JP6749566B2 - Game table - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning drum game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

Conventionally, a game table provided with a display means has been proposed (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2008-200302, A

However, the conventional game console has room for improvement in the display means.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming table having a display means.

A gaming table according to the present invention is a gaming table provided with a display unit capable of displaying a decorative symbol variable display and a notice unit capable of executing a plurality of types of prefetching notices, and the decorative symbol variable display is a plurality of units. After the variation of the type of decorative design is started, the display is configured to be stop displayable in a mode according to the result of the hit determination, the decorative design is a design that can be displayed in a plurality of display modes, and One of the display modes is a first display mode, one of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode, and one of the plurality of types of look-ahead notices is It is a first look-ahead notice, and in a certain decorative pattern variable display, the variation of the decorative pattern is started from the state where the decorative pattern according to the first display mode is stopped and displayed, and the decorative pattern according to the first display mode. May be stopped and displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”), and in a certain decorative symbol variable display, the variation of the decorative symbol from the state in which the decorative symbol according to the first display mode is stopped and displayed. There is a case where the decorative pattern according to the second display mode is stopped and displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “second case”), and the decorative pattern in the second display mode is the first look-ahead. It may be stopped and displayed as a notice, the display means is a means capable of displaying a super reach effect, and the display means is according to the second display mode even while the super reach effect is being displayed. It is a means that can continuously display the variable display of the decorative symbols, and the decorative symbol variable display that is started later than the certain decorative symbol variable display in the second case than in the first case ( Hereinafter, referred to as "first decorative pattern variable display") is likely to be a big hit, when the first decorative pattern variable display is a big hit, depending on the second display mode in the first decorative pattern variable display When the combination of big hits is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative pattern variation display is a loss, after the combination of the losses according to the second display mode is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first decorative pattern variation display. The gaming machine is characterized in that the combination of the loses is changed to the combination of the loses according to the first display mode and stopped and displayed .

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game table having a display means.

FIG. 3 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 3 is an external view of the same pachinko machine seen from the back side. It is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front. 6 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. (A) It shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a special figure. (B) An example of a decorative design is shown. (C) An example of a stop display pattern of a general figure is shown. (A) is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit main processing, and (b) is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. 6A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. (B) is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. (C) A flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. 9D is a flowchart of an image control process of the first sub control unit 400. 9A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. (B) is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. (C) A flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. It is a figure showing an example of button production in steps. It is a figure for demonstrating in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production which entwined the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a flow chart showing the execution timing about the production which entwined the operation means A and the production which entwined the operation means B. It is a flow chart showing the execution timing about the production which involved the operation means. It is a figure which shows an example concerning the production which entangled the operation means A (chance button 136) step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 14 in steps. It is a figure showing an example of a case where the production which entangled operation means A (chance button 136) is performed via a weak SP reach production, and makes a big hit stepwise. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 16 in steps. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example different from the examples shown in FIGS. 16 and 17. It is a figure showing an example of a case where it loses even if the production which entwined the operation means A (chance button 136) is performed through the strong SP reach production. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 19 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of a case where the effect which entangled the operation means B (transmission part 191) is performed via a strong SP reach effect, and becomes a big hit stepwise. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 21 in steps. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example in which a chance button 136, which is an operation means A, starts to vibrate in response to an operation of a transparent portion 191 that is an operation means B. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example in which a chance button 136, which is an operation means A, is also operated after operating the transparent portion 191 that is an operation means B. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example in which the timing of operating the transmissive part 191 which is the operating means B is later than the example shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example in which a transmission part 191 which is an operation unit B vibrates when the housing vibrates. It is a figure which shows the example which the transparent part 191 itself rotates in the front-back direction and vibrates strongly. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example in which a scene in which an enemy role wins is temporarily displayed after a strong SP reach production, but a big hit is made by a revival production. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 28 in steps. It is a figure showing an example of the 3rd production step by step. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the notice production started according to operation of the transparent part 191. It is a figure which shows the example different from the example demonstrated so far. It is a figure which shows the example different from the example demonstrated using FIG. It is the figure which shows one example of the production which entangles the pseudo run step by step. It is a figure which shows the example of the other production which stepped on the pseudo-relation step by step. It is a figure showing an example in which the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed from the shaking fluctuation display, and an effect involving the operation means is executed during the big hit game step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 36 in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of the pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a 4th production and a 5th production in steps. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example in which the timing of operating the button B is later than the example shown in FIG. 39. It is a figure for further explaining the relationship between button A (first chance button 136) and button B (second chance button 137). It is a figure showing three examples of promotion production. It is the figure which showed two other examples regarding promotion production. It is a figure for demonstrating a general timer advance notice. It is a figure which shows in stages the example etc. which may display the timer advance notice display T according to button operation. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between a back button operation timing and a hold increase timing. It is a figure which shows two examples about button production in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display method including the timer notice display T. It is a figure which shows the example in case a timer advance notice overlaps with other productions with the countdown of remaining time. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer advance notice. It is a figure showing an example in which a timer notice display T is displayed on a device different from the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a figure showing a mode of a change display of a decorative design in which an animation of a reservation icon is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of the simultaneous change of the hold icon at the time of a symbol stop step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the simultaneous change of the hold icons when there is a hold increase while the symbols are stopped. It is a figure showing an example of the change of the reservation icons all at once when the number of the reservations is increased by two while the symbols are changing. It is a figure which shows an example of the simultaneous change of the hold icons when the number of hold increases by two while the symbol is stopped. It is a diagram for explaining the winning order variation. It is a figure which shows an example of the simultaneous change of the holding icons when the number of holdings increases due to the change in the winning order. It is a figure showing an example when the number of holdings is increased and the holding is full while the stop display is being performed in the change of the winning order. It is a figure which shows the example in which the simultaneous change effect is not performed or is performed depending on the type of the hold icon displayed. It is a figure explaining the simultaneous change production at the time of becoming a reserve full tank in change in a winning order. It is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. It is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, as seen from the front side (player side). It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the back side. It is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of a display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of a stop display pattern of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of a stop display pattern of special figure 2, (c) is a decorative pattern An example is shown, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display design of a general figure. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetching process. It is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reading result storage part for special figures 1 and special figures 2. It is a figure explaining the content of the hit/miss determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub-control part command reception interruption. It is a flow chart of processing, (c) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part timer interruption processing, and (d) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part image control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub-control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub-control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub-control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process and (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 77 step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|generation of another case following FIG. 78 (q) in steps. (A) is a figure explaining the display example of a notice icon, (b) is a figure explaining the notice icon display area information storage area memorize|stored in RAM408, (c) is a notice icon. It is a figure explaining an example of a digestion timing, and (d) is a figure explaining an example of an increase timing of a notice icon. (A) is a figure explaining an example of the notice icon before a change, and (b) is a figure explaining an example of a notice icon after a change. It is a figure which shows an example of production centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 82 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 84 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 85 step by step. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of another production of the notice icon increase production. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of another production of the notice icon increase production. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of another production of the notice icon increase production. It is a figure which shows other example of an effect|action of a notice icon digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows other example of an effect|action of a notice icon digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows other example of an effect|action of a notice icon digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows other example of an effect|action of a notice icon digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of production centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 94 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 95 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 96 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of another production of the notice icon increase production. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of another production of the notice icon increase production. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of another production of the notice icon increase production. It is a figure showing an example of production in which a notice icon changes in stages. It is a figure which shows in stages the display example at the time of a power failure/power recovery, while displaying a notice icon. It is a figure which shows other examples of a notice icon increase production and a digest production in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows other example of an effect|action of a notice icon digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows other example of an effect|action of a notice icon digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of a notice icon increase production and a digest production in stages. It is a figure which shows the modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another modification of the digestion production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows other example of an effect|action of a notice icon digestion effect in steps. It is a figure showing in stages about an example of production using a movable means applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows other examples of effects of a notice icon increase effect in stages. It is a figure which shows other examples of effects of a notice icon increase effect in stages. It is a figure which shows stepwise another modification of the increase production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows other examples of effects of a notice icon increase effect in stages. It is a figure which shows other examples of a notice icon increase production and a digest production in stages. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure showing an example of the production which can be performed in decorative pattern display device 208 of pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure explaining a lottery table related to a notice item. It is a figure showing in stages the other example of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure showing in stages the other example of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 127 step by step. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment in stages. It is a figure showing another example of production concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment in stages. It is a figure explaining the relation between a notice icon and a tutorial display. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment in stages. It is a schematic explanatory drawing which shows an example of the structure of the production|generation device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in this embodiment. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a change change notice production as a look-ahead notice production by a reservation icon applicable to an embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure showing in stages about another example of a change notice of reservation change. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect shown by FIG. It is a figure which shows another modification of the production shown by FIG. It is a figure which shows in steps about an example of the super reach production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing in stages about another example of a change notice of reservation change. It is a figure showing in stages about another example of a change notice of reservation change. It is a figure showing in stages about another example of a change notice of reservation change. It is a figure showing in stages about another example of a change notice of reservation change. It is a figure showing in stages about another example of a change notice of reservation change. It is a figure showing in stages about another example of a change notice of reservation change. It is a figure showing in stages about another example of a change notice of reservation change. It is a figure showing in stages about another example of a change notice of reservation change. It is a figure which shows in steps about an example of the symbol variation display applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the extended production of a reservation display frame. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of production of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-9 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps about an example of the production|generation of the mini game applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing stepwise about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure showing stepwise about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure showing stepwise about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure showing stepwise about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure showing stepwise about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure showing stepwise about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure showing stepwise about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure showing stepwise about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure showing stepwise about another example of production of a mini game. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific production example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine seen from the back side. It is the outline front view which saw the game board from the front. 6 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. (A) It shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a special figure. (B) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol. (C) An example of a stop display pattern of a general figure is shown. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. 7A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU of the first sub control unit. (B) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit. (C) is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit. (C) It is a flowchart of the image control process of a 1st sub-control part. 9A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. (B) is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. (C) A flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. (A) is a figure which shows the operation key unit 137 shown in FIG. 64, (b) is a figure which shows the operation key unit 137 typically. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in a menu screen. FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the display example on the menu screen illustrated in FIG. 211. It is a figure explaining an example of a pseudo continuous production. It is a figure explaining an example of a chance eye production. It is a figure explaining an example of a cut-in production. It is a figure explaining an example of a cut-in production. It is a figure explaining an example of a reservation change notice. It is the figure which explains one example of the production which uses production movable body. It is the figure which explains one example of the production due to the single operation of production button. It is the figure which explains one example of the production due to the single operation of production button. It is the figure which explains one example of the production due to the single operation of production button. It is the figure which explains one example of the production due to the consecutive hit operation of production button. It is a figure which shows a mode that the long press automatic continuous hit is performed in the effect by the continuous hit operation of the effect button. It is a figure which shows a mode that the long press automatic continuous hit is performed in the effect by the continuous hit operation of the effect button. It is the figure which explains one example of the production due to the consecutive hit operation of production button. It is the figure which shows the state where the reservation change notice is given during production due to the consecutive hit operation of production button. It is the figure which explains one example of the production due to the long push operation of production button. It is the figure which explains one example of the production due to the long push operation of production button. It is a figure which shows a mode that the continuous hitting operation is performed in the production by the long-pressing operation of the production button. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete example of an effect in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete example of an effect in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete example of an effect in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which shows one example of the production which operates the production button according to the rhythm. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete example of an effect in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which shows one example of the concrete production example which uses the two production buttons. It is a figure explaining an example of a character selection production. It is a figure explaining an example of a character selection production. It is a figure explaining an example of a character selection production. It is a figure explaining an example of a character selection production. It is the figure which shows one example of the selective production which is executed during the design fluctuation indication. It is the figure which explains one example of the production due to the consecutive hit operation of production button. It is a figure explaining an example of a back button effect. It is the figure which explains one example of the production due to the long push operation of production button. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete example of an effect in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of a chance eye production. It is a figure explaining the other example of a display of a menu screen. It is a figure which shows a mode that the initial setting of the production movable object is performed. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of button production. It is the figure which shows the continuation of the concrete production example which is shown in Figure 248. It is a figure showing other examples of button production in steps. It is a figure showing other examples of button production in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific production example shown in FIG. It is a figure showing other examples of button production in steps. It is a figure showing other examples of button production in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps about an example of a pseudo continuous production. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific production example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in steps about the other example of a pseudo continuous production. It is a figure showing other examples of button production in steps. It is a figure showing in steps about another example of button production. It is a figure showing other examples of button production in steps. It is a figure showing other examples of button production in steps. It is a figure showing other examples of button production in steps. It is a figure showing other examples of button production in steps. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a button repeated hit operation production. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a button repeated hit operation production. It is a figure which shows in steps about an example of the reservation condominium notice production performed during the big hit game. It is a figure showing in steps about another example of the reservation condominium notice effect executed during the big hit game. It is a figure showing in steps about another example of the reservation condominium notice effect executed during the big hit game. It is a figure showing other examples of button production in steps. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a button repeated hit operation production. It is a figure showing other examples of button production in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific production example shown in FIG. (A) is a figure which shows another example of a decorative design, (b) is a figure explaining the combination of the design used as a chance of a pre-reading notice. It is a figure which shows in steps about an example of the production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is the figure which shows the continuation of the concrete production example which is shown in Figure 274. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific production example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific production example shown in FIG. 278. It is a figure showing other examples of button production in steps. It is a figure showing other examples of button production in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps about the other example of a pseudo continuous production. It is a figure showing other examples of button production in steps. It is a figure showing other examples of button production in steps. (A) is a figure which shows about the other example of the button production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment, (B) is other than the pseudo continuous production performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown about the example of. It is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. FIG. 16 is a schematic front view of a slot machine 1000 as a game table according to a modified example of the present invention as seen from the front. It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) shows the mobile telephone 3000 provided with the memory|storage part which memorize|stores the electronic data which implement|achieves this invention, (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and (d) shows a home-use television set having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention. A game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. It is the appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning a 4th embodiment from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the back side. It is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of a display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of a stop display pattern of special figure X, (b) shows an example of a stop display pattern of special figure Y, (c) is a decorative pattern An example is shown, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display design of a general figure. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetching process. It is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reading result storage part for special maps X and special maps Y. It is a figure explaining the content of the hit/miss determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub-control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process and (c) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub-control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub-control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub-control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process, (d) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part image control process. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st example of composition of production device 206, and (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd example of composition of production device 206. It is a figure explaining an example of production which can be applied in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production step by step centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 304 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure showing an example of a timer notice production in stages. It is a figure which shows other examples of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure showing an example of production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure explaining the aspect of the change of the remaining time display meter in button production. It is a figure showing other examples of button production in steps. It is a figure showing an example of production centering on the decorative pattern display device of a pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of a timer advance notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of a timer advance notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of a timer advance notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of a timer advance notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of a timer advance notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of a timer advance notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of a timer advance notice effect. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of a timer advance notice effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the production step by step centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps about another display example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 346 step by step. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 349 in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of the effect which continues from FIG. 350 (24). It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of the timer notice production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of the timer notice production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production shown in FIGS. 360-361. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production shown in FIGS. 360-361. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production shown in FIGS. 363-364. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production shown in FIGS. 360-361. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 366 in steps. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 368 in steps. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production shown in FIGS. 368-369. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 373 stepwise. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of the timer notice production shown in FIGS. 373 to 374. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 375 in steps. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 375 to 376. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing, in stages, the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 379. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of the effect which continues from FIG. 379 (18). FIG. 37 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 379 to 380. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 385 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 386 in steps. It is a figure showing stepwise about an example of the production in the big hit game performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing in stages about the example of a display when an error display is displayed in the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a timer notice display. It is a figure showing an example of a preliminary announcement effect which can be applied to this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows other examples of the preliminary notice effect during a preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of the preliminary notice effect during a preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure showing an example of a preliminary announcement effect which can be applied to this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in the tutorial display part TT1 applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows other examples of the preliminary notice effect during a preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure showing an example of a timer notice production applicable to this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure showing an example of a button repeated hit production applicable to this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect by explanation display applicable to this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of effects of the effect shown in FIG. 409 in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of a step-up notice production applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure explaining another example of the step-up notice production shown in FIG. 412. It is a figure which shows another example of the step-up notice production applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the step-up notice production applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo continuous production applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the button notice production applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure showing an example of the production which can be applied to this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows another example of the production applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the production applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure explaining another mode of the example of an effect shown in Drawing 154 (b-1)-the figure (b-5). It is a figure which shows the display example of a ball removal error display. It is a figure which shows the display example of a ball removal error display. It is a figure which shows the display example of a ball removal error display. It is a figure which shows in steps about an example of the timer advance notice effect performed in the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 426 step by step. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 428 step by step. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 432 in steps. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 439 in stages. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 441 in stages. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 445 stepwise. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 449 in steps. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 452 in steps. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in steps about an example of the pending notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 458 in steps. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 460 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. (A) It is an example of a decorative design of the first display mode. (B) It is an example of a decorative design of the second display mode. (C) It is an example of a decorative design of a third display mode. It is the figure which shows the decorative design fluctuation display and the pre-reading announcement which relate to execution example 1 in time series. (A) It is the figure which showed a part of decorative symbol variable display and a pre-reading notice concerning Example 2 in a time series. (B) It is the figure which showed a part of decorative symbol variable display and a pre-reading notice concerning Example 3 in a time series. (C), (d) It is the figure which showed a part of decorative symbol variable display and a pre-reading notice which concern on the modification of Example 3 in a time series. (A) It is the figure which showed a part of decorative symbol variable display and a pre-reading notice concerning Example 4 in a time series. (B) It is the figure which showed a part of decorative symbol variable display and a pre-reading notice concerning Example 5 in a time series. (C) It is the figure which showed a part of decorative symbol variable display and a pre-reading notice concerning Example 6 in a time series. (C) It is the figure which showed a part of decorative symbol variable display and a pre-reading notice concerning Example 6 in a time series. (D) It is the figure which showed a part of decorative symbol variable display and the pre-reading announcement which concern on the modification of Example 6 in a time series. (A) It is the figure which showed a part of decorative symbol variable display and a pre-reading notice which concern on the modification of Example 6 in a time series. (B) It is the figure which showed a part of decorative symbol variable display and a pre-reading notice concerning Example 7 in a time series. (B) It is the figure which showed a part of decorative symbol variable display and a pre-reading notice concerning Example 7 in a time series. (C) It is the figure which showed a part of decorative symbol variable display and a pre-reading notice which concern on the modification of Example 7 in a time series. (D) It is the figure which showed a part of decorative symbol change display and a pre-reading notice concerning Example 8 in a time series. (D) It is the figure which showed a part of decorative symbol change display and a pre-reading notice concerning Example 8 in a time series. (E) It is the figure which showed a part of decorative symbol variable display and a pre-reading notice which concern on the modification of Example 8 in a time series. It is the figure which showed a part of decorative symbol variable display and a pre-reading notice which concerns on Example 9 in a time series. It is the figure which showed a part of decorative symbol variable display and a pre-reading notice concerning Example 10 in a time series. (A) It is the figure which showed a part of decorative symbol variable display and a pre-reading notice concerning Example 11 in a time series. (B) It is the figure which showed a part of decorative symbol variable display and a pre-reading notice which concern on the modification of Example 11 in a time series. (C) It is the figure which showed a part of decorative symbol variable display and a prefetching notice which concern on Example 12 in a time series. (D)-(f) It is the figure which showed a part of decorative pattern variable display and a pre-reading notice which concern on the modification of Example 12 in a time series. (G) It is the figure which showed a part of decorative symbol variable display and a pre-reading notice which concern on Example 13 in a time series. (G) It is the figure which showed a part of decorative symbol variable display and a pre-reading notice which concern on Example 13 in a time series. (G) It is the figure which showed a part of decorative symbol variable display and a pre-reading notice which concern on Example 13 in a time series. (H)-(j) It is the figure which showed a part of decorative symbol variable display and a pre-reading notice concerning the modification of Example 13 in a time series. It is an explanatory view for explaining the switching of the symbols in the decorative symbol variable display. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the back side. It is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display pattern of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display pattern of the special figure 2, (c) is a decorative pattern An example is shown, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display design of a general figure. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetching process. It is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reading result storage part for special figures 1 and special figures 2. It is a figure explaining the content of the hit/miss determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub-control part command reception interruption. It is a flow chart of processing, (c) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part timer interruption processing, and (d) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part image control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process and (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of image control of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the outline of various tables used for the production of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of an effect centering on image display device 208' of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. FIG. 38 is an external perspective view of the slot machine applicable to the present invention as seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the supporting machine 2000, (b) shows the mobile telephone 3000 provided with the memory|storage part which memorize|stores electronic data which implement|achieves this invention. , (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) shows a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention.

<<First Embodiment>>

Hereinafter, a ball game machine (including an enclosed type) such as a pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. The term "enclosed type" as used herein refers to an enclosed game machine or the like that circulates and uses the game balls enclosed in the game machine.
<Overall structure>

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 includes, as an external structure, an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage plate-equipped door 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 3). .. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and that is mounted on the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be rotatable, and serves as a game machine base body of a vertical rectangular shape. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a lock function and to be openable/closable. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. Note that the frame lamp 122 is an example of a light emitting unit, and in the present specification, a lamp using a light source as an LED is also called a lamp, and a lamp that emits light such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode tube is called a lamp. That is, a device that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting unit.

A game area 124 (see FIG. 3) is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a door opening sensor 609 (see FIG. 4) that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

Further, the front frame door 106 is provided with a transmissive unit 190. The transmissive unit 190 includes a transmissive part 191 different from the transparent plate member 118, and the transmissive part 191 is rotatable in the front-rear direction about a drive shaft (not shown) provided in the lower part. Further, a light emitting diode (LED) is built in the transmissive unit 190. The transmissive part 191 of the transmissive part unit 190 shown in FIG. 1 is in the initial position. The transparent portion 191 functions as an operating unit (button) and also corresponds to an example of a movable unit. The ball storage tray door 108 is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “ball”) and provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launch device 110. , A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by a player's operation, and an opportunity button lamp 138 that causes the opportunity button 136 to emit light. And The chance button 136 is an effect button and corresponds to an example of an operating unit. The chance button 136 is also an example of a movable means, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is at the initial position. As will be described later in detail, the chance button 136 can execute the forward/backward movement. Further, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

In addition, an operation key unit 181 is provided on the right side of the chance button 136. The operation key unit 181 has a cross key 181a, an OK button 181b, and a cancel button 181c. A panel display unit 183 is also provided on the upper right of the operation key unit 181.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and a launching rod (not shown) that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching device (not shown) that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod. And a launch mallet. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. At the upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100, a ball tank 150 that has an opening that opens upward and temporarily stores game balls, and is located below the ball tank 150, and at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and while temporarily holding the game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, drive the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have temporarily stayed are delivered one by one below the payout device 152.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal, when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through the discharge port 152a and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to play the game. The ball to the person.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses a main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the overall game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. A first sub-board case 162 accommodating a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, a second sub-board that performs control processing related to performance based on processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of game balls, and an error release switch that cancels the error by the operation of the game shop staff A payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 including 168, a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that configures a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and power is supplied to various electric gaming devices. A power supply board including a power supply control unit 660 for controlling the power supply and a power supply switch 178 for turning on and off the power supply by an operation of a game shop clerk, and an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 for housing 182 and a CR interface 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided.

FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. The game board 200 shown in FIG. 3 is a so-called right-handed game board. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to define a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll. In a generally known right-handed game board, the strength of launching a game ball is changed by a player's operation, so that a universal figure starting port 228 and a second special figure starting port 232 described later, It can be divided into one special figure starting port 230. Specifically, by arranging the game nail 238 or the like in the game area 124, the game ball that rolls in the first area (the left side in the game area) provided with the first special figure starting port 230 is the second. It is difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the special figure starting port 232, and conversely, the game ball that rolls in the second area (the right side in the game area) provided with the second special figure starting port 232. It is configured that it is difficult or impossible to enter the 1 special map starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 provided with a right-handed game board, but can be widely applied to pachinko machines provided with general game boards.

A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the substantial center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary The symbol reserve lamp 216, the first special symbol reserve lamp 218, the second special symbol reserve lamp 220, and the high-precision middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol". The rendering device 206 will be described later.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) here. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can be configured to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

The general figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED here. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs here. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are symbol display means. The decorative design displayed on the decorative design display device 208 is a design that enhances the effect of the design displayed on the first special design display device 212 or the second special design display device 214, and is a decorative design. The display device 208 is also a kind of symbol display means.

The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of pending universal figure variation games (details will be described later), and here, to retain a predetermined number of universal figure variation games (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure reservation lamp 218 and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are on hold, and here, a predetermined number of special figure variation games. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low-probability state in which a big hit is hard to occur to a high probability state. Lights when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

In addition, around the performance device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a universal figure starting port 228, a first special figure starting port 230, a second special figure starting port 232, A central variable winning port 234 and a right variable winning port 235 are arranged.

A plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (when winning in the general winning opening 226). The payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. Hereinafter, a ball paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to the player may be referred to as a “loan ball”. Sometimes called "sphere (gaming ball)".

The universal figure starting port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. Here, 1 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. One is arranged. Therefore, it is expected that the game ball will enter by hitting the universal figure starting port 228 to the right. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

Only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls. Along with discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of itself does not change.

Only one second special figure starting port 232 is provided below the universal figure starting port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and it is expected that the player will enter the ball by hitting it to the right. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232. It corresponds to a variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (den Chu). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning the prize in the second special figure starting port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232 with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the closed state of the pair of blade members 2321 is an opening/closing mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure variation game is won and the universal figure display device 210 hits and displays the symbols as a stop, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, to the second special figure starting port 232. The ball can be entered (the prize winning state is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is the state where the prize is easy. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 has either one of a small size (corresponding to the first size) and a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball). It is a variable starting region in which the easiness of entering a game ball is variable, which changes from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting region. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are open, of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special region that is the variable starting region is more than the game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230 that is the fixed starting region. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or less than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with two variable winning openings. A central variable winning port 234 (corresponding to a first variable winning port) provided in the center of the game board 200 is arranged below the first special figure starting port 230. In addition, the right side variable winning a prize mouth 235 which is provided on the right side of the game board 200 (equivalent to the second variable winning a prize mouth) is arranged under the 2nd special figure starting mouth 232, the ball hits by hitting right There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a winning opening and door members 2341 and 351 which can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The winning opening may be called a special winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234 and 235 may be called an attacker. The central variable winning opening 234 maintains the closed state until the big hit game in the case of a big hit in the non-electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state changes between the open state and the closed state. repeat. The right side variable winning a prize mouth 235 maintains the closed state until the big hit game in the case of a big hit in the electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state change between the open state and the closed state. repeat. That is, each of the variable winning openings 234, 235 has a predetermined first open/closed state (closed state here) and a second open/closed state (opened here) in which it is easier to win a game ball than the first open/closed state. It is a variable winning means capable of changing the open/closed state from one to the other of (state), and when the special symbol variation game is won in the non-electric power support state and the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the big hit symbol. The door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the special symbol variation game is won in the electric support state and the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2351 of the right variable winning a prize port 235 has a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Open and close with. In any of the variable winning a prize ports 234 and 235, the closed state does not necessarily have to be a completely closed state, and even if it is slightly open, it may be a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter. .. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the central variable winning port 234 or the right variable winning port 235, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are used as prize balls. Discharge to 126. It should be noted that both the ball that has entered the central variable winning port 234 and the ball that has entered the right variable winning port 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

According to the arrangement of the universal figure starting port 228, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234, and the right variable winning port 235 described above, in the electric support state, the right In the non-electric power support state, hitting is a hitting method that is advantageous to the player, and left hitting is a method that is advantageous to the player in the non-electric power support state.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the operating handle of the player, and launches the rod 146. And the launching mallet 148 allows the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to pass through and launches into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize holes (general prize hole 226, central variable prize hole 234, right variable). The winning opening 235) or the starting opening (the first special drawing starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232) is won, or none of the winning openings or starting openings is won, or the universal starting opening 228 is used. It only reaches the outlet 240.
<Direction device 206>

Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball. Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

The stage 244 is capable of rolling a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 200 or the like, and the passed ball is the first special figure starting port 230 A special route 244a is provided to make it easier to enter.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means overlaps the inner ends of the left and right doors 246a and 246b, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it.

In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the lattice holes, or the shoji part of the lattice holes may be closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portion of the lattice holes may be completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 may be made completely invisible. Good. The above-described chance button 136 capable of executing the forward/backward movement and the transmissive portion 191 rotatable in the front-rear direction are also types of effect movable bodies.

Further, as the effect movable body, a family crest accessory 247 (see FIG. 14 and the like) (not shown) and a pair of united auditors products 248 (see FIG. 22 and the like) to be combined with the family crest accessory 247 are prepared. The family crest accessory 247 corresponds to an example of the first effect movable body, and the combined effect 248 corresponds to an example of the second effect movable body. The family crest monument 247 is arranged at an initial position above the decorative pattern display device 208. When the operation starts, the family crest part 247 drops from the initial position to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The pair of united winning objects 248 are arranged at the respective initial positions on the left side and the right side of the decorative pattern display device 208. When the combined accessory 248 starts its operation, the left and right sides advance from the initial position to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlap the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The pair of coalesced government products 248 sandwich the family crests governmental products 247 from the left and right, respectively, and are united with the family crests governmental products. In the state in which each of the family crest accessory 247 and the pair of coalesced auditors 248 is in the initial position, it is more difficult for the player to visually recognize the state than the state of overlapping the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is in.
<Control part>

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. According to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a second sub-control unit 500 controlling various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. A payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are formed of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. It may be composed of one circuit board, or the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be. Therefore, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are respectively controlled by the control unit (for example, the main control unit (300), the first sub-control unit (400), and the second sub-control unit (500). )), or one of these three control units (300, 400, 500) together can be regarded as the control means, and the main control unit 300 can be used as the first control means. One that combines the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 can also be regarded as the second control means.
<Main control unit>

First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and a temporary data A RAM 308 for storing the data, an I/O 310 for controlling the input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring the time, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing are mounted. .. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number value generation circuit 318 that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (two random number value generation circuits are built in this circuit. And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through each starting opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, door opening such as front frame door opening sensor and inner frame opening sensor A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined circuit. A drive circuit 324 for controlling display of a symbol display device, for example, the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214, and display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general symbol display device 210. For controlling the display of the driving circuit 326 and various status display sections 328 (for example, the general figure holding lamp 216, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.). Various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the drive circuit 330 and predetermined movable members such as the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232, the door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234, the door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235, and the like. Is connected to a drive circuit 334 for controlling.

The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random number value generation circuit 318 can be broadly classified into two types: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two additional methods for the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode uses a seed of random numbers to perform an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derives the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number.

The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value by using white noise superimposed on the signals input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the value thus obtained as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, as a seed of a random number, or when determining a read start position of a random number table. ..

When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and the latched value is built in the random value generation circuit 318. It stores in the random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generating circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is the same. Value is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318 and corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 uses the information output circuit 336 to pachinko the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302. In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 outputs the start signal output circuit 340 from the start signal output circuit 340. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 also includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. It is possible to communicate with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmit and receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always sends the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 sends error information. Both can communicate in both directions. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. A signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various performance data, and the like. Is connected to the ROM 406 in which is stored.

The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shield device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shield device 246, a detection unit 710 for detecting that the chance button 136 has been pressed, a shield device sensor 430 and an opportunity. An image stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404 and a sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the operation key unit sensor 425 that detects an operation of the detection unit 710 of the button 136 or the operation key unit 181 to the basic circuit 402. It is connected to a VDP 434 (video display processor) that reads out data and the like and uses the work area of the VRAM 436 to generate a display image to display the image on the decorative pattern display device 208.

Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates to control the entire second sub-control unit 500, data, and an image display. A ROM 506 that stores data and the like is provided.

In addition, the basic circuit 502 is for performing drive control of various movable bodies (a chance button 136 capable of performing an advancing/retreating operation, a transparent portion 191, which can be rotated in the front-rear direction, a family crest part 247, a combination part 248). Drive circuit 516, various movable body sensors 424 for detecting the current positions of various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, 248, and a sensor circuit for outputting detection signals from the various movable body sensors 424 to the basic circuit 502. 518 and are connected. Further, in the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game underframe lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game underframe lamp 542, A serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication is connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second sub-control unit 500 controls various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, 248. However, the second sub-control unit 500 may control the decorative symbol display device 208, and the first sub-control unit 400 may control the various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, 248, or either. One sub-control unit may perform both controls.

Although not shown in FIG. 4, the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500 also controls the display of the panel display unit 183 shown in FIG.
<Payout controller, launch controller, power controller>

Next, the payout controller 600, the launch controller 630, and the power controller 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on the control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed, and communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

Further, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the payout control unit 600, and the payout control unit 600 transmits a door open command to the main control unit 300. Further, when there is a payout error, the payout control unit 600 sends an error command to the main control unit 300.

Regarding the door opening command, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without using the payout control unit 600, or the payout control unit 600 may be used as a relay board. Then, the door opening sensor 609 may transmit a door opening command to the main control unit 300.

The firing control unit 630 is a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 for instructing to permit or stop firing, and a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134 outputs the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player. Control of the firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 and the like) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off (for example, a power storage circuit) (for example, , Condenser). Here, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 sends the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the firing control unit 630. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path. For example, the main controller 300 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply controller 660. The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a voltage after the predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the first sub control unit 400. The firing control unit 630 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, etc.) and devices. The first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and devices. The payout controller 600, the main controller 300, and the first sub controller 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply controller 660 almost at the same time. The payout control unit 600 may be configured such that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both or at least one of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400. The main controller 300 may be configured such that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply controller 660 earlier than both or at least one of the payout controller 600 and the first sub controller 400. The first sub control unit 400 may be configured such that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both or at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300.

Further, the second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost at the same time as the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is configured to supply the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. May be. The second sub control unit 500 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660.

In the island facility provided in the game machine installation branch, the 100V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and the pachinko machine 100 is supplied with a 24V AC current. The 24V AC current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 4, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit, and the direct current of 12 V is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (here, 5 V) by the voltage conversion circuit to obtain a predetermined voltage (5 V). The DC current of () is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main controller 300. Further, the DC current converted to the voltage of 12V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the activation signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I/O port 310 of the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the 12V supply current drops below a predetermined value (9V in this example). Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power supply line that connects the power supply control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the DC current of 12V flows, and this power supply line is an example of a predetermined power supply line. Equivalent to. The low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. Further, the power management unit 660 may output the input 24V AC current as it is, or may convert it into a 36V DC current and output it. Furthermore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 may be supplied with a current having an operating voltage (here, 5 V) via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

Further, the activation signal output circuit 340 outputs an activation signal when the voltage value of the DC current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 upon power-on reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Furthermore, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT 3141 times out, there is a case where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a program mistake, or a voltage drop due to lightning strikes, fraudulent activities, and the like. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the WDT 3141 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value. The activation signal from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 via a common signal line, but may be input via dedicated lines. The activation signal output from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined activation signal.

In the case of a momentary power failure in which the power is cut off and immediately restored, that is, in the case of automatic recovery without turning on the power switch 178, a power failure voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, first, it is determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302: a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is executed, the values of the core and the internal register of the CPU 304 are initialized. Then, a security check process is executed. In the security check process, whether or not the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct is recalculated. If the authentication code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time or a time obtained by adding a random time randomly selected to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, the main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and the game control is started. On the other hand, when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core and the internal register of the CPU 304 are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. After that, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.
<Type of design>

Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described.

FIG. 5(a) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a special figure. The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first starting hole sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230, and that the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on condition that the second starting opening sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variation display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variation display of special figure 2". To do. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of symbols (or variable display of special figure) according to the present invention.

Then, when the variation time (before the variation time in the present invention) determined before the variation of the special figure 1 starts, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, When the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation start of 2 (corresponding to the fluctuation time also referred to in the present invention) elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. These "stop display of stop symbol aspect of special figure 1" and "stop display of stop symbol aspect of special figure 2" correspond to an example of stop display of the symbol (or stop display of special figure) according to the present invention. .. Here, the "stop display of symbols (stop display of special symbols)" is to maintain the display of symbols (special symbols) in the stop symbol mode for a certain stop display time (for example, 0.6 seconds). In this specification, the term “stop display” may be replaced with “fixed display”, “fixed stop”, “main stop display”, or the like.

Also, from the start of "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed, or the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 after starting "variable display of special figure 2" Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display according to the present invention, hereinafter, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after starting the "variable display of the special figure 1 or 2". The series of display up to is referred to as a symbol fluctuation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

In FIG. 5A, 10 types of special symbols from “special symbol A” to “special symbol J” are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In FIG. 5A, the white parts in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts are the locations of the segments that are turned on.

"Special drawing A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot design, and "special drawing B" is a 15R jackpot design. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, determination of whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is called a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game and the 15R jackpot game, both shift to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure, and the state of not transiting to the time saving state is referred to as a low probability state of universal figure. The 15R special jackpot symbol "Special drawing A" is the special symbol high probability general figure high probability state, and the 15R jackpot symbol "Special map B" is the special symbol low probability general figure high probability state. These "special drawing A" and "special drawing B" are symbols in which the profit amount given to the player is a relatively large profit amount.

"Special map C" is a 2R jackpot design called sudden change, and is in a special map high probability general figure high probability state. That is, “Special drawing C” is 2R, which is different from “Special drawing A” which is 15R. “Special drawing D” is a 2R jackpot design called suddenly shorter working hours, which is a special probability low probability general figure high probability state. That is, the "special drawing D" is 2R as compared with the "special drawing B" which is 15R.

"Special map E" is a 2R jackpot pattern called hidden probability change, and is a special map high probability general figure low probability state. "Special map F" is a 2R jackpot pattern that is suddenly called normal, and is in a special map low probability general figure low probability state. These "special map E" and "special map F" are both 2R and are in a state where they do not shift to the time saving state.

"Special figure G" is the first small hit symbol and "Special figure H" is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same big hit without 2R time saving. That is, the "special drawing G" and the "special drawing H" are in the same state as the "special drawing F", but the effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 are different between the two, and even in the same state, the "special drawing" is intentionally changed. By providing "G", "special map H" and "special map F", the interest of the game is enhanced. In addition, "special drawing I" is the first off symbol, "special drawing J" is the second off symbol, and the profit amount to be given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is also provided with a symbol other than the "special symbol A" as the 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

FIG. 5(b) shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first start opening sensor detects that a ball has won the first special drawing starting opening 230 or the second special drawing starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special drawing starting opening 230, or On the condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232, the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Displayed in the order of “decoration 1”→“decoration 2”→“decoration 3”→... “decoration 9”→“decoration 10”→“decoration 1”→... in each symbol display region of the region 208c "Variable display of decorative pattern" is switched. Then, when notifying the 15R jackpot of "special drawing B", a symbol combination in which three identical ornamental symbols corresponding to the 15R jackpot are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration" 1" and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") are stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special drawing A", a pattern combination in which three same odd decorative patterns are arranged (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") , Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, "special drawing E" 2R big hit called hidden probability change, "special drawing F" suddenly called 2R big hit, or "special drawing G" first small hit, "special drawing H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying a 2R jackpot called "special figure C" suddenly changed or a 2R jackpot called "special figure D" suddenly shortened, "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" Stop display.

On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of "special drawing I" and the second deviation of "special drawing J", stop symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 3(b) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

In addition, in the present specification, states in which the displayed decorative pattern may be changed include “temporary stop (or temporary stop display)”, “temporary stop (or temporary stop display)”, and “fluctuation fluctuation ( In some cases, it may be referred to as "shaking fluctuation display)", "stop display", or the like. Even in this state, the displayed decorative design may not be changed. Further, even when some of the plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, some of the other decorative symbols may be in this state.

Further, in the present specification, from the state of “temporary stop (or temporary stop display)”, “temporarily stop (or temporary stop display)”, “sway fluctuation (or shake fluctuation display)”, or “stop display” The state in which the variation of the decorative symbol is started again may be referred to as “restart”, “re-variation”, “re-lottery”, “pseudo-variation”, or “pseudo-relation”. In particular, for the operation performed after the decorative pattern that can recognize the big hit is displayed, it may be called "re-lottery", "re-variation", or "restart", and one special figure variation game is being executed. In the production (so-called “pseudo-relation” or “pseudo-variation”) in which the variation display of the decoration pattern is displayed in multiple times, when the variation of the decoration symbol is restarted, “pseudo-variation”, “pseudo-relation”, “re-creation” It may be called “fluctuation” or “restart”.

Further, for the "pseudo-variation" and the "pseudo-relation", the temporary stop display (temporary stop, etc.) of the decorative design may not be performed, and for example, the variation speed of the decorative design is changed visually (for example, High speed fluctuation → low speed fluctuation → high speed fluctuation etc.) may also be referred to as "pseudo-run" or "pseudo fluctuation". Also, only some decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and then displayed again only in the mode of changing again, when performing pseudo-linking or when it appears to perform pseudo-linking, or when it functions as a notice. There may be symbols, and these may be referred to as "special symbols" and "pseudo continuous symbols".

Further, in the variable display of the decorative design, there is a case where the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a predetermined order (for example, the left decorative design, the right decorative design, the inner decorative design in this order), and in this specification, These are "left stop (or left stop display)", "right stop (or right stop display)", "medium stop (or middle stop display)", and "first stop (or first stop display)". )”, “second stop (or second stop display)”, and “third stop (or third stop display)”.

FIG. 5(c) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" which is a winning symbol and "Public figure B" which is a deviating symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". This "variable display of the universal figure" corresponds to an example of the variable display of the symbol (or the variable display of the universal figure) according to the present invention. Also in FIG. 5C, the white portions in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments that are turned on.

Then, when the variable time (corresponding to the variable time referred to in the present invention) determined before the start of fluctuation of the universal figure elapses, the normal symbol display device 210 stops and displays the stopped symbol aspect of the universal figure. The "stop display of the stop pattern of the universal figure" corresponds to an example of the stop display of the symbol according to the present invention (or the stop display of the universal figure). Here, the "stop display of symbols (stop display of public symbols)" is to maintain the display of symbols (normal symbols) in a stop symbol mode for a certain stop display time (for example, 0.6 seconds). In this specification, the term “stop display” may be replaced with “fixed display”, “fixed stop”, “main stop display”, or the like. In this example, when notifying the winning of the universal figure variation game, "Public symbol A" is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 210, and when notifying that the universal symbol variation game is out, the ordinary symbol display device 210 is displayed. "Pub B" is stopped and displayed.

Further, from the start of "variable display of public figure" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the universal figure corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display according to the present invention, and hereinafter, this "variable display of general figure" A series of display from the start to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the universal figure is referred to as a symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

In the variable display of the decorative symbols and the special symbols, there are cases in which they are described as “first stop display”, “second stop display”,... Further, the stop display may be used in all scenes, but may be replaced with other terms in comparison with the drawings.
<Main processing of main controller>

Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, a counter for generating a random number initial value for a special symbol for a big hit, a random number counter for determining a special symbol at the time of a big hit, and a random number for a small hit at the time of a big hit Random counter initial value generation counter for special figure determination, small figure special figure determination counter, random number special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, random special figure determination random number counter and special figure timer Each counter of a random number counter for number determination is provided. Further, in the RAM 308, the number of holdings, a big hit determination random number value, a big hit time special figure determination random number value, a small hit special figure determination random number value, a loss special figure determination for each special figure 1 and special figure 2 A random number for use, a result of prior judgment on acceptance, a result of prior judgment on special figure, a result of judgment on acceptance, a result of decision on special figure, and a result of decision on special figure timer are stored. Further, in the RAM 308, the special storage storage unit is divided into the maximum number (four in this example) of areas in which the start of the winning/disapproval determination (lottery) can be suspended, and the special storage is separately provided in the special drawings 1 and 2. It is prepared. The reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 has a random number value for determining the special figure 1 big hit, a random value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of big hit, a random number value for determining the special figure 1 at small hit, and a random value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of losing. The four random number values are set as one set, and these four random number values are stored for each area one by one in the winning order (holding order). In addition, the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 for the special figure 2 big hit determination random number value, the big hit special figure 2 determination random number value, the small hit special figure 2 determination random value, and the lost special figure 2 determination The four random number values of the random number values are set as one set, and these four random number values are stored for each area one by one in the winning order (holding order).

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, which has received the activation signal, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6A in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

In step S101, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, first, as initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I/O 310, and various types stored in the RAM 308. Initialization of variables, permission of operation to the WDT 314, setting of initial values, etc. are performed. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value. Next, the counter value of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted (hereinafter, this processing is referred to as WDT processing). Following the WDT process, in the initialization process of step S101, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338, the power management unit 660, the main control unit via the second sub-control unit 500. When the voltage value of the power supply supplied to 300 is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to the WDT process, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the initial stage is performed. Perform setting 2. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. In the initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, (1) Outputting a clear signal from the sub-control unit 400), setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

Next, in step S103, after setting interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process here, three initial numbers for generating the initial values of the random number counter for determining the special map at the time of big hit, the random number counter for determining the special map at the time of small hit, and the random number counter for determining the special map at loss Update the value generation counter. After completion of the basic random number initial value updating process, the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S105, effect random number update processing is performed. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a random number counter for determining timer numbers for special figures and general figures, and each of these counters determines a timer number that can take a value in the range of 0 to 99. Generate a random number for use. In step S105, the value of this counter is updated. After this effect random number updating process is completed, interrupt permission is set and the process returns to step S103.

The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S103 and S105 except during the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period (for example, 4 ms).
<Main controller timer interrupt processing>

Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, once in about 4 ms), and the main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle. At the time of starting the timer interrupt process, the values of the registers of the CPU 304 are temporarily saved in the stack area, or the WDT 314 is periodically (for example, once every about 2 ms which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt). ) Do a restart.

First, in step S201, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various sphere detection sensors are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence/absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 stores various types of signals. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, the RAM 308 stores information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) two times before in each RAM detection sensor. Is read from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ) The information on the presence/absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in) is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

Further, in this step S201, the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each of the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the present detection signal storage area is compared, It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. While one gaming ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process is repeated several times at very short intervals of about 2 ms. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal recording area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, when the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, there is no previous detection signal, there is a previous detection signal, there is a present detection signal). Information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the central variable winning opening 234, the right side variable winning opening 235, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or a normal It is determined that the drawing start port 228 has been passed. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence/absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 matches the above winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process associated with the winning in the mouth 226 is not performed, and the process branches to the subsequent process. The ROM 306 of the main controller 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there is a winning, it is not determined that there is a winning until the information of the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

In the basic random number initial value update process (step S203), the values of the counters for generating various random number counter initial values are updated in the range of 0 to 99, and in the subsequent basic random number update process (step S205), the values of various random number counters are updated. The value is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and for example, every time the random number counter for determining the special figure 1 at the time of big hit makes one round, the value of the generation counter is set in the random number counter for determining the special figure at the time of big hit 1. The other random number counters are similarly processed.

In step S207, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time to change/stop display the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time to change/stop display the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for, the special figure 2 display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time for measuring the time to change/stop display the symbol on the second special figure display device 214 , Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period and the like are updated.

Then, a winning determination process (step S209) is performed. In the winning determination process (step S209), first, when the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 are won, the prizes provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening. The value of the number-of-spheres storage area is read and 1 is added to set the original number-of-spheres storage area.

Next, in this winning determination process, there is a prize in the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232, and the number of pending special figure variation games is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4). If, the predetermined start information is stored. That is, if the number of holdings is less than the predetermined number, a big hit determination random number value and various special figure determination random number values are stored. The big hit determination random value is a value obtained by processing a value acquired from the random value storage register of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4 (for example, acquired value+value of R register+1). On the other hand, the special figure determination random number value is a value obtained by processing the software random number derived from the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (software random number value+R register value+1). A combination of the random number value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4, the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing corresponds to an example of the starting information deriving means. Various random number values (starting information) are stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) of the special figure holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. This special figure reservation storage unit has a predetermined upper limit number (four in this case) of starting information derived based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232. It corresponds to an example of the starting information storage means capable of storing up to. At this time, various random number values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the values stored in the temporary area may be stored in the reserved storage unit of the special figure. In this case, the temporary area is started. The information storage means may be used, or the reserved storage unit and the temporary area of the special figure may be used as the start information storage means. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number of special maps stored in the RAM 308, and increases the reserved number of special maps by 1. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit.

In addition, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, and the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2), the universal figure winning at that timing is disturbed. The value of the random number counter for numerical value generation is stored in the random number storage area provided in the RAM 308, which is different from that for special figures, as the random number value for universal figure winning as starting information.

In the winning determination process, the predetermined special ball detection sensor is used to move the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the general figure starting port 228, the central variable winning port 234, or the right variable winning port 235. When the winning (ball entry) is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal figure starting port 228, and the center variable. The prize reception information indicating whether or not there is a prize (ball) in the prize hole 234 and the right side variable prize hole 235 is set.

Whether the starting information is the special figure or the starting information is the general figure, if the number of holdings is equal to or more than the respective predetermined numbers, the starting information is not stored and the process proceeds to step S211.

When this winning determination process (step S209) ends, the prefetch process is called. In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether the number of holdings has increased from the prefetching process executed last time. That is, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of reservations up to now (the number of reservations at the end of the previous timer interrupt process, which will be referred to as the old number of reservations), and the CPU 304 The number of reservations at the time of executing the prefetch processing of this time that has passed the winning determination processing (step S209) is compared with the number of old reservations, and it is determined whether the number of reservations is increasing. If the number of reservations has not increased, this prefetching process ends without prefetching the start information. On the other hand, if the number of holdings is increasing, the increase of the random number value for special figure 1 big hit determination in the holding storage section of special figure 1 provided in RAM 308 is prefetched, or the special value in the holding storage section of special figure 2 is specified. Figure 2 Pre-read the increase in the random number for jackpot determination. In the prefetching here, only the increment is prefetched, but all the prefetches may be performed. It should be noted that the prefetch here means that the starting information is read first before the success/failure determination (main lottery), but in the prefetching process thereafter, the word “prefetch” is used as a result of the result of the success/failure determination (main lottery). ) May be used in the sense of reading.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is in one of the control states of a special figure low probability state in which the probability of winning a big hit is relatively low and a relatively high special figure high probability state. The state of high probability of special map is called probability changing. A probability variation flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. When the probability variation graph is set to ON, the special figure high probability state (during probability variation) is set, and when the probability variation graph is set to OFF, the special figure low probability state is set.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a win/fail pre-determination table used in the prefetching process. In this win/fail pre-determination table, the random number range is defined separately for the special figure high probability state and the special figure low probability state. When the pre-reading of the special figure 1 big hit judgment random number value or the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value is finished, this time, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit judgment random number value or special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value is judged in advance. It is determined to which random number range in the work table belongs. That is, referring to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random number value or special figure 2 big hit determination random number value is within a predetermined numerical range. Sometimes, the result of prior determination of win/fail is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is other than that, the result of prior determination of win/fail is pre-determined as "miss". Even in the special figure-related processing (step S213 shown in FIG. 6B) described later, the special figure variation game win/loss determination is performed again by using the win/loss determination table having the same content as the win/loss pre-determination table. The determination result here is only the result of the preliminary determination.

If the result of the prior determination is “big hit”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of big hit in the reserved storage section of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is read in advance, or in the reserved storage section of the special figure 2. Pre-read the random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of big hit. In the case where the result of the prior determination is "small hit", the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of small hit in the reserved storage section of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the reserved storage of the special figure 2 is stored. The random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of small hit in the department is pre-read. When the result of prior determination is “miss”, the random number value for determining the special time 1 at the time of loss in the reserved storage unit of the special diagram 1 provided in the RAM 308 is read in advance, or in the reserved storage unit of the special diagram 2. Pre-read the random number value for determining Toku-zu 2 when lost. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, a special figure preliminary determination table used in the prefetch process is also stored. In the special figure pre-determination table, the random number range corresponding to each of the 10 types of stop symbol modes (“special figure A” to “special figure J”) shown in FIG. The figure determination random number value obtains a special figure preliminary determination result (which stop symbol mode shown in FIG. 5A is stopped and displayed) depending on which random number range it belongs to. In addition, the determination result of the special figure here is also only the result of the preliminary determination, and the determination of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure is performed again in the special figure-related processing (step S213 shown in FIG. 6B) described later. ..

The pre-reading of the start-up information described above and the preliminary determination using the pre-read start-up information are executed before the success/failure determination (main lottery) of the special figure-related processing (S213) described later. The main control unit 300 that pre-reads the special figure 1 big hit determination random number value and various special figure 1 determination random number values corresponds to an example of the first starting information pre-reading means, and the special figure 2 big hit determination random number value and various kinds The main control unit 300 that pre-reads the random number value for determining Toku-zu 2 corresponds to an example of a second starting information pre-reading unit. Further, the main control unit 300 that performs the preliminary determination based on the random number values for determining the special figure 1 big hit and the various random numbers for determining the special figure 1 corresponds to an example of the first preliminary determination means, and for the special figure 2 big hit determination. The main control unit 300 that performs the preliminary determination based on the random number value and various random number values for determining the special figure 2 corresponds to an example of the second preliminary determination unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a pre-reading information temporary storage unit for special figure 1 which is divided into areas for each hold, and a pre-reading information temporary storage section for special figure 2 which is also divided into areas for each hold. Has been. The information indicating the special figure preliminary determination result (which is also information indicating the special figure and is hereinafter referred to as prefetch information) is stored in the corresponding pending area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit.

If the number of reservations has not increased, the pre-read information "no reservation" is stored in the corresponding reservation area of the pre-read information temporary storage unit. Further, in the prefetching process, when the big hit game is being played, and when the current control state is the electric power support state (the time saving flag is in the on state), the prefetching of the starting information of Toku-zu 1 and the preliminary determination are performed. However, in these cases, “undetermined” information indicating that the pre-determination of the stop symbol based on the start information of the prefetched special figure 1 is not performed is the corresponding reserved area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit. Remember. That is, based on the fact that the pair of blade members 2321 is not provided to the starting port (the first special figure starting port 230 where the state is a fixed starting region), it is acquired during the big hit game and during the electric support. The pre-determination based on the starting information is not performed, and the notification of the pre-determination result (pre-reading notice) is not performed. This ensures the fairness of the player. Note that the pre-reading of the starting information itself is not performed, but the pre-reading may be performed and the pre-determination and the result notification (pre-reading notice) may not be performed. Further, the pre-reading and the pre-determination are performed, but the pre-determination result is obtained. The notification (prefetch notice) may not be performed.

In the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, the universal figure related process is performed following the winning determination process of step S209 (step S211). In the general-university-drawing-related process, first, as the general-university-drawing state update process, one process out of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the general-universal figure is performed. For example, in the processing in the middle of the universal figure variation display (the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the lighting/extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns on and off the 7-segment LED configuring the normal symbol display device 210 To do. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

In the processing at the timing when the universal figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the winning symbol (the universal symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) and the lost symbol (7B LED shown in FIG. 5C) is controlled to turn on/off the 7-segment LED constituting the universal display device 210 so as to have one of the display modes. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general-drawing-related process here. Here, the above-mentioned lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fixed display of either one of the winning symbol and the lost symbol. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.6 seconds), information indicating the stop period is always set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the hit symbol that is confirmed and displayed is always stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the universal figure variation game.

If the result of the universal figure variation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal figure operation is set in the setting region, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the opening period to the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening/closing, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the universal figure variation game is a loss, the universal figure lost flag is turned on. When the universal figure loss flag is on, even in the universal figure state updating process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set.

Subsequently, in this public figure-related lottery process, opening/closing control of the general figure variation game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the general figure is not operating), and the public figure that is being held When the number of variable games is 1 or more, the result of the universal figure variable game is won or unwinned by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the random number storage area described above. If the winning judgment is made, and if the winning is won, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the universal figure timer random number value described above is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value. One of the times is selected to change the display of the public figure on the public figure display device 210, and the variable display time is stored in the general figure change time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the general figure change display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is stored in the universal figure pending count storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Moreover, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

In the main controller timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 6B, the special figure related processing (step S213) is performed subsequent to the general figure related processing of step S211 described above. In this special figure-related processing, first, special figure state update processing for special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed, and then special figure state update processing for special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update Process). The special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 The lighting/light-off drive control is performed by repeatedly turning the light off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the general command rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), Based on the special figure determination result (stop figure mode of the special figure), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is controlled to be turned on/off, and the special figure 2 is being stopped displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings that indicate that. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214, 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), 2R special jackpot symbol (special symbol C), sudden shortening symbol (special symbol) Figure D), hidden probability variation pattern (special figure E), suddenly normal pattern (special figure F), first small hit symbol (special figure G), second small hit symbol (special figure H), first missing symbol (special figure) Figure I), and the fixed display of any one of the first lost symbol (special diagram J). Further, thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the timer for special figure 2 stop time management provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). By this setting, the special display 2 that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 variable game. Further, when a value is set in the electric support frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the shortened time count and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability fluctuation is not occurring, the time saving flag is turned off. Further, the time saving flag is turned off even during a big hit game (during a special game state) or a small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the non-electric power support state (first entry rate control state) in the big hit game state and the small hit game state (special game state).

In addition, the predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S215) described later is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and a symbol for stopping the variable display is displayed. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that it is the special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

In addition, the jackpot flag is also prepared in the RAM 308, and if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on at the start of the special figure 2 variable game. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is updated in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect production period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to inform the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In order to do so, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command winning effect start setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which is started at the timing when the predetermined prize-winning effect period is finished (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the central variable winning port 234 or the right variable winning port 235 detects the winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the central variable winning port 234 or the door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234 or the door member of the right variable winning port 235. A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in the open state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the 2351, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. To do. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command special winning opening opening setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234 or the right side A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 351 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2351 of the variable winning port 235 for a predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) and is provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state updating process which starts and closes this door member a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds) and ends at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, decoration The production standby period is shown in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to stand by while displaying the image for notifying the player that the jackpot is finished by the symbol display device 208. Set the information.

As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 changes the open/closed state of the door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234 or the door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235 during the big hit game state (during the special game state). It corresponds to an example of a variable winning control means for controlling. The opening/closing pattern of the door members 2341, 351 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the opening/closing pattern according to the winning/deciding judgment of the special figure variation game from the ROM 306. get.

Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability variation flag and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON at the same time as the end of the big hit game, based on the stop symbol mode represented by the special figure determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON when the special figure determination result is “special figure A” or “special figure C” in the special figure lottery process described later. .. If the special figure determination result is “special figure E”, only the probable change flag or the probable change flag is set to ON. Further, when the special figure determination result is “special figure B” or “special figure D”, only the time saving flag of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag is set to ON, and the power support frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set the power support frequency to 100 times. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the entry rate control state, which is a state in which the ease of entry (entry rate) of the game ball into the second special figure starting port 232 (variable starting area) is controlled to the first state. This corresponds to an example of an approach rate changing unit that changes between a non-electric support state that is the approach rate control state and a power support state that is the second approach rate control state.

Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operation is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, the RAM 308 also has a loss flag, and if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the loss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the Toku-zu 2 state update process when the Toku-zu 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next process.

When the special figure 2 state update processing is completed, the special figure 1 state update processing is performed. In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, the description will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

When the special figure state update processing described above is completed, the special figure related lottery processing is performed this time. In the special figure-related lottery process, first, the process for the special diagram 2 (special diagram 2 related lottery process) is performed, and then the process for the special diagram 1 (special diagram 1-related lottery process) is performed. In this way, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the same timing (the winning determination process in the main control unit timer interrupt process started at a predetermined trigger). When the starting information is acquired based on the game ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 in S209) and the starting information is acquired based on the game ball entering the second special figure starting port 232. Or, if the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied at the same time, or both the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied. Even if there is, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the big hit determination of the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and the prize is given to the second special figure starting port 232. The notification of the result of the lottery based on the priority information is performed prior to the notification of the result of the lottery based on the winning of the winning in the first special map starting port 230, and the starting information and the special map of the special map 1 are used as the start information not performing the lottery. When only the starting information of Toku-zu 1 among the starting information of No. 2 remains and the starting information of Toku-zu 2 is newly stored, based on the newly stored starting information of Toku-zu 2 The notification of the result of the lottery is performed prior to the notification of the result of the lottery based on the start information of the special figure 1 that has already been stored. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing-related lottery process corresponds to an example of a lottery unit (win/win determination unit).

In the special figure 2 related lottery process, a lottery (judgment determination) is executed, a special figure to be stopped and displayed, and a timer number are decided. First, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined hit/miss determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. Here, it is determined whether or not the second special figure display device 214 is performing the special figure change display or the stop display, and if any of them is being displayed, the main controller timer interrupt processing is executed. If none of the displays are displayed, it is determined whether the special figure is activated or not activated, and if the special figure is activated, the main controller timer interrupt process is executed. Returning to, if the special figure is not set, it means that the hit/absence determination prohibition condition is not satisfied, and this time, it is determined whether or not a predetermined hit/miss determination condition is satisfied. The determination here refers to the pending storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308, and determines whether the number of pending special figure 2 variable games is greater than 0 or not. If the number of holdings is 0, the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process, and if it is 1 or more, it means that the predetermined win/fail judgment condition is satisfied.

If a predetermined hit/miss determination condition is satisfied, one set of random number values (starting information stored in the past in the reserved storage unit of special figure 2 provided in RAM 308 (random number value for special figure 2 big hit determination) , The random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of big hit, the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at time of the small hit, and the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at loss, and the start information (random A set of numerical values) from the currently stored area to the adjacent area. That is, if the starting information stored in the oldest is fetched from the reserved storage unit of special figure 2, and if the starting information is stored in the reserved storage section of special figure 2, the Nth oldest starting information is reserved in special figure 2. This is set as the (N-1)th oldest start information in the storage unit. Further, the number of reservations stored in the RAM 308 is decremented by 1. One set of random number values from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 of the RAM 308 (random number value for special figure 2 big hit determination, random number value for special figure 2 determination at the time of big hit, random number value for special figure 2 determination at small hit, and at the time of loss) The main control unit 300 that performs the process of extracting the special figure 2 determination random number value) corresponds to an example of a second start information acquisition unit.

Next, a hit/miss determination process is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a win/loss determination table. The contents of the win/loss determination table are the same as the contents of the win/loss pre-determination table described above. In this win/loss determination process, the random variation value for special figure 2 jackpot determination is stored in the win/loss determination table in accordance with the control state (special figure low probability state, special figure high probability state) by referring to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308. “Big hit”, “small hit”, or “miss” is derived as the result of the hit determination based on which random number range of In the special figure high probability state, the probability of winning the big hit is higher than in the special figure low probability state. Derivation of “big hit”, “small hit”, or “miss” corresponds to the win/no win determination (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 executing the win/loss determination process here is the lottery means (win/win determination means). Corresponds to an example. Further, the “big hit” corresponds to an example of a specific hit/miss judgment result.

When the execution of the hit determination processing is completed, the process proceeds to the symbol determination processing of the special figure. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure determination table. The contents of the special figure determination table are the same as the contents of the special figure preliminary determination table described above. In the symbol determination process of this special figure, when the winning/decision determination result is "big hit", based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random number value for special figure 2 determination at the time of big hit belongs to, The special figure determination result is decided to be one of "special figure A" to "special figure F". Further, when the win/no decision result is “small hit”, the special figure determination result is determined based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random number for special figure 2 determination at the time of small hit belongs to. It is decided to be "Special drawing G" or "Special drawing H". Furthermore, when the winning/disapproval determination result is “miss”, the special figure determination result is determined to be “special” based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of losing belongs. Determined as "I" or "Special J". The CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the symbol determining process of the special figure corresponds to an example of the symbol determining means.

In the variation time determination process subsequent to the symbol determination process of the special diagram, the variation display period in the variation stop display of the special diagram is determined. In this fluctuation time determination process, the timer number determination random number is acquired from the timer number determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The timing for acquiring the random number for determining the timer number is the timing immediately before the start of the special figure variation, but it may be the timing for acquiring the start information. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a timer number determination table. In this timer number determination table, a timer number and a random number range corresponding to the timer number are defined for each special figure determination result. The timer number, the second special figure display device 214 or the first special figure display device 212, the time from the start of the fluctuation of the symbol to the display of the stop symbol representing the result of the winning/disapproval determination, that is, the special symbol is variably displayed. Although it represents the variation table period (special figure variation time), it may be the variation table period of the decorative pattern.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, timers 1 to 8 are prepared as timers. Timer 1 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period is 2 seconds, which is an extremely shortened special figure fluctuation time, and timer 2 is the special figure fluctuation stop period is 5 seconds, which indicates a shortened special figure fluctuation time. It means that Note that the determination of the timer 1 or the timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure variation. The special figure fluctuation stop period of the timer 3 becomes 10 seconds. In timers 1 to 3, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3 is no reach.

The timer 4 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period is 12 seconds, and when the timer 4 is determined, the normal reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display device 208. Normal reach is generally a two-symbol display area (for example, the left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208c shown in FIG. 3) is the same decorative symbol as a stop display (strictly temporary stop) (first stop and second stop are performed. ), that the remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is variably displayed, that is, the variably displayed symbol display area is a specific symbol (stopped symbol display area) It is a state in which a predetermined combination of big hit symbols is stopped and displayed if stop display (third stop or final stop) is performed. The timer 5 represents that the special figure fluctuation time is 40 seconds, the timer 6 represents that the special figure fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and the timer 7 represents that the special figure fluctuation time is 80 seconds. When the timers 5 to 7 are determined, the super reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208. Super reach is a version of the normal reach that has a special variation display added to it to improve the effect of presentation (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.).

The timer 8 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time becomes 120 seconds. When the timer 8 is determined, the special variation is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208. The special variation includes a special multi-line reach, a full rotation reach, a special full rotation reach, etc. When the timer 8 is set, the full rotation reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display device 208. The probability that the timer 8 is selected is much lower than the probability that the other timers are selected, and this full rotation reach corresponds to the premier reach.

The simple reach means a variation pattern of a decorative pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special variation.

This reach means that the result of the hit determination (main lottery) in the special figure-related processing becomes a specific hit determination result (a predetermined result with a high player's advantage) after the hit determination. This is a notice effect that is given to the player in advance before the result of the hit determination is notified, and whether or not to reach is determined after the hit determination.

In the variable time determination process here, the timer number is determined based on the timer number determination random number using the timer number determination table. That is, the timer number is determined according to which random number range the acquired random number for timer number determination corresponds to the special figure determination result. In determining the timer number, if the timer number determination table defines the timer number according to the number of holdings, the number of holdings of the current special figure 2 as well as the random number for determining the timer number is used. Based on this, the timer number may be determined.

The timer number representing the special figure variation time described above is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

In addition, before the special figure lottery-related processing is executed (for example, the winning determination processing S209 described above), a special figure preliminary determination result is obtained from a plurality of types of timer selection tables including a timer number that is one or a plurality of period information. It is also possible to select one type of timer selection table on the basis of predetermined random number lottery based on this or to determine the timer number from the timer selection table. Also in determining the timer number here, a lottery may be performed by using a dedicated random number (for example, a random number for determining the timer number), or the timer number may be uniquely determined without performing the lottery. .. Further, the timer selection table may be selected in this special figure lottery-related processing, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be caused to select the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the timer selection table.

When the variable time determination process is completed, other processes are performed, and the special figure 2 related lottery process ends.

Subsequently, in the special figure-related processing, special figure 1-related lottery processing is performed. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 related lottery process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 related lottery process is replaced with “special figure 1”, the description thereof will be omitted. Omit it.

As described above, the special figure-related processing (step S213) in the main controller timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 6B is finished, and the command setting transmission processing (step S215) is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are commands. Type (for example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, prize effect start command, finish effect start command, number-of-rounds designation command, big winning opening opening command, big winning opening closing command, power recovery command, RAM Information that can specify the type of command such as a clear command, special figure hold increase command, general figure hold increase command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating a special figure stop symbol, information indicating a control state (information indicating a setting state of a time saving flag and a probability variation flag), information indicating a timer number. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, including the information indicating the special symbol stop symbol (special symbol determination result), the information indicating the control state, etc., in the case of the winning effect start command and the end effect starting command In the case of the command for designating the number of rounds per hit, the information indicating the control condition, the number of hits per round, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the second special figure starting port 232, and winning at the central variable winning port 234. And the presence or absence of a prize in the right side variable winning a prize mouth 235.

Further, in the above-described general command rotation start setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308 is information indicating a special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating a control state, information indicating a timer number, and a hold. Information indicating the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game that is being set is set. In the above-described general command rotation stop setting transmission processing, information indicating a special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating a control state, etc., stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned general command winning effect start setting transmission processing, the command data includes information indicating the special figure determination result, information indicating the control state, the number of pending first special figure variation games or second special figure variation games, etc. Is set. The winning effect production start command here corresponds to the big hit game start command. In the above-described general command end effect setting transmission process, the command data represents the effect control information and control state stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. The information, the information indicating the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which is withheld, etc. is set. Upon receiving the end effect start command, the first sub control unit 400 transmits the end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. The second sub-control unit 500, which has received the end effect control command, causes a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image notifying the player that the big hit is ended, and the big hit game. Ends. The end effect start command referred to here corresponds to a big hit game end command. In the above-described general command special winning opening opening setting transmission processing, as the command data of the special winning opening opening command, information indicating the number of hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, and the like is set. .. In the above-described general command special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, as the command data of the special winning opening closing command, the current number of rounds stored in the RAM 308, information indicating the control state, the first special figure fluctuation game that is held. Alternatively, information indicating the number of second special figure variation games and the like is set.

Further, in this step S215, a general command special figure pending increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure pending increase command, control state Is set, and information indicating a stop symbol of special figure 1 or special figure 2 that has been preliminarily determined (special figure predetermination result) is set.

Further, in this step S215, general command universal figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command hold increase process, the command data of the hold increase command is set with information indicating the control state. Further, the main control unit 300 also transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a general figure variation start command indicating that the general figure variation display has started (executes) as a general figure related command. In addition, from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, a universal figure variation stop command indicating that the variable display of the universal figure has stopped (does), and the pair of blade members 2321 start (open). It is also possible to transmit an electric chew opening start command indicating that, or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 are closed.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until all the winning rounds are completed, based on the number of winning rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

In the command setting transmission process, the command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, and strobe information is set in bit 7 (when set, data is set) and power-on information is set in bit 6. (When it is ON, it indicates that the command has been transmitted for the first time after the power is turned on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate the data after encryption processing. The number of payout requests is shown.

Next, in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, an external output signal setting process (step S217) is performed. In this external output signal setting processing, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 shown in FIG.

In step S219, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S201 described above are read to monitor the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence of a lower tray full tank error, and open the front frame door. When an error or a lower tray full tank error is detected, the device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The device information set here is included in the basic command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Further, various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234 and the right variable winning port 235, and via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various status display parts 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I/O 310.

When the device monitoring process in step S219 ends, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6A. Before returning, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is returned to each original register. Set, set interrupt permission, etc. Also, before returning, it monitors whether the low voltage signal is on, and if the low voltage signal is on (when the cutoff of the power supply is detected), it returns to the state at the time of power failure at power restoration. A specific variable or a stack pointer for saving is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, a power interruption process such as initialization of an input/output port is performed, and then a main control unit main process is performed again. Good.
<Process of the first sub-control unit 400>

Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. Note that FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

First, in step S301 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization processing, the input/output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. The effect, which will be described below, involving the operation means is also first controlled by the effect control processing. That is, when the symbol variation start command including the information regarding the variation time of the symbol is received, whether or not to execute the effect involving the operation means is determined in this effect control process according to the length of the variable time. When determined by the lottery process and executed, the effect data is read from the ROM 406. Image display control in the decorative symbol display device 208 is executed in step S313 according to the effect data read here, and the movable body control is performed by the second sub-control unit 500 according to the effect data read here. The command is transmitted, and is performed by the second sub control unit 500 in step S713 described below.

In step S311, the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 is detected via the sensor circuit 428 to determine whether or not the chance button 136 has been pressed. As a result of the determination here, when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is detected, the process of changing the effect data updated in step S309 into the effect data corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 136, or the pressing of the chance button 136. If the operation is valid, a process of preparing effect data corresponding to the operation acceptance effect described later is performed.

In step S313, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to VDP434, this command is output to VDP434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to sound source IC 416, this command is output to sound source IC 416. In step S317, if the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

In step S319, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to the shielding device 246, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step S321, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 (for example, a control command related to various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, 248), The control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303. When the door opening command is transmitted from the main control unit 300, the door opening command is set to be output to the second sub control unit in step S321.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub control unit 400 when the strobe signal output from the main control unit 300 is detected. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, and the effect random number updating process is performed.

Next, the image control process of step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, and if not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for you. In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601. , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S607, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for is input. In step S611, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.
<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>

Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

First, in step S701 of FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S701. In this initialization processing, the input/output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 508 is initialized.

In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

In step S709, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. In step S711, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

In step S713, the movable body control process is performed, and then the process returns to step S703. In the movable body control processing here, various movable bodies (a chance button 136 capable of performing an advancing/retreating operation, a transmissive portion 191, which can be rotated in the front-rear direction, a family crest part 247, a combination part, are transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. When a control command regarding the object 248) is received, various processes corresponding to the control command are performed, and operation control of each of the movable bodies 136, 191, 247, 248 is performed.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the second sub control unit 500 when the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400 is detected. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt process at a predetermined cycle. Run with.

In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 of the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process and the like are performed.

Next, an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of the button effect step by step. In FIG. 9, time elapses in the order of the alphabets written in parentheses (the same applies to the subsequent figures unless otherwise specified). Note that the time intervals between the alphabets written in parentheses and the alphabets written next in parentheses may be equal or different in one figure. , And different intervals may be mixed (the same applies to the following figures).

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9, a variable icon display area 208e is provided in the center of the effect display area 208d, and a hold icon display area 208f is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 208e. Is provided. A frame-shaped image indicating the position of the variable icon display area 208e is displayed on the outer periphery of the variable icon display area 208e. This frame-shaped image is always displayed, but when the display conditions are satisfied (for example, when the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area or when the variable icon is displayed in the opposite direction, further reach effect is displayed). It may be displayed only when it is not displayed). Note that only one of the variable icon display area 208e and the hold icon display area 208f may be provided.

One or more hold icons can be displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 9A, four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed. All of these four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed as black circles, and the white circle display with a dotted line indicates that the hold icons are not displayed. The hold icon is an icon indicating that the start of the symbol variation display of the special map or the start of the success/failure determination of the special figure is suspended, and the number of the hold icons displayed is basically the number of the special figure variation game. It is the same as the number of reservations. However, there may be a timing before and after the hold is exhausted, in which the number of displayed hold icons does not represent the number of hold. The hold icons include the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 and the hold icon of Toku-zu 2, and the hold icon display area 208f may be divided into two to provide display areas for both icons. In addition, the hold icon can give a pre-reading notice regarding whether the hold is successful or not depending on the display mode. The animation related to the hold icon includes, for example, an increase animation that is executed when a new hold icon is displayed due to an increase in hold, and the order of the hold changes due to the completion of the previous hold, A moving animation that is executed when the icon moves to another display position (for example, a position on the left side), a change animation that is executed when the display mode of the hold icon changes based on the look-ahead result, and the hold is digested. Deletion animation executed when the hold icon of the priority side special figure is increased in the priority variator, and the save animation executed when the hold icon of the special figure of the non-priority side is saved Etc. In addition to the above animations, a standby animation that can be executed independently during a period other than the execution of the above animation (for example, a period during which there is no increase or decrease of the hold or the change of the hold icon) and can be executed overlapping with the above animation There is. An example of this standby animation is an animation performed on the spot without changing the display position (for example, a repeated animation of a constant length animation). It should be noted that each animation of increase, move, change, deletion, save, and standby of the hold icon may be executed in duplicate.

One variable icon can be displayed in the variable icon display area 208e. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 9B, a star-shaped variation icon c is displayed. The variation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variation game, which is displayed after the hold is exhausted and the special figure variation game is started. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time when the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon is started. More strictly speaking, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area 208f to the variable icon display area 208e, the moving icon is referred to as a variable icon, or the variable icon moves. May be. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area 208e is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. The variable icon is displayed with a display size different from the hold icon (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may facilitate the identification of the variable icon and the hold icon, but they may have the same size. The variable icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon allows advance notice of whether or not the change is appropriate (the advance notice of the change) depending on the display mode, and is basically erased at the timing at which the result of the change is informed. Therefore, the variable icon can be viewed as an icon related to the hold, and can be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the hit/miss result of the special figure change game is held. The erasing timing may be before, at the same timing, or after the timing at which the result of the variation is notified.

As an animation related to both the hold icon and the variable icon, a hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 208f with the earliest timing of the start winning is the variable icon display area 208e when the hold is exhausted. There are a moving animation for moving as a variable icon and a changing animation for changing from the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the variable icon. These animations may be combined and executed at the same time. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the variable icon are the same, execution of the change animation can be omitted.

As the animation related to the variable icon, a standby animation that is executed during execution of the special map variable game, an erase animation that is executed when the special icon variable game ends and the variable icon is deleted, and a variable icon There is a change animation or the like that is executed when the display mode of is changed midway. These animations may be combined with each other and run at the same time. Also, the standby animation of the variable icon may be executed at the same time in combination with the movement animation or the change animation.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special symbol 2 are displayed at the upper right. The fourth design 2081 of special figure 1 is a round display, and the fourth design 2082 of special figure 2 is a quadrangle display. In each of the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, gray represents that the pattern is changing, black represents that the jackpot pattern is stopped (fixed display), and white represents that the lost symbol is stopped (fixed display). It means that.

Further, in FIG. 9, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a first special symbol reservation lamp 218, and a second special symbol reservation lamp 220 are shown. ing.

In addition, in FIG. 9, a chance button 136 is also shown on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9, a white display indicates a white lighting state or a non-lighting state of the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the chance button 136, and a hatched display indicates the chance button lamp 138. Indicates the red lighting state. When the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red, the chance button 136 is pressed. The hatched display may be in a lighting state other than red. Further, although “lighted” is used here, it may be “blinking” (hereinafter the same).

The background image of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 9 is a background image of a castle town. When the background image is the background image of the castle town, the pachinko machine 100 is in the castle town mode among the effect modes prepared in plural types. That is, the background image and the effect mode are associated with each other.

In FIG. 9A, both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display (fixed display) the stopped symbols that are lost, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a disparity. "Decorative 3"-"Decorative 4"-"Decorative 1" are displayed. In addition, both the fourth design 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth design 2082 of the special figure 2 are white stop display. The first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9A are lit four, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays four black circle holding icons which are the holding displays of the special diagram 1. Therefore, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area 208e.

In FIG. 9B, the variable display of special symbols is started on the first special symbol display device 212, and the variable display of decorative symbols is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the update of the decorative symbol (variable display) is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Further, only three first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9B are turned on, and only three holding icons (holding icons h1 to h3) are held in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. The variable icon display area 208e, which is not displayed, displays a star-shaped variable icon c. This is because among the four hold icons h1 to h4 displayed in FIG. 10A, the hold icon h1 with the earliest timing of start winning is a change icon, and the change icon is displayed from the hold icon display area 208f. This is the result of moving to the area 208e. Further, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a circular display is changed to a changing display (gray).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9C, the reach effect is started. Up to now, the variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced in the left corner and is in the reach state by the numeral 3. ..

In this example, when the reach effect is started, the button effect is also started. The button production here is a production that tells the development of super reach. Further, the button effect may be an effect of fortune-telling the type of developing super reach. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 9D, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. ) Of the arrow 136 as a promotion display and a remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding a period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid (operation valid period). One is displayed as one set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display showing the remaining period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9 is in the initial position at any stage, and the chance button lamp 138 shown in FIG. 9(d) starts to light up in red and prompts the depression.

In this example, the player does not operate the chance button 136 immediately after the button effect is started, but operates (presses) the chance button 136 after a short time (see FIG. 9(f)). When the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136, which has been lit in red until then, is switched to lighting in white or turned off.

When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a cut-in notice indicating whether or not it is likely to develop into a super reach. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 9(g), the display “CHANCE” is interrupted so as to overlap the background image, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9(h), it develops into super reach A. There is. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 9(h), the letters “Super Reach A” are displayed, indicating that the effect of Super Reach A is being performed. In this example, the castle town is in the background from the beginning to the end, and the effect display of the super reach A is also performed in the background of the castle town. Further, when the effect display of the super reach A is started, all the hold icons h1 to h3 disappear and are invisible. On the other hand, the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, and the frame-shaped image indicating the positions of the variable icon c and the variable icon display area 208e continue to be displayed. The fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, the variable icon c, and the frame-shaped image may be erased to make them invisible. Super reach A is not a big hit confirmed super reach, but just because it has evolved into super reach A does not necessarily mean a big hit. In addition, even if the indication "CHANCE" is expected to develop into the super reach, it does not necessarily mean that the super reach is started, and the lost design is stopped and displayed without the super reach being started. There are also cases. In addition, the display of “CANCE” shown in FIG. 9G may be a dedicated display that is not displayed unless the chance button 136 is operated, or a general-purpose display that is displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated. May be

On the other hand, in FIG. 9(g') showing another example following FIG. 9(f) in which the chance button 136 is operated (pressed), "sorry" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and then the same figure is displayed. As shown in (h'), the combination of lost decorative symbols of "decoration 3"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 without developing to super reach. Has been done. Even if the message "sorry" is displayed, there may be a big hit due to the reversal effect.

The operation of the chance button 136 is always accepted, but the operation outside the operation valid period is finally treated as an invalid operation, and a new effect such as a cut-in notice is not started. That is, the state within the operation valid period in the pachinko machine 100 is a state (operation valid state) in which execution of a new effect such as a cut-in notice is started when the chance button 136 is operated. However, the operation of the chance button 136 may not always be accepted, and control may be performed to accept only the acceptance period.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining in detail the operating means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a chance button 136 capable of executing an advancing/retreating operation and a transparent portion 191 rotatable in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 10A shows that, like the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the chance button 136 and the transparent portion 191 are in their respective initial positions. That is, the chance button 136 does not project, and the transmissive portion 191 is also substantially parallel to the transparent plate member 118. The chance button 136 can be operated (pressed) even in the initial position, and the built-in chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked. The chance button 136 may vibrate and can vibrate even in the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is vibrating, the chance button lamp 138 can be lit or blinked, and the speaker 120 can output a sound effect or an effect sound. The chance button 136 may be capable of vibrating only at the pushed position.

FIG. 10B shows a state in which the transmissive portion 191 rotates from an initial position around a drive shaft (not shown) provided in the lower portion and is inclined forward. This drive shaft is a horizontal shaft extending in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100. The transmissive unit 191 rotates forward while the LED built in the transmissive unit 190 lights up or blinks, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or effect sound. The transmissive part 191 may also vibrate, and can vibrate even in the initial position. Further, even in the state of being inclined forward as shown in FIG. In addition, the transmission part 191 may rotate in small steps in the front-rear direction as strong vibration with a large vibration swing. Even when the transmissive part 191 is vibrating, the LED built in the transmissive part unit 190 can be turned on or blink, and the speaker 120 can output a sound effect or an effect sound. The state (second state) of the transmission part 191 shown in FIG. 10B is closer to the player than the state (first state) in the initial position shown in FIG. 10A, The player can operate the transparent portion 191 by pushing the transparent portion 191 toward the initial position by hand, and the transparent portion 191 corresponds to an example of operating means. Even when the transmissive unit 191 is operated and pushed in, the LED incorporated in the transmissive unit 190 lights or blinks, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or effect sound. The transmissive part 191 may not vibrate at the initial position.

FIG. 10C shows the chance button 136 starting to advance upward from the initial position. The chance button 136 advances while the built-in chance button lamp 138 lights or blinks, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or effect sound. Further, FIG. 11D shows that the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position. The chance button 136 can be stopped at one or more positions between the initial position and the maximum advance position. Therefore, it is possible to advance in multiple stages. The chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can also vibrate, and vibrates laterally or vertically in the advanced (protruding) state. Also at this time, the chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked, and the speaker 120 can output a sound effect or an effect sound. Further, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can be operated so as to be pushed toward the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is operated and pushed in, the chance button lamp 138 lights up or blinks, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or an effect sound. Further, the chance button 136 may be one which is simply pushed down in the advanced state and is automatically retracted toward the initial position.

It should be noted that the vibration of the chance button 136 and the vibration of the transmission part 191 may be a function that appears only in a certain set state. For example, it may be a function that is exhibited by a player's effect customization function or a switch on the game shop staff side. That is, depending on the setting state, it may not vibrate at all, or may vibrate only partially.

FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an effect involving the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

Here, as the operation means, the chance button 136 described with reference to FIG. 10 will be described as the operation means A, and the transparent portion 191 will be described as the operation means B. Comparing the operating means A and the operating means B here, the operating means B is an operating means larger than the operating means A (an operating means having a large operating surface), and the operating means A can be operated even in the initial position. There is a difference that the means B is inoperable at the initial position, but the operation means B and the operation means A may be reversed, or both may be operation means having the same size. It may be an operation means that can be operated together, or an operation means that cannot be operated together. It should be noted that only one of the plurality of examples of the operation means listed here may be applied, the plurality of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. Good.

Further, the operation means described as the transparent portion 191 in the following description can be replaced with other operation means such as the second chance button 137 described later.

As shown in FIG. 11A, the effect involving the operation of the operation means B (transmission part 191) is a big hit rather than the effect involving the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). Has high expectations. Further, although the function A has both, the function B has only the operation means A. Examples of the function A include a function of vibrating at the operating position and a function of shining. Examples of the function B include a function of rotating and a function of vibrating even at the initial position. As shown in FIG. 11A, the operating means B is inferior in number of functions to the operating means A.

However, as shown in FIG. 11B, both may have the same number of functions. That is, the function B was provided only in the operation means A, but the operation means B may be provided with the function C. An example of the function C is a function of performing strong vibration.
The operation means A and the operation means B may have the same number of functions.

FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a part of the effect data of the operation means A. Here, the display data on the decorative symbol display device 208 is “liquid crystal”, the operation data on the family crest actor 247 and the united actor 248 is “movable body”, the sound output data from the speaker 120 is “sound”, the frame lamp 122, , LED and various built-in lamp emission data are displayed as “LED”, and vibration data of the operating means A is displayed as “Vibe”. "..." in the figure represents omission of data. Direction No. The data of "Vibe" in 1 is "E0", and this "E0" indicates that no vibration occurs. Direction No. The data of "Vibe" in 2 is "E1", and this "E1" represents that the operating means A is vibrated before operating the operating means A (chance button 136). Direction No. The effect data of “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, “sound”, and “LED” in 2 become effect data after the operation of the operation means A, and the operation means A vibrating before the operation is operated. Then, the effect after the operation is started according to each of these effect data. Direction No. The data of "Vibe" in 3 is "E2", and this "E2" represents that the operating means A is vibrated after the operating means A (chance button 136) is operated. Direction No. Each effect data of “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, “sound”, and “LED” in 3 becomes effect data after the operation of the operation means A. Direction No. 2 data and effect No. The data of No. 3 may be called even when the operation unit B (transparent unit 191) is operated. This is because, as the effect data after the operation of the operation means B, each effect data of “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, “sound”, and “LED” can be used in some cases. In this case, after the operation means B is operated, the effect No. 2 data or effect No. The effect according to the effect data of "liquid crystal", "movable body", "sound", and "LED" in the data of No. 3 is started, and the operating means A vibrates according to the data of "E1" or "E2". That is, the effect No. The data of 2 includes data (E1) for vibrating the operating means A before operating the operating means A, and other data such as "liquid crystal" is data after operating the operating means A, but the operating means B The operation No. When the data of No. 2 is read, the data of "Vibe" is also executed after the operation of the operation means B in accordance with other data such as "liquid crystal". In addition, direction No. 2 data and effect No. 3 is different from the data of 3 at least in the data of “liquid crystal” such as “A1” and “A2”, and when the data of “liquid crystal” of “A1” is used after the operation means B is operated. Is a production number. Not the data of No. 3 but the effect No. It is necessary to read 2 data.

The effect data regarding the operation means B may also be called when the operation means A is operated, and after the operation means A is operated, “liquid crystal”, “movable body” in the effect data regarding the operation means B, The effect according to each effect data of "sound" and "LED" is started, and the operating means B vibrates according to the data of "vibe". However, the effect data regarding the operating means B may not be called even when the operating means A is operated.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the execution timings of the effect involving the operation means A and the effect involving the operation means B. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 12, time elapses from left to right in the figure. In the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C, the “operation means B-related effect” and the operation means B which are started in accordance with the operation of the operation means B (transmission part 191) are operated in order from the top. When the operation means B related effect is started, "operation means B operation valid state", "operation means B operation" indicating that operation means B is operated, and operation means A (chance button 136) are displayed. "Operation means A related effect" started in response to operation, "operation means A operation effective state" in which operation means A related effect starts when operation means A is operated, operation means A is operated The “operation means A operation” indicating that is shown. The "manipulation means B-related effect" includes effects in which the operation means B itself vibrates, and also includes effect display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. In addition, the "operation means A-related effect" includes effects in which the operation means A itself vibrates, and also includes effect display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. However, the "operation means A-related effect" may indicate only that the operation means A itself vibrates. It should be noted that during the "operation means B operation enabled state", there may or may not be a notification prompting to operate the operation means B. Even during the "operation means A operation enabled state", the operation is performed. In some cases, the notification for prompting the user to operate the means A (operation promotion notification) is performed, and in other cases, the notification is not performed. If these notifications are given, the player can know that the operation is in an effective state, but if not given, each operation means becomes a so-called back button.

In the example shown in FIG. 12A, the operation means B is not operated during the operation means B operation enabled state, but the operation means B related effect is started at the same time when the operation means B operation enabled state ends. In this way, the "operation means B-related effect" may be started even if the operation means B is not operated. The "operation means B-related effect" may be an effect that is always started even if the operation means B is not operated. Further, the content of the “operation means B-related effect” may be different depending on whether or not the operation means B is operated. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect is started at the same time when the operation means B-related effect is started without passing through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without the operation means A being operated. .. In this way, the "operation means A-related effect" may be started even if the operation means A is not operated. The "operation means A-related effect" may be an effect that is always started even if the operation means A is not operated. Further, the content of the “operation means A-related effect” may be different depending on whether or not the operation means A is operated. In this example, the execution period of the operation means B-related effect and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect are the same, and, for example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission part 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Starts at the same time and ends at the same time.

In the example shown in FIG. 12B, when the operation means B is operated and the operation means B is operated during the operation means B operation effective state, the operation means B operation effective state is changed to the execution of the operation means B related effect. Switch. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect is started at the same time when the operation means B-related effect is started without the “operation means A operation valid state” and without the operation means A being operated. Has been done. Also in this example, the execution period of the operation means B-related effect and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect are the same, and, for example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission part 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136) are the same. Starts at the same time and ends at the same time.

Also in the example shown in FIG. 12C, when the operating means B is operated and the operating means B is operated during the operating means B operation valid state, the operating means B operation valid state is changed to the execution of the operating means B related effect. Switch. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect is started at the same time when the operation means B-related effect is started without the “operation means A operation valid state” and without the operation means A being operated. Has been done. In the example shown in FIG. 12C, the execution period of the operation means B-related effect is longer than the execution period of the operation means A-related effect. The vibration of A (chance button 136) is started at the same time, but the vibration of the operating means A is finished first, and after the vibration of the operating means A is finished, the vibration of the operating means B is finished.

The start times may be the same, and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect may be longer than the execution period of the operation means B-related effect. Alternatively, the start timing is different, the operation means B-related effect starts first, then the operation means A-related effect starts, the operation means A-related effect ends first, and then the operation means B-related effect ends. May be. On the contrary, even if the operation means A related effect starts first, then the operation means B related effect starts, the operation means B related effect ends first, and then the operation means A related effect ends. Good. Also, the end timing may be the same, the operation means B-related effect starts first, then the operation means A-related effect starts, and the operation means B-related effect and the operation means A-related effect end together. Alternatively, on the contrary, the operation means A-related effect may be started first, then the operation means B-related effect may be started, and the operation means A-related effect and the operation means B-related effect may be completed together. ..

Further, as described with reference to FIG. 12A, when the operation means B related effect is executed without operating the operation means B, for example, the operation means B related effect is the operation means B operation effective. As long as the operation means B is operated until the first time elapses from the start of the state, the operation means B may be operated at an earlier stage so that the execution time of the operation means B-related effect becomes longer. become able to.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the effect involving the operation means. The arrows in each of FIG. 13A to FIG. 13C represent the vibration period of the operating means A.

The example shown in FIG. 13A is an example during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and when the operation means B is operated while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission part 191) is being performed, the operation is performed. The vibration of the means A (chance button 136) is started, and at the decorative symbol display device 208, the judge effect is started. When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect is ended, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the fluctuation display of the three decorative symbols as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the middle of the execution period of this fluctuation display. Eventually, the shake fluctuation display ends, and the combination of the three decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed.

Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13A, when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the fluctuation time of the three decorative symbols is displayed because the variation time of the entire decorative symbol is already determined. The execution period of is shortened, and the vibration of the operation means A is continued until just before the end of the reduced execution period of the shake fluctuation display.

As shown in FIG. 13A, before the notification of the result regarding the profit of the player such as the confirmation display, the effect such as the vibration of the operation means A is finished so that the player can concentrate on the notification of the result regarding the profit. I have to.

The example shown in FIG. 13B is an example during a big hit game, and when the operation means B is operated in a state where the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission part 191) is being performed, the operation means A ( The vibration of the chance button 136) is started, and at the decorative symbol display device 208, the judge effect is started. The judge in the judge production here is a judge that is linked to whether or not to shift to the probability changing state. When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect is ended, and the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies that the specific winning opening (for example, V winning opening) is aimed at in the next round. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the middle of the notification execution period. Eventually, the next round will be started, and it will be informed again that a specific winning opening (for example, a V winning opening) is aimed.

Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13B, if the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the maximum allowable time for one round has already been determined, and therefore the specific winning opening is aimed at in the next round. The execution period for informing the fact is shortened, and the vibration of the operating means A is continued until just before the end of the reduced execution period for the informing.

As described above, the effect involving the operation means is executed even during the big hit game. In addition, the number of rounds in which the specific winning opening should be aimed is limited, and if the specific winning opening can be won in that round, the state changes to the probable state after the jackpot game is over. Therefore, the round that should aim for the specific winning opening is an important round that leads to the profit of the player, and before the start of the round that leads to the profit of the player, the effect such as the vibration of the operating means A is finished, and the player I am able to concentrate on aiming for a specific winning hole.

In addition, the example shown in FIG. 13A and the example shown in FIG. 13B are examples in which the vibration period of the operating means A remains constant even if the operating timing of the operating means B changes.

The example shown in FIG. 13(c) is an example of the pseudo continuous production during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the operation means B is operated while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission part 191) is being performed. Then, the vibration of the operating means A (chance button 136) is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is started to stop displaying the pseudo continuous symbol. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol is finished, and the vibration of the operating means A is finished at the same time when the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol is finished. Then, the next pseudo variation display is started, the number of pseudo repetitions becomes the n-th time, and the operation promotion notification of the operation means B is performed even in the n-th pseudo variation display.

Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13C, when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the period of stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol started by the operation of the operation means B is shortened. The vibration of the operating means A ends at the same time when the stop display of the shortened pseudo continuous symbols ends.

The example shown in FIG. 13C is an example in which when the operation timing of the operating means B changes, the vibration period of the operating means A also changes.

In summary including the above description, the operating means A can vibrate at least during the period when the judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is being executed. Further, the operation means A may be capable of vibrating during at least a part of the period in which the judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is being executed. For example, the vibration may be ended at the same time when the judgment effect is ended, the vibration may be continued even when the judgment effect is ended, or the vibration may be ended before the judgment effect is ended. Further, the vibration period in which the operating means A vibrates may be constant or may vary depending on whether or not the operating means B is operated and the operation timing.

The upper example shown in FIG. 13D is an example in which the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means A. The final judge effect is a judgment regarding whether or not a big hit occurs in the variable display of the decorative pattern during variable display, and reach effect (strong SP reach, etc.).

It may be a judge showing the ending in the final stage reach production). In this upper example,

The period during which the operating means A is vibrating is a period during which the operation of the operating means A is treated as valid, and when the operating means A is operated, the vibration ends and the final judge effect is started. Therefore, if the operation of the operating means A is delayed, the period L1 between the vibration start timing of the operating means A and the start timing of the final judge effect becomes longer, and the period during which the operating means A is vibrating becomes longer. Further, even when the operation means A is not operated, the final judge effect is started. In this case, the period L1 is the longest and has a constant period length.

On the other hand, in the lower example shown in FIG. 13D, the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means B, and the vibration of the operation means A is also started. Therefore, the start timing of the vibration of the operating means A and the start timing of the final judge effect become the same, and the period length between them becomes zero. However, the period during which the operating means A is vibrating can be secured for a certain period. While the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means B, the vibration of the operation means A is started by operating the operation means A after the operation of the operation means B. If the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period between the start timing of the final judgment effect and the vibration start timing of the operation means A becomes longer, and the period in which the operation means A is vibrating becomes longer, as in the example of FIG.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of an effect involving the operation means A (chance button 136), and FIG. 15 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

Descriptions of the items described above with reference to the example of the button effect shown in FIG. 9 will be omitted. In each drawing of FIG. 14, on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, in addition to the chance button 136 which is the operation means A, the transparent portion 191 which is the operation means B is also shown. 14 and 15, the chance button 136 which is the operation means A is in the initial position at any stage, and the transparent portion 191 which is the operation means B is also in the initial position at any stage.

In FIG. 14A, both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display (fixed display) a stopped stop symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a disparity. "Decorative 3"-"Decorative 4"-"Decorative 1" are displayed. In addition, both the fourth design 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth design 2082 of the special figure 2 are white stop display. Four of the first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 14A are lit, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays four black circle holding icons which are the holding display of the special diagram 1. Therefore, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area 208e.

In FIG. 14B, the variable display of the special symbols is started on the first special symbol display device 212, and the variable display of the decorative symbols is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the update of the decorative symbol (variable display) is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Further, only three first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 14B are turned on, and only three holding icons (holding icons h1 to h3) are held in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. The variable icon c that is not displayed and has the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 208e. Further, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a circular display is changed to a changing display (gray).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14C, the reach effect is started. Up to now, the variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced in the left corner and is in the reach state by the numeral 3. ..

Also here, as in the case of FIG. 9, an example in which the button effect is started when the reach effect is started is shown. The button effect here is a type of judge effect and serves as a notice effect for judging whether or not the super reach will be developed. The button effect may be an effect for judging the type of developing super reach. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 14D, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light in red and prompts the user to press it. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 that has begun to light in red, and an arrow display 136b as a promotion display for prompting the operation (press) of the chance button 136 and Three sets of a character display "PUSH" and a remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding a period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid (operation valid period) are displayed as one set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display showing the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. Hereinafter, these three images 136a, 136b, 136c and the character display "PUSH" are collectively referred to as the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification. The initial position display 136X corresponds to an example of the second notification. It should be noted that the initial position display 136X does not have to include all the three images 136a, 136b, 136c and the character display "PUSH". For example, the initial position display 136X that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c may be used.

14E is within the operation valid period, and the chance button 136 which is the operation means A is operated at the timing of FIG. 14E. When the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136, which has been lit in red until then, is switched to lighting in white or is turned off.

When the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, is operated within the operation valid period, the family crest actor 247 falls on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208 (see FIG. 14(f)). The family coat emblem 247 covers the middle symbol display area 208b, part of the variable icon display area 208e, and part of the variable icon c. The fall of the family crest monument 247 is a manifestation of the judgment result of the development into super reach, and as shown in FIG. 14G, the decorative pattern display device 208 starts the super reach effect and the background image changes. .. Since the chance button 136 is operated within the effective operation period, it remains in the off state at the initial position and does not vibrate.

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 14(h), the family crest monument 247 returns to the initial position, and the background image further changes to the fusuma background image. In the super reach effect, the first super reach effect (weak SP reach effect) with a relatively low chance of a big hit and the second with a relatively high probability of a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display. Super-reach effect (strong SP reach effect) is prepared, and the background image of the fusuma corresponds to the background image of the weak SP reach effect. Even in this weak SP reach production, the judge production is performed. The judge effect here is an effect of judging whether or not it will be a big hit, and it is equivalent to the final judge effect, and if the princess character appears from the inside with the sliding door open, the symbol variation display currently being performed It is a sign of the judgment result that it is confirmed that it will be a big hit with. In FIG. 14(i), a cloud-like effect display e1 is displayed. Although it cannot be seen in the diagram of FIG. 14(j), in FIG. 14(j), some shade is faintly seen in the cloud-like effect display e1. In FIG. 14(k), the effect display e1 is displayed. The e1 disappears, the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the character display "Rescue Princess" is displayed on the upper right. The character display "Rescue Princess" may be displayed from the timing of FIG. 14(h). The shadow of something described in the description of FIG. 11(j) is the shadow of the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification. The effect display e1 of FIG. 14(i) and FIG. 14(j) corresponds to the precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is changed from FIG. 14(k) when the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is started to be displayed. Although started, it can be seen from FIG. 14(i) that the final judge effect has started.

FIG. 14(l) is within the operation valid period, and the chance button 136 which is the operation means A is operated again at the timing of FIG. 14(l), and the judgment result of the final judge effect is displayed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 15(m) following FIG. 14(l), there is no one in which the sliding doors are open, and the judgment result here is likely to be out of alignment. .. Even during the execution of the final judge effect described above, the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, is located at the initial position and is not vibrating.

Note that the judgment result of the final judge may be displayed even if the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, is not operated within the operation valid period, and the chance button 136 is not operated and the chance button 136 is not operated. The final judgment result may be displayed even when a different operation means (for example, a second chance button 137 described later) is operated (the same applies to the following examples). This may be the same as in the production of judging whether or not to develop into the super reach, or may be limited to the production of judging whether or not to develop into the super reach, It may be limited to the final judge production which is a direct judge for the big hit.

When the final judge effect is finished, the fluctuation display of the three decorative symbols is started as the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 15(n), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 3" are displayed in a swinging manner.

Eventually, when the symbol variation display of the special symbols is finished on the first special symbol display device 212 and is confirmed and displayed, the decorative symbols are also fixedly displayed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. "-Decoration 4"-"decoration 3" is confirmed and displayed. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example of a case in which an effect involving the operation means A (chance button 136) is executed after a weak SP reach effect and a big hit occurs, and FIG. 17 is an example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of a stepwise.

Hereinafter, description will be made focusing on differences from the example illustrated in FIGS. 14 and 15, and description of the same points may be omitted.

Also in FIG. 16D, the button effect is started in the reach state. The button performance here will also be a performance to judge whether or not to develop into super reach. When the button effect is started, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light in red, and the decoration pattern display device 208 displays the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification.

As shown in FIG. 16(e), when the chance button 136 which is the operating means A is operated within the operation valid period, in this example as well, as shown in FIG. 16(f), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. On the front side, the judgment result that the family crest monument 247 has dropped and developed into super reach is notified.

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 16( h ), the background image is further changed to the background image of the fusuma and the weak SP reach effect is started as the family crest monument 247 returns to the initial position. Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 16(i), a cloud-like effect display e1 is displayed, and in FIG. 16(j), a shade of something is faintly seen in the effect display e1. .. Also, after the effect display e1 is displayed, the chance button 136, which is the operating means A, starts to advance from the initial position. When the chance button 136 starts to advance, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light in red and the chance button 136 itself starts vibrating. That is, the chance button 136 executes the advancing operation (protruding operation) while vibrating. The vibration may be started after the protrusion. The chance button 136 reaches an intermediate position between the initial position and the maximum advance position, and stops at the intermediate position. At the timing of FIG. 16(k), the effect display e1 disappears, and the opportunity button lamp 138 is lit in red in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 with the opportunity button lamp 138 lit in red. The simulated button image 136a1, the arrow display 136b, and the remaining period meter display 136c are displayed in one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a2, 136b, 136c are collectively referred to as an operation promotion notification intermediate position display 136Y. The intermediate position display 136Y also corresponds to an example of the second notification. The intermediate position display 136Y may not be included in all of the three images 136a2, 136b, 136c. For example, it may be an intermediate position display 136Y that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c. The chance button 136 continues to vibrate even after stopping at the intermediate position, and continues to vibrate until the remaining period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid becomes zero or the chance button 136 is pushed. The opportunity button 136 may start advancing at any time during the weak SP reach production, for example, before the effect display e1 is displayed, or the intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification is displayed. It may be at the same time as the above or after that. Note that only one of the plurality of types of advance start timing of the chance button 136 listed here may be applied, or a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all the examples may be applied. Types may be applied. Further, the timing for completing (stopping) the advance operation of the chance button 136 may be any time during the weak SP reach production, and may be the same as the display of the intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification, or after that. Good. Further, the vibration start of the chance button 136 does not have to coincide with the start of advancement of the chance button 136, and may be before or after the start of advancement. When it is later, for example, the vibration may be started at the same time as or after the advance operation of the chance button 136 is completed (stopped). Furthermore, the chance button 136 may end the vibration if it is pushed in even a little, or may continue the vibration until it is pushed to the initial position. The effect display e1 of FIG. 16(i) and FIG. 16(j) also corresponds to the precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is changed from FIG. 16(k) in which the intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification is started to be displayed. Although it is started, it can be seen that the final judge effect has started from FIG. 16(i), and it can be seen that the final judge effect has started when the chance button 136 starts to advance, and the chance button 136. It can be seen that the final judge effect has started when the player reaches the intermediate position.

16(l) is within the operation valid period, and at this timing of FIG. 16(l), the chance button 136, which is the operating means A and has advanced (protruded) to the intermediate position, is pushed to the initial position and the final judge The judgment result of the performance is displayed. In FIG. 17(m) subsequent to FIG. 16(l), the chance button 136 is in the initial position, does not vibrate, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the princess character GC behind the fusuma. , It is certain that the judge result here will be a big hit. The effect in which the princess character GC appears in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 17(m) is a notice effect and corresponds to an example of the second effect. That is, this effect (second effect) is an effect which is started in response to the operation of the chance button 136 which is the operation means A. The notice effect (second effect) in which the princess character GC appears may be started at the same time when the operation of the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, is started, or the chance button 136 returns to the initial position. It may be started at the same time, it may be started at the same time when the chance button 136 returns to the initial position, or the second condition (for example, another second condition (for example, when the chance button 136 is operated). It may be started when the first time elapsed after the start of the weak SP reach effect is satisfied.

The effect (second effect) started in response to the operation of the chance button 136 may be liquid crystal display, LED lighting or blinking. Further, the second effect may be an effect including N (plural) effects of a plurality of types of effects, and the chance button 136 may vibrate before the second effect is started. The chance button 136 may be configured to vibrate without fail.

In this example, the chance button 136 is advanced, but it may be in a mode of vibrating while staying at the initial position, and the chance button 136 may be replaced with a second chance button 137 described later.

When the final judge effect is finished, the decoration symbol display device 208 swayingly displays “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” as shown in FIG. 17(n), and then FIG. As shown in (), "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" are confirmed and displayed, and a big hit is made. In the example shown in FIG. 15, from the fluctuation display to the confirmation display, the background screen has no pattern, but in the case of a big hit, the background screen is where the lords are gathering. Further, in the case of a big hit, a promotion effect of a kind of big hit (for example, a promotion effect from a big hit without probability change to a big hit with probability change) may be performed during the swing fluctuation display (the same applies to the following).
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example different from the examples shown in FIGS. 16 and 17.

The figure numbers of the alphabets written in parentheses in FIG. 18 correspond to the figure numbers of the alphabets written in parentheses in FIGS. 16 and 17. Hereinafter, description will be made focusing on differences from the example illustrated in FIGS. 16 and 17, and description of the same points may be omitted.

The example shown in FIG. 18 is an effect that is only executed after passing through a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 16D to 16G). An effect display e1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18(i), and in FIG. 18(j), a shade of something is faintly seen in the effect display e1. Also in this example, after the effect display e1 is displayed, the chance button 136, which is the operating means A, lights in red from the initial position and starts to advance while vibrating. In the example shown in FIG. 18, the chance button 136 advances to the maximum advance position and stops at the maximum advance position. After advancing to the maximum advancing position, it may be stopped after returning to the initial position by the first amount. In the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18(k), a button image 136a2 simulating the chance button 136 in which the opportunity button lamp 138 is lit in red in a state where it has advanced to the maximum advance position, and an arrow display Three of 136b and the remaining period meter display 136c are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a2, 136b, 136c are collectively referred to as the maximum advance position display 136Z of the operation promotion notification. The maximum advance position display 136Z also corresponds to an example of the second notification. The maximum advancing position display 136Z may be displayed without including all of the three images 136a2, 136b, 136c. For example, it may be the maximum advance position display 136Z that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c.

Since the button image 136a2 is large in the maximum advance position display 136Z of the operation promotion notification, a part of the character display "Rescue Princess" is hidden. Since the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position display 136Z, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the player has advanced to only the intermediate position or has not advanced at all and remains at the initial position. ..

18(l) is within the operation valid period, and at this timing of FIG. 18(l), the chance button 136, which is the operating means A and has advanced (protruded) to the maximum advanced position, is pushed to the initial position, and is finally operated. The result of the judge's judgment is displayed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 18(m), the princess character GC is displayed in the back of the sliding doors, and it is decided that the judge result here is a big hit. Further, in FIG. 18(m), the chance button 136 continues to vibrate at the initial position. That is, in this example, the chance button 136 that was vibrating at the maximum advance position is vibrating during the pushing operation and after returning to the initial position, and the vibration continues. However, the vibration of the chance button 136 may be temporarily interrupted by the pushing operation. For example, if the chance button 136 is pushed in even a little, the vibration may be interrupted once and then resumed after returning to the initial position. May be restarted. Further, regardless of whether or not the chance button 136 has advanced (protruded), and regardless of the amount of advance of the chance button 136, at least a part of the period (all the time) during execution of the notice production in which the princess character GC appears. The chance button 136 vibrates during the period, or only during a partial period such as the beginning. In the example illustrated in FIG. 18 described above, the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, vibrates in the notice effect in which the princess character GC appears, which is an example of the second effect.

In this example as well, although the chance button 136 is advanced, it may be in a mode of vibrating while remaining at the initial position, and the chance button 136 may be replaced with a second chance button 137 described later.

Further, the display mode of the princess character GC in the notice production may change according to the type of big hit and the degree of expectation of the big hit with probability variation. For example, when the expectation of the jackpot with probability variation is high, the display mode (second display mode) in which the fan is widened and dancing may be used.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of a case in which the player is lost even though the effect involving the operation means A (chance button 136) is executed through the strong SP reach effect, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 19 in steps.

Hereinafter, the description will focus on the differences from the examples described so far, and description of the same points may be omitted.

Also in FIG. 19D, the button effect is started in the reach state. The button performance here will also be a performance to judge whether or not to develop into super reach. When the button effect is started, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light in red, and the decoration pattern display device 208 displays the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification.

As shown in FIG. 19E, when the chance button 136 which is the operation means A is operated within the operation valid period, in this example as well, as shown in FIG. On the front side, the judgment result that the family crest monument 247 has dropped and developed into super reach is notified.

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 19(h), the family crest monument 247 returns to the initial position, and the background image changes to a duel scene between the hero and the enemy. The background image of the duel scene corresponds to the background image of the strong SP reach effect. Even in the strong SP reach production, the final judge production of whether or not to be a jackpot is performed, and if the main character wins, it is confirmed that it will be a jackpot in the currently displayed symbol fluctuation display. become. As shown in FIG. 19(i), the effect display e2 such as a flash overlaps with the display in which the lord and the enemy role cut off each other. Even after the effect display e2 such as a flash is displayed, the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, remains in the initial position. In FIG. 19(k), the effect display e2 disappears, the operation promotion notification initial position display 136X is displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 starts to light in red at the initial position. However, the chance button 136 does not vibrate. The effect display e2 of FIG. 19(i) and FIG. 19(j) also corresponds to the precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is changed from FIG. 19(k) when the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is started to be displayed. Although started, it can be seen from FIG. 19(i) that the final judge effect has started.

FIG. 19(l) is within the operation valid period, and at this timing of FIG. 19(l), the chance button 136 (operation means A) at the initial position is pressed, and the judgment result of the final judge effect is displayed. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20(m), the scene in which the enemy has won is displayed, and the judge result here is likely to be lost. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 20(m) is in the off state at the initial position and is not vibrating.

When the final judge effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 20(n), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 3" are displayed in a swinging variation on the unpatterned background screen, as shown in FIG. Next, as shown in FIG. 20(o), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 3", which is a combination of loss, is confirmed and displayed, resulting in loss.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of a case in which the effect involving the operation means B (transmission part 191) is executed through the strong SP reach effect, and a big hit occurs, and FIG. 22 is shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example in steps.

Hereinafter, description will be made focusing on differences from the example illustrated in FIGS. 19 and 20, and description of the same points may be omitted.

In FIG. 21(h), the strong SP reach production is started through the judgment production (FIG. 21(d) to FIG. 21(g)) of whether or not to develop into the super reach, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays A background image of the duel scene is displayed. Next, in FIG. 21(i), an effect display e2 such as a flash is displayed.

In FIG. 21, even when the display of the effect display e2 is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21(j), the transmissive portion 191 which is the operation means B rotates forward from the initial position and falls down toward the player. The transmissive portion 191 may rotate forward simultaneously with the display of the effect display e2, or the transmissive portion 191 may rotate forward before the display of the effect display e2. At the timing of FIG. 21(k), the effect display e2 disappears, and in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the transparent portion rotating image 191a simulating the pachinko machine 100 in which the transparent portion 191 has rotated forward, and the transparent portion. An arrow display 191b indicating that the user pushes in 191 and a character display of "pushing" and a remaining period meter display 191c indicating a remaining period for accepting the operation of the transmissive unit 191 are displayed as one set. .. Hereinafter, these three images 191a, 191b, 191c and the character display of "pushing" are collectively referred to as a transparent portion display 191X for operation promotion notification. The transparent portion display 191X corresponds to an example of the first notification. The transparent images 191X do not have to include all of the three images 191a, 191b, 191c and the character display of "pushing". For example, the transparent portion display 191X that does not include the remaining period meter display 191c may be used. The transparent portion 191 may be rotated forward at the same time as the transparent portion display 191X is displayed, or the transparent portion 191 may be rotated forward after the transparent portion display 191X is displayed. Even when the transparent portion display 191X is displayed, the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate. Further, although the transmitting portion 191 that has rotated forward is not vibrated, it may be vibrated. The effect display e2 of FIG. 21(i) and FIG. 21(j) also corresponds to the precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is changed from FIG. 21(k) when the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is started to be displayed. Although it is started, it can be seen that the final judge effect is started from the time when the effect display e2 is started, or it can be seen that the final judge effect is started from the time when the transparent portion 191 is rotated forward. ..

21(l) is within the operation valid period, and at this timing of FIG. 21(l), the transparent portion 191 which is the operation means B is pushed to the initial position. In this example, when the transparent portion 191 is pushed to the initial position, as shown in FIG. 22(m) following FIG. 21(l), the family crest actor 247 falls again on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208. The background image changes as it comes. Further, a pair of combined role products 248 from the left and right advance toward the family crest role product 247, and as shown in FIG. 22(n), the pair of united role products 248 sandwich the family crest role product 247 from the left and right, respectively. Combine with family crests. The fact that the transparent portion 191 which is the operation means B is rotated forward may itself be an effect that suggests a big hit, or an effect that the fall of the family crest accessory 247 is a big hit. Alternatively, it may be an effect that suggests that the combination of the pair of coalesced auditors 248 with the family crest auditors 247 is a big hit. In addition, only one of the examples of a plurality of types of effects suggesting that the jackpot will be listed here may be applied, or a plurality of types of examples may be applied, All types may be applied. After that, first, the pair of coalescing auditors 248 returns to the initial position (FIG. 22(o), then the family crest auditors 247 returns to the initial position (FIG. 22(p)), and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The judge result of the final judge effect is displayed in a state where there is no obstruction.The scene where the lord has won is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Fig. 22(q), and the judge result here. In this scene where the judge result of the final judge effect is displayed, the variable display of the decorative design reduced in the upper left is still in the reach state in FIG. 22(q). However, it may be a combination of big hits of decorative designs (for example, "333"), that is, a combination of big hits of decorative designs is displayed small together with the display of the final judgment result, and then the It may be a mode in which the combination of big hits is displayed in a large size.

The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 22(q) is off at the initial position and is not vibrating.

When the final judge effect is finished, in the decorative pattern display device 208, as shown in FIG. 22(r), "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" shakes and changes on the background screen where the lords are gathering. Then, as shown in FIG. 22(s), "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" are confirmed and displayed, and the jackpot is a big hit.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 described above, the family crest monument 247 (first effect movable body) operates before the start of the final judge effect (FIGS. 21(f) to 21(g)), Although the family crest monument 247 also operates in the final judge production (FIG. 22(m) to FIG. 22(o)), the family crest monument 247 does not operate before the final judgment production starts, and The operation may be performed only in the judge effect.

In addition, in this example, there was a scene (FIG. 21(j) to FIG. 21(l)) where the transparent portion 191 was operated, but instead of the transparent portion 191, other chance buttons 137 and the like described later are displayed. You may make it operate an operation means.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example in which the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, starts to vibrate in response to the operation of the transparent portion 191 that is the operation means B. The figure numbers of the alphabets written in parentheses in FIG. 23 correspond to the figure numbers of the alphabets written in parentheses in FIGS. 21 and 22. Hereinafter, description will be made focusing on differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, and description of the same points may be omitted.

The example shown in FIG. 23 is an effect that is only executed after passing through a certain effect (the effects in FIGS. 21D to 21J). When the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification shown in FIG. 23(k) is displayed, that is, after the final judge effect is started, when the transparent portion 191 is pushed to the initial position as shown in FIG. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated, the chance button 136 automatically starts vibrating (see FIG. 23(m)). In this example, the chance button 136 also starts vibrating simultaneously with the start of the final judge effect, and the chance button 136 ends the vibration before the judgment result of the final judge effect is displayed (see FIG. 23(p)). That is, the vibration of the chance button 136 is executed only during the period of FIG. 23(m) to FIG. 23(p), which is a part of the execution period of the final judge effect, and the judgment result of the final judge effect is displayed. At the timing of FIG. 23(q), there is a case where the judge result can be noticed without vibrating. However, the chance button 136 may continue to vibrate until the final judge effect is finished, and in this case, the vibration of the chance button 136 is always the entire period of the execution period of the final judge effect. Further, the chance button 136 may continue to vibrate even after the final judgment effect ends, and in the state where the vibration continues after the final judgment effect ends, the initial position of the operation promotion notification on the decorative pattern display device 208. The display 136X may or may not be displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 23, it can be seen that the chance button 136 is vibrating as a part of the final judge effect.

In the example shown in FIG. 23 described above, the final judge effect of FIGS. 23(m) to (q) corresponds to an example of the first effect, and the advance notice effect that is started according to the operation of the transmission unit 191. Is.

In the example shown in FIG. 23, the vibrating chance button 136 is not operated, but when the vibrating chance button 136 is operated during the execution of the final judge effect, the final judge effect is continued and According to the operation, first, the family crest actor 247 and the united actor 248 are returned to the initial positions, and then the judgment result is displayed. Therefore, the earlier the opportunity button 136 is operated, the earlier the judge result can be seen. When the vibrating chance button 136 is operated, the same judgment effect shown in FIGS. 17(m) and 18(m) is not started. That is, even if the chance button 136 is operated while the chance button 136 (second operation means) is vibrating during execution of the final judge effect (first effect) described with reference to FIG. The effect (second effect) shown in (m) or FIG. 18(m) is not started. Further, the effect (second effect) shown in FIG. 17(m) or FIG. 18(m) is configured not to be executed simultaneously with the final judge effect (first effect) described with reference to FIG. It is a production.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing, in stages, one example in which the chance button 136, which is the operating means A, is also operated after the transparent portion 191 that is the operating means B has been operated. The figure numbers of the alphabets written in parentheses in FIG. 24 correspond to the figure numbers of the alphabets written in parentheses in FIGS. 21 and 22. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 23 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

The example shown in FIG. 24 is also an effect that is executed only after passing through a certain effect (the effects in FIGS. 21D to 21J). In the example shown in FIG. 24, when the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, the transparent portion 191 is pushed in at a relatively early timing (FIG. 24(l)). That is, the transparent portion 191 is pushed in at a timing when the remaining period meter display 191c of the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about ⅕.

In this example, after the transparent portion 191 is pushed to the initial position, the chance button 136 corresponding to the operating means A is pushed this time. Then, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate. The chance button 136 indirectly starts vibrating in response to an operation of the transmissive portion 191, and directly starts vibrating in response to a pressing operation. Further, the chance button 136 continues to vibrate while being pressed, but when the predetermined maximum vibration time elapses after starting to vibrate, the chance button 136 ends vibrating even if pressed. In the example shown in FIG. 24, even when the final judge effect is finished and the shaking fluctuation display is started, the chance button 136 continues to vibrate (see FIG. 24(r1)), but the shaking fluctuation display is started. After a while, the maximum vibration time is reached, and the vibration ends even if it is pressed (see FIG. 24(r2)). The maximum vibration time corresponds to 6 frames in FIG. 24(m) to FIG. 24(r1). The shaking fluctuation display continues for a while thereafter (FIG. 24(r3) to FIG. 24(r4)), and the first time (FIG. 24(r2) to FIG. 24(r4) after the chance button 136 does not vibrate. After continuing for a time corresponding to one frame), "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" are confirmed and displayed as shown in FIG. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 24, the shake fluctuation display is executed over a period corresponding to four frames in FIG. 24(r1) to FIG. 24(r4).

Note that in the example of FIG. 24, it can be seen that the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191 that is the operation means B. That is, when the final judge effect is started, the family crest monument 247 is falling. Further, when the final judge effect is started, the chance button 136 vibrates in response to the pressing of the chance button 136.

In the example shown in FIG. 24 described above, the final judge effects of FIGS. 24(m) to 24(q) correspond to an example of the first effect.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example in which the timing of operating the transmissive part 191 which is the operation means B is later than the example shown in FIG. The figure numbers of the alphabets written in parentheses in FIG. 25 correspond to the figure numbers of the alphabets written in parentheses in FIGS. 21 and 22. Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 24 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

The example shown in FIG. 25 is also an effect that is executed only after passing through a certain effect (the effects in FIGS. 21D to 21J). In the example shown in FIG. 25, the transmissive part 191 is pushed in at a timing when the remaining period meter display 191c of the transmissive part display 191X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about 2/5. That is, the transmissive unit 191 is operated with a delay of one frame from the example shown in FIG. 24 (see FIG. 25 (12)). As a result, compared with the example shown in FIG. 24, the start of the final judge effect is delayed by one frame, the vibration period of the chance button 136 is also shifted backward, and the timing when the predetermined maximum vibration time elapses is 1 as well. It slips behind the frame. In the example shown in FIG. 25, the maximum vibration time corresponds to 6 frames in FIG. 25(m) to FIG. 25(r1), and the chance button 136 ends the vibration at the timing in FIG. 25(r1). The shaking fluctuation display is shown in FIG. 25(s) after the second time (the time corresponding to two frames in FIG. 25(r2) to FIG. 25(r3)) continues after the chance button 136 does not vibrate. As shown, "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" is confirmed and displayed, and a big hit occurs. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 24, the fluctuation display is for a period corresponding to four frames, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 25, the display shown in (r1) to (r3) in FIG. ) Is executed for a period corresponding to three frames, and the shake fluctuation display execution period is shortened by the delay of the timing of operating the transmissive portion 191 that is the operating means B.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example in which the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B vibrates when the housing vibrates. The figure numbers of the alphabets written in brackets in FIG. 26 correspond to the figure numbers of the alphabets written in brackets in FIG. Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 24 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

The example shown in FIG. 26 is also an effect that is executed only after passing through a certain effect (the effects in FIGS. 21D to 21J). In this example, as shown in FIG. 26(k), the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B vibrates at the second position (forward tilt position) which is rotated forward from the initial position (first position). There is. The transmissive portion 191 vibrates even if the transmissive portion 191 itself does not vibrate by vibrating the housing to which the transmissive portion 191 is directly or indirectly attached. The case here may be the main body 104 (inner frame) or the front frame door 106 provided with the transmissive unit 190. In this example, in addition to the transparent portion display 191X of the operation prompting notification shown in FIG. 26(k), the vibration of the transparent portion 191 can also prompt the operation of the transparent portion 191. In FIG. The part 191 is pushed to the initial position. When the transmissive portion 191 is pushed to the initial position, the vibration of the housing ends, and this time, when the chance button 136 which is the operation means A is pressed, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate.

The vibration of the housing, and hence the vibration of the transmission part 191 may start when the transmission part 191 reaches the forward tilt position from the initial position, or the transmission part 191 starts to rotate forward from the initial position. It may be started from the time point when the transmission portion 191 reaches the forward tilt position, or when the transmission portion 191 is not operated even after the first time has elapsed. Further, the vibration of the housing, and hence the vibration of the transmission part 191 may be ended when the transmission part 191 is pushed to the initial position, or may be ended when the transmission part 191 is pushed in a little from the front tilt position, or may be set to the initial position. Even if it is pushed, there may be a period in which the vibration continues for the first vibration period after the vibration is started or when the vibration returns to the initial position and the vibration is performed together with the chance button 136.

Similarly to the transmissive portion 191, the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, may be directly or indirectly attached to the chance button 136 even if the chance button 136 itself does not vibrate (for example, Alternatively, it may be made to vibrate by vibrating the door 108 with a ball storage tray.

Further, the transmission part 191 itself may vibrate in the front-back direction or the lateral direction.

FIG. 23(m) to FIG. 24(q), FIG. 24(m) to FIG. 24(q), FIG. 25(m) to FIG. 25(q), and FIG. 26(m) to FIG. The mode of the final judge effect shown in () is different from the mode of the judge effect shown in FIG. 17(m) and FIG. 18(m) described earlier. Different production modes mean different background screens, different appearing characters, and different displayed characters in different colors.

In addition, in any of the examples shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, the transparent portion 191 is operated, but instead of the transparent portion 191, other operating means such as a second chance button 137 described later is operated. It may be an example.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example in which the transmissive part 191 itself rotates in the front-rear direction and vibrates strongly. In FIG. 27, different examples are shown on the left side and the right side, respectively.

First, the example on the left side of FIG. 27 will be described. The example shown on the left side is also an effect that is executed only after passing through a certain effect (the effect in FIGS. 21D to 21G). The state of FIG. 27(a) is the same as the state of FIG. 19(k), the operation promotion notification initial position display 136X is displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 starts to light in red at the initial position.

FIG. 27(A) is within the operation valid period, and at this timing of FIG. 27(A), the chance button 136 (operation means A) at the initial position is pressed. Here, unlike the example shown in FIG. 19, the judge result of the final judge effect is not immediately displayed, and the family crest actor 247 falls on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208 as in FIG. 24(m) and the like. The background image changes as it comes. Further, in this example, the transparent portion 191 which is the operation means B is rotated from the initial position to the forward inclined position as the family crest 247 is dropped (see FIG. 27C). Next, as shown in FIG. 27D, the family crest actor 247 is sandwiched by the pair of coalesced auditors 248 that have advanced from the left and right, and the pair of the coalesced auditors 248 and the family crest auditor 247 are combined and the transparent portion is formed. 191 returns from the forward tilt position to the initial position. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 27(e), in a state where the pair of united auditors products 248 have returned to the initial position and the family crest auditors product 247 remains, the transmissive portion 191 rotates again from the initial position to the forward inclined position. Further, as shown in FIG. 27F, the family crest monument 247 returns to the initial position, and the transmissive portion 191 returns from the forward tilt position to the initial position again.

As described above, in the example on the left side of FIG. 27, at the same time when the final judge effect is started, the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B repeats the rotation between the initial position and the forward tilt position to vibrate strongly. I do. This strong vibration can be viewed as being performed as part of the final judge performance, or can be viewed as a performance different from the final judge performance.

Next, the example on the right side of FIG. 27 will be described. The example shown on the right side is also an effect that is executed only after passing through a certain effect (the effects in FIGS. 21D to 21J). The state of FIG. 27(a) is the same as the state of FIG. 24(k), the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the transparent portion 191 which is the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position. doing. The chance button 136, which is the operating means A, remains off at the initial position.

27(i) is within the operation valid period of the transparent portion 191, but in FIG. 27(i), not the transparent portion 191, but the chance button 136 which remains turned off at the initial position is operated.

Even when the chance button 136 is operated, in the same way as the example on the left side of FIG. 27 in which the transparent portion 191 is operated, the final judge effect is executed and the transparent portion 191 is set to the initial position and the forward inclined position. Strong vibration is repeated between the two. That is, the transmissive portion 191 returns from the forward tilt position to the initial position in FIG. 27(u), rotates from the initial position to the front tilt position in FIG. 27(e), and moves from the front tilt position to the initial position in FIG. 27(e). It returns to the position again, and in the same figure (or), it rotates again from the initial position to the forward tilt position. Therefore, the chance button 136 was a so-called back button. However, after the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 27B, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and remains off at the initial position.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of a situation in which a scene in which an enemy role has won is displayed after a strong SP reach production, but a big hit is brought about by a revival production, and FIG. 29 is shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example in steps.

The example shown in FIG. 28 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 21, and the judgment effect (FIGS. 28D to 28G) of whether or not to develop into the super reach is performed, and the example shown in FIG. , The strong SP reach effect is started, and the effect display e2 such as a flash is displayed in FIG.

Also in FIG. 28(j), in a state where the effect display e2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the transparent portion 191 which is the operation means B is rotated from the initial position to the forward inclined position, and FIG. At the timing of, the effect display e2 disappears, the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the transparent portion 191 remains in the forward tilt position.

In FIG. 28(l), the transmissive part 191 is pushed in. In FIG. 29(α) subsequent to FIG. 28(l), a scene in which an enemy role similar to that in FIG. 20(m), which is considered to be the judgment result of the final judge effect, is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and then As shown in 29(β), the swing fluctuation display of the combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 3” is temporarily started.

However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(γ), a warning sign is displayed when the revival effect is started, and the revival effect is executed from FIG. 29(m) to FIG. The revival effect here is the same effect as the final judge effect shown in FIG. 22(m) to FIG. 22(p), and in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the family crest actor 247 and the pair of united actors 248. Appears.

When the revival effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 29(r), the swing fluctuation display of the combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” is immediately started, and as shown in FIG. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown, the combination of "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" for a big hit is confirmed and displayed as it is.

In the example described above, the display of the duel result displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 of FIG. 29(α), which was considered to be the judgment result of the final judge effect, was a false display. Further, neither the chance button 136 which is the operation means A nor the transmissive part 191 which is the operation means B vibrates, and the display of the duel result (display of the judgment result of the final judge effect) is displayed whether it is true or false. If it is decided that a big hit will occur at the timing of display or at a subsequent timing, if the chance button 136 or/and the transparent portion 191 vibrate, it becomes a big hit for advanced players. It may be possible to convey that it is confirmed, and the interest in the game may improve. That is, the chance button 136 and/or the vibration of the transmission part 191 may be used to notify the judge result (true result) of the final judge effect.

In this example as well, there was a scene (FIG. 28(j) to FIG. 28(l)) in which the transparent portion 191 was operated. However, instead of the transparent portion 191, other chance buttons 137 described later, etc. You may make it operate an operation means.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of the third effect in stages. The figure numbers of the alphabets written in parentheses in FIG. 30 correspond to the figure numbers of the alphabets written in parentheses in FIG. 14 and the like.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 30C, the reach effect has been started, and in this example as well, when the reach effect is started, an effect involving an operation that is a kind of button effect is started. The effect involving the operation here is also a kind of judge effect, and is a notice effect for judging whether or not the super reach will be developed. In FIG. 30(d), as the effect involving the operation, the transparent portion 191 which is the operation means B is rotated from the initial position to the forward inclined position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the transparent portion 191X of the operation promotion notification. 'Is displayed. The transparent portion display 191X′ shown in FIG. 7D is a display having the same function, although it is slightly different from the transparent portion display 191X described above. The chance button 136, which is the operation means A, does not vibrate and remains off at the initial position.

As shown in FIG. 30(e), the transparent portion 191 is pushed in during the operation valid period of the transparent portion 191, and in FIG. 30(f), the family crest actor 247 is on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208. It is falling. Further, in contrast to the background image having no pattern in FIG. 14(f) and the like, the effect display e3 with a shadow is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 30(f). A part of the effect display e3 is hidden by the family crest monument 247. Again, the fall of the family crest monument 247 is a manifestation of the judgment result of developing into super-reach, and then develops into super-reach. The effect of FIG. 30(f) described above corresponds to an example of the third effect, and is a notice effect that is started according to the operation of the transmissive unit 191.

In this example as well, there was a scene (FIG. 30(d) to FIG. 30(e)) where the transparent portion 191 was operated. However, instead of the transparent portion 191, other second chance buttons 137, which will be described later, etc. You may make it operate an operation means.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice effect that is started in response to the operation of the transmissive unit 191. The figure numbers of the alphabets written in brackets in FIG. 31 correspond to the figure numbers of the alphabets written in brackets in FIG.

The example shown in FIG. 31 is also an effect that is executed only after passing through a certain effect (the effects in FIGS. 21D to 21F). The judge effect of whether or not to develop into the super reach is ended in FIG. 31(g), and the super reach effect is started from the same figure (h'). This super reach effect is different from the strong SP reach effect and the weak SP reach effect described above, and is the effect selected by the effect lottery. However, the remaining period meter display 191c of the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification remains at 1/2 or more of the transparent portion 191 that has been rotated to the forward tilt position shown in FIGS. 21(j) to 21(k). The final judge effect shown in FIG. 23 is executed when operated at a certain timing, and the final judge effect shown in FIG. 31 is executed when operated at a timing when less than 1/2 remains. Good. That is, even if one of the final judge effect shown in FIG. 23 and the final judge effect shown in FIG. 31 is configured to be started in accordance with the operation of the transmission unit 191 that is the operation means B. Good.

A background image in which the main character is chasing a bad merchant is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 of FIG. 31(h′), and a flashing effect display e2 is displayed in FIG. 31(i′). R. Even when the display of the effect display e2 is started, the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31(j′), the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B is rotated from the initial position to the forward tilt position, and the effect display e2 is displayed at the timing of FIG. 31(k′). Instead, the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed. FIG. 31(l') is within the operation valid period, and the transmissive portion 191 is pushed to the initial position.

The final judge effect corresponding to an example of the third effect is started in response to the pushing operation of the transmissive unit 191, and in FIG. 31(m′), a townscape of a castle town different from the background image shown in FIG. 22(m). 22(m), the family crest accessory 247 is falling on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208 as is the case with FIG. 22(m). Next, as shown in FIG. 31(n′), in front of the background image of the townscape of the castle town, the family crest actor 247 is sandwiched by the pair of united actors 248 that have advanced from the left and right, and the pair of united actors 248 and Family coat emblem 247 is united. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 31(o′), the pair of coalesced auditors 248 returns to the initial position, and the family crest auditors 247 remains in front of the background image of the townscape of the castle town. As shown in (p'), the family crest part 247 returns to the initial position in front of the decorative pattern display device 208 in which the background image of the townscape of the castle town is displayed, and there is no obstruction of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The judge result of the final judge effect is displayed in the closed state. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31(q') displays a scene in which the lord has caught a bad merchant, and it is decided that the judge result here is a big hit. During the execution period of the final judge effect shown in FIGS. 31(m') to (q'), which corresponds to an example of the third effect, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and remains off at the initial position. .. The final judge effects shown in FIGS. 31(m')-(q') are shown in FIGS. 23(m)-(q), 24(m)-(q), and 25(m). -(Q) of the same figure, FIG.26(m)-Unlike the aspect of the final judgment production shown in (q) of the same figure, these final judgment productions are not performed simultaneously. Further, unlike the mode of the judge effect shown in FIG. 17(m) or FIG. 18(m), it is not executed simultaneously with this judge effect.

In addition, in FIGS. 31(m') to 31(q'), the chance button 136 that remains off at the initial position is operated, but the operation here is not accepted, and the chance button 136 here is , It's not a so-called back button. The operation means different from the chance button 136 (for example, a second chance button 137 described later) may be a so-called back button.

In this example as well, there was a scene (FIG. 31(j′) to FIG. 31(l′)) in which the transparent part 191 was operated. However, instead of the transparent part 191, a second chance button 137 or the like described later is displayed. Other operating means may be operated.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example different from the examples described so far. In FIG. 32, different examples are shown on the left side and the right side, respectively.

First, the example on the left side of FIG. 32 will be described. The example shown on the left side is also an effect that is executed only after passing through a certain effect (the effects in FIGS. 21D to 21J). In this example, an LED lamp 139 is provided near the chance button 136. The LED lamp 139 is a light emitting means different from the chance button lamp 138.

In FIG. 32(a), as in FIG. 24(k) and the like, a transparent portion display 191X for operation promotion notification is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the transparent portion 191 which is the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position. It is moving. Further, in FIG. 32A, the chance button 136 which is the operation means A does not vibrate and remains off at the initial position, but the chance button 136 is operated. Even if the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and the chance button lamp 138 does not light or blink, but the LED lamp 139 lights or blinks. Further, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the final judge effect is not executed.

In FIG. 32A, the final judge effect is started in response to the pushing operation of the transmissive portion 191, the family crest actor 247 is falling on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown. The image changes. The chance button 136, which is the operation means A, remains off at the initial position without vibrating until just before the push-in operation of the transmissive part 191 is performed, but after the push-in operation of the transmissive part 191 is performed, When the chance button 136 is operated, it starts to vibrate. The chance button 136 may continuously vibrate during the execution period of the final judge effect, or may vibrate only while being pressed during the execution period of the final judge effect. Further, the vibration of the chance button 136 may end at the same time as the end of the final judge effect, or may end before the end of the final judge effect. Even when the chance button 136 starts vibrating, the chance button lamp 138 is still off. On the other hand, when the chance button 136 is operated, the LED lamp 139 also lights up or blinks here. The lighting or blinking of the LED lamp 139 may be continued from FIG. 32(A).

In FIG. 32C, the final judge effect is finished, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the shake fluctuation display. Even if the chance button lamp 138 is operated after the final judge effect is finished, the chance button lamp 138 does not vibrate. However, here again, the LED lamp 139 is lit or blinking. The lighting or blinking of the LED lamp 139 may be continued from FIG. 32(a).

In this example as well, there was a scene (FIG. 32A) in which the transparent portion 191 was operated, but instead of the transparent portion 191, other operation means such as a second chance button 137 described later is operated. You can

Next, the example on the right side of FIG. 32 will be described. In the example shown on the right side, as shown in FIG. 32(A), a button image 136a3 simulating the chance button 136 lit in red and vibrating is included instead of the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification. The initial position display 136X' is displayed. In addition, the real chance button 136 also lights up in red and vibrates. Even if the button image 136a that imitates the chance button 136 that is not vibrating is displayed, the actual chance button 136 may be vibrating.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example different from the example described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 33, four examples are shown on the left side, and one example is also shown on the right side. The example shown in the upper two on the left side (the example of FIG. 33(a) and the example shown in FIG. 33(A)) also passes through a certain effect (effects of FIGS. 21(d) to 21(g)). It is a production that can only be executed from the beginning.

First, in FIG. 33(a) which is the first example, the transparent portion 191 which is the operation means B is located at the initial position, but the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the background image of the duel scene, and the lower left corner. A transparent portion rotation image 191a simulating the pachinko machine 100 in which the transparent portion 191 has rotated forward is displayed on the screen. Further, a character display indicating that the glass button indicating the transparent portion 191 is on standby is also displayed. The transparent portion rotation image 191a and the displayed characters on standby become a notice display that the transparent portion 191 which is a glass button will be rotated to the forward tilt position thereafter. When this notice is displayed, thereafter, the transparent portion 191 which is a glass button is always rotated to the forward tilt position.

In FIG. 33(A), which is the second example, the background image of the duel scene is displayed as in FIG. 33(a), and the remaining period display by digital display is made at the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208. Here, it is displayed that the remaining period is 19.89 seconds. This remaining period display is also a notice display that the transmissive portion 191 is rotated to the forward inclined position. When the remaining period indicated by the remaining period display reaches 0.00 seconds, the transmissive portion 191 which is a glass button is moved to the forward inclined position. Be sure to rotate up to.

In FIG. 33A, which is the third example, the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to the first display means, and the second display means 209 different from the first display means is also provided. The second display unit 209 is a liquid crystal display device that has a smaller display screen than the decorative symbol display device 208, which is the first display unit, and is movable in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the second display means 209 is a position lower than the decorative pattern display device 208, but can be raised from the initial position. When the transparent part 191 which is the operation means B is operated in the button effect such as the final judge effect, the movable character effect such as the family crest effect object 247 or the pair of combined effect objects 248 is operated and the second display means 209 is moved to the initial position. The second display means 209 at least partially overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208. The second display means 209 may entirely overlap a part of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may only partially overlap a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. The chance button 136, which is the operation means A, may vibrate, or the transmission part 191 may vibrate, while the second display means 209 is operating or after the operation is completed. Alternatively, the second display unit 209 may be a touch panel and may correspond to an example of a third operation unit. In this case, the second display unit 209 is a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. You may vibrate in the overlapped state.

FIG. 33A, which is the fourth example, is also an example including the same liquid crystal display device as the second display unit 209 shown in FIG. The second display means 209 shown in FIG. 33A can display the stock of button images B, and six button images B are displayed here. One button image B represents that one button effect is executed, and in the example shown in FIG. 33A, the final judge effect is performed with the button effect corresponding to the third button image B, Button effects corresponding to the remaining three button images B are executed during the big hit game. The three button effects during the big hit game may be, for example, three times of promotion effects of the number of big hit rounds. Further, as the button effect corresponding to the six button images B, the button operation may be prompted for each of the six cut-in effects.

The second display unit 209 displays a hold icon instead of the button image B, changes the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the button image B, and operates the button to change the display mode of the button image B to the reliability of the prefetch notice. The display mode may be changed according to the degree. Also in this case, the operation means that receives the button operation (for example, the chance button 136 or the transparent portion 191) may be vibrated.

In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 33, an effect involving a long press operation of the chance button 136 is executed. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(α), a button image 136a4 imitating the chance button 136 in the off state, and an arrow display 136b as a promotion display for prompting a long press operation of the chance button 136. Also, the three characters, that is, the character display "store the meter by long pressing" and the remaining period meter display 136c that indicates the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a4, 136b, 136c and the character display of "store meter by long press" are collectively referred to as a long press display 136L of operation promotion notification. The long press display 136L may be provided even if it does not include all of the three images 136a4, 136b, 136c and the character display "Store meter by long press". For example, the long press display 136L that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c may be used. In addition, a level display L1 is also displayed on the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. The level display L1 is a display that increases in level according to the long press time of the chance button 136, and the level display L1 shown in FIG. 33(α) is 0 level.

After that, the chance button 136 is operated, the level display L1 reaches the full tank level before the remaining period of the operation valid period runs out, and the button effect is started in response to the level display L1 reaching the full tank level, Here, the transparent portion 191 which is the operating means B, not shown, is rotated to the forward inclined position, and the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 33(β). It is displayed. The operation of the chance button 136 is originally required to be a long-press operation, but here, even if the operation is to repeatedly press a short period of time that cannot be said to be a long press (single press), it is considered to be a long-press operation. Even if it is a so-called continuous hitting operation in which pressing or pressing for a short period of time is repeated, it is treated as a long pressing operation. In addition, even when the continuous hitting operation is required, the long pressing operation or the single pressing operation may be treated as the continuous hitting operation (the same applies to the following examples). Then, although not shown, when the transparent portion 191 is pushed in during the operation valid period, the judge effect is started.

Next, an effect involving so-called pseudo-relation will be described. The production involving the pseudo-relation is also executed when “execution” is won by the executability lottery in the first sub-control unit 400. The decorative symbols are variably displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the symbol variable display of the special symbols, but in the pseudo continuous production, with respect to the symbol variable display of one special symbol (that is, one start winning). , The temporary display of the variable display of the decorative symbols in some or all of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the decorative symbol display device 208 (the update of the decorative symbols is stopped but not confirmed, and is shaken). After that, all the decorative symbols are displayed again and again, and re-variation display is performed one or more times. For example, in the middle symbol display area 208b, in the state where the decoration symbol is updated (variable display), the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and then again. The variable display may be started, or the variable display of the decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in all the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and then the variable display may be started again. When the temporary stop is performed, a design or a pattern other than the decorative design may be temporarily stopped. In this pseudo continuous production, how many times the re-variation display is executed for the symbol variation display of one special figure (that is, one start winning) is also determined by the lottery in the first sub-control unit 400. To be done. The pseudo-relational effect may be a jackpot notice effect of the fluctuation (so-called normal notice effect) that announces that it will be a big hit in the symbol fluctuation display of the special map that is currently being performed, or is a currently performed special feature. It may be a reach announcement effect that gives advance notice of the development of super reach in the symbol variable display. Alternatively, it may be a pre-reading notice effect that gives a notice that a big hit will occur in the symbol variation display of the special symbol that is started after the symbol variation display of the currently performed special symbol. In any of the notice effects, as the number of times of the re-variation display increases, the expectation (reliability of notice) increases and the effect becomes hot. In addition, when the re-variation display is performed the first number of times (for example, four times), the big hit confirmation or the super reach determination may be performed. Further, in the case of the pre-reading notice production, a step-up notice may be incorporated in which the number of re-variation display increases as it approaches the start of the symbol variation table of the special figure to be noticed. For example, in the case where the symbol variation table of the special figure after three times is to be the subject of advance notice, the re-variation display is performed once in the pseudo continuous production in the symbol variation table of the first special figure, and the second special figure. The re-variation display is performed twice in the pseudo continuous production in the symbol variation table, and the re-variation display is performed three times in the pseudo continuous production in the symbol variation table in the third special drawing, In the pseudo continuous production in the symbol variation table, re-variation display is performed four times.

In the pseudo continuous production, the first pseudo continuous notification is started at the same time as the temporary stop. The first pseudo-relational notification here is to notify that the pseudo-reproduction is started or that the pseudo-reproduction is continued. For example, any one or a plurality of symbols or all symbols (hereinafter, referred to as “pseudo continuous symbols”) in the combination of symbols temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display device 208 correspond to an example of the first pseudo continuous notification. To do. That is, the pseudo-relational pattern is a decorative pattern (for example, “decoration 7”) shown in FIG. 5B, or a combination of decorative patterns (for example, “decoration 2”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 6” or , A so-called chance eye, or another pattern or pattern. Further, the pseudo continuous symbol may be a symbol that is finally stopped (third stop) in the temporary stop, may be a medium symbol, or may be a combination of a left symbol and a right symbol. Note that only one of the plurality of types of pseudo-relational patterns listed here may be applied, the plurality of types may be applied, or all types may be applied. May be. Further, the first pseudo-repeated notification may be character display, lamp lighting, or sound output, which is started at the same time as the temporary stop. Only one of the plurality of types of examples of the first pseudo-serial notification listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. You may.
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect involving the pseudo-relation.

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b which continues the variable display in the reach state shown in FIG. 34(a), as shown in FIG. 34(b). At the same time, the transmissive portion 191 that is the operation means B is rotated to the forward tilt position. At this stage, the chance button 136, which is the operating means A, remains off at the initial position.

FIG. 34C is within the operation valid period, and the transmissive portion 191 is pushed to the initial position. Then, in response to the operation of the transparent portion 191, the transparent portion display 191X disappears as shown in FIG. 34(d), and this time, the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, The chance button lamp 138 starts to light red, and the chance button 136 starts to vibrate at the initial position. In FIG. 34(d), the pseudo continuous effect is started, and a part of the pseudo continuous symbol N is also displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the initial position display 136X which is started to be displayed at the timing of FIG. 34(d) is displayed so as to overlap the pseudo continuous symbol N which is also started to be displayed at the timing of FIG. 34(d). As a result, a part of the pseudo continuous symbol N is displayed. The chance button 136 continues to vibrate during the operation valid period, and when the chance button 136 is pressed as shown in FIG. 34(e), the initial position display 136X disappears, and the pseudo continuous symbol N remains and the temporary stop occurs. There are cases where it is carried out and cases where the pseudo continuous symbol N disappears together with the initial position display 136X and temporary stop is not carried out. That is, the effects of FIGS. 34D to 34F are judgment effects of whether or not the temporary stop is executed. In FIG. 34(f), the pseudo continuous symbol N remains and the first temporary stop is performed. Both the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 34(f) and the fourth symbol 2081 of special figure 1 are also displayed during change, and the change icon c is still displayed.

In FIG. 34(g), the pseudo-relational symbol N disappears, and the update (revariation display) of the decorative symbol is started in all of the three symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, the symbol variation display of the special figure is still continuing, and the first special figure display device 212 and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 are also changing display, and the change icon c is still displayed. However, the start of the re-variation display here seems as if the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure was performed. Further, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 34(g) is displayed with the character "x2". Here, the re-variation display is the first time, but when viewed as the symbol variation display of the special figure, it looks like the symbol variation display of the second special figure due to the start of the pseudo-relational effect. For the purpose of representing, the character display of “×2” is made. That is, the character display of “×2” is a notification indicating the number of times related to the start of the pseudo continuous effect. The character display of “×2” corresponds to an example of the second pseudo-serial notification.

In FIG. 34(i), the symbol variable display in which the first temporary stop is performed in FIG. 34(f) continues, and the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed again, and the transparent portion 191 is displayed. When the transparent portion 191 is rotated to the forward inclined position and the transparent portion 191 is pushed to the initial position, the second temporary stop judge effect is started.

In this example as well, there were scenes (FIGS. 34B to 34C) in which the transparent portion 191 was operated. However, instead of the transparent portion 191, other chance buttons 137, which will be described later, etc. You may make it operate an operation means.
FIG. 35: is a figure which shows the example of the other production which entwined the pseudo-relation in steps.

In the example in FIG. 35, a transparent portion display 191X for operation promotion notification is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b that continues variable display in the reach state shown in FIG. 35(a), as shown in FIG. 35(b). At the same time, the transmissive portion 191 that is the operation means B is rotated to the forward tilt position. In addition, the transparent portion display 191X, which is started to be displayed at the timing of FIG. 35(b), is overlapped with the gray provisional pseudo continuous symbol N′ which is similarly started to be displayed at the timing of FIG. 35(b). As a result, in FIG. 35B, a part of the gray provisional pseudo continuous symbol N′ is also displayed.

FIG. 35C is within the operation valid period, and when the transparent portion 191 is pushed to the initial position, the judge effect is started according to the operation of the transparent portion 191. In the judgment effect here, when the transparent part 191 is operated, the transparent part display 191X disappears, and the provisional stop is performed by changing the gray temporary pseudo continuous pattern N′ to the white pseudo continuous pattern N. Even if the transparent portion display 191X disappears, the temporary pseudo continuous symbol N'does not change to the pseudo continuous symbol N, and even the temporary pseudo continuous symbol N'may disappear, and temporary stop may not be performed. In FIG.35(d), it changes into the white pseudo continuous symbol N, and the first temporary stop is performed. The change from the temporary pseudo continuous symbol N′ to the pseudo continuous symbol N is a change in the display mode, but it may be changed to a completely different symbol. It should be noted that both the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 35(d) and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 are displayed during change, and the change icon c remains displayed.

In this example, even if the transmissive unit 191 is operated, that is, the result of the judgment effect of FIG. 35D is displayed, the chance button 136 which is the operation means A does not vibrate and is turned off at the initial position. However, depending on the operation of the transmissive portion 191, the chance button 136 may start vibrating at the initial position, may start vibrating while moving forward, or start moving forward. Then, it may vibrate after reaching the advance position. Also, the chance button lamp 138 may be lit or blinking.

In this example also, there was a scene (FIGS. 35(b) to 35(c)) in which the transparent portion 191 was operated. However, instead of the transparent portion 191, another chance button 137 described later or the like is displayed. You may make it operate an operation means.

35(b') to FIG. 35(d') are modifications of FIGS. 35(b) to 35(d). FIG. 35(b′) and FIG. 35(c′) show a stirrup production in which the temporary stop has not yet started and the pseudo continuous production may start. That is, the pseudo continuous symbol N is displayed above the temporary stop position, and the pseudo continuous symbol N is not displayed at the temporary stop position. As shown in FIG. 35(b'), the chance button 136 which is the operation means A is vibrating, and the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 35(c'). The chance button 136 may start vibrating before the time shown in FIG. 35(b'). In response to the operation of the chance button 136, the pseudo continuous symbol N is displayed at the temporary stop position as shown in FIG. 35(d'), and the temporary stop is performed. On the contrary, the pseudo continuous symbol N may disappear according to the operation of the chance button 136, and in this case, the pseudo continuous effect is not started. As described above, the effect shown in FIGS. 35(b') to 35(d') in which the chance button 136 which is the operation means A is entwined is a type of judge effect, and corresponds to an example of the second effect.

35(b″) to FIG. 35(d″) are modified examples of FIG. 35(b′) to FIG. 35(d′). In FIG. 35(b′) and FIG. 35(c′), the chance button 136 which is the operating means A is vibrating, but in FIG. 35(b″) to FIG. 35(d″), the chance button 136 is shown. Does not vibrate, and the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B is rotated to the forward tilt position. Further, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a transparent portion display 191X for operation promotion notification. Further, also in FIGS. 35(b'') to 35(d''), as in the case of FIGS. 35(b') and 35(c'), a stirrup production in which the pseudo continuous production may be started is executed. ing. Then, the transmissive part 191 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. In response to the pushing operation of the transparent portion 191, the second pseudo continuous symbol N2 is displayed at the temporary stop position as shown in FIG. 35(d″), and the temporary stop is performed. The second pseudo continuous symbol N2 is a symbol different from the pseudo continuous symbol N. On the contrary, also here, the pseudo continuous symbol N may disappear according to the pushing operation of the transmissive part 191, and in this case, the pseudo continuous effect is not started. In this example as well, when the judge effect is being executed and the pseudo continuous effect is started, if the operation means (transparent part 191) different from the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136 is temporarily operated according to the operation. A pseudo continuous symbol (second pseudo continuous symbol N2) different from the stopped pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped.

The description of the specific example of the effect up to now has been the example in the symbol variable display of the special figure, but the same applies to cases other than the symbol variable display of the special figure.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing stepwise an example in which the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed from the swing fluctuation display, and an effect involving the operation means is executed during the big hit game, and FIG. 37 is a continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages.

In FIG. 36(a), the swing fluctuation display of the combination of "decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" without any probability change (normal big hit) is performed in the central area of the background screen where the lords are gathering. ing. In this example, the promotion effect is started during the execution of the shake fluctuation display. The promotion effect here is a type of jackpot promotion effect (probabilistic change promotion effect), and as shown in FIG. 36(b), the shaking fluctuation display is temporarily reduced to the upper left on the background screen where the lords are gathering. At the same time, the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the central area, and the chance button lamp 138 starts to light in red at the initial position. The probability variation promotion effect here is a kind of button effect and a kind of judge effect.

FIG. 36C is within the operation valid period, and when the chance button 136 is operated, the initial position display 136X disappears in response to the operation, and the shake fluctuation display of the combination of decorative symbols is displayed again. In this example, the probability variation promotion has failed, and as shown in FIG. 36(d), there is no probability variation big hit (normal big hit) of "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4" which is a combination of even decorative patterns. The shaking fluctuation display of the combination of is displayed. On the other hand, when the probability change promotion is successful, the shaking fluctuation display of odd-numbered combinations of decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is displayed again. It However, whether or not it is a jackpot with a probability variation is determined by the winning/winning judgment (lottery) at the time of winning, and whether the probability variation promotion is successful or unsuccessful here depends on the determination of the winning/winning determination (lottery) at the time of winning. The same applies to the probability variation promotion effect during the big hit game described below. After that, the combination of the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed in the swing fluctuation display in FIG. 36D is confirmed and displayed (see FIG. 36E).

In the same figure (f) following FIG. 36 (e), the big hit start effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the big hit game is started. In the big hit game, it is suggested that the player strikes to the right, and the hitting suggestion notification 110X is displayed on the upper right of the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, the number of consecutive big hits is displayed at the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208, and is displayed as “first time” on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 36(g). Further, the probability variation promotion effect is restarted at the timing of FIG. 36(g). The probability change promotion effect here is also a type of button effect and a type of judge effect. In FIG. 36(h), the chance button lamp 138 starts to light in red at the initial position and prompts the depression. Further, in the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 which has begun to light in red, an arrow display 136b and a “continuous stroke” as a promotion display for prompting a continuous hit operation of the chance button 136. The character display of "white" and the remaining period meter display 136c showing the remaining period of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid are displayed in one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a, 136b, 136c and the character display of "repeated hitting" are collectively referred to as an operation promotion notification consecutive hitting display 136R. It should be noted that the above-mentioned three images 136a, 136b, 136c and the character display of "repeatedly strike" may not be included in all, and may be the consecutively-stripped display 136R. For example, it may be a continuous hit display 136R that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c.

In addition, a level display L2 is also displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. This level display L2 is a display that increases in level according to the number of consecutive hits, and the level display L2 shown in FIG. 36(h) is a 0 level.

After that, the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the remaining period of the operation valid period disappears in FIG. 36(i). In the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 36(i), the chance button lamp 138 is extinguished, and the level display L2 on the decorative symbol display device 208 has reached 3 levels, but has not reached the MAX level, and FIG. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in (j) subsequent to (i), the continuous hitting display 136R and the level display L2 disappear, and the character display "defense failure", which indicates failure of the probability change promotion, is displayed.

Furthermore, in the big hit game started in FIG. 36(f), as shown in FIG. 37(k) following FIG. 36(j), the decorative pattern display device 208 has a transparent portion display 191X for operation promotion notification. In addition to being displayed, the character display “Push in to survive” is also made, and the transparent portion 191 which is the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position, and the button effect is started here as well. This button effect is an effect of judging whether or not the specific winning opening V (for example, V winning opening) can be aimed at in a specific round, that is, whether or not the specific winning opening V is in the winning enabled state. The chance button 136, which is the operating means A, remains off at the initial position.

FIG. 37(l) is within the operation valid period of the transmissive part 191 and the transmissive part 191 is pushed to the initial position. In response to the pushing operation of the transmissive portion 191, the chance button 136, which is the operating means A, starts vibrating at the initial position. The chance button lamp 138 may be lit or blinking in red, or may remain off. Further, although the chance button 136 starts the vibration, the vibration may not start in some cases.

Furthermore, the production movable body (movable accessory) operates according to the pushing operation of the transmissive portion 191. That is, the family crest accessory 247 falls on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208, then the pair of coalesced auditors 248 advances from the left and right, and as shown in FIG. It is sandwiched by the accessory 248, and the pair of united accessory 248 and the family crest agent 247 are united.

Next, the family crest actor 247 and the pair of united actors 248 return to the initial positions, and the result of the judge effect is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 37(n), and the specific winning opening V is set in the specific round. The character display "Successful Survival" indicating that the player is ready to win a prize is displayed. Although the chance button 136 does not vibrate at the timing shown in FIG. 37(m), it may vibrate at this timing. Further, a star mark with the letters GET is also displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. 37(n) subsequent to FIG. 37(n) suggests that the next round is a specific round and aims at a specific winning opening V (for example, V winning opening). Characters are displayed. In FIG. 37(q), the specific round is started, the display of the decorative pattern display device 208 is changed to the character display of “V aim”, and the game ball passes through the specific winning opening V (for example, V winning opening). Then, as shown in the figure (q), the letter "V" is displayed large on the decorative symbol display device 208, the specific winning opening V is won, and the privilege (for example, the state shifts to the probability change state after the jackpot game is over). Is notified. Then, the effect of ending the big hit game is executed (see FIG. 37(r)), and the big hit game ends.

In this example as well, there was a scene (FIG. 37(k) to FIG. 37(l)) in which the transparent portion 191 was operated, but instead of the transparent portion 191, other chance buttons 137, etc., which will be described later, are displayed. You may make it operate an operation means.
In the above description,

"First operating means [for example, transparent portion 191, cross key 181a, OK button 181b, cancel button 181c, button B (second chance button 137), etc.] and second operating means [for example, chance button 136] Etc.], and is configured to be able to execute a plurality of types of effects, and one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect and the first effect. The effect is a notice effect [for example, FIG. 23(m) to FIG. 23(q), FIG. 24(m) to FIG. 24(q), FIG. 25(m) to FIG. 26(m), and FIG. The final judge effect shown in (q) of the same drawing] is configured such that the first effect is started in response to an operation of the first operation means. In the first effect, The second operating means is configured to vibrate [for example, FIG. 23(m) to FIG. 23(p), FIG. 24(m) to FIG. 25(p), and FIG. 25(m) to FIG. r1), FIG. 26(m) to FIG. 26(r2), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ] Was explained.

Whether it is the first operation means or the second operation means, it may be a button button such as a chance button, another chance button, a cross key, a glass button, or a lever, a touch sensor, or a touch panel. Good. That is, as long as the first operating means and the second operating means are different operating means, these buttons, keys, levers and the like may be combined appropriately. The operation means includes not only those which are operated by direct contact but also those which can be operated by holding their hands even if they cannot be directly contacted.

Further, the first operation means is a chance button (for example, chance button 136), another chance button (for example, button B (second chance button 137)), cross key (for example, cross key 181a), transparent. It may be any one kind selected from a button-like part such as the part 191 and the like, a lever, a touch sensor, a touch panel, or only one kind is applied and the other ones are not. It may be applied. For example, the chance button (for example, the chance button 136) may be applied to the first operation means, and the remaining other chance buttons and the cross key may not be applied.

Furthermore, the first operating means and the second operating means may be appropriately combined with these buttons, keys, levers, etc. as long as they are different operating means. Note that the operation means includes not only those which can be directly contacted but also those which cannot be directly contacted but can be operated by holding a hand or the like (for example, a non-contact type). Further, even if each operation means has the same function (for example, vibration), the mode may be different depending on the operation means, such as the strength of vibration, the vibration time, the stroke and the pitch. For example, the first operating means may be capable of performing the vibration according to the first aspect, and the second operating means may be capable of performing the vibration according to the second aspect.

The notice effect may be one of a plurality of notice effects. The notice here may be a big hit notice, a development notice for super reach, a pseudo-start notice, or a pseudo-repetition count notice. .. Alternatively, one or more of the plurality of types of advance notice effects may be applied and the other may not be applied. Furthermore, only one of the plurality of types of advance notice effects may be applied, and all other notice effects may not be applied.

Further, the execution period of the notice effect, which is the first effect, may be from the start of the display of the image displayed for the first time after the button operation to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (fluctuation fluctuation), or the determination of the decorative pattern. It may be up to the display. Alternatively, the moving means may start moving from the first position to the second position and then return to the first position again, or may start moving to the first position. Good. Further, any one of the plurality of types of execution periods enumerated here may be used, only a plurality of types of execution periods may be applied, or all types of execution periods may be applied. You may. Further, specifically, in the case where the first effect is the final judge effect, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (fluctuation fluctuation) in a combination of the jackpot symbol aspect from the start of the notification or the like that is first performed after the button operation. Up to, or until the end after the button operation (especially the result in the case of success) is displayed may be the execution period of the first effect.

In addition, when the first effect is a final judge effect or the like, the second operation means vibrates, for example, in a state where the movable means is located at the second position (for example, the final reaching position). It may be vibrated in a state in which an effect display or the like executed in accordance with the movement of the movable means is displayed, or the movable means is in the second position and the effect is displayed. It may vibrate while the image is displayed. Further, only one of the plurality of types of examples listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied.

Furthermore, "the first effect is started in response to the operation of the first operation means" may mean that the first effect is started only in response to the operation of the first operation means. However, the first effect may be started in response to the operation of the first operation means and the satisfaction of other conditions (operation of other operation means, etc.). Further, the first effect may be started only in response to the operation of the first operation means, or even if the first operation means is not operated, if other conditions are satisfied, The first effect may be started. For example, after a certain period of time has passed, even if the first operation unit is not operated, the first effect may be started, or conversely, if there is no operation of the first operation unit, a certain period of time The first effect may not be started even after a lapse of time.

Further, the first effect may be configured to be able to be started in response to an operation of the first operation means. In this case, it may be started without fail, may not be started, may be started other than the operation of the first operation means, or by only the operation of the first operation means. It may be started.

Further, the first effect may be executed when the first operation means is operated in the first state. The first state here may be a state in which a notification prompting the user to operate the first operation unit is being issued, or conversely, a state in which such notification is not being performed. Alternatively, the first effect may be executed when the first condition is satisfied. The establishment of the first condition here includes the operation of the first operation means. Furthermore, "in the first effect" may or may not extend over the first effect. In addition, "in the first effect, the second operation means vibrates" includes that the vibration is arbitrarily started, and that the vibration is started when a condition is satisfied.

Further, the second operation means may be one that does not vibrate unless continuously operated, or may vibrate continuously without being pressed, and is not continuous but intermittent. It may vibrate mechanically. Further, only one of the plurality of types of examples listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied.

Furthermore, even after the completion of the first effect, the second operating means may be capable of vibrating, and in this case, the second operating means may or may not necessarily vibrate. There may be a case where it is not performed, a process other than the vibration may be executed, or only the vibration may be executed.

Further, it may be one that continuously vibrates from the first effect, or one that is temporarily stopped and then restarted. Alternatively, on the contrary, the second operation means may not vibrate after the first effect is finished.

Further, when the first effect can be divided into a plurality of effects, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate during execution of at least one effect of the plurality of effects. Good, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate during execution of an effect executed at intervals among the plurality of effects, and in all of the plurality of effects the first operation The second operating means may be configured to vibrate.

Furthermore, the second operating means may be configured to vibrate during execution of the first effect. Further, "the second operation means is configured to vibrate during the execution of the first effect" means that the vibration in the second operation means is related to the first effect. It may be configured to be performed regardless of whether or not to perform.
Also,

“One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect, and the second effect is a notice effect [for example, a judge effect shown in FIG. 17(m) or FIG. 18(m)]. The aspect of the second effect is different from the aspect of the first effect, and the operation of the second operation means [for example, shown in FIG. 16(l) or FIG. 18(l)]. The second effect is started in response to a pressing operation, etc., and the second operation means is configured to vibrate before the second effect is started. [For example, FIG. 16(j) to FIG. 16(k), FIG. 18(j) to FIG. 18(k), and the like]. ] Was also explained.

The "mode different from the first effect mode" may be a mode in which at least a part is different, or a mode in which all are different. For example, the movement of the first movable means is the same, but the other effect may be a mode in which the second movable means is also moved, or the movement of the first movable means is the same, but the effect is It may be a different mode.

Further, the second operation means may be configured to start the vibration after the start of the display of the image prompting the operation, or is configured to start the vibration after the start of the operation acceptance state. Good. Furthermore, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate at least before the second effect is started, and may be configured to vibrate simultaneously with the second effect. Alternatively, it may be configured to vibrate even after the end of the second effect.

Also, an effect (second effect) that is started in response to an operation of the second operation means is prepared, and the second effect is N (a plurality of) effects of a plurality of kinds of effects. The second operation means may vibrate before the second effect is started.

Further, all of the operations performed by the operation of the second operation means may correspond to the second effect, and may include, for example, liquid crystal display, LED lighting or blinking, and the like. However, the second effect may target only the effect executed by the liquid crystal display means.

Further, the vibration of the second operation means performed in the first effect continues until the predetermined vibration time elapses even if the second operation means is operated, and the vibration time elapses. Then, it may be ended, may be ended when the second operation means is operated, may be ended together when the first effect is ended, and the first effect is ended. Even if it continues, it may be continued until the stop display of the decorative design is performed (may be ended immediately before the stop display of the decorative design or at the same time as the stop display of the decorative design).

On the other hand, the vibration of the second operation means performed before the second effect is started may be terminated when the second operation means is operated, or the second effect is started. You may end at the same time as it is done. In these cases, even if the vibration of the second operation means is the same, the vibration end condition is used depending on whether the vibration is performed in the first effect or before the second effect is started. Will be different.

On the other hand, the vibration of the second operation means, which is performed before the second effect is started, continues until the predetermined vibration time elapses, even if the first operation means is operated. However, it may end when the vibration time elapses, or may continue even after the first effect ends and may continue until the stop display of the decorative design is performed (immediately before the stop display of the decorative design. Alternatively, it may end at the same time as the stop display of the decorative pattern). In these cases, the vibration end conditions are the same in the case of being performed in the first effect and in the case of being performed before the second effect is started.

In addition, “a second display means capable of displaying an image [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like] is provided, the first effect is an effect by displaying the image, and the second effect is the If the second operating means is operated while the second operating means is vibrating during the execution of the first effect, the second effect is not started. However, the gaming machine is characterized in that the first effect is continuously executed. ] Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, no effect may be newly started even if the second operating means is operated while the second operating means is vibrating during execution of the first effect. The second effect may not be started, but a seventh effect (for example, for outputting music from a speaker) different from the second effect may be started.

Further, the second display means may always display an image. Further, the second operation means may not vibrate before the start of the second effect. Further, the second effect may be an effect configured not to be executed simultaneously with the first effect. Further, the first effect may be an effect only by displaying the image, and the second effect may be an effect only by displaying the image.

In addition, "in the second effect, the second operation means is configured to vibrate [eg, FIG. 18 (m) etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

The second operation means may have been vibrating before the start of the second effect and may continuously vibrate in the second effect, or may be interrupted and then restarted. Alternatively, the mode of vibration (for example, vibration intensity, vibration time, stroke, pitch, etc.) may be different before and after the start of the second effect. More specifically, the vibration of the second operation means before the second effect is started may be executed during the acceptance state period of the second operation means.

Further, the game console is provided with a first operation means and a second operation means, is configured to be able to execute a plurality of types of effects, one of the plurality of types of effects is , A first effect, one of the plurality of kinds of effects is a second effect, the first effect is a notice effect, and the second effect is an notice effect. Yes, the first effect is configured to be started according to the operation of the first operating means, and in the first effect, the second operating means is configured to vibrate. And, in the second effect, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate.
Also,

“When the second operating means vibrates more than when the second operating means does not vibrate [for example, FIG. 14(j) to FIG. 14(l)] [for example, FIG. (L) or the like] is configured so that it is easier to shift to a state advantageous to the player [for example, a big hit game state or a probability change state after that], a gaming table. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "an advantageous state for the player" is a big hit (small hit) or a big hit of the lost game status, a probability change of a certainty change and a shortened time, a 15R big hit and a 4R big hit. The 15R jackpot (the jackpot with the larger number of rounds) may be in the game state, or the electric support 100 times and 100 times of 50 times may be given.

Further, "to make it easier to shift" may mean that the advantageous state is a big hit gaming state, and that the big hit gaming state is always entered. Further, the vibration of the second operation means in the first effect may be a big hit confirmation, or the second operation means may always vibrate in the first effect.

Further, a first display means [eg, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of executing a variable display of symbols is provided, and the second operation means is provided. The case where the second operation means vibrates [for example, FIG. 16(j) to FIG. 14(l)], rather than the case where no vibration occurs [for example, FIG. 14(j) to FIG. However, the result of the symbol variation display may be configured to be easily associated with a big hit, and further, may be configured to be easily associated with a big jackpot with probability variation.

In addition, "One of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect, and the third effect is a notice effect [for example, shown in FIGS. 31(m') to 31(q'). Judgment effect, etc.], and the aspect of the third effect is different from the aspect of the first effect, and the third effect is started according to the operation of the first operation means. In the third effect, the second operation means is configured not to vibrate [for example, FIG. 31(m′) to FIG. 31(q′)]. Characteristic game table. ] Was also explained.

The "mode different from the mode of the first effect" may be a mode in which at least a part is different, a mode in which all are different, or a mode in which only a part is different. May be. For example, the movement of the first movable means is the same, but the other effect may be a mode in which the second movable means is also moved, or the movement of the first movable means is the same, but the effect is It may be a different mode.

Further, the second operation means vibrates before the start of the third effect, does not vibrate during the third effect, and resumes the vibration when the third effect ends. It may be one.

Further, "the game machine is characterized in that the third effect is an effect configured not to be executed simultaneously with the first effect. ] Was also explained.

It should be noted that during a period in which one of the third effect and the first effect is being executed, the other effect may not be executed. Further, one of the first effect and the third effect may be started in response to an operation of the first operation unit.

In addition, “a plurality of types of notifications are configured to be executable, one of the plurality of types of notifications is a first notification, and the first notification is a notification of the first operation means. Notification for prompting operation [for example, FIG. 23(k) and FIG. 23(l), FIG. 24(k) and FIG. 24(l), FIG. 25(k) to FIG. 25(l2), FIG. 26(k) and FIG. 24 is a transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification shown in each of FIG. (l)], and the first effect is the first period [for example, the period of FIG. 23(k) to FIG. (K) to (l) period, FIG. 25(k) to (l2) period, FIG. 26(m) to (l) period, etc.]. A gaming machine, which is an effect started when the game is performed, and the first notification is configured to be performed in the first period. ] Was also explained. That is, the first period is a period during which the first notification is performed.

In addition, “the second operation means is at least a part of the period during which the first effect is executed [for example, the entire period in the examples of FIGS. 24 to 25 and 26, and FIG. In the example, it is a means configured to vibrate in a part of the period, etc. because it does not vibrate in the same figure (q)], the gaming table. ] Was also explained.

Further, the first operation means is a means [e.g., a cross key 181a] configured not to vibrate, and the second operation means is a means configured to vibrate [e.g., a chance button. 136]. ] Was also explained. The term "vibration" means a direct vibration caused by the operation means itself vibrating, and does not include an indirect vibration caused when another member vibrates indirectly. However, indirect vibration may be included in some cases.

Even in a state in which the first effect is not executed [for example, a state in which the pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 34(d) to FIG. 34(e) is being executed instead of the final judge effect], the second effect The operating means may be configured to vibrate, or may be configured to vibrate.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like shown in FIG. 1], the game table. ] Was also explained. Further, “the gaming table is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63]”. ] May be sufficient.
Next, the back button effect in which the start timing is changed by the operation will be described.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

FIG. 38A is a diagram conceptually showing the configuration of a pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. In the following description, components having the same names as those of the components described so far are designated by the same reference numerals. In addition, description of items that are the same as those described above may be omitted.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 38(A) has two chance buttons. Hereinafter, the chance button described above is referred to as button A or the first chance button 136, and the chance button different from the first chance button 136 is referred to as the button B or the second chance button 137. The button B (second chance button 137) is provided farther from the ball firing handle 134 than the button A (first chance button 136). That is, the button A (first chance button 136) is provided at a position LA away from the ball firing handle 134 by a straight line distance (shortest distance), while the button B (second chance button 137) is provided. Is provided at a position LB away from the ball firing handle 134 at a linear distance (shortest distance), and LA is longer than LB. From another perspective, the button B (second chance button 137) is provided at a position farther from the center position of the pachinko machine 100 in the left-right direction than the button A (second chance button 136). There is.

The positional relationship between button A (second chance button 136) and button B (second chance button 137) is not limited to the relationship described above. Similarly to the first chance button 136, the button B (second chance button 137) is also a kind of movable means, can vibrate, and can further advance (protrude). On the contrary, only the button B (the second chance button 137) may be not movable but may not be vibrated and may not be advanced (protruded). Further, the button B (second chance button 137) may or may not include a chance button lamp. Further, a plurality of chance buttons, such as a third chance button, and operation means different from the chance button may be further provided.

In each of the examples described up to FIG. 37, the button B (second chance button 137) illustrated in FIG. 38A can be applied instead of the transparent portion 191 described as an example of the operation unit B. Similarly, the operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 1 can be applied in place of the transmissive portion 191, but the operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 1 does not have a vibration function, so it is necessary to add a vibration function. There is.

The example shown on the right side of FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of button effects in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 38(A).

In FIG. 38(a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display the stop symbol of the loss (confirmed display), and the decorative symbol display device 208 is inconsistent. "Decorative 3"-"Decorative 4"-"Decorative 1" are displayed.

In FIG. 38(b), the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 212, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is shown in FIG. 38(c). Has started. When the reach effect is started, the operation shifts to an operation valid state in which the operation of button A (first chance button 136) is accepted as valid. However, a notification that the operation is in an effective state (for example, the opportunity button lamp 138 lights up or blinks in red) or an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the button A (first opportunity button 136) (for example, the initial position display 136X). ) Has not been performed, and the player does not know that the operation is valid. However, a person who knows from the information of the bachinko magazine or the like that the operation may be in the effective state when the reach effect is started, operates the button A (first chance button 136). Then, in response to the operation of the button A (first chance button 136), the cut-in notice image C by the character of the lord is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the button A (first chance button 136) is , Corresponds to a so-called back button.

Not only button A (first chance button 136) but also button B (second chance button 137) and transparent portion 191 are operated to display the cut-in notice image C of the lord's character. It may be done.
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of the fourth effect and the fifth effect.

In each drawing in FIG. 39, a button A (first chance button 136) and a button B (second chance button 137) are vertically arranged side by side on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208s. The actual positional relationship between the two is the positional relationship described with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 39( a ), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display (fixed display) a stopped stop symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a disparity. "Decorative 3"-"Decorative 4"-"Decorative 1" are displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39(a), four black circle hold icons, which are the hold displays of the special figure 1, are displayed, and no change icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e. ..

In FIG. 39(b), the variable display of special symbols is started on the first special symbol display device 212, and the variable display of decorative symbols is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the number of hold icons is decreased by one and three (hold icons h1 to h3) are displayed, and the variable icon c in the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 208e.

In FIG. 39(c), the reach effect is started. Here, the button effect is started in response to the start of the reach effect. Button B (second chance button 137) shown in FIG. 39( d) is starting to light up in red. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 39(d), a button image 137a imitating the button B (second chance button 137) which has begun to light in red, and the button B (second chance button 137). ) An arrow display 137b and a character display “PUSH” as a promotion display for prompting the operation (pressing), and a remaining period meter display 137c as a display regarding the operation valid period of the button B (second chance button 137). Are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 137a, 137b, 137c and the character display of "PUSH" are collectively referred to as an operation promotion notification button B display 137X.

In the example shown in FIG. 39, when the button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, the button B is operated at a relatively early timing (FIG. 39(e)). That is, the button B is operated at the timing when the remaining period meter display 137c of the button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about ⅕.

When the button B is operated, in response to the operation, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the cut-in notice image C of the lord's character instead of the button B display 137X (see FIG. 39(f)). ). When button B (second chance button 137) is operated, it returns to the state of being extinguished. The effect in which the cut-in notice image C is displayed according to the operation of the button B is the button effect, and corresponds to an example of the fifth effect. The display of the image C of the cut-in notice by the lord's character is the effect display displayed in the variable display of the decorative pattern. Further, the button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification corresponds to an example of the third notification, and the period during which the button B display 137X is displayed (the period of FIG. 39D to FIG. This corresponds to an example of the third period. It should be noted that the display of the image C of the cut-in notice by the lord's character (fifth effect) may be an effect that is not started unless the button B (second chance button 137) is operated, but the button B (first effect). Even if the second chance button 137) is not operated, when the period in which the button B display 137X is displayed, that is, the operation valid period of the button B has elapsed, the effect may be started when the time elapses, or after the time elapses. The effect may be started. Further, only one of the plurality of types of examples listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied.

Further, after the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord displayed by the button effect from the reach effect is displayed, the second period is started. That is, the second period is a period that is started in association with the operation of the button B (second chance button 137), and here, after the operation of the button B has been performed for a while (the time for one frame). Is started), and is started from FIG. 39(g). On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 39(g), the cut-in notice image C of the lord's character is still displayed, and the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is performed. The initial position display 136X of is not displayed. Further, the button A is in a state of being turned off at the initial position. However, the button A is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 39(g). In response to the operation of the button A here, the image G of the character "intense heat" is displayed so as to overlap the image C of the cut-in notice by the lord's character. The image G of the character “intense heat” is an image of a cut-in notice that it is confirmed that a big hit will be confirmed in the currently displayed pattern variation display, and is an expression of the judgment result of the final judge effect. Further, since it is the effect involving the button A, it is also a button effect, and corresponds to an example of the fourth effect started in response to the operation of the button A. The display mode of the image G of the character “Glamorous” is different from the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of Tonosama. Note that the image of the cut-in notice that there is a high possibility that it will be lost due to the currently displayed variable display of symbols becomes the image of the character "sorry".

The second period started from FIG. 39(g) is the operation valid period of the button A, but the initial position display 136X is not displayed, and the notification that it is the operation valid period is not performed. Button A here corresponds to a so-called back button. The display of the image G of the character “intense heat” (fourth effect) is an effect that is not started unless the button A (first chance button 136) is operated. That is, the display of the cut-in notice image C (fifth effect) by the lord's character may start even if the button B is not operated, whereas the button A corresponding to the back button is displayed. If is not operated, the fourth effect is not started. The ending timing of the second period is the earlier of the timing when the button A is operated and the timing when the operation valid period ends.

In this example, the execution period of the button effect of FIGS. 39(d) to (g) partially overlaps the execution period of the back button effect of FIGS. 39(g) to (i). All may be duplicated. More specifically, the effect period after the button operation of the button effect and the operation effective period of the back button effect overlap in at least a part of the period. On the contrary, the effect period after the button operation for the back button effect and the operation effective period for the button effect may overlap at least in part.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example in which the timing of operating button B is later than the example shown in FIG. 39. The timing of the figure number of the alphabet written in parentheses in FIG. 40 corresponds to the timing of the figure number of the alphabet written in parentheses in FIG. 39. Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 39 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 40, the button B is operated at the timing when the remaining period meter display 137c of the button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about 2/5. That is, the button B is operated one frame later than the example shown in FIG. 39 (see FIG. 40F). As a result, as compared with the example shown in FIG. 39, the start of the button effect (fifth effect) started in response to the operation of the button B is also delayed by one frame, and the operation of the button B is performed for one frame. The start timing of the second period, which starts after the passage of time, also shifts backward by one frame. In the example shown in FIG. 40, as shown in FIG. 40G, the button A is operated subsequent to the operation of the button B, but at the timing of FIG. 40G, the second period is started. The operation of button A here is accepted, but is not treated as valid. The player operates button A again at the timing of FIG. 40(h) because the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not change even if button A is operated at the timing of FIG. 40(g). .. In response to this second operation, the image G of the character “intense heat” is cut in and displayed, and the fourth effect is started.

As described above, the start timing of the second period in the example of FIG. 39 (FIG. 39(g) corresponding to an example of the first period) is the start timing of the variable display of decorative symbols (FIG. 39(b)). ) From the time of 4 frames (corresponding to an example of the first time), the start timing of the second period in the example of FIG. 40 (corresponding to an example of the second time in FIG. 40). (H)) is after the lapse of time (corresponding to an example of the second time) of 5 frames from the start timing (FIG. 40(b)) of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the start timing of the second period is It is variable (undefined).

Note that both the examples of FIG. 39 and the example of FIG. 40 are examples of effects related to the operation of the two types of chance buttons, but these effects are different from those of the two types of chance buttons. For example, it may be replaced with an effect related to the operation of the transparent portion 191 or the third chance button.

FIG. 41 is a diagram for further explaining the relationship between button A (first chance button 136) and button B (second chance button 137).

FIG. 41 shows two examples. In the example shown above, the chance button lamp of the button A (first chance button 136) is lit in red and the button B (second chance button 136) is lit. The chance button lamp of the chance button 137) is lit in blue. Illumination of the chance button lamp prompts the operation. In this example, the button A has a function of vibrating (first function), and the button B has a function of rotating (second function).

In FIG. 41(a), of the buttons A and B, only the button A is operated. When the button A is operated, it exerts its first function and starts vibrating. It should be noted that the button B, which has not been operated, remains in the lighted state.

In FIG. 41(b), of the buttons A and B, only the button B is operated. When the button B is operated, it exhibits the second function and starts rotating. On the other hand, the non-operated button A exerts its first function and starts vibrating in response to the operation of the button B. In this example, it is possible to enjoy the function (first function) of the other (button A) by only one operation (operation of button B here). Further, in this example, even if the button B137 is operated while the operation promotion notification of the button A136 is being performed, the button A136 vibrates and the operated button B rotates.

Also in the example shown in the lower part of FIG. 41, both the button A 136 and the button B 137 are lit. In this example, the button A136 has a function of vibrating (first function) and a function of rotating (second function).

In FIG. 41(A), of the buttons A and B, only the button A is operated. When the button A is operated, it exhibits the first function and starts vibration, and also exhibits the second function and starts rotation. As a result, the button A vibrates while rotating according to the operation. It should be noted that the button B, which has not been operated, remains in the lighted state.

In FIG. 41(B), of the buttons A and B, only the button B is operated. Even if the button B is operated, it remains lit, and neither vibration nor rotation starts. On the other hand, the non-operated button A exerts its first function and starts vibrating in response to the operation of the button B. In this example, only one operation (operation of button B here) can enjoy only a part of the plurality of functions of the other (button A) (first function). Further, in this example, even if the button B137 is operated while the operation promotion notification of the button A136 is being performed, the button A136 vibrates.
In the above description,

A gaming machine provided with a second operation means [for example, button A (chance button 136) and the like], capable of executing a plurality of types of effects, and capable of executing a plurality of types of notifications. One of the plurality of types of effects is the fourth effect [for example, the cut-in of “intense heat” shown in each of FIG. 39(h) to FIG. 39(i) and FIG. 40(i). It is configured such that the fourth effect is started according to the operation of the second operation means, and one of the plurality of types of notification is the second notification. The second notification is a notification for prompting the operation of the second operation means [for example, the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification], and the fourth effect is a variable display of a decorative symbol [ For example, 3↓3 displayed on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in each of FIG. 39 and FIG. 40] is an effect that may be executed, and the fourth effect is in the second period. This is an effect started when the second operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 39(g), FIG. 40(h), etc., and the second notification is not performed in the second period. The second period is a period that may start at the first time [for example, the time of FIG. 39(g)] in the variable display, and the second time is , A period that may start at a second time in the fluctuation display [for example, the time in FIG. 40(h)]
A game table characterized by that. ] Was explained.

It should be noted that a plurality of types of effects may be always executed, may not be executed, may be executed other than a plurality of types of effects, or may be executed only a plurality of types of effects. .. Further, the fourth effect may be an effect always executed in the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In addition, “third operating means [for example, button B (second chance button 137) or the like] is provided, and the second period is started in association with the operation of the third operating means [for example, button After B operation, it is started after the advance notice of cut-in by the character display of the lord, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "One of the plurality of types of effects is a fifth effect [for example, a cut-in notice by the character display of the lord that starts from FIG. 39(f) and FIG. 40(g)]. , One of the plurality of types of notifications is a third notification, and the third notification is a notification for prompting the operation of the third operation means [for example, a button B display 137X for operation promotion notification]. Etc.], and the fifth effect is started according to the operation of the third operation means. The fifth effect is the third period [for example, FIG. ) To (e) in the figure, the period in (d) to (f) in FIG. 40, etc.] is operated [for example, FIG. 39 (e), FIG. 40 (f)] Etc.], and the third notification is configured to be performed in the third period. ] Was also explained.
That is, the third period is a period during which the third notification is performed.

In addition, “the fifth aspect of the aspect is an aspect different from the aspect of the fourth aspect, the gaming table. ] Was also explained.

Further, "the fifth effect is an effect when there is a variable display of a decorative symbol [eg, Fig. 39(f), Fig. 40(g), etc.], which is characterized in that the gaming table. ] Was also explained.

In addition, “the fifth effect is an effect that is not started unless the third operation means is operated in the third period, which is characterized in that. ] Was also explained.

Further, "the fifth effect is an effect that is started even when the third operation means is not operated in the third period, the game table. ] Was also explained.

In this case, the fifth effect may be an effect that is started when the third period has elapsed or an effect that is started after the third period has elapsed.

Further, "the fourth effect is an effect that is not started unless the second operation means is operated in the second period, the gaming table. ] Was also explained.

By doing so, there is a clear difference from the case where the fifth effect is an effect which is started even when the third operation means is not operated in the third period, and the operation means is operated. You will be able to give a wide range of entwined production.

In addition, “the first time is a time after a lapse of a first time [for example, time for four frames] from the start of the variable display [for example, FIG. 39(b)], and The time is a time after a lapse of a second time [for example, a time for 5 frames] from the start of the variable display [for example, FIG. 40(b)], and the second time is for the first time. A game table characterized by being different from time. ] Was also explained.

Further, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like shown in FIG. 1], the game table. ] Was also explained.

Next, an example of an icon change display different from the icon change notice will be described by taking promotion production as an example.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing three examples of promotion effects. In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 42, during the variable display of the decorative pattern in FIG. 42A, the promotion effect is started at the same time as the reach effect is started, or after the reach effect is started. That is, the promotion effect is started during the reach state. In the promotion effect here, as shown in FIG. 42A, a display AT (first display) of a noteworthy item appears in the central area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the display AT of the noticeable item shown in FIG. 42(a), it is informed that attention is paid to the variable display of the reduced decorative symbol displayed in the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the state (“2↓2”) of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the reach state that is currently being performed is directly displayed, and the notice is given. Next, in FIG. 42 (c), the display AT of the noticeable item disappears, "decoration 7" is displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the high speed fluctuation continues in the middle symbol display area 208b. The state of doing is displayed. The pattern combination (“decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”) in which the same three even-numbered decorative patterns are lined up is a regular big hit pattern combination without any change, whereas the same odd-numbered decorative pattern is arranged in three lines. Since the combination (“decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is a special jackpot pattern combination with probability variation, here it is likely that promotion with probability variation will succeed. In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 42, a target of interest in the display AT of a noteworthy item and a target that has changed after that are both identical in decorative design. That is, this corresponds to an example in which the advance notice display (FIG. 42A) and the actual change display (FIG. 42C) match. In a production in which a design such as a decorative design changes, the advance notice display regarding the design and the actual change display may be configured to always match.

In addition, in the display AT of the noticeable item, the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the reach state currently being performed (“2↓2”) is directly displayed, but the variable display of the decorative pattern after the change is displayed. The state (“7↓7”) may be directly displayed as a notice display of the effect.

In the example shown in the center of FIG. 42, in the display AT of the noticeable item in the promotion effect, attention is given to the rightmost icon among the four displayed icons. The four icons displayed in the display AT of the matters to be noticed are the icons corresponding to the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative pattern display device 208, and are not displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. , Can be seen as a type of hold icon. Therefore, in the display AT of the noticeable item shown in FIG. 42(b), it is informed that the fourth hold icon h4 on the rightmost side among the four hold icons displayed is watched. Note that in the display AT of the noteworthy item shown in FIG. 42(b), the four hold icons are displayed while the variable icon is not displayed. On the other hand, only three reserved icons h1 to h3 of black circles (default display mode) are displayed in the reserved icon display area 208f of the decorative pattern display device 208, but black circles (default of the default icons) are displayed in the variable icon display area 208e. The variation icon c (display mode) is displayed. Further, in the display AT of the noteworthy item shown in FIG. 42B, the display mode of the noteworthy fourth hold icon h4 is a hatching display mode (the first display mode and the display mode of the prefetch notice). Is changing. Next, in FIG. 42(c), while still in the reach state, the display AT of the noteworthy item disappears, and in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, only three hold icons h1 to h3 of black circles are displayed. Not displayed. However, in the variable icon display area 208e, the variable icon c in the hatched display mode (normal notification display mode) is displayed. The display mode of this hatching is the same display mode as the display mode of the fourth hold icon h4 in the display AT of the noteworthy item in FIG. 42B, but in this example, the display mode of the noteworthy AT in the note AT The target (fourth hold icon h4) and the one that has changed after that (change icon c) are different. That is, in FIG. 42(b), while the advance notice that the hold icon (fourth hold icon h4) changes is given, the variable icon c actually changes in FIG. 42(c). Are different. Moreover, the variable icon itself is not displayed in the display AT of the noticeable item in FIG. 42B, while the fourth hold icon h4 is displayed in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also causes inconsistencies such as not being displayed. This example corresponds to an example in which the advance notice display (FIG. 42(b)) and the actual change display (FIG. 42(c)) do not match. In the example shown in the center of FIG. 42, the rightmost icon (fourth hold icon h4) in the display AT of the noteworthy item corresponds to an example of the first icon, and the actual fluctuation shown in FIG. The icon c corresponds to an example of the second icon. Further, the display AT of the item to be noted corresponds to an example of the first display, and the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42(c) corresponds to an example of the second display. In FIG. 42(d), the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished, and the combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 3” is definitely displayed. In the variable icon display area 208e of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42(d), the display mode of the variable icon c has returned from the hatched display mode to the black circle display abnormal. Further, there is no winning in the first special figure starting port 230, and the fourth hold icon h4 is not displayed.

In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 42, the display AT (FIG. 42(B)) of the noteworthy item of promotion effect is the same as the example shown in the center of FIG. 42, and one of the four displayed icons is displayed. It is informed that attention is paid to the icon on the right side (fourth hold icon h4). Further, the icon to be noticed (fourth hold icon h4) is displayed in a hatched display mode (first display mode). The hatching display mode (first display mode) is a display mode of a pre-reading notice in which the reliability of the big hit is relatively low. On the other hand, on the decorative symbol display device 208, four default display mode hold icons h1 to h4 and a variable icon c of the same default display mode are displayed. In this example, the number AT of the hold icons is the same between the display AT of the noticeable item of the promotion effect and the actual hold icon display area 208f. In FIG. 42(C), while still in the reach state, the display AT of the noteworthy item disappears, and only the three hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although not present, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 is changed to the display mode of the lord's face (second display mode). This display mode (second display mode) of the lord's face is a display mode of a pre-reading notice that has a relatively high jackpot reliability. In this example, not only is the target of attention (fourth hold icon h4) in the display AT of the noticeable item different from the one changed thereafter (first hold icon h1), the change content is also a hatched display mode. The (first display mode) and the display mode of the lord's face (second display mode) are different. The variable icon c in the default display mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 208e.

FIG. 42(C') is a modification of FIG. 42(C), and is a diagram showing a state in which the display AT of the noteworthy item shown in FIG. 42(B) has disappeared. Further, FIG. 6D' is a diagram showing a state at the time of stop display of the decorative pattern, following FIG. The display state of the hold icon in the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIGS. 42(C') and (D') is the same as the display state of the hold icon in the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIG. 42(B). The display states of the variable icons in the variable icon display area 208e shown in 42(C') and (D') are no different from the display states of the variable icons in the variable icon display area 208e shown in FIG. 42(D'), the same figure (E') shows that the hold corresponding to the hold icon, which has been the first hold icon h1, has been exhausted, and a new variable display of the decorative pattern has started. FIG. When a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started, a shift animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon that has been the first hold icon h1 until now moves toward the change icon display area 208e. , Is displayed as a variable icon c. The hold icon, which has been the second hold icon h2 until now, is displayed as the first hold icon h1, but at the same time as the start of the moving animation, during the moving animation, or at the end of the moving animation. Or, after the movement animation ends, the display mode changes to the display mode of the lord's face (second display mode). That is, the execution timing of the promotion display is different from the examples described so far, and the symbol variation display (the first symbol variation display) that is started next to the symbol variation display (the first symbol variation display) in which the attention AT is displayed AT is displayed. The promotion display is executed by the second symbol variable display). The first hold icon h1 that has changed to the display mode of the lord's face may be displayed in that display mode during execution of the second symbol variable display (for example, during reach production), and the display mode further changes. It may be deleted, or may be deleted when the super reach effect is executed.

The example shown on the right side of FIG. 42 also corresponds to an example in which the advance notice display (FIG. 42(B)) and the actual change display (FIG. 42(C) or (E′)) do not match.

In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 42, the rightmost icon (fourth hold icon h4) in the display AT of the noteworthy item corresponds to an example of the first icon, and FIG. 42C or 42E The actual first hold icon h1 shown in') corresponds to an example of the second icon. Further, the display AT of the noteworthy item corresponds to an example of the first display, and the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42(C) or (E′) is an example of the second display. Equivalent to.
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing two other examples of promotion effects.

In the example on the left side of FIG. 43, a mini icon such as a mini item is displayed on the hold icon. This mini icon is an icon smaller than the hold icon, and the notice of the effect executed in the symbol variable display that is started when the hold corresponding to the displayed hold icon is exhausted and the big hit in the symbol variable display It represents a pre-reading notice. In any of the decorative symbol display devices 208 shown in FIG. 43(A) and FIG. 43(B), the mini icon of A display is displayed on the leftmost first hold icon h1 among the three hold icons displayed. Two mAs are stacked. The mini-icon mA displayed in A, for example, gives a notice that the pseudo-relational production is started once. In the display AT of the noticeable item shown in FIG. 43(B), one mini icon of C display displayed on the leftmost icon (first holding icon h1) among the four displayed icons. It is reported that attention is paid to mC. The mini-icon mA displayed in C is, for example, a look-ahead notice that suggests that a big hit will be confirmed. In FIG. 43(C), while still in the reach state, the display AT of the noteworthy item disappears, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini icon mA of A display and the C display of the mini icon mA of A display are displayed on the first hold icon h1. Mini icons mC are stacked. That is, as the promotion display, the upper mini-icon changes from the A-display mini-icon mA to the C-display mini-icon mC, but the lower mini-icon does not change and the A-display mini-icon remains unchanged. It remains the icon mA. As a result, although the number of pseudo-repetitions has been reduced from two to one, it has been announced that it will be a symbol variation display that is definitely a big hit, and the promotion has been successful. In this example, the target of attention in the display AT of the noteworthy item is the mini icon that is displayed only one, whereas in reality that is displayed after that, two mini icons are displayed, Display of noteworthy items The first-stage mini-icon (C-display mini-icon mC) and the first-stage mini-icon (A-display mini-icon mA) that were the target of attention in the AT are changed. The content is also different. In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 43, the mini icon mC of C display in the display AT of the noteworthy item corresponds to an example of the first icon, and the mini icon of A display of the actual first stage shown in FIG. 43(C). The icon mA corresponds to an example of the second icon. In addition, the display AT of the item to be noticed corresponds to an example of the first display, and the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43C corresponds to an example of the second display.

In the example on the right side of FIG. 43, in the reach state, the promotion effect selected from the three types of promotion effects is executed. The three types of promotion effects referred to here are the promotion effects shown in FIGS. 42A to 42C, the promotion effects shown in FIGS. 42A to 42D, and FIG. 42A. -(C) of the same figure or (A) of FIG. 42-(C') of this figure-(E') of the same figure may be sufficient. Further, all of a plurality of types of effects (here, three types of promotion effects) for which one effect is selected are displayed in advance in advance as shown in FIG. 42(A) to FIG. )) and the actual change display (FIG. 42C) may be the same type of effect, or advance notice display (FIG. 42A to FIG. 42D). 42(b)) and the actual change display (FIG. 42(c)) may be a type of effect that does not match, or both a type of effect that matches and an effect of a type that does not match are included. Good.

In FIG. 43(b), a display AT1 of a noteworthy item marked "promotion opportunity A" as the promotion effect A and a display AT2 of a noteworthy item marked "promotion opportunity B" as the promotion effect B are shown. As the promotion effect C, the display AT3 of the noteworthy item described as "promotion opportunity C" is displayed, and any one kind of promotion effect is selected and executed by the internal lottery. The selection operation may be performed as if the button A (first chance button 136) or the button B (second chance button 137) is operated.

In the above description, the promotion effect is described as an example, but the icon change display different from the icon change notice is not limited to the promotion effect.
In the above description,

A gaming machine provided with a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like], wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons, and one of the plurality of types of icons. Is a first icon [for example, a fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 42(b), a fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 42(B), a mini icon mC shown in FIG. 43(B)], One of the plurality of types of icons is the second icon [for example, the variable icon c shown in FIG. 42(c), the first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 42(C) or FIG. 42(E′). , The mini-icon mA shown in FIG. 43(C)], the second icon is different from the first icon, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. Yes, one of the plurality of types of display is a first display, one of the plurality of types of display is a second display, the display of the first display is After the start, the second display is configured to be displayed in some cases, the first display is a display indicating that the display mode of the first icon is changed [eg, 42(b), FIG. 42(B), and FIG. 43(B), each of which shows the noticeable item AT, etc.], and the second display is a display in which the display mode of the second icon changes. There is a certain [for example, actual display in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in each of FIG. 42(c), FIG. 42(C) or FIG. 42(E'), FIG. 43(C)], .. ] Was explained.

The display unit may be a unit that always displays the plurality of types of icons, a unit that may display the icons, or a unit that displays other than the plurality of types of icons. It is also possible to display only a plurality of types of icons. Further, the second display may be displayed without fail after the display of the first display is started.

In addition, “the second icon [for example, the variation icon c shown in FIG. 42(c)] has a different type from the first icon [for example, the fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 42(b)]. A gaming table characterized by being an icon. ] Was also explained.

Further, “a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variable display is provided, and the first icon is a hold icon [for example, a fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 42(b)], and the hold icon is The number of times the start of the symbol variable display is being held is an icon that is represented by the number displayed, and one of the holding icons is an icon that indicates that there is one of the holding, and the second The icon is a variable icon [for example, the variable icon c shown in FIG. 42(c)], and the variable icon is the symbol when the hold represented by the hold icon is exhausted and the symbol variable display is started. A gaming table, which is an icon displayed as an icon corresponding to variable display. ] Was also explained.

The symbol display means may be a means that always displays the symbol variable display, a means that may display the symbol variable display, or a means other than the symbol variable display. Alternatively, only the variable display of symbols may be executed.

Further, “a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variable display [eg, a first special symbol display device 212, a special symbol 2 display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided, and the first icon is the first 42 (for example, the fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 42(B)), and the second icon is the second hold icon [for example, FIG. 42(C) or FIG. 42(E′)]. The first hold icon h1 etc. shown in FIG. 1), wherein the hold icon is an icon that represents the number of times the start of the symbol variable display is held by the displayed number, and the one hold icon is One of the icons indicating that there is the hold, and the first hold icon and the second hold icon are icons at different times when the hold is made. ] Was also explained.

In addition, “the first icon is a display of a first type of mini item [for example, a pre-reading notice mini icon mC or the like that indicates that a big hit is definitely confirmed], and the second icon is displayed. Is a display of a second type of mini item [for example, a mini icon mA or the like for notifying that the pseudo-relational production is started once]. ] Was also explained.
Also,

"The first display is a display that is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the gaming table. ] Was also explained. In addition, "the first display is a display that is displayed during the execution of the reach effect, the gaming table. ] Was also explained. In addition, "the second display is a display that is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the gaming table. ] Was also explained. In addition, “the second display is a display that is displayed during the execution of the reach effect, the gaming table. ] Was also explained. In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like shown in FIG. 1], the game table. ] Was also explained.
Next, the timer notice for starting the notification by the button effect will be described.
FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining a general timer advance notice.

In each drawing in FIG. 44, a button A (first chance button 136) and a button B are displayed next to the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the operation surface of the button B (second chance button 137) shown in FIG. 38 and the like has a circular shape, but the operation surface of the button B here is a quadrangle. The button B is referred to as a button B (operation button 137′), but the shape of the operation surface is not limited and may be referred to as a chance button. In FIG. 44( a ), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are displaying the stopped symbols that are lost (confirmed display), and the decorative symbol display device 208 is inconsistent. "Decorative 3"-"Decorative 4"-"Decorative 1" are displayed. In addition, both the fourth design 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth design 2082 of the special figure 2 are white stop display. The first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 44(a) are lit four, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays four black circle holding icons which are the holding display of the special diagram 1. Therefore, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area 208e.

In FIG. 44(b), the variable display of the special symbols is started on the first special symbol display device 212, and the variable display of the decorative symbols is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the update of the decorative symbol (variable display) is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Further, only three first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 44B are lit, and only three holding icons (holding icons h1 to h3) are held in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. The variable icon c that is not displayed and has the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 208e. Further, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a circular display is changed to a changing display (gray).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(c), the reach effect is started. Up to now, the variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced in the left corner and is in the reach state by the numeral 3. ..

From the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command for a special symbol or a special symbol hold increase command. The symbol variation start command includes information indicating the variation time of the symbol variation display to be started. Further, even when the information indicating the variation time is not included, the information indicating the stop symbol is included, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines the variation time from the information indicating the stop symbol. In the special figure hold increase command, when the main control unit 300 pre-reads up to the variable time, the information indicating the pre-read variable time is included, but even if it is not included, the information indicating the pre-read stop symbol is included. Is included, the first sub-control unit 400 can know the variation time from the information indicating the pre-read stop symbol. When the variation time is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the first sub-control unit 400 performs the timer advancement execution availability lottery.

If the player has won the timer announcement execution availability lottery (when the lottery result is the execution result), the timer announcement is started when the reach effect is started. The timer notice includes a display showing the remaining time until a new effect is started, and is also a type of notice effect that suggests that a new effect is started. The new effect here may be a notice effect of a big hit or a notice effect of whether or not a certain effect (for example, super reach effect or the like) is started. In addition, as the big hit advance notice effect, there are a normal notice effect that gives an advance notice that a big hit will occur in the currently displayed symbol variation display, and a look-ahead notice effect that gives notice that a big hit will be given in the subsequent symbol variation display. Further, the display indicating the remaining time may be a meter display, a level display, or a number display, but in this example, it is a numerical display. Note that only one of the plurality of examples of the display indicating the remaining time listed here may be applied, the plurality of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. You may apply. In FIG. 44(d), the timer notice display T is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 208e, and it is informed that the remaining time until the start of a new effect is 30:00 seconds. The remaining time displayed here is displayed as a countdown with the lapse of time, and is 0:00 seconds in FIG. When the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds, the first effect display is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(f), the lord's character is displayed on the variable icon display area 208e. The variable icon c in the black circle display mode (default display mode) is still displayed in the variable icon display area 208e in FIG. 44(f). Further, the timer notice display T of 0:00 seconds is still displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 208e, and the first effect display (display of the lord's character) here is the end of the timer notice. It is a production. However, the first effect display (display of the lord's character) can also be viewed as a start effect of a new effect whose start is announced by a timer notice. In particular, the timing at which the timer notice display T disappears at 0:00 seconds may be the moment at 0:00 seconds, or may disappear at the timing of (e) in the figure. Alternatively, although the timer advance notice has ended due to 0:00 seconds, the timer advance notice display T may continue to be displayed for a certain period even when a new effect is started.

In FIG. 44(g) subsequent to FIG. 44(f), although the timer notice display T has disappeared, the first effect display (lord's character display N1) remains displayed on the variable icon display area 208e. As a new effect that is announced by the timer notice, the normal notice effect has started. In this normal notice production, the variable icon c, which has been the default display mode until then, is changed to the display mode of the princess' face, and there is a possibility that it will be a big hit in the pattern fluctuation display that is currently continuing in the reach state. Has foretold.

In FIG. 44(h), the first effect display (display of the lord's character) also disappears, and the variable icon c in the display mode of the princess' face continues to be displayed in the variable icon display area 208e. continuing. After this, it evolved into super reach production, and the variable icon c disappeared (becomes invisible) together with the hold icon, and it became a big hit or lost, and even without development into super reach production, it became lost. To do. In addition, even in the case of development to the super reach production, the variable icon c in the display mode of the princess' face may remain visible without disappearing.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example in which the timer advance notice display T may be displayed in response to a button operation.

The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a counter timer, and when the execution of the timer advance notice lottery is won, internal counting by the counter timer is started. The start time of the internal count may be after the start of the symbol fluctuation display of the special symbol or before the start of the symbol fluctuation display, but in the example shown in FIG. 45, at the same time as the start of the symbol fluctuation display, Internal counting is started. A count value is set in the counter timer before starting, and counting is performed by a countdown method. The time represented by the count value is less than the fluctuation time of the special figure, but may be longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure. In FIG. 45, the counter timer 412 shown in FIG. 4 is shown in a pseudo manner. In the example shown in FIG. 45, the value of 40:00 seconds is set in the counter timer 412, and the internal count is started from the same figure (b) at which the symbol variable display is started.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, a state (operation valid state) is effectively received when the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is performed simultaneously with or immediately after the start of the internal counting. However, even after shifting to the operation valid state, the chance button lamp 138 of the button A (first chance button 136) remains off, and the operation promotion notification of the button A (for example, the initial position display 136X) is also performed. However, the player does not know that the operation is valid. However, when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, the timer notice display T is displayed according to the operation. In the example shown in FIG. 45, the button A (first chance button 136) is operated some time after the reach effect is started (see FIG. 45(c)). The display of the timer notice display T is related to the reach effect in the example shown in FIG. 44, but is not related in this example. The button A (first chance button 136) here corresponds to a so-called back button. Although the timer advance notice display T is not displayed even if the button B (operation button 137') is operated, it may be displayed. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(e), the timer notice display T is displayed, and it is notified that the remaining time is 20:00 seconds until the start of a new effect. In this example, when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, the timer notice display T is immediately displayed, so that the player starts counting down the remaining time as if the button A was operated. Although it looks like, the countdown of the remaining time has started internally before the button operation.

Note that, in this example, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponds to a so-called back button, but an operation promotion notification for promoting the operation of the button A may be performed. Will end when is operated. Therefore, if a certain period is provided between the time the button A (first chance button 136) is operated and the timer advance notice display T is displayed, the operation promotion notification is given within that period. It will not be done.

Further, since the timer advance notice display T is displayed according to the operation of the button A, the length of the remaining time at the beginning of the display varies depending on the timing of the operation of the button A. That is, as shown in FIG. 45(A), if the button A operation is performed a little earlier, the timer advance notice display T will be displayed from the state where the remaining time is 25:00 seconds. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45A, even if the button A operation is performed after the remaining time measured by the counter timer 412 becomes the first remaining time or less (here, 5 seconds or less), the timer advance notice display is displayed. The T may not be displayed. In this case, the operation valid state of the button A (first chance button 136) is before the first remaining time. Alternatively, when the remaining time measured by the counter timer 412 reaches the second remaining time (for example, 6 seconds), the timer notice display T is displayed from the second remaining time even if the button A is not operated. May be. In the example shown in FIG. 45, the operation valid state of button A (first chance button 136) is continuous, but it may be intermittent. For example, if the operation valid state continues for 5 seconds, transition to the operation invalid state for 3 seconds may be repeated until the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds.

45(f) and the subsequent steps are the same as those in FIG. 44(e) and subsequent steps, the description thereof will be omitted. However, since the button A (first chance button 136) is the back button, the beginner does not press the button A. The remaining time may elapse. Even in this case, after the remaining time has elapsed, the display mode of the variable icon c may be changed to the display mode of the face of the princess without performing the first effect display (character display N1 of the lord). Similarly to the case where the operation is performed, the display mode of the variable icon c may be changed to the display mode of the face of the princess after the first effect display (character display N1 of the lord) is displayed.

FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the back button operation timing and the hold increasing timing.

At the time when the symbol variation display is started in FIG. 46(b), the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is 2, and at the same time when the symbol variation display is started, the internal count is also started. That is, it is determined that the timer advance notice is to be executed at the time when the symbol variable display is started, and the button A (first chance button 136) is in the operation valid state.

In FIG. 46C, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated, and the timer notice display T is displayed. In the state where the timer notice display T is displayed (remaining time is 5:00 seconds), there is one ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased by 1, As shown in 46(d), three hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed. All of these three hold icons h1 to h3 have a black circle display mode (default display mode).

Eventually, the remaining time becomes 0:00 seconds (see FIG. 46(f)), and as shown in FIG. 46(g), the first effect display (lord's character display N1) is displayed on the variable icon display area 208e. ) Is displayed. Even in this state, the three hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed in the default display mode. In addition, in this example, a suggestion is given on the first effect display (the lord's character display N1) about a new effect to be started, that is, a new effect whose start has been announced by a timer notice, and a look-ahead notice is given. It is notified that the display mode of the target hold icon changes. In this example, the target of the prefetching notice is also determined in a controllable manner at the stage of determining whether or not to execute the button notice. Therefore, when the second suspension of special figure 1 is increasing during the execution of the symbol variation display that is one time before the symbol variation display that is currently being performed, the pre-reading announcement target is this The winning amount (here, the third hold) after the second hold and the execution of the timer notice is decided cannot be the subject of the look-ahead notice, but from the player's perspective, before the start of the new production. All of the three hold icons h1 to h3 displayed in 1 appear to have the possibility of being read ahead.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(h), the display mode of the second hold icon h2 of the three hold icons h1 to h3 is changed from the black circle display mode (default display mode) to the lord's face display mode. The display mode of the pre-reading notice is changed, and the pre-reading notice production is started as a new production noticed by the timer notice. In this example, the first effect display (lord's character display N1) continues to be displayed until the currently displayed symbol variation display ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46(c'), when the remaining time is 5:00 seconds, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is held. When the button A (first chance button 136) is operated after the timing of FIG. 46(d) in which the number is increased by one (see FIG. 46(e′)), the button is operated after the hold is increased. Therefore, the player tends to expect that the third hold, which had been increased before the button operation, will also be subject to the prefetch notice, but the increase in the hold after the execution of the timer notice is decided even before the button operation. In terms of control, the third hold cannot be the target of the prefetch notice, and in this example, the display mode of the second hold icon h2 also changes to the prefetch notice display mode.

In addition, during the execution of the symbol variation display one time before the currently performed symbol variation display, if the first suspension is also increasing together with the second suspension of special figure 1, the first suspension icon h1 There is a possibility that the display mode will change to the display mode of the pre-reading notice. In this case, it is not known in advance whether the pre-reading notice target is the first holding, the second holding, or both. ..

Further, if the control for determining the pre-reading notice target according to the operation of the button A is adopted, the number of the pre-reading notice subject may change according to the operation timing of the button A (first chance button 136). Become. That is, in the button operation at the timing of FIG. 46(c), only the first hold and the second hold are subject to pre-reading notice, but at the button operation at the timing of FIG. 46(e′), from the first hold to the third hold. Is a pre-reading notice target, and the expected target will differ depending on the timing of button operation.

Furthermore, the pre-reading notice target may be determined immediately before the start of a new effect, that is, when the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds.
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing, in stages, two examples of button effects.

The example on the left side of FIG. 47 corresponds to an example of a general button effect, and the counter timer 412 does not operate. In this example, FIG. 47A to FIG. 47D are in the reach state, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 47B has a button that imitates the chance button 136 in the state of being turned off at the initial position. An image 136a4, an arrow display 136b and a character display "press" as a promotion display for prompting the operation of the chance button 136, and a remaining period meter display 136c indicating the remaining period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. One is displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a4, 136b, 136c and the character display of "press" are collectively referred to as a normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification. In FIG. 47(c), the button A (first chance button 136) is operated while the normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification is being performed, and the decoration shown in FIG. 47(d) according to this operation. On the symbol display device 208, a cut-in notice image C1 displayed as a chance is displayed.

The example on the right side of FIG. 47 is an example in which the start of the timer announcement is waited for. 47(A) to 47(C) are the same as FIGS. 47(a) to 47(c), and a description thereof will be omitted. Also in this example, the counter timer 412 is not operating, and the timer advance notice is not executed in the currently displayed symbol variation display. However, at the stage of receiving the special figure hold increase command when each of the three holds held here is held, the variable time of each is changed from the information indicating the pre-read stop symbol included in each command. You can know, among these three holds, if there is a hold whose fluctuation time is longer than the first time, stock the timer notice until the hold is exhausted and the symbol fluctuation display is started. I'll do it. As shown in FIG. 47(C), when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated during the operation valid period, the timer notice is not started in the currently displayed symbol variation display, but after this As a display for announcing that the timer advance notice will be started in the symbol variation display to be started, as shown in FIG. 7D, a display T′ of “standby” is displayed at a position where the timer advance notice display T is displayed. When it is displayed and the timer advance notice is started, the remaining time is displayed instead of "waiting".

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a modification of the display method including the timer notice display T. In FIG. 48, three examples are shown on the left side and two examples are shown on the right side.

First, in FIG. 48A, which is the first example, in the reach state, a display similar to the timer notice display T (hereinafter referred to as the time display T1) is displayed at the display position of the timer notice display T with the button A. (First chance button 136) It is already displayed before the operation. The time display T1 is also displayed as a countdown with the passage of time, but in FIG. 48(a), 10:00 seconds is displayed. On the other hand, the counter timer 412 shown in FIG. 48(a) is 30:00 seconds, and the two do not match. Button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated at the timing of FIG. 48(b) when the counter timer 412 reaches 25:00 seconds, and the time display T1 is displayed in response to this operation. , A timer notice display T is displayed. At the timing of FIG. 48B, the time display T1 is 5:00 seconds, and the timer notice display T is 25:00 seconds, which is the same as the counter timer 412.

In the second example of FIG. 48A as well, as in the first example of FIG. 48A, the time display T1 is displayed at the display position of the timer notice display T and the button A (first display) is displayed. The chance button 136) is already displayed before the operation. After that, also in this example, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated. The operation timing of the button A is the timing when the counter timer 412 reaches 25:00 seconds, and in response to this operation, the timer advance notice display T is displayed instead of the time display T2. The timer advance notice display T shown in FIG. 48(B) is 25:00 seconds, which is the same as the counter timer 412. Further, on the timer notice display T, the difference between the time of the time display T1 that has been displayed so far and the time of the newly displayed timer notice display T is displayed. That is, at the timing of FIG. 48(B), the time of the time display T1 that has been displayed so far should have been 5:00 seconds, while the remaining time displayed on the timer notice display T is Since it is 25:00 seconds, the difference display T2 "+20" is displayed. Also in FIG. 48A which is the third example, as in the case of FIG. 48A which is the first example, the time display T1 is at the display position of the timer notice display T and the button A (first The chance button 136) is already displayed before the operation. After that, also in this example, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated. The operation timing of the button A is the timing of FIG. 48(a), which is also the timing when the counter timer 412 reaches 25:00 seconds. On the other hand, at the timing of FIG. 48(a), the time display T1 is 5:00 seconds, which is 20:00 seconds ahead of the remaining time of the counter timer 412. In this example, the character display "LOCK" is displayed so as to overlap the upper portion of the time display T1, and the countdown in the time display T1 is temporarily stopped. Even if the countdown in the time display T1 is temporarily stopped, the countdown of the counter timer 412 continues, and the character display of "LOCK" is displayed until the remaining time of the counter timer 412 reaches 5:00 seconds of the time display T1. Therefore, the countdown in the time display T1 is temporarily stopped. Eventually, when the remaining time of the counter timer 412 reaches 5:00 seconds, the character display "LOCK" disappears, the time display T1 is replaced with the timer notice display T, and thereafter, the countdown as the timer notice display T is continued. It In addition, in this example, when the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated, the time display T1 continues to count down, and eventually becomes 0:00 seconds, and the timer notice is given. The display T ends without being replaced.

In FIG. 48(α), which is the fourth example shown in the upper right, an arrow indicating the passage of time is displayed, indicating the state in which the symbol variation display is being performed. In general, it can be said that the longer the count value (remaining time) initially set in the counter timer, the higher the expectation of a big hit. When the timer notice announces the start of the final cut-in notice in the currently displayed symbol variation display, the longer the timer notice execution time (remaining time) is, the more various effects are executed. Will be possible. For example, in the first half, it is possible to change the display mode of the hold icon and start the pseudo-link. Further, after the normal reach is started, the development to the super reach (SP) and the change of the title color of the reach can be executed. Furthermore, it is possible to execute a chance-up production during the reach where the expectation of a big hit increases. For these reasons, internally, the countdown of the counter timer 412 continues to be executed, but the remaining time display in the timer notice display T is initially displayed to be small, and the countdown is apparently temporary. The interest of the game may be improved by stopping or adding the remaining period later. Further, as the number of remaining time displays such as the time display T1 shown in FIG. 48(a) increases, the number of times that is expected to change the effect when the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds increases, The interest of the game may improve. Then, in the final cut-in notice, a character that is definitely confirmed to be a big hit may appear. Even if the timer notice display T becomes 0:00 seconds in response to the counter timer 412 becoming 0:00 seconds, a new effect is not started, and a fake timer notice can be executed. Alternatively, it may be configured not to give a false timer notice.

In FIG. 48 (A) which is the fifth example shown in the lower right, button A (first chance button 136) is operated, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here Then, the timer advance notice display T displaying 30:00 seconds is displayed. In FIG. 48B, the operation of button A (first chance button 136) is performed again. The button A corresponding to the back button is in a state of accepting the second operation as valid, and the timer notice display T that has been displayed in the first mode (for example, a single frame) until now is displayed in the second operation. Accordingly, it is displayed in the second mode (for example, double frame). The timer advance notice display T, which has been displayed in the first color (for example, blue) until now, may be displayed in the second color (for example, blue) according to the second operation.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of a case where the timer notice overlaps with another effect accompanied by a countdown of the remaining time.

Two examples are shown in FIG. 49, and the example shown above is an example when the timer notice overlaps with the island simultaneous production. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 49(a) is largely displayed as "25 minutes until the island simultaneous production". On the other hand, the remaining time of the internal counter timer 412 is 30:00 seconds, but the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated at this stage, and the timer notice display T is not displayed. It is a display. In FIG. 49B, the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, and the remaining time (here, 25:00 seconds) of the counter timer 412 is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 208e. The timer notice display T is displayed. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 49(b) is displayed in the same size as the above, "20 seconds until the island simultaneous production". In this example, the difference between the time when the remaining time of the timer announcement is 0:00 seconds and the time when the island simultaneous production is started is only 5 seconds, but the timer announcement is affected by the countdown of the island simultaneous production. The remaining time is displayed according to the countdown of the counter timer 412 without receiving any.

The example shown in the lower part of FIG. 49 is an example in which the timer notice overlaps with the mission effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49A, a mission display M on the upper right of the variable icon display area 208e is displayed, and it is displayed that the remaining time is 10:00 seconds. On the other hand, the remaining time of the internal counter timer 412 is 30:00 seconds, but the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated at this stage, and the timer notice display T is not displayed. It is a display. In FIG. 49A, the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, and the remaining time (here, 25:00 seconds) of the counter timer 412 is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 208e. The timer notice display T is displayed. The mission display M shown in FIG. 49A indicates that the remaining time is 5:00 seconds. In this example, both the mission display M and the timer notice display T are displayed in a similar display mode surrounded by a single frame, so at first glance, there is a risk of misidentification, but on the contrary, be careful. It also has the effect of being viewed.
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing another example of the timer announcement.

In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 50, the timer notice display is not a numerical value display but a meter display. In this example, as shown in FIG. 50B, the normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification is not displayed, but the chance button lamp 138 built in the button A (first chance button 136) lights up in red. And encourage you to operate. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 50(b), a tutorial-like description of the display of a chance up meter, which is a type of timer advance notice display, is made. In FIG. 50(c), the button A is operated by being prompted to turn on in red, and the chance up meter CM is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the operation. The chance up meter CM has a start S at the left end and a goal G at the right end, and the arrow mark moves from left to right over time. This arrow mark represents the present time, and when the arrow mark reaches the goal G at the right end, the remaining time becomes 0:00 seconds. Therefore, the distance from the arrow mark to the goal G corresponds to the length of the remaining time. Further, this chance up meter CM not only indicates the remaining time, but also various changes such as the change of the pseudo-link and the hold icon, the change of the reach title color, and the chance increase effect during the reach shown in FIG. 48(α). The execution timing of the production of is also marked. It should be noted that only the execution timing of the effect is marked, and it may not be displayed until what kind of effect is executed.

The example shown on the right side of FIG. 50 is an example in which the effect to be executed changes according to the operation timing of the operation means. In this example, the chance button lamp 138 incorporated in the button A (first chance button 136) lights up in red and prompts the user to operate, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays a normal operation promotion notification 136N. Is displayed. Further, a mark JI is attached to the remaining period meter display 136c of the displayed normal display 136N, and when the remaining period meter approaches the mark JI, when the button A is operated, a special mode effect is produced. Be started. In FIG. 50(A), the operation of the button A is too late, and the special mode effect is not started. As shown in FIG. 50(B), the image C1 of the cut-in notice displayed in opportunity and black characters is displayed. Has been done. In FIG. 50(A), the operation timing of the button A exactly matches the timing of the mark JI, and as shown in FIG. 50(A), the chance C and the cut-in notice image C2 displayed in gray characters are displayed. ing. The cut-in notice image C2 shown in FIG. 50A is the same as the cut-in notice image C1 shown in FIG. The typeface and the type of the background may be different, and further, an image such as a character may be added. In FIG. 50A, the button B (operation button 137′) for which the operation promotion notification has not been performed is operated. The button B here corresponds to the back button. The operation timing of the button B also matches the timing of the mark JI, and as shown in FIG. 50(I), a special mode cut-in notice image C3 in which the princess character is displayed is displayed. In this way, the display mode of the effect differs depending on the operation timing, or the display mode of the effect changes depending on the operating means to be operated. Note that the display type of the effect is not limited, and the type of the effect and the start timing may be different. Even if the operating means to be operated are the same, the display mode of the effect, the type of the effect, and the start timing may be different when the back button is pressed and when it is not.

FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example in which the timer notice display T is displayed on a device different from the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the example shown in FIG. 51, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a timer notice display means 209′ with a shutter, which is separate from the decorative symbol display device 208. The panel display unit 183 shown in FIG. 1 can be applied to the timer notice display means 209′. 51A, the shutter is closed and the shutter is closed, and as shown in FIG. 51B, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated. Then, the shutter is opened, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here, 20:00 seconds) is displayed on the timer notice display means 209'.

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 51(c), the remaining time displayed on the timer notice display means 209' becomes 0:00 seconds. Then, as shown in FIG. 51(d), the first effect display (character display N1 of the lord) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, not on the timer notice display means 209', and then on the decorative symbol display device. In the variable icon display area 208e of 208, the variable icon c is changed to the display mode of the princess' face, and the normal notice effect is started. It should be noted that after the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds, the timer notice display means 209' does not close the shutter and continues to display 0:00 seconds.

The same display as "waiting" shown in FIG. 47(D) is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 51(A). The “standby” shown in FIG. 47(D) was a display for notifying that the timer advance notice will be started in the symbol variation display started after this, but the “standby” shown in FIG. 51(A) is , Which corresponds to a display that gives advance notice that the timer advance notice is started in the currently displayed symbol variation display. In FIG. 51(B), "standby" of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears, the shutter of the timer notice display means 209' opens, and the remaining time which is the same as the remaining time set in the counter timer 412 not shown here. (Here, 20:00 seconds) is displayed. The release of “standby” may be released automatically when the release time comes, or may be released by operating the button A or the button B again.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 51(A) is in the reach state, and the timer in which the remaining time (here, 25:00 seconds) of the counter timer 412 not shown is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 208e. The notice display T is displayed. Then, in the timer notice display unit 209', the shutter is opened and the character display of "chance" is displayed. In this way, the timer notice display means 209' can display a display other than the display showing the remaining period. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 51(a), it has been developed into a super reach effect. When the super reach effect is started, the timer notice display T disappears from the decorative symbol display device 208, and instead, the remaining time (20:00 seconds here) of the counter timer 412 (not shown) is the timer notice display means 209′. Is displayed in. By doing so, a part of the super reach effect executed on the decorative symbol display device 208 does not overlap the timer notice display T, while the remaining time of the timer notice can be clearly displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 51A, the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (not shown) is displayed on the timer notice display T of the decorative symbol display device 208 and also displayed on the timer notice display means 209′. However, while the timer advance notice display T of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays 25:00 seconds, the timer advance notice display means 209′ displays 24:95 seconds, and both are not shown in the counter timer 412. Although it should display the remaining time of, there is a very slight difference. This is a difference due to this time lag because some time lag occurs in the display control and the like because it is a different device such as the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timer notice display means 209′. It should be noted that a difference may be intentionally created between the timer notice display T of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timer notice display means 209' as part of the effect.

Although the timer notice display means 209′ is used here, the timer notice display means 209′ may be replaced with a second display means 209 capable of operating (moving up and down) shown in FIG. The second display means 209 may be always operated (elevated), may not be operated (elevated), may be operated in addition to the elevating operation, and is only elevating. It may be one.

In the above description, the gaming machine is provided with "second operation means [for example, chance button 136 or the like] and display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 or timer notice display means 209']. The display means is configured to display a plurality of types of displays, one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display, and the third display is a first notice. This is a display [for example, a timer advance notice display T, etc.], and the third display is a display according to the operation timing of the second operation means [for example, 20:00 shown in FIG. A) 25:00 shown in A), the image C1 of the cut-in notice displayed in black and the chance shown in FIG. 50B, and the special-mode cut displayed in gray and the chance shown in FIG. A game table characterized in that the display is started with the image C of the advance notice, etc.]. ] Was explained.

The third display indicates the operation timing of the second operation means [for example, whether the remaining time is equal to or shorter than the first remaining time or whether it coincides with the timing of the mark JI in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 50]. Whether or not] is displayed [for example, 20:00 shown in FIG. 45(e) and non-display shown in FIG. 45(a) or the chance shown in FIG. 50(B) and a cut-in notice displayed in black characters] The display may be started with the image C1 and the chance C shown in FIG. 50A and the image C of the cut-in notice of a special mode displayed in gray characters.

Further, the display means may or may not always display a plurality of types of display, may display something other than a plurality of types of display, or may display a plurality of types of display. Only one may be displayed.

In addition, "one display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display, the fourth display is a display that prompts the operation of the second operation means [e.g. 136N, etc.], and when the display of the third display is started by operating the second operation means [for example, when the operation is within the operation valid period], and when not started. [For example, in the case of an operation before the operation valid period or after the operation valid period has passed, etc.], the fourth display is configured such that in the second case, the second operation means is A gaming machine, which is a display that is not displayed between the time when it is operated and the time when the display of the third display is started. ] Was also explained. Note that the fourth display may be a display that is not displayed in the second case.

In addition, “the first notice display is a timer notice display, and the timer notice is a display indicating a first remaining time [eg, remaining time of the counter timer 412] [eg, timer notice display T Etc.], which is a notice after the first remaining time becomes zero [for example, a notice in which the display mode of the variable icon c shown in FIG. 45(h) changes to the display mode of the princess' face] 46A, or the pre-reading notice presentation effect in which the display mode of the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 46(g) changes to the display mode of the lord's face] is started. The display according to the operation timing of the second operating means" is a display showing the first remaining time, the gaming table. ] Was also explained. The first remaining time may be the remaining time until the advance notice effect is started.

Further, “The notice effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display that is being performed when the display of the third display is started [for example, the display mode of the variation icon c shown in FIG. 45(h) is a princess' face. Notice that changes to the display mode of
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

More specifically, as the notice effect, so-called pseudo-relation effect, a second reach effect developed from the first reach effect [for example, super reach effect, etc.], or an improvement in the expectation of a big hit in the reach effect is suggested. Examples of the effects include [for example, change in character color of title or dialogue], cut-in effect [for example, cut-in effect immediately before stop of design] and the like.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display, the fifth display is a display of a hold icon, the display means, depending on the number of the hold icon to be displayed. , A display capable of displaying a display indicating the number of holdings, and the notice effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon to a display mode of a prefetch notice [for example, the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 46(g). The display mode of the pre-reading notice effect that changes to the display mode of the lord's face, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

The display means may or may not always display a display showing the number of holdings, may display something other than the number of holdings, or may display only the number of holdings. It may be one that does.

Further, "when the number of holdings is increased during the display of the third display, the display mode of one or more holding icons of the holding icons indicating the number of holdings before the increase is A gaming table characterized in that there is a change in the display mode [for example, a change in the display mode of the second hold icon shown in FIG. 46(h)]. ] Was also explained.

In addition, when a plurality of the hold icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of hold icons”) are displayed at the time when the display of the third display is started, one of the plurality of hold icons is displayed. The display mode of the plurality of hold icons may change to the display mode of the prefetch notice.

In addition, in the case where the number of holdings increases during the display of the third display, the display mode of one or more holding icons of the holding icons representing the number of holdings after the increase indicates A game table characterized in that the display mode may change. ] Was also explained.

If a plurality of the hold icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of hold icons”) are displayed at the time when the notice effect is started, one or a plurality of the hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed. The display mode of may be changed to the display mode of the prefetching notice.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display [for example, time display T1 and the like shown in FIG. 48], and the sixth display is the first remaining time [for example, , The display indicating the second remaining time, which is different from the display indicating 25:00 seconds at the timing of FIG. 48(b) [for example, 5:00 seconds at the timing of FIG. 48(b)]. The gaming table, wherein the third display is a display that may be displayed together with the sixth display. ] Was also explained. Note that the third display may be a display that is always displayed together with the sixth display.

In addition, the gaming machine is provided with "counting means [for example, counter timer 412 or the like], and the display indicating the first remaining time is a display corresponding to the count value of the counting means. ] Was also explained.

In addition, the symbol display means [eg, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, etc.] capable of executing the variable display of symbols, the first control means [eg, the main control section 300, etc.], and the second And a control unit [for example, a first sub-control unit 400 or the like], the second control unit is a control unit capable of executing control according to a command from the first control unit. The first control means is a control means capable of controlling the symbol display means [for example, a control means for executing special figure state update processing], and the second control means is a control for the display means [for example, , Effect control processing, etc.], and the second control means may be means provided with the counting means. Further, the second control means may be a control means composed of a plurality of control means [for example, the basic circuit 402 and the VDP 434 and VRAM 436].

The symbol display means may be a means that always displays the symbol variable display, a means that may display the symbol variable display, or a means other than the symbol variable display. Alternatively, only the variable display of symbols may be executed. Further, the second control means may be a means that always executes the control according to the command from the first control means, or a means that may execute the control, or The control may be executed in addition to the control according to the command from the first control means, or may be executed only according to the command from the first control means.

In addition, when the operation timing of the second operation means coincides with the first timing [eg, the timing of the mark JI in the example shown on the right side of FIG. The display is started in a third display mode [for example, a special mode in which chances and gray characters are displayed as shown in FIG. 50(a)], and the third display is the second operation. When the operation timing of the means does not coincide with the first timing, the display is performed in the fourth display mode [for example, the opportunity shown in FIG. 50(B) and the cut-in notice image C1 displayed in black characters]. A gaming table, which is a display to be started. ] Was also explained.

Further, “third operation means [for example, button B (operation button 137′) shown in FIG. 50(a)] and the like is provided, and the third display is provided when the third operation means is operated. Also, the display is a display that may be started [for example, a display of a cut-in advance notice image C3 of a special mode in which the princess character is displayed as shown in FIG. 50(I)]. Game table. ] Was also explained.

In addition, “third display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like] capable of performing variable display of decorative symbols is provided, and the display means [for example, timer notice display means 209′ or the like] is the third A game stand characterized in that it is a means separate from the display means. ] Was also explained.

The third display means may or may not always execute the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may perform a display other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. Alternatively, only the variable display of the decorative pattern may be executed.

Further, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like shown in FIG. 1], the game table. ] Was also explained.

Finally, an example in which there are a plurality of timings at which the display modes of the plurality of hold icons start changing will be described.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing, step by step, the manner in which the decorative pattern in which the animation of the hold icon is executed is displayed in a variable manner.

In FIG. 52( a ), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display (fixed display) a stopped stop pattern, and the decorative pattern display device 208 has a variability. "Decorative 3"-"Decorative 4"-"Decorative 1" are displayed. In addition, both the fourth design 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth design 2082 of the special figure 2 are white stop display. The three first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 52(a) are lit up, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays three black circle holding icons which are the holding display of the special diagram 1. Therefore, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area 208e.

FIG. 52B shows the state immediately after the variable display of the special symbols is started on the first special symbol display device 212 and the variable display of the decorative symbols is also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the update (variable display) of the decorative symbol is continuously started in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Only two of the first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 52(b) are lit, while the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208 has three holding icons (holding icon). h1 to h3) are displayed, and the variable icon is not yet displayed in the variable icon display area 208e. This is a result of the time lag that occurs because the fluctuation is just starting. Further, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a circular display has been changed to a changing display (gray).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52(c), the movement animation of the hold icon has started. The movement animation here is an animation in which the hold icon moves diagonally to the upper left and then diagonally to the lower right, and the hold icon, which has been the first hold icon h1 until now, moves toward the variable icon display area 208e. The hold icon, which has been the second hold icon h2 until now, moves toward the position where the first hold icon h1 has been displayed, and the hold icon which has been the third hold icon h3 until now is the second hold icon h3. It moves toward the position where the hold icon h2 was displayed.

In FIG. 52D, the movement of the hold icon is completed, and the change icon c in the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e. Further, only two hold icons (hold icons h1 and h2) are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. Here, there is a one-ball winning in the first special figure starting port 230, the number of holding of special figure 1 is increased by 1, the first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 52 (e) is increased by 1 and 3 The individual lights. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the increase animation of the hold icon is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52(e), the upper end portion of the increase hold icon hi starts to be seen from the bottom of the display screen.

Also in FIG. 52(f), the increase animation of the hold icon continues, and the increase hold icon hi is about to reach the position where the third hold icon h3 is displayed. In FIG. 52(g), the hold icon increases. The animation ends, and the black circled third hold icon h3 is displayed.

In FIG. 52(h), the stop symbol of the loss is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to a display during stop (white). doing. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 52(h), the combination of missing decorative patterns of "decoration 2"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, but the variable icon display area The variable icon c still remains in 208e. In the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 52(i), the fixed stop symbols are displayed for confirmation, and also in the decorative pattern display device 208, "decoration 2"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 3". The combination of the decorative patterns that are lost is fixedly displayed, and the variable icon c is also disappeared.

52(j) to (l), the symbol variation display of the next special diagram 1 is performed, the stop display is performed in FIG. 52(m), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In, the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed.

52(a) to 52(n) described above is the castle town stage, and the background image of the decorative pattern display device 208 is the townscape of the castle town. Here, a stage change occurs. The stage change starts at the same time as the start of the variable display of the special symbols, and at the same time as the start of the variable display of the next special diagram 1 in FIG. (o), the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a mesh. The background image temporarily changes to a background image in which the princess character is displayed in the center of the background image. This background image is a background image dedicated to stage change that does not belong to any stage. When the background image dedicated to the stage change is displayed, the hold icon, the frame of the variable icon display area 208e and the variable icon c that have been displayed until then disappear, and the variable display of the reduced decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left. While being displayed, the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082 are only displayed on the upper right. In this state, the player does not know which stage to change to, and the player pays attention to the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 with interest. Eventually, the background image switches to a dark background image as shown in FIG. 52(p), and the stage change is completed. Here, we have switched from the castle town stage to the dark stage. When the stage change is completed, the hold icon, the frame of the variable icon display area 208e, and the display of the variable icon c itself are restored, and the variable display of the decorative symbols is also changed to the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right. It is performed in the symbol display area 208c. On the castle town stage, the default display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon is round, but on the dark stage, the default display mode is a quadrangle. In FIG. 52(p), the black square first hold icon h1 is displayed. And a black square variation icon c is displayed. In this way, the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon may change depending on the stage. Also, the decorative design and the fourth design may be changed according to the stage.

As for the stages described above, a plurality of stages are prepared in addition to the castle town stage and the dark stage, and the stage changes according to the control state (for example, the probable state/non-probable state, the electric support state/the non-electric support state). Is performed, or the stage is changed according to the number of times of variable display.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the simultaneous change of the holding icons while the symbols are stopped.

After the movement animation ends, there is a one-ball winning in the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased by 1 to become 3 while the symbols of special figure 1 are changing. In other words, the number of third reserves has increased here. The first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 53(b) is increased by one and turned on three. Although not shown in the decorative symbol display device 208, the increase animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 52 is executed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53B has three hold icons h1. ~h3 is displayed. The third hold increased here is subject to prefetching notice, but is displayed in the default display mode (black circle display mode) during symbol change in FIG. 53(b). In the following figures, the increase animation of the hold icon may be omitted, but the increase animation is executed unless otherwise specified.

In FIG. 53(c), stop display is performed, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 53(d) to FIG. 53(f), the decorative pattern is a decorative pattern of "decoration 2"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 3". The combination of is confirmed and displayed. During this confirmation display, the effect of the pre-reading notice of the third hold increased during the symbol variation display (corresponding to an example of the first effect display) is executed. In this effect, the display mode changes together with the increased third hold icon h3 and the hold icons (first hold icon h1, second hold icon h2) that were displayed when the third hold was increased. The first hold icon h1, the second hold icon h2, and the third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 53(d) are all black circle display modes (default display modes), but in FIG. The effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f, the effect display e4 overlaps these three hold icons h1 to h3, and the three hold icons h1 to h3 become invisible for a moment. When the effect display e4 disappears, as shown in FIG. 53(f), all the three hold icons h1 to h3 are changed to the display mode of the lord's face (pre-reading notice display mode). Here, the change of the display mode is simultaneous and the change of the same display mode, but it may be changed one by one in order, or may be changed to a different display mode (hereinafter The same applies to the simultaneous changes explained.).

In FIG. 53(g), the symbol variable display of the next special diagram 1 is started, and in FIG. 53(h), the hold icon in the display mode of the lord's face has started moving animation, and FIG. 53(i). Then, the movement of the hold icon is completed, and the change icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e. Further, in the hold icon display area 208f, two hold icons h1 and h2 in the display mode of the lord's face are displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 53, from the start of the pattern change to the end of the hold icon movement animation corresponds to an example of the first period, and if there is a hold increase in the first period, the The effect of simultaneous change display of the hold icons (hereinafter referred to as simultaneous change effect) is performed within one period. On the other hand, if there is no hold increase in this first period, and there is a hold increase in the second period (the period up to immediately before FIGS. 53(a) to 53(c)) after the end of the first period. The simultaneous change effect is not performed in the second period during the symbol change, but the simultaneous change effect is performed in the period during the fixed display (FIGS. 53D to 53F). The end of the first period may be the start of the second period.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the simultaneous change of the hold icons when there is a hold increase while the symbols are stopped.

In FIG. 54(c), stop display is performed, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 54(d) to FIG. 54(f), the decorative pattern of the "decoration 2"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 3" is lost. The combination of is confirmed and displayed. Since the confirmation display is also displayed during the stop display, the confirmation display is also referred to as a stop display in the following description. During this stop display, there is a one-ball winning in the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reserved special figures 1 is increased by one to become three. In other words, here again, the third reserve is increased. The first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 53(f) is increased by one and lit three. The third hold increased here will also be subject to prefetch notice. At the time of the increase of the hold during the stop display, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not execute the increase animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. That is, the execution of the increase animation is canceled. However, only part of the increase animation may be executed, or all of the increase animation may be executed.

In FIG. 54(f), the effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f, making it difficult to visually recognize the entire hold icon display area 208f. That is, the effect display e4 overlaps the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon h2 that have been displayed in the black circle display mode (default display mode), and includes the two hold icons h1 and h2. It becomes invisible for a moment. When the effect display e4 disappears, the third hold icon h3 increases as shown in FIG. 54(g). The display mode of the third hold icon h3 is a display mode of the face of the lord (a display mode of the prefetch notice). Further, both the display mode of the first hold icon h1 and the display mode of the second hold icon h2, which have been the display mode of the black circle (default display mode) so far, the display mode of the face of the lord (pre-reading notice display mode) Are changing at the same time. That is, all the three hold icons h1 to h3 including the increased third hold icon h3 are displayed in the display mode of the face of the lord (pre-reading notice display mode). In FIG. 54(g), the variable display of symbols is started, and the subsequent steps are the same as in the example of FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 54, the hold is increased while the symbols are stopped, and the simultaneous change effect using the effect display e4 is executed before the increased hold icon is displayed. That is, the simultaneous change effect is executed immediately after the increase of the hold or with the increase of the hold.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of simultaneous change of the hold icons when the number of hold increases by two during the change of the symbol.

55(a) to 55(c) are in the process of changing symbols, and among them, at the timing of FIG. 55(b) after the end of the moving animation, there is a one-ball winning at the first special figure starting opening 230, The number of reservations in FIG. 1 is increased by one to three. That is, here, the third hold is increased, and the third hold is a target of the look-ahead notice as a result of the pre-reading notice execution availability lottery in the first sub-control unit 400. The first special symbol hold lamp 218 shown in FIG. 55(b) increases by one and lights three, and the third hold icon h3 in the black circle display mode (default display mode) increases and the three hold icons. h1 to h3 are displayed. Also, at the subsequent timing of FIG. 55(c), there is a one-ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of holdings of special figure 1 is further increased by one to become four (full tank). That is, although the fourth hold is increased here, as a result of the pre-reading notice execution possibility lottery in the first sub-control unit 400, the fourth hold is not the target of the pre-reading notice. The first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 55(c) increases by one and lights four, and the fourth holding icon h4 in the black circle display mode (default display mode) increases and four holding icons. h1 to h4 are displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIGS. 55(d) to (g), the combination of missing decorative patterns of "decoration 2"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. During this stop display, the simultaneous change effect is executed as the effect of the pre-reading notice of the third hold increased during the symbol variation display, and the effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f as shown in FIG. 55(f). After it becomes difficult to visually confirm the entire hold icon display area 208f, the effect display e4 disappears and the display of the hold icon resumes, as shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55(g), the hold icon (first hold icon h1, second hold) that has already been displayed when the third hold increases, together with the third hold icon h3 of the prefetching notice target. The icon h2) is also changed to the display mode of the lord's face (pre-reading notice display mode), but the fourth hold icon h4 corresponding to the fourth hold increased after the third hold increases is displayed. The mode has not changed, and remains the black circle display mode (default display mode). In this way, even if it is called a simultaneous change effect, not all of the displayed hold icons necessarily change.

Even in this example, the period from the start of the pattern change to the end of the hold icon movement animation corresponds to an example of the first period, and if there is a hold increase in this first period, the first Simultaneous change production will be performed within the period. On the other hand, when there is no hold increase in this first period, and there is a hold increase in the second period (the period immediately before FIG. 55A to FIG. 55D) after the end of the first period. Does not perform the simultaneous change effect during the second period during the symbol change, and does the simultaneous change effect during the period during the stop display (FIGS. 55D to 55G).

Further, the first half period from the start of variable display of the decorative pattern (for example, the period before the reach effect is started) is set as the first period, and the second half period until the end of variable display (for example, the first period). The period of the latter half part following) may be the second period. The end of the first period may be the start of the second period.

Further, the first period may be a period from the start of display of the variable display to the display of the variable icon, that is, a period of time until the first hold icon h1 moves to the variable icon display area 208e, or from the start of display of the variable display. It may be a period until one of the plurality of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped (so-called first stop, or the first temporary stop in the simulated continuous production), or a combination of decorative symbols from the start of display of variable display. May be a period until reach the reach state. It should be noted that only one of the plurality of types of examples for the first period listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. You may.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of simultaneous change of the holding icons when the number of holdings is increased by two while the symbols are stopped.

56(c) to FIG. 56(g) are in the stopped state, among them, at the timing of FIG. 56(f), there is a one-ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of special figures 1 to be reserved. Is increased by 1 to become 3. That is, here, the third hold is increased, and the third hold is the target of the prefetch notice. The first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 56(f) is increased by one and lit three, but the effect display e4 appears in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the holding icon. The entire display area 208f is difficult to see. The increase animation of the hold icon due to the increase of the 3rd hold has been canceled.

Further, even at the timing of FIG. 56(g), there is a one-ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of holdings of special figure 1 is further increased by one to become four (full tank). That is, the fourth hold is increased during the execution of the simultaneous change effect which is the look-ahead notice effect, but the fourth hold is not the target of the look-ahead notice. Although the first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 56(g) is increased by one and lit four, the effect display e4 is continuously displayed and held in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire icon display area 208f is still difficult to see. The increase animation of the hold icon due to the increase of the 4th hold has also been canceled.

In FIG. 56(h), the effect display e4 disappears and the display of the hold icon resumes. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 56(h), the third hold icon h3 of the prefetching notice object is displayed in the display mode of the face of the lord (previewing notice display mode), and the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon. The icon h2 is also changed to the display mode of the lord's face (pre-reading notice display mode), but the fourth hold icon h4 corresponding to the fourth hold increased after the third hold is increased, and the black circle display mode is displayed. It is displayed in (default display mode). In this way, when the number of holdings increases while the symbols are stopped, the simultaneous change effect is immediately started as the prefetching notice effect, but when there is an increase in holding during the execution of the simultaneous change effect, the holding is increased. The increase is excluded, and the hold icons before the simultaneous change effect execution are changed at the same time. In addition, while the symbols are stopped, the simultaneous change effect will be executed immediately when the special figure is increased, but even if the fourth hold is increased before the simultaneous change effect is started, the third hold is a prefetch notice. If it is a target, the fourth hold icon h4 corresponding to the fourth hold is not displayed in the display mode of the prefetching notice. Further, if the fourth hold is the subject of the prefetch notice, both the third hold icon h3 and the fourth hold icon h4 are displayed in the display form of the prefetch notice.

As described above, in both FIG. 56(f) and FIG. 56(g), the increase animation of the hold icon is canceled, but the hold increase amount after the start of the simultaneous change effect that is the prefetch notice effect is changed to the hold You may perform the icon increase animation. In FIG. 56(f′), as in the case of FIG. 56(f), the effect display e4 appears and the entire hold icon display area 208f is displayed by the start of the simultaneous change effect accompanying the third hold being a prefetching notice target. It is difficult to see. In this state, there is an increase in the fourth hold, but since the simultaneous change effect is started, the increase animation of the hold icon is started. In FIG. 56(g1′), the upper end portion of the increase suspension icon hi starts to be seen from the bottom of the display screen. Since the layer on which the increase suspension icon hi is displayed is behind the layer on which the effect display e4 is displayed, the increase suspension icon hi is overlapped by the effect display e4. In FIG. 56(g1′) and subsequent FIG. 56(g2′), an increase suspending icon hi in a black circle display mode, which is partially hidden by the effect display e4, is shown.

Note that as the increase animation of the hold icon with the increase of the third hold, the increase hold icon hi in the display mode of the lord's face (pre-reading notice display mode) may appear together with the effect display e4.
Next, the simultaneous change effect of the hold icons in the winning order change machine will be described.

The description so far has been on the priority change of the special figure 2. That is, it was an explanation about the increase in holding of the special figure 1 when the symbol variation of the special figure 2 is prioritized. Note that the same holds true for the increase in the number of reservations in special figure 2.

Here, in the case of the winning order variation machine which starts the symbol variation display from the winning timing to the first special figure starting port 230 and the winning to the second special figure starting port 232, the winning timing is the earlier timing. explain.
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the winning order variation.

In the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 57, eight hold icons including the four hold of Special Figure 1 and the four hold of Special Figure 2 can be displayed. The variable icon display area 208e is provided in the lower left corner.

In FIG. 57A, six hold icons h1 to h6 are displayed. All of these six hold icons h1 to h6 have a black circle display mode (default display mode). Further, the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h1 of the six hold icons h1 to h6 is the hold of the special figure 2.

In FIG. 57(b), the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is increased while the symbols are changing, and the seventh holding icon h7 is added to the holding icon display area 208f. Also in this case, an increase animation similar to the increase animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 52 is executed, but the illustration is omitted. Eventually, the symbol variation ends and the symbol is stopped (FIG. 57(c) to FIG. 57(d)). In this example, the pre-reading notice execution availability lottery for the seventh hold is lost, and the simultaneous change effect of the hold icons is not started.

Next, the suspension of the special figure 2 corresponding to the first hold icon h1 is exhausted, and as shown in FIG. 57(e), the variable display of the special figure is started on the second special figure display device 214, and the decorative pattern is displayed. The device 208 also starts the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57(f), a movement animation similar to the movement animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 52(c) is started, and in FIG. 57(g), the hold icon moves. Is completed, the variable icon c in the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 208e.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of a simultaneous change of the holding icons when the number of holdings increases due to a change in the winning order.

In FIG. 58A, seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed. All of these seven hold icons h1 to h7 have a black circle display mode (default display mode). In addition, the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h1 of the seven hold icons h1 to h7 is the hold of special figure 2. The state shown in FIG. 58A is a state after the end of the moving animation.

In FIG. 58(b), the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is increased during the pattern change after the end of the movement animation, and the eighth holding icon h8 is added to the holding icon display area 208f, and the holding is full. As a result, a full tank display F called "hold MAX" is also made. In this example, the pre-reading notice execution availability lottery for the eighth hold is won, and a simultaneous change effect of the hold icons is executed thereafter.

Eventually, the symbol variation ends and the stop display is displayed (FIG. 58(c) to FIG. 58(d)). In this example, the simultaneous change effect of the hold icons is not started during the stop display.

Next, the suspension of the special figure 2 corresponding to the first hold icon h1 is exhausted, and as shown in FIG. 58(e), the variable display of the special figure is started on the second special figure display device 214 to display the decorative symbol. The device 208 also starts the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 58(f), a movement animation similar to the movement animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 52(c) is started, and in FIG. 58(g), the hold icon moves. Is completed, seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f, and the change icon c is displayed in the change icon display area 208e. The display mode of the seven hold icons h1 to h7 and the variable icon c is a black circle display mode (default display mode).

When the movement of the hold icon is completed, a simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is started. That is, the simultaneous change effect is started at the end of the movement animation of the hold icon. The effect display e5 also appears in this simultaneous change effect, but the effect display e5 here is a display overlapping the variable icon display area 208e together with the hold icon display area 208f as shown in FIG. 58(h). Therefore, in addition to the seven hold icons h1 to h7, the variable icon c becomes difficult to visually recognize. The effect display e5 shown in FIG. 58(h) does not overlap the position at which the eighth hold icon h8 is displayed, but may overlap up to this position. Further, the variable icon display area 208e may be an effect display that does not overlap.

In FIG. 58(i), the effect display e5 disappears, the hold icon becomes visible, and the variable icon c becomes visible. The simultaneous change effect here is a prefetch notice that the eighth hold when the hold is increased (FIG. 58(b)) is the notice target, but because the hold is exhausted, the eighth hold is the seventh. It is on hold, and the eighth hold icon h8 is not displayed in the first place. Therefore, the seventh hold icon h7, the first hold icon h1 to the sixth hold icon h6, and the variable icon c are displayed, and the display modes of all the displayed icons are changed. Moreover, in the simultaneous change effect here, the display mode does not change to one type of common display mode but to a plurality of types of display modes. It should be noted that there may be cases where the display modes of all the pending icons that have changed all at once differ.

Further, the simultaneous change effect may be executed at the timing when the movement animation of the hold icon is executed. 58(d') is in the stop display as in FIG. 58(d), and in FIG. 58(e'), as in FIG. 58(e), the variable display of special symbols is started and the decorative symbol is displayed. Also in the device 208, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In the previous example, immediately after this, the moving animation of the hold icon was started, but in this example, the effect display e5 appears at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern or immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. , The simultaneous change production has started. In FIG. 58(f'), the effect display e5 disappears, the seventh hold icon h7, the first hold icon h1 to the sixth hold icon h6, and the variation icon c are displayed, and all of these displayed The display mode of the icon is changing

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example when the number of holdings is increased and the holding is full while the stop display is being performed in the change of the winning order.

59(a) to FIG. 59(b), the stop display is displayed. At the timing between FIG. 59(a) and FIG. 59(b), there is a one-ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, The number of holdings in Fig. 1 is increased by 1 and the number of holdings is increased to 8. When the number of holdings is increased during the stop display, the increase animation of the holding icon is canceled, and as shown in Fig. 59(b). The first special symbol hold lamp 218 is increased by one and lights up four, and the eighth hold icon h8 in the black circle display mode (default display mode) is increased. When the number of tanks is increased and the tank is full, the full tank display F described in Fig. 58 is not displayed, that is, the full tank display F is displayed only while the symbol is changing. Is short and cannot be displayed for a certain period of time in the full tank display F. Thus, the next symbol variation display is started without the full tank display F being displayed (see FIG. 59(c)), Although illustration is omitted, a movement animation of the hold icon is executed, and thereafter, a simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is started, an effect display e5 appears (see FIG. 59(d)), and in FIG. The display e5 disappears, the seventh hold icon h7, the first hold icon h1 to the sixth hold icon h6, and the variation icon c are re-displayed, and the display mode of all these re-displayed icons changes. There is.

The full tank display F may be displayed during the stop display even for a short time. Further, the moving animation of the hold icon may be omitted. In addition, if the number of holdings does not increase during the change of the symbols, or if the holding is not full, the batch change effect of the holding icons may not be started.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example in which the simultaneous change effect is not executed or is executed depending on the type of the hold icon displayed. In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 60, in FIG. 60(b), the second hold icon h2 changes to the hold icon in the display mode (second display mode) of the character “heat”. This display mode (second display mode) may be a display mode of a read-ahead notice having the highest degree of reliability (anticipation of a big hit), or may be a display mode in which two or more are not displayed at the same time. The display mode may be a rare display mode having the lowest appearance rate. Note that only one of the plurality of types of examples of the second display mode listed here may be applied, the plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. You may apply. Even if the number of holds increases while the hold icon in such a display mode is displayed, the simultaneous change effect is not executed.

On the other hand, in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 60, in FIG. 60(B), the second hold icon h2 is changed to the hold icon in the illuminated display mode (first display mode). This display mode (first display mode) may be a display mode of a look-ahead notice with the lowest reliability (anticipation of a big hit), or may be a display mode in which two or more are displayed at the same time. The display mode having the second highest appearance rate after the default display mode may be used. Note that only one of the examples of the plurality of types of the first display mode listed here may be applied, the examples of the plurality of types may be applied, or all types may be applied. You may apply. When the number of holdings increases while the holding icon in such a display mode is displayed (see the third holding icon h3 in FIG. 60C), if the increased holding becomes a target of the prefetching notice, it changes all at once. The effect is executed (see FIG. 60(E)).

FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining a simultaneous change effect when a pending full tank is generated due to a change in the winning order.

The third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 61(a) is changed to the display mode of the longest character. The third hold icon h3 has a display mode changed by an effect different from the simultaneous change effect. For example, there may be a case where a character having the longest character appears from the beginning when winning, or a case where only the hold icon changes to a character having the longest character at the start of the next variation. In FIG. 61(d), the eighth hold icon h8 increases and the hold becomes full while the symbol is changing. When the tank is full while the symbols are changing, the full tank display F is displayed between the time when the tank is full and the stop display of the currently displayed symbol fluctuation display (FIGS. 61(c) to (d)). Is displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 61(f), the full display F disappears when the confirmation display is reached. Then, even when the display mode of the hold icon is changed by another effect, when the hold is full, the movement of the hold icon in the next change (see FIG. 61(g)) ends, and The simultaneous change effect is started as shown in 61(i), and the display modes of all the icons of the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7 and the variable icon c are changed as shown in FIG. .. In this example, regardless of the display mode of the hold icon as described with reference to FIGS. 60(a) to 60(e), the simultaneous change effect is executed in response to the hold full. .. Therefore, here, the third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 61(a) has the display mode of the longest character, but even in the display mode of the character of "heat" shown in FIG. 60(b), When the hold is full, the simultaneous change effect is executed. However, even if the hold is full, if the hold icon in the display mode (second display mode) of the character “heat” is displayed, the simultaneous change effect may not be executed.

In FIG. 61(A), the display mode of all the hold icons of the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7 has already been changed to the display mode of the lord's face due to the simultaneous change effect. Even in this case, the full tank display F is displayed when the reserved tank is full while the symbols are changing. Then, even after the simultaneous change effect has already been executed, the simultaneous change effect is executed again in response to the pending full state (see FIG. 61(C)). That is, if all the holding icons whose display mode has been changed due to the simultaneous change effect are fully filled before the holding icons are exhausted, the simultaneous change effect is executed again. The example of the winning order variation machine described with reference to FIGS. 58, 59, and 61 can be applied to the case where the reserved tank is full, even in the case of the special figure 2 priority variation machine or the alternate variation machine. Here is an example.

In the above description, the gaming table is provided with "effect display means [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208 or the like], and the effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons. Is a means capable of displaying a number of the hold icons according to the number of holds, and the effect display means displays a variable display of a decorative symbol [for example, immediately before FIG. 52(b) to FIG. (h)]. It is a possible means, the effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display, one effect display of the plurality of kinds of effect display is a first effect display, the first effect display, The effect display is an effect display in which the display modes of the plurality of hold icons are changed, and the first effect display is the first period in the variable display [for example, the hold icon after starting the pattern change. Is a production display that may be started in the period until the movement animation of the above is finished], and when the first production display is not started in the first period of the variation display, the variation is displayed. Also in the second period in the display [for example, the period until immediately before FIG. 53(a) to FIG. 53(c), the period immediately before FIG. 55(a) to FIG. 55(d)] The gaming table is configured so that the display is not started, and the second period is a period after the first period. ] Was explained.

In addition, "the effect display in which the display modes of the plurality of hold icons are respectively changed" may be an effect display in which the display modes of all of the plurality of hold icons are changed at the same time, or an effect display that is changed one by one. May be used, or the effect display may be changed in plurals. It should be noted that only one of the examples of the plurality of types of effect display enumerated here may be applied, the examples of a plurality of types may be applied, or all types may be applied. Good.

Further, for example, when the number of holdings is increased in the first period, the first effect display may be started to be displayed in the first period. In addition, when the hold is increased during the stop display of the decorative design, the first effect display is started to be displayed in the first period in the variable display started following the stop display of the decorative design. There are cases where

Further, the effect display unit may be a unit that always displays a plurality of hold icons, a unit that may display a plurality of hold icons, or a unit that displays other than a plurality of hold icons. Alternatively, only a plurality of hold icons may be displayed.

In addition, “the first period is a period in which a start time is a time when the variable display is started [for example, a first half period including FIG. 52(b)], and the second period is in an end period. The gaming table, which is a period when the variable display is finished [for example, a period of the latter half portion until immediately before FIG. 52(h)]. ] Was also explained.

For example, when the display of the first effect display is not started when the display of the variable display is started, the display of the first effect display is not started during the display of the variable display. That is, the display of the first effect display is started only at the time of start of fluctuation in the display of the fluctuation display.

Further, "the end of the first period is the start of the second period, a gaming machine. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "the effect display means is a means capable of displaying a stop display of the decorative symbol, and the first effect display is started while the stop display is being displayed [for example, FIG. ), the case shown in FIG. 55(f), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

For example, when the hold is increased during the display of the stop display, the first effect display may be started to be displayed during the display of the stop display. Further, even when the hold is increased during the display of the variable display before the stop display, the first effect display may be started during the display of the stop display.

Further, the effect display means may be means for always displaying the stop display of the decorative symbol, may be means for displaying it, and may display a display other than the stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be a means or a means for displaying only the stop display of the decorative pattern.

In addition, in the case where “the first effect display is started after the variable display when the number of holdings is increased during the display of the variable display [for example, the case shown in FIG. 55(f), etc.] is a production display. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect display is the first period in the variable display that is started next to the variable display in which the number of holdings is increased (hereinafter, referred to as "first variable display". 58H is a presentation display that may be displayed during the first half period including FIG. 58H]. ] Was also explained.

The first effect display may be an effect display that is always displayed during the first period in the variable display that starts next to the first variable display.

In addition, “The number of the plurality of hold icons whose display modes are respectively changed by the first effect display is the number before the increase of the hold number that is increased during the display of the first variable display [eg, FIG. [Example shown in]. ] Was also explained.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second effect display, and the second effect display is a movement animation of the hold icon [for example, shown in FIG. 52(k). Animation, etc.], and the movement animation is an animation whose display is completed before the second period is started. ] Was also explained.

Further, "the effect display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon in a first display mode [for example, a display mode in which the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 60(B) is shining], and The display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon in a second display mode [for example, a display mode of characters of “heat” of the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 60(b)], and the plurality of hold Even if the icon includes the hold icon in the first display mode, the first effect display is configured to start displaying during the first period, and the plurality of hold If at least one of the hold icons in the second display mode is included in the icons, the first effect display is not started to be displayed even in the first period. A gaming table characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

It should be noted that the first display mode may be a read-ahead notice display mode, and the second display mode may be a read-ahead notice display mode, and the first display mode and the second display mode may be used. And the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot is different, and the second display mode may be a display mode in which the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot is higher than that of the first display mode, On the contrary, the display mode may be low.

Further, the effect display means may be a means that always displays the hold icon in the first display mode, a means that may display the hold icon, or a first hold icon. It may be a means for displaying other than the display mode, or a means for displaying the holding icon only in the first display mode.

Further, the effect display means may be a means that always displays the hold icon in the second display mode, a means that may display the hold icon, or a second display of the hold icon. It may be a means for displaying other than the display mode, or a means for displaying the holding icon only in the second display mode.

Further, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like shown in FIG. 1], the game table. ] Was also explained.

It should be noted that, in the gaming table provided with "effect display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like], the effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons, and the effect display means holds It is a means that can display the number of the hold icons according to the number, the effect display means is a means that can display a plurality of types of effect display, one effect display of a plurality of types of effect display, It is a first effect display, the first effect display is an effect display in which the display modes of the plurality of hold icons are respectively changed, and the first effect display is a first period [for example, a symbol variation. Is the effect display that may be started in the period from the start of the operation until the animation of the hold icon ends], and when the first effect display is not started in the first period, , The first effect display also in the second period [for example, the period immediately before FIGS. 53(a) to (c), and the period immediately before FIGS. 55(a) to (d)]. Is configured so that the display is not started and the second period is a period after the first period."

Furthermore, in a gaming machine provided with effect display means, the effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons, and the effect display means displays the hold icons in a number corresponding to the number of hold. It is a displayable means, the effect display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols, the effect display means is a means capable of displaying a stop display of decorative symbols, and the effect display means is , A means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays, one of the plurality of types of effect displays is a first effect display, and the first effect display is a plurality of the hold icons. Is a production display in which each display mode changes, the first production display is a production display that may be started during execution of the stop display, and the first production display is the variable display. Is a performance display that may not be started during execution of ".

The first effect display may be an effect display that is always displayed during execution of the stop display. Further, the first effect display may be an effect display that is not necessarily started to be displayed during execution of the variable display.

Further, the first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the stop display when the number of holdings is increased during execution of the stop display, and the first effect display is The gaming table, which is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the stop display that is displayed next to the variable display when the number of holding increases during execution of the variable display. .. Was also explained.

It should be noted that the first effect display may be an effect display that is always displayed during execution of the stop display when the number of holding increases during execution of the stop display. Further, the first effect display is an effect display that is always started during the execution of the stop display that is displayed next to the variable display when the pending display is increased during the execution of the variable display. Good.

9 to 61 described above may be an example in one pachinko machine or may be an example executed in each different pachinko machine.
FIG. 62 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 62, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium shot from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 is discharged from the game area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. Further, display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, ball rental, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 1 are not provided.
The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

FIG. 63 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, as seen from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 63), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are housed, and the slot machine 1000 has It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, each symbol is printed on a strip-shaped member at an equal number of intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame member to form each reel 1010 to 1012. .. The symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in a vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 by the player, and a total of 9 symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols seen by the player is changed. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A back light (not shown in FIG. 63) for illuminating each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged on the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each design so that the individual designs can be uniformly illuminated. An optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided near each of the reels 1010 to 1012 inside the slot machine 1000. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotation direction of the symbol on the reel is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the pay line.

The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 1014 that is activated. The activated pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as the game medium. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, when one bet on a medal is bet, the horizontal pay line on the middle row is valid, and when two bets are placed on a medal, an upper horizontal pay line and a lower horizontal pay line are added. When three coins are activated and three medals are bet, the five lines to which the rightward winning line and the rightward winning line are added are effective as winning lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to five lines. For example, when one bet is placed on a bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the right line. Five lines of the downward winning line and the rightward winning line may be valid as the winning line. The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The re-play lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is re-playable (there is no need to insert medals) when a re-play, which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a production lamp.

The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) that are electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three cards are inserted, one when the bet button 1031 is pressed, two are inserted, and when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three pieces are put in. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals have been inserted, a game start notification indicating that a game start operation is possible is started. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

The medal insertion slot 1034 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically by using the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, and an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. is there. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display device 1026 is a display device for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of paid-out medals during a bonus game) by numerical values. The payout number display unit 1027 is a display unit for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination.

The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process for performing a lottery to determine which one of a plurality of types of winning combinations has been won is executed. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively disadvantageous state.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light-emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light-emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing the medal when the inserted medal is jammed to remove the medal. The settlement button 1043 is a button for settlement of the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals, and discharging from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided.

The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A rendering device 1080 is arranged above the front door 1002. The rendering device 1080 is a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right doors 1063a and left doors 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (illustrated in the drawing) disposed behind the door member 1063. When the two right doors 1063a and the left door 1063b are opened to the outside in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (player). Side) has a structure that appears. It should be noted that it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, as long as it is configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information, and is composed of, for example, a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. It may be a display device or the like. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the whole of the display screen is visible to the player. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but it may be a square flat surface. Further, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the periphery of the display screen may be hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen may look odd. Further, the display screen may have a curved surface.

In the slot machine 1000 described above, bet buttons 1030 to 1032, a start lever 1035, a stop button 1037 to 1039, etc., as well as an operation key unit 1090 (an example of a first operation means or a third operation means) are used as operation means. ) And effect button 1091 (an example of a second operation means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, the display panel 1070 displaying the title of the device and the like can project toward the front side. A light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 63 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can be pushed in and functions as an operating unit (button) like the transmitting unit 191, and an example of an operating unit (for example, a first unit). It corresponds to one example of one operation means) and also corresponds to one example of the movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, each button of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.
<<Second Embodiment>>

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 64 to FIG. 200, another game table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) applicable to the present invention will be described in detail. It should be noted that, in principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 64 to 200 are used only in the description using FIGS. 64 to 200, and even if duplicate reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. In the description using FIG. 200, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 64-200 are given priority.
<Overall structure>

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 64. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table that allows a player to obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage tray door 108, and a launch. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is a vertically rectangular game machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A store clerk of the store (gaming store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and to be opened and closed, and is configured by a frame shape to form an inner side thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The clerk of the game shop can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In addition, in this embodiment, a light source having an LED is also called a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage dish is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pressing an opening lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage dish which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage dish opened. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “ball”) and provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launch device 110. , A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the player's operation. Ball firing handle 134 to be launched into the game area 124, an effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 66) by the operation of the player, and an effect button 136 built in the effect button 136. Chance button lamp 138 for emitting a light, a ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit. A return operation button 142 and a ball lending display section (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit are provided. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 64 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is filled with a game ball. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided. This launching device 110 sends a game ball to the game area 124 of the game board at every elapse of a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the player continuously operates the ball firing handle 134. It is fired toward and corresponds to an example of a firing means. Note that a right-hand hit button capable of maximizing the firing strength by pushing down the ball firing handle 134 may be provided.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed through the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is omitted in FIG. 64, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG. 66.
FIG. 65 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 64 viewed from the back side.

At the upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100, a ball tank 150 that has an opening that opens upward and temporarily stores game balls, and is located below the ball tank 150, and at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in rear view.

The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have temporarily stayed are delivered one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that gives a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal, when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is given a predetermined amount. Based on the satisfaction of the condition, the player is provided (paid) with a game value (game ball) in an amount according to the given condition.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 which constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 67) for performing control processing of the whole game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-board 400 (see FIG. 67) that performs control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 67) that performs the control processing related to the effect, and the payout control section 600 that performs the control processing related to the payout of the game balls ( 67) and a payout board case 172 for housing a payout board 170 having an error canceling switch 168 for canceling an error by an operation of a game shop clerk, and a launch control unit 630 (FIG. 67) for performing control processing relating to launching a game ball. (See FIG. 67), a launch board case 176 accommodating a launch board 174, a power control unit 660 (see FIG. 67) for supplying power to various electric amusement machines, and a power switch for turning the power on and off by the operation of a game shop clerk. 178 and a power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 including a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and signals of the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. A CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving is provided. FIG. 66 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front.

An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the substantial center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary The symbol reserve lamp 216, the first special symbol reserve lamp 218, the second special symbol reserve lamp 220, and the high-precision middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as a "universal symbol", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later.

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

The general figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative design displayed on the decorative design display device 208 is a design representing the design displayed on the first special design display device 212 or the second special design display device 214 in a form that enhances the effect. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of a predetermined first variable game (a detailed figure variable game which will be described later in detail) that is being held, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of variable figure games. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

The 1st special figure reservation lamp 218 and the 2nd special figure reservation lamp 220 are the lamps for showing the number of the predetermined 2nd variation game which has been reserved (details variation game which details are mentioned later), this execution. In the form, it is possible to hold the special figure variation game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight if the first special figure and the second special figure are combined). The term "hold" here means to hold the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on start information described later.

The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notifying means) for making a notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-accuracy lamp 222 is configured to be informed that the current symbol control state is not notified after the power is turned on until the big hit game is started, and thereafter not to be informed. There is. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but as the symbol control state here, it may be any of the normal state, the time saving state (electric power support state), and the probability variation state, and the state with the special symbol probability variation and It may be one of the states in which there is no change in the special figure.

In the present specification, the term "control state" is used to describe a state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100), but the term "control state" includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

In addition, a general winning opening 226, a universal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the effect device 206. ing.

In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the entry into the general winning openings 226 (in the general winning openings 226). In the case of winning the prize), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 65 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 64 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player may be referred to as "prize balls" and the balls to be lent to the player may be referred to as "rental balls" in consideration of the prize. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

In this embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 65 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls. Along with discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of itself does not change.

In this embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is provided below the universal figure starting port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232. It corresponds to a variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (den Chu). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning the prize in the second special figure starting port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232 with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the closed state of the pair of blade members 2321 is an opening/closing mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure variation game is won and the universal figure display device 210 hits and displays the symbols as a stop, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, to the second special figure starting port 232. The ball can be entered (the prize winning state is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is the state where the prize is easy. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 has either one of a small size (corresponding to the first size) and a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball). It is a variable starting region in which the easiness of entering a game ball is variable, which changes from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting region. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are open, of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special region that is the variable starting region is more than the game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230 that is the fixed starting region. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or less than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning port 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 that can open and close the variable winning opening with a solenoid. The variable winning opening is sometimes called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 is sometimes called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball is easier to enter the variable winning opening than the closed state to the other state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state, and the closed state in the variable winning port 234 of the present embodiment is such that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state of the variable winning port 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 becomes substantially vertical to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning port 234 maintains the closed state until the big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly closed to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a state in which it is completely closed. Further, the variable winning port is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 66 as long as the gaming ball is won by passing or entering the gaming ball. When the special figure variation game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

The balls contained in the upper plate 126 are supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the launch rod 146 and the launch mall 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize (general winning hole 226, variable winning hole 234) or the starting hole. Outgoing outlet 240 by winning in (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), without winning any winning port or starting port, or only passing through universal figure starting port 228. To reach.
<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. .. Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp exit 242b or a ball ridden by a game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm portion 224a to a shoulder position and an elbow of an elbow. An unillustrated forearm motor for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The production movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the respective inner ends overlap. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the lattice holes, or the shoji part of the lattice holes may be closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portion of the lattice holes may be completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 may be made completely invisible. Good.

The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 64, the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect movable member 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 66 correspond to the effect means, and among these, the decorative pattern display device 208. Corresponds to an example of the decorative pattern display means.

Further, on the game board 200, a specification sticker 290 showing the specifications of the game table is attached at a position visible to the player.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a main sub-control unit that responds to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300. In addition, a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. There is.

First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a time. A timer circuit 312 for measuring the number of times, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value within a range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit has two built-in counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each of the starting port, the winning port, and the variable winning port, and opening of the front frame door. A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame open sensor, and a lower pan full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302. 322, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general symbol display device 210 Display control of a drive circuit 326 for performing display control and various status display sections 328 (for example, the universal figure holding lamp 216, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.) And a drive circuit 334 for controlling a predetermined movable member, for example, various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232, a door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234, and the like. , Are connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere has won the special opening 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the internal counter value storage corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Stored in the register for use. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the special figure 2 starting port 232, it similarly latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 at that timing. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336, the external terminal board 349, an external hall computer (not shown), and the like. The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is provided with the voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 outputs the start signal output circuit 340 from the start signal output circuit 340. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. It is possible to communicate with the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured to be unable to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by bidirectional communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to send a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured to be unable to send a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Good.

Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, chance button lamp 138). A drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. Volume adjustment switch (not shown) for adjusting the volume to be output, operation unit sensors (not shown) that detect pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors are output to the basic circuit 402. VDP (video) for displaying the image on the decorative pattern display device 208 by reading the image data and the like stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the sensor circuit 428 and the CPU 404 and using the work area of the VRAM 436 to display the image. -Display processor) 434 is connected.

Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on this control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

In addition, the basic circuit 502, the drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, the effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and the detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. A sensor circuit 518 for outputting to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game underframe lamp drive for controlling the game underframe lamp 542. A circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540 are connected.

Next, the payout controller 600, the launch controller 630, and the power controller 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on the control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of ball rentals. Ball rental information indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout controller 600. The frame sensor 605 detects when the front frame door 106 is open and outputs an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The firing control unit 630 is a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 for instructing to permit or stop firing, and a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134 outputs the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player. Control of the firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 and the like) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off (for example, a power storage circuit) (for example, , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply controller 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout controller 600 and the second sub controller 500, and the payout controller 600 fires the main controller 300 and the second sub controller 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 68A to 68D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described.

The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first starting mouth sensor which is the ball detection sensor detects that the sphere has entered the special opening 1 starting mouth 230, and the ball enters the special opening 2 starting aperture 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on condition that the second starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor has detected that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variation display of special figure 1" (special figure Fluctuating game). Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure fluctuation game). Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 has elapsed, the first special figure display device 212 displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 in a stopped manner, and the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 2 When, passes, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of special figure. The variable display of this special map may be continuously performed multiple times.

FIG. 68(a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. In FIG. 68(a), nine types of special drawings from "special drawing A" to "special drawing I" are shown. In FIG. 68(a), the white portions in the figure show the locations of the segments where the light is turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments where the light is turned on.

In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols (“special symbol A” to “special symbol G”) are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special symbol. "Special map A" is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, 15R probable big hit pattern that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "Special map B" is a 15R jackpot pattern. So, while 5 out of 15 rounds can be expected to win coins, the remaining rounds cannot be expected to win coins, which is a real 5R probability variable jackpot design. "Special map C" is a 15R jackpot design. There is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) design that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "Special drawing D" is a 15R jackpot design, 8 out of 15 rounds. You can expect to win balls in one round, but you cannot expect to win balls in the remaining rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB. You can expect to win balls in the rounds, but you can't expect to win balls in the remaining rounds. It is a real 4R-RUB, "Special Figure F" is a 5R normal jackpot design, and "Special Figure G" is a 2R jackpot. It is a 2R probability variation big hit symbol that is called a latent probability variation or hidden probability variation that cannot be expected to win a ball in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a jackpot that directs the player in a manner in which it is difficult to specify how long a round in which a win can be expected at the start of a jackpot is expected, and a particular round (for example, 5 rounds). This is a jackpot that creates a form that encourages the player whether or not the round in which the winning of balls can be expected to continue continues when the player's eyes or the ninth round) are reached.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, determination of whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the regular jackpot and the probability jackpot is that the probability of winning the jackpot in the next special figure variation game is high (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot). Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state with a low probability is special This is called a low probability state. In addition, there is a case where the game is transferred to a time saving state (electric support state) after the big hit game is over. Here, the electric support state is a predetermined advantage that the player is higher than the non-electric support state, such as shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. The state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure (hereinafter, may be referred to as “probable probability variation”), and the state not in the short time state is referred to as a low probability state of universal figure. In this way, the electric power support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric power support state” is a state where the general map is concerned, and the “time saving state” is a state where the special figure is concerned or a state where the special figure and the special figure are concerned. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a time saving flag, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric power support state and the universal figure high probability state. It is easier to win the universal figure variation game in the universal figure high probability state than in the universal figure low probability state (normal figure probability variation). For example, the winning probability of the universal figure fluctuation game is 1/100 in the universal figure low probability state (non-electric power support state), while it increases to 99/100 in the universal figure high probability state (electric power support state). Further, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the universal figure fluctuation game becomes shorter than in the non-electric power support state (general figure variation short). For example, in the non-electric power support state, the variation time of the universal figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the power support state. In addition, in the electric power support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-electric power support state (extension of the electric charge opening period). For example, in the non-electrically-supported state, the power-chew open period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electrically-powered support state. Further, in the electrically supported state, the blade members 2321 are more likely to be opened than in the non-electrically supported state (the number of times of opening the electrically operated chew is increased). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electrically-supported state for each winning of the universal figure starting port 228 opens twice in the electrically-supported state (2 seconds open, 1 second closed, and 2 seconds again). Open). Due to the extension of the electric-chew opening period and the increase in the number of electric-chew opening times, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric power support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, particularly in a big hit game, if a game ball is picked up by an electric chu with a small number of prize balls, and the number of game balls to the variable winning port (attacker) 234 is reduced, the player may be disadvantaged. Because there is. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), all of the normal figure probabilistic change, the general figure change short, the electric chew open period extension, and the electric chew open frequency increase are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage is high, and the player may be in the power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase of the number of electric chew opening is performed to increase the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electrically-supported state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electrically-supported state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between the difficult winning state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and the easy winning state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in the easy winning state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "special map A" to "special map E" are stopped and displayed, after the big hit game that is performed thereafter is finished, the electric power support state (universal figure high probability state until the next big hit game is started. ) Is maintained and "Special map F" is stopped and displayed, after the big hit game that is performed after that, while the special map variation game is played 100 times, the electric power support state is maintained and the non-electric power is played in the 101st time. Transition to support state (universal figure low probability state). On the other hand, when the big hit without the electric support (“special figure G”) is won, the electric support state does not shift after the big hit game ends.

In this way, in this embodiment, when "special map A" to "special map E" are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map high probability general figure high probability state after the jackpot game is over. Further, when the "special map F" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map low probability general figure high probability state after the jackpot game is over. Further, when the "special map G" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map high probability general figure low probability state after the jackpot game is over.

In addition, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game balls enter a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If you do, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hitting game, the special figure low probability general figure low probability state shifts. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game after the end of the small hit game. As shown in FIG. 68(a), "special drawing H" is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening/closing mode (opening/closing frequency and opening time) of the variable winning a prize mouth 234 in the small hit game and the opening/closing mode (opening of the variable winning a prize hole 234 in the big hit game to which the "special figure G" is stopped and displayed. The number of times of opening and the time of opening are substantially the same, but they may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the time of opening may be different. Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as the lost symbol. "Special drawing I" is a lost design.

FIG. 68(b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. In FIG. 68(b), six types of special maps of “special map a” to “special map f” are shown, and five types of special maps are jackpot patterns (“special map a” to “special map”). Fig. e"). "Special drawing a" is a 15R big hit design, 15R probability variation big hit design that you can expect to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "Special drawing b" is a 15R big hit design, 15 It is a 15R-RUB design that can be expected to win balls in all of the rounds, and "Special Drawing c" is a 15R jackpot pattern, and is expected to win balls in 8 out of 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that you can't expect to get balls in the remaining rounds, and "Special Drawing d" is a 15R jackpot design, and you can expect to get balls in 4 out of 15 rounds. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a ball, and the "special figure e" is a 2R normal jackpot design.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as the lost symbol. “Special drawing f” is a lost design.

FIG. 68(c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first start opening sensor detects that a ball has won the special opening 1 starting opening 230 or the special opening 2 starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, or the special opening 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second starting hole sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting symbol 232. In the pattern display area, the display is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

When notifying substantially 5R probability variation big hit ("special drawing B"), 5R normal big hit ("special drawing F"), 2R normal big hit ("special drawing e"), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration" 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" A combination of ornamental patterns in which three ornamental patterns with the same numbers are arranged (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 1"). "Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Stop decoration "7". Furthermore, when notifying 15R-RUB, substance 8R-RUB, and substance 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols of the same number, and the middle symbol display area 208b is like a lord. A combination of decorative patterns that are decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 1-donor-decoration 1" or "decoration 4-donor-decoration 4") is stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying a hidden probability change (“special map G”) that is a big hit of 2R or a small hit (“special map H”), “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative patterns such as "3" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying a lost symbol of "special symbol I" or "special symbol f", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described above is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, disperse). Stop the display).

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed under the control of the first sub control unit 400.

FIG. 68(d) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a universal figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" which is a winning symbol and "Public figure B" which is a deviating symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the universal figure display device 210 has all seven segments illuminated and one central segment. Repeated lighting "Public variable display" (Public variable game) is performed. Then, after the change time elapses, either one of the symbols "Public symbol A" which is a hit symbol and "Public symbol B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 68(d), the white parts in the figure show the positions of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts are the positions of the segments that are turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of the "variable display of the universal figure" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of the universal figure may be referred to as the variable display of the universal figure.
<Main processing of main controller>

Next, the main control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 shown in FIG. 67 will be described with reference to FIG. 69. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 stores a special figure random number value, a special figure round determination random number value, a special figure electric support determination random number value, and a special figure determination random number. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random number value of special figure winning, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area of the RAM 308 that stores the number of reserved special figures is sometimes referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start-up information storage unit for a special figure, which is divided into a maximum number (four in this example) of areas in which the start of the win/fail judgment (lottery) can be suspended. There is also a random number storage area for general drawings. In the special figure starting information storage unit, as will be described later, a plurality of kinds of starting information are set as one set, and these starting information are stored one by one in the winning order (holding order).

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, to which this activation signal is input, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 69 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power supply that the power supply control unit 660 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in the present embodiment), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing a main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, Processing for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether the state before the power is cut off (before the power failure) is restored, and if the state before the power failure is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state) ), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a clerk of a game shop operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 65 is ON (indicating that there is an operation). If the RAM clear signal is on (when RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not required), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte configuration register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) or not (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal) is determined. If the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specified. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main controller 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command that indicates that the power-off state has been restored, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value in the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting the interruption prohibition, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generating random number counters for respectively generating initial values of the universal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of possible numbers for the universal figure winning random number is 0 to 20, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, the value 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Main controller timer interrupt processing>

Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The partial timer interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (mainly) set so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (not to detect abnormal processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port status update processing, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 67 including various sphere detection sensors are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 stores various types of signals. The data is stored in a signal state storage area that is provided separately for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, the RAM 308 stores information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) two times before in each RAM detection sensor. Is read from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ) The information on the presence/absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in) is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

Further, in step S205, the presence/absence information of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, It is determined whether or not the information on the presence/absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one gaming ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process is repeated several times at very short intervals of about 2 ms. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, there is a current detection signal). If it matches with the information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the universal figure starting opening 228. It is determined that there has been a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 234 and 226 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been won. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first starting opening sensor that detects the ball entering the first special drawing starting opening 230 matches the above winning determination pattern information, the first special drawing It is determined that there is a winning in the starting opening 230, that is, a game medium that passes through a predetermined area is detected, and the processing following the winning in the first special figure starting opening 230 is performed, but the detection signals of the past three times are detected. If the presence/absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the first special figure starting port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, a previous detection signal does not exist, and a current detection signal does not exist). After it is determined that there is a winning, it is not determined that there is a winning until the information of the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and the universal figure winning random number value and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a result obtained by obtaining a value from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100 and adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter that corresponds to the random number counter The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating the random number for winning I'll do it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for general-purpose winning random number value generation has completed one round, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has completed one cycle. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for

In step S211, an effect random number updating process is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the symbol is displayed on the universal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time to change/stop displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210. Various including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time of fluctuating/stopping, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a timer for measuring a predetermined ending effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning a prize counter updating process, when the winning holes 234 and 226 and the starting openings 230 and 232 are won, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is displayed. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

In addition, in step S217, prize winning acceptance processing is performed. In the prize receiving process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of starting information acquired here are stored as a set of starting information in an empty area of the starting information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 in accordance with the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 67 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set) and bit 6 are set in bit 7. To the power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate the encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

In step S221, a universal figure state update process is performed. The universal figure state update process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the general figure state update processing in the middle of the general figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED which normally constitutes the symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

Further, in the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the universal figure variation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. Ordinary symbol display device 210 is configured to be in a mode, the 7-segment LED is turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be a lost symbol display mode. Turn on/off the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general-picture state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 confirms either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 68(c)) or the lost symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 68(c)). Display. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player. Further, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal figure operation is set in the setting region, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the opening period to the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening/closing of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the universal figure variation game is a loss, the universal figure loss flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure loss flag is on, even in the universal figure state updating process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the universal figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this universal figure-related lottery process, opening/closing control of the universal figure variation game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the universal figure is inactive), and the pending universal figure variation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unselected by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the random number storage area described above. The winning judgment is performed, and when the winning is determined, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value, the universal figure display device 210 receives the common figure display device 210 from among a plurality of fluctuation times. One time during which the figure is variably displayed is selected, and this variability display time is stored as a figure variation display time in the figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is stored in the universal figure pending count storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Moreover, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

Then, the special figure prefetching process (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update processing in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on/off the drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game). In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. .. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special figure When the probability variation flag is also on and the universal figure probability variation flag is also on, any one of special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured to have the special figure e when the figure probability variation flag is off and the general figure probability variation flag is on, and the special figure f when the loss flag is on. The 7 segment LED is controlled to be turned on/off, and the setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214, 15R special big hit pattern (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal big hit pattern (special figure e), lost symbol ( The fixed display of any one of the special symbols f) is performed.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the special display 2 that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 variable game. Further, if the number of shortening times stored in the shortening number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shortening times, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, the time saving flag is turned off. Further, even during the big hit game (during the special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that it exists is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the area, in order to stand by for a predetermined winning effect production period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, for a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the big hit by the decorative pattern display device 208 is started. First, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the variable winning opening 234 is detected) The solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), the door member Is output in the open state and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234, and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information that indicates the closing period. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which is repeated at a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in the present exemplary embodiment) of opening/closing control of the door member, a predetermined end effect period (for example, Storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by for 3 seconds), that is, for a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the jackpot by the decorative pattern display device 208 is finished. The information indicating the production standby period is set in. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time saving frequency (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and is also provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving frequency storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON.

The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit is shortened. If the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure (universal figure probable variation). In the high probability state of the public figure, the probability of being hit in the general variation game is higher than in the low probability state of the universal figure. Also, in the general figure high probability state, the variation time of the general figure fluctuation game becomes shorter than in the general figure low probability state (general figure shortness). Further, in the universal figure high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state (electric chute extension). In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. The state in which any one of these Phenomenon Probability, Phenomenon Variance, and Den Chu is set is called Densapo (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, the general probability low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is a normal figure high probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 during the big hit game, many game balls in the special figure 2 starting hole 232 until the game balls enter There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be won during a big hit increases and the gambling performance increases, which is to solve this problem.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operation is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, the out flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, the description will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Special figure 2 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is inactive both, and special figure 2 which is on hold Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random number storage area. Special figure 1 related lottery process, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is in the non-operating state, and the special figure 1 which is suspended With the start condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area.

Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. If the number of pending special game 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable games relating to the pending special game 1 variable games are not performed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the determination result of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and notifies the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting opening 232. , The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting opening 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, the special figure variation game with high advantage (special figure 2 variation game in this example) is played prior to the special figure variation game with low advantage (special figure 1 variation game in this example). Therefore, it may be easy to give a difference in the degree of advantage of the gaming state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special piece) from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. FIG. 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value pair) is acquired, and based on the special figure 2 winning random value in the acquired special figure 2 starting information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, the ROM 306 It is determined whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a non-win by using the hit/miss determination table stored in (a hit/miss judgment). Then, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information and the determined hit/miss judgment result. After the variable display, the symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed are determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit/miss determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the hit determination, the obtained random number for determining the special figure variation time, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) of special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

The main control unit 300 retrieves the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, deletes the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and Figure 2 The special figure 2 reservation number in the reservation number storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is performed based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area. You may do it.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is similarly performed. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game with a high degree of advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with a low degree of advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority variation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variable game with a low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game with a high advantage, and the special figure 1 is held pending It may be the special figure 1 priority variation that is prioritized over the reservation and is digested. Also, without prioritizing either the special figure 2 variation game with a high advantage or the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, the special figure variation game related to the suspension of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started. It may be a change in the winning opening winning order that starts in order. In the starting mouth winning order variation, the maximum number of reservations is 8 regardless of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. Therefore, compared with the priority fluctuation in which the maximum number of reservations is 4 in Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, respectively. In some cases, the upper limit of the number of reservations can be increased.

Further, in the above description, the lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special map are not performed according to the state of one special map, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special map state update described above is not performed. By performing the process and the special figure-related lottery process independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, a plurality of special figures may be simultaneously changed. When a plurality of special maps are simultaneously changed in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special maps, or the lottery results of the respective special maps are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to separately display each lottery result, or one display may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special symbols. In addition, when fluctuations relating to a plurality of special maps are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped first may influence the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flag values, and a timer selected in the special figure related lottery process. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, including information such as numbers, various jackpot flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flag values, etc. are included, and winning effect start command and end In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit round number, etc. are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232, and winning at the variable winning ports 234 and 235. Including presence or absence. In the case of the prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in the prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

Further, in the above-described rotation start setting transmission process, the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-flags, special figure probability variation flags, special figure 1 related lottery processing, and special figures stored in the RAM 308 are included in the command data. 2 Set the information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, and the like. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, the command data is set with information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, such as the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening opening setting transmission processing, in the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games. Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variation games or special figure 2 variation games Set the information indicating such as.

Further, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) Prior notice information or no prior notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full tank error. .. When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, and the universal figure display device 210 and the special figure 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display sections 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I/O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I/O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input/output port is performed. After that, the state becomes HALT.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special diagrams 1 and 2, and pre-determines the stop symbol before the winning/disapproving process, and the pre-determination result (special The prefetch result) is stored in the prefetch result storage unit (see FIGS. 72A to 72C) in the RAM 308.

Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit that stores the pre-reading result of the special figure 1 and the number of special figure 1 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit are specified. A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing as 1 prefetch number is provided. In this example, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 1 pre-reading result of the highest rank (the first place) is deleted every time the number of special figure 1 pre-reading decreases by 1 and the remaining special figure 1 pre-reading result is deleted. Are processed so that the rank of the data of 1 is advanced by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 1 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 1 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 1 prefetch results having the lowest rank (last).

Further, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section for storing the special figure 2 pre-reading result and the number of special figure 2 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section are stored. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing the number is provided. In this example, the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four pre-reading results. In the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 2 pre-reading result with the highest rank is deleted and the remaining special figure 2 pre-reading result data ranks each time the number of special figure 2 pre-reading decreases by one. Are processed so as to be incremented by one. Also, each time the number of special figure 2 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 2 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 2 preread results having the lowest rank.

In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increased (step S301). Whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of prefetches. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing when the special figure 2 reserved number is larger than the special figure 2 preread number, and the special figure 2 reserved number is equal to the special figure 2 preread number. If they are the same, it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is specified before the winning/judging process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Figure 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-reading special figure 2 start information, for example, the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is set to the special figure 2 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made prior to the hit/miss determination processing in the processing (step S229). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Then, it transfers to step S307. In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of special figure 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage. This is performed by comparing with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increased, the special figure prefetching process is ended and the main control unit is executed. Return to timer interrupt processing.

In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is not being performed (the power support is being performed (universal figure high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading advance notice includes conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electricity support.

In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (set of special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value) is specified before the winning/judgment processing in the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231). Figure 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 1 start information, and the hit determination table and the special figure decision table used at the time of hit determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is set to the special figure 1 related lottery Preliminary determination is made prior to the hit/miss determination processing in the processing (step S231). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

In step S313 subsequent to step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained in advance determination is stored in the earliest empty area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process.

In step S315, the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 in RAM 308 is replaced with the "undetermined" information indicating that the starting information is not pre-read without pre-reading the increased special figure 1 starting information. Store in the first empty area of the set. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above, only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be stored. All pre-reading results in the set may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 71, the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2, and the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the electric support. However, whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special maps 1 and 2 may be determined by a lottery. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300 may determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not in non-electric support), when the start information increases, the prefetch is always executed and the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch is performed. The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to execute the lottery and the effect using the pre-reading result.

FIG. 72 exemplifies a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 72A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 72A, the special-reading 1 pre-reading result storage unit has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of reserveable special-playing 1 variable games. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 72(a), the storage area "hold 1" stores "special drawing I" (off) as stop symbol information, and the storage area "hold 2" stores stop symbol information "special drawing I". "(Disappearance) is stored, "special drawing A" (15R probability variation big hit) is stored in the storage area "holding 3" as stop symbol information, and "special drawing I" is stored in the storage area "holding 4" as stop symbol information. "(Disappearance) is stored.

FIG. 72B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 preread result information is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 72( b ), the special figure 2 prefetching result storage section has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of special figure 2 variable games. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 72(b), the storage area "holding 1" stores "special drawing f" (off) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas "holding 2" to "holding 4" have a stopping symbol. No information is stored. In FIG. 72(b), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as "none".

FIG. 72(c) shows an example of the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 1 during electronic support. As shown in FIG. 72(c), in the storage area "holding 1", "undetermined" information is stored instead of the stopped symbol information. Neither stop symbol information nor “undetermined” information is stored in the storage areas “holding 2” to “holding 4”.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the judgment result, the fluctuation timer number (variation time), the timer group described later, and the like are pre-determined, and the pre-read result is stored in the pre-read result storage unit. The information can be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, for a win/fail judgment table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 73(a) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for win/loss determination, and FIG. 73(b) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for win/loss determination. In the case of the special figure high probability state when the special figure 1 is determined, the high probability state for special figure determination shown in FIG. , And the low probability table for success/failure determination shown in FIG. 73( b ). Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referred win/loss determination table and the acquired random number value, the win/loss determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variation game, a big hit, a small hit, or an outlier is selected as the hit/miss determination result.

Similarly, in the case of the special drawing high probability state, when the special figure high probability state, the special figure low probability state is referred to by referring to the high probability table for determining odds and hits shown in FIG. 73(a). In this case, the low probability table for win/fail judgment shown in FIG. 73(b) is referred to. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referred win/loss determination table and the acquired random number value, the win/loss determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variation game, the big hit or the outlier is selected as the hit/miss determination result.

FIG. 73C is a diagram showing an example of the small hit determination table. When the jackpot judgment result of the big hit is off, the small hit judgment table shown in FIG. 73(c) is referred to, and based on the numerical range shown by the referred small hit judgment table and the acquired random number value. , Select the result of the special drawing small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the win/no win determination result (lottery result) per special figure is the special figure 1, the small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the win/no determination result, and the loss is with a probability of 63536/65536. However, the small hit is not selected when the result of the lottery win/loss determination (lottery result) per special drawing is the special drawing 2.

Next, the stop is performed based on the winning/disapproval determination result determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 70. The special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 74(a) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 74(b) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 74(a) is referred to, and the special figure is determined based on the result of the special figure 1 and the numerical range of the random number value. Select the stop pattern of 1. In the present embodiment, when the hit/no hit result of Toku-zu 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special drawings A to G, and when the hit/no hit determination result of Toku-zu 1 is a small hit, Toku-zu H is selected, and when the hit/no-go result of Toku-zu 1 is lost, toku-zu I is selected.

Further, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, by referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 74 (b), based on the hit result of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The special design 2 stop design is selected by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the hit/damage result of Toku-zu 2 is a big hit, any one of the Toku-zu a to Toku-e is selected. f is selected. After the symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined, the symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 75A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 75(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, the input/output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. The effect control process will be described later.

In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, when pressing of the effect button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the effect button 136.

In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to the VDP 434, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, the command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S417 following step S415, the lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the shielding device 246, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output. Then, it returns to step S403.

FIG. 75B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects the strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 75C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step S601 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S603 following step S601, the control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in the information transmission process of the first sub control unit main process (step S421), and the other effect random number updating process is performed. And so on.

FIG. 75D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

In step S703 subsequent to step S701, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S705, If not (step S703: No), it waits until the transfer end interrupt signal is input.

In step S705, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701. , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S707 subsequent to step S705, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

In step S709 subsequent to step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S709: Yes), If not (step S709: No), the process waits until the generation end interrupt signal is input.

In step S711, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 76A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S801 of FIG. 76(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, the input/output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 508 is initialized.

In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. .. In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S807, the effect data corresponding to this command (effect data by the effect movable body 224 and effect data by the lamp) is read from the ROM 506, and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

In step S813 following step S811, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. After that, the process returns to step S803.

FIG. 76B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

FIG. 76C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step S1001 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S1003, which is subsequent to step S1001, an effect random number updating process and the like are performed.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

77. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

77, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and the general symbol. A hold lamp 216 is shown.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77(a), the combination of decorative symbols "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. The background here is not displayed, but a default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped), and from the top, the symbol changing notification area of the normal figure, the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1 , Becomes the notification area during the symbol change of special figure 2. While the pattern of the universal figure is stopped, the quadrangle figure is lit up and displayed, but during the change of the pattern of the universal figure, the quadrangle figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, the round figure is lit and displayed, but during the change of symbol of special figure 1, the circular figure is blinked or turned off. While the special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is lit and displayed, but during the change of the special figure 2, the triangular figure is blinked or turned off. As described above, the fourth symbol is different not only in the display position but also in the display mode (here, the shape), and the player can discriminate it at a glance. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or blinking mode of the fourth symbol. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 77 is a non-electric power support state (non-time saving state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Further, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state.

The hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 displays a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1, and the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 displays a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2. .. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of special figure 1 in addition to the number of lighting of special figure 1 holding lamps 218. The number of holdings of special figure 2 is the number of lighting of special figure 2 holding lamps 220. In addition, it is also represented by the number of holding icons in special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon,.... In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, the hold icons on the right side are the hold icons with older winnings, and the hold icon is displayed vertically in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. , The lower the hold icon, the older the winning icon.

In FIG. 77(a), two holding icons h11 and h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed in the holding icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1, and both of the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special drawing 1 are shown. , Is displayed in a default display mode (a round, unpatterned, white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokushu 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 77(a), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. ..

On the other hand, no pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 77 is the non-electric power support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric choo and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because. The reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, that is, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display a line demarcating the area, but in FIG. Is shown by a dotted line for clarity. A line demarcating the area may be provided, or a line demarcating the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the pending icon display area of the special map that is more likely to win the prize in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the hold icon display area of the other special figure is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-electric power support state, as shown in FIG. 77(a), the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of the special figure 2 is displayed. The area 282 is displayed at the right end. When the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed at the right end. Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 is a rectangular unpatterned and white display mode, and not only the display position is different from the hold icon of the special figure 1, but also the display mode ( Here, the shapes are also different, and the player can tell the difference by just looking at it. In addition, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 may be the same.

In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variable display of the special symbol is changed in the special symbol display device→starting or extinguishing the blinking of the fourth symbol→starting or erasing the moving animation of the hold icon→starting the variation of the decorative symbol. However, this order may change.

In FIG. 77(b), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon or decoration The pattern has not changed yet.

In FIG. 77(c), the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of Toku-zu 1 has started. The movement animation here is such that the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 (the hold icon that is the subject of this pattern change) starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon located at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not started.

In FIG. 77(d), the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 77(e), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of variation, reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The variable display of decorative patterns has not started. In addition, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon which has been the first hold icon h11 until then may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon until then. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.
Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 77(f).

As shown in FIG. 77(g), an operation promotion notification image 136P that urges the production button 136 to be pressed within the valid period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the variable display of the decorative symbol has started. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the hero. The variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol 284 and the like. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative pattern is not hidden.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 77(h), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 77(i), the player is pressing the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in FIG. 77(j), the reachable state entry notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. .. In the reach state entry notice image 2071, the character display "Chance" is displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character.

In FIG. 77(k), the reach state advance notice image 2071 disappears, the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes visible, and thereafter, the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. Even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered in some cases. However, the reach state may be entered.

As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to a presentation that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display.

In FIG. 77(m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far, is moved to the lower right corner and reduced, and in FIG. 77(n). , Has developed into super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 77(n) displays a large image of an enemy swordsman, and the subsequent decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 77(o) is a duel between the main character and the enemy swordsman. An animation of the scene is displayed.

The reach state entry notice image 2071 is not limited to a notice of entering the reach state, and may be a notice of development of super reach.
FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 77 step by step.

In FIG. 78(p) continuing from FIG. 77(o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues to FIG. 78(s). In FIG. 78(s), the main character wins the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 78(t), all are temporarily hidden except the fourth symbol display area 284. Instead of non-display, a background image different from the conventional one may be displayed. Eventually, as shown in (u) of the figure, the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed. The background here may be a non-displayed background image or a background image different from the past. Further, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 78(v), the combination of decorative patterns of 15R sure variation big hit confirmation of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, the fourth design (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 78(v) is lit. In FIG. 78(v), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed. Then, in FIG. 78(w), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of "probable variation big hit" is displayed together with a background image celebrating the big hit (not shown here).

On the other hand, when the reach state is reached by a different decorative design (substantially 5R probability variation big hit, 5R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit) in FIG. 77(l), a case of another case continuing from FIG. 78(t) In 78(u'), the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is displayed, and in FIG. 78(v') following FIG. 78(u'), "decoration 6-decoration The combination of the jackpot decorative patterns of "6-decoration 6" is stopped and displayed. Then, in FIG. 78(w′) subsequent to FIG. 78(v′), a character image of “big hit” is displayed together with a background image (here omitted) celebrating the big hit as a big hit game start effect.
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of the effect in another case following that of FIG. 78(q).

In FIG. 79(a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 77(o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 79(b). In FIG. 79(b), the main character loses to the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 79(c), like the FIG. 78(t), all are temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Eventually, in FIG. 79(d), the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is started. Here, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is restored, and the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 are displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79(e), the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special diagram 1 is turned on, and the combination of the defective decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is stopped. It is displayed. Next, during the fixed display period of the special figure 1, in the variable icon display area 280, the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 is executed. In (f) of the figure, the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 is started, and the erasing animation continues in the (g) of the figure, and the varying icon h0 completely disappears in the (h) of the figure. Note that the changing icon h0 may be erased before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 is performed.

Next, the notice icon displayed in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. Here, FIG. 80A is a diagram illustrating a display example of the notice icon, and FIG. 80B is a diagram illustrating a notice icon display region information storage area stored in the RAM 408. FIG. 7C is a diagram illustrating an example of the timing of the notice icon being consumed, and FIG. 9D is a diagram illustrating an example of the timing of increasing the notice icon. Further, FIG. 81(a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a pre-change notice icon, and FIG. 81(b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a post-change notice icon.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80(a), a notice icon display area 285 may be displayed on the upper portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, six areas, and from the left, the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display. An area YA4, a notice icon fifth display area YA5, and a notice icon sixth display area YA6 are arranged side by side in the column direction. In the present embodiment, the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is four (or the number of hold icons that can be displayed when the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is further displayed). Is 8 in total), so it can be said that the number of notice icons that can be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is different from the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area. The number of noticeable icons and the number of hold icons that can be displayed may be the same. The number of areas forming the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to six, and may be one or may be set to any number of two or more. Further, the number of areas may be changed according to the progress of the game.

In the notice icon display area 285, one notice icon may be displayed for one area. For example, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the notice icon first display area YA1 displays a notice icon I6 of a hat having a hat pattern, and the notice icon second display area YA2 displays a thousand-box box. The notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes made up of a design is displayed, the notice icon I10 of a fan made up of a design of a fan is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is shown. A shuriken notice icon I7 consisting of a shuriken pattern is displayed, a ribbon notice icon I8 consisting of a ribbon pattern is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5, and a notice icon sixth display area YA6 is indicated. It is blank. Which notice icon is displayed in each area in the notice icon display area 285 is based on the information stored in the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408 shown in FIG. 80(b). It is determined. In this embodiment, one advance notice icon is displayed for each area, but two or more advance notice icons may be displayed for each area.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), the respective notice icons displayed in the respective areas (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 are consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 80(c), for example. Controlled to be done. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is appropriately read and executed. That is, 8 seconds after the variation display (the variation) of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 80(a) is started, the ribbon notice icon I8 is consumed, and then the digested ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed. A corresponding effect may be executed. After that, when the variation ends, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 starts to move toward the variation icon display area 280, and the variation display of the decorative symbol (the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1) is started, When 12 seconds have passed from the start of the symbol variation, the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested, and thereafter, the effect corresponding to the digested shuriken notice icon I7 may be executed. After that, when the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 ends, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 (in FIG. 80(a), the hold icon h12 is moved to the hold icon h11) is moved toward the change icon display area 280. Along with the start of, when the variable display of the decorative symbol (the symbol variable corresponding to the hold 2) is started, 4 seconds after the symbol variable is started, the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, and thereafter, The effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the digested hat may be executed. In addition, when 10 seconds have elapsed after the SP reach was started, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes may be consumed, and thereafter, an effect corresponding to the notice icon I9 of a consumed box may be executed. After that, when 2 seconds have elapsed after all the decorative patterns are in the temporarily stopped state, the fan advance notice icon I10 is consumed, and thereafter, the effect corresponding to the exhausted fan advance notice icon I10 may be executed. .. Thus, it can be said that the digestion of the notice icon notifies the player in advance that the notice or effect will be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 80(a), each of the notice icons displayed in each area (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative pattern display device 208 has, for example, the timing shown in FIG. 80(d). It is controlled to be increased by. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is appropriately read and executed. That is, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 80(a) was started, the lord appearance appears on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the hall effect that increases the notice icon is executed. To be done. In this hall effect, an effect of displaying the hat notice icon I6, the ribbon notice icon I8, and the shuriken notice icon I7 in the notice icon display area 285 is increased. After that, when the variation ends and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is started, a DJ effect is executed in which a DJ appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the notice icon is increased. In this DJ effect, an effect is displayed in which the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. After that, when the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 ends and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 2 is started, 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the second pseudo continuous production, the hall production is executed and the fan The notice icon I10 is increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Here, the pseudo continuous effect is a variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the variation start and the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol are executed plural times in the variable display of one special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be configured to be larger than the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is a big hit. For example, the maximum number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is out of sync may be set to one, and the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be at least two or more.

Next, the contents of effect corresponding to the type of the notice icon displayed in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 81. As the notice icon, as shown in FIG. 81(a), the content of the corresponding effect is not clear, and as shown in FIG. 81(b), the content of the corresponding effect is clear. For example, as shown in FIG. 81(a), the first notice icon I1 and the second notice icon I2 of the second lord are displayed as the notice icons (contents before change) whose contents of the corresponding effect are not clear. There is a third lord's notice icon I3 and a first button notice icon I4. The first notice icon I1 of the lord is a notice icon in which the silhouette of the lord's face is shown in white, and the reliability of the big hit is weak. The second notice icon I2 of the lord is a notice icon in which the silhouette of the lord's face is shown in green, and the reliability of the big hit is medium. In addition, the third notice icon I3 of the lord is a notice icon in which the silhouette of the face of the lord is represented in red, and the reliability of the big hit is high. Further, the first button notice icon I4 is a notice icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is either weak to strong. When the first notice icon I1, the second notice icon I2, and the third notice icon I3 arrive at a predetermined change display timing (for example, the increase display timing of the notice icon), 81(b) is changed to one of the changed notice icons. In addition, the first button notice icon I4 changes to any of the changed notice icons shown in FIG. 81(b) at the timing when the player operates the effect button 136. The first button notice icon I4 may change to any of the notice icons before the change when the player operates the effect button 136.

In this way, the first reminder notice icon I1, the second reminder notice icon I2, the third reminder notice icon I3, and the first button notice icon I4 start the symbol variation, which is the target of prefetching. It may be displayed before it is displayed and may function as a prefetch notice. Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, a character notation may be displayed together, and the notice icon I1 of the first lord, When the second palace's notice icon I2 and the third lord's notice icon I3 are displayed, a "question mark" may be additionally displayed.

On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 81(b), a notice icon (a notice icon after change) whose content of the corresponding effect is clear includes a hat notice icon I6, a shuriken notice icon I7, and a ribbon notice icon. There are a notice icon I8, a thousand box notice icon I9, a fan notice icon I10, and a second button notice icon I11.

The hat notice icon I6 is a notice icon imitating a hat worn by a bancho character, and the jackpot reliability is strong or weak. When the notice icon I6 of one hat is consumed, the pseudo-relational production may be performed only once. Here, the pseudo continuous production includes a strong pattern, a weak pattern, and a gaze pattern. In the strong pattern pseudo continuous production, for example, as will be described later, when the pseudo continuous production starts, a character with a length appears, but the display mode of the character with the length is different from usual (for example, the length becomes aura). By the wrapped display mode), the fact that the reliability is strong is notified. Note that, for example, in spite of the second pseudo-reproduction, the third-time pseudo-reproduction may be notified to indicate that the reliability is strong. In addition, the pseudo pattern production of the weak pattern notifies that the reliability is weak by displaying the appearing length character in a normal display mode. Further, the pseudo continuous effect of the gasse pattern is an effect of performing a false display while pretending that the pseudo continuous effect is performed, as described later. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed in association with the hat notice icon I6, if the reliability is high, the pattern A is displayed in red or black as “Continued”. There are cases where Alternatively, the "question mark" may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. If the reliability is low, the pattern A may be displayed as “continuation” in black characters with “question” or “question mark”. Alternatively, the "question mark" may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted, the pseudo continuous effect may be performed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

The shuriken notice icon I7 is a notice icon that imitates a shuriken thrown by a character of the Oniwaban (ninja), and the reliability of the big hit is strong or weak. When one shuriken's notice icon I7 is digested, if the jackpot reliability is strong, there may be a case where the running notice production is switched to a highly reliable strong notice production through freeze production. Yes (freeze notice). On the other hand, if the reliability of the big hit is weak, a stop symbol notice may be given to notify a part or all of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in advance. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed along with the shuriken notice icon I7, if the reliability is high, “freeze” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, the "question mark" may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, if the reliability is low, the pattern A may be displayed as “Cham”. Alternatively, the "question mark" may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. When the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is exhausted, one of the freeze notice and the stop symbol notice may be executed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

The ribbon notice icon I8 is a notice icon imitating a ribbon worn by Princess Chibi, and the jackpot reliability is strong or weak. When the notice icon I8 of one ribbon is consumed, if the reliability of the big hit is high, the background may shift to a special stage such as the look-ahead mode or the change notice mode (stage change). Strong production). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is low, an effect may be executed in which the displayed background is changed from one of a plurality of types of backgrounds used in the normal gaming state (stage change weak). Production). In addition, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed along with the notice icon I8 on the ribbon, if the reliability is high, the pattern A is displayed in red or black as “STETCHEN”. There are cases where Alternatively, the "question mark" may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, if the reliability is low, the pattern A may be displayed in black characters as “STETCHEN”. Alternatively, the "question mark" may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. When the notice icon I8 on the ribbon is exhausted, either one of the strong stage change effect and the weak stage change effect may be executed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

Thousand-box alert icon I9 is a notice icon that imitates a thousand-box that a lord's character throws at a farmer, and the jackpot reliability is a big hit confirmed, strong or weak. When the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is consumed, if the reliability of the big hit is strong, the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is consumed during the execution of the weak reach production with low reliability, and the reach transition production is performed. After that, an effect of shifting (promoting) to a highly reliable strong reach effect is performed (reach transfer effect). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is low, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is digested after the low-reliability weak cut-in notice is executed, and then the high-reliability strong cut-in notice is executed (preliminary notice promotion). Production). If the jackpot is confirmed, either the reach transition effect or the notice promotion effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed in association with the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, if the big hit is confirmed, the pattern A may be displayed as “large board behavior”. Alternatively, the "question mark" may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. Further, if the reliability is high, the pattern A may be displayed in red or black as “promotion”. Alternatively, the "question mark" may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, if the reliability is weak, the pattern A may be displayed in black characters as “promotion”. Alternatively, the "question mark" may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, when the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is exhausted, any one of the fixed effect, the reach transition effect, and the notice promotion effect may be executed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

The fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon that imitates a fan worn by a princess character, and the reliability of the big hit is confirmed as the big hit. When the notice icon I10 of one fan is exhausted, a premiere notice for notifying in advance that the big hit is finalized or a premier reach in which the big hit is fixed is executed (premier effect). Alternatively, the notice icon I10 of the fan is exhausted after the out-of-reach is displayed, and a revival effect that is a big hit is executed (revival effect). Further, in the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed in association with the fan advance notice icon I10, “Blessing” may be displayed. When the fan advance notice icon I10 is exhausted, one of the premiere effect and the revival effect may be executed without fail. Further, in the present embodiment, the content to be produced differs depending on the timing when the fan advance notice icon I10 is consumed, but the digestion timing may be the same.

The second button notice icon I11 is a notice icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is any of the weakest to the big hit confirmed. When one of the second button notice icons I11 is consumed, a button effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 136 is performed. At this time, the operation acceptance period is started, and when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance period, the second button notice icon I11 is displayed as the hat notice icon I6, the shuriken notice icon I7, and the ribbon. There is a case where any one of the notice icon I8, the notice icon I8 of 1,000 boxes, and the notice icon I10 of the fan is changed to a digested display, and a corresponding effect is executed. Alternatively, it may be erased and displayed without changing any of the notice icons.

In the present embodiment, the change notice of the notice icon is displayed when the notice icon before the change is changed to the notice icon after the change, but the notice icon from the change icon before the change is displayed via the change display of the notice icon. It is also possible to perform a display for deleting the notice icon (“No” notice icon shown in item 5 of FIG. 81(b): deletion effect). In this presentation, it is notified that the variation is out of alignment. In other words, it is a preliminary announcement indicating that the pattern is a loss confirmation pattern. Naturally, the reliability is the weakest. Even if the erase effect is executed, a big hit may occur.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

In FIG. 82, a decorative pattern display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a public figure display device 210, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, a general figure. The figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are shown. Here, the fourth symbol display device 284a is a display device having the same function as the display of the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 77, and, for example, displays the display result of the fourth symbol by the light emitting mode of the LED. It is possible to do. The fourth symbol display device 284a may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or EL. The fourth symbol display device 284a is provided, for example, at a predetermined position on the game board 200, and is drive-controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. From the top, the fourth symbol display device 284a becomes a symbol variation notification region of a normal figure, a symbol variation notification region of special figure 1 and a symbol variation notification region of special diagram 2. The LED in the area where the quadrangle figure is displayed is lit while the symbol of the universal figure is stopped, but it is blinking or extinguished during the variation of the symbol of the regular figure. While the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, the LED of the area where the round figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but during the change of symbol of special figure 1, it is blinking or turned off. While the symbol of special figure 2 is stopped, the LED in the area where the triangular figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but during the change of symbol of special figure 2, it is blinked or turned off. As described above, the fourth symbol is different not only in the display position but also in the display mode (here, the shape), and the player can discriminate it at a glance. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or blinking mode of the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol may be displayed in a lighted state while the symbol is changing, and may be displayed in a lighted state while the symbol is stopped.

Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 82(1), the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed on the upper part. Note that in FIG. 82(1), no notice icon is displayed in any area of the notice icon display area 285. Further, as shown in FIG. 82(1), the first special map display device 212 is performing variable display of symbols, and accordingly, the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of decorative symbols. In addition, in the fourth symbol display device 284a, the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 is performed. The advance notice icon display area 285 may be always displayed, or may not be displayed as needed.

In addition, in FIG. 82(1), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Therefore, all of the two holding icons h11 and h12 and the change icon h0 in FIG. 1 are displayed in the default display mode (circular unpatterned and white display mode). In addition, in this effect example, the display of the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the second hold icon display area 282 may be displayed.

Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 82(2), when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the number of lights in the first special figure holding lamp 218 increases by 1 to 3 and is held. It is shown that the number has become three. Further, the third hold icon h13 of the special figure 1 is also displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. The third hold is a hold that is the target of prefetching, and is a hold that triggers whether or not to display the notice icon, as described later. Note that, for convenience of description, the third holding icon h13 of the special figure 1 which is the target of prefetching is shown by hatching, but actually, it is the same as the holding icons h11 and h12 of the other special figures 1. The display mode is a round, non-patterned, and white display mode. The same applies to the following description.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 82(3), the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 7", and the display result of the off is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in FIG. 82(4), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the turning off of the fourth symbol is further performed, but no change has occurred in the hold icon and the decorative symbol.

In FIG. 82(5), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of Toku-zu 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. Change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is the special figure. It becomes the 1st second hold icon h12. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

At the timing shown in FIG. 82(6), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. This is an effect executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of the prefetch. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the hat notice icon I6.

Then, after the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 82(7), the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is displayed at the notice icon at the timing shown in FIG. 82(8). An effect display that is thrown toward the area 285 is performed.

Then, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 82(9), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82(10). On the decorative pattern display device 208, a performance display in which the lord's character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and has a happy expression is performed. As a result, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6 will be executed in the future. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 to give a notice that the pseudo-relation effect will be executed in the future.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 82(11) to 82(12), display is performed in which the lord's character YM is framed out toward the lower part of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 82(13), the decorative pattern display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 step by step.

In FIG. 83(14) continuing from FIG. 82(13), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off. However, there is no change in the hold icon or the decorative symbol. It has not yet occurred.

In FIG. 83(15), the hold icons h11 and h12 of Toku-zu 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 becomes, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

At the timing shown in FIG. 83 (16), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. This is also an effect executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of pre-reading the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the lord's character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 83(17), the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position, and then at the timing shown in FIG. An effect display is performed in which the icon I9 and the fan advance notice icon I10 are thrown toward the advance notice icon display area 285.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 83(19), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is shown in the notice icon third display area. The fan advance notice icon I10 is displayed in YA3, and is displayed in the advance notice icon fourth display area YA4. After that, the same effect display as in FIGS. 82(10) to 82(12) is performed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 83(20), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and notifies the display result of the deviation. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in FIG. 83(21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

In FIG. 83 (22), the hold icon h11 of Toku-zu 1 is moved and displayed by a moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes to the variable icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed after the variable display of the decorative pattern has started, as shown in FIG. 83 (23), in the decorative pattern display device 208, it is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display that the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, the notice icon digesting effect of digesting the notice icon is performed in this manner. As shown in FIG. 83(23), when the same notice icon is displayed more than once in the notice icon display area 285, for example, two notice icons I6 for a hat are displayed, for example, on the left side. Although it is set in advance to preferentially consume the displayed notice icon, the order of digesting may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Further, which of the notice icons is to be used may be randomly determined, or the notice icon displayed on the right side may be set to be preferentially consumed. That is, the order in which the notice icons are consumed is limited to the above-described order and can be set appropriately.

After that, when the hat notice icon I6 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (24), and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 83 (25). Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of "Continue" is additionally displayed to inform that the pseudo-relational production will be performed. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time that the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. Good. Further, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed, for example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the prefetch notice. In addition, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed when the hold icon is displayed.

Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased together with the character display of "Continue" at the timing of FIG. 83 (26), and then, as shown in FIG. 83 (27). The left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left symbol and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that it is in the non-reach state.
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 83 step by step.

In FIG. 84(28) continuing from FIG. 83(27), the bancho character BC appears outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is stopped and displayed in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6. The effect display that pushes up the design is performed to notify the player that the pseudo continuous effect may be started. In the present embodiment, after the bancho character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed again. For example, the right symbol is the same as the left symbol (for example, “ It is also possible to form the reach state as decoration 1”) and start the reach effect.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol and the right symbol are continuously stopped and displayed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, a pseudo continuous symbol representing the lord's character is displayed. The display is moving slowly from top to bottom.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 84(30), as shown in FIG. A cut-in display consisting of the character display and is displayed. In the present embodiment, in this manner, the pseudo-relational symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby informing that the pseudo-relational is being executed. It should be noted that if the pseudo-relational pattern is not stopped and displayed, and if the frame is framed out downward, the pseudo-relation is not started, and the combination of decorative symbols that are out of order is stopped and displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed even if the hat notice icon I6 is not digested.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. At this time, in the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “pseudo×2” indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo continuous effect is started is displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. .. At this time, the reach effect has not started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 84(34), the display of the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is started to be consumed. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat moves to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 84(35), and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 84(36). Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, the character display of "continuation" for announcing that the pseudo continuous production is to be performed is additionally displayed.

Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased together with the display of the character "CONTINUE" at the timing of FIG. 84 (37). In response to the end of the notice icon I6 of No. 6, the bancho character BC appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display that pushes up the right symbol that is stopped is displayed, and the second pseudo continuous effect. The player is informed that there is a possibility that the game will start.

Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (39), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the bancho character BC pushes up the right symbol, the decorative symbol displayed in the right symbol display area 208c changes from "decoration 1" to " The decoration is changed to "2", a non-reach state is formed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, a display in which the pseudo continuous symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed is displayed. At this time, the character information of “pseudo×2” is erased while the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed, but the display may be continued. Further, while the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed, the character information of “pseudo×2” may be displayed in another area. Further, the display mode of the character information of “pseudo×2” may be changed while the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed. In this example of effect, after the banchou character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed again to maintain the reach state and the reach effect may be started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 84(40), as shown in FIG. 84(41), the character of the lord and "continue". A cut-in display consisting of the character display and is displayed to inform that the pseudo-link will be executed. In the present embodiment, as the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted in one pattern variation display, the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit. That is, in the case where only one notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed and the pseudo continuous effect is performed once, and when the two notice icons I6 of the hat are consumed and the pseudo consecutive effect is performed twice, the hat is performed. It is more likely to be a big hit if the two notice icons I6 of “No” are consumed, and only two notice icons I6 of the hat are consumed and the pseudo-representation is performed only twice, and three notice icons I6 of the hat are consumed. It can be said that, when the pseudo continuous production is performed three times, it is more likely to be a big hit if the three notice icons I6 of the hat are consumed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (42), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. At this time, in the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “pseudo×3” indicating that the third variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo continuous production is started is displayed.
FIG. 85 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 84 step by step.

In FIG. 85 (43) continued from FIG. 84 (42), the decorative pattern of “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, to form the reach state. Here, the reach effect is started.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (44), the super reach (swordsman reach) described above is developed. The variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and reduced. Is displayed. A large image of the enemy swordsman is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (44), and a duel between the main character and the enemy swordsman is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (45). The animation display of the scene starts.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (46), the display that the 1,000-box notice icon I9 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is consumed is started. That is, a display is made in which the 1,000-box notice icon I9 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the notice icon I9 of the thousand box is moved to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I9 is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. A character display of "promotion" is displayed additionally to notify that the production will shift to a more reliable production. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is enlarged, may be displayed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. Good.

Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), in the decorative pattern display device 208, at the timing of FIG. 85 (48), the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is erased together with the character display of “promotion”, and then the figure. The reach transition effect described above is started at the timing of 85 (49). When the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 85(49), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect display being executed is slightly darkened, and the lord's character appears in the cut-in display, A display for cutting off the reach effect display being executed is displayed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85(50), the background turns dark.

Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the strong reach effect (button reach effect) with high reliability. When the button reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 85(51), in the decorative pattern display device 208, after the character display "Is it too hot?" is displayed on the dark background, FIG. 85(52). At the timing shown in, the character display of "No" is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (53), the character display "one shot" is displayed to notify that the button effect will be performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (54), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted, and inform the player. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 85(55), as shown in FIG. 85(56), the button image 136a is deleted in the decorative symbol display device 208, It shows that the button reach production has failed.

In time, in FIG. 85 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1".
FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 85 step by step.

In FIG. 86 (58) which continues from FIG. 85 (57), all are temporarily hidden including the advance notice icon display area 285. Eventually, in FIG. 86 (59 ), the fluctuation fluctuation (temporary symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also restarted.

After that, for example, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display in which the fan advance notice icon I10 displayed in the advance notice icon fourth display area YA4 is exhausted is started at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (60). .. That is, a display is made in which the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, when the fan advance notice icon I10 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (61). At this time, for example, below the enlarged fan notification icon I10, a character display of "blessing" for notifying that the big hit is set may be added. In addition, when adding the character display, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan advance notice icon I10 is enlarged and displayed, or may be performed before the enlarged display. , May be performed after enlarged display.

After that, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I10 of the fan is erased and the notice icon display area 285 is framed out at the timing of FIG. 86 (62). Is displayed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 86 (63), the variable display of the decorative symbols that have been fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is restarted and re-variation effect is started. .. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is completely framed out. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be continuously displayed even after the re-variation effect is started.

In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 86 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced in size. It

Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (65 ), the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is displayed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (66), the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" which is confirmed as a big hit is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the first special figure display device 212, 15R probability variation big hit "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display device 284a, the fourth symbol (round figure) of special figure 1 Is lit. After that, although not shown, the big hit game is started after the above-described big hit game start effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, the fan advance notice icon I10 displayed in the advance notice icon display region 285 is exhausted, so that the re-variation effect is executed and a big hit occurs. However, the fan advance notice icon I10 is displayed in the advance notice icon display region. If it is not displayed in 285, the re-variation effect is not performed, and the display result of the outlier may be derived. In other words, when the reach transition effect executed by digesting the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is not performed, this reach transition effect can be regarded as a false notice effect. That is, when one notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is consumed, when a reach transition effect as a false notice of a type corresponding to the notice icon I9 of a consumed box is executed, the result of the variable display of symbols is displayed. It can be said that is out of range. The same applies to the notice effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6, the notice effect corresponding to the shuriken notice icon I7, and the notice effect corresponding to the ribbon notice icon I8.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the notice effect can be executed according to the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. In other words, it can be said that the notice icon is configured to be displayed in a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed.

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the description is given of the one in which the notice icon is consumed only during the execution of the pattern variation display which is the subject of the notice ahead of time, and the effect corresponding to the noticed icon after the notice is executed is executed. Even in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display, the notice icon may be consumed and the effect corresponding to the notice icon may be executed. In this case, the number of notice icons consumed in the pattern change display subject to prefetch notice and the number of notice icons consumed in the pattern change display executed before the symbol change display subject to prefetch notice are made different. Or they may be the same.

Next, another example of the above-described effect of increasing the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. Here, FIG. 87 to FIG. 89 are diagrams showing stepwise other effect examples of the effect of increasing the notice icon. 87 to 89, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

87(8a) to FIG. 87(10a) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 82(8) to 82(10). That is, in FIG. 87(8a), not the notice icon I6 of the hat but the notice icon I1 of the first lord is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, and an effect display is displayed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (9a-1), the thrown first palace's notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 87(9a-2), after the display that the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 explodes, the timing shown in FIG. 87(10a). Then, the notice icon I1 of the first lord who has exploded changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the presentation display is performed in which the lord's character YM succeeds in increasing the notice icons and makes a happy expression. Even with this example of effect, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6 will be executed in the future.

87(8b) to (9b) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 82(8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 87(8b), the effect display in which the first button notice icon I4 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed.

Then, the thrown first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (9b). When the effect button 136 is operated during the period from the display of the first button notice icon I4 in the notice icon display area 285 to the consumption of the first button notice icon I4, the first button notice icon The notice icon I1, the second notice icon I2 of the second lord, and the third notice icon I3 of the second lord. As described above, in this example of performance, it is difficult to recognize the reliability of the big hit indicated by the notice icon until the effect button 136 is operated. Therefore, the incentive to operate the effect button 136 in order to know the reliability of the big hit. May work, and the staging effect may be enhanced. The period from the time the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 until the time it is consumed may be the effective period of the operation of the effect button 136. Here, when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed over a plurality of symbol variable displays, the operation of the effect button 136 may be invalidated during the symbol stop display period, or the symbol may be invalidated. The operation of the effect button 136 may be valid during the stop display period. If the effect button 136 is not operated until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed when the effect button 136 was operated during the notice effect of the notice icon was displayed. A corresponding effect display may be performed, or when the button effect is performed when the first button notice icon I4 is consumed and the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136, The effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed may be performed, or when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 ends without operating the effect button 136, the notice that was scheduled to be displayed The effect display corresponding to the icon may be performed. In addition, after the first button notice icon I4 is consumed and the button effect is started, the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed only when the effect button 136 was operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136. The effect display corresponding to may be performed. Further, when the button effect is performed, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may not be provided. In this case, the effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed after the button effect was started may be performed. Further, until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, even if the effect button 136 is operated, the first button notice icon may not be changed to another notice icon.

87(8c) to (9c) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 82(8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 87(8c), as in the case of FIG. 82(8), the effect display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed.

However, in the case of FIG. 87(9c), it is shown that the notice icon I6 of the hat does not reach the notice icon display area 285, and is framed out from the left of the display area. That is, in the present embodiment, it is also possible to execute a sloppy increase effect in which the increase of the notice icon fails. Note that the gallet increase effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6. For example, the notice icon having a higher reliability of the jackpot may be less likely to be executed.

FIG. 87(7d) to FIG. 87(9d) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 82(7) to 82(9). That is, in FIG. 87(7d), similar to FIG. 82(7), a state in which the lord's character YM having the hat notice icon I6 is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position is shown. Thereafter, in FIG. 87(8d), not only one hat notice icon I6 but also three hat notice icons I6 are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 for effect display. The effect display may be thrown one by one, not simultaneously.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (9d), the notice icons I6 of the three thrown caps are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display in the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, the increase of the plurality of notice icons can be executed by one increase effect. Therefore, the increase in the number of notice icons at one time improves the sense of expectation for the increase in the number of notice executions, and may improve the effect. It is to be noted that, for example, as shown in FIG. 87 (9d), the same notice icon (for example, the notice icon I6 of a hat) is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 by a predetermined number (for example, three) or more, so that the pseudo link is performed. It may be possible to give a notice that the big hit is settled because the effect is guaranteed to be executed three times. The notice icon with high reliability is hard to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (hard to be stocked), and the notice icon with low reliability is easy to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (easy to be stocked). Or vice versa.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 87 (9d'), some or all of the three hated notice icons I6 of the hat have not reached the notice icon display area 285, and from the left of the display area. It is also possible to execute a partly increased increase effect or a completely decreased increase effect that causes a frame out.

87(7e) to FIG. 87(9e) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 82(7) to 82(9). That is, in FIG. 87(7e), unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 82(7), the character YM of the lord who has the notice icon I6 for one hat, the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 for a fan in addition to the notice icon I6 for one hat. Is displayed to be moved to a predetermined throwing position. At this time, only one or two of the three notice icons may be displayed. Here, only the notice icon with the lowest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, only the notice icon with the highest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or the notice icon randomly selected. You may make it display only. After that, in FIG. 87(8e), the effect display in which the notice icon I6 for the hat, the notice icon I9 for the thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 for the fan are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. The effect display may be thrown one by one, not simultaneously. Further, as described above, the three notice icons may not be different from each other, and for example, the same notice icon may be included in plural.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 87(9e), the three notice icons thrown are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285. Displayed respectively. As described above, also in this example of effect, it is possible to increase the plurality of types of notice icons by one increase effect. Therefore, since the number of notice icons increases at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of notice executions can be improved, and the expectation for the execution of a plurality of notices can be increased, so that the effect can be further enhanced. There are cases.

Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 87(9e′), some or all of the three preview icons thrown do not reach the preview icon display area 285, and the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. It is also possible to execute a partial gall increase effect or an all gase increase effect that causes a frame out from the left side of the area.

FIG. 87(12f-1) to FIG. 87(12f-2) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 82(12). That is, in FIG. 87 (12f-1), as in the case of FIG. 82 (12), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed with the notice icon I6 of the hat being displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is being done. Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (12f-2), the decorative pattern of "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed and the reach effect is started. R. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even when the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach effect, a big hit may be made. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the big hit ends.

FIG. 88(8g) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 82(8). That is, in FIG. 88 (8g), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice (display mode by the character of Sabohani), the lord's character YM displays the notice icon I6 of the hat in the notice icon display area 285. A performance display that is thrown at is displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the increase effect of the notice icon even during the execution of the prefetch notice using the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase effect of the notice icon and the pre-read notice using the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

FIG. 88(8h) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 82(8). That is, in FIG. 88 (8h), the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are not displayed in the decorative pattern display device 208, and the effect hold lamp 286 is set at a predetermined position on the game board 200 (for example, It may be provided in the vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208), so that the number of holdings is displayed. The effect holding lamp 286 includes, for example, a full-color LED and is drive-controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. For example, in addition to lighting in a default lighting mode (for example, lighting in white), pre-reading warning light is emitted. Drive control can be performed according to the mode (for example, lighting while switching between 7 colors). In FIG. 88 (8h), for convenience of description, the holding lamp of the second special diagram 1 which is the target of prefetching is shown by hatching, but actually, the first special diagram 1 is shown. Like the holding lamp of No. 2, the second holding lamp of Toku-zu 1 is also turned on by the default light emission mode.

FIG. 88(8i) to FIG. 88(9i-2) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 82(8) to 82(9). That is, in FIG. 88(8i), as in the case of FIG. 82(8), an effect display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed.

However, in the case of FIG. 88 (9i-1), it is shown that the notice icon I6 of the hat does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 88 (9i-2), the notice icon I6 of the hat acts on the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to display the look-ahead notice. The effect display that changes to (holding change effect) is being performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the hat notice icon I6 may not be displayed as a notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger for starting the prefetch notice by the hold icon. The hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6. For example, the notice change icon having a higher reliability of the big hit may be less likely to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 89 (9i-2′), the variable symbol display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are not displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and are held using the effect holding lamp 286. In the case of displaying the number, the light emitting mode of the first holding lamp of the special drawing 1 may be changed to the light emitting mode of the pre-reading notice after the hat notice icon I6 drops below the display area.

88(8j) to FIG. 88(9j) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 82(8) to 82(9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 82(8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 88(8j) it differs from FIG. 82(8). It is shown that the character BY of DJ having the notice icon appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area, not the character YM of the lord (DJ effect). In the example shown in FIG. 88 (8j), the DJ character appears with the notice icon I6 of the hat. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 88(9j), the DJ character BY jumps toward the upper left corner and displays the hat notice icon I6 in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The effect display that is left on is displayed. Note that the number of the notice icons that the DJ character BY places in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one and may be two or more. In addition, a plurality of types of advance notice icons may be placed in the advance notice icon display area 285 in one production of the advance notice icon by the DJ character BY. In this manner, a plurality of types of increase effects of the notice icon may be prepared (for example, a first notice icon increase effect by the lord's character YM and a second notice icon increase effect by the DJ character BY). By configuring, the production may be diversified and the production effect can be enhanced.

88(8k) to FIG. 88(9k) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 82(8) to 82(9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 82(8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 88(8k), the DJ with the notice icon is further added. Character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 88 (8k), the DJ character appears with the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 88 (9k), the hat notice icon I6 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ character is While flying toward the upper left corner, the effect display is performed in which the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes held is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed as if it passes through the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 88 (9k'), the DJ character is placed in a layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 so that the DJ character passes behind the notice icon. You may display as if you are doing. Also, as shown in FIG. 88 (9k″), the DJ character BY is displayed in a thousand boxes so as to be superimposed on the hat notice icon I6 thrown by the lord's character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. You may make it perform the effect display which puts the notice icon I9 in the notice icon 1st display area YA1. That is, the notice icon may be overwritten. In this way, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may enhance the effect of the effects.

FIG. 88(12l) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 82(12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 88 (12l), character notations corresponding to the respective notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are displayed together. For example, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is additionally displayed with the character "CONTINUE", and the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. "Promotion" is additionally displayed, and the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is additionally displayed with "Blessing" and the notice icon fourth display. The notice icon I7 of the shuriken displayed in the area YA4 is additionally displayed with the characters "Chan eyes", and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5 is "STETCHEN". The characters are additionally displayed, and the caption notification icon I6 displayed in the notification icon sixth display area YA6 is additionally displayed with the characters "question mark" together with "continuation". This may make it easier to understand the contents of the notice effect that is predicted to be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIG. 88 (12l′) and FIG. 88 (12l″), some or all of the characters additionally displayed on the notice icon are changed to “question mark” to clarify the corresponding notice effect. It may not be displayed in. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not a notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon will be executed, which may improve interest.

Further, it may be possible to give a notice that the effect display in which the big hit is determined by the combination of the plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 or the number of the notice icons displayed is executed, for example, FIG. 88. As shown in (12l″″), when three notice icons I6 of a hat to which the character notation of “continuation” is added are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, four big pseudo-fixes are determined. It may be possible to give a notice that the effect display including the continuous effect is performed. In addition, when the character additionally displayed on the notice icon does not correspond to the notice icon (for example, when the character "promotion" is additionally displayed on the notice icon I6 of the hat), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed. The result of the symbol variation display when is digested is a big hit confirmation (or there may be a big hit in the hold) may be a premier notice display.

In the effect example described above, the notice icon is increased by the appearance of the lord's character YM or the DJ character BY, but in the effect example shown in FIG. 89, the notice icon is increased by the display of the decorative pattern. It is something to do.

In FIG. 89(A1), the decorative symbols of “decoration 6” are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed and the reach effect is started. This reach effect is, for example, normal reach.

After the reach effect starts, the notice icon pattern imitating the notice icon is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 89(A2). In the example shown in FIG. 89(A2), the hat notice icon pattern imitating the hat notice icon I6 is stopped and displayed. The word "stock" is added near the lower part of the notice icon pattern of this hat, and when the notice icon pattern is stopped and displayed, the notice icon display area 285 is informed that the notice icons will be increased and displayed. doing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89(A3), the notice icon pattern of the hat is changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the notice icon display area 285 is moved to the notice icon first display area YA1. As shown in (A4), the decorative pattern of "decoration 5" arranged on the back side of the notice icon pattern is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the display result is off. In this embodiment, the effect of increasing the number of notice icons may be performed in this manner.

In FIG. 89(B1), similarly to the effect example shown in FIG. 89(A1), the decorative symbols of “decoration 6” are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, to form the reach state. , Normal reach production is started.

After the reach effect is started, at the timing shown in FIG. 89(B2), the notice icon icon of the first lord who imitates the notice icon I1 of the first lord is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the production example shown in FIG. 89(B2), the notice icon “STOCK” is added to the notice icon design of the first lord, and the notice icon display area is displayed by stopping the notice icon design. In 285, it is informed that the notice icon is displayed in an increased number.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89(B3), the notice icon design of the first lord changes to the notice icon I1 of the first lord and moves to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. As shown in FIG. 89(B4), the decorative design of "decoration 5" arranged on the back side of the notice icon design is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result is a display defect. At this time, the notice icon I1 of the first lord has changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat. It is needless to say that the changed notice icon is not limited to the hat notice icon I6 and may be another type of notice icon. Further, the timing of changing the notice icon is not limited to the period during which the symbol variation display is being executed, and for example, the notice icon may be changed during the execution of the symbol variation display from the next time onward. The icon may not be changed until it is exhausted. In the present embodiment, the effect of increasing the number of notice icons may be performed in this manner.

Next, another example of the above-mentioned notice icon digesting effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 93. Here, FIG. 90 to FIG. 93 are diagrams showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon digesting effect. 90 to 93, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

90 (38 m) to FIG. 90 (40 m-3) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 84 (38) to (40 ). 90(38m) to (39m), the same effect as in FIGS. 84(38) to (39) is performed, but in FIG. 90(40m-1), the middle symbol display area 208b is operated at a low speed. Although the pseudo-relational pattern appears in a variably displayed manner, after that, as shown in FIG. 90 (40m-2), immediately before the pseudo-relational pattern comes to the stop display position of the decorative pattern, the variable display becomes high speed and the pseudo-relational pattern. Is scrolled out to the lower part of the display area, and as shown in FIG. 90 (40m-3), a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed as a temporary stop and fluctuations are displayed. , It is informed that it is the result of the stop display. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the hat notice icon I6 is consumed, the pseudo-relation effect may not be performed.

90 (23n) to FIG. 90 (24n) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 83 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 90(23n), the display that the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted is started, but as shown in FIG. 90(24n), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is enlarged and displayed. There may be a case where a display that is erased as it is is displayed, and that the digested effect is not performed.

90(23o) to FIG. 90(24o-2) show another example of the effects shown in FIG. 83(23) to FIG. 83(24). That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (23o), the display of the notice icon I6 of the hat is started, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 90 (24o-1). The notice icon I6 of No. is erased, and as shown in FIG. 90 (24o-2), the combination of the decorative patterns that are out of order without the pseudo continuous effect being started (in FIG. 90 (24o-2), “decoration 1-decoration 2 -A combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 2") is displayed as a temporary stop, and fluctuations are displayed. After that, stop display is performed and the result of the deviation is notified. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the hat notice icon I6 is consumed, the pseudo-relation effect may not be performed.

90(22p) to FIG. 90(23p) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 83(22) to 83(23). That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (22p), when, for example, 4 seconds elapse after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, in FIG. 90 (23p), the leftmost side of the notice icon display area 285 (the notice icon is displayed). Instead of the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the first display area YA1), another notice icon may be displayed. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 90 (23p), an effect in which the 1,000-box warning icon I9 displayed in the notification icon third display area YA3 is consumed is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the notice icons may not be sequentially digested from the left. Further, in the present embodiment, the notice icons are consumed in the order in which they are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (in other words, the stocked order), but the notice icons that are stocked later are digested first. There may be cases. For example, if a previously-stocked notice icon is first consumed, the big hit may be likely to occur, or conversely, the big hit may not be likely to occur. In addition, regardless of the stock order, the order of digesting the notice icons may be determined. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may not be affected, or the reliability of the jackpot may change depending on the order of notice of the notice icons. You may do so. Further, it may be possible to give a notice that the jackpot is settled by digesting a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in a specific order. For example, a notice icon I6 for a hat and a shuriken A rule may be set such that the jackpot is determined when the notice icon I7, the hat notice icon I6, the shuriken notice icon I7, the hat notice icon I6, and the shuriken notice icon I7 are digested in this order. As a result, the player may be given an incentive to find out the rule of the digestion order of the notice icon which is a big hit, and the player's motivation may be improved.

90(24q-1) to (24q-2) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 83(24). That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (24q-1), the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested to the notice icon first display area YA1. After the vacancy has occurred, as shown in FIG. 90 (24q-2), the display positions of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 to the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are moved to the left side, respectively. You can At this time, for example, a moving animation for moving the display position of the notice icon to the left side may be performed, or the display position may be changed without performing the animation. The timing of changing the display position of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as when the digestion effect of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started. However, it may be after the digestion effect of the notice icon is started or after the digestion effect of the notice icon is finished.

FIG. 91(Aa) to FIG. 91(Ae) show effect examples when the notice effect of the notice icon is increased and then the notice effect of the notice icon is increased. That is, as shown in FIG. 91(Aa), after the shuriken's notice icon I7 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285 is consumed, the stop symbol notice is executed, At the timing indicated by 91 (Ab), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and it is informed that the display result is out of alignment. Then, as shown in FIG. 91(Ac), after the hold is exhausted and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, as shown in FIG. 91(Ad), the increase effect of the notice icon by the lord's character YM is performed. When the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, as shown in FIG. 91(Ae), the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is exhausted to leave a blank notice icon third. A notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes thrown in the display area YA3 is displayed. In this way, it is possible to display an increasing number of notice icons in the notice icon display area that is blank due to the notice icon being consumed.

FIG. 91(B) shows an example of an effect in which the number of notice icons is increased after a plurality of blanks appear in the notice icon display area due to the consumption of a plurality of notice icons. That is, as shown in FIG. 91B, in the notice icon display area 285, after the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 are consumed, the lord's character YM is displayed. When the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 which are blank are displayed. Of these, they are displayed in order from the left. In this way, the display of increasing the number of notice icons may be performed. Note that when there are a plurality of blanks in the notice icon display area 285, the order of the display areas for displaying the increasing notice icons is not limited to the above-described order, and may be another order. It may be preset in 400. Also, in this example of performance, the reliability of the big hit and the number of the notice icons are not changed depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed. It may be suggested that the reliability or the number of displayed notice icons is different. For example, in the case where an increasing number of notice icons are displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6, which is the rightmost area of the blank notice areas in the notice icon display area 285, at least six notice icons are displayed. It may be suggested that it is displayed in the display area 285, or that the reliability of the big hit is the highest.

FIG. 91C shows an example of an effect when the notice effect of the notice icon and the increase effect of the notice icon are executed during the execution of the one-time symbol variable display. That is, as shown in FIG. 91(C), while the effect of digesting the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is being performed, It is displayed that the advance notice icon I6 by the character YM is produced, and the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. Here, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is a notice icon increased in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display is executed. In this manner, the notice effect of the notice icon and the increase effect of the notice icon may be executed during one execution of the symbol variable display. At this time, the period in which the notice effect of the notice icon is performed and the period in which the notice effect of the notice icon is increased may overlap. Further, the increase effect of the notice icon may be started after the notice effect of the notice icon is started, the digest effect of the notice icon may be started after the increase effect of the notice icon is started, or the notice icon The digest effect and the increase of the notice icon may be started at the same time. Here, the area where the increasing notice icon is displayed may be an area that is blank at the time of starting the variable display of symbols, or after the variable display of symbols is started, the increase effect of the notice icon is increased. It may be an area that is planned to be blank before it is started.

FIG. 91 (59r) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 86 (59). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 91 (59r), before the digestion effect of the advance notice icon is started, the effect of inspiring whether or not the advance notice icon is exhausted is performed. Specifically, for example, of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, whether or not the notice icon, which is the target of the digest, starts shaking and fluctuates, and whether or not the notice icon is digested is determined. I am trying to fuel it. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (60), the fan advance notice icon I10 may be exhausted, or the fan advance notice icon I10 may not be exhausted. When not digested, the notice icon may be erased without being digested, or the notice icon may be maintained and the notice icon may be suspended. In the effect example shown in FIG. 91 (59r), when the fan advance notice icon I10 is erased without being consumed, thereafter, a stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative decorations, which is the display result of the deviation. You may notify that.

91 (59s) to (60s) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 86 (59) to (60). That is, in FIG. 91 (59s), the notice icon display area 285 shows two hat notice icons I6, a thousand-box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10. Among the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 after the fluctuation starts with the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1", the notice icon of the fan is displayed. When I10 is digested, it gives a notice of a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 91 (60s), when another notice icon (for example, the notice icon I6 of a hat) is digested, it is left as it is. The combination of the decorative patterns may be used to notify that the display is stopped and is not displayed.

FIG. 91(23t) to FIG. 91(32t) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 83(23) to 84(32). That is, as shown in FIG. 91 (23t), in this example of presentation, an in-digestion notice icon display area YA0 for displaying the noticed icon that has been consumed is added to the notice icon display area 285. As shown in FIG. 91 (23t) to FIG. 91 (25t), when the digestion effect of the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started, the digested hat notice icon I6 is started. Is displayed in the digesting notice icon display area YA0. As shown in FIG. 91 (28t) to FIG. 91 (32t), the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the digesting notice icon display area YA0 is continuously displayed even after being digested, and the corresponding effect (pseudo continuous effect) is displayed. ) Is displayed continuously until the end. It should be noted that the timing of displaying the notice icon in the during-digest notice icon display area YA0 may start after the notice effect of the notice icon starts, or before the notice effect of the notice icon starts. It may be the same as the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon displayed in the during-digest notice icon display area YA0 is erased may be after the notice effect of the notice icon ends, or before the notice effect of the notice icon ends. Good, it may be at the same time as the end of the digestion effect of the notice icon, or after the production corresponding to the digested notice icon has started, or after the production corresponding to the digested notice icon has ended. May be the same as the start of the production corresponding to the digested notice icon, may be before the production corresponding to the digested notice icon starts, or to the digested notice icon. It may be performed at the same time as the end of the corresponding effect, or may be deleted at the end of the symbol variation in which the notice icon is erased (for example, the symbol stop timing of the special figure), or the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion. Is deleted at the timing (for example, the notice icon display area 285 and the notice-in-digestion icon display area YA0 are deleted in FIG. 85 (44) or only the notice-icon-in-digestion display area YA0 is deleted). May be. In addition, when a plurality of notice icons are consumed during one pattern change display, the notice icon a in the digesting notice icon display area YA0 corresponding to the notice icon A that has been digested first is the notice icon A. The effect may be erased after or at the same time as the end of the effect, and no notification icon may be displayed in the in-digestion notification icon display area YA0, or the digestion effect of the notification icon B to be digested next may be started. May be deleted at the same time as or after being started, or may be deleted at the same time as or after the notice icon b displayed in the digesting notice icon display area corresponding to the notice icon B to be digested next is displayed. The notice icon a may be left as the history even during the digestion of the notice icon B, or at the end of the symbol variation in which the notice icon A and the notice icon B are consumed (for example, It may be erased at the symbol stop timing in the figure). When the notice icon display area 285 is erased when a specific effect display (for example, during a super reach effect, a big hit effect, or a simultaneous island effect) is performed, only the notice icon display area 285 is deleted, and the notice is being consumed. The icon display area YA0 may be displayed as it is, or conversely, only the digesting notice icon display area YA0 may be deleted and the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed as it is. Both the area 285 and the in-digestion notice icon display area YA0 may be deleted.

FIG. 92(Aa) to FIG. 92(Ae) show effect examples in which a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area are consumed at the same time. That is, in FIG. 92(Aa), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3. A ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed, and a fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Then, of these notice icons, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 are respectively consumed. The production is started. Here, the start timings of the digestion effects of the respective notice icons may be the same or different. In this case, the order of digesting the notice icons may be the order corresponding to the execution order of the effects.

After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon are moved to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, as shown in FIG. .. Specifically, the character display of "Continue" is additionally displayed near the lower part of the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat, and the character display of "Stéchen" is added near the lower part of the notice icon I8 of the enlarged ribbon. Is displayed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the stage change effect is started in response to the completion of the notice icon I8 on the ribbon. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92(Ac), after the shoji closes and Princess Chibi's character CH appears on the front side thereof, as shown in FIG. 92(Ad), the shoji opens and the moon opens. The display of the background (moon surface) showing how the universe is viewed from the surface starts. It should be noted that during execution of the stage change effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c is the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. Moves to and is displayed in reduced size.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92(Ae), the reduced-sized decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area, and then, in response to the notice icon I6 of the hat, the banquet character BC. Appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect display that pushes up the right symbol that is stopped and displayed is performed, and the player is informed that the pseudo continuous effect may be executed thereafter. ..

In this example of effect, the start timings of the plurality of effects corresponding to the digested notice icon are different, but they may be started at the same time.

FIG. 92 (66u-1) to FIG. 92 (66u-3) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 86 (66). That is, in FIG. 92 (66u-1), the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that it is a big hit, but the notice icon display area 285 is continuously displayed. It is shown that there is an undigested notice icon. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (66u-2), after the jackpot start effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 92 (66u-3), after the jackpot round game is started, it is still undigested. A notice icon is displayed. In this example of performance, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed below the display area during execution of the big hit game, but it may be displayed above the display area. In addition, in this effect example, the undigested notice icon may be used, for example, in a promotion effect during a big hit (for example, an effect that notifies that the probability variation big hit is confirmed). In the example shown in -3), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted during execution of the jackpot game, it is notified that the probability variation jackpot is confirmed, and when the notice icon I10 of the fan is consumed. May notify that the 15R jackpot is confirmed. Further, when the other notice icon is consumed, for example, it may have a meaning indicating that it may be promoted. In this way, even with the same notice icon, when the big hit game is exhausted during execution, an effect of giving another meaning may be performed. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the big hit game may be different from the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display. That is, a notice icon specific to a big hit may be prepared. Further, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the jackpot game may be the same as the notice icon displayed during the execution of the variable display, or only some notice icons may be commonly used. ..

FIGS. 92(Ba) to (Bc) are display examples before and after the stage change. That is, as shown in FIG. 92(Ba), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and thereafter, the hold is exhausted and symbol variation. When the display is started, the stage change effect is started as shown in FIG. 92(Bb). When the stage change effect is started, the notice icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden together with the notice icon display area 285. After that, when the stage change effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 92(Bc), although not shown, the background is changed and the symbol variable display is continuously performed. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed again, but all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be erased when the stage is changed. It should be noted that after the stage change is performed, the notice icon may be erased without fail, or only a part of the plurality of notice icons may be erased, or the notice icon may not be erased. Good.

FIG. 92(22v-1) to FIG. 23(23v) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 83(22) to 83(23). That is, as shown in FIG. 92 (22v-1), when the symbol variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 92 (22v-2), the lord's character YM2 with a placard appears and is digested. Notify in advance the type of advance notice icon. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (23v), the digestion effect of the notice icon in which the notice icon of the type notified in advance (the notice icon I6 of the hat) is consumed is started. Even if the type of the notice icon to be digested is announced in advance, the notice icon may not be digested, or a notice icon of a different type from the notice icon that was announced in advance is digested. May be done. When a notice icon of a different type from the notice icon given in advance is consumed, it may be suggested that the reliability of the big hit is high.

FIG. 92(22w) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 83(22). That is, as shown in FIG. 92 (22w), after the variable display of the symbols is started, the notice icon that may be consumed is highlighted so that the player pays attention to the use of the notice icon. Good.

In the above-described embodiment, for example, when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the bancho character BC appears and the pseudo-relation effect is executed, and other effects are not performed. Although the production corresponding to is executed and the other productions are not executed, for example, although the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed, the bancho character BC does not appear, and the princess character appears. The big hit may be settled when an effect that does not correspond to the digested notice icon is executed (so-called, big hit is settled).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the notice icon to be digested is predetermined and cannot be selected by the player. However, for example, by operating the effect button 136 or the like, the notice icon to be digested is displayed. You may make it selectable.

In addition, when the big hit in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is erased when the big hit game is started, and the notice icon is carried over when shifting to the probability changing state or the time saving state. It may be configured not to be performed. In addition, when the big hit in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is once hidden when the big hit game is started, and is displayed again after the probability variation state or the time saving state is finished. May be configured as follows. Further, it may be configured not to be carried over even after the probability variation state or the time saving state is completed.

Next, a description will be given of an example of an effect that gives advance notice of the contents of the reach effect that will be transferred thereafter depending on the type of the notice icon that is consumed.

As shown in FIG. 93(Aa), when "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a, respectively, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. May be digested. For example, as shown in FIG. 93(Ab-1), when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 93(Ac-1), the enlarged character length character BC2 is displayed. Appears, and then shifts to the Bancho reach that corresponds to the appeared character. Further, as shown in FIG. 93(Ab-2), when the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is consumed, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93(Ac-2), the enlarged lord's character YM3 is displayed. Appears, and then shifts to the Tonosama Reach corresponding to the appeared character. In addition, as shown in FIG. 93(Ab-3), when the fan advance notice icon I10 is exhausted, thereafter, the enlarged princess character HM is displayed as shown in FIG. 93(Ac-3). Appears, and then shifts to Princess Reach corresponding to the appeared character. In addition, in this example of performance, the reliability of the big hit that the notice icon means corresponds to, and the reliability of the big hit of these reach effects is configured in the order of princess reach> lord's reach> bancho reach. There is. It should be noted that when a character other than the character corresponding to the digested notice icon appears (for example, a lord's character enlarged and displayed after the hat notice icon I6 has disappeared) appears (in the case where a so-called law break occurs). May be configured so that a jackpot is confirmed. Alternatively, a plurality of notice icons may be combined and digested, and a plurality of characters may appear in response to the notice icons to execute the combined notice. In addition, a specific effect for digesting a plurality of notice icons (dedicated effect for multiple digestion) may be executed, and it is a big hit if a plurality of notice icons are consumed rather than a notice icon is consumed. May be configured to have high reliability.

Next, a button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 has been consumed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 93(Ba), a second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and after the pattern variation display is started, At the timing shown in (Bb), the display of consuming the second button notice icon I11 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 93(Bc), a button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter and the effect button 136 is displayed. The player is informed that the operation can be accepted, and the player is prompted to operate the effect button 136.

Next, another example of the button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 is consumed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 93(Ca), a second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Further, the above-mentioned button reach effect is performed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. After that, at the timing of FIG. 93(Cb), the display in which the second button notice icon I11 is consumed is started. That is, a display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it overlaps with the button image 136a already displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and is shown in FIG. 93(Cc). As described above, the projected button image 136b is changed to the projected button image 136b. That is, it is shown that the button has been promoted to a button reach effect with higher reliability of the big hit.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the effect centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 95 is a stepwise continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 94. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing in sequence the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 95, and FIG. 97 is a diagram showing in sequence the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 96. 98 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 97.

Incidentally, in FIGS. 94(1) to 95(14), the notice icon I6 of the hat was changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord, which was the notice icon used in the effect of increasing the notice icon. Since it is the same as FIGS. 82(1) to 83(14) except for the points, the description thereof is omitted here. Also, regarding the effect performed between FIG. 95(14) and FIG. 95(20), all the notice icons used in the increase effect of the notice icon are changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. 83(15) to FIG. 83(19) except for.

In FIG. 95(20), the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the result of the deviation is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in FIG. 95(21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

In FIG. 95(22), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes to the variable icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds elapse after the variable display of the decorative symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 95 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays it in the notice icon first display area YA1. In addition, the display that the first notice icon I1 of the Lord is consumed is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 95(23), when a plurality of the same notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, for example, four notice icons I1 of the first lord are displayed, for example, Although it is set in advance to preferentially consume the notice icon displayed on the leftmost side, the order of digesting may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Further, which of the notice icons to use may be randomly determined, or the notice icon displayed on the rightmost side may be set to be preferentially consumed. That is, the order in which the notice icons are consumed is not limited to the above-described order and can be set appropriately.

After that, when the first palace's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, it changes to the hat notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (24) and is enlarged and displayed. As shown at 95 (25), a character display of "continuation" for announcing that the pseudo continuous effect is performed is additionally displayed below the notice icon I6 of the enlarged and displayed hat. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time that the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. Good.

Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (26), the character display of "continuation" added to the hat notice icon I6 disappears and the hat notice icon is displayed. After I6 is reduced and displayed, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. As described above, in the present embodiment, the digested notice icon may be displayed again at the original position. It should be noted that when the digested notice icon is re-displayed at the original position, it may be displayed so that it can be recognized that it has been digested, for example, by changing the display area where the digested notice icon is displayed. The information may be displayed in gray-out, or the character information “done” may be added. Further, the digested notice icon may be deleted after being displayed in the notice icon display area 285.

After that, in the effect contents shown in FIGS. 95(27) to 96(33), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and the notice icon second display area YA2 to notice icon. This is the same as FIGS. 83(27) to 84(33) except that all the notice icons displayed in the fourth display area YA4 are changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. Is omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208, display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (34) to consume the first icon of the first palace's notice displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. That is, a display is performed in which the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the first palace's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, it changes to the hat notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (35) and is enlarged and displayed. As indicated by 96 (36 ), a character display of “continuation” for announcing that the pseudo continuous effect is to be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged notice icon I 6 of the hat.

Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (37), the character display of "continuation" attached to the hat notice icon I6 disappears and the hat notice icon is displayed. After I6 is reduced and displayed, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285.

After that, the effect contents shown in FIGS. 96 (38) to (45) are as follows. 84(38) to FIG. 85 (except that the notice icons displayed in the icon third display area YA3 and the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are both changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. 45), so the description here is omitted.

On the decorative pattern display device 208, display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (46) to consume the first icon of the first palace's notice displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3. That is, a display is performed in which the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the first palace's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes and is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (47). Above the notice icon I9 of the displayed 1000-litre box, a character display of "promotion" for notifying that the production with a higher degree of reliability is to be performed is additionally displayed. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is enlarged, may be displayed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. Good.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character display of "promotion" added to the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is deleted, and the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 96 (48). Then, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285. After that, the reach transition effect described above is started at the timing of FIG. 97 (49). In the present production example, when the reach transition production is started, as shown in FIG. 97 (49), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the production display such as the occurrence of the power failure is performed, the strong reach with high reliability is displayed. Production (button reach production) is started. When the button reach effect in this effect example is started, as shown in FIG. 96 (50-1), in the decorative pattern display device 208, after the character display “Is it a chance” is displayed on the dark background. , (50-2) in FIG. 97, the character display of "No" is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 97(51), the character display "Is it too hot?" is displayed, and then the character display "NO" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 97(52). After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (53), the character display "one shot" is displayed to notify that the button effect will be performed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (54), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to inform that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted, and inform the player. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (55), when the player operates the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 97 (56), the button image 136a is deleted in the decorative symbol display device 208, It shows that the button reach production has failed.

Eventually, in FIG. 97 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1".

In FIG. 97 (58), everything including the notice icon display area 285 is once hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 97 (59 ), swing fluctuation (provisional symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also restarted.

Then, for example, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display that the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (60). Be started. That is, a display is performed in which the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the first palace's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the fan notice icon I10 at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (61) and is enlarged and displayed. At this time, for example, below the enlarged fan notification icon I10, a character display of "blessing" for notifying that the big hit is set may be added. In addition, when adding the character display, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan advance notice icon I10 is enlarged and displayed, or may be performed before the enlarged display. , May be performed after enlarged display.

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208, after the fan notice icon I10 is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 98 (62), the original display position, that is, the notice icon fourth display region of the notice icon display region 285. A display for moving to YA4 is displayed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 98 (63), the variable display of the decorative design that has been fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is restarted and re-variation effect is started. .. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is still displayed.

In the re-changing effect, as shown in FIG. 98 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced in size. It

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 98(65), the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (66), the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" which is confirmed as a big hit is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the first special figure display device 212, 15R probability variation big hit "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display device 284a, the fourth symbol (round figure) of special figure 1 Is lit. After that, although not shown, the big hit game is started after the above-described big hit game start effect is executed.

Next, another example of the above-described effect of increasing the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. Here, FIG. 99 to FIG. 101 are diagrams showing, in stages, another effect example of the effect of increasing the notice icon. 99 to 101, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

FIG. 99(8a) to FIG. 99(9a) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 94(8) to 94(9). That is, in FIG. 99(8a), the effect display in which the third palace's notice icon I3 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the first lord's notice icon I1 is displayed. Note that the same can be done for the second palace's notice icon I2. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 98(9a), the thrown third palace's notice icon I3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285.

FIG. 99(8b) to FIG. 99(9b) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 94(8) to 94(9). That is, in FIG. 99(8b), as in the case of FIG. 94(8), an effect display in which the first palace's notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed.

However, in the case of FIG. 99 (9b), it is shown that the notice icon I1 of the first lord does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and the frame is out from the left of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the effect of increasing the amount of noise using the announcement icon of the lord.

FIG. 99(8c) to FIG. 99(9c) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 94(8) to 94(9). That is, in FIG. 99(8c), not only one notice icon I1 of the first lord but also three notice icons I1 of the first lord are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 for effect display. ing. The effect display may be thrown one by one, not simultaneously.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (9c), the three first palace's notice icons I1 thrown are the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the third display area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, the increase of the plurality of notice icons can be executed by one increase effect. Therefore, the increase in the number of notice icons at one time improves the sense of expectation for the increase in the number of notice executions, and may improve the effect. Further, a highly reliable notice icon (for example, the notice icon I3 of the third lord) is difficult to be displayed (hard to be stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, and has a low reliability (for example, the first lord's notice). The notice icon I1) may be easily displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (prone to be stocked) or vice versa. In this example of performance, the same notice icon (the notice icon I1 of the first lord) is increased by three, but a plurality of types of notice icons having different degrees of reliability may be increased at the same time. The notice icon I1 of the first palace and the notice icon I3 of the third lord may be simultaneously increased.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 99(9c'), some or all of the three first palace's notice icons I1 thrown do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative pattern is displayed. You may make it perform the partial gall increase effect or the all gall increase effect which frame-outs from the left of the display area of the display device 208.

FIG. 99(8e) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 94(8). That is, in FIG. 99(8e), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetching notice (the display mode by the character of Savohani), the lord's character YM notifies the first lord's notice icon I1. An effect display that is thrown toward the display area 285 is displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the increase effect of the notice icon even during the execution of the prefetch notice using the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase effect of the notice icon and the pre-read notice using the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

FIG. 99(8f) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 94(8). That is, in FIG. 99 (8f), the variable symbol display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold number is displayed by the effect hold lamp 286. In FIG. 99 (8f), for convenience of description, the holding lamp of the second special diagram 1 which is the target of prefetching is hatched, but in reality, the first special diagram 1 is shown. Like the hold lamp of No. 2, the second hold lamp of Toku-zu 1 is also turned on by the default light emission mode.

FIGS. 99(8g) to (9g-2) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 94(8) to 94(9). That is, in FIG. 99(8g), as in the case of FIG. 94(8), an effect display in which the first palace's notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed.

However, in the case of FIG. 99 (9g-1), it is shown that the notice icon I1 of the first lord does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (9g-2), the notice icon I1 of the first lord acts on the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to read the advance notice. The effect display (holding change effect) that changes to the display mode is being performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the first lord's notice icon I1 may not be displayed as a notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger for starting the prefetch notice by the hold icon. Note that the hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the notice icon I1 of the first hall, for example, the notice change icon having a higher reliability of the jackpot may be less likely to be executed. Good.

FIG. 99 (12h-1) to FIG. 99 (12h-2) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 94 (12). That is, in FIG. 99 (12h-1), as in the case of FIG. 94 (12), the decorative pattern in the state where the first palace's notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The variable display is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (12h-2), the decorative pattern of "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed and the reach effect is started. It As described above, in this embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even when the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach effect, a big hit may be made. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the big hit ends.

FIG. 100(8i) to FIG. 100(9i) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIG. 94(8) to FIG. 94(9). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 94(8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 100(8i), it differs from FIG. 94(8). It is shown that the character BY of DJ having the notice icon appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, not the character YM of the lord. In the example shown in FIG. 100(8i), the DJ character BY appears with the first lord's notice icon I1. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100 (9 i ), the DJ character BY jumps toward the upper left corner and holds the first palace's notice icon I 1 in advance in the notice icon display area 285. The effect display that is placed in the display area YA1 is performed. Note that the number of the notice icons that the DJ character BY places in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one and may be two or more. In addition, a plurality of types of advance notice icons may be placed in the advance notice icon display area 285 in one production of the advance notice icon by the DJ character BY. In this manner, a plurality of types of increase effects of the notice icon may be prepared (for example, a first notice icon increase effect by the lord's character YM and a second notice icon increase effect by the DJ character BY). By configuring, the production may be diversified and the production effect can be enhanced.

FIGS. 100(8j) to (9j) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 94(8) to 94(9). That is, in the example of production shown in FIG. 94(8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 100(8j), the DJ with the notice icon is further added. Character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 100(8j), the DJ character BY appears with the first palace's notice icon I1. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 100(9j), the first palace's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ's As the character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the effect display is performed in which the first palace's notice icon I1 he/she has is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character BY is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed as if it passes through the notice icon front side. Here, as shown in FIG. 100 (9 j ′), by placing the character BY of DJ on a layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the back side of the notice icon is displayed. It may be displayed as passing.

FIG. 100(8k) to FIG. 100(9k) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIG. 94(8) to FIG. 94(9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 94(8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 100(8k), the DJ with the notice icon is further added. Character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 100 (8k), the DJ character BY appears with the third lord's notice icon I3. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (9k), the first palace's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then the DJ's While the character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the third lord's notice icon I3 is thrown by the lord's character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The effect display in which the character BY of DJ places the notice icon I3 of the third lord in the notice icon first display area YA1 is displayed so as to be superimposed on the notice icon I1. That is, it is possible to perform an effect of promotion by overwriting the notice icon having a low reliability of the big hit with the notice icon having a high reliability of the big hit. In this way, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may enhance the effect of the effects. It should be noted that this promotion effect may be performed while the same symbol variable display is being executed, or may be performed in a plurality of symbol variable displays. Further, the promotion effect may be executed every time the pseudo-relational effect is performed.

FIG. 100(12l) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 94(12). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 100 (12l), the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are displayed in association with the character notation of "question mark". For example, the notice icon I1 of the first visitor is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second visitor is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area is displayed. The notice icon I1 of the first palace is displayed in YA3, the notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4, and the notice icon I2 of the third lord is shown in the notice icon fifth display area YA5. The notice icon I3 is displayed, and the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6, and the letter notation of "question mark" is added to each notice. According to this effect example, it may be possible to give an expectation to the changed notice icon.

Further, as shown in FIG. 100 (12l′), some of the pre-change pre-notification icons may be pre-announced in a character notation after the change. For example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon fourth The second palace's notice icon I2 displayed in the display area YA4 has the letter "Question mark" added to it, and the changed notice icon cannot be recognized, but the notice icon third display area is displayed. The first lord's notice icon I1 displayed on YA3 is annotated to be changed to a shuriken notice icon I7 by adding the character notation "Chan-me", and is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5. The notice icon I3 of the third lord, who is displayed, is annotated to be changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat by adding the character notation of "continuation", and is displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6. The notice icon I1 of No. 1 lord is annotated with the character notation of "question mark" along with "continuation", and is changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat. These character notations may be notified at once for all or some of the notice icons, or may be notified gradually over time.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 100 (12l″), all or some of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are changed notice icons, and the changed notice icons are displayed. You may make it add the corresponding character notation only about the thing.

FIG. 101(8m-1) to FIG. 101(9m) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 94(8) to 94(9). That is, in the example of production shown in FIG. 94(8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 101(8m-1), the notice icon is further provided. It is shown that the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (8m-1), the DJ character BY appears with the 1,000-box warning icon I9. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (8m-2), after the first palace's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, As shown in FIG. 101 (9 m ), the character BY of DJ is thrown toward the upper left corner while throwing the 1,000-box notice icon I 9 thrown by the lord's character YM and the notice icon first display area. The production display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the 1,000-box notice icon I9 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to overlap with the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in YA1. According to this effect example, the pre-change notice icon may be overwritten with the post-change notice icon. In this way, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may enhance the effect of the effects. In addition, this overwriting effect may be performed during the execution of the same symbol variable display, or may be performed in a plurality of symbol variable displays. Further, the overwriting effect may be executed every time the pseudo continuous effect is performed.

FIG. 101(8n-1) to FIG. 101(9n) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 94(8) to 94(9). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 94(8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 101(8n-1), the notice icon is further provided. It is shown that the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (8n-1), the DJ character BY appears with the first lord's notice icon I1. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (8n-2), the 1,000-box warning icon I9 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the warning icon first display area YA1 of the warning icon display area 285, and then the FIG. As shown in FIG. 9n), while the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the first lord's notice icon I1 is thrown by the lord's character YM and the notice icon first display area is displayed. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the first palace's notice icon I1 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the thousand-box notice icon I9 displayed in YA1. In this way, the notice icon after the change may be overwritten on the notice icon before the change. In this way, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may enhance the effect of the effects. In addition, this overwriting effect may be performed during the execution of the same symbol variable display, or may be performed in a plurality of symbol variable displays. Further, the overwriting effect may be executed every time the pseudo continuous effect is performed. Further, when the notice icon before the change after the overwriting (for example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord) is consumed, the notice icon after the change becomes the notice icon before the overwriting (for example, the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes). May be another notice icon. At this time, it may be configured that the jackpot reliability is higher when the notice icon after overwriting is consumed than when the notice icon before overwriting is consumed, or it is configured so that the reliability of the jackpot is low. Alternatively, the reliability of the big hit may not be changed.

Next, an example of an effect in which the notice icon changes will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 102 is a diagram showing in stages an example of an effect in which the notice icon changes. In FIG. 102, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the public figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 102(A), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Then, in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1) are displayed, and it is shown that the start of the two symbol variations is put on hold. ing. Note that both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is hatched for convenience of description and is hatched for convenience of description, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The aspects are the same. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon first display area YA1 displays the notice icon I1 of the first visitor, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon I3 of the third visitor. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 102(A), the lord's character YM2 holding the placard appears during the variable display of the decorative pattern. This placard is given the character notation "I'll be changing" to announce that the display mode of either the notice icon or the hold icon will change.

After that, when the display mode of the notice icon changes after the predetermined effect is displayed, it is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 as shown in FIG. 102(B1). The notice icon I3 of the third lord changes to the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes. It should be noted that the display mode of the first notice icon I1 of the lord displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes, as shown in FIG. 102(B2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold displayed in the default display mode is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Changes to. It should be noted that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, any of the two hold icons h11, h12 may change, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change. May change. In this way, in the present production example, as a result of a certain production, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the certain production, the notice icon may be held without being changed. It can be said that the icon may change. It should be noted that there may be a case where the display modes of both the hold icon and the notice icon change due to this effect.

Further, as shown in 39(C), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner, but the reduced symbol is displayed at the lower right. Then, in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1) are displayed, and it is shown that the start of the two symbol variations is put on hold. ing. Note that both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is hatched for convenience of description and is hatched for convenience of description, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The aspects are the same. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon first display area YA1 displays the notice icon I1 of the first visitor, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon I3 of the third visitor. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 102(C), in the decorative pattern display device 208, a Chibihime chance effect is performed. The Chibihime chance effect is an effect that may be started when the above-mentioned universal figure variation game is executed. The Chibi-hime chance production is a production that imitates the Amida lottery, in which the Chibi-hime character selects one of the five start points, moves from the selected start point along the Amida route, and reaches the goal point. It is foretold that the effect corresponding to the icon shown will be executed. For example, when the princess Chibi character reaches the goal point indicated by the double circle icon, the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is foretold to be opened long, and “Super hot” is displayed. When reaching the goal point indicated by the letter notation, it is highly possible that the result of the symbol variation display being executed is a big hit, and when reaching the goal point indicated by the cross icon Indicates that the variable display result of the general map is out of order.

Further, in this example of performance, when the player reaches the goal point where the lord's notice icon is displayed, as shown in FIG. 102(D1), one of the pre-change notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. At least one of them changes to the changed notice icon. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 102(D1), the notice icon I3 of the third palace displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is changed to the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes. It should be noted that the display mode of the first notice icon I1 of the lord displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change.

When the character Sabohani reaches the indicated goal point, as shown in FIG. 102(D2), at least one of the hold icons in the default display mode in the hold icon display area 281 of Toku-zu 1 is displayed. Will change to the display mode of the advance notice. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 102(D2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which is the default display mode, is changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice. It should be noted that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, any of the two hold icons h11, h12 may change, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change. May change.

In this way, in the present production example, as a result of a certain production, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the certain production, the notice icon may be held without being changed. It can be said that the icon may change. It should be noted that there may be a case where the display modes of both the hold icon and the notice icon change due to this effect.

Next, a display example when power is cut off/power is restored while the notice icon is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. 103. Here, FIG. 103 is a diagram showing, step by step, a display example when power is cut off or restored while the notice icon is being displayed.

As shown in FIG. 103(A), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Then, in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1) are displayed, and it is shown that the start of the two symbol variations is put on hold. ing. Note that, of these two hold icons, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold is in the display mode of the prefetch notice, and the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is the default display. It is a mode. Further, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon third display area YA3 includes a thousand box. The notice icon I9 is displayed, and the notice icon I10 of the fan is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4.

In FIG. 103(B), the power is cut off for some reason, and FIG. 103(C) shows the decorative pattern display device 208 immediately after the power is restored instantaneously. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 103(C), a character display of "restore, please wait for a while" which is a return display is displayed. At this time, the first special figure display device 212 resumes the variable display, and the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, and the general figure holding device. The lamp 216 has returned to the state before the power failure. After that, as shown in FIG. 103(D), the variable display of symbols is finished, and the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and the special result I, which is the display result, is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, when the variable display of the symbols is finished, the display is stopped and displayed as "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 7" which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. Then, when the power is cut off or restored, all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are erased. Further, when the power is cut off or restored, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which is the display mode of the prefetching notice, also becomes the default display mode. In the present embodiment, when the power is cut off or restored, the pre-read result information stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage section or the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section in the RAM 308 is “undetermined” information. You may comprise so that it may become. Here, if there is at least one hold in which the "undetermined" information is included in the subcommand including the prefetch result information transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit, the "undetermined" information is included. The pre-reading notice including the notice effect and the increase effect of the notice icon may not be performed until all the reserved reservations have been consumed. In addition, the pre-reading notice is not given for the newly increased hold (holding that the pre-reading result is saved) after the power interruption/recovery, but the pre-reading notice is given after all the holdings including "undetermined" information have been exhausted. Alternatively, the pre-reading notice may be given before the suspension including the “undetermined” information is exhausted for the suspension that is newly increased after the power interruption/recovery.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is a step-by-step example of another effect of the increase effect of the notice icon and the digestion effect. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 104. 104 to 105, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 104, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold of the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching, but the display mode is For example, like the first hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

FIG. 104(1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 82(5) described above. However, in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the center of the display screen, a large decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, A second decorative symbol display area is formed above the hold icon display area 281, and the three-digit second decorative symbol is displayed in a small size, which is different from FIG. 82(5). The second decorative symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol display area is configured such that, after the fluctuation starts, the decorative symbols in any of the symbol rows continue to fluctuate until the fixed stop.

At the timing shown in FIG. 104(2), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. Here, unlike the case of FIG. 82(6), the lord's character YM possesses the notice icon I21 of "house" in which the letters "house" are circled.

At the timing shown in FIG. 104(3), the lord's character YM is moved to the predetermined throwing position, and then displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 104(4). An effect display that is thrown toward the area 285 is performed.

Then, the notice icon I21 of the thrown "house" is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 104(5), and then as shown in FIG. 104(6). In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect display in which the lord's character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and has a happy expression is performed. Thus, it can be said that the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, which at least suggests that a family crest effect described later may be executed in the future.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 104(7) to 104(8), a display is performed in which the lord's character YM is framed out toward the lower side of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 104(9), the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is determined. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Thereafter, the variable display of the symbols on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 104(10), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved by moving animations. The hold icon displayed and at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 changes to the special figure 1 Becomes the first hold icon h11. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

At the timing shown in FIG. 104(11), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. This is also an effect executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of pre-reading the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the "crest" notice icon I22 in which the character "crest" is circled.

Then, after the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 104(12), the notice icon I22 of the “crest” possessed is foretold at the timing shown in FIG. 104(13). An effect display that is thrown toward the icon display area 285 is performed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 104(14), the thrown "montle" notice icon I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. After that, the same effect display as in FIG. 104(6) is performed, and then the same effect display as in FIG. 104(7) to FIG. 104(8) is performed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 104(16), the decorative pattern display device 208 stops and displays the combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and notifies the display result of the deviation. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Thereafter, the variable display of the symbols on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 104 (17), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. ..

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 105(19) subsequent to FIG. 104(18), the notice icon I21 of the “house” and the notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 are displayed. The display in which the notice icon I22 of the “crest” displayed in the second display area YA2 is simultaneously consumed is started. That is, the notice icon I21 of "house" displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I22 of "crest" displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and A display for moving from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest” are consumed. The timing for deleting the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted when the effect corresponding to the end of the notice icon is started, or the effect corresponding to the end of the notice icon is started. The display may be continued after that. In addition, the movement of the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest” may be started at the same time, or the notice icon I21 of the “house” may be moved to be the notice icon I22 of “crest”. May be earlier than the start of movement, or the movement of the notice icon I22 of "Crest" may be earlier than the start of movement of the notice icon I21 of "house".

After that, when the "house" notice icon I21 and the "monkey" notice icon I22 move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 21) At the timing shown in 21), the family crest accessory 224B, which is one of the effect movable bodies 224, descends from above the decorative pattern display device 208, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an effect image to that effect. A fall production is performed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed small in the lower right part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 105(22), the super reach (swordsman reach) is developed. The effect contents of the swordsman reach are as described above with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79, and therefore the description thereof is omitted here.

In the present embodiment, when the two specific notice icons (for example, the notice icon I21 for "house" and the notice icon I22 for "crest") are consumed, a corresponding notice effect (decline for crest effect) is performed. Is configured. It should be noted that the family crest fall effect may not be performed even if these notice icons are exhausted, or another effect may be performed. In addition, when the family crest drop effect is performed, it may be guaranteed that a big hit will occur in the symbol variation display, or a result of a loss may result. In addition, the case where the crest fall effect is performed may be configured to be easier to hit than the case where the crest fall effect is not performed. In addition, the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be configured such that the family crest drop effect is performed more frequently than the symbol variation display that is a big hit. In addition, it is easier to consume the two specific notice icons (for example, the "house" notice icon I21 and the "monger" notice icon I22) in the symbol variation display which is a big hit than in the symbol variation display which is a loss. May be configured.

106 and 107 are diagrams showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon digesting effect. 106 to 107, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

In FIG. 106(a1), unlike FIG. 104(5), the notice icon I22 of “Crest” appears before the notice icon I21 of “house” and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. As shown in FIG. 106(a2), the notice icon I21 of “house” appears and is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 106(a3), the notice icon I22 of the “crest” displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 are displayed. The display that the notice icon I21 of the “house” that was used is simultaneously consumed is started. That is, the "crest" notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the "house" notice icon I21 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and A display for moving from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach state by “decoration 1” is formed and the reach effect is started.

After that, when the "crest" notice icon I22 and the "house" notice icon I21 move to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 in this arrangement order, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 106(a4-1). It At this time, it is displayed in the correct arrangement order (that is, the arrangement order of the “house” and the “print”) instead of the arrangement order of the “print” and the “house”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 106(a4-2), the notice icon I22 of “crest” and the notice icon I21 of “house” may be enlarged and displayed in the order of arrangement of “crest” and “house”. In this effect example, the above-mentioned family crest fall effect is performed after that, regardless of whether it is shown in FIG. 106(a4-1) or shown in FIG. 106(a4-2). For example, when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the arrangement order of the “house” and the “crest” (that is, the correct arrangement order), the family crest fall effect is performed, and the arrangement order of the “crest” and the “house” (that is, the When the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in an incorrect order, the crest drop effect may not be performed. Also, when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the order of "monkey" and "house", it is more likely that the family crest fall effect will not start than when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the order of "house" and "monkey". May be configured as.
FIG. 106(b1) to FIG. 106(b6) show another effect form of the crest drop effect.

First, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 106(b1), only the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the “crest” is displayed. The notice icon I22 is being consumed without waiting for it to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 106(b2), when only the notice icon I21 of “house” is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 106(b3), the family crest The object 224B slightly descends from above the decorative symbol display device 208, and vertically while overlapping a part of the front side of the notice icon display area 285 arranged at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is operating (stirring) as if it were vibrating in the direction. At this time, in the center upper right portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display of "preparing for family crest" indicating that there is a possibility that the crest fall effect will be performed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106(b2), the notice icon I21 of “house” is enlarged and displayed, while the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208. The production of the lord has started. At this time, the lord's character YM possesses the notice icon I22 of "crest". Then, as shown in FIG. 106( b 4 ), when the lord's character YM moves to a predetermined throwing position and the notice icon I 22 of “crest” is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. The notice icon is displayed in the second display area YA2.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 106(b5), the decorative pattern display device 208 stops and displays the combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is determined. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the notice icon I22 of the "crest" remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. At this time, the family crest monument 224B is temporarily retracted to the initial position to make it easier to recognize that the symbol is definitely stopped. However, it is not retracted to the initial position and the flapping motion is continued. Good. On the other hand, the character display of "Preparing for family crest" is continuously displayed.

Thereafter, the variable display of the symbols on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 106(b6), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, the family crest monument 224B, which has been retracted, descends again and resumes the tilting motion. In this example of performance, after that, for example, when the notice icon I22 of the “crest” displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 is consumed, the family crest cast 224B descends, and FIG. The family crest fall effect shown in (21) is performed. It is possible that the notice icon I22 of “Crest” is not digested and the family crest fall effect is not performed. In FIG. 106(b2), the notice icon I21 of “house” may be displayed in an enlarged state until the notice icon I22 of “crest” displayed later is consumed. At that time, the notice icon I22 of the “crest” may be stocked, but may be digested as it is without being stocked.

FIG. 106(c1) to FIG. 106(c2-3) show another example of the notice icon digesting effect. In this example of performance, the background notice in which the background changes by the notice icon being consumed is shown.

As shown in FIG. 106(c1), in the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I31 of “don”, which is a circle of the letters “don”, is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. Then, the notice icon I32 of "Princess", which circles the characters "Hime", is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon I33 of "Grandpa", which circles the letters "Grandpa", makes a notice. It is displayed in the icon third display area YA3.

In FIG. 106 (c2-1), the state of the background display after the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" is shown is shown. ing. As shown in FIG. 106(c2-1), when these three notice icons are consumed, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image of the grandfather's face up from the left side of the display screen and the face of the lord. A background display is displayed in which the updated image and the image of the princess' face are divided into three equal parts. In the present embodiment, when all the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess", and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are exhausted, the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display is high. Is configured to be displayed as a background display indicating that is the highest. Further, the three notice icons may be digested at the same time or one by one. Here, when the three notice icons are consumed one by one, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the order of the notice icons that are consumed, and for example, the notice icon I31 of “Den”> “Hime” It is possible that the highest degree of reliability is achieved when the notice icon I32 of ">" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are digested in that order, but the relationship between the digestion order and the reliability for the jackpot can be set appropriately. ..

In addition, in FIG. 106 (c2-2), among the three notice icons, that is, the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess", and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa", the notice icon I32 of "princess" and The state of the background display after only the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" has been consumed is shown. As shown in FIG. 106(c2-2), when these two notice icons are consumed, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the image of the princess's face up from the left side of the display screen and the grandfather's face. A background display in which the uploaded image is bisected is displayed. In the present embodiment, when two notice icons out of the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are consumed, the symbol variable display is performed. The background display indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is relatively high but the reliability is lower than when the three notice icons are exhausted is displayed. In addition, in the present embodiment, an example in which the notice icon I32 of “Princess” and the notice icon I33 of “Grandpa” have been digested among the three notice icons has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, “Denshi” The notice icon I31 of “No.” and the notice icon I32 of “Princess” may be consumed, or the notice icon I31 of “Tono” and the notice icon I33 of “Grandpa” may be consumed. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the combination of the notice icons to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "donor" and the notice icon I32 of "princess" are consumed, "donor" The notice icon I31 of "Grandpa" and the notice icon I33 of "Grandpa" or the notice icon I32 of "Princess" and the notice icon I33 of "Grandpa" have higher jackpot reliability than when they are consumed, and the notice icon I31 of "Den" When the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" is consumed, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are consumed. These can be set appropriately.

In addition, in FIG. 106 (c2-3), of the three notice icons, that is, the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess", and the notice icon I33 of "grandfather", only the notice icon I33 of "grandfather" is shown. The state of the background display after the is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 106(c2-3), when this one advance notice icon is consumed, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a background display in which the image of the grandfather's face is displayed on the entire display screen. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, when one of the three notice icons, that is, the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" is consumed, the symbol variable display is performed. The background display indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is lower than that when the two notice icons are exhausted is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the "grandpa" notice icon I33 of the three notice icons is consumed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the "donor" notice icon I31 is consumed. The notice icon I32 of "Princess" may be digested. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be changed depending on the notice icon to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "donor" is digested, the notice icon I32 of "princess" or the notice of "grandpa" is announced. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than that when the icon I33 is consumed, and the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the notice icon I32 of "Princess" is consumed than when the notice icon I33 of the "grandpa" is consumed. However, these can be set appropriately.

Further, in this effect example, an example in which all three notice icons are displayed has been described, but only one or two may be displayed. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the type of the notice icon displayed. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "Park" is displayed, the notice icon I32 of "Princess" or "Grandpa" is displayed. The reliability of the big hit is higher than when the notice icon I33 of "is displayed", and when the notice icon I32 of "Princess" is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is larger than when the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" is displayed May be set higher, or, for example, when the notice icon I31 of "donor" and the notice icon I32 of "princess" are displayed, the notice icon I31 of "donor" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are displayed. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the "princess" notice icon I32 and the "grandpa" notice icon I33 are displayed, and the "donor" notice icon I31 and the "grandparent" notice icon I33 are displayed. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be set higher than when the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are displayed, but these can be set appropriately.

Further, in this effect example, the background display corresponding to the type of the noticed icon that has been consumed is configured to be displayed, but a background display different from the background display corresponding to the type of the noticed icon that has been consumed is displayed. In some cases, the background display may not change, and in this case, a so-called breaking of the law may be used to notify that the big hit is confirmed.

Further, when displaying the three notice icons, the three notice icons may be displayed in one symbol variable display, or one notice icon may be displayed each time the symbol variation display is performed. You may In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be different depending on the display order. In addition, in this example of performance, when the notice icon I31 of "donor" is consumed, the character of the lord appears and the lord reach is started, and when the notice icon I32 of "princess" is consumed, When the princess character appears to start the princess reach and the "grandpa" notice icon I33 is consumed, the grandpa character may appear to start the grand reach. Further, when the "grandpa" notice icon I33 and the "princess" notice icon I32 are consumed, the grandfather character and the princess character appear to start the grandfather & princess reach, and the "donor" notice icon. When I31 and the notice icon I32 of "Princess" are digested, the character of the lord and the princess character appear and the lord & princess reach is started, and the notice icon I31 of the lord and the notice icon of the grandfather When I33 is digested, the Lord's character and the Grandfather's character may appear and the Lord's & Grandfather's reach may be started. In addition, when the notice icon I31 of "lord", the notice icon I32 of "princess", and the notice icon I33 of "grandfather" are exhausted, a character of the lord, a princess character, and a grandfather character appear, and Hime & Grand Reach may be started. In this way, the reach effect display corresponding to the character indicated by the digested notice icon may be performed.

Further, what is displayed by digesting these notice icons is not limited to the notice of the reach effect and the background display described above, and for example, the effect mode in the big hit game and the mode during the pattern change may be changed. Alternatively, other notices (for example, various notices such as a character increasing the notice icon) may be given. Further, the effect performed by digesting the notice icon is not limited to the effect display, and a sound output (for example, a music piece) corresponding to the notice icon that has been digested may be performed. You may make it produce by the corresponding light emission pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, regarding an example in which an effect may be performed for each of when the “house” notice icon I21 is consumed and when the “crest” notice icon I22 is consumed explain.

First, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 107(d1), the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon of “crest” is displayed. I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol forms the reach state by “decoration 1”, and the reach effect is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 107(d2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, only the notice icon I21 of “house” is digested from the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest”. Is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 107(d3), the notice icon I21 of "house" is enlarged and displayed as a middle symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, it is shown that the notice icon I21 of “house” is digested to change to the chance symbol which is the special symbol.

After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 107(d4-1), an effect image is displayed in association with the display of the chance pattern, or, as shown in FIG. 107(d4-2), the effect image and the family crest are displayed. In some cases, a family crest fall effect for dropping the accessory 224B may be performed. After such an effect is performed, for example, the swordsman reach described above may be moved to. In addition, you may make it move to the swordsman reach after performing the effect of dropping the family crest actor 224B without displaying the effect image. Alternatively, the effect image may be changed to the swordsman reach without dropping the family crest actor 224B. You may make it shift. Also, as shown in FIG. 107 (d4-3), the normal reach effect may be started without performing any effect due to the digestion of the notice icon I21 of “house”. Further, when the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, another super reach (family crest challenge reach) may be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 107 (d3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the stop display is performed with the combination of “decoration 1-chance symbol-decoration 1”, at the timing shown in FIG. 107 (d4-4), On the decorative pattern display device 208, the character display of “family crest challenge” indicating that the family crest challenge reach has been made is displayed. The first decorative pattern is shaken and changed while maintaining the combination of "decoration 1-chance pattern-decoration 1" at the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 107 (d5-4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the lord's character YM pulls the notice icon I22 of the “crest” with a rope, and the notice of the “crest” is shown. It is suggested that attracting the icon I22 increases the expectation for a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 107 (d6-4), when the lord's character YM succeeds in drawing the notice icon I22 of “Crest”, as shown in FIG. 107 (d7-4), the family crest actor 224B falls. At the same time, a family crest fall effect in which a predetermined effect image is displayed is performed. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I22 of the “crest” has been successfully digested. It should be noted that after the family crest fall effect is performed, for example, the above-mentioned swordsman reach is transitioned to.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 107 (d6-4a), the rope that the lord's character YM is pulling may break and fail to pull the notice icon I22 of the “crest”. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 107 (d7-4a), after only a predetermined effect image is displayed, the above-mentioned swordsman reach may be shifted to. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be lower than that in the case where the notice icon I22 of the "crest" is successfully drawn. In addition, as shown in FIG. 107 (d6-4b), if the rope pulled by the lord's character YM is broken and the pulling of the notice icon I22 of the “crest” fails, the result is shown in FIG. 107 (d7-4b). As shown, the result of loss may be displayed as it is. The same may be applied to the case where the notice icon I22 of the “crest” is first consumed. In addition, it may be configured such that the family crest fall effect is more likely to occur when the “crest” notice icon I22 is consumed than when the “house” notice icon I21 is consumed. The reverse is also possible.

In addition to the "house" notice icon I21, the "crest" notice icon I22, the "lord" notice icon I31, the "princess" notice icon I32, and the "grandparent" notice icon I33, There may be a gaze notice icon that resembles an icon, such as a "U" notice icon, a "shark" notice icon, an "old" notice icon, a "subject" notice icon, or an "aunt". A notice icon or the like of “” may be prepared. For example, even if the "house" notice icon and the "shark" notice icon are consumed, the crest fall effect may not be performed, or the "house" notice icon and the "crest" notice icon may be consumed. The crest dropping effect may be performed less frequently when the notice icon of “house” and the notice icon of “shark” are consumed than when the notice is performed. In addition, the notice icon of Gase such as “shark” may be changed to the notice icon such as “crest”.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example of the effect, one word is formed by two characters of "house" and "mon", and the predetermined effect is performed by satisfying the requirement for forming the word. However, for example, a word composed of three or more letters may be used to apply to this effect example. For example, a “suspect” notice icon, a “like” notice icon, and a “run” notice may be used. The pseudo-relational effect may be performed when three of the icons have been consumed.

Further, in this example of performance, when it is desired to stock the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest” and there is only one stock space in the notice icon display area 285, , The "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 may not be displayed. Alternatively, only one of the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 may be displayed. In this case, the notice icon of the one that could not be displayed is displayed as the notice icon. If there is a space in the area 285, the increase display may be performed. If there is no space in the notice icon display area 285, the displayed notice icon may not be consumed. Further, even if the notice icon display area 285 becomes empty, the notice icon may not be stocked and may be used as it is.

Further, in the case where there is no space in the notice icon display area 285 and at least one of them is not displayed by the time the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest” are consumed, for example, “house” When the notice icon I21 of “No” is consumed, the notice icon I22 of “crest” may be used together, or only the notice icon I21 of “house” may be used.

FIG. 108 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and shows an increase effect and a digest effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows a modification in stages. In FIG. 108, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 108(e1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold icon that is the target of the prefetch notice, and its display mode is another hold icon (for example, the first hold icon). It is displayed in a larger size than the hold icon h11), which is a display mode of the prefetch notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108(e1), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed. The first decorative symbol is variably displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in such a manner that the decorative symbol is largely displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. ing. In addition, the second decorative pattern is displayed small at the left end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon is not displayed in any display area. In this effect example, various parts are added to the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the prefetching notice, and in FIG. 108(e1), the hold icon display area 281 is displayed. The second hold icon h12 that is displayed constitutes the first notice part P1. The first notice part P1 is an image simulating the body part of a snowman. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 108(e1), it is shown that the character EC of the evil merchant is framed in from the left side of the display screen. It carries the second notice part P2 to be given to the notice part P1. The second notice part P2 is an image simulating the head of a snowman.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant attaches the second notice part P2 to the upper part of the first notice part P1. On the other hand, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the third notice part P3. The third notice part P3 is an image simulating a bucket put on the head of a snowman.

At the timing shown in FIG. 108(e3), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant is framed out, and eyes and mouth are drawn on the second notice part P2. On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 108(e4) after the lord's character YM is moved to the predetermined throwing position and displayed, at the timing shown in FIG. 108(e4), the third display part P3 in possession is thrown toward the notification icon display area 285 for effect display. Is done.

Then, the thrown third notice part P3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 108(e5). That is, in this embodiment, it can be said that the notice icon display area 285 has a function of stocking the notice parts forming the hold icon. After that, the lord's character YM is framed out as described above with reference to FIGS. 104(6) to 104(8).

FIG. 108(e6) shows that the display result of the loss is derived, one pending variable display of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the symbol variable display is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108(e7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. The chance roulette display area 287 notifies, for example, that the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the read-ahead notice display mode, or the hold icon display mode that is already the read-ahead notice display mode is more reliable when it is a big hit. It is notified that the display mode is changed to a high frequency. In addition, the big hit announcement display is also performed in the symbol variation display being executed. Further, in the present embodiment, it may be notified that the notice icon is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108(e7), variable display of symbols is started in the chance roulette display area 287.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108(e8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the third notice part P3 is being consumed. The third notice part P3 is moving toward the first hold icon, which is the display mode of the snowman. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a state in which the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet from the right side of the display screen and flies from the right side to the left side of the display screen is shown. The DJ character BY possesses the fourth notice part P4. The fourth notice part P4 is an image simulating a muffler wrapped around the neck of a snowman.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108(e9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the third notice part P3 is a second model of the head forming the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the snowman. Of the DJ, the character BY of the DJ flies toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the fourth notice part P4 held by the DJ character BY is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. The effect display to be placed in the 2 display area YA2 is performed. In the chance roulette display area 287, variable display of symbols is still displayed.

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (e10), the display result in which the character “Get” is displayed together with the fifth notice part P5 in the chance roulette display area 287 is derived. That is, it is informed that the fifth notice part P5 will be displayed. The fifth notice part P5 is an image simulating a pair of twigs that function as both arms of a snowman.

Then, as shown in FIG. 108(e11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fifth notice part P5 is a first model imitating the body part of the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the snowman. It is attached to the upper left and right of the notice part P1. As shown in FIG. 108(e11′), the fifth notice part P5 is not immediately mounted, but the third notice icon P3 is once displayed, but the notice icon first area of the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. You may make it display once (stock) in the display area YA1. In this case, the display may not be performed in the notice icon first display area YA1, but may be performed in another display area (for example, the notice icon third display area YA3).

After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 108 (e12), the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and is lost. The display result of is confirmed. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". In this example of effect, the variable icon h0 is still displayed at this time, but it may be deleted. The fourth notice part P4 is still displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

Thereafter, the variable display of the symbols on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 108 (e13), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108 (e14-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the fourth notice part P4 is being digested. The fourth notice part P4 is moving toward the variable icon h0 which is the display mode of the snowman. After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (e15-1), the fourth notice part P4 is wrapped around the neck of the variable icon h0 which is the display mode of the snowman, and the variable icon h0 (or the hold icon of the display mode of the snowman). ) Is completed. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability of the big hit in the symbol variation display is high. When the display mode of the completed snowman is a hold icon, it is displayed as a pre-reading notice, and moreover, it is notified that the reliability of the big hit in the variation is high.

Further, the fourth notice part P4 is not limited to being displayed during the normal symbol variation display, and may be mounted, for example, when the super reach effect is being performed, and for example, FIG. 108 (e14-2). As shown in FIG. 10, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the fourth notice part P4 is digested in the swordsman reach, and attached to the variation icon h0 of the snowman display mode at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e15-2). You may do it. Here, as the variable icon h0 shifts to the super reach, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are framed out downward, and accordingly, the display position is displaced downward.

In this example of performance, all the displayed notice parts are attached to the hold icon that is the target of the prefetch notice. For example, the displayed notice parts are consumed, but attachment to the hold icon fails. Display may be performed. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be reduced. Also, when the displayed advance notice part is consumed, it is attached to a hold icon other than the hold icon that is the target of read ahead, functions as another read ahead notice of hold, or is attached to a variable icon that is not the target of read ahead. Alternatively, it may function as a notice display in the symbol variation display.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment, and an increase effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment and It is a figure which shows the modification of a digestive production step by step, and FIG. 110 is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the production shown in FIG. 109 step by step. 109 to 110, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 109, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to show that it is the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the second hold icon h11, it has a default display mode. Further, FIGS. 109 to 110 differ from the above-described embodiment in that a first decorative symbol display device 208A as a main display device and a second decorative symbol display device 208B as a sub display device are provided. .. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208B is the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It overlaps part of the front side. Then, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative pattern is displayed in a large size across the first decorative pattern display device 208A and the second decorative pattern display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative pattern may be improved.

As shown in FIG. 109(1), the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B perform variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays the second symbol. The variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed. As shown in FIG. 109(1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

At the timing shown in FIG. 109(2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lord's effect is started. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the hat notice icon I6. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the background display is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285A in accordance with the appearance of the lord's character YM. The notice icon display area 285A is divided into four display areas: a notice icon first display area YA1, a notice icon second display area YA2, a notice icon third display area, and a notice icon fourth display area YA4. The display area in which the notice icon is displayed is not limited to this, and may be three or less, or five or more. Further, for example, the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, but in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, when four display areas less than eight are displayed, the second When the notice icon is displayed in all of the four display areas being displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208B, the display area is increased and even if it is notified that the notice icon can be stocked. Well, for example, the display area may be increased by one each time the display area being displayed is filled with the notice icon, or when the four display areas are filled with the notice icon. May display all the remaining four display areas that have not been displayed. Further, when the lord's character YM appears, the display area may be increased by the number of notice icons possessed by the lord's character YM. Specifically, for example, when the number of display areas in the notice icon display area being displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is four, and these four display areas are filled with the notice icon. In the case where the lord's character YM has one notice icon when the lord's effect is started, one display area is displayed when the lord's character YM throws the notice icon. It may be increased only by this, or all four displayable remaining display areas may be displayed. If the lord's character YM possesses three notice icons, the display area may be increased by only three when the lord's character YM throws the notice icon. The remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. Further, for example, the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, but in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, when four display areas less than eight are displayed, the second When the notice icon is displayed in all of the four display areas being displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208B, the notice icon display area including the four notice areas in which the four notice icons are displayed (first notice) (The icon display area) is reduced and a new notice icon display area (second notice icon display area) including four new display areas in which the notice icon is not yet displayed is newly displayed, and the second notice icon is displayed. You may make it display the notice icon newly stocked in a display area. Here, the timing for displaying the second notice icon display area may be the timing when the first notice icon display area is full, or the timing when the notice icon is newly stocked. Good. Further, the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A or the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, for example, when performing a super reach effect, the notice icon display area 285 is reduced and displayed, or the notice icon display area 285 is replaced with the notice icon stock number. Alternatively, the notice icon display area 285A may be deleted. As described above, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, it may be possible to give a pre-reading notice by switching from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A.

At the timing shown in FIG. 109(3), the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position, and at the timing shown in FIG. A performance display that is thrown at is displayed. In this example of performance, the notice icon I6 of the hat thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I6 of the hat may be displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In addition, when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A, it may be arranged so as not to straddle the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, for example, the first decorative symbol display device. The notice icon entered in the predetermined warp entrance displayed in 208A may be displayed in the notice icon display area 285A after appearing in the predetermined position of the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

Then, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A at the timing shown in FIG. 109(5), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109(6). On the first decorative symbol display device 208A, an effect display in which the lord's character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and has a happy expression is performed. Accordingly, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A, thereby giving a notice that the pseudo-relation effect may be executed in the future. After that, the lord's character YM frames out toward the lower part of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

In FIG. 109(7), the first decorative symbol display device 208A is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

After that, as a result of the symbol variable display based on the suspension of the variable display of the first special figure 1, as shown in FIG. 109(8), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, "decoration 7-decoration 6 -Display is stopped with a combination of decoration patterns of "decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A continues to be continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. After that, when the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 109(9), on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 is moved by the movement animation. The displayed hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, as shown in FIG. 109(10), the first icon of the previous icon of the previous icon display area 285A in the second decorative pattern display device 208B is displayed. The display in which the hat icon I6 displayed in the display area YA1 is consumed is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, it can be said that the hat notice icon I6 may be displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It should be noted that when the notice icon is consumed, the notice icon may be displayed so as not to straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be switched to the background display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 109(11), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat moves to the center of the display screen of the first decorative pattern display device 208A, and then is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 109(12). To be done. It should be noted that the timing of switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the background display is such that the digested notice icon shown in FIG. 109(11) is the first decorative symbol display. The timing may be the time when the apparatus 208A is moved to the center or the timing when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 109(12).

In FIG. 110(13) which continues from FIG. 109(12), a character display of “continuation” for announcing that the pseudo continuous effect is performed is additionally displayed below the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat. The timing at which the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is switched to the background display may be the timing at which the character display of "continuation" is additionally displayed. The timing may be the timing after the character display of "continuation" is additionally displayed, or the timing before the character display of "continuation" is additionally displayed.

After that, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), the notice icon I6 of the hat disappears together with the character display of "Continue" at the timing of FIG. The display including the icon display area 285A is switched to the background display. At this time, the first decorative symbol is variably displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, the first decorative pattern is displayed over the two display screens. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the second decorative pattern is displayed on one display screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 110(15), the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left symbol and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that it is in the non-reach state.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 110(16), the enlarged and displayed Bancho character BC2 appears and is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. As shown in (17), in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, the bancho character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 and pushes up the stopped right symbol. The player is informed that the pseudo continuous effect may be started. At this time, the right symbol pushed up by the length-long character BC is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In the case shown in FIG. 110(16), the long-length character BC2 does not have to be displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Here, "display across" is displayed in cooperation with each other in the image display area (display panel) of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area (display panel) of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. It may be that. Further, the image may be integrally displayed by the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Further, the display may be moved from the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110(18), the pseudo continuous symbol is framed in from above the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and a display is displayed in which the pseudo symbol is moving downward at a low speed. At this time, the pseudo continuous symbol is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

Then, as shown in FIG. 110(19), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 110(19). After that, for example, the pseudo continuous effect is performed in the manner described above and shown in FIG.

111 and 112 are diagrams showing, in stages, another modified example of the increase effect and the digest effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 113 shows the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows another modification of a digestive effect in steps. 111 to 113, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 111 and FIG. 112, the hold icon that is the target of the prefetch notice in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched for the purpose of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode. ing.

111(a1) to (a7-2) are the same as the configurations shown in FIGS. 109 to 110, but the second decorative symbol display device 208B is vertically movable. When the second decorative symbol display device 208B is lowered, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is different in that it can be overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

As shown in FIG. 111(a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. ing. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative pattern is displayed in a large size across the first decorative pattern display device 208A and the second decorative pattern display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative pattern may be improved. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and variable display of symbols is performed. The content displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is as described above with reference to FIG. 108, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 111(a1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 111(a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287. Then, as shown in FIG. 111(a3), the second decorative symbol display device 208B descends and overlaps with the substantial center on the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the background display is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285A. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, an effect image surrounding the second decorative symbol display device 208B is displayed to make the second decorative symbol display device 208B stand out. Note that the advance notice icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 111(a3) is the same as that shown in FIG. 109(2) and described above, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 111(a4), after the notice icon I6 of the hat derived and displayed in the chance roulette display region 287 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, FIG. As shown in (a5-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208B moves up and returns to the initial position. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 111(a5-1), the variable display of Toku-zu 1 ends and the stop display is performed with the combination of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2" which is the result of the loss. At this time, the variable icon h0 is not erased, but it may be erased at a timing before the variable display of Toku-zu 1 ends. In addition, in FIG. 111 (a5-1), the result of the misalignment is displayed only in the second decorative design, and the first decorative design is not displayed, but the first decorative design is displayed and even in this first decorative design. The result of loss may be displayed. In this example of performance, when the notice icon is displayed (stocked), it may be possible to easily recognize that the notice icon is stocked by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208B. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured not to operate during the symbol stop display, but may be configured to be operable even during the symbol stop display. Further, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be continuously performed without interruption, regardless of whether the symbol is stopped and displayed or the variable display is being performed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111(a5-2), even after the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is raised. Instead, the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A may be maintained in the overlapping state. In this example, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is maintained in the lowered state until the pattern variable display in which all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A are exhausted is finished, but at any timing 2 Whether to raise the decorative symbol display device 208B can be set appropriately. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (a5-2), the variable display of the special figure 1 is finished, and both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are the result of the "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". Is displayed in combination. Here, the first decorative design is displayed in the upper right corner of the second decorative design display device 208B, and the second decorative design is displayed in the upper left corner of the first decorative design display device 208A. The display position of the symbol can be set arbitrarily.

FIG. 111(a6-2) shows that after that, the two reservations are exhausted and the symbol variation display, which is the target of prefetching, is started. Specifically, in the upper right corner of the second decorative design display device 208B, the variable display of the first decorative design is performed, and in the upper left corner of the first decorative design display device 208A, the variation of the second decorative design. The display is done.

After that, when the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A is consumed, the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged as shown in FIG. 111 (a7-2). Then, it is displayed so as to extend from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In addition, below the enlarged hat notice icon I6, a character display of "Continue" for notifying that the pseudo-relational effect is performed is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It is displayed throughout. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is moved to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A so as to be easily visible to the player. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208B may thereafter be raised and returned to the initial position, or may be kept in the lowered state until the symbol variation is completed.

111(b1) to FIG. 111(b4), instead of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, at a predetermined position of the game board 200 (for example, a position near the lower portion of the decorative symbol display device 208), the number of notice icon display is displayed. An example is shown in which a device 288 is provided. The notice icon display number display device 288 includes, for example, two 7-segments, and can display the number (stock number) of the notice icons displayed.

FIG. 111(b1) to FIG. 111(b3) have the same effect contents as those in FIG. 83(17) to FIG. A state is shown in which the numerical value changes in accordance with the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. That is, in FIG. 111(b1), since only one hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon display number display device 288 displays “01” indicating the number. There is. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 111(b2), the lord's character YM throws three notice icons (a notice icon I6 for a hat, a notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, and a notice icon I10 for a fan), but any notice icon Since it is not yet displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the value displayed in the notice icon display number display device 288 remains “01”. The value of the notice icon display number display device 288 may be updated at the timing when the lord's character YM throws these notice icons. Further, a number different from the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed (so-called gasse is displayed). Then, when the above three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 111(b3), the value is updated and “04” is displayed on the notice icon display number display device 288. To be done.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111(b4), when the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is consumed, it is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Since the number of notice icons displayed is decreased by one, the notice icon display number display device 288 updates the value and displays "03". The timing at which the value of the notice icon display number display device is reduced may be the timing before the notice icon is consumed, may be the same as the notice icon is consumed, or the notice icon may be displayed. The timing may be after digestion. It should be noted that, as shown by enclosing with a broken line, the value does not decrease even if the notice icon is exhausted, and the total number (four in this example) of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is counted and displayed. You may do it. In this example of performance, the number of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed by 7-segment. However, for example, an operation by a light emitting unit such as an LED or a movable unit such as a production movable body, for example, , A transparent plate member is provided on the front surface side of the decorative pattern display device 208 to emit light in a predetermined pattern, voice, or a decorative pattern display device (a decorative pattern display device in which the notice icon display area 285 is displayed, or other The display number of the notice icon may be notified by a decorative pattern display device or the like).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 112 (c1) to (c9) use two display devices (the first decorative pattern display device 208C and the second decorative pattern display device 208D) as in FIGS. 109 to 110. However, they are different in that they use the same size display device. 112, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 112(c1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold of the variable pattern display that is the target of prefetching, but is displayed. The mode is a default display mode, like the first hold icon h11. The second decorative symbol display device 208D is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208D and the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208C are It is arranged so as to substantially overlap. Then, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the special figure 1 second reserved number display H1 and the special figure 2 second reserved number display H2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special figure 1 and special figure 2 are reserved. “2” and “0” are displayed corresponding to the numbers, respectively. Further, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and FIG. 112(c1). At the timing shown by, the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner. The chance roulette display area 287 described above is displayed in the lower right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 112(c1). It is shown. In addition, the background display is also greatly displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. That is, the background is displayed on the entire two screens.

When the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 as shown in FIG. 112(c1), the second decorative pattern display device 208D displays the first decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 112(c2). It descends to a position that covers the upper half of the display device 208C. At this time, the first decorative symbol display device 208C, which was performing the background display, is switched to a display including the notice icon display area 285B, and is derived and displayed in the notice icon first display area Y1 of the notice icon display area 285B. The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed (stocked). That is, when the notice icon is displayed, the display mode at the time of displaying the notice icon is changed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed, but the size of the symbol becomes small and is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

In FIG. 112(c3), three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285B. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3. .. At the timing shown in FIG. 112(c3), since the number of reservations is one, the special reservation 1 second reservation number display H1 displays “1” to that effect.

FIG. 112(c4) shows a state when the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested. That is, it is notified that the notice of the chance eye is given by the notice icon I7 of the shuriken being digested. At this time, the effect display in which the notice icon is consumed is performed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

After that, when the variable display of the special figure 1 ends, as shown in FIG. 112 (c5), the second decorative symbol display device 208D stops at the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1" which is the result of the loss. it's shown. However, the combination of the results of this loss is an opportunity, and it is informed that the symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit is suspended. That is, the pre-reading advance notice is given by displaying this opportunity.

FIG. 112(c6) shows a state when the notice icon I6 of the second hat is digested after the symbol variation of the special figure 1 is started. That is, it announces that the second pseudo-announcement will be made. As the notice icon I6 of the second hat is consumed, no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285B.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 112(c7), the notice icon display area 285B displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C is erased, and the second decorative symbol display device 208D rises and returns to the initial position. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 112 (c8), the decorative design is displayed from the first decorative design display 208C to the second decorative design display 208D, and the background display is also the first decorative design display 208C. And, it will be displayed on the entire two screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112(c9), the bancho character BC appears outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208C in response to the completion of the second hat notice icon I6, and the stop display is displayed. The effect display that pushes up the right pattern is performed, and the player is informed that the second pseudo continuous effect may be started. At this time, the guard length character BC is displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 112(c9), when the decorative design is displayed in a large size, for example, a large design in which the numerical design and the character image are integrated is displayed, and the notice icon display area 285B is displayed. When a small decorative design is displayed, a small design consisting only of numerical designs is displayed, and a large design and a small design are displayed in different display modes, but a large design and a small design are displayed. It is also possible to make the display mode the same by changing only the size with.

In addition, in this effect example, when the notice icon display area 285B is displayed, only the second decorative symbol display device 208D is made movable, but the first decorative symbol display device 208C may be made movable. The first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may both be movable. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be moved in respective directions in which they are separated from each other, and in this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display. When the device 208D is separated, it may be configured such that the character objects arranged on the back side thereof can be visually recognized, and further, the character objects can be moved so as to project forward. You may. You may make it maintain such a state until all the notice icons are exhausted.

FIG. 112(d) shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, in FIG. 112(d), the first decorative symbol display device 208E arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and the second decorative symbol display arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The display is performed by the device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The second decorative symbol display device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G have the same height as the first decorative symbol display device 208E, but the width is slightly smaller. The three decorative symbol display devices may have the same size.

The variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed at the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. On the other hand, the notice icon display area 285C is displayed across three screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the third decorative symbol display device 208G. In the example shown in FIG. 112(d), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and particularly, the notice icon second display area YA2. The hat notice icon I6 displayed at is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208F and the first decorative symbol display device 208E. In addition, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3, and the fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Further, the decorative symbols are displayed on one decorative symbol display device for each symbol column. That is, the left symbol display area 208a is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the right symbol display area 208c is the third decorative symbol display. It is displayed on device 208G. Note that there may be a decorative pattern display device in which the notice icon display area 285C is not displayed. Further, there may be a decorative pattern display device in which the effect display related to the notice icon is not displayed. This is applicable to the embodiments described so far as well as the embodiments described below.

FIG. 113 shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, in FIG. 113, a first decorative symbol display device 208H arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and a second decorative symbol display device 208I arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. , And the third decorative symbol display device 208J arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Compared to the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J have the same display area in the vertical direction but slightly shorter in the horizontal direction. Then, the second decorative symbol display device 208I is provided with the frame portions projecting from the upper end side, the lower end side and the left end side, respectively, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J has the upper end side, the lower end side and the right end side. A frame portion is provided so as to protrude from each. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are respectively configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and when they are in positions closest to each other, It is possible to perform display as if one screen is being displayed on the two display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and further, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The whole can be coated.

Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H when they are in the state of being closest to each other. It is configured to be able to.

FIG. 113(e1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 85(47) and covers the entire display screens of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. Swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in FIG. 113(e1), while the swordsman reach is being executed, the 1,000-box icon I9 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is consumed, and a notice is given that the production will shift to a more reliable production. Is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 113(e2), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start moving in the directions in which they approach each other. At this time, since both end portions of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H are covered by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the display state is difficult to visually recognize. As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be started by digesting the notice icon.

As shown in FIG. 113(e3), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move to the positions closest to each other, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208H is almost invisible. It becomes a state. Then, at this time, the reach transition effect as described above with reference to FIG. 85 (49) is performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. That is, the reach effect display that has been executed across the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J becomes slightly darker, and the lord's character appears in a cut-in display, and the reach effect being performed. The display is cut. This display is a display rotated 90 degrees to the right. At this time, the decorative pattern and the notice icon display area 285 are not displayed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 113(e3) to (e5), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrally formed on the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Rotate counterclockwise along. In other words, it can be said that the display of the reach transition effect is started before the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start rotating.

After that, as shown in FIG. 113(e6), a button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J to accept the operation of the effect button 136. Is notified that the player can operate the effect button 136. At this time, the variable display of the reduced decorative pattern is displayed at the lower right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208I.

After that, when the player operates the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 113(e7), "decoration 1-decoration 2- The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1".

After that, as shown in FIGS. 113(e8) to 113(e9), all are once hidden, and in that state, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated. And rotates 90 degrees clockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H.

Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in the directions away from each other and return to the initial position, at the timing shown in FIG. 113(e10), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, Over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the display of shaking fluctuation (temporary symbol stop display) of the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1" is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also restarted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (e11-1), the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is erased, and the decoration of “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1” that has fluctuated. The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, and is displayed as a result of losing.

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, the display that the fan advance notice icon I10 displayed in the advance notice icon fourth display area YA4 is exhausted is started at the timing shown in FIG. 113 (e11-2). That is, a display is performed in which the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208H. In this way, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may not operate even if the notice icon is consumed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 123 (e12-2), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed, and is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The decorative pattern is reduced and displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208H and the third decorative pattern display device 208J, and the variable display is performed again, and then the combination of the decorative patterns of the big hit (for example, "decoration 1-decoration A combination of decorative patterns of "1-decoration 1" is derived and displayed.

FIG. 113(e7′) shows an example in which a combination of jackpot decorative symbols is derived and displayed when the player operates the effect button 136 after the display shown in FIG. 113(e6) is performed. It is a figure. That is, when the player operates the effect button 136, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in a direction away from each other. In the example shown in FIG. 113(e7′), the second decorative symbol display device 208I moves downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J moves upward. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears, and the background display including the grandfather character is displayed over the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. At the same time, a combination of decorative patterns "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. That is, it is possible to derive the jackpot display result without rotating the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J to the original position (for example, the initial position).

FIG. 113(e7″) is configured such that when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H can also rotate together. The example of production when it is performed is shown. That is, as shown in FIGS. 113(e3) to (e5), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H also has these. It is also possible to rotate together with. In this case, for example, a mechanism for driving the first decorative symbol display device 208H and a mechanism for driving the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be integrally configured, or separately. It may be configured as a body and configured to be driven and controlled by each. According to such a configuration, for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208H may be rotated in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. is there. Further, according to such a configuration, when the player operates the effect button 136 after the display shown in (e6) of the figure is performed, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display are displayed. The devices 208J move in directions away from each other. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears in a state of being rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise, and unlike FIG. 113(e7′), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third. The decorative pattern display device 308J can be displayed in a state where the horizontal widths of the respective display screens are aligned.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another modified example of the increase effect and the digest effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment. In the production example shown in FIG. 114, a transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 through the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL is formed by stacking two layers of panels in the depth direction, and a predetermined lens cut is applied to each of the transmission regions of each layer. A light emitting means such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of each layer of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region has a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear as if it is emitting light. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 114, the panel of the first layer arranged on the front side is provided with the lens cut having the same pattern as the hat icon I6, and is arranged on the back side of the panel of the first layer. On the second layer panel, a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is applied. In addition, in FIG. 114, the light guide plate IL is surrounded by a broken line. Moreover, the number of layers of the panel of the light guide plate IL is not limited to two layers, and may be one layer or three or more layers. Here, in the case of being configured by one layer, for example, the pattern formed on the light guide plate when light is emitted may be configured to be different by changing the pattern of lens cut. In addition, in FIG. 114, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 114, the hold icon that is the target of the prefetching notice in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched for the purpose of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode.

As shown in FIG. 114(f1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable symbol display region 280 and the hold icon display region 281 are displayed while the decorative symbol variable display is being performed, and the variable icon display region 280 and In the hold icon display area 281, the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, and a chance roulette display area 287 is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen. The content displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is as described above with reference to FIG. 108, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 114(f1), when the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287, as shown in FIG. 114(f2-1), in the decorative pattern display device 208, a dark display is displayed. At the same time, the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. That is, in FIG. 114 (f2-1), a dark display and a stock effect of the notice icon by the light emission of the light guide plate IL are performed. After that, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends (lights off), and the dark display in the decorative symbol display device 208 ends. The dark display of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be ended after the light guide plate IL is turned off, or the light guide plate IL may be turned off after the dark display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (f2-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. While displaying the movement toward, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, whereby stock production of the notice icon is performed. You may be allowed to.

Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 114 (f2-3), the light guide plate IL is configured to be rotatable along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, dark display is performed and guidance is performed. Stock production of the notice icon is performed by rotating the light plate IL 90 degrees counterclockwise to cause the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. You may do it. Here, the light guide plate IL may be configured to be separated into the first layer panel and the second layer panel. In this case, for example, only the second layer panel is rotated to rotate the first layer panel. The layer panel may not be rotated, or the first layer panel may be rotated together with the second layer panel.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114(f3), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, so that the future pseudo It announces that the continuous production will be executed.

FIG. 114(g) shows that the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 has been consumed. As shown in FIG. 114(g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is moved to the center of the display screen and then erased, at that timing. The notice icon digesting effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat. In FIG. 114(h), the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed before the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (before the stock effect of the notice icon is executed). It shows a state of giving advance notice. As shown in FIG. 114(h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of symbols is performed in the chance roulette display area 287 displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. At this time, the light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel of the light guide plate IL is caused to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat, and as a result of the variable display of the symbols in the chance roulette display area 287, Of the notice icon I6 is announced.

FIG. 114(i) shows another example of the notice icon digesting effect. As shown in FIG. 114(i), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area is moved to the center of the display screen and then deleted, and at that timing, the light guide plate. A pattern imitating the effect image is formed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat, and also causing the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer to emit light. The notice icon is being digested as well. At this time, if the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer and the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer are made different, the pattern formed on the panel of the first layer and the second layer In some cases, the pattern formed on the panel and the pattern formed on the panel can be conspicuous.

FIG. 114(j) shows another example of the notice icon digesting effect. As shown in FIG. 114(j), in the decorative pattern display device 208, after moving the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon display area 285 to the center of the display screen, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed. The screen is enlarged and displayed, and at that timing, the notice icon digesting effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is erased, but it may be displayed.

FIG. 115 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect example of the notice icon digesting effect. 115(1) to (11) except that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is replaced by the fan notice icon I10 and becomes the drink notice icon I31. 85(44) to FIG. 54(54), only parts different from the above description with reference to FIG. 85 will be described in detail, and description of common parts will be omitted. In addition, in this effect example, the effect button 136 can be projected upward by an actuator such as a motor, and the position thereof can be displaced in accordance with the effect content. That is, the effect button 136 can be changed between the normal position (default position) and the protruding position.

As shown in FIG. 115(1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I31 of the drink is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285. The notice icon I31 for this drink is a notice icon for giving a notice that the content to be rendered is changed by digestion.

At the timing shown in FIG. 115(11), the effect button 136 is in the default position as shown in FIG. 115(12). Then, as shown in FIG. 115(13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the drink notice icon is displayed. I31 moves toward the center of the display screen.

Then, as shown in FIG. 115(14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I31 of the drink is enlarged and displayed, and the effect image of sprinkling the contents of the drink on the button image 136a is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (15 ), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the liquid spilled from the drink container spreads and the button image 136 a is hidden.

Then, as shown in FIG. 115(16), on the decorative symbol display device 208, after the liquid image disappears, a projection button image 136b indicating that the effect button 136 is in the projection position is displayed. At this time, it is in a state before the start of the operation reception of the effect button 136.

Then, after the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the projecting position at the timing shown in FIG. 115(17), as shown in FIG. 115(18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button reception time meter decreases. Then, it is notified that the operation reception of the effect button 136 has started. Note that the timing at which the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position may be the same as the timing at which the protruding button image 136b is displayed, as shown in FIG. 115(16), or the protruding button image 136b. The timing may be before the display of, or may be the timing after the projection button image 136b is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 115(13), the effect button 136 may be displaced from the default position to the protruding position with the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon I31 of the drink. Further, in this example of performance, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off during a period other than the operation acceptance period of the production button 136. In addition, during the period other than the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136, for example, it is lit in a manner of notifying that it is a period other than the operation acceptance period (for example, lights in blue). You may make it light in the mode which notifies that (for example, it lights in red).

FIG. 116 is a diagram showing, step by step, an effect example using the movable means applicable to this embodiment.

116(a1) to FIG. 116(a3), when the notice icon is stocked, the effect movable body 224C is moved to a position overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208 to notify the stock of the notice icon. There is. FIG. 116(a1) is the same display as FIG. 104(1), but the effect movable body 224C imitating a placard with the character display of "STOCK" on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an effect device. It is arranged so as to be hidden behind the 206.

FIG. 116(a2) shows that the effect movable body 224C has moved from the initial position hidden by the effect device 206 to the visible position which is a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, a notice is given that one of the plurality of types of notice icons will be stocked. At this time, the type of the notice icon to be stocked may be notified, for example, the type of the notice icon may be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, or a notification may be given by voice or a lamp. It is also possible to prepare a plurality of effect movable bodies 224C according to the type of the notice icon and notify the type of the notice icon to be stocked according to the type of the effect movable body 224C that appears.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116(a3), when the effect movable body 224C returns from the visible position to the initial position, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the stocked notice icon. FIG. 116(a3) shows that the hat notice icon I6 is stocked.

In FIG. 116(b), effect movable bodies 224Da to 224Df that are rotatable around the depth direction as rotation axes are arranged in the upper and lower neighborhoods of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. More specifically, in the vicinity of the upper portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first effect movable member 224Da with the character "large" attached, the fifth effect movable member 224De with the asterisk symbol attached, and the "board". The second effect movable bodies 224Db to which the characters are attached are arranged side by side in the lateral direction, and in the vicinity of the lower portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, the third effect movable bodies 224Dc to which the characters “shake” are attached, A sixth effect movable body 224Df marked with an asterisk and a fourth effect movable body 224Dd marked with the character “Mai” are arranged side by side in the lateral direction. The first effect movable body 224Da to the sixth effect movable body 224Df rotate in accordance with the number of notice icons displayed (stocked) in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 116(b), when four notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, four effect movable bodies of the first effect movable body 224Da to the fourth effect movable body 224Dd. Rotates. In addition, when the notice icon is consumed, the rotation of the produced movable bodies may be stopped, or the number of produced movable bodies corresponding to the total number of the notice icons stocked may be rotated. Good.

FIG. 116(c1) to FIG. 116(c6) show a state in which the effect movable body 224 is informed that the prefetch mode has been entered. In this effect example, a special notice icon I41 as a notice icon may be displayed. When the special training notice icon I41 is exhausted, the mode shifts to the prefetch mode informing that the variable display of the special map that is likely to be a big hit is being held.

FIG. 116(c1) shows a state in which the special notice icon I41 has been digested. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the special training notice icon I41 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is consumed and moved to the center of the display screen. An effect movable body 224 simulating an arm is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. This production movable body 224 is configured by an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b, and the base end portion of the upper arm portion 224a is rotatably attached to the production device 206 via the rotation axis ax1. .. The forearm portion 224b is rotatably attached to the tip end portion of the upper arm portion 224a via the rotation axis ax2.

When the notice icon I41 for special training is digested and the prefetch mode is started, as shown in FIG. 116(c2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character display “preparing for special training” is displayed on the right in the strip-shaped scroll display area. To scroll to the left. As a result, the player is notified that the read-ahead mode has been entered. On the other hand, in the production movable body 224, an initial position where the upper arm portion 224a does not overlap the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a position (first position) that covers the front surface side of the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. A reciprocating operation (prefetch operation) is performed between the two. The prefetch operation by the effect movable body 224 is made to return to the initial position once during the stop display of the symbol, but the operation may be continued even during the stop display of the symbol. Further, during execution of the prefetch operation, only the upper arm 224a operates and the forearm 224b does not operate. However, in addition to the upper arm 224a, the forearm 224b may operate, or the upper arm 224a does not operate and the forearm does not operate. Only the part 224b may operate.

FIG. 116(c3) shows a state in which the reach state is formed by aligning two "decorations 1" during the variable display of the special figure 1 that is the target of prefetching. The read-ahead operation is still being performed here.

FIG. 116(c4) shows a state in which special training reach as a super reach effect is started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of "preparing for special training" is finished, and the character display of "starting special training" indicating that special training reach has been started is displayed. In addition, after the production movable body 224 once returns to the initial position, as shown in FIG. 116(c5), the upper arm 224a moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position, and then as shown in FIG. 116(c6). Then, the forearm 224b moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position. At this time, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a predetermined effect image to notify that the reliability of the big hit is high.

FIG. 117 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon. Is. In FIG. 117, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 117, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to show that it is the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the second hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

The display in FIG. 117(1) is similar to that in FIG. 104(1) described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

At the timing shown in FIG. 117(2), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the hat notice icon I6.

In this example of performance, at the timing shown in FIG. 117(3), the lord's character YM is moved to the predetermined throwing position and displayed, but the notice icon I6 of the hat he owns has not been thrown yet, and FIG. 117(4). As shown in, while the lord's character YM is standing by at the throwing position, the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Thereafter, the variable display of the symbols on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 117(5), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved by moving animations. The hold icon displayed and at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 changes to the special figure 1 Becomes the first hold icon h11. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The lord's character YM still stands by at the throwing position.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 117(6), the effect display is performed in which the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In other words, in this effect example, when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the notice icon is announced during the symbol variation display that is being executed, but the notice icon is not stocked. Not, the notice icon is stocked after the symbol variable display ends and the next symbol variable display starts. In addition, when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, a notice is displayed that the notice icon will be displayed during the symbol variation display that is being executed, but a so-called gaze notice that does not display the notice icon is given. May be. In this case, for example, the lord's character YM may be terminated before the variable display of the symbols to be read ahead starts, for example, one symbol before the symbol variable display to be read ahead. The display may be ended at the timing when the result of the symbol variation display to be performed is derived. Further, the display of the lord's character YM may be terminated before the symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching is terminated, for example, the super reach which is performed during the symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching is started. The display of the lord's character YM may be ended before. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, the lord's character YM may be continuously displayed even after the notice icon is stocked. Also, in the state where the character of Tonosama is on standby, if a big hit occurs in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is thrown, the timing of deriving the jackpot symbol after super reach (for example, , While the swinging fluctuation is being displayed), the lord's character may continue the standby display with the notice icon, or may be deleted.

Then, after that, the effects shown in FIGS. 117(7) to (10) are performed, but the effects shown in FIGS. 117(7) to (10) are shown in FIGS. 82(9) to 82(9). Since it is the same as (12) except that the variable display of the second decorative symbol is displayed, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 117(11) shows a state in which the result of the symbol variable display that is performed immediately before the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching is derived. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117(11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. There is. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In FIG. 117 (12), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes to the variable icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed after the variable display of the decorative symbol has started, as shown in FIG. 117 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays it in the notice icon first display area YA1. The notice icon digestion effect that the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed is performed.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing, in steps, another effect example of the notice icon increasing effect. In FIG. 118, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 118, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to show that it is the hold of the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching, but the display mode is For example, like the first hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

FIG. 118(a1) to FIG. 118(a6) show that the notice icon is stocked after the effect of giving notice that the notice icon is stocked is performed.

FIG. 118(a1) shows a state in which the boring effect that is performed during the symbol variation display that is being executed is started when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118(a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an explanation display unit 288 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the mission and its success reward are shown. In the explanation display unit 288 shown in FIG. 118(a1), when the strike is acquired in the bowling game, the character display of "Strike item Get" indicates that the item can be obtained as a reward. In this example of performance, when a strike is won in a bowling game, a notice item is stocked. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, bowling effect by the lord's character is started. The contents of the mission and the success reward displayed on the explanation display unit 288 are related to the stock of the advance notice item, for example, that the hold display is related to the change to the display mode of the prefetch advance notice, or is being executed. It may be related to a notice about the variable display of symbols. Further, the content displayed on the explanation display unit 288 may be a special effect display that is displayed only for the notice regarding the stock of the notice icon. In this effect example, it can be said that the notice of the advance notice icon being stocked is given by performing the bowling effect as shown in FIG. 118(a1). In addition, this bowling effect may be a special effect that is provided only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon, may be used in the advance notice effect in the symbol variation display being executed, or may be used as another prefetch advance notice. You may be asked.

Then, as shown in FIG. 118(a2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the bowling effect is not finished, and the character display of "following the next change" is displayed, which indicates that the boring effect is continuously performed in the next symbol change display. It is to be noted that the "Strike item Get" indicating the mission and its reward is also displayed on the upper portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118(a3), the decorative pattern display device 208 shows that the ball thrown by the lord's character rolls on the lane toward the ten aligned bowling pins. , Is fueling the expectation that the notice icon may be stocked.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118(a4), on the decorative pattern display device 208, the image of the scene where the strike has been taken is displayed together with the character display of “strike”, and it is assumed that the mission has been achieved, and as shown in FIG. 118(a5). As shown in the figure, the character display of "GET" is displayed together with the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat to notify that the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 118(a6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. It is reported that stock has been made. In this way, in this effect example, the notice item is not displayed (stock) and the notice item is displayed during the symbol variation display being executed when the symbol variation display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended. Has been announced.

As shown in FIG. 118(b), a wipe display area WP1 may be displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the above-mentioned bowling effect may be performed in the wipe display area WP1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 118(c), in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 208K is arranged side by side on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and wiped to the upper half of the display screen of the sub display device 208K. The display area WP2 is displayed, and the notice icon display area 285C for displaying the notice icon in the lower half is displayed to perform the above-mentioned bowling effect in the wipe display area WP2 and the notice icon to be stocked is displayed in the notice icon display area 285C. You may make it display on.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 118, when a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, when the bowling effect is started at the timing of displaying the big hit symbol derived after the super reach (for example, during swing fluctuation display). Background display may be displayed, or a background display different from this may be displayed, and for example, the state shown in FIG. 118(a2) may be displayed.

Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 118(b), when a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, the display of the wipe display area WP1 may be ended, but the display may be continued as it is. .. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 118(c), when a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, the display of the bowling effect on the sub display device 208K may be ended, but the display is continued as it is. May be.

FIG. 119 is a diagram showing, step by step, another modified example of the effect of increasing the number of advance notice icons applicable to this embodiment. In the above-described embodiment, the one in which the variation display of the special figure 2 is preferentially displayed over the special figure 1 has been described, but in this effect example, priority is given to either the special figure 1 variation game or the special figure 2 variation game. Nonetheless, the special figure variation game according to each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is applied to the variation of the starting mouth winning order in which the starting mouth winning order is started. It should be noted that this production example can also be applied to the case where the special figure 2 priority variation is performed. Further, in FIG. 119, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a public figure display device 210, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, a general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 119, the fifth hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to show that it is the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the second hold icon h11, it has a default display mode. Further, among the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 281, the first hold icon h11, the third hold icon h12, and the fifth hold icon h13 are displayed on the first special figure starting port 230. The second holding icon h21 and the fourth holding icon h22 are holding icons showing the variable display of the special figure 1 that is won and held, and the second special figure starting port 232 is won and held. It is a hold icon showing a variable display of special figure 2.

The effect shown in FIG. 119 is an effect that may be started after the symbol variable display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended, and the character SB of Sabohani moves on the line according to the rule of the Midaku Lottery to reach the destination. It is a production (Amida production) for acquiring a notice item.

First, as shown in FIG. 119(a1-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed. It is reported that the result is a loss. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the Amida effect has been started. Specifically, when the Amida effect is started, as shown in FIG. 119(a1-1), the character SB of the sabotani is placed at any one of the starting points of the three horizontal lines extending in the horizontal direction. And a notice icon I6 for a hat, a notice icon I10 for a fan, and an icon IX for a loss are placed for each end point of the three horizontal lines. In addition, an appropriate number of vertical lines connecting adjacent horizontal lines are set, and the central portion of these vertical lines is hidden by smoke. The number of vertical lines to be set is determined according to, for example, the number of holdings at the time when the Amida effect is started, but is not limited to this. In this Amida production, when the character of Sabohani moves on the line according to the rule of Mida and reaches the end point where the notice icon I6 of the hat or the notice icon I10 of the fan is arranged, the notice icon is stocked. Then, when the end point where the lost icon IX is arranged is reached, it is notified that the notice icon is not stocked. Then, every time the symbol variable display is started, the character SB of the sabotani moves to the position where the vertical line is arranged. It should be noted that the character SB of the sabotani may be moved to the position where the vertical line is arranged each time the pseudo-repeating is performed. For example, when the pseudo-repeating occurs, the character SB advances to a position two vertical lines ahead. You may do the same. Further, it is also possible to proceed to a vertical line two or more ahead with one symbol variation display. The effect as shown in FIG. 119 can be performed in the wipe display area WP1 or the sub display device 208K, as described above with reference to FIGS. 118(c) and 118(d). is there. In this case, for example, it is possible to continue displaying the mami effect even during execution of the super reach. Then, for example, in some cases, the effect of increasing the number of notice icons during the super reach can be performed in parallel.

Then, when the variable display of the special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 119(a2-1), the hold icons h11, h21, h12, h22, and h13 are moved by the moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon is displayed. The hold icon at the display position of h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to change to the change icon h0, and the other hold icons move one by one to the right. On the other hand, the decorative pattern starts variable display. Further, as shown in FIG. 119(a2-1), when the symbol variation display is started, the character SB of Sabohani starts to move from the start point of the horizontal line in the upper row of the three horizontal lines, and the first vertical line. When the line is reached, the smoke that hides the vertical line is erased, and a state in which the horizontal line in the upper row and the horizontal line in the middle row are connected by the vertical line is displayed, and the character SB of Sabohani moves on the vertical line. At the timing shown in FIG. 119(a2-1), the middle horizontal line is reached halfway.

After that, when the variable display of the special map 1 ends, the variable display of the special map 2 continues, and the four hold icons h21, h12, h22, and h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are moved by moving animations. To be done. Then, as shown in FIG. 119(a3-1), when the character SB of the sabotani reaches the second vertical line connecting the horizontal line in the middle row and the horizontal line in the lower row, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. .. As a result of the smoke being erased, it was found that this vertical line was cut in the middle, and the vertical line cannot move from the horizontal line in the middle row to the horizontal line in the lower row. Therefore, the character SB of Sabohani is in the middle row. Continue straight on the horizontal line toward the end point.

Then, when the variable display of the special figure 2 ends, the variable display of the special figure 1 is continuously started, and the three hold icons h12, h22, and h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are moved by the moving animations. .. Then, as shown in FIG. 119(a4-1), when the character SB of the sabotani reaches the third vertical line connecting the horizontal line in the middle row and the horizontal line in the upper row, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. .. As a result of the smoke being removed, this vertical line connects the horizontal line in the middle row and the horizontal line in the upper row. Therefore, the character SB of Sabohani follows the vertical line from the horizontal line in the middle row to the upper row in accordance with the rule of Amidakuji. Move to the horizontal line. As a result, the character SB of the sabotani reaches the end point of the upper horizontal line where the hat notice icon I6 is arranged, and as shown in FIG. 119(a5), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the hat notice icon I6. After the display indicating that the information has been acquired is performed, the Amida effect is terminated, and as shown in FIG. 119(a6), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. To be done.

Note that, in this example of performance, as shown in FIG. 119(a1-1) and as described above, one of the plurality of different types of notice icons is selected, but, for example, FIG. 119(a1-) As shown in 2), the notice icon I6 of the hat is arranged at all the end points of the horizontal line, or the notice icon I10 of the fan is arranged at all of the end points of the horizontal line as shown in FIG. Good. In this way, by arranging the same type of advance notice icon at all the end points of the horizontal line, it is possible to notify the player that it is confirmed that the displayed advance notice icon will be stocked. In particular, as shown in FIG. 119(a1-3), the fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon indicating that an effect for giving notice that the big hit will be settled is performed as described above, so that the player is It may be possible to further increase the expectation of a big hit. The effect as shown in FIG. 119(a1-3) is a kind of premier effect that rarely appears.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 119(a1-4), the icon IX for losing is not arranged, but the notice icon I6 for a hat, the notice icon I10 for a fan, and the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes are arranged at the end points of each horizontal line, It may be determined that one of the notice icons is always stocked. According to this, the player may be able to enjoy the Amida production at ease.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119(a1-5), the sabotani character SB is arranged at all of the starting points of the horizontal lines, and the notice icons (the notice icon I6 of the hat and the notice icon I10 of the fan) arranged at the end points of the horizontal lines. Alternatively, it may be decided that all the notice icons I9) of the thousand boxes are stocked. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 119(a1-5), since the fan advance notice icon I10 is included, it is assured that an effect for giving advance notice that the big hit will be settled is performed, so the player makes a big hit. It may be possible to further increase the expectation of.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119(a1-6), the notice icon of the lord whose notice line type is not clear at the end of each horizontal line (the notice icon I1 of the first lord, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, The notice icon I3) of Mr. No. 3 may be arranged. In this way, the player does not know what kind of notice icon will be stocked until the end point is reached. In some cases, expectations can be improved. Also, the notice icon of the lord is different in color depending on the type as described above, and the reliability of the big hit is different depending on the color. Therefore, the player may be able to increase the expectation of the notice icon after the change from the notice icon of the lord, depending on which color the notice icon of the lord is acquired. For example, the third palace's notice icon I3, which is the red lord's notice icon, is more likely to be changed to the “pseudo-relation” confirmation notice icon than the “pseudo-relation” confirmation notice icon. The notice icon I1 of the first lord, which is the notice icon of, can be changed easily to the notice icon in which "pseudo-ream" is not fixed.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 119(a3-1) and as described above, it is difficult to identify the traveling route of the character SB of the sabotani by hiding the central portion of the vertical line with smoke, but, for example, FIG. As shown in (a3-2), the vertical line may not be hidden by smoke, and the traveling route of the character SB of Sabohani may be specified at the time when the Amida effect is started. This allows the player to know in advance which of the notice icons will be stocked, and thus may be able to enjoy the Amida production with peace of mind. Further, in this case, a roulette effect for determining the starting point of the horizontal line on which the character SB of the sabotani is arranged may be performed to further enhance the effect.

Further, in this example of production, as described above with reference to FIG. 119(a2-1), the notice icon that may be stocked at the start of the Amida production is displayed in a recognizable manner. As shown in FIG. 119(a2-2), during execution of the Amida effect, the areas in which the notice icons respectively arranged at the end points of the respective horizontal lines are displayed are hidden by smoke, and then, shown in FIG. 119(a2-2a). ), the notice icons respectively arranged at the end points of the horizontal lines may be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 119(a2-2a), the icon IX for losing is changed to the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, and the content of the Amida effect is promoted. Note that, for example, some or all of the notice icons placed at the end points of the horizontal lines may be changed to the missing icon IX or a notice icon of a lower rank, so that the contents of the Amida production are demoted. You can

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 119(a4-1), the central portion of the vertical line is hidden by smoke so that the traveling route of the character SB of the sabotani can be predicted to some extent. As shown in a4-2), the smoke that hides a part of the vertical line extends in the vertical direction during execution of the Amida effect, and the smoke disappears as shown in FIG. 119 (a4-2a). The vertical lines may increase or decrease before and after. In the example illustrated in FIG. 119(a4-2a), before the smoke is extended, it is suggested that one of the hat notice icon I6 and the fan notice icon I10 may be acquired. Then, the third vertical line is erased, and it is assured that the fan notice icon I10 is stocked.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 119(a4-1), since the second vertical line is cut midway, the lost icon IX is not selected. As shown in 119(a4-3), the second vertical line is not cut, and therefore, the icon IX of the loss is selected, and after the Amida effect is finished, FIG. 119(a4-3a). As shown in FIG. 5, it may be notified that no notice icon is stocked in any display area of the notice icon display area 285.

It should be noted that in the above-mentioned Amida effect, it is possible to give a pre-reading notice for the symbol variable display, which is the target of the pre-reading, depending on the type of the notice icon arranged at the end point of the horizontal line.

FIG. 120 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is a figure showing stepwise another effect example of the notice icon increasing effect. is there. In FIG. 120, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 120, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is the hold of the symbol variation display that is the target of the prefetch, and the hold display is the display mode of the prefetch notice (sabohani hold icon). It is different from the above-described embodiment in that

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 120(1), the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top. Note that, in FIG. 120(1), the notice icon is not displayed in any area of the notice icon display area 285. Further, as shown in FIG. 120(1), the first special symbol display device 212 is performing variable display of symbols, and accordingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. The variable display of symbols is being performed.

In addition, in FIG. 120(1), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Therefore, all of the two holding icons h11 and h12 and the change icon h0 in FIG. 1 are displayed in the default display mode (circular unpatterned and white display mode).

Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 120(2), when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the third hold icon h13 of special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1. It is displayed to notify that the number of holdings has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold that is a target of prefetching. In this effect example, the hold icon h13 of the third special diagram 1 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetching notice (the display mode of Sabohani) instead of the default display mode.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 120(3), the decorative pattern display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 120(4), the hold icons h11, h12, h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively. The hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 is moved to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold of the special figure 1. It becomes the icon h11, the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 120(5) shows that the symbol variable display is being continued.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 120(6), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the hat notice icon I6. In this way, in this effect example, in the effect that the notice icon is displayed (stock) in the symbol variation display that is started next to the symbol variation display that is performed when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended. The production of a certain lord has started.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 120(7), the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 120(8), the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is displayed as a notice icon. An effect display that is thrown toward the area 285 is performed.

Then, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 120(9), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 120(10). On the decorative pattern display device 208, a performance display in which the lord's character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and has a happy expression is performed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 120(11) to 120(12), a display in which the lord's character YM is framed out toward the bottom of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (13), the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 120(14), the hold icon which is moved and displayed by the moving animation and which is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. ..

After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 has passed, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (15), the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and is dislocated. The display result of is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 120 (16), the hold icon which is moved and displayed by the moving animation and which is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. That is, the variable display of the symbols that have been prefetched is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds elapse after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, as shown in FIG. 120(17), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays it in the notice icon first display area YA1. The notice icon digestion effect that the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed is performed. As described above, according to this effect example, it can be said that the pre-reading notice by the notice icon and the pre-reading notice by the hold icon are simultaneously performed.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and step by step other effect examples of the notice icon increase effect and the digestion effect. FIG. 121, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 121, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold of the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching, but the display mode is For example, like the first hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

FIG. 121(a1) to FIG. 121(a3-1) show a state in which a notice effect is given in advance that the notice icon is stocked. As shown in FIG. 121(a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1", and the display is out of order. The result is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, no notice icon is displayed in any display area.

After that, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 121(a2-1), it is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold is at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The icon moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of special figure 1 and the third hold icon h13. The hold icon at the display position becomes the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 121(a2-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the placard PL1 for notifying that the notice icon will be stocked in the symbol variation display to be started next. Specifically, on this placard PL1, a notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed following "at the next change", and further, a notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed following this, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed. Warns that the product will always be stocked during the next symbol fluctuation display.

After that, when the variable time of the special figure 1 elapses and the variable display is ended, and the next variable display of the special figure 1 is started, for example, the hall effect is performed during the execution of the symbol variable display, As shown in 121 (a3-1), the hat notice icon I6 is stocked in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. This allows the player to recognize in advance that the notice icon I6 of the hat will be stocked, so that the player may be able to enjoy the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the above-described production example, the placard PL1 is displayed to notify that the notice icon is always stocked. However, for example, a placard PL2 as shown in FIG. 121(a2-2) is displayed. It may be displayed to notify that the notice icon may not be stocked. Specifically, on this placard PL2, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed following "in the next change", and further, "ga stock" is displayed following this, but the question mark is added. In this case, the notice icon I6 of the hat may be stocked during the next symbol variation display.

When the notice icon I6 of the hat is not stocked during the next symbol variation display, no production relating to the stock of the notice icon is performed as shown in FIG. 121 (a3-2). It should be noted that, although production related to the stock of the notice icon (for example, lord's production etc.) may be performed, in this case, so-called gasse stock production in which the notice icon is not stocked is performed.

121 (b1) to (b3) in FIG. 121, the look-ahead mode, which is one of the look-ahead notices, is being performed during the design change display that is being executed when the design change display that is the target of the read-ahead is suspended. It is shown.

As shown in FIG. 121(b1), a game ball is won in the first special map starting port 230, and the symbol variation display that is the target of the prefetch is suspended, and the prefetch notice is displayed as the display mode of the third suspension icon h13. The hold icon of the display form of Sabohani as the display form of is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is performed corresponding to the variable display of the special figure 1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 121(b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the look-ahead mode, which is an effect of notifying that the symbol variable display that is likely to be a big hit is being held, is started. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "intense heat approaching" scroll from the right to the left in each of the two strip-shaped scroll display areas. Is displayed.

After that, when the variable time of the special figure 1 elapses and the variable display ends, and the next variable display of the special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 121(b3), during the execution of the symbol variable display. The lord's presentation is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. As described above, according to this effect example, it is possible to give a pre-reading notice by changing the background display, in addition to the pre-reading notice by the stock of the notice icon and the pre-reading notice by changing the display mode of the hold icon.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 121 (c1) to (c2), during the symbol variation display that is being executed at the time when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the hall effect etc. is performed and the notice icon is displayed. May be stocked.

FIG. 121 (d1) to FIG. 121 (d3) show a state in which the notice icon is stocked and consumed while the same symbol variation display is being executed. That is, stocking and digesting of the notice icon relating to the notice effect being performed during the variable display of the symbol is also configured to be executable.

As shown in FIG. 121(d1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 by the lord's effect, the notice icon I6 of the hat displays the notice icon I6 as shown in FIG. 121(d2). The preliminary announcement icon first display area YA1 in the area 285 is temporarily stocked. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), as shown in FIG. 121(d3), the notice icon digesting effect is performed and the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested.

As shown in FIGS. 121(e1) to 121(e2), the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown to the notice icon display area 285 by the production of the lord, but is digested without being stocked in the notice icon display area 285. You may do it.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and shows the notice icon increase effect and the digest effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of stepwise. 122, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 122, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold of the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching, but the display mode is For example, like the first hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

122(a1) to 122(a3) show that the notice icon display area and the area for displaying the stage name for explaining the background display are used in common.

As shown in FIG. 122(a1), in the decorative pattern display device 208, a stage display area 289 indicating the current stage is provided in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the current stage is “castle town”. There is. In this stage display area 289, in addition to displaying the current stage name, for example, a tutorial display such as the contents of the notice or explanation of the appearing characters may be performed, or the notice display may be performed. Good. In this way, it can be said that the stage display area 289 functions as an explanation display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 122(a1), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the above-mentioned hall effect is performed and the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 122(a2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, and the notice of "stock" is additionally added, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked. Is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 122(a3), the stage display area 289 displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the notice in the notice icon display area 285D is changed. A hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the first icon display area YA1.

As shown in FIGS. 122(b1) to 122(b3), the stage display area 289 is not changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the notice icon I6 of the hat that appears due to the lord's effect is not stocked and is kept as it is. It may be digested. As a result, the notice effect of the notice icon relating to the notice that is being displayed in the pattern change display can be performed.

FIG. 122(c1) to FIG. 122(c2) show that a plurality of notice icon display areas are provided and the notice icon display area for displaying the notice icon is selected according to the type of the notice icon.

As shown in FIG. 122(c1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a first notice icon display area 285E is provided at the left end portion of the display screen, and a second notice icon display area is provided at the right end portion of the display screen. 285F is provided. In this effect example, the first notice icon display area 285E is an area in which notice icons other than the button notice icon are displayed, and the second notice icon display area 285F is a display area dedicated to the button notice icon. However, it is not limited to this. The first notice icon display area 285E is provided with four display areas (a notice icon first display area YAL1, a notice icon second display area YAL2, a notice icon third display area YAL3, and a notice icon fourth display area YAL4). The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAL1 and the notice icon second display area YAL2, respectively, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is shown in the notice icon third display area YAL3. It is displayed. The second notice icon display area 285F also has four display areas (a notice icon first display area YAR1, a notice icon second display area YAR2, a notice icon third display area YAR3, and a notice icon fourth display area YAR4). Is provided, and the notice icon is not displayed in any of the display areas. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, two second button notice icons I11 are enlarged and displayed side by side substantially at the center of the display screen, and a state in which these second button notice icons I11 are stocked is shown. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 122(c2), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YAR1 and the notice icon second display area YAR2 of the second notice icon display area 285F. In this example of performance, the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4. That is, that is, when the second button notice icon I11 is exhausted after the second button notice icon I11 is full in the second notice icon display area 285F, and when the number is smaller than that Even when the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the second notice icon display area 285F and the second button notice icon I11 is exhausted, the reliability of the jackpot may be different. Well, for example, the larger the number of second button notice icons I11 in stock, the more likely it is to be a big hit. It should be noted that all of the stocked button notice icons I11 may not be consumed, for example, even if four button notice icons I11 are displayed, only two may be consumed. In this case, In, the remaining two button notice icons I11 may be kept in stock until the next symbol variation display, or may be erased without being consumed. The first notice icon display area 285E may also be configured so that the reliability of the big hit varies depending on the number of the notice items stocked.

FIG. 122(d1) to FIG. 122(d3) show another example of the increase effect of the notice icon.

As shown in FIG. 122(d1), the hat notice icon I6s is displayed in a small size overlapping the fluctuation icon h0 and the second hold icon h12, respectively, and the shuriken notice icon I7s is displayed as the first hold. It is displayed in a small size overlaid on the icon h11. That is, in this effect example, an example in which the notice icon is included in the hold icon and may be displayed is shown.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 122(d2), the notice icon I6s of the reduced hat displayed on the variable icon h0 pops out and moves toward the center of the display screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 122(d3), the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and the character display "stock" is added, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. To be done. In this effect example, the effect of stocking the advance notice icon displayed in the change icon h0 is performed every time the suspension of the variable display of the symbols is exhausted, but the timing of stocking the advance notice icon is set to this. Not limited.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 122(e1), the notice icon may not be displayed on all the variable icons and the hold icons, but may be displayed only on some of the variable icons or the hold icons.

122(f1) to FIG. 122(f3) show an example in which the notice icon may not be stocked even though the notice icon is displayed on the variable icon h0.

122(f1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 122(d1), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this effect example, thereafter, the erasing animation of the variation icon h0 is started at the timing when the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 122(f2), and thereafter, the variation icon is displayed as shown in FIG. 122(f3). Although h0 is deleted, at this time, the notice icon I6s of the hat displayed on the change icon h0 is also removed together with the change icon h0, and it is notified that the notice icon I6 of the hat is not stocked. In this way, even if the notice icon is displayed on the variable icon or the hold icon, the displayed notice icon may not be stocked.

FIG. 122(g1) to FIG. 122(g3) show how, when a certain notice icon is consumed, an effect is obtained in which the same effect as when a plurality of notice icons are consumed is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 122(g1), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the bouquet notice icon I51 as the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The notice icon I51 of this bouquet includes two or more of the plurality of types of notice icons described above with reference to FIG. 81(b). Which notice icon is included? It is difficult to identify.

Then, as shown in FIG. 122(g2), when the bouquet notice icon I51 is consumed, the bouquet notice icon I51 is moved from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display screen and then enlarged. It

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (g3), the notice icon I51 for the bouquet changes in display to the notice icon I6 for the hat and the notice icon I8 for the ribbon, and the types of the notice icons included in the notice icon I51 for the bouquet are changed. Can be recognized. Therefore, the player may be able to have a sense of expectation as to which type of notice icon is included, while having the pleasure of stocking the notice icon.

In the embodiments described so far and in the embodiments described below, the notice icon may be continued to be displayed even after the symbol is stopped and displayed. Not only when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a certain state, but when the notice icon is stocked when the symbol is stopped and displayed in the state where the variable display of the symbol is not held, the stock state even during the demo display May be maintained. Further, the stock state may be maintained as long as the notice icon is stocked, regardless of whether the variable display of symbols is held or not.
Further, it may be possible to give a notice of the time until the notice icon is displayed.

Further, the stocked notice icon may be changed or promoted (upgraded), for example, the noticed icon I6 of the stocked hat may be changed to the notice icon I10 of the fan. , When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed due to a combination of chances while the hat notice icon I6 is stocked, the notice icon I6 of the hat may be changed to the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. .. On the contrary, the stocked notice icon may be demoted (downgraded).

Further, the effect display that is performed when the notice icon is consumed may be changed or promoted (leveled up). For example, the effect that the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed is performed. The production may be changed to the fan advance notice icon I10 while it is being performed, or the number of pseudo consecutive times may be increased in the pseudo continuous production executed by digesting the hat advance notice icon I6. Good. In addition, conversely, an effect that the effect display performed when the notice icon is consumed may be demoted (level down).

Even when the button notice icon is displayed, the button holding icon may be displayed, but may not be displayed.

When the button notice icon is displayed, the button notice may be displayed, but may not be displayed.

Further, depending on the length of the symbol variation display time, whether or not to give a notice of stocking the notice icon may be determined.

Further, the length of the variable display time may be the same or different in the case where the advance notice of stocking the advance notice icon is not given for the symbol change display which is a big hit and the symbol change display which is a loss.

Further, as the variation display time of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 which is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1, a variation time of a length in which the notice icon is not stocked may be selected.

Further, when the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 is interrupted and the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 is executed, the notice of stocking the notice icon may be controlled in a controlled manner.

Further, when the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 is interrupted and the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 is executed, the effect data table may be set not to give the notice of stocking the notice icon.

Further, when the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 is interrupted and the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 is executed, the varying time of the length for stocking the notice icon may be selected. Here, the stocked notice icon may be consumed in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that has been interrupted, or may be consumed during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 that has been interrupted.

Further, when the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of special figure 1, it is stocked in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display of special figure 1 before the interruption is performed. The notice icon may be kept in stock and not digested, or may be configured to be digested.

Further, the types of the notice icon are not limited to those described above or those described below, and various types can be adopted.

For example, as a notice icon, an item for customization may be displayed. When this item for customization is consumed, for example, the number of selectable BGMs, the number of selectable backgrounds, and the player's selection are increased. The number of possible effect modes (for example, one-shot notification mode) may be increased.

In addition, for example, an item for effect selection may be displayed, and when the item for effect selection is consumed, for example, the BGM can be changed, the effect mode can be changed, the volume setting, or the like. The brightness may be settable.

Further, for example, a user setting clear item may be displayed, and when this user setting clear item is consumed, for example, the user setting may be made clear or the user setting may be cleared. It may be possible to clear after confirming whether or not to do it.

Further, for example, the effect mode end item may be displayed, and when the effect mode end item is consumed, for example, it is possible to end the prefetch mode or the effect mode. Alternatively, the pre-reading mode or the effect mode may be confirmed before ending.

Also, for example, points-acquiring items and level-up gift items may be displayed. When these items are consumed, for example, points may be gifted or the level may be increased. You can

Further, for example, the reach effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started, and, for example, when the lord's icon is consumed, the lord's VS swordsman reach may be performed.

Further, for example, the notice production corresponding to the notice icon may be started. For example, when the present icon is exhausted, the icon “next notice” is displayed, and the notice production of “next notice” is displayed. May be started.

Further, for example, there may be an icon (divination icon) in which fortune-telling is started when digested. In this case, the fortune-telling icon may be displayed only during the customer waiting demonstration effect, or may be displayed other than during the customer waiting demonstration effect.

Further, for example, there may be an icon that displays information regarding the island simultaneous production when it is consumed. For example, the countdown to the start of the island simultaneous production may be started, the time until the island simultaneous production is started, or the content of the next island simultaneous production may be displayed. Good.

Further, for example, there may be an icon that allows the store side customization when the digestion is completed. For example, even if it is possible to set a setting for producing an effect related to the area of the installed game shop (for example, setting of the Tohoku region mode or the Chubu region mode) or the name of the installed game store. Good. For example, depending on the setting, the group notice character that appears in the Tohoku region mode (for example, Namahage group) and the group notice character that appears in the Chubu region mode (for example, Shachihoko group) can be different. There are cases.

Further, for example, there may be an icon for which the tutorial display is started when it is consumed.

Further, for example, there may be an icon for which the roulette effect is started when it is consumed. In this roulette effect, for example, a result indicating that the promotion effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed, a result indicating that a notice about the symbol variable display is given, and the like are displayed.

Further, for example, there may be an icon that changes the display mode of the symbol or returns to the original state when it is consumed.

Next, a modified example of the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124. Here, FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of effects that can be executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in stages, and FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining a notice item related lottery table. Is.

In FIG. 123, a decorative pattern display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a first special figure holding lamp 218 and a second special figure holding lamp 220 are shown. The illustration of the universal figure display device 210, the universal figure holding lamp 216, and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 123(a), the reserved icon display area 281A of special figure 1 and the reserved icon display area 282A of special figure 2 are adjacent to each other below the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. It is displayed as if. In FIG. 123(a), the number of reservations is 0 in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Then, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped and displayed as "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. Further, a notice icon display area 285A is arranged above the reserved icon display area 282A of the special figure 2, and the notice icon Ih of the princess is displayed. Although the notice icons are displayed left-justified in the notice icon display area 285A, the display position of the notice icon is not limited to this. Further, the notice icon display area 285 may be always displayed, or may not be displayed as needed.

In FIG. 123(b), two gaming balls have been won in the first special figure starting port 230. In the hold icon display area 281A of special figure 1, a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold and a hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold are displayed side by side in the left alignment. Both of these hold icons h11 and h12 have default display modes.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 123(c), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In the hold icon display area 281A of the special figure 1, since the first hold has been exhausted, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold moves to the left and becomes the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. Is displayed. Further, at this time, since the game ball has won in the second special figure starting port 232, the hold icon h21 corresponding to the first hold is displayed in the left-justified manner in the hold icon display area 282A of the special figure 2. This hold icon h21 has a default display mode.

Then, when the timing shown in FIG. 123(d) comes, the display mode of the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold in FIG. 1 is the display mode of the prefetch notice (the display mode displayed as "heat"). ) Changes to.

After the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, at the timing shown in FIG. 123(e), the notice icon It of the lord and the notice icon Ih of the princess are additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. It That is, a display in which the number of advance notice icons increases is displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123(f), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess notice icon Ih increased after the two princess notice icons Ih is consumed. Then, the princess character HI accompanied by the balloons of "Atari" and "Question mark" is displayed. The appearance timing of the princess character HI may be before, after, or simultaneously with the stop display timing of the left symbol.

After that, as shown in FIG. 123(g), "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and then "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, which means that the result is off. Is notified.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 is executed prior to the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1, so at the timing shown in FIG. 123(h), the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 is started. It In the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, if the result of the symbol variation display of the particular figure 2 is out of order, the notice icon Will not be digested and the notice icon will not be displayed. Therefore, the notice icon may not be displayed or the notice icon display area 285A may not be displayed while the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 is being performed. In addition, when the result of the variable display of the special figure 2 is a big hit, it is possible not to perform the advance notice icon exhaustion and increase display, or when the advance notice icon exhaustion and increase display is performed. There may be. On the other hand, the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be continuously displayed, or any of the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be hidden, or the hold icon display of special figure 2 may be displayed. Only the area 282A may be displayed. When the symbol variable display of special figure 2 is interrupted and performed, the background may be changed to a dedicated background. When the dedicated background is displayed, the notice icon display area 285A may be hidden and only the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 123(i), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3", and it is notified that the result of the symbol variable display of special figure 2 is out of alignment. ..

Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 123(j), after the suspended variable display of the special figure 1 is started, the notice icon It of the lord is digested, and “Atari” and “Question mark” are displayed. A lord's character YI appears with a balloon of character notation. The appearance timing of the lord's character YI may be before, after, or simultaneously with the start of the symbol variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, in FIG. 123(j), the notice icon Id of the evil officer is additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. That is, a display in which the number of advance notice icons increases is displayed. Here, the timing of additionally displaying the notice icon Id of the evil officer may be before or after the display display of the notice icon It of the Lord is started, or at the same time. May be

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123(k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess's notice icon Ih and the evil representative's notice icon are displayed. Id is digested, and the princess character HI and the evil protagonist character DI appear. The appearance timing of the princess character HI may be before, after, or simultaneously with the stop display timing of the left symbol. The appearance timing of the princess character HI may be before, after, or at the same time as the appearance timing of the evil proxy character DI.

Then, at the timing of FIG. 123(m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display region 208c, and then "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b. , It is reported that the big hit.

Next, the configuration of the lottery table related to the notice icon for determining whether to execute the increase display and the exhaustion display of the notice icon in this effect example will be described.

As shown in FIG. 124(A), when the big hit determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a big hit, regardless of the result of the prefetch of the hold of the special figure 1, 4 There is a 50/50 chance of displaying the increase of the Lord's notice icon, a 3/50 chance of increasing the display of the Princess notice icon, and a 2/50 chance of increasing the evil notice notice icon. .. On the other hand, 40/50 has the probability of executing the display of the Lord's notice icon, 35/50 has the possibility of executing the display of the Princess's notice icon, and has the probability of 25/50 showing the notice of the evil officer. The digest display of is executed. In addition, since the execution lottery of the increase display and the exhaustion display is performed for each notice icon, when the increase display is performed for two or more notice icons at the same time, or when the digest display is performed for two or more notice icons at the same time. There is.

Further, when the result of the big hit determination executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is out of alignment, as a result of the prefetch of the hold in FIG. 64, when the symbol variation display of the big hit is suspended Has a 3/50 chance of displaying the increase of the Lord's notice icon, a 2/50 chance of increasing the indication of the Princess notice icon, and a 1/50 chance of increasing the evil prominent notice icon. Execute the display. Also, on the other hand, there is a 1/50 chance to execute the display of the Lord's notice icon, a 10/50 chance to execute the display of the Princess notice icon, and a 15/50 chance to show the evil representative notice icon. The digest display of is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 124(B), when the jackpot determination result executed along with the start of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 is a jackpot, regardless of the result of the pending look-ahead of Toku-zu 1 , With a probability of 25/50, increase the notice icon of Tonosama, with a probability of 20/50, increase the notice icon of Princess, with a probability of 7/50 Execute. On the other hand, there is a 20/50 chance to execute the display of the Lord's notice icon, a 15/50 chance to display the princess notice icon, and a 5/50 chance of the evil prominent notice icon. The digest display of is executed. In addition, for example, in a normal game state (non-electric power support state), in a pachinko machine that is not supposed to win the second special figure starting port 232, even if the big hit determination result is a big hit, It is also possible not to increase the notice icon for each of the notice icons, and not display the notice icons for any of the notice icons.

In addition, when the big hit determination result which is executed with the start of the variable display of special figure 2 is out of order, regardless of the result of the prefetch of the hold of special figure 1, an increase display is displayed for any notice icon. Not performed, and the notice display is not performed for any of the notice icons.

Note that, for example, when the electric power support state is finished and one or more suspensions of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 are left, the notice icon is not displayed as a prefetch notice for the special figure 2 suspension. Alternatively, the advance notice icon may be displayed in an increased or reduced manner in accordance with the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 137.

125 to 137 are diagrams showing, in a step-by-step manner, a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to this embodiment. 125 to 137, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, FIGS. 125 to 137 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, the first decorative pattern display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative pattern display devices, the second decorative pattern display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and the first decoration The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be a sub display device, and a second decorative symbol display device. 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the width direction, and the height is also slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right edge portion thereof overlaps with the front side of the left edge portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has its left edge portion the first. 1 The decorative pattern display device 208N overlaps with the front surface side of the right end portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in the directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Also, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the state of being closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily variable display of the decorative symbols for each display device, and are named for convenience. However, it should be noted that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N) are summarized as effect display means, and the effect display means is the decorative pattern. It is also possible to perform variable display of, or to display a plurality of types of effect. Further, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. .. The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmissive region. A light-emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end portion of the light guide plate, and light from the light-emitting body is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear as if In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 125 to 137, the light guide plate is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. In addition, the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the region where the light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the light irradiation. Therefore, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 125 to 135 and 137 show the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136.

FIG. 125 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of the notice icon increasing effect and the digesting effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a sequel to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 125. Is.

As shown in FIG. 125(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is located at the center thereof. It is displayed in a state of being placed on a pedestal, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a reservation icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reservation icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 125(a), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 both have default display modes. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged, various information regarding a game and a performance is displayed (tutorial display), and the content is updated at an appropriate timing. To be done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 125(a), "The lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed, and the explanation about the lord's character is given. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit is displayed with priority during the variable display of the first decorative pattern and is provided in a region that does not overlap with the display region of the first decorative pattern, but with the display region of the first decorative pattern. May overlap. In addition, the explanation display section (or the explanation display area) may be a place where a certain thing is displayed, in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, in a configuration in which the stage name is displayed and it is hot when the stage moves to a certain stage, when the stage name is displayed in red, the display may be an explanation display instead of a notice. Conversely, when the normal stage name is displayed in white, it is not so hot as compared with the red stage name display, and this may also be a kind of notice.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display portion ST1 as an explanation display portion for displaying the currently performed stage name and reach name is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 125(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed. The lord's character may or may not always be displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. ing. Further, the family crest monument 224E has a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yashiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged and can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro 224Fa and the general 224Fb each have a light emitting means such as a full-color LED or the like built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the effect contents.

Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 125(b), when the game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the third hold icon h13 (third hold icon) of the third special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed to notify that the number of holdings has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold of the variable display of symbols that is the target of prefetching. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in the display mode of the prefetching notice (for example, the display mode with a blue circle). At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound "Pong" to notify that the pre-reading notice is displayed by the hold display.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 125(c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1", and the result of the display is off. Is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1".

Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 125(d), the hold icons h11, h12, h13 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position of is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to be the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11. , The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12 and moves to the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 125(d), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the text "Tonosama is Yatsushiro Shogun" is still displayed. In this way, the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variable displays.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125(e), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character is started, and the lord's character sets the bomb-like icon (bomb icon) I61. It is shown trying to throw. The bomb icon I61 is an icon that, when thrown by the lord's character, has various effects on the effect. Note that the throwing of the bomb icon I61 may be displayed with an animation in which the displayed notice icon can be specified or cannot be specified. In this case, it may be identifiable from the middle of throwing or may be identifiable from the beginning. In addition, there is an animation related to the notice icon with high jackpot expectation when digested (high expectation notice icon) and an animation related to the notice icon with lower expectation of jackpot when digested than the high expectation notice animation. The animation display modes may be the same or different.

At the timing shown in FIG. 125(f), the appearance of the lord's character throwing the bomb icon I61 is shown.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 125(g), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "Tonosama is the Yatsushiro Shogun" has been changed to "Due to the notice icon being exhausted..." There is an explanation of what happens. The timing at which the display on the tutorial display section TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the bomb icon I61. The timing may be before the movement from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the bomb icon I61. The timing may be after the movement to. As described above, in the tutorial display section TT1, a plurality of types of explanation display may be displayed in one symbol variable display.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125(h), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character bursts, the burst bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman's notice icon I62 at the timing shown in FIG. 125(i). .. The swordsman's notice icon I62 is an icon for giving a notice to shift to the swordsman reach, as will be described later. Further, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “Don” to inform that effect. Here, the notice icon may have a combination of 1 to 1 to many to many (for example, N to N).

Then, as shown in FIG. 125(j), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed in a reduced size and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a sound "Paquine" to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125(k), the character's character throws the bomb icon I61. The animation ends. In this way, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to see. Here, it is difficult to visually recognize that the notice icon is more difficult to visually recognize than when the notice icon is not in a position overlapping the front surface side of the tutorial display section TT1. To put it another way, by making the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlap the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, it is easier for the player to draw attention to the display of the tutorial display section TT1 and the swordsman's notice icon I62. May be possible. In addition, it may be possible to notice the existence of the tutorial or to focus on the symbol variation display rather than the presentation explanation that may occur in the future or in the future.

Note that the swordsman's notice icon I62 may be arranged not only at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1 but also at a position near the tutorial display section TT1. Sometimes you can get. Further, the content indicated by the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 may be, for example, the content related to the swordsman's notice icon I62, or the content not related to the swordsman's notice icon I62 at all. The content may be the content related to the current performance, or the content not related to the current performance. In FIG. 125(j), the content of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is a display relating to the notice icon, and is a display related to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, but the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed. Although it is not displayed in connection with, but is related to the content of the explanation by chance, the content of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is determined in accordance with the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62. It may be configured to be performed. When displaying the tutorial display along with the notice icon, the tutorial display may be displayed before the notice icon, the notice icon may be displayed before the tutorial display, or the tutorial display and the notice icon may be displayed. You may display simultaneously. The swordsman's notice icon I62 arranged so as to overlap the tutorial display portion TT1 is digested in the pattern variation display which is the target of prefetching, as described later. Note that the swordsman's notice icon I62 may be consumed in the symbol variation display performed prior to the symbol variation display of the prefetch target. As a result, the overlap with the tutorial display section TT1 is resolved before the pattern variation display, which is the target of prefetching, is started. In this example of performance, the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display section TT1, but the notice icon may be stocked in the stage name display section ST1.

After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 125(l), in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the first decorative pattern is the decorative pattern of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the disagreement is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". Further, as shown in FIG. 125(l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display portion TT1 is changed from "The notice icon is exhausted..." to "Panda is the master of the lord". , The relationship between the lord's character and the panda character is explained. That is, in this effect example, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be changed to a new content in a state where the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed overlapping the tutorial display section TT1. In other words, it can be said that the new explanation display is started in a state where the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the tutorial display section TT1. The timing of changing the display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the decorative design is stopped and displayed, or may be the timing before the timing at which the decorative design is stopped and displayed, The timing may be later than the timing at which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the timing of the display change of the tutorial display section TT1 is a timing before the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the tutorial display section TT1 displays a plurality of explanatory displays in one symbol variable display. It can be said that it may be started.

FIG. 125(m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display that is performed immediately before the symbol variation display that is the target of the prefetching is completed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6". Further, as shown in FIG. 125(m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display portion TT1 is changed from "Panda is the master of the lord" to "When the Yatsushiro general moves...". It is explained that something happens when the Yatsushiro 224Fa and the General 224Fb operate.

Then, when the symbol variation on the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 125(n), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The suspended icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed to become the variable icon h0. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 125(n), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125(o), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. To be done.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 125(p), the swordsman's notice icon I62 starts swinging, which fuels an expectation as to whether or not the swordsman's notice icon I62 will be consumed. By doing so, it may be possible to make the player long for the advance notice icon to be used soon. At this time, the effect display is performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in accordance with the swing of the swordsman's notice icon I62. The effect display may not be performed. This effect display depends on the character display portion of the tutorial display section TT1, and therefore the explanation display may be able to be focused on.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 125(q), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman's notice icon I62 has moved upward and is being digested. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “paquin” to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. As a result, the overlapping state of the swordsman's notice icon I62 on the tutorial display section TT1 is resolved, and the player may easily see the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 126(a) subsequent to FIG. 125(q), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a message notifying that the super reach (swordsman reach) will be developed. That is, in this example of performance, the development of the swordsman reach is announced by the digestion of the swordsman's announcement icon I62. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Then, as shown in FIG. 126(b), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, which shows that the swordsman reach has high reliability for the big hit. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps the tutorial display section TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize.

FIG. 126(c) shows that a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display has been changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to Swordsman Reach, and the second decorative symbol display. On the stage name display portion ST1 of the device 208M, the character display of "Swordsman Reach" is displayed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the duel scene animation is being performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 126(c), a state in which the lord's character and the swordsman character face each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI portion is framed out downward, and therefore the display position of the variable icon h0 is moved downward. At this time, the UI unit may frame out after the hold icon is deleted, or the UI unit may frame out together with the hold icon. In addition to the hold icon, when the explanation display is being performed, the UI may be framed out after the hold icon and the explanation display are erased at the same time. Here, the timing at which the hold icon and the explanation display are deleted may be different.

126(d), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 126(e), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It notifies that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 has started, and promotes the operation of the effect button 136 to the player. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, light emission in red) indicating that it is in the operation accepting state. The timing at which the light emission mode of the chance button lamp 138 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed, or may be before the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed. Alternatively, it may be after the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed.

After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 126(f), as shown in FIG. 126(g), the first decorative symbol display device 208L indicates that the master goes up and “go. The cut-in image to which the character display "" is added is displayed overlaid on the animation display of the duel scene.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126(h), the hero's lord lost to the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 126(i), both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". The combination of decorative symbols is derived and the swing fluctuation is started.

After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 126(j), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed as “decoration 2” on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. -Decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns, and the display result of the off is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". If a notice icon (for example, the notice icon I10 of the fan described above) that performs a rehabilitation effect after being displayed as a loss is stocked, the background display changes from the background of the swordsman reach to the background of the castle town, which is the normal background. It may be digested after returning.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of the notice icon increasing effect and the digesting effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 127 in a stepwise manner. Is. Note that FIGS. 127(a) to 127(l) are the same as FIGS. 125(a) to 125(l), and a description thereof will be omitted here.

FIG. 127(m) shows a state in which the symbol variable display that is performed immediately before the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 127(m), the notice icon pattern CS (may be referred to as "decoration C") displayed as "C" in the middle symbol display area 208b is stopped and displayed, and "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration" The temporary stop display is made by the combination of the decorative patterns of "6". When the notice icon pattern CS is displayed in a derived manner, it has a function of notifying that a chance-up notice icon I63 described later is stocked. When the notice icon design CS is displayed, the chance-up notice icon I63 may be always stocked, or the chance-up notice icon I63 may not be stocked. Further, the notice icon design CS may include an image (including the enlarged/reduced image itself) imitating the notice icon I63 of increasing the chance, and it may be moved to the notice icon display area. That is, unlike the throwing animation, the notice icon acquisition animation based on the pattern may be any noticeable display of the notice icon. In addition, the notice icon pattern CS and the chance increase notice icon I63 may not correspond to each other. Further, the types of notice icons displayed as symbols may be larger or smaller than the types of notice icons not displayed as symbols. The type of the notice icon displayed at the moment of the animation related to the character of the lord (for example, throwing animation) is the notice displayed at the moment of the animation related to the symbol (for example, the animation performed by displaying the notice icon symbol CS). It may be different from the type of icon, and at least some of the notice icons may be icons that are displayed when both animations are triggered. A certain notice icon may be displayed as both a design and a mini character. For example, the pseudo-announcement icon may be displayed at two triggers, and two fluctuations may be stocked at different triggers with one change, or may not be displayed. Further, in the second decorative symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in any symbol row. The variable icon h0 is erased here, but may be displayed. Further, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from "Panda is master of lord" to "When General Yatsushiro moves...".

As described above, when the notice icon design CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIG. 127(n), the chance up notice icon I63 pops out from the notice icon design CS, and FIG. 127(o). ), it is moved to the right side of the notice icon I62 of the swordsman at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1 and arranged (stock). Then, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "Paquine" to notify that the chance-up notice icon I63 has been stocked. It should be noted that at the timing when the chance-up notice icon I63 pops out, there is no particular notification by voice output. This is because it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the advance notice icon I63 for increasing the chances of being stocked is derived by deriving the advance notice icon design CS, but it is also possible to give a notification by voice. As described above, in this production example, it may be possible to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 by using the plurality of notice icons. Further, according to this effect example, a plurality of notice icons can be stocked. In addition, in this example of performance, the swordsman's notice icon I62 and the chance up notice icon I63 have different triggers for stocking. Therefore, the contents of the production until the stocking are different.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 127(p), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6", and the result of the display is off. Is confirmed. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6".

Then, when the symbol variation on the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 127(q), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The suspended icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed to become the variable icon h0. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 127(q), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128(a) following FIG. 127(q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of “decoration 2” is stopped in each of the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c. It is displayed and the reach state is formed.

Thereafter, the swordsman's notice icon I62 starts swinging at the timing shown in FIG. 128(b). At this time, in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the effect display displayed in accordance with the swing of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed on the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in addition to the character display portion of the tutorial display section TT1. In some cases, it can be noted that the chance-up notice icon I63 is stocked in addition to the explanation display.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 128(c), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman's notice icon I62 has moved upward and is being digested. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “paquin” to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. In this production example, the overlapping state of the swordsman's notice icon I62 on the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated, but the chance up notice icon I63 is still overlapping the tutorial display section TT1. Further, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is consumed, a predetermined effect display is displayed around the swordsman's notice icon I62 to make the swordsman's notice icon I62 stand out. As shown, this effect display is on the tutorial display portion TT1 and the chance-up notice icon I63, and it may be possible to draw attention to the explanation display and the chance-up notice icon I63.

At the timing shown in FIG. 128(d), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays to inform that the swordsman reach will be developed. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Then, as shown in FIG. 128E, the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps the tutorial display section TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the pattern formed on this light guide plate also overlaps with the chance-up notice icon I63 that was not digested before the transition to super reach (swordsman reach), and the chance-up notice icon I63 is displayed. May be difficult to see. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 128E, a part of the explanation display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden by the pattern formed on the light guide plate and the chance-up notice icon I63. There is. Here, since a predetermined space is provided between the light guide plate and the decorative pattern display device, it is possible to avoid the overlap due to the pattern formed on the light guide plate depending on the position viewed by the player. In some cases, the chance-up notice icon I63 can be made easy to visually recognize.

FIG. 128(f) shows that a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display has been changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to Swordsman Reach, and the second decorative symbol display. On the stage name display portion ST1 of the device 208M, the character display of "Swordsman Reach" is displayed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene is being performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 128(f), a state in which the lord's character and the swordsman character confront each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI part is framed out downward, so the display position of the change icon h0 is moved downward, but the advance notice icon I63 of chance up is not affected by it, and the display position is Not changed.

In FIG. 128(g), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 128(h), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. .. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a light emission mode (e.g., red light emission) indicating that it is in the operation acceptance state. Here, the chance-up notice icon I63 starts oscillating, which fuels an expectation as to whether or not the chance-up notice icon I63 is consumed. At this time, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display is performed in accordance with the swing of the advance icon I63 for increasing the chance.

Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 128(i), as shown in FIG. 128(j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the "up The cut-in image (first cut-in image) to which the character display "Ze" is added is displayed so as to be superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

Then, as shown in FIG. 128(k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the chance-up notice icon I63 that has been rocking is moved upward and is being digested.

Then, as shown in FIG. 128(l), the second cut-in image in which the display image extends in the upper right direction is displayed with the second cut-in image overlapping the first cut-in image because the angle of the lord's face is different, and the jackpot is hit. It has been reported that the reliability of That is, it is shown that the notice by the cut-in image is ranked higher by digesting the notice icon I63 for increasing the chance. The first cut-in image may be deleted when the second cut-in image is displayed, that is, the first cut-in image may be replaced with the second cut-in image for display. May be. Also, when another notice icon is stocked when the second cut-in image is displayed, the second cut-in image may overlap the noticed icon that is stocked. , The second cut-in image may be overlapped with the stocked notice icon, or the second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stocked notice icon, The second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stocked notice icon. In the embodiment described so far and the embodiment described below, the timing at which the digested notice icon is deleted is the same as the timing at which execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. It may be the timing before the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started, or the timing after the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. In addition, in this effect example, the notice icon overlaps the tutorial display section TT1 when the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed, but is displayed when the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed. However, they do not overlap. In other words, the stocked advance notice icon has a predetermined area to be displayed and may overlap with another image at one trigger, but may not overlap with another image at one trigger. You can Note that when the chance-up notice icon I63 is used to promote the button display shown in FIG. 128(h), the notice icon is consumed and disappeared before the start of the cut-in display that is another promotion target. It may or may not disappear.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128 (m), the main character wins over the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 128 (n), both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. The combination of the decorative patterns of is derived and the swing fluctuation is started.

After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 128(o), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed as “decoration 2” on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. -Decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns, and the jackpot display result is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2".

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon increasing effect that can be applied to the present embodiment. In FIG. 129, after the notice icon is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid so that the displayed notice icon is conveyed to the stock position. It shows how they are doing.

As shown in FIG. 129(a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI section, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 129(a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the prefetch advance notice display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 129(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the treasure box image TR is displayed above the display screen, and as will be described later, an effect display in which the notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR may be displayed. In addition, in this effect example, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged below the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and is displayed as "The notice icon is exhausted...". In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

In addition, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb are arranged. Has been done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129(a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the lid of the treasure chest image TR is opened, and the bomb icon I61 is shown protruding downward from the inside. In the tutorial display section TT1, the explanation display has been changed from "Due to the announcement of the notice icon..." to "Swordsman is your nemesis." The timing of changing the explanation display on the tutorial display portion TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR, or may be the timing before the timing at which the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR. It may be present, or may be a timing later than the timing at which the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129(a3), the bomb icon I6 that pops out of the treasure chest image TR bursts. This burst effect display overlaps the front surface side of the tutorial display section TT1, and it may be difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 129(a4), the exploded bomb icon I61 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62. At this time, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, at least some of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to see. Then, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "PAKINE" to notify that effect, indicating that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129(a5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides leftward along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. After that, as shown in FIG. 129(a6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N heads toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, a mode in which the swordsman's notice icon I62 is not moving at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L). The swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N in a manner (as if going forward). At the timing shown in FIG. 129(a6), the state in which the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. When the swordsman's notice icon I62 completely moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the overlap of the swordsman's notice icon I62 on the tutorial display portion TT1 is eliminated. After that, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide rightward toward the initial position and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 129(a7).

Next, with reference to FIG. 129(b1) to FIG. 129(b8), another example of the notice icon increasing effect performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices will be described.

As shown in FIG. 129(b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 129(b1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the prefetch advance notice display mode. In addition, in this example of production, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged in the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and "Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis" is displayed as an explanation display. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 129(b1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the treasure box image TR is displayed below the display screen, and an effect display in which the notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR may be displayed. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

In addition, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb are arranged. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 129(b2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the lid of the treasure chest image TR is opened, and a state in which the bomb icon I61 jumps upward is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129(b3), the bomb icon I6 jumping out from the treasure box image TR is changed to the enlarged swordsman's notice icon I62, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129(b4). Is erased. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "PAKINE" for notifying that, and notifies that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked. The timing of voice output from the speaker 120 may be the same as the timing of changing from the bomb icon I6 to the swordsman's notice icon I62, or more than the timing of changing from the bomb icon I6 to the swordsman's notice icon I62. It may be the previous timing, the timing later than the timing of changing from the bomb icon I6 to the swordsman's notice icon I62, or the timing before the treasure chest image TR is erased. The timing may be the same as the timing at which the treasure chest image TR is erased, or may be the timing after the treasure chest image TR is erased.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129(b5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides leftward along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the lower end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps with the UI portion on the front surface side of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed in the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, as shown in FIG. 129(b5), the portion overlapping the UI unit displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed, and the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed. Therefore, the tutorial display section TT1 displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208L is overlapped by the third decorative pattern display device 208N, so that at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display part TT1 is difficult to see. May be

After that, as shown in FIG. 129(b6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N heads toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, a mode in which the swordsman's notice icon I62 is not moving at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L). The swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N in a manner (as if going forward). At the timing shown in FIG. 129(b6), the state in which the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. After that, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide rightward toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 129(b7). When the third decorative symbol display device 208N returns to the initial position, the overlap by the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 108L is eliminated, and the player is The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be easily visible.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129(b8), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed in a reduced size and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a sound of "Paquine" to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked. In this way, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to see.

In this example of performance, as shown in FIG. 129(b5′), for example, as shown in FIG. 129(b5′), the heights of the lower edges of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are at least the first decorative symbol display device. If the tutorial display section TT1 displayed on 208L is higher than the displayed position, even if the third decorative pattern display device 208N slides and overlaps with the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed. On the other hand, since it is possible to create a state in which they do not overlap, for example, the third decorative symbol display device 208N displaying the notice icon is in the vicinity of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Since the slide movement is performed by, the effect by the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be viewed while visually recognizing the display state of the tutorial display section TT1.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 129, when the notice icon is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1, after the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid, the notice icon is displayed as the third decorative symbol display device 208N. May be overlapped with each other, and the effect display may be performed such that the notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and carried. As a result, when the notice icon is carried by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the overlapping state of the notice icon on the tutorial display section TT1 may be eliminated, and the explanation display may be easily visible.

FIG. 130 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon increasing effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 130, the tutorial display unit TT1 is normally framed out, and when the explanation display is performed, it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed in from below.

As shown in FIG. 130(a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. In this mode, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 130(a1), since three variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the read-ahead notice display mode. There is. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 130(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of the lord's character on the stage is shown. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb described above. Are arranged. At the timing shown in FIG. 130(a1), the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed on any of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. ..

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 130(a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in of the tutorial display unit TT1 is started from below the right frame of the display screen, and then shown in FIG. 130(a3). The tutorial display section TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position at a timing, and “Tama is the Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 at a timing shown in FIG. 130(a4).

After that, when the display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the tutorial display unit TT1 moves downward as shown in FIGS. 130(a5) to (a6), and the first decorative pattern. Frame out from the display device 208L. The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be erased before the frame-out animation starts, may be erased at the timing when the frame-out animation starts, or frame-out. It may be deleted at a timing after the animation starts, or may be displayed until the frame out of the tutorial display section TT1 is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 130(a7), for example, after the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. As shown, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character ends.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 130(a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in by the tutorial display unit TT1 is restarted from below the right frame of the display screen, and then in FIG. 130(a10). At the timing shown, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position. At this time, the tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the back side of the stocked swordsman's notice icon I62, and as a result, overlaps with the swordsman's notice icon I62.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 130(a11), the tutorial display section TT1 displays an explanation display "Due to the notice icon being exhausted..." Therefore, at least a part of the explanation display is hidden, which makes it difficult to visually recognize.

After that, when the display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time, an animation in which the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. The overlap condition with TT1 is eliminated. When the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is maintained until the tutorial display section TT1 is framed out, the explanation display may be easily visible by eliminating the overlap state. Then, as shown in FIG. 130(a13), when the tutorial display unit TT1 completely frames out from the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-out animation ends.

Also, in this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 130(b1) to 130(b2), even if the notice icon is consumed and rises during the period in which the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed, the notice icon is used. The overlapped state on the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated. 130(b1) to FIG. 130(b2) are as described above with reference to FIG. 125(p) to FIG. 125(q), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 131 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect example of the notice icon increasing effect which is applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 131, in addition to the tutorial display on the tutorial display unit TT1, the tutorial display is also shown in the conversation effect of the character.

As shown in FIG. 131(a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and in this UI section, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 131(a1), since three variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the read-ahead notice display mode. There is. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 131(a1) displays "Tonosama is Yatsushiro Shogun". In this production example, the tutorial display section TT1 may be referred to as a first tutorial display section. Further, in this example of production, a balloon part TT2 as a second tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed along with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The princess Chibi character CH1 and the balloon portion TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanation display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 131(a1), an explanation display that "gold is hotter than red" is displayed in the blowing portion TT2, and an explanation is given regarding the advance notice to be made in the pachinko machine 100. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The blowing portion TT2 may overlap the first decorative pattern in some cases, but may be arranged at a position where they do not overlap. Further, the hold icon is not displayed in the balloon section TT2 or the balloon section TT3 described later. Further, the same display as that displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed on the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 may have a larger display area or a smaller display area than the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. In the tutorial display section TT1, the font of characters may be larger or smaller than that of the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. The fonts may be the same or different between the tutorial display section TT1 and the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. Although the balloons TT2 and TT3 may overlap with the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern is configured not to overlap in the display area for performing other description display, but may overlap. In the tutorial display section TT1, the frequency of explanation display may be lower or higher than that in the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. Further, both the tutorial display section TT1 and the balloon sections TT2 and TT3 may be display areas partitioned by lines, or one or both of them may be display areas not partitioned by lines.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 131(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of the lord's character on the stage is shown. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb described above. Are arranged.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 131(a2), the balloon portion TT2 is erased together with the character CH of Princess Chibi. Also, the decorative pattern is still in variable display. Thus, unlike the tutorial display section TT1, the balloon section TT2 is configured not to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays. The balloon section TT2 may also be configured to be able to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 131(a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the first decorative symbol as a stop in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1", and the display result is out of alignment. Is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1". The tutorial display section TT1 still displays "Tonosama is the Yatsushiro Shogun".

Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 131(a4), the hold icons h11, h12, h13 are respectively moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the first hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. , The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and moves to the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131(a4), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the text "Tonosama is Yatsushiro Shogun" is still displayed. In this way, the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variable displays.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131(a5), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character is started, and the state that the lord's character tries to throw the bomb icon I61 is shown. Has been done. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Chibihime character CH1 is displayed again together with the balloon portion TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and the conversation effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 131(a5), an explanation display “Swordsman reach is hot” is displayed in the balloon portion TT2, and an explanation regarding a specific super reach is given. The timing at which the balloon portion TT2 is displayed may be the timing before the throwing animation is started, the timing at which the throwing animation is started, or the timing after the throwing animation is started. It may be.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 131(a6), it is shown that the lord's character has thrown the bomb icon I61. Further, as shown in FIG. 131(a6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the balloon GOT1 and the balloon portion TT3 as the third tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) are displayed on the right side of the display screen. ing. The grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (description display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 131(a6), the explanation display "When the panda intrudes" is displayed in the balloon unit TT3, and the notice effect is explained. Here, the blowing portion TT3 overlaps on the front surface side of the first decorative pattern, but may be arranged at a position that does not overlap. The timing at which the balloon portion TT3 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the lord's character throws the bomb icon I61, or the timing before the timing at which the lord's character throws the bomb icon I61. Alternatively, the timing may be later than the timing at which the lord's character throws the bomb icon I61. Further, the conversation effect by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the grandfather character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 131(a7), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "The Lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" is changed to "Due to the notice icon being exhausted...". Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 131(a7), the bomb icon I61 is located at a position overlapping the front surface side of the balloon TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed in the balloon TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to draw attention to the display of the balloon TT3 and the bomb icon I61. The timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon TT3, or the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon TT3. The timing may be earlier than the timing or may be later than the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon TT3.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131(a8), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character bursts. At this time, the effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded may be located at a position overlapping the front side of the balloon TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed in the balloon TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 131(a9), the exploded bomb icon I61 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62. At this time, the swordsman's notice icon I62 may be located at a position overlapping the front side of the balloon TT3, and at least part of the characters displayed in the balloon TT3 may be difficult to see. Further, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “Don” to inform that effect. As described above, in this example of effect, only one of the two displayed conversation effects (the balloon TT2 and the balloon TT3) may be overlapped by another image. It is configured.

Then, as shown in FIG. 131(a10), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed in a reduced size and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a voice of "Paquine" to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked. At this time, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. As described above, the swordsman's notice icon I62 may overlap the plurality of display units (the tutorial display unit TT1 and the balloon unit TT3) on which the explanation is displayed.

131(a1) to FIG. 131(a10), an explanation display (tutorial display) for explaining the effect is displayed in the balloon (the balloon section TT2 and the balloon section TT3) displayed together with the character. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 131(b), the display mode of the balloon TT2 is changed (for example, the background color of the balloon TT2 is changed to red), and the word "intense heat" is displayed. In some cases, such as displaying, the notice display or the prefetch notice display in the symbol variation display may be performed.

131(c1) to 131(c3) show another example of the contents displayed in the tutorial display section TT1.

As shown in FIG. 131(c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. It is shown that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has started rocking. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the explanation display "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 131(c2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swinging swordsman's notice icon I62 is moved upward and is being digested. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 131(c3), the display of the tutorial display section TT1 has been changed from "Panda is Master of the Lord" to "Development into Swordsman Reach", and an explanation display of the events that will occur (live commentary) Is displayed). With this configuration, the player may be able to easily understand what happens when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is digested. Note that at the timing of FIG. 131(c3), the speaker 120 outputs the sound of “paquine” to notify that the notice icon has been consumed.

In addition, in the above-described production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 has been described as having a function of performing an explanation display of the production. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 131(d), the tutorial display unit TT1 has a display mode. While changing (for example, making the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 red) and displaying the character "intense heat", a notice display or a look-ahead notice display in the symbol variation display may be performed. Good.

FIG. 132 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect example of the notice icon increasing effect which is applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 132, the UI part is displayed in the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in which the variable icon display area, the hold icon display area, the tutorial display part TT4, and the stage name display part ST2 are integrally displayed. Has been done. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, it is shown that the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 is erased. Even in this example of performance, when the super reach is reached, the UI portion is framed out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed without being framed out even when the super reach is reached. You can leave it alone.

As shown in FIG. 132(a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI portion surrounded by a rectangular frame is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI section shown in FIG. 132(a1) has a hold icon display area formed in the center thereof. The hold icon display area is divided into four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. Further, a variable icon display area is formed in the upper center of the UI section, and the variable icon is displayed in such a manner that it is placed on a frame formed by the UI section. At the timing shown in FIG. 132(a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 both have default display modes. A tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display section TT1 and the stage name display section ST1 described above, description thereof will be omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132(a1), "Due to the notice icon being exhausted..." is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, "Castle town stage" is displayed. It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

In addition, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yashiro actor 224Fa and the general officer substance. 224Fb is arranged.

Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 132(a2), when the game ball is won in the first special figure starting port 230, the third hold icon (third hold icon h13) of the third special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed to notify that the number of holdings has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold of the variable display of symbols that is the target of prefetching. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in the display mode of the prefetching notice (for example, the display mode with a blue circle).

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 132(a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation Is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is not deleted, but it may be deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1".

Thereafter, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 132(a4), the throwing animation is performed in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This throwing animation is the same as the throwing animation described above with reference to FIGS. 125(e) to 125(k).

In FIG. 132(a5), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character ruptures, the blasted bomb icon I61 changes to a princess's notice icon I64, and is moved to the stage name display portion ST2 while being reduced and displayed. 132(a5), although it overlaps with the stage name display portion ST2 at the timing shown in FIG. 132(a5), it does not reach the predetermined display position (stock position). .. In this case, since the princess notice icon I64 is not yet displayed on the stage name display portion ST2, the explanation display of "Castle Town Stage" is displayed, and at least a part of the princess notice icon I64 is displayed. It is difficult to see. Note that the explanation display may be erased before the notice icon overlaps the stage name display portion ST2. Further, in the case of the notice icon related to the notice icon pattern CS (see FIG. 127), the explanation display is erased based on the opportunity of acquisition of the notice icon, such as the explanation display being erased before overlapping the stage name display portion ST2. May be configured so that the timing of erasing is different. The throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be an animation in which the bomb icon moves to the stage name display unit. Further, a pattern (so-called gasse) in which the notice icon is not acquired may be provided after the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61. For example, the bomb icon I61 may not pass through the stage name display portion ST2 and the notice icon may not be acquired. In this case, even if the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the stage name display portion ST2, the explanation display may not be erased (that is, in the case of a gasse pattern, the explanation display is not erased. In a true pattern in which the notice icon is obtained, for example, the explanation display may be erased when the bomb icon I61 is in a state of being overlapped with the stage name display portion ST2. In the case where the UI part is hidden during the darkening effect, at least part of the process from the start of the bomb icon throwing animation to the acquisition of the notice icon and the gaze are executed when the darkening effect is being executed. Specifically, when the darkening effect starts after the bomb icon I61 throwing animation is started and the darkening effect ends and the UI unit is re-displayed, a notice is given. The icon may be acquired (a state in which the explanation display is disappeared from a state in which the explanation display is displayed), in which case at least one of sound and lamp effect is performed. It may be in the state of being performed, or in the state of not performing both.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132(a6), when the princess notice icon I64 is displayed at a predetermined display position on the stage name display portion ST2, the “castle town” that has been displayed until now on the stage name display portion ST2. The explanation display of "Stage" is deleted, and it functions as an area for displaying the notice icon. Therefore, the characters "STOCK" are displayed above the stage name display portion ST2. That is, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is stocked in the stage name display portion ST2, the stage name is not displayed. Note that the scene in which the notice icon is consumed and the execution of the above-described darkening effect may be configured to overlap. In addition, when the notice icon is acquired, the movable means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N) performs an effect of moving, so that the movable means acquires the notice icon. Or configured to overlap with at least a part of the already-obtained notice icons (at least one notice icon among the plurality of notice icons, or a part of one notice icon, etc.) You may. In addition, the movable means is moved in at least a part of the period from the start to the end of the bomb icon I61 throwing animation, and at least part of the explanation display is overlapped by the movable means. Good. That is, the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the movable means before the notice icon is displayed, and the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the notice icon after the notice icon is displayed.

After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 132(a7), in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the first decorative pattern is the decorative pattern of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the disagreement is confirmed. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2".

Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 132(a8), the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by a moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position becomes the change icon h0 in the change icon display area, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132(a8), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 132(a8), the stage is changed with the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the background display is changed from the castle town to the coast. That is, in this effect example, the stage can be changed even when the stage name display portion ST2 is in the non-display state, and when the stage name display portion ST2 is in the non-display state, the stage name after the change is displayed. No display is made. When the stage is changed, the changed stage name may be displayed for a predetermined time on the stage name display portion ST2, and then the stage name may be erased and a notice icon may be displayed.

FIG. 132(a9) shows that five notice icons are stocked. That is, up to three notice icons can be displayed on the stage name display portion ST2, but when the fourth notice icon is stocked, it is also displayed on the tutorial display portion TT4. In this case, the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 is erased, and it functions as an area for displaying the notice icon exclusively. That is, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display section TT4, the tutorial display (explanation display) is not performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132(a9), first, the stage name display portion ST2 is stocked with the princess notice icon I64 and the two pseudo-repeated notice icons I65, and then the tutorial display portion. In TT4, a swordsman notice icon I62 and a chance up notice icon I63 are stocked.

In addition, in the example of the effect, for example, when the notice icons are consumed from the left side, an animation for changing the display position of the notice icons other than the consumed notice icons may be performed. Specifically, for example, in the case shown in FIG. 132(a9), when the princess notice icon I64 is exhausted, the two pseudo-repeated notice icons I65 move to the left one by one, and the tutorial display The swordsman notice icon I62 displayed on the left side of the section TT4 moves to the rightmost side of the stage name display section ST2, and the chance up notice icon I63 displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 moves to the left side. To do. When the notice icon displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 moves to the stage name display section ST2, it may be moved momentarily so as not to affect the visibility of other displays.

Then, when all the notice icons displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 have been exhausted, the explanation display is resumed on the tutorial display section TT4 and all the notice icons displayed on the stage name display section ST2 have been consumed. In this case, the display of the stage name is restarted on the stage name display portion ST2. The explanation display and the display of the stage name may not be restarted. The restart of the explanation display may be restarted within the same variable display as the symbol variable display in which the notice icon has been exhausted (for example, restarting after the super reach). Further, when the explanation display is restarted, the exact same display may be restarted, or the display may be restarted from a different portion of the telop type (scroll type) display.

Further, the type of the notice icon displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 and the type of the notice icon displayed on the stage name display section ST2 may be predetermined. In this case, when the notice icon is consumed, the other notice icons may not be moved.

The execution time of the animation for changing the display position of the notice icon may be the same as the execution time of the moving animation of the hold icon, may be shorter than the execution time of the moving animation of the hold icon, or may be It may be longer than the execution time of the moving animation of the icon.

Also, in this example of performance, when the notice icon is stocked, it is first stocked in the stage name display section ST2, and when the number of stocks is three, the notice icon to be stocked afterwards is displayed in the tutorial display section. Although it is configured that up to 3 more can be stocked in TT4, if the stocked number is first in the tutorial display section TT4 and the number of stocked is 3, the notice icon to be stocked thereafter is further 3 in the stage name display section ST2. It may be configured such that up to three can be stocked.

In addition, in this production example, before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display portion ST2 or the tutorial display portion TT4 (a part of the notice icon is displayed in a part of the stage name display portion ST2 or the tutorial display portion TT4. In (state), the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Immediately after the notice icon is completely set in the stage name display portion ST2 or the tutorial display portion TT4, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Immediately after starting to move upward when the notice icon is consumed, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Further, the explanation display is displayed before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display portion ST2 or the tutorial display portion TT4, and immediately after the notice icon starts moving upward when the notice icon is consumed, the explanation display is displayed. You may not be allowed to.

Further, in this example of production, the above-mentioned thing shown in FIG. 125 is referred to as an example of the throwing animation, but it goes without saying that it is also possible to combine the modes shown in other figures.

Further, in the embodiments described above and the embodiments described below, for example, there may be a display area dedicated to the notice icon to be consumed, such as a variable icon display area.

Further, the notice icons do not have to be displayed in the order in which they are digested. For example, a plurality of notice icons are digested in a toothless manner, and other notice icons may be moved so as to fill the empty space. You don't have to move.

In addition, a so-called MAX8 machine (8 which can be assigned to the first special prize winning opening and the second special prize winning opening per starting opening, and which can hold eight symbol variation displays in a normal gaming state (8 (Although it may be called a maintenance order machine), the hold icon display area has a display area for four reservations in advance, and when the number of reservations reaches four, the display area expands to five. It may be enlarged or expanded to eight. At this time, for example, the enlarged hold icon display area may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT4 or the stage name display portion ST2, and the explanation display may be hidden.

FIG. 132(b1) to FIG. 132(b2) show the situation where the stocked notice icon is consumed.

As shown in FIG. 132(b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the chance-up notice icon I63 is displayed in the stage name display portion ST2. Both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are being variably displayed.

Then, after that, at a timing when the chance-up notice icon I63 is consumed, as shown in FIG. 131(b2), the chance-up notice icon I63 moves upward. In this example of performance, even if the advance notice icon I63 for increasing the chance is moved from the display position in the stage name display portion ST2, at least a part of the advance notice icon overlaps the stage name display portion ST2, an explanation is displayed. The display of stage names has not been resumed. This also applies to the tutorial display section TT4. The display of the stage name may be restarted immediately after the advance notice icon moves from the display position on the stage name display portion ST2.
FIG. 133 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect example according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 133(a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. In this case, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 133(a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the read-ahead notice display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 133(a1) displays “Due to the notice icon being exhausted... ”. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 133(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of the lord's character on the stage is shown. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb described above. Are arranged.

FIG. 133(a1) to FIG. 133(a3) show how the display mode of the UI unit changes depending on the stage.

FIG. 133(a1) shows a state of the castle town stage. Note that the display mode of this castle town stage is the same as the mode shown in FIG.

FIG. 133(a2) shows a state of the space stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L on the space stage is different from the castle town stage described above in that the UI portion is formed on the lower left side of the display screen. That is, in the UI section on the space stage, the variation icon display area is arranged in the lower center of the display screen, and the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal, and the hold icon is displayed on the left side of the variation icon display area. The area and the tutorial display area TT1 are arranged side by side vertically. The display position of the stocked notice icon is the same as the display position of the notice icon on the castle town stage shown in FIG. 125 and described above. The hold icon display area has a display mode in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 133(a2), since three variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 on the space stage is a pentagon, unlike the display modes of the change icon and the hold icon on the castle town stage, and in the default display mode, for example, The white pentagonal display mode, and the look-ahead notice display mode is, for example, a blue pentagonal display mode. At the timing shown in FIG. 133(a2), the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are in the default display mode, and the third hold icon h13 is in the prefetch advance notice display mode. Has become. In the tutorial display area TT1 arranged below the hold icon display area, "Panda is master of lord" is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. As described above, since the display position of the notice icon and the display position of the tutorial display area TT1 are different on the space stage, the notice display icon does not overlap the tutorial display area TT1.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

FIG. 133(a3) shows a state immediately after shifting from another stage to the castle town stage. As shown in FIG. 133(a3), in the tutorial display area TT1, the explanation display is hidden immediately after shifting to the castle town stage, and remains hidden until a new explanation display is performed. To be done. As shown in FIG. 133(a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the tutorial display area TT1 in the non-display state. The explanation display may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 immediately after the stage transition. Further, when the tutorial display area TT1 is hidden in a certain stage (for example, a castle town stage), if the stage is moved to another stage (for example, a space stage), an explanation display is provided in the tutorial display area TT1 in the stage after the transition. May be displayed.

FIG. 133(b1) to FIG. 133(b2) show that the tutorial display area TT1 is arranged in the third decorative pattern display device 208N and the tutorial display area TT1 is deleted when the notice icon is stocked. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 133(b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI section, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 133(b1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the prefetch advance notice display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 133(b1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged below the display screen, and is displayed as "Due to the announcement of the notice icon...". In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

In such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 133(b2), when the button icon IBT is stocked, it is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but in this case, the third The tutorial display section TT1 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208N is deleted. Here, a plurality of button icons IBT can be stocked, and, for example, are icons that preliminarily notify the number of times the effect of operating a button during a specific effect is generated, and for example, the number of times the button operation effect is generated is large. It can be said that the higher the reliability of the big hit is, that is, the larger the stock number of the button icon IBT is, the easier it is to win the big hit.

As described above, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed, it can be said that another display is sacrificed.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect example of the notice icon increasing effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 134, another example of the effect using the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord is shown. FIG. 134(a1) to FIG. 134(a6) show that the notice icon already stocked changes due to the throwing animation.

As shown in FIG. 134(a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 134(a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the prefetch advance display mode. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 134(a1) displays "Tonosama is Yatsushiro Shogun". Further, as shown in FIG. 134(a1), Hatena's notice icon I66 is displayed (stock) so as to overlap the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. Hatena's notice icon I66 is an icon that may change to another notice icon before the timing to be digested, but it does not change to another notice icon and nothing happens even if it is digested, so-called gasse. May also function as a notice icon. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 134(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of the lord's character on the stage is shown. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb described above. Are arranged.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134(a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character is started, and the state that the lord's character tries to throw the bomb icon I61 is shown. Has been done.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 134(a3), the appearance of the lord's character throwing the bomb icon I61 is shown.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 134(a4), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "The Lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" is changed to "Due to the notice icon being exhausted...".

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134(a5), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character reaches the notice icon I66 of Hatena and explodes. At this time, the effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded overlaps the front side of the Hatena's notice icon I66, and at least a part of the Hatena's notice icon I66 is difficult to see. The size of the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is such that it at least covers the notice icon I66 of Hatena. That is, the effect image is applied only to the notice icon that is the change target.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 134(a6), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is erased, and Hatena's notice icon I66 is changed to Swordsman's notice icon I62. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "Paquine" to notify that the Hatena's notice icon I66 has been changed to the Swordsman's notice icon I62. At this time, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, at least a part of the explanation display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. Further, in the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 134(a6), what was displayed as "Due to the notice icon being exhausted..." is changed to "Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis." The timing of changing the explanation display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is started, or may be changed from the timing at which the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is started. May be before the timing, or may be after the timing at which the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is started. In this way, it can be said that part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least part of the change effect of the stocked notice icon.

FIG. 134(b1) to FIG. 134(b3) show that the notice icon already stocked changes due to the throwing animation. Note that FIG. 134(b1) is the same as FIG. 134(a4) and FIG. 134(b3) is the same as FIG. 134(a6), so description of these drawings will be omitted. In the tutorial display portion TT1 in FIG. 134(b3), "Due to the notice icon being exhausted..." is displayed.

After the effect shown in FIG. 134(b1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 134(b2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character reaches the notice icon I66 of Hatena and bursts. At this time, an effect image showing that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is displayed overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1 so as to cover substantially the entire tutorial display section TT1. As a result, at least a part of Hatena's notice icon I66 and the tutorial display portion TT1 are difficult to see, and the overlapping range is larger than the effect image shown in FIG. 134(a5). When a plurality of notice icons are stocked, all the notice icons may be overlapped. In this way, it can be said that part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least part of the change effect of the stocked notice icon.

FIG. 134(c1) to FIG. 134(c3) show that the notice icon already stocked changes due to the throwing animation. Note that FIG. 134(c1) is the same as FIG. 134(b1) and FIG. 134(c2) is the same as FIG. 134(b2), so description of these drawings will be omitted.

After the bomb icon I61 bursts at the timing shown in FIG. 134(c2), as shown in FIG. 134(c3), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is erased, and Hatena's notice icon I66 informs the swordsman. The icon I62 and the chance up notice icon I63 have changed. That is, one notice icon is changed to two notice icons. In other words, it can be said that the change of the notice icon and the stock of the new notice icon are simultaneously performed by one throwing animation. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock production of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the production of changing the stocked notice icon and stocking a new notice icon.

FIG. 134(d1) to FIG. 134(d3) show how the display mode of the hold icon changes due to the throwing animation. Note that FIG. 134(d1) is the same as FIG. 134(a4), and therefore a description of this drawing is omitted.

After the effect shown in FIG. 134(d1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 134(d2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character becomes the second hold icon h12 which is the display mode of the prefetch notice. Reach and burst. At this time, the effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded overlaps the front side of the second holding icon h12, and at least a part of the second holding icon h12 is difficult to visually recognize. The size of the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is large enough to cover at least the second hold icon h12. That is, the effect image is applied only to the hold icon that is the change target.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 134(d3), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is erased, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes (for example, from the blue display mode to the red display mode). )doing. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a sound "Pong" to notify that the display mode of the hold icon h12 has changed. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 134, at least a part of the animation when the notice icon is acquired is the same as a part of the other animation. For example, when the display is performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N), a certain decorative symbol display device (for example, the third decorative symbol) The same applies to the animation performed on the display device 208N).

FIG. 135 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment.

FIG. 135(a1) to FIG. 135(a7) show that a specific notice icon has been stocked, and the fact that the mission has been achieved is notified by displaying that fact. Note that FIG. 135(a1) to FIG. 135(a3) are the same as FIG. 125(h) to FIG. 125(j), and therefore description of these drawings will be omitted.

After the effect shown in FIG. 135(a3) is performed, as shown in FIG. 135(a4), the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character ends. Further, as shown in FIG. 135(a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, above the tutorial display section TT1, there is an achievement display section KM1 as an explanation display section for notifying that a specific effect has been performed. It is displayed. The achievement display section KM1 displays "Swordsman Stock", which indicates that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. That is, when a mission to obtain the swordsman's notice icon I62 is imposed, if the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked, the fact is displayed in the achievement display section KM1 to notify the achievement of the mission. be able to. Alternatively, for example, the achievement display section KM1 is displayed in order to explicitly notify that the swordsman's notification icon I62 for predicting that a performance with a high expectation for a big hit will be performed. Good. The timing at which the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed may be the same as the end of the throwing animation, the timing before the end of the throwing animation, or the end of the throwing animation. It may be timing. Since the achievement display section KM1 is displayed in the vicinity of the stocked swordsman's notice icon I62, the achievement display section KM1 may be noticeable in some cases. The notice icon to be stocked may be displayed so as to overlap the achievement display section KM1.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 135(a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration C" as the notice icon symbol CS is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration" The temporary stop display is made by the combination of the decorative patterns of "6". The variable icon h0 is erased here, but may be displayed.

As described above, when the notice icon design CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIGS. 135(a6) to (a7), the notice icon I63 indicating a chance up from the notice icon design CS is displayed. It jumps out toward the display position on the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 135(a6), the chance-up notice icon I63 overlaps the front side of the achievement display section KM1, making at least part of the explanation display on the achievement display section KM1 difficult to see.

In this example of performance, when the display position of the notice icon is preset according to the type of the notice icon when the notice icon is stocked, for example, the achievement display section KM1 May be eliminated. Further, for example, when a plurality of notice icons are stocked and the notice icons are exhausted to move the remaining notice icons so as to be arranged at predetermined intervals, among the notice icons, When the predetermined number of notice icons have been consumed, the overlap of the notice icons with the achievement display section KM1 may be eliminated.

In FIG. 135(b1) to FIG. 135(b3), for example, an example of an operation mode of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N that operates when developing into a super reach or when a big hit occurs It is shown.

FIG. 135(b1) shows a state in which super reach is being performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135(b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the background screen of super reach is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is displayed in the lower center of the display screen. .. As described above, the UI unit is framed out downward during super reach. Therefore, the display position of the variation icon h0 is lower than that when the UI unit is displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, while the variable display of the first decorative symbol is being performed above the display screen, the second reserved number display of special diagrams 1 and 2 and the special symbols 1 and 2 of FIG. The fourth symbol is also displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 135(b2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in a direction in which they approach each other. Moving. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N is overlapped. There are cases. According to this, due to the phenomenon in which the decorative pattern display device hides the movable operation and the explanation display, it may be possible to draw attention to the explanation display while giving an expectation for the big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 135(b3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N which are close to each other are integrally formed along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It rotates 90 degrees clockwise. Also, the variable icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the left end portion of the display screen across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and has a rectangular shape. The image in which the character "Holiday" is given in the frame is also displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in the third decorative symbol display portion 208N, in the lower right corner of the display screen, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 135(b3), the family crest accessory 224E disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves upward and overlies the lower center of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The 8th character part 224Fa and the general character part 224Fb, which are arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, are moved downward and overlap the upper end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N is overlapped. There are cases. In addition, when the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, it may be overlapped with the Yatsushiro character 224Fa or the general character 224Fb. In addition, when the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be overlapped with the family crest monument 224E. According to this, due to the phenomenon that the decorative pattern display device and the movable operation by the effect movable body and the explanation display are hidden, it may be possible to focus on the explanation display while giving an expectation for the big hit.

In FIG. 135(c1) to FIG. 135(c4), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is constantly or at least displayed for a certain period of time, and the display state of the button image 136a is changed, whereby the effect button 136 is displayed. It is shown that the state is notified.

FIG. 135(c1) shows the animation of the duel scene in Swordsman Reach. Although FIG. 135(c1) corresponds to FIG. 126(d), the stage name display portion ST1 is displayed in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L instead of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, The difference is that the button image 136a is constantly or at least displayed for a certain period below the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The button image 136a displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed in the normal state (default display state).

In FIG. 135(c2), the animation of the duel scene continues, and when the timing shown in FIG. 135(c2) is reached, the second decorative symbol display device 208L displays a button reception time meter and a button image. The display mode of 136a is displayed in a display mode that prompts the player to press the effect button 136. This display notifies that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 has been started, and prompts the player to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, light emission in red) indicating that it is in the operation accepting state.

Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 135(c3), as shown in FIG. 135(c4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the player goes up with The cut-in image to which the character display "" is added is displayed overlaid on the animation display of the duel scene. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is changed to the default display mode, assuming that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has ended. In this effect example, with the above-described configuration, for example, when the operation of the above-described button notice icon (first button notice icon I4 or second button notice icon I11) is enabled, as described above. In some cases, the player can be prompted to operate the effect button 136.

FIG. 135(d) shows an example of the notice icon applicable in this embodiment. For example, in addition to Hatena's notice icon I66, pseudo-repeated notice icon I65, chance up notice icon I63, princess notice icon I64, swordsman notice icon I62, pending promotion notice icon I67, chance chance notice icon I68. , Panda notice icon I69 is prepared. Here, the hold promotion notice icon I67 is an icon for giving a notice that the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon will be changed to a display mode with higher reliability for the big hit when it is consumed. Further, the pseudo-reminder icon is an icon for notifying that the pseudo-representation will be performed when it is consumed. In addition, the notice icon I68 of the chance eye is an icon that gives a notice that the chance eye will be derived as a display result of the decorative pattern when it is consumed. Further, the princess's notice icon is an icon for notifying that the player will move to the look-ahead zone when digested. Further, the panda notice icon I69 is an icon for giving notice that, when digested, an effect that pandas intrude is performed, and that a big hit (success) is guaranteed.

FIG. 136 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the notice icon and the tutorial display.

FIGS. 136(a1) to 136(a7) show that the explanation display (for example, “Swordsman is Lord's nemesis”) scroll-displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. The left side of the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 136 is overlapped with the swordsman notice icon I62.

FIG. 136(a1) shows a state before the start of the scroll display of the explanation display.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 136(a2), when the scrolling of the explanation display is started, the display “Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis” scrolls in sequentially from the right side of the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 136(a2), only the "Swordsman is" portion is scrolled in, and at the timing shown in FIG. 136(a3), only the "Swordsman is your lord" portion is scrolled in. There is. In these cases, since neither of the characters overlaps the swordsman's notice icon I62, the explanation display may be clearly recognizable in some cases.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 136(a4), the entire text "Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis" is displayed. In this case, at least the character part of "Swordsman" is overlapped with the notification icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a visually difficult state.

At the timing shown in Fig. 136 (a5), the "Swordsman" part scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display part TT1, and the "I'm Lord's nemesis" part is displayed in the tutorial display part TT1. .. In this case, at least the character part of "Denso-no-sama" is overlapped with the swordsman's notice icon I62, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a visually difficult state.

At the timing shown in FIG. 136(a6), the "Swordsman is the Lord" scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display section TT1, and the "Nemesis" section is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. .. In this case, at least a part of the characters “In the enemy” is overlapped with the swordsman's notice icon I62, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a visually difficult state.

At the subsequent timing shown in FIG. 136(a7), the scroll of the explanation display ends. As described above, in this example of performance, the characters overlapped by the notice icon are continuously changed by scrolling the explanation display. Further, scrolling of the explanation display causes a period in which the notice display overlaps with the notice icon and a period in which the explanation display does not overlap. Note that when the explanation display is scrolled repeatedly, these periods also occur repeatedly.

136(b1) to FIG. 136(b7), while the scrolling display of the explanation display (for example, the display of “Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis”) is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, another screen is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. A state in which a display (for example, a notice display of "intense heat") is performed is shown. 136(b1) to FIG. 136(b3) and FIG. 136(b6) to FIG. 136(b7) respectively show FIG. 136(a1) to FIG. 136(a3) and FIG. 136(a6) to FIG. 136(a6). Since it is the same as FIG. (a7), detailed description is omitted.

After the explanation display is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 136(b3), as shown in FIGS. 136(b4) to 136(b5), the preview display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. As for the notice display, the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 is set to red, and the character "intense heat" is displayed to perform the notice display or the prefetch notice display in the symbol variation display. During the notice display, the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted. For example, the above-mentioned notice display may be overlapped with the explanation display to make the explanation display difficult to view, or the scroll display of the explanation display may be switched to the notice display.

After that, when the notice display ends, the scroll display of the explanation display resumes, as shown in FIG. 136(b6). The scroll display of the explanation display is proceeding in the background even while the notice display is being performed, and the display mode of the explanation display when the explanation display is restarted is the display after proceeding in the background. It is a mode. The display mode of the explanation display at the time when the display of the explanation display is restarted may be the display mode at the time of interruption. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 136(b7), the scroll display of the explanation display ends. Although the notice display is described as an example in which the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted and displayed, the scroll display of the explanation display may be interrupted by a display other than the notice display.

FIGS. 136(c1) to 136(c5) are explanatory views (for example, “Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis” display) displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 when multiple notice icons are stocked. During the display, it is shown that, as part of the notice icon is exhausted, another notice icon moves.

In FIG. 136(c1), the chance-up notice icon I63, which is the notice icon to be first digested, and the swordsman notice icon I62, which is the notice icon to be secondly digested, are the chance-up notice icon I63. It is shown that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged side by side on the right side of, and overlaps on the left side of the tutorial display section TT1. Therefore, a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 136(c2), when the chance-up notice icon I63 is exhausted, as shown in FIGS. 136(c3) to (c5), the swordsman's notice icon I62 increases the chance. The notice icon moving animation of moving to the position where the notice icon I63 of was displayed. As a result, after the range of the overlap with the tutorial display section TT1 by the swordsman's notice icon I62 changes continuously, the overlap state is released, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is easy to see. May be. That is, in this effect example, the notice icon may or may not overlap the tutorial display portion TT1 depending on the number of the notice icons stocked. When the explanation display is scroll-displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, the movement display of the notice icon in the movement animation of the notice icon and the scroll display of the explanation display may overlap with each other.

FIG. 137 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 137, when the notice icon is stocked, the stocked notice icon is enlarged and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 137(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit UI1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In this UI unit UI1, a hold icon display area in which four hold icons can be displayed in a substantially rectangular display frame is formed on the left side, and four notice icons are displayed in a substantially square display frame on the upper right side. The notice icon display area that can be displayed in is displayed in the upper right, and the tutorial display area TT5 is formed below the notice icon display area. The variable icon display area is displayed above the UI unit UI1 and in a position close to the hold icon display area. More specifically, the variable icon display area is arranged above the display frame in which the first hold icon h11 is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 137(a), since three variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the read-ahead notice display mode. There is. Further, in the tutorial display section TT5 shown in FIG. 137(a), “Tonosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed. Further, in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 137(a), two pseudo-repeated notice icons I65 are stocked, and both of them are in the normal display mode (in this example of presentation, it is referred to as "first display mode"). In some cases.) is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Here, since the notice icon in the normal display mode displayed in the notice icon display area is located apart from the display area of the decorative design, it is not overlapped with the decorative design, and the decorative design is also included. Do not overlap. The notice icon in the normal display mode may overlap the decorative design, or the decorative design may overlap.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 137(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, a button image 136a is displayed above the stage name display portion ST1 in a default display mode, and the display mode is changed when the operation of the effect button 136 is instructed. The button image 136a may be displayed all the time or may be displayed for a period. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

In addition, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yashiro actor 224Fa and the general officer substance. 224Fb is arranged.

Then, as shown in FIG. 137(b), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character is started, and the state that the lord's character tries to throw the bomb icon I61 is shown. Has been done.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 137(c), it is shown that the lord's character has thrown the bomb icon I61.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 137(d), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The bomb icon I61 overlaps the decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner, but the bomb icon I61 may overlap the decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137(e), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character reaches the display frame where the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked and explodes. At this time, the effect image representing the explosion of the bomb icon I61 overlaps the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked, and the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked. At least a part of the displayed frame is difficult to see. The size of the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is such that it at least covers the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked. As a result, a notice is given that the third notice icon will be stocked. In the example shown in FIG. 137(e), the effect image of the bomb icon I61 is adjacent to a part of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT5 or the display frame of the reserved display area where the bomb icon I61 has exploded. When the display frame to be displayed and the notice icon are stocked in this display frame, they overlap the notice icon.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 137(f), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is enlarged, and the display mode changes to the flame effect EF1 that covers the entire UI unit UI1 with a flame. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the change icon h0, the hold icons h11, h12, h13, and the tutorial display unit TT5 together with the notice icon displayed on the UI unit UI1. At this time, the UI unit UI1 may be hidden or the UI unit UI1 may be displayed so that the entire UI unit UI1 is overlapped by the flame effect EF1. Further, the flame effect EF1 may cover only a part of the UI part UI1, and at least part of the change icon h0, the hold icons h11, h12, h13 and the tutorial display part TT5 may be visually recognized, or the notice icon display area. It may be difficult to see only.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137(g), the notice icon enlargement animation is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 137(g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF formed by extracting the notice icon display area formed in the UI portion UI1 is a flame effect. A state of appearing from inside EF1 is displayed. At this time, in the notice icon display frame YF, two pseudo notice icons I65 are displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked and the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked. A swordsman's notice icon I62 is newly displayed in the display frame in which the third notice icon is stocked to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked. At the timing shown in FIG. 137(g), the notice icon display frame YF is displayed larger than the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1, and the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is , Are enlarged and displayed with respect to the normal display mode in accordance with the size of the notice icon display frame YF. This may allow the player to easily recognize that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 137(h), the notice icon display frame YF moves toward the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and is further enlarged to be displayed. Part of the left side of the display frame in which the icons are stocked and part of the right side of the display frame in which the fourth notice icon is stocked are displayed outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It Further, the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also enlarged and displayed according to the size of the notice icon display frame YF. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the pseudo-announcement icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 137(h), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 overlap the front side of the left and right end portions of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize a part of the notice icon display frame YF displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it can be said that at least a part of the pseudo-repeating notice icon I65 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is difficult to be visually recognized. Further, since the notice icon display frame YF is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner, it may be easier to understand that the notice icon is stocked. In other words, it can be said that the enlarged and displayed notice icon may overlap the decorative pattern. Note that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Further, in this example of performance, when the effect of stocking the notice icon is performed, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame is displayed with priority over other displays (for example, notice display) (overlap). However, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame may be overlapped with another notice display.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 137(i), the notice icon display frame YF is enlarged to the maximum size, and the notice icon enlargement animation ends. A display frame in which a third notice icon in which the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed is stocked is displayed at approximately the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is also enlarged and displayed up to the maximum size. That is, the stocked swordsman's notice icon I62 and the already-stocked pseudo-repeated notice icon I65 are displayed in an enlarged display mode (in this rendering example, the “first Second display mode"). At this time, part of the display frame where the second notice icon adjacent to the display frame where the third notice icon is stocked and part of the display frame where the fourth notice icon is stocked are , Each of which is displayed outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. This makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the pseudo-announcement icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 137(i), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 overlap the front side of the left and right end portions of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize a part of the notice icon display frame YF displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, at least part of the pseudo-repeated notice icon I65 in the display frame in which the second notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stocked is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and is visually recognized. It can be said that it is difficult. Further, in other words, it can be said that a part of the already-stocked pseudo-repeated notice icon I65 can be visually recognized in a state where the third notice icon is in the enlarged display mode. Note that the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is entirely outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and thus is displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked. The pseudo-reminder icon I65 that is present is hidden.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137(j), the notice icon reduction animation is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 137(j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is reduced and the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is displayed. The display is moving toward you. The notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also reduced in size according to the size of the notice icon display frame YF. At this time, the entire display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is completely displayed within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the pseudo-repeated notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is completely displayed and is in a state where it is easy to view. Further, a part of the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the pseudo link is displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked. A part of the notice icon I65 is made visible. That is, in this example of presentation, the notice icon outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is gradually visible in the notice icon reduction animation. In other words, it can be said that the number of visible notice icons is increasing due to the notice icon reduction animation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137(k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduction animation of the notice icon display frame YF continues. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 137(k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is further reduced and at the position where the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is displayed. The display is moving toward you. The notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also reduced in size according to the size of the notice icon display frame YF. At this time, the notice icon display frame YF is entirely within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF (two pseudo consecutive notice icons I65 and The swordsman's notice icon I62) is all visible. That is, it can be said that the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are displayed in an enlarged manner with respect to the normal display mode, but all of them are visible.

After that, the notice icon reduction animation ends at the timing shown in FIG. 137(l). That is, as shown in FIG. 137(l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is deleted, and at the same time, the flame effect EF1 overlapping the notice icon display frame YF is also deleted. , The UI unit UI1 is displayed again. At this time, in the notice icon display area, in addition to the two pseudo-repeated notice icons I65, a state in which a swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked is shown. Also, in the tutorial display section TT5, what was displayed as "The Lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" has been changed to "Panda is the Master of the Lord". Here, the flame effect EF1 may be deleted after the notice icon display frame YF is deleted, or the notice icon display frame YF may be deleted after the flame effect EF1 is deleted. The icon display frame YF and the flame effect EF1 may be deleted at the same time. Further, the display change of the tutorial display section TT5 may be at a timing before the flame effect EF1 is erased or at a timing after the flame effect EF1 is erased. The display of the tutorial display section TT5 may not be changed. Further, the variable icon or the hold icon may be displayed at a timing between the timing shown in FIG. 137(k) and the timing shown in FIG. 137(l). In this case, it may be configured such that an increase in the number of holdings is reflected firmly.

In addition, in this example of performance, the case where the third notice icon is stocked has been described. However, for example, when the first notice icon is stocked, when the above-mentioned notice icon expansion animation is finished, Since the display frame in which the first notice icon in the notice icon display frame YF is stocked is in the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the left end portion of the notice icon display frame YF is visible, In the area on the left side of the left end of the notice icon display frame YF in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the background display appears. Further, in this case, since there is no notice icon outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon that is difficult to view is not generated.

Further, in this example of performance, when the notice icon is stocked, the notice icon expansion animation and the notice icon reduction animation are performed to produce the notice icon stock. For example, the flame effect EF1 is displayed. After that, the advance notice icon display frame YF may be displayed as shown in FIG. 137(i) without the advance notice icon enlargement animation. After the display as shown in i), the UI part UI1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 137(l) without passing through the notice icon reduction animation, and the notice icon stocked this time is added to the hold icon display area. You may make it display it.

Further, in this effect example, the stocked notice icon is displayed in a normal display mode by the reduction animation after being enlarged and displayed. However, for example, the notice icon is consumed in the enlarged display state. In some cases, the advance notice icon may be consumed without being displayed in the normal display mode.

Also, in this example of performance, when the notice icon is stocked, the notice icon expansion animation is performed to enlarge and display the notice icon. However, when the notice icon is consumed, the procedure described above is performed. The notice icon to be consumed may be enlarged (displayed in the second display mode) and then may be digested, or the notice icon may be enlarged (displayed in the second display mode) when consumed. You may do it.

Further, in this example of performance, a part of the notice icon enlarged animation performed when the notice icon is stocked may be canceled due to the stock trigger. For example, in the stock of the notice icon by the action of the character (for example, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character, etc.), if it is performed immediately before the stop display of the decorative pattern, a part is canceled (for example, the latter half part). May be canceled), or, for example, in the stock of the notice icon due to the stop of the special symbol such as the pseudo continuous symbol, it may not be canceled.

Also, the enlarged display mode may be different depending on the number of the notice icons already stocked or the number of the notice icons stocked. Also, the enlarged display mode may be the same regardless of the number of the notice icons.

In addition, when the hold is increased while the notice icon is enlarged, the effect image is displayed, the LED (for example, the LED provided at the starting port) is blinked, and the effect sound is output. And so on. This may be performed, for example, at the time of increasing the number of holdings to be prefetched at the time of starting winning. Further, even when the notice icon is enlarged and the number of holdings is increased, the effect image is displayed, the LED (for example, the LED provided at the starting port) is blinked, and the effect sound is output. It is possible that the display mode of the hold icon is changed after the enlarged display of the notice icon is finished without performing the above, and by doing so, the player becomes aware of the change of the display mode of the hold icon. Sometimes it can be easier.

Further, when the notice icon is enlarged, the variable icon and the hold icon may also be enlarged. In this case, the hold increase animation may not be performed when the hold increases during the enlarged display of the notice icon.

Further, in the above description, when the notice icon is composed of characters (for example, “chance”, “heat”, “SP”, “pseudo-ren”), it may be referred to as a notice text.

Next, an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 138. Here, FIG. 138 is a schematic explanatory diagram showing an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 138(a-1), in the game board 200 applicable to this embodiment, on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a plate shape extending substantially parallel to the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208. The transparent protective member CL is provided. The transparent protection member CL is, for example, formed so as to rise from the rear end of the stage 244, and has a rib RB formed at the upper end, and is provided so as to protrude forward substantially along the shape of the stage 244. The transparent protective member CL covers about 1/3 below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 through the transparent protective member CL. There is. By this rib RB, the game ball jumping into the stage 244 is prevented from jumping over the transparent protection member CL and deviating to the rear, and between the decorative symbol display device 208 and this decorative symbol display device 208 and the transparent protective member CL. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent a problem from being caused by a collision with the production movable body or the like arranged at.

FIG. 138(a-2) shows that the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 138(a-1) is applied and effect display is being performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 138, a family crest accessory 224E as one of the effect movable bodies is arranged below the decorative pattern display device 208, and is located between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the transparent protection member CL. It can be displaced by. As shown in FIG. 138(a-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a UI section is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI section, the variable icon h0 is displayed as a square-shaped suspended display in the center thereof. It is displayed in a state of being housed in the frame FL1, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 138(a-2), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is in the default display mode and is displayed in blinking. It is a display mode of a notice. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the display content is updated at an appropriate timing. The tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 138(a-2) is in a non-display state. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit is displayed with priority during the variable display of the first decorative pattern and is provided in a region that does not overlap with the display region of the first decorative pattern, but with the display region of the first decorative pattern. May overlap. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 138(a-2), the princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed with the speech balloon TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and the grandfather character GY1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The balloon section TT3 is displayed. The speech bubble "TT" is displayed in the speech bubble portion TT2, and the speech phrase "Here" is displayed in the speech bubble portion TT3. Note that the balloons TT2 and TT3 are overlapped with the decorative pattern that is being variably displayed, and are in a state that is difficult to visually recognize as compared with a state where the decorative pattern that is being variably displayed is not overlapped. In addition, a part of the UI unit (the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icons h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 displayed in the hold display frame FL1) and the Chibihime character CH1 overlap the transparent protection member CL and are transparent. The visibility may be reduced as compared with the case where the protection member CL does not overlap.

In FIG. 138(a-3), the state in which the family crest accessory 224E rises and overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. At this time, the pending display frame FL1 has its range enlarged so as to extend upward, and the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the enlarged portion. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 138(a-3), a part of the ninja character NJ1 is overlapped with the family crest monument 224E.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 138(a-4), the family crest monument 224E returns to the initial position below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the overlap state with the decorative symbol display device 208 is eliminated. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138(a-4), the variable icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are displayed side by side in the vertical direction in the extended display frame FL1 displayed in an expanded manner. Has been done. Note that the balloon portion TT2 overlaps with the expanded portion of the extended display frame FL1 that is displayed in an expanded manner, and is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where the balloon portion TT2 does not overlap the expanded portion of the extended display frame FL1 that is displayed in an expanded manner. The balloon section TT3 is displayed above the reserved display frame FL1 and therefore does not overlap. Further, the decorative pattern in the variable display is overlapped with the hold display frame FL1, and part of the decorative pattern is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where it is not overlapped with the hold display frame FL1. In addition, in this embodiment, since the pending display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed above, it is possible to display above the transparent protective member CL, and therefore the visibility of the pending display frame FL1 may be improved.

FIG. 138(b-1) shows the above-described state shown in FIG. 138(a-2), and FIG. 138(b-1a) shows the cross section AA of FIG. 138(b-1). The situation is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 138(b-1a), between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the transparent protective member CL, the size of the decorative pattern display device 208 is approximately the same as the size of the decorative pattern display device 208 in addition to the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E. A light guide plate IL is arranged. The light guide plate IL is arranged on the front surface side (that is, the player side) of the family crest monument 224E. In the state shown in FIG. 138(b-1), the family crest monument 224E is retracted below the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the player is configured in this way, a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visually recognized only through the light guide plate IL, and another part is seen through the transparent protection member CL and the light guide plate IL. Will be visually recognized. Since the configuration of the light guide plate IL is as shown in FIG. 114 and described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

FIG. 138(b-2) shows the above-described state shown in FIG. 138(a-3), and FIG. 138(b-2a) shows the BB cross section of FIG. The situation is schematically represented.

As shown in FIG. 138(b-2a), the family crest actor 224E is interposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL, and the family crest actor 224E is the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL. The decorative pattern display device 208 is more difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where it is not interposed.

FIG. 138(b-3) shows the above-described state shown in FIG. 138(a-4), and FIG. 138(b-3a) shows the cross section C-C in FIG. The situation is schematically represented.

As shown in FIG. 138(b-3a), the family crest actor 224E has moved to the lower side of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the player has the family crest actor 224E between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL. In comparison with the case where the decorative pattern display device 208 is interposed, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 is easier to visually recognize through the transparent protective member CL and the light guide plate IL.

138(c-1) and FIG. 138(c-2) are diagrams illustrating an example of a layer configuration in which an image displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 138(c-1), the above-mentioned reserved display frame FL1 is arranged in the first layer layer LY1. Further, in the example illustrated in FIG. 138(c-2), a portion of the pending display frame FL1 that is extended upward (extended portion) is a second layer that is arranged behind the first layer layer LY1. It is arranged in the layer LY2. The ninja character NJ1 displayed in the extended portion of the reserved display frame FL1 is also arranged in the second layer layer LY2. That is, it can be said that the extended portion of the pending display frame FL1 has a low display priority. Here, another layer LY3 is formed between the parts arranged in each of the two layers forming the reserved display frame FL1, and, for example, a serif notice, a decorative design, or a notice display (for example, an arrow fly display). ), etc. can be displayed. Further, the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 is also displayed on the first layer layer LY1 (or the second layer layer LY2) so that the parts are not spread over two or more layers and configured as one image data. You can

The display mode of the UI unit may be different or common depending on the effect stage and the effect mode (hereinafter, referred to as “effect stage etc.”) according to each game state.

Further, at least a part of the effect stage or the like may be selectable by the operation of the player, or may change in accordance with the progress of the game (for example, every number of changes). Good.

Further, the characteristic operation of the present invention, "the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward", is at least a part of the production stage or the like (for example, the production stage in the non-electric support state, or the design. It may be performed on a part of the production stage or the like that can be selected by the player while the setting screen is being changed, or may be performed on all the production stages or the like.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 154.

139 to 154 are diagrams showing, in a step-by-step manner, a modified example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 139 to 154, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, FIGS. 139 to 150, FIG. 152, and FIG. 154 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative pattern display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative pattern display devices, the second decorative pattern display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and the first decoration The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be a sub display device, and a second decorative symbol display device. 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the width direction, and the height is also slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right edge portion thereof overlaps with the front side of the left edge portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has its left edge portion the first. 1 The decorative pattern display device 208N overlaps with the front surface side of the right end portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in the directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Also, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the state of being closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily variable display of the decorative symbols for each display device, and are named for convenience. However, it should be noted that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N) are summarized as effect display means, and the effect display means is the decorative pattern. It is also possible to perform variable display of, or to display a plurality of types of effect. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmissive region. A light-emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light-emitting body is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can look like. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern simulating a predetermined effect image. In addition, the light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the region where the light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the light irradiated. Therefore, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable. Further, the light guide plate IL may be provided on the front side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, in FIGS. 139 to 150 and FIGS. 152 to 154, the states of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136 are shown.

FIG. 139 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the pending change notice effect as the prefetch notice effect by the hold icon applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 140 is a sequel to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 139. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 139(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is located at the center thereof. It is displayed in a state of being accommodated in the rectangular hold display frame FL1, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. There is. In a broad sense, the entire UI unit may be interpreted as a pedestal for the hold icon. At the timing shown in FIG. 139(a), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 both have default display modes. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 serving as an explanation display section is arranged, and various information related to games and effects (tutorial display) is displayed, and the content is updated at an appropriate timing. To be done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 139(a), "The Lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed, and the explanation about the character of the Lord is given. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit is displayed with priority during the variable display of the first decorative pattern and is provided in a region that does not overlap with the display region of the first decorative pattern, but with the display region of the first decorative pattern. May overlap. In addition, the explanation display section (or the explanation display area) may be a place where a certain thing is displayed, in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, in a configuration in which the stage name is displayed and it is hot when the stage moves to a certain stage, when the stage name is displayed in red, the display may be an explanation display instead of a notice. Conversely, when the normal stage name is displayed in white, it is not so hot as compared with the red stage name display, and this may also be a kind of notice.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display portion ST1 as an explanation display portion for displaying the currently performed stage name and reach name is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 139(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, a button image 136a is displayed above the stage name display portion ST1 in a default display mode, and the display mode is changed when the operation of the effect button 136 is instructed. The button image 136a may be displayed all the time or may be displayed for a period. Further, the UI unit may be always displayed or may be displayed for a period. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed. The lord's character may or may not always be displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. ing. Further, the family crest monument 224E has a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yashiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged and can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro 224Fa and the general 224Fb each have a light emitting means such as a full-color LED or the like built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the effect contents.

Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 139(b), when a game ball wins the first special figure starting opening 230, the third hold icon h13 (third hold icon) of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed to notify that the number of holdings has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold of the variable display of symbols that is the target of prefetching. However, in this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the default display mode at the timing shown in FIG. 139(b).

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 139(c), the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 in the hold icon display area changes to the display mode of the prefetching notice (for example, the display mode blinking in white). At this time, a sound output of "picone" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the pre-reading notice is displayed by the hold display. The voice output from the speaker 120 may be performed before the display mode of the hold icon h13 is changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h13 is changed before the voice output from the speaker 120. May be. In this case, the timing may be always set, or the timing may be different depending on the case. Further, the timing of changing the display mode of the hold icon h13 and the timing of audio output from the speaker 120 may be the same timing. In addition, on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon part TT2 as a second tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed along with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi. The princess Chibi character CH1 and the balloon portion TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanation display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 139(c), the balloon section TT2 has an explanatory display “This fluctuation is... ”, and suggests an advance notice to be given in the pachinko machine 100. The blowing portion TT2 is overlapped with the first decorative pattern, but it may be arranged at a position where it is not overlapped. In addition, the princess Chibi character CH1 and the balloon TT2 may be displayed at the same timing, the balloon TT2 may be displayed after the princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed, or the balloon TT2 may be displayed. After being displayed, the Chibihime character CH1 may be displayed. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 139(d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which a plurality of arrows descend from the upper right to the lower left of the display screen is shown. The plurality of arrows appear as a notice display, and are overlapped with the decorative pattern in the variable display. In addition, the balloon section TT2 is changed to an explanatory display of "maybe...". Here, the timing at which the display of the plurality of arrows is started may be the timing before the description display of the balloon TT2 is changed, or the timing after the description display of the balloon TT2 is changed. Alternatively, the timing may be the same as the timing at which the explanation display of the balloon section TT2 is changed. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case. Further, the princess Chibi character CH1 and the balloon portion TT2 are overlapped with a plurality of arrows, but may be overlapped with a plurality of arrows. Further, it is hidden in the tutorial display section TT1. The timing at which the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden may be the timing after the display of the balloon section TT2 is changed, or the timing before the display of the balloon section TT2 is changed. Good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display section TT1 is erased and the timing at which the display on the balloon section TT2 is changed may be the same timing. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 139(e), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the left symbol is stopped and displayed as “decoration 6”. In addition, the left symbol stopped and displayed by "decoration 6" is displayed so as to partially overlap the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the balloon TT2. Further, the plurality of arrows are displayed so as to be stuck on the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 139(f), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the right symbol is stopped and displayed as “decoration 2”. The plurality of arrows and the Chibihime character CH1 have been deleted. The timing at which the plurality of arrows are erased may be after the Chibi-hime character CH1 has been erased, before the Chibi-hime character CH1 is erased, or may be erased by the Chibi-hime character CH1. It may be the same timing as the timing. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

Then, as shown in FIG. 139(g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as "decoration 2", a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" After the shaking fluctuation is performed, the display result of the loss is confirmed. In addition, at the timing of the fixed stop display of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol that has been variably displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is also stopped and displayed in the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". .. At this time, the variable icon h0 may be deleted or may remain displayed. Further, it may be configured to be erased before the swinging fluctuation state of the decorative pattern is started.

FIG. 140(a) shows a state where the symbols are stopped and displayed, continuing from FIG. 139(g).

Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 140(b), the hold icons h11, h12, h13 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon in the display position of is stored in the hold display frame FL1 in which the variable icon is displayed and becomes the variable icon h0, and the hold icon in the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11. Then, the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and moves to the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140(b), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the characters "Panda is the master of the lord" are displayed. Here, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the timing after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the same timing as the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, or the change of the decorative pattern. The timing may be before the start of display. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140(c), in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, a balloon portion TT2 as a second tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) is provided on the left side of the display screen together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi. It is displayed. In the speech bubble portion TT2, a dialogue display "Where is the grandfather?" is made, and the conversation announcement is started. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a plurality of arrows is shown again coming down from the upper right to the lower left of the display screen. As described above, the plurality of arrows may function as a continuous notice that is continuously displayed in the symbol variation display a plurality of times. In addition, in this example of performance, as in FIG. 139(c), the character CH1 of Princess Chibi is displayed, but another character may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 140(d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the balloon character TT3 as the third tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with the grandfather character GY1. ing. The grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (description display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 140(d), in response to the dialogue display by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi, the speech display "here" is displayed in the balloon portion TT3, and the conversation announcement continues. Here, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon TT3 are overlapped by the first decorative symbol, but the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon TT3 may be overlapped with the first decorative symbol. Further, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be arranged at positions that do not overlap the first decorative pattern. Further, the old character GY1 and the balloon TT3 may be displayed at the same timing, the balloon TT3 may be displayed after the old character GY1 is displayed, or the balloon TT3 is displayed. The grandfather character GY1 may be displayed later. Further, the conversation announcement by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the grandpa character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136. Further, it is hidden in the tutorial display section TT1. The tutorial display unit TT1 may be hidden at a timing after the grandpa character GY1 is displayed, or at a timing before the grandpa character GY1 is displayed. Good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased may be the same as the timing at which the grandfather character GY1 is displayed. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case. Further, the plurality of arrows are displayed so as to be stuck on the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140(e), it is shown that the family crest 224E has risen from the initial position and overlaps with the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. More specifically, the family crest monument 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1 after moving, and also includes a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display section TT1, and a balloon section TT2. It covers each part.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140(f), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an extension animation (extended animation) of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 is extended upward, and the family crest actor 224E. Is shown above. That is, it can be said that the hold display frame FL1 shows a portion that is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E. Further, the expanded reserved display frame FL1 overlaps the balloon TT2 and overlaps the balloon TT2, but does not overlap the balloon TT3 and does not overlap. That is, in this effect example, there is a case in which the reserved notice frame FL1 does not overlap with the dialogue notice (the balloon portion TT3) displayed later even if it is expanded. In this way, the display mode of the pending display frame FL1 after expansion may be referred to as an expanded display mode. It should be noted that, in this example of performance, the pending display frame FL1 before the expansion and the pending display frame FL1 after the expansion are shown, but the extended animation also includes the one in which the pending display frame FL1 is expanded stepwise.

Then, as shown in FIG. 140(g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the appearance of the ninja character NJ1 is shown in the upper part of the reserved display frame FL1. It should be noted that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest monument 224E, and is more difficult to visually recognize than when the family crest monument 224E is not partially overlapped.

In FIG. 140(h), the state in which the family coat emblem 224E descends toward the initial position is shown. Then, the portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to visually recognize it. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. This shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives a pre-reading notice. The effect display of the shuriken SH1 may be displayed on the front side or the rear side of the conversation notice displayed by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the grandpa character GY1. .. It can be said that the effect by the ninja character NJ1 is performed in the extended portion of the extended display frame FL1 after the extension. In other words, it can be said that the Ninja character NJ1, which is an example of the effect display, is displayed in the expanded portion of the hold display frame FL1. In other words, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the area of the difference between the area within the frame of the reserved display frame FL1 in the extended display mode and the area within the frame of the reserved display frame FL1 in the default display mode. It can also be said. The effect by the ninja character NJ1 may function as an effect of a look-ahead notice or a change notice. The effect display by the shuriken SH1 is related to the effect (effect by the ninja character NJ1) performed in the extended display frame FL1 after expansion, but it can be said that the effect display is performed outside the retained display frame FL1.

After that, FIG. 140(i) shows that the family crest monument 224E is returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the shuriken SH1 is facing the second hold icon h12. Note that, as shown in FIG. 140(i), the area within the frame of the reserved display frame FL1 in the extended display mode is configured to include the area within the frame of the reserved display frame FL1 in the default display mode. In other words, it can be said that the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode is a display mode in which the area of the region within the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode is large.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140(j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, and the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. ing. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire second hold icon h12 and also overlaps a part of the adjacent first hold icon h11. This may give the player an expectation that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change and the reliability of the big hit may be increased.

After that, in FIG. 140(k), it is shown that the emission color of the family emblem 224E changes from white to green. That is, it can be said that a notice is given that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green. In other words, the predetermined light emitting means (such as the LED incorporated in the family crest 224E or the LED provided in the special figure starting port) is placed on the hold icon before the hold icon of the hold that is the target of prefetching changes. It can be said that the aspect is changed according to the aspect after the change of.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140(l), the effect EF2 is erased and the second hold icon h12 is displayed again easily in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a state of lighting in green. On the other hand, the sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. It should be noted that voice output may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h12 is changed, the display mode of the hold icon h12 may be changed after the voice output is performed, or the display of the hold icon h12 may be performed. The mode change and the voice output may be performed at the same time. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140(m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 displayed in the hold display frame FL1 disappears, and then the hold display frame FL1 is shown in FIG. 140(a). An animation display (reduced animation) is performed to reduce the shape to the one shown. A reduced animation may be performed without erasing the ninja character NJ1. In this case, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed so as to move downward in accordance with the reduction of the pending display frame FL1, and the change icon h0 is displayed. It may be so arranged that they are finally erased.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140(n), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 ends, and the hold display frame FL1 becomes the default display mode.

In addition, in the above-described production example, the start timing of each production such as the character CH1 of the princess Chibi, the character GY1 of the grandfather, the advance notice display of a plurality of arrows, the family crest part 224E, the decorative pattern variable display, and the expansion operation of the hold display frame FL1 The end timing can be set in any combination.

Further, in this effect example, a character (for example, a ninja character NJ1) for changing the hold icon is displayed in the expanded hold display frame FL1. However, an image substantially the same as the changed hold icon is displayed. Alternatively, the image may be displayed (corresponding to the changed hold icon) that recalls the changed hold icon. Next, in the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1, an example of the effect when the change of the display mode of the hold icon fails will be described.

FIG. 140(i′) corresponds to FIG. 140(i) and has the same effect contents as in FIG. 140(i). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140(j′), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, but the effect EF2 is not displayed and the shuriken SH1 is the second hold. After passing through the icon, as shown in FIG. 140(k′), the shuriken SH1 is framed out below the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, thereby failing to change the display mode of the hold icon. Directing. Therefore, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 remains the mode of blinking in white.

FIG. 141 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. In FIG. 141, it is shown that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed when the decorative design in which the character display of “change” is displayed in the middle design is stopped and displayed. That is, it can be said that the decorative pattern of "change" is a display suggesting the effect contents.

As shown in FIG. 141(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI section, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the pending display frame FL1. It is displayed in the accommodated state, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 141(a), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is blinking in white, and a pre-reading notice is displayed. It is displayed in a manner. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state of swinging and fluctuating in a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 3-change-decoration 1” is shown. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative pattern. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 141(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode above the stage name display portion ST1, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is riding on the stage, and at the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and special figure 1 And the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is displayed.

In addition, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb are arranged. Has been done.

After that, in FIG. 141(b), it is shown that the family crest accessory 224E is lifted from the initial position and overlaps with the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the family crest monument 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1, and also a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display section TT1, and a part of the middle pattern of "change". Covering. Note that the family crest accessory 224E may not overlap the decorative pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 141(c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and is displayed above the family crest part 224E. At this time, the pending display frame FL1 after expansion overlaps the decorative pattern (the middle pattern of “change”). In other words, it can be said that the decorative design (the middle design of “change”) is overlapped with the extended display frame FL1. The extended display frame FL1 may not overlap the decorative pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 141(d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper part of the reserved display frame FL1. Note that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest monument 224E, and it is difficult to visually recognize the character NJ1 as compared with the case where the family crest monument 224E is not partially overlapped.

In FIG. 141(e), a state in which the family crest monument 224E descends toward the initial position is shown. Then, the portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to visually recognize it. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. This shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives a pre-reading notice. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is started in a state in which the display indicating the effect content (decorative pattern of “change”) is overlapped.

After that, in FIG. 141(f), the state in which the family crest monument 224E is returned to the initial position is shown. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the shuriken SH1 is facing the second hold icon h12.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141(g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, and the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. ing. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire second hold icon h12 and also overlaps a part of the adjacent first hold icon h11.

After that, in FIG. 141(h), it is shown that the emission color of the family coat emblem 224E changes from white to green.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141(i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is easily visible again compared to the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Is displayed. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a state of lighting in green. On the other hand, the sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141(j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 displayed in the hold display frame FL1 disappears, and thereafter, a reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141(k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 ends, and the hold display frame FL1 becomes the default display mode. That is, it becomes a state where the overlap to the decorative pattern by the hold display frame FL1 is eliminated, and the decorative pattern becomes easier to visually recognize as compared with the state where the overlap to the decorative pattern by the hold display frame FL1 is not eliminated.

FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect shown in FIG. 140. In FIG. 142, the tutorial display unit TT1 is normally framed out, and when the explanation display is performed, it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed in from below. It should be noted that FIGS. 142(a) to 142(n) are the same as FIGS. 140(a) to 140(n) except that the tutorial display unit TT1 performs an animation of frame-in and frame-out, and therefore is different. Only the part will be described, and description of the same contents as those in FIGS. 140(a) to 140(n) will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 142(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed and is in a frame-out state.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 142(b), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in animation (frame-in animation) of the tutorial display section TT1 is started from below the right frame of the display screen, and thereafter, At the timing shown in FIG. 142(c), the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and the text display "Panda is Master of the Lord" is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. In addition, the timing at which the character display of the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed may be the same as the completion of the frame-in animation, the timing after the completion of the frame-in animation, or the timing before the completion of the frame-in animation. May be Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case. Further, the character display of "Panda is master of lord" on the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed until the frameout animation (frameout animation) of the tutorial display section TT1 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 142(f) (for example, It is displayed continuously for 5 seconds. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 142(e), when the family crest monument 224E rises and overlaps a part of the tutorial display section TT1, a part of the character display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is changed. It may be overlapped.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 142(f) to 142(h), the tutorial display section TT1 moves downward, and a frame-out animation for frame-out from the first decorative symbol display device 208L is performed. The instruction display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be deleted before the frame-out animation starts, may be deleted at the timing when the frame-out animation starts, or the frame-out animation starts. It may be erased at a timing after that, or may be displayed until the frame-out of the tutorial display section TT1 is completed. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case. Further, the start timing of the frame-out animation may be the same as the start timing of the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1, may be the timing before the start of the extended animation, or the extended animation The timing may be after the start. In this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT1 can be said to be an example of the second extended display. For example, the tutorial display section TT1 is similar to the extended hold display frame FL1 (may be an example of the first extended display in this example of performance) in that it is not overlapped with the decorative pattern, but the dialogue It can be said that they are different in that they do not overlap the notice, that there are few overlapping areas, that they do not overlap frequently.

FIG. 143 is a diagram showing another modified example of the effect shown in FIG. 140. In FIG. 143, after the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the explanation and is framed out, the tutorial display unit TT1 is again framed in, and the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the preview display. In addition, in FIGS. 143(a) to 143(n), after the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out, the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed in again, and a preliminary notice is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Since it is similar to (a) to (n) of FIG. 14, only different parts will be described, and description of the same contents as in (a) to (n) of FIG. 142 will be omitted.

After the effects shown in FIGS. 143(a) to 143(h) are performed, at the timing shown in FIG. 143(i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial is started from below the frame on the right side of the display screen. The frame-in animation of the display unit TT1 is restarted, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 143(j), the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the characters of “pseudo-link”. The display is displayed. That is, there is a display indicating that pseudo-linking may be performed. That is, in the tutorial display section TT1, not only the tutorial display but also the notice display can be displayed. It should be noted that the character display of “pseudo-relation” may be a notice of the change or a prefetch notice. The timing of completion of the frame-in animation on the tutorial display section TT1 may be a timing before the display of the effect EF2 is started, or a timing after the display of the effect EF2 is started. It may be present, or may be the same timing as when the display of the effect EF2 is started. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case. After that, as shown in FIGS. 143(j) to 143(n), the tutorial display section TT1 is continuously displayed. In addition, in this example of performance, the display time of the tutorial display section TT1 is longer when the notice display is performed than when the explanation display is performed, but even if the display time is the same, Alternatively, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be configured to have a longer display time when the explanation display is performed than when the notice display is performed. Further, the color of the characters may be different between the case of the explanation display and the case of the notice display. As described above, in this production example, the tutorial display section TT1 may be displayed a plurality of times.

In the tutorial display section TT1, a plurality of types of mini-games having a pattern of success or failure are displayed, and when a success pattern of the mini-game is performed, simultaneously with the display indicating success or after the display. , A display that gives a change to another effect display such as a hold change (for example, a change in the display mode of the hold icon, a change in the display mode of the variable icon, the stop of the pseudo-relational symbol, the occurrence of the pseudo-repeation, the display mode of the dialogue notice Change (for example, blue lines or blue background lines to red lines or red worship lines), step up of the line notice (for example, when the character A line notice is displayed, then the character B line It may be configured to display a notice).

FIG. 144 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the super reach effect applicable to the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 144 is, for example, executed after the effect display shown in FIG. 140 is executed, and the pattern variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon whose display mode is changed as described above is performed. Is shown.

As shown in FIG. 144(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI section, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the reserved display frame FL1. It is displayed in the accommodated state, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 144(a), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a display mode of a pre-reading notice that is lit in green and the two hold icons h11 and h12 have a default display mode. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is erased. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative pattern. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the character display "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed, and the appearance of the explanation display is shown.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 144(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is informed that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode above the stage name display portion ST1, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is riding on the stage, and at the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and special figure 1 And the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

In addition, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb are arranged. Has been done. The family coat emblem 224E emits green light in accordance with the color of the variable icon h0.

After that, as shown in FIG. 144(b), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays to notify that the super reach (swordsman reach) will be developed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 144(c), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, which shows that the swordsman reach has a high reliability for the big hit. .. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL overlaps the tutorial display section TT1, the hold display frame FL1, the variation icon and the hold icon, and the tutorial display section TT1, the hold display frame FL1, the variation icon and the hold icon. It may be difficult to visually recognize these displays as compared with the case where they do not overlap.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144(d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation (UI part FO animation) in which the UI part is framed out below the display screen is started. Specifically, when the UI section FO animation is started, the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is erased, and the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted. The timing of erasing the character display on the tutorial display section TT1 may be a timing before the timing of erasing the hold icon or a timing after the timing of erasing the hold icon. The timing may be the same as the timing of deleting the hold icon. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case. Although the variable icon h0 has not been deleted, the variable icon h0 may also be deleted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 144(d) to FIG. 144(g), the UI section frames out by the UI section FO animation. In some cases, even if the hold display frame FL1 is erased, the display mode of the hold icon may be recognized by the light emission color of the family coat emblem 224E. That is, as described above, it is displayed by performing the variable display of symbols based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon changed by the change effect of the display state of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL1. It may be possible to confirm the display mode after the change of the hold icon even after the hold display frame FL1 in which the variable icon is housed is hidden.

FIG. 144(h) shows that a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display has been changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to Swordsman Reach, and the second decorative symbol display. On the stage name display portion ST1 of the device 208M, the character display of "Swordsman Reach" is displayed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the duel scene animation is being performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 144(h), a state in which the lord's character and the swordsman character face each other is displayed.

After that, for example, after the animation display of the duel scene by the lord's character and the swordsman character shown in FIGS. 126(c) to (h) is performed, as shown in FIG. 144(i), the first decoration In the pattern display device 208L, the main character is defeated by an enemy swordsman, and as a result, a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is derived for both the first and second decorative patterns, and fluctuations are caused. Is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144(j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background dedicated to the swordsman reach is changed to the background of the castle town. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIGS. 144(j) to (n), an animation (UI portion FI animation) in which the UI portion is framed in from below the display screen is performed. Although the hold icon is redisplayed after the display of the UI section FI animation is completed, it may be displayed from the time when the display of the UI section FI animation is started. It may be displayed upon completion. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 144(o), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is a decoration of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is stopped and displayed by the combination of symbols, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". Further, the family crest monument 224E changes from a green light emission mode to a default light emission mode (white light emission mode). Although the first decorative symbol is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be erased at the stop display. The timing at which the family crest monument 224E changes to the default light emission mode may be the same timing as the stop display of the decorative design, or may be the timing before the stop display of the decorative design, or the decoration. The timing may be after the stop display of the symbols. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case. Further, the variable icon h0 may be changed to the default display mode once before the stop display of the decorative pattern and then deleted, or may be changed to the default display mode after the stop display of the decorative pattern. Then, it may be deleted, before the stop display of the decorative pattern, may be deleted without changing the display mode, or after the stop display of the decorative pattern, the display mode is It may be erased without changing, or may be erased without changing the display mode at the same timing as the stop display of the decorative pattern.

It should be noted that while the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL is being displayed, the hold display frame FL1 after expansion/expansion/reduction may be displayed. All of the reserved display frames FL1 may be configured not to overlap the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL. Further, the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icon h0 may be configured to be displayed during the super reach, and in the configuration, at each timing during the super reach (for example, cut-in of an ally character or cut-in of an enemy character). Display timing, or the display timing of the dialogue displayed in blue, the display timing of the dialogue displayed in red, and the like) may be changed.

Further, in addition to or instead of the above configuration, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be configured to be frame-in during super reach, and the display mode at each timing may be changed. You may make it display one of the multiple types of display which shows.

FIG. 145 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 145(a-1) to (a-4), it is shown that the effect display in which the notice icon is stocked is performed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, and FIG. 1) to (b-6) in FIG. 145 (c-1) to FIG. 145 (c-1) to FIG. 145 (b-6) show that the display effect of the hold icon is changed while the notice icon is stocked. FIG. (c-6) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the notice icon is performed by an effect that is partially common to the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon.

The example of the effect shown in FIG. 145(a-1) is the same as that in FIG. 140(g) except that the notice icon BX of the treasure box is displayed instead of the ninja character NJ1. Omit it. Note that, as shown in FIG. 145(a-1), a part of the treasure chest notice icon BX is overlapped with the family crest monument 224E, and a part thereof is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E. By comparison, it is difficult to see. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon BX of the treasure box is used as an example of the notice icon, but it is also applicable to the case of displaying various notice icons shown in FIG. 81 and FIG. 136(d), for example. Needless to say.

After that, as shown in FIG. 145(a-2), the state in which the family crest monument 224E descends toward the initial position is shown. Then, in the notice icon BX of the treasure box, the portion not overlapping the family crest 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to visually recognize it.

After that, in FIG. 145(a-3), it is shown that the family crest monument 224E is returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the notice icon BX of the treasure box is moving toward the second hold icon h12. At this time, the notice icon BX of the treasure box is displayed in a reduced size, but may be displayed without being reduced or may be displayed in an enlarged size. Further, the shape may be changed and the display color may be changed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 145(a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon BX of the treasure box is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the second hold icon h12, and corresponds to the second hold icon h12. It suggests that some kind of notice will be given in the symbol variable display based on the hold. That is, the pre-reading notice is given by the notice icon BX of the treasure box.

The example production shown in FIGS. 145(b-1) to (b-6) is different from the example shown in FIG. 140(g) except that the notice icon BX of the treasure box is displayed above the second hold icon h12. -Since it is the same as that of the same figure (l), detailed description is abbreviate|omitted. The notice icon BX shown in FIG. 145(b-1) is not limited to the one displayed in the above-described manner in FIG. 145(a-1) to FIG. 145(a-4), but may be another effect, for example. (For example, an effect produced by stopping the chance symbol, etc.) may be displayed. Further, the notice icon may not be displayed in the effect in the hold display frame FL1.

FIG. 145(b-3) shows that the shuriken SH1 overlaps the notice icon BX of the treasure box. Here, the shuriken SH1 may overlap the notice icon BX of the treasure box, or may overlap the notice icon BX of the treasure box. That is, for example, even if the treasure chest notice icon BX is displayed in the manner described above in FIGS. 145(a-1) to (a-4), the shuriken SH1 is better than the treasure chest notice icon BX. May be displayed on the front side or may be displayed on the back side.

FIG. 145(b-4) shows that the effect EF2 overlaps not only the second hold icon h12 but also the notice icon BX of the treasure box. As a result, it may not be known whether the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes or the display mode of the treasure box notice icon BX changes, and it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 145(c-1) to (c-5) are the same as those in FIGS. 145(b-1) to (b-5), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 145(c-5), the effect EF2 is displayed so as to cover the entire second hold icon h12, but the emission of the family crest actor 224E corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the changed hold icon is changed. No change in aspect is observed. That is, it can be said that the change of the hold icon is not displayed due to the change in the emission color of the family crest 224E.

FIG. 145(c-6) subsequent to FIG. 145(c-5) shows a state after the effect EF2 is erased. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 145(c-6), after the effect EF2 is erased, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 does not change, and the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box changes. In some cases, the player may be surprised at the production and further increase the expectation for the big hit, because the notice icon BX of the treasure box is changed not by the change of the display mode of the hold icon but by the promotion change. is there. The change mode of the treasure box notice icon BX is not limited to the change in size, and for example, the shape may be changed, the color may be changed, or the combination may be changed. .. Note that, as shown in FIG. 145(c-6), the speaker 120 outputs a voice notifying that the display mode of the treasure chest notice icon BX has changed, but it seems that the voice output is not performed. You can

FIG. 146 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 146(a-1) to (a-6), the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon other than the hold icon displayed in the prefetch advance notice display mode (for example, blinking in white) 146(b-1) to FIG. 146(b-4), another character appears in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 to display the hold icon. 146(c-1) to (c-5) of FIG. 146(c-1) to FIG. 146(c-5) show an effect of changing the display mode of all the hold icons being displayed. Is shown.

The example of effect shown in FIG. 146(a-1) is the same as that of FIG. 140(g) except that the third hold icon h13 is displayed, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 146(a-1), the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the default display mode.

FIG. 146(a-1) is followed by FIG. 146(a-2), showing that the family crest monument 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, the portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to visually recognize it. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the third holding icon h13 adjacent to the second holding icon h12, which is pre-reading notice.

After that, in FIG. 146(a-3), the state in which the family crest monument 224E is returned to the initial position is shown. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the third hold icon h13.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146(a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the third hold icon h13, and the display of the effect EF2 in which the third hold icon h13 explodes is displayed. Has been done. This effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire third hold icon h13, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent second hold icon h12. Note that the second hold icon h12 remains in the display mode of the prefetching notice (blinking in white).

After that, in FIG. 146(a-5), it is shown that the emission color of the family crest monument 224E changes from white to green. That is, it can be said that a notice is given that the display color of the third hold icon h13 will change from white to green.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146(a-6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the third hold icon h13 is visually recognized again as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the third hold icon h13 is displayed in a green lighting state. On the other hand, the sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. It should be noted that voice output may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h13 is changed, the display mode of the hold icon h13 may be changed after the voice output is performed, or the display of the hold icon h13 may be performed. The mode change and the voice output may be performed at the same time. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case. Further, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 remains unchanged from the display mode of the prefetching notice. According to this effect example, the display mode of the third hold icon h13 adjacent to the second hold icon h12, instead of the second hold icon h12, is changed, so that the effect can be made to have an unexpectedness and the second hold icon h13 In some cases, it is possible to dramatically improve the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the third hold icon h13 while maintaining the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon h12. .. It should be noted that, although this example of effect has been described with respect to the third hold icon adjacent to the second hold icon that is the target of the prefetching notice, it may be performed for the first hold icon. However, if there is a fourth hold, it may be performed for the fourth hold icon h14.

146(b-1) to FIG. 146(b-4), the production example shown in FIG. 146(b-1) shows the extended character of the ninja character NJ1 instead of the ninja character BC1 and the throwing object in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1. 140(g) to FIG. 140(j) except that is changed, so that only different points will be described in detail, and detailed description of other points will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 146(b-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, not the ninja character NJ1 but the banquet character BC1 appears in the upper part of the reserved display frame FL1. Note that the bancho character BC1 is partially overlapped with the family crest monument 224E, which is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the state in which the family crest monument 224E is not partially overlapped.

FIG. 146(b-2) shows a state in which the family crest monument 224E is descending toward the initial position. Then, the part of the bancho character BC1 that is not overlapped with the family coat emblem 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to visually recognize it. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the bancho character BC1 is emitting a qigong wave KK1 instead of the shuriken SH1 as a thrown item. This qigong wave KK1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives a pre-reading notice. The effect display of the qigong wave KK1 may be displayed on the front side or the back side of the conversation notice display by the character CH1 of the princess Chibi and the character GY1 of the grandfather. Good.

After that, in FIG. 146(b-3), it is shown that the family crest monument 224E has returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the qigong wave KK1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12.

After that, as shown in FIG. 146(b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the qigong wave KK1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12, and the display of the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes. Is being done. Here, the display mode of the effect EF2 may be different for the shuriken SH1 and the qigong wave KK1. Further, at this time, the bancho character BC1 is erased from the reserved display frame FL1, but may be displayed. As described above, in this example of performance, by displaying a character other than the ninja character NJ1, it may be possible to change the reliability of the jackpot depending on the appearing character.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 146(c-1) to (c-3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed, and the second hold icon h12 is the default display mode. 146(b-1) to (b-3) in FIG. 146 except the above, only the different points will be described in detail, and the detailed description of other points will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 146(c-3) followed by FIG. 146(c-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the qigong wave KK1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12, and the exploding effect EF3 is displayed. However, the effect EF3 is an effect display that explodes not only in the second hold icon h12 but also in the entire hold icon display area. That is, the display of the effect EF3 informs that all of the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area are subject to change in display mode. This may give rise to the expectation that confidence may increase for all pending. At the timing shown in FIG. 146(c-4), the longest character BC1 is erased from the reserved display frame FL1, but it may be displayed. In addition, the effect produced by the effect EF3 may be an effect that is performed only when the banquet character BC1 appears, and is not performed when the ninja character NJ1 appears. In addition, when the banchou character BC1 appears, the effect EF3 may be necessarily performed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146(c-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF3 is erased, and the first hold icons h11 to h3 are compared with the state in which the effect EF3 is not erased. The hold icon h13 of is displayed again easily and visually. At this time, all the display modes of the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the main character. According to this performance example, not only the hold icon that is the target of prefetching, but also the display mode of all the displayed hold icons can be changed, so that the effect can be given a surprise and In some cases, the expectation for a big hit can be dramatically improved. This effect example may be performed, for example, when the hold is increased at a specific timing, and more specifically, when the hold is increased after the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is started. You may make it to.

FIG. 147 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, FIGS. 147(a-1) to (a-5) show that the extension range of the hold display frame FL1 is enlarged, and FIGS. 147(b-1) to (a-5). FIG. 147(c-1) to FIG. 147(c-4) show a state in which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is opened and a character related to the hold change notice effect appears in b-5). In the figure, it is shown that an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon is being performed.

The effect example shown in FIG. 147(a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 140(g) and described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 147(a-1) followed by FIG. 147(a-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is further expanded upward. In addition, the ninja character NJ1 is further moved upward in response to the further expansion of the hold display frame FL1. At this time, the ninja character NJ1 is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E and is easier to visually recognize as compared with the state in which it is overlapped with the family crest monument 224E. Further, the hold display frame FL1 overlaps the balloon TT3, and it is difficult to visually recognize the display of the balloon TT3 as compared with the state in which it does not overlap the balloon TT3. In addition, the family crest 224E is descending toward the initial position.

Then, as shown in FIG. 147(a-3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing three shurikens SH1. All of these three shurikens SH1 are moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives advance notice. The effect display of the shuriken SH1 overlaps the balloon portion TT2. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 147(a-3), the family crest monument 224E has returned to the initial position.

Then, as shown in FIG. 147(a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the three shurikens SH1 overlap the second hold icon h12, and the second hold icon h12 explodes. The display is done.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147(a-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is the display mode of the lord. At this time, the speaker 120 may output a notification sound that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. In addition, at this time, the light emission mode of the family crest monument 224E has not changed, but may change. In this way, in this effect example, as compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 140, the expansion range of the hold display frame FL1 is further increased upward and the effect contents are partially different. The effect contents may be the same even if the extension range of the hold display frame FL1 is increased. Further, the extension range of the hold display frame FL1 may be changed according to the reliability. As a result, it may be possible to change the feeling of expectation for a big hit depending on the amount of change in the hold display frame FL1.

The expansion range of the hold display frame FL1 may be expanded not only in the upper direction but also in the width direction. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 147(a-3′), in addition to expanding the hold display frame FL1 upward, the hold display frame FL1 may be expanded in the width direction to a range overlapping the hold icon to be read ahead. Good. Further, the extension range of the hold display frame FL1 in the vertical direction may be set to the extent shown in FIG. 140(g), and the extension range in the width direction may be set to a range overlapping with the hold icon of the prefetch target. Further, when the third hold icon that is digested after the second hold icon h12 that is the target of prefetching is displayed, it is possible to expand in the width direction to at least a part of the third hold icon. You may comprise. In other words, a part of the hold display frame FL1 may be configured to overlap the third hold icon.

In FIG. 147(b-1), the family crest monument 224E rises from the initial position and the pending display frame FL1 is expanded upward by the extended animation of the pending display frame FL1, but the character does not appear in the expanded portion, and thereafter, The state in which the family crest 224E has moved to the initial position is shown. Since the other effect contents are the same as those shown in FIG. 140(g), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147(b-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the opening operation of raising the background of the hold display frame FL1 like a shutter is started, and the back side of the background is visually recognized. It is shown that various forms of display are being performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 147(b-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the background of the hold display frame FL1 is in a fully opened state, and the appearance of the ninja character NJ1 is shown. It is also possible to prepare a plurality of types of back colors of the hold display frame FL1 whose background is fully opened and to change the color depending on the degree of expectation of a change in the display mode of the hold icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 147(b-3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing a shuriken SH1. The timing at which the throwing effect of the shuriken SH1 is started may be later than the timing at which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened, or the same as the timing at which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened. Alternatively, the timing may be before the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

After that, as shown in FIG. 147(b-4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the shuriken SH1 is facing the second hold icon h12.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147(b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, and the display of the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. Has been done. At this time, the closing operation in which the background of the hold display frame FL1 descends like a shutter is started, and then the door is closed. The start timing of the closing operation of the background of the hold display frame FL1 may be earlier than the timing at which the display of the effect EF2 is started, or may be the same as the timing at which the display of the effect EF2 is started. Alternatively, it may be after the timing at which the display of the effect EF2 is started. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

The production example shown in FIG. 147(c-1) is the same as that of FIG. 140(i) except that the ninja character NJ1 throws a shuriken toward the variable icon h0. A detailed description will be given, and a description of others will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 147(c-1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing a shuriken SH1 toward the variable icon h0.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147(c-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the variable icon h0, and the effect EF3 in which the variable icon h0 explodes is displayed. This effect EF3 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire variable icon h0, and also overlaps a part of the ninja character NJ1. The second hold icon h12 remains unchanged in the display mode of the prefetching notice. Thereby, while maintaining the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the second hold icon, the display mode of the change icon h0 may change to increase the reliability of the big hit for the change. It may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

After that, in FIG. 147(c-3), a state in which the emission color of the family crest monument 224E changes from white to green is shown. That is, it can be said that a notice is given that the display color of the variable icon h0 changes from white to green. In other words, the predetermined light emitting means (such as the LED incorporated in the family crest part 224E or the LED provided in the special figure starting port) is changed to the change icon before the notice that the change icon display mode is changed is given. It can be said that the aspect is changed according to the aspect after the change of h0.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147(c-4), the effect EF3 is erased and the variable icon h0 is displayed again easily in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the variation icon h0 is displayed in a manner in which it lights in green. On the other hand, the sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the change icon h0 has changed. It should be noted that voice output may be performed after the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed after the voice output, or the display of the variable icon h0 may be changed. The mode change and the voice output may be performed at the same time.

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. FIG. 148 shows a state in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is being performed when the UI unit is framed out of the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 148(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI section, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the reserved display frame FL1. It is displayed in the accommodated state, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 148(a), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is blinking in white and is displayed in the prefetch advance display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the first decorative symbol is variably displayed is shown. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative pattern. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the balloon portion TT2 is displayed together with the Chibihime character CH1 on the left side of the display screen. A plurality of question marks are displayed side by side in the balloon portion TT2, which suggests that a UI portion FO animation in which the UI portion including the pending display frame FL1 is framed out, which will be described later, is performed. That is, it can be said that the display of the balloon portion TT2 shown in FIG. 148(a) is a display related to a predetermined effect in which the hold display frame FL1 is hidden due to a frame-out.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 148(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode above the stage name display portion ST1, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of the lord's character on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second hold number display and special symbols of special maps 1 and 2 are displayed. The fourth symbol of 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

In addition, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb are arranged. Has been done.

FIG. 148(b) shows a state in which the UI section FO animation is performed and the UI section is framed out below the display screen together with the hold display frame FL1. This UI part FO animation is performed, for example, in the case of transition to darkness production or SP reach.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148(c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed, and the shuriken SH1 is thrown toward the position where the second hold icon h12 was displayed. Is being done. That is, in this effect example, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1 is performed even when the hold display frame FL1 is not displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 148(c), the ninja character NJ1 overlaps with the decorative pattern and also overlaps with the balloon portion TT2.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148(d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 reaches the position at which the second hold icon h12 is displayed, and the explosion effect EF2 is displayed. There is.

After that, FIG. 148(e) shows that the emission color of the family crest monument 224E changes from white to green. That is, the advance notification is given that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148(f), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, but the UI part is still in the frame-out state, so the second hold icon h12 is still displayed. It has not been. On the other hand, the sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

In FIG. 148(g), an animation in which the UI section is framed in (UI section FI animation) is performed, and the UI section FI animation is completed. When the UI section FI animation is completed, the UI section is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L together with the hold display frame FL1. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from white to green.

In this example of the effect, the UI section including the hold display frame FL1 is framed out, and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed during this period. For example, FIG. 148(a′) to FIG. As shown in ′), the UI part may be framed out while leaving the hold display frame FL1. Here, the example of the effect shown in FIG. 148(a′) is the same as that in FIG. 148(a), and therefore detailed description will be omitted.

In FIG. 148(a′), which is shown in FIG. 148(a′), the UI part FO animation is completed. As shown in FIG. 148(b′), in this effect example, when the UI part FO animation is performed, the UI part is framed out below the display screen, but the hold display frame FL1 is not framed out and is displayed. Is maintained.

In FIG. 148(c'), an extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and then the ninja character NJ1 throws a shuriken SH1 in the hold display frame FL1. It is shown. That is, as shown in FIG. 148(c′), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expanded portion of the hold display frame FL1, and the shuriken SH1 is displayed as the second hold icon h12. The production is being thrown toward the position where it was. That is, in this effect example, even if the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode is not displayed, the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1 is performed.

FIG. 149 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, FIGS. 149(a-1) to (a-7) show that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon and the display of the notice icon are performed at the same time. FIG. 149(b-1) to FIG. 149(b-5) show how the hold icon changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice.

The effect example shown in FIG. 149(a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 140(f) and described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 149(a-1) followed by FIG. 149(a-2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a ninja character NJ1 appearing above the reserved display frame FL1. It should be noted that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest monument 224E, and it is difficult to visually recognize the character NJ1 as compared with the state where the family crest monument 224E is not partially overlapped.

Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state in which the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character is started and the lord's character tries to throw the bomb icon I61 is shown.

After that, in FIG. 149(a-3), the state in which the family crest monument 224E descends toward the initial position is shown. Then, the portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to visually recognize it. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. This shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives a pre-reading notice.

On the other hand, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the lord's character has thrown the bomb icon I61. The timing at which the bomb icon I61 is thrown may be the same as the timing at which the ninja character NJ1 starts throwing the shuriken SH1 or may be before the throwing of the shuriken SH1. The timing may be after the throwing of the shuriken SH1 is started. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

Thereafter, in FIG. 149(a-4), the state in which the family crest monument 224E is returned to the initial position is shown. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the shuriken SH1 is facing the second hold icon h12.

On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 149(a-4), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The bomb icon I61 overlaps with the first decorative symbol and also with the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3. In other words, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the bomb icon I61, and the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon TT3 are also overlapped with the bomb icon I61. The bomb icon I61 may be overlapped with the first decorative symbol, or may be overlapped with the grandfather character GY1 or the balloon portion TT3.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149(a-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, and the display of the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. Has been done.

On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 149(a-5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character is ruptured. The timing at which the bomb icon I61 bursts may be the same as the timing at which the effect EF2 is displayed, the timing before the effect EF2 is displayed, or after the effect EF2 is displayed. May be the timing. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

After that, in FIG. 149(a-6), it is informed in advance that the light emission color of the crest product 224E changes from white to green, and the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green.

On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 149(a-6), the exploding bomb icon I61 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62 to give notice that the swordsman reach will be reached. Here, at the timing when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 may output a sound notifying that effect. Further, the timing at which the swordsman's notice icon I62 changes may be the same as the timing at which the emission color of the family crest actor 224E changes to green, or before the emission color of the family crest actor 224E changes to green. Or the timing after the emission color of the family coat emblem 224E changes to green. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149(a-7), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a state of lighting in green. On the other hand, the sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 149(a-7), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged in a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1 while being displayed in a reduced size, and thereafter, the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character. Ends the throwing animation. It should be noted that it may be notified by voice output that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged in the tutorial display section TT1. In this way, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged in a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, compared to the state in which the swordsman's notice icon I62 is not arranged in a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. Then, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to see. In other words, according to this effect example, it can be said that the swordsman's notice icon I62 may overlap the tutorial display section TT1 as a part of the hold display frame. As described above, in this example of performance, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, so that the player can easily draw attention to the display of the tutorial display section TT1 and the swordsman's notice icon I62. You may be able to. In addition, it may be possible to notice the existence of the tutorial or to focus on the symbol variation display rather than the presentation explanation that may occur in the future or in the future.

The example of production shown in FIG. 149(b-1) is the same as that of FIG. 139(a), except that the text "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1, and thus detailed description will be given. The description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 149(b-1) followed by FIG. 149(b-2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character is started, and the lord's character is bomb icon. It is shown trying to throw I61.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 149(b-3), the lord's character throws the bomb icon I61, and the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The situation is shown.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149(b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character reaches the second hold icon h12, and the bomb icon I61 bursts. Is shown. The display of the exploded bomb icon I61 covers the entire second hold icon h12 and also overlaps a part of the first hold icon h11.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149(b-5), in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the ruptured bomb icon I61 is deleted, and the ruptured bomb icon I61 is compared to a state in which the bomb icon I61 is not deleted. The hold icon h12 of is displayed again easily and visually. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the prefetch advance notice display mode (display mode blinking in white). As described above, the manner of changing the display mode of the read-ahead notice of the hold icon is not limited to when the hold is increased, and may be performed at an appropriate timing after the increase of the hold. Further, as in this example of effect, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed by another change effect. In addition, the above-described effect of changing the display mode of the pre-reading notice of the hold icon may be performed, for example, in a state where the UI unit is out of frame.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, FIG. 150 shows a state in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed while moving the sub display devices (the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N).

The effect example shown in FIG. 150(a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 140(d) and described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 150(a-2) following FIG. 150(a-1) shows a state in which the lord's character displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is erased for each stage.

Then, in FIG. 150 (a-3), the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moving toward the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The situation is shown. At this time, the grand character GY1, the balloon section TT3, the tutorial display section TT1, and each part of the right symbol of the first decorative pattern are overlapped on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the grand character GY1 and the balloon section. TT3, the tutorial display portion TT1, and each part of the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are in a visually difficult state when compared with a state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208N does not overlap each part.

After that, in FIG. 150(a-4), it is shown that the third decorative symbol display device 208N is continuously moving. Then, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the hold display frame FL2 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h00 is displayed in the frame. The hold display frame FL2 and the variable icon h00 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N are respectively larger in size than the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. .. That is, it can be said that the hold display frame FL2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is an extended display of the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 150(a-4), although the overlap with the old-fashioned character GY1 has been eliminated, the balloon portion TT3, each part of the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is still the third decorative symbol display. It is overlapped with device 208N. Furthermore, at the timing shown in FIG. 150(a-4), the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icon h0 accommodated in the hold display frame FL1 and each part of the balloon portion TT2 are overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icon h0 accommodated in the hold display frame FL1, and each of the balloon portions TT2 is not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. ..

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N has reached the position where its center is aligned with the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and has finished moving. Then, all of the reserved display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the middle symbols of the first decorative symbol are overlapped on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and together with the medium symbol and the reserved display frame FL1. The change icon h0 becomes invisible in a front view. In addition, a part of the first hold icon h11, the balloon TT2, and the balloon TT3 is also overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the first reserve icon h11, the balloon TT2, and a part of the balloon TT3 are partially overlapped. The third decorative symbol display device 208N makes it difficult to visually recognize as compared with the state where they are not overlapped.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150(a-6), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, an expansion animation of the reserved display frame FL2 is performed, and the reserved display frame FL2 expands upward, and the expanded portion is a ninja. The appearance of the character NJ2 is shown. That is, it can be said that the pending display frame FL2 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is extended and displayed, and the pending display frame FL2 is further extended and displayed. Although the ninja character NJ2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is larger than the ninja character NJ1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the size may be the same. However, it may be made smaller.

Then, as shown in FIG. 150(a-7), a state in which the ninja character NJ2 is throwing the shuriken SH1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second notice icon h12 that gives the look-ahead notice. The effect display of the shuriken SH1 may be displayed on the front side or the back side of the conversation notice displayed by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the grandpa character GY1. .. It can be said that the effect by the ninja character NJ2 is performed in the extended portion of the extended display frame FL2 after the extension. In other words, it can be said that the ninja character NJ2, which is an example of the effect display, is displayed in the expanded portion of the hold display frame FL2. The effect by the ninja character NJ2 may function as an effect of the look-ahead notice or the change notice. Further, the effect display by the shuriken SH1 is related to the effect (effect by the ninja character NJ2) performed in the extended display frame FL2 after expansion, but it can be said that it is performed outside the reserved display frame FL2.

Then, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-8), the shuriken SH1 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and moves toward the second hold icon h12. The situation is shown.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150(a-9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, and the display of the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. Has been done. This effect EF2 is partially overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

After that, in FIG. 150(a-10), it is shown that the emission color of the family emblem 224E changes from white to green. Further, the LED arranged around the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light, and these light emitting means notify the advance notice that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green. To do. The timing of the change in the emission color of the family crest monument 224E may be the same as the timing at which the LED provided in the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light, or in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The timing may be after the provided LED emits green light, or the timing before the LED provided in the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150(a-11), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a state of lighting in green. Here, a change in the display mode of the hold icon may be notified by voice output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 150(a-12), the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the hold display frame FL2 is erased together with the ninja character NJ2. In this case, for example, the animation may be performed by frame-out from the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fade-out may be performed, or the erase may be performed suddenly.

After that, in FIG. 150(a-13), it is shown that the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves to the right and moves toward the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-13), the overlap of the first hold icon h11 is resolved, and the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the third decorative symbol display. A part of the device 208N is overlapped, and a part of the device 208N is visible together with the change icon h0. In addition, the middle pattern of the first decorative symbol is also partially overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and compared with the state in which part of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is not overlapped. While the part is visible, the right symbol is overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which is difficult to see as compared with the non-overlapped state.

After that, in FIG. 150(a-14), a state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208N is at the initial position is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-14), since the overlap is canceled for each display in the first decorative symbol display device 208L that has been overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N so far, the overlap is achieved. Compared with the state in which is not eliminated, each display is in a state where it is easy to visually recognize.

After that, in FIG. 150(a-15), it is shown that the LED emitting light around the third decorative symbol display device 208N is turned off. Instead of turning off the light, the light may be turned on in a default light emitting mode (for example, a white light emitting mode). On the other hand, the family crest monument 224E still emits green light corresponding to the display color of the second hold icon h12.

In this production example, one display device (third decorative symbol display device 208N) of the two sub display devices (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is the first decorative symbol. The display device 208L is moved so as to overlap the display device 208L so that the display mode of the hold icon is changed. However, for example, as shown in FIG. You may make it perform the effect which moves and changes the display mode of a hold icon.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 150(b), when performing the effect of changing the display form of the hold icon, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are set to the first decorative symbol. The display device 208L is moved to a position close to each other in the center. Then, while extending and displaying the reserved display frame FL2 from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the lower part of the reserved display frame FL2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. And the ninja character NJ2 is displayed above the variation icon h00. At this time, by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the balloon portion TT2, the balloon portion TT3, the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icon. The entire h0 is overlapped, and the tutorial display portion TT1 and a part of the Chibihime character CH1 are overlapped.

FIG. 151 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIG. 151, in place of the above-mentioned two sub-display devices, a sub-display device (only one sub-decorative symbol display device 208P is provided, and the display mode of the hold icon is changed in this sub-decorative symbol display device 208P Is shown.

151 is different from the above-described embodiment in that it includes a decorative symbol display device 208 as a main display device and a sub decorative symbol display device 208P as a sub display device. The sub-decorative symbol display device 208P is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the upper edge of the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P overlaps a part of the front side of the lower edge of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. Then, as shown in FIG. 151(a), in the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P, the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and below these, the tutorial display section TT1. The UI section in which is formed is displayed, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the hold display frame FL1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, while the second hold icon h12 is in the prefetch advance notice display mode. In the tutorial display section TT1, "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed, and the relationship between the panda and the lord is explained. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a balloon portion TT2 is displayed together with the Chibihime character CH1 on the left side of the display screen. In the speech bubble portion TT2, a dialogue display "Where is the old man?" is displayed. On the right side of the display screen, a balloon portion TT3 is displayed together with the grandfather character GY1. In the speech bubble portion TT3, a dialogue display saying "Here". That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 151(a), a conversation notice is given. Although the balloons TT2 and TT3 overlap the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern may overlap the balloons TT2 and TT3. Further, in the upper right portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 151(a), the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed.

After that, in FIG. 151(b), an extended animation of the reserved display frame FL1 is performed, the reserved display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and a state in which the ninja character NJ2 appears in the expanded portion is shown. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P extends from the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P to the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserved display frame displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expanded portion of FL1. Here, a part of the speech balloon TT2 is overlapped with the expanded reserved display frame FL1 and a part of the balloon TT2 is visually recognized in comparison with a state where it is not overlapped with the expanded reserved display frame FL1. It is considered difficult. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display in which the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1 is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 151(b), the thrown shuriken SH1 is displayed in the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P. It is shown that the user is moving toward the displayed second hold icon h12.

After that, in FIG. 151(c), the thrown shuriken SH1 moves from the decorative symbol display device 208 to the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P, and is shown toward the second hold icon h12.

After that, as shown in FIG. 151(d), in the secondary decorative symbol display device 208P, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, and the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. There is. The effect EF2 overlaps a part of the first hold icon h11 that is displayed adjacently.

After that, as shown in FIG. 151(e), in the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is again easily visually displayed as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. To be done. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a state of lighting in green. Here, a change in the display mode of the hold icon may be notified by voice output.

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, FIGS. 152(a-1) to (a-6) show a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is being performed while the error display is being performed. In FIG. 152(b), it is shown that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is being performed while the effect display is being performed across the plurality of decorative symbol display devices. FIGS. 152(d-1) to (c-1) to FIG. 152(d-1) show that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed by operating the effect button 136 in FIGS. In the same drawing (d-3), a state is shown in which an effect of prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 and changing the display mode of the hold icon while the button effect is being performed is being performed.

The production example shown in FIG. 152(a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 140(d) and described above, except that an error display is performed. Therefore, only the different points will be described in detail, Detailed explanations of other parts are omitted.

In Fig. 152(a-1), when the lower plate is full, the character "Please remove the ball" is displayed to inform that the lower plate full error has occurred. It is shown that the tan error display ER is displayed. The lower plate full tank error display ER is an example of the error display in the present embodiment, and other error displays include, for example, a door open display that notifies that the front frame door 106 is open. Such an error display is displayed prior to other displays because it is necessary to promptly inform the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152(a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the lower plate full tank error display ER is shown as overlapping with a part of the balloon portion TT2. Note that such an error display is continuously displayed until the error is resolved.

After that, as shown in FIG. 152(a-2), the state in which the family crest monument 224E is raised from the initial position and overlaps with the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. In FIG. 152(a-2), since the family crest 224E is arranged in front of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, a part of the lower plate full tank error display ER is overlapped with the family crest 224E. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the lower plate full tank error display ER as compared with a state in which part of the lower plate full tank error display ER is not overlapped with the family coat emblem 224E.

After that, as shown in FIG. 152(a-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an extended animation of the reserved display frame FL1 is performed, and the reserved display frame FL1 expands upward, and thus, the family crest actor 224E. The appearance is shown above. In this effect example, since the error display is displayed with priority over the hold display frame FL1, a part of the hold display frame FL1 overlaps the lower plate full tank error display ER, and a part of the hold display frame FL1. Is difficult to visually recognize as compared with a state where the lower plate full tank error display ER is not overlapped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 152(a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper portion of the reserved display frame FL1 is shown. Note that a part of the ninja character NJ1 overlaps the lower plate full tank error display ER, and it is difficult to see when compared with a state in which a part of the ninja character NJ1 does not overlap the lower plate full tank error display ER. It is said that.

FIG. 152(a-5) shows a state in which the family crest monument 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, the portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E is enlarged. However, since a part of the ninja character NJ1 is still overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER, compared with a state where a part of the ninja character NJ1 is not overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER. It is difficult to visually recognize the character NJ1. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. This shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives a pre-reading notice.

After that, FIG. 152(a-6) shows a state in which the family crest monument 224E is returned to the initial position. Then, the overlapping state of the family crest 224E with respect to the hold display frame FL1, the variable icon h0, and the ninja character NJ1 is canceled. However, since the lower plate full tank error is still continuing, the lower plate full tank error display ER is still displayed, and the ninja character NJ1 displayed in a part of the reserved display frame FL1 and the extended part of the reserved display frame FL1 is displayed. Part of it overlaps the lower plate full tank error display ER. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the shuriken SH1 is facing the second hold icon h12 is shown.

In FIG. 152(b), the notice display YK is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the state of scrolling to the left is shown. Has been done. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expanded portion, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed. The situation is shown. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 152(b), the second hold icon h12 is in the display mode of the prefetching notice. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the character display of "enemy is invading" is displayed, and the content related to the notice display YK is displayed. In this effect example, since the effect display of the display mode of the hold icon is given priority over the notice display YK, a part of the notice display YK is overlapped with the extended hold display frame FL1.

In FIG. 152(c-1), as an example of the display mode of the prefetching notice, it is shown that the second hold icon h12 is a button hold icon that is a display mode imitating the effect button 136. In addition, in this example of performance, the character CH1 of Chibihime and the character GY1 of the grandfather are not displayed, and the tutorial display unit TT1 is in a non-display state. Although the button image 136a is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a may be displayed. Further, since the button hold icon is displayed at a position apart from the hold display frame FL1, it can be said that even when the hold display frame FL1 is enlarged, the display does not overlap. The display mode of the hold icon of the button may be displayed when the hold is increased, or may be changed from another display mode (for example, the default display mode) after the hold is increased.

After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 152(c-2), the second hold icon h12 changes from the button hold icon as shown in FIG. 152(c-3). It changes to the hold icon in the display mode of the lord's character. It should be noted that the operation of the effect button 136 is in a receivable state on condition that the symbol is changing, and cannot be accepted during the symbol stop display, but the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted even during the symbol stop display. Good.

FIG. 152(d-1) shows a state in which an effect for changing the display mode of the hold icon is being performed while the button effect is being performed. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the center, and a remaining time display bar indicating the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is below the button image 136a. It is displayed. That is, the button effect is performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expanded portion, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is also performed. .. In this example of effect, since the effect display for changing the display mode of the hold icon is displayed with priority over the button effect, the button image 136a and a part of the remaining time display bar are expanded and displayed in the hold display frame FL1. It is overlapped. Further, while the button effect is being performed, the first decorative symbol is not displayed, and therefore the button effect can be said to be an effect that does not overlap the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is the button effect. It can be said that the productions do not overlap. At this time, when the above-described error display is performed, the button effect and the hold display frame FL1 are displayed in priority. When the above-mentioned button hold icon is displayed, the button image 136a is displayed in front of the button image 136a and the remaining time display bar, and is displayed in front of the hold display frame FL1. Alternatively, it may be displayed behind the remaining time display bar, or may be displayed behind the hold display frame FL1.

After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 152(d-2), as shown in FIG. 152(d-3), the cut-in in which the lord's character is displayed up is displayed. Display may occur. By performing this cut-in display, the player may be able to recognize that the jackpot is highly reliable. In this effect example, since the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is displayed with priority over the cut-in effect, a part of the cut-in image is overlapped and displayed in the hold display frame FL1 that is displayed in an expanded manner. .. At this time, when the above-mentioned error display is performed, the cut-in display and the hold display frame FL1 are displayed in priority. Further, when the above-mentioned button hold icon is displayed, it is displayed on the front side of the cut-in display and on the front side of the hold display frame FL1, but on the back side of the cut-in display. It may be displayed, or may be displayed on the back side of the hold display frame FL1.

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the symbol variable display applicable to the present embodiment. Here, the effect examples shown in FIGS. 153(a-1) to (a-5) do not include a sub display device, and effect display is performed only by the decorative pattern display device 208 as the main display device. FIG. 153(b-1) to FIG. 153(b-2) show a state in which an error display is performed. Also, FIG. 153(c) shows that the display positions of the variable icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed in the reserved display frame FL1, and FIGS. 153(d-1) to 153(d). -2) shows that a hold display frame is displayed in the hold icon display area.

153(a-1) is different from the above-described embodiment in that only the decorative symbol display device 208 as the main display device is provided and the sub display device is not provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 153(a-1), the UI unit is arranged at the bottom of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the second decorative pattern is displayed at the upper left of the display screen, and the display screen is also displayed. In the upper right of the, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed.

Further, the family crest actor 224E is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor symbol 224Fb are disposed above the decorative symbol display device 208.

As shown in FIG. 153(a-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2", and fluctuation fluctuation is performed. Further, the variable display is performed in the second decorative pattern. Further, in the UI unit, the hold display frame FL1 accommodating the variable icon h0 is displayed, and two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden.

After that, as shown in FIG. 153(a-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display in which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 move from the left and right of the display screen toward the center is performed. In this example of the effect, images that imitate sliding doors are used as the wipe images WP1 and WP2, and as the wipe display, an effect display in which the sliding doors are closed is displayed. Here, the wipe refers to a video effect in which an image to be displayed next is interrupted from a part of the display screen when the image is switched. There are various types of wipe techniques, but any technique can be applied. In this example of performance, the wipe display is performed by the wipe images WP1 and WP2 after the shaking fluctuation is started by the combination of the decorative patterns with the loss, but the wipe display is performed at the timing when the shaking fluctuation ends and the confirmation display is performed. May be performed. In addition, for example, it may be performed when the stage is changed, or may be performed when shifting to the super reach effect, and can be performed at an appropriate timing. The wipe images WP1 and WP2 are overlapped with the UI portion and the first decorative symbol, while being overlapped with the second decorative symbol, the second reserved number display and the fourth symbol. At the timing shown in FIG. 153(a-2), the two hold icons h11 and h12 and the hold display frame FL1 displayed in the hold icon display area are not overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2. The variable icon h0 is deleted at the timing when the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are displayed. Here, the change icon h0 may be deleted at a timing before the display of the wipe images WP1 and WP2 is started, or at the same timing as the start of the display of the wipe images WP1 and WP2. It may be present, or it may be a timing later than the timing when the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are started to be displayed. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

FIG. 153(a-3) shows that the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are further moving toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 153(a-3), the two hold icons h11 and h12 displayed in the hold icon display area overlap the wipe image WP1, but the hold display frame FL1 shows the wipe image WP1. , WP2 is not overlapped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 153(a-4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire display screen is covered with the wipe images WP1 and WP2, and a state in which the fixed symbol is definitely displayed is displayed. Therefore, the entire hold display frame FL1 is in a state of being entirely overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2. In addition, the second decorative pattern displayed on the upper left of the display screen is a combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" in accordance with the combination of the decorative patterns displayed at the time of fluctuation of the first decorative pattern. It is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol is also stopped and displayed with a missing symbol.

After that, when the hold is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 is started, the wipe display in which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are framed out in the left-right direction of the display screen is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Be seen. As a result, the UI portion is visible, and the hold display frame FL1 is also visible. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol have begun variably displayed. At this time, for example, by the hold movement animation, the first hold icon displayed as the first hold icon h11 moves to the hold display frame FL1 and is displayed as the variable icon h0. Further, the second hold icon that was displayed as the second hold icon h12 also moves to the display position of the first hold icon and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the character display "Panda is master of lord" is displayed.

FIG. 153(b-1) to FIG. 153(b-2) show that the wipe display is being performed during the display of the error display. 153(a-1) to FIG. 153(a-3) to FIG. 153(b-3) to FIG. 153(b-2) except that the lower plate full tank error display ER is displayed. Since it is the same as that of a-4), only the different points will be described in detail, and detailed description of other points will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 153(b-1) to FIG. 153(b-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the lower plate full tank error display ER described above overlaps with the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Has been done. Such an error display is displayed prior to other displays because it is necessary to promptly inform the player. Therefore, also in the case shown in FIG. 153(b-1), the lower plate full tank error display ER is given priority over the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Note that, as shown in FIG. 153(b-2), even when the symbol is confirmed and displayed, the lower plate full tank error display ER is not erased and is displayed overlapping the wipe images WP1 and WP2. .. The error display such as the lower plate full tank error display ER may be overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2.

FIG. 153(c) shows that the display positions of the variable icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed in the hold display frame FL1. Here, FIG. 153(c) is the same as FIG. 140(i) except that the display positions of the variable icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed, so only the different points will be described in detail, and the others. The detailed description is omitted. In the effect example shown in FIG. 153(c), for example, when an extension animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the change icon h0 moves upward with the extension of the hold display frame FL1, and from the back side of the change icon h0. The effect is such that the ninja character NJ1 appears. As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that the display position of the variable icon h0 is changed when the hold display frame FL1 is expanded.

In FIG. 153(d-1), a hold display frame FL4 that surrounds the second hold icon h12 that is the subject of the prefetching notice is displayed, and this hold display frame FL4 expands upward and the ninja appears in the expanded portion. It is shown that the character NJ3 is displayed. In addition, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 153 (d-1), a hold display frame FL4 surrounding the second hold icon h12 is displayed, and the hold display frame FL4 is not displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1. Since it is the same as that of b), only different points will be described in detail, and detailed description of other points will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 153(d-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL4 is displayed so as to surround the second hold icon h12 which is the display mode of the prefetching notice. This hold display frame FL4 is, for example, in a default display mode having a size that matches the size of the second hold icon h12, is framed in from below the display screen, and is moved to a position surrounding the second hold icon h12. After that, a display in which the hold display frame FL4 is expanded upward is performed by the expanded animation in the above-described manner. Then, the ninja character NJ3 is displayed in the extended portion of the extended hold display frame FL4, and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as described above. It should be noted that both the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL1 and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL4 are performed. May be overlapped, or the times when both effects are performed may not be overlapped.

In addition, when the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is being performed, the symbol is stopped and displayed, and when the next symbol variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 153 (d-2), The hold display frame FL4 also moves in accordance with the movement of the hold icon. In this case, for example, when the symbol stop display is performed, the extended reserved display frame FL4 is reduced to change to the default display mode, and then the symbol is fixedly displayed. Then, the hold display frame FL4 of the default display mode is moved in accordance with the movement of the second hold icon h12 by the moving animation, and the variable display of symbols is started. After that, the hold display frame FL4 is expanded upward by expanding the hold display frame FL4. The hold display frame FL4 may be moved in this manner. Further, at the time of the symbol stop display, the hold display frame FL4 may be erased once, and the hold display frame FL4 may be displayed again after the next symbol variable display is started. Further, the display of the hold display frame FL4 may be maintained in an expanded state even at the time of the symbol stop display, and the hold display frame FL4 may be moved in accordance with the movement display of the second hold icon h12 by the moving animation.

FIG. 154 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the expansion effect of the hold display frame. Here, FIGS. 154(a-1) to 154(a-4) show that the tutorial display unit TT6 serving as a hold display frame is expanded, and FIGS. 154(b-1) to 154(a-1). In b-5), a state in which the hold display frame accommodating the hold icon is extendedly displayed and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed is shown.

As shown in FIG. 154(a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the center of the pending display frame. It is displayed in a state of being housed in the FL1, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 154(a-1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 both have default display modes. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, in this effect example, the tutorial display section TT6 extends in the left-right direction along the lower edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is arranged below the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area. .. Then, in the tutorial display section TT6, the character display "Panda is master of the lord" is displayed, and a state in which the explanation display is displayed is shown. In this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT6 may function as a hold display frame.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 154(a-1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed. Note that the button image 136a is not displayed in this effect example.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is riding on the stage, and at the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and special figure 1 And the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

In addition, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb are arranged. Has been done.

FIG. 154(a-2) shows that the tutorial display unit TT6 is expanded upward, and the holding display frame FL1 and the holding icon display region are pushed upward to expand the range of the tutorial display unit TT6. ing. Further, in the expanded tutorial display section TT6, a drinker confrontation reach effect is started. At this time, the first decorative symbol that has been variably displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the variable display is continued. Therefore, in this effect example, it can be said that the area where the display of the decorative pattern is not disturbed is expanded. In other words, by moving the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area, the area below the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area (lower area) is expanded. The display that is performed in the lower area is a decorative pattern that is displayed in a variable manner, for example, a dialogue display such as a conversation notice, a notice display, or a display that does not overlap with the effect of the change in the display of the hold icon. Can be said. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a character display of "SP development by victory" is displayed, and the content of the effect performed when the win in the drink-drink confrontation reach effect is informed. In the production of a drinker confrontation reach, a competition between the main character and the grandfather will be compared, and if the grandfather gets drunk, it will be announced that the main character will win and that SP will be reached. It should be noted that, when the drinking drink confrontation reach effect is started, the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area may be hidden, or the hold display frame FL1 may be displayed and the hold icon display area may be hidden. May be.

In FIG. 154(a-3), a state where the drinking drink confrontation reach effect is continuously performed is shown.

After that, as shown in FIG. 154(a-4), when shifting to the SP reach, the grandfather is drunk and an effect display in which the main character's lord has won is displayed. On the other hand, when the result of the loss is displayed without shifting to the SP reach, as shown in FIG. 154(a-4′), the hero's lord is drunk and the hero's lord is defeated by the grandfather. Is done. Note that the tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 154(a-1) may be configured not to perform the effect display performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 of the state of FIG. 154(a-2). The tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 154(a-2) may be configured not to display the explanation display performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 of the state of FIG. 154(a-1). Further, in the state shown in FIG. 154(a-2), the hold icon and the variable icon may be hidden.

As shown in FIG. 154(b-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit UI2 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the UI unit UI2 in this example of performance, a hold icon display area is formed on the left side. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, each of which constitutes a hold display frame, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 154(b-1), four hold icons are accommodated in each frame in the hold icon display area, and among the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14. The second hold icon h12 is a display mode of the prefetching notice (for example, a display mode of lighting in blue), and the other hold icons are default display modes. Further, a variable icon display area is formed above the frame accommodating the first hold icon h11, and the variable icon h0 is displayed in this variable icon display area during symbol variable display. Here, the area in which the variable icon h0 is displayed may be included in the UI unit UI2. A tutorial display section TT7 is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 154(b-1), the tutorial display section TT7 displays the character display of "Delivery of notice icon...", which indicates that notice production is performed. The tutorial display unit TT7 may display an explanation. It should be noted that none of the variable icon h0 and the first holding icon h11 to the fourth holding icon h14 overlaps the decorative symbol.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen. In addition, in this example of performance, the stage name display portion and the button image 136a are not displayed.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is riding on the stage, and at the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and special figure 1 And the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is displayed.

In addition, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb are arranged. Has been done. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 154(b-1), the family crest monument 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154(b-2), the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The hold icon display area can be enlarged and displayed by, for example, an animation display that gradually enlarges. At the timing shown in FIG. 154(b-2), the hold display frame accommodating the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the prefetch notice, is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the hold display frame accommodating the second hold icon h12 is displayed in an expanded form. At the timing shown in FIG. 154(b-2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 154(b-3), the emission color of the family crest monument 224E that has emitted blue light changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is changed from blue to green.

Then, as shown in FIG. 154(b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the enlarged second hold icon h12 is changed from blue to green. As a result, the player may be able to increase his/her expectation for the big hit for the variable display of symbols relating to the suspension corresponding to the second suspension icon h12.

Then, as shown in FIG. 154(b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced and the default display mode is restored. The reduction display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually reduces. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this way, and the display mode of the hold icon can be changed with the expanded hold display frame.

Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to Examples 1 to 9 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to Examples 1 to 9 will be described with reference to FIG. 155(a). As shown in FIG. 155(a), the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment replaces the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 with a first display device 800, a second display device 802, and a third display device 802. Display device 804. The first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804 are arranged in the rendering device 206 of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 66. In this embodiment, liquid crystal display devices are used as the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804, but various effects and various games can be used even if they are not liquid crystal display devices. It suffices if it is configured to be able to display information, for example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, Other display devices, including projectors, may be used.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the first to ninth examples includes a production movable body 806, a production movable body 808, and a production movable body 810. Rendering movable body 806, rendering movable body 808, and rendering movable body 810 are arranged in rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 66.

Here, the positional relationship among the first display device 800, the second display device 802, the third display device 804, the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 will be described. .. After that, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, a position relatively close to the player facing the pachinko machine 100 is described as “front”, and a position farther from the player than the “front” is. It is written as "after". Therefore, for example, one closer to the player is referred to as “front”, and one farther from the player than the “front” is referred to as “rear”. The side closer to the player is referred to as the “front side”, and the side farther from the player than the “front side” is referred to as the “rear side”. Further, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed on, for example, an island facility, the horizontal left side as viewed from the player is defined as “left” (left side, left side, left end, etc.), and vice versa is “right” (right side, right side). , Right edge, etc.).

The first display device 800 is arranged substantially in the center of the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 66, the second display device 802 is arranged to the left of the first display device 800, and the third display device 804. Are arranged on the right side of the first display device 800. The second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are arranged in front of the first display device 800. The positions of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 in the front-rear direction are the same.

The effect movable body 806 is arranged on the upper left side of the first display device 800, and the effect movable body 808 is arranged on the upper right side of the first display device 800. The effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 are arranged adjacent to each other. The positions of the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 in the front-rear direction are the same and are on the front side of the first display device 800.

The effect movable body 810 is arranged below the first display device 800. The position of the production movable body 810 in the front-rear direction is the front side of the first display device 800.

These display devices and effect movable bodies are, from the rear side, a first display device 800, a second display device 802 and a third display device 806, an effect movable body 806, an effect movable body 808, and an effect movable body 810. They are arranged in order. Note that the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 may have the same position in the front-rear direction, or the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 are arranged in front of the effect movable body 810. May be. Further, the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 may be arranged in front of the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810.

The first display device 800 has a horizontally long rectangular display area. The first display device 800 is, as shown in FIG. 68(c), "decoration 1"→"decoration 2"→"decoration 3"→... "decoration 9"→"decoration 10"→"decoration 1"→ It is possible to execute the variable display of the decorative symbol for switching the display of each of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol in the order of. During the stop display of the decorative symbol, the first display device 800 displays the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in this order from the left in a horizontal row. In the example shown in FIG. 155(a), the first display device 800 stops and displays the symbol combination "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit.

A game information display area a is provided below the display area of the first display device 800. The lower end side of the game information display area a coincides with the lower end side of the display area of the first display device 800, the left end side of the game information display area a coincides with the left end side of the display area, and the game information display area The right edge of a coincides with the right edge of the display area. At the center of the game information display area a, a variable icon display area b surrounded by a square frame is provided. The variable icon is displayed in the variable icon display area b. The variation icon is an icon displayed in the variation icon display area b when the hold is exhausted and the special figure variation game is started. By changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon, it is possible to notify (the fluctuation notice) whether or not the special figure fluctuation game is successful with a predetermined jackpot reliability (expectancy). In the example shown in FIG. 155(a), the variable icon f1 is displayed in a white (indicated by dot hatching) circular display mode. The white circular display mode is the default display mode, and is the display mode with the lowest jackpot reliability among the plurality of display modes.

In the game information display area a and to the left of the variable icon display area b, a special figure 1 hold icon display area c is provided. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, the number of hold icons of the special figure 1 corresponding to the number of hold of the special figure 1 can be displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, it is possible to notify the number of holdings of the special figure 1 variable game by the number of holding icons of the special figure 1, and the special figure relating to the holding by the display mode of each holding icon. It is possible to notify (prefetch advance notice) with a predetermined jackpot reliability (expectation) whether or not one variation game is won.

The special figure 1 hold icon display area c is roughly divided into four areas from the right to the left, that is, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Each of the first to fourth areas corresponds to the first to fourth reservation orders, respectively. That is, the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 corresponding to the earliest (the most memorized in the past) hold can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, the second to fourth areas can hold the second to fourth hold icons. The hold icon of the special figure 1 corresponding to the hold can be displayed.

An elliptical pedestal image indicating the display position of the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is displayed below each of the first to fourth regions. In the example shown in FIG. 155(a), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is three, and the hold icons g1, g2, g3 in the first area, the second area, and the third area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. Are displayed respectively. The hold icons g1, g2, and g3 are displayed so as to overlap the top of the pedestal image. In the example shown in FIG. 155(a), the hold icons g1, g2, and g3 are displayed in a white (indicated by dot hatching) circular display mode. The white circular display mode is the default display mode, and is the display mode with the lowest jackpot reliability among the plurality of display modes. It should be noted that the special figure 1 hold icon, which indicates that the special figure 1 prefetch result is “undetermined”, may be displayed in the default display mode. In this case, the reliability of the default display mode is not set.

As shown in FIG. 155(a), the hold icon is displayed in a display size smaller than that of the variable icon. This may facilitate identification of the hold icon and the variable icon.

As shown in FIG. 155(a), a special figure 2 hold icon display area d is provided in the game information display area a and to the right of the variable icon display area b. In the special figure 2 hold icon display area d, the number of hold icons of the special figure 2 corresponding to the number of hold of the special figure 2 can be displayed. In the special figure 2 hold icon display area d, it is possible to notify the number of holds of the special figure 2 variable game by the number of hold icons of the special figure 2, and the special figure relating to the hold by the display mode of each hold icon. 2 It is possible to notify (pre-reading notice) whether or not the variation game is won with a predetermined jackpot reliability (expectation).

In the example shown in FIG. 155(a), since the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area d. When the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0, as shown in FIG. 155(a), a horizontally long rectangular display area e is provided so as to overlap a part of the special figure 2 hold icon display area d. To be In the display area e, it is possible to display a tutorial display and a notice display such as a description of a game method and effect contents, a description of a character, and the like in a character image. As shown in FIG. 155(a), during the stop display of the decorative pattern, the character image is not displayed in the display area e, and the tutorial display and the notice display are not executed in the display area e. As described above, during the stop display of the decorative pattern, the tutorial display or the notice display may not be displayed in the display area e. In addition, when the number of holdings of special figure 2 is 1 or more, or when the game state is the electric support state, the display area e does not have to be provided, and within the display area of the first display device 800. Therefore, the display area e may be provided at a position that does not overlap the special figure 2 hold icon display area d, or the display area e may be provided in the second display device 802 or the third display device 804. Good.

In the example shown in FIG. 155(a), the castle town stage is set as the effect stage. On the first display device 800, a background image of the castle town corresponding to the castle town stage (hereinafter referred to as “castle town background”) is displayed. The background image is displayed on the bottom of the display area of the first display device 800. The first display device 800 can display a background image corresponding to the current effect stage, effect mode, and game state.

The second display device 802 has a vertically long rectangular display area. The vertical length of the display area of the second display device 802 is shorter than the vertical length of the display area of the first display device 800, and the display area of the second display device 802 is smaller than that of the first display device 800. It is smaller than the display area. On the upper part of the display area of the second display device 802, a mini decorative pattern having a smaller display size than the decorative pattern displayed on the first display device 800 is displayed. In FIG. 155 and thereafter, the mini decorative design is illustrated in a simplified manner than the decorative design displayed on the first display device 800. The display mode of the mini decorative design may be different from the display mode of the decorative design displayed on the first display device 800. On the second display device 802, it is possible to display three mini-decorative symbols of a left symbol, a middle symbol and a right symbol arranged in this order from left to right. During execution of the special figure 1 or special figure 2 variation game, each pattern on the left middle right is "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" →... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → The variable display of the mini decorative pattern that is switched in the order of “decoration 1”→... Is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 155(a), the second display device 802 has a pattern combination "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, as in the case of the first display device 800. It is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 155(a), a reception count display 850 showing the reception count of the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed in the center of the display area of the second display device 802. In the example shown in FIG. 155(a), the number of times of acceptance of the character string image “850 times” is displayed 850, and the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is zero. A button image 852 simulating the chance button 136 is displayed in the display area of the second display device 850 and below the number-of-acceptances display 850. Three lines are drawn in the button image 852 at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the button image 852 is divided into four regions. The button image 852 also functions as a meter by changing the display color of these divided areas from white to green, for example. In the example shown in FIG. 155(a), all four areas of the button image 852 are displayed in white and the meter is 0. The specific contents of the effect using the reception count display 850 and the button image 852 will be described later.

In the lower part of the display area of the second display device 802, a horizontally long rectangular frame image is displayed, and in the frame image, information about the current performance stage is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 155(a), since the effect stage is the castle town stage, the character string image of "castle town" is displayed in the frame image.

A background image of the castle town background is displayed on the second display device 802. The background image is displayed on the back of the display area of the second display device 802. The second display device 802 can display a background image corresponding to the current effect stage, effect mode, and game state.

Full-color LEDs are arranged on the outer peripheral portion (frame portion) of the display area of the second display device 802. By causing the full-color LED to emit a predetermined color, it is possible to perform a predetermined effect, notification, or the like.

As shown in FIG. 155(a), the third display device 804 has a vertically long rectangular display area having the same size as the second display device 802. The vertical length of the display area of the second display device 802 is shorter than the vertical length of the display area of the first display device 800. In the upper left portion of the display area of the third display device 804, a number indicating the number of reserved special maps is displayed. The numbers displayed on the left side indicate the number of reservations of special figure 1, and the numbers displayed on the right side indicate the number of reservations of special figure 2. In the example shown in FIG. 155(a), the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 3 and the number of reservations in Toku-zu 2 is 0. And the number "0" are displayed.

The fourth symbol is displayed in the upper right portion of the display area of the third display device 804. The fourth symbol is a symbol showing whether or not the special figure variation game is being executed. The square-shaped fourth symbol displayed on the left side is the fourth symbol for special figure 1, and the circular fourth symbol displayed on the right side is the fourth symbol for special figure 2. During execution of the special figure 1 variation game, the fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed in white, and during execution of the special figure 1 variation game, the fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed in black. Similarly, during execution of the special figure 2 variation game, the fourth symbol for the special figure 2 is displayed in white, and during execution of the special figure 2 variation game, the fourth symbol for the special figure 2 is displayed in black. .. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), since both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 variation game are not being executed, both the fourth symbol for the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol for the special figure 2 It is displayed in black. In addition, when the special symbol 1 of the big hit symbol mode is stopped and displayed, the fourth symbol for the special symbol 1 may be displayed in a predetermined color other than black. Similarly, when the special design 2 of the big hit symbol mode is stopped and displayed, the fourth design for the special design 2 may be displayed in a predetermined color other than black.

In the lower part of the display area of the third display device 804, a character image of a lord on a cylindrical stage is displayed. It is possible to execute predetermined effects and notifications using the character image of the lord.

Also, the background of the castle town is displayed on the third display device 804. The background image is displayed on the back of the display area of the third display device 804. The third display device 804 can display a background image corresponding to the current effect stage, game state, and effect mode.

A full-color LED is arranged on the outer peripheral portion (frame portion) of the display area of the third display device 804. By causing the full-color LED to emit a predetermined color, it is possible to perform a predetermined effect, notification, or the like.

The second display device 802 may display a decorative pattern, a variable icon, a hold icon, a tutorial display, a number-holding number display, or a fourth pattern, or the third display device 804 may display a decorative pattern or a variable icon. Alternatively, a hold icon, a tutorial display, a reception count display, a button image, a mini decorative design, or information on the current performance stage may be displayed. It should be noted that the first display device 800 may display a mini decorative design, a reception count display, a button image, information on the current effect stage, a fourth design, or a hold count display by numbers.

The display control of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804 is executed by the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. Note that a control unit (for example, a liquid crystal control unit) that executes display control of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804 may be separately provided. The emission control of the LEDs provided on the second display device 804 and the third display device 806 is executed by the second sub control unit 500 shown in FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 155(a), the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are located at their initial positions. The second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are driven by, for example, a stepping motor, and are located on the front side of the display area of the first display device 800 in the plane parallel to the display area, respectively. Can be moved from left to right. Drive control (movement control) of the second display device 804 and the third display device 806 is executed by the second sub control unit 500 shown in FIG. The initial positions of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are positions symmetrical to each other with respect to a virtual straight line that passes through the center of the display area of the first display device 800 and extends in the vertical direction. In addition, a virtual straight line extending in the horizontal direction passing through the center of the display area of the first display device 800 and the second display device 802 and the second display device 802 are located at positions passing through the center of the display area of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804. Three display devices 804 are arranged. The right end portion of the second display device 802 located at the initial position overlaps a part of the left end portion of the display area of the first display device 800 when viewed from the front. Similarly, the left end portion of the third display device 804 located at the initial position overlaps a part of the right end portion of the display area of the first display device 800 when viewed from the front.

In the example shown in FIG. 155(a), the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 are located at the initial position. The effect movable body 806 is relatively arranged on the left side, and the effect movable body 808 is relatively arranged on the right side. The effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 have the same vertical position in the initial position. The production movable body 806 and the production movable body 808 have horizontally long rectangular plates of the same size, and are arranged so that the plate surface is orthogonal to a virtual straight line extending in the front-rear direction. The character "Yatsushiro" is written on the plate surface of the production movable body 806, and the character "General" is written on the plate surface of the production movable body 808.

The production movable body 806 and the production movable body 808 are driven by, for example, a stepping motor, and are in the front side of the display area of the first display device 800 and in a plane parallel to the display area from the respective initial positions in the vertical direction. Can be moved. In addition, the production movable body 806 and the production movable body 808 may operate integrally or individually during operation. Further, the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 have full-color LEDs, and the predetermined effect or notification can be executed by causing the full-color LEDs to emit light. In the example shown in FIG. 155(a), the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 emit white light (indicated by dot hatching in the figure).

The effect movable body 810 has a circular shape, and the surface thereof is decorated with a family crest. In the example shown in FIG. 155(a), the production movable body 810 is located at the initial position. The effect production movable body 810 is driven by, for example, a stepping motor, and is movable in the vertical direction from the respective initial positions in the front side of the display area of the first display device 800 and in the plane parallel to the display area. In addition, the production movable body 810 has a full-color LED, and the full-color LED can be caused to emit light to perform a predetermined production or notification. In the example shown in FIG. 155(a), the production movable body 810 emits white light (indicated by dot hatching in the figure).

Drive control (movement control) of the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. 67. The light emission control of the LEDs provided on the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 is executed by the second sub control unit 500 shown in FIG. 67.

155(a) and the subsequent figures, the components necessary for the explanation among the components of the pachinko machine 100 are extracted and shown in the region on the paper surface delimited by the alternate long and short dash line. As shown in each of FIG. 155(a) and subsequent figures, the speaker 120 is schematically illustrated in the upper left part of the drawing, the chance button 136 is schematically illustrated in the lower left part of the drawing, and the general winning is shown in the lower right part of the drawing. The mouth 226 is schematically illustrated.

Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each figure of FIG. 155 is a figure which shows this production example in time series. FIG. 155(a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the hit/miss determination result of the special figure 1 variation game is out of order, "decoration 6-decoration 2" -"Decorative 2" is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed.

At the time point shown in FIG. 155(a), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 3 and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0. In the upper left part of the display area of the third display device 804, the number of holdings is displayed by the numbers “3” and “0”. The variable icon f1 displayed in the variable icon display area b is erased during the stop display of the decorative symbol. The variable icon f1 may be deleted at the same time as the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished, or may be deleted at the same time as the next variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

During the game, a predetermined BGM is output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 emits white light (indicated by dot hatching in the figure).

155 (b) continued from FIG. 155 (a), with the start of the special figure 1 variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (first special figure display device 212) not shown in FIG. 155 and thereafter, The variable display of the decorative pattern and the variable display of the mini decorative pattern have been started. In each figure, the variable display of the decorative design and the variable display of the mini decorative design are represented by downward black arrows.

Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the variation icon deletion animation is executed, and the variation icon f1 is deleted. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reduction animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c changes to the change icon f2. Moved to the icon display area b, the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and changed to the special figure 1 hold icon The hold icon g3 displayed in the third area of the display area c moves to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time point shown in FIG. 155(b), the reduction animation of the hold icon has ended, and the movement of the variable icon f2 and the hold icons g2, g3 has been completed.

Further, along with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the tutorial display is started in the display area e. In this example, a character string image "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed in the display area e, and the panda character is explained.

FIG. 155(c) continuing from FIG. 155(b) shows a state immediately before one game ball is won in the general winning opening 226. FIG. 155(d) continuing from FIG. 155(c) shows a state in which the meter of the button image 852 has increased by one in response to the fact that one game ball has won in the general winning opening 226. More specifically, the leftmost area of the four areas of the button image 852 changes from white to green (indicated by diagonal cross hatching in the figure). In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, each time one gaming ball is won in the general winning opening 226, one of the four divided areas of the button image 852 changes from white to green and the meter is displayed. Is increased by 1.

The five vertically aligned dots shown in FIG. 155(e) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 155(d). In this example, the special figure 1 variation game started in FIG. 155(b) is being executed, and two gaming balls have been won in the general winning opening 226 after FIG. 155(d).

FIG. 155(f) shows a state after two game balls have been won in the general winning opening 226. In response to the winning of two game balls in the general winning opening 226, two more areas of the button image 852 change from white to green and the meter increases by 2. At this point the meter value is 3.

After the time point shown in FIG. 155(f), one game ball is won in the general winning opening 226. FIG. 155(g) shows the state following FIG. 155(f). In response to the winning of one game ball in the general winning opening 226, one more area of the button image 852 changes from white to green, the meter increases by 1, and the meter becomes full. In this example, when a total of four game balls are won in the general winning opening 226, the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted (hereinafter, may be referred to as “reception number”) is increased by one. The received content display 850 has the display content updated to the character string image of "1 more time", and it is notified that the number of accepted times of the chance button 136 has increased from 0 to 1. In the button image 852, after the meter is full, all four areas change from green to white and the meter value is reset to zero. Note that the meter of the button image 852 may be reset at the same time as the display content of the acceptance count display 850 is updated, or before the display content is updated, It may be after the display content is updated. In this example, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started when the number of times the chance button 136 is received has increased from 0 to 1. It should be noted that when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, the chance button 136 may emit red light. The red light emission of the chance button 136 may start at the same time as the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, after the start of the operation valid period, or immediately before the start of the operation valid period. May be.

The five dots arranged vertically in FIG. 155(h) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 155(g). In this example, the special figure 1 variation game started in FIG. 155(b) is being executed, and after FIG. 155(g), eight more game balls have been won in the general winning opening 226.

FIG. 155(i) shows a state after eight more game balls have been won in the general winning opening 226. The number of times the chance button 136 is received is increased by two in response to the eight winning game balls in the general winning opening 226. The display content of the reception count display 850 is updated to a character string image of "3 more times", and it is notified that the reception count of the chance button 136 has increased to 3 times. In the button image 852, all four areas are displayed in white and the meter is reset to 0.

FIG. 155(j) continuing from FIG. 155(i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game started in FIG. 155(b) is finished. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the hit/miss determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order, "decoration 3-decoration 2" -"Decorative 2" is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed. During the stop display of the decorative pattern, the character image is not displayed in the display area e and the tutorial display is not executed. The timing of erasing the character image in the display area e may be the same as the start of the stop display of the decorative pattern, may be immediately before the start of the stop display of the decorative pattern, or the stop display of the decorative pattern is in progress. May be.

155 (k) continued from FIG. 155 (j), with the start of the special figure 1 variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the variable display of the mini decorative pattern is started. The state is shown. In each figure, the variable display of the decorative design and the variable display of the mini decorative design are represented by downward black arrows.

Prior to the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the fluctuation icon deletion animation is executed, and the fluctuation icon f2 is deleted. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reduction animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon g2 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c changes to the change icon f3. The icon moves to the icon display area b, and the hold icon g3 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time point shown in FIG. 155(k), the reduction animation of the hold icon is completed, and the movement of the variable icon f3 and the hold icon g3 is completed.

Further, along with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the tutorial display is started in the display area e. In this example, a character string image "The Lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed in the display area e, and a description of the character of the Lord is given. In this way, the display contents of the tutorial display may be changed for each symbol variation display.

Further, on the second display device 802, a reception count display 850 is displayed by a character string image of “3 more times”. The number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 accumulated during the execution of the previous special figure variation game can be carried over to the next special figure variation game transition.

FIG. 155(l) subsequent to FIG. 155(k) shows a state in which the player has operated the chance button 136 once. FIG. 155(m) subsequent to FIG. 155(l) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is operated (pressed). In this example, the effect is not executed in response to the operation of the chance button 136. Since the chance button 136 is operated once, the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is reduced to twice. As a result, the display content of the acceptance count display 850 displayed on the second display device 802 is updated to “2 more times”.

The five vertically aligned dots shown in FIG. 155(n) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 155(m). In this example, after FIG. 155 (m), the chance button 136 is operated twice by the player during execution of the special figure 1 variation game started in FIG. 155 (k).

FIG. 155(o) shows a state after the player has operated the chance button 136 twice. In this example, no effect is executed in response to either of the two operations of the chance button 136. Since the chance button 136 is operated twice, the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is reduced to zero. As a result, the display content of the acceptance count display 850 displayed on the second display device 802 is updated to “0 more times”. In this example, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends when the number of times the chance button 136 is received decreases from once to zero. For example, even if the chance determination result related to the symbol variation display being executed is out of order, the chance button 136 may be operated or the effect may not be executed according to the operation.

FIG. 155(p) shows another pattern of the effect example continuing from FIG. 155(k). In this pattern, the notice effect of the change is executed in response to the operation of the chance button 136. In FIG. 155(p), the player has operated the chance button 136. Further, the variation icon f3 is displayed in a green circular display mode. When the variable icon and the hold icon are displayed in a predetermined color, the jackpot reliability is set to increase in the order of white, blue, green, and red. That is, the display mode with the lowest jackpot reliability is white, the display mode with the highest jackpot reliability is blue, the display method with the highest jackpot reliability is green, and the display method with the highest jackpot reliability is It is red. Therefore, the white circular variation icon f3 shown in FIG. 155(k) is displayed when the green circular variation icon f3 shown in FIG. 155(p) is displayed during execution of the symbol variation display. The jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display than in the case. The display mode of the variable icon f3 shown in FIG. 155(p) may be changed from white to green during execution of the symbol variable display, or the display mode may be changed from white to green at the start of the symbol variable display. It may be changed, the display mode may be changed from white to green during the period displayed as the hold icon f2 before the variable icon is displayed, and the hold icon f2 may be displayed in the green display mode from the beginning. May be.

FIG. 155(q) following FIG. 155(p) shows a state in which the player has operated the chance button 136 once. In this example, the notice effect of the change is executed according to the operation of the chance button 136. As the notice effect of the change, a notice image including a character image of “celebration” is displayed in the display area of the second display device 802 and above the button image 852, and the emission colors of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 are displayed. Changes from white to red (indicated by cross-hatching of vertical and horizontal lines in the figure), and the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect of "keen". The notice image is displayed so as to overlap the entire reception count display 850. It should be noted that the reception count display 850 may be erased while the notice image is being displayed. In addition, either the timing at which the notice image is started to be displayed or the timing at which the light emission color of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 changes from white to red may be first or may be simultaneous. Good. Note that the effect movable bodies 806 and 608 may execute a moving operation as a notice effect. For example, the production movable bodies 806 and 808 may move downward at the same time when the emission color changes to red, or may move downward after the emission color changes to red, or the emission color may change to red. You may move downwards before changing to.

Further, either one of the timing at which the advance notice image starts to be displayed and the timing at which the speaker 120 outputs the sound effect “Kean” may be first or may be the same. Further, either one of the timing at which the light emission color of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 changes to red and the timing at which the speaker 120 outputs the sound effect “Kean” may be first, or at the same time. It may be.

In this example, the notice image including the character image of “celebration” is a notice image for confirming the big hit, and is displayed only when the result of winning/decision determination relating to the symbol variation display being executed is the big hit. In the case where the hit/no hit determination result relating to the symbol variation display being executed is out of alignment, the effect is not executed in response to the chance button 136 being operated as shown in FIGS. 155(m) and (o). Alternatively, for example, a notice image including a character string image of “chance” may be displayed as a notice of the change. The advance notice image including the character string image of “chance” can be displayed even when the result of winning/decision determination relating to the symbol variation display being executed is a big hit. The notice image including the character string image of “chance” has a lower jackpot reliability than the notice image including the character image of “celebration”, and the notice image including the character image of “celebration” is displayed while the variable display is being executed. In the case of being displayed, the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display than in the case of displaying the notice image including the character string image of “chance”.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the notice effect in which the effect movable body emits red light is set to be relatively high. The light emission color of the effect movable body during the advance notice effect is set to have a high jackpot reliability in the order of white, blue, green, and red. During execution of the symbol variation display, the case where the production movable body emits red light and the notice production is executed is more than that when the production movable body emits blue light and the notice production is executed. There is a high probability that the jackpot pattern mode will be confirmed and displayed on the display.

In this embodiment, the notice effect of the change is executed in response to the first operation of the chance button 136, but the notice effect of the change may be executed in accordance with the second operation of the chance button 136. However, the notice effect of the change may be executed according to the third operation, or the notice effect of the change may be executed for each operation of the chance button 136. Incidentally. The effect executed in response to the operation of the chance button 136 may be a pre-reading notice effect.

In the present embodiment, the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted is increased by 1 each time four game balls are won in the general winning opening 226. It should be noted that the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted may be increased by one each time one game ball is won in the general winning opening 226, or two or three game balls are won in the general winning opening 226. The number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 may be increased by one, or the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 may be increased by one each time a predetermined number of game balls of five or more are won in the general winning opening 226. May be. The upper limit of the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 may be three times, less than three times, or four times or more.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with a chance button 136 as an operating means and a general winning opening 226 as a first area. The number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 in the effect (first button effect) related to the chance button 136 by the number of times of acceptance display 850 and the button image 852 can be increased or decreased, and when the number of game balls enters the general winning opening 226, the number of times of acceptance is concerned. May increase. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the player can be made aware of the number of winning game balls in the general winning opening 226 by increasing the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 and the number of operations of the chance button 136. There are cases.

Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 156(a) to 156(c). FIGS. 156(a) to 156(c) are diagrams showing the effect example in time series. FIG. 156(a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The variable display of the decorative design is executed on the first display device 800, and the variable display of the mini decorative design is executed on the second display device 802. On the third display device 804, a white fourth symbol for Toku-zu 1 is displayed. Since the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 2 and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0, the hold icons g1 and g2 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the display area of the third display device 804. In the upper left part of the, the number of reservations is displayed by the numbers "2" and "0". The hold icons g1 and g2 are displayed in a white circular display mode. The variable icon f1 is displayed in the variable icon display area b. The variation icon f1 is displayed in a green circular display mode.

In FIG. 156(a), a button image 854 simulating the chance button 136 is displayed in the center of the display area of the first display device 800, and a gauge image 856 showing the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is displayed below the button image 854. ing. The button image 854 is displayed in a red display mode. The gauge image 856 displays the remaining time of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the length of a predetermined color (light black color in the figure). The button image 854 and the gauge image 856 are displayed so as to overlap the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the middle symbol). The button image 854 has a larger display size than the button image 852.

Also, the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted is three times in response to the winning of twelve game balls in the general winning opening 226 before the time shown in FIG. 156(a), and the second display device. In 802, a reception count display 850 by a character string image of “3 more times” is displayed. Note that the entire area of the button image 852 is white and the meter value is 0.

In the present embodiment, an effect regarding the chance button 136 based on the number-of-acceptance display 850 and the button image 852 (hereinafter referred to as “button effect A”) and an effect regarding the chance button 136 based on the button image 854 and the gauge image 856 (hereinafter referred to as “button effect”). (Referred to as “B”) is executed redundantly. The operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect A is continued until the chance button 136 is operated three times, and the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B is, for example, 10 seconds. The remaining time is reported. In this example, the button image 854 and the gauge image 856 are displayed simultaneously with the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B. Note that the button image 854 and the gauge image 856 may be displayed after the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B, or the button image 854 may be displayed before the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B. The gauge image 856 may be displayed. Further, in the button effect B, when the chance button 136 is operated once, the notice effect is executed according to the operation. Note that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B ends when the chance button 136 is operated once. When the chance button 136 is not operated even once during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B, the button image 854 and the gauge image 856 are erased at the end of the operation valid period. In this case, the notice effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button effect B is not executed. Even when the chance button 136 is not operated even once during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B, the notice effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button effect B is executed. Good.

156(b) following FIG. 156(a) shows a state in which the player operates the chance button 136 once. 156(c) subsequent to FIG. 156(b) shows a state in which the effect is executed in response to the operation of the chance button 136. In this example, the first notice effect is executed corresponding to the button effect A, and the second notice effect is executed corresponding to the button effect B according to the operation of the chance button 136. The first notice effect and the second notice effect are started at the same time. The first notice effect is similar to the change notice effect shown in FIG. 155(q). As the first notice effect, it is in the display area of the second display device 802 and above the button image 852. , A notice image including a character image of “celebration” is displayed, the emission color of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 changes from white to red, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect of “keen”. The second notice effect is a notice effect of the change, and as the second notice effect, a cut-in image 858 having a horizontally long parallelogram shape and including a lord's character image is displayed on the first display device 800. The cut-in image 858 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable icon display area b. In this example, when the first notice effect and the second notice effect overlap, the sound effect corresponding to the first notice effect is output, but the sound effect corresponding to the second notice effect is output. May be done.

In the button effect A, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the first notice effect when the chance button 136 is operated when the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is 1 or more. When the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect B, the second notice effect can be executed. The button effect A and the button effect B are separate and independent effects, and the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect B even when the “0 more time” character image acceptance count display 850 is displayed. Then, the second notice production can be executed. As shown in FIGS. 156(a) and 156(b), the button effect A and the button effect B can be executed in parallel, and the first notice effect and the second notice effect can be executed in parallel. Is.

When the chance button 136 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 156(b), the second notice effect may be started after the first notice effect is started. In this case, when the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 emit green light as the second notice effect, after the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 emit red light as the first notice effect, the second notice effect is generated. The effect movable bodies 806 and 808 may emit green light. When the chance button 136 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 156(b), the first notice effect may be started after the second notice effect is started. In this case, after the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 emit red as the second notice effect, the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 may emit red as the first notice effect. In this way, the light emission color of the effect movable body may be overwritten with the color according to the notice effect that is started later.

The button effect B in this example is an effect requiring a single-shot operation of the chance button 136, but the button effect B may be an effect requiring a continuous hit operation of the chance button 136. For example, in the case where the button effect B is an effect that requires ten consecutive hit operations of the chance button 136, the button effect B causes the chance button 136 to be operated seven times even after the number of times the button effect A has been received is zero. Is accepted and the chance button 136 is operated 10 times, the operation valid period of the button effect B ends, and the second notice effect is executed.

The chance button 136 may emit red light only when the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect A and the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B overlap, or in the button effect A. Light may be emitted in red only during the operation-effective period of the chance button 136, or may be emitted in red only during the operation-effective period of the opportunity button 136 in the button effect B.

In the button effect A, a period other than the stop display of the decorative symbol and the execution of the wipe effect display described later in FIG. 158 may be set as the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In addition, after the jackpot game is over, the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 by the button effect A may be reset to zero.

Next, a modified example of the effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 156(d) and 156(e) are diagrams showing an example of the effect of this modification in time series. FIG. 156(d) shows a state during execution of the special figure 1 variation game. The variable display of the decorative design is executed on the first display device 800, and the variable display of the mini decorative design is executed on the second display device 802. On the third display device 804, a white fourth symbol for Toku-zu 1 is displayed. Since the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 2 and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0, the hold icons g1 and g2 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the display area of the third display device 804. In the upper left part of the, the number of reservations is displayed by the numbers "2" and "0". The hold icon g1 is displayed in a white circular display mode. The variable icon f1 is displayed in the variable icon display area b. The variation icon f1 is displayed in a green circular display mode.

The hold icon g2 is displayed in a display mode of a pattern simulating the chance button 136. Further, the hold icon g2 is displayed in red. The hold icon g2 has a smaller display size than the button image 850. In addition, the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted is three times in response to the winning of twelve game balls in the general winning opening 226 before the time point shown in FIG. 156(d), and the second display device is shown. In 802, a reception count display 850 by a character string image of “3 more times” is displayed. Note that the entire area of the button image 852 is white and the meter value is 0.

In this example, the button effect A based on the number-of-acceptance display 850 and the button image 852 and the effect regarding the chance button 136 based on the hold icon g2 (hereinafter, referred to as “button effect C”) are overlapped. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect A is continued until the chance button 136 is operated three times, and the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect C is in the period in which the hold icon g2 is displayed. It continues until the chance button 136 is operated once. In this example, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect C is started at the same time when the display of the hold icon g2 having a pattern simulating the chance button 136 is started. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect C may start after the display of the hold icon g2, or the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect C prior to the start of display of the hold icon g2. May be started.

156(e) subsequent to FIG. 156(d) shows a state where the player has operated the chance button 136 once. In response to the operation of the chance button 136, the first notice effect is executed corresponding to the button effect A, and the third notice effect is executed corresponding to the button effect C. The first notice effect is similar to the change notice effect shown in FIG. 155(q). As the first notice effect, it is in the display area of the second display device 802 and above the button image 852. , A notice image including a character image of “celebration” is displayed, and the emission color of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 changes from white to red. The third notice effect is a look-ahead notice effect, and the third notice effect in this example is a look-ahead notice about the special figure variation game related to the second holding of special figure 1. As the third notice effect, the display mode of the hold icon g2 is changed from the pattern simulating the chance button 136 to the character pattern of the lord. In the hold icon, the jackpot reliability of the display mode of the lord's character pattern is set higher than that of the display mode of the red circle. When the display mode of the hold icon g2 changes, the hold icon change animation may be displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. In this example, when the first notice effect and the third notice effect overlap, the sound effect corresponding to the first notice effect is output, but the sound effect corresponding to the third notice effect is output. May be done.

In the button effect A, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the first notice effect when the chance button 136 is operated when the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is 1 or more. When the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect C, the third notice effect can be executed. The button effect A and the button effect C are separate and independent effects, and even when the "0 more times" character image acceptance count display 850 is displayed, the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect C. Then, the third notice production can be executed. As shown in FIG. 156(d), the button effect A and the button effect C can be executed in parallel, and the first notice effect and the third notice effect can be executed in parallel. In this example, the button effect A and the first notice effect are executed as the notice effect of the variation, and the button effect C and the third notice effect are executed as the prefetch notice effect. Note that the button effect B shown in FIGS. 156(a) and (b) and the button effect C shown in FIG. 156(d) may be executable in parallel, or the button effect B and the button effect C may be performed. When the chance button 136 is operated in the state of being executed in parallel, the second notice effect and the third notice effect may be executed in parallel.

In the first and second embodiments, the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted is increased when a game ball is won in the general winning opening 226, but the special figure 1 starting opening 230 (first special figure) Even if the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is increased when the game ball enters the starting opening 230), the special drawing 2 starting opening 232 (second special drawing starting opening), and the universal drawing starting opening 228. Good.

In addition, a sensor (for example, a gate or a through chucker) that detects passage of the game ball is provided in front of the flow path of the game ball of the general winning opening 226, and when the game ball passes the sensor, the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. The number of times may be increased.

It should be noted that the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted may be increased only in a predetermined game state (for example, special figure low probability general figure low probability state, non-execution of big hit game).

Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each figure of FIG. 157 is a figure which shows this production example in time series. FIG. 157(a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the hit/miss determination result of the special figure 1 variation game is out of order, "decoration 6-decoration 2" -"Decorative 2" is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed.

At the time point shown in FIG. 157(a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 3 and the number of holdings of special figure 2 is 0, so that holding icons g1, g2, g3 are displayed in the special figure 1 holding icon display area c. In the upper left part of the display area of the third display device 804, the number of holdings is displayed by the numbers “3” and “0”. The variable icon f1 displayed in the variable icon display area b is erased during the stop display of the decorative symbol. The variable icon f1 may be deleted at the same time as the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished, or may be deleted at the same time as the next variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 157(a), a horizontally long rectangular wipe display screen wpa is displayed in the lower right part of the display area of the first display device 800. In the wipe display screen wpa, a still image or a moving image different from the still image or the moving image displayed outside the wipe display area is displayed, and a predetermined effect is executed. The wipe display screen wpa functions as a so-called corner wipe. The wipe display screen wpa may be provided on the second display device 802 or the third display device 804. For example, the wipe display screen wpa may be provided on the first display device 800 when the super reach effect is not executed and may be provided on the second display device 802 or the third display device 804 when the super reach effect is executed. Good. The wipe display screen wpa may be provided on the second display device 802 or the third display device 804 when the super reach effect is not executed, and may be provided on the first display device 800 when the super reach effect is executed. Good. As shown in FIG. 157(a), the wipe display screen wpa displays a character image of a disappointed lord. The character image is a default display displayed on the wipe display screen wpa. In addition, during the stop display of the decorative pattern, a part of the image displayed in the wipe display screen wpa and the wipe display screen wpa (the upper end portion in this example) is over the decorative pattern in the stop display (right pattern). Wrapped and displayed.

157(b) continuing from FIG. 157(a), with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable display of the decorative pattern and the variable display of the mini decorative pattern are started. The state is shown.

Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the variation icon deletion animation is executed, and the variation icon f1 is deleted. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reduction animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c changes to the change icon f2. Moved to the icon display area b, the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and changed to the special figure 1 hold icon The hold icon g3 displayed in the third area of the display area c moves to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 157(b), the reduction animation of the hold icon has ended, and the movement of the variable icon f2 and the hold icons g2, g3 has been completed.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, the wipe display screen wpa and a part of the image displayed in the wipe display screen wpa (the upper end portion in this example) are not overlapped with the variable display of the right symbol of the decorative pattern. In other words, the wipe display screen wpa and a part of the image displayed in the wipe display screen wpa (upper end portion in this example) are displayed overlapping the variable display of the right symbol of the decorative symbol. In addition, the lower end of the variable display of the right symbol of the decorative symbol may match the upper edge of the wipe display screen wpa.

FIG. 157(c) continuing from FIG. 157(b) shows a state immediately before one game ball is won in the general winning opening 226. 157(d) following FIG. 157(c) shows a state in which the mini game effect display is started on the wipe display screen wpa in response to the fact that one game ball has been won in the general winning opening 226. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a mini game effect display is executed as a wipe display on the wipe display screen wpa in response to the game ball winning the general winning opening 226. Even when a game ball is won in the general winning opening 226, the special symbol is held 0, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (the symbol variable stop is displayed), and the big hit game is being executed. If the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation game being executed is, for example, 10 seconds or less, the mini game effect display may not be executed. In addition, the mini game effect display may be executed as many times as the number of game balls that have won the general winning opening 226. For example, the mini game effect display is started in response to the fact that one game ball has been won in the general winning opening 226 while the mini game effect display is not being executed, and the general winning opening is further played during the execution of the mini game effect display. When the ball wins, the start of the mini game effect display may be suspended. Further, the mini game effect display is started only when the game ball is won in the general winning opening 226 while the mini game effect display is not executed, and the game ball is won in the general winning opening 226 while the mini game effect display is being executed. In this case, the start of the mini game effect display may not be suspended.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 157(d), a mini game effect display is performed in which the lord and the old man have a comparison of drinking alcohol. On the wipe display screen wpa, a moving image of a scene in which the lord and the old man are drinking and comparing the drinks is displayed. The mini game effect display of this example is executed as a pre-reading notice effect for the special figure variation game according to the second holding of special figure 1. The mini game effect display may be executed as a look-ahead notice effect or may be executed as a notice of the change.

157(e) subsequent to FIG. 157(d) shows a state in which the mini game effect display is being executed. 157(f) subsequent to FIG. 157(e) shows a state in which the result of the mini game effect display is displayed. In this example, the lord wins the confrontation comparing drinking, and the wipe display screen wpa displays the character string image of “win” and the moving image of the scene where the lord won. In this example, if the mini-game is successful, the lord wins the confrontation with drinking and drinking.

FIG. 157(g) subsequent to FIG. 157(f) shows a state in which the notice effect executed when the mini game is successful is started. In the present example, as the notice effect, a hold icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon g3 indicating the second hold in FIG. 1 is executed. In the hold icon change animation of this example, a moving image in which the effect image 860 moves from the wipe display screen wpa toward the hold icon g3 is displayed. A part of the hold icon change animation of this example is displayed as a wipe display on the wipe display screen wpa. The arrows in FIGS. 157(g) and 157(h) indicate the loci of movement of the effect image 860.

157(h) subsequent to FIG. 157(g) shows a state in which the effect image 860 is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon g3. The entire hold icon g3 is hidden by the effect image 860. The effect image 860 may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon g2) that is not the target of the hold icon change animation.

157(i) subsequent to FIG. 157(h) shows a state in which the hold icon change animation is completed. When the hold icon change animation ends, the effect image 860 is erased and the hold icon g3 as a whole becomes visible again. Due to the hold icon change animation, the display state of the hold icon g3 is changed from white to green.

157(j) subsequent to FIG. 157(i) shows a state after the mini game effect display is finished. In this example, the mini game effect display ends after the hold icon change animation ends. On the wipe display screen wpa, a default display similar to that of FIG. 157(b) is executed.

FIG. 157(k) shows an example of the effect of a pattern in which the mini game has failed. If the mini-game fails, Tono is defeated in a confrontation with drinking and drinking, and the wipe display screen wpa displays a character string image of "Loss" and a moving image of the scene in which the defeat was lost. When the mini game fails, the hold icon change animation is not executed and the mini game effect display ends.

FIG. 157(l) shows an example in which the mini game effect display is displayed overlapping with other effect display. At the lower right part of the display area of the first display device 800, a conversation notice image 862 including a character image of Princess Chibi and a balloon image including a character string image is displayed. A part of the conversation notice image 862 is overlapped with the wipe display screen wpa. More specifically, in the conversation notice image 862, the right half of the character image of Princess Chibi, the entire character string image, and the part other than the upper end and the right end of the balloon image are overlapped on the wipe display screen wpa and visually recognized. It is impossible. In other words, in the present example, the wipe screen wpa is displayed on the conversation notice image 862 without overlapping. Further, in this example, the conversation notice image 862 is displayed as a notice image of the change. The conversation notice image 862 may be displayed as a prefetch notice image.

157(m) to (r) show another example of the mini game effect display in time series. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute a plurality of mini game effect displays. FIG. 157 (m) continuing from FIG. 157 (b) shows a state immediately before one game ball is won in the general winning opening 226. 157(n) following FIG. 157(m) shows a state in which the mini game effect display is started on the wipe display screen wpa in response to the fact that one game ball has been won in the general winning opening 226. In this example, as shown in FIG. 157(n), a mini game effect display in which the lord tries to throw a thousand boxes is executed. On the wipe display screen wpa, a moving image of a scene where the lord is throwing a thousand boxes is displayed. The mini game effect display of this example is executed as a pre-reading notice effect for the special figure variation game according to the second holding of special figure 1. The mini game effect display may be executed as a look-ahead notice effect or may be executed as a notice of the change.

FIG. 157 (o) continued from FIG. 157 (n) shows a state in which the mini game effect display is being executed. FIG. 157 (p) subsequent to FIG. 157 (o) shows a state in which the result of the mini game effect display is displayed. In this example, the lord succeeds in throwing a thousand boxes, and the wipe display screen wpa displays a moving image of a scene where the lord succeeds in throwing a thousand boxes. In this example, if the mini-game succeeds, the lord wins the Thousand-Box.

157(q) subsequent to FIG. 157(p) shows a state in which the notice effect executed when the mini game is successful is started. In the present example, as the notice effect, a hold icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon g3 indicating the second hold in FIG. 1 is executed. In the hold icon change animation of this example, a moving image in which the effect image 860 moves from the wipe display screen wpa toward the hold icon g3 is displayed. The arrow in FIG. 157(q) indicates the locus of movement of the effect image 860. The hold icon change animation of this example is the same as the hold icon change animation shown in FIGS. 157(g) to (i). In this example, similar to FIG. 157(j), the mini-game effect display ends after the hold icon change animation ends.

FIG. 157(r) shows an example of the effect of a pattern in which the mini game has failed. When the mini game fails, the lord fails to throw a thousand boxes, and the wipe display screen wpa displays a moving image of a scene where the lord fails to throw a thousand boxes. When the mini game fails, the hold icon change animation is not executed and the mini game effect display ends.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute a plurality of types of mini game effect display. The jackpot reliability may be set according to the type of mini game effect display. For example, the mini game effect display (hereinafter, referred to as “mini game effect display A”) of the drinking and drinking comparison shown in FIGS. 157(d) to (l) is shown in FIGS. 157(m) to (r). The jackpot reliability may be set to be higher than that of the mini-game effect display (hereinafter, referred to as “mini-game effect display B”) that attempts to throw a thousand boxes. In this case, when the mini game effect display A is executed, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be fixedly displayed in the symbol fluctuation table subject to the notice than when the mini game effect display B is executed. Conversely, the mini-game effect display B may be set to have a higher jackpot reliability than the mini-game effect display A. In this case, when the mini game effect display B is executed, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be fixedly displayed in the symbol fluctuation table subject to the notice than when the mini game effect display A is executed. In addition, when the mini game effect display A is executed, it may be easier to succeed in the mini game than when the mini game effect display B is executed, or when the mini game effect display B is executed. May be more likely to succeed in the mini game than when the mini game effect display A is executed. It should be noted that the holding icon change animation may be only one kind or may be provided in plural kinds. When multiple types of hold icon change animations are provided, the hold icon change animation to be executed for each mini game effect display may be determined in advance, or the hold icon change animation to be executed is determined by lottery each time. May be done.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a general winning opening 226 as a first area, and display means for the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804. When the game ball enters the general winning opening 226, the mini game effect display may be executed, and the mini game effect display does not overlap the fluctuating decorative pattern. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, not only the prize ball based on the winning in the general winning opening 226 but also the effect display based on the winning in the general winning opening 226 is given to the player with an expectation for a big hit. May be possible.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the mini game effect display as a wipe display in the wipe screen wpa which is a part of the display area of the first display device 800. The mini game effect display may be displayed in a part of the display area of the second display device 802 or the third display device 804.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a part of the hold icon change animation as a wipe display on the wipe screen wpa. Note that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may display a part of the variable icon change animation for changing the variable icon in the wipe screen wpa as a wipe display. In addition, the mini game effect display may not be started during the execution of the stop display of the decorative pattern.

In this embodiment, the mini game effect display is executed when the game ball is won in the general winning opening 226, but the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the special drawing 2 starting opening 232, The mini game effect display may be executed when a game ball enters the starting port 228.

A sensor (for example, a through) that detects passage of the game ball is provided in front of the flow path of the game ball through the general winning opening 226, and when the game ball passes the sensor, the mini game effect display is executed. It may be configured.

It should be noted that the mini game effect display may be executed only in a predetermined game state (for example, special figure low probability general figure low probability state, non-execution of big hit game).

It should be noted that the change animation of the hold icon is an animation that only starts displaying the effect image 860 and deletes the effect image 860, and the animation in the wipe display screen wpa in FIGS. 157(g) and (h) is for the change of the hold icon. It may be an animation.

Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 158. Each figure of FIG. 158 is a figure which shows this production example in time series. FIG. 158(a) shows a state in which "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 6" indicating a deviation during the super reach production is temporarily stopped (swing variation display). Note that the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are not shown in each drawing of FIG. 158.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 155 to 157, holds the mini decorative design displayed on the second display device 802 and the numbers displayed on the third display device 804. The number display and the fourth symbol are displayed on the first display device 800. The mini-decorative design is displayed in the upper left part of the display area of the first display device 800, and the number-of-holds display and the fourth design are displayed in the upper right part of the display area. Further, during the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern, since the decorative pattern is being changed and displayed, the wipe display screen wpa is displayed so as to overlap the “decoration 6” of the right pattern.

At the time shown in FIG. 158(a), since the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 2 and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is 0, the reservation icons g1 and g2 are displayed in the special figure 1 reservation icon display area c. In the upper right part of the display area of the first display device 800, the number of reservations is displayed by the numbers “2” and “0”.

158(b) subsequent to FIG. 158(a) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started. The wipe effect display is an effect in which the image is erased from the edge of the display area of the display device so as to be wiped out. In this example, as shown in FIG. 158(b), the wipe display wpb1 starts to appear from the left end of the display area of the first display device 800, and the wipe display wpb2 starts to appear from the right end of the display area. The wipe display wpb1 and the wipe display wpb2 start to appear at the same time, and the appearance of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 is regarded as the wipe effect display start. The display mode of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 is a fusuma pattern. The wipe effect display may or may not be executed on the second display device 802 and the third display device 804.

The wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 are displayed so as to overlap the display other than the mini decorative design, the number-of-holds display and the fourth design. As shown in FIG. 158(b), the wipe display wpb1 is displayed so as to overlap the display other than the mini decorative design, and the wipe display wpb2 overlaps with the display of the number of numbers held and the display other than the fourth design. Will be displayed. In other words, the mini decorative design, the number-of-holds display by numbers, and the fourth design are displayed overlapping the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2.

Further, the variable icon f1 is erased at the same time when the wipe effect display is started. The variable icon f1 may be deleted before the start of the wipe effect display, may be deleted after the start of the wipe effect display, or may be displayed after the start of the wipe effect display.

158(c) following FIG. 158(b) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is being executed. The variable icon f1 may be deleted at the time shown in FIG. 158(c).

158(d) subsequent to FIG. 158(c) shows a state in which the appearance of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 has been completed. The entire display area of the first display device 800 is displayed by the wipe display wpb1 and wpb2 in a display mode in which the sliding doors are closed. In this example, at the same time as the appearance of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 is completed, the variable display of the mini decorative symbol and the variable display of the fourth symbol (variable symbol display) are terminated. In the upper left part of the display area of the first display device 800, a mini decorative pattern of a combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and in the upper right part of the display area, a black special figure 1 The fourth symbol for use is displayed. The symbol variation display may be terminated after the appearance of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 is completed. In addition, the withdrawal display of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 is executed after the end of the variable display of the symbols, and the stop display of the decorative symbol of the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 6" can be visually recognized.

158(e) following FIG. 158(d) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variation game is started. The withdrawal display of the wipe display is completed prior to the start of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the withdrawal display of the wipe display, the wipe display wpb1 shrinks toward the left end of the display area of the first display device 800, the wipe display wpb1 is deleted from the display area, and the wipe display wpb2 shrinks toward the right end of the display area. The wipe display wpb2 is erased from the display area. The withdrawal display completion timing of the wipe display wpb1 and the withdrawal display completion timing of the wipe display wpb2 are the same.

Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reduction animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c changes to the change icon f2. The icon moves to the icon display area b, and the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time point shown in FIG. 158(e), the reduction animation of the hold icon has ended, and the movement of the variable icon f2 and the hold icon g2 has been completed.

As shown in FIG. 158(e), since the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 are erased, the wipe display area wpb, the change icon f2, the hold icon g2, and the castle town background are visible. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to refresh the player's mood by executing the wipe effect display before starting the next variation when the deviation occurs in the super reach effect.

158(f) and (g) show another example of the wipe effect display in time series. FIG. 158(f) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 158(c) except that the lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed.

At the time point shown in FIG. 158(f), the lower plate 128 becomes full with game balls, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the lower center of the display area of the first display device 800, a lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed in which a character string image of "Please pull out the ball" is displayed in a white horizontal rectangular image. There is. The lower plate full tank error display 852 is displayed under the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of the command including the information of the lower plate full tank error from the main control unit 300. The lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern and the wipe display wpb1 and wpb2.

158(g) subsequent to FIG. 158(f) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 158(d) except that the lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed. The lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2. In this way, the lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 at the time of disengagement. In other words, the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 at the time of detachment are not overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display 864.

FIG. 158(h) shows another example of the wipe effect display in time series. 158(h) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 158(g) except that the hold icon change animation is displayed. FIG. 158(h) shows a state in which the effect image 860 of the hold icon change animation is displayed overlapping the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2. The arrow in FIG. 158(h) indicates the locus of movement of the effect image 860. The moving effect image 860 is not overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display 864. In other words, the lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed so as to overlap with the moving effect image 860.

In this way, the notice effect display may be displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 at the time of disconnection. In this example, the effect image 860 of the hold icon change animation as the prefetching notice effect is displayed overlapping the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 at the time of detachment. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment refreshes the player's mood by executing the wipe effect display before starting the next change when the deviation occurs in the super reach effect, and the prefetch advance notice display is displayed on the wipe effect display. By overlapping, it may be possible to expect after the next symbol variation display. Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first to fourth embodiments of the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 158 again.

(A1) An operating means (for example, a chance button 136) and a first area (for example, a general winning opening 226, a special drawing 1 starting opening 230, a special drawing 2 starting opening 232, a general drawing starting opening 228) are provided. In the gaming table, the first area is an area into which a game ball can enter, and the operation means in the first button effect (for example, the effect regarding the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 155, button effect A). The number of times of accepting the operation (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of times of acceptance") can be increased or decreased, and the number of times of acceptance may increase when a game ball enters the first area.

According to the gaming machine having the above structure, the player may be able to recognize the number of game balls that have entered the first area by increasing the number of times the operation means is operated and the number of times the operation means is operated.

(A2) The gaming table described in A1 above, including display means (for example, a generic name of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804), and the display means (for example, , At least one of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804) is a unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. One of the displays is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "first display" (for example, a notice display including a character image of "holiday" shown in FIG. 155(d)).) In the button effect of (1), the first display may be displayed when the operation means is operated when the number of times of reception is one or more, and the first display may be displayed.

(A3) In the gaming machine described in A2, one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display (hereinafter, "second display" (for example, cut-in shown in FIG. 156(c)). The image 858 is referred to as the hold icon g2) shown in FIG. 156(e)), and the display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display, and the second button When the operation means is operated in the effect (for example, button effect B, button effect C), the second display may be displayed, and even if the number of receptions is 0, the second A display may be displayed, and the second display and the first display can be displayed in parallel.

(A4) The game table according to A3, wherein the first button effect and the second button effect can be executed in parallel.

(A5) The game machine according to A3 or A4, wherein the display unit is an image simulating the operation unit in the first button effect (hereinafter, "third display" (for example, a button image). 852)), and the display means displays an image (hereinafter, “fourth display” (for example, button image 854, FIG. 156 (FIG. 156)) imitating the operation means in the second button effect. The holding icon g2) shown in d)) can be displayed, and the size of the third display is different from the size of the fourth display.

(A6) The game table according to any one of A1 to A5, wherein the number of times of acceptance may decrease when the operation means is operated.

(A7) In the game table according to any one of A1 to A6, when a plurality of (for example, four) game balls enter the first area, the number of times of acceptance may increase. A game table characterized by that.

(A8) The game table according to any one of A1 to A7, wherein the first area is a general winning opening (for example, a general winning opening 226).

(A9) The game table according to any one of A1 to A8, including a second area (for example, a through provided in front of a downflow path of a game ball of the general winning opening 226), The second area is an area where a game ball can pass, and the game ball that has passed through the second area may enter the first area, and when the game ball enters the second area, A game console characterized in that the number of receptions may increase.

(A10) The game table according to any one of A1 to A9, wherein the game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

When the game ball enters the first area, the number of times of reception may increase. The number of times of reception may increase only when the game ball enters the first area in a state where a predetermined condition such as the number of times of reception is not full.

There may be a case where the number of receptions does not increase even if the game ball enters the first area in a state where a predetermined condition such as the number of receptions is not full or the like is not satisfied.

In the first button presentation, when the operation means is operated when the number of times of reception is 1 or more, the first display may be displayed without fail. In the first button effect during execution of the variable display of symbols, the first display may be displayed only when the operation means is operated when the number of times of reception is 1 or more.

In the first button effect during non-execution of the variable display of symbols, the first display may not be displayed even when the operating means is operated when the number of times of reception is 1 or more.

When the operating means is operated in the second button effect, the second display may be displayed without fail.

The second display may be displayed only when the operation means is operated in the second button effect.

The second display may not be displayed even when the operation means is operated in the second button effect.

The second display may be always displayed even when the number of receptions is 0 when the operation means is operated.
The second display may be displayed only when the number of receptions is 0 when operating the operation means.

The second display may not be displayed even when the number of receptions is 0 when the operation means is operated.
When the operating means is operated, the number of receptions may be reduced.
The number of receptions may be reduced only when the operation means is operated.
The number of receptions may not be reduced even when the operation unit is operated.
When a plurality of game balls enter the first area, the number of times of reception may increase without fail.
The number of receptions may increase only when a plurality of game balls enter the first area.
Even if a plurality of game balls enter the first area, the number of times of reception may not increase.
The game ball that has passed through the second area may enter the first area without fail.
Only the game balls that have passed through the second area may be able to enter the first area.
There may be a case where the game ball that has passed through the second area does not enter the first area.
When a game ball enters the second area, the number of times of reception may increase.

The number of times of reception may increase only when the game ball enters the second area while a predetermined condition such as the number of times of reception is not full.

There may be a case where the number of receptions does not increase even if the game ball enters the second area in a state where a predetermined condition such as the number of receptions is not full or the like is not satisfied. Special figure Low probability General figure It is possible to increase the winning rate to the general prize hole to increase the base (number of prize balls/number of game balls) in the low probability state, but with conventional game consoles general prize hole Since there is no means for the player to recognize that the winning rate to 226 has increased, the number of award balls based on the award to the general award winning hole 226 increases, so that the total number of award balls is not achieved. There was a fear of distrusting the player about the increase. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment increases the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 based on the winning of the general winning opening 226, thereby increasing the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 and the number of operations of the chance button 136. In some cases, the player may be able to know the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening 226.

The number of times of reception may be increased by one each time one game ball is won in the first area.

In a so-called right-handed machine where a universal starting port and an attacker are provided on the right side of the game area, a game ball is won in the general winning opening provided on the left side of the game area when right-handed (when electric power is supported or when a big hit game is played). In such a case, the number of receptions may not be increased.

At the time of right-handed, the number of receptions may or may not be increased at the general winning opening provided on the right side of the game area, and the number of receptions dedicated to right-handed may be increased. Good.

When the game ball enters the first area, the effect in which the operation means is operated at least once may be started. For example, in a configuration in which a certain effect always involves the operation of the operation means, it may indicate the number of occurrences of the certain effect (for example, a pseudo-relation effect).

The display of the first display (for example, the first notice effect) may be configured to require a plurality of operations of the operating means even when the symbol variation display being executed is a big hit.

The number of times of acceptance may be configured to increase at other occasions (the number of times of a big hit or the number of times of execution of a predetermined reach).
Even when the first display is being made, the number of receptions is reduced when the operation means is operated.

When the game ball enters the first area during the first display, the number of times of reception may or may not increase.
(B1)

A first area (for example, a general winning opening 226, a special drawing 1 starting opening 230, a special drawing 2 starting opening 232, a universal drawing starting opening 228),

Display means (for example, a general term for the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804),
A gaming table equipped with
The first area is an area where a game ball can enter,

The display unit (for example, at least one display unit of the first display unit 800, the second display unit 802, and the third display unit 804) is a unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. ,

One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as “first display” (for example, mini game effect display)).

When the game ball enters the first area, the first display may be displayed, and the first display is not overlapped with the changing decorative design,
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, not only the prize balls based on the winning in the first area but also the first display based on the winning in the first area gives the player an expectation of a big hit. You may be able to.
(B2)
The gaming machine described in B1 above,

One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as “second display” (for example, conversation notice image 862)),

The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a wipe display,
The wipe display does not overlap the second display,
The first display is the wipe display,
A game table characterized by that.
(B3)
The gaming machine described in B2 above,

The wipe display is displayed in a partial area (for example, a wipe screen wpa) of the display area of the display unit,
A game table characterized by that.
(B4)
The gaming table according to any one of B1 to B3 above,

One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as “third display” (for example, hold icon, change icon)),

The display mode of the third display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,

As the display for changing the display mode of the third display, the first display (for example, a wipe effect display as a hold icon change animation or a change icon change animation) is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.
(B5)
The gaming machine described in B4 above,
The third display is a hold icon,
A game table characterized by that.
(B6)
The gaming table according to any one of B1 to B5,

The first display is not started during execution of the stop display of the decorative pattern (for example, the wipe effect display is not started during execution of the stop display of the decorative pattern),
A game table characterized by that.
(B7)
The gaming table according to any one of B1 to B6,

When the game ball enters the first area during the display of the first display, the first display is continuously displayed (for example, in the general winning opening 226 during execution of the wipe effect display). When the game ball wins, the wipe effect display is continuously executed),
A game table characterized by that. (B8)
The gaming table according to any one of B1 to B7,
The first area is a general winning opening (for example, a general winning opening 226),
A game table characterized by that.
(B9)
The gaming table according to any one of B1 to B8,

A second area (for example, a through provided in front of the flow path of the game ball of the general winning opening 226),
The second area is an area through which a game ball can pass,
The game ball that has passed through the second area may enter the first area,
When the game ball enters the second area, the first display may be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(B10)
The gaming table according to any one of B1 to B9,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game table characterized by that.
The first display may be always displayed when the game ball enters the first area.

The first display may be displayed only when the game ball enters the first area during the execution of the symbol variation display.

The first display may not be displayed even if the game ball enters the first area during the non-execution of the symbol variation display.
The game ball that has passed through the second area may enter the first area without fail.
Only the game balls that have passed through the second area may be able to enter the first area.
There may be a case where the game ball that has passed through the second area does not enter the first area.
When the game ball enters the second area, the first display may be displayed without fail.
The first display may be displayed only when the game ball enters the second area.
Even if the game ball enters the second area, the first display may not be displayed.

Special figure Low probability General figure It is possible to increase the winning rate to the general prize hole to increase the base (number of prize balls/number of game balls) in the low probability state, but with conventional game consoles general prize hole Since there is no means for the player to recognize that the winning rate to 226 has increased, the number of award balls based on the award to the general award winning hole 226 increases, so that the total number of award balls is not achieved. There was a fear of distrusting the player about the increase. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the mini game effect display based on the winning in the general winning opening 226 to notify the player that the game ball has won in the general winning opening 226, and at the same time the mini game. It may be possible to give the player an expectation for a big hit by the effect display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the mini game effect display in the wipe screen wpa that is displayed with priority over the decorative design and other effect displays (for example, the conversation notice image 862) to display the mini game. Performance display It may be possible to grasp the winning rate to the general winning opening 226 by the frequency of the performance display so as not to give the player a feeling of distrust.

Note that the wipe screen wpa may display not only the mini game effect display but also the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 (for example, the number of times of acceptance display 850) and the button image (for example, the button image 852).

Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160(a) to 160(e). 159 and FIGS. 160(a) to 160(e) are diagrams showing the effect example in time series. In the states shown in FIGS. 159 and 160(a) to 160(e), the game state is a non-electric power support state. As shown in FIG. 159(a), the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a digestion icon in the game information display area a of the display area of the first display device 800 and to the right of the variable icon display area b. A display area i is provided. The digestion icon display area i is roughly divided from the left to the right into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. In the digestion icon display area i, a variation icon corresponding to the finished special figure variation game (symbol variation display) can be displayed as a digestion icon. A pedestal image of a horizontally long rectangular shape indicating the display position of the digestion icon is displayed at the bottom of each of the first to fourth regions.

159(a) and the subsequent figures, the components necessary for the explanation among the components of the pachinko machine 100 are extracted and shown in the area on the paper surface delimited by the alternate long and short dash line. As shown in each of FIG. 159(a) and subsequent figures, the speaker 120 is schematically illustrated in the upper left part of the drawing, and the chance button 136 is schematically illustrated in the lower left part of the drawing.

FIG. 159(a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game has not been executed since the pachinko machine 100 was powered on. The pachinko machine 100 displays "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" which is the default symbol combination on the first display device 800 and the second display device 802 after the power is turned on. At the time shown in FIG. 159( a ), the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icon is not displayed on the first display device 800, and the third display device 804 is not displayed. The number of holdings is displayed by the numbers "0" and "0". Further, on the third display device 804, a black special figure 1 fourth symbol and a black special figure 2 fourth symbol are displayed.

A button image 870 simulating the chance button 136 is displayed on the second display device 802. The display color of the button image 870 is white. The chance button 136 emits white light. The effect movable bodies 806, 808, and 810 are respectively located at the initial positions, and all emit white light. A predetermined BGM is output from the speaker 120.

159 (a) that continues from FIG. 159 (a), the holding of the special drawing 1 is increased by 1 in response to the fact that one game ball is won in the special opening 1 starting opening 230, and the holding of the special drawing 1 is exhausted. Then, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212, the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the mini decorative symbol are shown. In the variation icon display area b, the variation icon f1 having a white circular display form is displayed. The third display device 804 displays the white fourth symbol for special figure 1.

In FIG. 159(b), when the number of holdings of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the increased holding of special figure 1 is exhausted to change the special figure 1 game. Has been started. In this case, the command including the information that the number of the special reservation 1 has been increased by 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. Upon receiving the command, the first sub control unit 400 controls the first display device 800 to execute the increase animation of the hold icon. The increase animation of the hold icon is executed in such a manner that the hold icon gradually rises from below toward the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon c. In this example, since the suspension of Toku-zu 1 was consumed during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon, the first sub control unit 400 starts the symbol variation start from the main control unit 300 during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon. Receive command. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command, it controls the first display device 800 to stop the increase animation of the hold icon, and the variable display of the decorative symbol and the movement animation between the hold/variable icons. To run. In the moving animation between the hold/variable icons, the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 1 becomes the change icon and moves to the change icon display area b. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the first display device 800 to perform the increase animation of the hold icon. Stop it on the way and start the animation for moving between the hold and change icons. In addition, when the number of holdings of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 0 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 increases by 1, the increase animation of the holding icon, the holding icon corresponding to the increased holding, and the holding/fluctuation. Instead of displaying the movement animation between icons, the variable icon corresponding to the special figure fluctuation game (symbol fluctuation display) which is started immediately after the hold increase may be displayed in the fluctuation icon display area b. In addition, after the hold icon corresponding to the increased hold is completely moved to the first area of the special icon 1 hold icon display area c (after the hold icon increase animation is finished to the end), the move animation between the hold/variable icons May be performed.

In FIG. 159(c) continuing from FIG. 159(b), four game balls are won in the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is increased by 4 and an increase animation of the holding icon is executed, and the holding is performed. This shows the state in which the increasing animation of the icon has ended. Reserved icons g1 to g4 are displayed in the first to fourth areas of the special figure 1 reserved icon display area c. The display modes of the hold icons g1 to g4 are all white circles. The increase animation of the hold icon is executed in a mode in which the hold icons g1 to g4 gradually rise from the lower side toward the first area to the fourth area. Further, the number of holdings is displayed on the third display device 804 by the numbers “4” and “0”.

FIG. 159 (d) continuing from FIG. 159 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. The winning-and-losing determination result related to the special figure 1 variation game is a failure. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the winning/deciding result of the special figure 1 variable game is out, is "decoration 3-decoration 4". -"Decorative 2" is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed.

159(e) continuing from FIG. 159(d), with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the mini decorative symbol are started. The state is shown. The third display device 804 displays the white fourth symbol for special figure 1.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of executing a movement animation between the variation/digestion icons and a reduction animation of the hold icon with the start of the special figure 1 variation game. In the moving animation between the variation/digestion icons, the icon displayed as the variation icon becomes the digestion icon and moves to the digestion icon display area i. In the movement animation between the fluctuation/digestion icons of this example, the fluctuation icon f1 corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation game ended in FIG. 159(e) becomes the digestion icon j1 at the same time as the movement starts, and the digestion icon j1 becomes the digestion icon display area. Gradually move toward the first region of i. At the time point shown in FIG. 159(e), the movement of the digestion icon j1 is completed. The movement animation between the fluctuation/digestion icons ends when the movement of the digestion icons is completed. Further, the display mode of the digestion icon j1 changes from a white circle to a gray ninja character pattern after the movement is completed. The display mode of the digestion icon j1 may change during the movement of the digestion icon j1, or may change at the same time when the movement of the digestion icon j1 is completed. In this example, the digestion icon in the display mode of the gray ninja character pattern may be displayed as a notice icon as a notice of advance notice or notice of the change. By using the digest icon in the display mode of the gray ninja character pattern, for example, a notice effect such as a pending change animation can be executed. Even if the digestion icon in the display mode of the gray ninja character pattern is displayed, the notice effect such as the pending change animation may not be executed.

The reduction animation of the hold icon is an animation including a movement animation between the hold/variable icons and a movement animation of the hold icon. In the movement animation between the hold/variable icons, the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special icon 1 hold icon display area c becomes the change icon f2 and gradually moves to the change icon display area b. At the time point shown in FIG. 159(e), the movement of the variable icon f2 has been completed. The moving animation between the holding and changing icons ends when the moving of the changing icon is completed. Further, the display size of the variable icon f2 is gradually enlarged while moving to the variable icon display area b.

The hold icon movement animation is an animation in which each hold icon moves to a region corresponding to the next higher hold order. In this example, the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, The hold icon g3 displayed in the third area moves to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the hold icon g4 displayed in the fourth area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c changes. FIG. 1 Moves to the third area of the hold icon display area c. At the time point shown in FIG. 159(e), the movement of the hold icons g2 to g4 has been completed. The animation for moving the hold icon ends when the move of the hold icon is completed.

In this example, the moving animation between the changing/digesting icons, the moving animation between the holding/changing icons, and the moving animation of the holding icon are started at the same time. Note that the three animations may be started in an arbitrary order, or two of the three animations may be started simultaneously.

Further, in this example, the moving animation between the changing/digesting icons, the moving animation between the holding/changing icons, and the moving animation of the holding icon end at the same time. Note that the three animations may end in any order, or two of the three animations may end at the same time.

159(f) following FIG. 159(e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. The winning-and-losing determination result related to the special figure 1 variation game is a failure. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the winning/deciding result of the special game 1 variation game is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 9" -Decoration 5" is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed.

159 (f) that continues from FIG. 159 (f), with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the variable display of the mini decorative pattern is started. The state is shown. The third display device 804 displays the white fourth symbol for special figure 1.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute a moving animation of the digestion icon when one or more digestion icons are displayed in the digestion icon display area i at the start of the special figure 1 variation game. The movement animation of the digestion icon is an animation in which the digestion icon moves one area to the right. In the movement animation of the digestion icon in this example, the digestion icon j1 displayed in the first area of the digestion icon display area i in FIG. 159(f) gradually moves toward the second area of the digestion icon display area i. .. At the time point shown in FIG. 159(g), the movement of the digestion icon j1 has been completed. The animation of moving the digestion icon ends when the movement of the digestion icon is completed.

In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, a movement animation between variation/digestion icons and a reduction animation of the hold icon are executed. In the movement animation between the fluctuation/digestion icons, the fluctuation icon f2 corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation game ended in FIG. 159(f) becomes the digestion icon j2 at the same time as the movement starts, and the digestion icon j2 becomes the first in the digestion icon display area i. Gradually move toward area 1. The display size of the digest icon j2 is gradually reduced during the movement so that the digest icon j2 has the same display size as the hold icon at the same time as the completion of the movement to the first region of the digest icon display area i. The display size of the digestion icon j2 is the same as the display size of the circular suspension icons (for example, the suspension icons g3 and g4 shown in FIG. 159(g)), and the display color of the digestion icon j2 is gray (indicated by the horizontal line in the figure). It is shown as a striped pattern). The circular gray display mode is the default display mode of the digestion icon. The digest icon in the default display mode is not used as the notice icon.

As described above, the display icon and the display icon of the default display mode have the same display size and shape as the variable icon of Toku-zu 1 and the hold icon of Toku-zu 1. This may make it easier for the player to recognize that the digestion icon is an icon corresponding to the ending special figure 1 variation game.

In the present example, the digestion icon j1 is moved to the second region as if it was pushed out of the first region of the digestion icon display region i by the digestion icon j2 by executing the movement animation of the digestion icon and the movement animation between the variation/digestion icons. To do.

Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, a reduction animation of the hold icon is executed. In the movement animation between the hold/variable icons, the hold icon g2 displayed in the first area of the special icon 1 hold icon display area c gradually changes to the change icon display area b as a change icon f3. At the time point shown in FIG. 159(g), the movement of the fluctuation icon f3 has been completed. In the moving animation of the hold icon, the hold icon g3 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the special figure 1 hold icon is displayed. The hold icon g4 displayed in the third area of the area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time point shown in FIG. 159(g), the movement of the hold icons g3 and g4 has been completed.

In this example, the movement animation of the digestion icon is started at the same time as the movement animation between the variation/digestion icons, the movement animation between the hold/variation icons, and the movement animation of the hold icon. Note that the four animations may be started in any order, and two or three of the four animations may be started simultaneously.

Further, in this example, the moving animation of the digested icon ends at the same time as the moving animation between the changing/digesting icons, the moving animation between the holding/changing icons, and the moving animation of the holding icon. Note that the four animations may end in any order, or two or three of the four animations may end.

FIG. 159 (h) continuing from FIG. 159 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. The winning-and-losing determination result related to the special figure 1 variation game is a failure. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the hit determination result of the special game 1 variation game is out of order, "decoration 6-decoration 3" -Decoration 9" is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed.

The five vertically aligned dots shown in FIG. 159(i) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 159(g). In this example, after the state shown in FIG. 159(g), the special figure 1 variation game is executed twice. It is assumed that there is no winning of the game ball to the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game twice. Also, due to the start of the special game 1 variable game twice, animation animation of the digestion icon, animation animation of transition/digestion icon, animation animation of hold/variation icon, and animation animation of hold icon are 2 respectively. It is executed one by one.

159(g) and (h), the digestion icon j1 displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area is associated with the start of the first special figure 1 variation game from the state shown in FIG. 159(h). Move to the third area of the digestion icon display area i by the animation animation of the digestion icon executed, and then display the digestion icon by the animation animation of the digestion icon executed with the start of the second special figure 1 variation game started. Move to the fourth area of the area i.

159(g) and (h), the digestion icon j2 displayed in the first area of the digestion icon display area is associated with the start of the first special figure 1 variation game from the state shown in FIG. 159(h). Moved to the second area of the digestion icon display area i by the animation animation of the digestion icon executed, and then displayed the digestion icon by the animation animation of the digestion icon executed at the start of the second special figure 1 variation game started. Move to the third region of the region i.

The variation icon f3 displayed in the variation icon display area b in FIGS. 159(g) and (h) was executed with the start of the first special figure 1 variation game from the state shown in FIG. 159(h). By moving animation between the fluctuation and digestion icons, the digestion icon j3 becomes the digestion icon display area i, and it moves to the first area of the digestion icon display area i, and then the digestion icon executed when the second special figure 1 variation game starts The animation moves to the second area of the digestion icon display area i.

159(g) and (h), the hold icon g3 displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c is accompanied by the start of the first special figure 1 variation game from the state shown in FIG. 159(h). It was changed to fluctuating icon f4 (not shown) due to the moving animation between the hold and fluctuating icons, and moved to the fluctuating icon display area b. Then, it was executed when the second special figure 1 fluctuating game was started. Due to the movement animation between the change/digestion icons, the digestion icon j4 is moved to the first area of the digestion icon display area i.

159(g) and (h), the holding icon g4 displayed in the special figure 1 holding icon display area c is accompanied by the start of the first special figure 1 variation game from the state shown in FIG. 159(h). Due to the executed movement animation of the hold icon, it moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and then between the hold and change icons executed with the start of the second special figure 1 change game started. The moving animation results in a variable icon f5 that moves to the variable icon display area b.

159(j) shows a state in which the second special figure 1 variation game has ended from the state shown in FIG. 159(h). The winning-and-losing determination result related to the special figure 1 variation game is a failure. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the hit determination result of the special game 1 variation game is out of order, "decoration 3-decoration 1" -Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed.

The five vertically arranged points shown in FIG. 159(k) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 159(j). In this example, it is assumed that one game ball has been won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 while the special figure variation game shown in FIG. 159 is not executed. In accordance with the winning, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by 1, the increase animation of the holding icon is started, and the holding icon g5 (not shown) corresponding to the increased holding is the first area of the special figure 1 holding icon c. It is displayed in such a manner that it gradually rises from below toward. In this example, during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon, the hold of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started, so the increase animation of the hold icon is stopped, and the movement between the hold and variable icons is stopped. Animation starts. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon g5 becomes the change icon f6 and moves to the change icon display area b. FIG. 159(l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The variable display of the decorative design is executed on the first display device 800, the variable display of the mini decorative design is executed on the second display device 802, and the white special pattern 1 is displayed on the third display device 804. The fourth symbol for use is displayed.

In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, a movement animation of the digestion icon and a movement animation between the variation/digestion icons are executed.

In this example, up to four digestion icons can be displayed in the digestion icon display area i. When the movement animation of the digestion icon is started in a state where the four digestion icons are displayed in the digestion icon display area i, it is displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i at the start of the movement animation of the digestion icon. The digest icon is moved to the right, and the digest icon is gradually erased in a mode of moving toward the outside of the display area of the first display device 800. In this example, the digestion icon movement animation is executed, so that the digestion icon j1 displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area c in FIG. 159(j) is moved to the right, and the digestion icon j1 becomes It is gradually erased in such a manner that it moves toward the outside of the display area of the first display device 800. In addition, since the moving animation of the digestion icon is executed, the digestion icon j2 displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i moves to the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i, and the digestion icon display area is displayed. The digestion icon j3 displayed in the second region of i moves to the third region of the digestion icon display region i. At the time point shown in FIG. 159(l), the digestion icon j1 is erased, the digestion icons j2 and j3 have been moved, and the animation for moving the digestion icon has ended. In this example, the digestion icon j1 is deleted without the notice effect being executed by the digestion icon j1 in the display mode of the ninja character pattern.

By executing the movement animation between the variation/digestion icons, the variation icon f5 displayed in the variation icon display area b in FIG. 159(j) becomes the digestion icon j5 and moves to the first area of the digestion icon display area i. .. At the time point shown in FIG. 159(l), the movement of the digestion icon j5 has been completed, and the movement animation between the fluctuation/digestion icons has ended.

Also, during the execution of the special figure 1 variation game, two game balls are won in the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by 2 and the increase animation of the holding icon is started, and 1 piece is held. The hold icon g6 corresponding to the hold increased in accordance with the winning of the eye is displayed in a manner of gradually rising from the lower side toward the first region of the special figure 1 holding icon c, and is displayed in accordance with the second winning. The hold icon g7 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed in a manner of gradually rising from the lower side toward the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon c. At the time point shown in FIG. 159(l), the movement of the hold icons g6 and g7 has been completed, and the movement animation of the hold icon has ended. The display modes of the hold icons g6 and g7 are default display modes.

FIG. 159 (m) continued from FIG. 159 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. The winning-and-losing determination result related to the special figure 1 variation game is a failure. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the winning/deciding result of the special game 1 variation game is out of order, "decoration 3-decoration 6" -Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed.

159 (n) continued from FIG. 159 (m), with the start of the special figure 1 variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212, the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the variation display of the mini decorative symbol is started. The state is shown. The third display device 804 displays the white fourth symbol for special figure 1.

With the start of the special game 1 variation game, a movement animation of the digestion icon, a movement animation between the variation/digestion icons, a movement animation between the hold/variation icons, and a movement animation of the hold icon are executed.

By executing the movement animation of the digestion icon, the digestion icon j2 displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i is deleted, and the digestion icon j3 displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i is digested icon. Moved to the fourth area of the display area i, the digest icon j4 displayed in the second area of the digest icon display area i moved to the third area of the digest icon display area i, and moved to the first area of the digest icon display area i. The digestion icon j5 displayed in the area moves to the second area of the digestion icon display area i. At the time point shown in FIG. 159(n), the digestion icon j2 has been erased, the digestion icons j3, j4, and j5 have been moved, and the digestion icon movement animation has ended.

By executing the movement animation between the variation/digestion icons, the variation icon f6 displayed in the variation icon display area b in FIG. 159(m) becomes the digestion icon j6 and moves to the first area of the digestion icon display area i. .. At the time point shown in FIG. 159(n), the movement of the digestion icon j6 has been completed, and the movement animation between the fluctuation/digestion icons has ended.

By executing the movement animation between the hold/variable icons, the hold icon g6 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c in FIG. 159(m) becomes the change icon f7 and the change icon display area b. Move to. At the time point shown in FIG. 159(n), the movement of the variable icon f7 has been completed, and the movement animation between the hold and variable icons has ended.

By executing the moving animation of the hold icon, the hold icon g7 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c in FIG. 159(m) moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. To do. At the time point shown in FIG. 159(n), the movement of the hold icon g7 has been completed, and the movement animation of the hold icon has ended.

159(n) subsequent to FIG. 159(n) shows a state in which the display mode of the digestion icon j4 is changed to a gray ninja character pattern. The digestion icon j4 after the change of the display mode is displayed as a notice icon.

159(p) subsequent to FIG. 159(o) shows a state in which a hold icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon is executed. The change animation of the hold icon is a look-ahead announcement effect. In this example, the hold of the look-ahead notice object is the hold of special figure 1 corresponding to the hold icon g7 (holding of special figure 1 with the first hold order), and the change animation of the hold icon corresponds to the hold of the look-ahead notice object. It is executed in order to change the display mode of the hold icon (in this example, the hold icon g7) to be executed. In the change animation of the hold icon in this example, the digestion icon j4 displayed as the notice icon throws the shuriken image k (hereinafter referred to as “shuriken k”) toward the hold icon g7 that is the display mode change target. A moving image of the scene where the shuriken k hits is displayed on the hold icon g7. The arrow in FIG. 159(p) indicates the trajectory of the shuriken k. The shuriken k is displayed overlapping the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the variable display of the decorative pattern does not overlap the shuriken k and is not displayed. At the time point shown in FIG. 159(p), the shuriken k hits the hold icon g7.

159(q) following FIG. 159(p) shows a state in which the hold icon change animation is being executed. In the change animation of the hold icon of this example, after the shuriken k hits the hold icon g7, the effect image 872 is displayed overlapping the hold icon g7. The shuriken k is erased at the same time when the display of the effect image 872 is started. The shuriken k may be deleted prior to the display of the effect image 872, or may be deleted after the display of the effect image 872 is started.

159(r) subsequent to FIG. 159(q) shows a state in which the change animation of the hold icon is completed. When the effect image 872 that has been displayed so as to overlap the entire hold icon g7 is deleted, the entire hold icon g7 whose display mode has changed to a blue circle becomes visible again. When the effect image 872 is deleted, the change animation of the hold icon ends. In addition, the emission color of the production movable body 810 changes from white to blue prior to the end of the change animation of the hold icon. In other words, the emission color of the production movable body 810 changes from white to blue before the entire hold icon g7 becomes visible again. It should be noted that the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 may change from white to blue at the same time when the hold icon change animation ends, or the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from white to blue after the hold icon change animation ends. May change. In other words, at the same time that the entire hold icon g7 becomes visible again, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 may change from white to blue, or after the entire hold icon g7 becomes visible again. The emission color of the movable body 810 may change from white to blue. In this way, when the hold icon change animation is executed, the display color of the hold icon whose display mode has changed and the emission color of the effect movable body 810 become the same color. In this example, as the look-ahead notice effect, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes. The effect of changing the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 is related to the change animation of the hold icon. The effect movable body whose emission color changes as the look-ahead notice effect when the change animation of the hold icon is executed may be at least one effect movable object among effect movable objects 806, 808, and 810.

In this example, a change animation of the hold icon that changes the display mode of the hold icon g7 by the digest icon j4 having the display mode of the ninja pattern is executed. In FIGS. 159(o) to 159(r), the digestion icon j4 is displayed as a prefetch advance notice display. The animation for changing the hold icon is only for displaying the effect image 872 and deleting the effect image 872. The animation of the scene where the digestion icon j4 throws the shuriken k and the shuriken k flies is the animation for changing the hold icon. May be

FIG. 160(a) continuing from FIG. 159(r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is finished. The winning-and-losing determination result related to the special figure 1 variation game is a failure. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the winning/deciding result of the special game 1 variation game is out of order, "decoration 3-decoration 5" -Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed.

The decorative pattern displayed on the first display device 800 is surrounded by a vertically long rectangular frame image. When the decorative pattern is an odd number, the frame image is displayed in red and the decorative pattern is an even number. In some cases, the inside of the frame image is displayed in blue. The display pattern of the decorative pattern includes the display color in the frame image. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the prefetching notice by displaying all the stop symbols of the decorative symbols in odd numbers or even numbers. In this example, the pre-reading notice with a combination of odd-numbered decorative patterns has a higher jackpot reliability than the pre-reading notice with a combination of even-numbered decorative patterns. In other words, the pre-reading notice with a combination of red decorative patterns is set to have a higher jackpot reliability than the pre-reading notice with a combination of blue decorative patterns. For this reason, when the combination of odd (red) decorative symbols is displayed, the jackpot pattern mode is stopped and displayed in the pattern variation display of the look-ahead notice than when the combination of even (blue) decorative symbols is displayed. Easy to be affected. A combination of odd-numbered, even-numbered, and decorative patterns of the same color is a so-called chance.

FIG. 160(b) continued from FIG. 160(a), with the start of the special figure 1 variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212, the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the mini decorative symbol are started. The state is shown. The third display device 804 displays the white fourth symbol for special figure 1.

With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a moving animation of the digestion icon, a movement animation between the variation/digestion icons, and a movement animation between the hold/variation icons are executed. In addition, when only one hold icon is displayed at the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the movement animation of the hold icon is not executed along with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

By executing the movement animation of the digestion icon, the digestion icon j3 displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i is deleted, and the digestion icon j4 displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i is digested icon. Moved to the fourth area of the display area i, the digestion icon j5 displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i moved to the third area of the digestion icon display area i, and moved to the first area of the digestion icon display area i. The digestion icon j6 displayed in the area moves to the second area of the digestion icon display area i. At the time point shown in FIG. 160(b), the digestion icon j3 has been erased, the digestion icons j4, j5, j6 have been moved, and the digestion icon movement animation has ended.

By executing the movement animation between the variation/digestion icons, the variation icon f7 displayed in the variation icon display area b in FIG. 160(a) becomes the digestion icon j7 and moves to the first area of the digestion icon display area i. .. At the time point shown in FIG. 160(b), the movement of the digestion icon j7 has been completed, and the movement animation between the fluctuation/digestion icons has ended.

By executing the moving animation between the hold/variable icons, the hold icon g7 displayed in the first area of the special icon 1 hold icon display area c in FIG. 160(a) becomes the change icon f8 and the change icon display area b. Move to. At the time point shown in FIG. 160(b), the movement of the variable icon f8 has been completed, and the movement animation between the hold and variable icons has ended.

FIG. 160(c) subsequent to FIG. 160(b) shows a state in which a change icon change animation for changing the display mode of the change icon is executed. The change animation mode of the variable icon in this example is the same as the change animation mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 159(p) to (r). As shown in FIG. 160(c), the digestion icon j4 displayed as the notice icon throws the shuriken k toward the variable icon f8, and a moving image of the scene where the shuriken k hits is displayed on the variable icon f8. The arrow in FIG. 160(c) indicates the trajectory of the shuriken k. The shuriken k is displayed overlapping the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the variable display of the decorative pattern does not overlap the shuriken k and is not displayed. At the time point shown in FIG. 159(p), the shuriken k hits the variable icon f8.

Note that the change animation mode of the variable icon may be different from the change animation mode of the hold icon. For example, in the changing icon change animation, a moving image of the scene where the digestion icon j4 throws a bomb may be displayed.

FIG. 160(d) subsequent to FIG. 160(c) shows a state where the change icon change animation is being executed. In the change icon change animation, the effect image 872 is displayed overlapping the change icon f8 after the shuriken k hits the change icon f8, as in the hold icon change animation. The shuriken k is erased at the same time when the display of the effect image 872 is started. The shuriken k may be deleted prior to the display of the effect image 872, or may be deleted after the display of the effect image 872 is started.

FIG. 160(e) subsequent to FIG. 160(d) shows a state in which the change icon change animation ends. When the effect image 872 that has been displayed so as to overlap the entire variation icon f8 is deleted, the entire variation icon f8 whose display mode has changed to a red circle becomes visible again. The change icon change animation ends when the effect image 872 is deleted. In addition, the emission color of the production movable body 810 changes from blue to red prior to the end of the change icon change animation. In other words, the emission color of the production movable body 810 changes from blue to red before the entire variable icon f8 becomes visible again. It should be noted that the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 may change from blue to red at the same time when the change icon change animation ends, or the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from blue to red after the change icon change animation ends. May change. In other words, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 may change from blue to red at the same time that the entire variable icon f8 is visible again, or after the entire variable icon f8 becomes visible again. The emission color of the movable body 810 may change from blue to red. In this way, when the change icon change animation is executed, the display color of the change icon whose display mode has changed and the emission color of the effect movable body 810 become the same color. In this example, as the notice effect of the change, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes. The effect of changing the emission color of the effect movable body 810 is related to the change icon change animation. Even if the effect movable body whose emission color changes as the notice effect of the change when the change icon change animation is executed is at least one of the effect movable bodies 806, 808, 810. Good.

In this example, a variation icon change animation is performed in which the display mode of the variation icon f8 is changed by the digestion icon j4 in the display mode of the ninja pattern. 160(b) to 160(e), the digestion icon j4 is displayed as a notice display of the change. Note that the change animation of the hold icon is an animation that only displays the effect image 872 and deletes the effect image 872. The animation of the scene in which the digestion icon j4 throws the shuriken k and the shuriken k flies is for changing the change icon. It may be an animation. In this example, the digestion icon j4 is displayed as a pre-reading notice display and then also as a notice of the change.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a first display device 800, a second display device 802, and a third display device 804. In this example, the first display device 800 can display the variable display of the decorative design shown in FIGS. 159(e) and (f) after the variable display of the decorative design shown in FIGS. 159(b) to (d). Is. The first display device 800 can display the variable icon f1 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern shown in FIGS. 159(b) to (d), and the icon displayed as the variable icon f1 is shown in FIG. 159(e). ), (f) can be displayed as the digestion icon j1 in the variable display of the decorative pattern. The digestion icon j1 is displayed as a notice icon. The digestion icon display area i in which the digestion icon j1 is displayed is an area different from the variable icon display area b. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even if the symbol variation display is stopped in the symbol variation display, the variation icon corresponding to the previous symbol variation display is displayed as the notice icon in the next symbol variation display. Since it can be displayed as, there is a case where it is possible to have an expectation for the symbol variation display immediately after the deviation.

In the present embodiment, the first display device 800 can display the variable icon f2 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIGS. 159(e) and (f). The first display device 800 can display both the variation icon f2 and the digestion icon j1.

In the present embodiment, the first display device 800 can display the icon displayed as the hold icon as the variable icon f4. The notice icon can be changed to one of a plurality of types of display modes, and one of the plurality of types of display modes is a gray ninja character pattern as the first display mode. This is a display mode. The digestion icon j4 of the gray ninja character pattern is displayed as a notice icon and is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon g7 (for example, a change animation of the hold icon).

The digestion icon j4 of the gray ninja character pattern is displayed as a notice icon, and is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the variable icon f8 (for example, a change icon change animation).

Note that one of the plurality of display modes of the digestion icon is, for example, a display mode of a banquet character pattern (a display mode of a hold icon g1 shown in FIG. 160 (e) described later). The digest icon of the gray bancho character pattern may be displayed as a notice icon, and is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon (for example, a change animation of the hold icon). It is an icon related to a change (for example, a change icon change animation).

The display mode of the bancho character pattern may be set to have a higher jackpot reliability than the display mode of the ninja character pattern. For example, when the notice icon of the display mode of the banquet character pattern is displayed, the jackpot pattern mode is stopped in the pattern variation display of the notice object than when the notice icon of the display mode of the ninja character pattern is displayed. It may be easily displayed.

In this example, by executing the movement animation of the digestion icon, the digestion icon displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i becomes the second area in the digestion icon displayed in the first area of the digestion icon display area i. Move as if pushed out. Similarly, the digestion icon displayed in the third region of the digestion icon display region i moves to the digestion icon displayed in the second region of the digestion icon display region i so as to be pushed out from the second region, Display of the first display device 800 such that the digestion icon displayed in the fourth area of the icon display area i is pushed out from the second area to the digestion icon displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i. Erased from area.

In this example, by executing the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area is changed from the third area to the digestion icon displayed in the fourth area of the hold icon display area c. Move as if pushed out. Similarly, the hold icon displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area c is moved to the hold icon displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area c so as to be pushed out from the second area, and is held. The hold icon displayed in the first area of the icon display area c is moved from the first area to the hold icon displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area c so as to move to the variable icon display area b. ..

As described above, the movement animation of the digestion icon and the movement animation of the hold icon are common in the animation mode in which the icon is pushed to the icon in the adjacent area and moves to the area opposite to the adjacent area.

In the present embodiment, when the movement animation of the digestion icon, the movement animation between the fluctuation/digestion icons, and the movement animation between the hold/variation icons are executed, they are displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i. When the digested icon is pushed out by the digested icon displayed in the third area of the digested icon display area i and is erased, when the change icon becomes the digested icon, and when the hold icon becomes the changed icon Is the same as. Note that these three timings may be different and the order can be set arbitrarily. Note that two of the three timings may be the same.

In the present embodiment, the increase animation of the hold icon is executed in a manner in which the hold icon rises from below, but may be executed in a manner in which the hold icon descends from above.

The effect of displaying the variable icon as the digestion icon or the notice icon after the next symbol variable display is executed only in the non-electric power support state. For this reason, the movement animation of the digestion icon and the movement animation between the fluctuation/digestion icons are executed only in the non-electric support state. It should be noted that the movement animation of the digestion icon and the movement animation between the variation/digestion icons may be executed without fail in the electric power support state.

Note that the number of digestion icons whose display mode changes is not limited to one. In the present embodiment, the display mode of only the digestion icon j4 is changed in FIG. 159(o), but the display mode of at least one digestion icon j3, j5, j6 along with the digestion icon j4. May change. When the display mode of many digestion icons changes at one time, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the pattern variation display of the notice target than when only the display mode of one digestion icon changes. In this case, it may be possible to entertain the player with lively productions with a relatively high jackpot reliability. On the contrary, when only one digestion icon display mode changes, the jackpot symbol is confirmed in the pattern change display of the notice subject, compared to when many digestion icon display modes change at once. It may be easy to display. In this case, it may be possible to give the player an impression of the digestion icon displayed as the notice icon by changing the display mode.

In the present embodiment, during the symbol variation display in FIGS. 159(m) to 160(a), the notice-pending hold is the hold of Toku-zu 1 having the first holding order (Hold 1 of Toku-zu 1). When the hold 1 of the special figure 1 is a notice target, the icon indicating the design variable display of the notice object is displayed as a hold icon in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the change icon display There are two chances of changing the display mode (promotion to the display mode having a high jackpot reliability) compared with the case where the area is displayed as a variable icon. 159(o) to 160(a), the digestion icon j4 as a notice icon is displayed in the third region of the digestion icon display area i, and in FIGS. 160(b) to 160(e) as a notice icon. The digestion icon is displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i, and the digestion icon j4 can be displayed over the two symbol variable displays. Since the change animation of the hold icon or the variable icon is executed only once in one symbol variable display, the digestion icon as the notice icon related to the change animation is displayed over the two symbol variable displays. In this case, it may be possible to predict that the symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display when the digestion icon is started to be displayed is the subject of advance notice.

For example, in the case where the notice-targeted hold is the hold of the special figure 1 with the second holding order (hold-down 2 of the special figure 1), the icon indicating the notice variable display is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Change in the display mode three times when displayed as a hold icon in the second and first areas of c and as a change icon in the change icon display area b (display with high jackpot reliability) There is an opportunity for promotion to the form). The digestion icon as the notice icon related to the change animation of the icon may start to be displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i. As a result, since the digestion icon is displayed over the three symbol variation displays, the third variation display including the symbol variation display that is being executed when the digestion icon starts to be displayed is a notice target. Sometimes it can be predicted.

As described above, it may be possible to predict the target change of the prefetching notice by the display start position of the digestion icon as the notice icon. It should be noted that the greater the chances of promotion of the icon display mode, the higher the jackpot reliability. In some cases, the jackpot reliability can be suggested by the number of times of promotion of the icon display mode.

For example, in the case where the notice-targeted hold is the hold of the special figure 1 with the second holding order (hold-down 2 of the special figure 1), the icon indicating the notice variable display is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Change in the display mode three times when displayed as a hold icon in the second and first areas of c and as a change icon in the change icon display area b (display with high jackpot reliability) There is an opportunity for promotion to the form). The digestion icon as a notice icon related to the change animation of the icon may start to be displayed in the fourth region of the digestion icon display region i. As a result, the digestion icon is displayed over the one-time symbol variable display, so it may be possible to predict that there is only one opportunity to promote the display mode of the icon.

It should be noted that the digest icon as the notice icon can be displayed in the first to fourth areas of the digest icon display area i regardless of whether the notice target is held. The digest icon as the notice icon can be associated with the promotion of the icon display mode up to four times when the display is started in the first region of the digest icon display region i. On the other hand, the hold icon displayed in the fourth area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c has five opportunities to be promoted in the display mode, and one digestion icon is related to all promotion opportunities. I can't. The hold icon displayed in the fourth area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c may not be the target of the change animation of the hold icon (the target of promotion of the display mode).

The display on the first display device 800 in the present embodiment may be displayed on at least one of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160(f), an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 160(f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed on the first display device 800, the variable display of the mini decorative symbol is executed on the second display device 802, and the white fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed on the third display device 804. It is displayed. A white circular variation icon f1 is displayed in the variation icon display area b. In the state shown in FIG. 160(f), the game state is a non-electric power support state, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 4, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is 2. On the third display device 804, the number of holdings is displayed by the numbers “4” and “2”. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area c of the first display device 800, hold icons g1 to g4 corresponding to the hold of special figure 1 are displayed.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the display area for displaying the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not provided in the non-electric power saving state, and when the hold of the special figure 2 is 1 or more in the non-electric power saving state, In the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, a hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 160(f), the hold icon m1 corresponding to the hold 1 of the special figure 2 is partially overlapped with the hold icons g1 and g2 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 and the special figure 1 hold icon is displayed. The hold icon m2 corresponding to the hold 2 in the special figure 2 is displayed in the area c, and is partially overlapped with the hold icons g2 and g3 corresponding to the hold in the special figure 1 and is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. To be done. Therefore, a part of the hold icons m1 and m2 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 becomes invisible. The hold icons m1 and m2 are displayed in a white square display mode. The display mode of the white square is the default display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold in FIG. The hold icon corresponding to the hold of special figure 2 is displayed on the back side of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of special figure 1.

As described above, in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon corresponding to the hold of special figure 2 is displayed so as to overlap with the hold icon corresponding to the hold of special figure 1. In other words, in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon corresponding to the hold of Toku-zu 1 is displayed without overlapping the hold icon corresponding to the hold of Toku-zu 2.

The hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed as a change icon in the pattern change display executed when the corresponding hold is exhausted, and a digest icon or a notice is displayed in the pattern change display next to the concerned pattern change display. Not displayed as an icon. The variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is erased at the end of the symbol variation display. For example, when the hold of the special figure 2 which remains at the end of the electric support is consumed after the end of the electric support, the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed as a change icon in the symbol variable display. , It is not displayed as a digestion icon or a notice icon in the next symbol variation display.

In addition, in the non-electric power support state, when the holding of special figure 2 becomes 1 or more, or when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the game information display area a is erased, and the digestion icon and special figure 1 Is also erased, and a special figure 2 hold icon display area is separately provided in the display area of at least one display device of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, or the third display device 804. You may be asked. In addition, in the non-electric power support state, when the suspension of special figure 2 becomes 1 or more, or when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the digestion icon or the notice icon may be deleted.

In the non-electric power support state, by using a device that distributes the winning of game balls to the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the special figure 2 starting port 232 for each ball, the starting port winning is possible with a maximum number of 8 held. In the forward change configuration, a maximum of 8 hold icons and digest icons can be displayed, so if you mistake the digest icon for a reserve icon, the number of reserve icons looks like 16 and the maximum reserve number is It may be mistaken for 16 pieces. This may give the player a fresh feeling. In addition, in the electric power support state, the holding icon and the digestion icon of Toku-zu 1 are not displayed, so the maximum holding number may appear to be four.

It should be noted that a maximum of four special icons 1 of the hold icon and the digest icon can be displayed respectively. For example, the display area of the first display device 800 is divided into two, and one area is displayed with a hold icon and a variable display of a decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure variation game to execute the effect, and the other is displayed. A fake effect may be executed by displaying a variation display of a fake decorative design not corresponding to the digestion icon and the special figure variation game in the area. The fake effect may be displayed in the wipe screen wpa shown in FIG. 157.

Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 160(A) to 160(E). Each of FIGS. 160(A) to 160(E) is a diagram showing the effect example in time series. In the states shown in FIGS. 160(A) to 160(E), the game state is a non-electric power support state. FIG. 160(A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game has ended. The winning-and-losing determination result related to the special figure 1 variation game is a failure. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the winning/deciding result of the special game 1 variation game is out of order, "decoration 3-decoration 5" -Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In the first display device 800, the look-ahead notice is executed by a combination of odd (red) decorative patterns of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7”. In this example, the pre-reading notice target is the suspension of special figure 1 having the second suspension order.

On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed. In the digestion icon display area i, digestion icons j1 to j4 are displayed. The display mode of the digestion icons j1 to j4 is the default display mode of a gray circle. In the variable icon display area b, the variable icon f5 in the display mode of the ninja character pattern is displayed. The change icon f5 is displayed in color and is not displayed in gray. The icon in the display mode of the ninja character pattern may be displayed not only in the digestion icon display area i but also in the variable icon display area b and the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. When the icon in the display mode of the ninja character pattern is displayed in the variable icon display area b or the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, it is displayed in color. In this example, the variable icon f5 is used as a pre-reading notice display for the reservation of the special figure 1 having the second reservation order.

In FIG. 160(B) continuing from FIG. 160(A), with the start of the special figure 1 variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212, the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the mini decorative symbol are started. The state is shown. The third display device 804 displays the white fourth symbol for special figure 1.

With the start of the special game 1 variation game, a movement animation of the digestion icon, a movement animation between the variation/digestion icons, a movement animation between the hold/variation icons, and a movement animation of the hold icon are executed.

By executing the movement animation of the digestion icon, the digestion icon j1 displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i is deleted, and the digestion icon j2 displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i is digested icon. Moved to the fourth area of the display area i, the digestion icon j3 displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i moved to the third area of the digestion icon display area i, and moved to the first area of the digestion icon display area i. The digestion icon j4 displayed in the area moves to the second area of the digestion icon display area i. At the time shown in FIG. 160(B), the digestion icon j1 has been erased, the digestion icons j2, j3, and j4 have been moved, and the digestion icon movement animation has ended.

By executing the movement animation between the variation/digestion icons, the variation icon f5 displayed in the variation icon display area b becomes the digestion icon j5 and moves to the first area of the digestion icon display area i. At the time point shown in FIG. 160(B), the movement of the digestion icon j5 has been completed, and the movement animation between the fluctuation/digestion icons has ended. The digestion icon j5 is displayed with the same display size as the variation icon f5. In this way, the icon of the display mode of the ninja character pattern has the same display size when it is displayed as the variable icon and when it is displayed as the digestion icon. The digestion icon j5 is displayed in gray. The display color of the digestion icon j5 may be changed to gray at the same time when the digestion icon j5 starts moving to the first area of the digestion icon display area i, or may be changed to gray during the movement to the first area. The color may be changed to gray at the same time when the movement to the first area is completed, or may be changed to gray after the movement to the first area is completed.

By executing the movement animation between the hold/variable icons, the hold icon g5 displayed in the first area of the special icon 1 hold icon display area c becomes the change icon f6 and moves to the change icon display area b. At the time shown in FIG. 160(B), the movement of the change icon f6 has been completed, and the movement animation between the change/digest icons has ended.

By executing the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon g6 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 160(B), the movement of the hold icon g6 has been completed, and the movement animation of the hold icon has ended.

FIG. 160(C) subsequent to FIG. 160(B) shows a state in which a hold icon change animation that changes the display mode of the hold icon is executed. At the time shown in FIG. 160(C), the shuriken k thrown by the digestion icon j5 hits the holding icon g6. The icon displayed as the variable icon in FIG. 160(A) may be used as a notice effect after it becomes a digestion icon.

FIG. 160(D) continuing from FIG. 160(C) shows a state in which the hold icon change animation is being executed. After the shuriken k hits the hold icon g6, the effect image 872 is displayed overlapping the hold icon g6. The shuriken k is erased at the same time when the display of the effect image 872 is started. The icon (in this example, the hold icon g6) corresponding to the symbol variable display of the notice target may change the display mode when being displayed as the hold icon.

FIG. 160(E) continuing from FIG. 160(D) shows a state in which the change animation of the hold icon is completed. When the effect image 872 that is displayed overlapping the entire hold icon g6 is erased, the entire hold icon g6 whose display mode has changed to a red circle becomes visible again. In addition, the emission color of the production movable body 810 changes from white to red prior to the end of the change animation of the hold icon. In this way, when the hold icon change animation is executed, the display color of the hold icon whose display mode has changed and the emission color of the effect movable body 810 become the same color. In this example, as the look-ahead notice effect, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the change icon as a notice icon for which a notice other than the change is a notice target. Note that the hold icon may be displayed as a notice icon that gives notice of a hold other than the hold of the corresponding hold order. In addition, the icon in the display mode of the ninja character pattern may be displayed as a notice display of the variation in the variation icon display region b, and may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display in the special figure 1 hold icon display region c. is there.

Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 160(a) to 160(e). Each figure of (a)-(e) of FIG. 160 is a figure which shows this production example in a time series. In the states shown in FIGS. 160A to 160E, the game state is a non-electric power support state. FIG. 160 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. On the first display device 800, a decorative pattern of a combination of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed. The variable display of the mini decorative design is executed on the second display device 802, and the white fourth design for special figure 1 is displayed on the third display device 804. Moreover, the number of reservations of special figure 1 is 2, and the number of reservations of special figure 2 is 0. On the third display device 804, the number of holdings is displayed by the numbers “2” and “0”. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area c of the first display device 800, hold icons g1 and g2 corresponding to the hold of special figure 1 are displayed.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the digestion icon display area i is not provided in the game information display area a, and the digestion icon is not displayed. Further, the variable icon display area n of the present embodiment is not surrounded by a square frame image unlike the variable icon display area b in the above-mentioned embodiment, and the variable icon display position is provided at the bottom of the variable icon display area n. The horizontally long rectangular pedestal image shown is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 160 (A), the variable icon f1 in the display mode of the ninja character pattern is displayed. The variation icon f1 is displayed in color. The change icon f1 is displayed as a notice icon that gives a notice of the hold of the special map 1 having the first hold order.

FIG. 160 (i) continued from FIG. 160 (a) shows a state in which the display mode of the hold icon g1 is changed during the execution of the special figure 1 variation game. The display mode of the hold icon g1 is changed from a white circle to a display mode of a long-length character pattern. The display mode of the Bancho character pattern is a display mode of the advance notice. When the display mode of the hold icon g1 changes, a change icon change animation including a scene in which the change icon f1 throws a shuriken to the hold icon g1 may be executed, or the change icon f1 shown in FIG. An animation may be displayed in which the Ninja character turns to the hold icon g1. When the display mode of the hold icon g1 changes, an animation including the moving image of the variable icon f1 may be displayed, and the change icon f1 may be associated with the change of the display mode of the hold icon g1.

FIG. 160 (u) continuing from FIG. 160 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game has ended. The winning-and-losing determination result related to the special figure 1 variation game is a failure. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the winning/deciding result of the special game 1 variation game is out of order, "decoration 3-decoration 5" -Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In the first display device 800, the look-ahead notice is executed by a combination of odd (red) decorative patterns of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7”. The hold of the prefetching notice target is the hold of the special map 1 having the first hold order.

FIG. 160 (e) continuing from FIG. 160 (u), the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the mini decorative symbol are started with the variation of the special symbol 1 started by the special symbol 1 display device 212. The state is shown. The third display device 804 displays the white fourth symbol for special figure 1.

With the start of the special figure 1 variation game, in this example, in addition to the movement animation between the variation icons, the movement animation between the hold/variation icons, and the movement animation of the hold icon, the movement animation of the variation icons is executed.

By executing the moving animation of the variable icon, the variable icon f1 moves from the center of the variable icon display area n to the right side. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the variation icon related to the change display of the display mode of the hold icon is displayed in the variation icon display area n even after the end of the corresponding special figure variation game. At the time point shown in FIG. 160(E), the movement of the variable icon f1 has been completed, and the moving animation of the variable icon has ended.

By executing the movement animation between the hold/variable icons, the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special icon 1 hold icon display area c becomes the change icon f2 and moves to the change icon display area n. At the time point shown in FIG. 160 (e), the movement of the variable icon f2 has been completed, and the movement animation between the variable/digested icons has ended.

By executing the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time point shown in FIG. 160E, the movement of the hold icon g2 has been completed, and the movement animation of the hold icon has ended.

In this embodiment, two variable icons may be displayed in the variable icon display area n. In the example shown in FIG. 160E, the variation icon f1 is displayed in the upper right portion of the pedestal image in the variation icon display area n, and the variation icon f2 is displayed in the upper left portion of the pedestal image. The variable icon f1 and the variable icon f2 are displayed in different areas in the variable icon display area n so that one of them does not overlap the other. Note that a part of one of the variable icons f1 and f2 may overlap with a part of the other icon. A character string image of "co-fighting" is displayed above the variation icons f1 and f2, and the variation icon f1 of the ninja character pattern and the variation icon f2 of the banquet character pattern provide advance notice of the variation. To be executed. In this way, the variable icon f1 and the variable icon f2 may be integrally displayed and function as one variable icon. In FIG. 160(e), the variable icon f1 may be displayed as a notice icon or a digestion icon. The variable icon corresponding to the symbol variable display shown in FIG. 160(e) may be only the variable icon f2.

As in this embodiment, the two icons may be integrally displayed as one variable icon. When two icons are displayed integrally as one variable icon, the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display being executed than when one icon is displayed as one variable icon. Good.

Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160 (a) shows the state where the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed on the first display device 800, the variable display of the mini decorative symbol is executed on the second display device 802, and the white fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed on the third display device 804. It is displayed. A white circular variation icon f1 is displayed in the variation icon display area b.

In the state shown in FIG. 160(A), the game state is a non-electric power support state, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 2, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is 0. On the third display device 804, the number of holdings is displayed by the numbers “2” and “0”. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area c of the first display device 800, hold icons g1 and g2 corresponding to the hold of special figure 1 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons g1 and g2 are default display modes.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a horizontally elongated rectangular display area e similar to the example shown in FIG. 155(a) is provided in the game information display area a and to the right of the variable icon display area b. .. In the display area e, it is possible to display, as a character string image, a tutorial display or a notice display such as a description of a game method, effect contents, or a character description. In FIG. 160(A), the tutorial display is executed by displaying the character string image of "Due to the notice icon being exhausted..." In the display area e.

The notice icon o is overlapped and displayed on the upper portion of the character string image of “previous notice” in the display area e. The display mode of the notice icon o is a character pattern of a swordsman. The icon displayed as the variable icon is displayed as the notice icon o after the end of the corresponding special figure variable game (symbol variable display). In this example, the notice icon o is the icon displayed as the variation icon in the special figure 1 variable game one time before the special figure 1 variable game executed in FIG. Note that the notice icon o may be the icon displayed as the variation icon in the special figure 1 variable game two or more times before the special figure 1 variable game executed in FIG. 160(A). The notice icon o may be a swordsman's character pattern or may be in a circular display form of a predetermined color during the period displayed as the variable icon. The notice icon in this example is the same as the notice icon I62 shown in FIG. 125(i). The notice icon of this example may be displayed as the notice icon shown in FIG. 81. For example, the pseudo-relationship effect may be executed when the notice icon of this example is consumed. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can be applied to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 154.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to Examples 5 to 9 of the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160 again.
(C1)

Display means (for example, a generic name of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804, the special figure 1 display device 212)
A gaming table equipped with

The display means (for example, at least one display device of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804, the special figure 1 display device 212).

Is a symbol variable display (hereinafter, "first symbol variable display" (for example, variable display of decorative symbol, variable display of special symbol 1, variable display of mini decorative symbol, shown in FIGS. 159(b) to 159(d))). After the symbol variation display, the symbol variation display finished in FIG. 160(A), the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 160(A) to 160(U)), the next symbol variation display (hereinafter, “second symbol”) "Variable display" (for example, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of special symbols, variable display of mini decorative symbols, symbol variable display shown in FIGS. 159(e) and (f), and FIG. 160(B) to (E)) It is a means capable of displaying the symbol variation display shown, and the symbol variation display shown in FIG.

In the first symbol variation display, a variation icon corresponding to the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, “first variation icon” (for example, variation icon f1 shown in FIGS. 159(b) to (d)), A variable icon f5 shown in 160(A) and a variable icon f1 shown in FIGS. 160(a) to 160(u)) can be displayed.

The icon displayed as the first variation icon (for example, the variation icon f1 shown in FIGS. 159(b) to (d), the variation icon f5 shown in FIG. 160(A), and FIGS. 160(A) to (U)). The variation icon f1 shown in FIG. 2 is a notice icon (for example, the digestion icon j1 shown in FIGS. 159(e) and (f), the digestion icon j5 shown in FIGS. 160(B) to 160(E)) in the second symbol variation display. , And is configured to be displayed as the variable icon f1) shown in FIG.

The area in which the notice icon is displayed (for example, the notice icon display area i) is a different area from the area in which the first variation icon is displayed (for example, the variation icon display area b),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, even when the deviating symbol mode is stopped and displayed in the first symbol variation display, in the next second symbol variation display, the first symbol variation display is displayed. Since the corresponding variable icon can be displayed as the notice icon, it may be possible to have an expectation for the second symbol variable display immediately after the deviation.
(C2)

The gaming machine described in C1 above, in the second symbol variation display, a variation icon corresponding to the second symbol variation display (hereinafter, "second variation icon" (for example, FIG. 159(e)). , (F) shown in FIG. 160(B) to (E), and a variable icon f2 shown in FIG.

The second variation icon (for example, the variation icon f2 shown in FIGS. 159(e) and (f), the variation icon f6 shown in FIGS. 160(B) to (E)) and the notice icon (for example, FIG. 159(e). ) And digestion icon j1 shown in (f) and digestion icon j5 shown in FIGS. 160(B) to 160(E)) are configured to be displayable (for example, FIGS. 159(e), (f), and FIG. 159). 160 (A) to (E)),
A game table characterized by that.
(C3)
The gaming table described in C1 or C2,

The icon displayed as the hold icon (for example, the hold icon g7 shown in FIGS. 159(l) to (r) and FIG. 160(a)) is changed to the change icon (for example, the change icon f8 shown in FIG. 160(b)). Can be displayed,

The notice icon can be changed to one of a plurality of display modes (for example, a gray circular display mode and a gray ninja character pattern display mode).

One display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode (for example, a display mode of a gray ninja character pattern),

The notice icon in the first display mode (for example, digestion icon j4 shown in FIGS. 159(o) to (r), 160(a) to (e), digestion shown in FIGS. 160(B) to (E)). The icon j5) is a display mode of the hold icon (for example, hold icons g7 shown in FIGS. 159(l) to (r), FIG. 160(a), hold icon g6 shown in FIGS. 160(B) to (E)). (For example, refer to FIGS. 159(p) to (r) and FIGS. 160(C) to 160(E)),
A game table characterized by that.
(C4)
The gaming machine described in C3 above,

The notice icon in the first display mode (for example, the digestion icon j4 shown in FIGS. 159(o) to (r) and FIGS. 160(a) to 160(e)) is the variation icon (for example, FIG. 160(b)). ) Is a icon related to a change in the display mode of the variable icon f8) (for example, a change icon change animation),
A game table characterized by that.
(C5)
The gaming table described in C3 or C4,

One display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode (for example, a display mode of a gray guard character character pattern),

The notice icon of the second display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon (for example, a change animation of the hold icon),

The notice icon of the second display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the variable icon (for example, a change animation of the variable icon),
A game table characterized by that.
(C6)
The gaming table according to any one of C1 to C5,

The display mode of the notice icon (for example, the display color is gray) is different from the display mode of the change icon (for example, the display color is a color other than gray (white, blue, green, red, color)),
A game table characterized by that. (C7)
The gaming table according to any one of C1 to C6,

An animation including a movement of the notice icon (for example, a movement animation between a fluctuation/digestion icon, a movement animation of a digestion icon) can be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.
(C8)
The gaming table according to any one of C1 to C7,

The display means (for example, the first display device 800, the second display device 802, the third display device 804) is configured to include an image display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device).
A game table characterized by that.
(C9)
The gaming table according to any one of C1 to C8,

In the non-electric power support state, the icon displayed as the first variable icon is displayed as the notice icon in the second symbol variable display,
A game table characterized by that.
(C10)
The gaming table according to any one of C1 to C9,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100),
A game table characterized by that.

The display modes of the hold icon, the variable icon, and the notice icon may be different from each other, the display modes of the hold icon and the variable icon are the same, and the notice icon may be different only in color from the hold icon and the variable icon. Alternatively, the notice icon may be different in color and shape from the hold icon and the change icon.

The display state of the variable icon and the notice icon are the same, the hold icon may be different from the change icon and the notice icon only in color, and the hold icon may be different from the change icon and the notice icon in color and shape. You may

It should be noted that the display mode of the hold icon and the notice icon are the same, the variable icon may be different only in color from the hold icon and notice icon, and the change icon may be different in color and shape from the hold icon and notice icon. You may

An animation that changes the display mode of the digestion icon may be executed by the hold icon. The hold icon may be an icon related to a change in the display mode of the digestion icon. On the contrary, even if the hold icon does not execute the animation that changes the display mode of the digestion icon. The hold icon may be an icon that is not related to a change in the display mode of the digestion icon.

An animation may be executed by the digest icon to change the display mode of the digest icon different from the digest icon. The digestion icon may be an icon associated with a change in the display mode of the digestion icon different from the digestion icon.

The special icon variation game is being executed (the symbol variation display is being performed), and after the display indicating the deviation (for example, the temporary stop display of the deviation pattern) is executed, the fluctuation icon of the default display mode is the ninja. It may be changed to a character pattern such as a symbol or a bancho, and may be displayed as a notice icon after the end of the variable display of the symbol.

The digestion icon may return to the default display mode after the end of the notice effect related to the digestion icon (for example, the change animation of the hold icon or the change animation of the variable icon). The digestion icon that has finished the role of production may return to the default display mode. Note that the ninja character pattern hold icon does not return to the default display mode even after the effect of changing another hold icon, a variation icon, or a digestion icon is executed by the ninja character pattern hold icon.

At least a part of the same mode of effect, effects that change the display mode of the notice icon, and other effects (for example, change of the display mode of the hold icon, acquisition of a mini item (notice icon), stop of the middle symbol) It is feasible.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described first to ninth embodiments uses the first display device 8 as the display means.

00, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804, the pachinko machine 100 may include only the first display device 800 among these display devices. In this case, the display on the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 described in the above-described production example may be displayed on the first display device 800. In the first to ninth examples, the display on the first display device 800 may be displayable on at least one of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804, The display on the second display device 802 may be displayable on at least one of the first display device 800 and the third display device 804, or the display on the third display device 804 may be. The display may be displayable on at least one of the first display device 800 and the second display device 804. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the above Examples 1 to 9 has a first decorative pattern shown in FIG. 125 instead of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804 as the display means. The display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be provided. In this case, the display described in the above-described effect example is executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIGS. 125 to 154 is the first display device 800 and the second display device 802. , May be displayed on the third display device 804. The game information display area a corresponds to the user interface (UI) section in FIG. 125(a). The game information display area a may be referred to as a user interface (UI) unit.
The matters described in the first to ninth embodiments can be combined.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 161 to FIG. 170 are diagrams showing, in a step-by-step manner, modification examples of effects centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to this embodiment. 161 to 170, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, FIGS. 161 to 170 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative pattern display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative pattern display devices, the second decorative pattern display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and the first decoration The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be a sub display device, and a second decorative symbol display device. 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the width direction, and the height is also slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right edge portion thereof overlaps with the front side of the left edge portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has its left edge portion the first. 1 The decorative pattern display device 208N overlaps with the front surface side of the right end portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in the directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Also, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the state of being closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily variable display of the decorative symbols for each display device, and are named for convenience. However, it should be noted that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N) are summarized as effect display means, and the effect display means is the decorative pattern. It is also possible to perform variable display of, or to display a plurality of types of effect. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmissive region. A light-emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light-emitting body is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can look like. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 161-170, the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut in a pattern simulating a predetermined effect image. In addition, the light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the region where the light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the light irradiated. Therefore, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable. Further, the light guide plate IL may be provided on the front side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 16 to 170, the appearance of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136 is shown.

FIG. 161 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the effect of the mini game applicable to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 161(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is located at the center thereof. It is displayed in a state of being accommodated in the rectangular hold display frame FL1, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. There is. In a broad sense, the entire UI unit may be interpreted as a pedestal for the hold icon. At the timing shown in FIG. 161(a), since three variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the three hold icons h11, h12, h13 all have default display modes. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 serving as an explanation display section is arranged, and various information related to games and effects (tutorial display) is displayed, and the content is updated at an appropriate timing. To be done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 161(a), no display is made and it is hidden. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with a combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2", and it is informed that it is lost. There is. The UI unit is provided in a region that does not overlap with the display region of the first decorative symbol, but may overlap with the display region of the first decorative symbol. Further, the UI unit may be always displayed, or may be displayed for a certain period.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display portion ST1 as an explanation display portion for displaying the currently performed stage name and reach name is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 161(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a loss. It has been reported.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed. The lord's character may or may not always be displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. ing. Further, the family crest monument 224E has a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yashiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged and can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro 224Fa and the general 224Fb each have a light emitting means such as a full-color LED or the like built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the effect contents.

Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 161(b), the holding icons h11, h12, h13 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively, and the first holding icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon in the display position of is stored in the hold display frame FL1 in which the variable icon is displayed and becomes the variable icon h0, and the hold icon in the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11. Then, the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and moves to the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 161(b), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the text "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed, and the relationship between the panda and the lord's character is explained. Here, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the timing after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the same timing as the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, or the change of the decorative pattern. The timing may be before the start of display. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 161(c), the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 in the hold icon display area changes to the display mode of the button hold icon. In the present embodiment, the timing for changing the display mode of the hold icon may be configured to be always performed at the same timing after the symbol variable display is started, or may be configured to be different in some cases. Good. Further, the speaker 120 may output a voice at the timing of changing the display mode of the hold icon h12 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 161(c), even if the effect button 136 is operated, the operation is not validated and the display mode of the hold icon h12 is not changed. However, the operation of the effect button 136 is valid. The display mode of the hold icon h12 may be changed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 161(d), the effect of the mini game is started on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. When the mini game is started, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the dice symbol is stopped and displayed above the stage name display portion ST1 in a manner showing the result of "1", and above it, The explanation of the mission of the mini game is displayed. In the mission explanation display shown in FIG. 161(d), the display of "button push" and the display of "3" on the dice are displayed together with the display of "chance" and the mini game starts. After that, it is explained that if the production button 136 is operated and the result of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, something good will happen. In addition, in this effect example, the mini game is executed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, but in other words, the display area in which the mini game is executed is a liquid crystal frame configured by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It can be said that it is partitioned by (bezel).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 161(e), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the symbols of the dice is started, and the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to accept the operation of the effect button 136. Is notified and the player is prompted to operate the effect button 136. The display mode of the button reception time meter changes so that the gauge becomes shorter according to the time elapsed from the start of the mini game. The button reception time meter may not be displayed. Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 161, when the effect button 136 is operated during the execution of the mini game, the result of the mini game is derived in preference to the change in the display mode of the hold icon. It is configured.

Therefore, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 161(f) after the mini game starts, as shown in FIG. 161(g), the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays dice symbols. While the display is stopped, the hold icon h12 of the display mode of the button hold icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L has not been changed in the display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 161(g), the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed in a mode showing the result of "3", and it is informed that the mission is achieved.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 161(h), the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays “Hold 1UP” indicating that it is a reward for achieving the mission. That is, it is announced in advance that the reliability of the pre-reading notice in the hold icon will be ranked up by one step. In other words, it can be said that the reward for accomplishing the mission functions as a notice of a big hit notice. It should be noted that the reward for accomplishing the mission functions as a notice of a big jackpot announcement, so it can be said that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the mission is performed than when the mission is not performed. Also, at the timing when the mini game ends, the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the change display of the hold icon starts. At this time, a button reception time meter may be displayed. FIG. 161(i) shows that the reward for completing the mission is continuously displayed. Further, since the effect button 136 has not been operated yet, the second hold icon h12 in the special figure 1 remains in the display mode of the button hold icon.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 161(j), as shown in FIG. 161(k), the hold icon h12 of the display mode of the button hold icon becomes a circular blue display mode. Change. That is, the display mode of the pre-reading notice has changed. In the present embodiment, the hold icon in the display mode of the prefetching notice can be displayed in three display modes of blue, green, and red, and the reliability of the big hit is higher in the order of red>green>blue. .. In other words, when the circular red hold icon is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the circular green hold icon is displayed. When the hold icon in the green display mode is displayed in, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the case where the hold icon in the circular blue display mode is displayed. When the hold icon in the display mode is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the hold icon in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, in this production example, by operating the production button 136, the hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon is changed to the hold icon in the blue display mode which is the first stage rank of the prefetch notice, but the green The hold icon may be changed to the display mode of or the display mode of red. In this case, for example, the display mode of the button holding icon may be displayed in an aura-like manner so that the holding icon is expected to change to a display mode with a higher rank.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 161(l), the display of "holding 1UP" displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves over the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and becomes a blue display mode. It is shown that the second holding icon h12 of the changed special figure 1 is headed. In the present embodiment, the timing at which the display of "hold 1UP" starts moving is the timing after the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes, but it may be any timing. For example, the timing at which the display of “Hold 1UP” starts moving may be the same as the timing at which the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes. Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the display of "hold 1UP" starts to move is within the same symbol variable display as the symbol variable display in which the display mode of the pending icon h12 has changed, but the display mode of the pending icon h12 changes. The symbol variation display performed after the symbol variation display may be in execution.

After that, when the display of "Hold 1UP" overlaps the second hold icon h12 of Toku-zu 1, the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes from blue to green, as shown in FIG. 161(m). That is, the result of the mini game is reflected, and it is produced that the reliability of the pre-reading notice in the hold icon h12 is upgraded by one step. Even if the display of "hold 1UP" overlaps the hold icon, the display mode of the hold icon may not change.

After that, when the symbol variation display time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 161(n), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". , Is lost. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the character display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is erased and hidden.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the mini game mission is announced so that the display mode of the look-ahead notice in the hold icon is ranked up by one step. However, for example, the mini game mission is achieved. As a result, one of the mini items shown in FIG. 81 and FIG. 135(d) may be stocked, and the contents of the effect (notice effect) to be performed thereafter may be announced, or timer stock may be performed. May be. Here, the timer stock is, for example, an aspect of a notice that displays the timer and suggests that a special effect is started when the time indicated by the timer has elapsed. Further, as a result of the mission of the mini game being completed, a rare item that is not related to the result of the success/failure determination may be acquired.

Further, in the present embodiment, the mini game is started at the timing after the hold icon is changed to the display mode of the button hold icon and the change effect of the hold icon is started, but the mini game is started. The change effect of the hold icon may be started later. Further, in the present embodiment, the period during which the change effect of the hold icon is performed and the period during which the mini game is performed are made to overlap, but the periods may not be made to overlap, for example, a certain symbol variation. The mini game may be started after a change effect of the hold icon is performed in the display and the hold icon changes to the prefetch advance notice display mode (for example, a blue display mode). That is, the mini game may be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display while the hold icon in the blue display mode is displayed. This also applies to the following description.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a reward for the achievement of the mission of the mini game, it is configured to give a notice that the hold icon changed to the display mode of the look-ahead notice will be ranked up due to the change effect of the button hold icon. As a reward for the achievement of the mission of the mini game, a change effect of the button hold icon may give a notice that the hold icon is changed to a display mode of the prefetch notice. In this case, the rank of the display mode of the prefetch notice may be announced. Further, it may be possible to give a notice that a change effect of the button hold icon will be performed.

Further, in this example of production, the mini game is played on the sub liquid crystal (second decorative symbol display device 208M), but may be played on the main liquid crystal (first decorative symbol display device 208L).

FIG. 162 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect of the mini game. Note that FIG. 162(a) to FIG. 162(j) are the same as FIG. 161(a) to FIG.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 162(j), as shown in FIG. 162(k), the hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The circular display is changed to a green display mode, and the display of "Hold 1UP" is erased on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Thus, in this effect example, the case where the operation of the effect button 136 causes the change of the hold icon in the display mode of the button hold icon and the change in the display mode of the hold icon due to the achievement of the mini game mission at the same time are shown. .. That is, in this effect example, as a change of the display mode of the hold icon by the change effect of the button hold icon to the display mode (blue display mode) of the first stage of the prefetch notice, and as a reflection of the result of achievement of the mission of the mini game. The pre-reading notice rank of the display mode of the reservation icon is increased at the same time.

FIG. 163 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect of the mini game. Note that FIGS. 163(a) and 163(b) are the same as FIGS. 161(a) and 161(b), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

163(c) is different from FIG. 161(c) in that the change icon of the hold icon is not started, and the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 remains in the default display mode. After that, the effect of the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 163(d), and the mini game is performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 161(d)-(h) (FIG. 163(d)- The same figure (h)).

When the timing shown in FIG. 163(i) is reached in a state where the change effect of the hold icon is not started, the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 changes to a blue display mode on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, the display mode is changed to the first-stage display mode of the prefetching notice. That is, in this effect example, the display mode of the hold icon is not changed by the change effect of the hold icon using the button hold icon, and only the change of the display mode of the hold icon is reflected as a result of achievement of the mini game mission. Has been done. FIG. 164 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect of the mini game. Note that FIGS. 164(a) to 164(l) are the same as FIGS. 161(a) to 161(l), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

At the timing shown in FIG. 164(l), the display of "holding 1UP" displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves over the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display of "holding 1UP" is displayed. When it overlaps with the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1, as shown in FIG. 164(m), the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes from blue to red, and the reliability of the prefetch notice is ranked up by two levels. ing. In this example of performance, the advance notice reliability was predicted to be one rank higher as the result of achievement of the mini game mission, but the result is more advantageous than the notice content (preread warning reliability is increased to two ranks). It is shown that is reflected.

After that, when the symbol variation display time elapses, as shown in FIG. 164(n), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". , Is lost. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the character display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is erased and hidden.

In the present embodiment, due to the change effect of the button hold icon, the display mode of the hold icon is changed to the first-stage display mode (blue display mode) of the look-ahead notice, and then the mission achievement result of the mini game is displayed. As a reflection, the display mode of the hold icon is further changed. However, due to the change effect of the button hold icon, the display mode of the hold icon is changed to a display mode of two or more ranks of prefetch notice, and then the mini game You may make it further rank up the display mode of a hold icon as a reflection of the result of mission achievement. Here, for example, due to the change effect of the button hold icon, the display mode of the hold icon is the highest rank display mode of the prefetch notice (for example, a red display mode, or a premier display mode for predicting the jackpot confirmation (for example, rainbow). If the display mode of the hold icon is changed, the display mode of the hold icon may not be changed even if the rank increase of the display mode of the hold icon is announced as a result of achievement of the mini game mission. Further, the display mode may be changed to a specific display mode (for example, a gold display mode) that can be displayed only as a reflection of the result of achievement of the mini game mission.

FIG. 165 is a diagram showing another example of the effect of the mini game step by step. Note that FIGS. 165(a) to 165(e) are the same as FIGS. 161(a) to 161(e), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 165(f) after the mini game is started, as shown in FIG. 165(g), the dice symbol is stopped in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. indicate. On the other hand, in this effect example, the hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the button hold icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, is changed to the first-stage display mode (blue display mode) of the prefetching notice. .. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the button operation reception in the mini game and the button operation reception in the change effect of the button hold icon are simultaneously performed by one operation of the effect button 136.

After that, the effect is performed as described above with reference to FIGS. 161(k) to 161(l) (FIGS. 165(h) to 165(k)).

FIG. 166 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect of the mini game. Note that FIGS. 166(a) to 166(c) are the same as FIGS. 161(a) to 161(c), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In this effect example, before the effect of the mini game is started, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the timing shown in FIG. 166(d). The slide movement is started in the directions close to each other along the display surface of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the left edge of the display region is substantially aligned with the left edge of the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, the third decorative symbol display device 208N stops at the position where the right edge of the display region is substantially aligned with the right edge of the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon is overlapped with the second decorative symbol display device 208M in which the mini game is played, and compared with the state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M is not overlapped. Therefore, the hold icon h12 is difficult to see. In other words, it can be said that the effect including the button image for promoting the button operation is overlapped with the effect including the button image for promoting the button operation. The change effect of the button holding icon is performed by the holding icon h12 of the second special drawing 1, the holding icon h13 of the third special drawing 1, and the holding icon h14 of the fourth special drawing 1. In this case, if the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps and the first holding icon h11 of the special diagram 1 is used, the second decorative symbol display device 208M does not overlap, but 1 Even when the hold icon h11 of the second special diagram 1 is used, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may be configured to be overlapped. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 166(d), a part of the hold icon h12 of the second special drawing 1 is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M, but the second special drawing 1 All of the hold icons h12 may be overlapped with the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In this effect example, when only one of the notice of change in the display mode of the hold icon and the mini game is being performed, the effects of each other do not overlap, and the hold icon Even when the period in which the display mode change notice is given and the period in which the mini game is performed do not overlap, the mutual effects do not overlap. In addition, the tutorial display section TT1 in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the tutorial display section is compared with the state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208M is not overlapped. The character display displayed on TT1 is difficult to see. Further, the first decorative symbol, the left symbol and the right symbol are overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, respectively, it is difficult to visually recognize, but the middle symbol is It is not overlapped by the display device and is visible.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 166(e), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the effect of the mini game is started as described above with reference to FIG. 161(d).

After that, as shown in FIG. 166(f), the variable display of the symbols on the dice is started on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 166(g) after the mini game is started, as shown in FIG. 166(h), the dice symbol is stopped in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. indicate. In addition, the hold icon h12 of the display mode of the button reservation icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is not changed in display mode. That is, also in this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 in the change effect of the button holding icon is not accepted, and only the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is accepted. In the example shown in FIG. 166(h), the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed in a mode showing "3", and it is informed that the mission is achieved.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 166(i), the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays “Hold 1UP” indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission. After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start sliding movement in the directions away from each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and FIG. 166(j). As shown, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N both stop at the initial position. At this time, the hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon is such that the overlap by the second decorative symbol display device 208M has been eliminated, and the hold icon compared to the state of being overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. h12 is easily visible. The timing at which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N return to the initial position may be after the mini game is finished, or may be returned during the derivation of the result of the mini game. May be.

After that, the effect is performed as described above with reference to FIGS. 161(j) to 161(n) (FIGS. 166(k) to 166(n)).

In this effect example, the display device in which the change effect by the button holding icon is performed is different from the display device in which the effect of the mini game is effected, and the button is changed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M in which the effect of the mini game is effected. Although it is shown that the change effect by the hold icon is overlapped, the display device by which the change effect by the button hold icon is performed and the display device by which the effect of the mini game is performed may be the same. In this case, for example, the effect of the mini game may be displayed so as to overlap with the effect of change by the button holding icon.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the change effect by the button holding icon is performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the mini game effect is performed in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. A change effect may be performed by the button holding icon on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and a mini game effect may be performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this case, the change effect by the button holding icon is performed. The effect of the mini game may be overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M which is displayed.

Further, when the display device that performs the change effect by the button hold icon and the display device that performs the effect of the mini game are the same, for example, the change effect by the button hold icon overlaps the effect of the mini game. It may be displayed.

In addition, in this example of performance, an example in which the effect of the mini game is overlapped with another effect is shown, but, for example, in addition to the effect of the mini game, other than a mini game such as a customer waiting demonstration effect or a decorative pattern variable display The effect may be performed, and this effect may overlap other effects. More specifically, for example, a big hit effect is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol display device 208M is moved along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol is displayed. The effect displayed on the display device 208L may be overlapped. According to this, it may be possible to focus more attention on the effect by performing the effect other than the mini game.

FIG. 167 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect of the mini game. Note that FIGS. 167(a) to 167(g) are the same as FIGS. 166(a) to 166(g), and a description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 167(g) after the mini game is started, the dice symbol is stopped in the second decorative symbol display device 208M as shown in FIG. 167(h). indicate. On the other hand, in this effect example, in the display mode of the button hold icon which is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and overlaps with the second decorative symbol display device 208M on which the effect of the mini game is performed. The hold icon h12 changes to the first-stage display mode (blue display mode) of the prefetching notice. That is, in this effect example, the button operation reception in the mini game and the button operation reception in the change effect of the button holding icon overlapping the effect of the mini game are simultaneously performed by one operation of the effect button 136. Is shown.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 167(i), the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays “Hold 1UP” indicating that it is a reward for achieving the mission. After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start sliding movement in the directions away from each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and FIG. 167(j). As shown, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N both stop at the initial position. At this time, the hold icon h12 that has changed to the blue display mode has the overlap by the second decorative symbol display device 208M resolved, and the hold icon compared to the state of being overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. h12 is easily visible.

After that, the effect is performed as described above with reference to FIGS. 165(i) to (k) (FIGS. 167(k) to (l)).

FIG. 168 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect of the mini game. Note that FIGS. 168(a) to 168(g) are the same as FIGS. 166(a) to 166(g), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 168(g) after the mini game is started, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 168(h), the line is displayed in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The dice pattern in the effect of the mini game being displayed is not stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is overlapped with the second decorative symbol display device 208M on which the mini game effect is being performed. The hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the button holding icon, is changed to the display mode of the first stage of the prefetching notice (blue display mode). That is, in this effect example, the button operation in the mini game is not accepted, and only the button operation in the change effect of the button holding icon overlapping the effect of the mini game is accepted. In other words, in this effect example, it can be said that the reception of the button operation in the change effect of the button hold icon is prioritized to the reception of the button operation in the mini game.

After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start sliding movement in the directions away from each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and FIG. 168(i). As shown, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N both stop at the initial position. At this time, the effect of the mini game is still continuing, and in order to promote the operation of the effect button 136, the button image 136a is displayed and the gauge of the button reception time meter is decreasing. .. On the other hand, the hold icon h12 that has changed to the blue display mode has the overlap by the second decorative symbol display device 208M eliminated, and the hold icon h12 compared to the state of being overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is easy to see.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 168(j), as shown in FIG. 168(k), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the dice symbol is “3”. The display is stopped in the manner shown, and it is notified that the mission has been achieved. After that, the effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 165(h) to 165(k) and described above (FIGS. 168(l) to 168(n)).

FIG. 169 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect of the mini game. Note that FIGS. 169(a) to 169(f) are the same as FIGS. 161(a) to 161(f), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 169(f) after the mini game is started, as shown in FIG. 169(g), the second decorative symbol display device 208M stops the dice symbol. While displaying, the hold icon h12 of the display mode of the button reservation icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L has not been changed in display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 169(g), the symbols on the dice are stopped and displayed in a mode showing the result of "1", and it is informed that the result of the mission is not achieved.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 169(h), the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays "sorry" to inform that the mission of the mini game has failed. Therefore, in this example of performance, the notice of the big hit notice is not given. In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily finalized when the mission achievement outcome is derived than when the mission achievement outcome is derived. There is.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 169(i), as shown in FIG. 161(j), the hold icon h12 of the display mode of the button hold icon changes to the default display mode. .. In other words, it is shown that the change effect of the button holding icon is an effect that does not change to the display mode of the prefetch notice.

After that, when the symbol variation display time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 169(k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". , Is lost. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the character display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is erased and hidden.

FIG. 170 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect of the mini game. Note that FIGS. 170(a) to 170(e) are the same as FIGS. 161(a) to 161(e), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 170(f) shows that the mini game has started but the effect button 136 has not been operated yet. Therefore, the variable display of the symbols on the dice is continuously performed.

After that, when the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing shown in FIG. 170(g), as shown in FIG. 170(h), the result of the mini game is not notified, and the effect of the mini game ends. To do.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 170(i), as shown in FIG. 170(j), the hold icon h12 of the button hold icon display mode changes to a blue display mode. , Look-ahead notice is given.

After that, when the symbol variation display time elapses, as shown in FIG. 170(k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". , Is lost. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the character display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is erased and hidden.

In the example production shown in FIG. 161, in the mini game, when the production button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance period of the production button 136, a notice that the mini game mission is achieved and the display mode of the hold icon changes However, in the example of the effect, since the effect button 136 is not operated in the mini game, the mission is not achieved, and the notice that the display mode of the hold icon is changed is not shown. In addition, in this effect example, since the mission has not been achieved, the effect that the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by one step is prevented from being performed. However, for example, the display mode of the hold icon changes to the second step. If it is predetermined to do so, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed as previously set regardless of the result of the mini game. For example, the hold icon up to the second stage It is decided to change, and after changing the hold icon to the first stage in the change effect of the hold icon of the button, the effect of the mini game is executed so that the mini game result is a mission achievement, and the mini game is derived. In the case where it is planned to change the hold icon to the second stage in correspondence with the result, even if the result of the mini game is not derived, the hold icon may be finally changed to the second stage. Good. Regarding the change mode, for example, in the change effect of the button hold icon, the hold icon is changed from the button hold icon display mode to the green display mode in the second stage in response to the operation of the effect button 136. The display mode may be changed, or the hold icon is changed from the display mode of the button hold icon to the first-stage display mode which is a blue display mode in response to the operation of the effect button 136. After that, during the execution of the symbol variation display, when the symbol variation is stopped and displayed, or during the execution of the symbol variation display that is performed after the symbol variation display being executed, the second stage which is a green display mode. The display mode may be changed. In other words, a notice corresponding to the result of execution of the mini game may be given, or if the result of the mini game is not derived, a notice corresponding to the result to be derived is given. It may not be performed. Even in this case, the result of the variable display of symbols does not change, so that it is possible to perform an appropriate effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the holding icon may be displayed in green more easily when the mini game is played than when the mini game is not played. That is, it can be said that when the mini game is started, the advance notice is more likely to be given in an advantageous manner than when the mini game is not started.

In addition, in this example of performance, when the mini game is started in a state where the hold icon is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode and the result of the mini game is not derived, the display mode of the hold icon is ranked up. Although not performed, the current state is maintained, but even when the result of the mini game is not derived, the display mode of the hold icon may be upgraded. In this case, the rank may be increased in the symbol variation display in which the mini game is performed, or may be increased in the symbol variation display started after the symbol variation display in which the mini game is performed.

Further, in this production example, an example in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed is described as the pre-reading notice mode, but the pre-reading notice mode can be applied to a known mode such as continuous notice. ..

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 179.

171 to 179 are diagrams showing, in a step-by-step manner, modification examples of effects centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 171 to 179, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, FIGS. 171 to 179 show a pachinko machine 100 including one decorative pattern display device 208. In addition, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the transparent light guide plate IL described above may be arranged on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 171 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 172 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. Is. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 171(a), "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is a combination of missing decorative patterns, is stopped and displayed. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the sabotani display mode. That is, it is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. It should be noted that, in this example of performance, the display of the second number of holdings of the special figures 1 and 2 and the display of the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are not displayed, but these displays may be performed. ..

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 171(b), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is consumed, and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is used as the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1. Also, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, after the hold is exhausted and the symbol variable display is started, one variable icon corresponding to the symbol variable display may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the variable icon may be the same as or different from the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, for example.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171(c), the first stop is performed and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171(d), the second stop is performed and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171(e), the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed, followed by "decoration 2". -Decoration 5-decoration 7" is fixedly displayed by a combination of missing decorative patterns.

Subsequently, in FIG. 171(f), the suspension of special map 1 is exhausted and the suspension display disappears, and the first special symbol display device 212 (not shown) starts the variable display of the symbols, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the decorative symbols. The variable display has started.

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 171(g), the step-up notice is started. The step-up notice is a notice for sequentially switching and displaying a plurality of types of display modes in a predetermined display order, and in the step-up notice in the present embodiment, each display mode has a number indicating the number of steps of the display mode. It is displayed. The size of the number of steps is a display showing the degree of reliability of the big hit. For example, if it is displayed up to step 5, the development to super reach is confirmed and the possibility of a big hit increases. However, even if it is displayed up to step 5, it may come off, and the reliability is not 100%. In addition, when up to step 5 is displayed, the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed. As the number of steps increases, the display size also increases. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 171B(g), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. The step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Therefore, the decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize when it is overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when it is not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 171(h), the decorative symbol display device 208 updates the step-up notice, and the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 171(i), the decorative pattern display device 208 further updates the step-up notice, and the step-up notice SU3 in the display form of step 3 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 171(j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171(k), the second stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, variable display of decorative symbols continues.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171(l), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which it has developed into a super reach (sublimation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are respectively displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 171(m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 in which the mini game is displayed is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. This mini-game display area MN1 is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the super-reach effect display, and it is difficult to visually confirm the super-reach effect display as compared with the case where the mini-game display area MN1 is not displayed. There is. The mini game in this example of the effect is a game whose mission is to repeatedly hit the effect button 136 during the operation effective period to finally derive “Daikichi”. That is, the mini game in this example of performance requires multiple operations of the effect button 136 to derive the result. FIG. 171(m) shows that the mini game is started, and an explanation of the play in the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the character "continuous hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a, which prompts the effect button 136 to repeatedly hit. Also, below that, there is a text display that says "Maybe it's a big notice in Daikichi", and there is a possibility that a highly reliable notice may occur when "Daikichi" is derived. That is, the contents of the mission and the result of the mission achievement are explained. The mini game display area MN1 may not be partitioned by a frame. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 171(n), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Daikichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171(o), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Nakayoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of "Nakichi" overlaps a part of the display of "Daikichi."

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171(p), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Kokichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of "Kokichi" overlaps a part of the display of "Nakichi".

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 171(q), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character "continuous hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Kokichi", and the effect button 136 It has been notified that the acceptance of the repeated hitting operation by has started.

FIG. 171(r) shows a state in which the player continuously hits the effect buttons 136.

In FIG. 172 (a) following FIG. 171 (r), it is shown that the player continuously performs the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, a star effect image is displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and as the number of operations increases due to repeated hits, the number also increases. In this example of effect, when the player interrupts continuous hitting of the effect button 136, the number of star effect images gradually decreases, but may not be decreased. At the timing shown in FIG. 172(a), four effect images of stars are displayed in the mini game display area MN1.

In FIG. 172(b), it is shown that the player continuously performs the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 172(b), five effect images of stars are displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and the display of “Kokichi” is erased by operating the effect button 136 a predetermined number of times. It is notified that the possibility of "Nakichi" or "Daikichi" being derived as a result of the mini game has increased. In this example of performance, if the player interrupts continuous hitting of the effect button 136, the display of "Kokichi" once deleted may be displayed again, but if it is deleted once, it will not be displayed again. Good.

In FIG. 172(c), the player continues to continuously hit the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 172(c), there is no change in the number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and the display of “Daikichi” and the display of “Nakichi” continue. Instead of displaying the button image 136 and the character "repeatedly hit", the character "2 more seconds" is displayed, and it is notified that the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining.

In FIG. 172(d), a state is shown in which the player continuously performs the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 172(d), there is no change in the number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and the display of “Daikichi” and the display of “Nakichi” continue. The display for notifying the operation valid period is "1 second", and it is notified that the operation valid period is 1 second remaining.

FIG. 172(e) shows that the player continuously performs the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 172(e), there is no change in the number of star effect images displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 and there is no change in the display notifying the operation valid period, but a predetermined number of effect buttons It is informed that the display of “Nakichi” has been erased by the operation of 136 and the possibility that “Daiyoshi” will be derived as a result of the mini game has increased. In this example of performance, when the player interrupts the continuous production of the effect button 136, the display of “Nakichi” which has been erased may be displayed again, but when it is erased, it is not displayed again. Good.

FIG. 172(f) shows a state in which “Daikichi” is derived as the result of the mini game in the mini game display area MN1 after the player continuously performs the streak operation of the effect button 136. That is, it is notified that the mission of the mini game is completed. As a result, the player is informed that there is a possibility that an intense hot notice may appear. It should be noted that, by deriving the display of "Daikichi", it is possible to give a notice that the intense hot notice is always executed.

Subsequently, when the mini game display area MN1 is erased at the timing shown in FIG. 172(g), the super reach effect is restarted. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 172(g), the button advance notice effect is started, and the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, and "Push" is displayed together with this button image 136a. Is displayed to indicate that the one-time operation of the effect button 136 is being promoted. At this time, the effect button 136 is vibrating as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. It should be noted that the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode of only vibrating, may be displayed in a mode of only rotating, or may be displayed in a mode of neither vibrating nor rotating. There may be cases. In this example of performance, when the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of vibrating and rotating, the final result is more final than when the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of not vibrating and/or rotating. The jackpot pattern is designed to be easy to stop. Note that the button image 136a may be displayed only in a mode that neither vibration nor rotation occurs. As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the number of operations of the effect button 136 is different between the mini game and the main effect (effect relating to the variable display of the decorative pattern). Further, in this example of the effect, the effect is performed by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136 in the mini game and the operation is performed by operating the effect button 136 once in the main effect. However, the effect button is used in both the mini game and the main effect. The effect may be performed by the continuous hitting operation of 136.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 172(h), the state that the super reach effect is continuously performed and the display for promoting the operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed is shown. Here, when the operation valid period is started, the button reception time meter MT is displayed instead of the character display of "Push", and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases as the operation valid period elapses.

Then, as shown in FIG. 172(h), when the production button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 172(i), the word "Game" is displayed in the balloon together with the up image of the lord's character. A cut-in image including a balloon image with is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is the strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number (for example, 9) of face-length faces are arranged around the word "Game" in the balloon. In the game, the display of "Daikichi" is derived and is displayed corresponding to the result of achieving the mission.

On the other hand, in the mini game, when the display of “DAIKICHI” is not derived and the mission is not achieved, the weak cut-in image CI1b as shown in FIG. 172(i′) is displayed. The weak cut-in image CI1b is an image having a smaller size than the strong cut-in image CI1a, and is an image in which a long-faced face is not arranged around the characters of “game” in the balloon. Note that the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed even when the mission is not achieved in the mini game. Note that both the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b overlap the super-reach effect, and when these cut-in images are displayed, the super-reach is performed more than when these cut-in images are not displayed. The production is difficult to see. Further, the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b are overlapped with the decorative pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 172(j), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and a screen is displayed that has won, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". ..

After that, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 172(k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variation game ends.

In this example of production, in the mini game, the continuous operation of the production button 136 is required to achieve the mission, while in the main production, the operation of the production button 136 is required once in order to make the notice appear. In the mini game, one operation of the effect button 136 may be required, and in the main effect, one operation of the effect button 136 may be repeatedly pressed.

Further, when the result of the mini game is related to the notice relating to the variable display of symbols as in this effect example, the execution time of the mini game is shorter than the execution time of the variable display of symbols. ..

FIG. 173 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 173(a) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 171(j), in which the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a state in which the reach state is formed is shown. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, variable display of decorative symbols continues.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173(b), it is shown that it has been developed into a super reach (sublimation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are respectively displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 173(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. The mini game in this effect example is also performed as described above with reference to FIGS. FIG. 173(c) shows that the mini game is started, and an explanation of the play in the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the character "continuous hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a, which prompts the effect button 136 to repeatedly hit. Also, below that, there is a text display that says "Maybe it's a big notice in Daikichi", and there is a possibility that a highly reliable notice may occur when "Daikichi" is derived. That is, the contents of the mission and the result of the mission achievement are explained. On the other hand, a button operation effect that requires operation of an effect button is started even in the main effect. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 173(c), the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of vibrating and rotating, and the character "Push" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and the effect button 136 is displayed once. It is shown to facilitate the operation. At this time, the effect button 136 is vibrating as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. It should be noted that the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode of only vibrating, may be displayed in a mode of only rotating, or may be displayed in a mode of neither vibrating nor rotating. There may be cases.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 173(d), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of “Daikichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation valid period in the main effect has not started and the button reception time meter is displayed, but the gauge does not decrease. This suggests that the mini game in the mini game display area MN1 and the main effect have some relation to each other.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173(e), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Nakichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of "Nakichi" overlaps a part of the display of "Daikichi." On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation valid period has not started yet, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173(f), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Kokichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. The display of "Kokichi" overlaps a part of the display of "Nakichi". On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation valid period has not started yet, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 173(g), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "repeatedly hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Kokichi", and in the mini game. It has been notified that reception of the repeated hit operation by the effect button 136 has started. Then, the player sees this notification and starts hitting the effect button 136 repeatedly. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation valid period has not started yet, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed. As described above, in this example of effect, the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Furthermore, in this example of the effect, the button operation for the mini game in the mini game display area MN1 overlapping with the main effect is preferentially accepted. The button operation for the main effect overlapped with the mini game display area MN1 may be preferentially accepted.

In FIG. 173(h), a state is shown in which the player continuously hits the effect buttons 136. In the mini-game display area MN1, it is shown that the number of effect images of the star increases according to the number of times the effect button 136 is operated. At the timing shown in FIG. 173(h), four effect images of stars are displayed in the mini game display area MN1. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation valid period has not started yet, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

FIG. 173(i) shows that the player is continuously performing the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 173(i), the display of “Kokichi” is erased by operating the effect button 136 a predetermined number of times, and “Nakichi” or “Daikichi” is derived as the result of the mini game. It has been announced that the possibility has increased. The number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1 remains four. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation valid period has not started yet, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

In FIG. 173(j), a state is shown in which the player continuously performs the stapling operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 173(j), five effect images of stars are displayed in the mini game display area MN1. Further, instead of displaying the button image 136 and the character of “continuous hit”, the character of “2 more seconds” is displayed, and it is notified that the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation valid period has not started yet, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

FIG. 173(k) shows a state in which the player's continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is interrupted. Then, the effect images of the stars displayed in the mini game display area MN1 are gradually erased, and at the timing shown in FIG. 173(k), the number of effect images of the stars in the mini game display area MN1 is 0. The situation is shown. Also, although the display of "Daikichi" and "Nakichi" continues to be displayed, the display notifying the operation valid period is "1 second", and the operation valid period is 1 second remaining. It has been informed.

FIG. 173(l) shows that the operation valid period in the mini game has passed and “Nakichi” has been derived as a result of the mini game in the mini game display area MN1. That is, it is notified that the mini game mission has not been achieved. Originally, "Daikichi" was supposed to be derived when the continuous hit operation was continuously performed, but the mission was not achieved due to the insufficient number of operations of the effect button 136. It is due to that.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 173(m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game ends, the mini game display area MN1 is erased, the super reach effect is restarted, and the gauge by the button reception time meter MT is displayed. Decrease display is started. This notifies that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect has started. When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 173(n), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 173(o). This is displayed based on the fact that the derivation result of the mini game was not “Daikichi”. At this time, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed. In addition, in the case where it is determined in advance which of the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b is to be displayed, if it is determined in advance that the strong cut-in image CI1a is to be displayed, FIG. As shown in o'), the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as determined, regardless of the participation status (operation status) of the effect button 136 in the mini game. Further, if it is determined in advance that the weak cut-in image CI1b is to be displayed, the display of "Daikichi" may not be derived regardless of the participation status (operation status) of the effect button 136 in the mini game. Good.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 173(p), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". ..

After that, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 173(q), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variation game ends. In this way, the result of the win/fail is predetermined, and the result of the symbol variation display corresponding to the result of the win/fail is derived. Therefore, the effect in the middle may be appropriately changed, and therefore the operation means ( The notice that appears can be changed according to the operation status of the effect button 136).

FIG. 174 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 174(a) is an effect following FIG. 171(k), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that it has developed into a super reach (sublimation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are respectively displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174(b), a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area, and a state where a mini game is started in this mini game display area MN1 is shown. .. Specifically, the character "push" is displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 once. In addition, below that, there is a text display that says "Dai-kichi and let Daikichi appear super hot", and it is announced that a highly reliable notice will be issued when "Dakichi" is derived. The contents of the mission and the results of the mission achievement are explained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 174(c), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Daikichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174(d), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Nakayoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of "Nakichi" overlaps a part of the display of "Daikichi."

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174(e), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Kokichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. The display of "Kokichi" overlaps a part of the display of "Nakichi".

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 174(f), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, high-speed loop rotation of each display of “Daikichi”, “Nakichi”, and “Kokichi” is started. Then, the word "push" is displayed together with the button image 136a under the effect of the high-speed loop rotation, and it is informed that acceptance of one operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. On the other hand, in the main effect, the button operation effect requesting continuous operation of the effect button is started. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 174(f), the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of vibrating and rotating, and the characters "repeatedly hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a, and the consecutively depressing operation of the effect button 136 is performed. Is being promoted. At this time, the effect button 136 is vibrating as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. It should be noted that the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode of only vibrating, may be displayed in a mode of only rotating, or may be displayed in a mode of neither vibrating nor rotating. There may be cases. As described above, in this example of the effect, an effect of requesting a continuous hit operation by the effect button 136 is performed in the main effect, and an effect of requesting a single operation by the effect button 136 is performed in the mini game. That is, it can be said that an example is shown in which the number of times the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is requested is smaller than the number of times the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is requested. Further, in this effect example, the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promoting display in the mini game and the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promoting display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

After that, as shown in FIG. 174(g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reduced display of the gauge by the button reception time meter MT is started, and the operation reception of the effect button 136 is started. In this example of performance, the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect and the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game are accepted at the same time. Note that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game may be started after the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is started, or the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. After that, acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect may be started. Then, the player sees this and starts consecutively hitting the effect button 136. In this example of the effect, the display mode of the button image 136a displayed in the button effect in the main effect corresponds to the state of the effect button 136, but the button image displayed in the mini game display area MN1. The display mode of 136a and the state of the effect button 136 are different. As described above, in this effect example, the same operation means (effect button 136) can be operated for both the main effect and the mini game effect. Therefore, for example, when the effect in which the acceptance of the operation is prioritized is an effect requiring the continuous hitting operation and the effect in which the acceptance of the operation is non-priority is an effect requiring the single operation, the hitting force of the operating means is high. The result may be derived for the non-priority effect, and the effect for which the acceptance of the operation is prioritized is an effect that requires a single operation, and the effect for which the acceptance of the operation is not prioritized is a continuous hit operation. In the case of the required effect, the continuous hitting operation is performed from the beginning, so that the result may be surely derived even for the priority effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 174(h), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative pattern display device 208, "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game in response to the first operation with the effect button 136. Is shown. Then, the word "achievement" indicating that the mission of the mini game has been achieved is also displayed, and the fact is notified. That is, in this example of the effect, the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect of the mini game is accepted prior to the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. On the other hand, the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is continuously performed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 174(i), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in accordance with the continuous hit operation of the effect button in the main effect. In this effect example, a state in which the cut-in image is displayed during the operation valid period in the continuous hit operation effect in the main effect is shown. Then, the button reception time meter MT is overlapped by the cut-in image, which makes it difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where the cut-in image is not displayed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the lower edge of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of “Mission in progress” for notifying that the mission in the mini game has been completed is scrolling from the right end to the left end. This notifies that the strong cut-in image CI1a will be displayed on the condition that the continuous pressing operation of the effect button 136 is continued. Note that the player's continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is still continuing.

After that, as a result of the player repeatedly performing the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 174(j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the weak cut-in image CI1b is replaced with the strong cut-in image CI1a. Is displayed. This is displayed as a result of achievement of the mission in the mini game as described above. In this example of effect, a continuous hit gauge whose display mode changes according to the number of operations of the effect button 136 may be displayed. For example, when the continuous hit gauge reaches the first amount, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. The strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed when it is displayed and full. At this time, if it is determined in advance not to display the strong cut-in image CI1a, the continuous stroke gauge may not be filled up no matter how many continuous strokes are performed.

When the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as described above, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174(k), in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is changed to "Mission in progress" and " The display of "Super hot notice notice" is displayed to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a, which is a super hot notice, has been displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 174(h), the mini game mission is achieved, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174(i′), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed by the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. However, after that, when the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient due to the player canceling the repeated hit operation, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 174(j′). It may remain. That is, as in this example of performance, even if the mission has been achieved, there may be a case where the law collapses in which the intense hot notice does not appear, depending on the operation status of the performance button 136. In order to match the achievement of the mini game mission, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed regardless of the operation status of the effect button 136, or another strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed. You may make it display an intense hot notice. Further, when the continuous hit operation is not performed in the main effect, neither the strong cut-in image CI1a nor the weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174(l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". ..

After that, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 174 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variation game ends.

As described above, in this example of performance, the achievement of the mission is one of the display conditions of the strong cut-in image CI1a, and when the number of operations of the effect button 136 is less than the predetermined number of times, the strong cut-in is performed. The image CI1a is not displayed, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed when the number of operations of the effect button 136 is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. In this example of performance, it is determined in advance which of the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b can be displayed, and when it is determined that the strong cut-in image CI1a can be displayed, the mini cut-in image CI1a can be displayed. In the game, the display of "Daikichi" can be derived. Further, when it is determined that only the weak cut-in CI 1b can be displayed, the display of "Daikichi" is not derived in the mini game. Further, in this example of effect, in the button repeated hit operation effect in the main effect, the cut-in image is not displayed when the effect button 136 does not operate at least the number of times necessary to display the weak cut-in CI 1b. You can Further, when the effect button 136 is not operated in the mini game, the cut-in image may not be displayed even if the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit in the button continuous hit operation effect in the main effect, or a weak cut-in image. The CI 1b can be displayed, but the strong cut-in image CI1a may not be displayed.

FIG. 175 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 175(a) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 171(j), in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, showing that the reach state is formed. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, variable display of decorative symbols continues.

Subsequently, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 175(b), it is shown that the super reach (sublimation reach) has been developed. In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are respectively displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 175(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. FIG. 175(c) shows that the mini game is started, and an explanation of the play in the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the characters "take out Daikichi by repeated hits" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting the player to repeatedly hit the effect button 136. The button image 136a displayed in the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 175(c) has a larger size than the button image 136a displayed in the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 171(m). However, they may have the same size. Also, the small-sized button image 136a and the large-sized button image 136a may be selectively displayed, and the reliability of mission achievement may be different depending on the size of the displayed button image 136a. .. That is, when the large-sized button image 136a is displayed, it may be easier to achieve the mission than when the small-sized button image 136a is displayed. In addition, below that, there is a text display that "strong cut-in occurs in Daikichi", and it is announced that the strong cut-in notice with high reliability of the big hit will be generated when "Daikichi" is derived. The content of the mission and the result of the mission achievement are explained.

After that, the description of the play of the mini game displayed in the mini game display area MN1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 175(d), the decorative symbol display device 208 may be derived as a result of the mini game. Each display of "Daikichi", "Nakichi", and "Kokichi" is displayed in this order, "Dakichi" is overlapped with "Nakichi", and "Nakichi" is displayed on "Kokichi". Is displayed so as to overlap the display of.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 175(e), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character "continuous hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Kokichi", and the effect button 136 is displayed. It has been notified that the acceptance of the repeated hitting operation by has started. Further, a button reception time meter MT is displayed on the left side of the mini game display area MN1, and the gauge is reduced in accordance with the lapse of the operation reception period of the effect button 136. In this effect example, it is shown that the display related to the mini game is also performed in the area other than the mini game display area MN1.

175(f) to FIG. 175(g) show a state where the effect button 136 is continuously hit during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game. In the mini game display area MN1, the number of star effect images increases in accordance with the number of times the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit.

After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 elapses, a result according to the number of continuous hits of the effect button 136 is derived. In the example shown in FIG. 175(h), “Daikichi” is derived as the result of the mini game, and the word “Mission achieved” is displayed below it to inform that the mission of the mini game has been achieved. ing.

Then, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175(i), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a cut-in notice. This notifies that the reliability of the big hit is high. The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is based on the result of the achievement of the mission by deriving "Daikichi" as a result of the mini game described above.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 175(j), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and a screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". ..

After that, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 175(k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variation game ends.

On the other hand, after the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 175(e), as shown in FIG. 175(f′) to FIG. 175(g′), the number of times the effect button 136 has been operated. However, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has elapsed in a state where the number of times is less than the number determined in advance, as shown in FIG. 175(h′), in the mini game display area MN1, as a result of the mini game, While "Kokichi" is derived, the word "Mission failed" is displayed below it to inform that the mission of the mini game has not been achieved. In addition, the result of the mini game may be determined in advance based on the result of the success/failure determination.

Then, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 175(i′), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as a cut-in notice. This informs that the reliability of the big hit is lower than that when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is due to the result that "Kokichi" was derived and the mission was not achieved as a result of the above-mentioned mini game.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 175(j′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character's shrine is defeated by an enemy swordsman, and a defeated screen is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The "decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7". It

Then, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 175(k′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped (fixed display). Then, the variation game of one special figure ends.

FIG. 176 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 176(a) is an effect following FIG. 171(d), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7", which is a combination of missing decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the display mode of Sabohani, that is, the display mode of the prefetching notice.

Subsequently, in FIG. 176(b), the suspension of special map 1 is exhausted and the suspension display disappears, and the first special symbol display device 212 (not shown) starts the variable display of the symbols, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the decorative symbol. The variable display has started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176(c), it is shown that the mission as the main effect has started. Specifically, the character "Mission activation" is displayed above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the mission has started. At the lower edge of the display area, "take out the cut-in" and "big hit if it comes out" are displayed together with the image of the longest face to inform the contents of the mission. That is, it is informed that the mission is achieved and the jackpot is confirmed if an image of the face of the bancho appears during the mission.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 176(d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbols continues. In addition, in the lower left corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “In Mission” indicating that the mission is continuing is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176(e), the second stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, variable display of decorative symbols continues. In addition, the display of "during mission" continues to be performed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 176(f), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a display that develops into a super reach (sublimation reach) is displayed. In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are respectively displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed. Even after the super reach was developed, the display of "Mission in progress" continues to be performed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 176(g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area, and the mini game is started. In this example of the effect, it is shown that the mission as the main effect and the mission in the mini game are simultaneously performed. In other words, it is shown that the mission of the mini game is superimposed on the mission as the main effect. Here, in this example of performance, the mini game is started after the mission is started, but the mission may be started after the mini game is started. 175(c) to FIG. 175(c) to FIG. 176(g) to FIG. 1(l) except that the display of “during mission” indicating that a mission is in progress is displayed. Since it is the same as h), detailed description is omitted. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 176 (j) to (k), a part of the display of “during mission” is overlapped with the button reception time meter MT, and the button reception time meter MT is displayed. The display of "Mission in progress" is more difficult to see than when there is no overlap.

As shown in FIG. 176(l), "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game, and after the mission is completed, at the timing shown in FIG. 176(m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the cut-in notice. The strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as. The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is based on the result of the achievement of the mission by deriving "Daikichi" as a result of the mini game described above. Note that the mission continues while the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the display of "during mission" continues, but the strong cut-in image CI1a overlaps the strong cut-in image CI1a. It is more difficult to visually recognize than the case where the CI 1a is not overlapped.

As described above, the strong cut-in image CI1a is an image including a balloon in which a number of long-faced faces are arranged around the character "Game". Therefore, the appearance of the Bancho face, which is a mission in the main production, has been achieved, so that in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 176(n), the character display of “mission accomplished” is overlaid on the strong cut-in image CI1a. Wrapped and displayed. That is, it is informed that the jackpot will be confirmed by the completion of the mission in the main effect. In other words, in this effect example, it can be said that the mission in the main effect is achieved by the appearance of the strong cut-in image CI1a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 176(o), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". ..

After that, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 176(p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variation game ends.

FIG. 177 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 177(a) to 177(k) are the same as FIGS. 176(a) to 176(k), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 177(l), when "Kokichi" was derived as a result of the mini game, the word "Mission failed" is displayed below it, and the mini game mission was not achieved. Is notified. In addition, in this example of performance, the result of the hit/miss judgment is a loss, and therefore, when the mission of the mini game is completed, it is necessary to display the strong cut-in image CI1a. Therefore, in this example of production, in the mini game, Regardless of the number of times the effect button 136 is operated, it is determined in advance that a value other than "Daikichi" will always be derived.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 177(m), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b as a cut-in notice. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is because the mission was not achieved as a result of the mini game described above. Note that the mission continues while the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and “Mission in progress” is continuously displayed, but the weak cut-in image CI1b is overlapped with the weak cut-in image CI1b. Although the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b is smaller than the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a, although it is more difficult to visually recognize it than when it is not overlapped with the CI1b, the display of "during mission" indicates the strong cut-in image. It is easier to visually recognize when the weak cut-in image CI1b is overlapped than when it is overlapped by the CI1a.

As described above, the weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that does not include the longest face. Therefore, the appearance of the Banchou face, which is a mission in the main production, was not achieved, and therefore, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 177(n), the character display of “mission failure” is displayed in the weak cut-in image CI1b. Displayed overlapping. That is, in this example of production, it can be said that the mission in the main production was not achieved due to the appearance of the weak cut-in image CI1b.

After that, as shown in FIG. 177(o), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and the defeated screen is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7". ..

After that, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 177(p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variation game ends.

FIG. 178 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 178(a) to 178(i) are the same as FIGS. 176(a) to 176(i), and a description thereof will be omitted.

178(i) to FIG. 178(k), after the reception of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 178(i), the number of operation times of the effect button 136 is changed. When the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has elapsed in a state where the number of times is less than the number determined in advance, as shown in FIG. 178(l), in the mini game display area MN1, the result of the mini game is “Koyoshi”. Is derived, and the word “Mission failed” is displayed below it to inform that the mission of the mini game has not been achieved. In this example of performance, the result of the hit/miss determination is a big hit, and based on this result, it is determined that “Daikichi” can be derived as the result of the mini game. However, since the number of operations of the effect button 136 is less than the number of times determined in advance and the operation valid period has elapsed, “Daikichi” is not derived and “Kokichi” is derived. It should be noted that if the mini game has started but the production button 136 has not been operated even once, the result of the mini game may not be derived even if it is determined that “Daikichi” can be derived. .. In addition, when it is determined that "Daiyoshi" can be derived, "Daikichi" may be derived even when the number of times the effect button 136 is operated is insufficient or when the effect button 136 is not operated. ..

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 178(m), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b as a cut-in notice. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is because the mission was not achieved as a result of the mini game described above. Note that the mission continues while the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and “Mission in progress” is continuously displayed, but the weak cut-in image CI1b is overlapped with the weak cut-in image CI1b. Although the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b is smaller than the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a, although it is more difficult to visually recognize it than when it is not overlapped with the CI1b, the display of "during mission" indicates the strong cut-in image. It is easier to visually recognize when the weak cut-in image CI1b is overlapped than when it is overlapped by the CI1a. The weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed even if the mission result is not derived.

As described above, the weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that does not include the longest face. Therefore, the appearance of the Banchou face, which is a mission in the main production, was not achieved, so that in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. Displayed overlapping. That is, in this example of production, it can be said that the mission in the main production was not achieved due to the appearance of the weak cut-in image CI1b.

However, in this example of performance, the result of the hit determination is a big hit. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 178(o), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed. At the same time, in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 7" that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed, and the decorative symbol "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is displayed. It is informed that the combination will be scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

Then, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 178 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (determined display). One special figure variation game ends. That is, in this example of performance, the number of operations of the production button 136 in the mini game is insufficient, and the mission of the mini game fails. Therefore, the mission of the main production related to this cannot be achieved either, but the result is right or wrong. It is shown that the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed according to the result of the determination.

FIG. 179 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 179, the appearance of the effect movable body 224 is also shown in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 179(a) is an effect following FIG. 171(k), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that it has evolved into super reach (sublimation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are respectively displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 179(b), the button operation effect requesting the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is started as the main effect. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 179(b), the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of vibrating and rotating, and the characters "repeatedly hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a, and the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is performed. Is being promoted. At this time, the effect button 136 is vibrating as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reduced display of the gauge by the button reception time meter MT is started, and the operation reception of the effect button 136 in the main effect is started. Has been done. Then, the player sees this and starts continuous hitting of the effect button 136.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179(d), a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area, and a state in which the mini game is started in this mini game display area MN1 is shown. ing. Specifically, the character "push" is displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 once. Also, below that, there is a text display that says "Maybe it's a big notice in Daikichi", and there is a possibility that a highly reliable notice may occur when "Daikichi" is derived. That is, the contents of the mission in the mini game and the result of achieving the mission are explained. As described above, in this effect example, the mission effect in the main effect is started before the mini game is started. The display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes according to the time from the start of the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the main effect.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179(e), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Daikichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. In addition, the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is continuously performed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 179(f), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Nakayoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of "Nakichi" overlaps a part of the display of "Daikichi." Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 179(f), the forearm portion 224b of the production movable body 224 moves and overlaps the mini game display area MN1. In addition, in the example of the effect, the effect movable body 224 operates, for example, as a big hit announcement, but, for example, the effect movable body 224 operates to notify that the mission achievement in the mini game is likely to be achieved. Alternatively, it may be announced that the mission is likely to be achieved in the main production. In addition, the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is continuously performed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 179(g), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Kokichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of "Kokichi" overlaps a part of the display of "Nakichi". Further, the display of "Kokichi" overlaps with the forearm portion 224b of the production movable body 224, which makes it difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, the effect of continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is also continuously performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179(g), in response to the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. , A weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. In this effect example, a state in which the cut-in image is displayed during the operation valid period in the continuous hit operation effect in the main effect is shown. In this effect example, the weak cut image CI1 is displayed in a small size on the left side of the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT so as not to overlap with the button image 136a. Note that the player's continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is still continuing.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 179(h), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, high-speed loop rotation of each display of “Daikichi”, “Nakichi”, and “Kokichi” is started. Then, the word "push" is displayed together with the button image 136a under the effect of the high-speed loop rotation, and it is informed that acceptance of one operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. The display of the mini game is overlapped with the upper arm portion 224b of the production movable body 224, which makes it difficult to see. On the other hand, in the main effect, the button operation effect that requires continuous operation of the effect button continues. Further, in this effect example, the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promoting display in the mini game and the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promoting display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Again, the player continues to continuously hit the effect button 136, but when the acceptance of one operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is the effect button in the main effect. Since the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is accepted prior to the operation of 136, for example, the result of the mini game is derived in response to the effect button 136 operated at the timing surrounded by the one-dot chain line. Is configured. It should be noted that a single operation of the effect button 136 may be accepted as an operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect, and may also be accepted as an operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 179(i), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi" is derived as the result of the mini game in response to one operation by the effect button 136. Is shown. Then, the word "achievement" indicating that the mission of the mini game has been achieved is also displayed, and the fact is notified. However, since the mini-game display area MN1 overlaps the forearm portion 224b of the production movable body 224, it is difficult to visually recognize the character “achievement”. At the timing shown in FIG. 179(i), the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the main effect has passed, and the player has finished the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136.

Then, as shown in FIG. 179(j), when the mission in the main effect ends, the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area. That is, the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is derived as a result of the mission in the main effect. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 179(j), the forearm portion 224b of the production movable body 224 has moved to the initial position. Therefore, the overlap with the mini-game display area MN1 is eliminated, and the word "achievement" indicating that the mini-game mission has been accomplished is easily visible. The timing at which the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area after the mission in the main effect ends and the timing at which the forearm 224b of the effect movable body 224 moves to the initial position may be the same. After the mission in the main effect is finished and the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area, the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 may move to the initial position or the effect movable body 224. After the forearm portion 224b has moved to the initial position, the mission in the main effect may end and the weak cut-in image CI1b may move to the center of the display area.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 179(k), a state is shown in which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed in place of the weak cut-in image CI1b. This is displayed as a result of achievement of the mission in the mini game as described above. Here, the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a is larger than the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b. Further, the strong cut-in image CI1a overlaps a part of the mini game display area MN1. Even if the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, if the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the main effect is insufficient, even if the mission in the mini game is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Although not displayed, when the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed when the mission in the mini game is achieved regardless of the number of times the effect button 136 is operated. You may do it.

After that, as shown in FIG. 179(l), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". .. After that, at the timing when the variable time elapses, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the variation game of one special figure ends.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 184.

180 to 184 are diagrams showing, in a step-by-step manner, modification examples of effects centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 180 to 184 also, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure. The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. In addition, FIGS. 180 to 184 show the pachinko machine 100 including one decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the transparent light guide plate IL described above may be arranged on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

180. FIG. 180 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 180, the appearance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is also shown in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 180(a) shows that the mini game is started during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In this production example, the mini game is played without being divided into regions. When the mini game is started, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL are displayed side by side on the lower left and right of the display area. ing. Also, "SP Reach if Yoshimune comes out" is displayed in the approximate center of the display area, and it is informed that when the main character's lord appears from the treasure box, it will move to super reach (SP reach). Further, "Select with the cross key" and "Decision with the button" are displayed above the display area. The treasure box is selected with the operation key unit 137 and the treasure box selected with the effect button 136 is determined as the treasure box to be opened. It has been announced that it is possible. That is, in this effect example, a state in which a mini game is played using a plurality of operating means is shown. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the mini game is played using a region wider than the effect related to the decorative symbol variable display.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180(b), it is shown that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 has started. Specifically, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL, and the treasure box surrounded by the cursor CSL is shown to be the selected treasure box. The remaining time of the operation valid period is shown on the right side of the center of the display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 180(b), "3" indicating that the operation valid period is 3 seconds remaining is displayed Has been done. Further, FIG. 180(b) also shows a state where the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 180(c), the cursor CSL that surrounds the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR and surrounds the right treasure box image BXR. .. The display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is “2”, which indicates that the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining.

Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 180(d), the selected right treasure box image BXR is determined as the treasure box to be opened, as shown in FIG. 180(e). The treasure box image BXR is enlarged and displayed together with the cursor CSL, while the unselected left treasure chest image BXL is reduced and displayed. In the decorative pattern display device shown in FIG. 180(d), the display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is "1", which shows that the operation valid period is 1 second remaining. Further, after the player operates the effect button 136 to determine the treasure box to be opened, a display for confirming the treasure box to be opened may be performed when the operation valid period has elapsed. Further, when the operation valid period elapses without performing the operation with the effect button 136, the treasure box selected by the cursor CSL may be determined as the treasure box to be opened, or the operation with the effect button 136 is performed. If the operation valid period elapses without any operation, no treasure box is selected and the treasure box may not be opened. According to this, it may be possible to improve the player's motivation to operate the operation means such as the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 180(f), the character YSM of the main character, Lord, appears from the right treasure box image BXR, showing that the mission of the mini game has been achieved. As a result, it is announced that the SP reach will be started. The look-ahead notice may be given by the appearance of the main character YSM's character YSM.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180(g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. .. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, variable display of decorative symbols continues.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 180(h), it is shown that the SP reach is developed. In this way, in this effect example, in the case where the variation pattern of the decorative design determined based on the result of the win/fail judgment is to shift to SP reach, in the mini game performed before shifting to SP reach, The character YSM of the hero, who gives a notice of the shift to SP reach, can be displayed. As a result, it may be possible to give advance notice of the shift to SP reach by causing the lord's character YSM to appear in the mini game.

In this production example, if the shift to SP reach is determined in advance, no matter whether the right treasure chest image BXR or the left treasure chest image BXL is selected, the lord's character YSM appears and does not shift to SP reach. When it is determined in advance that the right character treasure chest image BXR or the left treasure chest image BXL is selected, the lord's character YSM may not appear. Further, on condition that the transition to SP reach has been determined in advance, it is randomly determined which of the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL is to be hit, and the treasure chest image determined to be hit is selected. In the case of, the character YSM of the lord may appear. Further, in the case where a variable time capable of executing SP reach is selected, it is randomly determined which of the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL is to be hit, and the treasure chest image determined to be hit is selected. If the lord's character YSM appears, the lord's character YSM appears. Then, when the lord's character YSM appears, the SP reach is developed. However, if the lord's character YSM does not appear, the SP reach is subsequently displayed. It may be configured to perform a reach with a smaller jackpot reliability than a SP reach such as a normal reach until the variation time elapses. Further, whether or not the lord's character YSM appears at the timing of selecting the treasure box image may be randomly selected. Further, even if the lord's character YSM appears, it may not be possible to shift to SP reach. In this case, the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed as a break in the law.

FIG. 181 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 181, the appearance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208 is also shown.

FIG. 181(a) shows that the mini game is started during the variable display of the decorative symbol. When the mini game is started, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL are displayed side by side on the lower left and right of the display area. ing. Also, "SP Reach if Yoshimune comes out" is displayed in the approximate center of the display area, and it is informed that when the main character's lord appears from the treasure box, it will move to super reach (SP reach). Further, "Select with the cross key" and "Decision with the button" are displayed above the display area. The treasure box is selected with the operation key unit 137 and the treasure box selected with the effect button 136 is determined as the treasure box to be opened. It has been announced that it is possible. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 181(a), the cursor CSL is displayed between the right treasure box image BXR and the left treasure box image BXL, and no treasure box image is displayed. Has been done.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 181(b), the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, and the remaining time of the operation effective period is displayed in the center right side of the display area. It At the timing shown in FIG. 181(b), "3" indicating that the operation valid period is 3 seconds remaining is displayed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 181(c), in the state where no operation is performed after the operation reception of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, the remaining time of the operation valid period in the decorative symbol display device 208 is set. The display is "2", and the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining. Therefore, the cursor CSL is located between the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL, since no treasure chest image has been selected yet.

At the timing shown in FIG. 181(d), in the state where no operation is performed after the operation reception of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, the remaining time of the operation valid period in the decorative symbol display device 208 is set. The display is "1", which shows that the operation valid period is 1 second remaining. Therefore, the cursor CSL is located between the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL, without selecting any treasure chest image.

At the timing shown in FIG. 181(e), in the state where no operation is performed after the operation reception of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, the remaining time of the operation valid period in the decorative symbol display device 208 is set. The display becomes "0", indicating that the operation valid period has elapsed. Therefore, the cursor CSL is located between the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL, without selecting any treasure chest image. As a result, none of the treasure boxes is selected, and none of the treasure boxes is opened, that is, the result of the mini game is not derived, as shown in FIG. 181(f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach state is reached. Will be moved to.

In this effect example, if the transition to SP reach is determined in advance, SP reach is executed even if no treasure box is selected. However, the result of the variable display of the decorative symbols and the variation time are: Since it is determined in advance based on the result of the hit/miss judgment, if no treasure box is selected, SP reach is not performed, for example, reach with a lower jackpot reliability than SP reach such as normal reach is executed. You can According to this, it may be possible to improve the player's motivation to operate the operation means such as the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137.

FIG. 182 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 182, the appearance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is also shown in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that FIGS. 182(a) to 182(d) are the same as FIGS. 180(a) to 180(d), and a description thereof will be omitted.

When the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 182(d), as shown in FIG. 182(e), the selected right treasure box image BXR is determined as the treasure box to be opened, and the right treasure box image is displayed. The BXR is enlarged and displayed together with the cursor CSL, while the unselected left treasure chest image BXL is reduced and displayed. Further, in this example of production, as shown in FIG. 182(e), an error display of "a game ball is clogged" and "call an attendant" is displayed below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (error. (Notification) has been performed, and it is informed that a ball clogging error, which is a state in which gaming balls are clogged in the payout path, has occurred. Specifically, for example, a payout condition for a prize ball or a rental ball is satisfied, and the payout device 152 (see FIG. 65 or the like) is driven, but a payout of a game ball is not detected and a retry operation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, Despite repeated three times, if the payout of the game ball is not detected, a ball clogging error is notified. Since such an error can continue the game, in the present embodiment, the game is continued while the error notification is given. In addition, when the elimination of the error which is the target of the error notification is detected (for example, when the payout of the game balls is normally performed by the payout device 152), the error notification is erased. Here, the timing at which the error display is started may be the same as the timing at which the right treasure chest image BXR starts the enlarged display, or the timing after the timing at which the right treasure chest image BXR starts the enlarged display. Alternatively, the timing may be before the timing at which the right treasure chest image BXR starts the enlarged display.

182(f) to 182(h) are the same as FIGS. 180(f) to 180(h) except that an error display is performed, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this effect example, if the game is an error that is not interrupted, the mini game is continued.

FIG. 183 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 183, the appearance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208 is also shown. In addition, in this example of performance, a magnetic detection sensor that detects a magnetic force is provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko machine 100, and when the magnetic detection sensor detects the magnetic force, a detection signal is output to the main control unit 300. When the main control unit 300 receives the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor, the main control unit 300 determines that a magnetic detection error has occurred, transmits the magnetic detection command to the first sub-control unit 400, and then stops the game to disable the game. Control. After the deactivation, the main control unit main processing (see FIG. 69) is configured so that it cannot be restored until the initialization processing of step S113 is executed. On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the magnetic detection command, outputs an error sound from the speaker 120 or causes a predetermined error by the various lamps 418, the game board lamp 532, and the game underframe lamp 542. It is possible to blink the lamp and display a predetermined error on the decorative pattern display device 208. Here, since FIGS. 182(a) to 182(c) are the same as FIGS. 180(a) to 180(c), description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 183(c), the appearance of enclosing the right treasure chest image BXR is shown. The display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is “2”, which indicates that the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining.

After that, for example, when a player uses a magnet to make an illegal act, and a magnetic detection sensor (not shown) detects this, as shown in FIG. 183(d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "Magnet" is displayed on a plain background. The magnetic error display ERR including the character "Sensor error" is displayed, for example, overlapping the display shown in FIG. 180(d), and the game is stopped. Therefore, for example, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 183(d), even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display of the magnetic error display ERR is not erased, and also shown in FIGS. 180(d) to (h). However, the magnetic error display ERR is continuously displayed until the power is cut off without visually confirming these effect displays (FIG. 183(d) to FIG. )). It can be said that the magnetic error display ERR shown in FIG. 183 is different from the error display shown in FIG. 182 in the area overlapping with the effect of the mini game. In other words, it can be said that the effect display of the mini game has a different area overlapped with the error display depending on the type of error that has occurred.

FIG. 184 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 184(a) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 171(j), in which the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a state in which the reach state is formed is shown. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, variable display of decorative symbols continues.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 184(b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state of developing into bowling reach which is one of super reach is shown. Bowling reach is a reach production performed as a main production. When the process moves to bowling reach, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbols respectively displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c small in the upper left corner, and the ten pyramid-arranged bowlings are displayed. The effect display that the ball rolls on the lane toward the pin is displayed, and the word "Big hit with strike" is displayed in the upper right part of the display area, and if you complete the mission of strike you will be a big hit. It has been informed.

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 184(c) shows that the ball has reached a position close to the ten bowling pins and is about to fall down. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 184(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display area and overlaps at least a part of the bowling reach effect display. .. In the mini game display area MN1, an explanation display of the mini game is displayed. In the explanation display of the mini game shown in FIG. 184(c), a "1" on the dice is shown and a "put out" is displayed below the display of the "mini game". It is described that after the start of, the effect button 136 is operated to perform a mission to stop and display the result of the dice "1".

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 184(d), a state in which nine boring pins have fallen is shown. That is, it is shown that one boring pin remains without falling. On the other hand, in the mini game display area MN1, a button image 136a is displayed together with the display of “Push”, and it is notified that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. At this time, for example, the dice symbols may be variably displayed.

FIG. 184(e) shows that the effect button 136 has been operated and the result of the mini game has been derived in the mini game display area MN1. Specifically, since the strike does not occur in the bowling reach on the decorative pattern display device 208, the character "sorry" is displayed, and it is notified that the mission in the bowling reach cannot be achieved and the player will lose. On the other hand, in the mini-game display area MN1, the production button 136 is operated, and as a result of the mini-game, the result of the dice “1” is stopped and the mission is achieved. The display of "+1" is displayed to notify that the book will collapse.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 184(f), the mini game display area MN1 is deleted, and the result of the mini game is a "1" of the dice, and a reward of achievement of the mission. After the display of "+1 pin" is performed, as shown in FIG. 184(g), one remaining boring pin that has not fallen is collapsed and a strike is shown. That is, it is shown that an effect that is a revival jackpot from a loss is being performed.

After that, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 184(h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variation game ends.

As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the mini game influences the result of the reach effect as the main effect.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 to 192.

FIG. 185 to FIG. 192 are diagrams showing, in a step-by-step manner, a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 185 to 192 also, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure. The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. 185 to 192 show a pachinko machine 100 including one decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the transparent light guide plate IL described above may be arranged on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 185 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 185(a), "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is a combination of missing decorative patterns, is stopped and displayed. In addition, the first holding icon h11 of the special drawing 1, the holding icon h12 of the second special drawing 1, and the holding icon h13 of the third special drawing 1 representing the holding of the special drawing 1 are in the default display mode. It is displayed. Further, in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a multi-functional display area MF1 partitioned into a substantially rectangular shape is formed. The multi-function display area MF1 can display the above-mentioned tutorial display, notice display, mini game effect display, and the like. It should be noted that, in this example of performance, the display of the second number of holdings of the special figures 1 and 2 and the display of the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are not displayed, but these displays may be performed. ..

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 185(b), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is consumed, and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is used as the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1. It is displayed, the hold icon h13 of the third special drawing 1 is displayed as the hold icon h12 of the second special drawing 1, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, the variable icon may be displayed as described above.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 185(c), a state is shown in which the tutorial display is being performed in the multifunctional display area MF1. Specifically, in the multi-function display area MF1, a message "mini-game will start at various timings" is displayed, which suggests when the mini-game will start.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and after temporary stop due to the fluctuation of swing, as shown in FIG. -Decoration 5-decoration 7" is fixedly displayed by a combination of missing decorative patterns.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 185(e), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is consumed, and in the decorative pattern display device 208, the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is the first special figure 1 Is displayed as the hold icon h11, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185(f), a state is shown in which the tutorial display is being performed in the multi-function display area MF1. Specifically, in the multi-function display area MF1, "Yoshimune is the 8th shogun" is displayed, and information regarding the hero's lord is displayed.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 185(g), the tutorial display displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is interrupted and the mini game is started. When the mini game is started, the "dice game" is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 together with the buncho's face image BCH, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 185(h), in the multi-function display area MF1, a display of "1" on the dice and a display of "Hold 1UP" are displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the longest face. It is explained that, when the production button 136 is operated after the mini game is started and the result of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by one stage. That is, as a result of the mini game, by deriving the roll result of "1" of the dice as the mission, it is announced that the hold icon in the default display mode will change to the hold icon in the look-ahead warning display mode. Becomes

After that, as shown in FIG. 185(i), in the multi-function display area MF1, "press" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185(j), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in a mode in which the gauge is reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 185(j), as shown in FIG. 185(k), in the multi-function display area MF1, the dice symbol is the outcome of achieving the mission. The derivation display is performed in the form of showing the result of "1", and the display of "1UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the longest face image BCH is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 185(k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, variable display of decorative symbols continues. The stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived display after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of (3) is derived and displayed.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185(l), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation of the swing is performed. Decorative 2-decoration 7-decoration 7" is a fixed combination of decorative patterns. In addition, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the first stage of the prefetch notice from the default display mode. Is changed to a blue display mode. Also in this effect example, the reliability of the jackpot is high in the order of red>green>blue for the hold icon. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative pattern may be the same timing, the decorative pattern may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative pattern is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. The timing of erasing the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative design, or the decorative design may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

In addition, a omikuji game may be started in place of the dice game as the mini game described above with reference to FIGS. 185(g) to (k). Here, FIG. 185(g′) is another example of the effect following FIG. 185(f). Specifically, the tutorial display displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. 185(f) is interrupted, and as shown in FIG. 185(g'), the mini game is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1. Be started. In this example of performance, when the mini game is started, the "Omikuji game" is displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 together with the buncho face image BCH, and it is notified that the mini game is started. To be done. In this example of performance, the image BCH of the face with the same length is displayed even when different types of mini games are started. In other words, in this effect example, the same character (image BCH of the longest face) can be made to appear and a plurality of types of mini games can be executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 185(h'), in the multifunctional display area MF1, "Nakayoshi" and "Hold 1UP" are displayed on the right side of the buncho face image BCH, and "in hold 1UP" is displayed in the mini game. It is described that when "Nakichi" is derived and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is ranked up by one step. In other words, as a result of the mini game, the “Nakichi” fortune as a mission is derived, and it is announced that the hold icon in the default display mode will change to the hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 185(i′), in the multifunctional display area MF1, the treasure box image BXS is displayed together with the longest face image BCH, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started. It should be noted that the mini game in this example of performance is not operated by the operation means such as the effect button 136.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185(j′), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the display of the treasure box image BXS is changed to a display in which the treasure box image is open, and the “Nakichi” fortune is drawn and displayed, showing that the mission has been achieved. The stop display of the left symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived display after the left symbol is stopped and displayed. The left symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result is derived and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 185(k′), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is deleted, and “1UP confirmed” indicating that it is a mission achievement reward is displayed. There is. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the longest face image BCH is also continuously displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 185(k′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, variable display of decorative symbols continues. In addition, the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of starting the display of the mission achievement reward may be the same, or the display of the mission achievement reward may be started after the right symbol is stopped. Alternatively, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the display of the achievement of the mission is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185(l′), the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed, It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7". In addition, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the first stage of the prefetch notice from the default display mode. Is changed to a blue display mode. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative pattern may be the same timing, the decorative pattern may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative pattern is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. The timing of erasing the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative design, or the decorative design may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 185, there is shown an example configured such that different types of mini games can be played when the start condition of the mini game is satisfied. In the mini-game (dice game), the operation of the effect button 136 is required, while in the mini-game (fortune-telling game), no operation by the operation means is required, and further, the display mode in any mini-game. Are the same (all of which change the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1). That is, FIG. 185 shows an example of an effect in which, in any of the mini games, as a result, the objects that influence the main effect are the same. It should be noted that, in this effect example, which of the dice game and the fortune-telling game is to be executed may be determined randomly, or may be determined based on the result of the hit/miss judgment, for example, the dice game is executed. When the omikuji game is executed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the omikuji game is executed.

Further, as in this example of production, in a mini game, a character smaller than a character that appears during execution of variable display of decorative symbols (may be referred to as "small character"), or in production of tutorial display, for example. A character that appears (may be referred to as "navi character") may appear. It should be noted that these characters may be configured to be displayed in the tutorial display or other notices when the mini game is not played, or may be configured to appear only in the mini game. Further, these characters may be constantly displayed. Further, it is preferable that the characters appearing in the mini game and the characters appearing during the variable display of the decorative pattern are visually different. For example, the characters may be different in size, or the 3D character and the deformation may be different. There may be differences in terms of expression, such as the character.

In this example of production, the omikuji game (second mini game) may use a wider area than the dice game (first mini game). That is, the second mini game uses at least a certain display area (the multifunctional display area MF1 in which the first mini game is played), and further another display area (the display area of the enlarged portion of the multifunctional display area MF1). ) May also be configured to be used.

FIG. 186 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 186(a) to 186(e) are the same as FIGS. 185(a) to 185(e), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186(f), it is shown that the advance notice of the mini game is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1. Specifically, in the multi-function display area MF1, “Attention” is displayed together with the image BCH of the longest face to give a notice that the mini game is about to start.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 186(g), the mini game is started. When the mini game is started, the "dice game" is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 together with the buncho's face image BCH, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 186(h), in the multi-function display area MF1, the display of "3" on the dice and the display of "Hold 3UP" are displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the longest face. It is explained that, when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini game is started and the result of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three stages. That is, as a result of the mini game, by deriving the number "3" of the dice as the mission, it is announced that the hold icon in the default display mode will change to the hold icon in the look-ahead warning display mode. Becomes Moreover, in this example of performance, the content of the mission and the reward for achieving the mission are more advantageous than those of the dice game shown in FIG. 185.

After that, as shown in FIG. 186(i), in the multi-function display area MF1, "press" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186(j), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in a mode in which the gauge is reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 186(j), as shown in FIG. 186(k), in the multi-function display area MF1, the dice symbols are the achievement achievements of the mission. The derivation display is performed in a manner showing the result of "3", and the display of "3UP confirmed" showing that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the longest face image BCH is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 186(k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, variable display of decorative symbols continues. The stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived display after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of (3) is derived and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186(l), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed. Decorative 2-decoration 7-decoration 7" is a fixed combination of decorative patterns. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the prefetch notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular red display mode. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative pattern may be the same timing, the decorative pattern may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative pattern is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. The timing of erasing the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative design, or the decorative design may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

When the fortune game instead of the dice game is started, as shown in FIG. 186(g′), when the mini game is started in the multi-function display area MF1, the multi-function display area MF1 displays The “Omikuji game” is displayed together with the face image BCH of “A”, and it is notified that the Omikuji game as a mini game will be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 186(h′), in the multifunctional display area MF1, “Daichi” is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the face of the bancho, and “Hold 3UP” is displayed, and in the mini game, It is described that, when "Daikichi" is derived and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is ranked up by three levels. That is, as a result of the mini-game, the "Daikichi" fortune as a mission is derived, so that it is announced that the hold icon in the default display mode will change to the hold icon in the look-ahead notification mode. Moreover, in this example of performance, the content of the mission and the reward for achieving the mission are more advantageous than those of the fortune-telling game shown in FIG. 185.

After that, as shown in FIG. 186(i′), in the multifunctional display area MF1, the treasure box image BXS is displayed together with the longest face image BCH, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186(j′), the first stop is performed and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Also, in the multi-function display area MF1, the display of the treasure box image BXS is changed to the open state and the fortune-telling of “Daichi” is derived and displayed, showing that the mission has been achieved. The stop display of the left symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived display after the left symbol is stopped and displayed. The left symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result is derived and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 186(k′), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is erased, and “3UP confirmed” indicating that it is a mission achievement reward is displayed. There is. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the longest face image BCH is also continuously displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 186(k′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, variable display of decorative symbols continues. In addition, the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of starting the display of the mission achievement reward may be the same, or the display of the mission achievement reward may be started after the right symbol is stopped. Alternatively, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the display of the achievement of the mission is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186(l′), the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed, It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7". Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the prefetch notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular red display mode. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative pattern may be the same timing, the decorative pattern may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative pattern is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. The timing of erasing the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative design, or the decorative design may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

As described above, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 186, the content of the mission and the reward for achieving the mission can be made different even in the same type of mini game. It should be noted that the mission contents may be the same and the reward for achieving the mission may be different, or the contents of the mission may be different and the reward for achieving the mission may be the same.

FIG. 187 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

187(A1) to FIG. 187(A6) show an example of the effect performed in the auntie mode, and FIG. 187(B1) to FIG. 187(B6) show an example of effect performed in the princess mode. There is. In addition, the auntie mode and the princess mode are names of the effect modes, and are configured such that the mode-specific effects are performed in each mode. Note that, for example, at least one of the grandmother mode and the princess mode may be the prefetch mode. In addition, whether to shift to the auntie mode or the princess mode may be determined randomly or may be determined based on the game state. For example, if it is a normal game state (special probability low probability general figure low probability state), it is easy to shift to auntie mode, and if it is a hidden probability change state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state), shift to princess mode. For example, it may be made easier so that the player can guess the current game state.

FIG. 187(A1) shows that the effect mode is the old woman mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187(A1), while the "aunty mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, the auntie character BA is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It has been informed that the current performance mode is the old mode. In addition, as shown in FIG. 187 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, the “Dice game” is displayed together with the image BCH of the bancho face, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started. In this performance example, the dice game is more likely to be started than the fortune game in the auntie mode. Here, when executing the mini game in the old mode, the dice game may be always started and the omikuji game may not be started. Note that FIGS. 187(A2) to (A6) are the same as FIGS. 186(h) to (l) except that the auntie mode display and the auntie character BA are displayed. , Description is omitted.

FIG. 187(B1) shows that the effect mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 187(B1), “hime mode” is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left part of the display area. It is informed that the current production mode is the princess mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 187 (B1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed is shown. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the bancho, and it is notified that the mini game is started. In this production example, in the princess mode, the fortune game is more easily started than the dice game. Here, in the princess mode, when the mini game is executed, the omikuji game may be started and the dice game may not be started. Note that FIGS. 187(B2) to (B6) are the same as FIGS. 186(h′) to (l′) except that the princess mode display and the princess character HM1 are displayed. Therefore, the description is omitted.

FIG. 188 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

188(A1) to FIG. 188(A6) show an example of the effect performed in the auntie mode, and FIG. 188(B1) to FIG. 188(B6) show an example of effect performed in the princess mode. There is.

FIG. 188(A1) shows that the effect mode is the auntie mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188(A1), while the "aunty mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, the auntie character BA is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It has been informed that the current performance mode is the old mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 188(A1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed is shown. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, the “Dice game” is displayed together with the image BCH of the bancho face, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started. In this example of performance, the type of mini game to be executed is determined based on the content of the advance notice executed in the main performance. For example, if it is decided to execute the step-up notice, the dice game is easier to start as the mini game than the omikuji game in the symbol variable display, and it is decided to execute the pseudo-relation. In the case where the symbol variation display is performed, the omikuji game is more easily started as a mini game than the dice game. If it is decided to execute the step-up notice, the dice game is always started as a mini game in the symbol variable display, and if it is decided to execute the pseudo-relation, In the variable display of symbols, a omikuji game may be started as a mini game without fail. Further, in this example of performance, the type of mini game to be executed is determined without depending on the current effect mode, but the type of mini game to be executed may be determined depending on the effect mode.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 188(A2), in the multi-function display area MF1, a display of "3" on the dice is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the longest face, and "holding 3UP" is displayed. It is explained that, when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini game is started and the result of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three stages. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a step-up notice is started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 188(A2), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. The step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Therefore, the decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize when it is overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when it is not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1. Even if the display of the roll of "3" and the display of "Hold 3UP" are started in the multi-function display area MF1 and the start of displaying the step-up notice SU1 is the same. The step-up notice SU1 may be displayed after the display of the roll of "3" and the display of "Hold 3UP" is started in the multi-function display area MF1, or the step-up notice may be started. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the roll of “3” and the display of “Hold 3UP” in the multi-function display area MF1 may be started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 188 (A3), in the multi-function display area MF1, "press" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. The timing at which the display of the button image 136a and "press" in the multi-function display area MF1 is started may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed, or in the multi-function display area MF1. The display of the step-up notice SU2 may be started after the display of the button image 136a and “press” is started, or after the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started, the button image 136a in the multifunction display area MF1 is displayed. The display of "press" may be started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (A4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in a mode in which the gauge is reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 188 (A4), as shown in FIG. 188 (A5), in the multi-function display area MF1, the dice symbols are the achievement achievements of the mission. It is derived and displayed in the form of showing the result of "3", and the display of "3UP confirmed" showing that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the longest face image BCH is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 188 (A5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, variable display of decorative symbols continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived display after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the game result is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 188 (A5), the step-up notice has ended. In addition, the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the end timing of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may be ended after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice After the above, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (A6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed. Decorative 2-decoration 7-decoration 7" is a fixed combination of decorative patterns. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the prefetch notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular red display mode. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative pattern may be the same timing, the decorative pattern may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative pattern is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. The timing of erasing the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative design, or the decorative design may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 188 (B1) shows that the effect mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (B1), "hime mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current production mode is the princess mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 188 (B1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed is shown. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the bancho, and it is notified that the mini game is started.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (B2), a state is shown in which temporary stop is performed with a combination of decorative patterns "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3". In this example of performance, for example, it is informed that the pseudo-repeating may be performed by temporarily stopping with a combination of "decoration 7" and "decoration 3". That is, there is a case where the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 7” and “decoration 3” is the chance. In addition, you may make it notify about the start of a pseudo-relation by displaying a pseudo-relational pattern. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, “Daiyoshi” and “Hold 3UP” are displayed on the right side of the bancho face image BCH, and when “Daichi” is derived and displayed in the mini game, the hold icon is displayed. It is described that the display mode of 3 ranks up. In addition, the timing when the display of "Daikichi" and the display of "Hold 3UP" are started in the multi-function display area MF1 and the timing of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern may be the same, or the multi-function display area MF1. After the display of "Daikichi" and the display of "Hold 3UP" are started, the decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped, or after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, "Daikichi" in the multifunction display area MF1. The display of “” and the display of “Hold 3UP” may be started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 188 (B3), in the multi-function display area MF1, the treasure box image BXS is displayed together with the longest face image BCH, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has been started, and a state in which the pseudo variable first variable display is performed is shown. Here, the number of times the pseudo-repeating is performed may be displayed. The start of the variable display of the decorative pattern (pseudo-relation) and the display start of the treasure box BXS may be the same timing, or the display of the treasure box BXS after the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern (pseudo-relation). May start, or after the display of the treasure box BXS starts, the variable display of the decorative symbols (pseudo-link) may start.

Then, as shown in FIG. 188 (B4), in the multi-function display area MF1, the display changes to a mode in which the image BXS of the treasure box is open, and the “Daikichi” fortune is displayed and displayed, indicating that the mission has been achieved. It is shown. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily stops at the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3”, and gives a notice that the pseudo-repeation may be further performed. The temporary stop of the decorative pattern and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derivatized and displayed after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. The decorative design may be temporarily stopped after the result is derived and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 188 (B5), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is erased, and “3UP confirmed” indicating that it is a mission achievement reward is displayed. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the longest face image BCH is also continuously displayed. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the variable display of the decorative pattern has been started, and the second pseudo variable display is shown. It should be noted that the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern (pseudo-relation) and the timing at which the display of the reward for the mission achievement are started may be the same, or after the variable display of the decorative pattern (pseudo-relation) is started. The display of the reward for achievement of the mission may be started, or the variable display of the decorative pattern (pseudo-relation) may be started after the display of the reward for achievement of the mission is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (B6), the result of the mini game displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is displayed. Is changed from the default display mode to a circular red display mode as the display mode of the third stage of the prefetching notice. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the combination of the decorative patterns “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3” is confirmed and displayed, and it is notified that the decorative pattern has been lost. Here, after the decorative design is temporarily stopped, pseudo-linking may be further performed. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative pattern may be the same timing, the decorative pattern may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative pattern is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. The timing of erasing the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative design, or the decorative design may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

In this example, the result of the mini game has been described as affecting the display mode of the hold icon. However, as a result of the mini game, it may be announced that the pseudo-ream will be performed as a reward for completing the mission. Alternatively, the number of times the pseudo-relation is started may be announced in advance, or the increase in the number of pseudo-relations may be notified.

Further, as a result of the mini game, a step-up notice may be given as a reward for completing the mission, or the number of steps displayed in the step-up notice may be given. It may be possible to give a notice that the number will increase.

FIG. 189 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

189(A1) to FIG. 189(A6) show an example of the effect performed in the old lady mode, and FIG. 189(B1) to FIG. 189(B6) show an example of the effect performed in the princess mode. There is.

FIG. 189(A1) shows that the effect mode is the auntie mode. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 189(A1), while the "aunty mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, the auntie character BA is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It has been informed that the current performance mode is the old mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 189(A1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed is shown. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the mini game is started. In this example of performance, the character image SBH of Savohani is displayed instead of the buncho face image BCH, and "Dice Game" is displayed together with the character image SBH of Sabohani. It is shown that it is informed that the dice game will be started. The sabotani character image SBH is an image that may be displayed only in the dice game, for example, and is configured not to be displayed in the omikuji game, but may be displayed in the omikuji game as well. In this effect example, the reward for achieving the mission in the dice game is more likely to be advantageous when the character image SBH of the sabotani is displayed than when the image BCH of the bancho face is displayed. That is, in this effect example, when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode as a reward for accomplishing the mission than when the image BCH of the face of the bancho is displayed. It is easy to give a notice that is the third-stage display mode (red display mode) of the pre-reading notice, and when the buncho face image BCH is displayed, the mission is performed more than when the sabotani character image SBH is displayed. As a reward for achievement, it is easy to give a notice that the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the first step of the prefetching notification (blue display mode). More specifically, when the character image SBH of Savohani is displayed, the result of the mini game is more likely to be derived than when the image BCH of the bancho face is displayed. When the face image BCH is displayed, the result of the mini game is more likely to be derived than when the sabotani character image SBH is displayed. Further, when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed, the mission may be more easily achieved than when the image BCH of the bancho face is displayed. Note that in FIGS. 189(A2) to (A6), FIG. 188(A2) except that the longest face image BCH displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 is replaced with the sabotani character image SBH. The description is omitted because it is similar to that of FIG.

FIG. 189 (B1) shows that the effect mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 189(B1), “hime mode” is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left part of the display area. It is informed that the current production mode is the princess mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 189(B1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed is shown. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the mini game is started. In this effect example, the princess character image HM2 is displayed instead of the buncho face image BCH, and the "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the princess character image HM2. It is shown that the omikuji game is being notified. The princess character image HM2 is, for example, an image that may be displayed only in the fortune-telling game and is configured not to be displayed in the dice game, but may be displayed in the dice game as well. In this effect example, the reward for accomplishing the mission in the omikuji game is more likely to be advantageous when the princess character image HM2 is displayed than when the bancho face image BCH is displayed. That is, in this production example, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode as a reward for accomplishing the mission than when the bancho face image BCH is displayed. It is easy to give a notice that is the third-stage display mode (red display mode) of the prefetch notice, and when the buncho face image BCH is displayed, the mission is more than when the princess character image HM2 is displayed. As a reward for achievement, it is easy to give a notice that the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the first stage of the prefetching notification (blue display mode). More specifically, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, “Daikichi” is more easily derived as a result of the mini game than when the bancho face image BCH is displayed, and the bancho face image is displayed. When BCH is displayed, “Nakichi” is more likely to be derived as a result of the mini game than when the princess character image HM2 is displayed. It should be noted that, as in this example of effect, the character displayed in the mini game may be the same as the character displayed corresponding to the effect mode. That is, in this effect example, the character displayed in the princess mode (princess character HM1) and the character displayed in the mini game (princess character image HM2) are the same. Furthermore, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, the mission may be more easily achieved than when the bancho face image BCH is displayed. 189(B2) to (B6) are different from FIG. 188(B2), except that the longest face image BCH displayed in the multifunction display area MF1 is replaced with the princess character image HM2. The description is omitted because it is similar to that of FIG.

FIG. 190 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 190(A1) to FIG. 190(A6) show an example of the effect performed in the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), and FIG. 190(B1) to FIG. , An example of the effect performed in the probability change state (special figure high probability general figure high probability state) is shown. In this example of performance, it is shown that the type of mini game to be started differs depending on the current game state. More specifically, in the normal game state, a dice game is easily started as a mini game, and in the probability variation state, an omikuji game is easily started as a mini game. It should be noted that a dice game may be started as a mini game in the normal game state, and an omikuji game as a mini game may be started in the probability variation state. Further, the appearance frequency of the mini game may be different depending on the gaming state. For example, in the probability variation state, the player basically feels like to wait for a big hit, so the player is free until the big hit. Therefore, the probability of occurrence of the mini game may be higher than that in the normal gaming state. In addition, the probability of mini-game occurrence in the normal gaming state may be higher than in the probability variation state. Further, the mini game may be executed only in the probability changing state, or the mini game may be executed only in the normal game state. In addition, for a certain mini game, the appearance rate may be higher in the normal game state than in the probability change state, may be higher in the probability change state than in the normal game state, or may appear only in the probability change state. There may be cases where the game is played, or cases where the game appears only in the normal gaming state. In addition, for a certain notice, the appearance rate may be higher in the normal game state than in the probability change state, may be higher in the probability change state than in the normal game state, or may appear only in the probability change state. In some cases, it may appear only in the normal gaming state.

FIG. 190(A1) shows that the game state is the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 190(A1), the display of the "normal mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the current game state is the normal game state. Has been done. 189 (A1) to (A6) in FIG. 189 (except that the display of the old woman mode and the display of the old woman character BA are the normal mode display indicating the normal game state) The description is omitted because it is the same as A1) to (A6) in FIG.

In FIG. 190(B1), the game state is shown to be the probability change state (special figure high probability general figure high probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 190(B1), the "probability variation mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and it is informed that the current game state is the probability variation state. ing. In the upper right portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Right Strike" is displayed, and a striking suggestion display is also performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 190(B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the first holding icon h21 of the special drawing 2, the holding icon h22 of the second special drawing 2, and the holding icon h23 of the third special drawing 2 representing the holding of the special drawing 2 are all in the default display mode. It is displayed and is displayed on the lower right side of the display area. Further, in this effect example, the multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the left half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. That is, in this effect example, the display position of the multifunctional display area MF1 is changed depending on the game state. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the princess character image HM2, and it is notified that the mini game is started. In addition, in FIG. 190 (B1) to FIG. 190 (B5), the game state is the production mode of the princess mode, which is a probable change state, and the hold display of Special Figure 1 is the hold display of Special Figure 2. 189 (B1) to (B5) in FIG. 189 except that the number of the hold displays is different, the position of the hold display and the display position of the multi-function display area MF1 are exchanged. Therefore, the description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 190(B5), in the multi-function display area MF1, after the display of “3UP confirmed” indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 190(B6) In the device 208, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is erased, and in this example of performance, the display mode of the second hold icon h22 of the special figure 2 is changed from the default display mode to the pre-reading notice. Is changed to a circular and red display mode as the display mode of the third stage. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the combination of the decorative patterns “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3” is confirmed and displayed, and it is notified that the decorative pattern has been lost. In this way, the result of the mini game may affect any of the hold icons.

FIG. 191 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

191(A1) to (A6) show an example in which the display area of the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded, and FIG. 191(B1) to (B6) show that the multi-function display area MF1 is An example is shown in which the hold display area for displaying the hold icon is also used. Note that FIG. 191 has been described by taking the dice game as the mini game as an example, but it is also possible to apply the dice game described above.

FIG. 191(A1) shows that the game state is the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 190(A1), the display of the "normal mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the current game state is the normal game state. Has been done. Further, as shown in FIG. 191(A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "dice game" is displayed together with the character image SBH of the sabotani, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 191(A2), the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, and a state in which the area is enlarged is shown. In this example of performance, when the mini game is started, the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, and the visibility is improved. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a display of "3" on the dice is displayed on the right side of the character image SBH of the sabotani, and "is held 3UP" is displayed, and after the mini game is started, the effect button is displayed. It is described that when the user operates 136 to stop and display the roll of "3" on the dice, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by three levels. Here, the display showing the character image SBH of the sabotani and the roll of "3" on the dice is enlarged and displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a step-up notice is started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 191(A2), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. Since this step-up notice SU1 is not displayed overlapping the multifunctional display area MF1, it does not affect the visibility of both. The timing at which the multifunction display area MF1 is expanded and displayed may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU1 starts to be displayed, or the step-up notification may be performed after the multifunction display area MF1 is expanded and displayed. The notice SU1 may be started to be displayed, or the multifunctional display area MF1 may be extendedly displayed after the step-up notice SU1 is started to be displayed. Further, even when the display of the roll of "3" and the display of "Hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF1 are started and the timing of the start-up notice SU1 being displayed are the same, The step-up notice SU1 may be started after the display of the roll of "3" and the display of "Hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF1 is started, or the step-up notice SU1 may be started. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the roll of “3” and the display of “Hold 3UP” in the multi-function display area MF1 may be started. Further, the timing of the expanded display of the multifunction display area MF1 is the same as the timing of the display of the roll of “3” and the display of “Hold 3UP” in the multifunction display area MF1. Alternatively, after the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, the display of the roll of "3" and the display of "Hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF1 may be started. The multi-function display area MF1 may be expanded and displayed after the display of the roll of "3" and the display of "Hold 3UP" in the function display area MF1 are started. Further, the multi-function display area MF1 may or may not be necessarily expanded when the mini game is started. Further, the multi-function display area MF1 may be expanded according to the gaming state. For example, the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded when the mini game is started in the probability variation state, and the mini game is expanded in the normal gaming state. The multi-function display area MF1 may not be expanded when it is started, or the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded when the mini game is started in the normal game state and the mini game is started in the probability variation state. In this case, the multi-function display area MF1 may not be expanded. Further, in this production example, the expanded multi-function display area MF1 is not overlapped with the decorative design, but the expanded multi-function display area MF1 may be overlapped with the decorative design, or the expanded multi-functional display area is used. It may be overlapped with the function display area MF1. Further, the non-expanded multi-function display area MF1 may overlap the decorative pattern, or the non-expanded multi-function display area MF1 may overlap.

After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (A3), in the multi-function display area MF1, the button image 136aL that is displayed in a large size is displayed together with the button image 136aL, and "press" is displayed, and the effect button 136 in the mini game is displayed. It is notified that the operation valid period has started. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. The step-up notice SU2 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the multi-function display area MF1 and affects the visibility of the multi-function display area MF1. Therefore, when the step-up notice SU2 overlaps the multifunction display area MF1, the visibility may be lower than when the step-up notice SU2 does not overlap the multifunction display area MF1. Note that the step-up notice may be overlapped only when the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, or may be overlapped with the step-up notice even when it is not expanded and displayed. Further, the timing at which the display of the button image 136aL and "press" in the multifunction display area MF1 is started may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed, or in the multifunction display area MF1. The step-up notice SU2 may be displayed after the display of the button image 136aL and “press” is started, or after the step-up notice SU2 is displayed, the button image 136aL in the multifunction display area MF1 may be displayed. The display of "press" may be started.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 191 (A4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. This step-up notice SU3 is also displayed so as to overlap a part of the multi-function display area MF1 and affects the visibility of the multi-function display area MF1. Therefore, when the step-up notification SU3 overlaps the multifunctional display area MF1, the visibility may be lower than when the step-up notification SU3 does not overlap the multifunctional display area MF1. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136aL, and the gauge is reduced in accordance with the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136. Has been done. The button reception time meter MT is also enlarged and displayed. Therefore, the gauge reduction speed is faster than when the button reception time meter MT is not expanded. Here, the reduction rate of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game may be faster than the reduction rate of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect. The reduction speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect may be faster than the reduction speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game. The reduction rate of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the game may be the same as the reduction rate of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 191 (A4), the enlarged dice pattern is displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 as shown in FIG. 191 (A5) to achieve the mission. “3UP confirmed” indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the character image SBH of sabotani is also enlarged and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 191 (A5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, variable display of decorative symbols continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived display after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the game result is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 191(A5), the step-up notice has ended. In addition, the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the end timing of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may be ended after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice After the above, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 191 (A6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed. Decorative 2-decoration 7-decoration 7" is a fixed combination of decorative patterns. Further, the expanded multi-function display area MF1 has been reduced and returned to the default size. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the prefetch notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular red display mode. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative pattern may be the same timing, the decorative pattern may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative pattern is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. The timing of erasing the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative design, or the decorative design may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is confirmed and displayed. Further, the timing at which the multi-function display area MF1 returns to the default size may be the same as the timing at which the result of the mini game is erased, or after the multi-function display area MF1 returns to the default size, the mini game May be deleted, or the multifunctional display area MF1 may be returned to the default size after the result of the mini game is deleted.

FIG. 191(B1) shows that the game state is the normal game state. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (B1), the display of the "normal mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and it is informed that the current game state is the normal game state. Has been done. Further, as shown in FIG. 191(B1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed is shown. Further, in this effect example, the multifunctional display area MF2 is formed across the left and right ends of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this multi-function display area MF2, in addition to the above-mentioned tutorial display, notice display, mini-game effect display, etc., a hold icon is displayed. The holding icon of special figure 1 can be displayed on the left side of the multi-function display area MF2, and the holding icon of special figure 2 can be displayed on the right side of the multi-function display area MF2. As shown in FIG. 191(B1), on the left side of the multi-function display area MF2, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode. Further, on the right side of the multi-function display area MF2, the mini game is started using the display area of the hold icon of the special figure 2, and the "dice game" is displayed together with the character image SBH of Sabohani. Is notified that the dice game as is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (B2), in the multi-function display area MF2, a display of "3" on the dice is displayed on the right side of the character image SBH of the sabotani and a display of "and hold 3UP" is performed, It is described that when the production button 136 is operated after the mini game is started and the result of the dice "3" is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three stages. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a step-up notice is started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 191 (B2), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. The step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Therefore, the decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize when it is overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when it is not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1. In addition, even if the timing when the display of the roll of "3" and the display of "Hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF2 is started is the same as the timing when the step-up notice SU1 is displayed. The step-up notice SU1 may be displayed after the display of "3" on the dice and the display of "Hold 3UP" is started in the multi-function display area MF2, or the step-up notice may be started. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the roll of “3” and the display of “Hold in 3UP” in the multi-function display area MF2 may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (B3), in the multi-function display area MF2, “press” is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. The timing at which the display of the button image 136a and "press" in the multifunction display area MF2 is started may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed, or in the multifunction display area MF2. The display of the step-up notice SU2 may be started after the display of the button image 136a and "press" is started, or after the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started, the button image 136a in the multifunction display area MF2 is displayed. Also, the display of "press" may be started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 191 (B4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in a mode in which the gauge is reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 191 (B4), as shown in FIG. 191 (B5), in the multi-function display area MF2, the symbol of the dice is the result of achieving the mission. It is derived and displayed in the form of showing the result of "3", and the display of "3UP confirmed" showing that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF2, a character image SBH of sabotani is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 191 (B5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, variable display of decorative symbols continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived display after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the game result is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 191 (B5), the step-up notice has ended. In addition, the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the end timing of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may be ended after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice After the above, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 191 (B6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed, and then " Decorative 2-decoration 7-decoration 7" is a fixed combination of decorative patterns. In addition, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF2 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the prefetch notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular red display mode. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative pattern may be the same timing, the decorative pattern may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative pattern is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. The timing of erasing the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative design, or the decorative design may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 192 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 192(a) shows that the game state is the normal game state. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192(a), the display of the "normal mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Has been done. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is shown. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the display mode of the default t. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 192(a), the step-up notice as the main effect has been started. At the timing shown in FIG. 192(a), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. The step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Therefore, the decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize when it is overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when it is not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 192(b), the step-up notice is updated and the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Further, a mini game display area MN2 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the mini game display area MN2, the mini game is started, the "dice game" is displayed together with the character image SBH of Sabohani, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started. That is, in this effect example, a state where a dedicated area (mini game display area MN2) appears when the mini game is started is shown. Here, the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is started may be the same as the timing at which the mini-game is started, or the mini-game may be started after the step-up notice SU2 is displayed. However, the step-up notice SU2 may be displayed after the mini game is started.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 192(c), the decorative pattern that is being variably displayed is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the display area, and the mini game display area MN2 is erased to produce a mini game effect. It is shown that the display is greatly enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. Specifically, on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani, a display showing the result of "3" on the dice and a display of "Hold 3UP" are respectively greatly enlarged and displayed, and after the mini game is started, the effect is produced. It is described that when the button 136 is operated and the roll of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three stages. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the dedicated area (mini game display area MN2) is erased during at least a part of the period during which the mini game is played is shown. Further, the step-up notice was supposed to be displayed until the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 when the mini game was not started. It has been discontinued. Even when the mini game is started, the step-up notice may be continuously displayed without being discontinued. In this case, for example, the display area may be moved so as not to overlap the effect display of the mini game, or the step-up notice may be reduced and displayed. Further, the step-up notice may be displayed so as to overlap with the effect display of the mini game, or the effect display of the mini game may be shown to overlap with the step-up notice.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192(d), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the button reception time meter MT is displayed below the enlarged and displayed button image 136aL, and the gauge is reduced according to the time after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started. It is displayed in the form of. The button reception time meter MT is also enlarged and displayed. Here, the timing at which the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT are displayed may be the same as the timing at which the left symbol is stopped and displayed, or after the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT are displayed. The left symbol may be stopped and displayed, or the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT may be displayed after the left symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 192(d), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192(e), the enlarged dice symbol is the result of the mission achievement "3". Is displayed in a manner showing the result of "". At this time, the mini game display area MN2 is displayed again on the right side of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this mini game display area MN2, the dice symbol is derived with "3". In addition to notifying that it has been displayed, a display of "3UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the mini game display area MN2, a character image SBH of sabotani is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 192(e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, variable display of decorative symbols continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived display after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the game result is derived and displayed. The timing of derivation display of the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of re-display of the mini game display area MN2, or the mini game display area MN2 may be displayed after the result of the mini game is derived and displayed. The result of the mini game may be displayed again after the mini game display area MN2 is displayed again.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192(f), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed, and then " Decorative 2-decoration 7-decoration 7" is a fixed combination of decorative patterns. At this time, the size of the decorative pattern is returned from the reduced size to the default size, and the display position is also returned to the default display position. Further, when the mini game ends, the mini game display area MN2 is also erased, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is circular and red as the display mode of the third stage of the prefetch notice from the default display mode. The display mode has been changed to. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative pattern may be the same timing, the decorative pattern may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative pattern is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the mini game display area MN2 may be the same as the timing of finalizing the decorative design, or the decorative design may be finalized after the mini game display area MN2 is erased. The mini-game display area MN2 may be erased after the decorative design is confirmed and displayed. The timing of erasing the mini game display area MN2 and the timing of changing the display mode of the hold icon may be the same, or the display mode of the hold icon may change after the mini game display area MN2 is erased. Alternatively, the mini game display area MN2 may be erased after the display mode of the hold icon is changed.

Note that, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 192, the dice game has been described as an example of the mini game, but the above-described fortune game can also be applied.

Further, although the dice game and the omikuji game as the above-described mini game are executed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol variable display is performed, it is configured to be executed on a display device different from the decorative symbol display device 208. May be done.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 200.

193 to 200 are diagrams showing, in a step-by-step manner, modification examples of effects centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In addition, also in FIGS. 193 to 200, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, and the general figure. The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. In addition, FIGS. 193 to 200 show a pachinko machine 100 including one decorative pattern display device 208. In addition, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the transparent light guide plate IL described above may be arranged on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 193 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 193(a), a customer waiting demo display is displayed. This customer waiting demo display is a display that may be displayed in a standby state where the variable display of the special figure is not displayed, and is a display for promoting the player's willingness to play. In addition, in the lower part of the display area, "Display menu with push button" is displayed so as to overlap with the customer waiting demonstration display, and in the standby state, each button of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is displayed. It is informed that the menu screen will be displayed when is operated.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 193(b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a menu screen as shown in FIG. 193(c). On the menu screen, items such as member registration, two-dimensional code issuance, game history, mini-game, and end are displayed in a vertical column, and below the item, a directional key operation promotion image 137p and a character display of "selection" are displayed. In addition, the character string “OK” is displayed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q and the button image 136a, and the cursor CSL is moved by operating the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b of the operation key unit 137. It is shown that the item designated by the cursor CSL is executed by operating the button 137e or the effect button 136.

Here, when the item "member registration" is executed, the screen shifts to the member registration screen. On the member registration screen, for example, a two-dimensional code for obtaining a password is displayed. This two-dimensional code includes the URL of the registration page for the initial registration on the management server side. In this embodiment, by registering as a member, it is possible to set an original mode such as recording a game history and customizing an effect. The player, for example, uses a mobile terminal having a camera function and a bar code reader function to read the two-dimensional code and acquire the URL of the initial registration page. The player accesses the registration page of the acquired URL from the mobile terminal. The management server acquires personal identification information (ID) that can identify a person who has accessed the initial registration page, and issues a password. The personal identification information (ID) may be information based on an individual identification number peculiar to the mobile terminal or information input by an accessor. The password issued here includes personal identification information (ID) and initial values of history information. The history information is stored in the management server in association with the personal identification information acquired here. When the management server issues a password, the password is displayed on the display screen of the mobile terminal. When the item "Issuing two-dimensional code" is executed, a two-dimensional code issuing screen is displayed. On the 2D code issuing screen, the 2D code generated by the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The issuance of the two-dimensional code is prepared on the assumption that the player will select the game when ending the game in the state where the original mode is set.

The maximum capacity of the two-dimensional code is 2053 bytes (about 2 KB), and the display size should be changed in 4 cell increments within the range of 21 x 21 [cells] to 177 x 177 [cells]. You can A QR code (registered trademark) is known as a typical two-dimensional code. Note that a one-dimensional barcode or an encrypted character string may be used instead of the two-dimensional code. However, the two-dimensional code has an advantage that the amount of information that can be included is overwhelmingly larger than that of a simple character string. In the case of a character string, the larger the amount of information included, the larger the character string, which cannot be remembered by human beings and cannot be overwritten. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden by notifying by a two-dimensional code.

In the present embodiment, the two-dimensional code includes, for example, personal identification information (ID), the result of the current game, the mission achievement status, information indicating the cumulative value of the original mode points, and the like. Further, the number of winnings to the special figure starting opening (230, 232), the number of big hits, the number of small hits, information for store identification, information unique to the gaming machine, the operating status, the number of errors, and the like may be included. The information indicating the result of the game this time, the mission achievement status, the cumulative value of the original mode points, the number of winnings, and the like correspond to history information. Further, the two-dimensional code also includes the URL of the update reception page prepared in the management server.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the two-dimensional code is issued, information such as the result of the current game included in the two-dimensional code is erased from the pachinko machine 100. Therefore, in this embodiment, a warning screen is displayed when the two-dimensional code is issued to warn the player that information such as the result of the current game will be deleted.

When the player shoots the issued two-dimensional code using the camera function of the mobile terminal, the bar code reader function is activated. Then, on the display screen of the mobile terminal, the personal identification information (ID) included in the two-dimensional code is included in "http://www.~/jp" representing the address of the update reception page prepared in the operation server. The URL to which the argument indicating the history information is added is displayed. When the player accesses the URL converted by the barcode reader function from the read two-dimensional code, the history information stored in the operation server until now is associated with the personal identification information included in the argument portion, It is updated to the history information included in the argument part. In the present embodiment, since the player who has finished reading the two-dimensional code may leave the game table as it is, the history information stored in the game table at the time of issuing the two-dimensional code is erased. However, the history information is not limited to this, and the history information may be deleted based on the operation of the player after the two-dimensional code is issued. If the player does not delete the history information, the game can be returned to the game in which the history information is reflected. It may be configured as follows.

When the item "game history" is executed, for example, the result of the game this time, the mission achievement status, the information indicating the accumulated value of the original mode points, and the like are displayed. In addition, the number of winnings, the number of big hits, the number of small hits, the operating status, the number of errors, etc. to the special figure starting port (230, 232) may be displayed.

When the item "mini game" is executed, the mini game is executed. Details of the mini game will be described later.

When the "end" item is executed, the display of the menu screen is ended and the customer waiting demo display is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 193(c), when the down button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL is instructing "member registration", the cursor CSL is displayed as shown in FIG. 193(d). When the lower button 137b is operated once more, the cursor CSL indicates "game history", and the lower button 137b is operated once more, as shown in FIG. 193(e). Then, as shown in FIG. 193(f), the cursor CSL points to the "mini game".

Then, when the OK button 137e is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 193(f), as shown in FIG. 193(g), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the mini game. Specifically, the title "Today's fortune-telling" is displayed at the top of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, four treasure chests are arranged from the center to the left side of the display area, and the direction on the right side of the display area is The character "SELECT" is displayed together with the key operation promotion image 137p, and the character "SET" is displayed below the button image 136a, and the cursor CSL is moved by operating the direction key of the operation key unit 137. Then, one of the four treasure boxes (BX1, BX2, BX3, BX4) is instructed, and by operating the effect button 136, it is notified that the treasure box instructed by the cursor CSL can be opened. At the timing shown in FIG. 193(g), the cursor CSL points to the upper left treasure box BX1. In this mini game, the player selects from four treasure boxes and informs the contents of the selected treasure box. The contents of the treasure box are the result of fortune-telling fortune-telling that suggests fortune (for example, Daikichi, Nakakichi, Kokichi, Kyou, etc.), and multiple types are prepared. Furthermore, in this example of performance, a word of advice is added together with the result of the fortune telling. The results of the fortune-telling fortune-telling and the one-word advice are unrelated to the result of the acceptance judgment. In other words, it does not at least indicate the success or failure of the judgment. Further, which result is associated with each treasure box is randomly determined. Therefore, for example, even if the same treasure box is selected, the contents will change each time the mini game is executed. That is, it can be said that the contents of the treasure box (results of the mini game) change depending on the operation status of the operation means such as the operation key unit 137 and the effect buttons 136.

After that, when the lower button 137b is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 193(h), the cursor CSL points to the lower left treasure box BX2, as shown in FIG. 193(i).

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 193(i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lower left treasure box BX2 is surrounded by the cursor CSL as shown in FIG. 193(j). The enlarged treasure box BX1, the upper right treasure box BX3, and the lower right treasure box BX4 are reduced and displayed in the lower right portion. This notifies that the lower left treasure box BX2 has been determined as a treasure box to be opened.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 193(k), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the lower left treasure box BX2 is opened, and as a result of the mini game, the grandmother character BA appears in the treasure box and the result of the fortune telling. "Kokichi" is displayed, and "Moderately..." is displayed as one word of advice, showing that the player is alerted not to be overly absorbed in the game. That is, in this example of performance, "Kokichi" is associated with the auntie character BA, and it may be possible to understand that the result of the fortune telling is "Kokichi" by looking at the auntie character BA.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 193(l), the character display "other results are this" is displayed to notify that the contents of the treasure box that has not been opened will be notified. Note that the content of the character display shown in FIG. 193(l) differs depending on the appearing character. Is displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 193(m), the princess character HM3 appears from the upper left treasure box BX1, the leading face image BCH appears from the upper right treasure box BX3, and from the lower right treasure box BX4. The appearance of the image PND of the panda's face is shown. The princess character HM3 is a character corresponding to Daikichi, the buncho face image BCH is a character corresponding to Nakayoshi, and the panda face image PND is a character corresponding to evil. The combination of the result of the fortune-telling and the character can be set appropriately, and the combination of the result of the fortune-telling and the character may be changed every time the mini game is played.

As another example of the contents of the treasure box displayed as a result of the mini game, for example, as shown in FIG. 193(k1), the princess character HM3 appears in the treasure box and the result of the fortune-telling is “Daikichi”. Is displayed, and one word of advice is displayed as “I feel like a big catch today”, which gives a sense of expectation that a large number of balls may be obtained.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 193(k2), an image BCH of the face of the bancho appears from the treasure box, "Nakichi" is displayed as a result of the fortune-telling, and one word of advice is "If it's a sticky day "Is displayed, and there is also something that gives a sense of expectation that there may be things to play while sitting down slowly over time.

Also, as shown in FIG. 193(k3), an image PND of the face of a panda appears from inside the treasure box, and “bad” is displayed as a result of the fortune-telling fortune telling. "Is displayed, and there are some that show cautions not to be overly absorbed in the game.

Further, for example, a mini game result that can appear depending on the setting content of the DIP switch connected to the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 may be prepared. If the setting is made to increase the appearance rate of the premier notice that is promised to become, as shown in FIG. 193 (k4), the display of the one-word advice “Today is a big catch” It is also possible to change the display to "Premier notices are likely to be issued." That is, there may be a case where the presentation of the effect related to the result of the hit determination such as the suggestion of the appearance rate of the notice and the result not related to the result of the hit determination is displayed. According to this, it may be possible to make the player think that he/she is indirectly involved in the influence of the hit/miss judgment. The result of the mini game shown in FIG. 193(k4) may be displayed even if the appearance rate of the notice is not changed. In this way, even when the same character appears, the display added to the character, such as a word of advice, may be changed.

In addition, in this effect example, a tutorial display such as a game explanation or an explanation of a character of a model may be displayed instead of a word of advice.

FIG. 194 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 194(A1) to FIG. 194(A6) show an example of effects of another mini game, which is an effect following FIG. 193(f). That is, when the OK button 137e is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 193(f), in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 194(A1), "Today's fortune telling-draw Daikichi-" is displayed above the display area. The title is displayed, and a mini-game whose mission is to select the treasure box in the contents of "Daikichi" is started. Note that FIGS. 194(A1) to 194(A4) are the same as FIGS. 193(g) to 193(j) except that the display of the title is different, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 194(A5) shows a state in which the lower left treasure box BX2 is opened. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 194(A5), the treasure box at the lower left is opened, and as a result of the mini game, the princess character HM3 appears from the treasure box, and as a result of the fortune telling. "Daikichi" is displayed. The display of "Daikichi" means that the mission of the mini game has been achieved, and accordingly, "Mission achieved" is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 194 (A6), instead of the display of "mission accomplished", a message "Today's best feeling" is displayed as a word of advice, and the player wins the ball. I try to give a sense of expectation. It can be said that this one-word advice is also a display that is not related to the result of the success/failure determination.

FIG. 194(B1) to FIG. 194(B6) are also productions following FIG. 193(f), showing that the mission could not be achieved. Note that FIG. 194(B1) has the same display as FIG. 194(A1).

When the right button 137d is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 194(B2), the cursor CSL points to the upper right treasure box BX3, as shown in FIG. 194(B3).

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 194(B3), the upper right treasure box BX3 is surrounded by the cursor CSL in the decorative pattern display device 208, as shown in FIG. 194(B4). The enlarged upper left treasure box BX1, the lower left treasure box BX2 and the lower right treasure box BX4 are reduced and displayed in the lower right portion. As a result, it is notified that the upper right treasure box BX3 has been determined as the open treasure box.

Then, as shown in FIG. 194 (B5), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the treasure box BX3 in the upper right is opened, and as a result of the mini game, the auntie character BA appears in the treasure box and the result of the fortune telling. "Kokichi" is displayed. Since "Daikichi" was not displayed, the mission of the mini game was not achieved, and accordingly, "Not achieved..." is displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 194(B6), instead of the display of "not achieved...", a message of "moderate..." It is shown that they should be careful not to be over-immersed.

FIG. 195 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 195(a), the customer waiting demo display described above is displayed.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 195(b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a menu screen as shown in FIG. 195(c). On the menu screen shown in FIG. 195(c), the items of member registration, customization, mini game, personal data clear, and end are displayed in a vertical column, and below that, the direction key operation promotion image 137p is displayed together with "selection". Is displayed, and the character display of "OK" is displayed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q and the button image 136a, and the cursor is operated by operating the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b of the operation key unit 137. It is shown that an item designated by the cursor CSL is executed by moving the CSL and operating the OK button 137e or the effect button 137.

Here, when the item “customize” is executed, various settings can be customized. Details of the customizable settings will be described later.

In addition, when the item “clear individual data” is executed, the result of the current game, the mission achievement status, the information indicating the cumulative value of the original mode points, and the like are deleted from the pachinko machine 100. At this time, a warning screen may be displayed to prevent data from being accidentally cleared.

Then, as shown in FIG. 195(c), when the lower button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL is instructing "member registration", as shown in FIG. 195(d), the cursor CSL is displayed. Indicates "customization". Then, when the OK button 137e is operated while the cursor CSL is instructing "customize", the screen shifts to the customize menu screen as shown in FIG. 97(e).

On the customize menu screen, various settings such as auto button mode on/off, eco mode on/off, premier notice appearance rate setting, and tutorial display on/off are displayed in a column. The character display of “select” is displayed together with the key operation promotion image 137p, and the character display of “OK” is displayed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q, and the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b of the operation key unit 137 are displayed. By operating the cursor CSL in the vertical direction and operating the left button 137c and the right button 137b, the setting instructed by the cursor CSL can be changed.

Here, the "auto button mode" is an effect mode in which the effect buttons 136 and the buttons of the operation key unit 137 are automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set to on, the auto button mode flag is turned on, and the timing of button operation is automatically determined and the operation is performed. For example, when a continuous stroke operation effect that requires a continuous stroke operation of the effect button 136 is executed, the button operation is controlled to be automatically performed at every appropriate timing (for example, every 200 ms). In addition, in this effect example, when the "auto button mode" is set to ON, the various buttons are automatically operated without operating the various buttons. It may be possible to set to long press auto, in which the button is automatically operated by long pressing. Here, in the long press auto, in the production (including the mini game) that requires the operation means to be operated a plurality of times, when the long press operation is performed by the operation means, a plurality of operations are continuously performed. It is a pseudo operation that is supposed to have been done. In this case, when the operating means is operated for long pressing, it is treated as if the first manual operation was performed. For example, when the above-described continuous hitting operation effect is executed, by long-pressing the effect button 136, it is controlled to perform a pseudo continuous hitting operation. In addition, the full auto is an operation that is performed when the operation means is operated in a certain effect that requires the operation of the operation means even when the operation means is not operated.

The "eco mode" limits the driving of one or more drive devices, for example, turning off the various lamps 418 for the purpose of suppressing power consumption when the standby state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). Alternatively, it is a mode of stopping. In this embodiment, after the eco-mode is turned on, when the eco-mode start condition is satisfied, the various lamps 418 are turned off, and the brightness of the backlight of the decorative pattern display device 208 is reduced. The device for which driving is limited or stopped can be set appropriately.

Also, the "premier notice appearance rate" indicates the appearance rate of the notice that is guaranteed that the jackpot symbol will be finally confirmed and displayed by the appearance, and if it is set to "normal", the first The probability for the premiere notice to appear Appearance of the premiere notice is performed by using the normal probability table, and if set to "High", the premiere notice appears with a second probability higher than the first probability. The high probability table is used to perform a lottery for the appearance of the premier notice.

Further, when "Tutorial" is set to OFF, it is controlled so that the above-mentioned tutorial display is not performed.

When the left button 137c is operated once while the cursor CSL is pointing to the "auto button mode" as shown in FIG. 195(f), it is "off" as shown in FIG. 195(g). The "auto button mode" setting that was instructed was changed to "on".

Then, as shown in FIG. 195(g), when the OK button 137e is operated once while the "auto button mode" setting is "on", the "auto button mode" setting is "on". Will be confirmed. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once, as shown in FIG. 97(h), the screen shifts to the menu screen. If the OK button 137e is not operated and the effect button 136 is operated while the "auto button mode" setting is "on", the result of the "auto button mode" setting is not reflected. The menu screen may be displayed, or the result of the “auto button mode” setting may be reflected (confirmed) and then the menu screen may be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 195(h), when the down button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL is instructing "customize", as shown in FIG. 195(i), the cursor CSL is " "Mini game".

Then, as shown in FIG. 195(i), when the OK button 137e is operated while the cursor CSL is pointing to the "mini game", the mini game is started as shown in FIG. 97(j). R. Specifically, on the decorative pattern display device 208, a bancho character is displayed, and the name of a mini game called "bancho awakening game" is displayed, and below that, a mission "tear off clothes with continuous button hits". Is displayed. That is, in this mini game, when the mission is achieved on condition that the production button 136 is repeatedly hit during the operation acceptance period of the production button 136 and the production button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, the bancho's clothes are destroyed. Is displayed to inform that the mission has been completed.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 195(k), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are displayed together with the banquet character, and the word "START" is displayed above them. , A state in which the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. In this example of performance, as described above, the setting of “auto button mode” is set to “on” and set to full auto, but in the mini game, the setting of full auto is not effective and the effect button The automatic operation of 136 is configured not to be performed. When the “auto button mode” is set to “on” and the long press auto is set, the long press auto setting does not become effective even if the effect button 136 is long pressed, and Only one manual operation is effective, and thereafter, the effect button 136 is not automatically operated. In this production example, the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT is set to be different from the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game performed during the execution of the variable display of symbols. Alternatively, for example, as in this example of performance, it is performed during execution of the symbol variation display, rather than the changing speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demonstration display. The change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game may be faster or slower. In addition, the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demonstration display, and the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display The change speed of the display mode may be the same. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game performed during execution of the symbol variable display is more than the number of display modes of the button image 136a (for example, one type of default display mode). May be larger or smaller (for example, four types of default display mode, vibrating display mode, rotating display mode, vibrating and rotating display mode). , The number of display modes of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demo display, and the number of display modes of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game performed while the symbol variable display is being executed. May be the same.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 195(l) to (n), when the operation valid period elapses without pressing the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. The display mode does not change, indicating that the mission of breaking the clothes of the Bancho character has not been achieved. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 195(o), "bancho awakening game" and "end" are displayed to notify that the mission has ended.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 195(p), the decorative pattern display device 208 shifts to the menu screen.

It should be noted that in this effect example, the player may be allowed to select the execution of the mini game. For example, in the customized menu screen that is changed from the menu screen, it is possible to set whether or not the mini game can be executed. Or a type of executable mini game may be selected.

Further, it may be configured such that a customized effect is easily executed as a result of the mini game. For example, if the effect that the appearance rate is usually low is executed, the desire to participate in the mini game is high. May be improved.

196 and 197 are diagrams showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 196(A1) to FIG. 196(A6) are effects following FIG. 195(i), and show that the mission has been achieved as a result of the player repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. Note that FIGS. 196(A1) to 196(A2) are the same as FIGS. 195(j) to 195(k), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 196(A2), the player repeatedly hits the effect button 136.

Then, as shown in FIG. 196 (A3), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect images of the number of stars corresponding to the number of operations of the effect button 136 are displayed. As shown in FIG. 196(A3) to FIG. 196(A5), the number of star effect images displayed increases as the number of operations increases, and the number of star effect images displayed increases as the number of operations reaches a mission. 196(A5), an effect image of a large star is displayed. After that, when the effect button 136 is further hit repeatedly and the number of operations to achieve the mission is reached by the time the operation acceptance period elapses, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 196(A6), the longest character is worn. The clothes are shown to be broken, and the message "Bancho Awakening" and "Today is in good shape" is displayed to inform that the mission has been completed.

FIG. 196(B1) to FIG. 196(B6) show effects following FIG. 195(i) and show an example in which long press auto is enabled in a mini game. It is shown that the mission has been achieved as a result of the pseudo repeated hit operation. Note that FIGS. 196(B1) to 196(B2) are the same as FIGS. 195(j) to 195(k), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 196(B2), the player long presses the effect button 136.

Then, as shown in FIG. 196 (B3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one effect image of the star is displayed in response to the pressing operation of the effect button 136. However, the pseudo continuous tapping operation has not started yet. In the present embodiment, when the long press auto is enabled, one pressing operation is desired. However, in order to prevent an erroneous operation caused by the start of pseudo continuous hits, the long press of the effect button 136 is performed. When a predetermined time (e.g., 500 ms) has elapsed after the start of, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is started. In this case, one operation at the time when the long press is started is accepted. Therefore, compared with the operation state of the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 196 (A3), the number of operations of the effect button 136 is small, and the effect image of the star is also in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 196 (A3). Less than displayed. In other words, the manner of changing the display mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be different between the case where the player performs a normal continuous stroke operation and the case where a pseudo long stroke auto repeated stroke operation is performed. ..

When a predetermined time elapses after a long press of the effect button 136 is started and a pseudo continuous hitting operation is started, as shown in FIGS. 196(B4) to (B5), the operation by the pseudo operation is performed. As the number of times increases, the number of effect images of stars displayed increases, and when the number of operations for achieving a mission approaches, the effect images of large-sized stars are displayed as shown in FIG. 196 (B5). After that, a pseudo continuous hitting operation is further performed by the effect button 136, and when the number of operations to achieve the mission is reached before the operation acceptance period elapses, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is shown that the clothes worn by the character are torn, and "Bancho Awakening" and "Today are in good shape" are displayed to inform that the mission has been completed.

FIG. 197(C1) to FIG. 197(C7) are effects following FIG. 195(i) and show an example in which long press auto is disabled in a mini game. It is shown that no operation was performed and as a result the mission was not achieved. Note that FIGS. 196(B1) to 196(B2) are the same as FIGS. 195(j) to 195(k), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (C2), the player pushes the effect button 136 for a long time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 197 (C3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one effect image of the star is displayed in response to the pressing operation of the effect button 136.

However, in this effect example, since the long press auto is disabled, even if a predetermined time elapses after the long press of the effect button 136 is started, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is not started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 197 (C4), since the number of times the effect button 136 is operated does not increase, the effect image of the star does not increase, and the effect button 136 is operated for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). ) Has elapsed, the number of displayed star effect images gradually decreases, and at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (C5), the star effect images are completely erased. After that, when the operation acceptance period elapses as shown in FIG. 197(C6), as shown in FIG. 197(C7), the display mode of the Bancho character does not change, and the mission of breaking the clothes of the Bancho character is performed. It shows that it was not achieved. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 197 (C7), "bancho awakening game" and "end" are displayed to notify that the mission has ended.

FIG. 198 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In FIG. 198, the full-automatic (or long-pressing auto) function is enabled for the effect (including the mini game) that requires one operation or multiple operations of one button, but the operation key unit 137. For effects (including mini-games) that require selection using, an example in which the full-auto (or long-press auto) function is disabled is shown.

FIG. 198(A1) to FIG. 198(A6) show effects following FIG. 195(i), and show an example in which full-auto is enabled in a mini game in which the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit. It is shown that the mission has been achieved as a result of the pseudo continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. Note that FIG. 198(A1) to FIG. 198(A2) are the same as FIG. 195(j) to FIG.

When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (A2), the full-auto function is activated and the pseudo continuous hit operation is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 198 (A3), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect images of stars corresponding to the number of pseudo operations of the effect button 136 are displayed. As shown in FIG. 198(A3) to FIG. 198(A5), the effect images of stars are displayed more as the number of operations by the pseudo operation is increased, and as the number of operations achieved by the mission is approached. As shown in FIG. 198(A5), an effect image of a large-sized star is displayed. After that, further pseudo operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed, and when the number of operations to achieve the mission is reached before the operation acceptance period elapses, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 198 (A6). , The clothes worn by the Bancho character are shown to be broken, and "Bancho awakening" and "Today is in good shape" are displayed to inform that the mission has been completed.

FIG. 198(B1) shows an example of another mini game effect which is an effect following FIG. 193(f). That is, when the mini game is started, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 198 (B1), the title “Today's fortune telling-Daikichi defeat-” is displayed at the top of the display area, and “Daikichi” is displayed. A mini-game whose mission is to select a treasure box inside will start. In this mini game, each button of the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL and the effect button 136 is operated to determine the treasure box to be opened. By operating a plurality of buttons, the mini game is operated. Since this is what is done, the full-auto function is disabled. Therefore, after the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 198(B1) is displayed, no change occurs in the display state unless any button is operated.

On the other hand, even in such a mini game, full auto may be made to function. For example, as shown in FIG. 198 (B1′), when the mini game is started, full auto immediately functions and the effect button 136 is displayed. Is pseudo-operated, and the upper left treasure box is automatically selected as shown in FIG. 198 (B2′). That is, in the mini game in which the treasure box is selected with each button of the operation key unit 137 and the release button 136 is used to determine the treasure box to be opened in this manner, when the full auto is operated, the treasure box initially designated by the cursor CSL is activated. May be arbitrarily decided as a treasure box to be opened, and the operation intention of the player may not be reflected at all.

In the present embodiment, the mini game for deriving a result irrelevant to the result of the success/failure determination is executed in the standby state. However, for example, in an effect that is started at a predetermined time by RTC (Real Time Clock) (standby state And, it may be executed in a mini game executed in at least one of the variable display of symbols), or may be executed at any time regardless of the game state for the purpose of killing the player's time. ..

FIG. 199 and FIG. 200 are diagrams showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the following figures, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 199 and 200, the appearance of the effect movable body 224 is also shown in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 199 and 200, it is shown that the mini game is started during the execution of the big hit game. The mini game may or may not always start during the big hit game.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 199(a), the combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and a state of a big hit is shown. In addition, the holding icon h21 of the first special drawing 2, the holding icon h22 of the second special drawing 2, the holding icon h23 of the third special drawing 2, and the fourth special drawing 2 of the special drawing 2, which represents the holding of the special drawing 2. Each of the hold icons h24 is displayed in the default display mode. It should be noted that, in this example of performance, the display of the second number of holdings of the special figures 1 and 2 and the display of the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are not displayed, but these displays may be performed. ..

FIG. 199(b) shows that the big hit game is started and the game is shifted to the first round. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the "big hit start" is displayed to notify that the big hit game has started, and at the upper right of the display area, it is the first round of the big hit game. The display of "1R" shown and the display of "0GET" showing the current number of winning prize balls in the big hit this time are also displayed. It should be noted that the total number of winning prize balls from the first big hit to the end of the condominium may be displayed. In addition, as for the number of winning prize balls, the number of winning balls to the variable winning port 234 in one round becomes a predetermined number (for example, 10) and the variable winning port 234 is closed (overwinning). The number of prize balls based on the game balls may or may not be included. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 199(b), a child panda character may appear and perform a comical action, which may entertain the player. In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a right-handed machine, a right-handed notification for instructing a right-handed operation may be performed.

FIG. 199(c) shows that the fifth round of the big hit game is being played. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "5R" indicating that it is the fifth round of the big hit game and "735 GET" indicating the number of winning prize balls are displayed on the upper right of the display area. ing. This number of winning prize balls is due to the fact that 49 game balls have been won in the variable winning port 234 since the big hit started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199(c), the display that "a mini game starts in the next round" is displayed, and the mini game is started in the next round (sixth round). I foretell.

FIG. 199(d) shows that the sixth round has started. In the specific period, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "6R" indicating that it is the sixth round of the big hit game and "750 GET" indicating the number of winning prize balls are displayed on the upper right of the display area. ing. This number of winning prize balls is due to the fact that 50 game balls have been won in the variable winning port 234 since the jackpot was started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199(d), a display saying "Mini game will start" is displayed, which gives a notice that the mini game will be started.

After that, the decoration pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 199(e) shows that the mini game has started. Specifically, on the decorative pattern display device 208, a bancho character appears, a display showing the result of "1" on the dice and a display "If it comes out, the accessory action UP", and the mini game is executed. It is explained that if the production button 136 is operated after the start and the result of the dice “1” is stopped and displayed, the production movable body 224 is highly likely to operate. In addition, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “765 GET”, and the display based on the winning of 51 game balls to the variable winning port 234 is performed. There is. In addition, when the production movable body 224 operates during the execution of the big hit game, it is affirmed that a holding holiday is generated. That is, the operation of the effect movable body 224 during the big hit game can be an example of a pre-reading notice.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 199(f), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the symbols on the dice, the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are displayed, and “press” above them. Is displayed and the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "780 GET", and the variable winning port 234 is displayed based on the winning of 52 game balls. There is.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 199(g), as shown in FIG. 199(h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the dice symbol is "3". The display is stopped in the manner shown, and it is indicated that the mission was not achieved. In addition, the number of won prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199(g) indicates “810 GET”, and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 199(h). The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area 208 is “825 GET”.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199(i), the display showing the result of "3" derived as the result of the mini game is enlarged and displayed, and the mission of the mini game is not achieved. A "sorry" notification is displayed. Therefore, in this example of effect, the effect movable body 224 does not operate, and no notification is made as to whether or not the holding condominium is to be performed. In this example of performance, if the result of pre-reading is a suspended game, the mission may always be achieved in the mini game, and the effect movable body 224 may be operated. The movable body 224 may not operate in some cases. Further, the effect movable body 224 may be always operated when the mission is achieved, or may not be operated. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199(i) is "840 GET", and 56 game balls are won into the variable winning port 234. The display is based on.

After that, when the big hit game ends, as shown in FIG. 199(j), the decoration symbol display device 208 displays "end of big hit" to notify the player that the big hit game has ended. Further, in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, "16R" indicating that it is the 16th round and "2400GET" indicating that the number of won prize balls is 2400 are displayed. There is.

In addition, in the mini game of this production example, it is performed by operating the production button 136 once. For example, when the “bancho awakening game” shown in FIG. (For example, a notice of the operation of the production movable body 224) may be given.

Next, with reference to FIG. 200, a situation where a mission is achieved in a mini game performed during execution of a big hit game will be described. Note that FIG. 200(a) to FIG. 200(d) are the same as FIG. 199(a) to FIG.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 200(e), a state where the mini game is started is shown. Specifically, on the decorative pattern display device 208, a bancho character appears, a display showing the result of "1" on the dice and a display "If it comes out, the accessory action UP", and the mini game is executed. It is explained that if the production button 136 is operated after the start and the result of the dice “1” is stopped and displayed, the production movable body 224 is highly likely to operate. Here, the bancho character is displayed in a manner in which the clothes are torn, suggesting that the mission is likely to be achieved. In addition, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “765 GET”, and the display based on the winning of 51 game balls to the variable winning port 234 is performed. There is.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 200(f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbols on the dice start changing display, the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are displayed, and “press” above them. Is displayed and the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. In this example of effect, the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of rotating and vibrating, and the effect button 136 also vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. This suggests that the mission is likely to be achieved. Further, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “780 GET”, and the display based on the winning of 52 game balls to the variable winning port 234 is performed. There is.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 200(g), as shown in FIG. 200(h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the dice symbol is "1". The display is stopped in the manner shown, and it is indicated that the mission has been achieved. It should be noted that the number of won prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 200(g) indicates “810 GET”, and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 200(h). The number of won prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area 208 indicates “825 GET”.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 200(i), the display showing the result of "1" derived as a result of the mini game is enlarged and displayed, and the mini game mission is notified. The message “I did it” is displayed. In addition, “Attention to the arm” is displayed below that, and it is announced that the production movable body 224 may operate. In addition, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 200(i) indicates “840 GET”, and 56 game balls are won into the variable winning port 234. The display is based on.

FIG. 200(j) shows that the seventh round has started. In the specific period, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "7R" indicating that it is the seventh round of the big hit game and "900 GET" indicating the number of winning prize balls are displayed on the upper right of the display area. The display is based on the fact that 60 game balls have been won in the variable winning port 234 after the big hit has started.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 200(k), the forearm 224b of the production movable body 224 operates, and the forearm 224b overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208. Correspondingly, on the decorative pattern display device 208, a large number of effect images of stars are displayed, and a display as if the operation of the effectable movable body 224 influences the display on the decorative pattern display device 208 is performed. There is. In addition, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “915 GET”, and the display based on the winning of 61 game balls to the variable winning port 234 is performed. There is.

After that, as shown in FIG. 200(l), the decoration symbol display device 208 displays "confirmation of the reserved condominium", and notifies that the symbol variation display, which is a big hit, is suspended. That is, the look-ahead notice is given by the operation of the effectable movable body 224 and the display of "Holding condominium confirmed" in FIG.

In addition, in this example of performance, it may be possible to notify that the pending condominium is determined by the achievement of the mission.

In the present embodiment, one or more of the plurality of types of mini games described above can be combined and executed.

In the embodiments described so far, the buttons (operation means) used in the mission in the main effect may be different from the buttons (operation means) used in the mission in the mini game.

Further, the result of the main effect and the result of the mini game may be displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be displayed by using other display means (for example, a display device dedicated to the mission). , Other effect means (for example, movable means such as effect movable body 224 and shield device 246, sound output means such as speaker 120, light emitting means such as various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 542, etc. Other device).

Further, the mini game described above may be executed during the execution of one symbol variable display from the start to the end, or may be executed over a plurality of symbol variable displays.

Further, as in the above-mentioned mini game, it is preferable that the result is always notified when the mini game is started, but it may function as a false notice. For example, in the variable display of the special display where the number of pending variable displays is four, the variable time may be generally short, and in such a case, it looks like a mini game has started and the result is displayed. You may make it interrupt, without notifying. According to such a configuration, it may be possible to liven up the effect of the game.

Further, the mini game described above may be configured to be interrupted or stopped when a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, a sudden big hit (for example, a combination of decorative symbols of big hits is displayed without going through reach production). (Variable display pattern, etc.), RTC production starts, the production display being executed switches to a display such as wipe, and an error such as a door opening error or a magnetic detection error occurs, a mini game. May be interrupted. For example, if a big hit suddenly occurs during the execution of a mini game and the mini game is interrupted, it suddenly becomes a big hit during the period of looking forward to the results of the mini game, and surprises and delights the player. May be able to give. If the mini game is interrupted when the RTC effect is started, it may be possible to entertain the link in the effect with the other game console by the RTC effect.

The position and size of the display area in which the mini game is executed may be changed depending on the game state, the effect mode, and the stage.

Further, as the operation mode requested in the above-mentioned mini game, an appropriate operation mode such as one-time operation, repeated hitting operation, long-pressing operation, and timing operation can be adopted. As a result, the result of the mini game may be changed depending on the skill of the player and the willingness to participate in the game.

In addition, when the mini game is executed during the variable display of symbols, the mini game may be started before the reach. When reaching, there is a tendency for attention to be given to the effect of the symbol variable display. Therefore, by starting the mini game before reaching, it may be possible to enhance the effect of effect before reaching.

Further, as the reward for achieving the mission in the mini game described above, a notice is given that the notice is given, but the reward for achieving the mission in the mini game may be a notice or a look-ahead notice. For example, the variation notice or the look-ahead notice may be performed as a result of the mini game performed while the symbol variation display is being executed, and the look-ahead notice may be performed as a result of the mini game performed while the jackpot game is being performed.
<<Third Embodiment>>

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 201 to 285, another game table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) applicable to the present invention will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 201 to 285 are basically used only for the description using FIGS. 201 to 285, and even if the duplicated reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. In the description using FIG. 285, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 201 to 285 are given priority.
<Overall structure>

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, it is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 includes, as an external structure, an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage plate-equipped door 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and that is mounted on the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be rotatable, and serves as a game machine base body of a vertical rectangular shape. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a lock function and to be openable/closable. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the front frame door opening sensor 109 is provided for detecting the opening of the front frame door 106.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “ball”) and provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launch device 110. , A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of 200, and a production button 136 and a production button 136 as an example of an operation unit that changes the production mode of various production devices 206 (see FIG. 203) by a player's operation. A production button lamp 138 which is built in and causes the production button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 for giving a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and a player to the card unit. A return operation button 142 for instructing the return of the balance and a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit. The effect button lamp 138 is composed of, for example, a full-color LED, and can emit light in multiple colors. In the present embodiment, the effect button lamp 138 is an example of a light emitting unit that can emit light from the inside of the operating unit. Further, an operation key unit 137 as an example of operation means is also provided. In the present embodiment, the effect button 136 may be referred to as a first operation means, and each button forming the operation key unit 137 may be referred to as a second operation means. The specific configuration of the operation key unit 137 will be described later. Further, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full with a game ball is provided.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. Note that the game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.
202 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 203 as viewed from the back side.

At the upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100, a ball tank 150 that has an opening that opens upward and temporarily stores game balls, and is located below the ball tank 150, and at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and while temporarily holding the game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, drive the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have temporarily stayed are delivered one by one below the payout device 152.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal, when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) to reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The balls are paid out to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses a main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the overall game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. A first sub-board case 162 accommodating a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, a second sub-board that performs control processing related to performance based on processing information generated by the first sub-control section 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of game balls, and an error release switch that cancels the error by the operation of the game shop staff A payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 including 168, a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that configures a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and power is supplied to various electric gaming devices. A power supply board including a power supply control unit 660 for controlling the power supply and a power supply switch 178 for turning on/off the power supply by an operation of a game shop clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 for housing 182 and a CR interface 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided.

FIG. 203 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the substantial center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary The symbol reserve lamp 216, the first special symbol reserve lamp 218, the second special symbol reserve lamp 220, and the high-precision middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol". The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later.

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in this embodiment. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can be configured to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of productions. Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as a display unit capable of executing a plurality of types of displays.

The general figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is composed of 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 function as symbol display means capable of executing symbol variable display.

The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of pending universal figure variation games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the universal figure variation games are retained up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure reservation lamp 218 and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variation games (details described later) that are on hold, and in the present embodiment, the special figure variation games are It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a high-probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low-probability state in which a big hit is hard to occur to a high probability state. Lights when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

In addition, around the performance device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a universal figure starting port 228, a first special figure starting port 230, a second special figure starting port 232, A variable winning port 234 is provided.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, a ball paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball lent to the player may be referred to as a "ball rental", and the "prize ball" and the "ball rental" are collectively referred to. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls and the upper plate 126 is used. Along with discharging to, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (den Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 is provided with a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the blade member 232a is closed, and the player can win the universal figure variation game, and the universal figure display device. When 210 hits the stop symbol and displays it, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The variable winning port 234 is called a special winning port or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the central portion of the game board 200. This variable winning port 234 is provided with a door member 234a that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door member 234a is closed, and the special symbol display device wins the special symbol fluctuation game and the special symbol display device stops the big hit symbol When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the gaming island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the operating handle of the player, and launches the rod 146. And the launching mallet 148 allows the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to pass through and launches into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize (general winning hole 226, variable winning hole 234) or the starting hole. Outgoing outlet 240 by winning in (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), without winning any winning port or starting port, or only passing through universal figure starting port 228. To reach.
<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. .. Further, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative pattern display device 208, a rendering movable body 225, and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208, the rendering movable body 225, and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 is capable of rolling a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 200 or the like, and the passed ball is the first special figure starting port 230 A special route 244a is provided to make it easier to enter.

In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm portion 224a to a shoulder position and an elbow of an elbow. An unillustrated forearm motor for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The production movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The effect movable body 225 is formed in a circular shape imitating a family crest, is arranged on the back side of the game board 200, and can be moved vertically by a family crest motor (not shown). The production movable body 225 can be displaced between a position retracted above the decorative symbol display device 208 (retracted position) and a position overlapping on the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (advanced position).

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the respective inner ends overlap. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the lattice holes, or the shoji part of the lattice holes may be closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portion of the lattice holes may be completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 may be made completely invisible. Good.
<Control part>

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. According to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a second sub-control unit 500 controlling various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. A payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.
<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and a temporary data A RAM 308 for storing the data, an I/O 310 for controlling the input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring the time, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing are mounted. .. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

Further, in the basic circuit 302, a counter circuit 318 (two circuits in this circuit are used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. It has a built-in counter) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through each starting opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a lower plate full tank sensor and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device. For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and a drive circuit for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general figure display device 210. A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of 326 and various status display sections 328 (for example, the universal figure holding lamp 216, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.). And a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member such as a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 and a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234.

When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and the latched value is the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the value storage register. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is similarly set. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 uses the information output circuit 336 to pachinko the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is provided with the voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 outputs the start signal output circuit 340 from the start signal output circuit 340. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 also includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. It is possible to communicate with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Here, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 to send a command or the like. However, the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 cannot transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. The main controller 300 and the first sub controller 400 may be configured by bidirectional communication, or the main controller 300 and the payout controller 600 may be configured by bidirectional communication.
<Sub control unit>

Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and for measuring time, number of times, etc. The counter timer 412 is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

Further, the basic circuit 402 is for controlling the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and various lamps 418 (for example, the effect button lamp 138 provided inside the effect button 136). A drive circuit 420, a drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, various buttons of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 (for details, see The operation unit sensor 426 that detects the pressing of (described later), the sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the shielding device sensor 430 or the operation unit sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the signal stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 It is connected to a VDP 434 (video display processor) that reads out image data and the like and generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 to display the image on the decorative pattern display device 208.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) that monitors the voltage value of the power supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the first sub-control unit 400. Outputs to the basic circuit 402 a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment).

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit, not shown) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 404 uses the start signal. When the activation signal is input from the output circuit, the game control is started (the first sub-control unit main process described later is started).

Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates to control the entire second sub-control unit 500, data, and an image display. A ROM 506 that stores data and the like is provided.

Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable bodies 224, 225, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable bodies 224, 225, and an effect movable body sensor 424. A sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table for controlling the game underframe lamp 542. The frame lamp drive circuit 540 and the serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game base frame lamp drive circuit 540 are connected.
<Payout controller, launch controller, power controller>

Next, the payout controller 600, the launch controller 630, and the power controller 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on the control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed, and communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606. The firing control unit 630 is a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 for instructing to permit or stop firing, and a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134 outputs the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player. Control of the firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 and the like) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off (for example, a power storage circuit) (for example, , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 causes the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the firing control unit. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

Next, using FIGS. 205(a) to (c), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described.

The figure (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure. The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first starting hole sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230, and that the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on condition that the second starting opening sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variation display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variation display of special figure 2". To do. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of symbols in the present invention. Then, when the variation time (before the variation time in the present invention) determined before the variation of the special figure 1 starts, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, When the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation start of 2 (corresponding to the fluctuation time also referred to in the present invention) elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed, or the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 after starting "variable display of special figure 2" Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display according to the present invention, hereinafter, the stop symbol aspect of the special diagram 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after starting the "variable display of the special diagram 1 or 2". The series of display up to is referred to as a symbol fluctuation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In the figure (a), 10 types of special symbols from "Special symbol A" to "Special symbol J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display, and the white parts in the figure are turned off. The position of the segment to be turned on is shown, and the black-painted part shows the position of the segment to be lit.

"Special drawing A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot design, and "special drawing B" is a 15R jackpot design. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, determination of whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (big jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is called a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special big hit game ends and after the 15R big hit game ends, it shifts to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure, and the state of not transiting to the time saving state is referred to as a low probability state of universal figure. The 15R special jackpot symbol "Special drawing A" is the special symbol high probability general figure high probability state, and the 15R jackpot symbol "Special map B" is the special symbol low probability general figure high probability state. These "special drawing A" and "special drawing B" are symbols in which the profit amount given to the player is a relatively large profit amount.

“Special map C” is a 2R jackpot design called sudden change, and is in a special map high probability general figure high probability state. That is, “Special drawing C” is 2R, which is different from “Special drawing A” which is 15R. "Special drawing D" is a 2R jackpot design called sudden shortening of time, and is a special probability low probability general figure high probability state. That is, the "special drawing D" is 2R as compared with the "special drawing B" which is 15R.

"Special map E" is a 2R big hit symbol called a hidden probability change, and is a special map high probability general figure low probability state. "Special map F" is a 2R jackpot pattern that is suddenly called normal, and is in a special map low probability general map low probability state. These "special map E" and "special map F" are both 2R and are in a state where they do not shift to the time saving state.

"Special figure G" is the first small hit symbol, "Special figure H" is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability general figure low probability state. The small hit mentioned here corresponds to the same as the big hit without 2R time reduction. That is, the "special drawing G" and the "special drawing H" are in the same state as the "special drawing F", but the effects displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 are different between the two, and even in the same state, the "special drawing" is intentionally changed. By providing "G", "special map H" and "special map F", the interest of the game is enhanced.

In addition, "special drawing I" is the first off symbol, "special drawing J" is the second off symbol, and the profit amount to be given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is also provided with a symbol other than the "special symbol A" as the 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

FIG. 205(b) shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first start opening sensor detects that a ball has won the first special drawing starting opening 230 or the second special drawing starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special drawing starting opening 230, or On the condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232, the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Displayed in the order of “decoration 1”→“decoration 2”→“decoration 3”→... “decoration 9”→“decoration 10”→“decoration 1”→... in each symbol display region of the region 208c "Variable display of decorative pattern" is switched. Then, when notifying the 15R big hit of "special drawing B", a symbol combination in which three identical decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R big hit are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration" 1” and “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”) are stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "special drawing A", a pattern combination in which the same odd number of three decorative patterns are lined up (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") , Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, 2T big hit called "special figure E" hidden probability change, suddenly called 2R big hit of "special figure F", or 1st small hit of "special figure G", "special figure H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying a 2R big hit called "special figure C" suddenly changed or a sudden 2T big hit called "special figure D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is displayed. Stop display.

On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of "special drawing I" and the second deviation of "special drawing J", stop symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 7B in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG. 205(c) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" which is a winning symbol and "Public symbol B" which is a deviating symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". Then, "Public figure A" is stopped and displayed when the winning of the general figure fluctuation game is notified, and "Public figure B" is stopped and displayed when notifying that the general figure fluctuation game is missed. Also in this figure (c), the white part in the figure shows the place of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black-painted part shows the place of the segment where the light is turned on.
<Main processing of main controller>

Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 206. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, which has received the activation signal, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 206 according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, a predetermined value). If it is less than 9v), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, on a regular basis in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, Processing for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether the state before the power is cut off (before the power failure) is restored, and if the state before the power failure is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state) ), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

Specifically, first, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the clerk of the game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is ON (indicating that there is an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is required), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not required), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte configuration register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) or not (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal) is determined. If the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specified. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command that indicates that the power-off state has been restored, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value in the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting the interruption prohibition, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two random number generating random number counters for generating the initial values of the universal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number counter, the general figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer Update two random number counters for generating each random number value. For example, assuming that the numeric value range that can be taken as the universal figure timer random number value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure timer random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generating random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later.

The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Main controller timer interrupt processing>

Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 207. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process starts at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

In step S203, the WDT is periodically (mainly) set so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (not to detect abnormal processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower plate full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I/O 310. The presence/absence of a detection signal is input and monitored, and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, the RAM 308 stores information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) two times before in each RAM detection sensor. Is read from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ) The information on the presence/absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in) is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

Further, in step S205, the presence/absence information of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, It is determined whether or not the information on the presence/absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one gaming ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process is repeated several times at very short intervals of about 2 ms. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal recording area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 204 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, there is a current detection signal). If it matches with the information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the universal figure starting opening 228. It is determined that there has been a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence/absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 matches the above winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process associated with the winning in the mouth 226 is not performed, and the process branches to the subsequent process. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, a previous detection signal does not exist, and a current detection signal does not exist). After it is determined that there is a winning, it is not determined that there is a winning until the information of the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and the universal figure winning random number value to be used next in the main control unit 300, The two random number counters for respectively generating the special figure 1 random number value and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a result obtained by obtaining a value from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100 and adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter that corresponds to the random number counter The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating the random number for winning I'll do it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for general-purpose winning random number value generation has completed one round, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has completed one cycle. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for In the present embodiment, the counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 1 and the counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

In step S211, an effect random number updating process is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time to change/stop display the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time to change/stop the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for, the special figure 2 display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time for measuring the time to change/stop display the symbol on the second special figure display device 214 , Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. are updated.

In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this prize hole counter updating process, when there is a prize in the prize holes 226, 234 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228, the RAM 308 stores a prize ball number storage area for each prize hole or for each starting hole. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

In addition, in step S217, prize winning acceptance processing is performed. In this prize receiving process, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal figure starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, it is determined using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When there is a winning in the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the random number generation circuit 318. The value is acquired as a random number value, and also the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value as the special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. When there is a winning in the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the random number generation circuit 318. The value is acquired as a random number value, and the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value as the special figure 2 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. When a prize is received at the universal figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a universal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a prize in the variable winning port 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning port 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning port 234.

In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set) and bit 6 are set in bit 7. Is the power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 are the current processing type (0-3) for encryption, and bits 0-3 are encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

In step S221, a universal figure state update process is performed. The universal figure state update process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the general figure state update processing in the middle of the general figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED which normally constitutes the symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

Further, in the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the universal figure variation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the mode is turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be the display mode of the off symbol. Turn on/off the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general-picture state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 confirms either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 205(c)) or the deviating symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 205(c)). Display. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player.

Further, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal operation is set in the setting area, the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the opening period to the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

In addition, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening/closing, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is out, the universal figure out flag is turned on as described later. When the unillustrated flag is turned on, even in the unillustrated state updating process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the unusual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the universal figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this universal figure-related lottery process, opening/closing control of the universal figure variation game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the universal figure is inactive), and the pending universal figure variation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unselected by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the random number storage area described above. The winning judgment is performed, and when the winning is determined, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the universal figure timer random number value described above is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value. One of the times is selected to change the display of the public figure on the public figure display device 210, and the variable display time is stored in the general figure change time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the general figure change display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is stored in the universal figure pending count storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Moreover, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). This special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 The lighting/light-off drive control is performed by repeatedly turning the light off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the first off flag, the second off flag, the special figure probability variation flag, and the general figure. Probability variation flags are provided for each. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is on and the universal figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure A and 15R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 205(a) are on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, and the universal figure probability variation flag is on. Is a special map B, 2R big hit flag is on, special map probability fluctuation flag is also on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, special map C, 2R big hit flag is on, special map probability fluctuation flag is off When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the general figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure If the probability variation flag is off, the universal figure probability variation flag is also off, the special figure F, if the first small hit flag is on, the special figure G, and if the second small hit flag is on, the special figure H. In the case of the special symbol I when the first deviation flag is on, and the special symbol I when the second deviation flag is on, each of the 7-segment LED configuring the second special symbol display device 214 Lighting/lighting-off drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214, 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), sudden shortening symbol (special symbol) D), hidden probability variation pattern (special map E), suddenly normal pattern (special map F), first small hit pattern (special map G), second small hit pattern (special map H), first off pattern (special map) I), and the fixed display of any one of the second outlier symbols (special figure J). Further, thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the timer for special figure 2 stop time management provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). By this setting, the special display 2 that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 variable game. Further, if the number of shortening times stored in the shortening number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shortening times, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, even during the big hit game (during the special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that it exists is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is updated in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect production period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image is displayed to inform the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In order to do so, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234 until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning port 234. In addition to outputting the signal held in, the information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process which is started at the timing when the opening/closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). That is, the production standby period in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to stand by while displaying the image informing the player of the end of the big hit by the decorative pattern display device 208. Is set. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time saving number 100 times is set in the time saving frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving number storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON. The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit is shortened. If the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure. In the high probability state of the universal figure, compared to the low probability state of the universal figure, there is a high possibility of hitting the universal variation game. Further, in the general figure high probability state, the variation time of the general figure variation game and the variation time of the special figure variation game are shorter than those of the general figure low probability state. Further, in the universal figure high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state. In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, the general probability low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is a normal figure high probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 during the big hit game, a large number of games in the second special figure starting port 232 until the game balls enter This is to solve the problem that balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, which increases gambling.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operation is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, as will be described later, the off flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, the description will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub control unit 400, and notifies the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the second special figure starting port 232. However, the priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the prize in the first special figure starting port 230.

In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this embodiment, a command type such as a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power recovery command, a RAM clear command, etc. is specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, including the value of the 15R big hit flag and 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc., in the case of a winning effect command and an end effect start command, a special effect The value of the probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the second special figure starting port 232, and whether or not there is a winning at the variable winning port 234. Including presence or absence.

In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the values of the 15R big hit flag and the 2R big hit flag, the special figure probability variation flag values, the special figure 1 related lottery processing, and the special figure 2 related stored in the RAM 308 in the command data are related. The information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variation games or the second special figure variation games that are held, and the like is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stores the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating a value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which is withheld, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command data stores the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating a value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game which is withheld, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set the information indicating the number. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set the information indicating the number. Further, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) Prior notice information or no prior notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

In step S235, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full tank error. When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. Further, by driving various solenoids 332, control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, or through the display circuits 324, 326, 330, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display. The display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various status display units 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I/O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I/O 310).

In step S239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing is resumed.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input/output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main controller.
<Process of the first sub-control unit 400>

The processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

When the pachinko machine 100 is powered on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, the input/output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SC05. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, effect control processing is performed. In this effect control process, for example, when there is a new command in step S307, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 406 or the like, and when effect data needs to be updated, effect data is generated. Update process.

In step S311, when the depression of various buttons of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the depression of the various buttons.

In step S313, image control processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this image control processing, if the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to the VDP 434, this instruction is output to the VDP 434. In step S315, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to sound source IC 416, this command is output to sound source IC 416.

In step S317, if the effect data read in step S309 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to the shielding device 246, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step S321, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

In step S323, mission achievement determination processing (details described later) is performed, and in step S325, original mode control processing (details described later) is performed and then processing ends.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the first sub control unit 400 when the strobe signal output from the main control unit 300 is detected. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt is triggered by the timer interrupt process. To be executed in the cycle.

In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S503, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S321, and the effect random number updating process is performed.

Further, in step S505, it is monitored whether or not the above-mentioned low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S507, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process ends. In step S507, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery are saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 408, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input/output port is performed.
<Image control processing>

Next, the image control process of step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, and if not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for you. In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601. , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S607, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for is input. In step S611, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.
<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>

Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 209. It should be noted that FIG. 9A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

When the pachinko machine 100 is powered on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, the input/output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 508 is initialized.

In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

In step S709, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

In step S711, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed by the second sub control unit 500 when the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400 is detected. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle.

In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S903, an effect random number updating process and the like are performed.

Next, a specific configuration of the operation key unit 137 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 210A is a diagram showing the operation key unit 137 shown in FIG. 201, and FIG. 210B is a diagram schematically showing the operation key unit 137. As shown in FIG. 210(a), the operation key unit 137 is configured to have six buttons, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an OK button 137e, and a clear button 137f. There is. Note that, in the following description, in order to simplify the description, of the components of the operation key unit 137, the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, the right button 137d, and the OK button 137e will be described with reference to FIG. It may be expressed in the form shown in b).

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a long-press automatic continuous hitting function that performs a pseudo continuous hitting operation by long-pressing the effect buttons 136 and the buttons constituting the operation key unit 137. Here, the long press operation is an operation mode in which the state in which the effect buttons 136 and the buttons constituting the operation key unit 137 are pressed is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or more. The continuous hitting operation is an operation mode in which the effecting button 136 and the buttons forming the operation key unit 137 are pressed down a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled or disabled according to the contents of the effect using the effect buttons 136 and the buttons forming the operation key unit 137. In the present embodiment, in the state in which the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the continuous hitting operation is performed at regular intervals (for example, 100 ms intervals) while the effect buttons 136 and the buttons constituting the operation key unit 137 are continuously pressed. Is configured to be performed in a pseudo manner. Further, in the present embodiment, in the effect of performing one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the effect buttons 136 and the buttons that configure the operation key unit 137, the effect buttons 136 and the buttons that configure the operation key unit 137 are used. In order to properly perform a single-shot operation, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is used until a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) elapses after the pressing operation of each button included in the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started. It is configured so that the pseudo continuous hitting operation is not started.
Next, a specific example of performance in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 211 is a diagram showing a display example on the menu screen, and FIG. 212 is a diagram showing a continuation of the display example on the menu screen shown in FIG. In the following figures, the screen transitions are shown in alphabetical order in parentheses. 211 and 212 show, for example, how various settings are performed on the menu screen that can be executed in the standby state where the variable display of symbols is not performed.

The menu screen in the present embodiment allows the player to change the setting. In addition to this menu screen, for example, a setting menu screen for the amusement store side is displayed, whereby the amusement store It may be configured to be able to change various settings by the side, for example, to be able to input a master volume, a store name, and the like. Further, in the slot machine, for example, the setting change for determining the probability of BB, RB, etc. may be performed on the menu screen.

Further, in the present embodiment, the menu screen is configured to be displayed in the standby state, but, for example, the menu screen is not configured to be displayed in the power support state (probability variation, time saving). Good.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 211(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is stopped and displayed. Although not shown, the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are both stopped and displayed in an out-of-display mode, and the special figure 1, the fourth symbol t1, and the special figure 2 are displayed. The fourth symbol t2 is also stopped and displayed with a display result that is out of correspondence with the display results of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, respectively. Further, although not shown in the figure, the number of pending variable displays in both Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 is 0. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 211(a), the effect display in the standby state is performed.

In addition, at the bottom of the display screen, the icon "Display menu screen" is displayed together with the icon representing the effect button 136, and it is notified that the operation can be switched to the menu screen by operating the effect button 136. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 211(a), when the player presses the effect button 136 once, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the menu screen ("setting screen") as shown in FIG. 211(b). May be displayed.) is displayed. Specifically, in the menu screen, "volume and light intensity adjustment" for adjusting the volume and light intensity, "member registration" for registering the player's game history by entering a password, appearance frequency of effects such as notices, etc. There are four menus that can be selected, including "effect customization" for setting and "operation auxiliary setting" for setting a long-press automatic continuous hitting function and an automatic button function, which will be described later. At the bottom of these menus, the characters of "select" are displayed together with the icons of the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b, and on the right side thereof, the characters of "decide" are displayed together with the icon of the OK button 137e. Further, on the right side of it, a character "return with" is displayed together with the icon of the effect button 136. By operating the up button 137a and the down button 137b, the cursor CL is moved and the OK button 137e is operated. Informs that the menu indicated by the cursor CL can be executed. Further, in FIG. 211(b), it is also informed that when the effect button 136 is operated, the display returns to the effect display in the standby state shown in FIG. 211(a).

In the present embodiment, in the volume light amount adjustment, the volume and the light amount can be set from 11 stages of 0 to 10, respectively. The volume and the light amount are set to default values when the power is turned on, and the default values are set to “5”, for example. Needless to say, the default value can be set appropriately. Further, in the present embodiment, the player can change the setting of the volume and the light amount by the setting operation on the menu screen, but the player may not be able to change the setting of at least one of the volume and the light amount. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the volume and light amount settings can be changed only on the setting screen of the menu screen, but, for example, the volume and light amount settings can be changed without going through the setting screen. Well, for example, even during variable display of the decorative pattern or immediately after the stop display of the decorative pattern, the operation key unit 137 is operated without displaying the setting screen so that the setting of the volume and the light amount can be changed. Good.

In this embodiment, the cursor CL can be moved one by one on each operation of the up button 137a or the down button 137b on the menu screen, and the long press automatic continuous hitting function described later is disabled on the menu screen. Therefore, it is impossible to move the cursor CL by two or more by performing a long press operation. The cursor CL may be moved by two or more when the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b is pressed and held on the menu screen.

In the case where the effect display in the standby state is being performed, in addition to the effect button 136, one of the buttons constituting the operation key unit 137 or a specific button (for example, an OK button 137e or the like) is pressed. The menu screen may be displayed even in the case of a failure. Further, when the menu screen is displayed, in addition to the effect button 136, for example, when the clear button 137f is pressed, the menu screen may be returned to the effect display in the standby state. Then, as shown in FIG. 211(c), in the case where "volume light amount adjustment" is selected by the cursor CL, when the player presses the lower button 137b once, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays, As shown in FIG. 211D, a display indicating that “member registration” has been selected with the cursor CL is displayed.

After that, when the player presses the lower button 137b one more time, the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that "effect customization" is selected by the cursor CL, as shown in FIG. 211(e). Display is performed. That is, in this example of performance, when "volume light adjustment" is selected with the cursor CL, the menu of "production customization" operates the lower button 137b twice (or operates the upper button 137a twice). This is a display that can be selected. In other words, in the present embodiment, the long press auto continuous hitting function is disabled on the menu screen. Therefore, when “volume light amount adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL, the menu of “effect customization” is a display that is not selected unless the lower button 137b is operated twice (or the upper button 137a is operated twice). It can be said that there is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the display (an example of the second display) in which “customization” is selected with the cursor CL, the lower button 137b (upper button 137a) is operated a plurality of times (for example, twice). This is a display that may be displayed in response to the operation (operation in the first operation mode), and does not mean that the lower button 137b (up button 137a) has been pressed and operated (operated in the second operation mode). It can be said that the display in which "production customization" is selected by the cursor CL is not started.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the display in which "customization" is selected by the cursor CL is a display when one of the plurality of options is selected.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the display in which the “customization” is selected by the cursor CL is the display displayed on the menu screen (setting screen).

Further, in the present embodiment, the menu screen is a screen including a display for instructing to select one option from a plurality of options, and a display in which “volume light amount adjustment” is selected by the cursor CL (first When the lower button 137b (upper button 137a) is operated a plurality of times (operated in the first operation mode) when the third display example) is displayed, “effect customization” is selected by the cursor CL. There is a case where the display of the display (an example of the second display) is started, and when the display (an example of the third display) in which “volume light amount adjustment” is selected by the cursor CL is displayed, When the lower button 137b (upper button 137a) is pressed for a long time (operated in the second operation mode), the display of the "production customization" selected by the cursor CL (an example of the second display) is displayed. It can also be said that it will not start.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display in which "customization" is selected by the cursor CL is the lower button 137b (the upper button is displayed when the display in which "volume light amount adjustment" is selected by the cursor CL is displayed. It can be said that the display is started when the operation is performed N times (N≧2) by 137a).

Further, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the display in which "customization" is selected by the cursor CL is a display which is not started during the display of the symbol variable display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 211(e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the player selects the OK button 137e once in the state in which the "customize effect" is selected by the cursor CL, On the decorative symbol display device 208, a production customization setting screen as shown in FIG. 211(f) is displayed. In the production customization setting screen, "normal mode" that sets the appearance frequency of productions such as notices to the default setting, does not give false big jackpot notices, but only when a big hit is confirmed There are three menus that can be selected: "One-shot notification mode" and "Normal mode", which are set to increase the frequency of appearance of premier notices that confirm jackpots that have a low frequency of occurrence. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 211(g), when the "normal mode" is selected by the cursor CL and the player presses the OK button 137e once, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays As shown in 211 (h), along with the character of Princess Chibi, "Normal mode" and "You can see the usual production" are displayed to notify that the normal mode has been set, and the production of notices etc. appears. Frequency is set to default.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function is disabled on the menu screen, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 211(e), when “customize effect” is selected by the cursor CL. In the above, even if the OK button 137e is pressed and held by the player for a long time, the "normal mode" is not set, and the OK button 137e is operated again after the display screen is changed to the production customization setting screen. "Normal mode" is set.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 211(f), when the “normal mode” is selected by the cursor CL, if the lower button 137b is pressed twice, as shown in FIG. 211(g1). , "Premium up mode" is displayed with the cursor CL. In the present embodiment, as described above, the long press auto continuous hitting function is disabled on the menu screen, so that when the “normal mode” is selected by the cursor CL, the “premium up mode” menu is It can be said that the display can be selected by operating the lower button 137b twice, in other words, the display cannot be selected unless the lower button 137b is operated twice. That is, in the present embodiment, the display indicating that the “premium up mode” is selected by the cursor CL can be regarded as an example of the second display, and the “normal mode” is selected by the cursor CL. It can be said that the display indicating is an example of the third display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 211(g1), when the "premium up mode" is selected by the cursor CL, when the player presses the OK button 137e once, in the decorative symbol display device 208, As shown in Fig. 211 (h1), along with the character of Princess Chibi, "Premier productions can be seen a lot" is displayed to notify that the premier up mode has been set, and the frequency of premier notices will increase. Is set to.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 211(e), when the “production customization” is selected by the cursor CL, if the lower button 137b is pressed once more, as shown in FIG. 212(e2). In the decorative pattern display device 208, a display indicating that “operation auxiliary setting” is selected by the cursor CL is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled on the menu screen, so that when "volume light intensity adjustment" is selected with the cursor CL, the "operation auxiliary setting" menu is The display can be selected by operating the lower button 137b three times, in other words, the display cannot be selected unless the lower button 137b is operated three times. That is, in the present embodiment, the display indicating that “operation auxiliary setting” is selected by the cursor CL can be said to be an example of the second display. Then, as shown in FIG. 212(e2), when the “operation auxiliary setting” is selected by the cursor CL, when the player presses the OK button 137e once, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays An operation assistance setting screen as shown in FIG. 212(f2) is displayed. On the operation assistance setting screen, “no assistance” is not performed to assist the continuous operation of the buttons that form the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137, and long press the buttons that form the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137. By doing so, even if the “long press auto continuous hit” for assisting the continuous hits, the effect related to the operation of the effect buttons 136, etc., is not performed even if the operation of the effect buttons 136 or the buttons constituting the operation key unit 137 is not performed, Three menus of "auto button" for pseudo-simulating a single-shot operation, a long-press operation, and a repeated hitting operation are displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 212(f2), when "without assistance" is selected by the cursor CL, when the player presses the lower button 137b once, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays As indicated by 212 (g2), a display indicating that “long press auto continuous hit” is selected by the cursor CL is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 212(h2), when the player presses the OK button 137e once, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays, as shown in FIG. Will be activated.” will be displayed to notify that the long press auto continuous hitting function has been activated, and the long press auto continuous hitting function will be activated. In this embodiment, in this manner, the continuous press assist function by the long press operation of the effect button 136 or each button constituting the operation key unit 137 is provided on condition that the long press automatic continuous hit function is set to be effective. Is configured to activate. In addition, in the embodiment described in this specification, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be set, and the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be always enabled.

In the present embodiment, the menu screen is configured such that the long press automatic continuous tapping function is disabled. However, the menu screen may be configured such that the long press automatic continuous tapping function is enabled. When the 137a or the down button 137b is continuously pressed, the cursor CL may be moved in accordance with the pseudo continuous tapping operation. At this time, the pseudo continuous tapping operation interval may be set to, for example, an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which it is possible to easily recognize that the menu item selected by the player has been changed. Further, in this case, for example, when the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b or the OK button 137e is continuously pressed before the setting screen is switched, such as a transition from the menu screen to the effect customization setting screen, the setting screen is After the switching, the pseudo continuous tapping operation is not performed, and after the setting screen is switched, by pressing the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b or the OK button 137e again, the pseudo continuous tapping operation is performed again. May be. Further, the pseudo continuous hitting operation by the long-pressing operation may be prevented from being performed at least either one of the movement of the cursor CL and the transition of the setting screen.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the result set on the menu screen may affect the effect of the long-press automatic continuous hit function to be described later. For example, it is possible to set the difficulty level of the effect of performing the repeated hit operation on the menu screen, and if the difficulty is high, it is easier for the successful effect to be performed by making the long press auto continuous hit function rather than the continuous hit operation. You can Further, the volume and the light amount set on the volume light amount setting screen are reflected in the effect in which the long press automatic continuous hitting functions.

FIG. 213 is a diagram illustrating an example of the pseudo continuous effect. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 213 shows a state in which an effect of operating the effect button 136 is performed a plurality of times in the pseudo continuous effect. Here, the pseudo-relation is that the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in accordance with the variable symbol display, but the left symbol display area 208a, in the middle of the variable symbol display for one time. After the variable display of the decorative symbols is temporarily stopped in all of the symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable pattern of the decorative symbol is executed once or a plurality of times to re-variably display all the decorative symbols again. Refers to. That is, the pseudo-relation is a pseudo variation in which the decorative design appears to change a plurality of times with respect to one variation display of the special figure.

As shown in FIG. 213(a), in the first special symbol display device 212, the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol display area 208a, In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbols are variably displayed. Further, in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 which is variably displayed corresponding to the display state of the first special symbol display device 212 is displayed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, in response to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212, for example, the variable display is performed in a mode in which the color shown in the circle changes to a plurality of types. There is. In addition, in FIG. 213 and subsequent figures, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in such a manner that the symbol that is stopped and displayed can be recognized for convenience of description, but in reality, the stop symbol is displayed. The symbols thus displayed are displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. In addition, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 may be displayed in a manner that can be recognized by the player.

In addition, in the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold display area for displaying the hold number of the special figure 1 by the number of icons is provided. In this hold display area, a first special map 1 hold display h11 corresponding to the first hold of special figure 1 and a second special figure 1 hold display corresponding to the second hold of special figure 1 h12, a third special figure 1 hold display h13 corresponding to the third hold of special figure 1, and a fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 corresponding to the fourth hold of special figure 1 are displayed. Has been done. In FIG. 213(a), since the number of the variable display held in the special figure 1 is one, one holding lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 is lit, and the number of the variable display held in the special figure 2 is held. Is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are off. On the other hand, in the reserved display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 1 reserved display h11 among the first special figure 1 reserved display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 reserved display h11 corresponding to this. Only the default display mode (default hold icon) is displayed, and the other special figure 1 hold displays are displayed in a non-hold mode (for example, a grayed-out hold icon). Note that the hold icon may be hidden instead of displaying the hold icon.

Further, in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 284 for displaying a variable icon is provided. The variable icon has, for example, a display mode associated with the special display pending display, and is displayed in the same display mode as the pending display. The change icon can execute, for example, a notice about the display result of the change display (the change notice) depending on the display mode. The variable icon is erased after the variable display is started. It should be noted that the timing of erasing the variable icon is not limited to this, and may be erased when the variable display ends, for example.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 213(b), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in a swinging variation manner in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 213(c), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in a swinging variation manner in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display device 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 213(d), the third stop is performed, and the pseudo continuous symbol GG including the character display of "Continue" is stopped and displayed in a swinging variation manner in the middle symbol display area 208b. By the stop display of the pseudo-relational pattern GG, the player can expect whether or not the pseudo-repetition will occur.

Subsequently, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 213(e), the characters "PUSH" are displayed in the center of the screen together with the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136, and the remaining of the effect button press acceptance period. A remaining time meter MT indicating time is displayed below the effect button image BT. The effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT are displayed so as to be superimposed on the pseudo continuous symbol GG. As a result, the player is informed that the operation by the effect button 136 is acceptable.

After that, when the production button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 213(f), as shown in FIG. 213(g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the operation of the production button 136, Successful production is performed, and the production display is performed to the effect that the second variation display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-link is started. Specifically, the display of “×2” indicating that the second variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed is displayed above the decorative pattern.

Then, as shown in FIG. 213(h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c respectively change again, The first pseudo continuous production is started. That is, the variable display of the decorative pattern for the second time is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the first stop and the second stop are performed in the same manner as described above in FIGS. (b) to (c), as shown in FIG. 213(i), The third stop is carried out, and the pseudo symbol GG is stopped and displayed in a swinging variation manner in the middle symbol display area 208b. By the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbols GG, it is possible to make the player expect whether or not the second pseudo continuous symbols will occur.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 213(j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. The meter MT is also displayed. As a result, the player is informed that the operation by the effect button 136 is acceptable.

After that, when a single pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 213(k), as shown in FIG. 213(l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the operation of the effect button 136, The effect display is performed to the effect that the variable display of the decorative pattern for the third time is started successfully by the pseudo-link. Specifically, the display of “×3” indicating that the variable display of the decorative design for the third time is being executed is displayed above the decorative design. After that, as shown in FIG. 213(m), the second pseudo continuous effect is started.

In the effect example described above, the effect button image BT is displayed every time an effect (may be referred to as a pseudo continuous occurrence effect) that fuels whether or not the pseudo continuous occurrence effect is executed, and the pseudo continuous occurrence effect is generated a plurality of times. Since it is executed, the effect button image BT is also displayed multiple times, but only one effect button image BT is displayed at a time, and the effect button image BT is displayed intermittently at each occurrence of the pseudo continuous occurrence effect. Indicates that it will be done.

Further, in the above-described effect example, an example in which the effect button 136 is pressed down and the effect is successful is shown. However, when the pseudo-relation effect is not started, for example, as a result of the operation of the effect button 136, the effect has failed. The effect display may be executed, and the display may be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns that are out of order. In addition, after performing the effect display indicating that the effect has failed, it may be stopped and displayed with a combination of the jackpot decorative patterns.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single operation) by the effect button 136, but for example, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) or more by the effect button 136 is displayed. The result of the operation may be displayed by performing a long press operation. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hit operation with the effect button 136. In addition, in the above-described example of the effect, the effect of the effect button 136 by the single-shot operation is performed a plurality of times, but two or more of the effects are performed by the single-shot operation, the long-press operation, and the continuous-stroke operation. You may comprise by the above combination. In addition, in the above-described effect example, the long-press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled, and when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the effect associated with the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is simulated. It may be sequentially performed in accordance with the continuous hitting operation. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is long pressed. Further, in the above-described example of effect, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled. In this case, the effect button lamp 138 may be turned off even if the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. Further, the effect button lamp 138 may be caused to emit light in a light emission mode (for example, light emission in blue) different from a light emission mode (for example, light emission in red) in a state where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled.

As described above, in the present embodiment, one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the effect button 136 is an example of the first operation mode. In addition, the long-pressing operation of the effect button 136 for a predetermined time or longer is an example of a second operation mode in which the operation continues for a longer period than the first operation mode.

In this example of performance, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the pseudo continuous effect display executed as a result of the operation of the effect button 136 that occurs after the second time is the first operation. Of the first effect that can be started when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the mode, and can also be started when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It can be called an example.

Further, in the example of the effect, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the effect display by the pseudo continuous executed as a result of the operation of the effect button 136 that occurs after the second time is the second operation. An example of the second effect that is more likely to be started when the operation means performs the second number of operations in the first operation mode than when the operation means performs one operation in the mode be able to. It can also be said that this is an example of a second effect that is not started when the operation means performs only one operation in the second operation mode.

Further, in this example of effect, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, the effected display by pseudo continuous executed as a result of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode. It can be said to be an example of a first effect that can be started when a first number of operations are performed and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. ..

FIG. 214 is a diagram illustrating an example of the chance-eye effect. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 214 shows a state of transition to the super reach after the effect of operating the effect button 136 is performed a plurality of times in the chance eye effect. Here, the chance eye is a mode in which the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a specific combination (for example, a combination of different designs having the same color), and is one mode of the notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 214(a), after the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, in the left symbol display region 208a. The chance symbol “A” forming a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed, the chance symbol “B” forming a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the chance eye is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The chance pattern “C” forming a part of the above is stopped and displayed, and the chance pattern is stopped and displayed in combination with the decorative pattern. The first special symbol display device 212 is in the process of changing symbols, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212.

Further, in FIG. 214(a), since the number of holdings of the variable display of special figure 1 is one, one holding lamp in the first special figure holding lamp 218 is lit, and Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the reserved display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 1 reserved display h11 among the first special figure 1 reserved display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 reserved display h11 corresponding to this. Only the default display mode is displayed, and the other special figure 1 hold display is displayed in a non-hold mode.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 214(b), together with the effect button image BT1 that prompts the player to press the effect button 136 so as to overlap the chance symbol “A” stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. The character "PUSH" is displayed, and the remaining time meter MT1 indicating the remaining time of the acceptance period for pressing the effect button is displayed below the effect button image BT1. In addition, the character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT2 that prompts the player to press the effect button 136 so as to overlap the chance symbol "B" that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the effect button press acceptance period. The remaining time meter MT2 indicating the remaining time of is displayed below the effect button image BT2. Also, the character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT3 that prompts the player to press the effect button 136 so as to overlap the chance symbol "C" that is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the effect button press acceptance period. The remaining time meter MT3 indicating the remaining time of is displayed below the effect button image BT3.

After that, when the production button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 214(c), as shown in FIG. 214(d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a stop in the left symbol display area 208a. The chance pattern “A” that has been displayed is changed to the lord's pattern YM1 which imitates the lord's face. At this time, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are still displayed while being overlaid on the hall design YM1, but the character display of “PUSH” is deleted, and the remaining time meter MT1 has a gauge remaining. It is displayed in a mode of 0 second.

After that, as shown in FIG. 214(e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 which are displayed overlaid on the hall symbol YM1 are deleted, and the hall symbol YM1 is easily visible. Is displayed. The timing at which the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are erased can be set appropriately, and is, for example, the timing before the timing of changing the display from the chance symbol “A” to the hall symbol YM1. Alternatively, the timing may be the same as the timing of changing the display from the chance symbol "A" to the hall symbol YM1. This also applies to the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. Further, the display of the remaining time shown on the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 is continuously updated while the above-described effect display is being performed.

When the effect button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 214(e), as shown in FIG. 214(f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop display is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The chance pattern “B” that has been done is changed to the lord's pattern YM2. At this time, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 are still displayed in an overlapping manner on the hall design YM2, but the character display of "PUSH" is deleted, and the remaining time meter MT2 has a gauge remaining. It is displayed in a mode of 0 second. Note that, in FIG. 214(e), a state in which the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are erased and a state in which the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed are shown at the same time. After the button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are erased, the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed. Note that the deletion of the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 and the pressing operation of the effect button 136 may be performed at the same timing, or after the pressing operation of the effect button 136 is performed, the effect button image BT1 and The remaining time meter MT1 may be deleted. In addition, even if the production button 136 is pressed, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 may not be deleted, only the effect button image BT1 may be deleted, or only the remaining time meter MT1. May be deleted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 214(g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 that were displayed in a superimposed manner on the hall symbol YM2 are deleted, and the hall symbol YM2 is easily visible. Is displayed. Further, the display of the remaining time shown on the remaining time meter MT3 is continuously updated while the above-mentioned effect display is being performed.

Further, when the effect button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 214(g), as shown in FIG. 214(h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a stop display is made in the right symbol display area 208c. The chance pattern “C” that has been done is changed to the lord's pattern YM3. At this time, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 are still displayed while being overlaid on the hall design YM3, but the character display of "PUSH" is deleted, and the remaining time meter MT3 has a gauge remaining. It is displayed in a mode of 0 second. Note that, in FIG. 214(g), a state in which the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 are erased and a state in which the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed are shown at the same time. After the button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 are erased, the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed. It should be noted that the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 may be erased and the pressing operation by the effect button 136 may be performed at the same timing, or the effect button image BT2 and the effect button image BT2 after the pressing operation by the effect button 136 may be performed. The remaining time meter MT2 may be deleted. Further, even if there is a pressing operation by the effect button 136, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 may not be deleted, only the effect button image BT2 may be deleted, or only the remaining time meter MT2. May be deleted.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 214(i), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 which are displayed in a manner superimposed on the hall design YM3 are deleted, and the hall design YM3 is easily visible. Is displayed, and it becomes a mode in which the hall patterns YM1 to YM3 are gathered. Then, as shown in FIG. 214(j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c move to the upper left corner of the display screen and become super reach. The display of "SP reach" indicating that the shift has been made is displayed. It should be noted that even if the effect button 136 is pressed, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 may not be deleted, only the effect button image BT3 may be deleted, or only the remaining time meter MT3. May be deleted.

In the above-described effect example, effect button images BT1 to BT3 are displayed for each decorative pattern, a plurality of effect button images BT1 to BT3 are simultaneously displayed, and effect button images BT1 to BT1 are operated each time the effect button 136 is operated. It shows that BT3 is erased one by one. Further, in the above-described production example, an example in which the production button 136 is pressed down and the production succeeds, all the chance symbols are changed to the lord's pattern and the process shifts to super reach, but after the opportunity production is performed. When not moving to the super reach, for example, as a result of the operation of the effect button 136, at least one of the chance symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, Change the design from the chance design to a design different from the lord's design (for example, an evil officer design imitating the face of an evil officer), notify that it will not move to super reach, and then combine it with a decorative design It may be stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the effect button 136. However, for example, by performing a long press operation by the effect button 136, the operation is performed. The result of may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hit operation with the effect button 136. In addition, in the above-described example of the effect, the effect of the effect button 136 by the single-shot operation is performed a plurality of times, but two or more of the effects are performed by the single-shot operation, the long-press operation, and the continuous-stroke operation. You may comprise by the above combination. In addition, in the above-described effect example, the long-press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled, and when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the effect associated with the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is simulated. It may be sequentially performed in accordance with the continuous hitting operation. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is long pressed. Further, in the above-described example of effect, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

In this effect example, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, an effect in which the chance pattern “B” is changed to the lord's design YM2, and the chance pattern “C” is changed to the lord's design YM3. The effect can be started when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode, and also when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It can be said that this is an example of the first effect that can be started.

Further, in this effect example, in the case where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, an effect in which the chance symbol “B” is changed to the lord's symbol YM2, and the chance symbol “C” is changed to the lord's symbol YM3. The effect to be changed is more when the operation means performs the second number of operations in the first operation mode than when the operation means performs the operation once in the second operation mode. It can be said that this is an example of a second effect that is easily started. It can also be said that this is an example of a second effect that is not started when the operation means performs only one operation in the second operation mode.

In addition, in this effect example, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the effect in which the chance pattern is changed to the hall pattern as a result of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is operated in the first operation mode. An example of the first effect that can be started when the operation is performed the first number of times by the means and can be started even when the operation is performed once by the operation means in the second operation mode. You can

FIG. 215 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cut-in effect. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 215 shows how an effect of operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In this effect example, a cut-in effect is displayed in which a cut-in image is displayed each time the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 215(a), the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special symbol display device 212 is in the process of changing symbols, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212. Further, on the left side of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "PUSH" are displayed together with the effect button image BT1, and the remaining time meter MT1 is displayed below the effect button image BT1. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT2, and the remaining time meter MT2 is displayed below the effect button image BT2. Further, on the right side of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT3, and the remaining time meter MT3 is displayed below the effect button image BT3.

Further, in FIG. 215(a), since the number of suspensions of the variable display in the special maps 1 and 2 is 0, the suspension lamp in the first suspension map lamp 218 and the suspension in the second suspension map lamp 220 are reserved. All lamps are off. In this example of effect, the decorative pattern display device 208 does not perform the hold display, but the hold display may be performed as described above.

After that, for example, when 1 second has passed, as shown in FIG. 215(b), the remaining time meters MT1 to MT3 indicate that 1 second has passed, that is, the gauge has decreased by 1 second. It is displayed in a manner.

Then, when the production button 136 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 215(c), “PUSH” displayed together with the production button image BT1 displayed on the left side of the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The remaining time meter MT1 is displayed in such a manner that the character is erased and the gauge has 0 seconds remaining. At this time, the update display of the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 is stopped. That is, the remaining operation reception time of the effect button 136 does not decrease. In addition, you may make it not stop update display of remaining time meter MT2 and remaining time meter MT3 (reduce the operation reception remaining time of effect button 136).

Then, as shown in FIG. 215(d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are erased.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 215(e), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the first cut-in image CI1. The first cut-in image CI1 is displayed so as to overlap the effect button image BT2 and the effect button image BT3.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 215(f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first cut-in image CI1 is erased, the update display of the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 is restarted, and the effect button 136 is displayed. The operation acceptance of is restarted.

After that, for example, at a timing when 1 second has further passed, as shown in FIG. 215(g), the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 show a mode in which 1 second has passed, that is, the gauge is The display is further reduced by one second.

When the production button 136 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 215(h), "PUSH" displayed together with the production button image BT2 displayed in the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The remaining time meter MT2 is displayed in such a manner that the character is erased and the gauge has 0 seconds remaining. At this time, the update display of the remaining time meter MT3 is stopped. Note that the update display of the remaining time meter MT3 may not be stopped (the remaining operation reception time of the effect button 136 is decreased). Then, as shown in FIG. 215(i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 are erased.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 215(k), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the second cut-in image CI2. The second cut-in image CI2 is displayed so as to overlap the effect button BT3. Further, the second cut-in image CI2 has a display range enlarged in the vertical direction as compared with the first cut-in image CI1.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 215(l), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the second cut-in image CI2 is deleted, the update display of the remaining time meter MT3 is restarted, and the operation reception of the effect button 136 is restarted. To be done.

After that, for example, at the timing when 1 second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 215(m), the remaining time meter MT3 indicates that 1 second has elapsed, that is, the gauge further decreases by 1 second. It is displayed in the mode.

When the production button 136 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 215(n), “PUSH” displayed along with the production button image BT3 displayed on the center right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character "" is erased, and the remaining time meter MT3 is displayed in a mode in which the gauge has 0 seconds remaining.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 215(o), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 are deleted.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 215(p), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the third cut-in image CI3. The third cut-in image CI3 is an image displayed on the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the above-described production example, the example in which the cut-in image is displayed as successful production is shown each time the production button 136 is pressed three times and the production button 136 is pressed. The cut-in image may be displayed only for any one or two of the pressing operations of the button 136, and the cut-in image may be displayed in any of the three pressing operations of the effect button operation 136e. May not be displayed.

Further, these cut-in images may be displayed even when the operation button 136 is not pressed. At this time, different display modes may be used depending on whether the production button 136 is pressed or not, and the same display mode may be used.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the effect button 136. However, for example, by performing a long press operation by the effect button 136, the operation is performed. The result of may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hit operation with the effect button 136. In addition, in the above-described example of the effect, the effect of the effect button 136 by the single-shot operation is performed a plurality of times, but two or more of the effects are performed by the single-shot operation, the long-press operation, and the continuous-stroke operation. You may comprise by the above combination. In addition, in the above-described effect example, the long-press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled, and when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the effect associated with the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is simulated. It may be sequentially performed in accordance with the continuous hitting operation. At this time, when the operation of the effect button 136 is ready to be accepted, a pseudo pressing operation by the effect button 136 is immediately performed, so that the remaining time meter is updated in a state of being able to accept the operation of the effect button 136. In some cases, the three cut-in images can be displayed with almost no change in the display mode of the remaining time on the remaining time meter. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is long pressed. Further, in the above-described example of effect, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

In this example of effect, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the effect of displaying the second cut-in image CI2 and the effect of displaying the third cut-in image CI3 are: It can be started when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode, and can be started even when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It can be said as an example of one production.

Further, in this example of effect, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, an effect of displaying the second cut-in image CI2 and an effect of displaying the third cut-in image CI3. Is easier to start when the operation means performs the second number of operations in the first operation mode than when the operation means performs the operation once in the second operation mode. It can be said as an example of the second production. It can also be said that this is an example of a second effect that is not started when the operation means performs only one operation in the second operation mode.

Further, in this example of the effect, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the effect that the cut-in image is displayed as a result of the repeated hitting operation of the effect button 136 is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode. It can be said to be an example of a first effect that can be started when a first number of operations are performed and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. ..

FIG. 216 is a diagram illustrating an example of the cut-in effect. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of numbers in parentheses. 216(a-1) to (a-6) show a state in which the effect is produced by a single operation of the effect button 136 during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and FIGS. 216(b-1) to (b-). 6) shows a state in which the effect is produced by a single operation of the effect button 136 when the auto button function is in the valid state. Here, the auto button function is a function that pseudo-executes a single shot operation, a long press operation, and a continuous hitting operation even when the effect button 136 is not operated during execution of the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136. is there. In the present embodiment, the auto button function is enabled or disabled according to the contents of the effect using the effect button 136. Further, in a state where the auto button function is enabled, only one or two functions of a single shot operation, a long press operation, and a continuous hit operation are enabled depending on the content of the effect using the effect button 136. It may be configured to be.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 216(a-1), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result (for example, white circle) is confirmed and displayed. The effect button lamp 138 is off. That is, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state. If the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state, the effect button lamp 138 may be caused to emit light in a specific color (for example, blue). Here, the color of light emitted is not limited to blue, and can be set to an appropriate color. As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect button 136 can be said to be in the second state when it is not in the operation reception state.

Since the number of pending variable displays of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, both the holding lamp of the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the holding lamp of the second special figure holding lamp 220 are off.

After that, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 216(a-2), the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and Correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. At this time, the decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative pattern display device 208.

Then, the character "PUSH" is displayed in the center of the screen together with the effect button image BT that prompts the player to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 216(a-3), and the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT. The meter MT is displayed. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. Note that the color of light emitted is not limited to red, and can be set to an appropriate color. As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect button 136 can be said to be in the first state when it is in the operation acceptance state.

When the effect button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 216(a-4), the effect button image BT is displayed together with the effect button image BT, as shown in FIG. 216(a-5). The word "PUSH" is deleted, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the gauge has 0 seconds remaining.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 216(a-6), the cut-in image CI4 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

In the above-described production example, after the production button 136 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 216(a-5), the character "PUSH" displayed along with the production button image BT is erased. Although the remaining time meter MT is displayed in the mode in which the gauge has 0 seconds remaining, such display may not be performed.

On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 216(b-1), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4", which are combinations of outlying decorative patterns, are definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result (for example, white circle) is confirmed and displayed. The effect button lamp 138 emits green light that indicates that the auto button function is enabled. It should be noted that the color of light emitted is not limited to green and can be set to an appropriate color. As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect button 136 can be said to be in the third state when the auto button function is valid.

Since the number of pending variable displays of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, both the holding lamp of the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the holding lamp of the second special figure holding lamp 220 are off.

After that, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 216(b-2), the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and Correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. At this time, the decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative pattern display device 208.

After that, the character "PUSH" is displayed in the center of the screen together with the effect button image BT that prompts the player to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 216(b-3), and the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT. The meter MT is displayed.

After that, when a half of the acceptance period of pressing the effect button 136 elapses, the one-off operation by the effect button 136 is pseudo-executed by the auto button function at the timing shown in FIG. 216(b-4).

Then, as shown in FIG. 216(b-5), the character "PUSH" displayed along with the effect button image BT is erased, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the gauge is left at 0 seconds. It

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 216(b-6), the cut-in image CI4 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

In the above-described example of the effect, after the operation of the effect button 136 is artificially performed by the auto button function, as shown in FIG. 216(b-5), “PUSH” displayed together with the effect button image BT. Although the character is erased and the remaining time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the gauge has 0 seconds remaining, such a display may not be performed.

In the above-described example of the effect, a single-shot operation is performed by the effect button 136, and when the single-shot operation is performed, the cut-in image is displayed as the success of the effect is shown. The cut-in image may not be displayed because of failure.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by the single-shot operation by the effect button 136, but the result of the operation is displayed by, for example, performing the long press operation by the effect button 136. You can Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hit operation with the effect button 136. In addition, in the above-described effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the effect content (display of the cut-in image CI4) executed when the operation of the effect button 136 is simulated by the auto button function is a single operation performed by the effect button 136. The effect content is the same as the effect content executed when the effect button 136 is executed, but the effect content executed when the operation of the effect button 136 is simulated by the auto button function is the one-shot operation performed by the effect button 136. In some cases, it may be different from the effect contents executed in the case of, and it may be different.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 216, the light emission mode of the effect button lamp 138 is different between a state in which a normal operation of the effect button 136 in the effect of a single-shot operation can be accepted and a state in which the auto button function is enabled. Is shown.

FIG. 217 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pending change notice. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of numbers in parentheses. 217(a-1) to (a-7) and FIGS. 217(b-1) to (b-8) show a pending change notice in which the display mode of the pending icon is changed by the operation of the effect button 136. It shows the situation.

As shown in FIG. 217(a-1), in the first special symbol display device 212, the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol display area. The decorative symbols variably displayed in 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively. Further, in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is displayed. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1, in response to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212, the variable display is performed as described above.

In FIG. 217(a-1), since the number of holdings of the variable display of the special figure 1 is three, three holding lamps in the first special figure holding lamp 218 are lit, and Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the hold display area at the bottom of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special map 1 hold among the first special map 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special map 1 hold display h14 is correspondingly provided. The display h11, the second special figure 1 hold display h12, and the third special figure 1 hold display h13 are displayed in the default display mode, and the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is not held. Is displayed. A variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 217(a-2), the number of variable displays held in the special figure 1 is increased to 4, and the first special figure hold lamp. The four hold lamps at 218 are illuminated. Then, in the reserved display area in the lower portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth special figure 1 reserved display h14 is displayed in a default display mode corresponding to this. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

After that, when the production button 136 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 217(a-3), animation display in which the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is deformed is started. In FIG. 217(a-3), an animation in which the hold icon displayed in a circle extends horizontally and changes to an ellipse is displayed. At this time, the effect button image BTH is still displayed, but the effect button image BTH may be deleted when the effect button 136 is operated. After that, as shown in FIGS. 217(a-3) to 217(a-5), the hold icon extends vertically or horizontally for a predetermined performance execution period (for example, 2 seconds). Animation continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 217(a-6), after an animation that the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 bursts is displayed, as shown in FIG. 217(a-7), the hold icon Changes to a notice display mode that imitates the face of the lord.

On the other hand, in FIG. 217(b-1), the state in which the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is being displayed is shown. At this time, since the number of suspensions of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four suspension lamps of the first special diagram suspension lamp 218 are lit, and the number of suspensions of the variable display of the special chart 2 is 0. Therefore, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, the first special figure 1 reserved display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 reserved display h14 are all displayed in the default display mode. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap with the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

After that, at the timing of the symbol stop display, as shown in FIG. 217(b-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols is “decoration 2”-“decoration” which is a combination of the decorative symbols which are out of order. 3"-"decoration 3" is confirmed and displayed. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, it is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. Has been done.

In this state, for example, even if the production button 136 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 217(b-3), an animation display in which the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is transformed is Not started. That is, in this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 is not accepted during the stop display of the symbol. Note that the operation of the effect button 136 may be accepted even during the stop display of the symbol. Here, the stop display of the symbol may be the stop display of the special symbol or the stop display of the decorative symbol.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 217(b-4), the variable display of symbols is started based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is deleted after moving to the variable icon display area 284 and the second special figure 1 hold display h12. -The hold icons displayed on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are moved to the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third special figure 1 hold display h13 for animation display.

After the pattern variation display is started as described above, when the production button 136 is pressed once, the third special figure 1 hold display h13 is generated at the timing shown in FIG. 217(b-5). An animation display in which the hold icon is deformed is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 217(b-5) to (b-6), the hold icon extends vertically for a predetermined performance execution period. The animation display that stretches horizontally is continued.

After that, as shown in FIG. 217(b-7), after an animation that the hold icon in the third special figure 1 hold display h13 bursts is displayed, as shown in FIG. 217(b-8), the hold icon is changed. The notice display mode is changed to imitate the face of the lord.

In addition, in the above-described production example, the example in which the single-shot operation is performed by the production button 136, and when the single-shot operation is performed, the hold icon is changed to indicate that the production is successful, but the single-shot operation is also performed. Alternatively, it is possible not to perform the display for changing the hold icon because the production has failed. For example, when a single operation is performed by the production button 136, the hold icon is deformed, and then the default display is displayed again. You may make it perform the effect display which becomes a mode.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by the single-shot operation by the effect button 136, but the result of the operation is displayed by, for example, performing the long press operation by the effect button 136. You can In this case, for example, when the variable display of the symbols ends and is stopped and displayed during the long press operation, after the next symbol variable display starts, the production button 136 is pressed again to perform the long press operation. May be required, or the long press operation may be continuously effective even during the stop display of the symbol. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hit operation with the effect button 136. In addition, in the above-described effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In this case, for example, when the variable display of the symbol ends and is stopped and displayed during the long-press operation, after the next variable display of the symbol starts, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function to enable the effect button It may be necessary to re-press 136, or even if the long press operation is continued while the symbols are stopped and displayed, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be continued and effective. Further, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled. In addition, the operation of the effect button 136 may be simulated by enabling the auto button function.

FIG. 218 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect using the effect movable body. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 218 shows how an effect of operating the effect button 136 is performed in super reach. In the example of production shown in FIG. 218, for convenience of explanation, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are decorative symbols. It is shown on the lower right side of the display device 208.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 218(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed.

Since the number of pending variable displays of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, both the holding lamp of the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the holding lamp of the second special figure holding lamp 220 are off. Moreover, none of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure hold display h14 is displayed in a state where they are not held.

In addition, in this effect example, it is shown that the effect movable body 224 is arranged so as to overlap with the right end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 218(b), the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and in response to this. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

Then, after transitioning to the super reach as shown in FIG. 218(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character "press button" that prompts the player to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 218(d). Display is performed.

When the production button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 218(e), as shown in FIG. 218(f), the production movable body 224 is moved to the initial position (first position) indicated by the chain line. Position) to the position indicated by the solid line (second position).

In addition, in the above-described production example, the example in which the production movable body 224 moves when performing a single-shot operation with the production button 136 and the single-shot operation is performed, but the single-shot operation is performed, is shown. It may be configured that the production movable body 224 does not move because the production has failed. Further, when the single shot operation is performed, the effect movable body 224 moves toward the second position, but it may be operated so as to return to the first position in the middle of the move because the effect has failed.

Further, in the example of the above-described effect, the result of the operation is displayed by the single-shot operation by the effect button 136, but the result of the operation is effected by, for example, performing the long press operation by the effect button 136. You can Further, for example, the result of the operation may be rendered by performing a continuous hitting operation with the rendering button 136. At this time, for example, each time the effect button 136 is pressed, the position may be gradually changed, or the first position may be swung, or the first position to the second position. You may make it move gradually toward. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled, and for example, the display as shown in FIG. 218(d) is displayed, and the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. When the effect button 136 is continuously pressed from before, the effect movable body 224 is moved as if the effect button 136 was pseudo-pressed when the operation of the effect button 136 was enabled. May be configured to do so. After that, in the state where the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, when another effect for operating the effect button 136 is further generated, the generated effect button 136 is pseudo-pressed in the generated effect. As a result, the result of the operation may be displayed or rendered (in other words, the result of the operation is displayed or rendered even when the rendering button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the same operation is performed even when the button is pressed for a long time. The result may be displayed or rendered), and the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be invalidated so that the simulated rendering button 136 may not be pressed. Further, in the above-described example of effect, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

FIG. 219 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by a single operation of an effect button. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 219 shows how the production is performed by a single operation of the production button 136 in the reach production.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 219(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative symbols, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. Further, in this effect example, the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 is displayed below the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1. In the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2, corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure display device 214, for example, the variable display is performed in such a manner that the colors shown in the squares change into a plurality of types. Is. As shown in FIG. 219(a), since the second special figure display device 214 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is the display result of the second special figure display device 212. The display result of the deviation (for example, a white square mark) is confirmed and displayed corresponding to. In FIG. 219 and subsequent figures, for the sake of convenience of explanation, the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in such a manner that the symbol which is stopped and displayed can be recognized, but actually, it is stopped and displayed. The symbols are displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. Note that the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 may be displayed in a manner that can be recognized by the player. Note that, in FIG. 219(a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

Further, in FIG. 219(a), since the number of variable displays held in the special figure 1 is four, the four holding lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the variable display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variation icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 219(b), the variable display of symbols is started based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, and then changes to the change icon h00 having the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. In this production example, the timing at which the variable icon h00 is erased is the timing at which the decorative design is confirmed and displayed, but it can be set to an appropriate timing, for example, at a timing before the decorative design is confirmed and displayed. It may be present, or may be a timing before the reach effect is started. When the variable icon h00 is displayed in the default display mode, it is displayed in the same display mode as the hold icon which is the default display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed. Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 219(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 219(d), the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 is displayed. The character "press" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state.

When the effect button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 219(e), the cut-in image CI5 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 as shown in FIG. 219(f). It

In the above-described example of the effect, a single-shot operation is performed by the effect button 136, and when the single-shot operation is performed, the cut-in image is displayed as the success of the effect is shown. The cut-in image may not be displayed because of failure.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by the single-shot operation by the effect button 136, but the result of the operation is displayed by, for example, performing the long press operation by the effect button 136. You can Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hit operation with the effect button 136. In addition, in the above-described effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled. In addition, in the above-described effect example, the auto button function may be enabled or disabled.

FIG. 220 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by a single operation of the effect button. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 220 shows how in the reach effect, the effect is performed by a single operation of the effect button 136.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 220(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of deviating decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. In addition, the second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. Note that the effect button lamp 138 is off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state. In the present embodiment, the operation accepting state may be basically set when the effect button lamp 138 is lit. In this case, it may be in the operation accepting state even when the effect button lamp 138 is off, or may be in the operation accepting state even when the effect button lamp 138 is lit. Further, when the effect button lamp 138 is on, the operation is always accepted, but even when the effect button lamp 138 is off, the operation is not always in the non-operation accepting state. Good.

In addition, in FIG. 220(a), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of special figure 1 is four, the four suspension lamps of the first special figure suspension lamp 218 are lit, and the variation display of special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variation icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the variable display of symbols, but the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 220(b), the symbol variable display based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1 is started. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 changes to the change icon h00, which is the notice display mode, after moving to the change icon display area 284. In addition, the holding icons displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 respectively indicate the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third special figure 1 hold display h13. The animation display for moving to is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 220(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 220(d), the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 is displayed. The character "press" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. In addition, at this time, since the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the operation of the effect button 136 is not accepted. In order for the operation to be accepted, it is necessary to release the pressing of the effect button 136 once and then press the effect button 136 again.

Then, as shown in FIG. 220(e) to FIG. 220(f), after the effect button 136 is continuously pressed during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136, the effect becomes the timing of FIG. 220(g). When the operation acceptance period of the button 136 (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes 0 seconds remaining. Then, as shown in FIG. 220(h), the cut-in image CI5 is finally displayed.

In this example of effect, when the effect button 136 is not operated effectively, the cut-in image CI5 may not be displayed, which is different from the cut-in image CI5 shown in FIG. 219(f). You may make it display the cut-in image of a display mode.

FIG. 221 is a diagram for explaining an example of the effect produced by a single operation of the effect button. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 221 shows how the production is performed by a single operation of the production button 136 in the reach production.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 221(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. In addition, the second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. Note that the effect button lamp 138 is off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

Further, in FIG. 221(a), since the number of variable displays held in Toku-zu 1 is four, the four holding lamps in the first Toku-zu holding lamp 218 are lit up, and Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variation icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the automatic button function is enabled, and a character display of "auto setting" indicating that is displayed on the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example of effect, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, but it may be made to emit green light as described above. Further, in this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the variable display of symbols, but the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 221(b), the variable display of symbols is started based on the suspension of the first variable display of the special figure 1. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 changes to the change icon h00, which is the notice display mode, after moving to the change icon display area 284. In addition, the holding icons displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 respectively indicate the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third special figure 1 hold display h13. The animation display for moving to is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 221(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 221(d), together with the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136, " The character "press" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. Note that a green light emission mode indicating that the auto button function is enabled may be used.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 221(e) to 221(f), after the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, a predetermined auto button function activation time (for example, the effect button 136 is generated at the timing of FIG. 221(g). When 2.5 seconds have passed since the operation was in the operation accepting state), the auto button function is activated and a single operation by the effect button 136 is performed in a pseudo manner. Then, as shown in FIG. 221(h), the cut-in image CI5 is displayed.

In this example of effect, when the auto button function is activated and the effect button 136 is pseudo-operated, a display different from the cut-in image CI5 shown in FIG. 219(f) or FIG. 220(h) is displayed. The cut-in image of the aspect may be displayed.

FIG. 222 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by continuous operation of the effect button. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 222 shows a state in which the reach effect is produced by continuous hit operation of the effect button 136.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 222(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. Note that, in FIG. 222(a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

In addition, in FIG. 222(a), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of special figure 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special figure suspension lamp 218 are lit, and the variation display of special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variation icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 222(b), the variable display of symbols is started based on the suspension of the first variable display of the special figure 1. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, and then changes to the change icon h00 having the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 222(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 222(d), the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 is displayed. The character "repeatedly strike" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. That is, the continuous hit operation effect is started. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. In addition, a continuous stroke meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. This continuous hit meter RD is displayed such that the gauge increases in accordance with the number of times the effect button 136 is operated, and when the gauge is full, it is considered that the effect has been successful, and the notice effect is executed. Has been done.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 222(e) to 222(g), when the consecutive hitting operation by the effect button 136 is performed, the gauge of the consecutive hit meter RD increases according to the number of operations of the effect button 136. It should be noted that the effect button lamp 138 remains lit in red during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether or not the effect button 136 is operated.

Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing shown in FIG. 222(g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hit meter RD was not full and increased to 3/6. Further, at this time, since the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is in the off state. Then, as shown in FIG. 222(h), since the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is not full, the decorative pattern display device 208 indicates that the production has failed, and displays "sorry..." to that effect. Is done.

In the above-described production example, an example is shown in which a continuous stroke operation is performed by the production button 136, and as a result of the continuous stroke operation, the fact that the production has failed is displayed, but the gauge of the continuous stroke meter RD becomes full. In such a case, it may be possible to give a notice display such as a cut-in image or to give a notice that a big hit will be given, assuming that the production has been successful. It should be noted that whether or not it is possible to fill the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is determined based on the display result of the special figure. That is, when it is not possible to fill the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD, the gauge will not be filled no matter how many times the effect button 136 is hit.

Further, in the above-described production example, when the continuous hitting operation by the production button 136 (an example of the first operation means) is performed and the production is successful, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a big hit is announced. Although the notification is made, for example, even when the OK button 137e (an example of the second operation means) is repeatedly hit, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notification that a big hit will be given. It may be performed. At this time, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function by the OK button 137e is invalid, and even if the long-press operation by the OK button 137e is performed, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notification notifying that the jackpot will be a big hit is not performed. Good. Further, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function by the OK button 137e may be made effective, and even if the long-press operation by the OK button 137e is performed, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice for notifying a big hit may be given. In this case, since there is a difference in operability between the effect button 136 and the OK button 137e due to a difference in button size, a difference in stroke, or the like, the player can select and operate a favorite button. There is. Further, since the OK button 137e is smaller than the effect button 136 and is not provided with the light emitting means such as the effect button lamp 138, it is difficult for the player to know whether or not the OK button 137e is in the operation valid state, and the OK button 137e is used. It can be said that the operation is for an advanced person who has obtained the information from, for example, a strategy magazine or the Internet. Here, the OK button 137e may be provided on the left side or the lower side of the effect button 136 or the like to facilitate the operation of the OK button 137e with the left hand.

Further, in the above-described production example, when the continuous hitting operation by the production button 136 (an example of the first operation means) is performed and the production is successful, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a big hit is announced. Although the notification is made, for example, only by operating the OK button 137e (an example of the second operation means) once, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice of a big hit is given. You may do it. In this case, the fact that the effect is produced by one operation of the OK button 137e may not be notified. As a result, it may be possible to give a sense of superiority to a game expert who knows the existence of the back button effect.

In this effect example, the continuous hit operation effect is an effect that can be started during the execution of the pattern variation display, and is an example of a third effect that prompts continuous operation of the operation means in the first operation mode. it can.

Further, in this example of effect, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is full is the operation means in the second operation mode. It can be said that an example of the second effect that is more likely to be started when the operation means performs the second number of operations in the first operation mode than when the one operation is performed. It can also be said that this is an example of a second effect that is not started when the operation means performs only one operation in the second operation mode.

In this example of effect, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the effect button lamp 138 may be in the second state during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136. That is, the effect button lamp 138 may be in a state of not emitting light, or may be made to emit blue light.

FIG. 223 is a diagram showing a state in which long press auto continuous hits are performed in the effect by the continuous hit operation of the effect buttons. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 223 shows a state in which the reach effect is produced by the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 223(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. Note that, in FIG. 223(a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

Further, in FIG. 223(a), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of special figure 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special figure suspension lamp 218 are lit, and the variation display of special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variation icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 223(b), the symbol variable display based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1 is started. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, and then changes to the change icon h00 having the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 223(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 223(d), the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 is displayed. The character "repeatedly strike" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. In addition, a continuous stroke meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In this effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and the player starts the long-press operation of the effect button 136 after the display as shown in FIG. 223(d) is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 223(e) to 223(g), the continuous press operation is artificially performed by the long press automatic continuous hit function, and the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD increases. In this case, at the start of the long press operation, one operation due to the production button 136 being pressed is accepted, and thereafter, as described above, if the operation is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), Pseudo continuous tapping operation is started. It should be noted that the effect button lamp 138 remains lit in red during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether or not the effect button 136 is operated.

Then, when the operation acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing of FIG. 223(g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hit meter RD was not full and increased to 4/6. Further, at this time, since the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is in the off state. Then, as shown in FIG. 223(h), since the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is not full, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays that "sorry..." to that effect, because the production failed. Is done.

In the above-described production example, an example is shown in which a pseudo continuous stroke operation of the production button 136 by the long press automatic continuous stroke function is performed, and as a result, a display indicating that the production has failed is displayed. When the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is full after 4 seconds, it is possible to display a notice such as a cut-in image or to give a notice that the jackpot will be a big hit, assuming that the production is successful. That is, when the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time, it is assumed that the operating means is operated in a pseudo first operation mode a first number of times (for example, 20 times). It can be said that the production of can be started.

In this example of the effect, the effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is full is that the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode during the execution of the third effect. It is an example of the first effect that can be started when the third effect is performed and can be started even when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode during execution of the third effect. it can. In other words, in this effect example, the result of the operation (first effect) is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation (first effect) is also displayed when the button is pressed for a long time. It can be said to be displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect button 136 is operated a plurality of times (first operation) for the advance notice display of the cut-in image or the like that is successfully displayed in the continuous stroke operation effect, and the notification of the big hit. It is an effect that may be executed in response to being operated), and when a long press operation of the effect button 136 (operation in the second operation mode), the continuous hit operation effect is successfully displayed. It can be said that a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice for notifying a big hit may be started.

Further, in the present embodiment, a notice display such as a cut-in image that is successfully displayed in the continuous stroke operation effect, or a notice that a big hit is given may be started during the display of the symbol variation display. It can also be said that

FIG. 224 is a diagram showing a state in which long press automatic continuous hits are performed in the effect by the continuous hit operation of the effect buttons. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 224 shows that in the reach effect, the effect is produced by the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 224(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. Note that, in FIG. 224(a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

Further, in FIG. 224(a), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of special figure 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special figure suspension lamp 218 are lit, and the variation display of special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variation icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

In this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and the player continues to press the effect button 136 before the start of the symbol variation display.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 224(b), the variable display of symbols is started based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, and then changes to the change icon h00 having the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 224(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 224(d), the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 is displayed. The character "repeatedly strike" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. In addition, a continuous stroke meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Then, as shown in FIG. 224(e) to FIG. 224(g), the continuous press operation is artificially performed by the long press automatic continuous hit function, and the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD increases. In this example of performance, since the player has already started the long-pressing operation of the effect button 136, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is started when the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. It should be noted that the effect button lamp 138 remains lit in red during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether or not the effect button 136 is operated.

Then, when the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 (for example, 5 seconds) elapses at the timing of FIG. 224 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hit meter RD was not full and increased to 5/6. Further, at this time, since the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is in the off state. Then, as shown in FIG. 224(h), since the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is not full, the decorative pattern display device 208 indicates that the production has failed, and displays a "sorry..." to that effect. Is done.

In the above-described effect example, an example is shown in which a pseudo continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 by the long press automatic continuous hit function is performed, and as a result, a display indicating that the effect has failed is displayed. When the tank is full, it may be possible to display a notice such as a cut-in image or to give a notice that the jackpot will be a big hit, as if the production was successful. That is, when the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for the second time, the first effect can be started as if the operation means was operated pseudo a first number of times in the first operation mode. It can be said that it is configured.

In this example of the effect, the effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is full is that the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode during the execution of the third effect. It is an example of the first effect that can be started when the third effect is performed and can be started even when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode during execution of the third effect. it can.

FIG. 225 is a diagram for describing an example of an effect produced by continuous operation of effect buttons. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 225 shows a manner in which the reach effect is produced by continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 225(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative symbols, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. Note that, in FIG. 225(a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

Further, in FIG. 225(a), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of special figure 1 is four, the four suspension lamps of the first special figure suspension lamp 218 are lit, and the variation display of special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variation icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 225(b), the variable display of symbols is started based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, and then changes to the change icon h00 having the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 225(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 225(d), together with the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136, “ The character "repeatedly strike" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. In addition, a continuous stroke meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 225(e) to 225(h), when the consecutive hit operation is performed by the effect button 136, the gauge of the consecutive hit meter RD increases in accordance with the number of operations of the effect button 136. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off each time the effect button 136 is pressed, and when the pressing operation is released, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light again. Therefore, it is easy for the player to press the effect button 136. Sometimes it can be recognized. In addition, each time the effect button 136 is pressed, a different color (for example, blue) may be emitted. Then, when the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 (for example, 5 seconds) elapses at the timing of FIG. 225 (h), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes 0 seconds remaining. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hit meter RD was not full and increased to 3/6. Further, at this time, since the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is in the off state. Then, as shown in FIG. 225(i), since the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is not full, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays that "sorry..." to that effect because the production failed. Is done.

In the above-described production example, an example is shown in which a continuous stroke operation is performed by the production button 136, and as a result of the continuous stroke operation, the fact that the production has failed is displayed, but the gauge of the continuous stroke meter RD becomes full. In such a case, it may be possible to give a notice display such as a cut-in image or to give a notice that a big hit will be given, assuming that the production has been successful. It should be noted that whether or not it is possible to fill the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is determined based on the display result of the special figure. That is, when it is not possible to fill the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD, the gauge will not be filled no matter how many times the effect button 136 is hit.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled, and in this case, the effect button lamp 138 is made to blink only once when the effect button 136 is first pressed. Good.

FIG. 226 is a diagram showing a state in which a pending change notice is given during the effect by the continuous hit operation of the effect button. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 226 shows that in the reach production, the production is performed by continuously striking the production button 136 and the pending change notice is simultaneously given.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 226(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. Note that, in FIG. 226(a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

Further, in FIG. 226(a), since the number of the variable display holdings of the special figure 1 is four, the four holding lamps of the first special figure holding lamp 218 are lit, and the variable display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variation icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 226(b), the symbol variable display based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1 is started. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, and then changes to the change icon h00 having the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 226(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 226(d), together with the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136, “ The character "repeatedly strike" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. In addition, a continuous stroke meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and the player starts the long press operation of the effect button 136 after the display as shown in FIG. 226(d) is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 226(e) to 226(g), the continuous pressing operation is artificially performed by the long-press automatic continuous hitting function, and the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD increases. In this case, at the start of the long press operation, one operation due to the production button 136 being pressed is accepted, and thereafter, as described above, if the operation is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), Pseudo continuous tapping operation is started. It should be noted that the effect button lamp 138 remains lit in red during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether or not the effect button 136 is operated.

In addition, in this effect example, a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 during execution of the above-described continuous hit effect, and the number of suspensions of the variable display of the special figure 1 is increased to 4 as shown in FIG. 226(f). As shown in, the four holding lamps in the first special figure holding lamp 218 are turned on. Then, in the reserved display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth special figure 1 reserved display h14 is displayed in a default display mode corresponding to this. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. That is, the notice of pending change is started. However, in this effect example, the continuous hit effect that was being executed is prioritized, the operation of the effect button 136 accepts only the continuous hit operation related to the continuous hit effect, and the operation of the effect button 136 related to the pending change notice is at least the continuous hit effect It will not be accepted until is completed.

Then, when the operation acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing of FIG. 226 (h), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hit meter RD was not full and increased to 4/6. Further, at this time, since the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is in the off state. Then, as shown in FIG. 223(i), since the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is not full, the decorative pattern display device 208 indicates that the production has failed, and displays a "sorry..." to that effect. Is done.

In this effect example, after the continuous hit effect is completed in this way, the operation of the effect button 136 relating to the pending change notice can be accepted. At this time, if the long-press auto continuous hitting function is continuously enabled and the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, a pseudo change operation of the effect button 136 may start a pending change notice. Alternatively, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be disabled when the continuous hitting effect is finished, and the effect button 136 may be required to be pressed again. It should be noted that while the continuous hit effect is being executed, the operation of the effect button 136 relating to the pending change notice may be accepted, and the continuous hit effect and the pending change notice may be simultaneously executed. At this time, the operation of the effect button 136 relating to the notice of pending change may be accepted by the operation of the long-press automatic continuous hitting function, or the operation of pressing the effect button 136 once after the notice of pending change is started. The hold change notice may be configured to be executed by canceling the operation and pressing the production button 136 again.

In the above-described effect example, an example is shown in which a pseudo continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 by the long press automatic continuous hit function is performed, and as a result, a display indicating that the effect has failed is displayed. When the tank is full, it may be possible to display a notice such as a cut-in image or to give a notice that the jackpot will be a big hit, as if the production was successful.

Further, in this example of effect, for example, two effect buttons are provided, and in the continuous hit effect, operations of the first effect button and the second effect button can be accepted, and only the operation of the first effect button is held. It may be configured to be able to start a change notice. In this case, for example, when the long press auto continuous hitting function is enabled for the second effect button, the second effect button is long pressed to perform continuous hit effect while the first effect button is operated to change the hold. A notice can be started.

FIG. 227 is a diagram for describing an example of an effect by long-pressing the effect button. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 227 shows how the production is performed by long-pressing the production button 136 in the reach production.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of deviating decorative symbols, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. Note that, in FIG. 227(a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

Further, in FIG. 227(a), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of special figure 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special figure suspension lamp 218 are lit, and the variation display of special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variation icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 227(b), the symbol variable display based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1 is started. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, and then changes to the change icon h00 having the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 227(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 227(d), together with the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136, “ The text "Press and hold to save meter" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. Further, a long press meter NO is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 284. This long press meter NO is displayed such that the gauge increases in accordance with the cumulative time that the effect button 136 is pressed, and when the gauge is full, the notice effect is executed assuming that the effect has been successful. It is configured to be.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 227(e) to 227(g), when the long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed, the gauge of the long press meter NO increases according to the pressing time of the effect button 136. .. It should be noted that the effect button lamp 138 remains lit in red during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether or not the effect button 136 is operated.

Then, when the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 (for example, 5 seconds) elapses at the timing of FIG. 227 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the long press meter NO was not full and increased to 5/6. Further, at this time, since the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is in the off state. Then, as shown in FIG. 227(h), since the gauge of the long press meter NO did not become full, the decorative pattern display device 208 determined that the presentation failed, and "sorry..." of that effect. The display is done.

In the above-described production example, an example is shown in which a long press operation is performed by the production button 136, and as a result of the long press operation, it is displayed that the production has failed, but the gauge of the long press meter NO is full. In the case of a ton, it may be possible to perform a notice display such as a cut-in image or to notify that a big hit will be given, assuming that the production has been successful. Whether or not the gauge of the long press meter NO can be filled up is determined based on the display result of the special figure. That is, if it is not possible to fill the gauge of the long press meter NO, the gauge will not be filled up no matter how long the production button 136 is held down.

Further, in the above-described example of the effect, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In this case, for example, when the effect button 136 is long-pressed during the long-press effect, the long-press automatic continuous hit function may be used to perform a pseudo-hit operation.

FIG. 228 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect by long-pressing the effect button. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 228 shows that in the reach effect, the effect is produced by long-pressing the effect button 136.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 228(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. Note that, in FIG. 228(a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

Further, in FIG. 228(a), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of special figure 1 is four, the four suspension lamps in the first special figure suspension lamp 218 are lit, and the variation display of special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variation icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 228( a ), the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the symbol variation display.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 228(b), the variable display of symbols is started based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, and then changes to the change icon h00 having the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 228(c), in the decorative pattern display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 228(d), together with the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136, " The text "Press and hold to save meter" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. Further, a long press meter NO is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 284. In this effect example, since the effect button 136 has been continuously pressed before the start of the long press effect, the operation of the effect button 136 is not accepted and the gauge of the long press meter NO does not increase. In order for the operation to be accepted, it is necessary to release the depression of the effect button 136 once and then operate (long-press) the effect button 136 again.

Then, as shown in FIG. 228(e), FIG. 228(f), etc., after the effect button 136 is continuously pressed during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136, the timing of FIG. When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes 0 seconds. At this time, the long press meter NO is shown to be zero. Further, at this time, since the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is in the off state. Then, as shown in FIG. 228(h), since the gauge of the long press meter NO did not become full, the decorative pattern display device 208 determined that the presentation failed, and "sorry..." to that effect. Display is performed.

In the effect example described above, when the long-press effect is started while the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the operation of the effect button 136 is not effectively handled. Even when the long press effect is started while the button is continuously pressed, the operation of the effect button 136 may be effectively handled.

Further, in the above-described example of the effect, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In this case, for example, when the effect button 136 is long-pressed during the long-press effect, the long-press automatic continuous hit function may be used to perform a pseudo-hit operation.

FIG. 229 is a diagram showing a state in which a continuous hit operation is performed in the effect by long-pressing the effect button. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 229 shows how the production is performed by the long-press operation of the production button 136 in the reach production.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 229(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. Note that, in FIG. 229(a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

Further, in FIG. 229(a), since the number of variable displays held in the special figure 1 is four, the four holding lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the variable display of the special figure 2 is changed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variation icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 229(b), the symbol variable display based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1 is started. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, and then changes to the change icon h00 having the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 229(c), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the effect button image BT together with the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 229(d). The text "Press and hold to save meter" is displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. Further, a long press meter NO is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 284.

In this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 229(e) to 229(g), the player performs a continuous hit operation instead of a long press operation with the effect button 136. Even when such a continuous hit operation is performed, the gauge of the long press meter NO increases according to the time when the effect button 136 is actually pressed. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 227, since the time during which the effect button 136 is actually pressed is shorter than when the long press operation is performed, the increase amount of the gauge of the long press meter NO is small. It should be noted that the effect button lamp 138 remains lit in red during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether or not the effect button 136 is operated.

Then, when the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 (for example, 5 seconds) elapses at the timing of FIG. 229 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the long press meter NO was not full and increased to 3/6. Further, at this time, since the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is in the off state. Then, as shown in FIG. 229(h), the gauge of the long press meter NO did not become full, so that the decorative pattern display device 208 determined that the presentation failed, and "sorry..." of that effect. Display is performed.

In the example of the above-described effect, the continuous pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed in the long press effect, and as a result, the effect is displayed and the display to that effect is displayed. However, the gauge of the long press meter NO becomes full. In such a case, it may be possible to give a notice display such as a cut-in image or to give a notice that a big hit will be given, assuming that the production has been successful.

FIG. 230 is a diagram showing an example of a concrete effect example in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of numbers in parentheses. 230(a-1) to FIG. 230(a-4) show a state in which the conversation notice production is executed by operating the production button 136, and FIG. 230(b-1) to FIG. In b-2), a pending change notice is displayed in which the display mode of the pending icon is changed by operating the effect button 136. Here, the conversation notice effect is, for example, a notice effect according to the conversation content of the character.

As shown in FIG. 230(a-1), in the first special symbol display device 212, the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol display area. The variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in each of 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The decorative design is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative design display device 208. Further, in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is displayed. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1, in response to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212, the variable display is performed as described above. Further, below the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1, the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 is displayed, and it is confirmed and displayed as a display result of a deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special symbol display device 214. There is. In addition, a variation icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the variation icon display area 284 displays a variation icon h00 in the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. ..

In FIG. 230(a-1), since the number of holdings of the variable display of the special figure 1 is three, the three holding lamps in the first special figure holding lamp 218 are lit, and the change display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the reserved display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 1 reserved display h11 among the first special figure 1 reserved display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 reserved display h11 corresponding to this. , The second special figure 1 hold display h12 and the third special figure 1 hold display h13 are displayed in the default display mode, and the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is displayed in a non-hold mode. Has been done.

Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 230(a-1), an effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 is displayed in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, since the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light. Note that the remaining time meter is not displayed in this production example.

After that, when the production button 136 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 230(a-2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, along with the character image CH of Princess Chibi, “A reach is expected for development. A balloon FD1 including the characters "Yo" is displayed. That is, the first stage conversation announcement is executed. At this time, a confirmation sound for notifying that the effect button 136 has been pressed is output from the speaker 120. Note that the confirmation sound may be output at the same time when the character image CH of Princess Chibi and the balloon FD1 are displayed (the display timing and the voice output timing may differ depending on the display control, the voice output control, the timing of signal transmission/reception, etc.). It may be mixed up before and after), and may be output at a timing before the display of the character image CH of Princess Chibi and the balloon FD1, or at a timing later than the display of the character image CH of Princess Chibi and the balloon FD1. May be done. Further, the confirmation sound may not be output. Further, in this example of performance, the character image CH of Princess Chibi and the balloon FD1 are displayed at the same time, but the balloon FD1 may be displayed after the character image CH of Princess Chibi is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 230(a-3), the effect button image BT is continuously displayed even after the character image CH of Princess Chibi and the balloon FD1 are displayed. Thereby, the player may be able to recognize that the effect is further produced by operating the effect button 136.

When the production button 136 is further pressed once, as shown in FIG. 230(a-4), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the grandfather's character image GY together with "Grandpa's chance. A balloon FD2 including the character "" is displayed. That is, the second stage conversation announcement is executed. At this time, a confirmation sound for notifying that the effect button 136 has been pressed is output from the speaker 120. The confirmation sound may be output at the same time as the display of the grandpa character image GY and the balloon FD2, or may be output at a timing before the display of the grandpa character image GY and the balloon FD2. It may be output at a timing later than the display of the character image GY and the balloon FD2. In addition, in this effect example, the grandpa character image GY and the balloon FD2 are displayed at the same time, but the balloon FD2 may be displayed after the grandpa character image GY is displayed. Then, when the second-stage conversation announcement is executed, the effect button image BT is erased.

Needless to say, the contents of the character images and balloons appearing in the conversation notice presentation are not limited to those described above, and various types can be adopted. Further, the number of times of the conversation notice executed in one conversation notice production is not limited to two, and may be executed only once or may be performed three times or more.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single operation) by the effect button 136, but for example, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) or more by the effect button 136 is displayed. The result of the operation may be displayed by performing a long press operation. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hit operation with the effect button 136. In addition, in the above-described example of the effect, the effect of the effect button 136 by the single-shot operation is performed a plurality of times, but two or more of the effects are performed by the single-shot operation, the long-press operation, and the continuous-stroke operation. You may comprise by the above combination. In addition, in the above-described effect example, the long-press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled, and when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the effect associated with the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is simulated. It may be sequentially performed in accordance with the continuous hitting operation. That is, the conversation announcement may be executed one after another at intervals of pseudo repeated hitting operations. Further, the confirmation sound described above may not be output when the conversation advance notice is executed by the long press automatic continuous hitting function. Further, the gap between the timing at which the character image and the balloon are displayed in the conversation notice presentation and the timing at which the confirmation sound is output may be increased.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the character image and the balloon are added and displayed every time the conversation notice is executed, but the character image and the balloon are not added, and only the characters included in the balloon are displayed. May be changed. For example, by the first operation of the effect button 136, the character image CH of Princess Chibi and the balloon FD1 including the characters "A reach reach expectations" are displayed, and then the second operation of the effect button 136. Then, the character displayed in the balloon FD1 may be changed to "I'll have a better chance when the grandfather appears".

In this example of performance, in the case where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the second stage conversation announcement is made when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode. It can be said to be an example of the first effect that can be started and can be started even when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is long pressed.

Further, in this example of performance, in the case where the long-press auto continuous hitting function is disabled, the second-stage conversation announcement is more than the case where one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. Also, it can be said that it is an example of the second effect that is more likely to be started when the operation means performs the second number of operations in the first operation mode. It can also be said that this is an example of a second effect that is not started when the operation means performs only one operation in the second operation mode.

Further, in this example of performance, in the case where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the conversation notice executed as a result of the repeated hitting operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation mode by the operation means. It can be said to be an example of the first effect that can be started when the operation is performed the number of times and can be started even when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode.

On the other hand, in FIG. 230(b-1), the state in which the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is being displayed is shown. At this time, since the number of suspensions of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four suspension lamps of the first special diagram suspension lamp 218 are lit, and the number of suspensions of the variable display of the special chart 2 is 0. Therefore, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, the first special figure 1 reserved display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 reserved display h14 are all displayed in the default display mode. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap with the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. Further, in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is displayed. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1, in response to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212, the variable display is performed as described above. Further, below the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1, the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 is displayed, and it is confirmed and displayed as a display result of a deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special symbol display device 214. There is. In addition, a variation icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the variation icon display area 284 displays a variation icon h00 in the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. .. In this example of effect, the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state, but the effect button lamp 138 is off. Note that the effect button lamp 138 may be lighted in red, for example.

Then, as shown in FIG. 230(b-1), when the effect button 136 is pressed once, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the fourth image at the timing shown in FIG. 230(b-2). The special display 1 hold display h14 changes to a hold icon in a notice display mode that imitates the face of the lord. At this time, the effect button image BTH may be kept displayed.

FIG. 231 is a diagram showing an example of a concrete effect example in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of numbers in parentheses. 231(a-1) to FIG. 231(a-4), and FIG. 231(b-1) to (b-4) show the effect of operating the effect button 136 during the variable display of the decorative symbol. It shows that a plurality of events will be held at the same time. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 231(a-1), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. Note that, in FIG. 231(a-1), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

Further, in FIG. 231(a-1), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, four reserve lamps in the first special figure reserve lamp 218 are lit, and the variation of the special figure 2 is changed. Since the number of displayed holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variation icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the variable display of symbols.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 231(a-2), the variable display of symbols is started based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, and then changes to the change icon h00 having the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 231(a-3), on the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect button image BT related to the first effect button effect and an effect button image BTH related to the second effect button effect are displayed. Thus, it is shown that the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect are executed at the same time. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. Here, the first effect button effect is, for example, an effect in which a conversation notice effect is executed, and the second effect button effect is, for example, an effect in which a hold change notice is executed. Further, in this example of effect, since the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect, the operation of the effect button 136 is not treated as effective, and As shown in 231(a-4), the result of the operation is not produced for any of the production button productions. Note that the first effect button effect may be started at a timing before the start of the second effect button effect, or may be started at the same timing as the start of the second effect button effect. However, it may be started at a timing later than the start of the second effect button effect.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 231(b-1), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. Note that, in FIG. 231(b-1), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

Further, in FIG. 231(b-1), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, four reserve lamps in the first special figure reserve lamp 218 are lit, and the variation of the special figure 2 is changed. Since the number of displayed reservations is 0, all the reservation lamps in the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variation icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the variable display of symbols. Further, in this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 231(b-2), the variable display of symbols is started based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, and then changes to the change icon h00 having the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 231(b-3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect button image BT related to the first effect button effect and an effect button image BTH related to the second effect button effect. Thus, it is shown that the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect are executed at the same time. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. In this example of the effect, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed from before the start of the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect, but since the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state. As shown in FIG. 231(b-4), of the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect, only the result of the operation of the effect button 136 related to the first effect button effect is displayed. Of the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect, only the result of the operation of the effect button 136 related to the second effect button effect may be displayed. As for which one of the effect button effects, the result of the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed, for example, the effect which is started earlier may be performed, or the effect to be preferentially executed is determined in advance. May be.

FIG. 232 is a diagram showing an example of a concrete effect example in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 232 shows a state where another effect of operating the effect button 136 is started during execution of an effect of operating the effect button 136.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 232(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. Note that, in FIG. 232(a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

Further, in FIG. 232(a), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of special figure 1 is four, the four suspension lamps of the first special figure suspension lamp 218 are lit, and the variation display of special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variation icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the reserved display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variation icon display area 284. In this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the variable display of symbols. Further, in this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 232(b), the symbol variable display based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1 is started. That is, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol is started. The variable display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 moves to the change icon display area 284, and then changes to the change icon h00 having the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is displayed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon in a non-holding mode is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 232(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol moves to the upper left corner of the display screen, and the effect button image BT is displayed in the center of the display screen. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state.

Then, when the long press operation with the effect button 136 is started, it is assumed that there is one press operation with the effect button 136, and as shown in FIG. 232(d), as the first effect button effect, the decorative pattern display is performed. On the device 208, a balloon FD1 including the characters "A reach reach expectations for development" is displayed along with the character image CH of Princess Chibi. That is, the first stage conversation announcement is executed.

After that, when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 232(e), the number of variable displays held in the special figure 1 is increased to 4, and the first special figure holding lamp 218 Four holding lamps light up. Then, in the reserved display area at the bottom of the decorative symbol display device 208, correspondingly, the fourth special figure 1 reserved display h14 is displayed as a reserved icon in the default display mode. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. The display of the effect button image BTH is an example of the second effect button effect. However, in this effect example, the second effect button effect is an effect which is started after the first effect button effect, and therefore, when the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, this effect is effected. The result of the operation of the effect button 136 related to the button image BTH is not displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a balloon FD2 including a character "Grandpa's chance is up!" is displayed together with the grandpa character image GY at the timing of FIG. 232(f) by the long press automatic continuous hitting function. .. That is, the second stage conversation announcement is executed. Then, when the second-stage conversation announcement is executed, the effect button image BT is erased. In this example of performance, only the conversation notice effect is executed and the hold change notice is not executed. However, the long press auto continuous hit function allows the hold change notice to be continuously executed after the conversation notice effect is finished. Alternatively, the hold change notice may be executed by releasing the pressing operation of the effect button 136 once after the conversation notice effect is finished and then pressing it again.

FIG. 233 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of operating the effect button in accordance with the rhythm. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 233 shows that in the super reach, the effect of operating the effect button 136 in accordance with the rhythm is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 233(a), in the first special symbol display device 212, the variable display of the special symbol 1 is executed, and in response to this, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol. Is being done. Note that, as shown in FIG. 233(a), the decorative design shown in the left design display region 208a and the decorative design shown in the right design display region 208c are stopped and displayed as the same "7" design, In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbols is still being performed, and the reach state is reached. FIG. 233(a) shows a state in which the state has reached the reach state and then shifted to the super reach. On the decorative pattern display device 208, “Princess dance SP reach” indicating the type of super reach that has been transferred and “Press the flowing button at a proper timing” for explaining the effect contents are displayed. In the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, "mode 3" indicating the difficulty level of this effect is displayed. There are a plurality of difficulty levels, and for example, the difficulty level is changed according to the expectation level for a big hit.

In addition, in FIG. 233(a), since the number of variable displays held in the special figure 1 is two, the two holding lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the variable display of the special figure 2 is changed. Since the number of holdings is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. It should be noted that in this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state.

After the "princess dance SP reach" is started, as shown in FIG. 233(b), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the princess character image HM dances to the music on the left side of the display screen. The animation is displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, on the right side of the display screen, the timing image TM including the characters “CHANCE” is displayed moving from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen, and on the moving path of the timing image TM. A hit image HT is displayed on. The timing image TM is moved and displayed at a timing overlapping with the hit image HT in accordance with the music.

As shown in FIG. 233(c), when the player presses the effect button 136 at a position where the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT, the timing image TM changes to the effect button as shown in FIG. 233(d). The result display RS changes according to the timing of the operation of 136. The result display RS is displayed, for example, in a mode including the character display of "PERFECT" when the pressing operation of the effect button 136 is received at the timing when the timing image TM completely matches the hit image HT, and is slightly shifted. When the press operation of the effect button 136 is accepted at the timing, the display is made in a mode including the character display of "GOOD", and when the press operation of the effect button 136 is accepted at the timing greatly shifted, "BAD" The mode including the character display of is displayed. In this effect example, points are added or subtracted according to the timing of the operation of pressing the effect button 136, and the notice effect corresponding to the final point is executed. In addition, when the operation by the effect button 136 is not performed at the timing when the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT, the result display RS is not changed, and the screen is scrolled out downward.

It should be noted that, in this effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In this case, irrespective of the timing at which the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT, the pseudo-effect button 136 may be repeatedly hit at regular intervals, except for the timing image TM overlapping the hit image HT. When the pseudo effect button 136 is operated at the timing of, the points may be subtracted to reduce the possibility that the notice effect is executed. This provides an incentive for the player to operate the effect button 136 at his/her own timing without relying on the long-press automatic continuous hitting function, thereby improving the effect. Further, by the long-press auto continuous hitting function, only when the timing image TM completely coincides with the hit image HT (timing to be "PERFECT") or slightly shifted timing (timing to be "GOOD"), The effect button 136 may be operated in a pseudo manner.

FIG. 234 is a diagram showing an example of a concrete effect example in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of numbers in parentheses. 234(a-1) to (a-4) show that the auto button function is released, and FIG. 234(b) shows that the auto button function is set. 234(c) shows how to notify the preferable timing of the operation of the effect button 136, and in FIG. 234(d-1) to FIG. 234(d-3), the auto button function is valid. The state that the back button effect is being executed is shown in the state of being. Here, the back button effect does not notify that the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is valid, but is performed when the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is operated during the period. It refers to a specific performance. The player may be able to know the existence of such a back button effect on a strategy magazine or on the Internet. The back button effect is often used mainly for the notice effect, but is not limited to this. Here, the mode of notifying that the operation is valid is, for example, a light emission mode indicating that the effect button lamp 138 emits light or the light emission mode of the effect button lamp 138 is effective. One or a combination of two or more of outputting a predetermined sound (for example, a sound "press button") and displaying a predetermined image (for example, a character display "press") Say that. On the other hand, the mode that does not notify that the operation is valid is, for example, light emission of the effect button lamp 138 or a light emission mode indicating that the light emission mode of the effect button lamp 138 is effective. That is, at least one or all of outputting a sound and displaying a predetermined image is not performed. In addition, the aspect of not notifying that the operation is valid may be that at least a predetermined image is not displayed. Further, in the case where the N notification units notify that the operation is valid, the mode in which the N notification units do not notify may be the mode in which the operation is not notified. Good.

As shown in FIG. 234(a-1), the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed by the display result of the detachment, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also the first special figure display device 212. Corresponding to the display result of (3), the display result (for example, a white circle) of the deviation is confirmed and displayed. In addition, since the number of holdings of the variable display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, both the holding lamp in the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the holding lamp in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. There is. That is, FIG. 234(a-1) shows the standby state in which the symbol variation is not performed. The effect button lamp 138 is off. That is, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, which indicates that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state. In this effect example, for example, in addition to performing the auto button setting as described above with reference to FIG. 212, in the standby state, the left button 137c and the right button 137d are simultaneously pressed to activate the auto button function. Can be set to state.

When the auto button function is enabled, the effect button lamp 138 emits green light, as shown in FIG. 234(a-2).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 234(a-3), for example, when a button other than the effect button 136 (for example, the left button 137c) is operated while the auto button function is in the valid state, As shown at 234(a-4), the auto button function is canceled. That is, the auto button function is disabled. Note that the auto button function may be canceled by operating the effect button 136 while the auto button function is enabled, or the left button 137c and the right button 137d are simultaneously pressed. The automatic button function may be released by doing so. Further, the auto button function may be canceled even when "no assistance" or "long press auto continuous hit" is set as described above with reference to FIG.

Further, as shown in FIG. 234(b), when the auto button function is enabled, for example, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays "auto button setting in progress" to let the player automatically You may make it easy to recognize that the button function is valid.

The operation when the auto button function is in the valid state is as described above. For example, as shown in FIG. 234(c), when the effect related to the effect button 136 is being executed, the auto button is pressed. Compared to the case where the effect button 136 is pseudo-operated by the function, an advantageous timing for operating the effect button 136 is notified, and when the effect button 136e is operated at this timing, the automatic button function is used. It may be configured such that an effect different from the effect that is pseudo-operated by operating the effect button 136 is executed.

In the present embodiment, when the effect is performed by pressing the effect button 136, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. However, for example, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. Without performing, the back production may be executed when the production button 136 is operated.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 234(d-1), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also fixedly displayed by the display result of the outlier. In addition, in FIG. 234(d-1), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of special figure 1 is 1, one of the first special figure reserve lamps 218 is lit, and the variation of special figure 2 is changed. Since the number of displayed reservations is 0, all the reservation lamps in the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are turned off. Note that, in FIG. 234(d-1), the effect button lamp 138 emits green light, indicating that the auto button function is enabled.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 234(d-2), the symbol variable display based on the suspension of the first variable display of Toku-zu 1 is started, and correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, The variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. At this time, the decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, in this effect example, the display for prompting the operation of the effect button 136 is not displayed, but when the effect button 136 is operated, the back button effect is ready to be executed. The back button effect can be executed on the condition that, for example, whether or not to execute the back button effect is determined based on the result of the variable display of the symbols, and the back button effect is determined to be executed.

After that, at a predetermined activation timing of the auto button function, the auto button function causes a single-shot operation by the effect button 136 to be performed in a pseudo manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 234(d-3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the cut-in image CI6 as the back button effect.

In the above-described production example, it is indicated that the display prompting the user to operate the production button 136 is displayed even when the auto button function is enabled.

In the example of the above-described effect, the back button effect is executed by a single-shot operation by the effect button 136. However, for example, the back button effect is performed by performing a long press operation by the effect button 136. Good. Further, for example, the back button effect may be executed by performing a continuous hit operation with the effect button 136. In addition, in the above-described effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled. Further, when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 is started, the operation of the effect button 136 may not be accepted in the effect, and In some cases, it may be possible to see an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 136. On the other hand, when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 is started, the operation of the effect button 136 may be accepted in the effect, in which case In some cases, it may not be possible to see the effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 136.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the effect content (display of the cut-in image CI6) executed when the operation of the effect button 136 is simulated by the auto button function is a single operation performed by the effect button 136. The effect content may be the same as the effect content executed when the effect button 136 is operated, or the effect content executed when the operation of the effect button 136 is simulated by the auto button function is performed by the effect button 136. There may be a case where it is different from the content of the effect executed in the case of being broken, or it may be different.

FIG. 235 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect example using two effect buttons. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of numbers in parentheses. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 235, a first effect button 136A and a second effect button 136B are provided as effect buttons, and effects related to the effect buttons are executed according to these operations. It is configured. Here, FIGS. 235(a-1) to (a-7), FIG. 235(b-1) to (b-4), and FIGS. 235(c-1) to (c-6). The figure shows a state where the effect is performed by a single operation of the first effect button 136A or the second effect button 136B during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In this example of effect, the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B have different button shapes, but they may have the same shape.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 235(a-1), the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special symbol display device 121 is in the process of changing symbols, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT.

Further, in FIG. 235(a-1), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 0, the holding lamp in the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 All the hold lamps in are off. In this example of effect, the decorative pattern display device 208 does not perform the hold display, but the hold display may be performed as described above. The effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B are turned off.

Then, for example, when 1 second has passed, as shown in FIG. 235(a-2), the remaining time meter MT indicates that 1 second has passed, that is, the gauge has decreased by 1 second. It is displayed in a manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 235(a-3), a single pressing operation with the first effect button 136A is performed, but as shown in FIG. 235(a-4), the operation result is not displayed. The effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT are continuously displayed. That is, in this example of the effect, when the first effect button 136A is operated, the effect related to the effect button is not executed. Note that, in FIG. 235(a-3), since the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B are turned off, the result of the operation is displayed by any effect button. In some cases, it is possible to give the player an expectation of whether or not to play, and to improve the effect of production.

After that, as shown in FIG. 235(a-5), the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B emits red light. Thereby, the player may be able to recognize that the operation result is displayed by operating the second effect button 136B.

Then, as shown in FIG. 235(a-6), when one pressing operation is performed by the second effect button 136B, as shown in FIG. 235(a-7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, The cut-in image CI7 is displayed.

In the effect example described above, the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single operation) by the second effect button 136B. However, for example, a long press operation by the second effect button 136B is performed. By doing so, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the second effect button 136B.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled for one or both of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B. In the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, for example, the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235(a-1) is executed. If it continues to be performed, after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235(a-1) is started, the second press button 136B is pseudo-operated by the long-press auto continuous hitting function to operate. The result of may be displayed. That is, the result of the operation may be displayed even when the second effect button 136B is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation may be displayed when the second effect button 136B is long-pressed. In addition, for example, when the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235(a-1) is executed, in the case of FIG. Even if the effect related to the effect button shown in -1) is started, the pseudo second effect button 136B operation by the long-press auto continuous hitting function may not be accepted. In this case, the effect button After the effect related to is started, the pressing of the second effect button 136B may be canceled once, and the second effect button 136B may be pressed again.

In addition, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235(a-1) is executed. In FIG. 235(a-1), after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235(a-1) is started, the second press button 136B is pseudo-operated by the long press automatic continuous hitting function to display the operation result. You may do it. In addition, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235(a-1) is executed. In this case, even if the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235(a-1) is started, the operations of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B may not be accepted. In this case In addition, after the effect related to the effect button is started, once the pressing of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B is released, and the second effect button 136B needs to be pressed again. Good.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235(b-1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special symbol display device 212 is in the process of changing symbols, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT.

Further, in FIG. 235(b-1), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, the holding lamp in the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 All the hold lamps in are off. In this example of effect, the decorative pattern display device 208 does not perform the hold display, but the hold display may be performed as described above. In this example of effect, as shown in FIG. 235(b-2), the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A emits red light, and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B is turned off. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 235(b-3), when one pressing operation is performed by the second effect button 136B in which the effect button lamp does not emit light, as shown in FIG. 235(b-4). On the decorative symbol display device 208, the cut-in image CI7 is displayed. In this way, in this example of performance, by turning off the effect button lamp of the effect button that will display the result of the operation, and by causing the effect button lamp of the effect button whose result is not displayed even if the operation is performed, to emit light. In some cases, it is possible to make the player have an unexpected effect of the effect and improve the effect of the effect.

In the effect example described above, the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single operation) by the second effect button 136B. However, for example, a long press operation by the second effect button 136B is performed. By doing so, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the second effect button 136B.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled for one or both of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B. In the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, for example, the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235(b-1) is executed. If it continues to be performed, after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235(b-1) is started, the second press button 136B is artificially operated by the long-press automatic continuous hitting function to operate. The result of may be displayed. That is, the result of the operation may be displayed even when the second effect button 136B is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation may be displayed when the second effect button 136B is long-pressed. In addition, for example, when the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235(b-1) is executed, when the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed, Even if the effect related to the effect button shown in -1) is started, the pseudo second effect button 136B operation by the long-press auto continuous hitting function may not be accepted. In this case, the effect button After the effect related to is started, the pressing of the second effect button 136B may be canceled once, and the second effect button 136B may be pressed again.

In addition, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235(b-1) is executed. In FIG. 235(b-1), after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235(b-1) is started, the second press button 136B is pseudo-operated by the long press automatic continuous hitting function to display the operation result. You may do it. In addition, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235(b-1) is executed. In this case, even if the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235(b-1) is started, the operation of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B may not be accepted. In this case In addition, after the effect related to the effect button is started, once the pressing of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B is released, and the second effect button 136B needs to be pressed again. Good.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 235(c-1), the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special symbol display device 212 is in the process of changing symbols, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT.

Further, in FIG. 235(c-1), since the number of suspensions of the variable display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, the holding lamp in the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 All the hold lamps in are off. In this example of effect, the decorative pattern display device 208 does not perform the hold display, but the hold display may be performed as described above. The effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B are turned off.

Then, for example, when 1 second has passed, as shown in FIG. 235(c-2), the remaining time meter MT indicates that 1 second has passed, that is, the gauge has decreased by 1 second. It is displayed in a manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 235(c-3), a single pressing operation by the first effect button 136A is performed, but as shown in FIG. 235(a-4), the operation result is not displayed. The effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT are continuously displayed. That is, in this example of the effect, when the first effect button 136A is operated, the effect related to the effect button is not executed. Note that, in FIG. 235(c-3), since the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B are turned off, the result of the operation is displayed by any effect button. In some cases, it is possible to give the player an expectation of whether or not to play, and to improve the effect of production.

As shown in FIG. 235 (c-5), in this example of effect, after that, both effect button lamps of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B remain off.

Then, as shown in FIG. 235(c-5), when a single pressing operation by the second effect button 136B is performed, as shown in FIG. 235(c-6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, The cut-in image CI7 is displayed.

In the effect example described above, the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single operation) by the second effect button 136B. However, for example, a long press operation by the second effect button 136B is performed. By doing so, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the second effect button 136B.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled for one or both of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B. In the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, for example, the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235(c-1) is executed. If it continues to be performed, after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235(c-1) is started, the second press button 136B is pseudo-operated by the long-press auto continuous hitting function to operate. The result of may be displayed. That is, the result of the operation may be displayed even when the second effect button 136B is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation may be displayed when the second effect button 136B is long-pressed. In addition, for example, when the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235(c-1) is executed, in the case of FIG. Even if the effect related to the effect button shown in -1) is started, the pseudo second effect button 136B operation by the long-press auto continuous hitting function may not be accepted. In this case, the effect button After the effect related to is started, the pressing of the second effect button 136B may be canceled once, and the second effect button 136B may be pressed again.

In addition, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235(c-1) is executed. In FIG. 235(c-1), after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235(c-1) is started, the second press button 136B is pseudo-operated by the long-press automatic continuous hitting function to display the operation result. You may do it. In addition, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235(c-1) is executed. In this case, even if the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235(c-1) is started, the operations of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B may not be accepted. In this case In addition, after the effect related to the effect button is started, once the pressing of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B is released, and the second effect button 136B needs to be pressed again. Good.

FIG. 236 is a diagram illustrating an example of a character selection effect. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 236 shows, for example, how the character selection effect is performed during the big hit game. The character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears after the jackpot game is over.

As shown in FIG. 236(a), when the character selection effect is started, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the lord's character image Y is displayed brightly in the center of the display screen, and the princess character image H is displayed on the display screen. It is displayed slightly dark on the right side, and the old character image G is displayed slightly dark on the left side of the display screen. The character image Y of the lord is arranged in front of the character image H of the princess and the character image G of the grandfather, and it is notified that the character image Y of the lord is in a selectable state. For example, when the production image 136 is operated when the lord's character image Y is selectable, the character appearing after the jackpot game is determined to be the lord's character, and the princess character image H is selected. When the effect button 136 is operated in a possible state, the character appearing after the jackpot game is determined to be the princess character, and when the grandfather character image G is in a selectable state, When the effect button 136 is operated, the character that appears after the jackpot game is finished is determined as the grandfather character. Further, below these character images, icons of a left button 137c and a right button 137d are arranged side by side, and a balloon including a character display "Push button to select character" is displayed. The effect button lamp 138 is off. That is, the effect button lamp 138 is in the second state.

Then, when the right button 137d is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 236(b), as shown in FIG. 236(c), the character image Y of the lord, the character image H of the princess, and the grandfather The display in which the character image G rotates counterclockwise so as to draw a circle is started. At this time, the lord's character image Y is displayed slightly dark, the grandfather character image G is displayed brightly, and it is notified that the grandfather character image G is selectable. After that, the rotation display of each character image is performed as shown in FIGS. 236(c) to (f), and as shown in FIG. 236(f), the old character image G is displayed as the decorative pattern display device 208. When it reaches the center of the display screen of, the rotation display ends. The state in which the princess character image H can be selected can be realized by further performing one pressing operation with the right button 137d in the state shown in FIG. 236(f). That is, in this production example, the princess character image H is displayed in the first operation mode more than when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. Thus, it can be said that the case where the second number of operations are performed by the operation means is an example of the first image that is easier to select. It can also be said that the princess character image H is an image that is not selected by only one operation performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. When the left button 137c is pressed once, the character image Y of the lord, the character image H of the princess, and the character image G of the grandfather rotate in a clockwise direction so as to draw a circle.

In this example of performance, when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is operated during the rotation display of each character image, the position where each character image is displayed at the time of the operation remains unchanged and only the character image is displayed. It is possible to perform a character selection cancel display in which the characters are replaced. The character selection cancel display may not be performed. Further, when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is operated during the rotation display of each character image, the animation of the rotation display is omitted, and the character image in the selectable state is displayed at the position in front of the display screen. 236(d) to 236(e) when the right button 137d is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 236(c). The rotation display animation shown in) may be omitted and displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 236(f).

In this effect example, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the character selection effect is the first image in which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said as an example of the selection display.

In addition, in this example of effect, the effect by the princess character appearing after the jackpot game is said to be an example of the fourth effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display. it can.

In addition, in this example of performance, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, and even if the long-press operation is performed, only one character image that is in the selectable state shifts. It is said that the operation means is configured to perform one operation even when the operation means is maintained for a first time or longer during the execution of. be able to.

FIG. 237 is a diagram illustrating an example of a character selection effect. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 237 shows, for example, how the character selection effect is performed during the big hit game. The character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears after the jackpot game is over.

As shown in FIG. 237(a), when the character selection effect is started, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the lord's character image Y is brightly displayed in the center of the display screen, and the princess character image H is displayed on the display screen. It is displayed slightly dark on the right side, and the old character image G is displayed slightly dark on the left side of the display screen. The character image Y of the lord is arranged in front of the character image H of the princess and the character image G of the grandfather, and it is notified that the character image Y of the lord is in a selectable state. Further, below these character images, icons of a left button 137c and a right button 137d are arranged side by side, and a balloon including a character display "Push button to select character" is displayed. The effect button lamp 138 is off. In this effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and the player continues to press the right button 137d before the start of the character selection effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 237(b), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display in which the lord's character image Y, the princess character image H, and the grandfather's character image G rotate counterclockwise so as to draw a circle. Be started. At this time, the lord's character image Y is displayed slightly dark, the grandfather character image G is displayed brightly, and the fact that the grandfather character image G is selectable is notified.

Then, in this example of production, since the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the continuous pressing operation of the right button 137d is simulated by the long press automatic continuous pressing function. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 237(b) to 237(e), the above-described character selection cancel display is performed each time the pseudo right button 137d is operated (for example, every 200 ms). That is, for example, when the character selection cancel display is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 237(b), while maintaining the respective display positions of the character image Y of the lord, the character image H of the princess, and the character image G of the grandfather. As shown in FIG. 237(c), the grandfather character image G is displayed at the position where the lord's character image Y was displayed, and the lord's character image Y is displayed at the position where the princess character image H was displayed. The princess character image H is displayed at the position where the old character image G was displayed. Then, the character image in the selectable state is changed from the old character image G to the princess character image H, and the princess character image H is displayed brightly. That is, in this effect example, the princess character image H is selected even when the right button 137d is repeatedly hit, and the princess character image H is selected when the right button 137d is long-pressed.

In this example of effect, even if the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the start of the character selection effect, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is performed. It is possible not to perform the pseudo continuous hitting operation by, and when performing the pseudo continuous hitting operation by the long press auto continuous hitting function, after the character selection effect is started, the left button 137c or the right button 137d is pressed. It may be necessary to push them again. In addition, in the character selection effect, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be limited. As described above, in the present embodiment, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be effective for each button constituting the operation key unit 137 in addition to the effect button 136.

In this effect example, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the character selection effect is a second image in which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected in accordance with the operation of the operation means. It can be said as an example of the selection display.

Then, in this example of production, the princess character image H can be selected when the third operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display, It can be said that this is an example of the second image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display.

In addition, in this effect example, the effect by the princess character appearing after the jackpot game is an example of the fifth effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display. it can.

FIG. 238 is a diagram illustrating an example of a character selection effect. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 238 shows, for example, how the character selection effect is performed during the big hit game. The character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears after the jackpot game is over.

As shown in FIG. 238(a), when the character selection effect is started, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the lord's character image Y is brightly displayed in the center of the display screen, and the princess character image H is displayed on the display screen. It is displayed slightly dark on the right side, and the old character image G is displayed slightly dark on the left side of the display screen. The character image Y of the lord is arranged in front of the character image H of the princess and the character image G of the grandfather, and it is notified that the character image Y of the lord is in a selectable state. Further, below these character images, icons of a left button 137c and a right button 137d are arranged side by side, and a balloon including a character display "Push button to select character" is displayed. In this example of effect, the automatic button function is enabled and the effect button lamp 138 emits green light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 238(b), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display in which the lord's character image Y, the princess's character image H, and the grandfather's character image G rotate counterclockwise so as to draw a circle. Be started. At this time, the lord's character image Y is displayed slightly dark, the grandfather character image G is displayed brightly, and the fact that the grandfather character image G is selectable is notified.

Then, in this effect example, the auto button function is in an effective state, and the continuous operation of the right button 137d is simulated. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 238(b) to 238(e), the above-described character selection cancel display is performed each time the pseudo right button 137d is operated (for example, every 200 ms). It should be noted that when the auto button function is enabled, the continuous pressing operation of the left button 137c may be performed in a pseudo manner.

FIG. 239 is a diagram illustrating an example of the character selection effect. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 239 shows, for example, how the character selection effect is performed at the start of the big hit. This character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears during the big hit game.

As shown in FIG. 239(a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display "select character" is displayed, and the explanation display in the character selection effect is performed. Further, the lord's character image Y is displayed brightly in the center of the display screen, the princess character image H is displayed slightly dark on the right side of the display screen, and the grandfather character image G is displayed slightly dark on the left side of the display screen. .. The character image Y of the lord is arranged in front of the character image H of the princess and the character image G of the grandfather, and it is notified that the character image Y of the lord is in a selectable state. These character images are displayed in such a manner that a part thereof is covered by the above-mentioned character display. In this effect example, the character in the selectable state can be changed by operating the effect button 136, and the character in the selectable state at the end timing of the character selection effect (the character corresponding to the brightly displayed character image). ) Is determined as a character that appears during the big hit game.

Then, as shown in FIG. 239(b), in the decorative pattern display device 208, after the character display “START” is displayed, as shown in FIG. 239(c), the character selection effect is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 239(c), below the character images, the characters "PUSH" are displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen together with the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button image 136e. The remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. Further, on the right side of the effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT, a balloon including a character display "Press button to select character" is displayed.

Then, for example, at the timing when one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 239(d), the remaining time meter MT indicates that one second has passed, that is, the gauge is reduced by one second. Is displayed.

When the production button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 239(e), as shown in FIG. 239(f), the character image Y of the lord, the character image H of the princess, and the grandfather are displayed. The display in which the character image G is rotated counterclockwise so as to draw a circle is started. At this time, the lord's character image Y is displayed slightly dark, the grandfather character image G is displayed brightly, and the fact that the grandfather character image G is selectable is notified. After that, each character image is rotated and displayed as shown in FIGS. 239(f) to (i), and as shown in FIG. 239(i), the grandfather character image G is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. When it reaches the center of the display screen of, the rotation display ends. This operation is executed every time a pressing operation is performed with the effect button 136.

In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated during the rotation display of each character image, the character selection in which only the character image is replaced while the position where each character image is displayed at the time of operation is unchanged. A cancellation display can be displayed. The character selection cancel display may not be performed.

When the character selection cancel display can be executed, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. For example, when the long-press operation of the effect button 136 is performed after the character selection effect is started, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function causes the effect button 136 to be repeatedly hit, which results in a pseudo effect button. The above-mentioned character selection cancel display may be performed every operation of 136 (for example, every 200 ms). In addition, in the character selection effect, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

Further, in this effect example, when the character selection effect is started, the remaining time meter MT does not stop the gauge update display (does not stop decreasing the remaining time of the character selection effect) until the character selection effect ends. However, while the rotation display of the character image is being performed, the update display of the gauge may be stopped (the reduction of the remaining time of the character selection effect may be stopped). That is, the gauge may be updated and displayed only while any one of the character image Y of the lord, the character image H of the princess, and the character image G of the grandfather is stopped and displayed in front.

Further, while the long press operation by the effect button 136 is being performed, the update display of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT may be stopped. According to this, it may be possible to suppress the unnecessary operation of the effect button 136 by the player.

Further, in this example of performance, it is applied to the one that selects the character that appears during the big hit game, but, for example, one that selects the music to be output during the big hit game or the normal game state from a plurality of kinds of music, or a plurality of kinds of music. The present invention can also be applied to a case where a story to be executed during a big hit game is selected from the stories.

FIG. 240 is a diagram showing an example of the selection effect executed during the symbol variation display. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 240 is an example of the selection effect executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the effect of operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d to select one of the treasure boxes (treasure box selection effect) is executed. It shows the situation.

As shown in FIG. 240(a), when the treasure box selection effect is started, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the right treasure box image BG1 and the left treasure box image BG2 are displayed at the left and right centers of the display screen, respectively. Between the right treasure chest image BG1 and the left treasure chest image BG2, the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are displayed side by side, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below them. The right treasure box image BG1 and the left treasure box image BG2 are, for example, light blue, and the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are, for example, white. Then, on the upper part of the display screen, a character display "Select a treasure box to open with the direction key" is displayed to notify that the treasure box selection effect has started. In the upper right corner of the display screen, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed. In this treasure box selection effect, the left button 137c and the right button 137d are operated to select the right treasure box image BG1 or the left treasure box image BG2 by the time the operation acceptance period elapses, and the treasure box selected when the operation acceptance period elapses An effect in which an item may appear from the image is executed.

After that, for example, when 1 second has passed, as shown in FIG. 240(b), the remaining time meter MT is displayed in a mode showing that the remaining time meter MT has passed 1 second, that is, a mode in which the gauge is decreased by 1 second. To be done. At this time, the left button 137c and the right button 137d have not been operated yet.

When the left button 137c is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 240(c), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the color of the icon indicating the left button 137c changes from white to red, and The color of the left treasure box image BG2 changes from light blue to red. That is, it is notified that the left treasure box image BG2 is being selected. At this time, a confirmation sound is output once to notify that the button has been operated. Note that the audio output timing may be the same timing as the display changing timing, may be the timing after the display changing timing, or may be the timing before the display changing timing. Good. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 240(c), it is shown that, for example, 3 seconds have elapsed since the operation acceptance period started.

After that, when the operation acceptance period elapses, as shown in FIG. 240(d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the remaining time meter MT in a mode in which the gauge remains 0 seconds, and the left treasure box image BG2 is displayed. It is displayed in red to notify that the left treasure box image BG2 has been selected.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 240(e), after the left treasure box image BG2 is enlarged and displayed, the lid is opened, and the effect display in which the booklet as an example of the item pops out is performed. .. The items appearing in the left treasure box image BG2 are not limited to the booklet described above, and various items such as a princess character HM shown in FIG. 240(e1) can be made to appear. Also, as shown in FIG. 240(e2), although the treasure chest image is selected, the lid may not be opened and the item may not appear. Further, the same item may appear in the case where the left treasure box image BG2 is selected and the case where the right treasure box image BG1 is selected, or different items may appear.

In the effect example described above, one of the left treasure box image BG2 and the right treasure box image BG1 can be selected by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d once, but for example, the selection target is a loop. May be. Specifically, for example, in the state shown in FIG. 240(c), when the left button 137c is pressed once, the right treasure box image is displayed because the selection target is a loop. When the BG1 is selected and the left button 137c is further pressed once in that state, the left treasure box image BG2 may be selected. Further, in this case, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled, and when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the selection target is selected in accordance with the pseudo continuous hitting operation. The treasure chests that are the numbers may be sequentially changed. At this time, the pseudo continuous tapping operation interval may be set to an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the treasure box to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long-press auto continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the treasure box to be selected may be sequentially changed only each time the left button 137c and the right button 137d are pressed. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the treasure box selection effect is started, a pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed. Alternatively, the pseudo continuous hitting operation may be performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after the treasure box selection effect is started.

Further, the selection target does not have to be a loop. For example, when the left button 137c is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 240(c), the selection target is left. The treasure chest image BG2 may be configured not to change. In this case, only the confirmation sound by one pressing operation of the left button 137c may be output. Further, in this case, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled, and if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, a pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed, but the selection is made. The treasure chest image that is the target of may be configured not to change. Further, in this case, only the confirmation sound may be output for each pseudo continuous tapping operation.

FIG. 241 is a diagram for explaining an example of the effect produced by the continuous hit operation of the effect button. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Here, in the production example shown in FIG. 241, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the left image display device 209L and the front of the right edge part of the decorative symbol display device 208 are overlapped in front of the left edge part of the decorative symbol display device 208. The right image display device 209R is arranged at a position overlapping with. The left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R each function as fourth effect means (second image display means). The left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are, for example, connected to a slide drive motor (not shown) via link members, respectively, and along the display surface of the decorative pattern display device 208, in directions close to each other. It is possible to move to. The left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are connected to, for example, a rotation driving motor (not shown) via a link member, and when the positions are close to each other, the decorative pattern display device 208 It is possible to rotate along the display surface. Further, the left image display device 209L is provided with a light emitting portion LL in which full color LEDs are arranged side by side on the outer circumference thereof, and the right image display device 209R is provided with a light emitting portion LR in which LEDs are arranged side by side on the outer circumference thereof. ing. In the present embodiment, the light emitting units LL and LR function as an example of second rendering means. Further, the means for moving the left image display device 109L and the right image display device 209R provided with the light emitting units LL and LR function as an example of third rendering means (movable means). In addition, the transparent plate member 118 (see FIG. 201) is provided with a predetermined lens cut in the transmissive region, and a light emitter is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the transparent plate member 118. The light is reflected forward at the lens cut portion so that the transmissive region can be made to appear as if it is emitting light in a predetermined pattern. The light-emitting body forming the light-emitting units LL and LR is not limited to the LED, and may be, for example, a lamp, or another light-emitting device such as EL may be applied. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 241, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure holding lamp 218, and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are shown for convenience of description. Omitted. Even if the long press automatic continuous hitting function is set to be valid, in the effect example shown in FIG. 241, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is invalid. That is, the effect produced by the continuous hit operation of the effect button shown in FIG. 241 can be regarded as an example of the second effect. In addition, in the effect by the continuous hit operation of the effect button shown in FIG. 241, the long press automatic continuous hit function may be enabled.

As shown in FIG. 241(a), the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in the lower part of the display screen of the right image display device 209R. Then, continuous hit production by the production button 136 is started. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT together with the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 241(a), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid. Further, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Further, in the light emitting units LL and LR, all LEDs are turned off. In the present embodiment, in the normal time, all the light emitting units LL and LR are configured to turn off all the LEDs, but they may be configured to emit light in a predetermined mode. You may make it blink. In the present embodiment, a mode in which all the LEDs in the light emitting units LL and LR are extinguished is also included in the mode of light emission.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 241(b), the character "repeatedly strike" is displayed on the upper part of the effect button image BT, and the effect button lamp 138 emits red light, and the operation is performed. It is notified that the valid period has started. Then, the player who sees this starts the continuous hit operation with the effect button 136.

When the player continuously performs the hitting operation of the effect button 136, the light emitting units LL and LR gradually increase the number of LEDs to be emitted from the lower portion according to the number of operations of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 241(c), it is shown that the LEDs emit yellow light from the lower ends of the light emitting units LL and LR to a height of about 1/4. In the present embodiment, such a light emitting mode can be referred to as an example of the second light emitting mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display in which the gauge of the remaining time meter MT decreases according to the elapsed time is displayed. In the present embodiment, the same number of LEDs are simultaneously emitted from the light emitting section LL and the light emitting section LR. However, for example, the light emitting section LL emits light first, and all the LEDs of the light emitting section LL emit light. The light emitting section LR may be started to emit light later, or the light emitting section LR may be made to emit light first, and after all the LEDs of the light emitting section LR emit light, the light emitting section LL may be started to emit light. May be. Further, the number of LEDs to be emitted by the light emitting units LL and LR may be alternately increased.

After that, when the player continuously continues to hit the effect button 136, and when the timing shown in FIG. 241(d) is reached, the LED emits green light from the lower ends of the light emitting portions LL and LR to a height of about 2/3. In the present embodiment, such a light emitting mode can be referred to as an example of the second light emitting mode. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a green effect image is displayed in a region along the light emitting portions LL and LR, and an effect display as if the light from the LED influences the image is performed. As described above, the light emission colors of the light emitting units LL and LR are changed according to the number of light emission of the LEDs, that is, the number of times the effect button 136 is operated. It is also possible to change only the number of emitted LEDs and not change the emission color. Alternatively, only the emission color of the LEDs may be changed and the number of emitted lights may not be changed. Further, the timing at which the effect image is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the color of the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR changes, or the color of the LED may change after the effect image is displayed. , The effect image may be displayed after the color of the LED changes. Further, in the present embodiment, the display color of the effect image is the same as the emission color of the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR, but it may be different. In this case, the emission color of the LED and the display color of the effect image may or may not be associated with each other.

After that, the player continuously continues to hit the effect button 136, and when the timing shown in FIG. 241(e) is reached, all the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR emit red light. In the present embodiment, such a light emitting mode can be referred to as an example of the second light emitting mode. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a red effect image is displayed in a region along the light emitting units LL and LR, and an effect display as if the light from the LED influences the image is performed.

After that, when the player continuously continues to hit the effect button 136, at the timing shown in FIG. 241(f), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the princess character and the success of the hit operation is indicated. A mode in which the emission colors of all the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR change so that the light emitting units LL and LR appear to emit light in iridescent colors (hereinafter, referred to as “rainbow color light emitting mode”). It may light up. Further, in response to this, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an effect image in a display mode that is visually recognized in a rainbow color in the regions along the light emitting units LL and LR. The timing at which the princess character is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the effect image in which the effect image is displayed in rainbow colors is displayed, or the princess character is displayed. The timing may be earlier, or the timing at which the princess character is displayed may be later.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 241(g), the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R move in a direction in which they are close to each other, and the left at a position overlapping substantially in front of the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. The image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are the positions closest to each other. In the light emitting units LL and LR, all the LEDs are continuously turned on in the iridescent light emitting mode.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 241(h), after the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are integrally rotated 90 degrees clockwise along the display surface of the decorative pattern display device 208, At the timing shown in FIG. 241(i), the characters of “celebration” that congratulate the big hit are displayed across the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R. At this time, the decorative pattern being variably displayed is displayed in the lower left portion of the right image display device 209R in accordance with the orientation of the right image display device 209R.

Then, at a timing shown in FIG. 241(j), the light-emitting body arranged near the side end of the transmission plate member 118 emits light, and a predetermined pattern is formed in the transmission region of the transmission plate member 118. As a result, in some cases, the left image display device 209L, the right image display device 209R, and the pattern formed on the transmission plate member 118 can provide a deep effect. The effect of forming a predetermined pattern in the transparent area of the transparent plate member 118 may not be performed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, by performing the repeated hitting operation, as shown in FIGS. 241(b) to 241(f), the light emitting modes of the light emitting units LL and LR are set to the number of times the effect button 136 is operated. Although it is possible to see the effect and the effect image that change according to the effect, for example, if the player does not perform the continuous hit operation after the effect by the continuous hit operation is started, these effects are not performed, At the timing when the operation valid period elapses, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R move as shown in FIG. 241(g). That is, the player can visually confirm the effects shown in FIGS. 241(g) to 241(j) without performing a continuous hit operation, but the light emitting modes of the light emitting units LL and LR change. Since the effect and the effect image cannot be visually recognized, continuous hitting of the effect button 136 may be able to contribute as an incentive to enjoy such effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, for example, the effect in which the light emitting units LL and LR are turned on in the mode shown in FIGS. It can be said that it is an effect that may be executed as a result, and that it is an effect that is not started by long-pressing the effect button 136.

Further, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the continuous hitting operation effect shown in FIGS. 241(c) to 241(e) is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variable display.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the light emitting mode (light emitting color) of the light emitting units LL and LR when the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are in close proximity to each other depends on the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. It may or may not be related to the light emission mode (light emission color) of the changed light emitting units LL and LR. In addition, when the left-eye image display device 209L and the right-eye image display device 209R are located close to each other, the light-emission mode (light-emission color) of the light-emission units LL and LR is successful when the production is successful by the continuous-stroke operation and when the continuous-stroke operation is performed. It may be different or the same when it is not performed.

In addition to the above-described light emitting units LL and LR, a light emitting unit whose position changes according to the effect contents may be provided. In this case, the light emission mode may or may not change in relation to the effect by the repeated hit operation shown in FIG. 241, or may be emitted in association with the effect by the other successive hit operation. The aspect may be changed. Further, in addition to the above-described light emitting units LL and LR, a light emitting unit whose position changes according to the contents of the effect may not be provided.

Further, the light emitting units LL and LR have a predetermined light emitting mode (first light emitting mode) even during execution of an effect other than the effect by the continuous hit operation shown in FIG. ), the light may be turned on only during execution of the effect by the continuous hitting operation shown in FIG. 241. In the present embodiment, the first light emission mode is different from the second light emission mode, but may be the same light emission mode.

Note that in the effect example shown in FIG. 241, a shielding device 246 (see FIG. 203) that does not include an image display device may be applied instead of the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R. In this case, The light-emitting units LL and LR may be provided on the left door 246a and the right door 246b of the shielding device 246, respectively.

Further, in the present embodiment, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are configured to be integrally rotatable, but may be configured not to rotate. Further, although the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are configured to be movable along the display surface of the decorative pattern display device 208, they may be configured not to move.

Further, in the present embodiment, the two image display devices (the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R) are applied as the second image display means, but they may be configured by one image display device. It may be configured by three or more image display devices.

Further, in the present embodiment, the light emitting units LL and LR are provided in the effect device 206 of the game board 200, but may be provided in a part other than the effect device 206 of the game board 200, or the game board 200. Instead, it may be provided on the front frame door 106. For example, the effect button lamp 138 may be applied instead of the light emitting units LL and LR. In this case, for example, the effect button lamp 138 may have a structure in which light-emitting elements such as LEDs are arranged in a matrix, and the display mode may be changed according to the continuous hitting operation. Further, the light emitting units LL and LR may be provided on both the game board 200 and the front frame door 106. In this case, for example, if the light emission control is performed so that the light emission unit provided on the game board 200 and the light emission unit provided on the front frame door 106 emit light in synchronization with each other, the effect may be improved. Further, each of the light emitting units in these aspects may be movable by the movable means or may not be movable. In the case where the movable means is provided with a light emitting portion and a non-movable light emitting portion, the non-movable light emitting portion is first made to emit light, and then the step is stepped up to make the light emitting portion provided in the movable means emit light. The light emission may be controlled to be performed. Further, instead of the light emitting units LL and LR, the light emitting body provided on the side end portion of the transparent plate member 118 described above with reference to FIG. 241(j) is applied, and light emission in the pattern formed in the transmissive region is applied. You may make it implement|achieve by changing a mode.

FIG. 242 is a diagram illustrating an example of the back button effect. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Here, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 242, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, below the decorative symbol display device 208, effect lamps SL1 to SL4 functioning as second effect means are provided, and are turned on respectively. It is configured so that control can be performed. Each of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 has a built-in full-color LED as a light emitting means and is covered with a lens cover. The character "8" is drawn on the lens cover of the effect lamp SL1, the character "Alternative" is drawn on the lens cover of the effect lamp SL2, and the character cover is indicated on the lens cover of the effect lamp SL3. The character "General" is drawn, and the character "Army" is drawn on the lens cover of the effect lamp SL4. In addition, the transparent plate member 118 (see FIG. 201) is provided with a predetermined lens cut in the transmissive region, and a light emitter is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the transparent plate member 118. The light is reflected forward at the lens cut portion so that the transmissive region can be made to appear as if it is emitting light in a predetermined pattern. In addition, the light emitting means constituting the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is not limited to the LED, and may be, for example, a lamp or another light emitting device such as an EL. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 242, for convenience of explanation, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure holding lamp 218, and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are shown. Omitted. Further, even if the long press automatic continuous hitting function is set to be valid, in the effect example shown in FIG. 242, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is invalid, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be valid. In the present embodiment, during the period in which the back button effect can be executed (the operation reception period for performing the back button effect), it is not notified that the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is valid. For example, a tutorial display that suggests the existence of a back button effect such as "If you operate the button at the time of ...", etc., and this tutorial display happens to be a back button effect. It may be displayed in a feasible period or may be displayed intentionally. The production performed by the operation of the production button 136 or the like while suggesting the back button production by such a tutorial display may be called the back button production, and is not included in the back button production. It may be.

As shown in FIG. 242(a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. Further, in the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, a reach title TT "Search for a family crest" is displayed in a rectangular frame to notify that the super reach effect is started. In the frame of this reach title TT, for example, a green color scheme is applied. Moreover, all of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 and the effect button lamp 138 are turned off. Here, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 may be turned off during normal times, or may be made to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a mode in which the light is turned on in white). After that, when the player who knows the existence of the back button effect presses the effect button 136 once at the timing shown in FIG. 242(b), as shown in FIG. 242(c), the reach title TT frame is displayed. The color scheme inside changes from green to red. That is, although the operation of the effect button 136 is not notified, the operation of the effect button 136 is valid during the period (second period) in which the reach title TT is displayed, and the effect button 136 is activated during this period. A back button effect is produced by operating 136. It should be noted that the change in the color arrangement within the reach title TT frame may be performed by one pressing operation of the effect button 136, or may be performed when there are a plurality of operations. Alternatively, it may be performed when a long-pressing operation is performed for a predetermined time. Further, when the production button 136 is operated, the color scheme in the frame of the reach title TT is changed as the back button production. However, for example, the color of the characters may be changed, the background color or the display mode may be changed. It may be changed. Further, as the back button effect, the display mode of the reach title TT may be changed only once, or the display mode of the reach title TT may be changed each time the effect button 136 is pressed. Further, by operating the effect button 136 while the reach title TT is displayed, the back button effect may or may not always be performed. For example, the effect button 136 is operated. A lottery may be performed each time the game is played, and a back button effect may be performed when the player wins. In the example shown in FIG. 242(c), when the effect button 136 is operated, a predetermined sound effect may be output in addition to the change in the color arrangement within the frame of the reach title TT. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 242(c), even when the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation reception period, the color scheme in the frame of the reach title TT may change from green to red. Moreover, when the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation reception period, it may change to a color other than red. In this case, when the effect button 136 is further pressed, the color scheme in the frame of the reach title TT may be further changed (for example, green>yellow>red).

Then, as shown in FIG. 242(d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the super reach effect is started. When the super reach effect is started, the character display “development due to the family crest falling” is displayed on the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect movable body 225 simulating the family crest is above the decorative symbol display device 208. It is notified that the development performance with higher reliability of the big hit is started by falling from the beginning.

After the super reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 242(d), the player who knows the existence of the back button effect (back button continuous hit effect) starts the continuous hit operation with the effect button 136, and the predetermined number of times. When the pressing operation is performed, the effect lamp SL1 lights up in green as shown in FIG. 242(e). That is, although the operation of the effect button 136 is not notified, the operation of the effect button 136 is valid during the period (second period) during which the super reach effect is performed, and the effect button 136 is activated during this period. By continuously striking 136, the back button consecutive striking effect is produced. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a green effect image is displayed in a region along the lower edge of the display screen in response to the effect lamp SL1 lighting in green, and the light from the effect lamp SL1 affects the image. The effect display is displayed as if it were. Note that the timing at which the effect image is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the effect lamp SL1 is turned on in green, or the effect lamp SL1 may be turned on after the effect image is displayed, The effect image may be displayed after the effect lamp SL1 is turned on. Further, in the present embodiment, the display color of the effect image is the same as the emission color of the effect lamp SL1, but it may be different. In this case, the emission color of the LED and the display color of the effect image may or may not be associated with each other. Further, the effect image may not be displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect lamp 136 is repeatedly struck and the effect image is displayed along with the effect lamp SL1 being turned on. However, the effect button 136 is continuously struck to display the effect image. Alternatively, the effect lamp SL1 may be turned on in association therewith.

After that, when the player continuously performs the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136, the effect lamp SL1, the effect lamp SL2, the effect lamp SL3, and the effect lamp SL4 are sequentially lit in green in accordance with the number of operations of the effect button 136. To start. FIG. 242(f) shows that all the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are lit in green. The display mode of the effect image does not change, but it may be changed. For example, the display area of the effect image may be increased according to the number of lighting of the effect lamps. Further, the lighting order of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be set appropriately. Further, the big hit announcement may be given by making the lighting order of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 different from normal.

After that, when the player further continues the hitting operation of the effect button 136, and when the timing shown in FIG. 242(g) is reached, the effect lamp SL1 changes the light emitting mode from green to red. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display color of the effect image changes from green to red, and the display area also expands upward.

After that, when the player continuously performs the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136, the effect lamp SL1, the effect lamp SL2, the effect lamp SL3, and the effect lamp SL4 are sequentially changed from green in accordance with the number of times of operation of the effect button 136. The light emission mode changes to red. FIG. 242(h) shows a state in which all of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 have changed their light emitting modes from green to red. In the present embodiment, in the back button continuous stroke effect, the long press automatic continuous stroke function is disabled, so that the long-press operation of the effect button 136 does not start lighting of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4. In this way, in the back button repeated hit effect, the effect in which the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are turned on or the effect image is displayed can be referred to as an example of the second effect. Also, the effect image in the back button repeated hit effect can be said to be an example of the second display. Further, in the back button repeated hit effect, a mode in which at least one of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is turned on can be referred to as an example of a second light emission mode.

After that, when a predetermined effect time elapses from the start of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 242(i), the effect movable body 225 arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208 descends, and the decorative symbol. The display device 208 is moved to a position overlapping the center front of the display device 208. At this time, all of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are in a rainbow emission mode. The descent operation of the effect movable body 225 is not an effect of the back button effect, but an effect executed in the super reach effect. Further, the iridescent light emission mode by the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is a light emission mode associated with the movement of the effect movable body 225 and is different from the back button effect. It should be noted that the timing of starting lighting of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 in the iridescent light emission mode may be the same as the completion of the descending operation of the effect movable body 225, or before the completion of the descending operation of the effect movable body 225. May be the timing of, or may be the timing after the completion of the descending operation of the effect movable body 225.

After that, at a timing shown in FIG. 242(j), the light-emitting body arranged near the side end of the transmission plate member 118 emits light, and a predetermined pattern is formed in the transmission region of the transmission plate member 118. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the background image is changed to complement the pattern formed on the transparent plate member 118. As a result, the effect movable body 225 and the pattern formed on the transmission plate member 118 may be able to perform an effect with depth. The effect of forming a predetermined pattern in the transparent area of the transparent plate member 118 may not be performed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, by performing the continuous hitting operation, as shown in FIGS. 242(e) to 242(h), the light emission modes of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are the back button continuous hit effects. It is possible to see effects and effect images that change according to the number of times the effect button 136 is operated, but if the player does not perform continuous hit operations, these operations are not performed and the operation valid period elapses. 242(i), the effect movable body 225 is moved down. That is, the player can visually recognize the effects shown in FIGS. 242(i) to 242(j) without performing the continuous hit operation as the back button operation, but visually recognizes the above-described back button effect. Since it is not possible, continuous hitting of the effect button 136 may contribute as an incentive to enjoy such an effect.

Further, in addition to the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 described above, a light emitting means that changes a light emitting mode according to effect contents may be provided. In this case, the light emission mode may be changed or may not be changed in relation to the effect by the repeated hit operation shown in FIG. The aspect may be changed. In addition to the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 described above, a light emitting unit that changes a light emitting mode according to effect contents may not be provided. Further, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 may be movable according to the effect contents.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are provided in the effect device 206 of the game board 200, but may be provided other than the effect device 206 of the game board 200, or the game board 200. Instead, the front frame door 106 may be provided. Further, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 may be provided on both the game board 200 and the front frame door 106. In this case, for example, if the light emission control is performed such that the effect lamp provided on the game board 200 and the effect lamp provided on the front frame door 106 emit light in synchronization with each other, the effect may be improved. Further, any of the effect lamps in these modes may be movable by the movable means or may not be movable. Further, when the production lamp provided in the movable means and the production lamp that does not move are provided, after the production lamp that does not move is made to emit light first, the step is stepped up and the production lamp provided in the movable means emits light. The light emission may be controlled to be performed. Further, instead of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4, the light-emitting body provided at the side end portion of the transparent plate member 118 described above with reference to FIG. 242(j) is applied, and light emission in the pattern formed in the transmissive region is performed. You may make it implement|achieve by changing a mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the light emission of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 in the back button repeated hit effect may be executed in response to the effect button 136 being operated a plurality of times (operated in the first operation mode). It is a certain effect, and it can be said that the long-pressing operation of the effect button 136 (operation in the second operation mode) does not start the emission of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display of the effect image in the back button repeated hit effect is a display that may be executed in response to the effect button 136 being operated a plurality of times (operated in the first operation mode), It can be said that the effect image display is not started when the effect button 136 is long-pressed (operated in the second operation mode).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect of turning on the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 in the back button repeated hit effect and the effect of displaying the effect image are effects that may be started during the display of the variable pattern display. ..

FIG. 243 is a diagram for explaining an example of an effect by long-pressing the effect button. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Here, in the effect example shown in FIG. 243, an effect button unit 1360 is provided in place of the effect button 136. The effect button unit 1360 includes a button portion 136P and a jog dial portion 136J. The button portion 136P can be projected upward by an actuator such as a motor, and the position thereof is displaced according to the effect contents. The jog dial portion 136J is formed in an annular shape and is arranged so as to surround the outside of the button portion 136P. The jog dial section 136J can be rotated in the forward and reverse directions along the circumferential direction by the player, and a signal corresponding to the operation amount is output to the sensor circuit 428 of the first sub control section 400 (see FIG. 204). To be entered. In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 243, for convenience of explanation, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure holding lamp 218, and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are shown. Omitted. The special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the variable display of the symbols in the first special figure display device 212, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Corresponding to the above, the display is stopped and the result is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 243(a), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, the reach state is formed by "decoration 3", and the super reach (swordsman reach) is formed. Directing is being done. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 243(a), an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 243(a), the game will be decided. Is shown. It should be noted that, in order to easily recognize the contents of the effect, it is possible to display what the effect result that is a big hit is (for example, a character such as "Big hit if you win the swordsman" is displayed). Then, in the center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "PUSH" are displayed together with the effect button image BT simulating the effect button unit 1360, superimposed on the animation of the duel scene. A remaining time meter MT is displayed below, and a notification prompting the operation of the button portion 136P is performed. The effect button lamp 138 provided inside the button portion 136P emits red light. Note that FIG. 243(a) shows a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the operation valid period started. When the player presses the button portion 136P, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays, as shown in FIG. 243(b), a state in which the hero is defeated by a swordsman.

After that, as shown in FIG. 243(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the revival effect is started, the characters "Rotate the jog to rewind time" are displayed together with the effect button image BT, and the jog dial 136J is displayed. Notify to rotate.

As shown in FIG. 243(d), when the player rotates the jog dial 136J in accordance with the display of the decorative pattern display device 208, the animation is rewound until the display of the duel scene in the swordsman reach production. There are cases. Here, according to the rotation operation of the jog dial 136J, a predetermined effect such as an effect image or light emission of a lamp may be performed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 243(e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation of the duel scene is started again, and at the same time, the large button image LBT that is a large image simulating the effect button unit 1360 is displayed. The remaining time meter MT is displayed below the big button image LBT, and a notification prompting the user to press the button portion 136P is performed. In addition, in the effect button unit 1360, the button portion 136P is projected, and the effect that the expectation for the big hit is high. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light. The timing at which the button portion 136P projects may be the same as the timing at which the display of the deca button image LBT is started, may be after the display of the deca button image LBT is started, or the display of the deca button image LBT is started. It may be before. In the present embodiment, when the display of the big button image LBT is started, the operation valid period of the button portion 136P is started. However, when the button portion 136P projects, the operation valid period of the button portion 136P is changed. It may be started. In addition, in FIG. 243(e), instead of displaying the big button image LBT, the effect button image BT may be displayed, and in this case, the button portion 136P may not be projected.

FIG. 243(f) shows a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the display of the large button image LBT was started. When the player presses the button portion 136P as shown in FIG. 243(f), as shown in FIG. 243(g), the effect movable body 225 arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208 descends. Then, the decorative pattern display device 208 is moved to a position overlapping the center front of the decorative pattern display device 208. At this time, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a predetermined effect image is displayed in order to complement the fact that the effect movable body 225 has descended.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 243(h), the left decorative member 225L and the right decorative member 225R, which are arranged on both the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, move to positions close to each other, and the effect movable body 225. The left and right sides will be enclosed. The left decorative member 225L and the right decorative member 225R are formed by cutting out a part of a semicircular plate-shaped member in an arc shape, and have a shape that substantially follows the outer periphery of the production movable body 225. In the present embodiment, it may be possible to notify that a big hit will be generated by the operation of the effect movable body 225, and the player can recognize that it is a big hit by looking at this effect. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 243(g) to 243(h) may not necessarily be performed, and, for example, even if the button portion 136P is operated, the effect movable body 225 does not descend and the effect is not removed. The result may be displayed.

After that, when the left decorative member 225L and the right decorative member 225R are retracted to the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect movable body 225 is retracted above the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 243(i), On the decorative pattern display device 208, a display showing that the hero has won the swordsman is displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the swordsman reach effect, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, and after the effect shown in FIG. 243(c) is performed, the jog dial 136J is not rotated, and the FIG. As shown in d'), the effect shown in FIG. 243(e) may be performed by rotating the jog dial 136J by long pressing the button portion 136P.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by performing a long press operation on the button portion 136P, it is configured that a predetermined effect is started assuming that the rotation operation of the jog dial 136J is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the predetermined operation by the operation device other than the effect button is replaced by the long-press operation of the effect button. Examples of the operation device other than the effect button include a touch panel and a touch sensor. For example, in the case of a touch sensor, when performing an effect that requires you to rub your hand over the sensor to repeat detection/non-detection of the sensor multiple times, press and hold this operation for a long time. You may make it substitute by operation.

Further, instead of the long press operation of the effect button, it may be configured to enable the long press auto continuous hitting function by a long press operation by an operation device other than the effect button, for example, a long press operation on the touch panel or a touch. It may be configured to exhibit a long-press automatic continuous hitting function by long-time detection by the sensor.

FIG. 244 is a diagram showing an example of a concrete effect example in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Note that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 244, for convenience of description, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure holding lamp 218, and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are shown. Omitted. FIG. 244(a1) to FIG. 244(e1) show a state in which the effect of operating the effect button 136 in accordance with the rhythm is being executed in the super reach. In this super reach, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is set, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is valid, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be invalid.

As shown in FIG. 244(a1), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the reach state is formed by “decoration 3”, and the super reach (princess dance) is formed. SP reach) production is being performed. Also, in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "step 1" indicating the difficulty level of this effect is displayed. There are a plurality of difficulty levels, and for example, the difficulty level is configured to be changed according to the expectation level for a big hit and the success level of the performance in this princess dance SP reach.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 244(a1), a timing image TM including the characters “CHANCE” is displayed on the right side of the display screen moving from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen, The hit image HT is displayed on the moving path of the timing image TM. The timing image TM is moved and displayed at a timing overlapping with the hit image HT in accordance with the music. Further, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light to notify that it is in the operation accepting state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 244(b1), the player starts a long press operation of the effect button 136. Then, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is activated, and the pseudo effect button 136 is repeatedly hit at regular intervals regardless of the timing at which the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT. Note that, during the operation of the long-press automatic continuous hitting function, the pseudo effect button 136 may be operated only at the timing when the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT. On the other hand, a skilled player does not perform a game for beginners, such as long-pressing the effect button 136 to activate the long-press automatic continuous hitting function, and the effect button at a position where the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT. By playing a game in which 136 is operated, it is possible to aim for a high score. The playing method of this "princess dance SP reach" is the same as that shown in FIG. 233 and described above.

After that, the game of the first turn in the princess dance SP reach ends, and the result of the game in the first turn is determined. If the determination result is the level-up determination result, the character display of "NICE" is displayed as shown in FIG. 244(c1), and the difficulty level is notified to shift to "step 2". .. At the timing shown in FIG. 244(c1), the effect button lamp 138 is off because it is outside the operation valid period.

After that, the game with the difficulty level of "step 2" is started. FIG. 244(d1) shows that a game is being played with the difficulty level being “step 2”. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 244(e1), when the player starts the long press operation of the effect button 136, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is activated again, and the pseudo continuous effect operation of the effect button 136 is restarted. ..

In the present embodiment, the period during which the long press automatic continuous tapping function is valid is repeated, but for example, the first period during which the long press automatic continuous tapping function is valid (for example, FIG. 244(a1) to FIG. b2)) and an interval period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 244(c1)) in which the long press automatic continuous tapping function is invalid, and a second period (for example, a period during which the long press automatic continuous tapping function is valid) 244 (d1) to (e1) of FIG. 244), when the long press operation of the effect button 136 is performed, the second operation after the long press automatic continuous hitting function is once disabled. In the period of, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is not effective unless the effect button 136 is pressed again. When the production button 136 is long-pressed for a second period with an interval period from the first period, the long-press auto for the second period is performed without pressing the production button 136 again. The continuous hitting function may be enabled.

FIG. 244(a2) to FIG. 244(d2) show an example of the operation when the premium up mode is selected on the production customization setting screen as described above with reference to FIG.

FIG. 244(a2) shows a state in which the premium up mode is set as described above with reference to FIG. 211(h1).

As described above, when the continuous hitting operation effect is started after the premium up mode is set, as shown in FIG. 244(b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image that prompts the user to press the effect button 136. The character "repeatedly strike" is displayed in the center of the screen together with BT, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. In this continuous stroke operation effect, if the long press automatic continuous stroke function is set, the long press automatic continuous stroke function is validated. When the player recognizes that the continuous hit operation effect has started, he/she starts the continuous hit operation using the effect button 136.

After that, when a plurality of operations are performed by consecutively pressing the effect button 136, a cut-in image composed of the lord's character and the characters "iron plate" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, as shown in FIG. 244(c2). There may be a premier notice that is displayed and informs that the jackpot is confirmed. In the present embodiment, the premier notice is likely to occur because the premier up mode is set, and if the premier up mode is set to anything other than the premier notice in the effect customization setting screen Is likely to occur.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 244(d2), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative pattern of the big hit, "decoration 5"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5". Further, in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a mission achievement display showing a mission achievement is displayed. The mission achievement display is like a history of the effect generation display that has been displayed so far (in this case, the effect generation display that displays “NO92: I watched the iron plate notice”). The effect generation display corresponding to the effect with higher expectation may be displayed for a longer time. On the other hand, the effect generation display corresponding to the effect with low expectation may disappear immediately, and when the effect is executed one after another, it may be overwritten and displayed one after another. Further, the effect generation display may be provided with a display showing the degree of expectation or appearance frequency of the effect, for example, a rank display of A rank to C rank. Further, the mission achievement display may be a display for opening the hidden effect for membership service. That is, for example, due to the premiere notice shown in FIG. 244(c2), a specific hidden effect (for example, a specific character can be selected) becomes executable and this is achieved. It may be displayed as a display.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by setting the premier up mode, the premier notice is likely to occur, and thus, for example, when points as the player's game history are easily accumulated or a mission is given In some cases, missions can be easier to accomplish.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the menu screens described above with reference to FIGS. 211 to 212, each button that constitutes the operation key unit 137 is pressed once to move the cursor CL and transition the setting screen. And, as a benefit of the effort of setting the premier up mode, the premier notice (premier production) is easily generated.

Further, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the result set on the menu screen described above is reflected in the effect in which the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is effective.

FIG. 245 is a diagram for describing an example of the chance-eye effect. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 245 shows a state of shifting to the super reach after the effect of operating the effect button 136 is performed a plurality of times in the chance eye effect. Note that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 244, for convenience of description, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure holding lamp 218, and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are shown. Omitted. Further, in this chance production, even if the long press automatic continuous hitting function is set, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is invalid, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be valid.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 245(a1), after the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, in the left symbol display area 208a. The chance symbol “A” forming part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed, the chance symbol “B” forming part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the chance eye is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The chance pattern "C" forming a part of is displayed in a stopped state, and is displayed in a stopped state by the combination of decorative patterns which is the chance eye. Then, the character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT1 that prompts the player to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol "A" that is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the effect button press acceptance period. The remaining time meter MT1 indicating the remaining time of is displayed below the effect button image BT1. Further, the character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT2 that prompts the player to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol "B" that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the effect button press acceptance period. The remaining time meter MT2 indicating the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT2. Also, the character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT3 that prompts the player to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol "C" that is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the effect button press acceptance period. The remaining time meter MT3 indicating the remaining time of is displayed below the effect button image BT3. As described above, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 245(a1), it may be possible to recognize that the effect button 136 should be pressed three times. That is, in this embodiment, it may be possible to recognize the number of times that the effect button 136 should be pressed from the time when the opportunity production is started. In the present embodiment, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled in order to allow the player to perform a careful operation with respect to effects that allow the player to recognize the number of times the effect button 136 should be pressed. Then, when the player who visually recognizes the effect display shown in FIG. 245(a1) operates the effect button 136 a plurality of times, each time the operation button 136 is operated, the design for the chance YM1 to YM3 is displayed in this order instead of the chance pattern. There are cases where FIG. 245(b1) shows a state in which the decoration symbol display device 208 is displayed in a manner in which three hall patterns YM1 to YM3 are arranged. In the present embodiment, it can be said that the display in the mode in which the three hallmarks YM1 to YM3 are thus arranged is an example of the second display (second effect). On the other hand, displayed in the middle of a plurality of operations, for example, a display in the mode of only the hall design YM1, or a display in which the hall design YM1 and the hall design YM2 are displayed together, and the hall design YM3 is not displayed. Can be said to be a display other than the second display. That is, some kind of effect (output of a sound effect, etc.) is performed each time the operation of the effect button 136 is performed, and then the second display (second effect) is displayed (or executed). Can be said.

Then, as shown in FIG. 245(c1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the cut-in effect including the character display “heat” is performed, the super reach effect is produced at the timing shown in FIG. 245(d1). Be started. In the chance production, when the operation effective period elapses without pressing the production button 136 three times, the display in a mode in which three hall symbols YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 245(b1) are arranged Alternatively, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 245(d1) is started without performing the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 245(c1). In addition, in the chance production, when the operation effective period has elapsed without pressing the production button 136 three times, the display is made in a manner in which three hall symbols YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 245(b1) are arranged. 245 (c1) may be performed without performing, and then the super reach effect shown in FIG. 245 (d1) may be started.

In this way, in the chance eye effect shown in FIGS. 245(a1) to (d1), by operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times, the hall symbols YM1 to YM3 as shown in FIG. 245(b1) are obtained. In some cases, it is possible to visually recognize the display in the form in which all three are arranged. In other words, when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136, it is not possible to visually recognize the display in a state in which the three hall symbols YM1 to YM3 are arranged. The same can be said for the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 245(c1).

Further, for example, in the chance eye production, when the operation effective period has elapsed without pressing the production button 136 three times, in a mode in which three hall patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 245(b1) are arranged. May be displayed. In this case, for example, in the production in which the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the advanced player can quickly operate the production button 136 a plurality of times to see the production earlier than the beginner. So you may feel more fulfilled.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 245(a2), after the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, in the left symbol display region 208a. The chance symbol “A” forming part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed, the chance symbol “B” forming part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the chance eye is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The chance pattern "C" forming a part of is displayed in a stopped state, and is displayed in a stopped state by the combination of decorative patterns which is the chance eye. Then, the character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT1 that prompts the player to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol "A" that is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the effect button press acceptance period. The remaining time meter MT1 indicating the remaining time of is displayed below the effect button image BT1. Further, the character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT2 that prompts the player to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol "B" that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the effect button press acceptance period. The remaining time meter MT2 indicating the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT2. Also, the character "PUSH" is displayed together with the effect button image BT3 that prompts the player to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol "C" that is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the effect button press acceptance period. The remaining time meter MT3 indicating the remaining time of is displayed below the effect button image BT3. As described above, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 245(a2), it may be possible to recognize that the effect button 136 should be pressed three times. That is, in this embodiment, it may be possible to recognize the number of times that the effect button 136 should be pressed from the time when the opportunity production is started. In the present embodiment, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled in order to allow the player to perform a careful operation with respect to effects that allow the player to recognize the number of times the effect button 136 should be pressed. Then, when the player who visually recognizes the effect display shown in FIG. 245(a2) operates the effect button 136 a plurality of times, each time the operation button 136 is operated, the design for the chance YM1 to YM3 is displayed in this order instead of the chance pattern. There are cases where FIG. 245(b2) shows a state in which the three-dimensional hall patterns YM1 to YM3 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a lined up manner.

However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 245(c2-1), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the remaining time meter MT is displayed together with the effect button image BT, and the effect button 136 is pressed once again. A button operation additional effect that encourages that is being performed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 245(c2-1), the character "Please put in and press" is displayed above the display in the form in which three hallmark patterns YM1 to YM3 are aligned. , A predetermined effect image is displayed. Further, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light to notify that the operation valid period has started.

Then, when the player presses the effect button 136 once at the timing shown in FIG. 245 (c2-2), as shown in FIG. 245 (d2), the decorative pattern display device 208 starts the super reach effect. However, at this time, the character display of "Gekiatsu" indicating that the super-reach effect has a high reliability for the big hit is added. In addition, in the chance production, when the operation effective period has elapsed without pressing the production button 136 three times, the display in the mode in which three hall symbols YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 245(b2) are arranged Alternatively, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 245(d2) is started without performing the button operation additional effect shown in FIGS. 245(c2-1) to (c2-2). In this case, for example, it is not necessary to add the character display of "super hot".

In this way, in the chance eye effect shown in FIGS. 245(a2) to (d2), by operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times, the hall symbols YM1 to YM3 as shown in FIG. 245(b2) are obtained. In some cases, it is possible to visually recognize the display in the form in which all three are arranged. In other words, when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136, it is not possible to visually recognize the display in a state in which the three hall symbols YM1 to YM3 are arranged. This can be said to be the same for the button operation additional effect shown in FIGS. 245(c2-1) to (c2-2).

In addition, for example, in the chance eye production, when the operation effective period elapses without pressing the production button 136 three times, in a mode in which three hall patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 245(b2) are arranged. May be displayed. In this case, for example, in the production in which the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the advanced player can quickly operate the production button 136 a plurality of times to see the production earlier than the beginner. So you may feel more fulfilled.

In addition, in this example of performance, after the number of times of operation of the effect button 136 is recognizable in advance, the effect of additionally operating the effect button 136 is performed, so the number of times the operation of the effect button 136 should be performed is clear from the beginning. In some cases, it may not be possible to increase the player's expectations.

FIG. 246 is a diagram showing another display example of the menu screen. FIG. 246 shows, for example, how various settings are performed on the menu screen that can be executed in the standby state where the variable display of symbols is not performed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 246(a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which are combinations of outlying decorative patterns, are stopped and displayed. Although not shown in the drawing, the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed with a display result that is off, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also the display result of the first special figure display device 212. Corresponding to the above, the display is stopped and the result is stopped. Further, since the number of suspensions of the variable display in the special figure 1 is 0, the first special figure 1 reserved display h11 to the fourth special figure reserved display h14 are displayed in a mode in which none of them are reserved. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246(a), a special figure 1 holding number display section 281A that displays the number of variable display holdings of the special figure 1 by numbers is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. In the special figure 1 reserved number display portion 281A, "0" indicating that the reserved number is 0 is displayed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246(a), the effect display in the standby state is performed.

In addition, at the upper part of the display screen, the characters "Display menu screen with" are displayed together with the icon representing the effect button 136, and the fact that the operation button 136 is operated allows the menu screen to be displayed. ing.

When the effect button 136 is pressed once, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a menu screen as shown in FIG. 246(b). Specifically, on the menu screen, "volume and light intensity adjustment" for adjusting the volume and light amount, "member registration" for registering the player's game history by entering a password, and acquisition of the player's game history Three menus of "game history" to be displayed are displayed in a selectable manner. At the bottom of these menus, the characters "Select" are displayed together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and at the right of the menu, the characters "Decision" are displayed together with the icon of the effect button 136. Therefore, it is informed that the menu indicated by the cursor CL can be executed by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d to move the cursor CL and operating the effect button 136. In this effect example, the "game history" menu is a display that can be selected by operating the right button 137d twice, and if the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the first During execution of the selective display, a case where the operation means performs the second number of operations in the first operation mode, rather than a case where the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. Can be said to be an example of the first image that is easily selected. In addition, in this effect example, the menu screen can be referred to as an example of a first selection display in which one image of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation unit.

In this menu screen, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled, and when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the cursor CL is moved according to the pseudo continuous hitting operation. You may make it move. At this time, the pseudo continuous tapping operation interval may be set to an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the menu to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the menu to be selected may be sequentially changed only each time the left button 137c and the right button 137d are pressed. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous tapping function is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the menu screen is displayed, the pseudo continuous tapping operation is not performed. The pseudo continuous tapping operation may be performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the menu screen.

When the “volume light amount adjustment” is selected as described above, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an adjustment screen as shown in FIG. 246(c). That is, an “adjustment screen” indicating that the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted is displayed on the upper part of the display screen, and an 11-level gauge of 0 to 10 indicating the volume is displayed below the display. 11-level gauges 0 to 10 indicating the brightness of the display screen in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light amounts of the game board lamp 532 and the game underframe lamp 542 are displayed. Then, below the gauges, the characters "change" are displayed together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and on the right side thereof, the characters "decide" are displayed together with the icon of the effect button 136. By operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d, the setting of the item (volume and light amount) indicated by the cursor CL can be changed, and by operating the effect button 136, the changed volume setting. It is notified that the adjustment screen can be ended while determining that the effect is executed by the light amount setting. On this adjustment screen, the cursor CL can be moved to the volume or the light amount by operating the up button 137a and the down button 137b, and the cursor CL can be moved to the volume or the light amount by operating the up button 137a and the down button 137b. After that, each time the left button 137c is pressed, the setting can be changed to decrease the volume or light amount, and each time the right button 137d is pressed, the setting can be changed to increase the volume or light amount. be able to.

In this adjustment screen, the long-press automatic continuous tapping function may be enabled, and when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the volume and the light amount are adjusted in accordance with the pseudo continuous tapping operation. The setting of may be changed. Alternatively, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the volume and light amount settings may be changed only each time the left button 137c and the right button 137d are pressed. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous tapping function is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the shift to the adjustment screen, the pseudo continuous tapping operation is not performed. Alternatively, the pseudo continuous hitting operation may be performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the adjustment screen. Similarly, the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b may be in the valid state or the invalid state in the long-press automatic continuous hitting function.

In this example of performance, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the display for setting the volume can select one of a plurality of types of images in accordance with the operation of the operation means. It can be said that this is an example of the first selection display. Then, for example, in the case where the setting is “0” in the volume setting, the display mode of the setting “10” is one time by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. It can be said that it is an example of the first image that is easier to select when the second operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode than when the operation is performed. It can be said that the voice output executed with “10” is an example of the fourth effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display. The same applies to the light amount setting.

When "member registration" is selected on the menu screen, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a password input screen as shown in FIG. 246(d). That is, "Enter password" is displayed at the top of the display screen to indicate that a password can be entered, and below that, a four-digit entry that displays the entered characters is displayed. A character display area is provided. Then, below the input character display area, alphabets A to Z and a cursor UB which is an underlined display mode are displayed. The cursor UB indicates only one of the alphabets A to Z, and indicates "S" on the display screen shown in FIG. 246(d). In this password input screen, when the up button 137a, the down button 137b, the left button 137c and the right button 137d are pressed, the cursor UB moves, and when the effect button 136 is pressed, the cursor UB points. The alphabet is displayed in the input character display area with the alphabet as the input character. Then, as a result of inputting the alphabet in each of the four-digit input character display area, if the input password is correct, the game history corresponding to the input password is input. Note that the password input screen can be terminated by pressing the cancel button 136f, for example.

In this password input screen, the long press automatic continuous tapping function may be enabled, and if the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, a pseudo The cursor UB may be moved in accordance with the continuous hitting operation. Alternatively, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the cursor UB can be moved only for each pressing operation of the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c and the right button 137d. May be done. In addition, in the case where the long press automatic continuous tapping function is enabled, if the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the password input screen is displayed, , The pseudo continuous tapping operation is performed by pressing the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, or the right button 137d again after shifting to the password input screen without performing the pseudo continuous tapping operation. May be.

In this effect example, in the case where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the password input screen displays a first image in which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said as an example of the selection display. Then, for example, when the alphabet pointed to by the cursor UB is “S”, the display mode in which the cursor UB points to the alphabet “K” is the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. Is an example of the first image that is more easily selected when the second operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode than when the first operation is performed by the operation means You can

Further, in this effect example, in the case where the long press automatic continuous tapping function is enabled, the password input screen displays a first image in which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said as an example of the second selection display. Then, for example, when the alphabet pointed to by the cursor UB is “S”, the display mode in which the cursor UB points to the alphabet “K” is the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. Can be selected when the third operation is performed by the operation means, and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display. It can be said to be an example of the second image that can be selected. In other words, it can be said that the display mode indicating the alphabet "K" is displayed even when the left button 137c is repeatedly hit, and the display mode indicating the alphabet "K" is displayed even when the left button 137c is long-pressed.

Further, when "game history" is selected on the menu screen, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a code issuing screen as shown in FIG. 246(e). That is, at the upper part of the display screen, a "code issuing screen" is displayed to the effect that the game history can be acquired by reading the two-dimensional code with a mobile terminal or the like equipped with an imaging means, and below the display. The two-dimensional code CD in which the game history of the player is coded is displayed on the screen, and the text "Please read" prompting the reading of the two-dimensional code CD is displayed. In this effect example, the code issuing screen can be said to be an example of an effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.

The menus that can be selected on the menu screen described above are not limited to those described above, and various menus can be set. For example, as shown in FIG. 246(f), a favorite selection screen for selecting a character to appear in a big hit or in a normal game state may be displayed. That is, in the favorite selection screen, a "favorite selection screen" indicating that the character can be selected is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, and below the "favorite selection screen" for allowing the character A to appear. , “Character B” for causing the character B to appear, and “Character C” for causing the character C to appear, are selectably displayed. Below these selection items, the characters of “select” are displayed together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and further to the right thereof, the characters of “decide” are displayed together with the icon of the effect button 136. It is informed that the cursor CL can be moved by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and the character indicated by the cursor CL can be made to appear by operating the effect button 136.

In this favorite selection screen, the long-press automatic continuous tapping function may be enabled, and when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the cursor CL is moved in accordance with the pseudo continuous tapping operation. May be moved. At this time, the pseudo continuous tapping operation interval may be set to, for example, an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the selection item to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long-press auto continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the selection items to be selected may be sequentially changed only each time the left button 137c and the right button 137d are pressed. In addition, when the long press automatic continuous tapping function is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the shift to the favorite selection screen, a pseudo continuous tapping operation is performed. Alternatively, the pseudo continuous tapping operation may be performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the favorite selection screen.

In this effect example, in the case where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the favorite selection screen displays the first image in which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said as an example of the selection display. Then, the selection item of “character C” is the operation means in the first operation mode more than the case where the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. Therefore, it can be said that the case where the second operation is performed is an example of the first image that is easier to select. Then, the effect by the character C that appears by selecting the "character C" can be said to be an example of a fourth effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.

Further, in this effect example, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the favorite selection screen displays the first image from which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said as an example of the second selection display. The selection item of “character C” can be selected when the third operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during the execution of the second selection display. It can be said that this is an example of the second image that can be selected when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode during execution of the selective display. Then, the effect by the character C that appears by selecting the "character C" can be said to be an example of the fifth effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 246(g), a song selection screen for selecting a song to be output during a big hit or in a normal gaming state may be displayed. That is, on the song selection screen, it is possible to select from three selection items, "song A" for outputting song A, "song B" for outputting song B, and "song C" for outputting song C. Is displayed in. Below these selection items, the characters of “select” are displayed together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and further to the right thereof, the characters of “decide” are displayed together with the icon of the effect button 136. It is informed that the cursor CL can be moved by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and the music indicated by the cursor CL can be output by operating the effect button 136.

In this song selection screen, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled, and when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the cursor CL is moved according to the pseudo continuous hitting operation. May be moved. At this time, the pseudo continuous tapping operation interval may be set to, for example, an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the selection item to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long-press auto continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the selection items to be selected may be sequentially changed only each time the left button 137c and the right button 137d are pressed. Further, when the long-press automatic continuous tapping function is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the music selection screen is displayed, a pseudo continuous tapping operation is performed. Alternatively, the pseudo continuous tapping operation may be performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the music selection screen.

The song selection screen shown in FIG. 246(g) may be, for example, one that is executed in the jackpot start effect.

In this effect example, in the case where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the song selection screen displays the first image from which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said as an example of the selection display. Then, the selection item of “tune C” is operated in the first operation mode as compared with the case where the operation device is operated once in the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. Therefore, it can be said that the case where the second operation is performed is an example of the first image that is easier to select. Then, the song C that is selected and output as “song C” can be said to be an example of a fourth effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.

Further, in this effect example, when the long press auto continuous hitting function is enabled, the music selection screen displays the first image from which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said as an example of the second selection display. The selection item of “Song C” can be selected when the third operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. It can be said that this is an example of the second image that can be selected when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode during execution of the selective display. The music C that is selected and output as “song C” can be said to be an example of a fifth effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 246(h), a customization screen for individually setting various settings in the game may be displayed. That is, at the top of the display screen, a "customization screen" indicating that various settings in the game can be individually set is displayed, and below the display, a function 1, a function 2, and a function 3 are displayed. .. and setting contents for each setting item are displayed. At the bottom of these displays, the characters "Select with" are displayed together with the icons of the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b, and on the right side thereof, "Change with" with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. Is displayed, and it is possible to change the setting for the function selected by the left button 137c and the right button 137d by pressing the up button 137a and the down button 137b to select the function whose setting is to be changed. It has been informed. The selected function is surrounded by a thick frame.

In this customization screen, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be enabled, and when the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b is continuously pressed, a thick frame is displayed in accordance with the pseudo continuous hitting operation. You may make it move. At this time, the pseudo continuous tapping operation interval may be set to, for example, an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the function to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the function to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each one pressing operation of the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hit is made effective, if the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b is continuously pressed before the shift to the customization screen, the pseudo continuous hit operation is not performed, It may be configured so that the pseudo continuous tapping operation is performed by pressing the up button 137a or the down button 137b again after shifting to the customization screen.

Further, when the long press automatic continuous tapping function is valid, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the setting can be changed in accordance with the pseudo continuous tapping operation. May be. Alternatively, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the function may be changed only each time the left button 137c and the right button 137d are pressed. Further, in the case where the long-press auto continuous hitting is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the shift to the customization screen, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is not performed, It may be configured such that the pseudo continuous tapping operation is performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the customization screen.

Note that when the various setting screens shown in FIGS. 246(b) to (h) are displayed, the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, the right button 137d, or the effect button 136 is pressed and held. In the state where the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 described above is started, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled and the operation is performed. A pseudo continuous tapping operation of the button may be performed, or a pseudo continuous tapping operation by the long press automatic continuous tapping function may be performed on condition that the button is pressed again after the effect is started. However, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

Also, the various setting screens shown in FIGS. 246(b) to (h) are configured to be displayed on the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but, for example, FIGS. The various setting screens shown in FIG. (h) may be made smaller than the entire display screen, and may be displayed so as to be superimposed on the effect display in the standby state shown in FIG. 246(a).

Also, in the effect display in the standby state shown in FIG. 246(a), when one pressing operation with the effect button 136 is performed, without going through the display of the menu screen shown in FIG. 246(b), For example, various setting screens as shown in FIGS. 246(c) to 246(h) may be directly displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, it may be possible to set in advance whether or not it is possible to validate the long press automatic continuous hitting function. For example, in the menu screen shown in FIG. 246(b), an ON/OFF setting menu for the long press automatic continuous hitting function is provided, and on the condition that the long press automatic continuous hitting function is turned ON in this setting menu, the effect button When the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled when the user presses the long press 136, and when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is turned off, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is not enabled even when the effect button 136 is long pressed. You may do it. Further, it may be possible to set ON/OFF of the long press automatic continuous hitting function by a predetermined operation with the operation key unit 137.

Further, in the effect examples described so far, when performing the continuous hit operation effect, if the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, the effect button image may display a moving image in which the effect button image is continuously hit accordingly. Further, when the long-press operation effect is executed, when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time, the effect button image may display a moving image as if the long-press operation is performed accordingly. In addition, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled and the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time so that a pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed, the effect button image is not hitted by long-pressing, but continuously hit. You may make it display the moving image which is doing, and may display the moving image as if pressing and holding. The moving image display according to such an operation is not limited to the effect button 136, but may be applied to the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d shown in FIG. 246, and the up button 137a and the down button 137b. May be applied to the icon.
FIG. 247 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the effect movable object is initially set.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 247, as shown in FIG. 247(a), the production movable object GM1 is provided on the game board 200, and the position shown by the chain line in the figure (of the decorative symbol display device 208). It is configured to be able to move from an upper position that does not overlap the decorative symbol display device 208) to a position indicated by a solid line (a position that overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208). Further, as shown in FIG. 247(c), the effect movable member GM2 is provided at the lower left of the front frame door 106, and the effect movable member GM3 is provided at the upper right of the front frame door 106. The production movable member GM2 is rotatably attached to the front side with the pivot support shaft side of the front frame door 106 as a support shaft, and the production movable member GM3 is supported along the upper edge of the front frame door 106. A shaft is provided and is rotatably attached upward with the support shaft as a support shaft. These effect movable members GM1, GM2, GM3 are driven by, for example, a stepping motor.

In order to operate these effect movable members GM1, GM2, and GM3 normally, it is necessary to perform an initial operation and recognize the initial position. However, the production movable members GM2 and GM3 provided on the front frame door 106 may collide with the game store clerk by being operated at a timing unintended by the game store clerk performing the opening operation, for example. The effect movable members GM2, GM3 need to be initially operated at the timing intended by the game store clerk.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, first, as shown in FIG. 247(a), the initial operation of the effect movable member GM1 provided on the game board 200 that is unlikely to hit the game store clerk. Is done. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 247(b), if a long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed within 1 minute after the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 247(c), The initial operation of the production movable members GM2, GM3 is performed. As a result, it may be possible to reduce the possibility that the game store staff may collide with the effect movable member performing the initial operation during the opening operation of the game store staff.

Here, in order to perform the initial operation of the production movable member GM2, GM3, long-press operation of the production button 136 is performed, and in the state where the production button 136 is continuously pressed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. However, when the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 described above is started, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled, and a pseudo continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 may be performed. It is also possible to perform a pseudo continuous hitting operation by the long press automatic continuous hitting function under the condition that the effect button 136 is pressed again after the effect is started, or the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled. Good.

Although the initial operation of the effect movable members GM2, GM3 is started by the long-press operation of the effect button 136, the initial operation of the effect movable members GM2, GM3 is performed by one pressing operation of the effect button 136 (single-shot operation). May be started, or the initial operation of the effect movable members GM2, GM3 may be started by continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136.

Further, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled only for some of the selection effects described above, or the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled for all of them. In addition, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be enabled for only some of the selection effects described above, or the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be enabled for all of them.

Further, when the front button door 106 is opened, when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, a specific menu to be set by the game shop clerk may be configured to be executable. In this case, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled or enabled.

In addition, the long-press auto continuous hitting function described above may be enabled over a plurality of symbol variations, or may be disabled when a symbol is stopped and displayed over a plurality of symbol variations. May not function.

Also, in the case where a plurality of effect buttons are provided, when one of the effect buttons is being continuously struck by a pseudo effect button by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, the operation for the other effect button is not accepted. Alternatively, the acceptance of the operation for one effect button may be temporarily stopped, the operation for the other effect button may be accepted, and then the operation for the one effect button may be resumed.

Further, for example, in addition to the effect button 136, a lever for production, a touch sensor, or the like may be provided, and the long-press automatic continuous hitting function or the automatic button function may be enabled for the lever or touch sensor for production.

Further, for example, the effect in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled may be made to have regularity, and for example, after the start of the super reach effect, the effect that the long press automatic continuous hitting function becomes effective is not performed. You may Further, after the start of the super reach effect, the continuous hit effect may be performed.

Further, among executable continuous hit effects, there may be more or less effects in which the long press automatic continuous hit function is disabled than effects in which the long press automatic continuous hit function is enabled. May be.

Further, the expectation for the big hit may be higher or lower in the effect in which the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled than in the effect in which the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled.

In addition to the second effect, the Nth effect may be an effect in which the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled.

In addition to the first effect, the Mth effect may be an effect in which the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled.

Further, the effect in which the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is invalid may be only the second effect.

Further, the effect in which the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is valid may be only the first effect.

Further, for example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be made effective for what is determined as a result of the operation.

Further, in the effect in which the character display of “continuous hit” is displayed, the long press automatic continuous hit function may be made effective.

Further, in the continuous hitting operation effect (or the plural times operation effect) relating to the success or failure of the big hit, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be made effective.

Further, in the embodiments described so far, effects such as effects may be performed in accordance with the pseudo continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the long-press auto continuous hitting function. It can be said that the effect is different from the first effect referred to in the invention. In other words, the first effect can be referred to as an effect displayed as a result of a pseudo repeated hit operation of the effect button 136 by the long-press auto continuous hit function.

Further, in the continuous hitting operation effect in which the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, for example, an effect effect may be performed in accordance with the consecutive hitting operation (a plurality of operations) of the effect button 136 by the player, but such an effect Can be said to be an effect different from the second effect referred to in the present invention. In other words, the second effect can be referred to as an effect displayed as a result of the continuous hitting operation (many times of operation) of the effect button 136.

In addition, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is made effective for the continuous hitting operation (a plurality of operations) effect that is mainly executed by the control unit (for example, the main control unit 300) that determines whether or not the winning or hitting is successful. Alternatively, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

In addition, the control means (for example, the main control unit 300) that determines the winning/disapproval determination is not the control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500) different from this, and the execution is determined. The long-press automatic continuous hit function may be enabled or the long-press automatic continuous hit function may be disabled for the repeated hit operation (many times of operation) effect.

In addition, including the embodiments described so far, the relationship between the effect button 136 and the effect (button effect) related to the effect button 136 is exemplified as follows.

(1) When the single-shot operation is performed after the button effect (single-shot operation effect) for executing one pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the effect button 136 is started, the effect related to the result of the operation is executed. R.

(2) In the case where the single-shot operation effect is continuously executed a plurality of times, when the long-press operation with the effect button 136 is performed, only the effect related to the result of the operation related to the first button effect is executed. Alternatively, effects related to the results of operations related to all button effects are executed.

(3) When the continuous hit operation is performed after the button effect (continuous hit operation effect) that causes the effect button 136 to perform a plurality of pressing operations (continuous hit operation) is started, the effect related to the operation result is executed. R. In addition, when the long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed after the continuous hit operation effect is started, when the long press automatic continuous hit function is effective, the effect related to the operation result is executed.

(4) When the continuous hitting operation is performed after the long-press operation effect has been started, the effect may proceed as it is, for example, an effect corresponding to the accumulated pressing time of the effect button 136 is executed. .. Further, when the long press operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started, the effect regarding the result of the operation is executed. In this case, for example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is effective, the effect may be advanced as it is by performing a pseudo continuous hitting operation, or the operation is performed assuming that the effect button 136 is long pressed. May be accepted.

(5) When the single-shot operation effect is started in a state where the effect button 136 is continuously pressed (continuously pressed state), the operation by the effect button 136 is accepted as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained. Absent.

(6) When the continuous hitting operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is effective, a pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed, so that the effect related to the operation result is executed. R. In this case, a pseudo continuous stroke operation is performed from the time when the continuous stroke operation effect is started. In addition, when the continuous hitting operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the pseudo single shot operation is performed. May be. Further, when the continuous hitting operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state, the operation by the effect button 136 is not accepted as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained.

(7) When the long press operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state, the operation by the effect button 136 is not accepted as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained.

(8) When the single-shot operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state and then the single-shot operation effect is started, effects related to the result of the operation regarding these single-shot operation effects are executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect that is started earlier is executed. Alternatively, only the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect that is started later is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect having a predetermined high priority is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained, none of the effects is executed.

(9) When the single-shot operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state, and then the continuous hit operation effect is started, effects related to the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect and effects related to the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect are executed. To be done. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect is executed. Alternatively, only the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained, none of the effects is executed.

(10) In the continuously pressed state, when the single-shot operation effect is started and then the long-press operation effect is started, the effect on the result of the operation on the single-shot operation effect and the effect on the result of the operation on the long-press operation effect. Is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the long press operation effect is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained, none of the effects is executed.

(11) When the continuous hitting operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state, and then the single-shot operation effect is started, effects related to the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect and effects related to the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect are executed. To be done. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect is executed. Alternatively, only the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained, none of the effects is executed.

(12) When the continuous hitting operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state and then the continuous hitting operation effect is started, the effect concerning the result of the operation for these continuous hitting operation effects is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation of the continuous hit operation effect that has been started is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation of the continuous hit operation effect that is started later is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the continuous hitting operation effect having a predetermined high priority is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained, none of the effects is executed.

(13) When the continuous hitting operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state and then the long-pressing operation effect is started, an effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the continuous hitting operation effect and an effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the long-press operation effect. Is executed. Alternatively, only the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the long press operation effect is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained, none of the effects is executed.

(14) When the long-press operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state and then the single-shot operation effect is started, an effect related to the operation result for the long-press operation effect and an effect related to the operation result for the single-shot operation effect. Is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the long press operation effect is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained, none of the effects is executed.

(15) When the long press operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state and then the continuous hit operation effect is started, an effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the long press operation effect and an effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect. Is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the long press operation effect is executed. Alternatively, only the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained, none of the effects is executed.

(16) When the long press operation effect is started in the continuously pressed state and then the long press operation effect is started, effects related to the result of the operation for these long press operation effects are executed. Alternatively, only the effect regarding the result of the operation of the long-press operation effect that has been started previously is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation of the long-press operation effect started later is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation of the long-press operation effect having a predetermined high priority is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained, none of the effects is executed.

(17) When the long press operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started, and the single shot operation effect is started in that state, only the effect related to the operation result of the long press operation effect is executed, Unless the long-press operation is once released, the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect is not executed. Alternatively, both the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the long press operation effect and the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the single shot operation effect are executed. In addition, when the continuous hitting operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started and the single shot operation effect is started in that state, the long press operation effect is, for example, according to the accumulated pressing time of the effect button 136. There is a case where the effect proceeds as it is, such as when the effect is performed, and the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect is executed.

(18) When the long press operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started and the continuous hit operation effect is started in that state, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect is executed, As long as the long-press operation is not canceled once, the effect related to the result of the operation of the repeated hit operation effect is not executed. Alternatively, both the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the long press operation effect and the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect are executed. In addition, when the continuous hitting operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started and the continuous hit operation effect is started in that state, the long press operation effect is, for example, according to the accumulated pressing time of the effect button 136. There is a case where the effect proceeds as it is, for example, the effect is performed, and the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect is executed.

(19) When the long-press operation is performed after the long-press operation effect is started and the long-press operation effect is started in that state, the operation result of the long-press operation effect that was started first is related. As long as the effect is only executed and the long press operation is not canceled once, the effect related to the result of the operation of the long press operation effect that is started later is not executed. Alternatively, an effect regarding the result of the operation of any long-press operation effect is executed. In addition, when the continuous hitting operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started and the long press operation effect is started in that state, for the long press operation effect that is started earlier, for example, the effect button 136. The effect may proceed as it is, for example, the effect according to the accumulated press time of the button is performed, and for the long press operation effect that is started later, for example, the effect according to the accumulated press time of the effect button 136 is executed. In some cases, the production may proceed as it is.

(20) When the long-press operation is performed after the continuous-stroke operation effect is started and the single-shot operation effect is started in that state, the long-press automatic continuous-stroke function becomes effective, and the operation for the continuous-stroke operation effect is performed. Only the effect related to the result is executed, and the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect is not executed unless the long press operation is temporarily released. Alternatively, both the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect and the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the single shot operation effect are executed. In addition, after the continuous hit operation effect is started, the continuous hit operation is performed, and when the single-shot operation effect is started in that state, the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect and the result of the operation regarding the single-shot operation effect Both of the productions regarding are performed.

(21) If the long press operation is performed after the continuous hit operation effect is started and the continuous hit operation effect is started in that state, the long press auto continuous hit function becomes effective and the previously started continuous hit operation is performed. Only the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the operation effect is executed, and unless the long-press operation is temporarily released, the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the operation effect that is started later is not executed. Alternatively, an effect regarding the result of the operation of any continuous hit operation effect is executed. In addition, after the continuous hitting operation effect is started, when the continuous hitting operation is performed and the continuous hitting operation effect is started in that state, the effect concerning the result of the operation for any of the continuous hitting operation effects is executed.

(22) When the long press operation is performed after the continuous hit operation effect is started and the long press operation effect is started in that state, the long press auto continuous hit function becomes effective, and Only the effect related to the result of the operation is executed, and the effect related to the result of the operation regarding the long-press operation effect is not executed unless the long-press operation is temporarily canceled. Alternatively, both the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect and the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the long press operation effect are executed. In addition, when the continuous hit operation is performed after the continuous hit operation effect is started and the long press operation effect is started in that state, the effect regarding the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation effect is executed, and the long press operation effect is performed. With respect to, for example, the effect may proceed as it is, such as the effect according to the accumulated pressing time of the effect button 136 is executed.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 248 to 272. Further, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiment described below can be applied to any of the embodiments described above.

248 to 272 are diagrams showing, in stages, the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 248 to 272, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the first special symbol reservation lamp 218 and the second special symbol reservation lamp 220 Although illustrated, the universal figure display device 210 and the universal figure holding lamp 216 are omitted. Note that in FIGS. 248 to 272, the types of special symbols to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 are the stop symbol modes shown in FIGS. 68(a) and 68(b). Has been done. Further, in FIGS. 248 to 272, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, but as in the above-described embodiment, a device including a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. May be Further, the transparent light guide plate IL described above may be arranged on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 248 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 249 is a diagram showing a continuation of the concrete effect example shown in FIG. 248. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 248(1), the combination of decorative patterns "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background is not shown, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, if the background is not shown, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed.

On the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed. Special figure 1 4th design t1 and special figure 2 4th design t2 is the design in order to inform whether or not it is in the design fluctuation (or the design stop). The special symbol 1 4th symbol t1 is, while the symbol of the special symbol 1 is stopped, the symbol “X” corresponding to the result of the loss or the symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol in the special symbol 1 is displayed, and the symbol of the special symbol 1 is displayed. During the change, the symbol "-" is displayed blinking. Special symbol 2 4th symbol t2, the symbol of special symbol 2 is displayed while the symbol of special symbol 2 is stopped, and the symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol in special symbol 2 is displayed. During the change, the symbol "-" is displayed blinking. In this way, the fourth symbol is different not only in the display position from the decorative symbol but also in the display mode (here, the shape), so that the player can determine it only by looking at it. By changing the display mode, lighting mode, or blinking mode of the fourth symbol, a pre-reading notice or a notice regarding the variable display of the symbol may be given.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower left corner of the display screen.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 248 is a non-electric power support state (non-time saving state). On the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. It should be noted that, in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 may be displayed.

The number of holdings of special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of special figure 1 as well as the number of lighting of special figure 1 holding lamp 218. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon,.... The holding icons of the special figure 1 are displayed side by side, and the holding icons on the left side are the holding icons with older winnings.

In FIG. 248(1), three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of special figure 1 are displayed, and all of these three hold icons h11 to h13 of special figure 1 are in the default display mode (circular shape). No pattern and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokushu 1 is a round hold icon. On the other hand, none of the holding icons in special figure 2 are displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 248 is the non-electric power support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric Chu and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because there is.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the holding icon of the special map that is more likely to win the prize in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. .. That is, when the control state is the non-electric power support state, as shown in FIG. 248(1), the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is displayed and the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is hidden. When the control state is the power support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed and the hold icon of special figure 1 is hidden.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is also a circular unpatterned and white display mode, but the display position is different from the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 Alternatively, the display mode (here, the shape) may be different. By doing so, it may be possible for the player to make a distinction at a glance.

In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed in the order of the variation start in the special symbol display device→the start or the extinction of the fourth symbol blinking→the start of the hold icon moving animation→the variation symbol of the decorative symbol. , This order may be mixed up.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248(2), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the variable icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 move to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and the display position of the second hold icon h12, respectively. , The first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248(3), the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Savohani, and a state in which the hold notice is started is shown. That is, the display mode of Sabohani is the display mode of the advance notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248(4), the button operation effect requesting the operation of the effect button 136 is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 248(4), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with this button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display). The display state of the button reception time meter MT changes according to the time from the start of the operation valid period in such a manner that the gauge in the rectangular frame decreases. This button reception time meter MT is a display showing the maximum time during which the operation of the effect button 136 can be received after the operation effective period starts. Here, the button image 136a is displayed on the front side of the middle pattern of the decorative pattern so as to be overlapped (overlapped), but is arranged on the rear side of the decorative pattern and is overlapped (overlapped) with the decorative pattern. ) May be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 248(4), the operation valid period has not started yet, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 248(5) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, the step-up notice is started as shown in FIG. 248(6). R. At this time, the button reception time meter MT is deleted together with the button image 136a. The step-up notice is a notice that switching display is performed in a plurality of steps, and indicates that the reliability of the big hit is high as the step progresses. The step-up notice in this example of effect is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display, but may be executed as a prefetch notice. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 248(6), the display SU1 of step 1 in the step-up notice is displayed. The display SU1 in step 1 is a display represented by the face of the longest character. In this effect example, the case where the display of step 2 is performed after the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed is more than the case where the display of step 2 is not displayed after the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. Also, it is configured to be a big hit (a big hit pattern is likely to be confirmed and displayed). Note that the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed in an overlapping manner on the front side of the middle pattern of the decorative pattern, but it may be arranged on the rear side of the decorative pattern and may be displayed so as to be superimposed by the decorative pattern. Further, the step-up notice may not be started even if the effect button 136 is operated.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248(7), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, the step-up notice has ended, and the display SU1 of step 1 has been deleted. In other words, the previous step-up notice ends with the display SU1 of step 1.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248(8), the second stop is performed and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248(9), the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed, and then in FIG. 248(10). As shown in the figure, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the combination of the defective decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2” is confirmed and displayed. At this time, in the special symbol 1 4th symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is a loss is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol "Special figure I", which is a lost symbol, is stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248(11), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the variable icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which has been the display mode of the pre-reading notice, moves to the change icon display area 280 without changing the display form, and becomes the change icon h0 which is the notice display mode regarding the symbol change.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248(12), the button operation effect is started, and the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are displayed in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 248(4). At the timing shown in FIG. 248(12), the operation valid period has not started yet, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

After that, after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 248(13), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. As shown, the step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, although the button image 136a is erased, the button reception time meter MT is still displayed, and the display mode is changed so that the gauge decreases in accordance with the time from the start of the operation valid period. Here, the speed at which the gauge decreases may be faster, the same, or slower than the speed at which the gauge is displayed before the effect button 136 is operated. Further, in the button reception time meter MT, a plurality of miniature characters BCH having a lengthwise face and having a lengthwise face are arranged side by side (five in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 248(15)) in the remaining display portion of the gauge. There is. The number of full length mini-characters BCH displayed on the button reception time meter MT is a number according to the remaining amount of the gauge (the time from the start of the operation valid period). In this example of performance, the miniature character BCH having the longest length is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, thereby functioning as a notice display indicating that the reliability of the big hit is high. In addition, when the effect button 136 is operated, the display of the mini character BCH of the length in the button reception time meter MT (the notification display using the button reception time meter MT) is started after the display of the step-up notification is started. The step-up notice display may be started after the notice display using the button reception time meter MT is started, or the step-up notice display start and the button may be started. The start of the advance notice display using the reception time meter MT may be the same timing. This also applies to the following description. Further, the advance notice display using the button reception time meter MT is performed from the start of the operation valid period until the time corresponding to the maximum time of the operation valid period elapses, but ends at a timing earlier than that. Alternatively, it may be finished at a later timing. In addition, even if the effect button 136 is operated, the miniature character BCH of the length may not be displayed on the button reception time meter MT. That is, in this effect example, the case where the longest mini character BCH is displayed on the button reception time meter MT is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the longest mini character BCH is not displayed on the button reception time meter MT. Is configured. In addition, a mini character (for example, a princess mini character) different from the bancho mini character BCH may be displayed, and the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the displayed mini character. Further, after the mini character BCH having the length is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, a step-up notice that the displayed mini character is changed may be given, for example, the display mode of the mini character BCH having the length is changed. However, it may be more likely to be a big hit. In this example of performance, the reliability of the big hit is the same regardless of the number of the mini-characters BCH having the longest hit, but the reliability of the big hits is depending on the number of the mini-characters BCH having the longest hit. May be different, and for example, the reliability of the big hit may be higher as the number of mini-characters BCH having the length is displayed. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a may be displayed in a display mode other than the default (for example, the display mode of the deca button, the display mode in which the button vibrates and rotates, etc.), for example, the display mode of the deca button. When the button image 136a is displayed with, when the effect button 136 is operated, the mini character of the princess may easily appear in the button reception time meter MT. When included, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed than when only the miniature character BCH having the length appears. On the other hand, when the button image 163a is displayed in the default display mode, only the miniature character BCH having the longest length may be likely to appear. In addition, in this example of performance, when the effect button 136 is operated after the operation valid period starts, the advance notice is displayed in a mode in which the miniature character BCH of the length is displayed on the button reception time meter MT. The advance notice may be displayed by changing the color of the gauge of the reception time meter MT (for example, changing from blue to red), or the advance notice may be displayed by changing the shape of the button reception time meter MT. You may do it. Further, in this effect example, the type of the notice display on the button reception time meter MT may be different depending on the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated after the operation effective period starts, for example, the operation effective period starts. When the effect button 136 is operated at an early timing, the miniature character BCH having the longest length is likely to be displayed, and when the effect button 136 is operated at a later timing after the operation valid period starts, the timer display is performed. A notice may be given. Further, the advance notice display using the button reception time meter MT is performed on a display means other than the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, a sub-display device, a display device provided on the front door frame 106, or the door 108 with a ball storage dish). You may do it.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248(16), the step-up notice is continuously given, and the display SU1 of step 1 is changed to the display SU2 of step 2. The display SU2 of step 2 is a display represented by the whole body of the bancho character. That is, in this effect example, it is suggested that the display SU2 of step 2 is displayed in the step-up notice, and that the jackpot is likely to be a big hit rather than the display SU1 of step 1 being finished. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Also, the number of miniature characters BCH displayed in full length is reduced in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge, and the number is three at the timing shown in FIG. 248(16).

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 248(17), the step-up notice is continuously given, and the display SU2 of step 2 is changed to the display SU3 of step 3. The display SU3 in step 3 is a display showing how the bancho character is breaking clothes. Further, along with the display of the display SU3 in step 3, the character "intense hot" is displayed above the display SU3 in step 3, which suggests that the jackpot reliability is extremely high. That is, in this effect example, it is suggested that the display SU3 of step 3 is displayed in the step-up notice, and that the jackpot is likely to be a big hit rather than the display SU2 of step 2 being finished. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Further, the number of miniature characters BCH displayed in full length also decreases in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge, and the number is one at the timing shown in FIG. 248(17). The button reception time meter MT may be erased (that is, the advance notice display using the button reception time meter MT is terminated) before the display SU2 of step 2 is changed to the display SU3 of step 3. The button reception time meter MT may be deleted at the timing when the display SU2 in step 2 changes to the display SU3 in step 3. Further, in this effect example, no effect is performed even when the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT is exhausted, but a notice may be given when the remaining amount of the gauge is exhausted. Further, in this example of performance, the mini character displayed on the button reception time meter MT and the number of steps executed in the step-up notice are not related, but for example, the mini character displayed on the button reception time meter MT. When the princess includes a mini character, the display SU3 in step 3 may be easily displayed, or conversely, the mini character displayed on the button reception time meter MT is only the mini character BCH having the bancho. If the display SU3 is configured of, the display SU3 of step 3 may not be displayed easily, and the step-up notice may be easily ended by the display SU1 of step 1 or the display SU2 of step 2. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a may be a display mode other than the default display mode (for example, the display mode of the big button, the display mode of vibrating and rotating, etc.). When the display mode is the display mode of the big button, the display SU3 of step 3 is more easily displayed than when it is the default display mode, and when the display mode of the button image 136a is the default display mode. May make it easier to end the step-up notice in the display SU1 of step 1 or the display SU2 of step 2 than in the case of the display mode of the big button.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (18), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. At this time, the step-up notice has ended and the button reception time meter MT has also been erased. Here, the step-up notice may be continued until the gauge remaining amount in the button reception time meter MT is exhausted, or may be ended before the gauge remaining amount is exhausted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (19) subsequent to FIG. 248 (18), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "Geki Atsu" to notify that the reach state has been reached, and suggests that the reliability of the big hit in this reach is high. In addition, normally, when the reach state is formed, “reach” is displayed to notify that the reach state has been reached. That is, it can be said that when the reach state is formed and the display of "intense hot" is performed, the jackpot is more likely to occur than when the display of "reach" is performed. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 249(20), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which it has developed into a super reach (sublimation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative pattern is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed in which the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 249(21), the button advance notice effect has been started, and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. Note that the button reception time meter MT is not displayed in this button advance notice effect.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (22), as shown in FIG. 249 (23), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the “up and down game” of the character of the lord's character in the balloon. A cut-in image including a balloon image in which the character "Ja" is arranged is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number of faces (for example, nine) are arranged around the word "Game" in the balloon, and a weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. It suggests that jackpots are more reliable than they would be displayed. In addition, when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be a big hit without fail (finally, the big hit symbol is finally displayed).

Then, as shown in FIG. 249 (24), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

Then, as shown in FIG. 249(25), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to a swing fluctuation is performed by a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”, and then, FIG. ), on the decorative pattern display device 208, the combination of the large-decoration decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1, "A" indicating that the special feature A is a big hit is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is also deleted. In the first special drawing display device 212, the special special drawing A is stopped and displayed in the form of the big hit symbol.

FIG. 250 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 250(1), a combination of missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed.

On the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower left corner of the display screen. Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 250 is a non-electric power support state (non-time saving state). Therefore, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280.

In FIG. 250(1), the two holding icons h11 and h12 of Toku-zu 1 are displayed, of which the first holding icon h11 is displayed in the display mode of Sabohani (prefetching notice). The second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250(2), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the variable icon display area 280. To the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250(3), the button operation effect has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250(3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with this button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display). Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 250(3), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 250(4) and the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 250(5), the result shown in FIG. As shown, the step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is erased, and the timer notice display TM is displayed instead of the button reception time meter MT. The timer display in the timer notice display TM displays the time corresponding to the time from the start of the operation valid period (that is, the remaining amount of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT when the effect button 136 is operated). However, at the timing shown in FIG. 250(6), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM displays "03.87" indicating 3.87 seconds. That is, the timer display shows the timing at which the notice effect performed by the completion of the countdown in the timer notice display TM is executed, and the time indicated by the timer display when the timer display is started is This differs depending on the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated after the operation valid period is started. That is, in this example of performance, it can be said that the timer notice is given by the timer notice display TM displayed in place of the button reception time meter MT. In this example of the effect, the timer advance notice display TM is displayed by operating the effect button 136, but the timer advance notice display TM may not be displayed in some cases. Further, when the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period, the timer notice display TM may not be displayed, or the timer notice display TM may be displayed.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250(7), the step-up notice is continuously given, and the display SU1 of step 1 is changed to the display SU2 of step 2. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM is displayed in a mode in which the time in the timer display is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and 2.49 seconds at the timing shown in FIG. 250(7). “02.49” indicating that is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 250(8), when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM becomes “00.00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 250(9), the decorative symbol display device 208 , The display SU2 of step 2 is changed to the display SU3 of step 3. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM changes its display color to red and is shown in bold type to inform that the advance notice has occurred due to the completion of the countdown. The change from the display SU2 in step 2 to the display SU3 in step 3 is a notice display made by the timer display in the timer notice display TM being counted up. That is, in this example of performance, it can be said that the reliability of the step-up notification is further enhanced by the result of the timer notification, with respect to the step-up notification started as a result of the button operation effect. In other words, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice given as a result of the countdown of the timer notice are interrelated. From another perspective, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice given as a result of the countdown of the timer notice are separate notices. In this example of effect, the effect contents of the step-up notice may be changed in accordance with the remaining time indicated by the timer display in the timer notice display TM. For example, the remaining content indicated by the timer display when the timer notice is started is changed. When the time is long (for example, 5 seconds), the display SU1 of step 1 through the display SU2 of step 2 is followed by the display SU3 of step 3, but the remaining time indicated by the timer display when the timer notice is started is displayed. If the number is small (for example, 1 second), after the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed, the display SU2 of step 2 cannot be displayed in time, so that the display SU2 of step 2 is not displayed and the display of step 3 is displayed. SU3 may be displayed. Alternatively, the display SU3 of step 3 may be displayed without displaying the display SU1 of step 1 and the display SU2 of step 2. In addition, in this example of performance, the timer display in the timer notice display TM is changed from the time corresponding to the operation valid period (for example, 5 seconds) to the time after the operation valid period is started (for example, 1.13 seconds). When the remaining time after subtraction is 3.87 seconds, "03.87" indicating this is displayed, but according to the gauge remaining amount of the button reception time meter MT when the effect button 136 is operated. The initial value of the timer may be displayed, and the display SU3 of step 3 may be displayed at the timing when the timer counts down from the displayed initial value of the timer to “00.00”. .. Specifically, for example, "04.00" is displayed as the initial value of the timer during the period (first period) within 1 second after the operation valid period is started, and within 2 seconds after exceeding 1 second. During the period (second period), "03.00" is displayed as the initial value of the timer... During the period within four seconds after the third time is exceeded (fourth period), the initial value of the timer is "01". ".00" may be displayed. In addition, when the operation valid period exceeds a certain period after the start, the timer advance notice may not be started.

After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 250(10) to (18) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 250(10) to (18) are the same as those in FIGS. 248(18) to 249(25), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 251 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 252 is a diagram showing a continuation of the concrete effect example shown in FIG. 251. .. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 251(1) to 251(5) are the same as those in FIGS. 250(1) to 250(5), description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 251(5) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 251(4), as shown in FIG. 251(6). Then, the step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, although the button image 136a is erased, the button reception time meter MT is still displayed, and the display mode is changed so that the gauge decreases in accordance with the time from the start of the operation valid period. Further, in the button reception time meter MT, a plurality of miniature characters BCH having a longest face and having a longest face (five in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 251 (6)) are arranged side by side in the remaining display portion of the gauge. There is. That is, the advance notice is displayed by displaying the miniature character BCH having the length. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 251 (6), the timer notice display TM is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and in the timer notice display TM, regardless of the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated, the predetermined time is displayed. The timer display indicating the time (for example, 30 seconds) (in the timer advance notice display TM shown in FIG. 251 (6), "30.00" indicating 30 seconds) is displayed. At this time, the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM may be changed according to the time when the operation valid period is started, and the timing of ending the countdown may be the same, or, for example, The timing at which the countdown ends may be adjusted by changing the time during which the reach effect is started and the transition from the normal reach to the super reach is performed, and the time at which the temporary stop display due to the fluctuation of the swing is performed is changed. Further, the timer display displayed on the timer advance notice display TM when the timer advance notice is started may be configured to display a time corresponding to the time from the start of the operation valid period. As described above, in this effect example, it is possible to say that one notice display in which the notice by the display of the miniature character BCH of the length in the button reception time meter MT and the timer notice by the timer notice display TM are integrated. In other words, in this example of performance, at least the time remaining at the time when the effect button 136 is operated, out of the time set as the operation valid period, is notified by the button reception time meter MT, and some kind of notice (banner mini It can be said that the character BCH is displayed and the timer is announced.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 251(7), the step-up notice is continuously given, and the display SU1 of step 1 is changed to the display SU2 of step 2. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Further, the number of miniature characters BCH displayed in full length also decreases in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge, and the number is three at the timing shown in FIG. 251(7). Further, in the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM, the countdown progresses according to the time from the start of the timer advance notice, and at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (7), "28.50" indicating 28.50 seconds. Is displayed.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 251 (8), the step-up notice is continuously given, and the display SU2 of step 2 is changed to the display SU3 of step 3. Further, along with the display of the display SU3 in step 3, the character "intense hot" is displayed above the display SU3 in step 3, which suggests that the jackpot reliability is extremely high. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Further, the number of miniature characters BCH displayed in full length also decreases in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge, and the number is one at the timing shown in FIG. 251(8). In the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM, the countdown progresses according to the time from the start of the timer advance notice, and at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (8), "26.00" indicating 26.00 seconds. Is displayed. Note that, in this effect example, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 250, the result of the countdown due to the timer notice does not affect the step-up notice, and the countdown still continues in FIG. 251(8). ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 251 (9), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. At this time, although the step-up notice is finished and the button reception time meter MT is also erased, the timer notice is continuously given and the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is progressing. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice continues to be given after the time corresponding to the operation valid period has elapsed and the step-up notice has ended. Further, the period in which the timer display in the timer notice display TM is displayed is longer than the period from when the operation valid period is started and the gauge in the button reception time meter MT starts to decrease until the remaining amount of the gauge becomes zero. It can also be said that it is a long period. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 251 (10) to (13) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 251(10) to (13) are the same as those in FIGS. 249(19) to 249(22), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 251(12), after the button advance notice effect is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 251(13), as shown in FIG. 251(14), the decorative pattern display is performed. On the device 208, a cut-in image including a balloon image in which the characters "Game" are arranged in the balloon is displayed together with the up image of the lord's character. The cut-in image displayed here is the weak cut-in image CI1b in which the banchou face is not displayed around the word "Game" in the balloon, and is a big hit compared to the case where the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Is less reliable, but suggests that the jackpot is more reliable than if the cut-in image was not displayed. At this time as well, the timer advance notice is continued, and the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM is in progress. At the timing shown in FIG. 251 (14), “10.50” indicating that the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM is 10.50 seconds remaining is displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 251 (15), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's shrine is defeated by an enemy swordsman, and a defeated screen is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". On the other hand, even at this time, the timer notice is continuously given, and the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is progressing. At the timing shown in FIG. 251 (15), "05.50" indicating that the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM is 5.50 seconds remaining is displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 251 (16) to (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. Then, the timer advance notice is continuously given, and when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM becomes "00.00" at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (17) and the countdown is completed, the time is shown in FIG. 251 (18). As shown in the decorative pattern display device 208, the banchou character BC appears backwards, and the timer notice display TM displays the word "revival" to notify that the revival effect will be performed. That is, it is reported that the big hit is confirmed. It should be noted that, in the revival effect, an effect in which the revival fails may be performed and the result of the loss may be derived.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 252 (19) subsequent to FIG. 251 (18), the backward-looking Bancho character BC faces the front and the decorative pattern of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5” The combination of is displayed, and it is informed that the jackpot will be a big hit. Further, the timer notice display TM also displays the word "Congratulations", celebrating the big hit.

After that, as shown in FIG. 252(20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to a swing fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5—decoration 5—decoration 5”, and thereafter, FIG. ), on the decorative pattern display device 208, the combination of the large-decoration decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1, "A" indicating that the special symbol A has been a big hit is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, on the first special figure display device 212, it is stopped and displayed in the form of the big hit symbol of special figure A.

FIG. 253 is a step-by-step diagram showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 253(1) is the same as that in FIG. 250(1), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253(2), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (target hold icon of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 253(3), the button operation effect has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253(3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with this button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display). In this example of performance, a length icon and a panda icon are displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT. Then, the button reception time meter MT in this effect example is different from the above-described mode, and as shown in FIGS. 253(3) to 253(7), it corresponds to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Then, the display mode changes so as to be gradually shortened. In response to the shortening of the button reception time meter MT, the panda icon arranged at the right end of the button reception time meter MT also moves to follow the right end of the button reception time meter MT. At this time, the position-fixed icon arranged at the left end of the button reception time meter MT is fixed and has not moved. In the following description, an icon that is arranged at the left end of the button reception time meter MT and whose position does not change regardless of the reduced display of the button reception time meter MT is called a fixing icon, and is arranged at the right end of the button reception time meter MT. The icon that is moved and is displaced according to the decrease display of the button reception time meter MT may be referred to as a moving icon. Therefore, as the time elapses, the panda icon is displayed so as to approach the bancho icon. In this example of performance, it can be said that something happens when the panda bites the guard, that is, the display itself of the button reception time meter MT functions as a notice display. Further, from another viewpoint, by displaying the button reception time meter MT, the advance notice display by the button reception time meter MT is started before the operation of the effect button 136 in the button operation effect is performed. It can be said that there is. In this example of performance, a step-up notice may be given in which the icons displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT change according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, for example, the operation valid period. When the button starts, two panda icons are displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT, and when time elapses, the panda icons change one by one to the longest icon, and as the icon changes, the jackpot reliability increases. It may be possible to make it easier to display a high-frequency notice, or to make it easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol as the icon changes. Further, in this example of performance, the advance notice display is performed in the mode in which the icon of the character is displayed on the button reception time meter MT. However, for example, the advance notice display is performed by changing the color of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT. This may be performed, or the advance notice display may be performed by changing the display mode of the button reception time meter MT.

FIG. 253(4) shows a state in which the button reception time meter MT is shortened as time passes after the operation valid period is started.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 253(5), the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 253(6). At this time, although the button image 136a is deleted, the button reception time meter MT is still displayed, and the display mode is such that the button reception time meter MT is gradually shortened according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Change. At this time, a mini character (for example, a mini character BCH of a banquet, a mini character of a princess, etc.) may be displayed on the button reception time meter MT for advance notice display. In this case, for example, if the two icons added to the button reception time meter MT are both long-length icons, the mini character of the princess is likely to be displayed and is added to the button reception time meter MT. When one icon is a combination of the length icon and the panda icon, the length mini character BCH may be easily displayed.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253(7), the step-up notice is continuously given, and the display SU1 of step 1 is changed to the display SU2 of step 2. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is further shortened according to the time after the operation valid period is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 253(7), the panda icon approaches the bancho icon, By displaying the character "gabutsu", it is shown that the panda is biting the guard. This may cause the player to expect something to happen and, as a result, to give him a sense of expectation for a big hit. In this example of performance, the advance notice display by the button reception time meter MT is performed within the range from the start of the operation valid period to the time corresponding to the operation valid period.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253(8), the display SU2 in step 2 is covered with the pattern of many stars in a manner that is difficult to visually recognize. At this time, the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner. This effect is an effect performed by the panda biting the guard, that is, the result of the notice display by the button reception time meter MT affects the step-up notice (the notice started by the operation of the effect button 136). It can be said to give. In this way, it may be possible to expect that the step-up notice will change. In addition, it is possible to make the step-up notice surprising because the step-up notice is further developed by pretending that the step-up notice is over. In this example of performance, the time from the start of the operation effective period to the start of displaying the result of the advance notice display by the button reception time meter MT is determined, and therefore the effect is generated after the operation effective period is started. The earlier the timing at which the button 136 is operated, the longer the execution time of the step-up notice. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button is not operated during the operation valid period, the step-up notice is not started, and the result of the notice display by the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 253(9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, instead of the display SU2 of step 2, the princess character HM is displayed together with the character display of "premier yo", and it is confirmed that the big hit is confirmed. The state of being notified is shown. That is, the result of the advance notice displayed by the button reception time meter MT shifts from the step-up notice to the premier notice. If the effect button 136 is not operated in the above-described button operation effect, the step-up notice is not started, and therefore, the premier notice is not given. However, even if the step-up notice is not given, the premier notice is not issued. It may be performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 253(10), it is informed that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" will be stopped and displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 253(11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to a swing fluctuation is performed by a combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", and thereafter, FIG. ), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns of the big hits of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1, "A" indicating that the special symbol A has been a big hit is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, on the first special figure display device 212, it is stopped and displayed in the form of the big hit symbol of special figure A.

FIG. 254 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In this example of the effect, a state of the effect performed when the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect is shown. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 254(1) to 254(3) are the same as those in FIGS. 250(1) to 250(3), so description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 254(4) shows a state after the button operation effect is started and the operation effective period is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 254(4) to 254(6), when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136, the step-up notice is started as shown in FIG. 254(7). The display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. In this effect example, a state in which the step-up notice is started after the operation valid period has elapsed even if the effect button 136 is not operated in the operation valid period is shown. In this case, since the button reception time meter MT is erased as the operation valid period elapses, the advance notice display using the button reception time meter MT is not performed. In addition, when the above-described auto button mode is set, it is assumed that the effect button 136 is pseudo-operated at a timing when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the operation valid period is started, When the step-up notice is started, the notice display using the button reception time meter MT may be performed, or only the step-up notice is given and the notice display using the button reception time meter MT is not performed. Alternatively, only the notice using the button reception time meter MT may be given, and the step-up notice may not be given. After the step-up notice starts at the timing shown in FIG. 254(7), the step-up notice develops in the decorative pattern display device 208 as shown in FIGS. 254(8) to (9). In this case, the display SU3 of step 3 may not be displayed and the step-up notice may end with the display SU2 of step 2, or the display SU1 of step 1 may be displayed without displaying the display SU2 of step 2. The step-up notice may end at. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 254(8) to (9) are the same as those in FIGS. 248(16) to (17), except that the button reception time meter MT is not displayed. Is omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254(10), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254(11), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "Geki Atsu" to notify that the reach state has been reached, and suggests that the reliability of the big hit in this reach is high. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

After that, in the case of a big hit after the reach effect as described above is performed, after the temporary stop display due to the swing fluctuation is performed, as shown in FIG. 254 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, It is confirmed and displayed by a combination of the decoration patterns of the jackpot of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1, "A" indicating that the special symbol A has been a big hit is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, on the first special figure display device 212, it is stopped and displayed in the form of the big hit symbol of special figure A.

FIG. 255 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the pseudo continuous effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 256 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 255. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 255(1) is the same as that in FIG. 250(1), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (2), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the variable icon display area 280. To the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different. Further, in this effect example, the character display "If three people are gathered, it is pseudo rendition" is displayed on the upper portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 to give a notice that the pseudo rendition will be performed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 255(3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255(3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with this button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect related to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect. The button reception time meter MT in this effect example is the same as that shown in FIG. 253(3) and described above, and the display mode changes as the button reception time meter MT itself becomes shorter as time passes. In this button operation effect, the effect button 136 is operated a plurality of times (three times in this effect example) to display the desired display result (Echigoya character ECG, lord's character YSM, princess character HME. By the display), it is foretold that the pseudo-link will be performed. When the pseudo-repeating is not performed, the three characters are not displayed. In addition, in this effect example, the character is displayed one by one for each operation, but the character may be increased one by one depending on the amount of long-pressing operation, or depending on the number of continuous hitting operations. The number of characters may be increased one by one. Also, two or more characters may be displayed simultaneously by one operation. If the number of operations of the effect button 136 does not reach the predetermined number (for example, 3 times) before the operation valid period elapses, the pseudo-relation may not be performed, or the pseudo-repetition may be performed. May be.

After that, when the operation valid period is started and the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 255(4), as shown in FIG. 255(5), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the Echigoya is displayed at the upper part of the display screen. Character ECG is displayed. When the second effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 255(5), as shown in FIG. 255(6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YSM is displayed at the upper part of the display screen. Are displayed side by side with the character ECG of Echigoya. Further, when the third operation of the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 255(6), as shown in FIG. 255(7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is displayed at the upper part of the display screen. Are displayed side by side with the lord's character YSM, and the desired display result is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 255 (8), the bunker icon and the panda icon displayed in association with the button reception time meter MT are separated from each other, and the characters "all set" are displayed on the button reception time meter MT. Will be displayed and it will be announced that the pseudo-link will be held.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (9), a combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 7-replay symbol-decoration 7" is displayed to show a state in which temporary stop is performed by the swing fluctuation display. , It is informed that the pseudo-link will be performed. That is, in this effect example, the replay symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol to notify that the pseudo-relation is performed. In this production example, "decoration 7-replay symbol-decoration 7" is displayed at the same time, but it may be sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of left symbol> right symbol> middle symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255(10), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol for the second time by the pseudo link is started is shown. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “×2” indicating the number of times the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started by pseudo-linking is displayed. In addition, a character display "If three people are gathered, it is a pseudo-relation" is displayed on the upper portion of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and it is announced that the second pseudo-reproduction will be performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (11), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 255(11), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with this button image 136a. This button operation effect is also a notice effect related to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect. The button reception time meter MT in this effect example is the same as that shown in FIG. 253(3) and described above, but the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. It is displayed. In this example of performance, pseudo-linking is more likely to occur when two icon of the length is displayed on the button reception time meter MT than when the icon of the length and the icon of the panda are displayed. When two icons are displayed, the pseudo-link may be performed without fail. When two button length icons are displayed on the button reception time meter MT, the button image 136a is displayed in a display mode other than the default mode (for example, the display mode of the deca button, the display mode of vibration and rotation, etc.). If the button image 136a is displayed in a display mode other than the default display mode, two button length icons may be easily displayed on the button reception time meter MT. ..

After that, the operation valid period is started, and when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 255 (12), as shown in FIG. 255 (13), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the Echigoya is displayed at the upper part of the display screen. Character ECG is displayed. Then, when the second effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 255(13), as shown in FIG. 255(14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YSM is displayed at the upper part of the display screen. Are displayed side by side with the character ECG of Echigoya. Further, when the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 255(14), as shown in FIG. 255(15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is displayed at the upper part of the display screen. Are displayed side by side with the lord's character YSM, and the desired display result is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 255 (8) and in the above-described manner, the pair of icons of the guard length displayed in association with the button reception time meter MT are separated from each other, and the button reception time meter MT indicates “all set”. The characters are displayed and it is announced that the second pseudo run will be performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (16), a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-replay symbol-decoration 7” is displayed, and a state is shown in which temporary stop is performed by the shaking fluctuation display. It is notified that the second pseudo-repeating will be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (17), a state is shown in which the variable display of the decorative symbol for the third time by the pseudo-linking has started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “×3” is displayed, which indicates the number of times that the variable display of the decorative symbol for the third time is started by the pseudo link. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display "If three people are gathered, it's really hot" is displayed to announce that a highly reliable big hit will be given.

Then, as shown in FIG. 256 (18) following FIG. 255 (17), button operation effect is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 256 (18), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with this button image 136a. This button operation effect is an announcement effect related to a certain announcement effect being performed. In the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 256(18), the length icons are displayed at both ends. In this example of performance, a more reliable notice is more likely to be generated when the two length icons are displayed than when the length icon and the panda icon are displayed on the button reception time meter MT, that is, , It is easy to be a big hit (the big hit pattern is easily confirmed and displayed) by displaying the two icon of the length.

After that, when the operation valid period is started and the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 256 (19), as shown in FIG. 256 (20), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the Echigoya is displayed at the upper part of the display screen. Character ECG is displayed. Then, when the second effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 256(20), as shown in FIG. 256(21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YSM is displayed above the display screen. Are displayed side by side with the character ECG of Echigoya. Further, when the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 256(21), as shown in FIG. 256(22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is displayed above the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the lord's character YSM, and the desired display result is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 256 (23), “decoration 7” is displayed on each of the left symbol and the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character ECG of Echigoya, the character TSM of the lord, and the character HME of the princess are arranged so as to overlap with the front side of the middle symbol, and in the button reception time meter MT displayed below them, The characters “Gekiatsu” are displayed, suggesting that the jackpot is highly reliable.

Then, as shown in FIG. 256 (24), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (sublimation reach). The effects shown in FIGS. 256(24) to (30) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 249(20) to (26), except that the decorative pattern forming the reach state is different, and thus the description thereof is omitted. To do.

FIG. 257 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the pseudo continuous effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In this effect example, it is shown that three characters are not arranged in the button operation effect and pseudo-relation is not performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 257(1) to (6) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 255(1) to (6), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 257(6), a button operation effect is being performed, and as a result of the effect button 136 being pressed twice, the state where the character ECG of Echigoya and the character YSM of the lord are displayed. It is shown. Then, when the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 257(6), as shown in FIG. 257(7), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the princess character HME, “X” is displayed to indicate that the princess character HME has not appeared.

Then, as shown in FIG. 257(8), the banquet icon and the panda icon displayed accompanying the button reception time meter MT are separated from each other, and the word "sorry" is displayed on the button reception time meter MT. It is displayed, and it is notified that the button operation effect has failed and the pseudo-relation is not performed. It should be noted that there may be a case where the pseudo-repeating is performed even though the three characters are not displayed and the character "sorry" is displayed. In this case, for example, as a premium effect of breaking the law, a big hit may be settled.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 257(9) to (12), the decorative design stops in the order of left design>middle design>right design, and the decorative design of the missing decorative design of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2" The combination is confirmed and displayed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 257(9) to (12) are the same as those in FIGS. 248(7) to 248(10), and thus the description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in this effect example, the icons displayed in association with the button reception time meter MT are the longest icon and the panda icon, and the two longest icons in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 255 to 256 are It is more difficult for the big hit symbols to be confirmed and displayed than when they are displayed.

FIG. 258 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In this example of the effect, a state of the effect performed when the effect button 136 is operated at a timing close to the end of the operation valid period in the button operation effect is shown. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 258(1) to 258(4) are the same as those in FIGS. 248(10) to 138(13), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 258(5) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 258(4), as shown in FIG. 258(6). Then, the step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. Here, as shown in FIG. 258(5), the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated is later than the timing shown in FIG. 248(14), and slightly before the end of the operation valid period. Has become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 258(6), the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT is small, and the number of the mini character BCH having the longest length displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge is only one.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 258(7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. On the other hand, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. The step-up notice ends at a timing before the left symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, the timing at which the step-up notice ends is set in advance (for example, in this example of performance, before the left symbol is stopped and displayed), the step-up notice can be executed during the production button. It changes depending on the timing when 136 is operated. Therefore, the later the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated, the shorter the execution time of the step-up notice. In this effect example, since the effect button 136 is operated at a timing slightly before the end of the operation valid period, after the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is started, the display SU3 of step 3 is performed. Although the display SU3 of step 3 was scheduled to be displayed because there is not enough time to perform the development effect, the step-up notice ends with the display SU1 of step 1. It should be noted that the display of the step-up notice to start the display may be determined according to the time when the step-up notice can be executed. In this case, the display SU1 of step 1 and the display SU2 of step 2 may not be displayed, and the display may be started from the display SU3 of step 3.

After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 258(8) to (15) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 258(7) to 258(15) are the same as those in FIGS. 248(18) to 249(26), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 259 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIGS. 259(1) to 259(4) are the same as those in FIGS. 248(10) to 248(13), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 259(5) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 259(4), as shown in FIG. 259(6). Then, the step-up notice will be started. In this effect example, when the step-up notice is started, the display is not started from the display SU1 of step 1, but the display is started from the display SU2 of step 2, and then, as shown in FIG. 259(7), Display SU3 of 3 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 259(5), this is a timing at which the effect button 136 is operated later than the timing shown in FIG. 248(14). Therefore, the executable time of the step-up notice is Since it is shorter than the execution time of the effect scheduled to be executed in the advance notice, when the display is started from the display SU1 of step 1, the display SU2 of step 2 and the display SU3 of step 3 cannot be sufficiently displayed. .. Therefore, in this effect example, the display of the step to start the display in the step-up notice is determined from the timing when the effect button 136 is operated, and the step-up notice is given based on this. For example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 259(5), it is determined to start the display from the display SU2 in step 2, and the display SU3 in step 3 is displayed. .. As a result, for example, when the display SU3 in step 3 is scheduled to be displayed, it may not be possible to see it due to the delay in the operation of the effect button 136. In this example of the effect, the above-described character icon may be added to both ends of the button reception time meter MT. For example, when the bancho icon and the panda icon are displayed, the effect button 136 is operated. Then, the mini-character BCH of the length is likely to appear on the button reception time meter MT, and when two icons of the length are displayed, the mini-character of the princess is more likely to appear than the mini-character BCH of the length. When the princess mini character appears, it may be more likely to be a big hit (the big hit pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed) than when the banquet mini character BCH appears.

After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 259(8) to (16) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 259(8) to (16) are the same as those in FIGS. 248(18) to 249(26), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 260 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 260(1) is the same as that in FIG. 250(1), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260(2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special diagram 1 is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the variable icon display area 280. To the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260(3), the button operation effect has been started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 260(3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, but the button reception time meter MT as described above is not displayed. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display).

After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 260(4), “5.00 seconds remaining” indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is displayed. The display of the remaining time is displayed such that the numerical value gradually decreases by the countdown method according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. The countdown display may be configured such that the countdown advances in response to the passage of the actual time, the countdown proceeds faster than the passage of the actual time, or the countdown progresses later than the passage of the actual time. You may choose to remove it. In addition, in this effect example, the display of the remaining time is started at the timing when the operation valid period is started, but the display of the remaining time may be started at the timing after the operation valid period is started. When the maximum time of the period is 5 seconds, after the operation valid period starts, the remaining time is displayed, such as "3.00 seconds left" when the remaining 3 seconds are left. Good.

After that, the timing shown in FIG. 260(5) (for example, in this example of performance, 2 seconds have passed since the operation valid period was started, and the remaining time is displayed as “3.00 seconds remaining”) When the effect button 136 is operated, the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 260(6). At this time, the countdown display is erased together with the button image 136a.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260(7), the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 253(3) is displayed below the display SU1 in step 1. The button reception time meter MT starts to be displayed with the same length regardless of the timing from the start of the operation valid period to the operation of the effect button 136. On the other hand, the execution period of the step-up notice depends on the timing from the start of the operation valid period to the operation of the effect button 136, and therefore the period in which the button reception time meter MT is displayed is also different. Therefore, the speed at which the button reception time meter MT becomes shorter differs depending on the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated. The speed at which MT becomes shorter becomes slower.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260(8), the step-up notice is continuously given, and the display SU1 of step 1 is changed to the display SU2 of step 2. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is shortened according to the time after the button reception time meter MT starts to be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 260 (8), the panda icon approaches the bancho icon. , "Gabutsu" is displayed to show that the panda bites the guard. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 260(9) to 260(13) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 260 to (13) are the same as those in FIGS. 253 (8) to (12), so description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in this example of effect, in the button operation effect, the display related to the operation valid period (the display of the remaining time and the display of the button reception time meter MT) is changed before and after the operation of the effect button 136. There is.

FIG. 261 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 261(1) is the same as that in FIG. 250(1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 261 (2), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the variable icon display area 280. To the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 261(3), the button operation effect has been started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 261(3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, but the button reception time meter MT as described above is not displayed. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display).

Then, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 261 (4), “5 seconds remaining” showing the remaining time of the operation valid period is displayed. The display of the remaining time is displayed such that the numerical value is reduced by the countdown method according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. In this effect example, as compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 260, since there is no display for less than 1 second, it can be said that the remaining time is roughly displayed. The countdown display may be configured such that the countdown advances in response to the passage of the actual time, the countdown proceeds faster than the passage of the actual time, or the countdown progresses later than the passage of the actual time. You may choose to remove it.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 261 (5) (for example, in this example of performance, 1 second has elapsed from the start of the operation valid period, and the remaining time is displayed as “4 more seconds”), When the effect button 136 is operated, the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 261 (6). At this time, although the button image 136a is erased, the countdown display is still displayed and the countdown is also continued. Also, at this time, the "after" part of the countdown display has been deleted, indicating that the display has switched from the display of the remaining time of the operation effective period to the display of the timer notice until a certain effect is performed. ing.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 261(7) to 261(10), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a countdown as a timer notice. At this time, the display of the numerical portion of the countdown display changes to multicolor (for example, 7 colors), which suggests that the reliability of the big hit is high. When the display of the numerical portion of the countdown display changes to multiple colors, the big hit may be confirmed. Further, the numerical portion of the countdown display may be displayed in another color, for example, the reliability of the big hit may be changed depending on the display color. Further, for example, the typeface of the numerical portion of the countdown display may be changed so that the displayed typeface suggests the reliability of the big hit. Further, in the step-up notice, the development from step 1 is not performed, and the display SU1 of step 1 remains unchanged.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 261(10), the countdown display becomes “0 second”, and when the countdown is completed, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the step 1 as shown in FIG. 261(11). The display changes from SU1 to SU3 in step 3. Also, the countdown display is erased. The change from the display SU1 in step 1 to the display SU3 in step 3 is a notice display made when the countdown as the timer notice is completed. That is, in this example of performance, it can be said that the reliability of the step-up notification is further enhanced by the result of the timer notification, with respect to the step-up notification started as a result of the button operation effect. In other words, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice given as a result of the countdown of the timer notice are interrelated. From another perspective, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice given as a result of the countdown of the timer notice are separate notices.

Then, for example, after the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed in the reach state in the manner shown in FIGS. 248(18) to (19), the effects shown in FIGS. 261(12) to (18). Is done. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 261 (12) to (18) are the same as those in FIGS. 249 (20) to (26), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 262 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 262(1) is the same as that in FIG. 250(1), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (2), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the variable icon display area 280. To the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different. In addition, in this example of performance, a character display "If three people gather, it is a chance" is displayed at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and it is suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is high if three characters appear. Has been done.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262(3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 262(3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with this button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display). The button reception time meter MT in this effect example is the same as that shown in FIG. 253(3) and described above, and the display mode changes as the button reception time meter MT itself becomes shorter as time passes. In this button operation effect, the effect button 136 is operated a plurality of times (three times in this effect example) to display the desired display result (Echigoya character ECG, lord's character YSM, princess character HME. By displaying it, it is notified that a notice with high reliability of the big hit is given. That is, when all three characters are displayed, the notice is more likely to be displayed than when all three characters are not displayed. In addition, in this effect example, the character is displayed one by one for each operation, but the character may be increased one by one depending on the amount of long-pressing operation, or depending on the number of continuous hitting operations. The number of characters may be increased one by one. Also, two or more characters may be displayed simultaneously by one operation.

After that, when the operation valid period is started and the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 262(4), as shown in FIG. 262(5), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the Echigoya is displayed at the upper part of the display screen. Character ECG is displayed. At this time, although the button image 136a is deleted, the operation valid period continues. That is, a state is shown in which a hidden button effect for accepting the operation of the effect button 136 is performed in a state in which the display prompting the operation of the effect button 136 is not performed. Then, when the second effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 262(5), as shown in FIG. 262(6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YSM is displayed above the display screen. Are displayed side by side with the character ECG of Echigoya. That is, a state in which the lord's character YSM appears by operating the hidden button is shown. Further, when the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 262(6), as shown in FIG. 262(7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is displayed above the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the lord's character YSM, and the desired display result is displayed. That is, the appearance of the princess character HME appearing due to the hidden button operation is shown. As described above, in this effect example, the hidden button effect is performed while the advance notice display is being performed by the button reception time meter MT.

Then, as shown in FIG. 262 (8 ), the bunker icon and the panda icon displayed accompanying the button reception time meter MT are separated from each other, and the characters “all set” are displayed on the button reception time meter MT. Is displayed to notify that a notice display indicating that the reliability of the big hit is high will be given thereafter.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (9), “decoration 7” is displayed on each of the left symbol and the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character ECG of Echigoya, the character YSM of the lord, and the character HME of the princess are arranged so as to overlap (overlap) with the front side of the middle symbol, and the button reception displayed below them is arranged. On the time meter MT, the character "chance" is displayed, and a notice is displayed to suggest that the reliability of the big hit is high. In the button operation effect, when the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient and three characters are not displayed, or when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, for example, one of the three characters is used. When the above-mentioned characters do not appear, the character "chance" may be replaced with, for example, "sorry" may be displayed to inform that the reliability of the big hit is low. In addition, when the reach is achieved with a specific symbol (for example, “decoration 7”), the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed than when the reach is achieved with other symbols.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 262(10), the decorative pattern display device 208 shows that the sublimation reach has been developed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (11), the button notice effect is started, and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. Note that the button reception time meter MT is not displayed in this button advance notice effect.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (12), as shown in FIG. 262 (13), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b.

Then, as shown in FIG. 262 (14), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's shrine is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and a screen is displayed in which the defeat is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 262 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to a fluctuation is performed by a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”, and then FIG. ), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". At this time, in the special symbol 1 4th symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is a loss is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol "Special figure I", which is a lost symbol, is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 263 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 263(1) to 263(3) are the same as those in FIGS. 250(1) to 250(3), so description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 263(3), after the button operation effect is started, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 263(4), the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character “continuous hit” is displayed on, and the fact that the step will advance in the step-up notice is notified by the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136.

Then, when the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 263(5), as shown in FIG. 263(6), the step-up notice is given in response to the first operation of the effect button 136. Starting, the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, although the button image 136a is erased, the button reception time meter MT is still displayed, and the display mode is changed so that the gauge decreases in accordance with the time from the start of the operation valid period. Further, at this timing, in the button reception time meter MT, a plurality of miniature characters BCH having a length (five in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263(6)) are arranged side by side in the remaining display portion of the gauge. .. In this example of performance as well, the miniature character BCH having the longest length is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, thereby functioning as a notice display indicating that the reliability of the big hit is high. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 263(6), the player continuously performs the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. In this effect example, the step-up notice is started by one operation of the effect button 136, but the step-up notice is started when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit a predetermined number of times after the operation effective period is started. The notice may be started. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the advance notice is displayed by the button reception time meter MT is shown while the effect of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is being executed.

After that, when the production button 136 is continuously struck, and the production button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 263 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, from the display SU1 of step 1 to step Step up to display SU2 of 2. As described above, in this effect example, the step-up of the display in the step-up notice may be performed on condition that the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, and in other words, the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient. If so, step-up is not performed. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Further, the number of miniature characters BCH displayed in full length also decreases according to the remaining amount of the gauge.

After that, when the effect button 136 is continuously struck and the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 263 (8), in the decorative symbol display device 208, steps from the display SU2 of step 2 to step Step up to display SU3 of 3. That is, in this effect example, it is suggested that the display SU3 of step 3 is displayed in the step-up notice, and that the jackpot is likely to be a big hit rather than the display SU2 of step 2 being finished. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Further, the number of miniature characters BCH displayed in full length also decreases according to the remaining amount of the gauge.

After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 263(9) to (17) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 263(9) to (17) are the same as those in FIGS. 248(18) to 249(26), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 264 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the button repeated hit operation effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 264(1) is the same as that in FIG. 250(1), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264(2), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the variable icon display area 280. To the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264(3), a state where the button repeated operation effect is started is shown. Specifically, the banchou character BC1 is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character "Wake up the Banchou with continuous strokes" is also displayed. That is, in this button repeated hit operation effect, it can be said that it is a mission effect intended to perform a display in a manner in which the effect button 136 is hit repeatedly and the guard clothes are torn within a predetermined time.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264(4), it is shown that the operation valid period in the button repeated operation effect has started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character display of “wake up the bancho with continuous hits” displayed on the right side of the bang length character BC1 is changed to the character display of “start of continuous hits”, and A button reception time meter RMT for continuous hits is displayed below the display of "start". The button reception time meter RMT for repeated hits has a different display mode from the button reception time meter MT described above, and is configured by an indicator made up of a plurality of blocks (in the example shown in FIG. 264(4), nine blocks). There is. Then, the display mode of the continuous-stroke button reception time meter RMT changes in such a manner that the blocks at the right end are erased one by one according to the time from the start of the operation valid period.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 264(5) to 264(7), when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, the number of star symbols displayed on the bancho character BC1 is increased as the number of operations increases. Increase.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 264(8), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a mode in which the bancho character is breaking clothes (final form). The display of the character BC2 having the longest length is displayed, and the character "awakening" is displayed to notify that the purpose (mission) of the button repeated operation effect has been achieved. At this time, the continuous hit button reception time meter RMT is not erased, and the displayed blocks are displayed in a mode in which each block is changed to a multicolor (for example, 7 colors), suggesting that the jackpot is highly reliable. .. In this example of production, it can be said that the advance notice is displayed due to the change in the display mode of the button-reception time meter RMT for continuous hits. It should be noted that the display mode of the continuous-stroke button reception time meter RMT may not change, and it may be suggested that the reliability of the big hit is low, or the continuous-stroke button reception time meter RMT disappears when the mission is achieved. However, the advance notice may not be displayed. Further, the display color of the continuous-stroke button reception time meter RMT may be changed to any one of a plurality of colors, and the jackpot reliability may be changed depending on the changed display color. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the notice display using the button reception time meter RMT for continuous hits is performed after the purpose of the continuous hit button operation effect is achieved. It should be noted that, in the button repeated operation effect, if the mission is not determined to be achieved in advance or the mission is to be achieved in advance, the number of times the effect button 136 is operated during the effective operation period is If the number of times required to complete the mission is not reached, the Bancho character is not displayed in the final form (that is, the Bancho character BC2 in the final form is not displayed), and the button for repeated hits is used. Since all the blocks of the reception time meter RMT are also deleted, the advance notice display using the button for continuous hitting reception time meter RMT is not performed. If it is determined in advance that the mission will be achieved, even if the number of times the effect button 136 is operated is less than the number of times required for the mission to be achieved during the operation valid period, the bancho character BC1 is displayed. The final form may be displayed. Even in this case, since all the blocks of the continuous-stroke button reception time meter RMT are erased, the advance notice display using the continuous-stroke button reception time meter RMT is not performed. Moreover, after the operation valid period starts, the number of times of operating the production button 136 has become the number of times necessary for the mission to be achieved, but, for example, because the predetermined period has not elapsed since the operation valid period started. When the condition for achieving the mission is not satisfied, the mission may not be achieved unless the effect button 136 is continuously hit until the predetermined period elapses. Further, in the button repeated hit operation effect, the mission may be achieved by one operation of the effect button 136 after the operation valid period starts.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264(9), one block is erased one by one according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and the remaining number of blocks is four. Has been done. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 264(9), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 264(10), one block is erased one by one according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and the number of remaining blocks is one. Has been done. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 264(10), the second stop is performed, the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol (corresponding to the right symbol in the normal display state), and the reach state is formed. In the right design (corresponding to the middle design in the normal display state), the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 264(11), the decorative design is brought into a normal display state, and the decorative design of “decoration 7” forming the reach state in the left design and the right design is stopped and displayed. , The state in which the middle symbols are displayed in a variable display is shown. Then, the bancho character BC2 in the final form moves to a position where the middle symbol overlaps on the front side, the character "SP" is displayed, and it is notified that the super reach is to be performed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 264 (12) to (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 shifts to super reach (sublimation reach), and a state in which the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed is shown. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 264(12) to (18) are the same as those in FIGS. 256(24) to (30), description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 265 is a diagram showing in stages an example of the button repeated hitting operation effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 265(1) to 264(4) are the same as those in FIGS. 264(1) to 264(4), so description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 265(4), after the operation valid period in the button repeated hit operation effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 265(5) to (6), the effect button 136 is hit repeatedly, As the number of operations increases, the number of star symbols displayed in superposition on the longest character BC1 increases.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 265(7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final-length character BC2 and “ The word "awakening" is displayed to inform that the mission has been completed. At this time, the continuous hit button reception time meter RMT is not erased, and the displayed blocks are displayed in a mode in which each block is changed to a multicolor (for example, 7 colors), suggesting that the jackpot is highly reliable. .. It should be noted that, in this effect example, as compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 264, since the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit and the number of operations per time is large, the number of blocks of the continuous hit button reception time meter RMT remains large. The mission has been completed with (7 remaining). After that, the blocks are erased one by one according to the time from when the operation valid period is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 265(8), it is shown that the mini character YM of the lord is displayed in the blank portion formed by the block being erased in the button receiving time meter RMT for repeated hits. There is. This lord's mini character YM appears when the time from the start of the operation valid period to the completion of the mission is early (when the mission is completed within the predetermined first mission completion time). It can be said that this is an example of a notice display using the continuous-stroke button reception time meter RMT together with the change in the display mode of the continuous-stroke button reception time meter RMT. That is, it can be said that the form of the advance notice using the continuous-stroke button reception time meter RMT differs depending on the time from the start of the operation valid period to the completion of the mission. As described above, by performing the advance notice display by using the blank portion formed by erasing the block in the continuous hit button reception time meter RMT, the effect of presentation may be improved and the interest may be improved. In addition, when the mission is completed, the mini character YM of this lord may be always displayed regardless of the time from the start of the operation effective period to the completion of the mission. It may not be displayed even if the time from the start of the operation valid period to the completion of the mission is early. In addition, when the mini character YM of this lord appears, the big hit may be confirmed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 265(9), two more blocks are erased according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and the number of remaining blocks is three. ing. Further, the continuous-stroke button reception time meter RMT also shows that the mini character YM of the lord is moving to the left as the blank area in which the block is erased is enlarged. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 265(9), it is shown that the character “large board” appears in association with the mini character YM of the lord. In this example of performance, the appearance of the character "Large board behavior" informs that the big hit is confirmed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 265(9), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 265(10), one block is erased one by one according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and the number of remaining blocks is one. Has been done. At this time, the display of the character "Ohaku-behyo" which is displayed in association with the mini character YM of the lord is completely displayed. In this example of performance, it is possible that only "Large board" of "Large board behavior" appears and the character of "Behavior" does not appear. In this case, the entire character of "Large board behavior" appears. It is possible to make it more difficult for the jackpot symbol to be fixedly displayed than when the symbol appears. By doing so, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not the big hit is a highly reliable announcement until the lord's character YM is completely displayed. In addition, a display of a character in which a character different from “behavior” appears may be displayed. On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 265(10), the second stop is performed, the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol (corresponding to the right symbol in the normal display state), and the reach state is formed. In the right design (corresponding to the middle design in the normal display state), the variable display of the decorative design continues. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 265(11) to (18) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 265(11) to (18) are the same as those in FIGS. 264(11) to 264(18), description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 266 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the reserved holidaymaker notice effect executed during the big hit game. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. In FIG. 266, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220, the state of the production movable body 224. Also shown.

As shown in FIG. 266(1), in the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol I, which is a lost symbol, is stopped and displayed, and in the second special figure display device 214, it is a big hit symbol. The special figure a” is stopped and displayed. In this example of performance, the special figure 2 shows a big hit. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the combination of the large decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is a "special symbol I" and is lost. It is stopped and displayed with the symbol "x" indicating that it has become, and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 is stopped and displayed with the symbol "A" indicating that it is a big hit in "special symbol a". There is.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower left corner of the display screen. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 266, since the big hit has been made in the electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. In FIG. 266(1), the four hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of the special figure 2 are displayed, and all of the four hold icons h21 to h24 of the special figure 2 are displayed in the default display mode ( It is displayed in a circular non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is a round hold icon. On the other hand, the number of reservations of special figure 1 is 0, and no reservation icon of special figure 1 is displayed. In addition, in this production example, the hold icon of the special map 1 is not displayed in the electric power support state, but when the number of hold of the special map 1 is 1 or more, the hold icon may be displayed. Good.

In addition, the production movable body 224 is such that both the upper arm portion 224a and the forearm portion 224b are in the initial position, that is, they are in a non-movable state.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 266(2), a state in which the big hit game is started and the big hit start effect is performed is shown. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the decorative pattern displayed in the combination of the large-decoration decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" that was displayed when the big hit was displayed is the upper left of the display screen. It is displayed in the corner, and at the center of the display screen, it is shown that a Kopanda character with a fan celebrates the big hit.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 266(3) shows that the big hit start effect is finished and the first round is started. In the production during the big hit game, the number of consecutive wins of the big hit, the number of coins obtained during the present big hit, and the number of coins obtained during the consort may be displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 266(4) shows that the seventh round has started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 266(5), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the button operation effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character “Super hot when the arm comes out of the button” is displayed on the right side of the Kopanda character, and the effect movable body 224 is operated by operating the effect button 136. In this case, it is explained that there is a high possibility that the symbol fluctuation display that is a big hit is included in the held symbol fluctuation display (that is, there is a high possibility that a suspended holiday is generated). Has been done.

Thereafter, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 266(6), the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with this button image 136a. This button effect can be said to be an example of a pre-reading notice effect during the big hit game. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 266(6), the operation valid period has not started yet, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 266(7) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, as shown in FIG. 266(8), the forearm portion of the effect movable body 224 is shown. 224b operates and moves to a position overlapping the front side of the right end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, at this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a plurality of star symbols are displayed in response to the operation of the effect movable body 224, and the effect display as if the forearm part 224b influences the decorative symbol display device 208. Is being done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 266(9), the forearm portion 224b of the production movable body 224 returns to the initial position again, and the decorative symbol display device 208 informs that it is determined that the reserved consecutive holidays will occur. The display of “Determining the reserved holiday resort” is performed. In addition, in this example of performance, when the production movable body 224 operates, the holding consecutive holidays are always generated. However, even when the production movable body 224 operates, the holding consecutive holidays may not occur. Good.

FIG. 267 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the pending holidaymaker notice effect executed during the big hit game. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 267(1) to (6) are the same as those in FIGS. 266(1) to 266 (6), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 267(7) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the button operation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 267(8), the effect movable body 224 is used. The operation is not performed, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the character of “chance” that has an expectation as to whether or not the holding consecutive holidays will occur. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode is changed so that the gauge decreases in accordance with the time from the start of the operation valid period. Further, in the button reception time meter MT, a plurality of panda mini-characters PNDs having a panda's face (five in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 267 (8)) are arranged side by side in the remaining display portion of the gauge. The number of panda mini-characters PND displayed on the button reception time meter MT is a number according to the remaining amount of the gauge (the time from the start of the operation valid period). In this example of performance, the mini character PND of the panda is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, thereby functioning as a notice display that suggests that the degree of expectation that the pending holiday game is not so high. In addition, even if the effect button 136 is operated, the mini character PND of the panda may not be displayed on the button reception time meter MT. That is, when the panda mini character PND is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, the holding holidays are more likely to occur than when the panda mini character PND is not displayed on the button reception time meter MT. It may be configured. Further, a mini character different from the panda mini character PND may be displayed in some cases, and the degree of expectation that a pending holiday game may occur may be different depending on the displayed mini character. In addition, a plurality of types of mini characters may be displayed in a mixed manner. In addition, in this example of performance, the degree of expectation that the pending holiday game will occur is the same regardless of the number of displayed panda mini-characters PND, but according to the number of displayed pandas mini-character PNDs. The degree of expectation that the pending holiday game may occur may be different, and for example, the greater the number of displayed mini characters PND of the pandas, the higher the degree of expectation that the holiday resort may occur. Further, the type of the mini character displayed on the button reception time meter MT may be changed depending on the timing after the operation valid period starts. For example, the timing of the operation of the effect button 136 is changed to the operation valid period. If it is an early timing after the start of, a mini character other than the panda's mini character (for example, a miniature character with a length) may be easily displayed. Further, in this effect example, the character display of "chance" is displayed due to the operation of the effect button 136, and thereafter, without the operation of the effect button 136, the mini character PND of the panda in the button reception time meter MT is displayed. Although the display is performed, for example, the character display of "chance" and the display of the mini character PND of the panda on the button reception time meter MT may be performed simultaneously with the operation of the effect button 136. That is, in this effect example, the target displayed by operating the effect button 136 is a "chance" display, and the display of the panda mini character PND on the button reception time meter MT is displayed by operating the effect button 136. It is shown for non-examples.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 267(9), the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a state in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Further, the display number of the mini character PND of the panda also decreases in accordance with the remaining amount of the gauge, and the number is two at the timing shown in FIG.

FIG. 267(10) shows that the eighth round has started. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 267 (10) shows that the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT has become zero. That is, a state is shown in which a time corresponding to the operation valid period has elapsed since the operation valid period was started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 267(11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one star figure is displayed, while the production movable body 224 does not operate, and then is shown in FIG. 267(12). As described above, the display of the character "sorry" is performed, and it is notified that the button operation effect fails and the possibility that a holding holiday camp occurs is low. It should be noted that, in this example of performance, even when the holding holiday complex is scheduled to occur, there may be a case where the button operation effect may fail, and by configuring in this way, the expectation for the holding holiday complex is impaired. May be reduced.

FIG. 268 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the pending holidaymaker notice effect executed during the big hit game. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 268(1) to 268(7) are the same as those in FIGS. 267(1) to 267(7), so description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 268(7) after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the button operation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 268(8), effect is also produced in this effect example. Although the operation by the movable body 224 is not performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character "Atsui" which has an expectation as to whether or not a reserved long-distance residence is generated. When the character "ATSUI" is displayed, the effect movable body 224 is more likely to operate than when the character "CHANCE" is displayed, that is, there is a high possibility that a holding consecutive holidaymaker will occur. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode is changed so that the gauge decreases in accordance with the time from the start of the operation valid period. Further, in this effect example, a plurality of miniature characters BCH having a lengthwise face and miniature characters PND of a panda are provided in the remaining display portion of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT (decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 268(8)). In the device 208, two mini-characters BCH of the length and three mini-characters of the panda PND are arranged side by side. In this example of performance, the suspension game is more likely to occur when the mini character BCH having the longest length is displayed than when only the mini character PND of the panda is displayed (a big hit in the suspended variable display of symbols). It is easy to confirm and display the design). In other words, the banquet mini-character BCH is likely to be displayed when the pending holiday game is scheduled to occur. The mini-character BCH having the length is arranged on the right side of the mini-character PND of the panda, and the mini-character BCH having the length is erased earlier than the mini-character PND of the panda as the remaining amount of the gauge decreases. Therefore, the player may be able to pay attention to the change in the display mode of the button reception time meter MT in order to confirm the miniature character BCH having the length. Further, since the number of mini characters displayed on the button reception time meter MT is a number according to the remaining amount of the gauge (the time from the start of the operation valid period), the operation valid period is started. When the operation timing of the effect button 136 is late and the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT is less than the space for arranging the mini character BCH having the longest length, only the panda mini character PND is displayed. The bancho mini character BCH may not be displayed. Therefore, the player may want to check the minister BCH who is the bancho and may improve his/her motivation to press the effect button 136 quickly. In this example of performance, regardless of the number of miniature characters BCH displayed, the degree of expectation that the production movable body 224 operates is the same, but according to the number of minicharacters BCH displayed. The effect movable body 224 may be made to have different expectations, and for example, the effect movable body 224 may be made easier to operate as the number of miniature characters BCH having the longest length is displayed. In addition, the button image 136a displayed in FIG. 268(6) may be displayed in the display mode of the deca button or the display mode of vibration and rotation. When such a display mode is displayed, May make it easier to display the mini character BCH having the longest length than in the case of being displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268(9), the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Further, all mini characters BCH having the length corresponding to the remaining amount of the gauge are erased, and only the mini character PND of panda is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 268(9), two panda mini characters PND are displayed.

FIG. 268(10) shows that the eighth round has started. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 268(10), the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT becomes 0, and the time corresponding to the operation valid period has elapsed since the operation valid period was started. The situation is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 268(11), the forearm portion 224b of the production movable body 224 operates and moves to a position overlapping the front side of the right end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a plurality of star symbols are displayed in response to the operation of the effect movable body 224, and the forearm portion 224b produces an effect as if the decorative symbol display device 208 is affected. The display is done. As described above, in this effect example, the effect movable body 224 does not immediately operate in response to the effect button 136 being pressed, and operates only when the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT becomes 0. An example of the effect is shown.

After that, as shown in FIG. 268 (12), the forearm portion 224b of the production movable body 224 returns to the initial position again, and the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies that it is determined that the reserved consecutive holidays will occur. The display of “Determining the reserved condominium” is displayed.

FIG. 269 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 269(1), a combination of missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed.

On the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower left corner of the display screen. Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 269 is a non-electric power support state (non-time saving state). Therefore, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 of FIG. 269(1), the three holding icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special drawing 1 are displayed, and all of these three holding icons h11 to h13 of the special drawing 1 are default. It is displayed in the display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269(2), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon that is the target of the present pattern change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is the variable icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 move to the display positions of the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, respectively, Are displayed as a hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269(3), the button operation effect has been started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 269(3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with this button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display). The display mode of the button reception time meter MT in this example of performance is the mode described above with reference to FIG. 253(3), and the ban icon and the panda icon are displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT.

FIG. 269(4) shows a state in which the button reception time meter MT is shortened as time passes after the operation valid period is started.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 269(5), the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 269(6). At this time, although the button image 136a is deleted, the button reception time meter MT is still displayed, and the display mode is such that the button reception time meter MT is gradually shortened according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Change.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269(7), the step-up notice is continuously given, and the display SU1 of step 1 is changed to the display SU2 of step 2. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is further shortened according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and at the timing shown in FIG. 269(7), the panda icon approaches the bang icon, By displaying the character "gabutsu", it is shown that the panda is biting the guard. This may cause the player to expect something to happen and, as a result, to give him a sense of expectation for a big hit.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269(8), after the banquet length icon displayed at the left end of the button reception time meter MT changes to a panda icon, the pair of panda icons are separated from each other. The button acceptance time meter MT displays the character "icon change" to notify that the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains the display SU2 of step 2 and does not change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 269(9), the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Savohani, and a notice of the symbol variable display is given. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged from the display SU2 of step 2 here. As described above, in this effect example, even when the step-up notice does not become the display SU3 of step 3, the change icon changes to the notice display mode by the notice effect using the button reception time meter MT. , It may be possible to maintain the expectation for a big hit. In this effect, the easiness of displaying the display SU3 in step 3 may be different depending on the characters displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT. For example, the icons displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter may be different. In the case of the length icon and the panda icon, the display SU3 of step 3 is difficult to be displayed, and the step-up notice is likely to be ended by the display of the display SU1 of step 1 or the display SU2 of step 2, and the button reception time meter When the icons displayed at both ends are two longest length icons, the display SU3 in step 3 may be easily displayed.

After that, the first stop and the second stop of the decorative symbol are performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 269(10). In the device 208, "reach" is displayed to notify that the reach state has been reached.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 269(11), the decorative pattern display device 208 shows that the sublimation reach has been developed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 269(12), the button advance notice effect has been started, and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. Note that the button reception time meter MT is not displayed in this button advance notice effect.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 269(13), the weak design image display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b as shown in FIG. 269(14).

Then, as shown in FIG. 269(15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character's shrine is defeated by an enemy swordsman, and a defeated screen is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The "decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and the fact that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 269(16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5−decoration 6−decoration 5”, FIG. 269(17) ), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, in the special symbol 1 4th symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is a loss is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol "Special figure I", which is a lost symbol, is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 270 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the button repeated hit operation effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 270(1) to (6) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 269(1) to 269(6), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 270(5) and the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 270(6), the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown, the step-up notice is continuously given, but the display SU1 of step 1 does not change to the display SU2 of step 2, and the display SU1 of step 1 remains unchanged. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is further shortened according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and at the timing shown in FIG. 270 (7), the panda icon approaches the bancho icon, Tries to bite into the Bancho, but the character "return attack" is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 270(8), the panda returns to the Bancho and encounters the attack. In this example of performance, when the effect that the panda returns to the bancho and encounters is performed, it is easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the effect in which the panda bites into the bancho is performed. In the example of production, as will be described later, the pending symbol variation display is likely to be a big hit).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270(9), after the panda icon displayed on the right end of the button reception time meter MT changes to the bang icon, the pair of bang icons are separated from each other. The button acceptance time meter MT displays the character "icon change" to notify that the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains the display SU1 of step 1 and does not change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 270(10), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the lord, and the hold notice is given. On the other hand, the step-up notice also remains the display SU1 of step 1 without any change. As described above, in this effect example, even when the result of the step-up notice in the symbol variation display is such that the expectation for the big hit cannot be expected, the look-ahead notice may be given using the button reception time meter MT. As a result, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that a big hit will occur in the pending symbol variation display. Further, in this effect example, as a result of the notice effect being made by the button reception time meter MT in the same display mode, one of the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 changes, so that a notice effect of the symbol change display is given. It can be said that at least a part of the presentation and the presentation of the look-ahead announcement are performed in the same manner, whereby the expectation can be maintained until the change icon h0 or the hold icons h11 to h14 change. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270(11), the first stop is performed and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (12), the second stop is performed and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270(13), the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed, and then in FIG. 270(14). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 7". At this time, in the special symbol 1 4th symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is a loss is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol "Special figure I", which is a lost symbol, is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 271 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 272 is a view showing a continuation of the concrete effect example shown in FIG. 271. .. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 271(1), a combination of missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed.

On the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower left corner of the display screen. Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 271 is a non-electric power support state (non-time saving state). Therefore, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 of FIG. 271(1), the two holding icons h11 and h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed, and the holding icons h11 and h12 of these two special drawings 1 are both default display modes. Is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special symbol 1 is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the variable icon display area 280. To the variable icon h0, and the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (3), the button operation effect has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (3), a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in a default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with this button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display). Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 271 (3), the operation valid period has not started yet, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 271(4) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, the button image 136a is erased as shown in FIG. 271(5). In addition, the button reception time meter MT is enlarged and displayed, and the mini game is started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (5), the characters "stock chance" and "press at the right time" are displayed, and the enlarged button display of the button reception time meter MT shows the operation valid period. The display mode changes so as to decrease the gauge depending on the time from the start of. At this time, the decorative pattern has moved to the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, in the button reception time meter MT, three treasure boxes (treasure boxes TR1, TR2, TR3) are arranged side by side in the remaining display portion of the gauge, and the right end portion of the gauge that is reduced and displayed as time passes. It is suggested that something appears by operating the effect button 136 at the timing when passes through the center of each treasure box. That is, it is notified that the timing-pressed mini-game is started. In addition, in this example of the effect, the mini game with the button reception time meter MT may not be performed, and the advance notice effect using the button reception time meter MT may be performed. Further, the number of treasure boxes to be displayed may be different depending on the remaining amount of the gauge displayed according to the time from the start of the operation valid period when the effect button 136 is operated. The earlier the operation timing of the operation of 136 is after the operation effective period starts, the more the remaining amount of the gauge is. Therefore, the number of treasure boxes may be increased accordingly, and the later the operation timing of the effect button 136 is, The number of treasure boxes to be displayed may be reduced.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 271 (6), the effect button 136 is pressed at the timing when the right end portion of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is substantially in the center of the treasure box TR1 arranged on the rightmost side of the three treasure boxes. When operated, as shown in FIG. 271 (7), the treasure chest TR1 may move upward, and the treasure chest TR1 may be opened to cause the notice icon I71 of Sabohani to which the characters “change” are added. .. The notice icon I71 for Savohani is one mode of prefetch notice, and when the notice icon I71 for Savohani is stocked, it is announced that the change icon or the hold icon changes to the notice display mode. As described above, in this production example, the production button 136 is operated in good timing when the right end portion of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is substantially in the center of the treasure box arranged in the button reception time meter MT. Notice icons may be stocked. Here, the notice icon may be referred to as a notice item or a mini item. In addition, even when the production button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is substantially in the center of the treasure box TR1, the notice icon may not appear. Also, a thing other than the notice icon may appear, for example, a notice character appears to give a notice of the symbol variation display or a look-ahead notice, or a simple effect display without notice (for example, an explanation display). May be performed. Further, even if the notice icon I71 of Sabohani is stocked, the display mode of the variable icon or the hold icon may not change.

As shown in FIG. 271(7), when the notice icon I71 of Savohani appears from the treasure box TR1, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 271(8), the notice icon of Sabohani that appears appears in the upper right corner of the display screen. I71 is displayed, showing that the notice icon has been stocked.

Then, as shown in FIG. 271 (9), the right end portion of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is substantially the center of the treasure box TR2 arranged on the right side of the remaining two treasure boxes (treasure boxes TR2, TR3). When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing, as shown in FIG. 271 (10), the treasure box TR2 is moved upward and the treasure box TR2 is opened to add the word "subjugation" to the notice icon I72. May appear. This lord's notice icon I72 is an aspect of the prefetch notice, and when the lord's notice icon I72 is stocked, a strong cut-in CI1a is obtained in the subdued reach that is scheduled to be executed with the variable display of the symbols. It will be announced in advance. That is, since the notice icon I71 of the lord is stocked, a look-ahead notice that the sublimation reach will be performed in the pending symbol variation display and a look-ahead notice that the strong cut-in CI1a will appear are given. Can be said. Note that the strong cut-in CI1a may not appear even if the lord's notice icon I72 is stocked, or the strong cut-in CI1a may necessarily appear.

As shown in FIG. 271 (10), when the palace's notice icon I72 appears from the treasure box TR, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (11), the appeared lord's notice icon appears in the upper right corner of the display screen. I72 is displayed, showing that the notice icon has been stocked.

Then, as shown in FIG. 271 (12), when the effect button 136 is operated at a timing that is far behind the timing when the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is substantially in the center of the remaining one treasure box TR3. As shown in FIG. 271 (13), the treasure box TR3 moves upward but is not opened, and the character "FAIL" is displayed, indicating that the timing pressing has failed. Therefore, the contents of the treasure box TR3 are not displayed, and the treasure box TR3 is deleted as it is, as shown in FIG. 271 (14). It should be noted that if the timing is unsuccessful, the contents of the treasure box are displayed, but if the contents of the treasure box are the notice icon, they may not be stocked. Further, in this example of performance, when the function of the automatic button is effective for the effect button 136, even if the effect button 136 is not operated, the right end portion of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is an abbreviation for each treasure box. Each treasure box may be opened as if the effect button 136 was operated at the central timing, or the function of the auto button may be disabled in this timing pressing mini game.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (15), the button reception time meter MT is erased and the mini game using the button reception time meter MT is finished. The notice icon I71 of Sabohani and the notice icon I72 of the lord are continuously displayed.

After that, the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the order of left design> right design> middle design, and in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (16), it shakes with the combination of the decorative design of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2”. Temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 271 (17), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2". At this time, in the special symbol 1 4th symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is a loss is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol "Special figure I", which is a lost symbol, is stopped and displayed. Further, in this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed, the decorative pattern is not displayed in the default display mode but is displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the button reception time meter MT is displayed. It is shown that the notice display using is affecting the subsequent decorative pattern variable display.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (18), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. Then, the variable icon h0 is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The notice icon I71 of Sabohani and the notice icon I72 of the lord are continuously displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (19) subsequent to FIG. 271 (18), it is shown that the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 272(20), the notice icon I71 of Sabohani moves to the approximate center of the display screen while being enlarged, and the notice icon I71 of Sabohani is consumed. ..

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (21), the variable icon h0 of the default display mode displayed in the variable icon display area 280 changes to the display mode of Sabohani, and the advance notice display by the variable icon h0 is displayed. Is being performed. The display mode of the hold icon may change when the notice icon I71 of Sabohani is consumed.

As shown in FIG. 272(21), after the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 272(22), the enlarged notice icon I71 of Sabohani is erased, and thereafter. As shown in FIG. 272(23), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (24), the first stop is performed and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (25), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 272 (26 ), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters “Gekiatsu” and informs that the player has reached the reach state, and at the same time, the reliability of the jackpot in this reach is shown. It is suggested to be high. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (27) shows that the normal reach effect is being performed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (28), the state of the palace's notice icon I72 is enlarged and moved to the approximate center of the display screen, and the state of the lord's notice icon I72 is consumed. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 272 (29 ), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which it has developed into a super reach (sublimation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative pattern is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed in which the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272(30) shows that the button advance notice effect is started and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. Note that the button reception time meter MT is not displayed in this button advance notice effect.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 272(31), the strong design image display device 208 displays the strong cut-in image CI1a as shown in FIG. 272(32). The strong cut-in image CI1a appears as shown in FIG. 272(28) when the sir's notice icon I72 is digested. If the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the button notice effect, the strong cut-in image CI1a does not have to be displayed, and the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period. Even if it does not exist, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed after the operation valid period has elapsed. Further, in the above-mentioned mini game, the lord's notice icon I72 was planned to appear, but if the lord's notice icon I72 did not appear due to the failure in pressing the timing of the effect button 136, the strong cut-in image CI1a. The weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed more easily.

Then, as shown in FIG. 272 (33), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

Then, as shown in FIG. 272 (34 ), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to a swing fluctuation is performed by a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 5—decoration 5—decoration 5”, and then FIG. ), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decorative decorative symbols "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1, "A" indicating that the special symbol A has been a big hit is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, on the first special figure display device 212, it is stopped and displayed in the form of the big hit symbol of special figure A.

In the example of the effect, as a result of the mini game, a notice icon indicating that the button operation effect for which the notice display using the button reception time meter MT described above is performed may be stocked. That is, the pre-reading notice of the notice display using the button reception time meter MT may be given.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 273 to 285. 274 to 285, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the first special symbol reservation lamp 218 and the second special symbol reservation lamp 220 Although illustrated, the figure display device 210 and the figure holding lamp 216 are not shown. In addition, also in FIGS. 274 to 285, the types of special symbols to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 are the stop symbol modes shown in FIGS. 68(a) and 68(b). Has been done. In addition, in FIGS. 274 to 285, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, but as in the above-described embodiment, a device including a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. May be Further, the transparent light guide plate IL described above may be arranged on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, regarding the display mode of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 274 to 285, it goes without saying that the display mode of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 to 272 can be applied as it is or by appropriately changing it. Nor.

First, with reference to FIG. 273, the types of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 will be described. Here, FIG. 273(a) is a diagram showing another example of a decorative symbol, and FIG. 273(b) is a diagram explaining a combination of symbols which is a chance of a prefetching notice.

As shown in FIG. 273(a), in the decorative pattern of the present embodiment, in addition to 10 kinds of decorative patterns of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10", two special "special 1" and "special 2" are included. Decorative patterns are also available. The decorative pattern of "special 1" may be referred to as a replay pattern, and for example, a predetermined display mode including this (for example, a mode in which "special 1" is stopped and displayed in the middle pattern, or "special 1" in all patterns is It is a decorative pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is to be performed when the display is stopped). The "special 2" decorative pattern is sometimes referred to as a chance button pattern, and has a display mode in which the button is simply represented, and the display mode is different from the above-described button image 136a displayed in the button operation effect. There is. The decorative pattern of "special 2" is, for example, a predetermined display mode including this (for example, a mode in which "special 2" is stopped and displayed in the middle pattern, a mode in which "special 2" is stopped and displayed in all symbols, etc.) When it becomes, it is a decorative pattern that the button operation effect will be performed. In addition, "special 1" and "special 2" are not always included in the variable display of the decorative pattern and appear as needed, but these are always displayed in the variable display of the decorative pattern. May be included. Further, the "special 1" and the "special 2" are not fixedly displayed by a combination of decorative symbols including them, but function as a notice display for giving a notice of the contents of the effect to be performed thereafter. It should be noted that a combination of decorative patterns including a decorative pattern of "special 1" or "special 2" is definitely displayed, and it functions as a look-ahead notice that an effect corresponding to "special 1" or "special 2" will be performed. You can Further, although one type of symbol corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect and one type of symbol corresponding to the button operation effect are prepared, respectively, there may be two or more types. Further, in the present embodiment, the "special 1" decorative pattern corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect and the "special 2" decorative pattern related to the button operation effect are prepared, but in addition to these, for example, the variation icon Alternatively, a special decorative pattern corresponding to the effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes to the display mode of the notice, or a special decorative pattern specifically suggesting the content of the effect to be performed thereafter may be prepared. In this case, at least a part of the display mode of these special decorative symbols and the display mode of the image displayed when the corresponding effect is performed may be different or the same.

As shown in FIG. 273(b), in the present embodiment, a combination of decorative patterns consisting of only "decoration 7" and "decoration 3" is excluded, except for combinations that form a reach and combinations of decorative patterns for jackpots. The look-ahead notice can be displayed by confirming and displaying the combination of decorative patterns (may be referred to as "chance eyes"). Specifically, the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 7", the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss of "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7", "decoration 7-decoration 3-decoration 3" By the combination of the decorative pattern of the "missing" and the combination of the decorative pattern of the "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3" are confirmed and displayed, the pattern that is likely to be a big hit in the pending pattern variation display It is notified that the variable display is included. FIG. 274 is a diagram showing in stages an example of an effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 275 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 274. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 274(1), the combination of decorative patterns "decoration 1-decoration 6-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. Although the background is not shown, for example, a default background image is displayed.

On the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed. In both the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2, a symbol "x" corresponding to the result of the loss is displayed.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower left corner of the display screen.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 274 is a non-electric power support state (non-time saving state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. The holding icon of the special figure 1 represents the number of holdings of the special figure 1 by the displayed number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon,.... The holding icons of the special figure 1 are displayed side by side, and the holding icons on the left side are the holding icons with older winnings.

In FIG. 274(1), the two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed, and both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are in the default display mode (circular It is displayed in a pattern and white display mode). On the other hand, none of the holding icons in special figure 2 are displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 274 is the non-electric power support state (non-time saving state) as described above, it is difficult to open the electric Chu and it is difficult to win the prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because there is.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the holding icon of the special map that is more likely to win the prize in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. .. That is, when the control state is the non-electric power support state, as shown in FIG. 274(1), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed and the hold icon of special figure 2 is hidden. When the control state is the power support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed and the hold icon of special figure 1 is hidden.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is also a circular unpatterned and white display mode, but the display position is different from the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 Alternatively, the display mode (here, the shape) may be different. By doing so, it may be possible for the player to make a distinction at a glance.

In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed in the order of the variation start in the special symbol display device→the start or the extinction of the fourth symbol blinking→the start of the hold icon moving animation→the variation symbol of the decorative symbol. , This order may be mixed up.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274(2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special symbol 1 is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. In addition, the hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are moved, and the hold icon (the target hold icon for the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. Then, the variable icon h0 is displayed, and the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274(3), the first stop is performed and "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274(4), the second stop is performed and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274(5), the third stop is performed, the decorative symbol of "special 2" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and the decorative symbol of "decoration 3-special 2-decoration 4" is displayed. The combination is temporarily displayed as a stop (temporary stop display). Then, as shown in FIG. 274 (6), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the button operation effect requesting the operation of the effect button 136. That is, in this effect example, the decorative design of "special 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle pattern, thereby informing that the button operation effect is started. Specifically, the decorative pattern of "special 2" is deleted, and a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode in place of the decorative pattern of "special 2", and this button image 136a is displayed. A button reception time meter MT is also displayed. Further, above the button image 136a, the text "Press chance button" is also displayed to promote the operation of the effect button 136. At this time, the middle symbols may remain erased or may be displayed in a variable manner. Further, the button image 136a may be displayed by a predetermined animation (for example, an animation in which a button moves up and down). As described above, the decorative pattern of "special 2" is displayed in the mode in which the buttons are simply displayed as described above, whereas the button image 136a is in the display mode imitating the effect button 136. In addition, the button reception time meter MT is displayed, and it can be said that these display modes are different. Note that the "special 2" decorative pattern is not animated at least when stopped and displayed, but may be animated while stopped and displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 274(7) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, as shown in FIG. 274(8), in the decorative symbol display device 208, While the button reception time meter MT is erased, a plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to cover the front side of the middle symbol and the right symbol, and a display is given to affect these.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274(9), after the sliding fluctuation display in which the middle symbol and the right symbol are variably displayed at high speed, the middle symbol and the right symbol are displayed as shown in FIG. 274(10). "Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on each of the symbols, and a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 274 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7". It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss. At this time, in the special symbol 1 4th symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is a loss is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol "Special figure I", which is a lost symbol, is stopped and displayed. As described above, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7” is a chance, and includes the variable pattern display that is highly likely to be a big hit in the suspended variable pattern display. It functions as a pre-reading notice to inform that. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 274 (11), it is foretold that the suspension of the first symbol variation display of special figure 1 is a symbol variation display that is highly likely to be a big hit. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 274 (10), when temporarily stopped at the chance, the character “Chance” is displayed in the upper center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the chance is displayed. Has announced that a pre-reading notice has been made.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (12), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (target hold icon of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280. It is displayed as a variation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. That is, the variable display of the symbols, which is the target of the prefetch notice, has been started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274(13), a state where the mini game is started is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (13), the characters "mini game" and "press with good timing" are displayed, and a belt-shaped timing meter is displayed, and the timing meter is approximately at the center. It is shown that the treasure chest TR is arranged in the. At this time, the decorative pattern has moved to the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The display form of this timing meter changes so that the gauge decreases in accordance with the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136. In this mini game, it is suggested that something will appear by operating the effect button 136 at the timing when the right end of the gauge that is reduced and displayed as time passes through the center of the treasure chest TR.

FIG. 274(14) shows a state after the mini game is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 274(15), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end portion of the gauge of the timing meter is substantially in the center of the treasure box TR, as shown in FIG. 274(16). TR is enlarged and moved to the upper side of the timing meter, and the replay icon RP appears in the treasure box TR. In the replay icon RP, a display in which a question mark is added to the characters "continued" is displayed, and it is informed that there is a possibility that pseudo-linking will be performed in the symbol variable display. That is, it can be said that the replay icon RP is functioning as a notice of the pseudo continuous effect in the symbol variable display. That is, in this effect example, the pseudo-replay is more likely to be started when the replay icon RP appears than when the replay icon RP does not appear. Here, the replay icon RP does not appear, for example, a button icon may appear, and the appearance of the button icon causes the decorative pattern of "special 2" to be stopped and displayed in the symbol variable display. Alternatively, it may be notified that a button operation effect may be performed. Here, when the icon of the button appears, the decorative design of “special 2” may be displayed and the button operation effect may be started more easily than when the icon of the button does not appear. In addition, the timing meter is still displayed, and the length icon is displayed on both left and right ends of the gauge. The bancho icon displayed on the right follows the reduced display of the gauge and moves to the bancho icon displayed on the left. In addition, when the production button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end portion of the gauge of the timing meter is substantially in the center of the treasure box TR1, something other than the replay icon RP may appear. By appearing, it may be possible to give a notice that the button operation effect may be performed in the symbol variable display. That is, the button operation effect may be started more easily when the button icon appears than when it does not appear. Further, even when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the timing meter is substantially in the center of the treasure box TR1, nothing may appear.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (17), the treasure box TR is erased, the replay icon RP is displayed in the substantially center, and a stirrup production as to whether or not the pseudo-link is performed is performed. This fanned effect is continued until the time corresponding to the operation valid period elapses after the operation valid period is started. Until then, the timing meter continues to display the reduced gauge.

After that, when the time corresponding to the operation valid period has elapsed from the start of the operation valid period and the remaining amount of the gauge in the timing meter becomes 0, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The question mark displayed on the icon RP is changed to an exclamation mark, and the timing meter also displays the characters "I'm still going on" to inform that the pseudo-link will be performed. As described above, in this effect example, the pseudo continuous effect is performed by displaying the icon (replay icon RP) related to the pseudo continuous effect before the decorative pattern of "special 1" is stopped and displayed. It may be possible to give a sense of anticipation to the person at an early stage.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (19) subsequent to FIG. 274 (18), the mini game ends and the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (20), the first stop is performed and "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275(21), the second stop is performed and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (22), after the decorative symbol of "special 1" appears in the middle symbol and scrolls downward, as shown in FIG. 275 (23), "special 1" The decorative pattern is displayed as a stop, and the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 3-special 1-decoration 4" is temporarily stopped (temporary stop display). This “special 1” decorative pattern is a pattern in which the characters “Replay” are displayed in a substantially elliptical shape with a moon pattern, and the graphic is the replay icon RP that appears as a result of a mini game. They are common in that they are the same, but the displayed characters are different.

Then, as shown in FIG. 275 (23), the decorative symbol of "special 1" stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is enlarged and displayed, and it is informed that the pseudo link is performed. The appearance of this "special 1" decorative design is a production performed by the appearance of the replay icon RP as a result of the mini game shown in FIGS. 274(13) to (18). You can It should be noted that if the above-described mini game fails, pseudo-repeating may not be performed, or even if the mini-game fails, pseudo-repeating may be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (25), a state in which the second variable display of decorative symbols by pseudo-linking is started is shown. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “×2” indicating the number of times the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started by pseudo-linking is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (26), the first stop is performed and "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (27), the second stop is performed, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 275 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which it has developed into a super reach (sublimation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative pattern is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed in which the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the display of "Chance" for notifying that the chance eye has appeared is erased.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (29) shows that the button advance notice effect is started. In this button advance notice effect, a big button image 136aL is displayed in place of the default mode button image 136a. The big button image 136aL is an image that imitates the effect button 136, but has a larger display mode than the button image 136a in the default mode. The display mode of the deca button image 136aL is the display mode of the "special 2" decorative pattern shown in FIG. 274(5), which was displayed in the previous symbol variable display (that is, displayed in a different decorative symbol variable display). Is different from As described above, in this effect example, a plurality of types of button images are prepared as the button image displayed in the button operation effect, and the display pattern of the button image (decorative pattern of "special 2") displayed as the decorative pattern. It can be said that it has more display patterns. Note that the default button image 136a may be displayed instead of the big button image 136aL. In this case, when the big button image 136aL is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed more easily than when the button image 136a of the default mode is displayed. Note that the button reception time meter MT is not displayed in this button advance notice effect.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 275 (30), the strong design image display device 208 displays the strong cut-in image CI1a as shown in FIG. 275 (31).

Then, as shown in FIG. 275 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The "decoration 3" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3".

Then, as shown in FIG. 275 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to a swing fluctuation is performed by a combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3", and then, as shown in FIG. ), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decoration decorative patterns "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3". At this time, in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1, "A" indicating that the special symbol A has been a big hit is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, on the first special figure display device 212, it is stopped and displayed in the form of the big hit symbol of special figure A. Note that, as shown in FIG. 275 (33), when the decorative pattern becomes the default display mode, the display of the character "Chance" for notifying that the chance eye has been displayed is resumed, but is not displayed. You don't have to.

In this effect example, when the decoration pattern of the third stop is "special 1" or "special 2", the button operation effect or the pseudo-link is performed, but the "special 1" or "special 2" A button operation effect or a pseudo-link may be performed when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the second stop or the first stop. Further, button operation effect or pseudo-link may be performed when the "special 1" or "special 2" decorative pattern is included in two of the three decorative patterns.

Further, in this effect example, the description has been made in comparison with the button image displayed in the button operation effect in which the decorative pattern of “special 2” is displayed and displayed in the decorative pattern variable display once. The present invention also includes a comparison between the "special 2" decorative pattern displayed in the pattern variation display and the button image displayed in the button operation effect that is not related to the display of the "special 2" decorative pattern. It can be applied as a concept.

FIG. 276 is a step-by-step diagram showing another example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 276, the button operation effect is performed when the three "special 2" decorative patterns are arranged, but the button operation effect is not started without the three "special 2" decorative patterns being arranged. It is shown that the production is being performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 276(1) and 276(2) are the same as those in FIGS. 274(1) and 274(2), so description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 276(2), after the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 276(3) makes the first stop, and the special symbol 2 is displayed on the left symbol. Is displayed as a stop. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 276(4), the second stop is performed and "special 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Here, when "special 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, "special 2" is more likely to be stopped and displayed on the right symbol than when "special 2" is not stopped and displayed on the left symbol. Good. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to quickly give up on the start of the button operation effect, and the expectation for the button operation effect being performed can be expected until the last minute when the third stop of the decorative pattern is performed. Sometimes you can. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 276(5), the third stop is performed, the decorative pattern of "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the middle pattern, and the decorative pattern of "special 2-decoration 4-special 2" is displayed. The combination is temporarily stopped and displayed, and it is notified that three "special 2" are not prepared and the button operation effect is not started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the left symbol and the right symbol are variably displayed at high speed, as shown in FIG. 276(6), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and "decoration 3" on the right symbol. "Is displayed as a stop, and a temporary stop due to fluctuations is performed with a combination of the decorative decorations that are missing in "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 3", and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 276(7), "decoration 4" -Decoration 4-decoration 3" is fixedly displayed by a combination of missing decorative patterns. At this time, in the special symbol 1 4th symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is a loss is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol "Special figure I", which is a lost symbol, is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 277 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 278 is a diagram showing a continuation of the concrete effect example shown in FIG. 277. FIG. 279 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 278. In the example productions shown in FIGS. 277 to 279, the pseudo continuous production is performed when three "special 1" decorative patterns are arranged, and the button operation production is performed when three "special 2" decorative patterns are arranged. It is shown to take place. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 277(1) to (4) are the same as those in FIGS. 276(1) to 276(4), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 277(4), the second stop is performed, and after the "special 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277(5) performs the third stop. That is, the decoration symbol of "special 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the temporary stop is displayed in a mode in which three "special 2" are arranged.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277(6), the decorative symbol starts the variable display again and the button operation effect is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 277(6), a vibration/rotation button image 136aV showing how the effect button 136 vibrates and rotates is displayed, and the button reception time meter MT together with this vibration/rotation button image 136aV. Is also displayed. At this time, the effect button 136 also starts to vibrate and rotate the internal mechanism. When the effect button 136 is vibrated and the internal mechanism is rotated, the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than when the effect button 136 is not vibrated and the internal mechanism is not rotated (the big hit symbol is easily displayed. ) Is configured as. This button operation effect can be said to be a notice effect in which a chance eye appears in the symbol change display, and is a look-ahead notice effect that gives a notice that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the held symbol change display. Can also be said. Note that the vibration/rotation button image 136aV may be replaced with the button image 136a in the default display mode described above. In this case, for example, the display color of the button image 136a may be changed, the button image 136a may be displayed blinking, or the button image 136a may be displayed by a special animation. Further, instead of the vibration/rotation button image 136aV, it may be displayed in another display mode (for example, a display mode of a deca button). At the timing shown in FIG. 277(6), the operation effective period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as effective. As described above, in this effect example, in the button operation effect, it is possible to display the button image corresponding to the state of the effect button 136 (at least one of vibration and rotation), and the display mode of "special 2" Can be said to have different displays. In this example of effect, the effect button 136 may only vibrate, and a button image may be displayed in which a state of vibrating correspondingly is displayed, or only the rotation operation of the internal mechanism of the effect button 136. It is also possible to display the button image showing the state of rotating correspondingly. Further, the button image 136a in the default display mode may be displayed in a normal state in which the effect button 136 is neither vibrated nor rotated. There may be a case where a button image other than the button image corresponding to the state of the effect button 136 is displayed. For example, when the effect button 136 is vibrating and rotating, the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed. May be displayed. On the contrary, although the vibration/rotation button image 136aV is displayed, the effect button 136 may take a default state in which neither vibration nor rotation operation is performed.

Then, after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 277(7), as shown in FIG. 277(8), the decorative pattern is displayed as the default display. In addition to the variable display being performed as a mode, a plurality of star patterns of large and small sizes are displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable display, and a display that affects the decorative pattern in a variable display is displayed. Be seen.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 277(9), after temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the missing decorative patterns of “decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7”, FIG. 277(10) It is confirmed and displayed as shown in. At this time, in the special symbol 1 4th symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is a loss is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol "Special figure I", which is a lost symbol, is stopped and displayed. As described above, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7” is a chance, and includes the variable pattern display that is highly likely to be a big hit in the suspended variable pattern display. It functions as a pre-reading notice to inform that. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 277(10), it is foretold that the suspension of the first symbol variation display of special figure 1 is a symbol variation display that is highly likely to be a big hit. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 277(9), when temporarily stopped at the chance, the character "Chance" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the chance is displayed. Has announced that a pre-reading notice has been made.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (11), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (target hold icon of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280. It is displayed as a variation icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. That is, the variable display of the symbols, which is the target of the prefetch notice, has been started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (12) shows that the mini game is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (12), the characters "mini game" and "press with good timing" are displayed, and a band-shaped timing meter is displayed, and the timing meter is approximately at the center. It is shown that the treasure chest TR is arranged in the. At this time, the decorative pattern has moved to the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The display form of this timing meter changes so that the gauge decreases in accordance with the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136. In this mini game, it is suggested that something will appear by operating the effect button 136 at the timing when the right end of the gauge that is reduced and displayed as time passes through the center of the treasure chest TR.

FIG. 277(13) shows a state after the mini game is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 277(14), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end portion of the gauge of the timing meter is substantially in the center of the treasure box TR, as shown in FIG. 277(15). Is switched to a display showing how the pattern BF of the longest face appears. Then, as shown in FIG. 277(16), after the character "CONTINUE" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 277(17), the character "CONTINUE" is added to the variation icon h0, and the symbol variation display is displayed. A notice will be given that the pseudo-relation will be held. The variable icon h0 to which the character "continue" is added can also be referred to as an example of the display mode of the design symbol for notifying that the pseudo link is performed. As described above, a plurality of types of notification modes of the pseudo-relation may be prepared.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (18), the mini game is finished and the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (19) subsequent to FIG. 277 (18), the first stop is performed and “special 1” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278(20), the second stop is performed and "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (21), the third stop is performed, the decorative symbol of "special 1" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and three "special 1" are once arranged in a mode. A stop display (temporary stop display) is displayed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 278(22), the character of the co-panda appears, the character "again" is displayed, and it is informed that the pseudo-link will be performed. In this way, the decorative pattern for notifying that the pseudo-relation is to be performed has one type of display mode (decorative pattern of "special 1"), but of the effect design for notifying that the pseudo-ream is to be performed. Multiple types of display modes are prepared, and there are many variations. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (23), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol for the second time by pseudo-linking is started is shown. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “×2” indicating the number of times the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started by pseudo-linking is displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (24) shows that the selection effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (24), two boxes BXL and BXR are arranged side by side, and a button reception time meter MT is shown below them. Here, the box arranged on the left side may be referred to as a left box BXL, and the box arranged on the right side may be referred to as a right box BXR. Further, above the two boxes BXL and BXR, an operation key image 137p schematically showing the operation key unit 137 is displayed with the left and right button portions highlighted, and the operation key unit 137 is operated. "Choose" letters are displayed to encourage the user. Further, the left box BXL of the two boxes BXL and BXR is displayed in a state surrounded by the cursor CSL. That is, in this effect example, the left button 137c and the right button 137d of the operation key unit 137 are operated to move the cursor CSL between the start of the operation valid period and the end of the operation valid period. It is shown that when one of the boxes BXL and BXR is selected, an effect corresponding to the selected box is performed. The operation key image 137p is an image that is displayed only when the selection effect is performed, and is not prepared as a decorative pattern for notifying that the selection effect is performed. That is, no special symbol is prepared to give a notice that the operation effect will be performed. It should be noted that an image simulating the operation key unit 137 may be separately prepared as a special symbol for giving a notice that the operation effect will be performed.

Then, after the operation acceptance period of the operation key unit 137 is started, when the right key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 278(25), as shown in FIG. 278(26). The cursor CSL surrounding the left box BXL moves to surround the right box BXR.

After that, as shown in FIG. 278 (27), when the operation reception period has elapsed and the remaining amount of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT runs out, the decoration pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (28) does not select it. The left box BXL is erased, only the selected right box BXR is displayed, the right box BXR is opened, and the replay icon RP appears in that mode with a question mark in the vicinity. That is, the replay icon RP is different from the display mode of the decorative pattern of "special 1" in that the question mark is added. As a result, it is notified that the second pseudo-run may be performed in the symbol variable display. In this example of performance, since the question mark is added to the replay icon RP, it is not guaranteed that the pseudo-replay is performed. Therefore, the pseudo-relation may not be performed, and it may end with a gaze. Note that the question mark may not be added and the pseudo-replay may be displayed in a mode that guarantees that the pseudo-replay is always performed. If the replay icon RP appears from the box, the pseudo-replay is always performed. You may do it.

Then, as shown in FIG. 278 (29), the character "continuation" is added to the variable icon h0 and the question mark added to the replay icon RP corresponds to the display of the variable icon display area 280. A question mark is also displayed on the upper side, which also notifies that there is a possibility that pseudo-linking will be performed in the symbol variation display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278(30), the state where the selected effect is finished and the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the default display mode is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278(31), the first stop is performed and "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (32), the second stop is performed, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (33), the enlarged decorative symbol of "special 1" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. At this time, the decorative design of "special 1" may be stopped and displayed without the reach effect, or the decorative pattern of "special 1" may be stopped and displayed after the reach effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 278 (34), the character "again" is displayed below the decorative pattern of "special 1" and the question mark displayed above the variable icon display area 280 is changed. It is changed to an exclamation mark, and it is notified that pseudo-link will be performed. In this way, in this effect example, after the reach state is reached, the decorative symbol of "special 1" may be stopped and displayed, and pseudo-linking may be started. In addition, when the pseudo-relation is not performed, the reach effect may be performed after the decorative pattern of "special 1" is scrolled out downward without stopping, or the reach effect is not performed. One of the decorative symbols other than the special symbol may be stopped and displayed on the symbol, and a combination of the lost decorative symbols or a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols may be derived.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (35), a state is shown in which the variable display of the decorative symbol for the third time is started by the pseudo link. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “×3” is displayed, which indicates the number of times that the variable display of the decorative symbol for the third time is started by the pseudo link.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (36), a plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to overlap on the front side of the variable icon h0, and a display as if the variable icon h0 is affected is displayed. The situation is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 279 (37) following FIG. 278 (36), the change icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the Savohani display mode. That is, the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed to the advance notification display mode. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 278(36) to 279(37), when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may change instead of the change icon h0.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (38), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (39), the second stop is performed, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “super hot” to inform that the reach state has been reached, and suggests that the reliability of the big hit in this reach is high. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 279 (40), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which it has developed into a super reach (sublimation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative pattern is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen is displayed in which the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (41), the button notice effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (41), instead of the button image 136a, a protruding button image 136aS that schematically represents the aspect in which the effect button 136 protrudes upward is displayed, This suggests that the jackpot is likely to be a big hit (that is, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed) than when the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed. In this protruding button image 136aS, a grandfather character is added to the front side, and the character "Push it" is displayed below it to prompt the operation of the effect button 136. In this example of effect, since the effect button 136 does not have a function of projecting upward, the state of the effect button 136 does not correspond to the display mode of the protruding button image 136aS. 136 may have a function capable of projecting upward, and in this case, the effect button 136 may or may not be projected upward in accordance with the display of the projecting button image 136aS. .. Note that the button reception time meter MT is not displayed in this button advance notice effect.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 279 (42), the strong design image display device 208 displays the strong cut-in image CI1a as shown in FIG. 279 (43).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 279 (44), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and a winning screen is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 3" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3".

Then, as shown in FIG. 279 (45), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”, FIG. ), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decoration decorative patterns "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3". At this time, in the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1, "A" indicating that the special symbol A has been a big hit is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is also deleted. Further, on the first special figure display device 212, it is stopped and displayed in the form of the big hit symbol of special figure A.

In this example of effect, as shown in FIGS. 248(4) to (6), when the notice using the button reception time meter MT is not given, when the effect button 136 is operated, the button reception time is operated. Although the meter MT is erased, for example, even if the effect button 136 is operated, the button reception time meter MT may be continuously displayed and the effect display may be performed using the remaining display portion of the gauge. This effect display may be a notice display, or may be an effect display that is not a notice display.

FIG. 280 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 280(1) and 280(2) are the same as those in FIGS. 274(1) and 274(2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 280(2), after the symbol variable display of special figure 1 is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280(3), “decoration 3” is displayed on the left symbol from above the display screen. It is shown scrolling in and moving downward. At this time, "decoration 3" is moving at a low speed. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol at high speed continues.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280(4), the "decoration 3" of the left symbol moves at an extremely low speed immediately before the stop display, and at this time, on the front side of the "decoration 3" of the left symbol. A plurality of star patterns are displayed so as to be overlapped with each other, and an effect display as if affecting the "decoration 3" of the left pattern is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 280(5), after the "decoration 3" of the left symbol is changed to the decorative symbol of "special 2", it is stopped and displayed. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the effect button 136 is changed to the "special 2" design which is a simplified representation of the effect button 136 immediately before the decorative design is stopped and displayed. Further, subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280(6), "decoration 1" is scrolled in from the upper part of the display screen to the right symbol, and it is shown that it is moving downward. .. At this time, "decoration 1" is moving at a low speed. In addition, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues at a high speed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280(7), "decoration 1" of the right symbol moves at an extremely low speed immediately before the stop display, and at this time, on the front side of "decoration 1" of the right symbol. A plurality of star patterns are displayed so as to be overlapped with each other, and an effect display as if affecting the "decoration 1" of the right pattern is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 280(8), the "decoration 1" of the right symbol is changed to the "special 2" ornamental symbol, and then stopped and displayed. Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280(9), the state that "decoration 6" is scrolled in from the upper part of the display screen to the middle symbol and is moving downward. At this time, the "decoration 6" is moving at a low speed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280(10), the "decorative symbol 6" of the medium symbol moves at an ultra-low speed immediately before the stop display, and at this time, to the front side of the "decorative symbol 6" of the medium symbol. A plurality of star patterns are displayed so as to be overlapped with each other, and an effect display as if affecting the "decoration 6" of the middle pattern is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 280(11), after the "decoration 6" of the middle pattern is changed to the decoration pattern of "special 2", it is stopped and displayed, and the "special 2" is temporarily stopped in the form in which three are arranged. Is displayed (temporary stop display).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (12), the decorative symbol starts changing display again and the button operation effect is started. The effect shown in FIG. 280(12) is the same as that in FIG. 277(6), so description thereof will be omitted.

In this effect example, a state in which the effect button 136 is changed to a decorative pattern of “special 2” which is simply imitated just before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a stopped state is shown. For example, the decorative pattern is stopped. Immediately before, the "special 2" may be interrupted in the arrangement order of the decorative symbols, and the "special 2" may be stopped and displayed. For example, in the case where the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in the order of “decoration 1”>“decoration 2”>>...>“decoration 10”, “decoration 1” and “decoration 1” are displayed immediately before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. A decorative pattern of "special 2" may be inserted between "decoration 2" and "special 2" may be stopped and displayed.

FIG. 281 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 281(1) to 281(2) are the same as those in FIGS. 274(1) to 274(2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 281(2), after the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281(3) makes the first stop, and the left symbol is "decoration 3". Is displayed as a stop. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (4), the second stop is performed and "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281(5), a state in which the decorative symbol of "special 2" appears in the middle symbol and scrolls downward is shown. The "special 2" decorative pattern is an extra-large size display mode in which the size is larger than the normal display mode. After that, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (6), the left design and the right design are erased, and only the decorative design of the "special 2" which is the middle design is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display). It is shown. As described above, in this production example, instead of the stop display mode by the combination of three decorative symbols, the display may be performed by the stop display mode by one decorative symbol.

Then, as shown in FIG. 281 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the button operation effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (7), the simplified button image 136aX imitating the decorative pattern of "special 2" is displayed together with the button reception time meter MT. That is, in the simplified button image 136aX, the display portion of the button is the same as the decorative pattern whose display mode is "special 2", but the decorative pattern of "special 2" is displayed at least together with the button reception time meter MT. It can be said that the display mode is different from. The display mode of the simplified button image 136aX may be a mode in which the character display of "Chance" is omitted from the display mode of the decorative pattern of "special 2". In this case, although the shape of the button is common, It can be said that the display mode of the simple button image 136aX and the display mode of the decorative pattern of "special 2" are different depending on the presence or absence. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (7), the decorative pattern is not displayed, but it may be displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen, for example.

On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (5), the decorative symbol of "special 2" appears in the middle symbol and the state of scrolling downward is shown, but the button operation effect is performed. If there is not, for example, the decorative pattern of "special 2" is scrolled out without performing stop display, and then, as shown in FIG. 281 (6'), "decorative 6" is stopped displayed in the middle pattern. After the temporary stop due to the fluctuation of the swing is performed, the display may be confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns with the loss of “decoration 3-decoration 6-decoration 1”.

FIG. 282 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the pseudo continuous effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 282(1) and 282(2) are the same as those in FIGS. 274(1) and 274(2), so description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 282(2), after the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282(3) makes the first stop, and the left symbol is "special 1". Is displayed as a stop. Characters for informing the number of times of pseudo-repeating are added to the decoration pattern of "special 1" in this effect example. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 282(3), the decoration pattern of "special 1" is added. Is added with a character “×1” indicating that there is a possibility that the first pseudo-repeating may be performed. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282(4), the second stop is performed and "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Also for the "special 1" in this right pattern, the character "x1" is added to inform that the first pseudo-run may be performed. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282(5), the third stop is performed, the decorative symbol of "special 1" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and three "special 1" are temporarily arranged. It is stopped. Also in this case, the character "x1" is added to notify that the first pseudo-repeating may be performed for "special 1" in the middle pattern.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 282(6), the decorative pattern in which three "special 1" are arranged is erased, and instead, the decorative pattern stop display of "special 1" which is a display mode of an extra-large size is deleted. Is shown. Thereby, it is notified that the first pseudo-repeating will be performed. As described above, in this production example, instead of the stop display mode by the combination of three decorative symbols, the display may be performed by the stop display mode by one decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282(7), a state in which the second variable display of decorative symbols by pseudo-linking is started is shown. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “×2” indicating the number of times the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started by pseudo-linking is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282(8), the first stop is performed and "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. Also in the decorative pattern of "special 1" shown in FIG. 282(8), a character for notifying the number of times of pseudo-repeating is added, and "x2" for notifying that the second pseudo-repeating may be performed. Is added. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282(9), the second stop is performed and "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Also for the "special 1" in this right pattern, the character "x2" is added to inform that the second pseudo-run may be performed. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (10), the third stop is performed, the decorative symbol of "special 1" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and three "special 1" are temporarily arranged. It is stopped. Also in this case, the character "x2" is added to inform that the second pseudo-run may be performed for "special 1" in the middle pattern.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (11), the decorative pattern in which three "special 1" are arranged is erased, and instead, the decorative pattern stop display of "special 1" which is an oversized display mode is displayed. Is shown. Thereby, it is notified that the second pseudo-repeating will be performed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (12), a state is shown in which the variable display of the decorative pattern for the third time by pseudo-linking has started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “×3” is displayed, which indicates the number of times that the variable display of the decorative symbol for the third time is started by the pseudo link.

As described above, in this example of performance, the number of pseudo runs is displayed on the decorative pattern of "special 1", but the display mode of the decorative pattern of "special 1" itself is changed according to the number of pseudo runs. You may do it. This may allow the player to easily recognize the number of pseudo runs.

FIG. 283 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 283(1) and 283(2) are the same as those in FIGS. 274(1) and 274(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 283(2), after the symbol variable display of the special map 1 is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283(3) makes the first stop, and the left symbol is "special 2". Is displayed as a stop. In the decorative pattern of "special 2" in this example of performance, the miniature character BCH of the length is displayed. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283(4), the second stop is performed and "special 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Unlike the decorative pattern of "special 2" stopped and displayed on the left symbol, the decorative symbol of "special 2" in the right symbol is displayed in a mode in which the mini character PND of the panda is added. In this example of performance, even if the same "special 2" decorative pattern is used, the added symbols are different, so it may be possible to prevent erroneous recognition that a reach has occurred. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283(5), the third stop is performed, and the decorative symbol “special 2” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. The decoration symbol of "special 2" in the middle symbol is displayed in a mode in which a mini character BCH having the same length as the decoration symbol of "special 2" stopped and displayed on the left symbol is added. As a result, three "special 2" are temporarily stopped and displayed, but in this effect example, the type of the mini character added to "special 2" stopped and displayed on the right symbol is different. .. That is, in this effect example, even when three "special 2" are arranged, the display mode of at least one of the "special 2" is different from the display mode of the other "special 2". In some cases, it may be possible to prevent misidentification that a big hit has occurred. In this production example, the display mode of "special 2" stopped and displayed on the right symbol and the display mode of "special 2" stopped and displayed on the middle symbol are the same, but three "special 2" are displayed. All of the display modes may be different. In addition, there may be a case where the types of the mini characters added to the three "special 2" are all the same (for example, the mini character BCH of the length is added to all of the three "special 2"). In this case, the reliability of the jackpot is higher (the jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed) than when the types of the mini characters added to the three "special 2" are not the same. Good.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283(6), a state in which the button operation effect is started by displaying the three “special 2” decorative symbols in a stopped state is shown. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 283(6), a vibration/rotation button image 136aV showing how the effect button 136 vibrates and rotates is displayed, and the button reception time meter MT together with this vibration/rotation button image 136aV. Is also displayed. Further, the vibration/rotation button image 136aV is provided with a miniature character BCH having a length, and in this respect, it can be said that the display pattern is common to the above-mentioned "special 2" decorative pattern. At this time, the effect button 136 is in a normal state with neither vibration nor rotation, but the vibration and the rotation operation of the internal mechanism may be started. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display being executed (the symbol variation display). Note that the mini character added to the vibration/rotation button image 136aV may be a mini character (for example, a panda mini character PND or the like) other than the mini character BCH having the length. At this time, the reliability of the jackpot may be changed according to the type of the additionally displayed mini character. For example, the mini character BCH having the longest length is displayed as compared with the case where the panda mini character PND is displayed. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be higher. Further, as in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 280(12), the mini character may not be additionally displayed, and when the mini character is additionally displayed, it is a big hit compared to when the mini character is not additionally displayed. May be made to have a high reliability (a big hit symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed). Further, instead of the vibration/rotation button image 136aV, the button image 136a in the default display mode described above may be displayed. At this time, the longest mini character BCH and the panda mini character PND may be added to the button image 136a. At the timing shown in FIG. 283(6), the operation valid period has not started yet, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

After that, after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 283(7), as shown in FIG. 283(8), the characters “×1” are displayed. The three "special 1" decorative symbols to which "is added" are stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the first pseudo-repeating will be performed. In addition, the above-mentioned mini character may be added and displayed to the decorative pattern of "special 1", and in this case, at least one mini character of the three decorative patterns of "special 1" is the other "special 1". It may be different from the mini character having the decorative pattern of “” to prevent misjudgment of a big hit or a reach state.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 283(9), the decorative pattern in which three "special 1" are arranged is erased, and instead, the decorative pattern stop display of "special 1" which is a display mode of an oversized size is deleted. Is shown. Thereby, it is notified that the first pseudo-repeating will be performed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 283(10), a state is shown in which the variable display of the second decorative pattern by pseudo-linking has started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “×2” indicating the number of times the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started by pseudo-linking is displayed.

FIG. 284 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 284(1) to 284(7) are the same as those in FIGS. 274(1) to 274(7), so description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 284(7) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, as shown in FIG. 284(8), the button is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. While the image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are deleted, a plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to cover the second hold icon h12, and a display is given to influence these. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, "decoration 4" is scrolled in from above the display screen and is moving toward the stop position of the middle symbol due to the low speed fluctuation.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 284(9), the display form of the second hold icon h12 is changed from the default display form to the button advance notice display form. That is, the display mode of this button advance notice is the display mode of the prefetch advance notice. The display mode of the button notice is different from the display mode of the decorative pattern of "special 2" in that the character "Chance" is not displayed and the animation for prompting the button operation is displayed. .. In addition, the medium pattern continues to change at low speed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284(10), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed, after that, as shown in FIG. 284(11), On the symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols with the missing "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 4" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, in the special symbol 1 4th symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is a loss is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In the first special figure display device 212, the special symbol "Special figure I", which is a lost symbol, is stopped and displayed. The second hold icon h12 that has changed to a button image has not changed yet.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (12), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, a moving animation of the holding icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the object holding icon of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280. Then, the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The second hold icon h12, which was the display mode of the button notice, continues to be the display form of the button notice even after being moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and displayed as the first hold icon h11. To be done.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 284 (13), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the button advance notice display mode to the sabotani display as shown in FIG. 284 (14). The mode is changed. As a result, it is suggested that the first symbol fluctuation display that is held is a symbol fluctuation display that is highly likely to be a big hit.

FIG. 285(A) is a diagram showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 285(B) is a pseudo executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the other example of continuous production.

FIG. 285(A1) to FIG. 285(A2) show a state in which the content of the button operation effect is suggested by the decorative pattern of "special 2". Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285(A1), a state in which the "special 2" decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on each of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol is shown. In this effect example, the display mode of "special 2" that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is different from the display mode of "special 2" that is stopped and displayed in the left symbol and the right symbol, and the effect button 136 is imitated. It is said to have been done. Then, in the "special 2" of the middle pattern, the character "Hold change" is displayed on the upper surface thereof, and by operating the effect button 136 in the button operation effect, the hold icon (or the variable icon) is changed. It has been notified in advance that the display mode may change. That is, the decoration symbol of "special 2" of the middle symbol can be said to be a dedicated display mode for notifying that the notice of the change of the hold icon due to the button hold is given.

Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285(A2) shows that the button operation effect is started. Specifically, when the button operation effect is started, the decorative pattern display device 208 erases the decorative pattern in which three "special 2" are complete, and instead, the button image 136a represented by an oversized size is displayed. Is shown. The character "Hold change" is displayed on the upper surface of the button image 136a to notify that the notice of change of the hold icon due to the button hold is given. The button image 136a has the same display mode as the special display mode "special 2", but differs in that an animation for promoting the button operation is performed. That is, it can be said that the button image 136a shown in FIG. 285(A2) and the decorative pattern of "special 2" of the dedicated display mode shown in FIG. 285(A1) share a part of the display mode. On the other hand, the first hold icon h11 has changed from the default display mode to the button reservation display mode. The word "push" is displayed on the upper surface of the hold icon h11 in the button hold display mode, and prompts the player to operate the effect button 136. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated, the button image 136a is erased, and the hold icon h11 in the button hold display mode is changed to another display mode (for example, the display mode of Sabohani or the default display mode). ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285(B), the pseudo-reminder icon acquired and stocked in the mini game or the like is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. This pseudo-rendition notice icon is a notice icon displayed in a manner in which the characters "quasi-ren" are added to the lord's character, and may be displayed as both the look-ahead notice and the notice in the symbol variation display. However, the display mode may be different between the prefetching notice and the symbol variable display. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 285(B), it is shown that three decorative symbols of "special 1" are gathered and a pseudo run occurs. Note that in FIG. 285(B), the pseudo-reminder icon displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen is not related to the display of the three "special 1" decorative patterns, Both may be related. Here, in the case where the display mode of the pseudo notice icon and the display mode of the decorative pattern of "special 1" are different, the player can clearly distinguish the notice icon and the decorative pattern. There is.

In the embodiments described so far, the main display device having a large screen size and one or a plurality of sub display devices having a screen size smaller than the main display device may be provided. In this case, For example, a design displayed on a sub-display device having a smaller screen size than the main display device than a design (decorative design, button image, various icons, characters, etc.) displayed on the main display device having a large screen size. You may make it display larger.
In the above description,
"Image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],

Symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],

A notice means capable of executing a plurality of types of notices [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 120, a shielding device 246, a performance movable body 224, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game underframe lamp 542, etc.] ,
A gaming table equipped with

The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display [for example, a hold icon or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,

The hold display is a display displayed in a hold display area of the image display means [for example, a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, a hold icon display area of special figure 2, a variable icon display area 280, etc.],

The hold display is a display corresponding to the number of the operation of the symbol variable display being held (hereinafter referred to as the “holding number”) [for example, in the holding icon display area 281 of the special figure 1]. , The number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of special figure 1 is held is displayed],
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is exhausted,

The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285 or the like] of the image display means,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,

The notice icon display area is an area in which one or a plurality of notice icons can be displayed [for example, the notice icon display area 285 includes the notice icon first display area YA1 to the notice icon sixth display area YA6. , Each area is configured to display a notice icon],

The notice means is means for executing, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, executing the notice of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed [eg, , When the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted, the pseudo-relation effect may be executed, and when the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is exhausted, the reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,

During the period in which the symbol variable display is being executed once, the first notice icon [for example, the notice icon I6 of a hat] of the plurality of types of notice icons has a first number [for example, two, etc.]. ] A second number larger than the first number [eg, three, etc.] is more likely to be a big hit than a digested case,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the image display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of production.

Further, according to this gaming machine, since the notice icon is displayed, it is easy to recognize that there is a change in which the notice icon may be consumed, so the player pays attention to the display in the hold. , It may be possible to prevent missing the notice display corresponding to the notice icon.

Further, according to this gaming machine, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and consumption of the notice icon.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of symbols, or may be capable of executing other than the variable display of symbols. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variable display, or may not execute the symbol variable display.

Further, the advance notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of advance notices, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of advance notices. In addition, the advance notice means may execute a plurality of types of advance notices, or may not execute a plurality of types of advance notices.

Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the hold display, or may be capable of displaying other than the hold display. Further, the image display means may always display the hold display or may not display the hold display.

Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice icons. Further, the image display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of advance notice icons.

Further, the hold display may be displayed only in the hold display area of the image display means, or may be displayed other than the hold display area of the image display means.

Further, the hold display may be a hold icon or may not be the hold icon, and may be represented by letters, numbers, or symbols, for example.

Further, the hold display may display only the hold number or may display other than the hold number.

Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is exhausted, or may be started other than when the hold is exhausted. Further, the symbol variation display may be always started when the hold is exhausted, or may not be started when the hold is exhausted.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area of the image display means, or may be displayed in a region other than the notice icon display area of the image display means. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means.

Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying a matter other than the one or a plurality of notice icons. Further, the notice icon display area may always display one or a plurality of notice icons, or may not display one or a plurality of notice icons.

Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the type of notice corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed, a notice other than the type of notice corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be executable. Further, the advance notice means may be a device which, when one of the advance notice icons displayed in the advance notice icon display area is exhausted, always executes an advance notice of a type corresponding to the type of the exhausted advance notice icon, When one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed, the notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may not be executed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to be displayed in a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is equal to that of the notice icons”]. A notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be executed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it is possible to expect the number of times to execute the notice displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change to be consumed, so that the player should not miss the notice display. In some cases, it can be done.

Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed, or may be displayed in a number other than the number according to the number of possibilities of the notice being executed. Things may also be displayed. Further, the notice icon may always display the number according to the number of times the notice may be executed, or may not display the number according to the number of times the notice may be executed. There may be.

In addition, "the notice means gives a false notice in the same form as the notice form [for example, a pseudo continuous production that is a big hit, a reach transition production, etc.] Is a viable means,

When the notice icon (for example, the notice icon I6 for a hat, the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, etc.) displayed in the notice icon display area is exhausted, the notice means is the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. Is a means capable of executing the false notice of the type corresponding to [for example, a false consecutive notice or a reach transition effect, etc.

After the false notification is executed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of order,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give the player a sense of tension until the notice icon is consumed and the notice is executed.

Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a fake notice in the same manner as the notice manner, or may be a means other than a false notice in the same manner as the notice manner. May be. Further, the notifying means may always execute a false notice in the same manner as the notice manner, or may not execute a false notice in the same manner as the notice manner.

Further, even if the notice means is capable of executing only a fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been exhausted when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is exhausted. Or, if one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, it may be possible to execute something other than a false notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. .. Further, the notice means may be one that always executes a fake notice of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. However, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed, a false notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may not be executed.

In addition, after the false notice is executed, the result of the variable display of symbols may be configured to be always out, or after the false notice is executed, the result of the variable display of symbols may be a big hit. It may be.

It should be noted that there may be a case in which after the false notice is executed, the notice in which the jackpot symbol is likely to be displayed on the symbol display means is executed.

Further, “the number of the notice icons started to be displayed in the notice icon display area during the period in which the one-time symbol variable display is executed is more than the third number [eg, one, etc.] The fourth number [for example, three, etc.], which is larger than the third number, is more likely to be a big hit,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the variable display of symbols.

In addition, "holding display means capable of executing a display according to the number of holdings [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, production holding lamp 286, etc.],
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the hold display and the notice icon display.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of executing only a display corresponding to the number of reservations, or may be capable of executing a display other than the display corresponding to the number of reservations. Further, the hold display means may always perform display according to the number of reservations, or may not perform display according to the number of reservations.

Further, "the holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.],

A gaming table characterized by that. According to this gaming table, it may be possible to clearly recognize the hold display.

Here, the hold display means may be configured to include only the light emitting means, or may be configured to include a portion other than the light emitting means (for example, an image display means).

The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be configured by LEDs of a plurality of colors, and for example, a single package including a plurality of LEDs such as a full-color LED may be used. Further, it may be composed of a single color LED.

In addition to the hold display means, the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the firing operation informing means for informing about the operation of the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

In addition, “pre-reading notice means that can execute the pre-reading notice [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208, the speaker 120, the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, the game board lamp 532, the game underframe lamp 540, etc. ],

The prefetching notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetching notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the expectation for a big hit may be increased by displaying the notice icon.

Here, the prefetching advance notice means may execute only the prefetching advance notice, or may execute other than the prefetching advance notice. Further, the prefetching advance notice means may always execute the prefetching advance notice, or may not execute the prefetching advance notice.

Further, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing the pre-reading notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the pre-reading notice means may be one that always executes the pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the pre-read notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

In addition, “the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 82(2)]”) The notice icon may be exhausted in the fifth number [for example, three, etc.] during the period in which

The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, “first symbol variation display [for example, three which are targets of prefetch shown in FIG. 82(2). There is a case where the notice icon is consumed by a sixth number [for example, one, etc.] during a period in which the "variation display of symbols based on the reservation held before the eye is held]" is executed. Yes,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,

The suspension display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, in FIG. 82(4) The hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold, which is the target of prefetch, is displayed during the period in which the variable display of symbols based on the hold that is held before the second hold that is the target of prefetch is displayed. The game table is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1], and the like. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the number of times the notice icon is consumed differs between the case where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is being performed and the case where the symbol variation display that is executed before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is performed. Therefore, it may be possible to make it easy to understand the symbol variation display that the player should pay attention to.

Here, in the period in which the second symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be consumed only in the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variable display is being executed. In, there may be a case where the notice icon is consumed by a number different from the fifth number. Further, in the period when the second symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely exhausted by the fifth number, or in the period when the second symbol variable display is being executed. , The notice icon may not be digested in the fifth number.

Further, in the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be consumed only in the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed. , The notice icon may be consumed in a number different from the sixth number. In addition, during the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely consumed by the sixth number, or during the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed. , The notice icon may not be digested in the sixth number.

Further, the hold display may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, or the first During the period in which the symbol variable display is being executed, it may be possible to notify other than the fact that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended. In addition, the hold display, in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, may necessarily inform that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol In the period in which the variable display is executed, there may be a case where the fact that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended is not notified.

Further, there is a case where the notice icon starts to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) is being executed [eg, As shown in FIG. 91(C), the display of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes and the notice icon I10 of the fan increase display are displayed in one pattern variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the notice icons may increase even in the variable display in which the notice icons are consumed, it may be possible to make the player have expectations until the notice icons are all consumed.

Here, in the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, the advance notice icon may be always displayed, or in the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, the advance notice icon is displayed. The display may not be started in some cases. Further, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed during a period other than the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being performed. May start to be displayed.

Note that the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the variable display in which the notice icon is consumed.

Further, in the period in which the "symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter, referred to as "third symbol fluctuation display") executed before the fourth symbol fluctuation display is executed" is being executed, The notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed may start to be displayed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat that is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 91(C) is the symbol variation display. Is increased during the execution of the symbol variation display that is executed before
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only during the period when the third symbol variable display is being executed, it may be configured to start displaying the notice icon that is consumed during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variable display is executed, the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is executed may be displayed. Further, in the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is being executed may be configured to always start displaying, In the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, there may be a case where the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is being executed is not started to be displayed.

Note that the notice icon that is consumed during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is executed does not have to start to be displayed during the period when the third symbol variable display is being executed.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area capable of displaying the hold display up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight],

The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icons up to an eighth number [eg, six, etc.],
The seventh number is different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the displayable number of the hold display and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the display of the notice icon.

Here, the hold display area may always display the hold display up to the seventh number, or may not display the hold display up to the seventh number.

Further, the notice icon display area may always display the notice icons up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icons up to the eighth number.

The maximum displayable number of the hold display and the maximum displayable number of the notice icon may be the same.

Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be greater than the maximum displayable number of the pending display of special figure 1, at least the same, or the same.

Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of the pending display of special figure 2. Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be larger than the total displayable maximum number of the pending displays of the special diagrams 1 and 2, and at least the same may be the same.

In addition, “a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of productions [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 210, a shielding device 246, a production movable body 224, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game underframe lamp 542]. Etc.]

One of the plurality of types of advance notices is a first advance notice [for example, FIG. 85(49) to FIG. 85(50) or the reach transition effect shown in FIG. 97(49)].

One of the plurality of types of notices is a second notice [for example, a stage change effect shown in FIG. 92(Ac) or FIG. 92(Bb)],
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice,

One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 85(51) to (57) or 97(50-1) to (57). Production etc.],

One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of a moon background],
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice notifying that the first effect will be executed,
The second notice is a notice notifying that the second effect will be executed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, since the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing an effect other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may execute notices other than the first notice and the second notice. Further, the advance notice means may execute the first advance notice and the second advance notice without fail, or may not execute the first advance notice and the second advance notice.

Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. .. In addition, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

In addition, the first notice may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. .. In addition, the first notice may necessarily notify that the first effect will be executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

In addition, the second notice may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. .. In addition, the second notice may necessarily notify that the second effect will be executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

In addition, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be surely consumed [for example, FIG. 82(1) to FIG. 86(66) or FIG. 94(1) to As shown in FIG. 98 (66), the increased notice icons are all consumed, etc.]. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon being displayed is always executed, which may improve the player's expectation.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,

[First display means capable of executing symbol variation display [eg, first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, etc.],

Second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, or a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 or the production holding lamp 286],
A gaming table equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,

The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, pseudo continuous production, freeze production, stop design notice, stage change production, reach transition production, premier notice production, re-variation production, etc.]. And

The second display means displays a display corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as "holding number") in which the operation of the symbol variable display is held, for example, a holding display area [for example, holding icon display area 281 of special figure 1 , The holding icon display area of the special figure 2, the variable icon display area 280, the holding display area of the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] [for example, in the holding icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, The number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of special figure 1 is held is displayed],
The symbol variation display is a display started when the hold is exhausted,

The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285 or the like] of the second display means,

The notice icon is an icon that does not display the pending number depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,

The notice icon display area is an area in which one or a plurality of notice icons can be displayed [for example, the notice icon display area 285 includes the notice icon first display area YA1 to the notice icon sixth display area YA6. , Each area is configured to display a notice icon],

The second display means, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, a display capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. This is a means [for example, when the hat notice icon I6 is exhausted, a pseudo-relation effect may be executed, and when the 1000-box notice icon I9 is exhausted, the reach transition effect is executed. Etc.],

During the period in which the symbol variable display is being executed once, a second number [eg, three, etc.] that is larger than the first number is consumed than when the notice icon is exhausted by the first number. If it is done, it is structured so that it is more likely to be a big hit,
A game table characterized by that. ] Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the image display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of production.

Further, according to this gaming machine, since the notice icon is displayed, it is easy to recognize that there is a change in which the notice icon may be consumed, so the player pays attention to the display in the hold. , It may be possible to prevent missing the notice display corresponding to the notice icon.

Further, according to this gaming machine, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and consumption of the notice icon.

Here, the first display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of symbols, or may be capable of executing other than the variable display of symbols. Further, the first display means may always execute the symbol variable display, or may not execute the symbol variable display.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of advance notice icons. Further, the second display means may display a plurality of types of advance notice icons without fail, or may not display a plurality of types of advance notice icons.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of advance notice displays. In addition, the second display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of advance notice displays.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying a display according to the number of holdings only in the holding display area, or may display a display according to the number of holdings other than the holding display area. It may be. Still, the second display means may always display the display according to the number of holdings in the holding display area, or may not display the display according to the number of holdings in the holding display area. ..

Further, the symbol variation display may be one that can be started only when the hold is exhausted, or may be one that can be started even when the hold is not exhausted. Further, the symbol variation display may be always started when the hold is exhausted, or may not be started even when the hold is exhausted.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area of the second display means, or may be displayed in a region other than the notice icon display area of the second display means. Good. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means.

Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying a matter other than the one or a plurality of notice icons. Further, the notice icon display area may always display one or a plurality of notice icons, or may not display one or a plurality of notice icons. In addition, the second display means is capable of displaying only the type of notice display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. However, if one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed, a notice display other than the notice display of the type corresponding to the digested notice icon type can also be displayed. Good. In addition, the second display means, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, always displays a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. Alternatively, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed, the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may not be displayed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to be displayed in a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice display corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it is possible to expect the number of times the notice display is displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change to be consumed, so that the player does not miss the notice display. It may be possible to

Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in the number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or may be displayed in accordance with the number of the notice display likely to be displayed. Other items may also be displayed. Further, the notice icon may always display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or may display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed. You may not.

In addition, "the second display means is a false notice display in the same mode as the notice display mode [for example, a pseudo continuous production that is a big hit, a reach transition production, or the like] [for example, a pseudo continuous production or a reach that is an outlier]. Transition effect, etc.] can be displayed,

The second display means, when one of the notice icons [for example, the notice icon I6 for a hat, the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, the notice that has been consumed A display unit capable of displaying the false notice display of a type corresponding to the type of icon [for example, a false consecutive notice or a reach transition effect, etc.

After the false notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of alignment,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give the player a sense of tension until the notice icon is consumed and the notice display is displayed.

Here, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a fake advance notice display in the same mode as the advance notice display, or other than a fake advance notice display in the same mode as the advance notice display May also be displayable. Further, the second display means may necessarily display a fake notice display in the same manner as the notice display mode, or may not display a fake notice display in the same manner as the notice display mode. It may be.

Also, the second display means is capable of displaying only a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed. Or, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, it is possible to display other than the fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. May be The second display means always displays a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. It may exist, or when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, it may not display a fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. ..

Further, after the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display may be always off, or after the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is a big hit. There may be cases.

In addition, after the fake notice display is displayed, there is a case where the notice display in which the jackpot symbol is likely to be displayed is displayed on the symbol display means.

Further, “the number of the notice icons started to be displayed in the notice icon display area during the period in which the one-time symbol variable display is executed is more than the third number [eg, one, etc.] The fourth number [for example, three, etc.], which is larger than the third number, is more likely to be a big hit,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the variable display of symbols.

In addition, "the second display means is a display means composed of a plurality of display means,

One display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like],

One of the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, a production hold lamp 286, etc.],
The hold display means is a display means including the hold display area,

The holding display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holdings in the holding display area [for example, turning on a number of holding lamps corresponding to the number of holdings],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the hold display and the notice icon display.

Here, the second display means may be composed of two display means, or may be composed of three or more display means.

Further, the second display means may be configured by only the image display means and the hold display means, or may be configured by including other than the image display means and the hold display means. In addition, the second display means may necessarily include the image display means and the hold display means, or may not include at least one of the image display means and the hold display means.

Further, the hold display means may be configured to include only the hold display area, or may be configured to include other than the hold display area. Further, the hold display means may be configured to always include the hold display area, or may not include the hold display area.

Further, the hold display means may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of hold only in the hold display area, or may display a display corresponding to the number of hold other than the hold display area. Good. Further, the hold display means may always display a display corresponding to the hold number in the hold display area, or may not display a display according to the hold number in the hold display area.

Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative design, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative design. Further, the image display means may always display the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may not display the decorative symbol display device.

Further, "the holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
According to this gaming table, it may be possible to clearly recognize the hold display.

Here, the hold display means may be configured to include only the light emitting means, or may be configured to include a portion other than the light emitting means (for example, an image display means).

The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be configured by LEDs of a plurality of colors, and for example, a single package including a plurality of LEDs such as a full-color LED may be used. Further, it may be composed of a single color LED.

In addition to the hold display means, the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the firing operation informing means for informing about the operation of the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

In addition, “the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, since the variable display of the decorative pattern and the hold icon are displayed on the same image display means, it may be possible to easily confirm the number of holding while visually observing the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Here, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, the image display means may always display the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may not display the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In addition, “pre-reading notice means that can execute the pre-reading notice [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208, the speaker 120, the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, the game board lamp 532, the game underframe lamp 540, etc. ],

The prefetching notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetching notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the expectation for a big hit may be increased by displaying the notice icon.

Here, the prefetching advance notice means may execute only the prefetching advance notice, or may execute other than the prefetching advance notice. Further, the prefetching advance notice means may always execute the prefetching advance notice, or may not execute the prefetching advance notice.

Further, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing the pre-reading notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the pre-reading notice means may be one that always executes the pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the pre-read notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

In addition, “the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 82(2)]”) The notice icon may be exhausted in the fifth number [for example, three, etc.] during the period in which

The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, “first symbol variation display [for example, three which are targets of prefetch shown in FIG. 82(2). There is a case where the notice icon is consumed by a sixth number [for example, one, etc.] during a period in which the "variation display of symbols based on the reservation held before the eye is held]" is executed. Yes,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,

The display according to the number of holdings is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is executed [eg, FIG. 82]. Corresponding to the second hold that is the target of prefetching during the period in which the variable display of symbols based on the hold that is held before the second hold that is the target of prefetch shown in (4) is being executed. The holding icon h12 is displayed in the holding icon display area 281 of the special figure 1], and the like, a gaming machine. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the number of times the notice icon is consumed differs between the case where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is being performed and the case where the symbol variation display that is executed before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is performed. Therefore, it may be possible to make it easy to understand the symbol variation display that the player should pay attention to.

Here, in the period in which the second symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be consumed only in the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variable display is being executed. In, there may be a case where the notice icon is consumed by a number different from the fifth number. Further, in the period when the second symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely exhausted by the fifth number, or in the period when the second symbol variable display is being executed. , The notice icon may not be digested in the fifth number.

Further, in the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be consumed only in the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed. , The notice icon may be consumed in a number different from the sixth number. In addition, during the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely consumed by the sixth number, or during the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed. , The notice icon may not be digested in the sixth number.

Further, the display according to the number of holding may be able to inform only that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed. In the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed, it may be possible to notify other than the fact that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended. In addition, the display according to the number of holdings may be something that always informs that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period when the first symbol variation display is being executed, There may be a case where the fact that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended is not notified during the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed.

Further, there is a case where the notice icon starts to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) is being executed [eg, As shown in FIG. 91(C), the display of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes and the notice icon I10 of the fan increase display are displayed in one pattern variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the notice icons may increase even in the variable display in which the notice icons are consumed, it may be possible to make the player have expectations until the notice icons are all consumed.

Here, in the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, the advance notice icon may be always displayed, or in the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, the advance notice icon is displayed. The display may not be started in some cases. Further, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed during a period other than the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being performed. May start to be displayed.

Note that the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the variable display in which the notice icon is consumed.

Further, in the period in which the "symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter, referred to as "third symbol fluctuation display") executed before the fourth symbol fluctuation display is executed" is being executed, The notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed may start to be displayed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat that is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 91(C) is the symbol variation display. Is increased during the execution of the symbol variation display that is executed before
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only during the period when the third symbol variable display is being executed, it may be configured to start displaying the notice icon that is consumed during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variable display is executed, the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is executed may be displayed. Further, in the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is being executed may be configured to always start displaying, In the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, there may be a case where the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is being executed is not started to be displayed.

Note that the notice icon that is consumed during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is executed does not have to start to be displayed during the period when the third symbol variable display is being executed.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area capable of displaying a display corresponding to the hold number up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight],

The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icons up to an eighth number [eg, six, etc.],
The seventh number is different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the displayable number of displays according to the number of holdings and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the display of the notice icon.

Here, the hold display area may be one that always displays up to the seventh number according to the hold number, or may not display up to the seventh number according to the hold number. Good.

Further, the notice icon display area may always display the notice icons up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icons up to the eighth number.

Note that the maximum displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings and the maximum displayable number of the notice icon may be the same.

Further, the maximum displayable number of advance notice icons may be larger than the maximum displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings of special figure 1, or at least the same may be the same.

The maximum number of noticeable icons that can be displayed may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum number of notices that can be displayed according to the number of reserved characters in special figure 2.

Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be larger than the total displayable maximum number of the displays corresponding to the number of holdings of special figure 1 and special figure 2, at least good, or the same. Good.

In addition, “a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of productions [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 210, a shielding device 246, a production movable body 224, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game underframe lamp 542]. Etc.]

One of the plurality of types of notice display is a first notice display [for example, FIG. 85 (49) to FIG. (50) or the reach transition effect shown in FIG. 97 (49)],

One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display [eg, stage change effect shown in FIG. 92(Ac) or FIG. 92(Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,

One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 85(51) to (57) or 97(50-1) to (57). Production etc.],

One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of a moon background],
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,

The first notice display is a notice display for notifying that the first effect is executed,

The game machine characterized in that the second notice display is a notice display for notifying that the second effect is executed. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, since the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing an effect other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display and the second notice display, or may display a notice display other than the first notice display and the second notice display. It may be possible. Further, the second display means may necessarily display the first notice display and the second notice display, or may not display the first notice display and the second notice display. Good.

Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. .. In addition, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

Further, the first notice display may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. Good. In addition, the first notice display may necessarily notify that the first effect is executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

Further, the second notice display may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. Good. In addition, the second notice display may necessarily notify that the second effect is executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

In addition, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be surely consumed [for example, FIG. 82(1) to FIG. 86(66) or FIG. 94(1) to As shown in FIG. 98 (66), the increased notice icons are all consumed, etc.]. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon being displayed is always executed, which may improve the player's expectation.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that.

In the above-described embodiment, the notice icon functions as a prefetch notice, but it may be displayed separately from the prefetch notice. Alternatively, the display of the notice icon may be different from that displayed in the prefetch mode. For example, the notice icon may increase or disappear even in the normal background display, and the notice icon may increase or disappear even while the special background mode for prefetching is being executed. Good.

Further, for example, when the notice icon A is displayed, the notice display a is always displayed, when the notice icon B is displayed, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed, and when the notice icon C is displayed, If the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed and the notice icon D is displayed, the notice c is configured to be displayed without fail. It is a display that is displayed in the case of, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if the other notice icons (B, C, D) are exhausted, "the pattern in which the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed. It may be configured such that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when "the symbol variable display in which the notice display a is displayed" is performed than when the "variable display" is performed. Further, the notice display b is a display displayed when the notice icon B or the notice icon C is consumed, and the notice display c is displayed when the notice icon B, the notice icon C, or the notice icon D is consumed. This is a display, and the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when "the symbol variable display with the notice display b" is executed than with "the symbol variable display with the notice display c" being executed. May be configured. Further, the notice display d is a display that is displayed when the notice icon C is displayed, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if the other notice icons (A, B, D) are exhausted. When digested, either the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed. The jackpot symbol is fixedly displayed when the “preview icon A, the notice icon B, or the design variation display in which the notice icon D is consumed” is executed, rather than the “design change display in which the notice icon C is consumed” is executed. It may be configured to be easy. Further, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be executed when "the symbol variation display in which the notice display a, the notice display b, or the notice display c is displayed" is executed than in the case where the "symbol change display in which the notice display d is displayed" is executed. It may be configured such that the finalized display is facilitated.
Also, in the above description,

"First display means [eg, first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, etc.] capable of performing symbol variation display,

Second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, or a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 or the production holding lamp 286],
A gaming table equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon,

The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, pseudo continuous production, freeze production, stop design notice, stage change production, reach transition production, premier notice production, re-variation production, etc.]. And

The second display means displays a display corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as "holding number") in which the operation of the symbol variable display is held, for example, a holding display area [for example, holding icon display area 281 of special figure 1 , The holding icon display area of the special figure 2, the variable icon display area 280, the holding display area of the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] [for example, in the holding icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, The number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of special figure 1 is held is displayed],
The symbol variation display is a display started when the hold is exhausted,

The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, a notice icon display area 285 or the like] on the second display means,

The notice icon is an icon that does not display the pending number depending on the number displayed,

The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area, and the notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of notice icons can be displayed [for example, the notice icon display area 285 has a notice icon. The first display area YA1 to the notice icon sixth display area YA6 are configured to be able to display the notice icon in each area],

The second display means is a display means capable of displaying, when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is consumed, the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed [eg, , When the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted, the pseudo-relation effect may be executed, and when the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is exhausted, the reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,

During the period in which the symbol variable display is executed once, the second number larger than the first number [than the case where the notice icon is consumed by the first number [for example, one, etc.] [ For example, 3 etc.] It is configured so that it is more likely to be a big hit when it is digested,

The second display means displays the symbol variation display (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [eg, based on the third hold, which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 82(2), which is the target of prefetching. The display means is capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area as a read-ahead notice display prior to the start of ".
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to be displayed in a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice icon corresponding to the notice icon displayed may be displayed.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the second display means is a false notice display in the same mode as the notice display mode [for example, a pseudo continuous production or a reach transition production that is a big hit] [for example, a pseudo continuous production or a reach that is an outlier]. Transition effect, etc.] can be displayed,

The second display means, when one of the notice icons [for example, the notice icon I6 for a hat, the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, the notice that has been consumed A display unit capable of displaying the false notice display of a type corresponding to the type of icon [for example, a false consecutive notice or a reach transition effect, etc.

After the false notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of alignment,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second display means includes a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, a production holding lamp 286, and the like]. Display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “one display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],

One of the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, a production hold lamp 286, etc.],
The hold display means is a display means including the hold display area,

The holding display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holdings in the holding display area [for example, turning on a number of holding lamps corresponding to the number of holdings],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols,

The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82(9) to 83(20), the notice icon is displayed as a prefetch notice). Is performed by the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, during the period in which the “second symbol variation display [eg, the symbol variation display based on the third hold which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 82(2)] is being executed, the notice icon is displayed. May be digested in the fifth number [eg 3],

The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, “first symbol variation display [for example, three which are targets of prefetch shown in FIG. 82(2). There is a case where the notice icon is consumed by a sixth number [for example, one, etc.] during a period in which the "variation display of symbols based on the reservation held before the eye is held]" is executed. Yes,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,

The display according to the number of holdings is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is executed [eg, FIG. 82]. Corresponding to the second hold that is the target of prefetching during the period in which the variable display of symbols based on the hold that is held before the second hold that is the target of prefetch shown in (4) is being executed. The holding icon h12 is displayed in the holding icon display area 281 of the special figure 1], and the like, a gaming machine. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be surely consumed before the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of the prefetching [for example, FIG. 82(1). As shown in FIG. 86(66) and FIG. 94(1) to FIG. 98(66), the increased notice icon is completely consumed until the end of the pattern change display that is the target of prefetching. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the notice icon may be started to be displayed in a period in which the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth symbol variation display") is being executed [eg, As shown in FIG. 91(C), the display of the notice icon I6 of the hat and the increase of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes and the notice icon I10 of the fan are displayed in a single pattern variation display. The game table is characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "in the period in which the symbol variable display is executed before the fourth symbol variable display is executed, it is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is executed There is a case where the notice icon is started to be displayed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat that is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 91(C) is displayed while the symbol variation display is executed before the symbol variation display. Increased display etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area capable of displaying a display corresponding to the hold number up to a seventh number [eg, four or eight],

The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icons up to an eighth number [eg, six, etc.],
The seventh number is different from the eighth number,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of productions [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 210, a shielding device 246, a production movable body 224, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game underframe lamp 542]. Etc.]

As the notice icon, a first notice icon [for example, the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes shown in FIG. 85 (47) or FIG. 96 (47)] can be displayed,

As the notice icon, a second notice icon [for example, a ribbon notice icon I8 or the like shown in FIG. 92(Ab)] can be displayed.

The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon,

One of the plurality of types of notice display is a first notice display [for example, FIG. 85 (49) to FIG. (50) or the reach transition effect shown in FIG. 97 (49)],

One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display [eg, stage change effect shown in FIG. 92(Ac) or FIG. 92(Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,

When the first notice icon is consumed, the first notice display is displayed.

When the second notice icon is consumed, the second notice display is configured to be displayed,

One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 85(51) to (57) or 97(50-1) to (57). Production etc.],

One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of a moon background],
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,

The first notice display is a notice display for notifying that the first effect is executed,

The game machine characterized in that the second notice display is a notice display for notifying that the second effect is executed. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "main control means [for example, main control unit 300 and the like],

Production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.],
Equipped with

The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means, the effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,

The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the first display means [eg, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.],

The effect control unit is a unit capable of executing control of the second display unit [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,

"A game table provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,

During the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display based on the suspension held before the third suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 82(2)], the notice icon is displayed. As a result, the display of the first notice icon [for example, the notice icon for hat I6, etc.] may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 82(9), the notice icon for hat I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285]. Etc.],

The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 82(9) to 83. As shown in (14), the notice icon I6 of the hat, which has been displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 82(9), has not been digested even if the next symbol variation display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 83(14). ],

Symbol variation display that is displayed after the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [eg, a symbol based on the third hold which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 82(2)) "Variable display, etc.]") is configured so that the first notice icon that has not been digested during the display of the first symbol variable display may be digested [eg, FIG. 9) to FIG. 83(25), the notice icon I6 of the hat, which has started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 82(9), is the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching, as shown in FIG. 83(23). Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In addition, “the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may be consumed during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, a notice icon of a hat] The notice icon I6 of this hat is consumed in the pattern variation display in which the display of I6 is started],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, “As a pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may be displayed while the first symbol variation display is being displayed [for example, FIG. 82(9) to FIG. As shown in 83 (25), the change in the pattern that is the target of prefetching is performed so that the notice icon I6 of the hat that has started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (9) is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (23). A notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed as a pre-reading notice of the display, etc.]. ] Was also explained. In addition, “during the display of the one-time symbol variable display, the second number [eg, three, etc.] is more than the case where the first number [eg, one, etc.] of the first notice icon is consumed. ] When the first notice icon in [] is digested, it is easier to get a big hit,
The second number is a number greater than the first number,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "a second notice icon [for example, a fan notice icon I10 or the like] can be displayed as the notice icon,

The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the exhausted pattern variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (60) to (66), the notice icon I10 of the fan is consumed). Then, the result of the symbol variation display is a big hit, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of display is a notice display [for example, pseudo continuous production, freeze production, stop pattern notice, stage change production, reach transition production, premier announcement production, re-variation production, etc.] ,

When the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6 or the like] is consumed, the first notice display [for example, the pseudo shown in FIGS. 84(28) to (31)] , Etc. may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of display is a false notice display [for example, a false continuous production or a reach transition production that is out of order],

When the first notice icon [for example, a hat notice icon I6 or the like] is consumed, a first false notice table [for example, a false pseudo-reproduction effect] is displayed as the false notice display. Sometimes,

The display mode of the first false notification display is the same display mode as the display mode of the first notification display,

The first fake advance notice display is configured to be displaced in the symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a prefetching effect display [for example, the effect of the prefetching mode which is the effect shown in FIG. 81(b), which is the effect of shifting to a special stage, etc.],

A third notice icon [for example, a notice icon I8 on a ribbon] can be displayed as the notice icon.

When the third notice icon is consumed, the prefetch effect display may be started [for example, when one ribbon notice icon I8 is consumed, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, The effect that the background shifts to the prefetch mode is performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the display means includes a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, a production holding lamp 286, etc.] A gaming table characterized in that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIG. 82(1), a decorative symbol variable display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] Is,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variable display [for example, based on the hold three times before the hold that is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 82(9)] The notice icon I6 of the hat which is started to be displayed during the variable display of symbols] is configured to be completely consumed by the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols [for example, a hold that is a target of prefetching] The notice icon I6 of the hat has been digested while the pattern change display based on
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285 or the like] of the display unit,

The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of notice icons can be displayed [for example, the notice icon display area 285 includes the notice icon first display area YA1 to the notice icon sixth display area YA6. Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500, etc.] is provided,

The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the display means [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "main control means [for example, main control unit 300 and the like],

A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, etc.],
Equipped with
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,

The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the symbol display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, in the above description, a gaming machine provided with “display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like], and one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice. Icons [for example, the notice icons shown in FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b), the notice icon I21 for "house", the notice icon I22 for "monkey", the notice icon I31 for "donor", and the "princess" The notice icon I32, the notice icon I33 of "Grandpa", etc.],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,

The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,

Large-scale jackpot variable display that is the object of prefetching (hereinafter, "second symbol variable display [eg, symbolic variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 104(1)]) ") is suspended, and the display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in the period from the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. In some cases, [for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 105, “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 during the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching to the end of the symbol variation display. Of the notice icon I21 of ", and the notice icon I22 of "Crest", etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a performance display,

When the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 83(23) to 84(32), a hat). When the notice icon I6 of No. is consumed, pseudo-linking may be performed. As shown in FIGS. 85(46) to (57), when the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes is consumed, a strong reach effect is produced. May be started, etc.],

The first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons [for example, a combination of the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "monkey" shown in FIG. 104] is one symbol variation. By being digested in the display, a first effect display [for example, an effect image displayed in the crest fall effect shown in FIG. 105(21)] is displayed as the effect display. ,
A game table characterized by that.

In the conventional game table, the display means has room for improvement, but according to this game table, the game table having the display means can be realized.

In addition, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to continue to give a sense of expectation that the first effect display may be displayed until the notice icon of the first combination is consumed.

Also, according to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons can be shown in the pattern variation display before the pattern variation display, which is the target of prefetching, is started, and an expectation for a big hit can be given. Sometimes you can.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display, or may be displayed other than as the prefetch notice display. The advance notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch advance notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch advance notice display.

Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is ended, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

In addition, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

Further, when the notice icon is consumed, only the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed, or when the notice icon is consumed, the type of notice icon that has been consumed. There may be a case where a display other than the effect display corresponding to is displayed. In addition, when the notice icon is consumed, the performance display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be always displayed, and when the notice icon is consumed, the type of notice icon that is consumed There may be a case where the effect display corresponding to is not displayed.

In addition, even if the first combination of the plurality of displayed notice icons is exhausted in one symbol variable display, only the first effect display may be displayed as the effect display. Good, the first combination of the plurality of notice icons displayed is exhausted in one symbol variation display, so that a display other than the first effect display is also displayed as an effect display. May be done. Further, even if the first combination of the plurality of displayed notice icons is exhausted in one symbol variable display, the first effect display is always displayed as the effect display. It is possible that the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons may be exhausted in one symbol variable display, so that the first effect display may not be displayed as the effect display.

Further, even if the first combination of the plurality of displayed notice icons is exhausted in one symbol variation display, the first effect display may be displayed as the effect display. Good, the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is configured to display the first effect display as the effect display, in addition to the fact that the first combination is exhausted in the one-time symbol variation display May be done.

In addition, “the first combination is a combination of a first number [for example, two, etc.] of the notice icons,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the first effect display is displayed from when one notice icon of the first combination of the first number notice icons is displayed until the first number notice icons are consumed. You may be able to continue to have the expectation that your may appear. In addition, “the first combination is a combination including a first notice icon [for example, a notice icon I21 of “house”] and a second notice icon [for example, a notice icon I22 of “crest”]. ,

The first notice icon and the second notice icon are different notice icons,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the first notice icon and the second notice icon are visually different from each other, so that it may be possible to enhance the effect.

Here, the first combination may be a combination of only the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination including notice icons other than the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be. The first combination may be a combination that always includes the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination that does not include at least one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be.

In addition, “the second symbol variation display [eg, a symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the second suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 104(1)] is suspended, and then the second In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIG. 105 (19), the symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching is suspended. In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the symbol, the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "crest" displayed in the notice icon display area 285 have been consumed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, a plurality of notice icons are digested in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, thereby responding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons are consumed, In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, some icons other than the plurality of notice icons may be consumed. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

Further, in the "one-time symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are exhausted, the first effect display is configured not to be displayed [eg, Even if only one of the "house" notice icon I21 and the "monkey" notice icon I22 is consumed, the effect image shown in FIG. 105(21) is not displayed, etc.]. Stand. ] Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, if the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is not digested in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is not displayed, so the first effect display It may be possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who has been able to see.

Here, in the one-time symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are consumed, it may be configured such that only the first effect display is not displayed. In the symbol variable display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are consumed, the display other than the first effect display may not be displayed. Further, in the one-time symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are consumed, the first effect display may not necessarily be displayed, or only one notice icon may be displayed. In the variable display of symbols, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are consumed, the first effect display may be displayed.

Further, only in the one-time symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are exhausted, the first effect display may be configured not to be displayed, or Even in the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display, the first effect display may not be displayed even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are consumed.

In addition, as the third notice icon [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIG. 83, etc.] is consumed as the notice icon, the third effect display [eg, FIG. 84 (28 ) Shown in FIG. 4), the banchou character BC displayed corresponding to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6 pushes up the right symbol, etc.] is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, there are cases in which variations in production are increased and the production effect can be enhanced.

Here, it may be configured such that only the third effect display is displayed by digesting the third notice icon, or by the third notice icon being digested, The display other than the effect display may be configured to be displayed. Also, the third notice icon may be configured to be always displayed when the third notice icon is consumed, or the third notice icon may be configured to be displayed. The display may not be displayed in some cases.

Further, the third effect display may be displayed only by digesting the third notice icon, or in addition to the fact that the third notice icon is consumed, The third effect display may be displayed.

In addition, "the pattern change display of the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "the fourth pattern change display [for example, the pattern change display shown in FIG. 83 (21) to FIG. 86 (66) The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [for example, FIG. 82]. As shown in (2) to FIG. 86 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the variable design display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended until the end of the variable design display that is the target of prefetching. ],
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the variable display of the symbols to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. The display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 83(21) to 86(66), which is a symbol variation display that is a deviation] is suspended,” the The plurality of advance notice icons may be consumed in the period until the display of the four symbol variable display is completed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82(2) to 86(66), the target of prefetching is Four notice icons have been consumed from the time when a certain pattern change display is suspended until the end of the pattern change display that is the target of prefetching, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the plurality of notice icons are surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

Further, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display. In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,

The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) for which the start of the symbol variable display is held [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 104. In the display area 281, the number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings.

Further, “The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, a notice icon (a notice icon I21 of “house” or a notice of a crest) shown in FIG. 104. The icon I22 etc.) is not an icon indicating the number of operations of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1 that are suspended, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,

[First display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 109, a first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 112],

Second display means [for example, the second decorative pattern display device 208B shown in FIG. 109, the second decorative pattern display device 208D shown in FIG. 112],
A gaming table equipped with

The first display means displays a notice icon [for example, a display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIGS. 109(10) to 110(13) is consumed, or FIGS. 110(16) to 110(19). ) Shown in FIG. 112), the display of the banchou character BC performed corresponding to the hat notice icon I6, or the pseudo continuous production, or the display of the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIGS. 112(c1) to 112(c5). Etc.] can be displayed,

The second display means displays the notice icon [for example, the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIGS. 109(2) to 110(13) or the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIGS. 109(5) to 110(13)). Display of the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 112, or display of the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 112(c6), etc.].

The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 81 may function as a look-ahead notice display, etc.],

Large-scale jackpot variable display that is the object of prefetching (hereinafter, "second symbol variable display [for example, symbolic variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 112 (c1)]) ") is suspended, and the display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in the period from the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. There is a case [for example, as shown in FIGS. 112 (c1) to (c9), the notice icon display is displayed during the period from the suspension of the pre-reading target variable display until the end of the variable display. Two hat notice icons I6 and one shuriken notice icon I7 are displayed in the area 285B],
A game table characterized by that. ] Was explained.

In the conventional game table, the display means has room for improvement, but according to this game table, the game table having the display means can be realized.

Further, according to this gaming table, since the display relating to the notice icon may be displayed on the plurality of display means, the line of sight of the player who sees the display regarding the notice icon should not be concentrated on one display means, Sometimes it can entertain the player.

Here, the display means may consist only of the first display means and the second display means, or may be provided with a display means other than the first display means and the second display means. .. Further, the display means may necessarily include the first display means and the second display means, or may not include the first display means and the second display means.

Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the display regarding the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display regarding the notice icon. Further, the first display means may always display the display regarding the notice icon, or may not display the display regarding the notice icon.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the display regarding the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display regarding the notice icon. In addition, the second display means may always display the display regarding the notice icon, or may not display the display regarding the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as something other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch notice display.

Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is ended, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

In addition, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

In addition, “the second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the second suspension that is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 112(c1)] is suspended, and then the second In the period until the display of the symbol variable display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 112(c1) to 112(c9), it is a target of prefetching. The notice icon I7 of the shuriken and the notice icon I6 of the two hats have been digested during the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the variable display of symbols], and the like, a gaming machine. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, a plurality of notice icons are digested in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, thereby responding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons are consumed, In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, some icons other than the plurality of notice icons may be consumed. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

Further, in the “second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 109, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 112, etc.], the notice icon is displayed. Configured [eg, as shown in FIG. 109(5), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the display means capable of performing the stock production is determined, it may be possible not to miss the stocked notice icon.

Here, the second display means may be configured to display only the notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to display other than the notice icon. Good. Further, the second display means may be configured to always display the advance notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to not display the advance notice icon in some cases.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only on the second display means, or the notice icon may be displayed on a display means other than the second display means. Good.

Further, in the "first display means [eg, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 109, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 112, etc.], the notice icon is displayed. There is a case where a notice is displayed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 109(2) to 109(5), a notice indicating that the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A is displayed. Effect) is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the advance notice icon may be displayed, so that it may be possible to focus the player on the display means and prevent the player from missing the advance notice icon. is there.

Here, in the first display means, there may be a case in which only a display for notifying that the notice icon is displayed may be performed, or in the first display means, a display for notifying that the notice icon is displayed. Other displays may be displayed. Further, there may be a case where the first display means always displays a notice that the notice icon is displayed, and the first display means displays a notice that the notice icon is displayed. You may not do it.

In addition, there may be a case where a notice is given that the notice icon is displayed only on the first display means, and the notice icon is also displayed on the display means other than the first display means. There may be a case of displaying a notice of.

In addition, “the first display means has a first display area [for example, a display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 109 or the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 112]. Is a means provided,

The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 109, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 112, etc.]. Means,

The advance notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 109(4) or FIG. 1 decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B are displayed, etc.], a gaming table. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it is possible to produce a notice icon with an impact, which may entertain the player.

Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be always provided with the first display area, or may not be provided with the first display area.

Further, the second display means may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be always provided with the second display area, or may not be provided with the second display area.

The notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area and the second display area, and the notice icon may be displayed in areas other than the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over the area. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed over the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. It may not be displayed.

In addition, only the notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area, and other than the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over the entire range.

In addition, “the first display means has a first display area [for example, a display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 109 or the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 112]. Is the means provided,

The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 109, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 112, etc.]. Means,

The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type [for example, a plurality of types of notice icons according to the type of effect shown in FIG. 81],

When the notice icon is consumed, a performance display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [eg, FIG. As shown in 110 (16) to (18), when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the enlarged and displayed Bancho character BC2 changes from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device. It is displayed over 208B, in the production display in which the bancho character BC pushes up the right symbol, the right symbol is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the pseudo continuous symbol is the second symbol. And the like displayed across the decorative pattern display device 208B and the first decorative pattern display device 208A],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it is possible to produce a notice icon with an impact, which may entertain the player.

Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be always provided with the first display area, or may not be provided with the first display area.

Further, the second display means may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be always provided with the second display area, or may not be provided with the second display area.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in a display mode according to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode according to the type. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the display mode according to the type, or may not be displayed in the display mode according to the type.

Further, when the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon consumed may be displayed only over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area and the second display area. Good. Further, when the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be always displayed in the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may not be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.

Further, when the notice icon is consumed, only the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is consumed, even if the effect display other than the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed is displayed over the first display area and the second display area, Good. In addition, "the pattern change display of the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "the fourth pattern change display [for example, the pattern change display shown in FIG. 83 (21) to FIG. 86 (66) The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [for example, FIG. 82]. As shown in (2) to FIG. 86 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the variable design display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended until the end of the variable design display that is the target of prefetching. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the variable display of the symbols to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. The display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 83(21) to 86(66), which is a symbol variation display that is a deviation] is suspended,” the The plurality of advance notice icons may be consumed in the period until the display of the four symbol variable display is completed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82(2) to 86(66), the target of prefetching is Four notice icons have been consumed from the time when a certain pattern change display is suspended until the end of the pattern change display that is the target of prefetching, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the plurality of notice icons are surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

Further, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display. In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,

The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) of which the start of the symbol variable display is held [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 109. In the display area 281, the number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (a notice icon I6 of a hat) shown in FIG. It is not an icon that shows the number of symbol variable display operations that are suspended, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,

“Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],

A first movable means [for example, an actuator that displaces the position of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 115 (12), a family crest part 224B shown in FIG. 107 (d4-2), and the like,
A gaming table equipped with

One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon [for example, notice icons shown in FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b), “house” notice icon I21, and “crest” notice icon I22. , Drink notice icon I31, etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,

The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,

Large-scale jackpot variable display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, "second symbol variable display [for example, symbolic variation display that becomes a jackpot based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 82(2)]) ".) is held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, the display of the plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") is started. In some cases [for example, as shown in FIG. 82(2) to FIG. 86(66) or FIG. 115, in the period from the time when the symbol variable display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended until the symbol variable display ends, In the notice icon display area 285, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a drink notice icon I31 are displayed, etc.],

The first movable means provides a first movable effect [for example, a movable effect for displacing the effect button 136 from the default position to the projecting position as shown in FIGS. 115(12) to (17)]. Is a viable means,

The first movable effect may be executed when the fourth notice icon [for example, the notice icon I31 of a drink, etc.] among the displayed notice icons is consumed. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the movable means, but according to this game table, a game table characterized by the movable means can be realized.

Further, according to this gaming machine, when the fourth notice icon is consumed on the display means, the first movable effect may be performed by the first movable means, so that variations of the effect can be increased. There are cases.

Further, according to this gaming table, the player's line of sight can be focused not only on the display means but also on the movable means, and the staging effect can be enhanced in some cases.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in a display mode according to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode according to the type. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the display mode according to the type, or may not be displayed in the display mode according to the type.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display, or may be displayed other than as the prefetch notice display. The advance notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch advance notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch advance notice display.

Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is ended, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

In addition, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. Further, the first movable means may be capable of executing only the first movable effect, or may be capable of executing movable effects other than the first movable effect. In addition, the first movable means may always execute the first movable effect, or may not execute the first movable effect.

Further, when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is consumed, it may be configured such that only the first movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon A movable effect other than the first movable effect may also be executed when the fourth notice icon is exhausted. Further, when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is consumed, the first movable effect may be executed without fail, or the first notice effect may be displayed. The first movable effect may not be executed when the fourth notice icon is exhausted.

Further, it may be configured such that the first movable effect may be executed only when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is consumed, or the first notice effect may be executed. The first movable effect may be executed even when the fourth notice icon is not consumed.

In addition, “the second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the third suspension that is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 82(2)] is suspended, and then the second In the period until the display of the symbol variable display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82(2) to 86(66) and FIG. During the period from the suspension of the target symbol variable display until the end of the symbol variable display, the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, and the notice icon I31 of the drink are consumed, etc.] ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, a plurality of notice icons are digested in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, thereby responding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons are consumed, In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, some icons other than the plurality of notice icons may be consumed. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, if the fifth notice icon among the displayed notice icons [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 81, the notice icon I21 of “house”, etc.] is consumed, the first movable icon is displayed. A game table characterized in that the production is not executed. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is consumed, only the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed, or of the displayed notice icons. When the fifth notice icon is consumed, the movable effects other than the first movable effect may not be executed. Further, when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is exhausted, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed, or the first notice effect of the displayed notice icons. The first movable effect may be executed when the five notice icons are exhausted.

Further, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed only when the fifth notice icon among the notice icons displayed is exhausted, or the first notice effect among the notice icons displayed may be executed. The first movable effect may be configured not to be executed even in cases other than the case where the five notice icons are exhausted.

In addition, “operating means [for example, effect button 136, etc.] that can be operated by the player is provided,
The first movable means is a means for moving the operating means,

The first movable effect refers to a mode of the operation means from a first mode [eg, default position shown in FIG. 115(12)] to a second mode [eg, FIG. 115(17)]. The projected position, etc.]
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the change of the operation means may be notified by the notification icon, so that the operation means may also be noticed.

Here, the operating means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by anyone other than the player. Further, it may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

Further, the first movable means may be movable only by the operating means, or may be movable by means other than the operating means. Further, the first movable means may be the one that can always move the operating means, or the operating means may not move.

In addition, “a second movable means [for example, a family crest part shown in FIG. 107 (d4-2)] is provided,

The second movable means is a means capable of executing a second movable effect [for example, a family crest falling effect shown in FIG. 107 (d4-2)].

The second movable effect may be executed when the sixth notice icon [for example, the notice icon I21 of "house", etc.] among the displayed notice icons is consumed. ing,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the variety of effects produced by the movable means becomes rich, and the interest may be improved.

Here, the second movable means may be capable of executing only the second movable effect, or may be capable of executing movable effects other than the second movable effect. In addition, the second movable means may always execute the second movable effect, or may not execute the second movable effect.

Further, when the sixth notice icon of the notice icons displayed is exhausted, only the second movable effect may be configured to be executed, or the notice icon displayed. It may be configured such that a movable effect other than the second movable effect may be executed when the sixth notice icon of the six icons is consumed. Further, when the sixth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is consumed, the second movable effect may be configured to be executed without fail. The second movable effect may not be executed when the sixth notice icon is consumed.

Also, the second movable effect may be configured to be executed only when the sixth notice icon of the notice icons displayed is exhausted, or the notice icon displayed is displayed. The second movable effect may be executed even when the sixth notice icon is not consumed.

In addition, "the pattern change display of the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "the fourth pattern change display [for example, the pattern change display shown in FIG. 83 (21) to FIG. 86 (66) The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [for example, FIG. 82]. As shown in (2) to FIG. 86 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the variable design display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended until the end of the variable design display that is the target of prefetching. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the variable display of the symbols to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. The display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 83(21) to 86(66), which is a symbol variation display that is a deviation] is suspended,” the The plurality of advance notice icons may be consumed in the period until the display of the four symbol variable display is completed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82(2) to 86(66), the target of prefetching is Four notice icons have been consumed from the time when a certain pattern change display is suspended until the end of the pattern change display that is the target of prefetching, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the plurality of notice icons are surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

Further, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display. In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,

The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) for which the start of the symbol variable display is held [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 104. In the display area 281, the number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings.

In addition, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [eg, the notice icon shown in FIG. 115 (thousand box notice icon I9, drink notice icon I31, etc.)] Is not an icon that indicates the number of operations of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,

[A game table provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],

One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon [for example, notice icons shown in FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b)],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,

The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,

Large-scale jackpot variable display that is the object of prefetching (hereinafter, "second symbol variable display [for example, a symbolic variation display that becomes a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 117(1)]) ") is suspended, and the display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in the period from the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. In some cases [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82(2) to 86(66), the notice icon is displayed in the period from the suspension of the variable display of the pattern to be read to the end of the variable display of the symbol. In the area 285, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed, etc.],

One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon display suggestion display [for example, as shown in FIG. 117(2) to FIG. ],

The notice icon display suggestion display is a display that suggests that the notice icon display may be started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, the display means has room for improvement, but according to this game table, the game table having the display means can be realized.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be suggested in advance that the display of the notice icon may be started, so that it may be possible to enjoy the process until the notice icon is displayed.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the display means may display only the notice icon display suggestion display, or may display a display other than the notice icon display suggestion display. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon display suggestion display, or may not display the notice icon display suggestion display.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display, or may be displayed other than as the prefetch notice display. The advance notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch advance notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch advance notice display.

Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is ended, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

In addition, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may be capable of only indicating that the notice icon may be displayed, or may be other than that the notice icon may be displayed. It may be suggestable. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may necessarily indicate that the notice icon may be displayed, or may not indicate that the notice icon may be displayed. It may be.

In addition, "the second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the second suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 117(1)] is suspended, and then the second In the period until the display of the symbol variable display is finished, the plurality of advance notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82(2) to 86(66), it is a target of prefetching. During the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the variable display, the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes and the notice icon of the fan displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are exhausted. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, a plurality of notice icons are digested in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, thereby responding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons are consumed, In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, some icons other than the plurality of notice icons may be consumed. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

Further, "The notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, twice as shown in FIGS. 117(2) to (5). The notice that the notice icon by the lord's production is displayed over the variable display of
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed over the plurality of symbol variable displays, so that it may be possible to enjoy the process until the notice icon is displayed.

Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed only over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays other than the symbol variation display. There may be cases where Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may be always displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may not be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

In addition, it is configured such that the display of the notice icon display suggestion display is terminated during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 117(2) ~ As shown in (5) of the same figure, the advance notice that the advance notice icon by the lord's effect is displayed is finished before the symbol variable display which is the target of the prefetch is started],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the notice icon display suggestive display is completed before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is started, so it may be possible to concentrate on the symbol variation that is the target of prefetching.

Here, during the display of the symbol variation display displayed prior to the second symbol variation display, only the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end, or the second symbol variation display The display other than the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to be terminated during the display of the symbol variable display that is displayed before the display. Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to always end during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display. It may be configured such that the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may not be terminated during the display of the symbol variable display displayed before the display.

Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end only during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display. The display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end even when the symbol variable display that is displayed before is displayed.

In addition, “the notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may indicate that at least one of the third number [for example, three] of the notice icons may be started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 119(a1-4), in the Amida effect, at least one of the hat notice icon I6, the fan notice icon I10, and the thousand-box notice icon I9 may be displayed. Suggesting that there is]],
The third number is a number greater than or equal to 2,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, at least one of the previously-predicted notice icons may be displayed, so that the player can grasp which notice icon may be displayed. There is a case where it is possible to entertain the fluctuation of the design in which the notice icon is displayed. Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may indicate only that at least one of the third number notice icons may be started, or the third notice icon display suggestion may be displayed. It may also indicate something other than that the display of at least one of the number of notice icons may be started. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may necessarily indicate that at least one of the notice icons of the third number may be displayed, or the notice icon of the third number may be displayed. It may not indicate that the display of at least one of the above may be initiated.

In addition, “at least one of the third number of the notice icons suggested that the notice may be started by the notice icon display suggestion display may be started [eg, FIG. 119(a1-1) to (a-6) in the figure, as a result of the Amida effect, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where only the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons, which has been suggested that the notice may be started by the notice icon display suggestion display, may be started. There may be a case where a display other than the display of at least one of the third number of advance notice icons, which has been suggested that the display may be started by the icon display suggestion display, may be started. Further, it may be configured such that the display of at least one of the third number of the notice icons suggested that the notice may be started by the notice icon display suggestion display may be necessarily started. There may be a case where the display of at least one of the third number of advance notice icons, which suggests that the display may be started by the icon display suggestion display, may not be started.

In addition, "the pattern change display of the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "the fourth pattern change display [for example, the pattern change display shown in FIG. 83 (21) to FIG. 86 (66) The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [for example, FIG. 82]. As shown in (2) to FIG. 86 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the variable design display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended until the end of the variable design display that is the target of prefetching. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the variable display of the symbols to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. The display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 83(21) to 86(66), which is a symbol variation display that is a deviation] is suspended,” the The plurality of advance notice icons may be consumed in the period until the display of the four symbol variable display is completed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82(2) to 86(66), the target of prefetching is Four notice icons have been consumed from the time when a certain pattern change display is suspended until the end of the pattern change display that is the target of prefetching, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the plurality of notice icons are surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

Further, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display. In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,

The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) for which the start of the symbol variable display is held [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 117. In the display area 281, the number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings.

In addition, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (e.g., notice icon I6 of hat) shown in FIG. It is not an icon that shows the number of symbol variable display operations that are suspended, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]

Was also explained. According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,

[A game table provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],

One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon [for example, notice icons shown in FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b)],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,

The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as the first look-ahead notice display,

Large-scale jackpot variable display that is the object of prefetching (hereinafter, "second symbol variable display [eg, symbolic variation display that becomes a jackpot based on the third hold that is the object of prefetching shown in FIG. 120(2)]) Display) is held after ".") is suspended (hereinafter, referred to as "first symbol change display [eg, symbol change display shown in FIGS. 120(4) to (13)]"). May be started,

In the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “plural notice icons”) The display may be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82(4) to 86(66), the symbol variation display started after the symbol variation display, which is the target of the prefetching, is held pending. From the start of the display of No. until the end of the pattern variation display that is the big hit that is the target of the prefetching, the two hat notice icons I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are displayed. etc],

The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is started to be displayed next to the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, the display means has room for improvement, but according to this game table, the game table having the display means can be realized.

Also, according to this gaming table, while the symbol variation display displayed when the hold display relating to the second symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, it starts after that. It may be possible to enjoy the display of the notice icon as the read-ahead notice display related to the second symbol change display that is the target of the read-ahead from the displayed pattern change display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the first look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed other than as the first look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the first look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as the first look-ahead notice display.

Further, there may be a case where only the display of the first symbol variation display is started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol variation after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where a symbol variable display other than the display display is also started. In addition, the display of the first symbol variation display may be always started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the display of the first symbol variation display after the second symbol variation display is suspended. It may not be started.

Further, there may be a case where only the display of the first symbol variation display is started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, and also after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where only one symbol variable display is started.

Further, there may be a case where only a plurality of notice icons are started in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, In some cases, the display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the start of the display of the one symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started without fail during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the first symbol variation There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started in the period from the start of the display of the display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the one symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

In addition, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [eg, As shown in FIGS. 82(4) to 86(66), the target of the look-ahead is started after the display of the design change display is started after the design change display, which is a big hit that is the target of the look-ahead, is suspended. By the end of the symbol variation display that is a big hit, the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are consumed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, while the symbol variation display displayed when the hold display related to the second symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, it is started after that. It may be possible to enjoy digesting the notice icon as a pre-reading notice display related to the second symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading from the symbol variation display.

Here, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the start of the display of the one symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. Also, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, or the first symbol variation display There may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are not digested in the period from the start of display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. In a period other than the period from the start of the display of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of the symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,

The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) for which the start of the variable display is held [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 120. In the display area 281, a number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings.

In addition, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (e.g., notice icon I6 of hat) shown in FIG. It is not an icon that shows the number of symbols variable display operation is suspended],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
According to this gaming table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, in the case where the “second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the third suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 120(2)] is suspended, the second The display of the hold display [for example, display of the third hold icon h13 shown in FIG. 120(2)] is started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to recognize that the second symbol variable display has been suspended.

Here, the display of the second hold display may be started only when the second symbol variable display is held, or in the case other than the case where the second symbol variable display is held second. The display of the hold display may be started. Further, when the second symbol variable display is suspended, the display of the second suspended display may be always started, and when the second symbol variable display is suspended, the display of the second suspended display is displayed. It does not have to be started.

In addition, as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display is displayed in the second prefetch display mode [for example, the prefetch notice display mode (sabohani display mode) shown in FIG. 120(2)] May be

In the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode [for example, FIG. 120(2 ), the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode (display mode of Sabohani) when the symbol variation display, which is a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of read-ahead, is suspended. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, there are cases in which variations of the prefetching notice display are increased and interest is improved.

Here, the second hold display may be displayed only in the second look-ahead display mode as the second look-ahead notice display, or the second hold display may be displayed as the second look-ahead notice display. It may be displayed in a display mode other than the second prefetch display mode. Further, as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display may be always displayed in the second look-ahead display mode, or as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display is the second look-ahead display. It may not be displayed in the form.

Further, in the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed only in the second prefetch display mode, or the second In the symbol variable display that is displayed when the symbol variable display is suspended, the second suspended display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second prefetch display mode. Further, in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be always displayed in the second prefetch display mode, or the second symbol variation display. In the symbol variable display displayed when is suspended, the second suspended display may not be displayed in the second prefetch display mode.

Further, only in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode, or the second Even in the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display displayed when the symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a third prefetching notice display [for example, a display display of the prefetching mode shown in FIG. 121(b2) to FIG. 121(b3), etc.],

The third prefetching notice display is a display that may be displayed after the second symbol variation display is suspended [for example, shown in FIGS. 121(b1) to (b3). As described above, the effect display in the prefetch mode is started after the symbol variable display, which is a big hit based on the third suspension that is the prefetching target, is suspended],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the variation of the pre-reading notice display is increased, so that the interest may be improved.

Here, the third look-ahead notice display may be displayed only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or after the second symbol variation display is suspended. Other than that, the display may be started. Further, the third look-ahead notice display may be always started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or may not be displayed after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be cases.

In addition, "a loss symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, "the fourth symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation that becomes a loss based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 120(2)" "Display etc.]") is suspended and is referred to as a symbol variation display (hereinafter, "third symbol variation display [eg, symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 120(4) to (13)]". ) May be displayed,

The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [eg, the figure As shown in 82(4) to FIG. 86(66), in the target of the prefetch after the display of the symbol variable display started after the symbol variable display that is the target of the prefetch is suspended By the end of the pattern variation display that is a certain loss, the notice icon I6 of two hats, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, the notice icon I10 of a fan, etc. are displayed],

The third symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is started to be displayed next to the symbol variation display displayed when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the variable display of the symbols to be read ahead is completed.

Also, there may be a case where only the display of the third symbol variation display is started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the third symbol variation after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where a symbol variable display other than the display display is also started. Also, the display of the third symbol variation display may be always started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the display of the third symbol variation display after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. It may not be started.

In addition, there may be a case where only the display of the third symbol variable display is started only after the fourth symbol variable display is suspended, and also after the fourth symbol variable display is suspended. There may be a case where only the display of the third symbol variable display is started.

Further, it may be possible that only a plurality of notice icons are started during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, In some cases, the display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display. Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started without fail during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the third symbol variation The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the start of the display of the display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 83(21) to 86(66), which is a symbol variation display that is a deviation] is suspended,” the The plurality of advance notice icons may be consumed in the period until the display of the four symbol variable display is completed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82(2) to 86(66), the target of prefetching is The four notice icons have been consumed from the time when a certain pattern variation display is suspended until the time when the pattern variation display, which is the target of prefetching, ends, etc.], and the gaming machine. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching ends.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the plurality of notice icons are surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,

A gaming table provided with display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],

The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, notice icons shown in FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b), notice icons shown in FIG. 135(d), etc.],

The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,

The notice icon is a different icon from the hold icon [eg, hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 132],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,

One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a character display or the like displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 132],

The first display is an explanation display [for example, a display of "advance notice icon exhausted..." displayed on the tutorial display portion TT4 shown in FIG. 132(a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 125(a). "The lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" displayed in the department TT1, the "Panda is the master of the lord" displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG.

The first display is a display displayed in a first display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 132] in the display means,

The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 132(a7), the tutorial display unit TT4 has a notice icon I62 of a swordsman). And the advance notice icon I63 for increasing the chance is displayed (stock), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, the display means has room for improvement, but according to this game table, the game table having the display means can be realized.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display, or may be displayed other than as the prefetch notice display. The advance notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch advance notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch advance notice display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may be displayable only in the first display area in the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area in the display means. Good. Further, the first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means.

Further, the notice icon may be able to be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be one. Further, when the notice icon is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area, or when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area. ..

In addition, “the first display is not displayed when the notice icon is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 132(a7), when the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4, Explanation is not displayed on the tutorial display section TT4],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may not be displayed only in the state in which the notice icon is displayed, or may not be displayed in any state other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed. Further, the first display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is being displayed, or may be displayed when the notice icon is being displayed.

In addition, “When the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted [for example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 132(a7), the notice display icon TT4 is displayed. When the notice icons are all exhausted, the explanation display will resume, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the notice icon is consumed, only the first display may be resumed. When the notice icon is consumed, displays other than the first display may be resumed. There may be. Moreover, when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted without fail, and when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may not be restarted.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of “heat” in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 131(d), etc.],

The second display is a notice display, and the second display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 131(d). , The tutorial display section TT1 displays the text "Intense heat", etc.],

The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display such as “Due to notice notice icon...” in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132(a1)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may be one that can be displayed only in the first display area when it is displayed, or in a display area other than the first display area when it is displayed. It may be displayable. The second display may be always displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed. Good.

Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display regarding the notice icon or may include a display other than the explanation display regarding the notice icon. Further, the explanation display may necessarily include the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include the explanation display regarding the notice icon.
In addition, "the display means is a means configured by a plurality of display means,

One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.],

One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like],

One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,

The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a variable display of the decorative design shown in FIG. 129],

The third display means displays a display matching the display of the second display means [for example, a bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR shown in FIGS. A display in which the icon I62 is stocked],

The first display area is a display area provided in at least a partial area of the third display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 129(a1), the tutorial display section TT1 has a third decoration It is arranged below the symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. It may be configured to include display means other than the display means. Further, the display means may be configured to necessarily include the first display means, the second display means and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means and the third display means. There may be a case in which at least one of the means is not included.

Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variable display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variable display, or may not display the symbol variable display.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the second display means may always display the effect display or may not display the effect display.

Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only a display that matches the display of the second display means, or may display a display other than the display that matches the display of the second display means. It may be anything. Further, the third display means may necessarily display the display matched with the display of the second display means, or may not display the display matched with the display of the second display means. Good.

The first display area may be provided in a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. ..

The first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the area of the third display means. It may be one that has been created. Further, the first display area may be necessarily provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means, or may not be provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means. It may be.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, a character display displayed in the stage name display portion ST2 shown in FIG. 132],

The third display is an explanation display [for example, a display of "Castle Town Stage" displayed on the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 132(a1), a stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 126(c). Display of "Swordsman Reach" etc.]

The third display is a display displayed in the second display area [for example, the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 132(a1)] of the display means,

The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second display area as well. [For example, as shown in FIG. 132(a7), the stage name display portion ST2 includes a princess notice icon I64. Two pseudo-announcement icons I65 are displayed (stock), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the third display may be displayable only in the second display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area of the display means. May be. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the second display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the second display area of the display means.

The notice icon may be displayed only in the second display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area. Good. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the second display area, or may not be displayed in the second display area.

In addition, “the third display is not displayed when the advance notice icon is displayed in the second display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 132(a7), the advance notice icon is displayed in the stage name display portion ST2. Is displayed, the stage name is not displayed on the stage name display portion ST2, etc.], and the gaming table. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the third display may not be displayed only in the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It may not be displayed even in the state of. The third display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It may be done.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 132(a1), the tutorial display section TT4 is partitioned by a line into a square shape, etc.] ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned by including other than the line. In addition, the first display area may be always partitioned by a line, or may not be partitioned by a line.

In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,

The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variable display being held (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 132. In the display area, the number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],

The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, a notice icon (a princess notice icon I64, a pseudo notice notice I65 shown in FIG. 132(a7), The swordsman's notice icon I62, the chance up notice icon I63, etc.) is not an icon indicating the number of pending operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be the one capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings.
According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,

A gaming table provided with display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],

The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, notice icons shown in FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b), notice icons shown in FIG. 135(d), and the like],

The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,

The display area in which the notice icon is displayed [for example, the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 132] is displayed in the hold icon [for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 132]. The hold icon h11, h12, h13, etc.] is a display area different from the display area [for example, the hold icon display area or the like shown in FIG. 132],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,

One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 132],

The first display is an explanation display [for example, a display of "advance notice icon exhausted..." displayed on the tutorial display portion TT4 shown in FIG. 132(a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 125(a). "The lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" displayed in the department TT1, the "Panda is the master of the lord" displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG.

When the first display is displayed, the first display is a display displayed in the first display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 132] in the display means,

The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 132(a9), the tutorial display portion TT4 has a swordsman notice icon I62 and a chance up. The notice icon I63 of is displayed (stock), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, the display means has room for improvement, but according to this game table, the game table having the display means can be realized.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display, or may be displayed other than as the prefetch notice display. The advance notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch advance notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch advance notice display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed, or when it is displayed other than the first display area of the display means. May be displayed in the display area of. Further, the first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

Further, “the first display is not displayed in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 132(a9), the notice icon is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4. In the displayed state, the explanation is not displayed on the tutorial display section TT4],
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

Here, only the first display may not be displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or the first display is not displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. The display other than the display may not be displayed. The first display may not necessarily be displayed in the state in which the notice icon first display area is displayed, or the first display may not be displayed in the state in which the notice icon first display area is displayed. The display may be displayed in some cases.

Further, the first display may not be displayed only in the state in which the notice icon first display area is displayed, or in a state other than the state in which the notice icon first display area is displayed, Only the first display may not be displayed.

In addition, “When the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted [for example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 132(a9), the notice display icon TT4 is displayed. When all the notice icons are exhausted, the explanation display will be resumed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the notice icon is consumed, only the first display may be resumed, and when the notice icon is consumed, displays other than the first display are also resumed. There may be cases where Moreover, when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted without fail, and when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may not be restarted.

Further, when the first display is, for example, an explanation of the first character, a tenth display which is an explanation display different from the first display may be displayed.

In addition, "one display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of "intense heat" in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 131(d), etc.],"
The second display is a notice display,

The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. Character display is displayed, etc.],

The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display such as “Due to notice notice icon...” in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132(a1)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may be one that can be displayed only in the first display area when it is displayed, or in a display area other than the first display area when it is displayed. It may be displayable. The second display may be always displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed. Good.

In addition, the explanation display may include only the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display regarding the notice icon. Further, the explanation display may necessarily include the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include the explanation display regarding the notice icon. The notice display in this description may be one of many notice displays.

Further, the notice display may be a notice display made by displaying characters. On the other hand, the other notice display may be an image display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, a character display of “hotter than red is hot” in the balloon TT2 shown in FIG. 131(a1), (A6), the character display of "Swordsman Reach is hot" in the speech balloon TT2, the character display of "Panda breaks in" in the speech balloon TT3, etc.],
The third display is an explanation display,

The display content of the third display is a display content different from the display content of the first display,

The third display is a display displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed [for example, the balloon TT2 and the balloon TT3 shown in FIG. 131(a6)]. ,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display content of the third display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or may be different entirely.

Further, the third display may be displayed only in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or when displayed, other than the second display area of the display means. May be displayed in the display area of. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

Further, the second display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different from the first display area.

In addition, "the third display may be displayed even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 131(a10), Even if the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4, the text display "Swordsman reach is hot" is displayed on the balloon display section TT2 and "Panda breaks in" on the balloon display section TT3. Text display is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the third display may be displayed, or the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. Even when the display is on, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Further, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may be always displayed, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. However, the third display may not be displayed.

In addition, the third display may be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, and other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even in this state, the third display may be displayed. The introduction animation of the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, and the stock display of the notice icon may not be displayed in the second display area.

In addition, a notice display different from the first notice display (second notice display) may be displayed in the second display area. In addition, the notice display and the explanation display may be displayed alternatively.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a character display displayed in the stage name display portion ST2 shown in FIG. 132],

The fourth display is an explanation display [for example, a display of "Castle Town Stage" displayed on the stage name display portion ST2 shown in FIG. 132(a1), a stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 126(c). Display of "Swordsman Reach" etc.]

The display content of the fourth display is display content different from the display content of the first display,

The fourth display is a display displayed in a third display area [for example, the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 132(a1)] in the display means,
The third display area is a display area different from the first display area,

In the state where the first number [for example, three, etc.] of the notice icons are displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area. [For example, when the three preview icons are displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132, a new preview icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display content of the fourth display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or may be different entirely.

Further, the fourth display may be displayable only in the third display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area of the display means. Good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the third display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the third display area of the display means.

The third display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different from the first display area.

Further, in the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area, or In the state where a number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area. Further, in the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area without fail, and In the state where the number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may not be displayed in the third display area.

In addition, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area only when the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area. Even in a state other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area.
Further, here, a type in which a stage name or the like is displayed on a plurality of display means is also included.

In addition, “the fourth display is not displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 132(a9), the notice icon is displayed in the stage name display portion ST2. Is displayed, the stage name is not displayed on the stage name display portion ST2],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the fourth display may not be displayed only in the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. It may not be displayed even in the state of. The fourth display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. It may be done.
In addition, "the display means is a means configured by a plurality of display means,

One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.],

One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like],

One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,

The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a variable display of the decorative design shown in FIG. 129],

The third display means displays in cooperation with the second display means [for example, a bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR shown in FIGS. 129(a2) to (a4) and a swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed. Are stocked, etc.],

The first display area is a display area provided in at least a partial area of the third display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 129(a1), the tutorial display section TT1 has a third decoration It is arranged below the symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. It may be configured to include display means other than the display means. Further, the display means may be configured to necessarily include the first display means, the second display means and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means and the third display means. There may be a case in which at least one of the means is not included.

Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variable display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variable display, or may not display the symbol variable display.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the second display means may always display the effect display or may not display the effect display.

Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only a display associated with the display of the second display means, or a display other than the display associated with the display of the second display means. It may be anything. Further, the third display means may always display the display associated with the display of the second display means, or may not display the display associated with the display of the second display means. Good.

The first display area may be provided in a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. ..

The first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the area of the third display means. It may be one that has been created. Further, the first display area may be necessarily provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means, or may not be provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means. It may be.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 132(a1), the tutorial display section TT4 is partitioned by a line into a square shape, etc.] ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned by including other than the line. In addition, the first display area may be always partitioned by a line, or may not be partitioned by a line.

Also, the second display area may be partitioned by a line, and the third display area may be partitioned by a line.

In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,

The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variable display being held (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 132. In the display area, the number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],

The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (princess notice icon I64, pseudo notice notice I65 shown in FIG. 132(a9), The swordsman's notice icon I62, the chance up notice icon I63, etc.) is not an icon indicating the number of the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be the one capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings.
It should be noted that the number of holdings and the number of notice icons may happen to coincide with each other.

Further, the maximum hold number and the maximum stock number of the notice icon may be the same or different. According to this gaming table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,

A gaming table provided with display means [for example, a decorative design display device 208, a first decorative design display device 208L, a second decorative design display device 208M, a third decorative design display device 208N, etc.],

The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, notice icons shown in FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b), notice icons shown in FIG. 135(d), etc.],

The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,

The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon [eg, hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 137],
It is configured to display the notice icon in a plurality of display modes,

One of the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode [for example, a display mode of the swordsman's notification icon I62 displayed in the notification icon display area shown in FIG. 137(l)]. ,

One of the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode [for example, display of the enlarged swordsman notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display frame YF shown in FIG. 137(i). Aspect etc.]

The size of the notice icon is larger in the second display mode than in the first display mode [for example, from the swordsman's notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 137(l). Also, the swordsman's notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display frame YF shown in FIG. 137(i) has a larger size, etc.],

The notice icon is an icon displayed in the second display mode when stocked [for example, when the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked, as shown in FIG. 137(i), The swordsman's notice icon I62 is enlarged, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the display means.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as something other than the prefetch notice display. The advance notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch advance notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch advance notice display.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayed in a mode other than a plurality of types of display modes. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes. Further, the size of the notice icon in the second display mode may be larger than that in the first display mode, and the size of the notice icon in the second display mode may be larger than that in the first display mode. There may be no cases.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the second display mode when stocked, or may be displayed in the display mode other than the second display mode when stocked. May be. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the second display mode when stocked, or may not be displayed in the second display mode when stocked.

In addition, “The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode [for example, the swordsman icon I62 is shown in FIG. ), and then displayed in a normal display mode as shown in FIG. 137(l).],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or after being displayed in the second display mode. In some cases, the display may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or may be displayed in the second display mode after being displayed in the first display mode. It may not be displayed in this display mode.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode only after being displayed in the second display mode, or other than after being displayed in the second display mode. Alternatively, it may be displayed in the first display mode. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or may be displayed in the second display mode after being displayed in the first display mode. It may not be displayed in the display mode.

In addition, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIG. 137(a), the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. etc],

The notice icon is an icon that is not overlapped with the decorative pattern variable display in the first display mode [for example, a normal display mode displayed in the notice icon display area as shown in FIG. 137(l). The pseudo-rendition notice icon I65 and the swordsman notice icon I62 are not overlapped with the decorative pattern that is displayed in a variable manner.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variable display, or may not display the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, the notice icon may not overlap the decorative symbol variable display only in the first display mode, or may not overlap the decorative symbol variable display in display modes other than the first display mode. May be. Further, the notice icon may not necessarily overlap the decorative symbol variable display in the first display mode, or may be overlapped with the decorative symbol variable display in the first display mode. ..

In addition, “the decorative symbol variable display is a display that does not overlap the notice icon in the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 137(l), the decorative pattern in the variable display is the notice icon. It does not overlap with the pseudo-reminder icon I65 in the normal display mode displayed in the display area or the swordsman notice icon I62],

The decorative pattern variable display is a display that may overlap with the notice icon in the second display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 137(i), the decorative pattern in the variable display is a notice. It is overlapped with the pseudo-reminder icon I65 in the enlarged display mode displayed in the icon display frame YF or the swordsman notice icon I62],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the decorative symbol variable display may not overlap only the notice icon in the first display mode, or may not overlap other than the notice icon in the first display mode. .. Further, the decorative pattern variable display may not necessarily overlap the notice icon of the first display mode, or may overlap the notice icon of the first display mode.

Further, the decorative pattern variable display may be overlapped only with the notice icon of the second display mode, or may be overlapped with other than the notice icon of the second display mode. There may be some. Further, the decorative pattern variable display may be always overlapped with the notice icon of the second display mode, or may not be overlapped with the notice icon of the second display mode.

Further, "the notice icon is an icon displayed in the second display mode even when it is consumed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display mode only when it is consumed, or may be displayed in the second display mode when it is not digested. It may be. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display mode without fail when it is consumed, or may not be displayed in the second display mode when consumed.

In addition, “the display means is a means capable of displaying the notice icon in a hold display area [for example, a notice icon display area in the UI unit UI1 shown in FIG. 137(a)].

The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 137(l), the notice icon display area is displayed. The pseudo-rendition notice icon I65 and the swordsman notice icon I62 are displayed in the normal display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may display the notice icon only in the hold display area, or may display the notice icon in an area other than the hold display area. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon in the hold display area, or may not display the notice icon in the hold display area.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area, or may be displayed in the hold display area other than the first display mode. The display mode may be displayed. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area, or may be displayed in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area. It may not be displayed.

The notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode only when it is displayed in the hold display area, or in the first display mode even when it is not displayed in the hold display area. It may be displayed by.

In addition, “When the notice icon is newly stocked, at least a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area is displayed in the second display mode [for example, FIG. 137(i) When the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked, a part of the pseudo-reminder icon I65 displayed in the notice icon display area is displayed in an enlarged display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the notice icon is newly stocked, only a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may be displayed in the second display mode, or the notice icon is newly stocked. In this case, all the notice icons displayed in the hold display area may be displayed in the second display mode. Further, when the notice icon is newly stocked, at least a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may be always displayed in the second display mode, or the notice icon is newly stocked. In this case, at least a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may not be displayed in the second display mode.

In addition, “the second display mode is a display mode in which the notice icon of the first display mode is enlarged [for example, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman in the enlarged display mode shown in FIG. 137(i) is 137(l) is an enlarged display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in the normal display mode],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second display mode may be a display mode in which only the notice icon in the first display mode is enlarged, or a display mode in which any other than the notice icon in the first display mode is also enlarged. Good. Further, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the notice icon of the first display mode is necessarily enlarged, or a display mode in which the notice icon of the first display mode is not enlarged.

In addition, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, pseudo continuous production, freeze production, stop design notice, stage change production, reach transition production, premier notice production, re-variation production, etc.]. Yes,

The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of the notice icons [for example, the notice icons shown in FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b), the notice icons shown in FIG. 135(d), etc.]. And

When the notice icon has been consumed, the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 83(23) to (25). 84(28) to FIG. 31(31) are displayed when the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of advance notice displays. Further, the display means may necessarily display a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of advance notice displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notice icons. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

Further, when the notice icon is consumed, only the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed, or when the notice icon is consumed, the notice icon may be consumed. There may be a case where a notice display of a type other than the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon is displayed. Also, when the notice icon is consumed, the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested may be displayed without fail, and when the notice icon is consumed, the type of notice icon that is consumed There may be a case where the type of notice display corresponding to is not displayed.

In addition, only when the notice icon has been consumed, the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed, or when the notice icon is not consumed. There may be a case where a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed is displayed.

In addition, "the display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as "hold number") for which the start of the variable display of the symbols is held [for example, FIG. In the hold icon display area of the UI unit UI1 shown in a), the number of hold icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],

The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (two pseudo-repeated notice icons I65) shown in FIG. It is not an icon that indicates the number of symbols whose variable display is activated],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of hold, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of hold. Good. Further, the display means may always display the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of hold, or may not display the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of hold.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,

"A gaming table provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] And

One of the plurality of types of display is a first display, one of the plurality of types of display is a second display,

The first display is a display including an icon display frame [for example, a hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 140(a)],

An icon (hereinafter, referred to as “icon”) relating to the variable display of symbols is configured to be displayed in a region inside the frame (hereinafter, referred to as “in-frame region”) of the icon display frame [for example, As shown in FIG. 140(a), the variable icon h0 is accommodated in the hold display frame FL1, etc.],
The icon display frame is a display frame that can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes,

One display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode [for example, a default display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 140(a)],

One display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode [for example, an extended display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 140(i)],

The second display mode is a display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded [for example, the extended display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. The pending display frame FL1 of the default display mode shown in (a) is a display mode expanded upward, etc.],

The second display is a decorative symbol variable display [for example, a variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140(b) and a second ornament on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Variable display of symbols etc.]

The first display displayed in the first display mode is a display that does not overlap with the second display [for example, in the default display mode shown in FIG. 140(b). The hold display frame FL1 is displayed at a position that does not overlap the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. so,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, the icon display frame displayed preferentially is expanded, and the player is informed that the effect is being performed by performing an effect such as a notice or a prefetch notice. In some cases it can be done. On recent game consoles, multiple colorful displays are being displayed simultaneously, so it tends to be complicated and difficult to see. However, according to this game console, the icon related to the symbol variation display that the player always pays attention to. By expanding the icon display frame for displaying, it becomes possible to distinguish and distinguish from other effect displays, and the effect effect may be enhanced in some cases.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display and the second display. .. Further, the display means may always display the first display and the second display, or may not display the first display and the second display.

Further, the first display may include only the icon display frame. That is, the first display may be an icon display frame. Further, the first display may include a display other than the icon display frame. Further, the first display may necessarily include the icon display frame, or may not include the icon display frame.

Here, the "icon display frame" may be referred to as a "holding display frame", a "holding frame", a "UI", a "holding icon display area", or the like. The “icon display frame” is a display that may be overlapped with at least a part of the hold icon, the variable icon, or the like. Further, since the "icon display frame" is displayed near the end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device, it may not be disturbed by other effect display. The “icon display frame” may be a frame in which one variable icon or hold icon is displayed. Further, the “icon display frame” is a display frame that does not overlap with the decorative pattern after the stop, and can also be a display frame that is overlapped by at least a part of the hold icon or the like. It can also be said that the “icon display frame” is a background display displayed on the back side of the hold icon or the like and is a background display different from the background display of the decorative pattern.

Further, here, the "icon display frame" is a part where the player can recognize that the icon is displayed without being caught by the word "frame", and the display of the frame image is This is an example and not a limitation.

In addition, only the icon may be configured to be displayed in the inner frame area of the icon display frame, or other than the icon may be configured to be displayed in the inner frame area of the icon display frame. Further, the icon may be configured to always be displayed in the inner area of the icon display frame, or may be configured such that the icon may not be displayed in the inner area of the icon display frame. Good.

Here, the area inside the frame constitutes the icon display frame, and is therefore a concept included in the first display.

Further, the icon display frame may be displayed only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the plurality of types of display modes. Further, the icon display frame may be always displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

Further, the icon display frame may be capable of being displayed only in the first display mode and the second display mode, or may display a display mode other than the first display mode and the second display mode. It may be one. Further, the icon display frame may necessarily display the first display mode and the second display mode, or may not display the first display mode and the second display mode. Good.

In addition, the second display mode may be an extension of only a part of the first display mode, or an extension of the entire first display mode.

Here, the "display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded" may be referred to as a second icon display frame.

In addition, the term “expansion” can be said to mean the display of an “icon display frame” in a broad sense, or the area of an image or a region can be increased.

Further, the first display displayed in the first display mode may not be overlapped only with the second display, and also in the display modes other than the second display mode. It may not be overlapped. The first display displayed in the first display mode may not necessarily overlap the second display, or may overlap the second display. It may be.

Here, the "decorative design variable display" may include a stop display of the decorative design and a display in a state in which the design is identifiable at the start of the variation, for example, during the high-speed variation, during the stop display. May be included in a display state that is more difficult to identify than the display state of (1) or the display state at the start of the change (for example, a semi-transparent display during high-speed change), or a decoration with a smaller size displayed during SP reach, etc. A variable display of symbols may be included.
In addition, "one display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,

The third display is an effect display [for example, a ninja character NJ1 throws a shuriken SH1 to change the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIGS. 140(g) to 140(l). Performance display, etc.]

A part of the second display mode that is expanded from the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “expanded part [for example, an expanded part in the reserved display frame FL1 of the expanded display mode shown in FIG. 140(i), etc. ]”), the third display is configured to be overlapped and displayable [for example, as shown in FIGS. 140(g) to 140(l), the second hold icon h12 is displayed. In the effect display that changes the display mode of N., the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, etc.],

The extended portion is a portion that is not overlapped with the second display [for example, as shown in FIG. 140(f), the pending display frame FL1 in the extended display mode is the first portion in the variable display). 1 is not overlapped with the decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, at least the expanded display of the icon display frame is prioritized over the variable display of the decorative pattern showing the validity of the change, and the effect display such as the advance notice or the prefetch advance notice is displayed in the extended part, so the effect In some cases, the effect can be improved.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the third display. Further, the display means may necessarily display the third display, or may not display the third display.

Here, the "effect display" includes an effect display in which the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes, an effect display in which the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes, and the like.

Further, only the third display may be overlapped and displayed on the expanded portion, or displays other than the third display may be overlapped and displayed on the expanded portion. In addition, the third display may be configured to be always displayed in the expanded portion, or the third display may not be displayed in the extended portion in some cases. Good.

Note that, here, the “extended portion” may refer to the difference from the portion before the extension or, when only a part of the icon display frame before the extension is extended (or enlarged), it may refer to itself. ..

Further, the expanded portion may not overlap only the second display, or may not overlap the display other than the second display. In addition, the expanded portion may not necessarily overlap the second display, or may sometimes overlap the second display.

In addition, “the effect display is a display of a prefetching notice [for example, an effect display that changes the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 140(g) to FIG. 140(l)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the effect display is a display for changing the display mode of the icon [for example, as shown in FIGS. 140(g) to 140(l), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 blinks in white. Effect display to change from a display mode to a display mode that lights up in green]
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second display is a display that may be overlapped with the expanded portion [for example, as shown in FIG. 140( f ), the decorative pattern in the variable display is held in the expanded display mode. It is overlapped with the display frame FL1, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may be overlapped only with the expanded portion, or may be overlapped with a portion other than the expanded portion. Further, the second display may be one that is always overlapped with the expanded portion, or may be one that may not be overlapped with the expanded portion.
In addition, "one display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,

The fourth display is a display of a dialogue [for example, a dialogue display by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi in the speech balloon TT2 and a dialogue display by the grandpa character GY1 in the speech balloon TT3 shown in FIG. 140(i)]. Yes,

The fourth display is a display that is not overlapped with the icon display frame of the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 140(d), a hold display of a default display mode]. The frame FL1 does not overlap the balloons TT2 and TT3, etc.],

The fourth display is a display that may overlap with the expanded portion [for example, as shown in FIG. 140(i), the suspended display frame FL1 in the expanded display mode is displayed in the balloon TT2. It overlaps with the display of the dialogue by Princess Chibi's character CH1],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fourth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display or may not display the fourth display.

Here, the “display of the dialogue” may be referred to as a “serif notice” or a “conversation notice”, and may include, for example, notice of the change, prefetch notice, tutorial display, or the like.

The fourth display may not overlap only the icon display frame of the first display mode, or may overlap other than the icon display frame of the first display mode. There may be things that are not. Further, the fourth display may not necessarily overlap with the icon display frame of the first display mode, or may overlap with the icon display frame of the first display mode. It may be. It should be noted that here, “the fourth display does not overlap with the icon display frame of the first display mode” does not seem to overlap in display position. It is a concept that also includes things that are configured.

Further, the fourth display may be overlapped only on the expanded portion, or may be overlapped on a portion other than the expanded portion. Further, the fourth display may be one that is always overlapped with the expanded portion, or may be one that may not be overlapped with the expanded portion.

Also, the "display of the serif" includes the display of the first serif and the display of the second serif, and the display of the first serif is a display that may overlap with the extension part. The display of the second line may be a display that is not overlapped with the extension portion.
In addition, "one display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,

The fifth display is a notice display [for example, an effect display for changing the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box shown in FIGS. 145(c-1) to (c-6) or FIG. 147(c). -1) to (c-4) of the same figure, which are effect displays that change the display mode of the variable icon h0],

In the expanded portion, the fifth display is configured to be overlapped and displayable [for example, the notice icon BX of the treasure box shown in FIGS. 145(c-1) to (c-6) is displayed. In the effect display that changes the display mode and the effect display that changes the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIGS. 147(c-1) to (c-4), the ninja character NJ1 is in the extended display mode. It overlaps the extended portion of the hold icon display area FL1, etc.],

Part of the third display and the fifth display are the same display [for example, an effect that changes the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIGS. 140(g) to 140(l). 147 (c-1) to (c-) in FIG. 145 (c-1) to (c-6) in FIG. 145 (c-1) to (c-6) in FIG. In the effect display that changes the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in 4), the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion of the hold icon display area FL1 in the extended display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, for example, it is difficult to confirm whether or not the change is due to the decorative pattern, but by displaying both the third display and the fifth display in the expanded icon display frame, the icon display frame is displayed. If you look at it, you may be able to see both displays without missing them. In addition, if the third display and the fifth display are all different modes, it may become clear whether or not the change should be expected or the symbol change display to be performed after that should be expected. By making a part of the display and a part of the fifth display the same, it may be possible to increase the expectation until it is possible to recognize which of the expected symbol variation displays is.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fifth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fifth display. Further, the display means may always display the fifth display, or may not display the fifth display.

Further, in the expanded portion, only the fifth display may be configured to be overlapped and capable of being displayed, or in the expanded portion, displays other than the fifth display may be configured to be overlapped and capable of being displayed. It may be one that has been created. Further, in the expanded portion, the fifth display may be configured to be displayed so as to overlap with each other, and in the expanded portion, the fifth display may not be displayed in an overlapped manner. It may be configured as. Also, the fifth display may be configured to be able to overlap and be displayed only in the expanded portion, or the fifth display may be overlapped and displayed in a portion other than the expanded portion. It may be configured.

Here, the "notice display" may be a change effect of the variable icon, or may be a stop of a special symbol such as a pseudo continuous symbol.

In addition, "a part of the third display and the fifth display are the same display" is a concept including, for example, that the animation up to the appearance of the character is the same.

In addition, “the area within the frame in the first display mode (hereinafter, “the area within the frame of the first display area [for example, the reserved display frame FL1 in the default display mode shown in FIG. 140(a)] Etc.]”) is the first area,

The area in the frame in the second display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "second frame area [for example, area in frame of reserved display frame FL1 in extended display mode shown in FIG. 140(i)]". .) is the second area,
The second area is larger than the first area,

The expanded portion is a portion of a difference area between the second in-frame area and the first in-frame area,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second in-frame area is an area configured to include the first in-frame area [for example, as shown in FIG. 140(i), the pending display frame FL1 in the extended display mode is displayed. The area in the frame is configured to include the area in the frame of the reserved display frame FL1 in the default display mode, etc.], The gaming table. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second in-frame region may be configured to include a part of the first in-frame region, or may be configured to include all of the first in-frame region. It may be.

Further, "the display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded" according to claim 1 means that "the area of the in-frame region in the first display mode is increased. "Display mode" [for example, as shown in FIG. 140(i), in the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode, the area of the area within the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode is increased. Display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "the icon display frame is configured to be displayable in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed [for example, there is no hold, and no symbol variable display is performed. , The hold display frame FL1 is displayed even when neither the change icon h0 nor the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the icon display frame may be configured to be displayable only in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed, or the icon display frame may be displayed even when the icon is not displayed. It may be configured to be displayable in a display mode other than the first display mode. Further, the icon display frame may be configured to be always displayed in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed, or the icon display frame may be displayed even when the icon is not displayed. May not be displayed in the first display mode.

The icon display frame may be displayed in a state where the icon is not displayed, and the icon may be displayed in an area other than the icon display frame.

In addition, “the icon that can be displayed in the frame area is a variable icon [for example, as shown in FIG. 140(i), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the pending display frame FL1 in the extended display mode. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Here, the icon that can be displayed in the frame area may be a hold icon.

In addition, “the display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon [for example, a first hold icon h11 to a fourth hold icon h14 or the like displayed in a hold icon display area] as the icon,

The display means is a means capable of displaying a number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variable display being held,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may display only the hold icon as an icon, or may display other than the hold icon as the icon. Further, the display means may always display the hold icon as the icon, or may not display the hold icon as the icon.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the number of holding icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variable display being held, or corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variable display being held. A hold icon other than the number of hold icons may be displayed. In addition, the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the variable display of symbols may be displayed without fail, or the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the change display of symbols being held may be held. May not be displayed.

In addition, “The first display displayed in the second display mode is a display that does not overlap with the second display [for example, FIG. 140(f) to FIG. The extended display mode of the reserved display frame FL1 shown in) is overlapped with the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display displayed in the second display mode may not be overlapped only with the second display, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. May not be overlapped. The first display displayed in the second display mode may not necessarily overlap the second display mode, or may overlap the second display mode. There may be cases.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like], the game table. ]
Was also explained.
In the above description,
"Operating means [for example, the operation unit 136] operable by the player,
A production means capable of executing a plurality of types of production [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208],
A gaming table equipped with

One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, an effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIG. 223 is full].

One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect button that is generated after the second time shown in FIG. 213 in the case where the long-press auto continuous hitting function is disabled. Effect display by pseudo-linking performed as a result of operation 136.
The second effect is an effect different from the first effect,

In the first effect, the operation means performs a first number of times [for example, 20 times] in a first operation mode [for example, one pressing operation with the effect button 136 (single-shot operation)]. It is a production that can be started in case,

The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode [for example, long-pressing operation by the effect button 136],

The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the operation is continued for a longer period than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number exceeding 1,

In the second effect, a second number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode, as compared with a case where the operation is performed once by the operation means in the second operation mode. The effect is more likely to be started when [1] is performed [for example, in the case where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, execution of the effect button 136 operation that occurs after the second time shown in FIG. 213 is executed. Effect display by the pseudo-run is not started by a long press operation with the effect button 136],
The second number is a number greater than 1,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the rendering means, but according to this gaming table, it is possible to provide a gaming table having a feature in the rendering means.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing an effect other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the first effect and the second effect, or may not execute the first effect and the second effect.

Here, the first effect may be, for example, an effect corresponding to "re" of "Doremi", and the second effect is, for example, "i" of "ayu". In some cases, it can be said that the corresponding production.

In addition, the first effect is started only when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It may be possible, except when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It may be one that can be started. In addition, the first effect always starts when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. Start when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode You may not.

In addition, “a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variable display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212 and a second special symbol display device 214],

One of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect [for example, continuous hit operation effects shown in FIGS. 223(d) to 223(g)],
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,

The third effect is an effect that prompts continuous operation of the operation means in the first operation mode [for example, as shown in FIGS. 223(d) to 223(g), effect button images are displayed. The effect that the characters "repeatedly strike" are displayed together with BT],

The first effect is an effect that can be started when the operation is performed the first number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect,

The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the third effect.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of executing displays other than the symbol variable display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variable display, or may not execute the symbol variable display.

Further, the third effect may be able to be started only while the symbol variable display is being executed, or may be able to be started other than during the symbol variable display. Further, the third effect may always start during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may not start during the execution of the symbol variation display.

In addition, the first effect, during the execution of the third effect, when the operation means has performed a first number of operations in the first operation mode, and during execution of the third effect, The operation may be started only when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode, or may be started by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect. Even when the operation is performed the number of times, and during the execution of the third effect, the operation can be started in addition to the case where the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. Good. In addition, the first effect, during the execution of the third effect, when the operation means has performed a first number of operations in the first operation mode, and during execution of the third effect, The operation may be always started when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, or the first operation mode is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect. There may be a case where the operation is not started when the operation is performed the number of times and when the operation unit performs the operation once in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.

In addition, “the second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a first time period [for example, a state in which the effect button 136 is pressed down is Operation mode maintained for 0.5 seconds or more],
A game table characterized by that. ]

Was also explained. In addition, “when the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a second time [for example, 4 seconds], the operating means is pseudo-operated in the first number of times in the first number of times. As a matter of fact, the first effect is configured to be able to start,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first effect is assumed that the operating means is operated in the pseudo first operation mode for the first number of times only when the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time. It may be able to start, or even when the operating means is operated for a second period of time, the operating means is operated in the pseudo first operation mode a first number of times. It may be something that can be started. In addition, the first effect is always started assuming that the operating means is operated in the pseudo first operation mode for the first number of times when the operating means is maintained for the second time. Alternatively, the operation means may not be started even when the operation state is maintained for the second time.

In addition, "the second effect is an effect that is not started by only one operation performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be able to be started when the operation means performs the operation two or more times in the second operation mode.
In addition, “light emitting means [for example, a production button lamp 138] is provided,

The light emitting means is a means that is in a first state [for example, a state of emitting red light] in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operating means can be accepted.

The light emitting means is a means that is in a second state [for example, a state where the light is turned off or a state where light is emitted in blue] when the operation for starting the second effect by the operation means can be accepted. Yes,
The second state is a state different from the first state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "the first state is a state of emitting light,
The second state is a state of not emitting light,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "the first state is a state of emitting light in the first mode,
The second state is a state of emitting light in the second mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first mode and the second mode are modes in which at least one of a color to be emitted, a lighting/extinguishing and blinking pattern, a location of an element to emit light, and brightness is different.
In addition, “the first aspect is a first color [for example, red],

A game table characterized in that the second mode is a second color [for example, blue]. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "the light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operating means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of emitting light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may always emit light from the inside of the operating means, or may not emit light from the inside of the operating means.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above explanation,
"Operating means [for example, the operation unit 136] operable by the player,
A production means capable of executing a plurality of types of production [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208],
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208],
A gaming table equipped with

One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, an effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIG. 223 is full].

In the first effect, the operation means performs a first number of times [for example, 20 times] in a first operation mode [for example, one pressing operation with the effect button 136 (single-shot operation)]. It is a production that can be started in case,

The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode [for example, long-pressing operation by the effect button 136],

The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the operation is continued for a longer period than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number exceeding 1,

One of the plurality of types of displays is a first selection display [for example, the character selection effect shown in FIG. 236],

The first selection display is a display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means,

One of the plurality of types of images is the first image [for example, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 236],

The first image is operated in the first operation mode more than when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. The image is easier to select when the second operation is performed by the means [for example, in the case where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the character image of the princess shown in FIG. 236. H is not selected by long-pressing with the effect button 136],
The second number is a number greater than 1,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the rendering means, but according to this gaming table, it is possible to provide a gaming table having a feature in the rendering means.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing an effect other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect. In addition, the production means may always execute the first production, or may not execute the first production.

Further, the display means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of performing a display other than the plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always execute a plurality of types of display, or may not execute a plurality of types of display.

In addition, the first effect is started only when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It may be possible, except when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It may be one that can be started. In addition, the first effect always starts when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. Start when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode You may not.

Further, the display means may be capable of executing only the first selection display, or may be capable of executing displays other than the first selection display. Further, the display means may always execute the first selection display, or may not execute the first selection display.

Further, the first selection display may be one in which only one image of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation means, or a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. One of the images may be selectable. Further, the first selection display may be one in which one of the plurality of types of images is always selected in accordance with the operation of the operating means, or the one of the plurality of types of images is selected in accordance with the operation of the operating means. There may be a case where one of the images is not selected.

In addition, “one of the above-mentioned multiple effects is a fourth effect [for example, an effect by a princess character that appears after the end of the big hit game],

The fourth effect is an effect different from the first effect [for example, an effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIG. 223 is full].

The fourth effect is when the first image is selected in the first selection display [for example, when the princess character image H is selected in the character selection effect shown in FIG. 236]. It is a production that can be started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the fourth effect may be one that can be started only when the first image is selected in the first selection display, or the first image is displayed in the first selection display. It may be something that can be started other than when it is selected. In addition, the fourth effect may be started without fail when the first image is selected in the first selection display, and the first image is selected in the first selection display. It may not start if it does.

In addition, “a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variable display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212 and a second special symbol display device 214],

One of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect [for example, continuous hit operation effects shown in FIGS. 223(d) to 223(g)],
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,

The third effect is an effect that prompts continuous operation of the operation means in the first operation mode [for example, as shown in FIGS. 223(d) to 223(g), effect button images are displayed. The effect that the characters "repeatedly strike" are displayed together with BT],

The first effect is an effect that can be started when the operation is performed the first number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect,

The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the third effect.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of executing displays other than the symbol variable display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variable display, or may not execute the symbol variable display.

Further, the third effect may be able to be started only while the symbol variable display is being executed, or may be able to be started other than during the symbol variable display. Further, the third effect may always start during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may not start during the execution of the symbol variation display.

In addition, the first effect, during the execution of the third effect, when the operation means has performed a first number of operations in the first operation mode, and during execution of the third effect, The operation may be started only when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode, or may be started by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect. Even when the operation is performed the number of times, and during the execution of the third effect, the operation can be started in addition to the case where the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. Good. In addition, the first effect, during the execution of the third effect, when the operation means has performed a first number of operations in the first operation mode, and during execution of the third effect, The operation may be always started when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, or the first operation mode is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect. There may be a case where the operation is not started when the operation is performed the number of times and when the operation unit performs the operation once in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.

In addition, “the second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a first time [for example, a state in which the effect button 136 is pressed down is 0.5 seconds. The operation mode maintained above].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “when the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a second time [for example, 4 seconds], the operating means is pseudo-operated in the first number of times in the first number of times. As a matter of fact, the first effect is configured to be able to start,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first effect is assumed that the operating means is operated in the pseudo first operation mode for the first number of times only when the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time. It may be able to start, or even when the operating means is operated for a second period of time, the operating means is operated in the pseudo first operation mode a first number of times. It may be something that can be started. In addition, the first effect is always started assuming that the operating means is operated in the pseudo first operation mode for the first number of times when the operating means is maintained for the second time. Alternatively, the operation means may not be started even when the operation state is maintained for the second time.

In addition, “during execution of the first selection display, even if the operating state of the operating means is maintained for the first time or more, one operation is performed by the operating means. Configured to be
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first image is an image that is not selected by only one operation performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first image may be selectable when the operation means performs the operation two or more times in the second operation mode.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a second selection display [for example, a favorite selection screen shown in FIG. 246(f)],

The second selection display is a selection display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means,
The second selection display is a selection display different from the first selection display,

One of the plurality of types of images is a second image [for example, a selection item of “character C”],

The second image can be selected when the third operation [for example, two times] is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. Image,

The second image is an image selectable when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display,
The third number is a number greater than 1,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second selection display may be one in which only one image of the plurality of types of images can be selected in response to the operation of the operating means, or the plurality of types of images in accordance with the operation of the operating means. Other than one of the images may be selectable. Further, the second selection display may be one in which one of the plurality of types of images is always selected in accordance with the operation of the operating means, or the one of the plurality of types of images is selected in accordance with the operation of the operating means. There may be a case where one of the images is not selected.

Further, the second image is displayed during execution of the second selection display when the third operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode, and during execution of the second selection display. The selection means may be selectable only when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode, or the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. Can be selected other than when a third number of operations are performed by, and when the second selection display is being performed and one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. May be In addition, the first effect, during the execution of the second selection display, when the operation means has performed a third number of operations in the first operation mode, and during execution of the second selection display. , May be selected without fail when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, or by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. Even if the operation is performed a third number of times, or even if the operation is performed once by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display, no selection may be made. Good.
In addition, "One of the multiple types of effects is the fifth effect,

The fifth effect is an effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the fifth effect may be one that can be started only when the second image is selected in the second selection display, or the second image is displayed in the second selection display. It may be one that can be started in a case other than the case where it is selected. Further, the fifth effect may be something which starts without fail when the second image is selected in the second selection display, and the second image is selected in the second selection display. It may not start if it does.
In addition, “light emitting means [for example, a production button lamp 138] is provided,

The light emitting means is a means that is in a first state [for example, a state of emitting red light] in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operating means can be accepted.

The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a second state [for example, a state where the light is turned off or a state where blue light is emitted] during execution of the first selection display,
The second state is a state different from the first state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "the first state is a state of emitting light,
The second state is a state of not emitting light,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "the first state is a state of emitting light in the first mode,
The second state is a state of emitting light in the second mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first mode and the second mode are modes in which at least one of a color to be emitted, a lighting/extinguishing and blinking pattern, a location of an element to emit light, and brightness is different.
In addition, “the first aspect is a first color [for example, red],
The second aspect is a second color [eg, blue],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "the light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operating means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of emitting light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may always emit light from the inside of the operating means, or may not emit light from the inside of the operating means.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,
"Operating means [for example, the operation unit 136] operable by the player,
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208],
A gaming table equipped with

One of the plurality of types of display is a display in the first display mode (hereinafter, “first display [for example, when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIG. 223 becomes full. Production performed by the]]).

One of the plurality of types of displays is a display in the second display mode (hereinafter, “second display [for example, in the case where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, FIG. The effect display by pseudo-linking performed as a result of the operation of the effect button 136 that occurs after the second time shown in FIG.
The second display is a display different from the first display,

One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operating means (hereinafter, "third display [e.g., shown in FIGS. 223(d) to (g). It is said that the continuous stroke operation effect]].

The third display is a display that is displayed in a state in which an operation of the operating means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as “first state”) [for example, FIG. d)-(g), as shown in the figure, the effect button image BT and the characters "repeatedly hit" are displayed].

The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started,
The first display is a display that can be started even when the operating means is long pressed,

The second display is a display that is easier to start when the operating means is repeatedly hit than when the operating means is long-pressed,

The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state in which the operation of the operating means for starting the second display can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as “second state”) [eg, FIG. 213]. In the example shown in (2), the character "repeatedly hit" is not displayed together with the effect button image BT],]. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the display means.

Here, the display means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of display or may be capable of performing a display other than the plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of display, or may not execute a plurality of types of display.

Further, the display means may be capable of executing only the first display, the second display and the third display, and may also display other than the first display, the second display and the third display. It may be executable. Further, the display means may necessarily execute the first display, the second display and the third display, or one of the first display, the second display and the third display. In some cases, part or all may not be executed. Further, the third display may be displayed only in a state where the operation of the operating means for starting the first display can be accepted, or the operating means for starting the first display. The operation may be executable even in a state other than the state in which the operation can be accepted. The third display may be always displayed in a state in which the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted, or the operation means for starting the first display. The operation may not be displayed in a state in which the operation can be accepted.

Further, the first display may be one that can be started only when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started or when the operation means is long-pressed. It may be one that can be started other than when the button is repeatedly hit and when the operating means is long pressed. Further, the first display may be always started when the operation means is repeatedly hit and when the operation means is long-pressed, or when the operation means is continuously hit and the operation means is long-pressed. It may not start if it does.
In addition, “light emitting means [for example, a production button lamp 138] is provided,
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operating means,

In the first state, the light emitting means is a means that becomes a first light emitting state [for example, a state of emitting red light],

In the second state, the light emitting means is a means that becomes a second light emitting state [for example, a state where the light is turned off or a state where blue light is emitted].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of emitting light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may always emit light from the inside of the operating means, or may not emit light from the inside of the operating means.

The light emitting means may be in the first light emitting state only in the first state, or may be in the first light emitting state in a state other than the first state.

The light emitting means may be in the second light emitting state only in the second state, or may be in the second light emitting state in a state other than the second state.
In addition, "the first light emitting state is a lighting state,
The second light emitting state is an off state,

When the light emitting means is in the lighting state, it represents a state in which the operation of the operating means is accepted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 216(a-3) and (a-4). , The effect button lamp 138 is lit in a state in which the operation of the operation means is accepted],

When the light emitting means is turned off, the operation of the operating means is not accepted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 216(a-1) and (a-2). In the state where the operation of the operation means is not accepted, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first light emission state is a state where light is emitted in a first light emission mode [for example, light emission in red], and the second light emission state is emitted in a second light emission mode [for example, It emits blue light.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, "one of the plurality of types of display is a variable display,

The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variable display [for example, a display regarding the result of the operation is performed during the variable display of special figure 1 and decorative symbols],

The second display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variable display [for example, a display regarding the result of the operation is performed during the variable display of the special figure 1 and the decorative symbol],

The third display is a display that can be started during the display of the variable display of symbols [for example, as shown in FIGS. 222(d) to 222(g), during the variable display of special symbols 1 and decorative symbols). Is performed repeatedly.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be a display that can be started only while the symbol variable display is being displayed, or may be a display that can be started when the symbol variable display is not being displayed. Further, the first display may be one in which the display is always started during the display of the symbol variable display, or may not be started during the display of the symbol variable display.

Further, the second display may be one that can be started only while the symbol variable display is being displayed, or may be one that can be displayed when the symbol variable display is not being displayed. Further, the second display may be one in which the display is always started during the display of the symbol variable display, or may not be started during the display of the symbol variable display.

Further, the third display may be capable of starting the display only during the display of the symbol variable display, or may be able to start the display other than during the display of the symbol variable display. Further, the third display may be one in which the display is always started during the display of the symbol variable display, or may not be started during the display of the symbol variable display.

In addition, “the second display is a display which is not started only by long-pressing the operating means [for example, the display shown in FIG. 213(l) indicates that the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is invalid. Is displayed, it is not displayed unless the effect button 136 is operated twice.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may be a display which is not started other than long-pressing the operation means.

Further, "when the operation means is pressed for a long time [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds], the first display can be started as if the operation means is repeatedly hit. [For example, as shown in FIG. 223, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, it is assumed that the operation means is operated 20 times in a pseudo manner, and a display related to the result of the operation (a preview display such as a cut-in image, Notifications to announce that it will be a big hit) will be started],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only when the operation means is long-pressed, the first display may be able to be started as if the operation means is repeatedly hit, or even when the operation means is not long-pressed, The first display may be able to start as being repeatedly hit. In addition, when the operation means is long-pressed, the first display may always be started as if the operation means was repeatedly hit, and when the operation means is long-pressed, the operation means is repeatedly hit. There may be cases where the first display does not start.

In addition, “the long press means that the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "the gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,
"Operating means [for example, the operation unit 136] operable by the player,
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208],
A gaming table equipped with

One of the plurality of types of display is a display in the first display mode (hereinafter, “first display [for example, when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIG. 223 becomes full. Production performed by the]]).

One of the plurality of types of display is a display in a fourth display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth display [for example, character selection effect shown in FIG. 236]”).
The fourth display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a performance display,
The fourth display is a selection display,

The fourth display is a display displayed when selecting one image of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means,

One of the plurality of types of images is the first image [for example, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 236],
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit,
The first display is a display that can be started even when the operating means is long pressed,

The first image is an image that is more easily selected when the operating means is operated a plurality of times than when the operating means is long-pressed [for example, a state where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled. 236, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 236 is not selected by a long-pressing operation with the effect button 136],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the display means.

Here, the display means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of display or may be capable of performing a display other than the plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always execute a plurality of types of display, or may not execute a plurality of types of display.

Further, the display means may be capable of executing only the first display and the fourth display, or may be capable of executing displays other than the first display and the fourth display. Further, the display means may necessarily execute the first display and the fourth display, or may not execute the first display and the fourth display.

Further, the first display may be able to be started only when repeatedly hit by the operating means or when the operating means is long-pressed, or when continuously hit by the operating means or long-pressed by the operating means. It may be something that can be started in addition to the case where it is performed. Further, the first display may start without fail when the operation means repeatedly hits and when the operation means is long-pressed, or when the operation means continuously hits and the operation means is long-pressed. It may not start if it does.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a fifth display [for example, an effect by a princess character that appears after the jackpot game is over],

The fifth display is a display different from the first display [for example, the effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIG. 223 is full].

The fifth display is a display that can be started when the first image [for example, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 236] is selected during execution of the fourth display.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the fifth display may be something that can be started only when the first image is selected during execution of the fourth display, or during execution of the fourth display, It may be one that can be started other than when one image is selected. Further, the fifth display may be started without fail when the first image is selected during execution of the fourth display, or the first display during execution of the fourth display. It may not start when an image is selected.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of displays is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operation means (hereinafter, “third display [for example, FIG. 223(d) to FIG. ), the continuous stroke operation effect]”).

The third display is a display that is displayed in a state in which an operation of the operating means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as “first state”) [for example, FIG. d)-(g), as shown in the figure, the effect button image BT and the characters "repeatedly hit" are displayed].

The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, the third display may be displayed only in a state where the operation of the operating means for starting the first display can be accepted, or the operating means for starting the first display. The operation may be executable even in a state other than the state in which the operation can be accepted. The third display may be always displayed in a state in which the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted, or the operation means for starting the first display. The operation may not be displayed in a state in which the operation can be accepted.

Further, the first display may be able to be started only when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started, or may be started other than when the operation means is repeatedly hit. It may be possible. Further, the first display may be always started when the operating means is repeatedly hit, or may not be started when the operating means is repeatedly hit.
In addition, “light emitting means [for example, a production button lamp 138] is provided,
The light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operating means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is a means that is turned on,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of emitting light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may always emit light from the inside of the operating means, or may not emit light from the inside of the operating means.

The light emitting means may be in the first light emitting state only in the first state, or may be in the first light emitting state in a state other than the first state.
Also, "one of the plurality of types of display is a variable display,

The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variable display [for example, a display regarding the result of the operation is performed during the variable display of the special figure 1 and the decorative symbol],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be a display that can be started only while the symbol variable display is being displayed, or may be a display that can be started when the symbol variable display is not being displayed. Further, the first display may be one in which the display is always started during the display of the symbol variable display, or may not be started during the display of the symbol variable display.

In addition, “the first image is an image that is not selected only by long-pressing the operation means [for example, in the display shown in FIG. 236, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled. In this case, unless the effect button 136 is operated twice, the princess character image H is not displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first image may be an image that is not selected except that the operation unit is long-pressed.

Further, "when the operation means is pressed for a long time [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds], the first display can be started as if the operation means is repeatedly hit. [For example, as shown in FIG. 223, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, it is assumed that the operation means is operated 20 times in a pseudo manner, and a display related to the result of the operation (a preview display such as a cut-in image, Notifications to announce that it will be a big hit) will be started],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only when the operation means is long-pressed, the first display may be able to be started as if the operation means is repeatedly hit, or even when the operation means is not long-pressed, The first display may be able to start as being repeatedly hit. In addition, when the operation means is long-pressed, the first display may always be started as if the operation means was repeatedly hit, and when the operation means is long-pressed, the operation means is repeatedly hit. There may be cases where the first display does not start.

In addition, “the long press means that the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds],
A game table characterized by that. ]
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "the gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,

"Symbol display means capable of displaying symbol variation display [eg, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
An operation means [for example, an operation unit 136 or the like] operable by a player,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
A gaming table equipped with

One of the plurality of types of display is a display in the first display mode (hereinafter, “first display [for example, when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIG. 223 becomes full. Etc.]”)),

One display of the plurality of types of display is a display in the second display mode (hereinafter, “second display [for example, in the case where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, FIG. In the chance-eye production shown in FIG. 3, a display in which three lord patterns YM1 to YM3 are aligned]”.
The second display is a display different from the first display,

The first display is a display that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display,

The second display is a display that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display,

One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operating means (hereinafter, “third display [for example, shown in FIGS. 223(d) to (g). It is referred to as a continuous hit operation effect, etc.]).

The first display, after the display of the third display is started, is a display that may be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit,

The first display, after the display of the third display is started, is a display that may be started even if the operating means is long-pressed,

One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to operate the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth display [e.g., shown in FIGS. 214(b) to (h)]. , The chance eye production, etc.”).
The fourth display is a display different from the third display,

The second display may be displayed when the operation means is operated two or more times [for example, three times] after the display of the fourth display is started. And

The second display is a display that is not started by only pressing and holding the operating means once after the display of the fourth display is started [for example, in FIG. The display in the mode in which the three hall designs YM1 to YM3 shown are not displayed unless the effect button 136 is operated three times, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ] Was explained.

In addition, “a light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of kinds of light emitting states [for example, a production button lamp 138 or the like] is provided, and the light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operating means,

One of the plurality of types of light emitting states is a first light emitting state [for example, a state of emitting red light, etc.],

The light emitting means is a means that becomes the first light emitting state in a state of accepting an operation of the operating means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of light emitting states is a second light emitting state [for example, a state where the light is turned off or a state where blue light is emitted],
The first light emitting state is a lighting state,
The second light emitting state is an off state,

When the light emitting means is in the lighting state, it represents a state in which the operation of the operating means is accepted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 216(a-3) and (a-4). , The production button lamp 138 is lit in a state in which the operation of the operation means is accepted],

When the light emitting means is turned off, the operation of the operating means is not accepted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 216(a-1) and (a-2). In the state where the operation of the operating means is not accepted, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of light emitting states is a second light emitting state [for example, a state where the light is turned off or a state where blue light is emitted],

The first light emission state is a state in which light is emitted in the first light emission mode [for example, light emission in red, etc.],

The second light emitting state is a state of emitting light in a second light emitting mode [for example, emitting light in blue].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first display is a notice display [for example, a notice display of a cut-in image or the like, a notice for notifying a big hit, etc.],"

The second display is a notice display [for example, as shown in FIG. 214(i), a notice is given to move to super reach by aligning three hall symbols YM1 to YM3, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a display for instructing to select one option from a plurality of options (hereinafter, “selection display [for example, character selection effect shown in FIG. 236. 246 (c) in the adjustment screen shown in FIG. 246 (c), when the volume is indicated by the cursor CL, or when the light amount is indicated by the cursor CL, etc.]".

One of the plurality of types of displays is the first option [eg, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 236, the volume “10” setting, or the light intensity “10” among the plurality of options. Display, etc., which is displayed when "Setting etc." is selected (hereinafter, "the fifth display [for example, a display in which the princess character image H shown in FIG. The setting is referred to as a display in the display mode of "10", or the setting of the light amount is referred to as a display in the display mode of "10"]".

The fifth display may be started when the operation means is operated two or more times [eg, twice or five times] after the selection display is started. Is a display,

The fifth display is a display in which the display is not started only by pressing and holding the operating means once after the display of the selection display is started [for example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is invalid. In the case of the state, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 236 is not selected only by the long press operation with the effect button 136, and in the case of the long press automatic continuous hit function being in the invalid state, The display in the display mode in which the volume setting is “10” shown in FIG. 246(c) is not selected only by the long-press operation with the right button 137d, or the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled. In this case, the display in the display mode in which the light amount setting is “10” shown in FIG. 246(c) is not selected only by the long press operation with the right button 137d, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the fifth display is started when the number of operations of the operation means is the first number [eg, 2 or 5 times] after the display of the selection display is started. Display,
The first number is 2 or more,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “when the operation means is pressed for a long time after the display of the third display is started [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds], the operation means is repeatedly hit. As a matter of fact, the display of the first display may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 223, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is simulated. A display regarding the result of the operation assuming that the operation has been performed 20 times (a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notification for notifying a big hit) is started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "long-pressing" means that the operating state of the operating means is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of states for accepting the operation of the operation means is the first state,

One of the plurality of states for accepting the operation of the operation means is a second state,
The second state is a state different from the first state,

The third display is a display displayed in the first state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 223(d) to 223(g), the characters "repeatedly strike" are displayed together with the effect button image BT. Etc.]

The fourth display is a display displayed in the second state [for example, the characters "PUSH" are displayed on each of the effect button images BT1 to BT3 shown in FIGS. 214(b) to 214(h). Displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]

Was also explained. In addition, “the first state is a state for accepting an operation for starting the display of the first display [in other words, the first state is a state for accepting an operation of the operation means. In the first state, the first display may be started when the operating means is repeatedly hit. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second state is a state for accepting an operation for starting the display of the second display [in other words, the second state is a state for accepting an operation of the operation means]. In the second state, the display of the second display may be started when the operating means is operated two or more times. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first state is a state in which it ends when a predetermined time [e.g., 5 seconds] elapses after the first state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second state is a state in which it ends when a predetermined time [for example, the remaining time shown in the remaining time meters MT1 to MT3 shown in FIG. 214] has elapsed after the second state has been reached. Is
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the second display indicates that the number of operations of the operation means is a second number [e.g., three times or more, and the first number ( The number of times different from (2 or 5 times)] is displayed.
The second number is 2 or more,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "the third display is a display including the first image,

The first image is an effect including an image [for example, an effect button image BT shown in FIG. 223(d), etc.] showing the appearance of the operation means [eg, as shown in FIG. 223(d), an effect. An image including the characters "repeatedly strike" together with the button image BT],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, “the fourth display is a display including a plurality of second images,

The second image is an image including an image showing the appearance of the operation means [for example, effect button images BT1, BT2, BT3, etc. shown in FIG. 214(b)] [for example, shown in FIG. 214(b). Image including the character "PUSH" together with the effect button image BT1, image including the character "PUSH" together with the effect button image BT2, and image including the image including the character "PUSH" together with the effect button image BT3] is there,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "the second image is an image whose display mode is different from that of the first image. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,
“A game table provided with a first operation means [for example, a production button 136 and the like],
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,

One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, an effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIGS. 222 and 223 is full, etc.],

One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, in the continuous hit operation effect shown in FIGS. 241(c) to 241(e), an effect in which the light emitting units LL and LR are turned on]. Yes,

The first operation means operates in the first operation mode [for example, continuous operation or multiple operations (the operation mode by continuous operation and the operation mode by multiple operations include the same operation mode. The same applies hereinafter. Etc.], the first effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 222, when a continuous hit operation is performed by the effect button 136 and the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD becomes full. In some cases, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit is given may be given as a result of successful production.],

When the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode [for example, operated a plurality of times], the second effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 241(e). , When the player repeatedly hits the production button 136, all the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR may emit red light, etc.],

When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, long-press operation, etc.], the first effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. When the long press operation by 136 is performed, the continuous long press operation is performed by the long press auto continuous hit function in a pseudo manner, and as a result, when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD becomes full, the production is considered to be successful, and the cut-in image Etc., a notice may be given to notify you of a big hit, etc.],

When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started [for example, in the continuous-stroke operation effect shown in FIG. 241, the long-press automatic continuous-stroke function is disabled. Therefore, if the effect button 136 is pressed and held, all the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR do not emit red light, etc.],

The second effect is an effect executed by a second effect means [for example, the light emitting units LL and LR].
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in performance, but according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in performance.

Here, the first effect may be executed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode. It may be executed in response to something other than being operated in one operation mode. Further, the first effect may be always executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means may be the first operation mode. There may be a case where it is not executed in response to being operated in.

Further, the second effect may be executed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, and the first operation means may be the first operation means. It may also be executed in response to something other than being operated in the operation mode. Further, the second effect may be always executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means may be the first operation mode. There may be a case where it is not executed in response to being operated in.

Further, the first effect may be executed only when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, and the first operation means may be the second operation. It may also be executed in a case other than the case of being operated in the mode. Further, the first effect may be always executed when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode. If it is done, it may not be executed.

Further, the second effect may not be started except that the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, and the first operation means may be the second operation mode. It may not necessarily be started by being operated in step 1, or may be started when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode.

The second effect may be executed only by the second effecting means, or may be executed by other than the second effecting means. The second effect may be always executed by the second effecting means, or may not be executed by the second effecting means.

In addition, the second effect is an effect that is executed by including at least the second effect means, and may be an effect that is executed only by the second effect means, or other than the second effect means. Alternatively, the effect may be executed including an effect means other than the second effect means. Further, when the second effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the second effect is an effect in which the second effect means and the effect means other than the second effect means are simultaneously executed. Good. In addition, the effect is assumed to be a concept included in the effect (hereinafter the same).
In addition, "the second production means is a light emitting means,

"The effect executed by the second effect means" means "the second effect means is in the second light emission mode [for example, approximately 1/from the lower end of the light emitting parts LL and LR shown in FIG. 241(c). 4 shows a state in which the LED emits yellow light, a state in which the LED emits green light up to a height of approximately 2/3 from the lower ends of the light emitting parts LL and LR shown in FIG. ), which is performed by all the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR emitting light in red].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the second effect means is a means capable of emitting light in a first light emission mode [for example, a predetermined light emission mode during symbol variation display or big hit game],

The first light emitting mode is a light emitting mode different from the second light emitting mode [for example, the light emitting modes of the light emitting units LL and LR shown in FIG. 241(c) to FIG. Different from the light emission mode in the display or during the big hit game],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect means may be capable of emitting light only in the first light emitting mode, or may be capable of emitting light in a mode other than the first light emitting mode. The second effect means may always emit light in the first light emission mode, or may not emit light in the first light emission mode.

Further, the first light emission mode may be partially different from the second light emission mode, or may be all different from the second light emission mode.
In addition, “first production means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like] is provided,
The first rendering means is a first image display means,

The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means [for example, as shown in FIG. 222, a continuous hit operation by the effect button 136 is performed and the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD becomes full. In this case, a notice display such as a cut-in image, which is executed as if the production was successful, or a notice for notifying that the jackpot will be a big hit is performed on the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first effect may be executed only by the first effecting means, or may be executed by effecting means other than the first effecting means. Further, the first effect may be always executed by the first effecting device, or may not be executed by the first effecting device.

Further, the first effect may be an effect executed including at least the first effect means, and may be an effect executed only by the first effect means, or other than the first effect means. Alternatively, the effect may be executed including an effect means other than the first effect means. When the first effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the first effect may be an effect in which the first effect means and the effect means other than the first effect means are simultaneously executed. Good.
In addition, "equipped with a third production means,
The third rendering means is a movable means,

The second rendering unit is a unit provided in the third rendering unit [for example, as shown in FIG. 241, a left image display device 209L provided with light emitting units LL and LR and a right image display unit]. The device 209R is a means that can be moved by a slide drive motor, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the third effect means may be composed of only the movable means, or may include means other than the movable means. Further, the third rendering means may necessarily include the movable means, or may not include the movable means.

Further, the second effect means may be provided only in the third effect means, or may be provided in addition to the third effect means. Further, the second effect means may be necessarily provided in the third effect means, or may not be provided in the third effect means.

In addition, “fourth effect means [for example, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R shown in FIG. 241] is provided,
The fourth rendering means is a second image display means,

The fourth rendering means is means provided in the third rendering means [for example, as shown in FIG. 241, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are driven by a slide drive motor. Movable means, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]

Was also explained. Here, the fourth rendering means may be composed of only the second image display means, or may include means other than the second image display means. Further, the fourth rendering means may necessarily include the second image display means, or may not include the second image display means.

Further, the fourth rendering means may be provided only in the third rendering means, or may be provided in addition to the third rendering means. Further, the fourth rendering means may be necessarily provided in the third rendering means, or may not be provided in the third rendering means.

In addition, “a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variable display [eg, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided,

The first effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, executed when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIGS. 222 and 223 becomes full. The effect that is performed is started during the pattern variation display, etc.],

The second effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, in the continuous hit operation effect shown in FIGS. 241(c) to 241(e), the light emitting unit LL, The effect that LR is turned on is started during the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variable display. Further, the symbol display means may always display the symbol variable display, or may not display the symbol variable display.

Further, the first effect may be started only during the display of the variable display of symbols, or may be started during the time other than the display of the variable display of symbols. Good. In addition, the first effect may be always started during the display of the symbol variable display, or may not be started during the display of the symbol variable display.

The second effect may be started only during the display of the variable display of symbols, or may be started during the time other than the display of the variable display of symbols. Good. Further, the second effect may be always started during the display of the variable display of symbols, or may not be started during the display of the variable display of symbols.

In addition, “When the first operation unit is operated in the second operation mode [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds], the first operation unit is operated in the first operation mode. There is a case where the first effect is started as being performed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 223, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is pseudo 20 times operated. As a result, the display of the result of the operation (a notice display such as a cut-in image, a notice for notifying that it will be a big hit, etc.) is started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, only the first effect may be started assuming that the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode. When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, effects other than the first effect are also started as if the first operation means was operated in the first operation mode. There may be. Further, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be necessarily started as if the first operation means was operated in the first operation mode. When the one operation device is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may not be started as if the first operation device was operated in the first operation mode.
In addition, "the operation in the first operation mode" is "a plurality of operations",
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In other words, the "operation in the first operation mode" in "the first operation may be started when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode" means It is a continuous hit operation,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Can be said.

Further, in other words, “operation in the first operation mode” in ““when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first effect may be started”” Means multiple operations,
A game table characterized by that. ]
It can also be said.
In addition, "the operation in the second operation mode" is a "long press operation",
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the long-press operation is an operation in which the operated state is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the effect mode of the second effect is an effect mode different from the effect mode of the first effect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the production mode of the second effect may be partially different from the production mode of the first effect, or all of them may be different.
In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, "The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,
“A game table provided with a first operation means [for example, a production button 136 and the like],
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,

One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, an effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIGS. 222 and 223 is full, etc.],

One of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect [for example, in the back button continuous hit effect shown in FIGS. 242(e) to (h), the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 emit green or red light. And the effect that the effect image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],

The first operation means operates in the first operation mode [for example, continuous operation or multiple operations (the operation mode by continuous operation and the operation mode by multiple operations include the same operation mode. The same applies hereinafter. Etc.], the first effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 222, when a continuous hit operation is performed by the effect button 136 and the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD becomes full. If the production is successful, a notice display such as a cut-in image is displayed, and a notice is given to announce that it will be a big hit, etc.],

When the first operation unit is operated in the first operation mode [for example, operated a plurality of times], the second effect may be started [for example, FIG. 242(e) to FIG. In the back button repeated stroke effect shown in h), when the player repeatedly hits the effect button 136, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 emit green or red, or the effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.],

The production mode of the second production is a production mode different from the production mode of the first production,

When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, long-press operation, etc.], the first effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. When the long press operation by 136 is performed, the continuous long press operation is performed by the long press auto continuous hit function in a pseudo manner, and as a result, when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD becomes full, the production is considered to be successful, and the cut-in image Etc., a notice is given to notify that it will be a big hit, etc.],

When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started [for example, in the back button continuous hit effect shown in FIG. 242, the long press automatic continuous hit function is invalid. Since the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 do not emit green or red, and the effect image is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
The second effect is a back button effect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in performance, but according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in performance.

Here, the first effect may be executed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode. It may be executed in response to something other than being operated in one operation mode. Further, the first effect may be always executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means may be the first operation mode. There may be a case where it is not executed in response to being operated in.

Further, the second effect may be executed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, and the first operation means may be the first operation means. It may also be executed in response to something other than being operated in the operation mode. Further, the second effect may be always executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means may be the first operation mode. There may be a case where it is not executed in response to being operated in.

In addition, the production mode of the second effect may be partially different from the production mode of the first effect, or may be different from all. Further, the first effect may be executed only when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, and the first operation means may be the second operation. It may also be executed in a case other than the case of being operated in the mode. Further, the first effect may be always executed when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode. If it is done, it may not be executed.

Further, the second effect may not be started except that the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, and the first operation means may be the second operation mode. It may not necessarily be started by being operated in step 1, or may be started when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode.
In addition, “first production means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like] is provided,
The first rendering means is an image display means,

The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means [for example, as shown in FIG. 222, a continuous hit operation by the effect button 136 is performed and the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD becomes full. In this case, a notice display such as a cut-in image, which is executed as if the production was successful, or a notice for notifying that the jackpot will be a big hit is performed on the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first effect may be executed only by the first effecting means, or may be executed by effecting means other than the first effecting means. Further, the first effect may be always executed by the first effecting device, or may not be executed by the first effecting device.

Further, the first effect may be an effect executed including at least the first effect means, and may be an effect executed only by the first effect means, or other than the first effect means. Alternatively, the effect may be executed including an effect means other than the first effect means. When the first effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the first effect may be an effect in which the first effect means and the effect means other than the first effect means are simultaneously executed. Good. It should be noted that the effect is a concept included in the rendering (hereinafter the same).

Further, ““the first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means”” means that “the first effect means a first display by the first effect means [eg, As shown in FIG. 222, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a big hit, which is executed as a successful production when a continuous hit operation by the effect button 136 is performed and the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is full, is a big hit. "A notification to notify the user, etc.] is displayed."
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, “the second effect is an effect executed by the first effect means [for example, in the back button repeated hit effect shown in FIGS. 242(e) to (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Effect image displayed on
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be executed only by the first effecting means, or may be executed by effecting means other than the first effecting means. The second effect may be always executed by the first effecting means, or may not be executed by the first effecting means.

Further, the second effect is an effect that is executed by including at least the first effect means, and may be an effect that is executed only by the first effect means, or other than the first effect means. Alternatively, the effect may be executed including an effect means other than the first effect means. Further, when the second effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the second effect is an effect in which the first effect means and the effect means other than the first effect means are simultaneously executed. Good.

In addition, "the second effect is an effect executed by the first effect means" means that "the second effect means that the first effect means displays a second display [eg, 242(e) to FIG. 242(h), the effect executed by displaying the effect image or the like displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the back button repeated hit effect”.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, “second effect means [for example, effect lamps SL1 to SL4, etc.] are provided,
The second rendering means is a light emitting means,

The second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means [for example, in the back button continuous hit effect shown in FIGS. 242(e) to (h), the effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Image is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be executed only by the second effecting means, or may be executed by an effecting means other than the second effecting means. The second effect may be always executed by the second effecting means, or may not be executed by the second effecting means.

Further, the second effect may be an effect that is executed by including at least the second effect means, and may be an effect that is executed only by the second effect means. Alternatively, the effect may be executed including an effect means other than the second effect means. Further, when the second effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the second effect may be an effect in which the second effect means and the effect means other than the second effect means are simultaneously executed. Good.

In addition, ““the second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means”” means “the second effect means that the second effect means uses a second light emission mode [for example, 242(e) to FIG. 242(h), in the back button continuous hitting effect, the effect lamps 1 to 4 emit light in green or red, etc.]. Is
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “informing means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, effect button lamp 138, etc.] is provided,

The notification means is a notification for prompting an operation on the first operation means (hereinafter, "operation notification [for example, a production button for promoting the depression of the production button 136 by the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222(d)]. The display of the image BT, the characters "repeatedly hit", the display of the remaining time meter MT, and the effect button lamp 138 to emit red light, etc.]), and the back button effect is the above. In the second period in which the operation notification is not performed [for example, the operation reception period relating to the back button repeated hit effect shown in FIGS. 242(d) to (h), etc.], the first operation unit is set It is an effect that may be started in response to an operation [for example, a repeated hit operation, etc.] in the operation mode.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the notification means may only notify that the operation of the first operation means should be performed, or may notify that the operation other than the operation of the first operation means is performed. In addition, the notification means may be a device that always gives a notification that prompts the user to operate the first operating device, or may not send a notification that prompts the user to operate the first operating device.

In addition, the back button effect may be started only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode in the second period in which the operation notification is not performed. Alternatively, in the second period in which the operation notification is not performed, the first operation means may be started in response to something other than the operation in the first operation mode. Further, in the second period in which the operation notification is not performed, it may be always started in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the operation notification is not performed. In the second period, the first operation means may not be started in response to the operation in the first operation mode.

In addition, in the “first period during which the operation notification is performed [for example, the operation acceptance period related to the continuous hitting operation effect shown in FIG. 222(d) to FIG. In some cases, the first effect may be started in response to being operated in one operation mode [for example, continuous hit operation, etc.],

In the first period, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, long-press operation, etc.], the first effect may be started.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first effect may be started only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode in the first period in which the operation notification is performed. In the first period in which the operation notification is performed, the first operation means may be started in response to something other than the operation in the first operation mode. .. Further, the first effect may be always started in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode in the first period in which the operation notification is performed, In the first period in which the operation notification is performed, the first operation means may not be started in response to the operation in the first operation mode.

Further, the first effect may be started only when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode in the first period, or in the first period. In the above, in some cases other than the case where the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, it may be started. Further, the first effect may be something that is necessarily started when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode in the first period, and in the first period, The first operation means may not be started in response to the operation in the second operation mode.

In addition, “a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variable display [eg, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided,

The first effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, executed when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIGS. 222 and 223 becomes full. The effect that is performed is started during the pattern variation display, etc.],

The second effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, effect lamps SL1 to SL2 in the back button continuous hit effect shown in FIGS. 242(e) to (h)). The effect that SL4 emits green or red, the effect that the effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is started during the variable display of symbols, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variable display. Further, the symbol display means may always display the symbol variable display, or may not display the symbol variable display.

Further, the first effect may be started only during the display of the variable display of symbols, or may be started during the time other than the display of the variable display of symbols. Good. In addition, the first effect may be always started during the display of the symbol variable display, or may not be started during the display of the symbol variable display.

The second effect may be started only during the display of the variable display of symbols, or may be started during the time other than the display of the variable display of symbols. Good. Further, the second effect may be always started during the display of the variable display of symbols, or may not be started during the display of the variable display of symbols.

In addition, “When the first operation unit is operated in the second operation mode [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds], the first operation unit is operated in the first operation mode. There is a case where the first effect is started as being performed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 223, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is pseudo 20 times operated. As a result, the display of the result of the operation (a notice display such as a cut-in image, a notice for notifying that it will be a big hit, etc.) is started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, only the first effect may be started assuming that the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode. When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, effects other than the first effect are also started as if the first operation means was operated in the first operation mode. There may be. Further, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be necessarily started as if the first operation means was operated in the first operation mode. When the one operation device is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may not be started as if the first operation device was operated in the first operation mode.
In addition, "the operation in the first operation mode" is "a plurality of operations",
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In other words, the "operation in the first operation mode" in "the first operation may be started when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode" means It is a continuous hit operation,
A game table characterized by that. Can be said.

Further, in other words, “operation in the first operation mode” in ““when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first effect may be started”” Means multiple operations,
A game table characterized by that. ]
It can also be said.
In addition, "the operation in the second operation mode" is a "long press operation",
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the long-press operation is an operation in which the operated state is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, "The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Also, in the above description,
“First operation means [for example, effect button 136, etc.],

Second operation means [for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an OK button 137e, a clear button 137f],
A gaming table equipped with
It is configured to display multiple types of displays,

One of the plurality of types of display is the first display [for example, the display that is displayed when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIGS. 222 and 223 is full, etc.],

One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a display showing that "customization effect" is selected by the cursor CL shown in FIG. 211(e), the same display (g1). Is a display indicating that the "premium up mode" is selected by the cursor CL, etc.],

The first operation means operates in the first operation mode [for example, continuous operation or multiple operations (the operation mode by continuous operation and the operation mode by multiple operations include the same operation mode. The same applies hereinafter. Etc.], the display of the first display may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 222, the continuous hit operation by the effect button 136 is performed and the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD becomes full. In that case, if the production is successful, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that the jackpot will be a big hit is given],

When the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode [for example, a continuous hit operation or a plurality of operations], the display of the second display may be started [for example, FIG. )-As shown in (e) of the figure, when "volume light amount adjustment" is selected by the cursor CL on the menu screen, the display indicating that "production customization" is selected by the cursor CL is as follows. It is displayed by operating the button 137b twice, and as shown in FIG. 211(f) and FIG. 211(g1), when the “notification mode” is selected by the cursor CL on the production customization setting screen, “Premier” A display indicating that the "up mode" is selected by the cursor CL is displayed by operating the down button 137b twice, etc.],

The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display, and the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, long press operation, etc.]. Then, the display of the first display may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 223, when a long press operation by the effect button 136 is performed, the continuous long press operation is simulated by the long press automatic continuous hit function. As a result, when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is full, it is determined that the production has succeeded, a notice display such as a cut-in image is displayed, and a notice is given to notify that it is a big hit, etc.],

When the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the display of the second display is not started [for example, as shown in FIG. 211(b) to FIG. In the case where "volume light amount adjustment" is selected with the cursor CL, the display indicating that "production customization" is selected with the cursor CL is not displayed due to the long press of the lower button 137b, As shown in FIG. 211(f) and FIG. 211(g1), when “notification mode” is selected with the cursor CL on the effect customization setting screen, “premium up mode” is selected with the cursor CL. Is not displayed when the lower button 137b is pressed for a long time, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in display, but according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game table having a display characteristic.

Here, the first display may be displayed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means It may be displayed in response to something other than being operated in one operation mode. Further, the first display may be always displayed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, and the first operation means may be the first operation mode. There may be a case where it is not displayed in response to the operation by.

The second display may be displayed only in response to the second operation means being operated in the first operation mode. May be displayed in response to something other than the operation in the operation mode. Further, the second display may be always displayed in response to the second operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the second operation means may be the first operation mode. There may be a case where it is not displayed in response to the operation by.

In addition, the display mode of the second display may be partially different from the display mode of the first display, or all of them may be different.

Further, the first display may start display only when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, and the first operation means may display the second operation mode. The display may be started in a case other than the case where the operation is performed in the operation mode. Further, the first display may be a display which is always started when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, and the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode. The display may not be started when operated.

Further, the second display may not be started even if the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode, and the second operation means does not perform the second operation. The display may not necessarily be started by being operated in the mode, or the display may be started when the second operation unit is operated in the second operation mode.
In addition, the effect is assumed to be a concept included in the effect (hereinafter the same).

In addition, “the second display is a display when one of the plurality of options is selected [for example, “volume light amount adjustment” in the menu screen shown in FIG. 211(e), The display when the "customization" of "member registration", "customization of production", and "operation assistance setting" is selected by the cursor CL, and "normal" in the production customization setting screen shown in FIG. Mode,” “One-shot notification mode”, “Premier up mode” among “Premier up mode”, etc. displayed when the cursor CL is selected],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second display is a display displayed on a setting screen [for example, the menu screen shown in FIG. 211],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may be displayed only on the setting screen, or may be displayed not on the setting screen. The second display may be always displayed on the setting screen, or may not be displayed on the setting screen.

In addition, “the setting screen is a screen including a display for instructing to select one option from a plurality of options [for example, the menu screen shown in FIG. Includes a display instructing you to select one option from "Register", "Customize production", and "Operation assistance setting", and select one option from "Normal mode", "One-shot notification mode", and "Premier up mode". Including a display instructing to select, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,

The third display is a display displayed when the first option of the plurality of options is selected [for example, “volume light amount adjustment”, “in the menu screen shown in FIG. 211(e), Display when the volume CL is selected from among "member registration", "production customization", and "operation assistance setting" with the cursor CL, or on the production customization setting screen shown in FIG. "Normal mode", "One-shot notification mode", "Premium up mode", etc. "Display when the normal mode" is selected with the cursor CL],

The second display is a display displayed when the second option of the plurality of options is selected [for example, “volume light amount adjustment”, “in the menu screen shown in FIG. 211(e),” Display when "Production customization" of "Member registration", "Production customization", and "Operation assistance setting" is selected with the cursor CL, or "Production customization setting screen shown in (g1) of FIG. "Normal mode", "One-shot notification mode", "Premier up mode" among "Premier up mode" is displayed when the cursor CL is selected, etc.],

When the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode while the third display is displayed, the display of the second display may be started [eg, FIG. As shown in (b) to (e) of the figure, when "volume light amount adjustment" is selected by the cursor CL on the menu screen and the lower button 137b is operated twice, "production customization" is displayed by the cursor. When the display indicating that the CL is selected is started, and as shown in FIG. 211(f) and FIG. 211(g1), the “notification mode” is selected by the cursor CL on the effect customization setting screen, When the down button 137b is operated twice, a display indicating that the "premium up mode" is selected by the cursor CL is started],

When the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode when the third display is displayed, the display of the second display is not started [for example, FIG. 211(b)). As shown in (e) of the same figure, when the “volume light amount adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL on the menu screen and the down button 137b is pressed and held, the “customization” is displayed with the cursor CL. The display indicating the selection is not started, and as shown in FIG. 211(f) and FIG. 211(g1), when the “notification mode” is selected by the cursor CL on the effect customization setting screen, If the lower button 137b is pressed and held, the display indicating that the "premium up mode" is selected by the cursor CL is not started.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the setting screen may include only a display for instructing to select one option from the plurality of options, or may instruct to select one option from the plurality of options. It may include a display other than the display. Further, the setting screen may necessarily include a display instructing to select one option from the plurality of options, or may instruct to select one option from the plurality of options. The display may not be included in some cases.

The third display may be displayed only when the first option of the plurality of options is selected, or the first option of the plurality of options is selected. It may be displayed in addition to the time. Further, the third display may be always displayed when the first option of the plurality of options is selected, or the first option of the plurality of options is selected. In some cases, it may not be displayed.

The second display may be displayed only when the second option of the plurality of options is selected, or the second option of the plurality of options is selected. It may be displayed in addition to the time. Further, the second display may be always displayed when the second option of the plurality of options is selected, or the second option of the plurality of options is selected. In some cases, it may not be displayed.

Further, the second display may be displayed only when the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode when the third display is displayed. Alternatively, when the third display is displayed, the display may be started even when the second operation means is not operated in the first operation mode. Further, the second display, when the third display is displayed, may be the display is always started when the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode, When the third display is displayed, the display may not be started when the second operation unit is operated in the first operation mode.

Further, the second display, when the third display is displayed, may not start display other than that the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode, When the third display is displayed, the display may not always be started when the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the third display is displayed. In this case, the display may be started by operating the second operation unit in the second operation mode.

In addition, “When the third display is displayed, the second display is operated N times (N≧2 [for example, twice, etc.]) by the second operation means. [E.g., in the menu screens shown in FIGS. 211(b) to 211(e), the display indicating that "customize effect" is selected by the cursor CL is "volume". When a display indicating that "light intensity adjustment" is selected by the cursor CL is displayed, the display is started when the lower button 137b is pressed twice, or in the effect customizing setting screen, The display indicating that the “premium up mode” is selected by the cursor CL is displayed twice by the down button 137b when the display indicating that the “notification mode” is selected by the cursor CL is displayed. A display is started when a pressing operation is performed, etc.]. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may be displayed only when the second display is operated N times when the third display is displayed. However, when the third display is displayed, the display may be started even when the operation of the Nth meeting is not performed by the second operation means. Further, the second display may be the one that is always started when the second display is operated N times when the third display is displayed. It may be possible that the display is not started when the N operation is performed by the second operation means when the display of No. is displayed.
In addition, “image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like] is provided,

The first display is a display displayed by the image display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 222, a notice display such as a cut-in image in a continuous hit operation effect, or a notice notifying a big hit is given. , Displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],

The second display is a display displayed by the image display means [for example, when the "CLEANING" on the menu screen shown in FIGS. 211(b) to 211(e) is selected by the cursor CL. 211(f) and (g1) in FIG. 211(f) and FIG. 21(g1) show that the "Premium up mode" on the production customization setting screen is selected by the cursor CL. 208, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be displayed only by the image display means, or may be displayed by means other than the image display means. Further, the first display may be always displayed by the image display means, or may not be displayed by the image display means.

Further, the second display may be displayed only by the image display means, or may be displayed by means other than the image display means. The second display may be always displayed by the image display means, or may not be displayed by the image display means.

In addition, “a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variable display [eg, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided,

The first display is a display that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, executed when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD shown in FIGS. 222 and 223 becomes full. The effect that is performed is started during the pattern variation display, etc.],

The second display is a display that is not started during the display of the symbol variable display [for example, "effect customization" on the menu screen shown in FIGS. 211(b) to 211(e) is selected by the cursor CL. The display indicating that the "Premium Up Mode" on the production customization setting screen shown in FIGS. 211(f) and (g1) is selected by the cursor CL is It is not started during display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variable display. Further, the symbol display means may always display the symbol variable display, or may not display the symbol variable display. Further, the first display may be displayed only during the display of the variable display of symbols, or may be started other than during the display of the variable display of symbols. May be. Further, the first display may be always started during the display of the symbol variable display, or may not be started during the display of the symbol variable display.

Further, the second display may not be started only during the display of the symbol variable display, or may not be started other than during the display of the symbol variable display. Further, the second display may not necessarily be displayed during the display of the symbol variable display, or may be started during the display of the symbol variable display.

In addition, “When the first operation unit is operated in the second operation mode [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds], the first operation unit is operated in the first operation mode. There is a case where the first display is started as being performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 223, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is operated 20 times in a pseudo manner. As a result, the display of the result of the operation (a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice for notifying that it is a big hit) is started]
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, only the first display may be started as if the first operation means was operated in the first operation mode. Alternatively, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the display other than the first display is started as if the first operation means was operated in the first operation mode. There may be cases where Further, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first display may always be started as if the first operation means was operated in the first operation mode, When the first operation unit is operated in the second operation mode, the first display may not be started as if the first operation unit was operated in the first operation mode.
In addition, "the operation in the first operation mode" is "a plurality of operations",
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In other words, “when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the display of the first display may be started” in “the first operation mode” Is a continuous tapping operation,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Can be said.

In addition, in other words, in “the first operation mode may be started when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode”, “in the first operation mode” "Operation" means multiple operations.
A game table characterized by that. ]
It can also be said.
In addition, "the operation in the second operation mode" is a "long press operation",
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the long-press operation is an operation in which the operated state is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, "The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,

“Operating means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate,

Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display [for example, a decorative design display device 208, a first decorative design display device 208L, a second decorative design display device 208M, a third decorative design display device 208N, etc.],
A gaming table equipped with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display,

The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative symbol variable display [for example, change effect of the hold icon shown in FIG. 161(c) to FIG. 161(n), or FIG. 172(g) to FIG. i) button advance notice presentation etc.],

The second effect display is the effect display of a mini game [for example, the mini game shown in FIGS. 161(d) to (k), or the button notice shown in FIGS. 171(m) to 172(f). Production etc.],

The first effect display is a first operation promotion display [for example, the display of the button holding icon shown in FIGS. 161(c) to (j) and FIGS. 172(g) to (h). Vibrating and rotating button image 136a and "Push" display, etc.].

The second effect display is a second operation promotion display [for example, the display of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 161(e) to FIG. 161(f) or the display of FIG. 171(r) to FIG. 172(b). Button image 136a that is displayed and a display of “continuous hitting”, etc.],
The first operation promotion display is a display for urging operation of the operation means,
The second operation promotion display is a display that prompts the user to operate the operation means,

The first operation prompting display and the second operation prompting display are different operation prompting displays,

The first effect display is a jackpot notice (hereinafter, "first notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 161(k), the hold icon is displayed in a prefetch notice display mode (circular blue display mode). Pre-reading notice due to the above, or notice by displaying the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 172(i) and the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 172(i′). It is a certain display,

The second effect display is a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter, “second notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 161(h) to FIG. 161(k), display of “hold 1UP”). Therefore, a notice that the reliability of the look-ahead notice in the hold icon will be upgraded by one step, or a notice of "Daikichi" as shown in FIG. "Preliminary notice, etc.]") may be derived.
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the display means.

Further, conventionally, a gaming table for playing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini-games. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in a mini game.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to focus attention on the second notice that affects the first notice.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to positively operate the operation means in order to reach the first notice.

Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operating means may be necessarily provided at a position operable by the player, or may not be provided at a position operable by the player.

The operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than a plurality of types of effect display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect display, or may not display a plurality of types of effect display.

Further, the plurality of types of effect display may be only the first effect display and the second effect display, or may include effect displays other than the first effect display and the second effect display.

Further, the first effect display may be related to only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be related to something other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the first effect display may be necessarily related to the decorative symbol variable display, or may not be related to the decorative symbol variable display.

In addition, the first effect display may include only the first operation promotion display, or may include a display other than the first operation promotion display. Further, the first effect display may necessarily include the first operation prompting display, or may not include the first operation prompting display.

Further, the second effect display may include only the second operation promotion display, or may include a display other than the second operation promotion display. Moreover, the second effect display may necessarily include the second operation promotion display, or may not include the second operation promotion display.

Further, the first effect display may be that only the first notice may be executed, or may be performed other than the first notice. The first effect display may be that the first notice is always executed, or the first notice may not be executed. Further, the second effect display may be one in which only a notice related to the first notice may be derived, or a notice other than the notice related to the first notice may be derived. It may be one. Further, in the second effect display, a notice related to the first notice may be always derived, or a notice related to the first notice may not be derived.

In addition, “a state in which both the first effect display and the second effect display are displayed (hereinafter, “first state [for example, as illustrated in FIG. 161(d) to FIG. , A state in which both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, or a state in which both the button notice effect and the mini game are displayed as shown in FIGS. 173(c) to 173(o). Etc.]”).
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make the player feel that the first notice and the second notice are related to each other.

Here, there may be a case where the state is only the first state, there may be a case where the state is other than the first state, the state may always be the first state, or the state may be the first state. It may not be the case.

In addition, “When the operation means is operated in the first state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed [for example, As shown in FIG. 161(f), when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, the result of the mini game is derived, or FIG. g) to (l) in the same figure, if the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit in a state where both the button advance notice effect and the mini game are displayed, the result of the mini game is derived, etc.],

When the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, the first notice is executed according to the second notice [for example, FIG. 161(j ), if the effect button 136 is operated after the result of the mini game is derived, the display mode of the hold icon is changed according to the result of the mini game, as shown in FIG. When the effect button 136 is operated after the result of the mini game is derived as shown in FIG. 173(n), as shown in FIG. 173(n), as shown in FIG. The weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed according to the result, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to focus attention on the second notice that affects the first notice. Therefore, it may be possible to positively operate the operation means for the mini game.

Here, when the operation means is operated in the first state, only the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in this state, a notice other than the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. Also, when the operation means is operated in the first state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed without fail, or the first notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in the state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may not be executed.

Further, the configuration may be such that the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed only when the operation means is operated in the first state. The configuration may be such that the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed even when the operation means is not operated in.

Further, when the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, only the first notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed, or the second notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated after the advance notice is started, the advance notice other than the first advance notice corresponding to the second advance notice may be executed. Further, when the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, the first notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed without fail. When the operation means is operated after the advance notice is started, the first advance notice corresponding to the second advance notice may not be executed.

The first notice may be executed according to the second notice only when the operation means is operated after the second notice is started. Even when there is no operation of the operation means after the start of, the first advance notice corresponding to the second advance notice may be executed.

In addition, it is configured such that at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed when the operation means is operated in the first state [for example, As shown in FIG. 165(f), when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, the display mode of the hold icon changes and the result of the mini game. 168 is also derived, or, as shown in FIG. 168 (g), when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, the display mode of the hold icon changes. However, the result of the mini game is not derived.],

After the second notice is executed, the first notice executed according to the second notice may change [eg, FIG. 165(g) to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 168(h) to 168(m), after the result of the mini game is derived and “Hold 1UP” is displayed, the hold icon in the blue display mode is changed to the green display mode. etc],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the operation means is operated in the first state, only the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in the state of 1), only the first notice and the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in the state of 1), the notice other than the 1st notice of the 1st notice and the 2nd notice may be executed, or in the 1st state When the operation means is operated, a notice other than the first notice and the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed.

Further, when the operation means is operated in the first state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed without fail. When there is an operation of the operation means in the state of, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may not be executed.

Further, the configuration may be such that at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed only when the operation means is operated in the first state. Even when the operation means is not operated in the state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed.

In addition, after the second notice is executed, only the first notice executed according to the second notice may change, or after the second notice is executed, A notice other than the first notice executed in response to the second notice may change. In addition, after the second notice is executed, the first notice executed according to the second notice may change without exception, or after the second notice is executed, the second notice may be changed. There may be a case where the first notice executed according to the notice does not change.

Further, the first notice executed according to the second notice may change only after the second notice is executed, or even after the second notice is executed. The first notice executed according to the second notice may change.

Further, “In the first state, the first effect display overlaps with the second effect display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 166(e) to (i), the first decoration is displayed. The change effect of the hold icon performed on the symbol display device 208L is overlapped with the mini game performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to increase the expectation of the first notice by paying attention to the effect display on the mini game side, which is the notice of the first notice.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to prioritize the mini-game side in time series.

Further, according to this gaming machine, a notice that affects a notice that may occur in the future is preferentially displayed, so that it may be easy to understand even if the operation means overlap.

Here, in the first state, the first effect display may overlap only with the second effect display, and in the first state, the first effect display is an effect other than the second effect display. It may also overlap the display. Further, in the first state, the first effect display may always overlap with the second effect display, and in the first state, the first effect display does not overlap with the second effect display. There may be cases.

Also, the first effect display may overlap the second effect display only in the first state, and the first effect display may be the second effect display in the states other than the first state. May be overlapped.

In addition, “the second effective period [for example, the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game shown in FIGS. 161(e) to (f) and FIGS. 175(e) to 175(g), etc.] ], the second advance notice is started when the operating means is operated,

The second effect display is a second effective period display [for example, button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 161(e) to FIG. 161(f), FIG. 175(e) to FIG. 175(g), or the like. ] Is included in the presentation display,

The second valid period display is a display whose display mode changes according to the lapse of the second valid period [for example, FIG. 161(e) to FIG. 161(f) and FIG. 175(e) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 7G, etc., the display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes in a mode in which the gauge decreases in accordance with the time from the start of the operation reception time, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, by displaying the second effective period, it is possible to prompt the player to derive the result of the mini game, so that the first notice may be noticed in some cases. ..

Here, when the operation means is operated in the second effective period, only the second notice may be started, or when the operation means is operated in the second effective period, The configuration may be such that a notice other than the second notice is also started. Further, the second advance notice may be configured to start without fail when the operating means is operated during the second effective period, or when the operating means is operated during the second effective period, The second notice may not be started in some cases.

The second advance notice may be started only when the operating means is operated during the second valid period, or when the operating means is not operated during the second valid period. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the second notice is started.

Further, the second effect display may include only the second effective period display or may include a display other than the second effective period display. The second effect display may necessarily include the second effective period display, or may not include the second effective period display.
In addition, "The first notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes,

One of the plurality of modes is the first mode [for example, the hold icon in the blue display mode shown in FIG. 161(k), the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 173(o), etc.]. And

One of the plurality of modes is the second mode [for example, the green hold mode hold icon shown in FIG. 161(m), the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 172(i), etc.]. And
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,

In the case where the first notice is executed in the second mode, it is easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally displayed in a finalized manner than in the case where the first notice is executed in the first mode. Is configured,

When the second effect display is started, the first notice is more likely to be executed in the second aspect than when the second effect display is not started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, there are cases where the first notice can be expected when the mini game is started.

Here, the first notice may be executable only in a plurality of modes, or may be executable in a mode other than the plurality of modes. Further, the first notice may be always executed in a plurality of modes, or may not be executed in a plurality of modes.

The first notice may be executable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be executable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. Good. Further, the first notice may be always executed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be executed in the first mode and the second mode.

Further, when the first notice is executed in the first mode, it may be configured such that the jackpot symbol is not finally displayed in a finalized manner, or the first notice is executed in the second mode. In the case, it may be configured such that the jackpot pattern is finally definitely displayed. Further, when the second effect display is not started, the first notice may be configured not to be executed in the second mode, or when the second effect display is started, the second mode The first notice may be configured to be executed.
In addition, "the second notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes,

One of the plurality of modes is a third mode [for example, the display of "Kokichi" shown in FIG. 177(l), etc.],

One of the plurality of modes is a fourth mode [for example, the display of “Daikichi” shown in FIG. 176(l), etc.],

When the second notice is executed in the fourth mode, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed.

The second notice is executed in the fourth mode when the first notice is executed in the second mode [for example, the display of “mission accomplished” shown in FIG. 176(n)]. Is configured to
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the first notice leads to the second mode, so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed, so that the expectation of the derived result for the second notice is further improved. You may be able to.

Here, the second notice may be executable only in a plurality of modes, or may be executable in a mode other than the plurality of modes. Further, the second notice may be always executed in a plurality of modes, or may not be executed in a plurality of modes.

The second notice may be executable only in the third aspect and the fourth aspect, or may be executable in aspects other than the third aspect and the fourth aspect. Good. Further, the second notice may be always executed in the third mode and the fourth mode, or may not be executed in the third mode and the fourth mode.

In addition, “The first notice is a prefetch notice [for example, display of the hold icon in the blue display mode shown in FIG. 161(k) or the hold icon in the green display mode shown in FIG. 161(m). Icon display, etc.]
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “a number of hold icons corresponding to the number of start of symbol variable display can be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 161(a), three start of symbol variable display of special figure 1 are held. Is displayed, three hold icons h11, h12, h13 are displayed, etc.],

The first notice is a notice given when the display mode of the hold icon changes [for example, as shown in FIG. 161(k) or FIG. 161(m), the display mode of the hold icon is blue. Pre-reading notice is given by changing to display mode or green display mode],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,

"A gaming table provided with display means capable of executing decorative symbol variable display [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] And
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],
It is configured to run multiple types of mini games,

One of the plurality of types of mini games is a first mini game [for example, a dice game shown in FIGS. 185(g) to 185(l)],

One of the plurality of types of mini-games is a second mini-game [for example, the omikuji game shown in FIG. 185(g′) to FIG. 185(l′)],

The first mini-game is a mini-game displayed using a display area [for example, the multi-function display area MF1 or the like shown in FIG. 185(a)],

The second mini game is a mini game displayed using the certain display area,
The first mini-game and the second mini-game are different mini-games,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the display means.

Further, conventionally, a gaming table for playing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini-games. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in a mini game.

Further, according to this gaming machine, the display area of the mini game is fixed to "a certain display area", which may be easy for the player to understand.

Here, the display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the display means may always execute the decorative symbol variable display, or may not execute the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, the display means may be configured by one display means or may be configured by two or more display means. Further, in the case of being constituted by two or more display means, the decorative symbol variable display may be performed only on some display means, or the decorative symbol variable display may be performed on all the display means. It may be something called.

Further, only a plurality of types of mini games may be configured to be executable, or a game other than the plurality of types of mini games may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured to always execute a plurality of types of mini games, or may be configured to not execute a plurality of types of mini games.

Further, only the first mini game and the second mini game may be configured to be executable, or mini games other than the first mini game and the second mini game may be configured to be executable. Further, the first mini game and the second mini game may be configured to be executed without fail, or the first mini game and the second mini game may not be executed in some cases. ..

Further, the first mini game may be displayed using only a certain display area, or may be displayed using an area other than the certain display area. In addition, the first mini game may be displayed without fail using a certain display area, or may be displayed without using a certain display area.

Further, the second mini game may be displayed using only a certain display area, or may be displayed using an area other than the certain display area. The second mini game may be displayed without fail using a certain display area, or may be displayed without using a certain display area.

In addition, “preliminary means capable of executing a plurality of notices [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],

One of the plurality of notices is a first notice [for example, a pre-reading notice in the blue display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 185(l) or (l')].

The first mini-game is referred to as a result (hereinafter, referred to as “first result [eg, display of “1UP confirmed” shown in FIG. 185(k)] or the like]”” indicating that the first notice is given. ) Is a mini game that can be derived,

The second mini game is a mini game capable of deriving the first result [eg, display of “1UP confirmed” shown in FIG. 185(k′)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the relationship such as the notice can be made easy to understand while entertaining the variation of the mini game.

Here, the advance notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of advance notices, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of advance notices. Further, the advance notice means may execute a plurality of advance notices without fail, or may not execute a plurality of advance notices.

Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice. Further, the advance notice means may execute the first advance notice without fail, or may not execute the first advance notice.

In addition, the first mini-game may be one in which only the first result can be derived, or one in which results other than the first result can be derived. In addition, the first mini game may always derive the first result, or may not necessarily derive the first result.

Further, the second mini-game may be one in which only the first result can be derived, or one in which results other than the first result can be derived. In addition, the second mini game may always derive the first result, or may not necessarily derive the first result.

In addition, "one of the plurality of notices is a second notice [for example, a prefetch notice in the red display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 186(l) or (l')]. ,

The case where the second notice is given is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the final jackpot pattern than when the first notice is given,

The first mini game is referred to as a result (hereinafter, referred to as “second result [eg, display of “3UP confirmed” shown in FIG. 186(k)] or the like]”” suggesting that the second notice will be given. ) Is also a derivable mini-game,

The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the second result [eg, “3UP confirmed” display etc. shown in FIG. 186(k′)] can be derived.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to improve the expectation that the result suggesting that the second notice will be given in the mini game is derived.

Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only the second notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the second notice. Further, the advance notice means may execute the second advance notice without fail, or may not execute the second advance notice.

In addition, the first mini-game may be one that can derive only the second result, or one that can derive results other than the second result. In addition, the first mini game may always derive the second result, or may not necessarily derive the second result.

In addition, the second mini game may be one in which only the second result can be derived, or one in which results other than the second result can be derived. The second mini game may always derive the second result, or may not derive the second result.

In addition, “the first mini game is a mini game in which a first character [for example, a face length image BCH shown in FIG. 185(g)] may be displayed.

The second mini game is a mini game in which the first character [for example, a face length image BCH of the length shown in FIG. 185(g′)] may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the same notice may be given even if the type of mini game is different, so that it may be possible to give the player various expectations.

Here, in the first mini game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may be displayed. .. In the first mini game, the first character may be always displayed, or the first character may not be displayed.

Further, in the second mini game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may be displayed. In the second mini game, the first character may be displayed without fail, or the first character may not be displayed in some cases.

In addition, “the first mini game is a mini game in which a first character [for example, a face length image BCH shown in FIG. 185(g)] may be displayed.

The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character [for example, a face-length face image BCH shown in FIG. 185(g′)] may be displayed.

The first mini-game is a mini-game in which a second character [for example, a character SBH of Sabohani shown in FIG. 189(A1)] may be displayed,

The second mini-game is a mini-game in which a third character [for example, a princess character HM2 shown in FIG. 189(B1)] may be displayed.
The first character and the second character are different characters,
The first character and the third character are different characters,
The second character and the third character are different characters,

The first mini game is a mini game in which the second result is more easily derived when the second character is displayed than when the first character is displayed, Is a mini game in which the second result is more easily derived when the third character is displayed than when the first character is displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give an expectation for the second result depending on the type of the character that appears in each mini game.

Here, in the first mini game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may be displayed. .. In the first mini game, the first character may be always displayed, or the first character may not be displayed.

Further, in the second mini game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may be displayed. In the second mini game, the first character may be displayed without fail, or the first character may not be displayed in some cases.

Further, in the first mini game, only the second character may be displayed, or characters other than the second character may be displayed. Further, in the first mini game, the second character may be always displayed, or the second character may not be displayed.

In the second mini game, only the third character may be displayed, or characters other than the third character may be displayed. In addition, in the second mini game, the third character may be always displayed, or the third character may not be displayed.

The third character and the fourth character may be the same character or different characters.

Further, in the first mini game, the second result may not be derived when the first character is displayed, or the second result is not derived when the second character is displayed. The result of may be always derived.

Further, in the second mini game, the second result may not be derived when the first character is displayed, or the second result may be derived when the third character is displayed. The result of may be always derived.
Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,

One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display [for example, an old woman mode shown in FIG. 187(A1) to FIG. 187(A6)],

One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display [for example, a princess mode shown in FIG. 187(B1) to FIG. 187(B6)],

The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 187(A1) to 187(A6), the auntie mode is decoration. Displayed during execution of symbol variation display, etc.],

The second effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 187 (B1) to (B6), the princess mode is decoration. Displayed during execution of symbol variation display], the first effect display and the second effect display are different effect display,

The first mini game [for example, a dice game or the like] is a mini game that is more easily executed during the display of the first effect display than during the display of the second effect display,

The second mini-game [for example, an omikuji game or the like] is a mini-game that is more easily executed during the display of the second effect display than during the display of the first effect display.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to associate the main effect with the mini game.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect display, or may not display a plurality of types of effect display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display and the second effect display, or capable of displaying effect display other than the first effect display and the second effect display. May be Further, the display means may always display the first effect display and the second effect display, or may not display the first effect display and the second effect display.

Further, the first effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display. It may be. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, the second effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display. It may be. Further, the second effect display may be always displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variable display, or may not be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variable display.

The first mini game may not be executed during the display of the second effect display, or may be executed without fail during the display of the first effect display.

In addition, the second mini game may not be executed during the display of the first effect display, or may be executed without exception during the display of the second effect display.
In addition, "it is configured to be able to transition to multiple types of gaming state,

One of the plurality of types of game states is a first game state [for example, a normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), etc.,

One of the plurality of types of game states is a second game state [for example, a probability variation state (special figure high probability general figure high probability state), etc.],

The first gaming state and the second gaming state are gaming states in which the second gaming state is more advantageous,

The probability of executing the plurality of types of mini games is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
A game table characterized by that. ]

Was also explained. According to this gaming machine, since the mini-game execution probability varies depending on the game state, it may be possible to change the expectation for the mini-game being executed depending on the game state.

Here, it may be configured to be able to shift to only a plurality of types of gaming states, or may be configured to be able to shift to a state other than a plurality of gaming states. In addition, it may be configured to always shift to a plurality of types of gaming states, or may not shift to a plurality of gaming states.

Further, it may be configured to be able to shift only to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may be configured to be shiftable to a gaming state other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. .. Further, it may be configured to always shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

In the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the first gaming state may have a higher probability of executing a plurality of types of mini games, or the second gaming state may have a higher probability. The probability of executing a plurality of types of mini games may be high.

In addition, the special figure low probability general figure low probability state is the first gaming state, while the special figure high probability general figure low probability state (including latent probability variation, the same hereafter), special figure low probability general figure low probability At least one of the state, special figure high probability general figure high probability state may be the second game state, while the special figure high probability state general figure low probability state is the first game state , Special figure high probability state Normal figure high probability state may be the second gaming state, special figure low probability general figure high probability state is the first gaming state, special figure high probability state The figure high probability state may be the second gaming state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the special figure, the general figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, whereas the general figure high probability state may be the second gaming state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the general figure, the special figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, while the special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state.

Further, it may be configured not to execute a plurality of types of mini games in the first gaming state, or may be configured not to execute a plurality of types of mini games in the second gaming state.

In addition, "the probability of executing the plurality of types of advance notice is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

In addition, “the probability of executing the first mini game is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

In addition, “the probability of executing the second mini game is different between the first game state and the second game state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

In addition, "the probability of executing the second notice is different between the first game state and the second game state,
A game table characterized by that. "

In addition, "the probability of executing the second notice is different between the first game state and the second game state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be
In addition, "it is configured to be able to transition to multiple types of gaming state,

One of the plurality of types of game states is a first game state [for example, a normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), etc.,

One of the plurality of types of game states is a second game state [for example, a probability variation state (special figure high probability general figure high probability state), etc.],

The first gaming state and the second gaming state are gaming states in which the second gaming state is more advantageous,

The first mini game [for example, a dice game or the like] is a mini game that is easier to be executed in the first game state than in the second game state [for example, FIG. 190]. As shown in (A1) to (A6) of the figure, the dice game is more likely to be executed in the normal game state than in the probability variation state],

The second mini-game [for example, an omikuji game or the like] is a mini-game that is easier to be executed in the second game state than in the first game state [eg, FIG. 190]. As shown in (B1) to (B6) of the same figure, the omikuji game is more likely to be executed in the probability variation state than in the normal game state],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to associate the gaming state with the type of mini game.

Here, it may be configured to be able to shift to only a plurality of types of gaming states, or may be configured to be able to shift to a state other than a plurality of gaming states. In addition, it may be configured to always shift to a plurality of types of gaming states, or may not shift to a plurality of gaming states.

Further, it may be configured to be able to shift only to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may be configured to be shiftable to a gaming state other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. .. Further, it may be configured to always shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

Also, while the special figure low probability general figure low probability state is the first gaming state, the special figure high probability general figure low probability state, special figure low probability general figure low probability state, special figure high probability general figure high At least one of the probability states may be the second game state, and the special figure high probability state general figure low probability state is the first game state, while the special figure high probability state general figure high The probability state may be the second game state, while the special figure low probability general figure high probability state is the first game state, while the special figure high probability general figure high probability state is the second game state It may be in a state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the special figure, the general figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, whereas the general figure high probability state may be the second gaming state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the general figure, the special figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, while the special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state.

Further, the first mini game may not be executed in the second gaming state, or may be executed in the first gaming state without fail. Good.

Further, the second mini game may not be executed in the first gaming state, or may be executed in the first gaming state without fail. Good.

"The first game state [for example, a normal game state (special probability low probability general figure low probability state) and the like] and the second game state [for example, probability variation state (special figure high probability general figure high probability state), etc. ], the probability of executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of mini games is different,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the mini-game execution probability varies depending on the game state, it may be possible to change the expectation for the mini-game being executed depending on the game state.

Here, in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the first gaming state may have a higher probability of executing a plurality of types of mini games, or the second gaming state may have a higher probability. The probability of executing a plurality of types of mini games may be high.

In addition, “the first game state is a non-electric power support state [for example, a general figure low probability state, etc.],
The second game state is a power support state [for example, a universal figure high probability state, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the non-electric power support state may be a special figure high probability state or a special figure low probability state.

In addition, the electric support state may be a special figure high probability state or a special figure low probability state.

In addition, "when none of the plurality of types of mini games is displayed in the certain display area [for example, the multifunctional display area MF1 or the like shown in FIG. 185(a)], a non-mini game effect is produced in the certain display area. A display [for example, a tutorial display "a mini game starts at various timings" shown in FIG. 185(c), a tutorial display "Yoshimune wa 8th Shogun" shown in FIG. 185(f), etc.] is displayed. May be

The non-mini game effect display is an effect display different from the plurality of types of mini games,

When any one of the plurality of types of mini games is started to be displayed in the certain display area, the non-mini game effect display being displayed is erased [for example, in FIG. 185(f) to FIG. As shown, if the mini-game is started while "Yoshimune is the 8th Shogun" is displayed, the display of "Yoshimune is the 8th Shogun" is deleted.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, since a non-minigame effect display can be performed using a certain display area from the normal time, it may be easy for the player to pay attention.

Here, when none of the plurality of types of mini-games is displayed in a certain display area, the non-minigame effect display may be displayed only in a certain display area, or in a certain display area, a plurality of types of mini-games may be displayed. The non-minigame effect display may be displayed in an area other than the display area in which none of the minigames is displayed. Further, when none of the plurality of types of mini games is displayed in a certain display area, a non-mini game effect display may be displayed in a certain display area without fail, and any of the plurality of types of mini games is displayed in a certain display area. The non-minigame effect display may not be displayed in a certain display area when it is not displayed.

Further, a non-minigame effect display may be displayed in a certain display area only when none of the plurality of types of minigames is displayed in a certain display area, or a plurality of types of minigames may be displayed in a certain display area. There may be a case where the non-minigame effect display is displayed in a certain display area even when neither of the games is displayed.

Further, when any one of the plurality of types of mini games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, only the non-mini game effect display being displayed may be erased, or any one of the plurality of types of mini games is displayed in a certain display area. When one of the displays is started, the display other than the non-minigame effect display being displayed may be deleted. Further, when any one of a plurality of types of mini games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, the non-mini game effect display being displayed may be deleted without fail, and any one of a plurality of types of mini games in a certain display area may be deleted. The non-minigame effect display being displayed may not be erased when one of them is started to be displayed.

Further, the non-minigame effect display that is being displayed may be erased only when any one of the plurality of types of mini games is displayed in a certain display area, or any of the plurality of types of mini games may be displayed in a certain display area. The non-mini-game effect display being displayed may be deleted in a case other than the case where one of the displays is started.

In addition, as the display applicable to the non-mini game effect display, an appropriate display such as a tutorial display, a display of parameters in the original mode (LV display, etc.), a display of remaining time until the start of RTC, etc. is adopted. It is possible.

In addition, “the certain display area is a frame [for example, a liquid crystal frame of the second decorative pattern display device 208M shown in FIG. 161(d), an outer frame of the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 171(m), , An outer frame of the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. 175(a)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, a certain display area may be partitioned only by a frame, or may be partitioned by something other than a frame.

In addition, “the certain display area is an area formed at a predetermined position [for example, as shown in FIG. 185(a), the multifunctional display area MF1 is a display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is formed in the right half of the lower end, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, a certain display area may be formed only at a predetermined position, or may be formed at a position other than the predetermined position.

In addition, “the certain display area is an area which is expanded in association with the start of the first mini game [for example, as shown in FIG. 191(A2), the multi-function display area MF1 is a start of the dice game. Is displayed in an expanded manner in relation to

The certain display area is an area that expands in association with the start of the second mini game,
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, there is a case where the player can focus on the mini game by expanding and displaying a certain display area.

Here, a certain display area may be expanded only in association with the start of the first mini game, or may be expanded in association with other than the start of the first mini game. Good. Further, a certain display area may be necessarily expanded in association with the start of the first mini game, or may not be expanded in association with the start of the first mini game.

Further, a certain display area may be expanded only in association with the start of the second mini game, or may be expanded in association with other than the start of the second mini game. .. Further, a certain display area may be necessarily expanded in association with the start of the second mini game, or may not be expanded in association with the start of the second mini game.

Also, a certain display area may expand only in association with the start of the first mini-game, and may be configured not to expand in association with the start of the second mini-game. It may be expanded only in connection with the start of the mini game, and may be configured not to be expanded in connection with the start of the first mini game.

In addition, “the certain display area is an area formed in the display area of the display means [for example, the multifunction display area MF1 shown in FIG. 185(a) is on the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, since the mini game is executed on the display means for executing the decorative symbol variable display, it may be possible to give more attention to the mini game.

Here, a certain display area may be formed only in the display area of the display means, or may be formed in an area other than the display area of the display means.

In addition, a display means (hereinafter, referred to as "second display means [for example, FIG. 161(a)] different from the display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 161(a)]]. Second decorative symbol display device 208M, etc.]”) shown in FIG.
The certain display area is an area formed in the display area of the second display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, a certain display area may be formed only in the display area of the second display means, or may be formed in an area other than the display area of the second display means.
Also, in the above description,
"A notice means capable of executing a plurality of notices [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.]

Display means capable of displaying the display of the mini game [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A gaming table equipped with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],

One of the plurality of notices is a first notice [for example, display of the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 175(i′)],

One of the plurality of notices is a second notice [for example, display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 175(i)].

The case where the second notice is given is configured so that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than the case where the first notice is given,
The mini game is a game that can derive a plurality of results,

One of the plurality of results is the first result [for example, the display of “Kokichi” shown in FIG. 175(h′), etc.],

One of the plurality of results is a second result [for example, the display of “Daikichi” shown in FIG. 175(h), etc.],

It is easier to give the second notice when the second result is derived than when the first result is derived,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the notification means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the notification means.

Further, conventionally, a gaming table for playing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini-games. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in a mini game.

Further, according to this gaming table, the player may participate (attention) in the mini game in order to derive the second result.

Here, the advance notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of advance notices, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of advance notices. Further, the advance notice means may execute a plurality of advance notices without fail, or may not execute a plurality of advance notices.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the mini game, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the mini game. Further, the display means may always display the display of the mini game, or may not display the display of the mini game.

Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice and the second notice. .. Further, the advance notice means may execute the first advance notice and the second advance notice without fail, or may not execute the first advance notice and the second advance notice.

In addition, when the first notice is given, the jackpot symbol may not be finally confirmed and displayed, and when the second notice is given, the jackpot symbol is always finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured to.

In addition, “at least suggesting that the derivation result of the mini game becomes the second result before the derivation of the result of the mini game, so that the second notice is likely to be given. [For example, as shown in FIG. 175(c), when the mini game is started, the display of "strong cut-in occurred in Daikichi" is displayed in the mini game display area MN1.] ,
A game table characterized by that. ]

Was also explained. According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to focus attention on the trend of the mini game toward the generation of an advantageous announcement.

In addition, by incorporating so-called mission effects in the mini game, it may be possible to increase the number of scenes in which the player can feel the achievement.

Here, it is configured to at least suggest that only the second notice is likely to be given because the derivation result of the mini game becomes the second result before the result of the mini game is derived. At least to suggest that it is easy to give a notice other than the second notice because the derived result of the mini game becomes the second result before the result of the mini game is derived. It may be configured. Further, it may be configured such that the derivation result of the mini game becomes the second result before the derivation of the result of the mini game, so that at least the second notice is surely given. However, before the mini game result is derived, the mini game derivation result becomes the second result, which may at least suggest that the second notice is not given. May be.

In addition, before the result of the mini game is derived, it may be configured to notify in advance that the second notice is likely to be given because the derived result of the mini game becomes the second result. ..

In addition, the mode of suggestion is, for example, a mode in which at least an effect of accomplishing the mission is suggested, such as "if ... succeeds in ...", "put out ~", or "when ~ stops..." Any aspect can be applied.
Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,

One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display [for example, the effect of the mission shown in FIGS. 176(c) to (n)].

The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variable display [for example, the effect of the mission shown in FIGS. 176(c) to (n) is a decorative symbol. Is being displayed during the fluctuation display of
The first effect display is an effect display capable of deriving a plurality of effect results,

One of the plurality of effect results is the first effect result [for example, the display of "Mission failure" shown in FIG. 177(n), etc.],

One of the plurality of effect results is a second effect result [for example, a display of "mission accomplished" shown in FIG. 176(n), etc.],

Before the effect result of the first effect display is derived, it is at least suggested that the effect result of the first effect display becomes the second effect result, which is likely to result in a big hit. [For example, as shown in FIG. 176(c), when the production of the mission is started, the contents of the mission such as “put out a cut-in” and “a big hit if it comes out” are displayed]

The second effect result in the first effect display [for example, in the mini game, the second effect result [for example, the display of “Daikichi” shown in FIG. 175(h)] is derived. 176(n) "display of "mission accomplished" and the like" is derived so that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to increase the number of scenes in which the player's sense of accomplishment can be obtained by incorporating so-called mission effects in addition to the mini game.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to increase the variation of the mission effect by providing a difference in the result of the mission.

Further, according to this gaming machine, the difference between the main production mission and the mini game mission may be clarified in some cases.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of effect displays, or may not display the plurality of effect displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying effect displays other than the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the first effect display, or may not display the first effect display.

Further, the first effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display. It may be. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, the first effect display may be one in which only a plurality of effect results can be derived, or one in which results other than the plurality of effect results can also be derived. Further, the first effect display may necessarily derive a plurality of effect results, or may not necessarily derive a plurality of effect results.

Further, the first effect display may be one in which only the first effect result and the second effect result can be derived, and effect results other than the first effect result and the second effect result are also derived. It may be possible. Further, the first effect display may necessarily derive the first effect result and the second effect result, or may not derive the first effect result and the second effect result. Good.

Further, before the effect result of the first effect display is derived, it is configured in advance that the effect result of the first effect display becomes the second effect result, so that it is likely to be a big hit. May be.

Further, when the second result is derived in the mini game, it may be configured such that the jackpot symbol is not finally confirmed and displayed, or when the second effect result is derived in the first effect display. May be configured so that the jackpot pattern is finally definitely displayed. Further, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the jackpot symbol may be finally settled and displayed, and the second effect result is derived in the first effect display. When it is done, it may be configured so that the jackpot pattern may not be finally confirmed and displayed.

In addition, "when the second effect result is derived, it is configured to finally confirm and display the big hit symbol,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to clarify the division of the mission effect.

Here, only when the second effect result is derived, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally confirmed and displayed, and also in cases other than the case where the second effect result is derived. The final jackpot design may be finally displayed.

In addition, “a state in which both the mini game and the first effect display are displayed (hereinafter, “first state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 176(g) to (l)) There is a case where both the presentation and the mini game are displayed]”).
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make the player feel that the result of the mini game and the result of the first effect display are related.

Here, there may be a case where the state is only the first state, there may be a case where the state is other than the first state, the state may always be the first state, or the first state It may not be the case.
In addition, "the mini game is started earlier than the first effect display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that there is a relationship between the mini game and the first effect display.

In addition, “operating means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position operable by the player is provided,

When the operating means is operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is derived [for example, FIGS. 176(g) to (l) and FIG. 177(g). As shown in (l) of the same figure, when the production button 136 is repeatedly hit in the mini game, "Daikichi" or "Kokichi" is derived, etc.],

When the operation means is not operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is not derived,

When the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice [for example, FIG. 177(m)] is used rather than the second notice [for example, the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 176(m)]. The weak cut-in image CI1b etc.] shown in FIG.

When the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice is more likely to be given than the first notice.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the result of the mini game may affect the notice, so that the player may be able to positively operate the operation means in order to derive the result of the mini game. ..

Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operating means may be necessarily provided at a position operable by the player, or may not be provided at a position operable by the player.

The operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, the result of the mini game may be derived only when the operation means is operated in the mini game, and the mini game may be obtained even when the operation means is not operated in the mini game. May be configured to be derived. Further, the result of the mini game may be always derived when the operation means is operated in the mini game, or the result of the mini game is derived when the operation means is operated in the mini game. It may not be done.

In addition, the result of the mini game may not be derived only when the operation means is not operated in the mini game. The game result may not be derived. The result of the mini game may not always be derived when the operation means is not operated in the mini game, or the result of the mini game is not obtained when the operation means is not operated in the mini game. It may be configured so that it may be derived.

Further, only when the result of the mini game is not derived, it may be configured so that the first notice is easier than the second notice, or when the result of the mini game is not derived. In other cases, the first notice may be more easily given than the second notice. Further, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice may be more likely to be executed than the second notice, and the result of the mini game is not derived. In some cases, the first notice may be less likely to be given than the second notice.

Further, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the second notice may be configured not to be given, and if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice may be given. May be configured to be exposed.

Further, only when the result of the mini game is derived, it may be configured such that the second notice is more likely to be given than the first notice, and other than when the result of the mini game is derived. Also in this case, the second notice may be more easily given than the first notice. In addition, when the result of the mini game is derived, it may be configured so that the second notice is more likely to be given than the first notice, or when the result of the mini game is derived, It may be configured such that the second notice is less likely to be given than the first notice.

The first notice may not be given when the result of the mini game is derived, and the second notice is always given when the result of the mini game is derived. May be configured as.

In addition, “even if the second notice is scheduled to be given (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”), if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice is given. [For example, when the result of the mini game is not derived although it is determined that “Daikichi” can be derived as the result of the mini game, as shown in FIG. 178(m), a strong cut is performed. The weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed instead of the in-image CI1a],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the result of the mini game may affect the notice, so that the player may be able to positively operate the operation means in order to derive the result of the mini game. ..

Also, according to this gaming machine, the notice does not affect the success/failure judgment, so even if a notice different from the scheduled one occurs, the result of the success/failure determination will not be affected, and the scheduled notice will be forced. No need to do. Therefore, it may be possible to participate in a mini game in order to give a better notice.

Here, even in the first case, the first notice may be provided only when the result of the mini game is not derived. The first advance notice may be provided even when the result of the game is not derived. Further, even in the first case, the first notice may be given whenever the result of the mini game is not derived, or even in the first case, the mini game If the result of (1) is not derived, the first notice may not be given.

In addition, “holding icon display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of holding icons [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.],

One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a blue display mode shown in FIG. 161(k)]

One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [eg, a hold icon in a green display mode shown in FIG. 161(m), etc.],

The first notice is a notice given when the first hold icon is displayed [for example, the prefetch notice is given by displaying the hold icon in the blue display mode shown in FIG. 161(k). Etc.],

The second notice is a notice given when the second hold icon is displayed [for example, the look-ahead notice is given by displaying the hold icon in the green display mode shown in FIG. 161(m). Etc.],

The mini game may be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed,

In the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon,

In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to expect a change in the display mode of the hold icon while enjoying the mini game. For example, the button holding icon is displayed and the display mode is changed by the operation of the operation means, which is monotonous only in the conventional production, but according to this game console, the display state of the holding icon is changed. After that, it may change further, so that it may be possible to further enhance the sense of expectation in the change display of the hold icon.

Here, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of hold icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of hold icons. Further, the hold icon display means may always display a plurality of types of hold icons, or may not display a plurality of types of hold icons.

Further, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or can display a hold icon other than the first hold icon and the second hold icon. It may be anything. Further, the hold icon display means may always display the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or may not display the first hold icon and the second hold icon. Good.

Further, the first notice may be given only by displaying the first hold icon, or may be given by something other than displaying the first hold icon. May be. Further, the first notice may be issued without fail by displaying the first hold icon, or may not be given by displaying the first hold icon. ..

The second notice may be given only by displaying the second hold icon, or may be given by something other than displaying the second hold icon. May be. In addition, the second notice may be necessarily given by displaying the second hold icon, or may not be given by displaying the second hold icon. ..

Further, the mini game may be configured so that it may be started only while a certain symbol variable display is being executed while the first hold icon is being displayed, and the first hold icon is displayed. It may be configured such that, in the state in which it is performed, it may be started other than during execution of a certain symbol variable display. In addition, the mini game may be configured to always start during execution of a certain symbol variable display in the state where the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In a state, it may be configured such that it may not be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display.

Further, the mini game may be configured so that it may be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display only when the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. Even in a state other than the displayed state, it may be configured to be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display.

Further, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change only to the second hold icon, or in the first case, When the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be changed to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. Further, in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change to the second hold icon, or in the first case, The first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon when the result of the mini game is not derived.

In the first case, the first hold icon may not be changed to the second hold icon only when the result of the mini game is not derived. In the first case, Even when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may not be changed to the second hold icon. Further, only in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change to the second hold icon, or other than the first case. In this case, the first hold icon may not change to the second hold icon when the result of the mini game is not derived.

In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be changed to only the second hold icon. In the first case In, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be changed to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon without fail. In, in the case where the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may not be changed to the second hold icon.

In the first case, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon only when the second result is derived in the mini game. In the first case In, in the case other than the case where the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon. Further, only in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon. In the first case In other cases, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon when the second result is derived in the mini game.

In addition, “holding icon display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of holding icons [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.],

One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a blue display mode shown in FIG. 161(k)]

One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [eg, a hold icon in a green display mode shown in FIG. 161(m), etc.],

The first notice is a notice given when the first hold icon is displayed [for example, the prefetch notice is given by displaying the hold icon in the blue display mode shown in FIG. 161(k). Etc.],

The second notice is a notice given when the second hold icon is displayed [for example, the look-ahead notice is given by displaying the hold icon in the green display mode shown in FIG. 161(m). Etc.],

The mini game may be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed,

In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display,

In the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display, and the certain symbol During execution of the symbol variation display started after the variation display, the first suspension icon changes to the second suspension icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the timing of changing the display mode of the hold icon may be changed depending on the participation status of the mini game.

Further, according to this gaming machine, there is a case where the relationship between the advance notice and the reliability can be held even if the mini game is not finally participated.

Here, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of hold icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of hold icons. Further, the hold icon display means may always display a plurality of types of hold icons, or may not display a plurality of types of hold icons.

Further, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or can display a hold icon other than the first hold icon and the second hold icon. It may be anything. Further, the hold icon display means may always display the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or may not display the first hold icon and the second hold icon. Good.

Further, the first notice may be given only by displaying the first hold icon, or may be given by something other than displaying the first hold icon. May be. Further, the first notice may be issued without fail by displaying the first hold icon, or may not be given by displaying the first hold icon. ..

The second notice may be given only by displaying the second hold icon, or may be given by something other than displaying the second hold icon. May be. In addition, the second notice may be necessarily given by displaying the second hold icon, or may not be given by displaying the second hold icon. ..

Further, the mini game may be configured so that it may be started only while a certain symbol variable display is being executed while the first hold icon is being displayed, and the first hold icon is displayed. It may be configured such that, in the state in which it is performed, it may be started other than during execution of a certain symbol variable display. In addition, the mini game may be configured to always start during execution of a certain symbol variable display in the state where the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In a state, it may be configured such that it may not be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display.

Further, the mini game may be configured so that it may be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display only when the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. Even in a state other than the displayed state, it may be configured to be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display.

In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is changed to only the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variable display. In the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to a hold icon other than the second hold icon during execution of certain symbol variation display. May be configured to do so. In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is always changed to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variable display. In the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variable display. May be configured as.

Further, in the first case, only when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variable display. In the first case, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variable display, even when the second result is derived in the mini game. May be configured as follows. Also, only in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variable display. Also, in cases other than the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variable display. May be configured as follows. Further, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon only during execution of the variable display which is started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. In the case of, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain pattern change display, and the first hold during execution of a pattern change display started after a certain pattern change display. The icon may be changed to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. Further, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to always change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the variable display which is started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. In the case of, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain pattern change display, and the first hold during execution of a pattern change display started after a certain pattern change display. It may be configured such that the icon may not change to the second hold icon.

Further, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon only during execution of the symbol variable display started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. In the case of, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first variation is also performed during the symbol variation display started after a certain symbol variation display. The hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon. Further, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to always change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol variable display started later.

In the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon only while a certain symbol variation display is being executed. May be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the variable pattern display that will be started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. In the case of, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon except during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first variation icon is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display started after the certain symbol variation display. The hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon. Also, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display. Also, it may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variable display started later.

Also, in the first case, only when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. May be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the variable pattern display that will be started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. In the case other than the case, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and while the symbol variation display is started after a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon. Also, only in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and a certain symbol variation display May be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the pattern variation display that will be started later, or in the case other than the first case, the result of the mini game If is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of certain symbol variation display, and during execution of symbol variation display started after certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon.

In addition, “operating means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position operable by the player is provided,

The derivation result of the mini game may differ depending on the operation status of the operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 176(i) to FIG. When the condition is satisfied, “Daikichi” is derived, but as shown in FIGS. 178(i) to 178(l), when the number of operations of the effect button 136 does not satisfy the condition, “ "Kokichi" is derived],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
According to this game table, it may be possible to entertain the operation of the operation means.

Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operating means may be necessarily provided at a position operable by the player, or may not be provided at a position operable by the player.

The operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, only the derivation result of the mini game may be different depending on the operation status of the operating means, or other than the derivation result of the mini game may be different depending on the operation status of the operating means. .. Further, the derivation result of the mini game may be different depending on the operation status of the operation means, or the derivation result of the mini game may not be different depending on the operation status of the operation means.

In addition, “operating means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position operable by the player is provided,

In the mini game, the same result may be derived depending on whether the operation means is operated or not [for example, shown in FIGS. 177(i) to (l). As described above, when it is determined in advance that “Nakichi” is derived, “Kokichi” is derived even if the production button 136 is repeatedly hit, or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operating means may be necessarily provided at a position operable by the player, or may not be provided at a position operable by the player.

The operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Also, in the mini game, the same result may be derived depending on whether the operating means is operated or not, or when the operating means is operated in the mini game. There may be a case where a result other than the same result is derived depending on whether the operation means is not operated. In the mini game, the same result may be always derived depending on whether the operating means is operated or not operated, and in the mini game, the same result is operated when the operating means is operated and when the operating means is operated. In some cases, the same result may not be derived even when there is no such case.

Further, only in the mini game, the same result may be obtained depending on whether the operating means is operated or not, and the operating means is operated even in other than the mini game. The same result may be derived depending on whether the operation means is operated or not.

Further, "the display means is a first display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like] and a second display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N or the like]. ] And means configured to include,
The first display means and the second display means are different display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means and the second display means, or may include display means other than the first display means and the second display means. It may be configured with. Further, the display means may be configured to necessarily include the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured to not include the first display means and the second display means. It may be one.
Also, in the above description,

“Operating means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate,

Display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A gaming table equipped with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],

The display means displays a display of a mini game [for example, the mini game shown in FIGS. 193(g) to (m) and the mini game shown in FIGS. 195(j) to 195]). Is a possible means,
The mini game is a game that can derive multiple types of results,

The result of the mini game is derived by operating the operation means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 193(g) to 193(k), a treasure box is opened by the operation key unit 137. When the selected treasure box is selected with the effect button 136, the old-aged character BA appears in the treasure box, and "Kokichi" is displayed as a result of the fortune telling, or FIG. 196(A1) to FIG. As shown in (A6), when the production button 136 is repeatedly tapped, it is shown that the clothes worn by the bancho character are torn, and "bancho awakening" and "today is in good shape" are displayed.] ,

It is configured such that any one of the plurality of types of results is derived according to the operation status of the operation means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 194(A1) to 194(A6), If the lower left treasure box BX2 is selected by the key unit 137 and the production button 136 is selected, the princess character HM3 appears and "Daikichi" is displayed as a result of the fortune telling, but FIG. 194 (B1). As shown in (B6) of the same figure, when the upper right treasure box BX3 is selected by the operation key unit 137 and the decision is made by the effect button 136, the grandmother character BA appears and the result of the fortune-telling is "Okichi. ”Is displayed, or, as shown in FIGS. 196(A1) to 196(A6), if the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit and the condition of the number of times of operations is satisfied, the clothes of the chief character are wearing. Is displayed, "Bancho Awakening" and "Today are in good shape" are displayed, and the production button 136 is operated repeatedly, but if the condition of the number of operations is not satisfied, the state shown in FIG. 197 (C7) is displayed. ), the clothes worn by the Bancho character will not be torn and the "bancho awakening game" will end, etc.],

One of the plurality of types of results is the third result [for example, the display of the auntie character BA and "Kokichi" shown in FIG. 193(k), and the bancho length shown in FIG. 197(C7). Indication that the clothes worn by the character are not broken, etc.]

The third result is a result that does not at least suggest the result of the hit/fail judgment [for example, the hit/no hit judgment of at least one of the special drawing and the hit/miss judgment of the general figure].
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the display means.

Further, conventionally, a gaming table for playing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini-games. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in a mini game.

Moreover, according to this gaming table, it may be possible to entertain the player other than the pure game.

Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operating means may be necessarily provided at a position operable by the player, or may not be provided at a position operable by the player.

The operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the mini game, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the mini game. Further, the display means may display the display of the mini game without fail, or may not display the display of the mini game.

Further, the mini game may be one in which only a plurality of types of results can be derived, or one in which a result other than a plurality of types of results can be derived. In addition, the mini game may always derive a plurality of types of results, or may not derive a plurality of types of results.

Further, it may be configured such that only the result of the mini game is derived by operating the operating means, or that other than the result of the mini game is derived by operating the operating means. May be done. The result of the mini game may be derived by operating the operation means, or the result of the mini game may not be derived by operating the operation means. May be.

Further, it may be configured such that only one of the plurality of types of results is derived according to the operation status of the operating means, or one of the plurality of types of results may be derived according to the operation status of the operating means. It may be configured such that one other than either one is also derived. Further, it may be configured such that any one of the plurality of types of results is always derived in accordance with the operation status of the operating means, and any one of the plurality of types of results may be derived depending on the operation status of the operating means. It may be configured such that one of them may not be derived.

Further, the mini game may be one in which only the third result can be derived, or one in which results other than the third result can be derived. Further, the mini game may necessarily derive the third result, or may not derive the third result.

In addition, the third result does not suggest the result of the acceptance/rejection determination and does not notify the result.

In addition, “The mini game is a game for deriving a certain result from the plurality of types of results [for example, the mini game shown in FIGS. 194(A1) to (A6) is “Daikichi”. The mission is to select the treasure chest of the contents, etc.],

The certain result is configured to be derivable depending on the operation status of the operation means [for example, in the case shown in FIGS. 194(A1) to (A6), the operation key unit 137 is used to select the lower left treasure box BX2. If the effect button 136 is selected, the princess character HM3 appears and "Daikichi" is displayed as a result of the fortune telling, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to concentrate on the operation of the operation means for the mini game.
Here, a certain result may be only one, or may be two or more.

Further, only a certain result may be configured to be derivable depending on the operating status of the operating means, or a result other than the certain result may be configured to be derivable depending on the operating status of the operating means. Further, it may be configured such that a certain result is always derived depending on the operating status of the operating means, or that a certain result may not be derived depending on the operating status of the operating means.

In addition, “decorative symbol display means capable of executing decorative symbol variable display [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] Prepare,

In the case where the mini game is started in the first period [for example, a period of a standby state (including a state where the customer waiting demo display is displayed) where the variable display of the special figure is not displayed, etc. (hereinafter, "The first case".)

The first period is a period in which the start of the decorative symbol variable display is not suspended [for example, a period in which the suspension of both the special diagram 1 and the special diagram 2 is 0, etc.],

The first period is a period in which the decorative symbol variable display is not executed [for example, a period in which decorative symbols are stopped and displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]

Was also explained. According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to entertain a mini game in the first period.

Further, according to this gaming table, it may be possible to positively operate the operation means during the original game by urging the operation of the operation means in the mini game.

Here, the decorative symbol display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the decorative symbol display means may always execute the decorative symbol variable display, or may not execute the decorative symbol variable display.

In addition, the mini game may be started only in the first period, or may be started in a period other than the first period. Further, the mini game may be always started in the first period, or may not be started in the first period.

Further, the first period may be a period in which only the start of the decorative symbol variable display is not suspended, or a period in which the start is not suspended other than the start of the decorative symbol variable display. Good.

Further, the first period may be a period in which only the decorative symbol variable display is not executed, and other than the decorative symbol variable display (for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device). 214, etc.) may also be in the non-executed period.

In addition, "automatic operation of the operating means [for example, long press auto, full auto, etc.] is configured to be executable,

In the first case, the mini game is configured such that the auto operation becomes inexecutable [for example, as shown in FIG. 195(g) and FIG. 195(j) to FIG. , Even if the auto button mode is set to ON, the production button 136 is not automatically operated in the Bancho awakening game, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, in the first case, since it is a mini game that is not related to winning/judgment determination, it is possible to disable the automatic operation and allow the player to positively operate the operating means. There is.

Here, only the automatic operation of the operating unit may be configured to be executable, or an operation other than the automatic operation of the operating unit may be configured to be executable. Further, the automatic operation of the operating means may be configured to be always executed, or the automatic operation of the operating means may not be executed in some cases.

Further, in the first case, the mini game may be configured such that only the automatic operation is inexecutable, or the operation other than the automatic operation is also inoperable. Further, in the first case, the mini game may be configured such that the automatic operation is always inexecutable, or may be configured such that the automatic operation may not be inexecutable.

In addition, the mini game may be configured such that the automatic operation is disabled only in the first case, and is configured to be disabled in the non-first case as well. Good. In addition, “The mini game is a game that may be started in the second period (hereinafter, referred to as “second case”) [for example, shown in FIGS. 161(d) to (l). The mini game shown in FIGS. 171(m) to 172(f) and the mini game shown in FIGS. 185(g) to 185(k) are started during the variable display of the decorative symbols. 200(e) to FIG. 200(i), the mini-game shown in FIG. 200(e) is started during the execution of the jackpot game, etc.],
The second period is a period that does not overlap with the first period,

The second period is a period including at least one of the execution of the decorative symbol variable display and the execution of the big hit game,

In the first case, the third result is more easily derived in the mini game than in the second case.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to entertain a mini game during a game.

Here, the mini game may be started only in the second period, or may be started in a period other than the second period. In addition, the mini game may be always started in the second period, or may not be started in the second period.

Also, in the first case, the third result may be derived in the mini game, and in the second case, the third result may not be derived in the mini game. Good.

In addition, “the types of the mini-games started in the first case and the second case are different [for example, today's fortune shown in (g) to (m) of FIG. Fortune-telling and the Bancho Awakening game shown in FIGS. 195(j) to (o) are mini-games started in the standby state, and the dice games and figures shown in FIGS. 185(g) to (l) are shown. 185(g′) to FIG. 1(l′) are fortune games that are started during variable display of decorative symbols, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to identify whether it is a notice or a simple game depending on the type of mini game.

Here, only the types of mini games started in the first case and the second case may be different from each other, or in the mini games started in the first case and the second case. It may be configured such that there are different types other than the types. Also, the types of mini-games started in the first case and the second case may be configured to be different from each other, and the types of mini-games started in the first case and the second case may be different. May be configured to be different from each other.

In addition, in the mini game started in the first case, a first effective period display [for example, a button acceptance time meter MT displayed in the Bancho awakening game shown in FIG. 195(k)] is displayed. Is configured to

In the mini game started in the second case, a second valid period display [for example, a button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game shown in FIG. 176(i)] is displayed. Is configured,

The first valid period display is a meter display whose display mode changes according to the lapse of a period in which the operation of the operating means is valid [for example, shown in FIGS. 195(k) to 195(n). As described above, the display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes according to the time from the start of the operation reception period of the effect button 136, etc.],

The second effective period display is a meter display whose display mode changes according to the lapse of a period during which the operation of the operation means is effective [for example, shown in FIGS. 176(i) to (k). As described above, the display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes according to the time from the start of the operation reception period of the effect button 136, etc.],

In the first effective period display and the second effective period display, the changing speed of the display mode is different,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to distinguish the type of mini game by looking at the valid period display.

Here, in the mini game started in the first case, only the first effective period display may be displayed, or in the mini game started in the first case, The valid period display other than the valid period display may be configured to be displayed. In addition, in the mini game started in the first case, the first effective period display may be configured to be always displayed, or in the mini game started in the first case, the first effective period display may be displayed. The period display may not be displayed in some cases.

Further, the first valid period display may be displayed only in the mini game started in the first case, or in the mini games other than the mini game started in the first case. The first valid period display may be displayed.

Further, in the mini game started in the second case, only the second effective period display may be displayed, or in the mini game started in the second case, the second effective period is displayed. The valid period display other than the period display may be configured to be displayed. In addition, in the mini game started in the second case, the second effective period display may be configured to be displayed without fail, or in the mini game started in the second case, the second effective period may be displayed. The period display may not be displayed in some cases.

Further, the second valid period display may be displayed only in the mini game started in the second case, and also in the mini games other than the mini game started in the second case. The second valid period display may be displayed.

Further, the first effective period display may be such that the display mode changes only according to the passage of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or other than the passage of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid. The display mode may be changed accordingly. Further, the first valid period display may be such that the display mode is always changed according to the passage of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or the display state may be changed during the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid. The display mode may not change accordingly.

Further, the second effective period display may be such that the display mode changes only according to the passage of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or other than the passage of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid. The display mode may be changed accordingly. Further, the second valid period display may be such that the display mode is always changed according to the passage of the period for which the operation of the operating means is valid, or the display state may be changed for the period of validating the operation of the operating means. The display mode may not change accordingly. Further, either one of the first valid period display and the second valid period display may not be displayed.

Further, in the first effective period display and the second effective period display, the first effective period display may have a higher change speed of the display mode, or the second effective period display may have a higher display mode. The changing speed of may be fast.

Further, the first effective period display and the second effective period display may have different display modes or the same display mode. Further, in the first effective period display and the second effective period display, the first effective period display may be larger in size, or the second effective period display may be larger in size. Alternatively, the first valid period display and the second valid period display may have the same size.

In addition, in the “mini game started in the first case, a first operation promotion display [for example, a button image 136a displayed in the Bancho awakening game shown in FIG. Etc.] is displayed.

In the mini game started in the second case, a second operation promotion display [for example, a button image 136a displayed in the mini game shown in FIG. 176(i) and a "continuous hit" display, etc.] is displayed. Is configured to
The first operation promotion display is a display for urging operation of the operation means,
The second operation promotion display is a display that prompts the user to operate the operation means,

The first operation prompting display is a display that can be displayed in a first number [eg, one, etc.] display pattern [eg, default display mode, etc.],

The second operation promotion display is a display that can be displayed in a second number [for example, two, etc.] display pattern [for example, a default display mode and a display mode that is vibrating and rotating],
In the first number and the second number, the second number is larger,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, in the mini game started in the second case, the expectation for the big hit may be increased by the variation of the display pattern of the operation promotion display.

Here, in the mini game started in the first case, only the first operation promotion display may be displayed, or in the mini game started in the first case, The operation promotion display other than the operation promotion display may be configured to be displayed. Further, in the mini game started in the first case, the first operation promotion display may be configured to be always displayed, or in the mini game started in the first case, the first operation The promotion display may not be displayed in some cases.

Further, the first operation promotion display may be displayed only in the mini game started in the first case, or in the mini games other than the mini game started in the first case. The first operation promotion display may be displayed.

In the mini game started in the second case, only the second operation promotion display may be displayed, or in the mini game started in the second case, the second operation is displayed. The operation promotion display other than the promotion display may be configured to be displayed. Further, in the mini game started in the second case, the second operation promotion display may be configured to be always displayed, or in the mini game started in the second case, the second operation promotion display may be performed. The promotion display may not be displayed in some cases. Further, the second operation promotion display may be displayed only in the mini game started in the second case, or in the mini games other than the mini game started in the second case. The second operation promotion display may be displayed.

Further, the first operation prompting display may be a display prompting only the operation of the operating means or a display prompting other than the operation of the operating means. Further, the first operation prompting display may be a display that always prompts the user to operate the operating means, or may be a display that may not prompt the user to operate the operating means.

Further, the second operation prompting display may be a display prompting only the operation of the operating means or a display prompting other than the operation of the operating means. The second operation promotion display may be a display that always prompts the user to operate the operation means, or may be a display that may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

Further, the first operation prompting display may be one that can be displayed only with the first number of display patterns, or one that can be displayed with a display pattern other than the first number of display patterns. Good. Further, the first operation prompting display may be always displayed with the first number of display patterns, or may not be displayed with the first number of display patterns.

Further, the second operation promotion display may be capable of being displayed only in the second number of display patterns, or may be capable of being displayed in a display pattern other than the second number of display patterns. Good. Further, the second operation promotion display may be always displayed with the second number of display patterns, or may not be displayed with the second number of display patterns.
Further, the first number may be one, or may be two or more.

Further, in the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display, the first operation promotion display may be larger in size, or the second operation promotion display may be larger in size. Alternatively, the first operation prompting display and the second operation prompting display may have the same size.

Further, the first operation prompting display and the second operation prompting display may have different display modes, or at least a part of the display modes may be the same.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of results is the first result [for example, the display of "Kokichi" shown in FIG. 177(l), etc.],"

The first result is a result that at least suggests the result of the hit/miss judgment [for example, the display of "Kokichi" shown in FIG. 177(l) indicates the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. At least suggest the display, etc.],

In the mini game, the first result is more easily derived in the second case than in the first case.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the mini game may be one in which only the first result can be derived, or one in which results other than the first result can be derived. Further, the mini game may always derive the first result, or may not always derive the first result.

Further, the first result may at least suggest only the result of the hit/miss judgment, or may at least suggest something other than the result of the hit/miss judgment. Further, the first result may at least suggest at least the result of the hit determination, or may not at least suggest the result of the hit determination.

Further, the first result may indicate the result of the hit/miss judgment, or may notify the result of the hit/miss judgment.

Further, in the first case, the first result may not be derived in the mini game, and in the second case, the first result may be always derived in the mini game.

Further, “The first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display is a notice or a pre-read notice [for example, FIG. 180(a) to FIG. ), in the mini game that is performed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, a notice or a look-ahead notice is given when the character YSM of the protagonist's lord appears from the treasure box],

The first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the jackpot game is a look-ahead notice,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the mini game may be able to function as a notice.
Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display,

The first effect display is an effect display [eg button operation effect shown in FIG. 173(c) to FIG. 173(o)] related to the decorative symbol variable display,

In the first effect display, a big hit announcement (hereinafter, referred to as “first announcement [eg, display of weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 173(o)]”) may be executed. And

As the first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the decorative pattern variable display, a notice related to the first notice may be executed [for example, FIG. As shown in (c) to (l) of the figure, the display of "Nakichi" derived in the mini game started during the variable display of the decorative pattern gives a notice of the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b, etc. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to draw attention to the first result that affects the first notice.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect display, or may not display a plurality of types of effect display.

Further, the first effect display may be related to only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be related to something other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the first effect display may be necessarily related to the decorative symbol variable display, or may not be related to the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, the first effect display may be that only the first notice may be executed, or may be performed other than the first notice. The first effect display may be that the first notice is always executed, or the first notice may not be executed.

In addition, as the first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, there may be a case where only the notice related to the first notice is executed, and the decorative symbol As a first result derived when the mini game is started during execution of the variable display, a notice other than the notice related to the first notice may be executed. Further, as a first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, a notice related to the first notice may be executed without fail, or the decorative symbol variable display is executed. As a first result derived in the case where the mini game is started, there may be a case where the notice related to the first notice is not executed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of results is a second result [for example, the display of “Daikichi” shown in FIG. 176(l), etc.],”

The second result is a result that at least suggests the result of the hit/miss judgment [for example, the display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 176(l) indicates the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 176(m). At least suggest the display, etc.],

In the second case, the second result is more easily derived in the mini game than in the first case,

If the second result is derived rather than the first result is derived as the result of the mini game, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the plurality of types of results may include only the first result and the second result, or may include results other than the first result and the second result.

In addition, the second result may be a result that suggests the result of the hit determination, or may be a result that the result of the hit determination is notified in advance.

Further, in the first case, the second result may not be derived in the mini game, and in the second case, the second result may be always derived in the mini game. Good.

Further, when the first result is derived, the jackpot symbol may not be finally confirmed and displayed. When the second result is derived, the jackpot symbol is always confirmed. It may be configured to be displayed.

In addition, in the case of the first case, only the third result [for example, the result of the mini game shown in FIG. 193(k) and FIG. 193(k1) to FIG. It is a game to derive,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of results is the fourth result [for example, the display of the princess character HM3 and “Daikichi” shown in FIG. 193(k1) and FIG. 196(A6). The display of the mode in which the clothes worn by the Bancho character are torn]

The fourth result is a result that does not at least suggest the result of the hit determination (for example, the hit determination of at least one of the hit determination of the special figure and the hit determination of the general figure).
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give variations to the result of the mini game.

Further, the mini game may be one that can derive only the third result and the fourth result, or one that can derive results other than the third result and the fourth result. .. Further, the mini game may necessarily derive the third result and the fourth result, or may not derive the third result and the fourth result.

In addition, the fourth result does not indicate the result of the judgment of success or failure, and does not inform the result.
Also, in the above description,

"Operating means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
A gaming table equipped with

One of the plurality of displays is a first display [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (12) to (17)],

The first display is a display that may include an operation valid period display [for example, the display of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248(12) to (14), etc.],

The operation valid period display is a display related to the operation valid period of the operation means [for example, the display of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248(12) to (14) is a production button. 136 shows the remaining time of the operation valid period of 136],

The first display is the first notice display [for example, a button reception time meter in a mode in which the mini character BCH of the length is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge shown in FIGS. 248(15) to (17). Display of MT, etc.]

The first display is a display in which the operation valid period display becomes the first notice display in response to the operation of the operating means after the operation valid period is started [eg, FIG. 248]. As shown in (12) to (17) of the same figure, the button reception time meter MT operates the effect button 136 while the display is being performed in a mode showing the remaining time of the operation valid period of the effect button 136. Then, the display is switched to a mode in which the miniature character BCH having the length is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge],

The first notice display is a notice display that is not displayed when the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 254 (3) to (7), button reception time In the meter MT, if the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, a notice using the button reception time meter MT is not given, and the button reception time meter MT is deleted, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

Conventionally, the display effect by the display means has become diversified. However, in the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a display means.

Further, according to this gaming table, it may be possible to quickly operate the operation means.

Further, according to this gaming table, it may be possible to make the expectation even after the operation means is operated.

Here, the operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be a position where the player may not operate.

Note that any operation device such as a button, a lever, a cross key, a touch panel, or a touch sensor can be applied as the operation means.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of displays or may not display the plurality of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display. Further, the display means may always display the first display, or may not display the first display.

Note that the configuration in which the operation unit itself includes the display unit may be applied, or the configuration in which the display unit itself includes the operation unit may be applied.

The first display may include only the operation valid period display, or may include a display other than the operation valid period display. Further, the first display may necessarily include the operation valid period display, or may not include the operation valid period display.

The operation valid period display may be a gauge display, a timer countdown display, or a display mode that is switched before and after the operation of the operation means.

Further, the first display may include only the first notice display, or may include a display other than the first notice display. Further, the first display may necessarily include the first notice display, or may not include the first notice display.

Further, the first display may be such that the operation valid period display becomes the first notice display only when the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started. The operation valid period display may be the first notice display in response to a matter other than the operation means being operated after the valid period is started. Further, in response to the operation means being operated after the operation valid period is started, the operation valid period display may be always the first notice display, or the operation valid period is started. In some cases, the operation valid period display may not be the first notice display in response to the operation means being operated later.

Further, the first notice display may not be displayed only when the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period, or when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period. It may not be displayed. Further, the first notice display may not necessarily be displayed when the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period, or may be displayed when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period. There may be.

Further, the first notice display can be applied not only to the display on the display device but also to the notice production by the output of voice, the notice production by the action of the production movable body, and the notice production by the light emission of the lamp.

In addition, “the first display includes a second notice display [for example, a display in which a length icon and a panda icon are attached to both ends of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 253(3)]. It is a display that may be

The second notice display is a notice display that may be displayed before the operation means is operated [for example, as shown in FIGS. The button reception time meter MT in the display mode with the panda icon is displayed since the button operation effect was started],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the first display even before the operation means is operated.

Here, the first display may include only the second notice display or may include a display other than the second notice display. Further, the first display may necessarily include the second notice display, or may not include the second display.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed only before the operation means is operated, or may be displayed other than before the operation means is operated. It may be. Further, the second notice display may be always displayed before the operation means is operated, or may not be displayed before the operation means is operated.

Further, in the case where the "first notice display is displayed in the first display mode [for example, a mode in which the mini character BCH having the length is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge shown in FIG. 248(15)] There is a notice display,

The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a mode in which a princess mini-character is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge].

The second notice display is displayed in a second display mode [for example, a mode in which a bang icon and a panda icon are displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 255(3)]. It is a notice display that may be,

The second notice display may be displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a mode in which a length icon is displayed at each end of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 255(11)]. It is a notice display,

The case where the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode is more than the case where the second notice display is displayed in the second display mode. The first notice display is configured to be easily displayed [for example, the button reception time is longer than when the icons displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT are a combination of a bancho icon and a panda icon. When the icons displayed at both ends of the meter MT are both long-length icons, it is easier for the mini character of the princess to be displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT, etc.],

Finally, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed, as compared to the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. [For example, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the mini character of the princess is displayed than when the mini character BCH of the length is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT] ,
A game table characterized by that. ]

Was also explained. According to this gaming machine, since the second notice display functions as a notice for the first notice display, it may be possible to focus attention on the first notice display by operating the operation means.

Here, the first notice display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. May be. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or a display mode other than the third display mode may be displayed. Good. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. Good. Further, the second notice display may be always displayed in the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed only in the fourth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the fourth display mode. Good. Further, the second notice display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fourth display mode.

Further, when the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it may be configured such that only the first notice display in the third display mode may be displayed. When the notice display of is displayed in the fourth display mode, the first notice display in a display mode other than the third display mode may be displayed in some cases. Further, when the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the first notice display in the third display mode may be displayed without fail, or the second notice display may be displayed. May be displayed in the fourth display mode, the first notice display in the third display mode may not be displayed.

Further, it may be configured such that the first notice display in the third display mode may be displayed only when the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode. It may be configured such that the first notice display according to the third display mode may be displayed in a case other than the case where the notice display of is displayed in the fourth display mode.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, only the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed in the third display mode. When displayed in, there may be a case where symbols other than the jackpot symbol are finally confirmed and displayed. Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally definitely displayed, or the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode. In this case, the jackpot pattern may not be finally displayed in a finalized manner.

Further, only when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed in the third display mode. Even in the case other than the case of being displayed with, the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed.

In addition, “One of the plurality of displays is the fourth display [for example, the button image 136a in the default display mode shown in FIG. 248(12), the large button image 136aL shown in FIG. 275(29), Vibration/rotation button image 136aV etc. shown in 277(6)],
The fourth display is an operation promotion display,

The operation promotion display is a display that promotes the operation of the operation means [for example, the operation of the effect button 136 is prompted by the display of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 248(12)],

The fourth display is a notice display that may be displayed in the fifth display mode [for example, the button image 136a in the default display mode shown in FIG. 248(12)],

The fourth display is the sixth display mode [for example, the deca button image 136aL of a display mode larger than the default display mode shown in FIG. 275 (29) or the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 277 (6) vibrates and Vibration/rotation button image 136aV in a rotating state], which is a notice display that may be displayed.

The first notice display may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a mode in which a mini character BCH having a length of length is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge shown in FIG. 248(15)]. Is a display,

The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a mode in which a princess mini character is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge]

When the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode, the first display according to the third display mode is more than in the case where the fourth display is displayed in the fifth display mode. Is configured to be easily displayed. [For example, when the deca button image 136aL or the vibration/rotation button image 136aV is displayed, the button reception time meter is displayed more than when the button image 136a is displayed. The mini character of the princess is easily displayed on the remaining display part of the MT gauge, etc.],

Finally, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed, as compared to the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. [For example, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the mini character of the princess is displayed than when the mini character BCH of the length is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT] ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the first notice display can be expected by the notice of the operation promotion display, the operation of the operation means can be further promoted in some cases.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fourth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display or may not display the fourth display.

Further, the fourth display may be a display including only the operation prompting display, or may include a display other than the operation prompting display. In addition, the fourth display may necessarily include the operation prompting display, or may not include the operation prompting display.

Further, the fourth display may be displayed only in the fifth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the fifth display mode. Good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the fifth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fifth display mode.

Further, the fourth display may be displayed only in the sixth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the sixth display mode. Good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the sixth display mode, or may not be displayed in the sixth display mode. Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. Good. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. Good. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

Further, when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode, it may be configured such that only the first notice display in the third display mode may be displayed. When the display is displayed in the sixth display mode, the first notice display in the display mode other than the third display mode may be displayed in some cases. Further, when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode, the first notice display in the third display mode may be configured to be displayed without fail, and the fourth display may be displayed in the first display mode. When displayed in the sixth display mode, the first notice display in the third display mode may not be displayed in some cases.

Further, only when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode, the first notice display in the third display mode may be displayed in some cases. It may be configured such that the first notice display in the third display mode may be displayed even when the display is not displayed in the sixth display mode.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, only the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed in the third display mode. When displayed in, there may be a case where symbols other than the jackpot symbol are finally confirmed and displayed. Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally definitely displayed, or the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode. In this case, the jackpot pattern may not be finally displayed in a finalized manner.

Further, only when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed in the third display mode. Even in the case other than the case of being displayed with, the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed.

In addition, “the first notice display is a notice display that is started in a display mode according to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started [for example, in FIG. 248 (15). As shown, the length of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT on which the mini character BCH of the length when the effect button 136 is operated is the length corresponding to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the display mode of the first notice display differs depending on the timing at which the operation means is operated, so that the display of the first notice display can be made more diverse, and the effect of production is improved. There are cases.

Here, the first notice display may be a display that can be started only in a display mode according to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started, or the operation valid period is started. After that, the display may be started in a display mode other than the display mode according to the timing at which the operation unit is operated. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in a display mode according to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started, or after the operation valid period is started. There may be a case where the display is not started in the display mode according to the timing at which the operation unit is operated.

In addition, “the first notice display is a notice display that is displayed only for a period corresponding to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started [for example, FIG. 248 (15) to FIG. As shown in (18), the button reception time meter MT on which the miniature character BCH having the length is displayed is displayed until the remaining amount of the gauge is exhausted. That is, the button reception time meter MT displaying the mini character BCH having the longest length is displayed until the time corresponding to the operation valid period elapses after the effect button 136 is operated, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, for example, the earlier the timing at which the operation means is operated, the longer the first notice display can be seen, so that the operation of the operation means can be promoted in some cases.

Here, the first notice display may be one that can be displayed only during a period corresponding to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started, or after the operation valid period is started. It may be displayable during a period other than the period corresponding to the timing at which the operating device is operated. The first notice display may be always displayed in a period corresponding to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started, or the operation means may be displayed after the operation valid period is started. It may not be displayed in a period according to the timing when was operated.

In addition, “the first notice display is a notice display whose display mode changes according to the passage of time [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248(15) to (17), a miniature character BCH The display mode of the button reception time meter MT with is changed such that the gauge decreases in accordance with the time from the start of the operation valid period, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the display mode of the first notice display changes with the passage of time, so that the first notice display may be able to be focused on.

Here, the first notice display may be such that the display mode can be changed only in accordance with the passage of time, or the display mode can be changed in any other manner than in accordance with the passage of time. It may be. Further, the first notice display may be one in which the display mode always changes with the passage of time, or the display form may not change with the passage of time.

Further, “The operation valid period display is a display whose display mode changes according to the passage of time [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248(12) to (14), the button reception time meter MT is The display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the effective operation period],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the display mode of the operation valid period display changes with the lapse of time, so that the operation valid period display may be able to be focused.

Here, the operation valid period display may be such that the display mode can be changed only in accordance with the passage of time, or the display mode can be changed in any other manner than in accordance with the passage of time. May be. In addition, the display mode of the operation valid period may always change with time, or the display mode may not change with time.

In addition, “one of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, a button reception time meter MT or the like shown in FIG. 248(4) to (5)],

The second display is the operation valid period display [for example, the display of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248(4) to (5)],

The second display is a display that is erased when the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248(4) to (6), The button reception time meter MT is erased when the production button 136 is operated while the display is being performed in a manner showing the remaining time of the operation valid period of the production button 136, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the second display is erased when the operation means is operated, so that it may be possible to pay attention to the second display when the operation means is operated.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the second display. Further, the display means may always display the second display, or may not display the second display.

In addition, the second display may be configured to include only the operation valid period display, or may be configured to include a display other than the operation valid period display. Further, the second display may be configured to always include the operation valid period display, or may be configured to not include the operation valid period display.

Further, the second display may be erased only when the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started, or the operation means is displayed after the operation valid period is started. It may be erased even when it is not operated. In addition, the second display may be always deleted when the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started, or when the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started. However, it may not be erased.

In addition, “one of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, button reception time meter MT and the like shown in FIG. 248(4) to (5)],
The first display and the second display are different displays,

The second display is a display that may include the operation valid period display [for example, the display of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248(4) to (5), etc.],
The second display is a display that may include a first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display different from the first notice display,

The second display is a display in which the operation effective period display is the first effect display in response to the operation of the operation means after the operation effective period is started.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the second display before and after the operation of the operation means.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the second display. Further, the display means may always display the second display, or may not display the second display.

The second display may include only the operation valid period display or may include a display other than the operation valid period display. Further, the second display may necessarily include the operation valid period display, or may not include the operation valid period display.

In addition, the second display may include only the first effect display, or may include a display other than the first effect display. Moreover, the second display may necessarily include the first effect display, or may not include the first effect display.

The first effect display may be partially different from the first notice display, or may be different from the first notice display.

Further, the second display may be one in which the operation effective period display becomes the first effect display only when the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started. The operation effective period display may be the first effect display in response to the operation other than the operation of the operation means after the effective period is started. Further, the second display may be such that the operation effective period display is always the first effect display in response to the operation means being operated after the operation effective period is started. In some cases, the operation effective period display may not be the first effect display in response to the operation means being operated after the effective period is started.

In addition, “the operation valid period display is a display by a gauge [for example, in the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248(4) to (5) and FIGS. 248(12) to (14). Button display hour meter MT display, etc.],

The first notice display is a gauge display [for example, a gauge display in the button reception time meter MT in which the mini character BCH having the length shown in FIGS. 248 (15) to (17) is displayed].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the operation valid period display and the first notice display may be easily visible.

Here, the operation valid period display may be configured by only the gauge, or may be configured by including something other than the gauge. Further, the operation valid period display may be configured to always include the gauge, or may not include the gauge.

Further, the first notice display may be configured by only the gauge, or may be configured by including something other than the gauge. Further, the first notice display may be configured to always include the gauge, or may not include the gauge.

In addition, “the first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed during execution of a certain effect [for example, decorative pattern change display, etc.],

The certain effect is an effect configured to develop after the display of the first notice display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248(15) to (20), The decorative pattern variable display has been developed into super reach after the button reception time meter MT on which the miniature character BCH of the length is displayed is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the original operation period is used, it may be possible to focus attention on the development effect after the first notice display is shown.

Further, according to this gaming machine, the first notice display including the display regarding the operation valid period may sometimes function as a timer notice regarding the development of a certain effect.

Here, the first notice display may be displayed only during execution of a certain effect, or may be displayed during execution of an effect other than execution of a certain effect. There may be In addition, the first notice display may be always displayed during execution of a certain effect, or may not be displayed during execution of a certain effect.

Further, the certain presentation may be configured so that it may develop only after the display of the first notice display is started, or the display of the first notice display is started. It may be configured so that it may develop other than afterwards. Further, the certain effect may be configured to be always developed after the display of the first notice display is started, or may be developed after the display of the first notice display is started. You may not.

In addition, “one of the plurality of displays is a third display [for example, a step-up notice shown in FIGS. 248(15) to (17)].

The third display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation valid period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248(12) to (17), the operation display is valid). When the effect button 136 is operated after the period starts, the step-up notice is started, etc.],
The third display is a notice display,

The certain effect is configured to develop after the display of the third display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 248 (12) to FIG. , Has developed into super reach after the step-up notice was started],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the third display will be displayed.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the third display. Further, the display means may necessarily display the third display, or may not display the third display.

The third display may be displayed only when the operating means is operated during the operation valid period, or when the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period. May also be displayed. Further, the third display may be always displayed when the operating means is operated during the operation valid period, or may not be displayed when the operating means is operated during the operation valid period. Good.

Further, the third display may be configured to include only the notice display, or may be configured to include a display other than the notice display. Further, the third display may be configured to always include the advance notice display, or may be configured to not include the advance notice display.

Further, a certain display may be configured to be developed only after the third display is started, or may be developed even after the third display is not displayed. May be configured as follows. Further, a certain display may be configured to be always expanded after the display of the third display is started, or may not be expanded after the display of the third display is started.

In addition, “The third display is a display that may be displayed even if the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period [for example, as shown in FIG. 254(3) to FIG. In addition, after the operation valid period starts, the step-up notice is started even when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the notice display that starts when the operation means is operated without the operation means appears, but the first notice display cannot be seen, so that In some cases, the operation of the operation means can be promoted to see the notice display.

Here, the third display may be always displayed even if the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period, or is not displayed when the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period. There may be.

In addition, when the first period [for example, a period of 5 seconds from the start of the operation valid period] has elapsed without the operation means being operated after the start of the operation valid period, the operation valid period ends. Is configured as

The first notice display is displayed when the operation means is operated after a second period [for example, a period of 1 second from the start of the operation valid period] has elapsed after the operation valid period starts. The period to be performed is a fourth period [for example, a period of 4 seconds after the production button 136 is operated],

The first notice display is displayed when the operation means is operated after the lapse of a third period [for example, a period of 3 seconds after the operation valid period starts] after the operation valid period starts. The period to be performed is a fifth period [for example, a period of 2 seconds after the effect button 136 is operated].
The third period is a longer period than the second period,
The fourth period is shorter than the third period,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured such that only the operation valid period ends when the first period elapses without operating the operation means after the operation valid period starts, or after the operation valid period starts. The period other than the operation valid period may be configured to end when the first period elapses without operating the operation unit. In addition, the operation valid period may be configured to always end when the first period elapses without the operation means being operated after the operation valid period starts, or the operation valid period starts after the operation valid period starts. The operation valid period may not end when the first period elapses without operating the means.

Here, the operation valid period display may be a display for informing about the first period.

Further, the operation valid period may be configured to end when only the first period elapses without the operation means being operated after the operation valid period starts, or the operation valid period starts after the operation valid period starts. The operation valid period may end even if a period other than the first period elapses without operating the means.

The second period may be shorter than the first period or may be the same length as the first period. Further, the third period may be a period shorter than the first period, or may be a period having the same length as the first period. Further, the fourth period may be a period shorter than the first period or a period having the same length as the first period. Further, the fifth period may be a period shorter than the first period, or may be a period having the same length as the first period. Further, the second period may be longer than the fourth period, may have the same length, or may be shorter. In addition, the third period may be longer than the fifth period, may have the same length, or may be shorter.

Further, "the total length of the second period and the fourth period is the same length as the first period, or a length shorter than the first period,

The total length of the third period and the fifth period is the same length as the first period, or is shorter than the first period,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Note that the total length of the second period and the fourth period may be longer than the length of the first period, or the total length of the third period and the fifth period may be the first period. May be longer than the length of.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,

"Operating means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
A gaming table equipped with

One of the plurality of displays is a first display [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 248 (12) to (17)],

The first display is a display that may include an operation valid period display [for example, the display of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248(12) to (14), etc.],

The operation valid period display is a display related to the operation valid period of the operation means [for example, the display of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248(12) to (14) is a production button. 136 shows the remaining time of the operation valid period of 136],

The first display is the first notice display [for example, a button reception time meter in a mode in which the mini character BCH of the length is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge shown in FIGS. 248(15) to (17). Display of MT, etc.]

The first display is a display in which the operation valid period display becomes the first notice display in response to the operation of the operating means after the operation valid period is started [eg, FIG. 248]. As shown in (12) to (17) of the same figure, the button reception time meter MT operates the effect button 136 while the display is being performed in the mode showing the remaining time of the operation valid period of the effect button 136. Then, the display is such that the miniature character BCH of the length is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge, etc.],

The first notice display is a notice display including the operation valid period display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248(15) to (17), a miniature character BCH having a length is displayed. The button reception time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the length of the gauge decreases corresponding to the time from the start of the effective operation period],
A game table characterized by that.

Conventionally, the display effect by the display means has become diversified. However, in the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a display means.

Further, according to this gaming table, it may be possible to make the expectation even after the operation means is operated.

Here, the operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be a position where the player may not operate.

Note that any operation device such as a button, a lever, a cross key, a touch panel, or a touch sensor can be applied as the operation means.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of displays or may not display the plurality of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display. Further, the display means may always display the first display, or may not display the first display.

Note that the configuration in which the operation unit itself includes the display unit may be applied, or the configuration in which the display unit itself includes the operation unit may be applied.

The first display may include only the operation valid period display, or may include a display other than the operation valid period display. Further, the first display may necessarily include the operation valid period display, or may not include the operation valid period display.

The operation valid period display may be a gauge display, a timer countdown display, or a display mode that is switched before and after the operation of the operation means.

Further, the first display may include only the first notice display, or may include a display other than the first notice display. Further, the first display may necessarily include the first notice display, or may not include the first notice display.

Further, the first display may be such that the operation valid period display becomes the first notice display only when the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started. The operation valid period display may be the first notice display in response to a matter other than the operation means being operated after the valid period is started. Further, in response to the operation means being operated after the operation valid period is started, the operation valid period display may be always the first notice display, or the operation valid period is started. In some cases, the operation valid period display may not be the first notice display in response to the operation means being operated later.

In addition, the first notice display may be configured to include only the operation valid period display, or may be configured to include a display other than the operation valid period display. Further, the first notice display may be configured to always include the operation valid period display, or may be configured to not include the operation valid period display.

Further, the first notice display can be applied not only to the display on the display device but also to the notice production by the output of voice, the notice production by the action of the production movable body, and the notice production by the light emission of the lamp.

In addition, “the first notice display is a notice display that is started in a display mode according to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started [for example, in FIG. 248 (15). As shown, the length of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT on which the mini character BCH of the length when the effect button 136 is operated is the length corresponding to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the display mode of the first notice display differs depending on the timing at which the operation means is operated, so that the display of the first notice display can be made more diverse, and the effect of production is improved. There are cases.

Here, the first notice display may be a display that can be started only in a display mode according to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started, or the operation valid period is started. After that, the display may be started in a display mode other than the display mode according to the timing at which the operation unit is operated. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in a display mode according to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started, or after the operation valid period is started. There may be a case where the display is not started in the display mode according to the timing at which the operation unit is operated.

In addition, “the first notice display is a notice display that is displayed only for a period corresponding to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started [for example, FIG. 248 (15) to FIG. As shown in (18), the button reception time meter MT on which the miniature character BCH having the length is displayed is displayed until the remaining amount of the gauge is exhausted. That is, the button reception time meter MT displaying the mini character BCH having the longest length is displayed until the time corresponding to the operation valid period elapses after the effect button 136 is operated, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, for example, the earlier the timing at which the operation means is operated, the longer the first notice display can be seen, so that the operation of the operation means can be promoted in some cases.

Here, the first notice display may be one that can be displayed only during a period corresponding to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started, or after the operation valid period is started. It may be displayable during a period other than the period corresponding to the timing at which the operating device is operated. The first notice display may be always displayed in a period corresponding to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started, or the operation means may be displayed after the operation valid period is started. It may not be displayed in a period according to the timing when was operated.

In addition, “the first notice display is a notice display whose display mode changes according to the passage of time [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248(15) to (17), a miniature character BCH The display mode of the button reception time meter MT with is changed such that the gauge decreases in accordance with the time from the start of the operation valid period, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the display mode of the first notice display changes with the passage of time, so that the first notice display may be able to be focused on.

Here, the first notice display may be such that the display mode can be changed only in accordance with the passage of time, or the display mode can be changed in any other manner than in accordance with the passage of time. It may be. Further, the first notice display may be one in which the display mode always changes with the passage of time, or the display form may not change with the passage of time.

Further, “The operation valid period display is a display whose display mode changes according to the passage of time [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248(12) to (14), the button reception time meter MT is The display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the effective operation period],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the display mode of the operation valid period display changes with the lapse of time, so that the operation valid period display may be able to be focused.

Here, the operation valid period display may be such that the display mode can be changed only in accordance with the passage of time, or the display mode can be changed in any other manner than in accordance with the passage of time. May be. In addition, the display mode of the operation valid period may always change with time, or the display mode may not change with time.

In addition, “one of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 248(4) to FIG.

The second display is the operation valid period display [for example, the display of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248(4) to (5)],

The second display is a display that is erased when the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248(4) to (6), The button reception time meter MT is erased when the production button 136 is operated while the display is being performed in a manner showing the remaining time of the operation valid period of the production button 136, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the second display is erased when the operation means is operated, so that it may be possible to pay attention to the second display when the operation means is operated.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the second display. Further, the display means may always display the second display, or may not display the second display.

In addition, the second display may be configured to include only the operation valid period display, or may be configured to include a display other than the operation valid period display. Further, the second display may be configured to always include the operation valid period display, or may be configured to not include the operation valid period display.

Further, the second display may be erased only when the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started, or the operation means is displayed after the operation valid period is started. It may be erased even when it is not operated. In addition, the second display may be always deleted when the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started, or when the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started. However, it may not be erased.

In addition, “one of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, button reception time meter MT and the like shown in FIG. 248(4) to (5)],
The first display and the second display are different displays,

The second display is a display that may include the operation valid period display [for example, the display of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248(4) to (5), etc.],
The second display is a display that may include a first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display different from the first notice display,

The second display is a display in which the operation effective period display is the first effect display in response to the operation of the operation means after the operation effective period is started.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the second display before and after the operation of the operation means.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the second display. Further, the display means may always display the second display, or may not display the second display.

The second display may include only the operation valid period display or may include a display other than the operation valid period display. Further, the second display may necessarily include the operation valid period display, or may not include the operation valid period display.

In addition, the second display may include only the first effect display, or may include a display other than the first effect display. Moreover, the second display may necessarily include the first effect display, or may not include the first effect display.

The first effect display may be partially different from the first notice display, or may be different from the first notice display.

Further, the second display may be one in which the operation effective period display becomes the first effect display only when the operation means is operated after the operation effective period is started. The operation effective period display may be the first effect display in response to the operation other than the operation of the operation means after the effective period is started. Further, the second display may be such that the operation effective period display is always the first effect display in response to the operation means being operated after the operation effective period is started. In some cases, the operation effective period display may not be the first effect display in response to the operation means being operated after the effective period is started.

In addition, “The operation valid period display is a display by a gauge [for example, in the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248(4) to (5) and FIGS. 248(12) to (14). Button display hour gauge MT display, etc.],

The first notice display is a gauge display [for example, a gauge display in the button reception time meter MT in which the mini character BCH having the length shown in FIGS. 248 (15) to (17) is displayed].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the operation valid period display and the first notice display may be easily visible.

Here, the operation valid period display may be configured by only the gauge, or may be configured by including something other than the gauge. Further, the operation valid period display may be configured to always include the gauge, or may not include the gauge.

Further, the first notice display may be configured by only the gauge, or may be configured by including something other than the gauge. Further, the first notice display may be configured to always include the gauge, or may not include the gauge.

In addition, “the first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed during execution of a certain effect [for example, decorative pattern change display, etc.],

The certain effect is an effect configured to develop after the display of the first notice display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248(15) to (20), The decorative pattern variable display has been developed into super reach after the button reception time meter MT on which the miniature character BCH of the length is displayed is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the original operation period is used, it may be possible to focus attention on the development effect after the first notice display is shown.

Further, according to this gaming machine, the first notice display including the display regarding the operation valid period may sometimes function as a timer notice regarding the development of a certain effect.

Here, the first notice display may be displayed only during execution of a certain effect, or may be displayed during execution of an effect other than execution of a certain effect. There may be In addition, the first notice display may be always displayed during execution of a certain effect, or may not be displayed during execution of a certain effect.

Further, the certain presentation may be configured so that it may develop only after the display of the first notice display is started, or the display of the first notice display is started. It may be configured so that it may develop other than afterwards. Further, the certain effect may be configured to be always developed after the display of the first notice display is started, or may be developed after the display of the first notice display is started. You may not.

In addition, “one of the plurality of displays is a third display [for example, a step-up notice shown in FIGS. 248(15) to (17)].

The third display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation valid period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248(12) to (17), the operation display is valid). When the effect button 136 is operated after the period starts, the step-up notice is started, etc.],
The third display is a notice display,

The certain effect is configured to develop after the display of the third display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 248 (12) to FIG. , Has developed into super reach after the step-up notice was started],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the third display will be displayed.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the third display. Further, the display means may necessarily display the third display, or may not display the third display.

The third display may be displayed only when the operating means is operated during the operation valid period, or when the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period. May also be displayed. Further, the third display may be always displayed when the operating means is operated during the operation valid period, or may not be displayed when the operating means is operated during the operation valid period. Good.

Further, the third display may be configured to include only the notice display, or may be configured to include a display other than the notice display. Further, the third display may be configured to always include the advance notice display, or may be configured to not include the advance notice display.

Further, a certain display may be configured to be developed only after the third display is started, or may be developed even after the third display is not displayed. May be configured as follows. Further, a certain display may be configured to be always expanded after the display of the third display is started, or may not be expanded after the display of the third display is started.

In addition, “The third display is a display that may be displayed even if the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period [for example, as shown in FIG. 254(3) to FIG. In addition, after the operation valid period starts, the step-up notice is started even when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the notice display that starts when the operation means is operated without the operation means appears, but the first notice display cannot be seen, so that In some cases, the operation of the operation means can be promoted to see the notice display.

Here, the third display may be always displayed even if the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period, or is not displayed when the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period. There may be.

In addition, “the first display includes a second notice display [for example, a display in which a length icon and a panda icon are attached to both ends of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 253(3)]. In some cases, the second notice display is a notice display that may be displayed before the operation means is operated [for example, shown in FIG. 253(3) to FIG. 5(5)). As described above, the button reception time meter MT in the display mode in which the bancho icon and the panda icon are attached is displayed from the time when the button operation effect is started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the first display even before the operation means is operated.

Here, the first display may include only the second notice display or may include a display other than the second notice display. Further, the first display may necessarily include the second notice display, or may not include the second display.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed only before the operation means is operated, or may be displayed other than before the operation means is operated. It may be. Further, the second notice display may be always displayed before the operation means is operated, or may not be displayed before the operation means is operated.

Further, in the case where the "first notice display is displayed in the first display mode [for example, a mode in which the mini character BCH having the length is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge shown in FIG. 248(15)] There is a notice display,

The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a mode in which a princess mini character is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge]

The second notice display is displayed in a second display mode [for example, a mode in which a bang icon and a panda icon are displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 255(3)]. It is a notice display that may be,

The second notice display may be displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a mode in which a length icon is displayed at each end of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 255(11)]. It is a notice display,

The case where the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode is more than the case where the second notice display is displayed in the second display mode. The first notice display is configured to be easily displayed [for example, the button reception time is longer than when the icons displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT are a combination of a bancho icon and a panda icon. When the icons displayed at both ends of the meter MT are both long-length icons, it is easier for the mini character of the princess to be displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT, etc.],

Finally, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed, as compared to the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. [For example, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the mini character of the princess is displayed than when the mini character BCH of the length is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT] ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the second notice display functions as a notice for the first notice display, it may be possible to focus attention on the first notice display by operating the operation means.

Here, the first notice display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. May be. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or a display mode other than the third display mode may be displayed. Good. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. Good. Further, the second notice display may be always displayed in the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed only in the fourth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the fourth display mode. Good. Further, the second notice display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fourth display mode.

Further, when the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it may be configured such that only the first notice display in the third display mode may be displayed. When the notice display of is displayed in the fourth display mode, the first notice display in a display mode other than the third display mode may be displayed in some cases. Further, when the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the first notice display in the third display mode may be displayed without fail, or the second notice display may be displayed. May be displayed in the fourth display mode, the first notice display in the third display mode may not be displayed.

Further, it may be configured such that the first notice display in the third display mode may be displayed only when the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode. It may be configured such that the first notice display according to the third display mode may be displayed in a case other than the case where the notice display of is displayed in the fourth display mode.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, only the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed in the third display mode. When displayed in, there may be a case where symbols other than the jackpot symbol are finally confirmed and displayed. Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally definitely displayed, or the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode. In this case, the jackpot pattern may not be finally displayed in a finalized manner.

Further, only when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed in the third display mode. Even in the case other than the case of being displayed with, the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed.

In addition, “One of the plurality of displays is the fourth display [for example, the button image 136a in the default display mode shown in FIG. 248(12), the large button image 136aL shown in FIG. 275(29), Vibration/rotation button image 136aV etc. shown in 277(6)],
The fourth display is an operation promotion display,

The operation promotion display is a display that promotes the operation of the operation means [for example, the operation of the effect button 136 is prompted by the display of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 248(12)],

The fourth display is a notice display that may be displayed in the fifth display mode [for example, the button image 136a in the default display mode shown in FIG. 248(12)], and the fourth display. Is a sixth display mode [for example, a mode in which the deca button image 136aL of a display mode larger than the default display mode shown in FIG. 275(29) or the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 277(6) vibrates and rotates. Vibration/rotation button image 136aV, etc.], which is a notice display that may be displayed.

The first notice display may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a mode in which a mini character BCH having a length of length is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge shown in FIG. 248(15)]. Is a display,

The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a mode in which a princess mini character is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge]

When the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode, the first display according to the third display mode is more than in the case where the fourth display is displayed in the fifth display mode. Is configured to be easily displayed. [For example, when the deca button image 136aL or the vibration/rotation button image 136aV is displayed, the button reception time meter is displayed more than when the button image 136a is displayed. The mini character of the princess is easily displayed on the remaining display part of the MT gauge, etc.],

Finally, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed, as compared to the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. [For example, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the mini character of the princess is displayed than when the mini character BCH of the length is displayed on the remaining display portion of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT] ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the first notice display can be expected by the notice of the operation promotion display, the operation of the operation means can be further promoted in some cases.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fourth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display or may not display the fourth display.

Further, the fourth display may be a display including only the operation prompting display, or may include a display other than the operation prompting display. In addition, the fourth display may necessarily include the operation prompting display, or may not include the operation prompting display.

Further, the fourth display may be displayed only in the fifth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the fifth display mode. Good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the fifth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fifth display mode.

Further, the fourth display may be displayed only in the sixth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the sixth display mode. Good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the sixth display mode, or may not be displayed in the sixth display mode.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. Good. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. Good. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

Further, when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode, it may be configured such that only the first notice display in the third display mode may be displayed. When the display is displayed in the sixth display mode, the first notice display in the display mode other than the third display mode may be displayed in some cases. Further, when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode, the first notice display in the third display mode may be configured to be displayed without fail, and the fourth display may be displayed in the first display mode. When displayed in the sixth display mode, the first notice display in the third display mode may not be displayed in some cases.

Further, only when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode, the first notice display in the third display mode may be displayed in some cases. It may be configured such that the first notice display in the third display mode may be displayed even when the display is not displayed in the sixth display mode.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, only the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed in the third display mode. When displayed in, there may be a case where symbols other than the jackpot symbol are finally confirmed and displayed. Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally definitely displayed, or the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode. In this case, the jackpot pattern may not be finally displayed in a finalized manner.

Further, only when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed in the third display mode. Even in the case other than the case of being displayed with, the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed.

In addition, when the first period [for example, a period of 5 seconds from the start of the operation valid period] has elapsed without the operation means being operated after the start of the operation valid period, the operation valid period ends. Is configured as

The first notice display is displayed when the operation means is operated after a second period [for example, a period of 1 second from the start of the operation valid period] has elapsed after the operation valid period starts. The period to be performed is a fourth period [for example, a period of 4 seconds after the production button 136 is operated],

The first notice display is displayed when the operation means is operated after the lapse of a third period [for example, a period of 3 seconds after the operation valid period starts] after the operation valid period starts. The period to be performed is a fifth period [for example, a period of 2 seconds after the effect button 136 is operated].
The third period is a longer period than the second period,
The fourth period is shorter than the third period,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured such that only the operation valid period ends when the first period elapses without operating the operation means after the operation valid period starts, or after the operation valid period starts. The period other than the operation valid period may be configured to end when the first period elapses without operating the operation unit. In addition, the operation valid period may be configured to always end when the first period elapses without the operation means being operated after the operation valid period starts, or the operation valid period starts after the operation valid period starts. The operation valid period may not end when the first period elapses without operating the means.

Here, the operation valid period display may be a display for informing about the first period.

Further, the operation valid period may be configured to end when only the first period elapses without the operation means being operated after the operation valid period starts, or the operation valid period starts after the operation valid period starts. The operation valid period may end even if a period other than the first period elapses without operating the means.

The second period may be shorter than the first period or may be the same length as the first period. Further, the third period may be a period shorter than the first period, or may be a period having the same length as the first period. Further, the fourth period may be a period shorter than the first period or a period having the same length as the first period. Further, the fifth period may be a period shorter than the first period, or may be a period having the same length as the first period. Further, the second period may be longer than the fourth period, may have the same length, or may be shorter. In addition, the third period may be longer than the fifth period, may have the same length, or may be shorter.

Further, "the total length of the second period and the fourth period is the same length as the first period, or a length shorter than the first period,

The total length of the third period and the fifth period is the same length as the first period, or is shorter than the first period,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Note that the total length of the second period and the fourth period may be longer than the length of the first period, or the total length of the third period and the fifth period may be the first period. May be longer than the length of.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,

“A gaming table provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],

One of the plurality of displays is a first display [for example, a "special 2" decorative pattern or the like shown in FIG. 274(5)],

One of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, a display combining the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 274(6), etc.],

The first display is a display related to a button effect [for example, button operation effect shown in FIG. 274(6) to FIG. 274(8)],
The second display is a display related to the button effect,

The first display is a display that may be displayed as a display forming at least a part of the combination of the decorative symbols during execution of the decorative symbol variable display [for example, “decoration 3 shown in FIG. 274(5)]. -A combination of decorative patterns of "special 2-decoration 4" and a combination of decorative patterns of "special 2-special 2-special 2" shown in FIG. 277(5) may be displayed as a stop],
The second display is a display that does not constitute a combination of decorative symbols,

The first display and the second display are different displays [for example, the decorative pattern of "special 2" shown in FIG. 274(5) simply represents a button, and the word "Chance" is displayed at the top. In contrast to the display mode in which is added, the button image 136a shown in FIG. 274(6) is a display imitating the effect button 136, and the button reception time meter MT is added, and the display mode is different. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

Conventionally, the display effect by the display means has become diversified. However, in the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a display means.

In addition, according to this gaming table, it may be possible to identify whether it is once displayed as a symbol or is generated as an effect.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of displays or may not display the plurality of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display. Further, the display means may always display the first display, or may not display the first display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the second display. Further, the display means may always display the second display, or may not display the second display.

Further, the first display may be a display related to only button effects, or may be related to effects other than button effects. In addition, the first display may be always related to the button effect, or may not be related to the button effect.

Further, the second display may be a display related to only the button effect or may be related to effects other than the button effect. Further, the second display may be always related to the button effect, or may not be related to the button effect.

Further, the first display may be displayed only as a display forming at least a part of the combination of the decorative symbols during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, or the execution of the decorative symbol variable display. The display may be displayed as a display other than the display forming at least a part of the combination of the decorative patterns. Further, the first display may be always displayed as a display forming at least a part of the combination of the decorative symbols during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, or the decoration during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display. It may not be displayed as a display forming at least a part of the symbol combination.

Further, the second display may not constitute only a combination of decorative symbols, or may not constitute any other than the combination of decorative symbols. Further, the second display may not necessarily form a combination of decorative symbols, or may form a combination of decorative symbols.

Further, the first display and the second display may be partially different displays or all different displays.

The differences between the first display and the second display are, for example, differences in color, differences in lighting mode, differences in blink mode, differences in animation mode, and animation mode. Differences depending on the presence/absence (for example, presence/absence of animation of pressing a button, etc.) can be cited, but the present invention is not limited thereto.

In addition, “the button effect is an effect that is started after the first display is displayed [for example, the button operation effect shown in FIG. 274 (6) to FIG. ) Is started after the decoration pattern of "special 2" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 27, and the button operation effect shown in FIGS. 277(6) to (8) is at the timing shown in FIG. 277(5). It is started after three special symbols of "Special 2" are displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the button effect will be performed by displaying the first display.

Here, the button effect may be started only after the first display is displayed, or may be started other than after the first display is displayed. Further, the button effect may be always started after the first display is displayed, or may not be started after the first display is displayed.

In addition, "the first display is a display that can be displayed in a first number of display modes [for example, one display mode (for example, a display mode of a decorative pattern of "special 2", etc.)",

The second display is a second number display mode [for example, five display modes (for example, the display mode of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 274(6), the display of the large button image 136aL shown in FIG. 275(29). Aspect, the display mode of the vibration/rotation button image 136aV shown in FIG. 277(6), the display mode of the protruding button image 136aS shown in FIG. 279(41), and the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 281(7) are added. The display mode of the simplified button image 136aX), etc.] can be displayed.
The second number is a larger number than the first number,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the number of patterns for the first display can be reduced to make it easier to understand, while the second display can be shown as various variations such as a notice.

Here, the first display may be displayable only in the first number of display modes, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first number of display modes. .. Further, the first display may be always displayed in the first number display mode, or may not be displayed in the first number display mode.

Further, the second display may be displayable only in the second number display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second number display mode. Further, the second display may be always displayed in the second number display mode, or may not be displayed in the second number display mode.

Further, the first number and the second number may be the same number, or the second number may be smaller than the first number.
In addition, "the first number is one,
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to understand as a symbol that is once displayed by setting the number of patterns of the first display to one.
Here, the first number may be a number larger than one or may be zero.

In addition, as a result of the decorative pattern variable display, a combination of three decorative symbols is configured to be stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 277 (10), the decorative pattern variable display result, the left symbol・A decorative pattern is displayed on each of the middle pattern and the right pattern, and the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed],

The button effect is started when a combination of three first displays is displayed as a combination of decorative symbols during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”). [For example, in the button operation effect shown in FIGS. 277 (6) to (8), decorative symbols “special 2” are displayed on the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, respectively, and “special 2-special” is displayed. 2-Special 2” is started when the display is stopped with a combination of decorative symbols],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to understand that a button effect may be performed.

Here, as a result of the decorative pattern variable display, only the combination of the three decorative patterns may be configured to be stopped and displayed, or as a result of the decorative pattern variable display, a combination other than the combination of the three decorative patterns is also stopped. It may be configured to be displayed. In addition, as a result of the decorative pattern variable display, the combination of three decorative patterns may be configured to be stopped and displayed, or as a result of the decorative pattern variable display, the combination of three decorative patterns may not be stopped and displayed. It may be configured as is.

Further, the combination of the three decorative patterns may be configured to be stopped and displayed only in the result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, and the combination of the three decorative symbols may be stopped in addition to the result of the variable display of the decorative symbols. It may be configured to be displayed.

Further, the button effect may be started only when the combination of the three first displays is displayed as the combination of the decorative symbols during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, or the decorative symbol variable display. During execution of the above, it may be started in a case other than the case where the combination of the three first displays is displayed as the combination of the decorative symbols. Further, the button effect may be always started when the combination of the three first displays is displayed as the combination of the decorative symbols during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, or the decorative symbol variable display. In the execution of, there may be a case where it is not started when the combination of the three first displays is displayed as the combination of the decorative symbols.

Further, the button effect may be started only when the decorative symbol variable display is being executed, when it is displayed in the combination of the three first displays as the combination of the decorative symbols, or the decorative symbol variable display. Other than during the execution of, may be started when a combination of three first displays is displayed as a combination of decorative symbols.

Further, in the "first case, at least a part of the display mode of at least one of the three first displays is different from the display mode of the other first display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 283(5), the "special 2" decorative pattern on the left symbol and the "special 2" decorative symbol on the middle symbol have a banquet mini-character BCH added to them, but on the right symbol Panda mini character PND is added to the decorative pattern of "Special 2", etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to prevent misunderstanding that all the symbols have become a big hit.

Here, in the first case, the display mode of one of the three first displays may be partially different from the display mode of the other two first displays, In the first case, the display mode of the first display of one of the three first displays may be entirely different from the display mode of the other two first displays.

In the first case, the display mode of the two first displays of the three first displays may be partially different from the display mode of the other one first display, or In one case, the display mode of two first displays of the three first displays may be entirely different from the display mode of the other first display.

Further, in the first case, the display modes of all the first displays of the three first displays may be partially different, and in the first case, the three first displays. All of the display modes of the first display may be different from each other.

In the first case, the display modes of all the first displays of the three first displays may be exactly the same.

In addition, as a result of the decorative symbol variable display, a combination of three decorative symbols is configured to be stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 275 (34), the result of the decorative symbol variable display, the left symbol・A decorative pattern is displayed for each of the middle pattern and the right pattern, and the combination of the decorative patterns “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed],

In the decorative design variable display, the three decorative designs are configured to be sequentially displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 275 (26), first, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left design. As shown in FIG. 275(27), subsequently, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and finally, as shown in FIG. 275(33), "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Etc.],

The button effect is an effect that is started when the first display is displayed as the last decorative pattern to be displayed among the three decorative patterns during execution of the decorative pattern variable display [eg, 274(6) to (8) in FIG. 274, the button operation effect is, as shown in FIG. 274(3) to (5), the decoration symbol of "special 2" in the middle symbol which is the third stop. Is started when is displayed], etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to understand that a button effect may be performed.

Here, as a result of the decorative pattern variable display, only the combination of the three decorative patterns may be configured to be stopped and displayed, or as a result of the decorative pattern variable display, a combination other than the combination of the three decorative patterns is also stopped. It may be configured to be displayed. In addition, as a result of the decorative pattern variable display, the combination of three decorative patterns may be configured to be stopped and displayed, or as a result of the decorative pattern variable display, the combination of three decorative patterns may not be stopped and displayed. It may be configured as is. Further, the combination of the three decorative patterns may be configured to be stopped and displayed only in the result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, and the combination of the three decorative symbols may be stopped in addition to the result of the variable display of the decorative symbols. It may be configured to be displayed.

Further, in the decorative design variable display, only three decorative designs may be configured to be sequentially displayed, or in the decorative design variation display, designs other than the three decorative designs may be configured to be sequentially displayed. Good. Further, in the decorative pattern variable display, the three decorative patterns may be configured to be sequentially displayed, or in the decorative pattern variable display, the three decorative patterns may not be sequentially displayed. Good.

Further, the three decorative symbols may be sequentially displayed only in the decorative symbol variable display, or the three decorative symbols may be sequentially displayed in addition to the decorative symbol variable display. Good.

Further, the button effect may be started only when the first display is displayed as the last decorative pattern to be displayed among the three decorative symbols during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display. However, during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, it may be started in a case other than the case where the first display is displayed as the last decorative symbol of the three decorative symbols. In addition, the button effect may be started without fail when the first display is displayed as the last decorative design of the three decorative designs during the execution of the decorative design variable display. However, it may not be started when the first display is displayed as the last decorative pattern to be displayed among the three decorative patterns during the execution of the decorative pattern variable display.

Note that the button effect may be started when the first display is displayed as the first decorative pattern to be displayed out of the three decorative patterns during the execution of the decorative pattern variable display, or the decorative pattern fluctuation During the execution of the display, it may be started when the first display is displayed as the second decorative design displayed among the three decorative designs, or during the execution of the decorative design variable display, three It may be started when the first display is displayed as two of the decorative patterns.

In addition, “the display means gives an advance notice that the first display may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variable display (hereinafter, “third advance notice display [for example, FIG. In the mini games shown in FIGS. 274(13) to (15), the mini game succeeds and the icon of the button appears, so that the decorative symbol of "special 2" may be stopped and displayed in the symbol variable display. , Etc.]”).

The case where the third notice display is displayed is configured to be easier to display the first display than the case where the third notice display is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give an expectation to the display of the first display.

Here, the display means may display only the third notice display during execution of the decorative symbol variable display, or the third notice display during execution of the decorative symbol variable display. Other displays may also be displayed. The display means may always display the third notice display during execution of the decorative symbol variable display, or the third notice display during execution of the decorative symbol variable display. It may not be displayed.

Further, the display means may display the third notice display only during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, or the third notice even when the decorative symbol variable display is not being performed. The display may be displayed in some cases.

Further, when the third notice display is displayed, only the first display may be displayed, and when the third notice display is displayed, the first notice may be displayed. A display other than the display may be displayed in some cases. Further, when the third notice display is displayed, the first display may be configured to be displayed, or even when the third notice display is displayed, the first display is displayed. It may be configured so that it may not be performed.

Further, the first display may be displayed only when the third notice display is displayed, or in the case other than the case where the third notice display is displayed. , The first display may be displayed.

In addition, “the decorative pattern variable display is configured such that after the variation of the decorative pattern is started, the combination of the decorative patterns according to the result of the hit/miss judgment is confirmed and displayed [for example, FIG. 274(1) As shown in (11) of the same figure, after the variation of the decorative design is started, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special figure 1 is a loss, there is a loss such as "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7". The combination of decorative patterns is fixedly displayed, etc.],
The first display is a display that is not confirmed and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to prevent misunderstanding that it may be included in a combination of decorative symbols.

Here, the decorative symbol variable display may be configured such that after the variation of the decorative symbol is started, only the combination of the decorative symbols depending on the result of the hit determination may be fixedly displayed. After the variation of the symbols is started, a combination other than the combination of the decorative symbols depending on the result of the hit/miss determination may be confirmed and displayed. Further, the decorative pattern variable display may be configured such that after the variation of the decorative symbol is started, the combination of the decorative symbols according to the result of the hit/miss judgment is definitely displayed, and the variation of the decorative symbol is started. After that, it may be configured so that the combination of decorative symbols depending on the result of the hit/no decision may not be confirmed and displayed.

Further, the decorative design variable display may be configured such that the combination of decorative designs depending on the result of the winning/disapproval determination is fixedly displayed only after the variation of the decorative design is started, and the variation of the decorative design is started. Other than after, the combination of the decorative symbols according to the result of the hit/miss determination may be configured to be fixedly displayed.

Further, the first display may not be fixedly displayed only as a combination of decorative symbols, or may not be definitely displayed as a combination other than the combination of decorative symbols. Further, the first display may not necessarily be definitely displayed as a combination of decorative symbols, or may be definitely displayed as a combination of decorative symbols.

In addition, “operating means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position operable by the player is provided,

The button effect is an effect using the operation means, and the first display is a display imitating the operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 274(5), "special 2" The decorative pattern is a display that includes, for example, a button in a simplified form,

The second display is a display including a display imitating the operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 274(6), the button image 136a is represented in a mode imitating the effect button 136, etc.]. ,
A game table characterized by that.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to recognize that the effect is produced by the operating means by displaying the first display and the second display.

Here, the operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be a position where the player may not operate.

Note that any operation device such as a button, a lever, a cross key, a touch panel, or a touch sensor can be applied as the operation means. Here, regarding these operation devices, although the first display is not prepared, there may be one prepared for the second display, for example, a first model imitating a lever as an operating means. Although the display of No. is not prepared, the second display may be prepared.

Further, the button effect may be an effect using only the operating means or an effect using a means other than the operating means. Further, the button effect may be an effect that always uses the operating means, or may not use the operating means.

Further, the first display may be a display including only a display imitating the operating means, or a display including a display other than the display imitating the operating means. Further, the first display may be a display that necessarily includes a display imitating the operation means, or may not include a display imitating the operation means.

Further, the second display may be a display including only a display imitating the operating means, or a display including a display other than the display imitating the operating means. Further, the second display may be a display that necessarily includes a display imitating the operating means, or may not include a display imitating the operating means.

In addition, "the first display is a display that does not include a display related to the operation valid period of the operation means [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 274(6)],

The second display is a display including a display relating to an operation valid period of the operation means in the button effect [for example, a button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 274(6)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to easily distinguish between the first display and the second display.

Here, the first display may not include only the display relating to the operation valid period of the operating means, or may not include the display other than the display relating to the operation valid period of the operating means. Further, the first display may not necessarily include a display regarding the operation valid period of the operating means, or may include a display regarding the operation valid period of the operating means.

Further, the second display may include only a display regarding the operation effective period of the operating means in the button effect, or may include a display other than the display regarding the operation effective period of the operating means in the button effect. Good. Further, the second display may necessarily include a display regarding the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect, or may not include a display regarding the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect. ..

In addition, “The first display is a display that is displayed before the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect is started [for example, in FIG. 274 (5) to FIG. As shown, the decorative pattern of "special 2" is stopped and displayed in the middle pattern before the button operation effect is started],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
According to this gaming table, it may be possible to easily recognize that the button effect is being performed.

Here, the first display may be displayed only before the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect is started, or the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect is started. It may be displayed other than before. Further, the first display may be always displayed before the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect is started, or the operation effective period of the operation means in the button effect is started. It may not be displayed before.

In addition, "the operation means is a means that can take any one of a plurality of states,

One of the plurality of states is a first state [for example, a default (normal) state of the effect button 136, etc.],

One of the plurality of states is a second state [for example, a state in which the effect button 136 is vibrating and rotating, etc.],
The first state and the second state are different states,

The first display is a display displayed in the first display mode [for example, the display mode of “special 2” shown in FIG. 274(5)],

The second display is a display that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, the display mode (default display mode) of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 274(6)],

The second display is the third display mode [for example, the display mode of the vibration/rotation button image 136aV shown in FIG. 277(6) (display mode showing how the effect button 136 is vibrating and rotating), etc.]. It is a display that may be displayed with,
The second display mode and the third display mode are different display modes,

The first display mode is a display mode according to the operating means in the first state,

The second display mode is a display mode according to the operating means in the first state,

The third display mode is a display mode according to the operation means in the second state,

The first display is a display that is not displayed in a display mode corresponding to the operation means in the second state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 277(5) to (7), the effect button 136 is displayed. The display state of "Special 2" has not changed even when the machine takes a state of vibrating and rotating.],

When the second display is displayed in the third display mode in the button effect after the first display is displayed in the first display mode (hereinafter, “second case [for example, After the "special 2" is displayed in FIG. 277(5), the button operation effect is started in FIG. 277(6), and in this button operation effect, the vibration/rotation button image 136aV may be displayed. Etc.]”).

The operation means is a means that is more likely to be in the second state than in the first state in the second case,
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

Here, the operation means may be capable of taking only one of the plurality of states, or may be a state other than any one of the plurality of states. It may be anything. Further, the operation means may be one that always takes one of the plurality of states, or may not take one of the plurality of states.

Further, the operating means may be one that can take only the first state and the second state, or one that can take a state other than the first state and the second state. It may be. Further, the operating means may be one that always takes the first state and the second state, or may not take the first state and the second state.

It should be noted that the first state and the second state are not limited to those showing only the external state of the operating means, and for example, those showing the internal control state regarding the operating means are also included in the present invention. For example, as the states applicable to the first state and the second state, a state in which a single pressing of the operating means is accepted, a state in which a continuous hitting operation of the operating means is accepted, or a long press operation of the operating means The state of accepting is also included. More specifically, for example, even if the first state is a state in which a single pressing of the operating means is accepted and the second state is a state in which a continuous hitting operation or a long pressing operation of the operating means is accepted. Good.

Further, the first state and the second state may be different from each other in a part of the states or may be different from all of the states.

Further, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. Further, the first display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Moreover, the second display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. Further, the second display may be always displayed in the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

The second display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. Further, the second display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

Further, the second display mode and the third display mode may be different in part of the display mode or may be different in all of the display modes.

Further, the first display mode may be a display mode corresponding only to the operating means in the first state, or a display mode corresponding to something other than the operating means in the first state. Good. In addition, the first display mode may be a display mode that always corresponds to the operation unit in the first state, or may be a display mode that does not correspond to the operation unit in the first state. Good.

Further, the second display mode may be a display mode corresponding to only the operating means in the first state, or a display mode corresponding to something other than the operating means in the first state. Good. Further, the second display mode may be a display mode that always corresponds to the operating means in the first state, or may be a display mode that does not correspond to the operating means in the first state. Good.

Further, the third display mode may be a display mode corresponding to only the operation means in the second state, or a display mode corresponding to something other than the operation means in the second state. Good. In addition, the third display mode may be a display mode that always corresponds to the operation means in the second state, or may be a display mode that does not correspond to the operation means in the second state. Good.

Further, the first display may not be displayed only in a display mode corresponding to the operating means in the second state, or a display mode other than the display mode corresponding to the operating means in the second state. However, it may not be displayed. Further, the first display may not necessarily be displayed in the display mode corresponding to the operating means in the second state, or may be displayed in the display mode corresponding to the operating means in the second state. There may be.

In addition, after the first display is displayed in the first display mode, the second display may be displayed only in the third display mode in the button effect, and the first display mode may be displayed. After the first display is displayed in, the second display may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode in the button effect. In addition, after the first display is displayed in the first display mode, there may be a case where the second display is always displayed in the third display mode in the button effect, or the first display mode. After the first display is displayed, the second display may not be displayed in the third display mode in the button effect.

Further, the second display may be displayed in the third display mode in the button effect only after the first display is displayed in the first display mode, or the first display mode. Even when the second display is not displayed after the first display is displayed, the second display may be displayed in the third display mode in the button effect.

Further, the operating means may be one that is likely to be in only the second state in the second case, or may be one that is likely to be in a state other than the second state in the second case. Further, the operating means may be always in the second state in the second case, or may not be in the second state in the second case.

Further, the operating means may be one that is more likely to be in the second state than in the first state only in the second case, and in the cases other than the second case, the second state is more than the first state. It may be one that easily becomes a state.

It should be noted that the display modes applicable as the first display mode, the second display mode and the third display mode can be appropriately adopted, and for example, the display mode of the deca button, the display mode of different colors, and the like. It is possible to employ a display mode that lights up, a display mode that blinks, a display mode using animation, and the like.

In addition, “when the operating means is in the second state, the final jackpot symbol is easier to be finalized and displayed than when the operating means is not in the second state.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the operating means will be in the second state.

Here, when the operation means is in the second state, only the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and when the operation means is in the second state, the final There may be a case where symbols other than the jackpot symbol are confirmed and displayed. Also, when the operation means is in the second state, the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and when the operation means is in the second state, the big hit symbol is finally confirmed. It may not be displayed.

Further, only when the operation means is in the second state, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally confirmed and displayed, and also when the operation means is not in the second state. In some cases, the big hit symbol may be finally displayed.
It may be displayed.

For example, the above embodiment can be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses the game balls enclosed in the game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses balls and circulates the enclosed balls in the pachinko machine for use.This enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed balls as a launch ball, The payout of the balls may be performed by an electronic display.
FIG. 286 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 1000 shown in FIG. 286, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium shot from the launching means 1001 to the game area 1002 is discharged from the game area 1002 and can be supplied to the launching means 1001 again. Further, display means 1003 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, ball rental, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 1002 on the front surface of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 201 are not provided.

It is to be noted that a mode in which the display means 1003 described above is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 201 may be adopted, and this display means 1003 is further provided with a touch panel. May be. That is, the touch panel provided on the display unit 1003 can function as an operation unit. Then, the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, continuous hitting operation, or long-pressing operation on the touch panel, or when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, It may be configured such that the pseudo continuous tapping operation is performed on the touch panel in a state where the touch panel is continuously touched. Further, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be set to an effective state. Further, in some of the effects, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In other words, in the touch panel, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be activated, may not be activated, or may be configured to have many effects to be activated, or may be configured to have few effects. .. In addition, when there are a plurality of effects by the continuous tapping operation on the touch panel, and when the touch panel is used, the long press automatic continuous tapping function may not be in an effective state in many cases, or may be configured in a small number. ..

As described above, the pachinko machine 1000 shown in FIG. 286 encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine for use. May be performed by credit.

Further, the term of the notice icon explained so far is given for the sake of convenience, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, the notice icon is named for convenience according to the display mode (motif). When the notice icon is a tool, it may be called a notice item, and when the notice icon is a character, it is called a notice character. In some cases, when the notice icon indicates a skill, it may be called a notice skill, and when the notice icon is a box, it may be called a notice box. , Notice medal). In addition, the term “preliminary notice” in the notice icons is given only for convenience and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, it may be referred to as a charge item or a stock item for indicating that it is to be stored.

Further, what has been called a lamp or an illumination so far is an example of a light emitting means, and the lamp can be replaced as long as it emits light such as an LED or a cold cathode tube.
The matters described in the above detailed description can be combined.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. It should be noted that even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and supplements, the constituent requirements may be applied to other embodiments, modifications, and supplements.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention can also be applied to the slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.

The gaming table according to the present invention corresponds to "a plurality of reels 1002 which are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel, as shown in FIG. 287. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, a lottery means (internal winning lottery) for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is achieved by a lottery, and a lottery result of the lottery means. The reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control related to the stop of the rotation of the reel, and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means correspond to the winning combination internally. And a determination means (prize determination process) for determining whether or not it is a predetermined symbol combination, and when the stop mode of the symbol is a predetermined prize mode, a game medium for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined prize mode In addition to the payout control means (medal payout processing 1008) for performing the medium payout processing, in addition to a production means 1010 for executing an effect based on the lottery result of the lottery means, this production means places a ball in a predetermined game area 1012. A launching device 1014 for launching, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detecting means 1018 for detecting a ball entering the winning opening 1016, and a detecting means 1018 detecting the ball. In the case of doing, a payout means 1020 for paying out a sphere, a variable display device 1022 that variably displays a predetermined symbol (identification information), a shutter 1024 movable to a position that shields the variable display device 1022, and a predetermined operation mode. The movable device 1026, which is provided with, and when the game ball enters the winning opening and wins the prize, the variable display device 1022 causes the variable display 1022 to change the symbol and then stop the display to render the game. It is also suitable for the slot machine 1000″.

The gaming table according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 288(a), "A banknote is inserted into the banknote slot 2002, a lottery is executed based on a bet 2004 and a start 2006 operation, and a lottery result is displayed on a lottery result display device 2008." However, at the time of winning, the bonus coin number is added to the remaining credit number, and when the cash out 2009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 2010 issues a receipt in which a code corresponding to the remaining credit number is issued 2000" May be

Further, as shown in FIG. 2B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and electronic data that realizes the present invention as shown in FIG. May be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the above, and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for implementing the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 1B has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data about a game through a mobile phone line, and data about the acquired game (book). A storage unit that stores electronic data for implementing the invention) and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

The portable game machine 4000 shown in FIG. 7C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired game-related data (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The household video game machine 5000 in FIG. 6D has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data about the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and data about the acquired game ( A storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 7E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data for implementing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game console 5000 shown in FIG.

Further, the present invention can be applied to execute a game even in a game program in which the operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine is simulated for a home game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used.

Furthermore, although the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as an example of a game table, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball game machine, a smart ball, or the like.
<<Fourth Embodiment>>

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 289 to FIG. 336, another game table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) applicable to the present invention will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 289 to 336 are basically used only in the description using FIGS. 289 to 336, and even if duplicate reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. In the description using FIG. 336, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 289 to 336 are given priority.
<Overall structure>

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. 289. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table that allows a player to obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage tray door 108, and a launch. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is a vertically rectangular game machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A store clerk in a store (gaming store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 is opened is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and to be opened and closed, and is configured by a frame shape to form an inner side thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The clerk of the game shop can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In addition, in this embodiment, a light source having an LED is also called a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage dish is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pressing an opening lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage dish which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage dish opened. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “ball”) and provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launch device 110. , A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 to be launched into the game area 124, an effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 291) by the operation of the player, and an effect button 136 built in the effect button 136. Chance button lamp 138 for emitting a light, a ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit. A return operation button 142 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit are provided. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 289 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is filled with a game ball. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided. This launching device 110 sends a game ball to the game area 124 of the game board at every elapse of a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the player continuously operates the ball firing handle 134. It is fired toward and corresponds to an example of a firing means. Note that a right-hand hit button capable of maximizing the firing strength by pushing down the ball firing handle 134 may be provided.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed through the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is omitted in FIG. 289, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

FIG. 290 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 289 seen from the back side. At the upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100, a ball tank 150 that has an opening that opens upward and temporarily stores game balls, and is located below the ball tank 150, and at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in rear view.

The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have temporarily stayed are delivered one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that gives a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal, when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is given a predetermined amount. Based on the satisfaction of the condition, the player is provided (paid) with a game value (game ball) in an amount according to the given condition.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 which constitutes a main control section 300 (see FIG. 292) for performing control processing of the whole game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-board 400 (see FIG. 292) that performs control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 292) that performs control processing related to the effect, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of gaming balls ( (See FIG. 292) and a payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 that includes an error canceling switch 168 that cancels an error by the operation of a game shop clerk, and a firing control unit 630 (FIG. 292) that performs control processing relating to the firing of a game ball. (See FIG. 292) and a power supply control unit 660 (see FIG. 292) that supplies power to various electric amusement machines, and a power switch that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game shop clerk. 178 and a power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 including a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and signals of the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. A CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving is provided.
FIG. 291 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front.

An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the substantial center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary The symbol reserve lamp 216, the first special symbol reserve lamp 218, the second special symbol reserve lamp 220, and the high-precision middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as a "universal symbol", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later.

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

The general figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative design displayed on the decorative design display device 208 is a design representing the design displayed on the first special design display device 212 or the second special design display device 214 in a form that enhances the effect. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of a predetermined first variable game (a detailed figure variable game which will be described later in detail) that is being held, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of variable figure games. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

The 1st special figure reservation lamp 218 and the 2nd special figure reservation lamp 220 are the lamps for showing the number of the predetermined 2nd variation game which has been reserved (details variation game which details are mentioned later), this execution. In the form, it is possible to hold the special figure variation game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight if the first special figure and the second special figure are combined). The term "hold" here means to hold the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on start information described later.

The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notifying means) for making a notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-accuracy lamp 222 is configured to be informed that the current symbol control state is not notified after the power is turned on until the big hit game is started, and thereafter not to be informed. There is. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but as the symbol control state here, it may be any of the normal state, the time saving state (electric power support state), and the probability variation state, and the state with the special symbol probability variation and It may be one of the states in which there is no change in the special figure.

In the present specification, the term "control state" is used to describe a state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100), but the term "control state" includes the concept of a so-called gaming state. In addition, a general winning opening 226, a universal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the effect device 206. ing.

In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering this general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 290 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 289 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player may be referred to as "prize balls" and the balls to be lent to the player may be referred to as "rental balls" in consideration of the prize. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

In this embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 290 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls. Along with discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of itself does not change.

In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is provided below the first special figure starting port 230. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232. It corresponds to a variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (den Chu). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning the prize in the second special figure starting port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232 with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the closed state of the pair of blade members 2321 is an opening/closing mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure variation game is won and the universal figure display device 210 hits and displays the symbols as a stop, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, to the second special figure starting port 232. The ball can be entered (the prize winning state is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is the state where the prize is easy. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 has either one of a small size (corresponding to the first size) and a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball). It is a variable starting region in which the easiness of entering a game ball is variable, which changes from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting region. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are open, of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special region that is the variable starting region is more than the game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230 that is the fixed starting region. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or less than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning port 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 that can open and close the variable winning opening with a solenoid. The variable winning opening is sometimes called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 is sometimes called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball is easier to enter the variable winning opening than the closed state to the other state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state, and the closed state in the variable winning port 234 of the present embodiment is such that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state of the variable winning port 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 becomes substantially vertical to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning port 234 maintains the closed state until the big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly closed to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a state in which it is completely closed. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 291, as long as the gaming ball passes or enters to win the gaming ball. When the special figure variation game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

The balls contained in the upper plate 126 are supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the launch rod 146 and the launch mall 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize (general winning hole 226, variable winning hole 234) or the starting hole. Outgoing outlet 240 by winning in (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), without winning any winning port or starting port, or only passing through universal figure starting port 228. To reach.
<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. .. Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp exit 242b or a ball ridden by a game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm portion 224a to a shoulder position and an elbow of an elbow. An unillustrated forearm motor for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The production movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the respective inner ends overlap. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the lattice holes, or the shoji part of the lattice holes may be closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portion of the lattice holes may be completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 may be made completely invisible. Good.

Decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 289, the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect movable member 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 291 correspond to the effect means, and among these, the decorative pattern display device 208. Corresponds to an example of the decorative pattern display means.

Further, on the game board 200, a specification sticker 290 showing the specifications of the game table is attached at a position visible to the player.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a main sub-control unit that responds to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300. In addition, a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. There is.

First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, the number of times, etc., a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing, and a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (this circuit includes two counters). Is equipped with. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. The random value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value within a range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

In addition, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through each of the starting port, the winning port, and the variable winning port, and a lower plate full tank sensor. However, a sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result or the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 in the basic circuit 302, the random value generation circuit 318, and the like, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the first special figure display device 212 or the first special symbol display device 212. 2 A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the universal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the universal figure holding lamp 216, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, the high accuracy medium lamp 222, and the like, and a predetermined movable member, for example, an ordinary electric accessory. For controlling various solenoids 332 including a driving means for driving the tongue member 2321 of the second special figure starting opening 232, a driving means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable winning a prize opening 234 as a special electric accessory, and the like. The driving circuit 334 and the driving circuit 334 are connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and the latched value is the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the value storage register. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is similarly set. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in the above.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is provided with the voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 outputs the start signal output circuit 340 from the start signal output circuit 340. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started). Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. It is possible to communicate with the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured to be unable to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300 from the first sub control unit 400. doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by bidirectional communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to send a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured to be unable to send a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Good.

Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times, and the like. The serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs. Alternatively, the ROM 406 may be included in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game underframe lamp 452. Then, lighting control by serial communication is performed between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246. The sensor circuit 428 and the volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 is provided with various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the shielding device 246, the production movable body 224, and the like, and a button sensor 426 that detects pressing of various buttons that form the production button 136 and the operation key unit 137. The detection signal is output to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on this control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time and the number of times, and a CPU 504. VDP (video display processor) 516 which reads out the image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 on the basis of the signal from the ROM 506 and generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 to display the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. And are equipped with. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is connected to a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

Next, the payout controller 600, the launch controller 630, and the power controller 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on the control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of ball rentals. Ball rental information indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout controller 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 has opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 has opened, and the like. When the sensor is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The firing control unit 630 is a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 for instructing to permit or stop firing, and a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134 outputs the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player. Control of the firing solenoid 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the firing mallet 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 that supplies a ball from the upper plate 126 to the firing device 110, based on a control signal that indicates the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 and the like) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off (for example, a power storage circuit) (for example, , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply controller 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout controller 600 and the second sub controller 500, and the payout controller 600 fires the main controller 300 and the second sub controller 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIG. 293(a) to (d), the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described.

The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first starting mouth sensor which is the ball detection sensor detects that the sphere has entered the special opening 1 starting mouth 230, and the ball enters the special opening 2 starting aperture 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on condition that the second starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor has detected that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variation display of special figure 1" (special figure Fluctuating game). Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure fluctuation game). Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 has elapsed, the first special figure display device 212 displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 in a stopped manner, and the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 2 When, passes, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of special figure. The variable display of this special map may be continuously performed multiple times.

FIG. 293(a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. In FIG. 293(a), nine types of special maps from "special map A" to "special map I" are shown. In FIG. 293(a), the white parts in the figure show the positions of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts are the positions of the segments that are turned on.

In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols (“special symbol A” to “special symbol G”) are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special symbol. "Special map A" is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, 15R probable big hit pattern that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "Special map B" is a 15R jackpot pattern. So, while 5 out of 15 rounds can be expected to win coins, the remaining rounds cannot be expected to win coins, which is a real 5R probability variable jackpot design. "Special map C" is a 15R jackpot design. There is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) design that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "Special drawing D" is a 15R jackpot design, 8 out of 15 rounds. You can expect to win balls in one round, but you cannot expect to win balls in the remaining rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB. You can expect to win balls in the rounds, but you can't expect to win balls in the remaining rounds. It is a real 4R-RUB, "Special Figure F" is a 5R normal jackpot design, and "Special Figure G" is a 2R jackpot. It is a 2R probability variation big hit symbol that is called a latent probability variation or hidden probability variation that cannot be expected to win a ball in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a jackpot that directs the player in a manner in which it is difficult to specify how long a round in which a win can be expected at the start of a jackpot is expected, and a particular round (for example, 5 rounds). This is a jackpot that creates a form that encourages the player whether or not the round in which the winning of balls can be expected to continue continues when the player's eyes or the ninth round) are reached.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, determination of whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the regular jackpot and the probability jackpot is that the probability of winning the jackpot in the next special figure variation game is high (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot). Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is called a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state with a low probability is special This is called a low probability state. In addition, there is a case where the game is transferred to a time saving state (electric support state) after the big hit game is over. Here, the electric support state is a predetermined advantage that the player is higher than the non-electric support state, such as shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. The state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure (hereinafter, may be referred to as “probable probability variation”), and the state not in the short time state is referred to as a low probability state of universal figure. In this way, the electric power support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric power support state” is a state where the general map is concerned, and the “time saving state” is a state where the special figure is concerned or a state where the special figure and the special figure are concerned. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a time saving flag, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric power support state and the universal figure high probability state. It is easier to win the universal figure variation game in the universal figure high probability state than in the universal figure low probability state (normal figure probability variation). For example, the winning probability of the universal figure fluctuation game is 1/100 in the universal figure low probability state (non-electric power support state), while it increases to 99/100 in the universal figure high probability state (electric power support state). Further, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the universal figure fluctuation game becomes shorter than in the non-electric power support state (general figure variation short). For example, in the non-electric power support state, the variation time of the universal figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the power support state. In addition, in the electric power support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-electric power support state (extension of the electric charge opening period). For example, in the non-electrically-supported state, the power-chew open period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electrically-powered support state. Further, in the electrically supported state, the blade members 2321 are more likely to be opened than in the non-electrically supported state (the number of times of opening the electrically operated chew is increased). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electrically-supported state for each winning of the universal figure starting port 228 opens twice in the electrically-supported state (2 seconds open, 1 second closed, and 2 seconds again). Open). Due to the extension of the electric-chew opening period and the increase in the number of electric-chew opening times, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric power support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, particularly in a big hit game, if a game ball is picked up by an electric chu with a small number of prize balls, and the number of game balls to the variable winning port (attacker) 234 is reduced, the player may be disadvantaged. Because there is. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), all of the normal figure probabilistic change, the general figure change short, the electric chew open period extension, and the electric chew open frequency increase are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage is high, and the player may be in the power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase of the number of electric chew opening is performed to increase the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electrically-supported state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electrically-supported state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between the difficult winning state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and the easy winning state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in the easy winning state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "special map A" to "special map E" are stopped and displayed, after the big hit game that is performed thereafter is finished, the electric power support state (universal figure high probability state until the next big hit game is started. ) Is maintained and "Special map F" is stopped and displayed, after the big hit game that is performed after that, while the special map variation game is played 100 times, the electric power support state is maintained and the non-electric power is played in the 101st time. Transition to support state (universal figure low probability state). On the other hand, when the big hit without the electric support (“special figure G”) is won, the electric support state does not shift after the big hit game ends.

In this way, in this embodiment, when "special map A" to "special map E" are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map high probability general figure high probability state after the jackpot game is over. Further, when the "special map F" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map low probability general figure high probability state after the jackpot game is over. Further, when the "special map G" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map high probability general figure low probability state after the jackpot game is over.

In addition, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game balls enter a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If you do, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hitting game, the special figure low probability general figure low probability state shifts. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game after the end of the small hit game. "Special drawing H" shown in FIG. 293(a) is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening/closing mode (opening/closing frequency and opening time) of the variable winning a prize mouth 234 in the small hit game and the opening/closing mode (opening of the variable winning a prize hole 234 in the big hit game to which the "special figure G" is stopped and displayed. The number of times of opening and the time of opening are substantially the same, but they may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the time of opening may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as the lost symbol. "Special drawing I" is a lost design.

FIG. 293(b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. In FIG. 293(b), six types of special maps, “special map a” to “special map f”, are shown. Fig. e"). "Special drawing a" is a 15R big hit design, 15R probability variation big hit design that you can expect to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "Special drawing b" is a 15R big hit design, 15 It is a 15R-RUB design that can be expected to win balls in all of the rounds, and "Special Drawing c" is a 15R jackpot pattern, and is expected to win balls in 8 out of 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that you can't expect to get balls in the remaining rounds, and "Special Drawing d" is a 15R jackpot design, and you can expect to get balls in 4 out of 15 rounds. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a ball, and the "special figure e" is a 2R normal jackpot design.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as the lost symbol. “Special drawing f” is a lost design.

FIG. 293(c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first start opening sensor detects that a ball has won the special opening 1 starting opening 230 or the special opening 2 starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, or the special opening 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second starting hole sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting symbol 232. In the pattern display area, the display is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

When notifying substantially 5R probability variation big hit ("special drawing B"), 5R normal big hit ("special drawing F"), 2R normal big hit ("special drawing e"), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration" 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" A combination of ornamental patterns in which three ornamental patterns with the same numbers are arranged (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 1"). "Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Stop decoration "7". Furthermore, when notifying 15R-RUB, substance 8R-RUB, and substance 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols of the same number, and the middle symbol display area 208b is like a lord. A combination of decorative patterns that are decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 1-donor-decoration 1" or "decoration 4-donor-decoration 4") is stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying a hidden probability change (“special map G”) that is a big hit of 2R or a small hit (“special map H”), “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative patterns such as "3" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying a lost symbol of "special symbol I" or "special symbol f", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described above is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, disperse). Stop the display).

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed under the control of the first sub control unit 400.

FIG. 293(d) shows an example of a stop symbol mode of a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" which is a winning symbol and "Public figure B" which is a deviating symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the universal figure display device 210 has all seven segments illuminated and one central segment. Repeated lighting "Public variable display" (Public variable game) is performed. Then, after the change time elapses, either one of the symbols "Public symbol A" which is a hit symbol and "Public symbol B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 293(d), the white portions in the figure show the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments to be turned on. Hereinafter, the display from the start of the "variable display of the universal figure" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of the universal figure may be referred to as the variable display of the universal figure.
<Main processing of main controller>

Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 292 will be described using FIG. 294. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 292 stores a special figure random number value, a special figure round determination random number value, a special figure electric support determination random number value, and a special figure determination random number. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random number value of special figure winning, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area of the RAM 308 that stores the number of reserved special figures is sometimes referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start-up information storage unit for a special figure, which is divided into a maximum number (four in this example) of areas in which the start of the win/fail judgment (lottery) can be suspended. There is also a random number storage area for general drawings. In the special figure starting information storage unit, as will be described later, a plurality of kinds of starting information are set as one set, and these starting information are stored one by one in the winning order (holding order).

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 292 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, which has received the activation signal, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 294 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power supply that the power supply control unit 660 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in the present embodiment), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing a main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, Processing for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed. In step S109, it is determined whether the state before the power is cut off (before the power failure) is restored, and if the state before the power failure is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state) ), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a clerk at a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 290 (indicating that there has been an operation). If the RAM clear signal is on (when RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not required), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte configuration register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) or not (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal) is determined. If the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specified. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 290 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command that indicates that the power-off state has been restored, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value in the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting the interruption prohibition, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generating random number counters for respectively generating initial values of the universal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of possible numbers for the universal figure winning random number is 0 to 20, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, the value 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Main controller timer interrupt processing>

Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 295. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 292 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The partial timer interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (mainly) set so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (not to detect abnormal processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 292 including various sphere detection sensors are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence/absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 performs various operations. The data is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, the RAM 308 stores information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) two times before in each RAM detection sensor. Is read from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ) The information on the presence/absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in) is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

Further, in step S205, the presence/absence information of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, It is determined whether or not the information on the presence/absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one gaming ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process is repeated several times at very short intervals of about 2 ms. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main controller 300 shown in FIG. 292 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, there is a current detection signal). If it matches with the information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the universal figure starting opening 228. It is determined that there has been a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 234 and 226 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been won. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first starting opening sensor that detects the ball entering the first special drawing starting opening 230 matches the above winning determination pattern information, the first special drawing It is determined that there is a winning in the starting opening 230, that is, a game medium that passes through a predetermined area is detected, and the processing following the winning in the first special figure starting opening 230 is performed, but the detection signals of the past three times are detected. If the presence/absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the first special figure starting port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, a previous detection signal does not exist, and a current detection signal does not exist). After it is determined that there is a winning, it is not determined that there is a winning until the information of the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and the universal figure winning random number value and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a result obtained by obtaining a value from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100 and adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter that corresponds to the random number counter The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating the random number for winning I'll do it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for general-purpose winning random number value generation has completed one round, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has completed one cycle. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for

In step S211, an effect random number updating process is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the symbol is displayed on the universal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time to change/stop displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210. Various including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time of fluctuating/stopping, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a timer for measuring a predetermined ending effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning a prize counter updating process, when the winning holes 234 and 226 and the starting openings 230 and 232 are won, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is displayed. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

In addition, in step S217, prize winning acceptance processing is performed. In the prize receiving process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of starting information acquired here are stored as a set of starting information in an empty area of the starting information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 in accordance with the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 292 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set) and bit 6 are set in bit 7. Is the power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 are the current processing type (0-3) for encryption, and bits 0-3 are encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

In step S221, a universal figure state update process is performed. The universal figure state update process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the general figure state update processing in the middle of the general figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED which normally constitutes the symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

Further, in the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the universal figure variation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. Ordinary symbol display device 210 is configured to be in a mode, the 7-segment LED is turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be a lost symbol display mode. Turn on/off the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general-picture state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 confirms either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 293(c)) or the lost symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 293(c)). Display. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player.

Further, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal figure operation is set in the setting region, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the opening period to the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening/closing of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the universal figure variation game is a loss, the universal figure loss flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure loss flag is on, even in the universal figure state updating process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the universal figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this universal figure-related lottery process, opening/closing control of the universal figure variation game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the universal figure is inactive), and the pending universal figure variation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unselected by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the random number storage area described above. The winning judgment is performed, and when the winning is determined, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value, the universal figure display device 210 receives the common figure display device 210 from among a plurality of fluctuation times. One time during which the figure is variably displayed is selected, and this variability display time is stored as a figure variation display time in the figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is stored in the universal figure pending count storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Moreover, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

Then, the special figure prefetching process (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update processing in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on/off the drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game). In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. .. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special figure When the probability variation flag is also on and the universal figure probability variation flag is also on, any one of special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured to have the special figure e when the figure probability variation flag is off and the general figure probability variation flag is on, and the special figure f when the loss flag is on. The 7 segment LED is controlled to be turned on/off, and the setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214, 15R special big hit pattern (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal big hit pattern (special figure e), lost symbol ( The fixed display of any one of the special symbols f) is performed.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the special display 2 that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 variable game. Further, if the number of shortening times stored in the shortening number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shortening times, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, the time saving flag is turned off. Further, even during the big hit game (during the special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that it exists is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the area, in order to stand by for a predetermined winning effect production period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, for a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the big hit by the decorative pattern display device 208 is started. First, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the variable winning opening 234 is detected) The solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), the door member Is output in the open state and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234, and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information that indicates the closing period. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which is repeated at a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in the present exemplary embodiment) of opening/closing control of the door member, a predetermined end effect period (for example, Storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by for 3 seconds), that is, for a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the jackpot by the decorative pattern display device 208 is finished. The information indicating the production standby period is set in. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time saving frequency (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and is also provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving frequency storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON.

The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit is shortened. If the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure (universal figure probable variation). In the high probability state of the public figure, the probability of being hit in the general variation game is higher than in the low probability state of the universal figure. Also, in the general figure high probability state, the variation time of the general figure fluctuation game becomes shorter than in the general figure low probability state (general figure shortness). Further, in the universal figure high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state (electric chute extension). In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. The state in which any one of these Phenomenon Probability, Phenomenon Variance, and Den Chu is set is called Densapo (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, the general probability low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is a normal figure high probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 during the big hit game, many game balls in the special figure 2 starting hole 232 until the game balls enter There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be won during a big hit increases and the gambling performance increases, which is to solve this problem.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operation is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, the out flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, the description will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Special figure 2 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is inactive both, and special figure 2 which is on hold Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random number storage area. Special figure 1 related lottery process, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is in the non-operating state, and the special figure 1 which is suspended With the start condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area.

Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. If the number of pending special game 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable games relating to the pending special game 1 variable games are not performed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the determination result of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and notifies the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting opening 232. , The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting opening 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, the special figure variation game with high advantage (special figure 2 variation game in this example) is played prior to the special figure variation game with low advantage (special figure 1 variation game in this example). Therefore, it may be easy to give a difference in the degree of advantage of the gaming state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special piece) from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. FIG. 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value pair) is acquired, and based on the special figure 2 winning random value in the acquired special figure 2 starting information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, the ROM 306 It is determined whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a non-win by using the hit/miss determination table stored in (a hit/miss judgment). Then, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information and the determined hit/miss judgment result. After the variable display, the symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed are determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit/miss determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the hit determination, the obtained random number for determining the special figure variation time, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) of special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

The main control unit 300 retrieves the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, deletes the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and Figure 2 The special figure 2 reservation number in the reservation number storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is performed based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area. You may do it.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is similarly performed. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game with a high degree of advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with a low degree of advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority variation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variable game with a low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game with a high advantage, and the special figure 1 is held pending It may be the special figure 1 priority variation that is prioritized over the reservation and is digested. Also, without prioritizing either the special figure 2 variation game with a high advantage or the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, the special figure variation game related to the suspension of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started. It may be a change in the winning opening winning order that starts in order. In the starting mouth winning order variation, the maximum number of reservations is 8 regardless of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. Therefore, compared with the priority fluctuation in which the maximum number of reservations is 4 in Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, respectively. In some cases, the upper limit of the number of reservations can be increased.

Further, in the above description, the lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special map are not performed according to the state of one special map, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special map state update described above is not performed. By performing the process and the special figure-related lottery process independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, a plurality of special figures may be simultaneously changed. When a plurality of special maps are simultaneously changed in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special maps, or the lottery results of the respective special maps are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to separately display each lottery result, or one display may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special symbols. In addition, when fluctuations relating to a plurality of special maps are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped first may influence the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flag values, and a timer selected in the special figure related lottery process. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, including information such as numbers, various jackpot flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flag values, etc. are included, and winning effect start command and end In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit round number, etc. are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232, and winning at the variable winning ports 234 and 235. Including presence or absence. In the case of the prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in the prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

Further, in the above-described rotation start setting transmission process, the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-flags, special figure probability variation flags, special figure 1 related lottery processing, and special figures stored in the RAM 308 are included in the command data. 2 Set the information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, and the like. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, the command data is set with information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, such as the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening opening setting transmission processing, in the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games. Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variation games or special figure 2 variation games Set the information indicating such as.

Further, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) Prior notice information or no prior notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full tank error. .. When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, and the universal figure display device 210 and the special figure 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display sections 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I/O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I/O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input/output port is performed. After that, the state becomes HALT.

FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process (step S224) of the main controller timer interrupt process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special diagrams 1 and 2, and pre-determines the stop symbol before the winning/disapproving process, and the pre-determination result (special The prefetch result) is stored in the prefetch result storage unit (see FIGS. 297(a) to 297(c)) in the RAM 308. Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit that stores the pre-reading result of the special figure 1 and the number of special figure 1 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit are specified. A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing as 1 prefetch number is provided. In this example, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 1 pre-reading result of the highest rank (the first place) is deleted every time the number of special figure 1 pre-reading decreases by 1 and the remaining special figure 1 pre-reading result is deleted. Are processed so that the rank of the data of 1 is advanced by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 1 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 1 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 1 prefetch results having the lowest rank (last).

Further, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section for storing the special figure 2 pre-reading result and the number of special figure 2 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section are stored. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing the number is provided. In this example, the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four pre-reading results. In the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 2 pre-reading result with the highest rank is deleted and the remaining special figure 2 pre-reading result data ranks each time the number of special figure 2 pre-reading decreases by one. Are processed so as to be incremented by one. Also, each time the number of special figure 2 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 2 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 2 preread results having the lowest rank.

In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increased (step S301). Whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of prefetches. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing when the special figure 2 reserved number is larger than the special figure 2 preread number, and the special figure 2 reserved number is equal to the special figure 2 preread number. If they are the same, it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is specified before the winning/judging process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Figure 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-reading special figure 2 start information, for example, the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is set to the special figure 2 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made prior to the hit/miss determination processing in the processing (step S229). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Then, it transfers to step S307.

In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of special figure 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage. This is performed by comparing with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increased, the special figure prefetching process is ended and the main control unit is executed. Return to timer interrupt processing.

In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is not being performed (the power support is being performed (universal figure high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading advance notice includes conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electricity support.

In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (set of special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value) is specified before the winning/judgment processing in the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231). Figure 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 1 start information, and the hit determination table and the special figure decision table used at the time of hit determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is set to the special figure 1 related lottery Preliminary determination is made prior to the hit/miss determination processing in the processing (step S231). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

In step S313 subsequent to step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained in advance determination is stored in the earliest empty area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process.

In step S315, the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 in RAM 308 is replaced with the "undetermined" information indicating that the starting information is not pre-read without pre-reading the increased special figure 1 starting information. Store in the first empty area of the set. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above, only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be stored. All pre-reading results in the set may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 296, the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2, and the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the electric support. However, whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special maps 1 and 2 may be determined by a lottery. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300 may determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not in non-electric support), when the start information increases, the prefetch is always executed and the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch is performed. The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to execute the lottery and the effect using the pre-reading result.

FIG. 297 exemplifies a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 297(a) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 preread result information is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 297(a), the special-reading 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the number of reserveable special-playing 1 variable games. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 297(a), the storage area "hold 1" stores "special drawing I" (off) as stop symbol information, and the storage area "hold 2" stores "special drawing I" as stop symbol information. "(Disappearance) is stored, "special drawing A" (15R probability variation big hit) is stored in the storage area "holding 3" as stop symbol information, and "special drawing I" is stored in the storage area "holding 4" as stop symbol information. "(Disappearance) is stored.

FIG. 297(b) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 preread result information is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 297(b), the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the holdable number of special figure 2 variable games. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 297 (b), "special figure f" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and the stop symbols are stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". No information is stored. Note that, in FIG. 297(b), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

FIG. 297(c) shows an example of the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 1 during electronic support. As shown in FIG. 297(c), in the storage area "holding 1", "undetermined" information is stored instead of the stopped symbol information. Neither stop symbol information nor “undetermined” information is stored in the storage areas “holding 2” to “holding 4”.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the judgment result, the fluctuation timer number (variation time), the timer group described later, and the like are pre-determined, and the pre-read result is stored in the pre-read result storage unit. The information can be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

Next, with reference to FIG. 298, for the win/fail judgment table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 295, see FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 298(a) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for win/loss determination, and FIG. 298(b) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for win/loss determination. In the case of performing the hit determination of the special figure 1, in the case of the high probability state of the special figure, the high probability table for determining the hit determination shown in FIG. 298(a) is referred to, and in the case of the low probability state of the special figure, 298, the low probability table for determination of success/failure is referred to. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referred win/loss determination table and the acquired random number value, the win/loss determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variation game, a big hit, a small hit, or an outlier is selected as the hit/miss determination result.

Similarly, in the case of performing the special determination of the special figure 2, if the special figure high probability state, it is in the special figure low probability state by referring to the high probability table for hit determination of FIG. 298 (a). In this case, the low probability table for success/failure determination shown in FIG. 298(b) is referenced. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referred win/loss determination table and the acquired random number value, the win/loss determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variation game, the big hit or the outlier is selected as the hit/miss determination result.

FIG. 298(c) is a diagram showing an example of a small hit determination table. If the result of the big hit judgment is out of order, the table for small hit judgment shown in FIG. 298(c) is referred to, and based on the numerical range shown by the table for small hit judgment referred to and the acquired random number value. , Select the result of the special drawing small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the win/no win determination result (lottery result) per special figure is the special figure 1, the small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the win/no determination result, and the loss is with a probability of 63536/65536. However, the small hit is not selected when the result of the lottery win/loss determination (lottery result) per special drawing is the special drawing 2.

Next, the stop is performed based on the result of winning/decision determination determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 295. The special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. 299. Here, FIG. 299(a) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 299(b) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 299(a) is referred to, and the special figure is determined based on the result of the special figure 1 and the numerical range of the random number value. Select the stop pattern of 1. In the present embodiment, when the hit/no hit result of Toku-zu 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special drawings A to G, and when the hit/no hit determination result of Toku-zu 1 is a small hit, Toku-zu H is selected, and when the hit/no-go result of Toku-zu 1 is lost, toku-zu I is selected.

Further, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 299(b) is referred to, and based on the hit/fail result of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The special design 2 stop design is selected by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the hit/damage result of Toku-zu 2 is a big hit, any one of the Toku-zu a to Toku-e is selected. f is selected. After the symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined, the symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 300A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 300(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, the input/output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 according to the detection result. Perform processing to change to.

In step S413 subsequent to step S411, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, the command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S415 subsequent to step S413, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is an instruction to the various lamps 442 and 452 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. To do.

In step S417 following step S415, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S419 following step S417, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output. Then, it returns to step S403.

FIG. 300B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects the strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 300C is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step S441 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S443 following step S441, the control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S419) of the first sub control unit main process, and the other effect random number updating process is performed. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 301A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU (not shown) of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S501 of FIG. 301(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S501. In this initialization processing, initialization of input/output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S503 following step S501, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505. .. In step S505, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S507 following step S505, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

In step S509 following step S507, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S507, processing such as reading effect data (effect data by the decorative pattern display device 208) corresponding to this command from a ROM (not shown) is performed to update the effect data. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S511 following step S509, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if the effect data read in step S509 includes a command to the VDP 516, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Then, it returns to step S503. FIG. 301(b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S531 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 301(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step S541 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S503 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S543 subsequent to step S541, update processing of the other random number value for effect is performed.

FIG. 301D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S511 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S551, a transfer instruction of image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S553 following step S551, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S553: Yes), the process proceeds to step S555. If not (step S553: NO), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S555, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 504 forms the display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S551. , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S557 following step S555, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S559 subsequent to step S557, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the image drawing end is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S559: Yes), If not (step S559: No), the process waits until the generation end interrupt signal is input.

In step S561, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, an example of the configuration of the rendering device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 302. Here, FIG. 302(a) is a diagram illustrating a first configuration example of the rendering device 206, and FIG. 302(b) is a diagram illustrating a second configuration example of the rendering device 206.

In the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 302(a), the decorative pattern display device 208 is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with the decorative member configuring the rendering device 206, and a part thereof is not visible. .. The decorative member may be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the decorative pattern display device 208 may be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. Further, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, and the general figure holding lamp 216 are not shown. Omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the right side of the lower part of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. On the first UI unit 280, the variable icon h0 can be displayed on the left side in a manner of being placed on the pedestal, and when the variable icon h0 is displayed, it is notified that the symbol variable is being displayed. ing. When the symbol is stopped, the change icon h0 is not displayed. On the right side of the variable icon h0, a navigation character YM composed of a lord's character is displayed. The navigation character YM is a character that is normally displayed at normal times, and by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game, for example, a notice display or a look-ahead notice display is performed. The second UI unit 281 has a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. Note that the navigation character YM does not have to be displayed all the time, and a specific notice or effect using the navigation character YM (for example, a look-ahead notice, a notice in the symbol variation display, or a suspension of the symbol variation display is accumulated N times). When the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by the user setting, the display may be displayed. In FIG. 302(a), since four variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, four suspension icons h11, h12, h13, h14 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round unpatterned and white display mode), but they are displayed in accordance with the progress of the game. May change. As a result, it is possible to display a notice display or a read-ahead notice display. Here, the variable icon may indicate an icon corresponding to the symbol variable display. Further, the variable icon h0 may indicate a hold (the hold) corresponding to the symbol change display. The variable icon h0 may not be displayed.

Further, in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second decorative symbol smaller than the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". .. The second decorative pattern may not be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and only the first decorative pattern may be displayed. Further, the second decorative design may not be displayed on the decorative design display device 208, but may be displayed on another effect display device (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative patterns in the second decorative pattern matches the combination of the decorative patterns in the first decorative pattern, but the combination of the decorative patterns in the first decorative pattern and the decoration in the second decorative pattern are the same. A part (1 or 2 of the decorative designs) of the combination of designs or all of them may be mismatched. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Note that the special symbol display device 208 does not have to display the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2. In addition, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). Good. It should be noted that the second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special maps 1 and 2, or may display the hold numbers of both of the special diagrams 1 and 2. Good.

Further, a background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a background display corresponding to the effect and the game state (normal game state, probability variation state, hidden probability variation state, time saving state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a pre-reading notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display irrelevant to the judgment result. Further, the background display may be displayed in a plurality of types in a certain game state (any one or more of a normal game state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, a time saving state). In this case, it may change with a law (for example, it changes in order such as background display A→background display B→background display C→background display A→... If it collapses, it may be announced as a big hit confirmation (premier announcement). The order may change randomly regardless of the order.

Further, below the decorative pattern display device 208, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved vertically or rotated according to the effect contents. It is configured. Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 302(a), the family crest monument 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest monument 224E is below the decorative pattern display device 208, but it can be set to an appropriate position. Further, the family crest monument 224E has a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect.

In addition, on the left and right sides of the decorative pattern display device 208, one of the effect movable bodies, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga with the character "Large" and the second with the character "Board" are provided. A large-scale behavioral accessory 224Gb, a third large-scale behavioral accessory 224Gc to which the character "during" is applied, and a fourth large-scale behavioral accessory 224Gd to which the character "dance" is applied are arranged. Each of the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd can rotate around the center and can move toward the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. ing. At this time, the 1st large board behavior part 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior part 224Gd are located in the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208, and can be overlapped with the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208. .. In addition, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd have a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the contents of the effect.

In addition, above the decorative pattern display device 208, a thousand box accessory 224H, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. .. The thousand-box box accessory 224H is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the Senryo box accessory 224H has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect.

A transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front surface side of the decorative pattern display device 208, the family crest actor 224E, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd, and the thousand box cabinet auditors hall 224H. The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body through the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmissive region. A light-emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light-emitting body is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can look like. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 302(a), the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut in a pattern simulating a predetermined effect image. In addition, the light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the region where the light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the light irradiated. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

Further, in the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the fourth symbol, for example, by the light emitting mode of the LED. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be configured by an image display device such as LCD or EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is drive-controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. While the symbol of the special figure is stopped, the LED is lit and displayed, but during the change of the symbol of the special figure, it is blinked or turned off. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or blinking mode of the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol may be displayed in a lighted state while the symbol is changing, and may be displayed in a lighted state while the symbol is stopped.

In the production device 206 shown in FIG. 302(b), three decorative pattern display devices are arranged in a row. That is, the first decorative pattern display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative pattern display devices, the second decorative pattern display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and the first decoration The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be a sub display device, and a second decorative symbol display device. 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the width direction, and the display area is slightly shorter in height. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right edge portion thereof overlaps with the front side of the left edge portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has its left edge portion the first. 1 The decorative pattern display device 208N overlaps with the front surface side of the right end portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in the directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the state of being closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are also configured to be slidable in the vertical direction along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The effect operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above may not all be configured to be performed, and any one operation or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured to be able to. Further, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform the effect operation (that is, may be fixed). Further, the effect operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the effect operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be different, for example, the number of effect operations that can be performed are different. Alternatively, the performance operation itself that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can be moved and rotated in the right direction, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be moved in the vertical direction. Good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured to be able to perform an effect operation. Specifically, while the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a production operation, either or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate, or Only one decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. Further, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily variable display of the decorative symbol for each display device, and are named for convenience. However, it should be noted that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N) are summarized as effect display means, and the effect display means is the decorative pattern. It is also possible to perform variable display of, or to display a plurality of types of effect. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is configured such that the front surface side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with a decorative member that constitutes the rendering device 206, and a part thereof is not visible. The decorative member may be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative pattern display device 208L may be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. Further, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, and the general figure holding lamp 216 are not shown. Omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. On the left side of the first UI unit 280, a variation icon h0 is displayed in a state of being placed on the pedestal, which notifies that the symbol variation display is being performed. On the right side of the variable icon h0, a navigation character YM composed of a lord's character is displayed. The second UI unit 281 has a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. In FIG. 302(b), since four variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, four suspension icons h11, h12, h13, h14 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round unpatterned and white display mode), but are displayed according to the progress of the game. The aspect may change. As a result, it is possible to display a notice display or a read-ahead notice display.

Further, in the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol smaller than the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". ing. In the present embodiment, the second decorative design is displayed on the same decorative design display device as the first decorative design, but it may be displayed on a different decorative design display device. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative patterns in the second decorative pattern matches the combination of the decorative patterns in the first decorative pattern, but the combination of the decorative patterns in the first decorative pattern and the decoration in the second decorative pattern are the same. A part (1 or 2 of the decorative designs) of the combination of designs or all of them may be mismatched. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display region, but it may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. In addition, the second hold number display may be divided into different decorative symbol display devices for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and displayed. In addition, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 does not need to be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7-segment or LED or dot matrix display device). May be done. It should be noted that the second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special maps 1 and 2, or may display the hold numbers of both of the special diagrams 1 and 2. Good.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As the background display, for example, a background display corresponding to the effect or the game state (normal game state, probability variation state, hidden probability variation state, time saving state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a pre-reading notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display irrelevant to the judgment result. Further, the background display may be displayed in a plurality of types in a certain game state (any one or more of a normal game state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, a time saving state). In this case, it may change with a law (for example, it changes in order such as background display A→background display B→background display C→background display A→... If it collapses, it may be announced as a big hit confirmation (premier announcement). The order may change randomly regardless of the order. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer circumference, but a frameless form may be used. Moreover, a decorative member or an LED may be provided on the frame.

In addition, the family crest accessory 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move or rotate in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. .. In the example shown in FIG. 302(b), the family crest monument 224E is located at the initial position, but the initial position of the family crest monument 224E shown in FIG. 302(b) is the upper end of the family crest monument 224E. Although the portion is a position slightly overlapping the lower end portion of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, it can be set to an appropriate position.

In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned 1000-box box accessory 224H is arranged, and is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the contents of the effect. Senryo box accessory 224H is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps on the front side of these decorative symbol display devices. It is possible.

The light guide plate IL described above is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device, the family crest actor 224E, and the thousand-box manipulator 224H, and the player displays the display state of each decorative symbol display device through the light guide plate. The motion of each effect movable body can be visually confirmed.

Further, in FIG. 302(b), a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided below the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Next, an example of effects using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302(a) or FIG. 302(b) will be described with reference to FIG. 303. Here, FIG. 303 is a diagram illustrating an example of effects applicable in the present embodiment.

In FIGS. 303(A1) to (A2), the operation mode of the effect movable body in effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302(a) is shown. That is, when the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd and the thousand box cabinet auditors 224H operate from the state shown in FIG. 303(A1), the mode shown in FIG. 303(A2) is obtained. Specifically, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd until the characters “large”, “board”, “behavior”, and “mai” first come to the front position. Each of them rotates, and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, the thousand-box box accessory 224H moves from the initial position to a position where it overlaps in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the Senryo box role product 224H is arranged on the front side of the first large-scale behavior product 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior product 224Gd, and the first large-scale behavior product 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior product 224Gd are the thousand-box product. It is considered difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where it is not overlapped with 224H. It should be noted that the Senryo box accessory 224H may be configured so as not to overlap the front side of the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd. In addition, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd may be arranged on the front surface side of the thousand-axle box auditors 224H and configured to overlap the thousand-robot box auditors 224H.

In FIG. 303(B1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302(a), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, during the light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight of the decorative pattern display device 208 and various lamps may be reduced to make the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL more visible. ..

FIGS. 303(C1) to (C4) show an operation mode of the effect movable body in effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302(a). Here, in the example shown in FIGS. 303(C1) to 303(C4), a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as a production movable body is provided in place of the family crest 224E. The POV display 224I is also referred to as a versa writer, is movable in the vertical direction, and is configured to be able to overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is below the decorative pattern display device 208, but it can be set to any position. The POV display 280 has a lifting arm and an LED array rotatably attached to the tip of the lifting arm. The elevating arm can be moved up and down by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a line in the LED array, and the attitude extending in the horizontal direction is the initial attitude of the LED array. The LEDs provided in the LED array may be full-color LEDs or single-color LEDs. A motor is built in the tip of the elevating arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotating shaft of the motor at the center in the extending direction. The first sub-control unit 400 (or the second sub-control unit 500) performs one lighting control for each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array based on Versa data, which is a kind of effect data. To do. By doing so, the light emission mode of the plurality of LEDs changes during the rotation of the LED array, and the afterimage is visually recognized by the player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated on the rotation locus of each LED, and a pattern is represented. Further, the POV display 224I is arranged on the front side of the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd and the thousand-box box auditory object 224H. Can be set.

FIG. 303(C1) shows a state where the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

In FIG. 303(C2), the POV display 224I shows a state in which the LED array is raised by the elevating arm, and the LED array overlaps with the front surface side in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is difficult to visually recognize the display screen as compared with the case where the POV display 224I does not overlap.

FIG. 303(C3) shows a state where the LED array of the POV display 224I has started to rotate. The LED array accelerates its rotation from low speed to high speed. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts rotating, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. Further, the rotating area of the LED array overlaps with the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the first decorative pattern, and these are difficult to visually recognize while the LED array is rotating.

In FIG. 303(C4), the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, the characters "heat" are displayed, and the advance notice display or the prefetch advance notice display is shown. The image displayed by the POV display 224I is not limited to the one described above, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative pattern, a background image, or the like. Further, while the image is displayed on the POV display 224I, the emission brightness of the backlight and various lamps of the decorative symbol display device 208 is reduced to improve the visibility of the image displayed on the POV display 224I. Good. Further, while the image is displayed on the POV display 224I, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be displayed in the dark mode.

In FIG. 303(D1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302(b), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the backlight of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the brightness of various lamps are reduced, and the like. The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made more visible.

In FIG. 303(E1) to FIG. 303(E2), a state in which the family crest actor 224E is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302(b) is shown. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 303 (E1), the family crest monument 224E moves from the initial position to a raised position and overlaps the change icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM, The change icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and at least a part of the navigation character YM are more difficult to visually recognize than when they do not overlap each other. After that, as illustrated in FIG. 303(E2), the family crest monument 224E rotates in the clockwise direction (CW direction). The family crest monument 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the family crest monument 224E may vibrate with or in lieu of rotation. Alternatively, only the ascending may be performed, and the rotation and the vibration may not be performed. In addition, it is also applicable to the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 302(a).

In FIG. 303 (F1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b), the thousand-box box accessory 224H is operating. Specifically, a state is shown in which the thousand-box box accessory 224H is moved from the initial position to a position where it overlaps with the front surface side of the substantially first center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 303 (F1), the first decorative symbol is made more difficult to visually recognize than the case where the first decorative symbol is in the non-overlapping state because the thousand-box box accessory 224H is overlapped. In this example of performance, when the Senryo box accessory 224H operates, the Senmon box accessory 224E does not operate so that the Senryo box accessory 224H and the family crest effect article 224E do not interfere with each other. There may be a case where both the thousand box product 224H and the family crest product 224E are in operation. Further, when the Thousand Box Actor 224H operates, a retracting operation of further moving the Family Emblem 224E may be performed.

In FIG. 303(G1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302(b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slide-moved so as to be continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A scroll display is also made. That is, with respect to the background image, a region which is not displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides is configured to be visually recognized by sliding. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that can be seen by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Thereby, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. It is possible to display the changed display. Note that the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide upward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward, or the second decorative symbol display tail device 208M may slide upward, The three decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

In FIG. 303(H1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302(b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged to display the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display. It is shown as being displayed across the devices 208N. That is, the left pattern of the enlarged first decorative symbol is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol of the expanded first decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the variable icons h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and do not straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that the enlarged first decorative symbol does not have to be displayed across two display devices, for example, the enlarged left symbol is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The enlarged middle symbol may be displayed, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed across a plurality of display devices.

In FIGS. 303 (I1) to (I2), the operation mode of the production movable body in the production device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b) is shown. Here, in the example shown in FIGS. 303(I1) to (I2), the POV display 224I described above is provided in place of the family crest monument 224E. At the timing shown in FIG. 303 (I1), the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

In FIG. 303 (I2), after the POV display 224I moves from the initial position to the position where the LED array overlaps with the front side of the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the LED array rotates, and the LED array rotates at a constant rotation. It is shown that the speed is reached and the rotation is constant, and the word "heat" is displayed.

In FIG. 303(J1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302(b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol display. It is shown that the background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281. That is, the navigation character YM and the variation icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are performing different display from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In FIG. 303(K1) to FIG. 303(K4), an operation mode of the effect movable body in effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302(b) is shown. In the examples shown in FIGS. 303(K1) to 303(K4), the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap the decorative member, and the image displayed in the region is also visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

In FIG. 303(K1), a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in the initial position is shown.

In FIG. 303(K2), a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M are slidingly moved to positions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. Has been done. At this time, the displays of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N scroll along with the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the slide movement. It is displayed. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are images displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the images of the overlapping portions are adjusted according to the slide movement. By scrolling the display, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can perform a display with a sense of unity. Note that, as shown in FIG. 303 (K2), the family crest monument 224E moves downward from the initial position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and becomes the retracted position. Has become. Here, as shown in FIG. 303 (K2′), the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid without scrolling. In addition, the family crest monument 224E may rotate at the initial position or may vibrate while the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are operating, You may vibrate while rotating.

In FIGS. 303 (K3) to (K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are close to each other, and the counterclockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is shown that they are integrally rotating in the direction (CCW direction). In FIG. 303 (K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are shown rotated 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative pattern so that the images displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N respectively match the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Display that rotates in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is performed around the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N. Thereby, the player may rotate the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but the displayed image may not appear to rotate.

In FIG. 303(L1), a modification of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302(a) is shown. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 303 (L1), the sub-display device 208S is arranged below the decorative design display device 208 in place of the family crest 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub-display device 208S is the decorative design display device 208. It overlaps at least part of the lower end. On the sub display device 208S, the respective displays on the above-mentioned first UI unit 280 and second UI unit 281 are displayed. That is, on the sub display device 208S, the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. The display on the sub display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative pattern display device 208, a state in which the character SBH of Sabohani is walking from the right side to the left side is shown, but a part of the character SBH is overlapped with the sub display device 208S. It is more difficult to visually recognize the display device 208S than when the display device 208S is not overlapped. As shown in FIG. 303 (L1′), a display image (background image, sabotani character SBH, or the like) may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

In FIG. 303 (M1), the operation modes of the sub display device 208S and the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd are shown. That is, the sub-display device 208S moves from the initial position to a position that is on the front side in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The 1 large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the 4th large-board behavior auditors 224Gd are each rotated to the position where the characters “large”, “board”, “behavior”, and “mai” come to the front, and then the decorative symbol display device 208. Of the sub display device 208S that has moved to a position near the center of the front surface of the sub display device 208S. At this time, a cut-in display is performed on the sub display device 208S, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, which shows that a predetermined notice effect or a look-ahead notice effect is being performed. ing.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 304 to 307. Here, FIG. 304 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 305 shows a step after the example of the effect shown in FIG. 304. FIG. 306 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 305, and FIG. 307 is a figure showing stepwise about another example of the effect shown in FIG. ..

In FIG. 304, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, an ordinary symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, a special symbol 2 hold lamp 220, a general symbol hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284 are shown. In the following, description will be made by applying the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302(a), but it is also possible to apply the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302(b). Further, in the following, illustrations of the family crest actor 224E, the first large-panel behavioral component 224Ga to the fourth large-panel behavioral component 224Gd, the thousand-fold box component 224H, and the light guide plate IL are omitted.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 304(1), the combination of decorative patterns "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image (coast background image) as shown in FIG. 302A is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner. The second decorative design is also stopped and displayed in combination with the decorative display of the first decorative design in combination with the decorative design of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". The navigation character YM is displayed on the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 304(1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable icon h0 is not displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 304 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281. In addition, the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state.

On the second UI unit 281, a hold icon representing the hold of special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of the special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holding icons of the special figure 1 and the second holding number display. In addition to the number of holding lamps 220 lit, the number of holding icons and the second holding number display in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon,.... In the second UI unit 281, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side become the hold icons with older prizes.

In FIG. 304(1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed on the second UI unit 281, and both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are in the default display mode. It is displayed in a (circular, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokushu 1 is a round hold icon. Note that in FIG. 304(1), in order to make it easy to understand that the four UI icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281, the ID icons that are not actually displayed are indicated by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 304(1), the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are sectioned by broken lines for ease of explanation, but the broken lines are not actually displayed.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons of special figure 2 are displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 304 is the non-electric power support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chu and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon holding icon of the special drawing which is easier to win in special maps 1 and 2 is displayed, and the holding icon of the other special map is displayed. I try not to display it. That is, when the control state is the non-electric power support state, as shown in FIG. 304(1), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281, and the hold icon of special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric power support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is displayed and the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is not displayed. Note that the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol is the variation start in the special symbol display device→the start or extinction of the blinking of the fourth symbol→the start of the variation of the second decorative symbol→the start or deletion of the moving animation of the hold icon→the ornament Although it is performed in the order of starting the variation of the symbols, this order may be changed.

In FIG. 304(2), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon or decoration The pattern has not changed yet. In addition, the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 and the variation display of the fourth symbol may start at the same time, or the variation display of the fourth symbol after the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 starts. May be started, or the symbol fluctuation in the first special symbol display device 212 may be started after the variable display of the fourth symbol is started.

In FIG. 304(3), the second hold number display is updated from 2 to 1, and a state in which the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started is shown. In addition, the update display of the second hold number display and the start of the variable display of the second decorative symbol may be performed at the same time, or the change of the second decorative symbol after the update display of the second hold number indicator is performed. The display may be started, or the second hold number display may be updated and displayed after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started.

In FIG. 304(4), the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 has started. The movement (decrease) animation here is that the hold icon (the target hold icon for the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the base of the change icon in the first UI unit 280. At the same time, the hold icon located at the display position of the second hold icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of Toku-zu 1. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not started.

In FIG. 304(5), the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 304(6), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change reaches the base of the change icon and is displayed as the change icon h0. Along with this, the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of variation, reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11, and thereafter, the variable display of the first decorative symbol. Is started. At the time when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 until then may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon until then. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. The end of the moving animation and the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be started after the end of the moving animation, or The movement animation may end after the variable display of one decorative pattern starts.

In FIG. 304(7), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is shown.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 304(8), a state in which the navigation character YM gives the navigation character notice is shown. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 208, when the navigator character notice is started, a balloon in which the characters "opportunity" is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigator character YM, informing that the expectation for a big hit is high.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 304(9) shows that the conversation announcement is started while the navigation character announcement is being given. When the conversation announcement is started, the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. In addition, in this conversation image CI1 of the lord, the first decorative design is made to be more difficult to visually recognize than when the first decorative design is not overlapped with the first decorative design. Further, in the navigation character notice, the balloon display is changed from the character display of "opportunity" to the character display of "no", and it is informed that the expectation for the jackpot is further increased. It should be noted that the timing at which the lord's conversation image CI1 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to "No", or the display in the balloon after the lord's conversation image CI1 is displayed. May be updated to “No”, or the conversation image CI1 of the lord may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to “No”. It should be noted that there may be a case where an effect (for example, “No”) that promotes from a previously displayed notice (for example, “good opportunity”) to a later displayed notice (for example, “heat”) is not performed. .. Further, the navigation character notice is not limited to the notice in the symbol variation display, but also a prefetch notice, a notice for notifying that a certain notice will be given, an explanation display (various notices, game states, characters that appear in the pachinko machine 100 production). And explanation of the stage of production, etc., and tutorial display) may be performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 304(10), the conversation notice is updated and the navigation character notice is also updated. In the conversation notice, the pal's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative pattern, and the grand conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the grand character. The operation promotion notification image is an image for urging the production button 136 to be pressed within the operation valid period, and includes a button image 136a simulating the production button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is composed by. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 304(10), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the old conversation image CI2, but the player may recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284 and the second decorative symbol. Sometimes you can. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative pattern is not hidden. Also, as shown in FIG. 304(10), the palace's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the grandpa's conversation image CI2, and the lord's conversation is more than that in the case where the conversation image CI2 is not overlapped. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to visually recognize. Further, in the navigation character notice, the balloon display is changed from the character display of "No" to the character display of "Extreme heat", and it is notified that the expectation for the big hit is considerably high. Further, the display of this balloon overlaps a part of the old conversation image CI2. Note that the timing at which the grandpa conversation image CI2 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to “intense heat”, or the timing at which the grandpa conversation image CI2 is displayed is displayed after the grandpa conversation image CI2 is displayed. The display may be updated to "intense heat", or the old conversation image CI2 may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to "intense heat". As described above, in this example of performance, the case where the conversation notice is given is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not given. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the lord's conversation image CI1 may not be displayed in a reduced size (for example, the display having the same size as that in FIG. 304(9) is displayed), and the lord's conversation image CI1 is displayed. It may be erased. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A with a high expectation for a big hit is this conversation. It may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A.

Then, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 304(11). The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 304(11).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 304(12) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a predetermined time has elapsed, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 304(13), the game is played. It is shown that the person is pressing the effect button 136. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 304 (12), the navigation character advance notice has ended and the balloon display has been erased. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 304 (14), the word "I'm gonna have a fever" is displayed in the old conversation image CI2 instead of the operation promotion notification image. There are cases where This informs that the reliability of the big hit is considerably high. The notice character display such as "It's intense heat" may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period is not operated without the operation of the effect button 136. It may be displayed even when the time has passed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 304 (15), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice is ended, and the first decorative pattern is easily visible. It is shown.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 304(16), after "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 304(17), "decoration" is displayed on the right symbol. 7” is stopped and displayed, and the reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed so that the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 304 (17) to (19), when the reach state is formed, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach start animation is performed. In the reach start animation in this effect example, when the reach state is formed, an animation display for enlarging/reducing the left symbol and the right symbol is performed. It should be noted that an appropriate display mode of the reach start animation can be adopted. The player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started by watching the reach start animation.

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 304 (20) to (21), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the upper left and right directions, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 changes. The icon h0 is left and the frame is displayed below the display area, and the hold icons h11 to h14 (the hold icon h11 in the example shown in FIG. 304(20)) displayed on the second UI unit 281 are also framed out. .. The start of the moving display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol and the start of the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be the same timing, or The frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be started after the moving display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol is started, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281. After the frame-out display of each image in is started, the moving display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 304(22), the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga and the second large-scale behavior auditor 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to see. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large-board behavior auditor 224Ga and the second large-board behavior auditor 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to see. It should be noted that only a part of the first large-board behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor 224Gd may operate, or all of them may operate, for example, the first large-board behavior auditor 224Ga- The reliability may be different depending on the number of the 4 large-board behavior auditors 224Gd operating. In addition, there may be cases where the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd do not operate.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 304 (23), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. The light guide plate IL may not emit light. For example, there may be a case where both the operation of the first large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior auditor 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL are performed, or the first large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior. There may be a case where only the accessory 224Gd is operated and the light guide plate IL does not emit light. Alternatively, only the light guide plate IL emits light, and the first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior The object 224Gd may not be operated, or both the operation of the first large board action member 224Ga to the fourth large board action member 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il may not be performed. Good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 304(24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, as shown in FIG. 305(25), the first large-board behavior auditor product 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor product 224Gd are respectively initialized. Return to position. In addition, the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be terminated after the first large-scale behavior member 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior member 224Gd return to their initial positions, or the first large-scale behavior member 224Ga to the second large-scale behavior member 224Ga to The start of the movement of the four-large-board behavior accessory 224Gd to the initial position and the end of the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be simultaneously performed. Here, in FIGS. 304 (22) to (24), a series of effects performed by the first large board behavioral member 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd and the light guide plate IL is performed in a series. It may be configured so that a big hit is more likely to occur than when no effect is performed.

In FIG. 305 (26), the state of development into super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 305 (26), the image of the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 305 (27), a duel scene between the main character and the enemy swordsman. Animation is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 305 (28), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, showing that the button effect is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 305 (29), the player can receive the operation of the effect button 136.

On the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 305 (30), it is shown that the operation valid period has started and the gauge has decreased, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 305 (31), the player A state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is shown. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed as shown in FIG. 305 (32), and a notice effect that notifies that the jackpot has high reliability is performed. .. The lord's cut-in image CI3 overlaps the animation display of the duel scene, which is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where the lord's cut-in image CI3 is not displayed. It should be noted that the cut-in image C13 of the lord may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 has been operated, or even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136. It may be displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 305 (33), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is erased, and the animation display of the duel scene continues.

Then, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 305 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, showing that the second button effect has started after developing to super reach. ing. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 305 (35), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136.

On the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 305 (36), it is shown that the operation valid period has started and the gauge has decreased, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 305 (37), the player A state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is shown. It should be noted that the operation valid period in the second button effect after developing to super reach may be shorter than the operation valid period in the first button effect after developing to super reach. In this case, the operation reaches the super reach. The speed at which the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the second button presentation after the first time decreases may be faster than the speed in which the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT decreases in the first button presentation after the super reach is developed. Also, the operation effective period in the first button effect after developing to super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing to super reach, or after developing to super reach. The operation valid period in the first button effect and the operation valid period in the second button effect after the development to the super reach may have the same length.

When the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 305 (38), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image, and the first large board is displayed. The behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left image and the right symbol of the effect image and the first decorative pattern are overlapped by the first large board behavioral product 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd, respectively, and the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object. It is considered to be more difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where it is not overlapped by 224 Gd. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large-board behavior auditor 224Ga and the second large-board behavior auditor 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to see. It should be noted that only a part of the first large-board behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor 224Gd may operate, or all of them may operate, for example, the first large-board behavior auditor 224Ga- The reliability may be different depending on the number of the 4 large-board behavior auditors 224Gd operating. In addition, the effect shown in FIG. 305 (38) may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 has been operated, or the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136. It may be displayed in some cases. Further, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd is performed. In addition, when both the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-board behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor 224Gd are performed, after the effect image is displayed, the first large-board behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor 224Ga. The operation of the large-scale behavior auditor product 224Gd may be started, the effect image may be displayed after the operations of the first large-scale behavior auditor product 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior auditor product 224Gd are started, or the effect image may be displayed. The display of and the operations of the first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd may be started at the same time. Also, when the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the effect display may be displayed without the effect shown in FIG. 305 (38), and further, the effect display that causes the loss may be displayed. You may make it display the revival effect after it is performed and perform the effect display that is a big hit. It should be noted that when the effect shown in FIG. 305 (38) is started, the displayed variable icon h0 is hidden, but it may be continuously displayed.

Then, in FIG. 305 (39), the thousand-box box accessory 224H moves and moves downward, and overlaps with the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd. Is shown. Further, thereafter, FIG. 305 (40) shows that the light guide plate IL emits light. Note that the display of the effect image, the operations of the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd, the operation of the thousand-fold box accessory 224H, and the order of starting the light emission of the light guide plate IL are not limited to those described above. Instead, it can be set appropriately. In addition, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board action product 224Ga to the fourth large board action product 224Gd, the operation of the thousand box operation product 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be a case where a part is not performed.

FIG. 305 (41) shows a state where the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 305 (42), the thousand-box box accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. Then, in FIG. 305 (43), the effect image fades out, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 305 (44), the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd move toward the initial positions. Has started. At this time, the decorative pattern display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is restarting while fading in. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also restarted.

Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 305 (46). In FIG. 305(46), the protagonist's lord wins over the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 305(47), "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle pattern to notify that it is a big hit. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 305 (48), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 306 (49), the first decorative pattern is “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. The swing fluctuation starts with the combination of decorative patterns. It should be noted that the second decorative symbol is still variably displayed in the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. The background here may be a non-displayed background image, a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or the same background image as before the super reach is performed. .. Further, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the holding icon of the special figure 1 are not displayed, but the changing icon h0 and the holding icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed. Although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 306 (50), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of special figure A. At the timing shown in FIG. 306 (50), the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed, but the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol is fixed, the fluctuation of the swing continues in the first decorative symbol, and the fluctuation is still displayed in the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 306 (51), the decoration of the first decoration pattern and the second decoration pattern is "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", respectively. Along with the stop display in the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays the symbols in a manner that the symbols have stopped.

After that, when the big hit game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, as shown in FIG. The display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", a "special bonus" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the game is played. It has been reported to the person that it is a 15R probability variation big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 306 (52), the mini right hitting display for instructing the right hitting is performed in the upper left corner of the display area. Note that the mini right-handed display may not be performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 306 (53), after the right-hand hitting instruction screen for instructing the player to hit the right hand is displayed, as shown in FIG. 306 (54), the first round is started. When the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a round effect and displays "decoration 7" indicating a combination of decorative symbols when a big hit occurs in the lower right corner of the display screen. Has been done. In addition, the mini right hitting display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the current round "1R" is displayed in the upper right corner. It should be noted that the number of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game or the total number of prize balls obtained during the continuous vacation may be displayed.

Then, when the big hit game is digested and the 15th round is started, as shown in FIG. 306 (55), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the round effect display, and at the upper right corner of the display area, The current round "15R" is displayed.

FIG. 306 (56) shows that the big hit game is finished, and the big hit end effect display is being performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the big hit game this time is the big hit game started as the 15R probability variable big hit, the game state becomes the special figure high probability general figure high probability state (electricity variation with electric support) after the big hit game ends. Therefore, in the big hit end effect display, "Yoshimune RUSH rush" indicating that is displayed, and it is informed that the state shifts to the positive change state with electric support.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 306 (57), a display (attention display) is displayed to warn about forgetting to take out the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 292). In addition, this warning display may be displayed only when the big hit game in the first big hit that became a big hit in the game state that is not in electric support is over, or regardless of the big hit situation, big hit It may be displayed without fail when the game is over.

FIG. 306 (58) shows the state before the jackpot game is over, the state shifts to the positive variation state with electric support, and the first symbol variation display is started. In the probability change state with electric support, the background image is the background image for the probability change state with electric support, and the decorative pattern is also in a display mode different from the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state) .. In addition, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is formed in the lower center of the display screen, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is notified by the number of displayed icons. Here, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 is a rectangular unpatterned and white display mode, and the display mode (shape here) is different from the hold icon of the special figure 1, and the player Can be discriminated from at a glance. In addition, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 may be the same. In addition, in FIGS. 306 (58) to (63), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold that is not actually displayed is displayed. The icon is indicated by a broken line. In addition, in FIGS. 306 (58) to (63), the holding icon display area 282 in FIG. 2 is divided by a broken line to facilitate the description, but the broken line is actually displayed. Not done. Further, in the probability variation state with power support, the holding icon of Toku-zu 1 is not displayed, but it may be displayed. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 306 (58), the mini right hit display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the character "Bonus×○" indicating the number of consecutive holidays is displayed below it. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 306 (58), since the first big hit game is over, a display of "bonus x 1" is displayed to that effect.

Then, after the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 306 (59), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 306 (60) instructs the player to strike right. Right hit notification is displayed. The right-handed notification is displayed in a mode in which the characters "please right-hand" are displayed on the semitransparent belt image. The right-hand hit notification overlaps the decorative design, and the decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the decorative design does not overlap. Right-handed notification is displayed only in the electric sapo state that has transitioned after the first big hit game, but may be displayed also in the electric sapo state that has transitioned after the big hit game other than the first big hit game has finished. For example, it may be displayed each time the big hit game ends and the electric power support state is entered. Further, after shifting to the electric support state, the right-handed notification may be displayed even when it is detected that the player is left-handed. For example, it is detected that the player has won the first special figure starting port 230. In this case, it may be determined that the left-handed stroke has been performed and the right-handed stroke notification may be displayed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 306 (60), the second hold number display is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 306 (61), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started is shown. After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the right-handing notification was displayed, the right-handing notification is hidden as shown in FIG. 306 (62). Note that the mini right-handed display continues to be performed.

In FIG. 306 (63), the state in which the symbol variable display of special figure 2 is suspended is four. That is, in the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, all four lamps are turned on to indicate that the special figure 2 is held four times, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons h21 to h24 of the special figure 2 are held. Is displayed four times. Also, in the second hold number display, "4" indicating that the number of hold numbers in the special figure 2 is 4 is displayed.

FIG. 307 (49a) shows another effect example following that of FIG. 305 (48). 304 to 305, the case where "decoration 7" is in the reach state and "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle pattern has been described, but here, "decoration 6" is in the reach state. A case where "decoration 6" is displayed on the design will be described. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 307 (49a), a state in which the first decorative pattern is swinging in a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is shown. It should be noted that the second decorative symbol is still variably displayed in the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. The background here may be a non-displayed background image, a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the holding icon of the special figure 1 are not displayed, but the changing icon h0 and the holding icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed. Although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 307 (50a), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of special figure B. At the timing shown in FIG. 307 (50a), the first sub-control unit 400 is in a state of not receiving the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300, and therefore has not determined to be the symbol fixed stop, The first decorative symbol continues to shake and fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still in the variable display.

Then, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 307 (51a), the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are decorations of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", respectively. Along with the stop display in the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays the symbols in a manner that the symbols have stopped. By seeing this, the player may be able to recognize that the actual 5R probability variation big hit, 5R normal big hit, or any of the 2R normal big hits.

After that, when the big hit game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 307 (52a), the decoration symbol display device 208, the big hit start effect. The display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", a "bonus" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the player It is reported that the actual 5R probability variation big hit, 5R normal big hit, or 2R normal big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 307 (52a), the mini right hit display is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

FIG. 307 (38b) shows another effect example following that of FIG. 305 (37). FIG. 307 (38b) shows that the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, but the result of the loss is displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is informed that it will be lost. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also restarted. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 307 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out, and the animation display of the duel scene is restarted. Here, the main character loses to the enemy swordsman, then the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 306 (40b), the variable icon h0, the second hold number display, and the second decorative pattern are displayed. It remains and is hidden.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 307 (41b) to (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 scroll in from below the display area, and the hold icon and the navigation character YM. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 307 (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation fluctuation is started in the combination of the decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". It should be noted that the second decorative symbol is still variably displayed in the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 307 (43b), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of special figure I. At the timing shown in FIG. 307 (43b), the first sub-control unit 400 is in a state of not receiving the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300, so it is not determined to be the symbol fixed stop, The fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is continuously changed, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still in the variable display.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 307 (44b), the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are decorations of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7", respectively. Along with the stop display in the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays the symbols in a manner that the symbols have stopped.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 307 (45b), the variable icon erasing animation is displayed. In the variable icon deletion animation display, the variable icon h0 gradually decreases, and finally, as shown in FIG. 307 (46b), an animation display in which the variable icon h0 disappears is performed. The variable icon deletion animation may be started before the special figure is stopped.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 308 is a diagram showing an example of the timer advance notice effect step by step.

In FIG. 308, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308(1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 308(1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, and the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308(2) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen to start the timer advance notice effect. On the timer notice display TM1, "10:00" is displayed, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 10 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. In this effect example, the countdown is started at the time when the frame advance of the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, but after the frame advance of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed (that is, the display shown in FIG. 308 (3)). The countdown may be started (after that).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 308(3) to 308(7), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed until it becomes “00:00”. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 308(5), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 308(6), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 308(8), the timer notice display TM1 replaces the timer display and calls attention to the notice. Character is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 308(9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the pseudo symbol pattern in which the character of the lord is displayed in the middle symbol is started to move at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308(10), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 308(11), the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, and then shown in FIG. 308(12). As described above, the cut-in display including the lord's character and the character display of "continuation" is performed. In the present embodiment, in this manner, the pseudo-relational symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby informing that the pseudo-relational is being executed. Here, the pseudo-relation is a variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the variation start and the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol are executed plural times in the variable display of one special symbol. In the present embodiment, the larger the number of times the pseudo-repeating is executed, the larger the chance of being hit. The pseudo-relational pattern may be framed out downward without being stopped and displayed. When the pseudo-relational pattern is framed out downward, the pseudo-relational pattern is not started, and the decorative pattern of the lost pattern is left as it is. The combination may be stopped and displayed, or the reach state may be set and the reach effect may be started. In this way, in this example of performance, the timer is notified so that the pseudo-relation is started after the countdown is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 308 (13), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted on the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “×2” indicating that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started is displayed in a large size so as to overlap the first decorative symbol.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 308 (14), the display of “×2” is reduced and moved to the lower side of the second decorative pattern.

FIG. 308(3a) shows another effect example following FIG. 308(2). In this example of performance, "20:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect will be started 20 seconds after the countdown is started.

After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIGS. 308(10a) to (11a), the first pseudo-repeating is performed in the above-described manner. Then, as shown in FIG. 300 (14a), the second variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. 308(10a), FIG. 11(a), and FIG. 14(a) are effects corresponding to FIG. 308(10), FIG. 11(11), and FIG. 14(14), respectively.

Then, after “decoration 7” and “decoration 6” are stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, as shown in FIG. 308 (15a), 20 seconds have elapsed since the timer advance notice effect was started, and the timer When the timer display of the advance notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 308 (16a), in the timer advance notice display TM1, the word "attention" indicating that the notice is to be noticed instead of the timer display is displayed. Is displayed. Further, at this time, the right design changes from "decoration 6" to "decoration 7". The right symbol may remain unchanged as "decoration 6". Then, as shown in FIGS. 308(16a) to (17a), the second pseudo run is performed in the same manner as the first pseudo run. As described above, the timer advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 308(3a) to (17a) give advance notice that the second pseudo-relation will be started. In addition, the fact that the second pseudo-relationship is announced in advance can also mean that the first pseudo-replication start is also announced. It can be said that the start of the first and second simulated runs has been announced. Note that the timer advance notice in this example of performance is a notice of the start of the second pseudo-relation, but it may be a notice of another type of notice or the occurrence of an effect.

FIG. 308(7b) shows another effect example following FIG. 308(6). It should be noted that FIGS. 308(7b) to (11b) correspond to FIGS. 308(7) to (11), respectively. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308(7b), the display in the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 308 (8b-1), instead of the character display of "attention" in the timer notice display TM1, the face image of the lord's character to which the balloon line "Ikuze" is added. YMF is displayed. Then, after that, as shown in FIG. 308 (8b-2), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. In this way, the notice other than the timer notice display TM1 may be used to call attention to the notice. It should be noted that the means for urging attention to the notice after the countdown in the timer notice production is completed is not limited to display, and may be performed by voice or a lamp, or a combination of two or more of display, voice, and lamp. You may do it.

Then, as shown in FIG. 308 (9b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a pseudo continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is displayed in the middle symbol is started to move at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308(10b), the moving display of the pseudo-relational symbol is continuously performed, and the face image YMF of the lord's character is deleted, as shown in FIG. 308(11b). After the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 308 (12), a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continuation" is performed.

In this example of effect, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the effect (pseudo-relation) corresponding thereto is started, but the timer display becomes "00:00". However, there may be a case where the corresponding effect is not performed.

Further, another notice may be given while the timer notice countdown is being performed on the timer notice display TM1. In this case, this notice may be a notice related to the timer notice effect or a notice not related to the timer notice effect.
FIG. 309 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect step by step.

FIG. 309(a1) shows another effect example following FIG. 308(7). When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 309(a1), the timer notice display TM1 replaces the timer display and calls attention to the notice. Character is displayed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (a2), the navigation character YM is displayed with the sword facing toward the variable icon h0. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309(a3), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 309(a4), a state in which a beam is emitted from the sword held by the navigation character YM toward the variable icon h0 is displayed, and then shown in FIG. 309(a5). As described above, the advance notice display in which the character "heat" is added to the variable icon h0 is displayed. The look-ahead notice display may be performed by changing the display mode of the hold icon instead of the variable icon h0. After that, as shown in FIG. 309(a6), after the navigation character YM returns to the default display mode, as shown in FIG. 309(a7), the reach state by "decoration 7" occurs. In this way, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect in this example effect is an effect that gives advance notice that a notice is given.

FIG. 309(b1) shows a state after the timer advance notice effect has started. In the timer advance notice effect in this effect example, the timer display displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 is started as "30:00", that is, the advance notice effect in which 30 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Is to be started. At the timing shown in FIG. 309(b1), the display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is "29:69". As described above, a plurality of types of countdown times may be prepared for the timer announcement effect. For example, the longer the countdown time is, the higher the reliability of the big hit may be. The shorter the length, the higher the reliability of the big hit may be configured, or the reliability of the big hit may be configured to remain unchanged regardless of the countdown time. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (b2), about 8 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started, and in the first decorative pattern, the reach effect by "decoration 7" has started. It is shown.

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 309 (b3), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the upper left and right directions, respectively, and the variable icon h0 is displayed in the first UI unit 280. The frame icon is framed out below the screen, and the hold icon displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out.

Then, in FIG. 309 (b4), it is shown that the super reach (swordsman reach) has been developed. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (b4), the image of the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 309 (b5), on the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character and the enemy character are shown. Animation display of the duel scene with the swordsman begins. During this period, the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 309(b5), when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 309(b6), the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed to the timer display, and the advance notice is displayed. "Attention" is displayed to encourage attention to. Then, as shown in FIG. 309 (b7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice display in which the character "heat" is added to the variable icon h0 is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the timer advance notice effect is continuously performed even after the transition to the reach state.

FIG. 309(b4′-2) shows another effect example following FIG. 309(b4). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (b4′-2), after the animation display of the duel scene is started, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is “02:37”. There is. That is, the state is shown when approximately 27 seconds have elapsed since the countdown by the timer advance notice effect was started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (b4′-2), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed to show that the button effect is started. It should be noted that this button effect is different from the effect announced by the timer notification effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 309 (b5′), when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed to the timer display as shown in FIG. 309 (b6′). The word “Attention” is displayed to encourage attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 309 (b7′), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a notice in which the character “heat” is added to the variable icon h0. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the notification display (or effect) performed as a result of the countdown in the timer notification effect is being performed during the execution of the button effect.

In the above-described production example, an example in which a change display of the display mode of the variable icon h0 is performed as the production performed as a result of the countdown in the timer notice production is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other productions may be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 309 (b7″), the color of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT may be changed to give the advance notice.

FIG. 309(b6″″) shows another example of effect following FIG. 309(b5). When the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 309 (b6″″), the timer notice advance display TM1 replaces the timer display and calls attention to the advance notice. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 309 (b6″″-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to perform the advance notice display, and the animation display of the duel scene is a big hit reliability. It is shown that the display is switched to the cut-in display showing that the degree is extremely high. In this cut-in display, the princess character is displayed in a large size on the right side of the display screen, and the character "tsutsuatsu" indicating that the reliability of the big hit is extremely high is displayed. It should be noted that this cut-in display may be a notice display that confirms a big hit. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of counting down in the timer notice effect, two or more notice images are displayed. The display mode of the variable icon h0 may not change and only the cut-in display may be performed.

The example effects shown in FIGS. 309 (c1) to (c2) show how the lever effect starts as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 309(c1), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” during the execution of the duel scene animation display, and instead of the timer display, the attention is given to the notice. The "attention" character of is displayed. In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 in this production example, a production lever 136V is provided in addition to the production button 136 as the operation means for production.

Then, as shown in FIG. 309 (c2), the lever image 136Va simulating the effect lever 136V and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, showing that the lever effect is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 309(c3), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, in this effect example, the state in which the lever effect starts as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect is shown, but the button effect described above may be performed instead of the lever effect.

There may be a plurality of types of button effects depending on the degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, a button image 136a in a default mode, a button image 136a having a different color from the default mode (for example, red or gold). , A button image 136a in which characters are added to the default mode (for example, “excited heat” or “high expectations”, etc.) or a character, a button image 136a different in size from the default mode (for example, a large button effect or a mini button). Production), button images 136a that are displayed in a larger number than in the default mode (for example, when three button images 136a are displayed, the same number of operations as the number of button images 136a (for example, three times) are performed. Alternatively, the operation may be performed a number of times different from the number of button images 136a (for example, once, twice, four times...) In addition, a response according to the operation of the effect button 136 may be performed. The display may display a number corresponding to the number of button images 136a, or a number different from the number of button images 136a).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 309(d1) to (d4) show how the effect movable body operates as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect. As shown in FIG. 309 (d1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach is achieved by "decoration 7" in the first decorative symbol, and the reach effect is shown. In the first UI unit 280, the variable icon h0 remains and is framed out downward, and the hold icon displayed in the second UI unit 281 is also framed out downward. Further, a timer advance notice effect is also performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 309(d1), the timer advance notice display TM1 shows that the timer display is "00:00". After that, as shown in FIG. 309 (d2), the timer notice display TM1 displays the word "attention" to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Then, as shown in FIG. 309 (d3), the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. After that, as shown in FIG. 309 (d4), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, in this production example, as a result of the countdown in the timer notice production, the first large-board behavior auditors Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors Gd as the movable objects are shown to operate. The object 224E and the Senryo box role product 224H may operate, and two or more of the first large board action product Ga to the fourth large board action product Gd, the family crest role product 224E, and the thousand box work item 224H operate. May be.
FIG. 310 is a diagram showing another example of the timer announcement effect step by step.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310(1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 310(1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 310(1), the above-mentioned timer announcement effect is started, and the timer announcement display TM1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 310(1), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is "09:69".

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310(2), it is shown that the navigation character YM is performing the timer addition effect. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon displaying the characters "addition" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the time of the countdown performed in the timer advance notice effect is extended. It should be noted that, for example, a button presentation, a pseudo-relational presentation, a chance up announcement, a pre-reading announcement, or the like may be provided between the start of the timer announcement presentation and the start of the timer addition presentation. ..

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 310(3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, “+10 seconds” indicating the additional time is displayed, and the additional time is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 310(4), the effect of adding time is performed by the display of the count-up animation in which the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is variably displayed at high speed. Note that the count-up animation display may not be performed. Further, instead of displaying the count-up animation, as shown in FIG. 310(4a), the effect images may be overlapped in such a manner that the display state of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM is difficult to see. After the effect image shown in FIG. 310(4a) is displayed, the count-up animation shown in FIG. 310(4) may be displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310(5), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. .. That is, it can be said that the display mode on the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed by the effect of adding the timer. Note that the countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 310(6), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased, and after a predetermined time (for example, about 3 seconds after completion of the timer addition effect), the first pseudo continuous effect. Is started, and the pseudo-relational symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

In this effect example, when the timer addition effect is performed and the time is added to the timer display, the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than when the time is not added. There may be no change or it may be difficult to make a big hit.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 310(1b) to 310(6b) show a situation in which the timer addition effect based on the conversation notice is performed in place of the timer addition effect by the navigation character YM described above. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310(1b), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (1b), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 310(1b), the above-mentioned timer advance notice effect is started, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 310(1b), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is “09:69”. In addition, in FIG. 310(1b), the conversation announcement is started, and the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of “chance” is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. It should be noted that the timing at which the timer notice effect is started and the timing at which the conversation notice is started may be the same, the conversation notice may be started after the timer notice effect is started, or the conversation notice may be given. The timer advance notice effect may be started after the start. In addition, the sir's conversation image CI1 is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the sir's conversation image CI1 is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where it is not overlapped. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI1 of the lord.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 310(2b), the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed in a reduced size, and is moved below the display position of the second decorative pattern, and the old character is displayed. At the same time, the grandpa's conversation image CI2 is displayed in which the character display "10 seconds extra." As a result, the fact that 10 seconds has been added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM is notified. It should be noted that the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice production is continuously performed. In addition, the old conversation image CI2 is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the old conversation image CI2 is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where it is not overlapped. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the old conversation image CI2.

Then, as shown in FIG. 310(4b), the effect of adding time is performed by the display of the count-up animation described above.

Then, after the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased and the conversation notice ends, as shown in FIG. 310(6b), the count-up animation display ends and the timer display in the timer notice display TM changes. The time is updated to "15:00" and 10 seconds is added to the time displayed on the timer. In this example of effect, the count-up animation display is ended after the end of the conversation notice. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 310 (4b′-1) to FIG. 310 (4b′-2), The conversation announcement may be continued until the count-up animation display ends. Further, the timing of ending the conversation notice and the timing of ending the count-up animation display may be the same.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 310(1c) to (6c) show another example of the timer-added production based on the conversation notice. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310(1c), a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 310(1c), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 310(1c), the above-mentioned timer advance notice effect is started, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 310(1c), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is “09:69”. Further, in FIG. 310(1c), the conversation announcement has started, and the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. It should be noted that the lord's conversation image CI1 is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the lord's conversation image CI1 is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the timer notice display TM1 is not overlapped. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI1 of the lord.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 310 (2c-1), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed in a reduced size and moved below the display position of the second decorative pattern, The old conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image described above is displayed is displayed together with the character. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (2c-1), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. Further, even during the execution of the conversation notice, the countdown by the timer notice effect is continuously performed.

After that, the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (2c-2). FIG. 310(2c-3) shows a state in which about 1.5 seconds have elapsed since the operation valid period was started, and the length of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT corresponds to the elapsed time. It is decreasing. After that, when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 310(2c-4), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT disappears, and the player is notified of that. R. Then, as shown in FIG. 310(3c), the display of the old conversation image CI2 is changed to the character display of "additional 10 seconds" indicating the time added from the operation prompting notification image, and in the timer notice display TM. It is informed that 10 seconds will be added to the timer display. In addition, when the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period, the time addition in the timer display may not be performed. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT may be temporarily disappeared, and then the display may be changed to the character display of "additional 10 seconds." The remaining time display meter MT may be changed to a character display such as "additional 10 seconds" without displaying the gauge disappearing. Further, on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated in the operation valid period, the character display of "It is an additional 10 seconds" may be displayed after the operation valid period has elapsed. When the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, 10 seconds may be added to the time indicated by the timer display at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated. That is, 10 seconds may be added to the remaining time when the effect button 136 is pressed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 310(4c), the effect of adding time is performed by the display of the count-up animation described above. In this case, the count-up animation display may be ended after the conversation notice is ended, or the conversation notice may be continuously given until the count-up animation display is finished. May end at the same time as the end of the count-up animation display.

Then, after the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased and the conversation notice ends, as shown in FIG. 310(6c), the count-up animation display ends, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM is displayed. It is updated and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 310(6c), after 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display, the timer display counts down to "09:85".

In addition, in this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 310 (2c-2) to (2c-4), the countdown display in the timer notice effect is continuously displayed even during the operation valid period. After the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 310(2c-2), as shown in FIG. 310(2c-3′), the countdown update display in the timer notice effect is not displayed during the operation valid period. Then (when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is left as "06:00"), the internal clock is performed, and at the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 310 (2c-4'), The timing result (for example, the remaining 2.00 seconds at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (2c-4′)) may be reflected in the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 to restart the countdown update display.

Further, for example, after the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (2c-2), as shown in FIG. 310 (2c-3″), the countdown update in the timer notice effect is performed during the operation valid period. Without displaying (while keeping the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 as "06:00"), the time is measured internally, and as shown in FIG. 310 (2c-4″), the operation valid period has elapsed. However, as shown in FIG. 310 (3c″), it does not reflect the internal time measurement result, and the display of the old conversation image CI2 indicates “10 seconds additional time” indicating the time added from the operation promotion notification image. At the timing when the display is changed to the character display, the internal timekeeping result (for example, 1.23 seconds remaining at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (3c″)) is reflected on the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown update display is displayed. May be restarted.
FIG. 311 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 311(1d) to FIG. 3(2d) show another example of the effect of FIG. 310(1b) to FIG. 310(2b). In FIG. 311 (1d), the character display displayed in the conversation image CI1 of the lord is “Attention to timer notice”. As a result, it may be possible to focus attention on the effect (notice) performed as a result of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 being "00:00". That is, it can be said that the advance notice is given by the display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord in FIG. 311 (1d).

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 311 (2d), the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed in a reduced size, and moved below the display position of the second decorative pattern, as shown in FIG. In 2b), the above-mentioned old conversation image CI2 is displayed. In this way, after paying attention to the timer notice effect, the fact that the timer display changes may be notified.

FIG. 311(1e) shows another effect example of FIG. 311(1d). In FIG. 311 (1e), the timer display is "00" by performing scroll display SC1 that scrolls from the right end to the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 above the timer notice display TM1 in place of the sir's conversation image CI1. You may make it pay attention to the effect produced as a result of becoming ":00". That is, in the scroll display SC1 shown in FIG. 311 (1e), the characters “watch timer notice” scroll in a loop from the right end to the left end of the display screen.

311 (1f) to (6f) is another example of the timer addition effect, in which the countdown of the added time is performed by a display different from the timer notice display TM1. Showing. FIG. 311(1f) is an example of effect following FIG. 310(3). After notification of the additional time by the balloon of the navigation character YM, the additional timer display TM2 is displayed below the timer notice display TM1. It is shown that the frame is in from the right end. In this additional timer display TM2, "10:00" indicating the additional time is displayed. Here, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is performed while the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted. Note that the additional timer display TM2 overlaps the balloon of the navigation character YM and is more difficult to visually recognize than when it is in a non-overlapping state. Further, the additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the balloon of the navigation character YM.

FIG. 311 (2f) shows a state in which the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed. At this time, the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased. Here, the balloon of the navigation character YM may be deleted after the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is completed, or the frame of the additional timer display TM2 is displayed after the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. The animation may be completed, or the timing of completing the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 and the timing of erasing the balloon of the navigation character YM may be the same. In FIG. 311 (2f), the additional timer display TM2 is arranged below the timer notification display TM1, but the timer notification display TM1 and the additional timer display TM2 may be arranged so as to overlap each other. As shown in FIG. 311 (2f″), the additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the timer advance notice display TM1, or as shown in FIG. 311 (2f″), the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed. You may make it overlap with the addition timer display TM2.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 311 (2f) to (4f), the process continues until the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 311 (5f), the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is started, and the state of the timer notice display TM1 being framed out to the right end of the display screen is shown. .. Here, the frame-out animation of the timer notice display TM1 may start after the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 has started, or the timing of the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 to start. The timing at which the frame-out animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts may be the same. Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 311 (5f), the timer notice display TM1 is framed out when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, but the timer notice display TM1 is not framed out. At that time, for example, as shown in FIG. 311 (5f′), the word “attention” may be displayed on the timer notice display TM1 to urge attention to the notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 311 (6f), in response to the completion of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, a pseudo continuous symbol appears in the middle symbol and the pseudo continuous symbol may be performed. The additional timer display TM2 counts down the time until another effect is performed. In addition, the pseudo continuous symbol does not appear at the completion of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, and the pseudo continuous symbol may appear when the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is completed. As described above, in this effect example, the added time is not added to the timer display in the timer notification display TM1 but is displayed on the additional timer display TM2 different from the timer notification display TM1 and the countdown is performed. ing. It should be noted that the notification of the added time may be notification of a total value of a plurality of timer advance notice displays. For example, a value obtained by adding 3 seconds to the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed, and the remaining timer indication TM2 may be displayed. A value obtained by adding 7 seconds may be displayed. The additional timer display TM2 here may be a timer notice newly displayed as the timer is added, or a timer notice originally displayed before the timer is added.

311 (3fa) to (8fa) are still another example of the timer addition effect, in which the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the countdown of the timer display in the addition timer display TM2 are simultaneously performed. It shows the situation. FIG. 311 (3fa) is an example of production following FIG. 311 (2f), and after the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is completed, the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 counts down together with the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is shown to be starting. That is, in this example of performance, the additional time is reported as 10 seconds, but the additional time is substantially 5 seconds. It should be noted that the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 may be a time obtained by adding the time indicated by the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 to the additional time of 10 seconds so that the additional display is substantially performed for 10 seconds. For example, in the case shown in FIG. 311 (3fa), "15:00" may be displayed on the additional timer display TM2.

After that, the countdown is continued in the manner shown in FIGS. 311 (3f) to (6f), and in FIG. 311 (7fa), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol to notify that the pseudo symbol is to be performed. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 311 (8fa), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted and the first pseudo-repeating is performed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “×2” indicating that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started is displayed below the second decorative symbol. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 311 (8fa), the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is completed, and the word "attention" indicating that the notice is to be displayed instead of the timer display is displayed. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 311 (9fa), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the replay symbol RP as a pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the second pseudo sequence is started. .. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 311 (9fa′), the pine symbol CC as a chance symbol may be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a notice may be given. Further, the pseudo continuous effect may be performed after the pine symbol CC is stopped and displayed. In this way, it is also possible to suggest that, as the effect that is performed as a result of the countdown by the timer notice effect, the notice effect or the big hit other than the pseudo-relation. Here, the replay symbol RP and the pine symbol CC are overlapped with the additional timer display TM2, but may be overlapped with the additional timer display TM2. As described above, in this effect example, the timer display is increased as one mode of the change in the display mode of the timer display. The timer display may be divided.
FIG. 312 is a diagram showing another example of the timer announcement effect step by step.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 312(1), the variable display of the decorative pattern is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 312(1), the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 2, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 are displayed, and in the second holding number display. , "2" indicating that the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 2 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 312(2), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed overlapping with the left symbol. The display of the notice icon MI1 of the clock is a notice display that may function as a look-ahead notice, and indicates that time is added in the timer notice effect. In addition, you may announce that a timer announcement production will be performed. Here, the timing at which the left symbol stops and the timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed may be the same, or the clock notice icon MI1 may be displayed after the left symbol stops, The left symbol may stop after the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed. Note that the display timing of the notice icon to be stocked is not limited to the case where the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed in association with the decorative pattern, and various kinds of notice icon stop notice, navigation character notice, conversation notice, etc. There may be a case where it is performed at any timing such as an advance notice or a hold or the like in the design variable display due to the effect, or a look-ahead notice due to various effects such as the navigation character YM.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 312(3), in the first UI unit 280, the platform on which the navigation character YM stands is raised and the notice icon display area 285 is formed. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, five areas, and areas in which the notice icon is displayed are arranged side by side in the row direction. Note that the number of areas configured in the notice icon display area 285 can be set arbitrarily.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 312(4), the notice icon MI1 of the clock moves to the notice icon display area 285 and is stocked. In addition, in the first decorative symbol, a state in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol is shown. Here, the timing when the right symbol stops and the timing when the notice icon MI1 of the clock starts moving may be the same, or the notice icon MI1 may start moving after the right symbol stops. The right symbol may stop after the notice icon MI1 starts moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 312(5), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is reduced and displayed, stored in the leftmost area of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked. ing. Incidentally, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 312 (5), the middle design is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative design and the second decorative design are a combination of the lost decorative designs of "Decorative 4-Decorative 1-Decorative 7". It is shown that it is confirmed and displayed. The timing when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stored in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as the timing when the decorative design is confirmed and displayed, or the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. The decorative pattern may be confirmed and displayed after being stored, or the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be stored in the notice icon display area 285 after the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 312(6), one holding of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the variable display of the symbol is displayed. Also, the timer advance notice effect has started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 312(6), the timer indication displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 is "09:69", and the countdown is being performed. Note that there may be an effect display (for example, the navigation character YM) that overlaps the timer notification display only during execution of a certain effect (for example, stock effect of the notice icon). On the contrary, there may be an effect display in which the timer notice is overlapped only while a certain effect is being executed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 312(7), an effect is displayed around the notice icon MI1 of the clock stored in the notice icon display area 285 to give notice that the notice icon MI1 of the clock will be used. .. Note that "07:31" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 312(8), the notice icon MI1 of the clock pops out from the notice icon display area 285 and is enlarged and displayed in the substantial center of the display screen. Although the effect is still displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be erased at the timing of popping out of the notice icon display area 285.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 312(9), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is erased, and the display of the count-up animation is started. The timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is deleted may be the same as the timing at which the count-up animation display is started, or the count-up animation may be displayed after the clock notice icon MI1 is deleted. The notification may be started, or the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be deleted after the display of the count-up animation is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 312(10), the notice icon display area 285 is framed out downward.
FIG. 313 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect step by step.

The example effects shown in FIGS. 313(A1) to (A4) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 313(A1), the variable display of the decorative pattern is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 313 (A1), the number of holdings in special figure 1 is 1, and the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings in special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313(A1), the timer notice effect is started, and "09:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (A2), it is shown that “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on each of the left symbol and the right symbol. Further, the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is completed, and the timer display is "00:00".

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (A3), a balloon with the characters "add on" displayed near the navigation character YM is displayed, and the time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. In addition, even if the characters "Add on" are displayed, the time displayed by the timer may not be added, or another effect may be performed. Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 313 (A3a-1), after displaying the character of "attention" to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display, as shown in FIG. 313 (A3a-2). Alternatively, a balloon of the navigation character YM may be displayed, and "+10 seconds" indicating the additional time may be displayed in the balloon to notify the additional time. In this example of the effect, the effect to be displayed as "attention" is not a notice display but an addition of 10 seconds. In addition, for example, as shown in FIG. 313 (A3b-1), instead of the timer display, after displaying the characters "not yet" to the effect that the timer advance notice effect continues, the display of the timer advance notice display TM1 is added. The time to be added may be notified by switching to the display of “+10 seconds” indicating the time to be added. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 313 (A3b-1), after displaying the characters "Still" on the timer notice display TM1, a balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed, and "+10" indicating the time to be added to the balloon is displayed. The display of “second” may be performed. Alternatively, after the display shown in FIG. 313 (A3), the display shown in FIG. 313 (A3b-2) may be performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 313 (A4), 10 seconds are added to the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display is updated to "10:00", and the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is restarted. .. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (A4), in response to the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 being “00:00”, the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. Is shown. The timing at which the timer display is updated and the timing at which the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed may be the same, or the pseudo continuous symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display is updated, The timer display may be updated after the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 313 (B1) to (B5) show effect examples in which the timer is shortened in the timer notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (B1), a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 313 (B1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and the timer advance notice display TM1 displays "06:99" and the countdown is performed. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (B1), a balloon in which the character “subtract” is displayed is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the time is subtracted from the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the time for which the timer advance notice effect is performed is shortened by a predetermined time.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (B2), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 continues, and the timer display shows "05:89". In addition, the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed to the character display of "subtraction" and "-3 seconds" indicating the shortened time. That is, it may be recognized that the timer announcement effect is shortened by 3 seconds, and the period until the countdown is completed is shorter than the initially displayed time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 313 (B3), an effect of shortening the time (timer shortening effect) is performed by displaying a shortened animation in which the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is variably displayed at high speed. Note that the shortened animation display may not be performed. Further, the effect images may be overlapped in such a manner that the display state of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is difficult to visually recognize.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (B4), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to “02:00”, and the time in the timer display is shortened (subtracted) by 3 seconds. ing. That is, it can be said that the display mode on the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed due to the effect of shortening the timer. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer shortening effect is being performed.

After that, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 313 (B5), the word "attention" is displayed instead of the timer display to call attention to the advance notice, and then the middle An advance notice is displayed by stopping and displaying the pine symbol CC as a chance symbol on the symbol. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 313 (B5′), the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-relational symbol may be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol to notify that the pseudo-repetition is started. The timing at which the "attention" character is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 may be the same as the timing at which the pine pattern CC (or the replay symbol RP) is stopped and displayed, or the "attention" character. After the start of the display, the pine symbol CC (or the replay symbol RP) may be stopped and displayed, or after the pine symbol CC (or the replay symbol RP) is stopped and displayed, the "attention" character May start displaying. Note that the appearance rate of the contents of the effect performed when the countdown is completed may change depending on whether the timer display does not change in the timer notification effect, for example, when the timer notification effect is being executed. If there is no change in the display, the pseudo-relational pattern is stopped and the notification of the pseudo-reliance is likely to be made. You may make it easy to give a highly reliable notice of the jackpot. In addition, when the timer shortening effect is performed, the pseudo-relation may be notified earlier than when the timer shortening effect is not performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 313(C1) to (C2) show another effect example in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes in the timer notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (C1), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 313 (C1), the number of holdings in special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings in special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (C1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and the timer advance notice display TM1 displays "06:99", and the countdown is performed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (C1), a balloon in which the characters “timer notice level UP” is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the jackpot reliability of the timer notice display TM1 is high. It is suggested that it may improve.

Then, as shown in FIG. 313 (C2), the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 changes from, for example, white to red, and it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot for the timer notice display TM1 is improved. ing. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display, it is notified that a highly reliable notification may be given as the notification to be executed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 313(D1) to (D5) show effect examples in which the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted and restarted. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (D1), a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 313 (D1), the number of holdings in special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings in special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (D1), the timer notice effect is performed, and the timer notice display TM1 displays "06:99". Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (D1), a balloon in which the character “Stop” is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted. It should be noted that the timing at which the balloon with the word "Stop" is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, or the balloon with the word "Stop" is displayed. After that, the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted, or after the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, the display of the balloon to which the character “Stop” is added may be started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (D2), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and it is shown that the pseudo symbol is informed. At the timing shown in FIG. 313(D2), the countdown of the timer display is suspended, and the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "06:99".

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 313 (D3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted, and the second variable symbol display by pseudo-linking is displayed. Has been done. It should be noted that “×2” is displayed below the second decorative pattern, which indicates that the second variable display of the decorative pattern is being performed by the pseudo link. Then, as shown in FIG. 313 (D3), a balloon in which the word "restart" is displayed is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display is restarted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 313(D4), the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is resumed, and thereafter, the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased as shown in FIG. 313(D5). As described above, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display is interrupted while a predetermined effect such as pseudo-relation is being performed, and it is possible to restart the countdown after the effect is finished. Has been done.

As an example of a change in the display mode of the timer notice display TM1, the number of the timer notice display TM1 may change (increase or decrease) more than before the change. For example, if one timer notice display TM1 is displayed before the change, and the timer notice display TM1 is notified to change, the timer notice display TM1 may increase to 2 or more, and conversely. When three notifications TM1 are displayed and the notification of the timer notification TM1 is changed, the timer notification display TM1 may be reduced to 2 or less. Here, when the number of the timer notice display TM1 increases, the time notified by the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed separately from the time previously notified by the timer notice display TM1. The displayed timer notice display TM1 may be increased as it is (for example, if there is one timer timer notice display TM1 indicating 10 seconds, if two timer notice displays TM1 are increased, 10). There are two timer advance notice displays TM1 that notify the seconds). Further, when the number of the timer notice display TM1 is decreased, the total value of the times notified by the timer notice display TM1 originally displayed may be displayed, or the timer notice display TM1 may be decreased as it is. (For example, assuming that there are two timer notice displays TM1 that notify 10 seconds, if the number is reduced to one, the timer notice display TM1 that notifies 10 seconds becomes one). When there are a plurality of timer notice displays TM1 that have changed due to increase or decrease, the timer notice display TM1 may start counting down at the same timing or at different timings.

FIG. 314 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer advance notice effect. Note that in the effect example shown in FIG. 314, in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302(a), a sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the family crest cast 224E. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative pattern display device 208. In addition, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd, and the thousand box cabinet auditors 224H are not shown for the sake of easy description.

The example effects shown in FIGS. 314(A1) to (A6) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (A1), the variable display of the decorative pattern is shown. Further, on the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 314(A1), the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and in the second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 314(A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and "05:89" is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 314(A1), a balloon in which the character "+10 seconds" is displayed is displayed near the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The time to be added is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 314(A2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, and its upper right corner overlaps with the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Then, as shown in FIG. 314(A3), in the timer notice display TM1, a count-up animation display is performed and an effect of adding time is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 314(A4), the sub display device 208S descends and returns to the initial position.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 314 (A5), in the timer notice display TM1, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to “15:00”, and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. It is shown. Note that the countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 314(A6), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased on the sub display device 208S. In this example of effect, when the timer addition effect is performed, the operation of raising the sub display device 208S is performed, but the operation of raising the sub display device 208S may not be performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 314(B1) to (B7) show another example of the timer addition effect using the sub display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314(B1), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed is shown. Further, on the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 314 (B1), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and in the second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314(B1), the timer notice effect is started, and "06:54" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed.

Then, in the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 314(B2), the display of the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icon are switched to the display of the characters “+10 seconds”, and the timer display is added to the timer display in the advance notice display TM1. The time to be notified is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 314(B3), when the sub display device 208S moves upward and overlaps with the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208 substantially in the center, the count-up animation display is started on the timer notice display TM1. The effect is to add time. At least a part of the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and it is more difficult to visually recognize the timer advance notice display TM1 than in the case where they are not overlapped. Further, the timing at which the sub display device 208S is located on the front side substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timing at which the count-up animation display starts may be the same, or the sub display device 208S may display the decorative symbol. The count-up animation display may be started after being positioned on the front side of the center of the device 208, or may be counted up before the sub display device 208S is positioned on the front side of the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. Animation display may start.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 314(B4) to (B5), the sub display device 208S displays a countdown of the additional time. More specifically, the addition time displayed on the sub display device 208S is decreased by 1 second, while the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 is added by 1 second. .. In this example of performance, while the countdown display of the additional time is being displayed, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted, but the countdown may be continued without being interrupted. Then, as shown in FIG. 314 (B5), when the additional time displayed on the sub display device 208S becomes “0 seconds”, the time of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed. It is updated and displayed. At this time, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 overlaps the sub display device 208S, and it is difficult to specify the time of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 314 (B6), in the sub display device 208S, the display of the additional time is switched to the display of “Restart” indicating that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is restarted, and then, The sub display device 208S starts descending toward the initial position.

FIG. 314(B7) shows a state in which the sub display device 208S descends and returns to the initial position. In the timer notice display TM1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, the countdown of the timer display is restarted, and the timer display is "14:23" at the timing shown in FIG. 314(B7). After that, the display of "Restart" displayed on the sub display device 208S is switched to the original display (display of the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0, and the notice icon) as shown in FIG. 314 (B1). Here, the timing at which the countdown of the timer display restarts and the timing at which the sub-display device 208S starts to descend may be the same, or the sub-display device 208S starts to descend after the countdown of the timer display restarts. Alternatively, the countdown of the timer display may be restarted after the sub display device 208S starts to descend. In addition, the timing when "Restart" is started to be displayed on the sub display device 208S and the timing when the countdown of the timer display is restarted may be the same, or after "Restart" is started to be displayed on the sub display device 208S. Then, the countdown of the timer display may be restarted, or “Restart” may be started to be displayed on the sub display device 208S after the countdown of the timer display is restarted. The timing at which the sub display device 208S returns to the initial position and the timing at which the countdown of the timer display restarts may be the same, or the countdown of the timer display restarts after the sub display device 208S returns to the initial position. Alternatively, the sub display device 208S may return to the initial position after the timer display countdown is restarted.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 314(C1) to (C6) show another example of the timer addition effect using the sub display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314(C1), a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is shown. Further, on the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 314 (C1), the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and in the second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (C1), the timer notice effect is started, and "05:89" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 314(C1), a balloon in which the character “+10 seconds” is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The time to be added is notified. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 314(C1), the timer advance notice display TM1 starts displaying a sucking animation for sucking the balloon displayed on the sub display device 208S, and the timer advance notice display TM1 sucks out. An effect image showing the situation is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 314(C2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, and a part of the display area of the sub display device 208S overlaps with a part of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. The display mode of the character "+10 seconds" displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM extends toward the timer notice display TM1 and is displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. The navigation character YM has a facial expression that surprises him.

In FIG. 314(C3), a state in which the sucking animation is continuously displayed is shown. Specifically, the display of "+10 seconds" absorbed by the timer notice display TM1 by the sucking animation further moves toward the timer notice display TM1, and the display of "+10 seconds" continues to the sub display device 208S. Is displayed across the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, on the timer notice display TM1, the above-mentioned count-up animation display has started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 314 (C4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "+10 seconds" absorbed by the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208. , The state of moving toward the timer notice display TM1 while being reduced. It should be noted that while the sucking animation is being displayed, the navigation character YM performs a surprising animation (an animation that accompanies the sucking animation) by seeing the sucking animation, but there is no particular need to perform the animation. ..

After that, as shown in FIG. 314(C5), when the display of “+10 seconds” is completely absorbed by the timer notice display TM1, the absorption animation display is completed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 314(C6), the timer is displayed. The notice display TM1 shows that the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to “15:00”, and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. Note that the countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed. In the case where a plurality of decorative symbol display devices are provided, the timer announcement effect may be performed only by one decorative symbol display device.
FIG. 315 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect step by step.

The example effects shown in FIGS. 315(A1) to (A4) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the example productions shown in FIGS. 315(A1) to 315(A4), the production device 206 shown in FIG. 302(a) is used. A part of the first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd and the thousand-axle box accessory 224H will be described by omitting illustration.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 315(A1), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 315(A1), the number of holdings in special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings in special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 315(A1), the timer notice effect is started, and "06:99" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 315(A2), the second large-board behavior auditor 224Gb and the fourth large-board behavior auditor 224Gd operate and overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, it is notified that time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Then, as shown in FIG. 315(A3), on the timer advance notice display TM1, the count-up animation display is performed and the effect of adding time is started.

After that, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. In addition, in this example of performance, the second large-board behavior auditors 224Gb and the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd among the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd operate to display 10 on the timer display. Although it is informed that the addition of seconds is performed, the time to be added may be different depending on the number of the activated actors among the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd, for example, When all of the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd are activated, 20 seconds may be added to the timer display. In addition, in this example of performance, the second large-scale behavioral accessory 224Gb and the fourth large-scale behavioral accessory 224Gd operate only once to notify that 10 seconds are added to the timer display. The time to be added may be different depending on the number of times. For example, when the second large-board behavior auditor 224Gb and the fourth large-board behavior auditor 224Gd operate three times, an additional 30 seconds is added to the timer display. May be.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 315(B1) to (B4) show examples of additional timer productions using the family crest monument 224E. It should be noted that in the example productions shown in FIGS. 315(B1) to (B4), description will be made using the production device 206 shown in FIG. 302(a), but for ease of explanation, the first large-scale behavior accessory A description will be given by omitting the illustration of 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224 Gd and the Senryo box accessory 224 H.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 315(B1), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 315 (B1), the number of holdings in special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings in special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 315(B1), the timer notice effect is started, and "06:99" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 315 (B2), the family crest accessory 224E operates, rises to the front side slightly below the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, overlaps with the decorative pattern display device 208, and moves up and down at that position. Work in the direction. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a state in which the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of times is displayed around the overlapping family crest part 224E. Specifically, one "+5 second" display, two "+2 second" display, and one "+1 second" display are displayed so as to surround the family crest product 224E, whereby the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. It is informed that 10 seconds will be added to the timer display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 315(B3), on the timer notice display TM1, the count-up animation display is performed and the effect of adding time is started.

After that, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. In addition, in this example of performance, it is informed that the family coat character 224E is operated only once to add 10 seconds to the timer display, but the time to be added may be different depending on the number of operations. Of course, for example, when the family crest part 224E operates three times, 30 seconds may be added to the timer display. The production examples shown in FIGS. 315(C1) to (C6) show another example of the timer-added production using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 315(C1) to (C6), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302(b) is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. However, the image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It should be noted that the family crest accessory 224E and the Senryo box accessory 224H are omitted from the drawing for ease of explanation.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315(C1), a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 315 (C1), the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first holding icon h11 is displayed in the holding display area in the second UI unit 281 formed on the lower left side of the display area. Is displayed, and in the second hold number display arranged in the upper right corner of the display area, “1” indicating that the hold number in Toku-zu 1 is 1 is displayed. In addition, a first UI unit 280 is formed on the lower right side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and on the first UI unit 280, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed.

Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer notice effect is being performed, and the countdown of the timer display is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 315(C1), "05:00" is displayed as the timer display. In this example of performance, when the timer display becomes "05:00", the countdown is interrupted and "05:00" is displayed. The display is maintained. The countdown may be continuously performed without interrupting the countdown.

In addition, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the characters "additional 10 seconds" are displayed, and the time to be added to the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is informed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 315(C2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in the directions in which they approach each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, As shown in FIG. 315(C3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the position closest to each other. At this time, the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps a part of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM is more difficult to visually recognize than the case where the third decorative symbol display device 208N is not overlapped. Has become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 315 (C4), the display of "15:00" indicating the time when 10 seconds is added to the time indicated by the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second display. It is displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 315(C5), the display of "15:00" is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is not displaying the timer display. The two decorative symbol display devices 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display start timing of “15:00” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the movement start timing of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be the same, After the display of "15:00" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is started, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may start moving, or the second decorative symbol. The display of “15:00” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be started after the symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 315(C6), after the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to their initial positions, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is restarted. It In addition, the countdown of the timer display in the state where the display of “15:00” is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N (for example, the state shown in FIG. 315(C4)). May be restarted. The case where the timer display is displayed over a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be configured to be a big hit more easily than when the timer display is displayed on one decorative symbol display device, The jackpots may be the same in ease, or may be configured so as not to be a jackpot.
FIG. 316 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the timer advance notice effect.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 316(A1) to (A4) show another example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 316(A1) to (A4), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302(b) is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. However, the image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It should be noted that the family crest accessory 224E and the Senryo box accessory 224H are omitted from the drawing for ease of explanation.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316(A1), a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 316(A1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, and the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer notice effect is started, and the timer display countdown is performed. That is, in this effect example, two timer notice effects are performed. In this effect example, the timer notice effect performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is the first timer notice effect, and the timer notice effect performed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second timer notice effect. explain. At the timing shown in FIG. 316(A1), "05:89" is displayed as the timer display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and "15:89" is displayed as the timer display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Has been done.

After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in the directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this effect example, the countdown of the timer display is continued even when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are moving, but may be interrupted. Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest position, as shown in FIG. 316(A2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device. The time indicated by the timer display respectively displayed in 208N is added up, and the display of "20:00" showing the result is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. R. At this time, the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, but it does not have to be interrupted. Further, the timer display of "20:00" is also displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L at a position corresponding to the display of "20:00" displayed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, since it is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is difficult to visually recognize. After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

FIG. 316(A3) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to the initial positions. Here, the timer display of "20:00" displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device. In response to the movement of 208N, scroll display is performed while maintaining the displayed coordinates. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M scrolls the display of "20:00" to the right in accordance with the movement to the initial position, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N responds to the movement to the initial position. The display of "20:00" is scrolled to the left. In the process of movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display of "20:00" is the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol. When "20:00" displayed across the symbol display device 208N and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is completely scrolled out, FIG. 316(A3) is displayed. As shown, the display of "20:00" is only displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

Then, as shown in FIG. 316 (A4), the timer display of "20:00" displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is erased and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. After that, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is restarted. It should be noted that the countdown may be started while the display of "20:00" is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L (for example, the state shown in FIG. 316(A3)). Here, the decorative pattern display device for which the timer display is displayed may have different jackpot susceptibility (in this example of performance, when the timer display is displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208L, It is more likely to be a big hit than the two decorative symbol display devices 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed separately, but the jackpots may be the same or less likely to be a big hit).

The example of effects shown in FIGS. 316(B1) to (B3) show an example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 316(B1) to (B3), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302(a) is applied, but in this effect example, instead of the family crest cast 224E, FIG. The POV display 224I described above with reference to FIG. In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 316(B1) to 316(B3), in order to facilitate the description, a part of the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd and the 1000-box box accessory 224H will be described. The illustration is omitted here.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 316(B1), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 316 (B1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, and the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 316(B1), the timer notice effect is started, and "05:71" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. Further, in FIG. 316(B1), the POV display 224I has reached a constant rotation speed and is rotating at a constant speed. Then, by the lighting control of the plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array, the character "+10" is displayed by the simple display, and the time to be added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is notified. As shown in FIG. 316(B1), by rotating the LED array of the POV display 224I, all of the first decorative symbol and the variable icon h0, the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11, and a part of the timer notice display TM1 are displayed. Since it overlaps with the rotating area, it is difficult to see.

After that, as shown in FIG. 316(B2), the character "+10" displayed on the POV display 224I moves to the lower right, and the display "+10" displayed only on the POV display 224I so far. Is also displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. That is, the character “+10” is displayed across the POV display 224I and the decorative pattern display device 208. At this time, the character "+10" may have a decorated display mode. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character "+10" so as to match the display of the character "+10" on the POV display 224I. As a result, it may be possible to perform display with a sense of unity with the display of "+10" on the POV display 224I and the display of the character "+10" displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In addition, in this production example, the number font displayed on the POV display 224I is different from the number font displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, but it may be the same.

After that, after the rotation speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I decreases, the POV display 224I stops in the initial posture as shown in FIG. 316(B3). At this time, the display of the character "+10" displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is easier to visually recognize than the state where the LED array is rotating. In this example of performance, thereafter, 10 seconds is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1.

The example effects shown in FIGS. 316(C1) to (C5) show other examples of the timer addition effect using a plurality of display devices (decorative pattern display device 208 and POV display 224I). Here, the configuration in the effect example shown in FIGS. 316(C1) to (C5) is the same as that shown in FIG. 316(B1).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 316(C1), a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 316 (C1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 316(C1), the timer notice effect is started, and "06:87" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. Further, in FIG. 316(C1), the POV display 224I has risen from the initial position to the position on the front side in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the initial posture, and is not rotating. Note that the entire variable icon h0 and the first decorative symbol and a part of the timer notice display TM1 are overlapped with the POV display 224I, which makes it more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where they are not overlapped.

After that, when the LED array of the POV display 224I starts to rotate and reaches a constant rotation speed to be rotated at a constant speed, as shown in FIG. 316(C2), the timer notice display TM1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The timer display displayed on the screen is displayed on the POV display 224I, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. The timer display displayed on the POV display 224I is "05:17", and the countdown is continuing. Further, at this time, it is shown that the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of parts and displayed around the rotation area of the LED array. Specifically, one "+5 second" display, two "+2 second" display, and one "+1 second" display are displayed so as to surround the family crest actor 224E, whereby 10 seconds are displayed on the timer display. It is informed that the addition will be made. Thereafter, on the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 316(C3), an effect that the timer display bursts is displayed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 316(C4), the timer display after addition is "15:00". Is displayed. In this example of performance, when "15:00" is displayed, the countdown is interrupted, but it may be continued.

Then, the rotation speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I starts to decrease, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the timer advance notice display TM1 again. Then, as shown in FIG. 316 (C5), the robot stops in the initial posture. At this time, the timer display of the displayed timer advance notice display TM1 is "15:00", and then the countdown is restarted. The countdown may be restarted while the timer display is displayed on the POV display 224I. Here, the case where the timer display is displayed by the POV display 224I may be made to be a big hit more easily than the case where the timer display is displayed by the decorative pattern display device 208, but the big hit is easily made. May be the same or may not be a big hit.

In addition, in the timer announcement effect described so far, when adding, shortening, or interrupting the timer in the timer display, internally from the beginning of the countdown before the change to the end of the countdown after the change. The total time may be counted down. Also, internally, the time until the change before the change may be counted down, and the time after the change may be counted down (for example, if it changes 10 seconds after the countdown is started, If 10 seconds is counted down and "Attention" is displayed 5 seconds after the change, then 5 seconds are counted down). Further, the display of the countdown and the internally counted time may be the same.
FIG. 317 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In FIG. 317, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, in this example of effect, the above-described effect lever 136V is further provided.

FIG. 317(1) shows another effect example following FIG. 305(25). In FIG. 317(1), the state of development into super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 317(1), the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 317(2), an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. Is displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 317(2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. The chance up meter CMT is, for example, a meter showing the progress status of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves between the start point SP and the final point GP, and the progress status of the current reach effect is roughly indicated by the position. Information. Here, the advancing speed of the character SBH of Sabohani is not constant but may be changed depending on the progress situation of the effect, but it may be constant. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 317(2), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, so that the player can be expected. That is, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 on the way, a specific advance notice may occur. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is displayed in rotation, which suggests that when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, either the result of the big hit or the loss is derived. In this example of performance, the display of the chance up meter CMT is started when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but the display of the state that has evolved into the super reach shown in FIG. 317(1) is started. The display may be started at the same timing, the display may be started when the reach state is reached, the display may be started before the reach state occurs, or the variation of the decorative design The display may be started when the display is started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317(3) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is starting to move from the start point SP.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 317(4), at the timing when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the character Boy of Boyi appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. The situation is shown. That is, it is shown that the advance notice is given by the appearance of the boy character BOY. It can be said that the boy character BOY is functioning as a chance-up character.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 317(5), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up Boy Passed" is displayed near the character SBH of Savohani, and a notice is given by the character display of the chance up. I am informing you. The timing at which the boy character BOY starts to display and the timing at which the balloon of the sabotani character SBH starts to display may be the same, or the balloon of the sabotani character SBH may be displayed after the balloon character BOY starts to display. It may be displayed, or the boy character BOY may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the sabotani character SBH is started. Note that the character SBH of Sabohani stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the advance notice by the display of the character Boy of Boy is being made, but it may not be stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 317(6), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and "UP" of "UP" indicates that the notice has appeared and the reliability of the jackpot has been improved. A letter is displayed above it to show the history of the advance notice. It should be noted that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped. Further, the content of the notice that has occurred may be displayed. Further, in this example of performance, the chance up meter CMT may be enlarged and displayed when the character SBH of Sabohani approaches the checkpoint. In this case, the entire chance up meter CMT may be enlarged and displayed, or only the relevant checkpoint portion may be enlarged and displayed. This is also applicable in the following description.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317(7) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. At this time, since the overlap of part of the display of "UP" is eliminated, part of the display is visible.

After that, when the character SBH of the sabotani reaches the second check point CP2 at the timing shown in FIG. 317(8), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 317(9). It is displayed and the button effect is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 317(10), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136. Here, the character SBH of Sabohani stops at the second checkpoint CP2 until a button operation is performed by the player or the operation valid period elapses, but may not be stopped. On the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 317(11), it is shown that the operation valid period has started and the gauge has decreased, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 317(12), the player A state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is shown. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed, as shown in FIG. 317 (13), and a notice effect is given to notify that the reliability of the big hit is high. .. In this example, the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is a special cut-in image surrounded by a golden frame and wearing a sunglasses and riding a large motorcycle while smoking a cigar. It is reported that the reliability of the big hit is dramatically high. Note that instead of the cut-in image CI3 of the lord shown in FIG. 317(13), a cut-in image CI3 of the lord (see FIG. 305(32)) having a lower reliability than the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed. May be. The cut-in image CI1 of this hall shown in FIG. 317(13) may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 has been operated within the operation effective period, or the effect button 136 is effective. It may be displayed without fail when operated within the period. In addition, the cut-in image CI1 of this hall shown in FIG. 317(13) may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136, or the effect button. It may be displayed without fail when the operation valid period elapses without being operated, or may not be displayed when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 317(14), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up Gold Cut-in" is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani, and the cut-in surrounded by a gold frame is displayed. It informs that the notice has been given by displaying the image. It should be noted that the display start timing of the lord's cut-in image CI3 may be the same as the display start timing of the balloon of the sabotani character SBH, or the sabotani character's character may be displayed after the lord's cut-in image CI3 is displayed. The balloon of SBH may be displayed, and the cut-in image CI3 of the lord may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. Note that the character SBH of Sabohani stops at the second checkpoint CP2 even while the character image CI3 of the lord is displayed, but may not stop. Further, in this effect example, the timing at which the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the second checkpoint CP2 and the timing at which the button effect is started may be the same, or the character SBH of Sabohani becomes the second checkpoint CP2. The button effect may be started after reaching, or the character SBH of Sabohani may reach the second check point CP2 after the button effect is started. In addition, in the case where the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is configured not to be displayed when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136, even when the effect button 136 is not operated, the effect button As in the case where 136 is operated, it may be notified that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred, or it may not be informed that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred, and the advance notice of the opportunity increase may be given. Only a part of the occurrence may be notified (for example, the balloon is not displayed and only the character "UP" is displayed).

After that, as shown in FIG. 317(15), the second check point CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is improved due to the appearance of the notice. A letter is displayed above it to show the history of the advance notice. It should be noted that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317(16) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. At this time, since the overlap of part of the display of "UP" is eliminated, part of the display is visible.

After that, when the character SBH of the sabotani reaches the third check point CP3 at the timing shown in FIG. 317(17), the lever image 136Va is displayed and the sabotani is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 317(18). In the vicinity of the character SBH, a balloon with the characters "Chance Up Lever" is displayed, indicating that the advance notice by the lever effect has started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (19), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. Also, the third checkpoint CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what has occurred is shown. It should be noted that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped. In addition, the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V may be started during the display of the balloon to which the characters “chance up lever” are added. Although the remaining time display meter MT may overlap a part (placard) of the chance up meter CMT, the remaining time display meter MT may overlap all of the chance up meter CMT. Part or all of the chance up meter CMT may be displayed so as not to overlap while the remaining time display meter MT is being displayed. There may be a case where the up-meter CMT overlaps part or all of the remaining time display meter MT, and during the display of the chance up meter CMT, part or all of the remaining time display meter MT is overlapped. Good.

After that, when the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V starts at the timing shown in FIG. 317(20), the player can receive the operation of the effect lever 136V. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. In addition, the character SBH of the sabotani may be stopped at the third check point CP3 until the lever operation is performed by the player or the operation valid period elapses.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 317(21) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the sabotani character SBH is located before the final point GP.

Thereafter, when the player operates the effect lever 136V at the timing shown in FIG. 317(22) within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 317(23), the first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth board. The large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryo box accessory 224H are activated, the light guide plate IL is caused to emit light, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect image. That is, it is notified that the jackpot will be a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is hidden, but may be displayed. 317 (23) shown in FIG. 317 (23) produced when the operation lever 126V is operated (the first large board behavior part 224Ga ~ the fourth large board behavior part 224Gd and the thousand box box part 224H is activated, the light guide plate IL emission. The effect that the effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208) is the same as the effect that is performed when the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 305 (40) is operated, but they may be different. Then, as shown in FIG. 317 (24), the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, and the first large-scale board action product 224Ga to the fourth large-board action product 224Gd and the thousand-box action product 224H are returned to the initial positions, respectively, and the decorative pattern is obtained. The effect image fades out on the display device 208. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is restarted while fading in. Although the chance up meter CMT also fades in along with the fade-in of the duel scene animation display, the chance up meter CMT may be re-displayed after the fade-in of the duel scene animation display is completed. .. The operation of FIGS. 317(23) to (24) is performed, for example, in the same manner as shown in FIGS. 305(38) to (44) and described above.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317(25), a state is shown in which the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene has been completed and restarted. Specifically, in the animation display of the duel scene, the enemy swordsman looks like he is in agony and appears to be defeated. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of the sabotani reaches the final point GP, and the placard shows a character of "V" which indicates a big hit.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (26), the main character's lord wins over the enemy swordsman, "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle pattern, and it is notified that it is a big hit. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 317(27), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 316(28), the first decorative pattern is "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". The swing fluctuation starts with the combination of the decorative patterns. Although the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, it may be displayed even after the reach effect is finished. Further, only a part of the chance up meter CMT (for example, the character SBH of Sabohani and the placard) may be displayed.

In the effect using the chance up meter CMT described above, the chance up meter CMT may or may not be displayed. In this case, the case where the chance up meter CMT is displayed may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where it is not displayed. The reliability of the big hit may be the same when the chance up meter CMT is displayed and when it is not displayed.

Further, there may be a notice of a chance up that appears only when the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

Further, there may be a notice of a chance up that appears regardless of whether or not the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

Further, the position of the check point may be moved or the check point may be erased during the performance of the chance up meter CMT.

Further, during execution of the effect on the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of the sabotani indicating the current position returns to a position (position indicating the past) before the current position, or a previous position (indicating the future). Position).

Further, the effect itself on the chance up meter CMT may be a mini game, and for example, when the effect is performed at the position indicated by the check point, the effect of increasing the chance may be performed. Further, for example, an enemy character may be arranged at the check point, and an effect may be performed in which the chance is increased when the teammate character fights and wins.

Further, as an effect of increasing a chance during the execution of the jackpot game (for example, rank-up bonus, probability variation promotion, promotion to a jackpot game with more balls, etc.), an effect using the chance up meter CMT may be performed.

Further, the chance up meter CMT itself may be made non-display by power failure recovery. Further, the display of the chance up meter CMT itself may be returned, but the history of the timing of the check point and the occurrence of the chance up effect before the power failure may be hidden.

Further, the effect displayed after the countdown of the count display in the timer advance notice effect becomes 0 may or may not have been notified by the chance up meter CMT.

FIG. 318 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

FIG. 318(3a) is another example of effect following FIG. 317(2), and the same effect as in FIG. 317(3) is performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318(4a), the character SBH of Sabohan reaches the first checkpoint CP1, but no notice is given. That is, it is shown that even if the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the first check point CP1, the advance notice of the chance is not given. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 318(5a), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 318(5a) to (7a), the character SBH of Sabohani has the first checkpoint. After passing through CP1 as it is, the marking at the first checkpoint CP1 and the display of the character "UP" are not performed. As a result, it may be possible to recognize at the first checkpoint CP1 that the occurrence of the notice has not ended. In addition, when the advance notice of the chance up is not given at the first check point CP1, the display of the first check point CP1 may be erased as shown in FIG. 318(7a′), for example. Further, as shown in FIG. 318(7a″), instead of the letters “UP” displayed at the first checkpoint CP1, the display of “X” indicating that the advance notice of the chance up has not been given. May be performed. Even when the advance notice of the chance increase is not actually given, it is assumed that the advance notice of the chance increase is given after the character SBH of Sabohani has passed the check point, and marking at the check point or “UP”. May be displayed, for example, the marking at the checkpoint or the character “UP” may be hidden once, and then the marking or the character “UP” may be displayed. The character SBH of Sabohani may return to the checkpoint to give an advance notice of the chance and display the marking or the character “UP”. In addition, for example, when the reach effect is rewound to the beginning or halfway, and when the character SBH of Sabohani passes the checkpoint after that, the opportunity increase effect is performed and the marking or the characters “UP” are given. May be displayed.

FIG. 318(17b) is another example of effect that follows FIG. 317(16), and the same effect as in FIG. 317(17) is performed. At the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT, the placard is displayed as a question mark, and when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, some event may occur. Is suggested.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (18b), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed instead of the lever image 136Va, and the state that the lever effect as the advance notice of the chance is not started is displayed. It is shown. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 318 (19b), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 318(17b) to (20b), the character SBH of Sabohani has the third checkpoint. It passes through CP3 as it is, and neither marking at the third check point CP3 nor displaying the characters "UP" is performed. Note that FIG. 318 (19b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has started and the player is ready to accept the operation of the effect button 136.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 318 (20b) shows that the operation valid period has decreased. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the sabotani character SBH is located before the final point GP.

After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 318 (21b) within the operation valid period, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. Is displayed along with a line saying "Did you remove it?" Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character display "development" is displayed on the placard at the final point GP to notify that the reach production will be developed.

After that, after the cut-in image CI4 by the lord's character shown in FIG. 318(23b) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 318(24b), the effect that the panda character appears as an assistant in the swordsman reach. Is started. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the character SBH of Sabohani rides on a flying carpet and moves toward the starting point SP.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 318(25b) to (29b), while the character SBH of Sabohani is heading to the start point SP, an indication for changing the chance up meter CMT while overlapping with the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed. To do. Therefore, due to the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani, for example, as shown in FIGS. 318(26b) to (27b), a part of the changed chance up meter CMT appears and the fifth check point CP5 appears. As shown in FIGS. 318(28b) to (29b), the fourth checkpoint CP4 appears.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (29b) shows that the character SBH of Savohani is again positioned at the start point SP. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display state before the change of the fourth check point CP4 and the fifth check point CP5 (the state where the red marking is not attached and the character "UP" is not displayed) is displayed. Has become. Then, on the chance up meter CMT, the movement of the character SBH of the sabotani is started.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (30b), a state in which the SP swordsman reach has been developed is shown. The SP swordsman reach is a reach that develops and transitions to a swordsman reach, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when the swordsman reach does not develop into an SP swordsman reach. In the SP swordsman reach, as shown in Fig. 318 (30b), the hero's lord and the enemy's swordsman face each other, which is the same as the pre-development swordsman reach, but they follow the panda as an assistant to the hero's lord. It differs from the point in that the full moon appears in the background. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (30b), at the timing when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the fourth checkpoint CP4, the co-panda supporter KPD composed of the characters of three co-pandas cheers. There is a notice display to show that the SP swordsman reach has become extremely reliable. It can be said that this Kopanda cheering party KPD is functioning as a character for increasing chances. The Kopanda cheering party KPD may or may not always appear in the SP swordsman reach.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (31b), a balloon with the letters “Chance Up Copanda Cheering Party” is displayed near the character SBH of Savohani, and a notice is displayed by the character display of chance up. I am informed that I was broken. The timing at which the display of the Kopanda cheering party KPD starts may be the same as the timing at which the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started, or the balloon of the character SBH of Savohani may be displayed after the display of the group of Kopanda cheering party KPD is started. It may be displayed, or the Kopanda cheering party KPD may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. Note that the character SBH of Sabohani stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the advance notice by the display of the Kopanda cheering party KPD is being given, but may not be stopped.

Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (32b) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the fifth check point CP5. Then, the display of "collaboration deadly" that the chance up effect is performed is displayed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 318 (33b), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the lever image 136Va together with the display of "one shot". To be done. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the letters “chance up lever” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani to notify that the notice by the lever effect has started. Here, there may be a case where the lever effect that is the chance-up effect is not performed but the button effect that is the effect of operating the effect button 136 is performed. Also, the lever effect may be always performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (34b), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the fifth checkpoint CP5 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the big hit has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what has occurred is shown. It should be noted that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped. After that, for example, when the effect lever 136V is operated, the effect is performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 318(23c) is another example of effects following FIG. 317(22). In the lever effects shown in FIGS. 317(18) to (22), the player operates the effect lever 136V. It shows that the production failed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and the combination of the loss of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is notified and it is notified. Also, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, but the placard shows the character “x” indicating that it is missing, and the character SBH of Sabohani has a disappointed expression. ing.

FIG. 318(5d) is a modification of the effect shown in FIG. 317(5). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (5d), a large number of boy characters BOY (boy group) appear from the left side of the display screen and move toward the right side. .. That is, it is shown that a notice is given by the appearance of the Boy group. When the boyy character appears in groups, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the boyy character BOY appears alone. In addition, the chance up meter CMT displays a balloon with the characters “Chance Up BOY Group” added near the character SBH of Sabohani to inform that the advance notice has been given by the character display of the chance up. In this way, different chance-up effects may be performed even at the same chance-up point, or the same effect may be performed at the same chance-up point.

FIG. 319 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

FIG. 319(7e) is another example of effect following FIG. 317(6), and the same effect as in FIG. 317(7) is performed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 319(8e) to (9e), in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani jumps over the second check point CP2 and reaches before the third check point CP3, and then the third It waits at that place until the advance notice of the chance up corresponding to the checkpoint CP3 is given. While the effect of the character SBH of Sabohani jumping over the second check point CP2 and reaching the third check point CP3 is being performed, the effect corresponding to the second check point CP2 (for example, FIG. 317 (9)- The button effect and the like shown in FIG. 15 (15) and the like may be performed, or the effect itself may not be performed. Alternatively, although the effect is not performed, the second checkpoint CP2 may be marked in red and the character "UP" may be displayed as the effect.

FIG. 319(2f) is another example of effect following FIG. 317(1). In the effect example shown in FIG. 319 (2f), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 317. Specifically, the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT is configured in the shape of a green rod, and instead of the character SBH of the sabotani, the position of the marker MRK roughly informs the current progress of the reach effect. At this time, the color of the advanced portion of the marker MRK in the gauge portion changes from green to white. Further, the moving speed of the marker MRK is not constant but may change depending on the progress status of the effect, but may be constant. Also, the display form of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is represented by question marks, so as to give a sense of expectation that the advance notice of the chance is given. The start point and the end point are indicated by the start and end of the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT.

FIG. 319(3f) following FIG. 319(2f) shows that the marker MRK has started to move from the start point.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 319 (4f), at the timing when the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1, the boy character BOY appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side. It is shown.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 319 (5f), a balloon with the letters “Chance Up Boy Pass” is displayed near the marker MRK, and the advance notice by the character display of the chance up has been given. Is informed. The marker MRK stands by at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 319(5f) to (6f).

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIGS. 319 (7f-1) to (7f-2), the state where the marker MRK has started to move is shown. At this time, instead of displaying the question mark at the first check point CP1, the character "UP" indicating that the reliability of the big hit has been improved due to the appearance of the notice is displayed over the gauge portion. The boy character BOY is framed out from the right side of the display screen at the timing shown in FIG. 319 (7f-2).

FIG. 319(4g′) shows an example of an effect when the boy character BOY does not appear even after the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1 after the effect shown in FIG. 319(3f) is performed. Has been done. Specifically, when the Boy character BOY does not appear at the timing shown in FIG. 319(4f), as shown in FIG. 319(4g′), the chance up meter CMT is at the first check point CP1. Instead of displaying the question mark, a "x" is displayed to indicate that the notice did not appear. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 319 (4g″), the display of the question mark at the first checkpoint CP1 may be erased and no display may be performed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 319 (4g″″), the display mode may be left unchanged while the question mark at the first checkpoint CP1 is displayed.

319(2h) is still another effect example following FIG. 317(1). In the effect example shown in FIG. 319(2h), it is similar to the display mode of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 319(2f), but the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are hidden. They differ in points. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize the start timing of the advance notice of the chance increase, and it may be possible to give the player an expectation as to when the advance notice of the chance increase is started.

At the timing shown in FIG. 319 (5h), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up Boy Passed" is displayed near the marker MRK to notify that the advance notice has been given by the character display of the chance up. At this time, a part of the characters "UP" showing that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved due to the appearance of the notice has appeared.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 319(6h) to (7h), as the marker MRK progresses and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT is changed, the hidden “UP” character is changed. Appear.

FIG. 320 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

320(A1) to FIG. 320(A11), the production examples shown in FIG. 320(A1) to (A11) show that the chance up meter CMT notifies the timing of occurrence of pseudo-relation and the number of occurrences of pseudo-repetition during execution of the pseudo-reproduction. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A1), a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 320(A1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A2), the character "Secure Echigoya" is displayed to show that the chase effect is started as an example of the pseudo continuous effect.

After that, in FIG. 320 (A3), a state where the chase effect is started is shown. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect display in which the main character, the lord, chases the evil merchant is started. Further, below the second decorative symbol, the chance up meter CMT in the above-described mode shown in FIG. 319(2f) is displayed. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 320(A3), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first check point CP1 to third check point CP3 indicate that pseudo-relation may occur, and are intended to give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the marker MRK reaches each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 on the way, a pseudo run may occur. In addition, it is suggested that reaching the final point makes it easier for the bad guys to be arrested and to shift to highly reliable reach production. In this example of performance, as the pseudo-relation occurs, a big hit is likely to occur. It should be noted that when the pseudo-ream occurs four times (that is, when the pseudo-ream occurs when the final point is reached), the big hit is determined. It should be noted that the big hits may be settled when the number of pseudo runs is a number other than 4, and for example, when the number of pseudo runs is 1 and 4, the big hits may be settled. It is more difficult for the number of pseudo-repetitions to be determined as a big hit to occur than for other pseudo-repetition times.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A4) shows that the marker MRK is starting to move from the starting point.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A5), it is shown that the first decorative pattern fluctuates in a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 320 (A6), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character "continuation" is displayed in the display in which the main character's lord chases the evil merchant, and it is informed that the first pseudo-link will be performed. Is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character "CONTINUE". Further, at this time, the first decorative pattern is not displayed, but the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode, for example. In addition, even if the display of the main character chasing after the evil merchant is the same as the timing when the character "Continue" is displayed and the timing at which the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character "Continued" Okay, after the word "Continue" is displayed on the display where the main character chases after the evil merchant, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 may change from the question mark to the display of the character "Continue". After the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is changed from the question mark to the display of the character "continuation", the character "continuation" may be displayed in the display in which the hero of the protagonist chases the unscrupulous merchant.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A7) shows that the first decorative symbol is swinging and fluctuating in a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. Note that the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A7) shows that the distance between the main character's hall and the evil merchant is shortened.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A8), the character "continuation" is displayed on the display that the main character chases after the evil merchant, and the state of informing that the second pseudo-repeating will be performed is displayed. It is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the second checkpoint CP2 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character "CONTINUE". Further, at this time, the first decorative pattern is not displayed, but the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode, for example.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A9), the first decorative pattern is shown to be swinging in a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third check point CP3. In addition, the angle showing how the hero's lord is chasing the bad guys has been changed, and the expression of the bad guys who could afford was a frustrated expression.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A10), the character "continuation" is displayed along with the display in which the main character chases after the evil merchant, and the state of informing that the third pseudo-ream will be performed is displayed. It is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the third checkpoint CP3 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character "CONTINUE". Further, at this time, the first decorative pattern is not displayed, but the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode, for example.

After that, as shown in FIG. 320 (A11), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the character "Secure" and the appearance that the main character's lord has captured the evil merchant. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, since the marker MRK has reached the final point, it is shown that the pseudo-repeating is performed three times in total in the present symbol variation display. Further, at this time, in the first decorative pattern, the reach state is reached by "decoration 7", and the reach effect is started.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 320(B1) to 320(B14) show that the chance up meter CMT is displayed during the normal variable display of the decorative symbols, and the timing of the advance notice of the chance up is notified. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (B1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (B1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 320 (B2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, below the second decorative symbol, the chance up meter CMT in the above-described mode shown in FIG. 319 (2f) is displayed. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 320(B2), the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2 are arranged. The first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 indicate that a chance-up notice may occur, and the player is expected to have a sense of expectation.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (B3) shows that the marker MRK has started to move from the starting point. In addition, a balloon in which the characters “opportunity” is displayed is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the navigation character advance notice is given by the navigation character YM. It should be noted that, in this example of performance, the advance notice of the navigator character YM's balloon of the character "opportunity" is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but is a chance directly related to the chance up meter CMT. It may be an advance notice.

Then, as shown in FIG. 320 (B4), the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1. Then, the character displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed from "opportunity" to "no". In response to this, a speech bubble with the word "chance up or not" added is displayed near the marker MRK to notify that the navigation character YM has given a notice of a chance up. Note that the marker MRK waits at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but the marker MRK may proceed without waiting. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that conversation advance notice has started. When the conversation announcement is started, the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. This Tonosama's conversation image CI1 is the first stage of the conversation announcement. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord is overlapped with the first decorative design, and the first decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative design is not overlapped. Also, the lord's conversation image CI1 is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and it is more difficult to visually recognize the lord's conversation image CI1 than in the case where the chance up meter CMT is not overlapped. It should be noted that, although this conversation image CI1 of the lord is a notice not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, it may be a chance up notice directly related to the chance up meter CMT.

Then, as shown in FIG. 320 (B5), in the chance up meter CMT, as the marker MRK progresses and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT is changed, the hidden “UP” character disappears. It is shown as it appears. This shows the history of occurrence of the advance notice of the chance up. In addition, the character displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed from "No" to "Intense heat". In this example of performance, the advance notice of the navigator character YM with a balloon of "intense heat" is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but the chance up that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT is increased. May be a notice in advance. Further, the palace's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the second decorative pattern. It should be noted that the sir's conversation image CI1 is also overlapped with the chance up meter CMT here, and is more difficult to be visually recognized than in the case where it is not overlapped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 320 (B6), the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. Then, as a continuation of the conversation announcement, a grandpa conversation image CI2 in which the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 304(10) is displayed is displayed together with the grandpa character. The old conversation image CI2 is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a chance up notice that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (B6), the operation valid period is not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to this is not performed. The first decorative pattern is overlapped by the old conversation image CI2. Further, as shown in FIG. 320 (B6), the palace's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the grandpa's conversation image CI2, and the lord's conversation is more than that in the case where the conversation image CI2 is not overlapped. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is partially overlapped by the balloon of the navigation character YM and the chance up meter CMT, and it is more difficult to visually recognize the conversation image CI2 than in the case where they are not overlapped. The marker MRK that has reached the second check point CP2 is in a standby state.

Then, the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (B7). The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 320 (B7).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 320 (B8) is shown in a display mode when a predetermined time has elapsed after the operation valid period started. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (B8), the navigation character advance notice has ended and the balloon of the navigation character YM has been erased. Then, when the player presses the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 320(B9), as shown in FIG. 320(B10), in the grandfather conversation image CI2, the operation promotion notification image is replaced with “super heat”. There is a case that the character "is so" is displayed. This informs that the reliability of the big hit is considerably high. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the outer frame of the old conversation image CI2 is a display mode in which the bold gold line is emphasized, which is more likely to be a big hit than in the case of the normal outer frame display mode. Is informed. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, in response to the change of the display form of the outer frame of the old conversation image CI2 to gold, a balloon with the characters “chance up gold frame” is displayed near the marker MRK. , Has announced that the announcement of a chance up in the conversation announcement has been made. Note that the marker MRK waits at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but the marker MRK may proceed without waiting. In addition, when the effect button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the old conversation image CI2 may be displayed or may not be displayed. When the old conversation image CI2 is not displayed, it is not necessary to inform that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred in the chance up meter CMT, may be informed, or only a part thereof may be informed. (For example, only the characters "UP" are displayed).

The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 320 (B11) shows that the position of the balloon has changed. At this time, the balloon overlaps the old conversation image CI2, and it is more difficult to visually recognize the old conversation image CI2 than in the case where the balloon does not overlap. Note that the position of the balloon may not change from the position shown in FIG. 320 (B10), or the display position of the balloon may be the position shown in FIG. 320 (B11) from the beginning.

Then, as shown in FIG. 320 (B12), in the chance up meter CMT, as the marker MRK progresses and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT is changed, the hidden “UP” character is changed. It is shown as it appears. This shows the history of occurrence of the advance notice of the chance up. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display of the balloon displayed on the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the conversation notice is also ended. The display of the balloon may be erased at the timing when the conversation notice ends, or may be erased after the conversation notice ends. Further, the conversation announcement may be ended after the display of the balloon is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (B13), the state where the first decorative symbol is “decoration 7” and the reach state is shown. At this time, the marker MRK of the chance up meter CMT has reached the final point, and it is shown that the effect by the chance up meter CMT is completed. After that, as shown in FIG. 320 (B14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect is started and the chance up meter CMT is erased. The timing at which the reach effect is started and the timing at which the chance up meter CMT is erased may be the same, or the chance up meter CMT may be erased after the reach effect is started, or the chance. The reach effect may be started after the upmeter CMT is erased.

Although the production by the chance up meter CMT in this production example ends when the reach state is reached, the production may be continued even when the reach state is reached, or may be continued even when the super reach is reached. You may do it. Further, when the production by the chance up meter CMT is started, it may be continuously performed until the symbol variable display is finished. At this time, for example, when the super reach is started, an effect by the chance up meter CMT different from the effect by the continuously executed chance up meter CMT may be started. Further, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may or may not always start during the normal symbol variation display. Further, in the normal symbol variation display, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may or may not start, but in the reach effect, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may be always started. Further, when the production by the chance up meter CMT is enabled, the production by the chance up meter CMT may be started when the production button 136 is operated. In this case, for example, a display to that effect may be displayed so that the player can recognize it.

FIG. 321 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In FIG. 321, the 1st special figure display device 212, the 2nd special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the 1st special figure reservation lamp 218, the 2nd special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216, and 4th. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 321(A1) to 321(A5), the effect is started by the chance up meter CMT, but is erased halfway.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A1), it has been developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman is shown. Further, in the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, showing that the chance up meter CMT is producing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (A1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves between the start point SP and the final point GM, and the current position depends on the position. The progress status of the reach production is roughly notified. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are reached on the road, a specific notice may be generated. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 321 (A1), the character SBH of Savohani becomes the first. The first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 have been reached, respectively, but since no corresponding advance notice of a chance increase has occurred, the display of the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 is erased. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321(A1) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving from the second check point CP2.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A2), a cut-in display showing a state in which a grandfather character having an energy drink speaks “Fight” is displayed. The display of this cut-in is, for example, an effect to promote the super reach being executed, and when this cut-in is displayed, it is more likely to be a big hit than when it is not displayed. Further, the display of this cut-in may be a premier notice, and when it is displayed, the big hit may be confirmed. When the cut-in is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is erased. In other words, in this effect example, it is shown that the effect by the chance up meter CMT has ended because the notification that the chance to hit the chance related to the chance up meter CMT is more likely to be a big hit. There is. The display of the cut-in is a notice not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of a chance increase directly related to the chance up meter CMT. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the effect by the chance up meter CMT ends before the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP. It can also be said that the appearance by the chance up meter CMT is finished before the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the checkpoint. It should be noted that in this effect example, the chance up meter CMT may be necessarily ended midway, or the chance up meter CMT may be ended midway or not. At this time, for example, the contents of the effect to be performed thereafter may be different depending on whether the chance up meter CMT ends midway or not, or the same effect may be performed. .. Further, when the chance up meter CMT ends midway, the big hit may be more likely to occur than when the chance up meter CMT does not end midway. Further, the reliability of the big hit when the chance up meter CMT ends midway is the same as when the chance up meter CMT does not end midway when a chance up notice is issued at all check points. May be Alternatively, when the chance up meter CMT does not end halfway, the big hit may be more likely to occur than when the chance up meter CMT ends halfway. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A3), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed together with the character display of “one shot”, and the state where the button effect is started is shown. This button effect is also a notice not related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of a chance increase related to the chance up meter CMT.

After that, the operation valid period is started, and when the player operates the effect button 136 or when the operation valid period elapses, "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle symbol as shown in FIG. 321 (A4), and " It is notified that the combination is a big hit "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". In addition, in the case of a loss, as shown in FIG. 321 (A4′), “decoration 6” is displayed in the middle pattern, and it is notified that the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is lost. To be done.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A5), the animation display of the duel scene fades in, and the appearance that the main character's lord has defeated the enemy swordsman is shown, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. ..

321(A2a) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 321(A1). Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A2a), a cut-in display showing a state in which the princess character speaks "I will rewrite the reach" is displayed. The display of this cut-in is, for example, a notice that the reliability of the big hit is improved by assuming that the reach effect performed in the symbol variable display is effected with other contents. When this cut-in is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is erased. The display of this cut-in is also a notice not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of a chance increase directly related to the chance up meter CMT. As described above, this example also shows that the chance up meter CMT is erased before the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP. It can also be said that the appearance of the chance up meter CMT before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the checkpoint is also shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A2a), the variable icon h0 is also deleted, but it may not be deleted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A3a) shows a state after the reach effect is rewritten. Specifically, in FIG. 321 (A3a), the erased chance up meter CMT is displayed again, but in this chance up meter CMT, the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 appear, and each is red. It is marked with and the letters "UP" are displayed. That is, although the advance notice of the chance increase corresponding to the first check point CP1 and the advance notice of the chance increase corresponding to the second check point CP2 were not actually given, both are represented as being performed and the big hit. It shows that the reliability of is improving.

FIG. 321 (A3a'-1) shows another example of effect following FIG. 321 (A2a). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A3a′-1), it is shown that the swordsman reach is changed to the SP swordsman reach described above with reference to FIG. 318 (30b). SP Swordsman Reach is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than Swordsman Reach. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A3a′-1), a chance up showing that the child panda cheering party KPD is cheering at the timing when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the third check point CP3. A notice is displayed to inform that the reliability of the SP swordsman reach for jackpots has increased dramatically. The child panda cheering party KPD may or may not always appear. In addition, in FIG. 321 (A3a′-1), the erased chance up meter CMT is displayed again, but the display form is the same as the display form before the chance up meter CMT is erased.

321(A3a′-2) is an example of effect that follows FIG. 321(A2a), and shows an example of effect different from that of FIG. 321(A3a′-1). The example of the effect shown in FIG. 321 (A3a'-2) is different from that in FIG. 321 (A3a'-1) in the display mode of the chance up meter CMT. That is, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (A3a′-2) is a chance up meter different from the chance up meter CMT before the cut-in of the princess character is displayed, and specifically, the figure As described above with reference to 318 (30b), the chance up meter CMT is displayed when the swordsman reach is changed to the SP swordsman reach. That is, according to the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (A3a′-2), it is indicated that the Kopanda cheering party KPD has appeared at the fourth checkpoint CP4 that has passed through after moving to the SP swordsman reach. Therefore, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the Kopanda cheering party KPD is displayed, and it is shown that the advance of the chance is being given. When the display of the chance up meter CMT is restarted, the character SBH of Sabohani may be located at the starting point SP and the SP swordsman reach may start from the beginning, or the character SBH of Sabohani may be at the final point GP. It may be located at, and may start from the end of SP Swordsman Reach.

FIG. 321 (A3a″) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 321 (A2a). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A3a″), the state where the full rotation reach is started is shown. The full-rotation reach is a reach in which a big hit is confirmed, and since it is not necessary to give the player more expectation, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed again, but FIG. 321 (A3a′″) ), the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again. In this case, it can be said that it has been notified that the big hit will be settled at the time when the full rotation reach is started. Therefore, the position of the character SBH of Sabohani is changed to the final point GP without passing through the fifth check point CP5. The placard may display "V" indicating that it is a big hit. It should be noted that the timing at which the full rotation reach is started may be the same as the timing at which the character SBH of the sabotani reaches the final point GP, or the character SBH of the sabotani reaches the final point GP after the full rotation reach is started. Alternatively, the full rotation reach may be started after the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. Further, the timing at which the full rotation reach is started and the timing at which the chance up meter CMT is displayed again may be the same, or the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again after the full rotation reach is started. However, the full rotation reach may be started after the chance up meter CMT is displayed again.

FIG. 321(A2b) to FIG. 321(A3b) show another example of effect following FIG. 321(A1).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A2b), a state in which the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image is shown. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased. After that, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The chance up meter CMT may be displayed again after the first large-scale behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral auditors 224Gd operate and the effect of overlapping on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208 ends. However, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed again.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 321 (B1) to (B4), the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, but the result by the chance up meter CMT is displayed because the result of the loss is displayed on the way. It is shown.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (B1), it has been developed into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman is shown. Further, in the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, showing that the chance up meter CMT is producing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (B1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the character SBH of the sabotani moves between the start point SP and the final point GM, and the current position depends on the position. The progress status of the reach production is roughly notified. Note that in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are reached on the road, a specific notice may be generated, but at the timing shown in FIG. Although the first checkpoint CP1 has been reached, no corresponding advance notice of a chance increase has been issued, so the red checkmark and “UP” are not displayed at the first checkpoint CP1. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321(B1) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving from the first check point CP1.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (B2), the cut-in image CI5 of the swordsman is displayed, showing that it is informed that there is a high possibility of losing. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (B3), the hero's lord is defeated by the enemy swordsman, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle pattern, and it is informed that it will be lost. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, a display is shown in which the character SBH of Sabohani is lost and shows a disappointing expression. Here, as shown in FIG. 321 (B3′), “decoration 6” is displayed in the middle pattern, and although it is informed that it will be lost, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani is the last. It may be displayed that the vehicle is proceeding toward the point GP. Then, as shown in FIG. 321 (B4), the first decorative pattern is shake-changed by a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7", and then stopped and displayed.

FIG. 322 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In FIG. 322, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 322(A1) to (A5), the chance up meter CMT is once erased during the effect by the chance up meter CMT, and then displayed again.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (A1), an animation of a duel scene between the main character's lord and the enemy swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (A1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 322(A1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, so that the player can be expected. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is displayed in rotation, which suggests that when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, either the result of the big hit or the loss is derived. The character SBH of Savohani is shown to start moving from the start point SP.

After that, in FIG. 322 (A2), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern simulating a predetermined effect image is shown on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. The light emission of the light guide plate IL serves as an advance notice of a chance increase corresponding to the first check point CP1. At this time, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display is darkened so that the pattern on the light guide plate IL can be seen more easily. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (A3), a state in which the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted by the dark display is restarting while fading in is shown. At this time, the display of the chance up meter CMT is also restarted. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the letters “chance up illumination light emission” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani to inform that a chance up notice has been given. Note that the light guide plate IL continues to emit light.

FIG. 322(A4) shows that the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished and the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what has occurred is shown.

FIG. 322 (A5) shows that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move.

In this example, the light guide plate IL emits light as a notice of an increase in chance in the reach effect, but the effect is not limited to that described above, and for example, the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed at the final point GP in the opportunity up meter CMT. You may apply in the production which arrives and stirs up whether it is a big hit or a loss. In addition to the effect of instigating whether it is a big hit or loss, it is applied in the effect of inspiring whether it is a big hit or something other than that (for example, the development develops, a loss is displayed, etc.) You may. Even in such a case, the chance up meter CMT may be temporarily erased during the production by the light emission of the light guide plate IL.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 322(B1) to (B6) show that the chance up meter CMT is displayed or erased by the operation of the player.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (B1), an animation of a duel scene between the main character, the lord, and the enemy, the swordsman, is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (B1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 322 (B1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, so that the player can be expected. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is displayed in rotation, which suggests that when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, either the result of the big hit or the loss is derived. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (B1), the appearance of the character SBH of Savohani reaching the first checkpoint CP1 and the character Boy of Boyie appearing from the left side of the display screen and moving toward the right side. Is shown, and it is shown that the advance notice of the chance is being given. Furthermore, in this example of performance, guidance display is performed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Specifically, in this guidance display, an icon indicating the upper key and the lower key of the operation key unit 137 and the character "Hide the meter by operating the arrow keys" are displayed, and the player can operate the operation key unit 137. It is displayed that the chance up meter CMT can be hidden by operating the up key or the down key. In this example of performance, the chance up meter CMT is displayed when the swordsman reach is started, but it may be displayed by a display operation by the player after the swordsman reach is started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (B2), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up Boy Passed" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Savohani, and the advance notice is given by the character display of the chance up. Is informed.

When the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 322(B3), the chance up meter CMT is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 322(B4). .. Then, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again at the timing shown in FIG. 322(B5), the chance up meter CMT is displayed again as shown in FIG. 322(B6). At this time, the character SBH of the sabotani is the position which should be located when the display of the chance up meter CMT is restarted. In this case, for example, the balloon shown in FIG. 322 (B2) may not be displayed, and the effect on the chance up meter CMT may be restarted from a point where it is sharp. Also, as shown in FIG. 322 (B6′), when the effect from the first check point CP1 to the second check point CP2 is omitted and the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed, the character SBH of the sabotani is displayed. May be located in front of the second check point CP2, and may wait at that position until the timing of giving a notice corresponding to the second check point CP2. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 322 (B6) and FIG. 322 (B6′), the first checkpoint CP1 is marked in red and “UP” is indicated by the appearance of the boy character BOY. The letters are displayed above it. At the timing shown in FIG. 322 (B6), the character “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani and is difficult to visually recognize.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 322(B1) to (B6), the display/non-display of the chance up meter CMT can be switched any number of times according to the operation of the player. After being displayed, after being hidden by the player's operation, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed until the next production by the chance up meter CMT is performed.

Further, in this effect example, the chance up meter CMT is initially displayed, but as shown in FIG. 322 (B4), the chance up meter CMT is initially hidden. It may be configured to be in a closed state.

FIG. 323 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect using the chance up meter. In FIG. 323, an example of effect in which a plurality of chance up meters are displayed is shown.

In FIG. 323, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 323(A1) to (A2) show how the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb each display the same content.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 323(A1), an animation of a duel scene between the main character's lord and the enemy swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323(A1), two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb are displayed side by side on the left and right sides of the variable icon h0 at the bottom of the display screen. In this example of performance, the chance up meter arranged on the left side is referred to as a first chance up meter CMTa, and the chance up meter arranged on the right side is referred to as a second chance up meter CMTb. The chance up meters CMTa and CMTb have the same display mode as that shown in FIG. 319(2f) and described above. In the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 323(A1), first check points CP1a and CP1b, second check points CP2a and CP2b, and third check points CP3a and CP3b are arranged, respectively. The first check point CP1a (CP1b) to the third check point CP3a (CP3b) are represented by question marks, and have an expectation that an advance notice of a chance is given. Here, the check points indicated by the first chance up meter CMTa and the check points indicated by the second chance up meter CMTb are targeting the same advance notice of opportunity. It should be noted that although two chance up meters are displayed in this example of performance, only one chance up meter may be displayed. For example, two chance up meters are displayed rather than one chance up meter. The big hits may be more likely to be displayed when they are displayed, or the big hits may be the same (reliability). Further, when the effect is produced by the chance up meter, two chance up meters may be displayed without fail. Further, three or more chance up meters may be displayed. Further, in this example of performance, the advance rates of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are the same, but they may be different, for example, the advance rate of the second chance up meter CMTb. However, it may be faster than the traveling speed of the first chance up meter CMTa.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 323(A2), the markers MRKa, MRKb have reached the first check points CP1a, CP1b, and the character Boy of Boyie has appeared, so that “around the markers MRKa, MRKb” is displayed. A balloon added with the characters "Chance Up Boy Passed" is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and it is informed that the chance up notice is given by the character display.

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 323(A2′), in the first chance up meter CMTa, the letters “Chance up BOY passing” are displayed in the balloon, and the reliability is displayed in the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb. May be displayed, and the reliability of the jackpot due to the appearance of the boy character BOY may be notified.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 323 (A2″), when the appearance of the boy character BOY and the appearance that the boy character BOY is humming as a rare notice are displayed as the first chance, The word "Chance Up Boy Passed" is displayed in the balloon of the up meter CMTa, and the word "Chance Up Nose" indicating that the rare notice has occurred is displayed in the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb. Good.

In this example of performance, the markers MRKa and MRKb have the same moving speed in the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, but may move at different speeds. Further, in this example of the presentation, the balloons are displayed by both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, but they may be displayed by only one of them. FIG. 323(A2a-1) to FIG. 323(A2a-2) show another effect example following FIG. 323(A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A2a-1) following FIG. 323 (A1), the markers MRKa and MRKb have reached the first chance up meters CMTa and CMTb, and the Boy character BOY has appeared. Then, balloons with the characters “Chance Up Boy Pass” are displayed near the markers MRKa and MRKb on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and a notice of the chance up by character display is given. It has been announced that it was done.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A2a-2), only the first chance up meter CMTa is erased from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and the second chance up meter. Only CMTb is displayed. In this way, after displaying the two chance up meters, one of them may be erased. For example, when one of the two chance up meters is erased, it is not erased. It may be more likely to be a big hit, or may be more likely to be a big hit if not erased. Further, the reliability may differ depending on the deleted chance up meter. Further, both of the two chance up meters may be deleted.

323(A2b-1) to FIG. 323(A2b-2) show still another effect example following FIG. 323(A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A2b-1) following FIG. 323 (A1), the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first chance up meters CMTa and CMTb, and the Boy character BOY appears. Then, balloons with the characters “Chance Up Boy Pass” are displayed near the markers MRKa and MRKb on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and a notice of the chance up by character display is given. It has been announced that it was done. At this time, the display form of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is changed to a red thick line, and it is notified that the reliability of the big hit is further improved. That is, in the display form of the balloons of the first chance up meter CMTa and the display form of the balloons of the second chance up meter CMTb, the display form of the balloons of the second chance up meter CMTb is a display of a highly reliable notice of a big hit. It can be called an aspect. Note that the display mode of the balloon may be changed by only one of the two chance up meters, or both of them may be changed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A2b-2), the first chance up meter CMTa in which the balloon with low reliability is displayed from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb. Only the second chance up meter CMTb in which a highly reliable balloon is displayed is displayed. As described above, after displaying two chance up meters, the display of the chance up meter in which the highly reliable balloon is displayed may be continued and the display of the other chance up meter may be deleted. Further, after displaying the two chance up meters, the chance up meter in which the balloon with low reliability is displayed may be continued and the display of the other chance up meter may be erased. Alternatively, both of the two chance up meters may be deleted.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 323(B1) to (B2) show how the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb display different chance advance notices.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (B1), animation of a duel scene between the main character, Tonosama, and the enemy, the swordsman, is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (B1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side with the variation icon h0 in between at the bottom of the display screen. Of the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 323(B1), the first chance up meter CMTa has three check points (first check point CP1a, second check point CP2a, third check point CP3a). It is arranged. On the other hand, in the second chance up meter CMTb, two check points (fourth check point CP4b and fifth check point CP5b) are arranged, and the fourth check point CP4b and the fifth check point CP5b are the first check point. The advance notice and the start timing of the chance increase corresponding to any of CP1a to the third check point CP3a are different. In this production example, when the arrival timings of the markers MRKa and MRKb of the first check point CP1a, the second check point CP2a, the third check point CP3a, the fourth check point CP4b, and the fifth check point CP5b are arranged in time series. , The first check point CP1a, the fourth check point CP4b, the second check point CP2a, the fifth check point CP5b, and the third check point CP3a.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (B2), after the marker MRKa of the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the first check point CP1a and the boy character BOY appears, the marker of the second chance up meter CMTb. It is shown that MRKb reaches the fourth checkpoint CP4b and the boy character BOY starts humming. In response to this, in the second chance up meter CMTb, a balloon with the words "Chance up humming" added is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRKb, and it is informed that the chance up has been announced.

In addition, in this example of performance, both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed. In this case, for example, when one of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb is not displayed, a chance up notice corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter that is not displayed is announced. It may not be performed, or a chance up notice corresponding to a check point on the chance up meter that is not displayed may be given. Further, there may be a check point that is not notified when either one of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb is not displayed, or it may be the check point that is notified. Good.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 323(C1) to (C4) show a state in which two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb display different advance notices of chances.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (C1), an animation of a duel scene between the main character's lord and the enemy swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323(C1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side with the variable icon h0 in between at the bottom of the display screen. Of the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 323(C1), the second chance up meter CMTa is a meter showing the progress of the entire reach production, and one check point (development point CPA) is arranged. Has been done. This development point CPA indicates a point where the reach production may develop. On the other hand, the first chance up meter CMTa indicates the period from the starting point to the check point, the period from the check point to the check point, or the period from the check point to the last point in the second chance up meter CMTa. When the period in the second chance up meter CMTb is changed, the first chance up meter CMTa is also changed to the display mode corresponding to the changed period. In this example of performance, the period from the start point SP to the development point CPA in the second chance up meter CMTb is referred to as a first period, and the period from the development point CPA to the final point GP is referred to as a second period. Further, in this effect example, the display modes of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTa are different, and the first chance up meter CMTa is the same as that shown in FIG. 319(2f) and described above. The second chance up meter CMTb has the same display mode as that shown in FIG. 317(2) and described above. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 323 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa is in the display mode corresponding to the first period, and three check points (first check point CP1, second check point CP2, The third check point CP3) is arranged, and it is shown that there is a possibility that an advance notice of a chance increase will occur when the marker MRK reaches each check point. Further, the marker MRK on the first chance up meter CMTa and the character SBH of Sabohani on the second chance up meter CMTb are also starting points.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (C2), a state where the button effect is being performed is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 323(C2), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT has decreased, and a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation valid period started is shown. Further, the first chance up meter CMTa displays the letters “UP” indicating that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred at the first check point CP1, and the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. It is shown. The second check point CP2 corresponds to, for example, a notice of a certain chance up that appears as a result of the button effect. Further, in the second chance up meter CMTb, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohan is proceeding toward the development point CPA.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (C3), the marker MRK reaches the final point at the first check point CP1 and the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the development point CPA at the second chance up meter CMTb. , A state in which a cut-in display showing that the princess character is saying "I'll rewrite the reach" is displayed. At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is erased. When the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the final point, the first chance up meter CMTa may not be erased and only the second chance up meter CMTb may be erased. Both the meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb may be deleted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (C4), the cut-in image of the panda is displayed, and the state of shifting to the SP swordsman reach is shown. At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is displayed in the display mode corresponding to the second period, two check points (fourth check point CP4, fifth check point CP5) are arranged, and each check is performed. It is shown that when the marker MRK reaches the point, there is a possibility that a notice of a chance up may occur. Further, the second chance up meter CMTb shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is advancing from the development point CPA toward the final point GP.

FIG. 324 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 324(A1) to 324(A7) show that the chance up meter CMT notifies the timing of occurrence of pseudo-relation and the number of occurrences of pseudo-repetition during execution of the pseudo-reproduction. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 324(A1), a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (A1), the number of holdings in special figure 1 is 1, and the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings in special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (A1), the character "Please secure Echigoya" is displayed, and a state in which a chase effect is started as an example of a pseudo continuous effect is shown.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 324(A2), it is shown that the first decorative pattern fluctuates with a combination of decorative patterns “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. A chance up meter CMT is displayed below the second decorative pattern, and a first check point CP1, a second check point CP2, and a third check point CP3 are arranged in this chance up meter CMT. , It has been announced that pseudo checkups may occur at each checkpoint. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 324 (A3), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character "continuation" is displayed in the display in which the main character's lord is chasing the evil merchant, and it is informed that the first pseudo-repeating will be performed. Is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character "CONTINUE". Further, at this time, the first decorative pattern is not displayed, but the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode, for example.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (A4), a state is shown in which the first decorative pattern variable display (that is, the second decorative pattern variable display) by the first pseudo-repeating is being performed. ..

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (A5), the dishonest merchant has escaped, but by recovering the thousand boxes, it is shown that the reach has been developed. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2, and the display of the second check point CP2 is changed from the question mark to the reach state by the letter “R”. The display has been switched. As a result, the pseudo continuous effect is terminated halfway, and as shown in FIG. 324 (A6), the display of the pseudo continuous effect fades out together with the chance up meter CMT.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 324 (A7), when the reach effect is started, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the upper left and right directions, respectively, and in the first UI unit 280, the variable icon h0 is left. And the hold icon h11 displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is erased when the fade-out of the display of the pseudo continuous effect is completed. In this way, the chance up meter CMT may reach the end more easily than the case where the chance up meter CMT ends at a checkpoint in the middle. Further, the easiness of a big hit may be different depending on the reached checkpoint.

In addition, as an example of the effect of hiding the chance up meter CMT, the procedure may be performed as shown in FIGS. 324 (A6a-1) to (A6a-2). Specifically, in FIG. 324(A5), when the pseudo continuous effect is ended midway, as shown in FIG. 324(A6a-1) to FIG. 324(A6a-2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed. The chance up meter CMT may be hidden by frame-out to the outside of the display screen.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 324(B1) to (B7) show that the chance up meter CMT is performing the production from the start of the reach production to the development of super reach. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (B1), a state is shown in which the reach effect that has reached and reached the "decoration 7" state is being performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 324 (B1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Then, in this effect example, when the reach effect is started, the chance up meter CMT is displayed below the second decorative symbol, and the effect using the chance up meter CMT is performed. The effect using the chance up meter CMT is performed until the super reach is displayed or until the loss is displayed without shifting to the super reach. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 324 (B1), in the reach production, when the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2, a chance advance notice corresponding to each check point is announced. Is being performed, and the character “UP” to that effect is displayed. Further, the chance up meter CMT overlaps a part of the first decorative pattern.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (B2), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the upper left and right directions, respectively, and in the first UI unit 280, the variable icon h0 is left and is displayed below the display area. It is shown that the hold icon h11 displayed on the second UI unit 281 is framed out as well as being framed out. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third check point CP3. The chance up meter CMT overlaps the left symbol of the first decorative symbol after the movement, and the left symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative symbol does not overlap.

Then, as shown in FIG. 324(B3), the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd operate and overlap on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga and the second large-scale behavior auditor 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to see. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large-board behavior auditor 224Ga and the second large-board behavior auditor 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to see. Further, in this example of performance, the chance up meter CMT is also at least partially overlapped by the first large-board behavior auditor 224Ga, and the chance up meter CMT is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the chance up meter CMT is not overlapped. ing. In addition, in this example of performance, the marker MRK continues to progress while the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd are operating, but the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large board The progress of the marker MRK may be stopped while the behavior accessory 224Gd is operating. Further, the chance up meter CMT may be hidden while the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are operating. Also, in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 324 (B3), a balloon with the letters “Chance up large board behavior” is displayed near the marker MRK, and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior role are displayed. It is informed that the 224Gd object has given a chance to advance.

After that, as shown in FIG. 324 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with the light emitting portion of the light guide plate IL.

After that, as shown in FIG. 324(B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 324(B6), the first large-board behavior member 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior member 224Gd are respectively initialized. Return to position. At the timing when the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, the marker MRK reaches the final point in the chance up meter CMT, but the emission of the light guide plate IL ends after the marker MRK reaches the final point. Alternatively, the marker MRK may reach the final point after the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends. In addition, in this production example, after the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operated, the first decorative pattern is arranged on the front side of the chance up meter CMT, and the first decorative pattern is left. The design overlaps the chance up meter CMT, but before the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd operate, the first decorative pattern is arranged on the front side of the chance up meter CMT, and After the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are operated, the first decorative symbol is arranged on the back side of the chance up meter CMT, and the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT. You may do it. Further, the front-rear relationship between the first decorative symbol and the chance up meter CMT does not have to be changed before and after the operations of the first large-board behavior auditor product 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor product 224Gd. The chance up meter CMT is erased after the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd return to the initial positions. Then, as shown in FIG. 324 (B7), the super reach is developed.

FIG. 325 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 325(A1) to (A5), other effects unrelated to the chance up meter CMT overlap the chance up meter CMT during execution of the effect using the chance up meter CMT. Is shown. Here, another effect may overlap only part of the chance up meter CMT, or another effect may overlap all of the chance up meter CMT.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (A1), a state in which a duel scene between the main character and the enemy swordsman is being developed is shown, which has evolved into super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, showing that the chance up meter CMT is producing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325(A1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress status of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the current reach effect progresses depending on the position. The situation is reported roughly. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325(A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the end point GP. When each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached, a specific notice may be generated, and at the timing shown in FIG. 325(A1), the marker MRK becomes the first check point CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding advance notice of a chance increase occurs, and at the first check point CP1, the character "UP" is displayed to notify that fact. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325(A1) shows that the marker MRK is proceeding from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (A2), the treasure box BX is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize the chance up meter CMT than when the treasure box BX does not overlap the chance up meter CMT. The treasure box BX is a notice production that is not related to the notice of the chance up corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT. Further, the marker MRK does not stop during the display of the treasure box BX and continues to proceed.

In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (A3), when the marker MRK reaches the second check point CP2, a corresponding advance notice of the chance up is generated, and at the second check point CP2, a notification to that effect is issued. Is displayed. The treasure box BX still overlaps the chance up meter CMT.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (A4), the treasure box BX is opened, and the state of the character “intense heat” appears from the inside. The character display of "intense heat" is also a notice production that is not related to the notice of the chance increase corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT. It may be a notice of a chance increase corresponding to a check point in the chance up meter CMT.

After that, as shown in FIG. 325 (A5), the treasure box BX which is overlapped and displayed on the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the chance up meter CMT is in a state where it is easily visible.

FIG. 325(B1) shows a state in which, while performing an effect using the chance up meter CMT, another effect unrelated to the chance up meter CMT is performed overlapping with the opportunity up meter CMT. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (B1), during execution of the chance up meter effect using the chance up meter CMT, the wipe is performed so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. A screen WP is arranged, and a state in which simultaneous production is performed on the wipe screen WP is shown. Here, the simultaneous production is, for example, using an RTC (Real Time Clock) or a built-in timer as a time measuring means, with the same type of pachinko machine 100 attached to the same gaming island, and with the same effect content. It is a performance performed at the timing. The wipe screen WP is displayed, for example, when the simultaneous production starts and is erased when the simultaneous production ends. Further, the wipe screen WP may be displayed even when an effect other than the simultaneous effect is performed.

FIGS. 325(C1) to 325(C2) show how an error display is displayed during execution of the effect using the chance up meter CMT.

In the decorative pattern display device shown in FIG. 325 (C1), it is shown that the animation of the duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman is being developed, which has evolved into super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, showing that the chance up meter CMT is producing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325(C1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress status of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves between the start point and the end point, and the current reach effect progresses depending on the position. The situation is reported roughly. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325(C1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the starting point SP to the final point GP. When each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached, a specific notice may be generated, and at the timing shown in FIG. 325(C1), the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding advance notice of a chance increase occurs, and at the first check point CP1, the character "UP" is displayed to notify that fact. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (C1) shows that the marker MRK is proceeding from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2.

After that, for example, a radio device such as a transceiver detects that a strong radio wave that causes fluctuations in the signal voltage of the pachinko machine 100 is output. When detected by the means, as shown in FIG. 325 (C2), an error display is performed by the character display of "radio wave detected" to that effect. In the effect example shown in FIG. 325 (C2), this error display does not overlap the chance up meter CMT and does not affect the visibility of the chance up meter CMT. This error display may be applied to other errors. For example, a ball drop error that occurs when it is detected that the lower plate 128 (see FIG. 289) is full, or the front frame door 106 (see FIG. (See 289), and the like, can be applied to a door opening error or the like that occurs when it is detected that the door member is opened. Depending on the type of error, the error display may not be performed, and the error notification may be performed by voice or a lamp.

325(C2a), FIG. 325(C2b), and FIG. 325(C2c) show other display examples of the error display. For example, as shown in FIG. 325(C2a), the error display indicates that the chance up meter CMT May be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 325 (C2b), a plurality of error displays are configured to be able to be performed at the same time, and when an error occurs, the display is arranged vertically from the upper left side of the display screen. There is. In this case, for example, when the fourth error (error D) occurs, the fourth error display causes the chance up meter CMT to be displayed so as to overlap. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 325 (C2c), it is shown that an error is displayed on the entire display screen. Specifically, the fact that strong magnetism is emitted to the game board 200 (see FIG. 289) of the pachinko machine 100 is detected by, for example, a magnetic force detection unit provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100. In this case, as shown in FIG. 325 (C2c), an error display is displayed on the entire display screen by the character display of "Magnetism detected" to that effect. As a result, the chance up meter CMT is hidden and other effects are also hidden. When such an error is detected, for example, the jackpot determination is not performed, and a part of the processing in the main control unit 300 is not performed until the power is cut off, so that the game may not be advanced. .. If the power is shut off while the error is being displayed, and then the power supply is restored, the variation time of the symbol variation display that was being executed when the power was turned off has elapsed and the symbol variation stop command has been issued. Until it is output to the first sub-control unit 400, for example, “in preparation” may be displayed on the entire display screen.

FIG. 325(D1) to FIG. 325(D2) show how the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with another display device. Note that, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 325(D1) to (D2), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302(a), the sub display device 208S is a decorative pattern display device 208 instead of the family crest 224E. It is located below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative pattern display device 208.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (D1), a state in which a duel scene between the hero of the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is developed is shown, which has evolved into super reach (swordsman reach). Further, a chance up meter CMT is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, showing that an effect is being produced by the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325(D1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the end point, and the current reach effect progresses depending on the position. It informs the situation roughly. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (D1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the end point GP. When each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached, a specific notice may be generated, and at the timing shown in FIG. 325(D1), the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding advance notice of a chance increase occurs, and at the first check point CP1, the character "UP" is displayed to notify that fact. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325(D1) shows that the marker MRK is proceeding from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2. Further, on the sub-display device 208S, the character "vs swordsman" indicating that the swordsman reach has been developed is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

In FIG. 325(D2), the sub display device 208S moves upward along the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the sub display device 208S overlaps with the front surface side of the decorative pattern display device 208. Has been done. At this time, at least a part of the chance up meter CMT overlaps the sub-display device 208S, and the chance up meter CMT is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the sub up display device 208S is not overlapped. Further, on the sub display device 208S, a cut-in image of the protagonist's lord with a balloon with the characters "Game" is displayed is displayed.

In this example of effect, the sub-display device 208S, which is an example of a display unit, overlaps the chance up meter CMT. However, another display unit may overlap the chance up meter CMT. For example, a display unit including a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, 7 segments, a dot matrix, a lamp, and the like can be applied.

Further, in this example of performance, the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but, for example, as shown in FIG. 325(E1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the sub display device 208S. You may Further, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

It should be noted that, in this effect example, an example in which the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with another display has been described, but it is also applied to a case where the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with another display instead of the chance up meter CMT. can do.

FIG. 326 is a diagram for describing a mode of change of the remaining time display meter in the button effect.

In FIG. 326, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

326(A1) to FIG. 326(A9) show example effects, the changing speed of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed by the navigation character YM and the changing speed of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed in the conversation notice. Are shown to be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326(A1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 326(A1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 326(A1), the button effect by the navigation character YM is started, and a balloon including the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed near the navigation character YM. Then, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A2), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136. The operation effective period in the button effect by the navigation character YM is, for example, 10 seconds.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 326(A3) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326(A3), it is shown that the conversation announcement is started while the button effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. When the conversation announcement is started, the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the notice of conversation. In addition, in this conversation image CI1 of the lord, the first decorative design is made to be more difficult to visually recognize than when the first decorative design is not overlapped with the first decorative design.

After that, the conversation notice is updated on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (A4). In the conversation notice, the pal's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative pattern, and the grand conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the grand character. The operation promotion notification image is composed of a button image 136a2 imitating the effect button 136a and a remaining time display meter MT2 indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A4), the operation valid period in the conversation announcement has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. On the other hand, in the button effect by the navigation character YM, since the operation valid period is started, when the effect button 136 is operated, the effect corresponding to this may be performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the old conversation image CI2, but the player may recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284 and the second decorative symbol. Sometimes you can. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative pattern is not hidden. In addition, as shown in FIG. 326(A4), the palace's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the grandpa's conversation image CI2, and the lord's conversation is more than that in the case where it is not overlapped. It is difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the image CI1. Further, the old conversation image CI2 is partially overlapped with the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM.

Then, the operation valid period in the conversation announcement starts at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A5). The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 326(A5). In addition, the operation effective period of the button effect by the conversation notice is, for example, 5 seconds, which is shorter than the operation effective period of the button effect by the navigation character YM. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 326(A5) to FIG. 326(A7), the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the conversation notice is displayed rather than the speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM decreases. The speed at which the gauge decreases is greater. In other words, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the conversation notice is reduced earlier than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM.

After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 326(A8), as shown in FIG. 326(A9), in the grandpa conversation image CI2, the operation promotion notification image is changed to “exciting heat”. The word “” may be displayed. This informs that the reliability of the big hit is considerably high. On the other hand, on the other hand, the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM, on which the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 were displayed, is changed to the display of "intense heat", and it is notified that the reliability of the big hit is considerably high. ing. That is, in this effect example, a single operation of the effect button shows that the effect according to the operation result of the button is performed for both the button effect in the conversation notice and the button effect by the navigation character YM. ing. It should be noted that both the character display of "Intense heat" displayed in the old conversation image CI2 and the character display of "Intense heat" displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM are displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed. However, it does not have to be displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 326(A8), for example, as shown in FIG. 326(A9a-1), the operation corresponding to the previously started button effect. You may make it produce the production according to a result. That is, in this effect example, since the button effect by the navigation character YM is started before the button effect in the conversation announcement, as shown in FIG. 326 (A9a-1), the effect button 136 by the navigation character YM in the button effect. Effect corresponding to the operation of (the display of the character "intense heat" in the balloon of the navigation character YM) is performed, and the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 in the button effect by the conversation notice (displayed in the old conversation image CI2). "The character is "intense heat"" is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 326 (A9a-2), when the player operates the effect button 136 for the second time, as shown in FIG. 316 (A9a-3), it corresponds to the button effect started later. An effect according to the operation result is performed. That is, an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 in the button effect by the notice of the conversation (the character display of "Intense heat" in the old conversation image CI2) is performed.

In this example of performance, when the effect button 136 is operated when the operation valid period has started for each of the two button effects, the button effect with a high speed at which the gauge in the remaining time display meter decreases is given priority. The effect may be performed according to the operation of the button 136, or the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 may be performed by prioritizing the button effect at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter decreases at a low speed. Good.

Further, in this production example, the change speeds of the display modes of the two remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 are different, but, for example, up to a certain time, the change of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the grand notice image CI2. The speed is the same as the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM, and the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 may change when a certain time is reached. ..

In addition, in this example of performance, the operation valid period related to the grandfather's notice image CI2 is set to 5 seconds. However, for example, it is prepared for 5 seconds and 10 seconds, and the remaining time display meter is provided at a speed corresponding to each. The display mode of MT2 may be changed. That is, when the operation valid period is 10 seconds, the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM is the same. In this case, the case where the operation valid period for the grand notice image CI2 is selected to be 5 seconds may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where it is selected to be 10 seconds.

In addition, in this example of effect, in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather whose extension is started later than in the case where "exciting heat" is displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM in which the effect is displayed first, "exciting heat" '' is displayed, the reliability of the big hit is higher, so that the notice displayed later is more likely to be displayed when it is a big hit, and the notice displayed later is more likely to be displayed. It may be possible to surprise the player by displaying it while the attention level is relatively lowered. In addition, compared with the case where "intense heat" is displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM in which the effect is displayed earlier, "Intense heat" is displayed in the grandpa's conversation image CI2, which has begun to be extended later. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be lower or the reliability of the big hit may be the same. The example productions shown in FIGS. 326(B1) to (B11) show that both the timer advance notice production and the production using the chance up meter are performed at the same time.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B1), it is shown that an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman is being performed, which has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, showing that the chance up meter CMT is producing an effect. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 326(B1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves between the start point SP and the final point GP, and the current position depends on the position. The progress status of the reach production is roughly notified. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 326(B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GP. It is shown that a specific notice may be issued when each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached on the way, so that the player can be expected. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is displayed in rotation, which suggests that when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, either the result of the big hit or the loss is derived.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326(B2) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is starting to move from the start point SP.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B3), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and the timer notice effect is started at the timing when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the first checkpoint CP1. It is shown. That is, in this example of performance, it can be said that the start of the timer notification effect functions as a notification of an increase in chance. Further, "10:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 10 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B4), a balloon with the word "Chance up timer notice" added is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, indicating that the chance up notice has been given. I am informing you. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1 is counting down the timer display, and "09:17" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (B4).

After that, as shown in FIG. 326 (B5), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and "UP" indicating that the jackpot reliability has improved due to the appearance of the notice. The letter is displayed above it to show the history of the advance notice. It should be noted that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "08:81" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 326(B5).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B6) shows a state in which the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. At this time, since the overlap of part of the display of "UP" is eliminated, part of the display is visible. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "08:31" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 326(B6).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326(B7) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started moving from the second checkpoint CP2. In this example of performance, the advancement of the chance (for example, the occurrence of a cut-in) is performed by the character SBH of Sabohan reaching the second check point CP2, and the second check point CP2 is marked in red. At the same time, the character "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the record, and the history of the notice being issued is shown. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "04:14" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 326(B7).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326(B8) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the third check point CP3. On the other hand, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", showing that the countdown is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 326(B9), the timer notice display TM1 displays the word "attention" to urge attention to the notice instead of the timer display. According to this effect example, the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 started later is faster than the ratio (speed) of the change of the display mode by the chance up meter CMT started earlier to the whole. It can be said that it is early. That is, the time taken from the start to the end of the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 started later than the time taken from the start point SP to the final point GP of the character SBH of the sabotani by the chance up meter CMT started earlier. Can be said to be faster.

Subsequently, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B10), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a balloon with the characters “Chance Up Lever” is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani, and the lever is displayed. It informs that the notice by the production has started. The display of the lever image 136Va in this lever effect is a notice of a chance increase displayed corresponding to the arrival at the third check point CP3, and at the same time, a notice given as a result of the completion of the countdown of the timer notice effect. .. That is, it can be said that the object of the advance notice of the chance increase shown in the effect by the chance up meter CMT is the same as the object of the advance notice given as a result of the timer advance effect. Alternatively, it can be said that the advance notice of the chance that the Sabohani character SBH has reached the third check point CP3 and the advance notice indicated by the “attention” character on the timer advance notice display TM1 are the same. The target of the advance notice of the chance up shown in the effect by the chance up meter CMT may be different from the target of the advance notice given as a result of the timer advance effect. For example, in the effect by the chance up meter CMT, the third check The lever image 136Va gives a notice of a chance up when the character SBH of Sabohani arrives at the point CP3, and the notice made as a result of the timer notice effect makes the display form of the appearing lever image 136Va a more reliable display form. May be changed (for example, from red to gold).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B11), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third checkpoint CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the big hit has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what has occurred is shown. It should be noted that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped.
FIG. 327 is a diagram showing another example of the button effect stepwise.

In FIG. 327, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 327(1), a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 327(1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of special drawing 1 is shown. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 327(2) shows that the button effect is starting. In this example of performance, six sets of operation promotion notification images, each of which is a combination of a button image and a remaining time display meter, are displayed. Specifically, the first operation promotion notification image including the first button image 136a1 and the first remaining time display meter MT1 is arranged at the upper left of the display screen, and the second button image 136a2 and the second remaining time are displayed. The second operation prompting notification image composed of the display meter MT2 is arranged at the center of the upper part of the display screen, and the third operation prompting notification image composed of the third button image 136a3 and the third remaining time display meter MT3 is displayed on the display screen. The fourth operation prompting notification image, which is arranged in the upper right and is composed of the fourth button image 136a4 and the fourth remaining time display meter MT4, is arranged in the lower right of the display screen, and the fifth button image 136a5 and the fifth remaining image are displayed. A fifth operation promotion notification image composed of the time display meter MT5 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen, and a sixth operation promotion notification image composed of the sixth button image 136a6 and the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 is displayed on the display screen. It is located at the bottom right of. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 327(3), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts for any of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 327(4), it is shown that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced in all of the first remaining time display meter MT1 to the sixth remaining time display meter MT6. Has been done. In this effect example, among the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image, the operation valid period for the first operation promotion notification image is the operation valid period for the other operation promotion notification image. It is designed to be shorter and allow the operation valid period to pass earlier. In this example of performance, the second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image have the same operation valid period. Therefore, the gauge of the first remaining time display meter MT1 decreases faster than the gauges of the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 327(5), as shown in FIG. 327(6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first operation promotion notification image is the character of the Copanda. It is shown that it has changed to KP and a notice is given. It should be noted that the second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image have not changed. That is, in this effect example, one operation of the effect button 136 changes only one operation promotion notification image of the plurality of operation promotion notification images. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated, the first operation promotion notification image, the second operation promotion notification image, the third operation promotion notification image, the fourth operation promotion notification image, the fifth operation promotion notification image. The display mode is changed one by one in the order of the notification image and the sixth operation promotion notification image. The order of the operation prompting notification images for changing the display mode is not limited to that described above, and can be set appropriately. Further, the display mode of two or more operation promotion notification images may be changed by operating the effect button 136 once.

In addition, in this example of production, the first remaining time display meter MT1 (the remaining time display meter corresponding to the first operation promotion notification image whose display mode changes first when the production button 136 is operated). Although the reduction of the gauge is assumed to be faster than that of the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6, for example, as shown in FIG. 327(4a), the third remaining time display meter MT3 (when the effect button 136 is operated. In the remaining time display meter MT1 including the first remaining time display meter MT1, the gauge decrease of the remaining time display meter corresponding to the third operation prompting notification image in which the display mode changes third priority , MT2, MT4, MT5, MT6 may be faster or slower. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 327(4b), a sixth remaining time display meter MT6 (a sixth operation promotion notification having the lowest priority for changing the display mode when the effect button 136 is operated). The gauge of the remaining time display meter corresponding to the image may decrease faster or slower than the remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5. Further, the remaining time display meter for accelerating the gauge reduction is not limited to the above-mentioned one, but can be set to an appropriate one.

In addition, in this example of performance, the button images 136a1 to 136a6 are included in all of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image, but the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation notification image For any one or more of the operation promotion notification images, another image may be displayed instead of the button image. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 327(4c), as the image forming the sixth operation promotion notification image, the sixth button image 136a6 is replaced with a sixth operation promoting the operation of the production lever 136V. The lever image 136Va6 may be displayed. In this case, the remaining time display meters of any of the first operation prompting notification image to the sixth operation prompting notification image may have the same gauge reduction speed, or as shown in FIG. So that the speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT6 corresponding to the sixth operation prompting notification image that constitutes the lever image 136Va6 is faster than the remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5 corresponding to the other operation prompting notification images. It may be done or it may be delayed. With such a configuration, for example, when the button effect is started and the display as shown in FIG. 327 (4c) is performed, it is promoted to operate the effect button 136 five times and then operate the effect lever 136V once. You may be able to.

Further, in this effect example, the speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter in any one of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image is reduced is displayed in the remaining operation promotion notification image. Although it is different from the meter, for example, as shown in FIG. 327 (4d), two or more gauges of the remaining time display meter may have different decreasing speeds. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 327(4d), the speed at which the gauges of the remaining time display meters MT3, MT5 of the third operation promotion notification image and the fifth operation promotion notification image decrease is the other operation promotion notification image. The image remaining time meters MT1, MT2, MT4, MT6 are different from each other, and the fifth remaining time display meter MT3 corresponding to the third remaining operation time notification meter corresponds to the fifth remaining operation time notification image. The remaining time display meter MT5 may increase the speed at which the gauge decreases.

FIG. 328 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

In FIG. 328, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 328(A1) to (A6) show a plurality of timer advance notice effects being performed at the same time.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328(A1), a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 328(A1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Also, in FIG. 328(A1), it is shown that two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. Specifically, the timer advance notices TM1 and TM2 are framed in from the right side of the display area to start the timer advance notice effects. Both timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 display "10:00", which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, as will be described later, since the countdown speed of the timer display in the one timer advance notice display is faster than the countdown speed of the timer display in the other timer advance notice display, it takes time to complete the countdown. Different. In this production example, of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2, the one displayed above may be referred to as the first timer notice display TM1 and the one displayed below may be referred to as the second timer notice display TM2. is there.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 328(A2), a state in which the frame-in of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed is shown. Each of the timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 thereafter starts counting down the timer display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (A3), the state in which the timer display countdown is performed in each of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 is shown. In this effect example, the countdown speed of the second timer notice display TM2 is faster than that of the first timer notice display TM1. The first timer notice display TM1 counts down according to the actual time elapsed, but the second timer notice display TM2 is faster than that. At the timing shown in FIG. 328(A3), the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is "09:73", and the timer display of the second timer advance notice display TM2 is "06:73". Has become. The countdown speed is not limited to the one described above, and may be set as appropriate. For example, the countdown speed of the second timer notice display TM2 may be a speed that matches the passage of actual time. The countdown speed of the first timer notification display TM2 may be slower than the countdown speed of the second timer notification display TM2.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (A4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed. On the other hand, the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is "06:00", that is, the state is shown when 4 seconds have elapsed after the countdown of the timer advance notice display started. You can

Then, as shown in FIG. 328(A5), in the second timer notice display TM2, the word "attention" is displayed in place of the timer display, inviting attention to the notice. On the other hand, the countdown of the first timer advance notice display TM1 continues, and the timer display is "05:87" at the timing shown in FIG. 328(A5). After that, a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 may be given. The second timer notice display TM2 is erased by, for example, frame-out after the countdown is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328(A6), the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed. After that, a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 may be given. After that, the first timer notice display TM1 is erased by, for example, frame-out after the countdown is completed.

In this effect example, the case where the two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time has been described, but the two timer advance notice effects may be started at different timings. In this case, for example, the timer advance notice effect started earlier may be selected. The countdown speed of the timer display in the timer preview display may be faster or slower than the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer preview display related to the timer preview effect started later.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 328(B1) to (B4), a plurality of timer notice effects are performed at the same time, and the time until the countdown is completed is added to one of the timer notice effects. Shows.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328(B1), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 328(B1), the number of holdings in special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, FIG. 328 (B1) shows a state in which two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. Specifically, when the timer notice display (first timer notice display TM1, second timer notice display TM2) is framed in from the right side of the display area, the timer notice effect is started. Both timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 display "10:00", which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display is the same.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328(B2), a state in which the frame-in of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed is shown. Each of the timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 thereafter starts counting down the timer display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328(B3), the timer display countdown is shown in each of the two timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2. It should be noted that both the first timer advance notice display TM1 and the second timer advance notice display TM2 count down in accordance with the actual passage of time. At the timing shown in FIG. 328 (B3), both the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM1 and the second timer advance notice display TM2 are “09:73”. The countdown speed is not limited to the one described above, and may be set appropriately, and may be slower or faster than the actual elapsed time, for example. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (B3), it is shown that the timer addition effect is being performed by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 208, "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the time to be added is informed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 328(B4), the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM1 is updated to “19:00”, and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM1. The situation is shown. At this time, since no addition is made to the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2, there is a difference of 10 seconds between the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2. Is occurring. Therefore, two timer advance notice effects are started, but the time is added to one timer display in the middle, so the timing at which the countdown ends is different.

In this example, the time is added to one of the two timer notice displays, but the time may be shortened (subtracted) or the timer notice may be displayed during execution. The countdown of one of the timer displays may be temporarily stopped so that the time until the countdown is completed may be different.

Further, in this example of performance, the case where the two timer advance notice effects are simultaneously started has been described, but the two timer advance notice effects may be started at different timings. In this case, for example, the timer advance notice previously started. Time is added to the timer display in the timer preview display related to the effect, and after the countdown of the timer display in the timer notification display related to the timer notification effect started later is completed, the timer notification effect started earlier is added. The countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display may be completed. In addition, the time is shortened with respect to the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect that was started later, before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started earlier is completed. In addition, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notification display related to the timer notification effect started later may be completed.

In addition, in this effect example, when the timer addition effect is performed while the two timer notice effects are being performed, the time addition is performed with respect to the timer display in the timer notice display related to one of the timer notice effects. However, in addition to the timer display in the timer preview display related to any of the timer preview effects, time is added (or the time is shortened or the countdown is temporarily stopped) to display any timer preview display. It may be changed.

In addition, after the two timer notice effects are started, two timer addition effects and the like (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) corresponding to the respective timer notice effects are performed. It is also possible to add the time to the timer display in the display, etc. for each.

In addition, after the two timer notice effects are started, three timer addition effects and the like (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) are performed, and for example, for one timer notice effect of the two timer notice effects. The timer display may be changed by two timer addition effects or the like, and the timer display may be changed by the remaining one timer addition effect or the like with respect to the other timer announcement effect. Further, three timer addition effects and the like may be performed, and, for example, the timer display may be changed only by two timer addition effects and the like of three timers, or by one of the three timer addition effects and the like. The timer display may be changed, or the timer display may not be changed by any of the three timer addition effects.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 328 (C1) to (C4), in the effect that prompts the user to operate any of the plurality of operating means, the remaining time display timer indicating the operation valid period for each of the plurality of operating means is displayed. It is shown as being displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328(C1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (C1), the number of holdings in special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings in special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328(C1), button effect has been started. Specifically, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR are displayed side by side. Corresponding to the left door image DRL, a left key image 137aL imitating the left key that constitutes the operation key unit 137 is displayed overlapping the left door image DRL, and below the left key image 137aL. The remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed. In addition, a right key image 137aR that imitates the right key that constitutes the operation key unit 137 is displayed so as to overlap with the right door image DRR and is displayed below the right key image 137aR. The remaining time display meter MT2 is displayed on. After that, the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 is started, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 by the player can be accepted. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328(C2), both the remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 corresponding to the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR have their operation valid period started and the gauge is reduced. The situation is shown. In this effect example, the operation valid period of the right key corresponding to the right door image DRR is shorter than the operation valid period of the left key corresponding to the left door image DRL, and the operation valid period passes earlier. Has become. Therefore, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 corresponding to the right door image DRR decreases faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 corresponding to the left door image DRL.

FIG. 328(C3) shows a state in which the left key image DRL is selected by the player operating the left key. Specifically, the left door image DRL is moved to the center of the display screen to be enlarged and displayed, and the left key image 137aL and the remaining time display meter MT1 are erased. Further, the right door image DRR is deleted together with the right key image 137aR and the remaining time display meter MT2. This informs that the left door image DRL has been selected.

Then, as shown in FIG. 328 (C4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the door of the left door image DRL is opened, and the appearance of the replay symbol RP is shown. As a result, for example, it is announced that the pseudo-relation will be performed.

On the other hand, in the case shown in FIG. 328(C2), when the right key is operated and the right door image DRR is selected, as shown in FIG. 328(C4a), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the right door image is displayed. The door of the DRR may open and the pine pattern CC may appear. The character "Gekiatsu" is added to this pine pattern CC, which suggests that the reliability of the jackpot has been dramatically increased.

As described above, in this example of performance, when one of the two remaining time display meters, which has a faster gauge reduction, is selected, a highly reliable notice display is displayed. Even if is selected, the same display may be displayed. Further, when one of the two remaining time display meters, which has a slower gauge reduction, is selected, a notice display with higher reliability may be displayed.

In addition, in this effect example, the operation valid period of the left door image DRL is set to be shorter than the operation valid period of the right door image DRR, but the operation valid period may be the same. For example, even when the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 of the right door image DRR becomes 0, while waiting until the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 of the left door image DRL becomes 0, the operation of the right key is performed. The operation may be enabled or the operation of the right key may be disabled during standby.
FIG. 329 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 329, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 329(A1) to (A12) show that the timer advance notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer advance notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 329(A1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1 in the second holding number display. “1” indicating that is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 329(A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer advance notice display TM1 displays "09:69", and the timer display countdown is performed. In this example of performance, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size (default display size), and when the timer notice display is started and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it is displayed in a small size. .. Here, when the countdown display in the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, it may be at least a small size. In this case, the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes large before the countdown display is started. The size may be displayed, the size may be displayed in another size, or the display mode itself may be different.

In the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 329(A2), the countdown of the timer display continues, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 329(A2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 329(A3), when the timer display is "03:00" indicating that the remaining time is 3 seconds, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also decorated. It is changed to substantially the center of the symbol display device 208. At this time, the first decorative pattern is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 that is enlarged and displayed, and the first decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative pattern is not overlapped. In addition, you may make it overlap with the timer notice display TM1 in which the first decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, an enlarged display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown is continued while the enlarged display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the enlarged display animation is being performed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the size of the timer display portion may not be changed and only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged. In addition, in this example of performance, the timer notice display TM1 is always enlarged and displayed when the timer display is "03:00", but it may not be enlarged. When the display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when it is not enlarged. Further, in this example of performance, the display position is changed when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, but the display position may not be changed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 329(A4) to (A7), the countdown in the enlarged timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 329 (A5), the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 329 (A6), the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is difficult to visually recognize by the enlarged timer display TM1. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 329 (A8), the timer notice display TM1 replaces the timer display and calls attention to the notice. Character is displayed. This "attention" character is enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer advance notice display TM1. It should be noted that after the timer display becomes "00:00", the character display of "attention" may not be displayed, and no presentation may be performed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (A9), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (approximately the right center of the display screen). The timer notice display TM1 may be deleted as it is without being displayed in a reduced size.

Then, as shown in FIG. 329 (A10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is shown in the middle symbol is displayed at a low speed moving downward from above. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (A11), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 329 (A12). As a result, it is notified that the pseudo-link will be executed.

In this example of the effect, when the timer display is "03:00" indicating the remaining 3 seconds in the timer notification effect, the timer notification display TM1 is enlarged, but the timer notification display TM1 is reduced. It may be displayed, the color of the frame may be changed, the color of the timer display (number part) may be changed, the shape of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the timer notice The direction of the display TM1 may be changed (for example, changed from horizontal to vertical), the timer notice display TM1 may be rotated, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, and the timer may be changed. Other elements such as characters and symbols may be added to the advance notice display TM1, time may be added to the timer display, time may be shortened with respect to the timer display, or timer display may be performed. Of the timer display may be stopped, the countdown speed of the timer display may be increased, the timer display may be counted up (rewound), or the timer notice display TM1 is divided and newly added. Different timer notice displays may be displayed, or when a plurality of timer notice displays are displayed, these timer notice displays may be integrated and changed to one timer notice display.

Further, in this example of performance, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to two sizes, that is, a small size and a large size, but it may be changed to three or more sizes. When displaying the "attention" character display in red, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a medium size, and when displaying the timer display or the "attention" character display in gold, the timer notice display TM1 is large. The size may be displayed. Thereby, for example, the display mode may be changed in accordance with the reliability of the big hit.

Further, in this example of performance, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the small size to the large size, but it may be changed from the small size to the medium size to the large size. For example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "05:00", the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the small size to the medium size, and when it is "03:00", the medium size is changed to the large size. The size may be changed. In addition, the size may change from the small size to the medium size, but may not change to the large size.

Further, in this effect example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size when the remaining time in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). The size of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed to a large size when the remaining time in the timer display becomes “00:00”, or the size of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed to a large size. The size may be changed to a large size.

Further, in this example of performance, the reliability of the big hit may be changed depending on the color of the frame or background of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is high in the order of gold>red>green>blue). Further, the reliability of the big hit may be changed depending on the size of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is high in the order of large size>medium size>small size). Further, the reliability of the big hit may differ depending on the shape of the timer notice display TM1.

Further, for example, the reliability of the big hit may be different depending on the color of the timer display or the character display of "attention" in the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is high in the order of gold> red> green> blue). ). Further, the reliability of the big hit may be different depending on the size of the timer display or the character display of "attention" in the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is high in the order of large size>medium size>small size). ). Further, the jackpot reliability may be changed depending on the shape of the timer display or the character display of "attention" on the timer notice display TM1.

Further, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, a certain effect may be made to appear easily. For example, when the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size, the pseudo-relational pattern is easily stopped. You may do it.

Further, in this example of effect, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, a certain specific effect is performed, but no effect may be performed even after the countdown is completed. May be. Here, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, a certain effect may be easily performed when the countdown is completed, and a big hit may be easily caused.

Further, in this effect example, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 has a small size display mode, but at the start of the countdown or the display start time of the timer notice display TM1. A large-sized display mode may be used.

Further, in this example of performance, when the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size, the timer display is also changed to a large size. However, only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size, and the timer display is performed. The size of may not be changed. Further, the size of the timer display may not be changed, and only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed to a small size. Further, although the size of the timer display is changed to a large size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed. Further, although the size of the timer display is changed to a small size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed.

Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the color of the frame portion or the background of the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the color of the frame portion (and/or background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may also change. Further, although the color of the frame portion (and/or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may not change. Further, although the color of the timer display changes, the color of the frame portion (and/or background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may also change. Further, although the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may not change. Further, although the shape (font) of the timer display changes, the shape of the frame portion of the timer advance notice display TM1 may not change.

Further, the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may change its form by animation. In this case, for example, when the frame portion of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed in shape by animation, the timer display may be changed in shape by animation. Further, although the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes its form by animation, the timer display may not change. Although the timer display changes its form by animation, the frame portion of the timer advance notice display TM1 may not change.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 329(B1) to (B4), another example in which the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 329 (B1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1 in the second holding number display. “1” indicating that is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, the timer advance notice display TM1 displays "00:31", and the timer display countdown is performed. Further, in the first decorative symbol, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the middle symbol and the right symbol are being variably displayed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 329(B2) to (B3), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. Here, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (B2), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, but it is overlapped by the timer notice display TM1.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 329 (B4), the timer notice display TM1 replaces the timer display and calls attention to the notice. Character is displayed. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also changed to substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208.

This "attention" character is enlarged and displayed according to the enlarged timer advance notice display TM1. It should be noted that after the timer display becomes "00:00", the character display of "attention" may not be displayed, and no presentation may be performed. At this time, the first decorative pattern is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 that is enlarged and displayed, and the first decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where it is not overlapped. In this way, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed when the character display of "attention" is performed, not only during the countdown of the timer display. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed when the timer display becomes "00:00".
FIG. 330 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer notice effect.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 330(A1) to (A3) are about an example in which, when the display mode of the timer notification display TM1 changes, the timer notification display TM1 after the display mode change is displayed on another display means. Showing. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 330(A1) to (A3), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302(a), the sub display device 208S replaces the family crest part 224E with the decorative pattern display device 208. It is located below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative pattern display device 208.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 330(A1), a state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed is shown. The sub display device 208S can display the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 330(A1), the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and this second hold number display indicates that the hold number in Toku-zu 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, in the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 330(A1), the timer notice production is performed, and the timer notice display TM1 is arranged at the upper center of the sub display device 208. In the timer notice display TM1, "09:69" is displayed as the timer display and the countdown is performed. That is, in this effect example, when the effect of the countdown by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size on the sub display device 208S. In addition, when the effect of the countdown by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in a small size on the decorative pattern display device 208.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (A2), the variable display of the decorative symbol is still being performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the countdown of the timer display continues in the timer advance notice display TM1, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 330(A2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 330 (A3), when the timer display is 3 seconds remaining, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the sub display device 208S moves to the decorative symbol display device 208, and further, The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first decorative pattern is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 that is enlarged and displayed, and the first decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative pattern is not overlapped. In addition, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be moved and enlarged by animation. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed after the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative pattern display device 208, or the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed as a decoration pattern from the sub display device 208S. It may be enlarged and displayed while moving across the display device 208, or may be enlarged and displayed before the timer notice display TM1 crosses the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the countdown is continuously performed while the enlarged display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the movement and the enlarged display animation are being performed.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 330(B1) to (B3), when the display mode of the timer notification display TM1 is changed, another timer notification display TM1 after the display mode is changed is displayed on another display means. An example is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330(B1), the state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed is shown. The sub display device 208S can display the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (B1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and in the second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (B1), the timer notice effect is performed, and the timer notice display TM1 displays "09:69" as the timer display, and the countdown is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (B2), the variable display of the decorative symbol is still being performed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 330(B2). In addition, at this time, the sub display device 208S is operating, rises along the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, is located on the front side substantially in the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The displayed decorative pattern and the timer notice display TM1 overlap with each other and are more difficult to visually recognize than when they are not overlapped. Further, while the sub display device 208S is rising, the change icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S are erased. The variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be deleted before the sub display device 208S starts moving, or the sub display device 208S completes moving. After that, the sub display device 208S may be erased, the sub display device 208S may be erased at the timing of starting the movement, or the sub display device 208S may be erased at the timing of completing the movement. Further, only one of the variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 may be deleted. Further, the display positions of the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be changed to the decorative symbol display device 208.

Then, as shown in FIG. 330 (B3), when the timer display is 3 seconds remaining, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the sub display device 208S, and further, The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. In addition, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be moved and enlarged by animation. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. Here, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed after the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the decorative pattern display device 208 to the sub display device 208S, or the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed as a sub display from the decorative pattern display device 208. The display may be enlarged while moving across the display device 208S, or may be enlarged before the timer notice display TM1 extends across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. Note that the countdown is continuously performed while the enlarged display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the movement and the enlarged display animation are being performed. In addition, in this effect example, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the timer notice display TM1 is erased from the decorative symbol display device 208 and displayed on the sub display device 208S. Also, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed continuously. In this case, for example, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in a reduced size. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 may be synchronized or may not be synchronized. ..

The production examples shown in FIGS. 330(C1) to (C9) show another example of the display mode after the change of the timer notice display TM1. At the timing shown in FIG. 330(C1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1 in the second holding number display. “1” indicating that is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 329(A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer advance notice display TM1 displays "09:69", and the timer display countdown is performed.

In the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 330(C2), the timer display continues to count down, and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 330(C2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 330(C3), when the timer display is “03:00” indicating that the remaining time is 3 seconds, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes. The timer advance notice display TM1a after the change has a mode in which the timer display is arranged inside the circular meter. As shown in FIGS. 330(C3) to (C6) in FIG. 330, the display state of the circular meter unit changes in the clockwise direction from the 12 o'clock position as time passes. Although the timer notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode is partially overlapped with the change icon h0, the change icon h0 may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a. Further, the timer notice display TM1a has the same size until the countdown is completed, but the size may be changed depending on, for example, the remaining time. For example, when the remaining time is 1 second, the circular meter unit is enlarged. It may be displayed. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode may be configured only by the circular meter portion and the timer display may not be performed. Further, the first decorative pattern is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a after the display mode is changed, and the first decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative pattern is not overlapped. The first decorative pattern may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a whose display mode has changed. Further, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes, a change display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown is continuously performed while the change display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the change display animation is being performed. Further, when the display form of the timer notice display TM1 is changed and displayed, the timer display portion may not be changed, and only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 330(C4) to (C6), the countdown and the gauge decrement display in the timer advance notice display TM1a are continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. In this production example, the production of the countdown is performed by both the countdown by the timer display and the reduction display of the gauge of the circular meter portion. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (C5), the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (C6), the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is difficult to visually recognize due to the timer notice display TM1a. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1a.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1a becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 330(C7), on the timer notice display TM1a, in place of the timer display, the pseudo continuous effect is displayed. Character is displayed. As a result, it is informed that the pseudo continuous effect will be performed. It should be noted that characters other than "Continue" may be displayed. For example, when the timer reaches the SP reach as a result of the completion of the countdown of the timer display, "SP reach" is displayed and the SP reach is displayed. You may notify that it shifts. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, “Attention” may be displayed to pay attention to the occurrence of the advance notice.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (C8), the timer notice display TM1a is erased, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 330 (A9), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character of the lord is displayed in the middle pattern. The display in which the pseudo continuous symbols moved at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side is started. After that, the pseudo-relational symbols are stopped and displayed, and the pseudo-repetition is executed.

In this example of performance, the character "CONTINUE" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1a to notify that the pseudo continuous effect is to be performed. However, for example, by adding a question mark to the character "CONTINUE", the pseudo continuous effect is given. The display may be performed so that the presentation may not be performed. Further, in such a case, for example, when the pseudo-relational effect is performed, the big hit may be settled.

Further, in this effect example, when the timer displays for the same effect are respectively displayed in a plurality of timer notice displays, one timer notice display may be displayed in a large size, or both timer notice displays may be displayed. The timer notice display may be displayed in a large size. In addition, one timer advance notice display shows a timer display of "03:00", and the other timer advance notice display roughly displays, for example, "3 seconds left" in different display modes. A countdown display may be displayed.
FIG. 331 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer notice effect.

In FIG. 331, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the public figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 331(A1) to (A8) show that the timer advance notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer advance notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 331(A1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1 in the second holding number display. “1” indicating that is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 331(A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer advance notice display TM1 displays "09:69", and the timer display countdown is performed.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331(A2) shows that the navigation character YM is performing the timer addition effect. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon in which the characters "add on" are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. It is informed that it will be done. That is, it is notified that the time of the countdown performed in the timer advance notice effect is extended.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 331 (A3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, “+10 seconds” indicating the additional time is displayed, and the additional time is informed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 331 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing of "05:00" indicating that the timer display has 5 seconds remaining, and the display position is also a decorative pattern display. It is changed to approximately the center of the device 208. In this example of performance, when "05:00" is reached, the countdown is temporarily suspended, but the countdown may be continued. Here, in this example of performance, the timer notice display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed due to the remaining time of the timer display being the predetermined time, but the timer notice display TM1 is added by adding time to the timer display. Is an enlarged display. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331(A4), the enlarged timer advance notice display TM1 is overlapped with the balloon of the navigation character YM, but the extended advance notice display of the navigation character YM is displayed. It may be overlapped with TM1. Further, the condition for displaying the timer advance notice display TM1 in an enlarged manner is not limited to the addition of the time in the timer display, and, for example, when the timer display changes, for example, when the time is shortened in the timer display or the countdown is stopped. The timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged.

As shown in FIG. 331 (A5), in the timer preview display TM1 that is displayed in an enlarged manner, the count-up animation is displayed, and the effect of adding the time in the timer display is performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331(A6), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. .. Note that the countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 331(A7), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased, and then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331(A8), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size. The display position is also changed to the original position. After that, the countdown of the timer display is restarted.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 331(B1) to (B7), in the timer announcement effect, the timer announcement display is enlarged and displayed when the time of the timer display is added. At the timing shown in FIG. 331 (B1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1 in the second holding number display. “1” indicating that is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol, "decoration 7" is stopped on the left symbol and "decoration 7" is stopped on the right symbol. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, and the timer advance notice display TM1 completes the countdown display of the timer display, and "00:00" is displayed. There is.

Then, as shown in FIG. 331 (B2), the timer notice display TM1 moves to substantially the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “attention” to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Is displayed. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 331 (B3), when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the timer display is performed again, and “00:00” is displayed as the timer display. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a pseudo symbol symbol in which the character of the lord is displayed in the middle symbol is displayed moving at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side. Pseudo continuous production by this pseudo continuous pattern is continuously performed from FIG. 331(B3) to FIG. 331(B7).

After that, as shown in FIG. 331 (B4), the timer advance notice display TM1 that is displayed in an enlarged manner displays a count-up animation and an effect that the time in the timer display is added.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (B5), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to “15:00”, and it is shown that 15 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. ..

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (B6), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (the center of the display screen on the right side). On the timer notice display TM1, thereafter, the countdown of the timer display is restarted. The timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in its original size without being reduced. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol, the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped in the middle symbol, and it is notified that the pseudo continuous symbol is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 331 (B7), a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continuation" is performed, and thereafter, the second variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The timer notice display TM1 is counting down the timer display, and the timer display is "14:92" at the timing shown in FIG. 331 (B7).
FIG. 332 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer notice effect.

In FIG. 332, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 332(A1) to (A8) show that the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed when the display mode of the timer notice display changes and the notice rank is increased. ing. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 332(A1), the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that the swordsman has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and the second number of reservations display indicates that the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332(A1), the timer notice effect is performed, the timer notice display TM1 displays "20:35", and the timer display countdown is performed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A2), the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman, the enemy of the main character, has begun to be displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 332(A2).

FIG. 332(A3) shows that animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 332(A3).

Then, as shown in FIG. 332 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing of "15:00" indicating that the timer display has 15 seconds remaining, and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The color of the frame of is changed from white to red, and “LvUP” indicating that the reliability of the big hit is higher is added. The display position of the timer notice display TM1 is also changed to substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 has been upgraded. Although the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed, the countdown may be temporarily interrupted while the enlarged display is being performed. Here, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed due to the remaining time of the timer display being the predetermined time, and the display form of the timer notice display TM1 is a highly reliable display of the big hit. By changing the mode, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A5), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (approximately the right center of the display screen). At this time, the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 remains red, but the display of "LvUP" is erased. The timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in its original size without being reduced.

As shown in FIG. 332(A6), when the display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, the timer advance notice display TM1 is replaced with the timer display as shown in FIG. 332(A7). The word "Attention" is displayed to encourage attention to the notice.

Then, as shown in FIG. 332 (A7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the cut-in display indicating that the reliability of the big hit is high is shown. In this cut-in display, the characters "Jitsuatsu" indicating that the jackpot is highly reliable are displayed together with the princess character. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A7), in response to the timer advance notice display TM1 being ranked up, the character display of “expected large” is additionally added. As a result, a big hit is likely to occur as compared with the case where a cut-in display in which the character display of “expected large” is not added is displayed. It should be noted that the character display of "high expectations" may or may not always be displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up. Further, the character display of "high expectations" may be displayed on condition that the timer notice display TM1 is ramped up, or may be displayed even if the timer notice display TM1 is not ranked up. May be. In this example of performance, the character display of “high expectations” is easier to be displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up than when it is not ranked up. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A7), the display of the variable icon h0 also changes and the advance notice display is performed. This change in the display of the variable icon h0 may be performed as a result of the countdown being completed in the timer notice effect, or may be performed regardless of the timer notice effect. That is, when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, a notice different from the notice given by the timer notice effect may be given.

As described above, in this example of performance, the rank advancement of the timer notice display TM1 may be a notification indicating that the notice given as a result of the completion of the countdown in the timer notice production has been promoted, or the timer notice. The rank up of the display TM1 itself may function as an advance notice of the chance up. In addition, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be ranked up to notify in advance that the expectation of displaying a highly reliable advance notice of a big hit is high.

Further, in this example of performance, the rank up of the timer notice display TM1 suggests that the notice given as a result of the completion of the countdown in the timer notice production may be promoted, but for example, the first decorative pattern It may indicate that the reach pattern in may be promoted. Specifically, for example, when the reach is performed with "decoration 2" in which the probability variation big hit is not determined and the reach effect is being performed, the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, and when the big hit is the probability variation big hit. May be determined, and the reach may change to “decoration 7” which is likely to be a big hit.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 332 (B1) to (B7) show how the production using the chance up meter is started when the timer notice production is being performed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B1), the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that it has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B1), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1, and the second number of reservations display indicates that the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and not displayed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B1), the timer notice effect is performed, the timer notice display TM1 displays “20:35”, and the timer display countdown is performed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B2), an animation of a duel scene between the main character's lord and the enemy swordsman has begun to be displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 332 (B2), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged in addition to the start point SP and the end point GP. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 332(B2).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332(B3) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is starting to move from the start point SP. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 332(B3).

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B4), at the timing when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the character Boy of Boyi appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side. Is shown. That is, it is shown that the advance notice of the chance increase due to the appearance of the boy character BOY is given. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 332 (B4), when the boy character BOY appears, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed so that the boy character BOY is conspicuous. That is, it may be possible to reduce the display of the timer notice display TM1 so as not to disturb the display of the boy character BOY, and it is also possible that the boy character BOY gives a notice of a chance up. Sometimes it can be easily recognized. It should be noted that the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down the timer display even if it is reduced and displayed, and "15:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 332(B4). The countdown of the timer display may be interrupted while the reduced display is being performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 332(B4) to (B6), the reduced display of the timer advance notice display TM1 is maintained until the advance notice of the chance up by the boy character BOY ends.

Then, as shown in FIG. 332 (B7), when the advance notice of the chance up by the boy character BOY ends, the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed in the original size.

In this example of performance, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced manner while the advance notice of the chance increase is given to notify that the advance notice of the chance increase is given. In some cases, the purpose can be achieved by changing the display mode. For example, in addition to the reduced display of the timer advance notice display TM1, an enlarged display of the timer advance notice display TM1, a change in the color of the frame of the timer advance notice display TM1 or the timer display itself, a change in the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1, and a timer advance notice. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed by changing the shape of the display TM1.
FIG. 333 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 333, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 333(A1) to (A3), it is shown that the display position of the timer advance notice display that was displayed at the time of shifting to the super reach is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 333(A1), the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 1, and in the second number-of-holds display, “1” indicating that the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333(A1), a state of shifting to super reach is shown. Specifically, it has been suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333(A1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, the timer advance notice display TM1 displays "21:37", and the timer display countdown is performed.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (A2), the title of Super Reach in which the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size is displayed, and the appearance of development into Super Reach (Swordsman Reach) is shown. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "20:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333(A2).

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (A3) that follows, an animation of a duel scene between the main character's lord and the enemy swordsman is displayed. When the animation display of the duel scene is started, the timer notice display TM1 changes its display position. Specifically, the timer advance notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to the lower right corner of the display screen. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, when the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 333 (A3′), the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed in a reduced size so that the effect of super reach is conspicuous.

In this example of effect, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is moved at the timing when the animation display of the duel scene starts, but when the effect of shifting to the super reach shown in FIG. 333(A1) is performed. The display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed when the title of the super reach shown in FIG. 333(A2) is displayed. Good. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be configured to move to the original position again at a specific timing (for example, 3 seconds before or 0, a chance of the timer notice display TM1 increasing, etc.). It may be displayed as it is. Further, even when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size, it is displayed in an enlarged manner (for example, first displayed at a specific timing (for example, 3 seconds before or 0, timing of timer notice display TM1). Displayed in a different size or a display larger than the size initially displayed).

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 333(B1) to (B7), it is shown that the display position of the timer notice display displayed when the effect movable body operates is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 333 (B1), the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 1, and in the second number-of-holds display, “1” indicating that the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and not displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (B1), a state of shifting to super reach is shown. Specifically, it has been suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, the timer advance notice display TM1 displays “27:37”, and the timer display countdown is performed.

In FIG. 333 (B2), it is shown that the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “25:34” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333(B2). Here, at least a part of the timer advance notice display TM1 is overlapped by the second large-board behavior auditor 224Gb and the fourth large-board behavior auditor 224Gd, and the timer announcement display is more than that in the non-overlapping state. TM1 is difficult to see.

Then, as shown in FIG. 333 (B3), the timer advance notice display TM1 changes the display position to a position where it does not overlap with the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd. Specifically, the timer advance notice display TM1 displayed at the central portion on the right end of the display screen is changed to the central upper end portion of the display screen. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, when the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced and displayed. In addition, when the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd do not operate, the display position may not be changed, but the display positions may be changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 333 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the effect image that appears when the light guide plate IL emits light overlaps the timer notice display TM1, but the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is not changed by this. The display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed when the light guide plate IL emits light. After that, as shown in FIG. 333(B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, as shown in FIG. 333(B6), the first large-board behavior auditor product 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor product 224Gd are initialized respectively. Return to position.

Then, as shown in FIG. 333 (B7), the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed to the original position (the central portion of the right end of the display screen). On the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "21:37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333(B7). The timing at which the timer notice display TM1 moves to the original position may be the same as the timing at which the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd start the operation of returning to the initial position. The timer notice display TM1 may be moved to the original position after the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd start the operation of returning to the initial position, or the timer warning display TM1. After starting to move to the original position, the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd may start the operation of returning to the initial position.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 333(C1) to (C5) show that the positional relationship between the timer notice display and the decorative pattern is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 333 (C1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1 in the second holding number display. “1” indicating that is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (C1), the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer advance notice display TM1 displays “29:69”, and the timer display countdown is performed. Further, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative design, and the first decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative design does not overlap.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (C2), the state that "decoration 7" is stopped on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is shown. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “22:04” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333(C2). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps the first decorative pattern.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (C3), the reach effect is started, and the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the upper left and right directions, respectively, and the variable icon h0 is displayed. , The navigation character YM and the hold icon h11 are framed out and hidden. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "21:37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333(C3). At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol, and the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the right symbol of the first decorative symbol. The timer notice display TM1 may overlap the first decorative symbol.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (C4), a state in which it has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (C4), the title of Super Reach in which the image of the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size is displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “20:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333(C4). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the first decorative pattern.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (C5), an animation of a duel scene between the main character and the enemy swordsman is displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333(C5). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the first decorative pattern. In addition, in the lower left corner of the display screen, the above-described chance up meter CMT is displayed, and an effect using the chance up meter is performed.
FIG. 334 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 334, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 334(A1) to (A10) show that the display position of the timer notice display is changed by the player's operation. At the timing shown in FIG. 334(A1), the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 1, and in the second number-of-holds display, “1” indicating that the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and not displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 334(A1), a state of shifting to super reach is shown. Specifically, it has been suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334(A1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, the timer advance notice display TM1 displays "21:37", and the timer display countdown is performed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (A2), the title of Super Reach in which the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size is displayed, and the appearance of development into Super Reach (Swordsman Reach) is shown. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "20:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334(A2).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (A3), the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman, the enemy of the main character, has begun to be displayed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334(A3). In addition, in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a guide display in which the character of "reduce timer" is displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137, is displayed by the player. It is informed that the timer advance notice display TM1 can be reduced and displayed by operating the key. In this example of performance, the guide display is displayed when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but it may be displayed from the time when the timer notice production is started, or when the reach state is reached. May be displayed in.

After that, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 334(A4), the timer advance notice display TM1 is reduced in size and its display position is changed as shown in FIG. 334(A5). change. Specifically, the timer advance notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to above the guide display. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves while shrinking may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed and then reduced, or the display position may be changed after the reduced display. Further, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated, the timer notice display TM1 may be hidden. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334(A5). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 334 (A5), the characters of "enlarge timer" are displayed together with the icon of the upper key of the operation key unit 137, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged by the player operating the upper key. Then, it is displayed in the original size, and it is informed that the display position is also returned to the original position.

Then, when the upper key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 334(A6), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and returned to the original size as shown in FIG. 334(A7). , The display position also returns to the original position. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "17:81" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334(A7). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 334(A7), the guide display in which the character of "reduce timer" is displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137, and the player operates the lower key. This informs that the timer notice display TM1 can be reduced and displayed. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 334(A3), when the timer advance notice display TM1 has the default display size and the default display position, when the upper key of the operation key unit 137 is operated, The timer advance notice display TM1 may be further enlarged and displayed.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (A8), a state where animation display of the duel scene continues is shown. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334(A8).

Then, as shown in FIG. 334(A9), when the timer display is "03:00" indicating that the remaining 3 seconds are left, the guide display displayed at the lower right of the display screen is deleted. It is indicated that the display position (display size) of the timer notice display TM1 cannot be changed. The display position and the display size of the timer notice display TM1 may be continuously changed. Further, when the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed when the timer display becomes "03:00" and the display is reduced, the display size is returned to the default display position with the default display size at this timing. Alternatively, the reduced display may be performed at the changed display position.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (A10), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, and the state where the countdown is completed is shown.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 334(B1) to (B9) show that the timer advance notice display is divided and displayed during execution of the timer advance notice effect. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (B1), the title of Super Reach in which the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size is displayed, and it is shown that it has developed into Super Reach (Swordsman Reach). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (B1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and the second number of reservations display indicates that the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (B1), the timer notice production is performed, the timer notice display TM1 displays "20:35", and the timer display countdown is performed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (B2) that follows, animation of a duel scene with the swordsman, the enemy of the main character, is started to be displayed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334(B2).

FIG. 334 (B3) shows that the animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334(B3).

After that, as shown in FIG. 334 (B4), an effect image is displayed around the timer notice display TM1 at the timing of “15:00” indicating that the timer display has 15 seconds remaining, and then, as shown in FIG. As shown in (B5), the timer notice display is divided into two. Here, the timer preview display displayed on the left side of the two timer preview displays may be referred to as a left timer preview display TM1L, and the timer preview display displayed on the right side may be referred to as a right timer preview display TM2R. The timer displays in these timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1R respectively show the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 334(B5), they respectively show "13:56". In this example of performance, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit is increased by dividing the timer notice display into two. Note that the number of times the timer notice display is divided is not limited to two, and may be three or more. The greater the number of divisions, the higher the reliability of the big hit. Further, in these timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1R, the color of the frame changes to red, but the color of the frame does not have to change, and when the color of the frame changes to red, the color of the frame changes. You may make it a big hit more easily than when the color does not change. Further, the color of the frame of either one of the timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R may be changed to red.

Then, as shown in FIG. 334(B6), when the timer display in timer advance notice displays TM1L, TM1R becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 334(B7), timer advance notice displays TM1L, TM1R display the timer display. Instead of this, the word "attention" is displayed to call attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 334 (B8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a cut-in display indicating that the princess character is saying "I will rewrite the reach". There is. The display of this cut-in is an effect performed by the completion of the countdown of the timer display in one of the two timer advance notices TM1L and TM1R (for example, the left timer advance notice display TM1L), and is a reliable jackpot. This is a notification that the promotion will be made to a reach production with higher sexuality. It should be noted that the effect may be produced by the completion of the countdown of the timer display in both of the timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1R.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (B9), it is shown that the SP swordsman reach has been developed. The SP swordsman reach is a reach that develops and transitions to a swordsman reach, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when the swordsman reach does not develop into an SP swordsman reach. In the SP swordsman reach, as shown in Figure 334 (B9), the hero's lord and the enemy's swordsman face each other, which is the same as the pre-development swordsman reach, but they follow the panda as an assistant to the hero's lord. The difference is that the full moon appears in the background. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 334(B9), a notice display showing that the Kopanda cheering party KPD composed of three Kopanda characters is supporting is displayed, and SP swordsman reach It informs us that the reliability of the big hits has dramatically increased. This Kopanda cheering party KPD is a notice character displayed when the countdown of the timer display in the other timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R (for example, the right timer notice display TM1R) is completed.

In this example of performance, the advance notification of a chance and the development of reach production are performed corresponding to each of the two timer notice displays, but one production (development of reach production) is performed corresponding to the two timer notice displays. It can be said that the opportunity production is being performed even in the developed reach production.

FIG. 335 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer advance notice effect. In FIG. 335, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 335(A1) to (A5) show timer advance notice effects using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 335(A1) to (A5), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302(b) is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. However, the image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It should be noted that the family crest accessory 224E and the Senryo box accessory 224H are omitted in the drawing for ease of explanation.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 335(A1), it has been developed into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman is shown. .. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 335(A1), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1. "1" shown is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and not displayed. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer notice effect is being performed, "15:47" is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is being counted down.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335(A2), the animation of the duel scene is continuously performed. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "15:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335(A2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 335(A3), a predetermined effect is applied to a display area near the second decorative symbol display device 208M in the first decorative symbol display device 208L and a display area near the third decorative symbol display device 208N. An image is displayed, suggesting that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N operate. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "14:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335(A3).

Then, as shown in FIG. 335(A4), a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N reciprocate left and right along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. ing. At this time, the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. That is, it is shown that the timer advance notice display is divided into two. The timer display may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M after the operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completed. The timer display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N respectively indicate the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 335(A4), "13: 56” is shown. Although the countdown of the timer display continues during the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are operating. May interrupt the countdown of the timer display. In this example of performance, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit is increased by dividing the timer notice display into two. Note that the number of times the timer notice display is divided is not limited to two, and may be three or more. The greater the number of divisions, the higher the reliability of the big hit. For example, in addition to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the timer display may be performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

Then, as shown in FIG. 335(A5), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N respectively return to the initial positions. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display countdown continues, and "12:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335(A5).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 335(B1) to (B5) show timer advance notice effects using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 335(B1) to (B5), a mini display device 208P is provided in addition to the decorative pattern display device 208. The mini display device 208P is provided, for example, at an appropriate position on the game board 200, the front frame door 106 (see FIG. 289), or the like. In this example of performance, for example, a dot matrix type display device in which full-color LEDs are arranged in a matrix is adopted, but other display devices such as LCD, EL, 7-segment, lamp, and drum may be used. The mini display device 208P is provided with a shutter member, and by driving the shutter member, the mini display device 208P can be switched between the easily visible state and the visually difficult state.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 335(B1), it is shown that the animation of the duel scene between the protagonist, the hero, and the enemy, the swordsman, is being developed, which has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (B1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and the second number of reservations display indicates that the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and not displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is performed, the timer advance notice display TM1 displays “18:19”, and the timer display countdown is performed. Further, the timer advance notice effect is also performed on the mini display device 208P, "6:19" is displayed as the timer display, and the countdown of the timer display is performed. That is, in this effect example, two timer advance notice effects are shown to be performed in parallel, and the timer display is "0" in the timer advance notice effect TM1 on the decorative pattern display device 208. In such a case, an effect such as an advance notice of a chance may be given. Further, when the timer display on the mini display device 208P is "0", an effect such as an advance notice of an opportunity is given. There are cases.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 335 (B2), the timer notice display is displayed at the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 at "15:00" indicating that the remaining timer display time is 15 seconds. The effect image is displayed around TM1 and the countdown is interrupted. On the other hand, also in the mini display device 208P, the countdown is interrupted at the timing "3:00" indicating that the timer display has 3 seconds remaining.

Then, as shown in FIG. 335 (B3), in the mini display device 208P, instead of the timer display, the time of the timer display shown in the mini display device 208P is the timer advance notice display displayed in the decorative pattern display device 208. The character "UP" indicating that the time is added to the timer display of TM1 is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 335 (B4), 3 seconds is added to the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the time is updated to "18:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 335 (B5), in the timer notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, the countdown of the timer display is restarted. At the timing shown in FIG. 335 (B5), the timer display is "17:99". On the other hand, in the mini display device 208P, the shutter member makes the display screen difficult to view. In addition, in this effect example, when time is added to the timer display of the timer notice display TM on the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer effect on the mini display device 208P is ended, but the decorative symbol display is performed. Even if time is added to the timer display of the timer notice display TM in the device 208, the timer effect may not be finished in the mini display device 208P, and then the timer display may be counted down.
FIG. 336 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 336, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

336(A1) to FIG. 336(A10) show the example of notifying about the fact that the timer advance notice effect is to be started by displaying that it is being prepared before the timer advance notice effect is started. Showing. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336(A1), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 336(A1), the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 3, and the first holding icon h11 to the third holding icon h13 are displayed, and in the second holding number display. , "3" indicating that the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 3 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336(A2) shows that the timer advance notice preparation effect has started. Specifically, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen, the timer notice preparation effect is started. In the timer advance notice preparation effect, a display indicating that preparation is in progress is displayed until the timer advance effect is started to give the player a sense of expectation. At the timing shown in FIG. 336(A2), nothing is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1. Note that, for example, the display of "STANDBY" described later may be displayed.

Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336(A3) shows that the frame advance of the timer notice display TM1 is completed. When the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed, "STANDBY" indicating that the timer notice effect is being prepared is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 to notify that effect. That is, in this effect example, it is an effect that is performed as one mode of the pre-reading announcement for announcing that the timer announcement effect will be performed while the call is held. It should be noted that the change notice may be a notice that the timer notice effect is performed in the changing symbol display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 336(A4), the timer advance notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed changes its display position to a position below the second hold display section. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in a mini size display size. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves while shrinking may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed and then reduced, or the display position may be changed after the reduced display. Further, the timer notice display TM1 does not have to be reduced and the display position need not be changed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 336(A5), a state is displayed in which the combination of the missing decorative patterns of “decoration 3-decoration 9-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed is continuously displayed.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A6), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the earliest hold of the special figure 1. The timer notice display TM1 is still kept displayed below the second hold display section. In this way, it can be said that the timer announcement preparation effect is an effect that may be performed across a plurality of symbol variable displays.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 336(A7), a state is displayed in which the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. At this time as well, the timer notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed is continuously displayed.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336(A8), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the earliest hold of the special figure 1. The timer notice display TM1 is still kept displayed below the second hold display section. The variable display of this time corresponds to the hold that has been the target of prefetching.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 336(A9), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and returned to the original size, the display position also returns to the original position, and the timer display is started from the display of “STANDBY”. Shows that the display is switched to "10:00". As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect has started. When the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves while enlarging may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and then displayed, or the display position may be changed after the enlarged display. Further, the display position of the timer notification display TM1 may be changed after the display of the timer notification display TM1 is switched to the timer display, or the timer notification display TM1 may be changed after the display position of the timer notification display TM1 is changed. The display of may be switched to the timer display. Further, the timing at which the display of the timer notice display TM1 is switched to the timer display may be the same as the timing of changing the display position of the timer notice display TM1.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336(A10), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started.

After that, for example, when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes a display of a specific time (for example, “03:00”) or when the display mode changes, the display size of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed. The size may be changed from a small size to a large size.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 336 (B1) to (B8), a plurality of notice icons MI1 of the clock functioning as prefetch notice are stocked, and the timer notice effect is performed by the number of the notice icons MI1 of the stocked clocks. Is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336(B1), a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 336(A1), the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 3, and the first holding icon h11 to the third holding icon h13 are displayed, and in the second holding number display. , "3" indicating that the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 3 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336(B2), a state where "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol is shown. This "decoration 3" has a notice icon MI1 of the clock added thereto, indicating that one notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked. Note that the notice icons MI1 of two or more watches may be stocked at one time.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 336(B3), a state is displayed in which the combination of the missing decorative patterns of “decoration 3-decoration 9-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. Further, below the second decorative pattern, a timer notice stock display area TMst showing the number of stocked notice icons MI1 of the clock is displayed. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, “timer notice stock×1” indicating that the notice icon MI1 of one clock is stocked is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect will be performed at least once in the hold. It should be noted that time may be added to the timer display in the timer notice production by the number of stocks of the notice icon MI1 of the clock. Further, the remaining time displayed on the timer display when the timer notice effect is started may be determined according to the number of stocks of the notice icon MI1 of the clock. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, the stock number is added every time the notice icon MI1 of the clock appears.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B4), a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is shown. Also, it is shown that the navigation character YM is giving a notice of navigation characters. This navigator character advance notice is made by displaying a balloon in which the character "get" is displayed together with a clock icon near the navi character YM. The navi-character notice in this example of the effect functions as a pre-reading notice that the timer notice effect will be performed while the call is held. As described above, the number of the notice icon MI1 of the clock stocked in one symbol variable display is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, there may be a plurality of types of effects performed when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked. Further, in the effect performed when the clock notice icon MI1 is stocked, the number of the clock notice icons MI1 to be stocked is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B5), a state is displayed in which the combination of defective decorative patterns of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, "timer notice stock×3" indicating that the notice icons MI1 of the three clocks are stocked is displayed. As a result, it is informed that the timer advance notice effect will be performed at least three times within the hold.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336(B6), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed is shown. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336(B7), one of the three notice icons MI1 of the stocked clocks has been consumed, and the timer notice effect has been started. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the timer notice display TM1, "10:00" is displayed as the timer display, which suggests that a chance up notice may be given 10 seconds after the countdown starts. Further, in this example of performance, one timer notice icon MI1 is consumed and one timer notice effect is started, but two timer notice icons MI1 are consumed and two timer notice effects are performed in parallel. You may do it by doing. Further, in this effect example, one timer notice icon MI1 is consumed to start one timer notice effect. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 336 (B7′), the clock notice icon MI1 is selected. There may be a case where the timer advance notice effect is started without being exhausted.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B8), the timer notice display TM1 changes the display position to the approximate right center of the display screen, and the countdown of the timer display is started. At this time, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed by a moving animation. When the timer notice icon MI1 is consumed and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be displayed substantially at the center of the display, but may be displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen from the beginning. ..

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 337 to 390. Further, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiment described below can be applied to any of the embodiments described above.

FIG. 337 to FIG. 390 are diagrams showing, in stages, an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to this embodiment. 337 to 390, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220 and the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. Note that, in FIGS. 337 to 390, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, but as in the above-described embodiment, a device including a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. May be Further, the transparent light guide plate IL or POV display described above may be arranged on the front surface side of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 337 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 338 shows a step-by-step continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 337. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 337(1), the combination of decorative patterns "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the fourth design and the second decorative design may be displayed. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 337(1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 337 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed. In addition, the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state.

In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon representing the hold of special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of the special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holding icons of the special figure 1 and the second holding number display. In addition to the number of holding lamps 220 lit, the number of holding icons and the second holding number display in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon,.... In the hold icon display area, hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side become the hold icons with older prizes.

In FIG. 337(1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are in the default display mode. It is displayed in a (circular, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokushu 1 is a round hold icon.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons of special figure 2 are displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 337 is the non-electric power support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chu and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon holding icon of the special drawing which is easier to win in special maps 1 and 2 is displayed, and the holding icon of the other special map is displayed. I try not to display it. That is, when the control state is the non-electric power support state, as shown in FIG. 337(1), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric power support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is displayed and the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is not displayed. Note that the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device→starting or erasing the moving animation of the hold icon→starting the variation of the decorative symbol, but this order is reversed. Good.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337(2), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is a decorative symbol display device. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 by moving to the change icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and displayed as the change icon h0, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. Is displayed as. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337(3), a state in which the navigation character YM gives the navigation character notice is shown. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 208, when the navigator announcement is started, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigator character YM together with the letters "chance", which suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337(4), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337(5), the second stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337(6), the third stop is performed, the replay symbol RP as the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 337(7), the navigation is performed. The character "CONTINUE" is displayed in the vicinity of the character YM to inform that the pseudo-repeating will be performed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 337(8), after the character "Ikuze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the second variation display of the decorative pattern by pseudo-linking is started. ing. After that, as shown in FIG. 337(9), in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “×2” is displayed, which indicates the number of times the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-link.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337(10), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337(11), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 337 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 337 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the Sabohani group advance notice that a large number of the characters SBHN of Sabohani cross is being given. This Sabohani group notice is a notice with a high expectation of a big hit. That is, it can be said that when the Sabohani group notice is given, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the Savohani group notice is not given. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of Sabohani group announcements are provided according to the reliability of the big hit, and the Sabohani character SBHN is the second number, and the strong Savohani group announcement is the first number. A weak Savohani group notice that is (a number smaller than the second number) may be executed. The notice of the sabotani group shown in FIG. 337 (13) is a notice of the strong sabotani group. Further, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337(14), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been informed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 337 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to inform the type of super reach.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337(16), the button advance notice effect is started and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In addition, in this button notice production, a button reception time meter may be displayed to notify the operation valid period.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (17), as shown in FIG. 337 (18), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the “up and down game” in the balloon together with the up image of the lord's character. A cut-in image including a balloon image in which the character "Ja" is arranged is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is the weak cut-in image CI1b in which the banjou face is not decorated around the word "Game" in the balloon, and is a big hit compared to the case where the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Suggests that the reliability of is low.

In a decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 338 (19) subsequent to FIG. 337 (18), the main character's lord is defeated by an enemy swordsman, a defeated screen is displayed, and substantially at the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. , "Decoration 6", which is scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle pattern, is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

Then, as shown in FIG. 338(20), in the decorative pattern display device 208, a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. There is. At this time, the character “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result will be lost. After that, as shown in FIG. 338 (21), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns with the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 339 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 340 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 339. is there. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 339(1) and (2) are the same as FIGS. 337(1) and 337(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339(3) shows that the timer notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by a frame-in animation, the timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 5 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Here, the timer advance notice display TM1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to display a decimal point of less than 1 second.

After that, countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, and "04:25" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 at the timing shown in FIG. 339(4). .. That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, the character “pseudo ream” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is suggested that the pseudo ream may be performed as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339(5), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down, and "03:96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339(5).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339(6), the second stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. Further, the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down, and "01:73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339(6).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339(7), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:52" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339(7). After that, as shown in FIG. 339(8), the character "CONTINUE" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the pseudo-link is to be performed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339(8). After that, as shown in FIG. 339(9), when the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", "go" to the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Is displayed, and the variable display of the decorative pattern for the second time is started by the pseudo link. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 339(10), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x" indicating the number of times the pseudo-linking has started the second variable display of the decorative symbol. 2” is displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 339(11) to (18) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 339(11) to (18) are the same as those in FIGS. 337(10) to (17), so description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 339(18), as shown in FIG. 340(19) following FIG. 339(18), in the decorative pattern display device 208, together with the up image of the lord's character. , A cut-in image including a balloon image in which the characters "Game" is displayed in the balloon is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number of faces (for example, nine) are arranged around the word "Game" in the balloon, and a weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. It suggests that jackpots are more reliable than they would be displayed. In addition, when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be a big hit without fail (finally, the big hit symbol is finally displayed).

Then, as shown in FIG. 340 (20), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 340(21), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 340(22), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns of the big hits of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this example of effect, when the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-relation is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is more than that when the timer notice effect is not performed and the pseudo-reaction is not started). It is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern in (Display). It should be noted that, in this example of effect, even if the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-relation is started, it may be lost.

FIG. 341 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 341(1) to (4) are the same as FIGS. 339(1) to 339(4), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341(5), the disappearance animation is started during the countdown display in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notification display TM1, it is notified that the notification that the pseudo link is performed is a false notification. In other words, it can be said that the timer announcement display TM1 is erased in the middle of the countdown before it becomes “00:00” and a certain effect (pseudo-relation) is not performed. In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the true timer advance notice effect is performed than when the false timer advance notice effect is performed. It should be noted that the present embodiment is configured so that even if a fake timer advance notice effect is performed, a big hit may occur.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341(6) shows that the timer notice display TM1 has been completely erased. In response to this, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-relation as a result of the timer advance notice effect is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341(7), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, the character "sorry" displayed near the navigation character YM has been deleted.

Then, the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and when the reach state is formed, as shown in FIG. 341 (8), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the navigation character YM. “Reach” is displayed in the vicinity to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In addition, in this example of performance, the pseudo-repeated notice by the timer notice production is a false notice, but it may be said that it is functioning as a notice of reach by moving to reach.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 341(9), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the weak Savohani group announcement is made in which the number of Sabohani SBHN is smaller than that of the above-described strong Savohani group announcement. This weak Savohani group notice is more reliable than it was without the Savohani group notice, but less reliable than when the strong Savohani group notice was given.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 341(10), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been informed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 341 (11) to (17) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 341(11) to (17) are the same as those in FIGS. 337(15) to 338(21), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 342 is a diagram stepwise showing another display example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 342(1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 339(1) to 339(6), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 342(6), after "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is "00: The third stop is performed at the timing of "00", and the replay symbol RP as the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. In this way, the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 may be completed at the timing when the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed. The middle symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", or the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed as "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. , Or the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 may be "00:00" and the middle symbol may be stopped and displayed.

After that, the timer notice display TM1 is erased at the timing shown in FIG. 342(8), and the character "CONTINUE" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the pseudo-repeating will be performed. It should be noted that the character "CONTINUE" may be displayed after the timer notice display TM1 is erased, or the timer notice display TM1 may be erased after the character "CONTINUE" is displayed. The timing at which the display TM1 is erased and the timing at which the character "CONTINUE" is displayed may be the same.

After that, as shown in FIG. 342 (9), the character "Ikuze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the second variable display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-link is started.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 342 (7a) to (9a), after the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the pseudo decorative continuous display of the second variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Until then, the display may be maintained without deleting the timer notice display TM1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 342 (9b), after the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer advance notice display is started at the timing when the second pseudo variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The character “Done” may be displayed on TM1 to notify that the timer advance notice effect has succeeded and the pseudo-relation as a certain effect has started.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 342 (9c), after the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer advance notice display is started at the timing when the second pseudo variable display of the decorative pattern is started. It is also possible to display the characters “pseudo-relation” on TM1 to notify that the timer announcement effect has been successful and the pseudo-reaction as a certain effect has started. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 342 (9c), by displaying the longest face icon BCHO on the timer notice display TM1, it is possible to produce an indication that the pseudo-relation as a certain production has started. Good.

FIG. 343 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 343(1) to (3) are the same as FIGS. 339(1) to 339(3), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343(4), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is performed, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is "04:25". In addition, in this example of the effect, the character "reach may" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which suggests that reach may occur.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343(5), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. The timer advance notice display TM1 continues to count down, and "03:96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 343(5).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343(6), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. The timer advance notice display TM1 continues to count down, and "01:73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 343(6).

Then, as shown in FIG. 343(7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. The timer advance notice display TM1 continues to count down, and "00:52" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 343(7).

After that, as shown in FIG. 343(8), when the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343(9), the strong sabotani group is displayed. A notice will be given. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the strong sabotani group notice is given as a result of the timer notice effect is shown. In other words, the notice of the strong sabotani group can be said to be an example of a certain effect. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 343(10) to (17) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 343(10) to (17) are the same as those in FIGS. 339(15) to 340(22), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong Savohani group notice is started, the symbol variation display is displayed more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong Savohani group notice is not started. In the (variable display of the symbol), the jackpot symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed. It should be noted that, in this example of effect, even if the timer notice effect is performed and the strong sabotani group notice is started, it may be lost.

FIG. 344 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 344(1) to (8) are the same as FIGS. 343(1) to (8), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 344(8), even if the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. An example without notice is shown. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM, the notice that the notice of the strong sabotani group is given is a false notice (gase). .. In other words, it can be said that even when the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, it is shown that a certain effect (strong notice of the sabotani group) has not been given.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344(10), "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the super reach will be developed.

Subsequently, the effects shown in FIGS. 344(11) to (17) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 344(11) to (17) are the same as those in FIGS. 343(11) to (17), description thereof will be omitted. It should be noted that, in this example of the effect, an example in which the timer announcement effect by the timer announcement display TM1 is false and a big hit may occur even if a certain effect is not started is shown, but it may be lost.

FIG. 345 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 345(1) to (8) are the same as FIGS. 343(1) to (8), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 345(8), when the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 345(9), the weak sabotani group notice is displayed. Is done. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that a notification (weak Sabohani group notification) different from a certain effect is given as a result of the timer notification effect. In other words, it can be said that when the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, it is shown that an effect (weak Savohani group notice) different from a certain effect (strong Savohani group notice) is performed. This timer advance notice effect can also be called a fake timer advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 345(10), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been informed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 345(11) to (17) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 345(11) to (17) are the same as those in FIGS. 343(11) to (17), description thereof will be omitted. In addition, this example of effect also shows an example in which the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 is false and a big hit may occur even if an effect different from a certain effect is started, but it may be lost. is there.

FIG. 346 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 347 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 346. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 346(1) and 346(2) are the same as FIGS. 337(1) and 337(2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by the frame-in animation, the timer notice display TM1A is framed in from the right side of the display screen to start the timer notice effect. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1A is a high reliability display mode indicating that the possibility of false timer advance notice is lower than the default display mode. In addition, when the timer advance notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is displayed, a certain effect performed as a result of the countdown may be executed without fail. Further, when the timer advance notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode is displayed, the reliability of the big hit is higher than when the timer advance notice display TM1 of the default display mode is displayed (the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed. May be done). "03:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1A, which indicates that a certain notice effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started.

Then, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice display TM1A is started, and "00:24" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 at the timing shown in FIG. 346(4). .. That is, it is shown that 2.76 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "Hold change", and the display mode of the hold icon may change as a result of counting down the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A. It has been suggested. That is, it is indicated that this timer advance notice effect may be a prefetch advance notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346(5), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1A is completed, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A becomes "00:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 346(6), the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon is displayed. It is informed that the display mode of h11 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 346(7), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the panda display mode, and the prefetch display mode is set. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect that is performed as a result of the timer notification effect by the timer notification display TM1A. In addition, the character “first hot” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is informed in advance that there is a high possibility of a big hit at the next symbol variation display. In addition, the character display of "first hot" may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed after the character display of "first hot" is performed. Alternatively, the characters “first hot” may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display (the symbol variable display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than when not.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346(8), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346(9), the second stop is performed and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346(10), the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 346(12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative symbols with the defect of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the character “first hot” displayed near the navigation character YM is also deleted.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (13), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 that has been the display mode of the prefetching notice becomes the change icon h0 that is the notice display mode related to the symbol variation by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346(14), a state in which the navigation character YM gives the navigation character notice is shown. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 208, when the navigation character advance notice is started, the character “Hot” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the jackpot is highly reliable.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346(15), the timer notice display TM1A is displayed, showing that the timer notice effect has started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1A is a high reliability display mode. "20:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1A, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 20 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. In addition, in this example of performance, the timer display time displayed when the countdown is started is as long as "20:00", and the reliability of the big hit is greater than when the short time is displayed. It is also suggested that it is increasing. The countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1A is then started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (16), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "18:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 346(16).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346(17), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "16:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 346(17).

Then, as shown in FIG. 346 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" near the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state is reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "16:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 346(18).

After that, as shown in FIG. 347 (19) following FIG. 346 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the strong sabotani group notice is given. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper right corner. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "15:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347(19). Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice display TM1A is overlapped by the character SBHN of Sabohani that constitutes the notice of the strong Savohani group. At the timing shown in FIG. 347(19), in addition to the timer notice display TM1A, the second timer notice display TM1 is started to be displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a plurality of timer advance notice displays are displayed in the timer advance notice effect is shown. The newly displayed timer advance notice display TM1 is a default display mode, and "5:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, and 5 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. Then, it is suggested that a certain production is started. Further, in this example of performance, the timer notice display TM1 displayed later has a shorter time than the timer notice display TM1A displayed earlier, and the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 displayed later is performed. However, the timer notice display TM1A which was started earlier is completed before the countdown. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 which is started to be displayed later is consumed first. The countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is then started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 347(20), while the Sabohani group notice is continuously displayed, "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it may develop into super reach. It has been informed. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "14:95" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347(20). In addition, the timer advance notice display TM1 which is started to be displayed later continues to count down, and “4:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347(20).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 347(21), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "10:95" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347(21). In addition, the timer advance notice display TM1 which is started to be displayed later continues to count down, and "1:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347(20).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 347(22), when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 which is started to be displayed later is “0:00” and the countdown is completed, the button notice effect is started and the button image is displayed. It is shown that 136a is displayed in the default mode. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice display by the timer advance notice display TM1 started to be displayed later is consumed before the timer advance notice display TM1A started to be displayed first. In the example of the effect, a certain effect that is performed as a result of the countdown of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 that is started to be displayed later is not the start of the button notice effect itself, but the operation of the effect button 136 in the button notice effect. This is a notice effect that is started as a result of being performed, and in this example effect, it is a notice that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, but it is a notice that the button notice effect itself is generated. May be.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (23), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 347 (24). On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1 that has already completed the countdown continues to display "0:00" until the effect button 136 is operated and the cut-in image is displayed. It may be deleted when the countdown is completed, "0:00" is displayed, and the button advance notice effect is started. In this example of performance, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notification display TM1 that is started to be displayed later, the notification that the strong cut-in image CI1a will be displayed is false (gaseous). It can be said that a certain situation is shown. Alternatively, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect, an effect (display of the weak cut-in image CI1b) different from a certain effect (display of the strong cut-in image CI1a) is shown. In other words, when the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “0:00”, it is shown that an effect (display of the weak cut-in image CI1b) different from a certain effect (display of the strong cut-in image CI1a) is performed. It can be said that the timer advance notice effect is a fake timer advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347(25), a state is shown in which the timer advance notice display TM1 which was started to be displayed later is erased. In the timer advance notice display TM1A which has been started to be displayed first, the countdown is continuing, and "5:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347(25).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (26), the main character's shrine is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and a defeated screen is displayed, and the middle symbol of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol The "decoration 6" of the schedule is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown is continuing, and "3:77" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347(26).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347(27) shows that the display position of the timer notice display TM1A moves from the center on the right side of the display screen to the upper left corner. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown is still continuing, and "2:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347(27).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (28), a state in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by a combination of decorative patterns “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5” is shown. At this time, the character “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result will be lost. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1A is still counting down, and "1:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347(28).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (29), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A becomes “0:00” while the fluctuation fluctuation of the decorative symbol continues, and the countdown is completed. ing. Then, as shown in FIG. 347 (30), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer notice display TM1A is erased, and the character BC3 of the bancho who has broken clothes appears together with the character "Resurrection" and the navigation character YM. An exclamation mark is displayed in the vicinity of the character, which shows that he is surprised at the sudden appearance of the Bancho character. Then, three decorative patterns of “decoration 5” are displayed, and it is notified that all three “decoration 5” are a big hit. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which a revival effect is informed that a big hit is given as a certain effect that is performed as a result of the timer notification effect TM1A.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (31), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 347 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols for the big hits of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 and the character "Yatteze" is also deleted.

As described above, in this example of effect, when the timer notice effect is performed and the revival effect is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is performed) is more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the revival effect is not started. It is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern in (Display).

In addition, in this effect example, when the timer notice display is displayed in the high reliability display mode, the time initially displayed on the timer display is set to "3:00" or "20:00". When displaying the notice display in the high-reliability display mode or in the special display mode, the time displayed first in the timer display is first displayed in the timer display when the timer notification display is displayed in the default display mode. The time (second time) may be longer than the time (first time) displayed on the. As a result, depending on the display mode of the timer notice display, it may be possible to give an expectation to a certain notice display to be executed.

FIG. 348 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 348(1) and (2) are the same as FIGS. 337(1) and 337(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by a frame-in animation, the timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 348(4), a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the characters "Hold change", and as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, the hold is displayed. It is suggested that the display mode of the icon may change. That is, it is indicated that this timer advance notice effect may be a prefetch advance notice. On the other hand, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is not started, and the timer display remains "03:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 348(5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 is started, and the state in which the timer notice display TM1 is erased is shown. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notification display TM1, it is notified that the notification that the display mode of the hold icon changes is a false notification. In other words, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is deleted before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and a certain effect (change effect of the display mode of the hold icon) is not performed. It can be said that the situation is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348(6), the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased. In response to this, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon as a result of the timer advance notice effect is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348(7), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. In addition, at this time, the character "sorry" displayed near the navigation character YM is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348(8), the second stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348(9), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 348(10), temporary stop due to fluctuation in fluctuation. Then, as shown in FIG. 348(11), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the defective decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 349 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 350 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 349. FIG. 351 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 350. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 349(1) and (2) are the same as FIGS. 337(1) and 337(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R are frame-in animations, respectively, and are frame-in from the left and right of the display screen, respectively, and the two timer notice effects are simultaneously started. Note that three or more timer announcement effects may be started at the same time. Both of these two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1R are default display modes. In the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, "10:00" is displayed as the timer display, suggesting that a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. There is. Further, "45:00" is displayed as the timer display on the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, suggesting that a certain notice effect is started when 45 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. doing. In this example of performance, since the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R start counting down at the same time, a certain notice effect is generated both 10 seconds and 45 seconds after the countdown is started. Have been suggested to be initiated. Here, a certain notice effect that may be started when 10 seconds have elapsed and a certain notice effect that may be started when 45 seconds have elapsed may be the same, May be different. Further, the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side has a long face icon BCHO added, which suggests that the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as a notice effect. .. In addition, the fact that the reliability of the big hit is improved may be notified by adding the icon BCHO of the face of this length. It should be noted that multiple types of icons added to the timer notice display may be prepared, and the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the type of the added icon, or a certain type of notice effect that may be performed. May be different.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1R is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349(4), the timer advance notice display TM1L displayed on the left side displays "9: 25" is displayed, and "44:25" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side. That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349(5), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative pattern is displayed small on the upper center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In addition, a character "select with the cross key" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a navigation display for operating the operation key unit 137 to move the cursor CSL to select a treasure box is displayed. Further, the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349(5), "9:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "44:00" is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display by the timer notice effect is started before the start of the mini game.

After that, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 349(6), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , The right treasure chest image BXR is surrounded. Further, the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349(6), "8:75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "43:75" is displayed.

After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the characters "Open to the right" are displayed near the navigation character YM on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 349(7). It is informed that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box that can be opened. Further, the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R are continuously counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349(7), "4:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "39:00" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349(8), the effect production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved to the center, and the left treasure chest image BXL not selected is displayed. Erased. Then, the word "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349(8), "3:67" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "38:67" is displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (9), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters “effect activation” are displayed, showing that the mini game mission has been achieved. Has been done. As a result, in the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, it is notified that the certain effect is promised when the countdown of the timer display is completed. In this example of production, the appearance of the princess character HME gives a notice that a pseudo-relation will be performed as a certain production. That is, in this example of production, the princess character HME can be referred to as a pseudo-rend notice item (may be referred to as a "predictor icon"). At this time, the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1R displayed on the right side is added, "41:67" is displayed, and the countdown continues. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, "1:67" is displayed and the countdown is continuing here as well. The timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1R displayed on the right side may not be added. In the present embodiment, the countdown is performed in this way by the timer advance notice effect, and it may be possible to excite the effect by the mini game before the countdown is completed (until "0:00" is reached).

After that, the mini game ends, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 349(10), the characters "preparing for production" are displayed above the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, and the pseudo-link is performed. It has been announced in advance. In addition, the characters “pseudo-repeating” are displayed near the navigation character YM as well, and a notice is given here that the pseudo-repeating will be performed. The two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349(10), "1:33" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "41:33" is displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349(11) shows that the countdown in the timer notice effect is continuing. Further, in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, it is visually displayed that the princess character HME is added, that is, the pseudo-reminder item is displayed, so that the pseudo-ream is performed. It may be easier to understand. As described above, in this example of performance, it can be said that the result of the mini game is displayed as an icon. The two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349(11), "10:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "41:00" is displayed.

After that, the countdown in the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R is continuously performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (12), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side becomes “0:00”. When the countdown is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 5-replay symbol RP-decoration 6". In the timer advance notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues, and "40:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 349(12).

After that, as shown in FIG. 349 (13), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is erased, and the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. Here, after the timer notice display TM1L is erased, the second variation display of the decorative design by the pseudo-relation may be started, or the timer after the second variation display of the decorative design by the pseudo-relation is started. The advance notice display TM1L may be erased, or the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link may be started at the timing when the timer advance notice display TM1L is erased. In addition, in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is displayed, and the display of the icon notifies that the pseudo-relation has been performed. In the timer advance notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues, and "39:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 349(13). As described above, in this example of effect, when the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-relation is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is more than that when the timer notice effect is not performed and the pseudo-reaction is not started). It is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern in (Display).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349(14), a new timer notice display TM1N is started to be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen, and a state in which a new timer notice effect is started is shown. The display mode of the newly displayed timer advance notice display TM1N is the default display mode. For example, a frame-in animation is used to frame in from the left side of the display screen. On the timer notice display TM1N, "10:00" is displayed as the timer display, which suggests that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this example of performance, the newly displayed timer advance notice display TM1N starts counting down after the timer advance notice display TM1R displayed on the right side where the countdown was first started, but the timer advance notice display displayed on the right side. The countdown will be completed earlier than TM1R. In the timer advance notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues, and "38:15" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 349(14).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349(15), the timer display countdown is performed in each of the timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R. At the timing shown in FIG. 349(15), "9:25" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, and "37:" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side. 40” is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1N displayed on the left side was started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349(16) shows that the second mini game has started. When the mini game is started, in the same manner as described above, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper center, and the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. BXR and left and right are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In addition, the characters "Select with the cross key" are displayed near the navigation character YM. Further, the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (16), the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side displays “9:00”, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "37:15" is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (17), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , The right treasure chest image BXR is surrounded. Further, the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349(17), "8:75" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "36:90" is displayed.

After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (18) displays the characters "Open right" near the navigation character YM, It is informed that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box that can be opened. Further, the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (18), "4:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "32:15" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350(19) subsequent to FIG. 349(18), the effect production of the mini game is started, and the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved and displayed in the center and is selected. The left treasure box image BXL that was not present is deleted. Then, the character "attention" is displayed near the navigation character YM. Further, the countdown continues in each of the two timer advance notice displays TM1N and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 350(19), "3:67" is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "31:82" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 350(20), the character BBA of the old woman appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters “Uhihi” are displayed, showing that the mission of the mini game has failed. ing. As a result, it is notified that the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side is a false timer notice effect. The two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 350(20), the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side displays “1:67”, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "29:82" is displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 350(21), the disappearance animation is started on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, and the state that the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side is erased is shown. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notification display TM1N displayed on the left side, it is notified that the notification that a certain notification effect is performed is a false (geek) notification. In other words, it can be said that the timer announcement display TM1N is erased in the middle of the countdown before it becomes “00:00” and a certain effect is not displayed. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1R displayed on the right side continues to count down, and "29:49" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350(21). Further, “×2” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the number of times the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner by pseudo-linking is twice. When the princess character HME is displayed, “×2” does not have to be displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350(22), the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side is completely erased. In response to this, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-relation as a result of the timer advance notice effect is not performed. Further, the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side continues to count down, and "27:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350(22).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (23), "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on each of the left symbol and the right symbol to form a reach state, and "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Then, it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 350(24), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that a strong sabotani group notice is given. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper right corner. Further, in this effect example, the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is moved from the center on the right side of the display screen to the upper left corner. Then, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1R is overlapped with the character SBHN of Savohani forming the notice of the strong Savohani group. The strong Savohani group notice may be started after the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is completed, or the strong Savohani group notice may be started before the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is completed. Alternatively, the strong sabotani group warning may be started at the timing when the movement of the display position of the timer warning display TM1R is completed. Further, the strong Savohani group notice may be started after the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is started, or the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is started after the start of the strong Savohani group notice. Alternatively, the strong sabotani group warning may be started at the timing when the movement of the display position of the timer warning display TM1R is started. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1R is still counting down, and "25:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350(24).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 350(25), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been informed. In the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and "24:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350(25).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (26), the display screen is darkened, and a state in which a blackout effect in which lightning crosses is performed is shown. In the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and "21:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350(26).

When the blackout effect is finished, the decoration pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 350(27) shows that the mini game is started using the entire display screen. Specifically, the character "strong cut-in chance" is displayed together with the icon of the bancho's face, indicating that the mini-game by Amidakuji has started. Then, it is shown that the long-faced face icon BCHO added to the timer notice display TM1R moves to the Amida field and is located in the middle of the three options. That is, the display of the bancho-faced icon BCHO added to the timer notice display can be said to be a notice display that the mini game by Amida lottery will be started. Further, a character "SELECT" is displayed below the Amida field, and prompts the user to operate the operation key unit 137 to select the buncho face icon BCHO from any of the three options. .. In the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and "21:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350(27).

After that, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350(28) displays the number of the bancho located in the middle of the three options in the Amida field. The face icon BCHO moves to the right of the three options. In the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and "18:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350(28).

After that, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the operation valid period elapses when the left side of the three options in the Amida field is selected, the timing of the FIG. The production is started. At this time, at each of the three end points of the Amida field, either "o" indicating success or "x" indicating failure is displayed. Specifically, of the three ending points, the left one is displayed as "x", the center one is displayed as "x", and the right one is displayed as "○". ing. It should be noted that the display number of “◯” may be two or more, or “◯” may be displayed at all the end points. Even at this time, the timer notice display TM1R continues to count down, and "18:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350(29).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 350(30), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the buncho-faced icon BCHO is moving along the line in accordance with the rule of the mid lottery. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1R is still counting down, and "17:55" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350(30).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350(31) shows that the longest face icon BCHO has reached the right end point among the three end points. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji has been derived. In this effect example, the icon BCHO of the bancho's face reaches the end point on the right side where "○" is displayed, and the character "strong cut-in confirmed" is displayed, the mission succeeds, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. It has been informed that the CI 1a has been confirmed to be displayed. In the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continuing, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350(31).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 350 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the display of the navigation character YM is restarted, but the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area remain hidden. Then, a character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. Also, it is shown that the display mode of the timer notice display TM1R is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1RA), and the reliability of the big hit is improved. There is. In the timer advance notice display TM1RA, the countdown continues, and "9:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (32).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (33), the state in which the button notice effect is started and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode is shown. At this time, in the timer advance notice display TM1RA, the timer display becomes "0:00", indicating that the countdown is completed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1RA is a timer notice effect related to this button effect, and is a timer notice effect about the strong cut-in image CI1a being displayed as a result of the button effect. .. The timer advance notice display TM1RA that has become "0:00" is maintained until the effect button 136 is operated to display the strong cut-in image CI1a, but after the countdown is completed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. May be deleted before is displayed.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 350(34), the strong design image display device 208 displays the strong cut-in image CI1a as shown in FIG. 350(35). After that, the timer notice display TM1RA is erased.

Then, as shown in FIG. 350 (36), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 351 (37) following FIG. 350 (36), the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. It is shown. At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. The display of the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area is resumed, and the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 351 (38 ), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decoration decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the pattern is more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (variable display of the symbol), the big hit symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed.

In addition, in this effect example, a state in which the timer advance notice effect is performed to start the pseudo-relation, the timer advance notice effect is performed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed is shown. However, it is structured so that it may be lost.

FIG. 352 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect that continues from FIG. 350(24). The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIG. 352(25a) to FIG. 352(28a) are the same as FIG. 350(25) to FIG. 28(28), but in this effect example, a countdown display is displayed in the blackout effect in FIG. 352(26a). The difference is that the timer advance notice display TM1R is temporarily hidden.

When the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the left side of the three options in the Amida field is selected and the operation valid period elapses, the effect of the lottery lottery is produced at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (29a). Be started. In this example of performance, at this time, three icons are displayed at three end points of the Amida field. Specifically, of the three ending points, a panda icon indicating that the mini game has failed is displayed at the ending point on the left side, and a banquet icon indicating that the mini game has succeeded at the center ending point. Is displayed, and at the end point on the right side, an icon of Savohani indicating that the mini game has been very successful is displayed. Note that there may be no panda icon, two panda icons, or all panda icons. In addition, there may be a case where there is no icon having a length, two icons may be used, or all icons may be length. In addition, there may be no Savohani icon, two icons, or all Savohani icons. Even at this time, the timer notice display TM1R continues to count down, and "18:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (29a).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 352 (30), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the icon BCHO, which is the longest face, is moving along the line according to the rule of the mid lottery. The timer advance notice display TM1R is still counting down, and "17:55" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (30a).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (31a) shows that the buncho face icon BCHO has reached the right end point among the three end points. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji has been derived. In this example of performance, the buncho's face icon BCHO reaches the end point on the right side where the Savohani icon is displayed, and the word "strongest cut-in confirmed" is displayed, making a great success in the mission and the strongest described later. It has been notified that the cut-in image CI1v has been confirmed to be displayed. In the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continuing, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (31a).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 352 (32a), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the display of the navigation character YM is restarted, but the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area remain hidden. Then, a character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. Also, it is shown that the display mode of the timer notice display TM1R is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1RA), and the reliability of the big hit is improved. There is. Furthermore, in this example of performance, the character "strongest cut-in in preparation" is displayed together with the character Sabohani under the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed in advance. I am informing you. In the timer advance notice display TM1RA, the countdown is continuing, and "9:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (32a).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (33a), the state in which the button notice effect is started and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode is shown. At this time, in the timer advance notice display TM1RA, the timer display becomes "0:00", indicating that the countdown is completed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (34a), the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, as shown in FIG. 352 (35a). At this time, the display of the character Sabohani and the character "preparing for the strongest cut-in" is erased. The strongest cut-in image CI1v includes a balloon image in which the characters "Game" are arranged in a balloon together with an up image of the character of Tonosama, and is surrounded by a large number of Sabohani characters. It is a cut-in image. When the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the jackpot pattern is easier to be confirmed and displayed than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In addition, when the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the big hit may be determined. In this effect example, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1RA, the strongest cut-in image CI1v, which is a notice effect more advantageous than the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain notice effect, is displayed. The situation is shown. Here, the strongest cut-in image CI1v may be displayed as a certain notice effect, or may be displayed as a notice effect different from the certain notice effect. After the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the timer notice display TM1RA is erased.

Then, as shown in FIG. 352 (36a), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and at the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (37a), a state in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is shown. At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. The display of the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area is resumed, and the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 352 (38a), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decorative decorative symbols "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 353 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 353(1) and 352(2) are the same as FIGS. 337(1) and 337(2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by the timer advance notice display TM1 being framed in from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "10:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353(4), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is not started, and the timer display remains "10:00". It should be noted that the timer advance notice effect in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect indicating that pseudo-relation may be performed as a certain advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353(5), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative pattern is displayed small on the upper center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In addition, a character "select with the cross key" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a navigation display for operating the operation key unit 137 to move the cursor CSL to select a treasure box is displayed. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 353(6), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , The right treasure chest image BXR is surrounded. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 353(7), the character "Open right" is displayed near the navigation character YM, It is informed that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box that can be opened. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353(8), the effect production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved to the center, and the left treasure chest image BXL not selected is displayed. Erased. Then, the word "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 353(9), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "pseudo-run stock" are displayed, and the mission of the mini game is achieved, and the pseudo-run It will be announced in advance that will take place. As a result, in the timer announcement effect related to the timer announcement display TM1, it is notified that the pseudo announcement as a certain announcement effect is promised when the countdown of the timer display is completed. The timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started. In this effect example, it is shown that the result of the mini game is derived and displayed before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started.

Thereafter, the mini game ends, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353(10), the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1A). It is shown that the jackpot reliability is improved. That is, in this effect example, the timer advance notice display TM1 is stepped up by the success of the mini game. In addition, a princess character HME as a notice item is displayed at the lower left of the display screen, and a notice is given that the pseudo-link will be performed. That is, in this example of performance, the advance notice item is displayed when the mini game is successful. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1A is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. Shutdown takes place. After that, as shown in FIG. 353 (12), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns with the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1A is continuously displayed even while the symbol is being fixedly displayed, and the princess character HME as the notice item is also displayed. That is, these displays will be displayed over the next symbol variation display. In other words, it can be said that the display of the timer advance notice display TM1A and the display of the princess character HME are displayed as a prefetch advance notice of the pseudo continuous production. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1A is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (13), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1A is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice display TM1A is started, and "06:44" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1A at the timing shown in FIG. 353(14). ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353(15), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "03:96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 353(15).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (16), the second stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. Further, the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down, and "01:73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 353(16).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353(17), the third stop is performed at the timing when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A becomes "0:00", and the middle symbol is replayed as a pseudo continuous symbol. It is shown that the symbol RP is stopped and displayed. After that, the second variable display of the decorative pattern is started by the pseudo-linking in the manner described above. As described above, in this example of effect, when the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-relation is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is more than that when the timer notice effect is not performed and the pseudo-reaction is not started). It is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern in (Display).

FIG. 354 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 353. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 354(1) to (8) are the same as FIGS. 353(1) to 353(8), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 354(9), the character BBA of the old woman appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "Uhihi" are displayed, showing that the mission of the mini game has failed. .. As a result, it is notified that the timer announcement effect related to the timer announcement display TM1 is a false timer announcement effect. The timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 354(10), the disappearance animation is started on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notification display TM1, it is notified that the notification that a certain notification effect is performed is a false notification. In other words, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed, but is erased before the countdown is started to show that a certain effect is not performed.

After that, after the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol as described above, and as shown in FIG. -Ornament 6-Ornament 6 is temporarily stopped due to fluctuations in the combination of decorative patterns of "6". Then, as shown in FIG. 354 (12), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. As described above, in this example of performance, the mini game has failed, and the pre-reading notice by the timer notice display TM1 is a false notice, so the process is terminated in the middle, and as a result, the pre-reading notice is not issued. It is shown.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (13), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354(14), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354(15), the second stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354(16), the third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 354(17), temporary stop due to fluctuation of swing. After that, the combination of the defective decorative patterns “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6” is confirmed and displayed.

In this example of performance, even if the mini game fails and the pre-reading notice by the timer pre-notification production is a false pre-announcement, there may be a big hit in the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice.

FIG. 355 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 356 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 355. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 355(1) and 355(2) are the same as FIGS. 337(1) and 337(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355(3), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative pattern is displayed small on the upper center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In addition, a character "select with the cross key" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a navigation display for operating the operation key unit 137 to move the cursor CSL to select a treasure box is displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355(4) shows that the timer advance notice effect is started during the period when the mini game is started and the selection operation by the player is accepted. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by the timer advance notice display TM1 being framed in from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "10:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

After that, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 355(5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , The right treasure chest image BXR is surrounded. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 has not started, and the timer display remains "10:00".

After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the characters "Open right" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 355(6). It is informed that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box that can be opened. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 355(7), the effect production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved to the center, and the left treasure chest image BXL not selected is displayed. Erased. Then, the word "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 355(8), the icon of the face of the leader BCF from the right treasure box image BXR appears, and the character "strong cut-in confirmed" is displayed, thereby completing the mini game mission. , The strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed in advance. The timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the decorative design is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and as shown in FIG. 355(9), it is a temporary variation due to the fluctuation in the combination of the decorative design of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". Shutdown takes place. At this time, the longest face icon BCF is reduced and displayed (stocked) in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. This look-ahead notice of the strong cut-in image CI1a is given by the stock of the icon BCF of the longest face. After that, as shown in FIG. 355(10), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is continuously displayed even while the symbol is fixedly displayed, and the icon BCF of the bancho face as the notice item is also displayed. .. That is, these displays will be displayed over the next symbol variation display. In other words, it can be said that the display of the timer notice TM1 and the icon of the face length BCF of the bancho are displayed as a look-ahead notice. The timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (11), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355(12), the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the panda display mode, and becomes the advance notification display mode. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed by, for example, the pending change animation, but the display mode may be changed by the switching display without performing the pending change animation. Then, as shown in FIG. 355(13), the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. The timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, and "9:95" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 at the timing shown in FIG. 355(14). ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355(15), the disappearance animation is started during the display of the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notification display TM1, it is notified that the notification that a certain notification effect is performed is a false notification. In other words, it can be said that the timer announcement display TM1 is erased in the middle of the countdown before it becomes “00:00” and a certain effect is not displayed. Further, in this effect example, a state in which the timer notice display TM1 which is a false notice is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays is shown. It should be noted that the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect related to the fact that the pseudo notice is performed as a certain notice effect, that is, by deleting the timer notice display TM1, the pseudo notice is generated. It may be recognized that it will not occur. It should be noted that before the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 is started, it may be possible to perform a gaze effect to that effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355(16), the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355(17), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (18), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 356 (19) following FIG. 355 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed in the lower center of the display screen to notify that the reach state has been reached. It On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 356(20), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the strong sabotani group notice is given. Further, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 356(21), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been informed. Here, since the buncho face icon BCF is also displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the display of "SP development" overlaps the buncho face icon BCF, and the buncho face icon BCF is displayed. It is considered to be more difficult to see than when not.

Then, as shown in FIG. 356 (22), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to inform the type of super reach.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (23) shows that the button notice effect is started and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 356(24), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as shown in FIG. 356(25). The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a corresponds to the fact that the notice is given by the long-faced face icon BCF displayed near the navigation character YM. In other words, it can be said that the result of the mini game is a look-ahead notice of the notice effect executed in the symbol variable display performed later. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is related to the result of the mini game and is not related to the timer advance notice effect started at the same time. That is, it is shown that the mini game and the timer advance notice effect are related to each other, but in reality, only the mini game of the strong cut-in image CI1a is the true advance notice effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 356 (26), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (27), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 356 (28 ), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative symbols for the big hits of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In addition, in this example, when the icon BCF of the longest face appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the mini game, the icon BCF of the longest face appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a appears. It is configured so that the jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when is not displayed. However, even if the icon BCF of the face of the bancho appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be lost. Good.

FIG. 357 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 357(1) and 357(2) are the same as FIGS. 337(1) and 337(2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, in this effect example, the longest face notice icon TM1 is added with the longest face icon BCHO, which suggests that a certain notice effect is likely to be displayed.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, and "0:24" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 at the timing shown in FIG. 357(4). .. That is, it is shown that 2.76 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the display of "Hold change". As a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM, the display mode of the hold icon changes. It has been suggested that there is a possibility. That is, it is indicated that this timer advance notice effect may be a prefetch advance notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357(5), the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is completed, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “0:00”.

Then, as shown in FIG. 357(6), the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon is displayed. It is informed that the display mode of h11 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 357(7), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the panda display mode, and the prefetch display mode is set. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1. In addition, the character “first hot” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is informed in advance that there is a high possibility of a big hit at the next symbol variation display. As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display (the symbol variable display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than when not.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357(8), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357(9), the second stop is performed and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357(10), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 357(11), temporary stop due to fluctuation of swing. After that, as shown in FIG. 357(12), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns with the defect of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the character “first hot” displayed near the navigation character YM is also deleted.

FIG. 358 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 357. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 358(1) and 358(2) are the same as FIGS. 357(1) and 357(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Also, this effect example is different from the effect shown in FIG. 357(3) in that the timer notice display TM1 is not added with the longest face icon BCHO. This suggests that it is less likely that a certain notice effect will be displayed, as compared with the case where the bancho-faced icon BCHO is added.

Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, and "0:24" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 at the timing shown in FIG. 358(4). .. That is, it is shown that 2.76 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the display of "Hold change". As a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM, the display mode of the hold icon changes. It has been suggested that there is a possibility. That is, it is indicated that this timer advance notice effect may be a prefetch advance notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358(5), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes "0:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 358(6), the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon is displayed. It is informed that the display mode of h11 may change.

However, as shown in FIG. 358(7), in this effect example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has not changed from the default display mode. That is, in this example of the effect, it is indicated that the effect is not a change of the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect that is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 but is a false timer notice effect. ing. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the timer advance notice effect was a false effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358(8), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358(9), the second stop is performed and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. At this time, the character "sorry" displayed near the navigation character YM is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358(10), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 358(11), temporary stop due to fluctuation of movement. Then, as shown in FIG. 358(12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the defective decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the character “first hot” displayed near the navigation character YM is also deleted.

FIG. 359 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 359(1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 341(1) to 341(6), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

After the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased in FIG. 359(6), the erased timer notice display TM1 is restored and redisplayed in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 359(7). It is shown. Further, at this time, the icon BCHO of the banchou face is added, which suggests that a pseudo-relation as a certain notice effect is likely to be displayed. That is, it is shown that the disappeared timer notice display TM1 is not the timer notice display TM1 related to the false timer notice effect but the true timer notice display TM1. It is also shown that the timer notice display TM1 is stepped up when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed again. From another viewpoint, it can be said that a plurality of timer advance notice effects targeting the same effect are being performed. Here, when the timer notice display TM1 is re-displayed, execution of a certain notice effect (pseudo-relation) performed as a result of the timer notice effect may be confirmed. In addition, the characters "pseudo-renka" are displayed again near the navigation character YM. At the timing shown in FIG. 359(7), "03:00" is displayed as the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, and it is informed that the pseudo link may be performed after 3 seconds.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 359(8), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down, and "02:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 359(8). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 359(9), the second stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "01:23" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 359(9).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 359(10), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as the pseudo-repetitive symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 359(10). Then, as shown in FIG. 359(11), the character "CONTINUE" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the pseudo-repeating will be performed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 359(11).

Then, as shown in FIG. 359 (12), when the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", "go" to the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Is displayed, and the variable display of the decorative pattern for the second time is started by the pseudo link. Then, as shown in FIG. 359 (13), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x" indicating the number of times the pseudo variable has started the second variable display of the decorative pattern. 2” is displayed.

As described above, in this example of effect, when the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-relation is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is more than that when the timer notice effect is not performed and the pseudo-reaction is not started). It is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern in (Display).

FIG. 360 is a diagram showing stepwise about another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 361 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 360. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIG. 360(1) and FIG. 360(2) are similar to FIG. 337(1) and FIG.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by a frame-in animation, the timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "25:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 25 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. In this effect example, a timer notice effect in which the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as a certain notice effect is shown. In addition, the characters "Chance in SP development" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a mission effect has been started to show that the expectation of the jackpot will be dramatically increased by developing into super reach. It is also shown to be present. In this example of performance, when the mission is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain notice effect that is performed as a result of the timer notice effect. Therefore, it may be possible to expect the strong cut-in image CI1a to appear by shifting to the super reach.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, and "23:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (4). .. That is, it is shown that two seconds have passed since the countdown started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360(5), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360(5).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360(6), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 360(7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. Further, the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down, and "18:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360(7).

Then, as shown in FIGS. 360(8) to 360(10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, normal reach is performed, and a state in which the middle symbol is changing at low speed is shown. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1 is still counting down, and "15:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360(10).

Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360(11) shows that the strong sabotani group notice is given. The strong sabotani group notice is a notice that the jackpot is highly reliable, and will have a high probability of transitioning to super reach. Therefore, due to the occurrence of the notice of the strong sabotani group, the expectation for achieving the mission may increase dramatically. In this example of production, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner at this time, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 360(11), the character SBHN of Sabohani forming the notice of the strong Savohani group overlaps the timer notice display TM1, but the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the character SBHN of Savohani. May be. Further, the timer notice display TM1 is still counting down, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (11).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (12), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been informed. From this, it may be recognized that the mission is accomplished. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1 is still counting down, and "12:90" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (12).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 360 (13 ), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the character "timer attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to urge attention to the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1 is still counting down, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (13).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360(14), a timer display step-up animation in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes is being performed. As a result, it is notified that the display form of the timer notice display TM1 changes to a display form in which the reliability of the big hit and the execution probability of a certain notice effect are improved. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed (degraded) to a display mode in which the reliability of the big hit or the execution probability of a certain notice effect is reduced.

Then, as shown in FIG. 360(15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the timer display step-up animation, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer notice display). TM1B) has been changed to step up, and the jackpot reliability has been dramatically improved. The timer notice display TM1B in the special display mode is a display mode in which the jackpot reliability is higher than the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode, that is, when the timer notice display in the special display mode is displayed, it is high. The jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the timer notice display in the reliability display mode is displayed. In addition, when the timer advance notice display in the special display mode is displayed, the big hit may be determined. Furthermore, the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed has a long face icon BCHO added thereto to give notice that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "4:32" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (15).

Then, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1B becomes “0:00”, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (16). That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the achievement of the mission. Further, the timing at which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed is notified by the timer notice display. Therefore, in this effect example, it can be said that the timer notice effect and the mission effect are performed in association with each other.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 360 (17), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 360(18), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 361 (19) following FIG. 360 (18), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decoration decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the pattern is more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (variable display of the symbol), the big hit symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 362 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 360 to 361. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 362(1) to (9) are the same as FIGS. 360(1) to 360(9), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362(10), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6" during the normal reach, the transition to the super reach is not performed, and the decoration of the "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is lost. It is informed that the display will be stopped by a combination of symbols. In addition, a character "sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the super reach is not to be performed. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1 is still counting down, and "15:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 362(10).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 362(11), since the transition to the super reach is not performed, it is shown that the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is a false notice, and the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts. To be done. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notification display TM1, it is notified that the notification that a certain notification effect is performed is false (gaseous). In other words, it means that the mission was not completed before the timer advance notice display TM1 became "00:00", so that it was erased in the middle of the countdown and a certain effect was not shown. it can. It should be noted that the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect relating to the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain advance notice effect, that is, by deleting the timer advance notice display TM1. It may be recognized that the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 362(12), after the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased, as shown in FIG. 362(13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5” is displayed. Tentative stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative patterns of "," and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 362 (14), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the decorative pattern of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is lost. Will be confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

It should be noted that, in this example of performance, it may be a big hit even when the timer advance notice production is finished without developing to super reach.

FIG. 363 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 360 to 361, and FIG. 364 is a figure showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 363. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 363(1) and 363(2) are the same as FIGS. 360(1) and 360(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by a frame-in animation, the timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "5:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 5 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. In this effect example, this point is different from the effect shown in FIG. 360(3). In this effect example, a timer notice effect in which the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as a certain notice effect is shown. In addition, the characters "Chance in SP development" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a mission effect has been started to show that the expectation of the jackpot will be dramatically increased by developing into super reach. It is also shown to be present. In this example of performance, when the mission is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain notice effect that is performed as a result of the timer notice effect. Therefore, it may be possible to expect the strong cut-in image CI1a to appear by shifting to the super reach. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 363(4) to (13) are performed. It should be noted that the effect examples shown in FIGS. 363(4) to (14) are the same as those in FIGS. 360(4) to 360(4), except that the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains “5:00”. The description is omitted because it is similar to FIG.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (15), as a result of the timer display step-up animation, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer notice display TM1B). It is shown that it has been changed and stepped up, and that the reliability of the jackpot has improved dramatically. Furthermore, the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed has a long face icon BCHO added thereto to give notice that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Further, the timer notice display TM1 has not yet started the countdown, and remains “5:00” at the timing shown in FIG. 363(15).

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice display TM1B is started, and "4:11" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1B at the timing shown in FIG. 363 (16). .. As described above, the timer advance notice effect in this effect example does not start the countdown of the timer display when started, but starts the countdown of the timer display when the mission is achieved.

Then, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1B becomes “0:00”, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363(17). That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the achievement of the mission. Further, the timing at which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed is notified by the timer notice display. Therefore, in this effect example, it can be said that the timer notice effect and the mission effect are performed in association with each other.

Then, as shown in FIG. 363 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (19) subsequent to FIG. 363 (18), the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. It is shown. At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 364 (20), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decoration decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the pattern is more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (variable display of the symbol), the big hit symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 365 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 363 to 364. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 365(1) to (9) are the same as FIGS. 363(1) to 363(9), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365(10), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6" during the normal reach, the transition to the super reach is not performed, and the decoration of the "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is lost. It is informed that the display will be stopped by a combination of symbols. In addition, a character "sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the super reach is not to be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365(11), since the process does not shift to the super reach, it is shown that the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is a false notice, and the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts. To be done. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notification display TM1, it is notified that the notification that a certain notification effect is performed is false (gaseous). In other words, the display of the timer notice display TM1 has been started, but the mission was not completed before the countdown was started, so it was erased before the countdown was started, and a certain effect was not performed. It can be said that it is shown. It should be noted that the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect relating to the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain advance notice effect, that is, by deleting the timer advance notice display TM1. It may be recognized that the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 365(12), after the timer advance notice display TM1 is completely erased, as shown in FIG. 365(13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5” is displayed. A temporary stop due to fluctuations is performed in a combination of decorative patterns of "," and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 365(14), in the decorative pattern display device 208, a decorative pattern with a defect of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" Will be confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 366 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 360 to 361, and FIG. 367 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 366. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 366(1) to (14) are the same as FIGS. 360(1) to 360(14), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 366(15), as a result of the timer display step-up animation, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer notice display TM1B). , The step-up is shown, and the reliability of the big hit is dramatically improved. Furthermore, the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed has a long face icon BCHO added thereto to give notice that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In addition, this example of effect is different from the effect shown in FIG. 360 (15) in that the timer display of the timer notice display TM1B is reset to "5:00". At this time, the countdown of the timer display has not started, and the display of "5:00" is maintained. As described above, in this example of performance, the time in the timer display is reset at the timing when the mission is achieved and the display mode of the timer notification display is changed, so that the change in the display mode of the timer notification display can be easily understood. ing. In addition, after the mission is achieved, it is shown that the timer notice display is reset to an appropriate time while the timer notice display is stepped up to a highly reliable display manner. It can be said that

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice display TM1B is started, and "4:32" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1B at the timing shown in FIG. 366 (16). .. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 366(17) to 367(20) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 366(17) to 367(20) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 360(16) to 361(19), so description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 368 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 369 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 368. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 368(1) to (9) are the same as FIGS. 339(1) to 339(9), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368(10), in order to erase the timer notice display TM1 due to the completion of the countdown in the timer notice display TM1, for example, as shown in FIG. 341(5) and described above. The appearance of the disappearing animation is shown. However, as shown in FIG. 368(11), not only the timer notice display TM1 is not deleted, but the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is added, and “22:35” is added to the timer notice display TM1. It is displayed. That is, it is found that the animation performed in FIG. 368(10) is not the disappearing animation but the timer notice addition animation which is the same animation as the disappearing animation. As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that a new timer notification effect is started using the same timer notification effect TM1. Further, in this effect example, it can be said that a part of the animation in which the timer display is added in the timer advance notice display and a part of the animation in which the timer notice display is erased are the same. Note that the timer advance notice animation and the disappearance animation may be completely different animations.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (12), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “×2” is displayed, which indicates that the second variation display of the decorative design is being performed by the pseudo-link. Further, the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 368(12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368(13), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 368(14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "18:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 368(14).

Then, as shown in FIGS. 368(15) to (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, normal reach is performed, and a state in which the middle symbol is changing at a low speed is shown. Note that the timer notice display TM1 is still counting down, and "15:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 368(17).

Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368(18) shows that the strong sabotani group notice is given. In this example of production, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner at this time, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 368(18).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (19) subsequent to FIG. 368 (18), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and “SP development” is displayed near the navigation character YM. It has been announced that it will develop into a super reach. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1 is still counting down, and "12:90" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369(19).

Then, as shown in FIG. 369(20), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the character "timer attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to urge attention to the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1 is still counting down, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369(20).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369(21), the timer display step-up animation in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes is being performed. The effect of this timer display step-up animation is the same as that of the disappearing animation described above. That is, it can be said that a part of the animation in which the display mode of the timer notice display is changed is the same as a part of the animation in which the timer notice display is erased. The timer display step-up animation and the disappearing animation may be completely different animations.

After the timer display step-up animation is started, as shown in FIG. 369(22), in the decorative pattern display device 208, as a result of the timer display step-up animation, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display. The mode is changed from the mode to the special display mode (timer advance notice display TM1B), and the state of stepping up is shown, showing that the reliability of the big hit is dramatically improved. In addition, the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed is provided with a long face face icon BCHO to give notice that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Note that the timer notice display TM1 is counting down, and "4:32" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369(22).

Then, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1B becomes “0:00”, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 369(23). That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1B in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect about the strong cut-in image CI1a being displayed as a certain advance notice effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 369 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 369(25), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 369 (26 ), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decorative decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In addition, in this example of performance, the timer advance notice effect is performed to start the pseudo-relation, and further, the timer advance notice effect is performed to display the strong cut-in image CI1a and finally the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed. Even if the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-relation is started, and the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be lost.

FIG. 370 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 368 to 369, and FIG. 371 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 370. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 370(1) to 370(9) are the same as FIGS. 368(1) to 368(9), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370(10), the disappearance animation described above is performed in order to erase the timer notice display TM1 due to the completion of the countdown in the timer notice display TM1. There is. This disappearing animation has the same display mode as that of the disappearing animation shown in FIG. 368(10) and described above. As a result, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether the timer notice display is continuously displayed or erased. As shown in FIG. 370(11), in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (12), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “×2” is displayed, which indicates that the second variation display of the decorative design is being performed by the pseudo-link.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (13), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 370(14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 370(15) to (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, normal reach is performed, and a state in which the middle symbol is changing at a low speed is shown.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370(18) shows that the weak Savohani group notice is given. In this example of production, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner at this time, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (19) following FIG. 370 (18), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and “SP development” is displayed near the navigation character YM. It has been announced that it will develop into a super reach.

Then, as shown in FIG. 371 (20), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the type of super reach is informed, which is different from the effect shown in FIG. 369(20).

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (21), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (22), the main character's shrine is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and a defeated screen is displayed, and the middle pattern of the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped and displayed in the middle pattern. The "decoration 6" of the schedule is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

Then, as shown in FIG. 371 (23), in the decorative pattern display device 208, a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. There is. At this time, the character “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result will be lost. Then, as shown in FIG. 371 (24), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 372 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 341. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 372(1) to (4) are the same as FIGS. 341(1) to 341(4), and thus description thereof will be omitted. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 372(5), the timer notice addition animation that is the same effect as the disappearance animation is started during the countdown display in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice addition animation is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 similarly to the disappearance animation. It is shown that the effect is displayed. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notification display TM1, it is notified that the notification that the pseudo-linking will be performed may be a false notification. As a result, the player may be able to think that the timer notice display TM1 is a false notice because the timer notice display TM1 is erased.

However, as shown in FIG. 372(6), not only the timer notice display TM1 is not deleted, but the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is added, and “20:00” is added to the timer notice display TM1. It is displayed. That is, it is found that the animation performed in FIG. 372(5) is not the disappearing animation but the timer advance notice addition animation which is the same animation as the disappearing animation. In this way, in this example of performance, it may be possible to recognize that another certain effect will be performed by performing addition of the timer display while predicting that pseudo-relation will be performed as a certain effect. is there. Further, in this effect example, it can be said that a part of the animation in which the timer display is added in the timer advance notice display and a part of the animation in which the timer notice display is erased are the same. Note that the timer advance notice animation and the disappearance animation may be completely different animations.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372(7), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. In addition, a character "Hot" is displayed near the navigation character YM, which indicates that the reliability of the big hit is high. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "18:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 372(7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372(8), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 372(9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "16:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 372(9).

Then, as shown in FIG. 372(10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the weak Savohani group notice is given. In this example of production, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner at this time, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "13:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 372(10).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372(11), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been informed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "10:37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 372(11).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 372 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to inform the type of super reach. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1 is still counting down, and "4:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 372 (12).

Then, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “0:00”, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 372(13). That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect for displaying the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain advance notice effect.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the pattern is more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (variable display of the symbol), the big hit symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed.

In addition, in this effect example, addition of the timer display is performed, the timer notice effect related to the timer display after the addition is performed, and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, which causes a loss, but it may be a big hit. May be.

However, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (14), the main character's shrine is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and a defeated screen is displayed, and the middle pattern of the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped at the middle pattern. The "decoration 6" to be displayed is displayed, and it is informed that the "decoration 5"-decoration 6-decoration 5 combination will be stopped and displayed. In this way, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, even if the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain advance notice effect, the display result may be lost.

After that, as shown in FIG. 372 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. There is. At this time, the character “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result will be lost. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 372 (16), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 373 is a diagram showing stepwise about another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 374 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 373. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 373(1), the combination of decorative patterns "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 373(1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed. Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 373 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed. In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative pattern display device 208, a hold icon representing the hold of special figure 1 is displayed, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the three special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area. , H13 are displayed. All of the three hold icons h11 to h13 in FIG. 1 are displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373(2), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. In addition, a moving animation of the holding icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon at the display position of the first holding icon h11 (the holding icon that is the target of the current pattern change) is displayed in the variable icon display area. The second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 are moved and displayed as the variable icon h0, and the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 are moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and the display position of the second hold icon h12, respectively. It is displayed as the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are frame-in animations, respectively, and are frame-in from the left and right sides of the display screen, respectively, and the two timer notice effects are simultaneously started. Of these two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is the default display mode, but the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is the special display mode. Both the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side and the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side display "03:00" as the timer display, and a certain notice is given when 3 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. It suggests that the performance will start. Further, the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side has a bancho-face icon BCHO added, which suggests that a certain notice effect is likely to be performed. Further, neither of these timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB has started the countdown of the timer display, and the timer display is maintained at "03:00".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373(4), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative pattern is displayed small on the upper center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In addition, a character "select with the cross key" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a navigation display for operating the operation key unit 137 to move the cursor CSL to select a treasure box is displayed. Then, in the approximate center of the display screen, the character "A strong timer is activated by the appearance of a princess" is displayed, and the character of the princess appears from the treasure box, so that an advantageous timer notice of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is displayed. It is informed that the timer announcement effect will be performed by the timer announcement display TM1RB displayed on the right side of the display. It should be noted that the timer display on the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

After that, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 373(5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , The right treasure chest image BXR is surrounded. In addition, the timer indications in the two timer advance notice indications TM1L and TM1RB are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (6) displays the characters "Open right" near the navigation character YM. It is informed that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box that can be opened. In addition, the timer indications in the two timer advance notice indications TM1L and TM1RB are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373(7), the effect production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved to the center, and the left treasure chest image BXL not selected is displayed. Erased. Then, the word "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. In addition, the timer indications in the two timer advance notice indications TM1L and TM1RB are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 373(8), the character BBA of the old woman appears from the right treasure chest image BXR, and the character "Bad was bad" is displayed, showing that the mission of the mini game has failed. ing. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM also notifies that the mission of the mini game has failed. It should be noted that the timer display on the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 373(9), the character "Kocchija" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the right side of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, which is an advantageous timer notice display. The timer display selection animation for erasing the timer notice display TM1RB displayed in is started and the timer notice display TM1RB is erased. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that at least the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side, which is the advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, is not performed. .. Note that both of the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB may be deleted so that the timer advance notice effect relating to any of the timer advance notice displays is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373(10), the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is completely erased, and only the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is displayed. ing. Further, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is left at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the decorative design is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and as shown in FIG. 373 (11), the temporary design is caused by the fluctuation in the combination of the decorative design of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". Shutdown takes place. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 373 (12), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the defective decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In this effect example, the timer advance notice display TM1L is continuously displayed even while the symbol is being fixedly displayed. That is, the timer notice display TM1L will be displayed over the next symbol variation display. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1L remains "03:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (13), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1L remains "03:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (14), the disappearance animation for the timer notice display TM1L is started, and the state where the timer notice display TM1L is erased is shown. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that, due to the failure in the mini game, a certain notice effect is not given to any of the two timer notice displays, which is a false notice.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373(15) shows that the timer notice display TM1 has been completely erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (16), the first stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (17), the second stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373(18), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then as shown in FIG. 374(19) following FIG. 373(18). Then, a temporary stop due to the fluctuation of the swing is performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 374 (20), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the fixed display is made by the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 5". To be done. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this example of the effect, the mini game fails and any timer notice effect ends midway and the lost pattern is finally displayed, but it may be a big hit.

FIG. 375 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 373 to 374, and FIG. 376 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 375. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 375(1) to (7) are the same as FIGS. 373(1) to 373(7), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 375(8), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "Expect" are displayed, showing that the mission of the mini game has been achieved. This is different from the effect shown in FIG. 373(8). In addition, the characters "Chance" are displayed near the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM also notifies that the mission of the mini game has been successful. It should be noted that the timer display on the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 375(9), the character "Kocchija" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the timer notice which is not the advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is displayed. It is shown that the timer display selection animation in which the timer advance notice display TM1L displayed on the left side of the display is erased is started and the timer advance notice display TM1L is erased. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that at least the timer notice effect relating to the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side, which is an advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, is performed. Therefore, compared with the effect shown in FIG. 373(9), the timer advance notice effect that is more likely to execute a certain effect is executed, thereby improving the expectation for the execution of the certain effect. May be possible. Note that both of the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB may not be erased, and the timer advance notice effect relating to any of the timer advance notice displays may be performed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 375(10), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is completely erased, and only the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is displayed. ing. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side remains "03:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

After that, the decorative design is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and as shown in FIG. 375 (11), it is a temporary variation due to fluctuation due to the combination of the decorative design of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". Shutdown takes place. After that, as shown in FIG. 375 (12), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns with the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In this effect example, the timer notice display TM1RB is continuously displayed even while the symbol is being confirmed. That is, the timer notice display TM1RB is displayed over the next symbol variation display. The timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1RB is left at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (13), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1RB is left at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (14), the timer notice display TM1RB is not erased, and the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 375(14), "02:76" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB. In addition, the character "Attention to hold" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the display mode of the hold icon may change.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 375(15), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1RB continues to count down, and "01:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 375(15).

Then, as shown in FIG. 375 (16), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani at the timing when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1RB becomes “00:00”. It changes and becomes a prefetch display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect that is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1RB. Note that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the Savohani display mode after the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1RB becomes “00:00”. After the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Savohani, the timer display in the timer advance notification display TM1RB may be "00:00", or the timer display in the timer advance notification display TM1RB may be " The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of Savohani at the timing of "00:00". It should be noted that the hold icon in the display mode of this sabotani has a higher jackpot reliability than the hold icon of the panda described above. Further, when the hold icon in the display mode of Sabohani is displayed, the big hit symbol may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon. That is, it may be a pre-reading notice of the big hit confirmation.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display (the symbol variable display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than when not.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (17), the timer notice display TM1RB is erased by the completion of the countdown, then the first stop is performed, and the "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. .. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (18), the second stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (19) subsequent to FIG. 375 (18), the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then as shown in FIG. 376 (20). Then, a temporary stop due to the fluctuation of the swing is performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 376 (21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fixed display is made by the combination of the missing decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 5". To be done. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 377 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 375 to 376, and FIG. 378 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 377. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 377(1) and (2) are the same as FIGS. 375(1) and 375(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377(3) shows that the timer notice effect has started. This production example is different from that shown in FIG. 375 (3) except that the timer display in the timer notification display TM1RB displayed on the right side of the two timer notification displays TM1L and TM1RB is "18:00". ) Is the same as the effect shown. In this way, by differentiating the time indicated by the timer display between the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, it is difficult to understand which notice effect corresponds to a certain notice effect, and the game is monotonous. May be suppressed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 377(4) to (7) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 377(4) to (7) are different from those shown in FIGS. 375(4) to (7) in the time indicated by the timer display of the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side. Since they are the same except that they are different, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 377(8), the character "Himenai" appears in the right treasure box image BXR, and the characters "Hopefully" are displayed, indicating that the mission of the mini game has been achieved. It is shown. Moreover, this effect example is different from the effect shown in FIG. 375(8) in that the special display is suggested to be given by the character display of "I expect you to expect more". In addition, the characters "Chance" are displayed near the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM also notifies that the mission of the mini game has been successful. Of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side remains “03:00” and the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is It is left at "18:00", and neither countdown has started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 377(9), the character "There are two" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is not an advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB. It is shown that the timer display selection animation in which the timer notification display TM1L displayed on the left side which is the timer notification display is erased is started and the timer notification display TM1L is erased. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that at least the timer notice effect relating to the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side, which is an advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, is performed.

However, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 377(10), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is not erased, and as a result of the timer display selection animation, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. The display mode of is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1LA), and it is shown that the user is stepping up and the possibility that a certain performance is performed is improved. Has been done. In addition, the characters "both expecting" are displayed near the navigation character, which suggests that there is expectation for any of the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB. It should be noted that the timer display on the two timer advance notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB has not yet started counting down.

After that, the decorative design is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and as shown in FIG. 377 (11), it is a temporary variation due to the fluctuation due to the combination of the decorative design of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". Shutdown takes place. Then, as shown in FIG. 377(12), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns with the missing "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 and the character display displayed near the navigation character YM are also deleted. In this effect example, the two timer advance notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB are continuously displayed even while the symbol is being fixedly displayed. That is, these timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB are displayed over the next symbol variation display. Of the timer displays in the two timer advance notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB, the timer advance notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side is left as "03:00" and the timer advance notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is It is left at "18:00", and neither countdown has started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (13), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Further, in this example of performance, the character "Attention to the left" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the timer display in the timer notification display TM1LA displayed on the left side of the two timer notification displays TM1LA and TM1RB is displayed. It suggests that the countdown will begin. It should be noted that the timer display on the two timer advance notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB has not yet started counting down.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (14), the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is displayed on the timer preview display TM1LA displayed on the left side of the two timer preview displays TM1LA and TM1RB. Be started. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 377(14), "02:76" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not started the countdown yet. In addition, the character "Attention to hold" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the display mode of the hold icon may change.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377(15), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. Of the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side continues to count down, and "01:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 377(15). There is. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started the countdown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 377 (16), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode at the timing when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side becomes “00:00”. The display mode is changed to that of Sabohani, and the display mode of prefetching is set. That is, in this effect example, an example in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect that is performed as a result of the timer notification effect by the timer notification display TM1LA displayed on the left side is shown. It should be noted that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the Sabohani display mode after the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1LA becomes “00:00”. After the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Savohani, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1LA may be "00:00", or the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1LA may be " The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of Savohani at the timing of "00:00". The timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started counting down.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display (the symbol variable display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than when not.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (17), the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side is erased because the countdown is completed. After that, the first stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the left pattern. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. The timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started counting down.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (18), the second stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. The timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started counting down.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378(19) subsequent to FIG. 377(18), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then as shown in FIG. 378(20). Then, a temporary stop due to the fluctuation of the swing is performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 378(21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fixed display is made by the combination of the defective decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 5". To be done. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In this effect example, the timer notice display TM1RB is continuously displayed even while the symbol is being confirmed. That is, this timer advance notice display TM1RB is displayed over the three symbol variation displays. The timer notice display TM1RB is left at "18:00" and the countdown has not started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (22), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. Here, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, that is, the display mode of Sabohani. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The timer notice display TM1RB has not yet started counting down.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378(23), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378(24), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 378(25), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown has not started yet, and “18:00” remains.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (26), the normal reach is performed and the state that the middle symbol is changing at a low speed is shown. In the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown has not started yet, and “18:00” remains.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice display TM1RB is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 378 (27), "17:75" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1RB. ..

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378(28) shows that a strong sabotani group notice is given. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In the timer advance notice display TM1RB, the countdown continues, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 378(28).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (29), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been informed. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1RB is still counting down, and "12:90" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 378 (29). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 378(30), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the character "timer attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, urging attention to the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1RB. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1RB is still counting down, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 378(30).

Then, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1RB becomes "0:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 378(31). That is, in this effect example, a certain notice effect that is performed as a result of the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1RB is the strong cut-in image CI1a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 378 (32), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". The timer advance notice display TM1RB is erased because the countdown is completed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (33), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 378 (34), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols for the big hit of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the pattern is more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (variable display of the symbol), the big hit symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed.

In this example of effect, a plurality of timer advance notice effects are performed, and each example corresponds to a different effect.

FIG. 379 is a diagram showing stepwise about another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 380 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 379. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 379(1) and (2) are the same as FIGS. 373(1) and 373(2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379(4), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative pattern is displayed small on the upper center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In addition, a character "select with the cross key" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a navigation display for operating the operation key unit 137 to move the cursor CSL to select a treasure box is displayed. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

After that, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379(5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , The right treasure chest image BXR is surrounded. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the characters "Open right" are displayed near the navigation character YM on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 379(6). It is informed that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box that can be opened. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379(7), the effect production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved to the center, and the left treasure box image BXL not selected is displayed. Erased. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 379(8), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "effect activation" are displayed, showing that the mini game mission has been achieved. Has been done. In addition, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379(9), the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started in the timer notice display TM1. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 379(9), "02:75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 379(10), the hold change animation is started in the second hold icon h12, and it is notified that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change. In addition, a character "Attention to hold" is displayed near the navigation character YM to urge attention to the change in the display mode of the hold icon. The timer advance notice display TM1 continues to count down, and "01:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 379(10).

Then, as shown in FIG. 379(11), at the timing when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the button reservation display mode. Is changed to a pre-reading display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1. The display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change from the default display mode to the button hold display mode after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”. The timer display in the timer notice display TM1 may be "00:00" after the display mode of the hold icon h12 of No. 1 has changed from the default display mode to the button hold display mode, or the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. The display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change from the default display mode to the button hold display mode at the timing when "" is "00:00". As described above, in this effect example, the timer advance notice display TM1 is first displayed and then the mini game is started in a state where the countdown is not started. When the result of the mini game is successful, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, and thereafter, the countdown is completed (that is, "00:00"). It can be said that the pending change effect is being performed as an effect. In addition, the start order of each effect is not limited to the above-described one. For example, after the mini game is started, the timer notice display TM1 is started to be displayed, and after the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started. The result of the mini game may be derived, and if the result of the mini game is successful, a certain effect may be performed at the timing when the countdown is completed.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display (the symbol variable display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than when not.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379(12), the timer notice display TM1 is erased because the countdown is completed. Further, the characters "button hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the second hold icon h12 has changed to the display mode of button hold.

After that, the decorative design is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and as shown in FIG. 379 (13), it is a temporary variation due to the fluctuation due to the combination of the decorative design of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". Shutdown takes place. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 379(14), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. The second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of button suspension, does not change in display mode and remains in the display mode of button suspension.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (15), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379(16), a state where the mini game is started using the entire display screen is shown. Specifically, the character "Hold change chance" is displayed together with the icon of the bancho's face, indicating that the mini-game by Amida lottery is started. Then, it is shown that the bancho-faced icon BCHO appears in the Amida field and is located in the middle of the three options. Further, a character "SELECT" is displayed below the Amida field, and prompts the user to operate the operation key unit 137 to select the buncho face icon BCHO from any of the three options. .. In addition, the characters "Kanbare" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, indicating that the player is encouraged.

After that, after the mini game by Amida lottery is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379(17) shows that a new timer advance notice effect is started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in animation and a new timer advance notice display TM1N is framed in from the right side of the display screen. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1N is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 5 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice display TM1N is started, and "04:77" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1N at the timing shown in FIG. 379(18). ..

After that, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (19) following FIG. 379 (18), the center of the three options in the Amida field is displayed. The Bancho face icon BCHO located at is moved to the right of the three options. In the timer advance notice display TM1N, the countdown continues, and "04:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 380(19).

Thereafter, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the operation valid period elapses when the right side of the three options in the Amida field is selected, at the timing shown in FIG. The production is started. At this time, at each of the three end points of the Amida field, one of “push” indicating that the button-holding operation effect is started and “x” indicating failure is displayed. Specifically, “push” is displayed at the left end of the three end points, “x” is displayed at the center end, and “push” is displayed at the right end. ing. Note that the number of "push" displayed may be one, or "push" may be displayed at all the end points. At this time as well, the timer advance notice display TM1N continues the countdown, and "03:88" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 380(20).

After that, the bancho-face icon BCHO moves along the line according to the rule of the lottery, and as shown in FIG. 380(21), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the buncho-face icon BCHO is one of the three ending points. It is shown that the end point on the left side of is reached. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji has been derived. In this effect example, it is shown that the icon BCHO of the bancho's face has reached the end point on the right side where "push" is displayed, the mission is successful, and the button effect operation effect is started. It has been announced that it has been confirmed. In the timer advance notice display TM1N, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 380(21).

As shown in FIG. 380(22), in response to the result of the mini game, at the timing when the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1N becomes “00:00”, the first hold icon h11 in the button hold display mode is displayed with “ The word "press" is added to notify that the button-holding operation effect is started. In addition, the character “Yoshisha” is displayed near the navigation character YM to congratulate the player. It should be noted that the character "push" may be added to the first hold icon h11 after the timer display in the timer notice display TM1N becomes "00:00", or "push" may be added to the first hold icon h11. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1N may be "00:00" after the character "" is added, or the first hold may be performed when the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1N is "00:00". The character “push” may be added to the icon h11. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice effect is performed a plurality of times, and as a result, a certain notice effect is performed for the same hold icon.

FIG. 380 (23) shows that the operation valid period related to the operation effect of the button holding is started because the timer display in the timer notice display TM1N has become “00:00”, and the decorative symbol display In the device 208, the timer advance notice display TM1N is not erased, and the characters "Hold change when button is pressed" are displayed to explain the game.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 380(24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the button hold display mode to the sabotani display mode. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1N displays the character "Gekiatsu Suspended" to inform that the first suspension icon h11 has a highly reliable display mode. In addition, a character "next hot" is displayed near the navigation character YM, which suggests that there is a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the next symbol variation display.

Thus, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the button holding operation effect is started, the symbol is more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the button holding operation effect is not started. In the variable display (variable display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon of the button hold), the jackpot pattern is likely to be confirmed and displayed.

Thereafter, the decorative design is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and as shown in FIG. 380 (25), the temporary design is caused by the fluctuation in the combination of the decorative design of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". Shutdown takes place. At this time, the timer notice display TM1N is erased. Then, as shown in FIG. 380 (26), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 381 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect that continues from FIG. 379(18). The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 381 (19a) following FIG. 379 (18) shows that the buncho face icon BCHO is located on the right side of the three options in the Amida field. There is. In the timer advance notice display TM1N, the countdown continues, and "04:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 381 (19a).

Then, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the operation valid period elapses when the right side of the three choices in the Amida field is selected, at the timing shown in FIG. The production is started. At this time, “x” is displayed at the left end of the three end points, “x” is displayed at the center end point, and “push” is displayed at the right end point. .. Even at this time, the timer advance notice display TM1N continues the countdown, and "03:88" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 381 (20a).

After that, the buncho face icon BCHO moves along the line according to the rule of the lottery, and as shown in FIG. 381 (21a), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the buncho face icon BCHO is one of the three ending points. It is shown that the end point on the left side of is reached. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji has been derived. In this example of the effect, it is shown that the icon BCHO of the bancho's face has reached the end point on the right side where "x" is displayed, the mission has failed, and the operation effect of holding the button is not started. Is notified. In the timer advance notice display TM1N, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 381 (21a).

As shown in FIG. 381 (22a), in response to the result of the mini game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the disappearing animation while the countdown is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N, and the timer notice display TM1N is erased. It is shown. In response to this, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the button holding operation effect as a result of the timer advance notice effect is not performed. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notification display TM1N, it is notified that the notification that the button-holding operation effect will be performed is a false (gaseous) notification. In other words, it is indicated that the timer notice display TM1N is erased in the middle of the countdown before it becomes “00:00” and a certain effect (button holding operation effect) is not performed. it can.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 381 (23a) shows that the timer notice display TM1N has been completely erased.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 381 (24a), the hold change animation is started for the first hold icon h11, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 381 (25a), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the button hold display mode to the default display mode. That is, in this effect example, since the mini game has failed, the operation effect of holding the button is not performed, and it is shown that the game ends in failure. In addition, when the button suspension operation effect is not performed and the operation is unsuccessful, the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the target of the button suspension is likely to be lost, but may be a big hit.

After that, the decorative design is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and as shown in FIG. 381 (26a), it is a temporary fluctuation due to fluctuation in the combination of the decorative design of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". Shutdown takes place. Then, as shown in FIG. 381 (27 a ), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns that are missing “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 382 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 379 to 380. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 382(1) to (7) are the same as FIGS. 379(1) to 379(7), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 382(8), the character BBA of the old woman appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters “Uhihi” are displayed, showing that the mission of the mini game has failed. .. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1 is a false timer notice effect. The timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 382(9), the disappearance animation is started on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notification display TM1, it is notified that the notification that a certain notification effect is performed is a false notification. In other words, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed, but is erased before the countdown is started to show that a certain effect is not performed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382(10) shows that the timer notice display TM1 has been completely erased.

After that, the decorative design is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and as shown in FIG. 382 (11), it is a temporary fluctuation due to the fluctuation in the combination of the decorative design of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". Shutdown takes place. After that, as shown in FIG. 382(12), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns that are missing "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (13), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 382(14), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 382(15), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Savohani, and the prefetch display mode is set. In this example of the effect, the result of the mini game is a failure, and the display mode of the hold icon as a certain notice effect is not changed by the timer notice effect, but the display state of the hold icon is not changed by the timer notice effect. Even if the result of the mini game is unsuccessful, the result of the effect (the hold icon changes to the hold icon of Sabohani) may be the same. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 379 to 380 and described above, the case where the display mode of the hold icon is changed as a result of the success of the mini game is changed to the mini game as shown in FIG. 382 and described above. Although it is made to be a big hit more easily than when the display mode of the hold icon is changed but failed, it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to this.

After that, the decorative design is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and as shown in FIG. 382(16), the temporary design is caused by the fluctuation in the combination of the decorative design of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". Shutdown takes place. At this time, the character “next hot” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is suggested that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the next symbol variation display. After that, as shown in FIG. 382(17), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 383 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 383(1) and 383(2) are the same as FIGS. 373(1) and 373(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383(4), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this example of performance, when the mini game is started, the decorative design is displayed small on the upper center of the decorative design display device 208, and the character of the chief appears, and the display showing the result of "1" on the dice. Is displayed, and the display mode of the hold icon is changed when the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed after the mini game is started. It should be noted that in this mini game, the result is derived without being operated by the effect button 136.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383(5), it is shown that the symbols on the dice have begun variably displaying.

Then, as shown in FIG. 383(6), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the dice symbol is stopped and displayed in such a manner as to show the result of "3", and it is shown that the result of the mission achievement has not been achieved. ing. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM to inform that the mini game has failed. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notification display TM1, it is notified that the notification that a certain notification effect is performed is a false notification. In other words, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1 is erased before the countdown is started, and a state in which a certain effect is not performed is shown.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 383(7), in response to the result of the mini game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 and shows that the timer notice display TM1 is erased. ing.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 383(8) shows that the timer notice display TM1N has been completely erased.

After that, the decorative design is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and as shown in FIG. 383(9), it is a temporary variation due to fluctuation due to the combination of the decorative design of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". Shutdown takes place. After that, as shown in FIG. 383(10), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns with the defect of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this example of the effect, the result is derived without operating the effect button 136 in the mini game, but the result may be derived by operating the effect button 136 in the mini game. In the mini game, when the result is derived by operating the effect button 136, a certain noticeable effect may be performed than when the result is derived in the mini game without operating the effect button 136. May be high, or the reliability of a big hit may be high.

FIG. 384 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384(1), the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 384(1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed. Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 384 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed. In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative pattern display device 208, a hold icon representing the hold of special figure 1 is displayed, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the three special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area. , H13 are displayed. All of the three hold icons h11 to h13 in FIG. 1 are displayed in the default display mode. In addition, in this example of performance, a 7-segment display device SEG including 4-digit 7-segment is shown. The 7-segment display device SEG is provided with a full-color LED for each segment, and is capable of emitting full-color light for each segment. Further, the 7-segment display device SEG is provided on the front frame door 106, for example, but may be provided on the ball storage plate-equipped door 108 or the game board 200. At the timing shown in FIG. 384(1), the 7-segment display device SEG is in the off state.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384(2), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. In addition, a moving animation of the holding icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon at the display position of the first holding icon h11 (the holding icon that is the target of the current pattern change) is displayed in the variable icon display area. The second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 are moved and displayed as the variable icon h0, and the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 are moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and the display position of the second hold icon h12, respectively. It is displayed as the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, the timer advance notice display is started also on the 7-segment display device SEG, and "0300" is displayed in a white light emission mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384(4), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative pattern is displayed small on the upper center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In addition, a character "select with the cross key" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a navigation display for operating the operation key unit 137 to move the cursor CSL to select a treasure box is displayed. Further, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both left at "03:00" and the countdown is not started.

Then, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 384(5). , The right treasure chest image BXR is surrounded. Further, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both left at "03:00" and the countdown is not started. After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 384(6) displays the characters "Open right" near the navigation character YM, It is informed that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box that can be opened. Further, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both left at "03:00" and the countdown is not started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384(7), the effect production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved to the center, and the left treasure box image BXL not selected is displayed. Erased. Further, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both left at "03:00" and the countdown is not started.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 384(8), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "effect activation" are displayed, showing that the mini game mission has been achieved. Has been done. In addition, a character "Yatteze" is displayed near the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that the timer advance notice display TM1 and the countdown of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG will be started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384(9), the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started in the timer notice display TM1. Further, the countdown of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is also started at the same time. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 384(9), "02:75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 and "0275" is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG. As described above, in this effect example, a plurality of devices each perform a timer advance notice effect. Here, when the timer advance notice effect is simultaneously performed by a plurality of devices, a certain effect may be started more easily than when the timer advance notice effect is performed by one timer advance notice display, and the reliability of the big hit is high. The degree may be high.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384(10), the hold change animation is started in the second hold icon h12, and it is notified that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change. In addition, a character "Attention to hold" is displayed near the navigation character YM to urge attention to the change in the display mode of the hold icon. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG each continue counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 379(10), "01:75" is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1. “0175” is displayed on the segment display device SEG.

Then, as shown in FIG. 384(11), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is the default display mode at the timing when the timer notification display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG become “00:00”. Is changed to a button-holding display mode, and a read-ahead display mode is set. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect that is performed as a result of the timer notification effect TM1 and the timer notification effect by the 7-segment display device SEG. .. In addition, after the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from the default display mode to the button reservation display mode. Alternatively, after the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from the default display mode to the button hold display mode, the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG become “00:00”. Alternatively, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may be changed from the default display mode to the button reservation display mode at the timing when the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG become “00:00”. May change. In this example of performance, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG perform two timer advance notice displays, but the timer advance notice display only on one of the decorative pattern display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG. May be performed. In this case, when the timer notice display is performed by both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG, a certain notice effect is always performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG are performed. When the timer notice display is displayed only on one of the above, it may be possible that a certain notice effect may not be performed. Further, the timer notice display may be displayed by three or more effect display devices, and the reliability of the big hit may be increased as the number of the timer notice displays displayed increases. For example, if there is one timer notice display, the weak cut-in image CI1b is likely to be displayed as a certain notice effect, and if there are two timer notice displays, the strong cut-in image CI1a is given as a certain notice effect. When the number of the timer notice display is three or more, the strongest cut-in image CI1v may be easily displayed as a notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384(12), the timer notice display TM1 is erased when the countdown is completed, and is turned off when the countdown in the 7-segment display device SEG is also completed. Further, the characters "button hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the second hold icon h12 has changed to the display mode of button hold.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display (the symbol variable display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than when not.

FIG. 385 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 386 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 385. FIG. 387 is a diagram showing, in stages, the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 386. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 385(1) and 385(2) are the same as FIGS. 384(1) and 384(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 385(3), a state after the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation and the timer notice effect is started is shown. The display form of the timer advance notice display TM1 is the default display form, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385(3), "09:75" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1. In this effect example, the time set on the timer notice display TM1 is, for example, “10:00”. Further, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the timer advance notice display is not started and the light is turned off.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385(4), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative pattern is displayed small on the upper center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In addition, a character "select with the cross key" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a navigation display for operating the operation key unit 137 to move the cursor CSL to select a treasure box is displayed. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously counting down, and "09:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385(4).

Then, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385(5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , The right treasure chest image BXR is surrounded. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously counting down, and "06:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385(5). At this time, the timer advance notice display is started on the 7-segment display device SEG, and “3000” is displayed in the red light emission mode. Here, when the light emitting mode of the 7-segment display device SEG is red, a certain notice effect is more likely to be started as a result of performing the timer notice effect than when it is white. In this example of the effect, the timer advance notice display by the 7-segment display device SEG functions as a prefetch advance notice, and a certain notice effect is different from the timer advance notice display by the timer advance notice display TM1.

After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 385(6) displays the characters "Open right" near the navigation character YM, It is informed that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box that can be opened. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously counting down, and "04:03" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385(6). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display maintains "3000".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385(7), the effect production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved to the center, and the left treasure chest image BXL not selected is displayed. Erased. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously counting down, and "03:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385(7). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display maintains "3000".

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 385(8), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "effect activation" are displayed, showing that the mini game mission has been achieved. Has been done. In addition, the character "Yazeze" is displayed near the navigation character YM, thereby informing that a certain notice effect will be started as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1. .. Note that the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously counting down, and "03:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385(8). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display maintains "3000".

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385(9), it is shown that the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed. On the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "02:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385(9). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display maintains "3000".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385(10), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. In addition, a character "Attention to hold" is displayed near the navigation character YM to urge attention to the change in the display mode of the hold icon. The timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously counting down, and "01:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385(10). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display maintains "3000".

Then, as shown in FIG. 385 (11), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani at the timing when the timer display in the timer advance notification display TM1 becomes “00:00”. It changes and becomes a pre-reading display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display (the symbol variable display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than when not.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385(12), the timer notice display TM1 is erased when the countdown is completed. Further, the word "hot" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is suggested that there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit in the next pattern variation display.

After that, the decorative design is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and as shown in FIG. 386(13) following FIG. 385(12), the decorative design of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. The temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of. After that, as shown in FIG. 386(14), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the characters displayed near the navigation character YM and the variable icon h0 are also erased. In the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started yet, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (15), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. In the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started yet, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the 7-segment display device SEG is started, and "2978" is displayed on the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (16). ing.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386(17), a state where the mini game is started is shown. When the mini game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol small in the upper center. Specifically, the character "strong cut-in chance" is displayed together with the icon of the bancho's face, indicating that the mini-game by Amidakuji has started. Then, it is shown that the bancho-faced icon BCHO appears in the Amida field and is located on the right side of the three options. Further, a character "SELECT" is displayed below the Amida field, and prompts the user to operate the operation key unit 137 to select the buncho face icon BCHO from any of the three options. .. The timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously counting down, and "2833" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386(17).

Then, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386(18), the number of the bancho located on the right side of the three options in the Amida field is displayed. The face icon BCHO moves to the left of the three options. Note that the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously counting down, and "2580" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386(18).

After that, when the player operates the operation key unit 137 to select the left side of the three options in the Amida field and the operation valid period elapses, the effect of the Amida lottery is started. At this time, at each of the three end points of the Amida field, either "o" indicating success or "x" indicating failure is displayed. Specifically, of the three ending points, the left one is displayed as "x", the center one is displayed as "x", and the right one is displayed as "○". ing. It should be noted that the display number of “◯” may be two or more, or “◯” may be displayed at all the end points. Then, as shown in FIG. 386(19), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the icon BCHO of the longest face moves along the line in accordance with the rule of the mid lottery. Note that the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is still counting down, and "2411" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386(19).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386(20) shows that the buncho face icon BCHO has reached the right end point among the three end points. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji has been derived. In this example of performance, the buncho face icon BCHO reaches the end point on the right side where "○" is displayed, and the character "Yatteze" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the mission succeeds. However, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a has been confirmed to be displayed. Further, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously counting down, and “2236” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386(20).

After that, the mini game ends, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386(21), the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed. In addition, the character “Intense hot standby” is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a with high reliability of the big hit appears. Further, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously counting down, and "2185" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386(21).

After that, "decoration 5" is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, and when the reach state is formed, as shown in FIG. 386 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lower center of the display screen is displayed. “Reach” is displayed on the display to notify that the player has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. The timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously counting down, and "2005" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386(22).

After that, as shown in FIG. 386 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the strong sabotani group notice is given. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously counting down, and "1927" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386(23).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 386(24), the notice of the sabotani group is continuously given. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is changed from the display mode of red to the display mode of rainbow which changes to multiple colors. In the timer display in the rainbow display mode, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than in the timer display in the red display mode, and a certain effect is easily started. Here, when the timer display is displayed in the rainbow display mode, the big hit symbol may be definitely displayed, or a certain effect may be always started. Further, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously counting down, and "1737" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386(24).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 387 (25) subsequent to FIG. 386 (24), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed. To be done. In addition, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously counting down, and "1010" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 387 (25).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (26), the button repeated hitting effect has been started, and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. Further, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously counting down, and "0500" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 387 (26). Then, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (27), the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed during the execution of the button repeated hit effect. This strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed in response to the success as a result of the mini game by Amida Kuji, but in this example of the effect, the strongest cut-in image CI1v is more advantageous than the strong cut-in image CI1a. It is displayed, and it is reported that the expectation of a big hit has increased dramatically. At this time as well, the player continuously continues to hit the effect button 136. Further, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously counting down, and "0200" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 387 (27).

After that, at the timing when the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "0000", in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (28), the character whose length is broken and the character "premier" appears. However, it is shown that the premiere notice is being given. This informs the player that the big hit has been confirmed. As described above, in this effect example, a certain notice effect targeted by the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the timer notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG are different from each other. Is shown. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is performed in one symbol variation display from the start to the end, but the timer notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG is twice symbol variation. It is shown that it is performed across the display. In addition, the target symbol variation display may be different between the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer advance notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG. Further, the timer advance notice effect may be performed across the big hit game and the symbol variation display performed after the end of the big hit game. Also, in this example of performance, as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed by the 7-segment display device SEG, a premier notice as a certain notice effect was given, but a notice with low reliability of a big hit is not a certain notice effect. A fake timer advance notice effect may be performed. In addition, a fake timer advance notice effect may be performed in which a certain advance notice effect is not performed. As described above, in this example of effect, when the timer notice effect is performed and the premiere notice is performed, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is performed) is more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the premier notice is not performed. It is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern in (Display).

Then, as shown in FIG. 387 (29), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the 7-segment display device SEG, in order to celebrate the big hit, multi-color display (rainbow display) is performed using all the segments. In addition, a character "premier appearance" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the premier notice has been given.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (30), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 387 (31), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hits of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also erased, and the 7-segment display device SEG is also turned off.

FIG. 388 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the effect in the jackpot game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

The effect example shown in FIG. 388(1) is, for example, an effect example following FIG. 387(31). The state is confirmed and displayed with.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388(2), the state where the big hit game is started and the big hit start effect is performed is shown. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a "big decoration 5", which is a big hit pattern, is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and a Kopanda character with a fan congratulates the big hit at the center of the display screen. The situation is shown. Further, in the 7-segment display device SEG, in order to improve the decoration effect in the big hit game, multicolor display (rainbow display) is performed using all the segments. At this time, a special effect display by the 7-segment display device SEG may be performed, and, for example, “7777” or a number string for word matching may be displayed. Such a display may be performed to, for example, give a notice of a holding consecutive holiday game where a big hit occurs in the hold, or give a notice of a probability change state after the big hit game ends.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 388(3) shows that the third round has started. Then, the character "LED attention" is displayed on the right side of the Kopanda character, which suggests that a notice effect is performed.

Then, in FIG. 388(4), the 7-segment display device SEG is turned off before, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 388(5), the character of the bancho appears with the display of the character "Bring your clothes with button repeated". , The mini game will start. In this mini game, it is possible to display the result according to the game state after the big hit game, and when the game state after the big hit game is a probable change state (special figure high probability general figure high probability state), production As a result of repeatedly hitting the button 136, there is a case where the mini game succeeds because the bancho's clothes are torn. Further, when the mini game is started, a timer is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, and the operation valid period for accepting the button repeated hit effect is displayed. In this example of performance, when the mini game is started, "1000" is displayed, and it is informed that it is possible to accept continuous hits of the effect button 136 for 10 seconds after the countdown (operation valid period) is started. This timer display starts counting down when the operation valid period starts in the fourth round. The display mode of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is a mode in which light is emitted in white, but it may be a mode in which light is emitted in another color. For example, the reliability of success in the mini game depends on the emission color. It may be different. Further, for example, instead of “1000” indicating 10 seconds corresponding to the operation valid period, a timer display indicating another time (for example, display of a combination of specific numbers such as “9999” and “7777”) is performed. By doing so, a premier notice that the mini game will always succeed may be given.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 388(6), the state of transition to the fourth round is shown. When the process shifts to the fourth round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the character “continuous hit” together with the button image 136a, prompting the effect button 136 to be hit repeatedly. In addition, the operation valid period for accepting the continuous operation of the effect button 136 is started, and the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is started. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 388(6), "0800" is displayed, indicating that 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of the operation valid period. As described above, in this effect example, this timer display may function as a timer notice effect, and it is shown that the timer notice effect and the mini game are started at the same time. Note that the timer advance notice effect and the mini game may not be started at the same time.

FIG. 388(7) shows a state where the player continuously performs the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. At this time, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is set to "0500", and it is informed that the remaining time of the operation valid period is 5 seconds.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 388(8), the characters “sorry” and “next time reduction” are displayed, indicating that the mini game has failed. As a result, after the jackpot game is over, it is notified that the state will shift to the time saving state (special probability low probability general figure high probability state) without shifting to the probability changing state.

FIGS. 388(5a) to (8a) show another example of effects following FIG. 388(4). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388(5a), it is shown that the above-mentioned mini game is started. In this example of performance, the princess character HME is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and it is notified that the mini game is likely to succeed. Further, when the mini game is started, the timer (“1000”) is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, and the operation valid period for accepting the button repeated hit effect is displayed. After that, the effect shown in FIG. 388(6a) to FIG. 387(7a) is performed. Note that FIGS. 388(6a) to (7a) are the same as FIGS. 388(6) to (7), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (8a), the characters of the bancho character are torn and the characters "bancho awakening" and "next probability change" are displayed, showing that the mini game has succeeded. As a result, it is informed that after the big hit game is over, the state will shift to the probability change state.

FIG. 389 is a diagram showing, step by step, a display example when an error display is displayed in the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 389(1), the combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 389(1), since the symbols are stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 389 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state, and the special icon 1 is held in the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In the hold icon display area, two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed, and both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are in the default display mode (round shape And is displayed in white). On the other hand, none of the hold icons of special figure 2 are displayed.

Further, in this example of performance, an error message "Please remove the ball" (lower plate full tank error display ERR1) is displayed above the center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. It is informed that it is doing. Since such an error can continue the game, in the present embodiment, the game is continued while the error notification is given. In addition, when the elimination of the error which is the object of the error notification is detected (for example, when the lower tray full tank detection switch is turned off and the lower tray full tank error is eliminated), the lower tray full tank error display ERR1 is displayed. Is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 389(2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special diagram 1 is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is a decorative symbol display device. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 by moving to the change icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and displayed as the change icon h0, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. Is displayed as. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. At the timing shown in FIG. 389(2), the lower plate full tank error has not been resolved, and the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 is still displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 389(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by a frame-in animation, the timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 5 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 389(3), the lower plate full tank error has not yet been resolved, and the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 is still displayed. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 and the visibility of the timer notice display TM1 is deteriorated. Therefore, the player may rush to remove the ball from the lower plate, seeing this display state.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, and "04:25" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 at the timing shown in FIG. 389(4). .. In addition, the character “pseudo ream” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is suggested that the pseudo ream may be performed as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM. There is. Even at the timing shown in FIG. 389(4), the lower plate full tank error has not yet been resolved, the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 is displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the lower plate full tank error display ERR1. Has been done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 389(5), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "03:96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 389(5). Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 389(5), the lower plate full tank error has not yet been resolved, the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 is displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped by the lower plate full tank error display ERR1. Has been done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 389(6), the second stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. Further, the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down, and "01:73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339(6). Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 389(6), since the player removes the ball from the lower plate, the lower plate full tank error is resolved and the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 is erased. Then, the effects shown in FIGS. 389(7) to (12) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 389(7) to (12) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 339(7) to (12), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the timer advance notice effect described above, the time until a certain effect is performed is displayed by the countdown of the timer display. However, for example, when performing the timer notice effect, the timer display in the timer notice display is changed to " Start from "00:00" and display such as "Maybe "03:00" is pending change" or ""25:00" is a strong cut-in" and count up the timer display. A certain effect may be performed when the designated time comes.

Further, in the timer notice effect described above, as a certain effect, the pending change effect, the pseudo continuous effect, the display of the cut-in image, and the big hit confirmation notification are described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the prefetch mode, It may be an effect of plunging into a specific zone, movie insertion, next notice effect, or the like.

Further, in the timer notice production described above, the expectation degree of the big hit is changed by changing the color of the timer notice display. In this case, for example, in the order of red>green>yellow>blue>white. If the expectation is high and the color of the timer notice display is yellow or more, the start of a certain effect may be confirmed. Further, when it is executed by a device other than the decorative symbol display device 208 such as the 7-segment display device SEG, a certain notice effect may be performed without fail. In this case, for example, when the color of the timer notice display displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 is blue and the light emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is white, the expectation of a big hit is obtained in the relationship of blue<white. Alternatively, when the color of the timer notice display on the decorative pattern display device 208 is red and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is red, the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is a big hit. The reliability of may be increased.

Further, for example, when the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is white and the light emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is yellow, the big hit symbol is more than when the light emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is red. There may be one in which the reliability of the big hit is dramatically improved by a combination of the color of the timer notice display in the decorative pattern display device 208 and the light emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG, such as easy confirmation display. Further, the color of the timer notice display on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the light emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG may be respectively ranked, and the jackpot reliability may be determined by comparing the sums of the ranks. When the white rank is 1, the yellow rank is 3, and the red rank is 5, the color of the timer notice display in the decorative pattern display device 208 is white and the light emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is yellow. In the case of the former (the former), the timer notice display is not displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer is displayed only in the 7-segment display device SEG, and the latter is the case when the emission color is red (the latter). May make the jackpot more reliable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 390, an example of a display mode of the timer notice display displayed when the timer notice effect starts will be described. Here, FIG. 390 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of the timer notice display.

FIG. 390(a) shows an example in which "7:77" is displayed as the timer display of the timer notification display TM1 when the timer notification effect is started. This timer display is a timer display reminiscent of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" which is a combination of jackpot decorative patterns, and the timer notice presentation TM1 shown in FIG. 390(a) has started the timer notice effect. When it is displayed at this time, it can be used as a premier timer display and as a notice that the big hit is confirmed. When the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 390(a) is displayed, it may be displayed as a notice for deriving a combination of jackpot decorative symbols "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". In addition, when this timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is decided that a sudden change will occur after the end of the big hit game, or as a notice that a hold holiday will occur.

FIG. 390(b) shows an example in which "99:99" is displayed as the timer display of the timer notification display TM1 when the timer notification effect is started. In the above-described embodiment, the time displayed first on the timer notice display TM1 is set to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the symbol, but the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 390(b) is at least The time is longer than the time from the start of the display to the stop display of the symbol, and the time is recognized that the countdown is not completed during the change. When the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 390(b) is displayed when the timer notice effect is started, it can be used as a notice of a big hit confirmation as a premier timer display. In addition, when this timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is decided that a sudden change will occur after the end of the big hit game, or as a notice that a hold holiday will occur.

Although the timer display shown in FIG. 390(b) is the maximum numerical value that can be represented by a decimal number, the maximum numerical value that can be expressed by a hexadecimal number is displayed as shown in FIG. 390(c). You may do it. Even in this case, the same effect as the timer display shown in FIG. 390(b) may be expected.

FIG. 390(d) shows an example in which "7:58" is displayed as the timer display of the timer notification display TM1 when the timer notification effect is started. This timer display is a timer display that is reminiscent of the wording of "Nagoya", which is the prefectural capital of Aichi Prefecture, and is displayed when the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 390(d) is displayed when the timer notice effect is started. Can be used as a premier timer display and as a notice that the jackpot will be confirmed. In addition, when this timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is decided that a sudden change will occur after the end of the big hit game, or as a notice that a hold holiday will occur.

Also, FIG. 390(e) is a timer display (“2:23”) that is reminiscent of the vocabulary of “Mt. Fuji”, which is the highest mountain in Japan, and the timer shown in FIG. In some cases, the same effect as the display can be expected. In the present embodiment, the timer display of the timer notification display TM1 displayed when the timer notification effect is started displays “0” for all digits less than 1 second. The timer display is characterized in that digits less than 1 second are also displayed. Note that the timer display displayed as the premier timer display is not limited to the above, and various types can be appropriately adopted.

FIG. 390(f) shows an example in which "win" is displayed as the timer display of the timer notification display TM1 when the timer notification effect is started. When this timer display is displayed, the player may be able to easily recognize that the big hit has been confirmed. When the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 390(f) is displayed when the timer notice effect is started, it can be used as a notice for a big hit confirmation as a premier timer display. In addition, when this timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is decided that a sudden change will occur after the end of the big hit game, or as a notice that a hold holiday will occur.

FIG. 390(g) shows a timer notice display TM1 in a display mode which may be changed when the timer notice effect is started or may be changed during the timer notice effect. The display mode of the timer notification display TM1 shown in FIG. 390(g) is a rainbow display mode that is displayed while changing to multiple colors. When the timer notification display TM1 is displayed in this rainbow display mode, the premium timer is displayed. As a display, it can be used as a notice that the jackpot will be confirmed. In addition, when this timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is decided that a sudden change will occur after the end of the big hit game, or as a notice that a hold holiday will occur. The display mode that can be adopted as the premier timer display is not limited to this, and can be set to an appropriate color.

FIG. 390(h) shows a timer notice display TM1 in a display mode that may be displayed when the timer notice effect is started or during the timer notice effect. The display mode of the timer notification display TM1 shown in FIG. 390(h) is a display mode in which the characters SBHN of Sabohani are added to the four corners, and when the timer notification display TM1 is displayed in this display mode, the premier timer is displayed. As a display, it can be used as a notice that the jackpot will be confirmed. The character to be added is not limited to this and can be set arbitrarily. In addition, when this timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is decided that a sudden change will occur after the end of the big hit game, or as a notice that a hold holiday will occur.

In addition, although the timer notice display TM1 described above is configured to display the timer display in a rectangular frame, the timer notice display TM1 having a different display form may be displayed as the premium timer display. For example, the timer notice display TM1 in which the timer display is displayed in the circular frame may be the premier timer display.

Further, the timer notice display TM1 of the above-mentioned premier timer display may be counted down after the display is started, or the timer notice effect may be ended without performing the countdown. The jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed during the countdown, and the timer advance notice effect may be configured to end. Further, when the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 of the premier timer display is started, a certain advance notice effect such as a pseudo continuous effect may not be performed even if the countdown of the timer display is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the mini game for notifying whether the timer advance notice effect is true or false according to the derivation result has been described, but this mini game may be applied to any of the above timer advance notice effects. You can

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 391 to 424. Further, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiment described below can be applied to any of the embodiments described above. 391 to 424 are diagrams showing, in a stepwise manner, modified examples of effects centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. Note that in FIGS. 391 to 424, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220 and the general figure hold device. Illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. In addition, FIGS. 391 to 424 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative pattern display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative pattern display devices, the second decorative pattern display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and the first decoration The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be a sub display device, and a second decorative symbol display device. 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the width direction, and the height is also slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right edge portion thereof overlaps with the front side of the left edge portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has its left edge portion the first. 1 The decorative pattern display device 208N overlaps with the front surface side of the right end portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in the directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Also, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the state of being closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily variable display of the decorative symbols for each display device, and are named for convenience. However, it should be noted that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N) are summarized as effect display means, and the effect display means is the decorative pattern. It is also possible to perform variable display of, or to display a plurality of types of effect. In the present embodiment, an example in which various images are displayed on each of the plurality of decorative symbol display devices is shown, but all of them may be displayed on one decorative symbol display device. .. Further, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. .. The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmissive region. A light-emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end portion of the light guide plate, and light from the light-emitting body is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear as if In the embodiments shown in FIGS. 391 to 424, the light guide plate is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. In addition, the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the region where the light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the light irradiation. Therefore, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, in FIGS. 391 to 424, the state of the fourth symbol display devices 284a1 and 284a2 is shown, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display device 284a1 corresponding to the special symbol 1 has a square shape, and It blinks during the variable display of FIG. 1 and lights up in the lost lighting mode or the jackpot lighting mode during the stop display of the special FIG. Further, the special figure 2 fourth symbol display device 284a2 corresponding to the special figure 2 has a circular shape, blinks during the variable display of the special figure 2, and lights up with a gap during the stop display of the special figure 2. Alternatively, the lights are turned on in a big hit lighting mode. In addition, in FIGS. 391 to 424, the states of the speaker 120 and the effect buttons 136 and 136z are shown. FIG. 391 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 391(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and this UI unit UI3 has a variable icon in the center thereof. The h0 is displayed in a state of being placed on the pedestal, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 391(a), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 both have a default display mode (white circular display mode). Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged, various information regarding a game and a performance is displayed (tutorial display), and the content is updated at an appropriate timing. To be done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 391(a), "Panda is master of lord" is displayed, and the relationship between the panda character and the lord's character is explained. The tutorial display section TT1 is not limited to the explanation display but may be displayed as a notice or as a demonstration effect, or may be hidden. Here, as the tutorial display, an explanation about the appearing character, an explanation about a notice (for example, a timer notice), and the like are displayed. In addition, you may comprise so that the big hit expectation degree can be alert|reported by the display mode (For example, it displays in a blue character, it displays in a red character, etc.) of a tutorial display. In this case, this tutorial display may be used as a preview display of the position of the preview display. In the present specification, for the sake of convenience, the display being explained will be described as a tutorial display. That is, the tutorial display section TT1 in this example of performance can be said to be an area for displaying something. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Note that the UI unit UI3 is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern and is provided in a region that does not overlap the display region of the decorative pattern, but may overlap the display region of the decorative pattern. In this way, the UI unit UI3 functions as a display frame that configures the hold icon display area, the variable icon display area, and the tutorial display section TT1. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391(a) has a default display mode displayed in blue, and the display mode may change according to the progress of the game.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display portion ST1 as an explanation display portion for displaying the currently performed stage name and reach name is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 391(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, a reception count display 850 indicating the reception count of the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the example shown in FIG. 391(a), the number of times of acceptance of the character string image "850 times" is displayed 850, and the number of times of accepting the operation of the effect button 136 is zero. A stock button image 852 simulating the effect button 136 is displayed below the reception count display 850. Three lines are drawn in the stock button image 852 at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the stock button image 852 is divided into four regions. The stock button image 852 also functions as a meter by changing the display color of these divided areas from white to green, for example. In the example shown in FIG. 391(a), all four areas of the stock button image 852 are displayed in white and the meter is 0.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. This lord's character may be called a navigation character. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. The lord's character may or may not always be displayed. Further, the stage name display portion ST1 and the lord's character may be included in the UI portion UI3, or at least a part of them may be displayed so as to overlap the front side of the UI portion UI3.

Further, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged, and can move in the vertical direction and rotate according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. Further, the family crest monument 224E has a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yashiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged and can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro 224Fa and the general 224Fb each have a light emitting means such as a full-color LED or the like built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the effect contents.

As shown in FIG. 391(b), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display portion TT1 of the UI portion UI3 is shown to be closed by the shutter image. That is, a display (display of a shutter image) before another display (display of "preparing") is performed instead of a display (explanation display) on a certain area (tutorial display section TT1). Can be said. Note that at least a part of the character display that is displayed before the shutter image is displayed may be displayed during the display of the shutter image.

Then, in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 391(c), the shutter image shows that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed. It can be said that the shutter image is a preliminary image preliminary notice display that is displayed before the display of the preliminary image RDY described later is started. Further, the shutter image may be displayed even when the advance notice display is performed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Further, the shutter image may be configured to be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, and the jackpot expectation may be different depending on the display mode of the shutter image. Alternatively, the shutter image may be displayed in only one type. You may comprise so that it does not show a big hit expectation degree only.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391(d), the shutter image is opened in the tutorial display section TT1 that was closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is opened and displayed by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the preparing image RDY in which the character “preparing” is displayed. In other words, it can be said that the image RDY being prepared is displayed in an overlapping manner on the display area of the tutorial display section TT1 and overlaps the UI section UI3. At the timing shown in FIG. 391(d), the background color of the preparing image RDY is green, that is, the display mode of the preparing image RDY shown in FIG. 391(d) is the default display mode. .. The preparing image RDY can be changed to a plurality of types of display modes, and even when the preparing image RDY is displayed in a display mode (for example, a red background color) different from the default display mode at the time of starting the display of the preparing image RDY. Alternatively, the display may be changed to another display mode after the display is started in the default display mode. Further, in the case of the above-mentioned configuration in which the shutter image can be displayed in a plurality of display modes, the shutter image may be related to the display mode of the image RDY being prepared. For example, when the shutter image is red, the red preparing image RDY may be displayed (easy to be displayed). In this effect example, a certain effect (for example, a timer notice or a mini game) may be performed in the tutorial display section TT1 by displaying the image RDY being prepared.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391(e), it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is changing from the blue display mode to the gold display mode. In this effect example, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 is set to a gold display mode, which suggests that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change. That is, the UI unit UI3 in the gold display mode functions as a pre-reading notice. As described above, when the UI unit UI3 is displayed in the gold display mode, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when it is displayed in the blue display mode. In addition, the UI unit UI3 in the golden display mode may function as a notice of the symbol variable display, and does not function as a notice of a change in the display form of the hold icon but as a direct look-ahead notice display. There may be a case. In addition, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 may be configured to be the default mode before the pending icon (preservation target preserving icon) whose display mode has changed is exhausted, or whether or not the prefetch target variation is the result. May be configured to be in the default mode after a display (for example, a display of a decorative pattern indicating a big hit or a loss) is performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391(f), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed in the upper right portion of the tutorial display portion TT1. The ninja character NJ4 is a character that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon is changed. In this example of performance, the ninja character NJ4 is displayed so as to overlap the tutorial display section TT1 on which the preparing image RDY is displayed. Therefore, when the preparing image RDY and the ninja character NJ4 can be noticed. There is.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391(g), the pending change animation is started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the first pending icon h11 and the first one. It is shown that the holding icon h11 is hit. At this time, the effect EF4 covers the entire first hold icon h11, making it more difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where the effect EF4 does not cover the first hold icon h11. The effect EF4 is displayed on the hold icon next to the target hold icon. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 391(g), the effect EF4 is placed next to the first hold icon h11. Part of the second hold icon h12 is also overlapped with the effect EF4. In this effect example, it can be said that the hold change animation performed before the hold icon changes functions as the hold change advance effect display. It should be noted that this hold change pre-effect display may include the display of the ninja character NJ4, that is, a series of animation from the start of the display of the ninja character NJ4 until the display mode of the hold icon changes. May be used as the hold change advance effect display. Further, the display of the pending change advance effect display may be made only by displaying the ninja character NJ4. Further, the display of the ninja character NJ4 displayed after the pending change may or may not be included in the pending change preliminary effect display. Note that the display mode of the hold icon may not change even if the hold change animation is performed. Further, the configuration may be such that the display of the image RDY under preparation is started after the effect display regarding the ninja character NJ4. On the contrary, the ninja character NJ4 may be configured not to display the in-preparation image RDY. In addition, when the hold icon displayed in the look-ahead mode is present, the preparing image RDY may be more likely to appear than when the hold icon is not present. According to this configuration, the state in which the hold icon changes after the ninja character NJ4 has appeared can be expected to appear in the preparing image RDY, so that the ninja character NJ4 has a different type of notice display (hold). In some cases, it may function as an advance notification of an icon change and a target such as the image RDY being prepared, or a target change such as a pre-reading notice and the notice.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391(h), the effect EF4 is erased and the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a state in which the display mode is changed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 391(h) has been changed from the default display mode to a red display mode. Further, the family crest monument 224E also emits red light in accordance with the display mode of the first hold icon h11. Note that the family crest monument 224E may emit red light after the first hold icon h11 starts to be displayed in red, or the first crest monument 224E may emit red light. The hold icon h11 may start to be displayed in a red display mode, or the family crest part 224E may emit red light at the timing when the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a red display mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 391(i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the pending change animation ends and the ninja character NJ4 is erased. Further, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and are stopped and displayed in the combination of the missing decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7". The combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7" is a combination of loss, but it is also a combination of chances. That is, the look-ahead notice is given by deriving and displaying the combination of the chances. The chance eye is easily derived and displayed when the hold icon is displayed in the read-ahead display mode, but the chance eye is displayed with an appropriate probability regardless of the display mode of the hold icon. May be. Further, when the chance eyes are displayed, the final big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when the chance eyes are not displayed. In addition, after the ninja character NJ4 is erased, the stop display of the decorative symbols may be sequentially performed, or the ninja character NJ4 may be erased after the sequential stop display of the decorative symbols is started. Further, the sequential stop display of the decorative symbols may be started at the timing when the ninja character NJ4 is deleted. Although the variation icon h0 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 391(i), the variation icon h0 may be erased at the timing when the symbol is fixedly displayed.

After that, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 391(j), the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed to become the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. , Move to the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391(j), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the tutorial display unit TT1, the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed, that is, the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays. On the other hand, the ninja character NJ4 displayed in the previous symbol variation display is a display that is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, but may be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. .. On the other hand, the lord's character displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be said to be a character displayed over a plurality of symbol variable displays.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391(k), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on each of the left symbol and the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. The "decoration 4" displayed on the left and right are considered to be shaking fluctuations, respectively, and the middle symbols are displayed at high speed. Note that the display screen may be darkened as a notice effect before the reach state is set, and the UI unit UI3 may be temporarily hidden. However, basically, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed until the super reach is started. It is not hidden.

Then, in FIG. 391(l), a state of shifting to the super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative design displayed on the first decorative design display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative design display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative design display device 208L. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the reach state is the "decoration 4". The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of shifting to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display for transitioning to super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E is raised and rotated, and the lower center part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps with the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and a part of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are made difficult to visually recognize because they are overlapped by the family crest 224E. Further, the family crest monument 224E also overlaps a part of the in-preparation image RDY. It is informed that the family crest part 224E is moved up to the super reach by the rising/rotating operation. The operation of the family crest monument 224E may be started after the super reach transition display is started, the super reach transition display may be started after the operation of the family crest monument 224E is started, or the super reach transition display may be started. The operation of the family crest monument 224E may be started at the timing when the reach transition display is started. Further, in this production example, in the case of transitioning to at least the swordsman reach of the super reach, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Will be hidden. It should be noted that the UI unit UI3 may be hidden before the super-reach transition display is started. As described above, in this effect example, when the process moves to a specific super reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, and at least the hold icon is hidden. The reach name (title) of the SP reach may be displayed, or the UI unit UI3 may be hidden at least when the reach name of the SP reach is displayed. Further, in the configuration in which a frame is displayed around the image RDY being prepared, the display of the frame may be a part of the UI unit UI3. In this configuration, it can be said that not all the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but a part of the UI unit UI3 is hidden. Further, since the peripheral frame is not displayed when the preparing image RDY is not displayed, it can be said that in this case, all of the UI unit UI3 is hidden. That is, it can be said that the non-display range of the UI unit UI3 after the transition to the super reach is different depending on whether or not the in-preparation image RDY is displayed before the transition to the super reach. The display of the image during preparation RDY is not configured to be able to specify a certain notice display or an aspect of a certain effect. Note that the UI unit UI3 may not be hidden even if the player moves to swordsman reach.

FIG. 391(m) shows that the swordsman reach has started. It should be noted that when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained displayed by changing the display position downward. Further, when the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, only the preparing image RDY is kept displayed, and the tutorial display section TT1 itself is framed out together with the UI section UI3. That is, in the image under preparation RDY, the display position in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed is the same as the display position after being hidden. Further, the family crest monument 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position. Here, the family crest cast 224E may return to the initial position after the swordsman reach has started, the swordsman reach may start after the family crest cast 224E has returned to the initial position, and the family crest cast 224E may start. Swordsman reach may be started when is returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391(n), the preparing image RDY is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state not overlapped with the effect EF5. .. That is, it can be said that the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished, and it can also be said that the display before the start of a certain notice display is started. Furthermore, it can be said that a certain notice display itself is started by the display of the effect EF5. Further, in this effect example, it can be said that the image RDY being prepared ends (is hidden) when the hold icon is in the non-display state (the UI unit UI3 is in the display state).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391(o), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the preparing image RDY was displayed. This mini game is an example of a notice display that is started after the display of the preparing image RDY is finished, but the mini game may be started without going through the display of the preparing image RDY. In this case, the big hit symbol may be confirmed and displayed more easily through the display of the preparing image RDY than through the display of the preparing image RDY. In the example of the effect, the display of the image RDY being prepared is ended and the mini game is started, but the display of the image RDY being prepared is ended and the timer advance notice effect may be started. Further, the result of the winning/disapproval determination may be suddenly displayed without displaying the mini game or the timer advance notice effect, for example, the characters “iron plate” are displayed. When the mini game is started, the mini character MC1 of the lord and the target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas that are divided into four equal parts, and at least one of the four areas (the upper area in the effect example shown in FIG. 391(o)) is the winning area. The arrow hits the hit area to give a highly reliable notice of the big hit. Note that the hit area is not limited to one, and may be a plurality of hit areas, all of the hit areas may be hit, or all the hit areas may be non-hit areas. Further, in a configuration in which there are a plurality of types of mini-games and timer notices, a certain type of mini-games and timer notices may be configured to always go through the display of the preparing image RDY (configuration 1). On the contrary, another type of mini game or timer notice may be configured not to go through the display of the image RDY in preparation (configuration 2). Both the configuration 1 and the configuration 2 may be provided, or either one may be provided.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 391(p), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord has pierced the area around the target TGT. In other words, it is shown that the mini game as a notice display has achieved great success. The display showing the result of the mini game may be displayed in a different cut from the cut shown in FIG. 391(p). The display of another cut may be performed regardless of success or failure, or may be configured to be performed only in the case of a specific result. In this effect example, when a certain notice display is a mini game, the result display portion of the mini game may be a certain effect. In the case where the certain notice display is a mini game, the display of “iron plate” may be the second certain effect, or the second certain effect may be performed after the certain effect.

Then, in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 391(q), the characters "iron plate" are displayed on the square background, and the iron plate image TP tilted about 15 degrees counterclockwise is displayed. .. This iron plate image TP is a notice display for notifying that the big hit is confirmed. As described above, in this example of performance, it is possible to say that the notice display according to the result of the mini game is performed, that is, another notice display according to the result of the notice display is performed. Further, in this example of the effect, when the timer advance notice effect is performed instead of the mini game, it can be said that the advance notice display is performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes 0. Further, when the timer notice production is performed, another notice display may be displayed in the state after the countdown is completed and becomes 0 in one cushion (for example, the countdown is completed. (Including that another notice display has started immediately before it becomes 0).

FIG. 392 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Note that at least one example of the plurality of other examples may be provided, or conversely, at least one example may not be provided. This also applies to the following figures.

392(a1) is an effect following FIG. 391(l). In the description of this embodiment, it is illustrated as a continuation of the effect example of FIG. 391, but it may be an effect performed in another scene, or an effect that is performed only as a continuation of the effect example of FIG. 391. Good. This also applies to the following figures. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 392(a1) to (a3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 391(m) to (o), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 392(a4), the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord has deviated from the target TGT and jumped to an area different from the target TGT. That is, it is displayed that the mini game as the notice display has failed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 392(a5), the iron plate image TP is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a state in which the swordsman reach is continuously performed is shown. In this example of directing, when there is only the difference between failure and success of the mini game, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the mini game is successful. Note that a timer advance notice effect may be performed instead of the mini game. For example, a fake timer advance notice effect may be displayed in which nothing is displayed even when the countdown of the timer display is completed to 0, or the timer display effect is displayed. When the countdown of No. is completed and becomes 0, an effect with low reliability (for example, the character of "chance" is displayed small in somewhere) may be performed.

FIG. 392(b1) is also an effect following FIG. 391(l). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 392(b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 391(m) to (o), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 392(b4), the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord hits the target TGT, but is shown stuck in the non-hit area. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the mini game is successful but not very successful.

Then, as shown in FIG. 392 (b5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the cut-in image HCI of the princess on which the characters of "chance" and the princess character are displayed on the background of horizontal stripes. ing. In this example of directing, in comparison with whether the mini game was successful or highly successful, it is easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed in the case of great success than in the case of success. ..

FIG. 392(c1) is also an effect following FIG. 391(l). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 392(c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 391(m) to (n), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 392(c3), a state where a mini game different from the mini game shown in FIG. 391(o) is started in the area where the preparing image RDY was displayed. It is shown. The mini game shown in FIG. 392(c3) is also an example of a notice display that is started after the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished. When the mini game is started, the cylindrical drum DRM extending in the horizontal direction starts rotating with the horizontal direction as the rotation axis. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed. In this effect example, the case where the mini game shown in FIG. 392(c3) is started is more likely to succeed than the mini game shown in FIG. 391(o) is started. The mini game shown in (o) may be configured to be more likely to succeed. In addition, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed more easily when the mini game shown in FIG. 392(c3) is started than when the mini game shown in FIG. 391(o) is started. However, the mini game shown in FIG. 391(o) may be configured such that the jackpot pattern is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 392(c4), the drum DRM is stopped and displayed, and the symbol in which the letters "iron plate" are displayed is derived, showing that the mini game has been very successful.

Then, as shown in FIG. 392 (c5), the iron plate image TP is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a state in which the big hit confirmation announcement effect is being performed is shown.

Note that, as compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 391, the mini game is performed in the effect shown in FIG. 391, but in the effect example shown in FIG. 392, the timer notice effect may be performed and vice versa. .. Further, both timer advance notice effects may be performed, and in this case, the background color and the time when the countdown is performed may be different.

FIG. 393 is a diagram showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment step by step.

FIG. 393(a1) shows that the swordsman reach has started. In this effect example, unlike the case of FIG. 391(m), the preparing image RDY is not displayed. Note that, in FIG. 393(a1), the variable icon h0 is displayed in red, and accordingly, the family crest actor 224E is also displayed in red.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393(a2) shows that the mini game is started. In this effect example, the mini game is started without the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the big hit symbol may be confirmed and displayed more easily through the display of the preparing image RDY than through the display of the preparing image RDY.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393(a3) shows a state in which the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord has pierced the area around the target TGT. In other words, it is shown that the mini game as a notice display has achieved great success.

Then, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393(a4), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed to notify that the big hit is confirmed.

Thus, in this effect example, the mini game is started without displaying the image RDY being prepared, but this may be executed only during the super reach, It may be executed not only during super reach, but may be configured to be executable during or without super reach. In addition, after the third display ends in the first state, there may be a pattern in which a certain notice display (a certain effect) is displayed from the first state to the second state. Good. Further, a certain notice display (certain effect) performed after the third display ends in the first state may extend to the next change. Then, after the third display ends in the second state, a certain notice display (in particular, a certain effect) may start and end at least in the second state.

FIG. 393(b1) is an effect following FIG. 391(l). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 393(b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 391(m) to (n), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393(b3), in the area where the preparing image RDY was displayed, not the mini game but the timer advance notice effect is started. This timer advance notice effect is also an example of a advance notice display started after the display of the image RDY being prepared. When the timer notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the preparing image RDY was displayed, and then the countdown is started. When the result of the countdown is "0:00" indicating 0 second, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 393(b3), "10:00" is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. It should be noted that there may be a case where a fake timer advance notice effect is started in which the timer advance notice effect ends after the countdown is started and before “0:00”. Here, as another example of the timer notice effect, the effect examples shown in FIGS. 337 to 390 can be appropriately combined. It should be noted that the jackpot symbol may be finalized more easily when the timer advance notice effect is started than when the mini game is started, or may be smaller than when the timer notice effect is started. It may be easier to finally confirm and display the big hit symbol in the case where is started. In the timer advance notice effect according to the present embodiment, after a countdown, as a result of reaching "0:00" indicating 0 second, a certain effect display (for example, in a display area different from the display area in which the timer display is performed is displayed. , The iron plate image TP) is displayed, but another effect display (for example, “iron plate”) is displayed in the display area in which the timer display has been performed after “0:00” indicating 0 seconds. Is a display area that is different from the display area in which the timer display is performed after performing a display capable of specifying a certain performance display or a display related to a certain performance display such as “chance”. The effect display (for example, the iron plate image TP) may be configured to be performed. Further, the timer advance notice effect in the present embodiment is configured to display up to "0:00" indicating 0 second as a result of the countdown, but may display up to "1" indicating 1 second, or , "00:01" may be displayed. Specifically, "10" is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. Then, after "1" is displayed, another effect display (for example, a certain effect display such as "iron plate" can be specified in the display area where the timer display is performed, or a "chance" After performing such display related to a certain effect display), a certain effect display (for example, the iron plate image TP) may be performed in a display area different from the display area in which the timer display is performed ( Here, the countdown display may be until the display of "1", immediately before another effect display is displayed, or until the display of another effect display. ). The time from the display of "1" to the start of the display of another effect display is the same (substantially the same) as the time from the display of "2" to the start of the display of "1". It may be different (that is, displayed at the timing of “0” in “2”→“1”→“0”) or different. In addition, when the pseudo-relational pattern is displayed as a certain effect display, a display indicating "NEXT" or "continuation" may be displayed as another effect display. Although the timer display (for example, “10:00”) is displayed immediately after the display of the preparing image RDY ends, another display is displayed after the displaying of the preparing image RDY ends. (For example, a display showing how to count up the timer display from 0, or a display related to the timer display such as "until next chance up, after") is displayed, and then the timer display is displayed. Alternatively, the display may be configured so that another display is not displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393(b4), as a result of the countdown, the timer display becomes "0:00", and the countdown is completed.

Then, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393(b5), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed to notify that the big hit is confirmed. That is, the timer notice effect can be a notice display of the iron plate image TP as a notice display. It should be noted that in each of the performance examples shown in the present embodiment, a performance other than the iron plate image TP may be performed as a certain performance.

FIG. 393(c1) to FIG. 393(c3) are effects following FIG. 393(b2). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393(c1), the state where the timer advance notice effect is started is shown in the area where the preparing image RDY was displayed. In the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 393(c1), in addition to the timer display, the remaining time display meter MT4 is displayed in an area different from the area where the preparing image RDY was displayed. The display mode of the remaining time display meter MT4 changes so as to be gradually shortened in accordance with the remaining time of the timer display. Then, the remaining time display meter MT4 disappears at the timing when the timer display becomes "0:00". In this effect example, a state in which the timer advance notice effect is performed is shown by the number display in the timer display and the display in a display mode other than the number. It should be noted that, first, only the decrease display of the meter by the remaining time display meter MT4 may be performed, and for example, the countdown by the timer display may be started when the remaining time becomes 3 seconds. In this case, the decreasing speed of the remaining time display meter MT4 may change before and after the countdown by the timer display starts. Further, two or more remaining time display meters having different remaining times may be provided and displayed with lengths corresponding to the respective remaining times, or two or more remaining time display meters having the same remaining time but different lengths may be provided. It may be displayed. In this case, for example, the decreasing speed of the longer remaining time display meter may be faster than the decreasing speed of the shorter remaining time display meter. When a plurality of remaining time display meters are displayed, different notice displays may be given when the remaining time display meters disappear. Further, two or more remaining time display meters having the same length may be provided so that the respective decreasing speeds are different.

In addition, in this example of the effect, an effect in which the execution time of the timer notice effect is extended may be performed. For example, in the case of extending, the number 0 may be erased and the meter may be restored again. Also, the length of the meter may be different depending on the timer advance notice time. Further, the decreasing speed of the meter does not have to be constant, and for example, it may not constantly decrease at a certain timing. Further, a plurality of meters may be displayed, and the length of a certain meter is long, but, for example, as a result of the decrease speed increasing from the middle, it may be shorter than the length of the other meter. Further, the decreasing speed of the meter does not have to be a constant speed, and for example, the decreasing speed may be faster or slower in the state where the numbers are also displayed.

FIG. 394 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example of the preliminary announcement effect that is applicable to this embodiment.

FIG. 394(a1) shows that the swordsman reach has started. In this effect example, unlike the case of FIG. 391(m), the preparing image RDY is not displayed. Then, after the reach effect is performed as shown in FIG. 394(a2) to FIG. 394(a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 394(a4) is performing a united animation and is displayed. A pair of translucent button images 136q is displayed from the upper left and right of the screen. Here, the united animation may be referred to as a button effect introduction animation or a fade-in animation (IN animation). The semi-transparent button image 136q informs that the button image 136a is materialized and the button advance notice effect is started by being united. Here, the introduction animation may also be included in the button notice presentation. The pair of semi-transparent button images 136q move toward the center while approaching each other. It should be noted that, in this effect example, an example in which two semi-transparent button images 136q are combined has been described, but, for example, an effect in which four semi-transparent button images 136q are combined may be performed, and in this case, two semi-transparent buttons are combined. The button image 136a is materialized and the button advance notice effect is more easily started when the effect of combining the four semi-transparent button images 136q is performed than when the effect of combining the image 136q is performed. You can Note that the operation of the effect button 136 has not been accepted while the combined animation is being displayed. Also, when the deca button image 136aL described later is displayed and the button advance notice effect is started, the united animation may be performed using the same translucent button image 136q, or by the translucent button image corresponding to the deca button image 136aL. A coalescing animation may be performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 394(a5), a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q is shown to be closer.

When the united animation is successful, the button image 136a is materialized and the button advance notice effect is started, as shown in FIG. 394(a6). When the button advance notice effect is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted, the character "press" is displayed together with the animation showing that the button image 136a is pressed, and the button image 136a is left below. The time meter MT is displayed to inform the remaining time of the operation acceptance period. The effect button lamp 138 provided on the effect button 136 also emits red light in response to the start of the operation valid period. Note that the button advance notice effect may be started after the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 may be started after the button advance notice effect is started.

FIGS. 394(b1) to (b6) show modified examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 393(b1) to (b5). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 394(b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 393(b1) to (b3), so description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 394 (b4) shows a state in which the above-mentioned united animation is started when the timer display countdown is being performed in the timer announcement effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "2:00", and it is indicated that the advance notice display corresponding to the timer advance notice effect is performed after 2 seconds. Here, the timing at which the semi-transparent button images 136q are united by the united animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed. That is, in this example of the effect, the united animation is performed. It is shown that the start of the button advance notice effect is announced by and the timer advance notice effect. It should be noted that the countdown may not be started immediately after the timer advance notice effect is started and the timer display is displayed, but the countdown of the timer display may be started at the start of the coalescence animation. According to this, there are cases where it is possible to easily specify the notice effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed. Further, the display of the image RDY being prepared may be ended and the timer advance notice effect may be started while the combined animation is being displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 394(b5), the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are further brought close to each other, and a state immediately before the completion of the combination is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display is "0:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. The timer display may be "0:00" after the united animation is completed, or the timer display may be "0:00" at the timing when the united animation is completed.

FIG. 394 (b6) shows a state in which the united animation has succeeded, the big button image 136aL has been materialized, the button advance notice effect has started, and the operation acceptance state has started. In this example of performance, the deca button image 136aL is more easily displayed in the case where both the timer advance notice effect and the combination animation are performed than in the case where only one of the timer advance notice effect and the combination animation is performed. Has become. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in the state where the big button image 136aL is displayed, for example, the iron plate image TP is displayed.

394(c1) is a modification of the effect shown in FIGS. 394(b3) to (b6). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 394(c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 394(b3) to (b4), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 394(c3), a state is shown immediately before the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q come close to each other and the combination is completed. In the effect example shown in FIG. 394(c3), when the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q come close to each other, the effect EF6 causes at least a part of the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q to overlap with each other, as compared with the state where they do not overlap. It is difficult to visually recognize the semi-transparent button image 136q. Therefore, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the united animation succeeds.

Then, when the united animation is successful, the button advance notice effect by the big button image 136aL is started as shown in FIG. 394(c4). The effect shown in FIG. 394(c4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 394(b6), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, the effect example shown in FIG. 394 is also shown for an example in which the preparing image RDY ends during execution of the super reach. There may or may not be a pattern in which the display of the image in preparation RDY ends and the timer advance notice starts while the introduction animation is displayed.

FIG. 395 is a diagram showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment step by step.

In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 395(a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. , And a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 395(a), since one variable display of Toku-zu 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The change icon h0 is in a red display mode, that is, the change advance notice display mode, and the hold icon h11 is in a default display mode. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the preparing image RDY is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 395(a). The background color of the in-preparation image RDY is red, and the jackpot pattern is more likely to be finally fixedly displayed than in the case of the green background color that is the default display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 395(a) has a default display mode in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 395(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yashiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 395(b), the preparing image RDY is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state in which it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. .. That is, the effect of ending the display of the image RDY being prepared is started. In this way, it can be said that, in this effect example, the display of the in-preparation image RDY is completed except for the super reach. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 395(c), the tutorial display area TT1 (that is, the area where the preparing image RDY was displayed) shows that the timer advance notice effect is started. ing. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, and then the countdown is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 395(c), "90:00" is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. Also, the background color of the timer display is red following the background color of the image RDY being prepared. In this effect example, a state where the timer advance notice effect is started before the super reach is developed is shown. Then, the timer display displayed when the timer notice effect is started is a long time of "90:00", and it can be inferred that the symbol variation display time is long, and the expectation for the big hit may be improved. As described above, in this example of performance, when the displayed timer display time is displayed for a long time (long time) such as "90:00", a relatively short time such as "10:00" is displayed. Finally, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than in the case of being displayed in (short time). Further, in this effect example, since the background color of the image RDY being prepared is red, it is easy for the timer display to become a long time and start in the timer notice effect. Further, in this example of performance, the timer display is long time and the background is red, so the reliability of the big hit is greatly improved.

In FIG. 395(d), a state of shifting to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative design displayed on the first decorative design display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative design display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative design display device 208L. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of shifting to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display for transitioning to super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E is raised and rotated, and the lower center part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps with the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and a part of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are difficult to visually recognize because the family crest monument 224E overlaps. The family crest monument 224E also overlaps a part of the timer notice display during the countdown display of the timer display. It is informed that the family crest part 224E is moved up to the super reach by the rising/rotating operation. At the timing shown in FIG. 395(d), the timer display is "30:00".

FIG. 395(e) shows a state in which the above-described united animation is started when the timer display countdown is being performed in the timer announcement effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "2:00", and it is indicated that the advance notice display corresponding to the timer advance notice effect is performed after 2 seconds. Here again, the timing at which the translucent button images 136q are united by the united animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is "0:00" and the countdown is completed. It is shown that the start of the button advance notice effect is announced by and the timer advance notice effect.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 395(f), the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are further brought close to each other, and a state immediately before the completion of the combination is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display is "0:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. In this example of performance, the background color of the timer notice display is red, which makes it easier to confirm and display the jackpot pattern than when the default background color is displayed, but the same may be applied. Note that the jackpot reliability may be the same when the timer advance notice display is the default background color and when it is the red background color.

FIG. 395(g) shows that the combination animation has succeeded, the big button image 136aL has been materialized, the button advance notice production has started, and the remaining time meter MT has been displayed to start the operation acceptance state. There is. In this example of performance, the longer the time for counting down the timer in the timer display, the more likely it is for a big hit.

FIG. 396 is a diagram showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment step by step.

In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 396(a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged in the lower part of the display screen, and the variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. , And a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 396(a1), since one variable display of Toku-zu 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The change icon h0 is in a red display mode, that is, the change advance notice display mode, and the hold icon h11 is in a default display mode. The family coat emblem 224E has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the preparing image RDY is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396(a1). The background color of the in-preparation image RDY is green, which is the default display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 396(a1) is in a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 396(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yashiro actor 224Fa, which is one of the production movable bodies. And a general character object 224Fb are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396(a2), the preparing image RDY is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state in which it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. ..

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396(a3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the preparing image RDY was displayed. When the mini game is started, the mini character MC1 of the lord and the target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas that are divided into four equal parts, and the upper area of the four areas is the hit area. The arrow hits the hit area to determine the reliability of the big hit. High notices are being given. In this effect example, a state where a mini game is played before the transition to the super reach is shown.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396(a4) shows a state in which the arrow released by the mini character MC1 of the lord has pierced the area around the target TGT. In other words, it is shown that the mini game as a notice display has achieved great success.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396(a5), the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, that is, the variable icon h0, because the mini game was a great success. It is shown that the notice by is ranked up. In addition, the family coat emblem 224E also emits gold in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. It should be noted that, after the change icon h0 is changed from the red display mode to the gold display mode, the family crest actor 224E may be changed from the red light emission mode to the gold light emission mode, or the family crest actor 224E may be red light emission. The change icon h0 may change from the red display mode to the gold display mode after changing the mode to the golden light emission mode, or the change icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode. Then, the family coat emblem 224E may be changed from a red light emitting mode to a gold light emitting mode. Then, in the tutorial display section TT1, the closing operation by the shutter image is started, and the display of the displayed mini game shifts to the invisible state by the shutter image. In addition, the closing operation by the shutter image may be started after the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed, or the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed after the closing operation by the shutter image is started, The closing operation by the shutter image may be started at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. Further, in this example of effect, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed as a result of the mini game, but the hold icon may be changed in some cases.

Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396(a6), the shutter image shows that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed. As a result, the display of the mini game is completely erased by the shutter image.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396(a7), the shutter display is shown opened in the tutorial display section TT1 that was closed by the shutter image. At this time, the tutorial display section TT1 is in a non-display state in which no display is performed. Note that when the shutter image is released, the tutorial display may be started, or another notice display, a timer notice display, or a mini game may be started. Further, it is also possible to display grayed out after the shutter image is released.

Next, with reference to FIG. 396(b1) to FIG. 396(b8), an example showing a state in which the mini game is started without displaying the preparing image RDY will be described.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396(b1), since one variable display of special figure 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 is displayed in red, and the advance notice is displayed. The hold icon h11 has a default display mode. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is master of lord” is displayed, and the relationship between the panda character and the lord's character is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 396(b1) is in a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396(b2), the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is shown as being closed by the shutter image. As a result, the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (b3), the shutter image shows that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed. It can be said that this shutter image is a mini game preview display that is displayed before the display of a mini game to be described later is started.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 396(b4), the shutter image is opened in the tutorial display section TT1 that was closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is opened and displayed by a predetermined open animation. In this example of performance, when the shutter image is released, the mini game is started on the tutorial display section TT1. That is, in this effect example, a state where the mini game is started is shown instead of the explanation display that has been performed so far. It can also be said that the mini game is started without displaying the image RDY being prepared. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 396(b4) to (b8) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 396(b4) to (b8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 396(a3) to (a7), description thereof will be omitted. It should be noted that after the mini game ends, the tutorial display unit TT1 may display an explanation or a gray-out display.

FIG. 397 is a diagram showing, step by step, a display example in the tutorial display unit TT1 applicable to this embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 397(a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. , And a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 397(a1), since one variable display of Toku-zu 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The change icon h0 is in a red display mode, that is, the change advance notice display mode, and the hold icon h11 is in a default display mode. The family coat emblem 224E has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. A tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 397(a1), “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed, and the panda character is displayed. And the relationship with Tonosama's character. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 397 (a1) is in a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 397(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yashiro actor 224Fa, which is one of the production movable bodies. And a general character object 224Fb are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 397 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is shown to be closed by the shutter image. That is, it can be said that a display (display of a shutter image) before another display (preliminary display) is performed instead of a certain display (explanation display) in a certain area (tutorial display section TT1). .. Note that at least a part of the character display that is displayed before the shutter image is displayed may be displayed during the display of the shutter image.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (a3), the shutter image shows that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed. It can be said that this shutter image is a display before advance notice display that is displayed before the advance notice display described below is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (a4), the shutter image is opened in the tutorial display section TT1 that was closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is opened and displayed by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display section TT1, when the shutter image is released, not the prepared image RDY, the mini game, or the timer notice effect, but a notice display made up of the characters "intense heat" is displayed. The notice display of the “heat” may be displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer notice effect. In this case, even if it is displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer notice effect, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than if it is displayed without passing through the mini game or the timer notice effect. Good. In addition, the notice display of the "intense heat" may not be displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer notice effect. In addition, in this example of effect, it is not necessary to perform the effect of closing the tutorial display section TT1 by the shutter image before displaying the notice such as "intense heat".

FIG. 397 (b1) to FIG. 397 (b8) show an example of presentation showing how the notice icon appears in the tutorial display section TT1. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 397(b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 397(a1) to 397(a3), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (b4), the shutter image is opened in the tutorial display section TT1 that was closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is opened and displayed by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display portion TT1, it is shown that, when the shutter image is released, a timer notice notice icon I81 that notices that the timer notice effect is performed appears. As a result, it is announced that the timer announcement effect will be performed. Other notice icons may appear, for example, the notice icons shown in FIG. 81 and FIG. 135(d) may appear.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (b5), the notice icon I81 of the timer notice displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 pops out of the tutorial display section TT1 and moves upward while expanding. The situation is shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (b6), the closing operation by the shutter image is started in the tutorial display section TT1.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (b7), the shutter image shows that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the display state on the tutorial display section TT1. In this example of performance, the state in which the timer advance notice icon I81 is displayed is maintained until the shutter image is completely closed to notify that the timer advance notice icon I81 is stocked. The shutter image may be deleted when the closing operation is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (b8), the shutter image is opened in the tutorial display section TT1 that was closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is opened and displayed by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is opened, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the preparing image RDY. At the timing shown in FIG. 397 (b8), the in-preparation image RDY is in the default display mode. This in-preparation image RDY is displayed because the notice icon I81 for timer notice is stocked. That is, the start of the timer advance notice effect is notified by the display of the image RDY being prepared. In the example of the effect, the display mode of the preparing image RDY for notifying the start of the timer notifying effect and the display mode of the preparing image RDY for notifying the start of the mini game are the same, but they are different. You can Further, the mini game or the timer notice effect may be started without displaying the image RDY being prepared.

FIG. 398 is a diagram showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment step by step. Here, even if the end timing of the third display, the start or end timing of a certain notice display, or the start or end timing of a certain effect is a separate state of the subdivided states of the second state It may be the same state.

FIG. 398(a1) is an effect following FIG. 391(l). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 392(a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 391(m), so description thereof will be omitted. In the effect shown in FIG. 398(a1), display may be started after the in-preparation image RDY develops into super reach.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398(a2), the animation of the duel scene continues, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 398(a3), the protagonist Tono wins the enemy swordsman, A combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" is derived, and swing fluctuation is started. At this time, the image RDY being prepared is still displayed. That is, it can be said that the in-preparation image RDY is displayed in the state where the display indicating that the big hit is being made. Also, in order to celebrate the big hit, the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the general character 224Fb emit light in a rainbow display mode that emits light in multiple colors.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398(a4), the preparing image RDY is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state not overlapped with the effect EF5. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 398(a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state where the timer advance notice effect is started is shown in the area where the preparing image RDY was displayed. When the timer notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the preparing image RDY was displayed, and then the countdown is started. When the result of the countdown is "0:00" indicating 0 second, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 398(a5), "3:00" is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. It should be noted that there may be a case where a fake timer advance notice effect is started in which the timer advance notice effect ends after the countdown is started and before “0:00”.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398(a6), as a result of the countdown, the timer display becomes "0:00", and the countdown is completed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398(a7), the character “Go” is displayed in the display area where the timer display was performed, and the fact that a certain notice effect is started is notified. There is. It should be noted that the display of the character "Go" may or may not be performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398(a8), it is shown that the promotion effect of the jackpot symbol is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 398(a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decal button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT to notify that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has started. The display of the big button image 136aL corresponds to a certain notice effect, that is, the notice effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect. Here, for example, when the timer advance notice effect is not performed, the promotion effect of the big hit symbol does not have to be started, and when the promotion effect of the big hit symbol is started, the default display instead of the big button image 136aL is displayed. The mode button image 136a may be displayed. Also, a mini game may be played in place of the timer announcement effect. In addition, the big button image 136aL may be displayed even when the timer advance notice effect or the mini game is not performed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 398(a9), from the combination of the decorative patterns of the "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" jackpot, the "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" jackpot is selected. It is changed to a combination of decorative symbols of, and it is notified that the probability variation big hit is confirmed. That is, it is reported that the big hit symbols have been promoted.

FIG. 398(b1) to FIG. 398(b4) show a state in which the countdown of the timer display by the timer advance notice effect is started while the animation of the duel scene in the super reach is continuing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398(b1), a state in which the animation of the duel scene continues is shown. At this time, the timer notice production is started, and the timer notice display is displayed in the display area where the tutorial display section TT1 was displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 398(b1), "10:00" is displayed as the timer display on the timer advance notice display, and then the countdown is started. It should be noted that the time when the countdown is started may be before the super reach is developed, after the super reach is developed, at the timing when the super reach is developed, or when the reach is reached. It may be before the shift to the state or after the shift to the reach state and before the super reach is developed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398(b2), the button advance notice effect is started, and the state in which the default time display mode button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT is shown. .. That is, it is shown that the final judge effect has been started. On the other hand, in the timer notice display, the countdown of the timer display continues, and the timer display shows "9:00" at the timing shown in FIG. 398(b2). That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer display countdown is performed by the timer notice effect during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136. Here, the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 is longer than the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the final judge effect and the length of the countdown in the timer notice effect.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 398(b3), in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 398(b4), the main character wins over the enemy swordsman, A combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4" is derived, and swing fluctuation is started. On the other hand, in the timer notice display, the countdown of the timer display is still continuing, that is, it is suggested that the promotion effect of the big hit symbol may be performed thereafter. It should be noted that in this effect example, the timer display is configured not to be "0:00" even when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect. This is because, for example, in the final judge effect, a combination of missing decorative symbols is displayed, and thereafter, the revival effect is performed at the timing when the timer display becomes “0:00”. On the contrary, if the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect, the count may be 0.

FIG. 399 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of the timer notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 399(a) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 397(a1), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399(b), it is shown that the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the preparing image RDY. Only one type of display mode is prepared for the in-preparation image RDY in this effect example, and change display to another display mode is not performed. As described above, in this example of performance, the reliability of the big hit is not known in the display mode of the image RDY being prepared. Further, when there are a plurality of types of certain notice display or certain effect, it is not possible to know which certain notice display or certain effect will be performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399(c), the preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is started. .. In this example of performance, the background color in the timer notice display is selected from a plurality of colors, and the reliability of the big hit is indicated by the background color. In the effect example shown in FIG. 399(c), the background color of the timer notice display is blue, which is a mode with low reliability. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display is "10:00", and it is notified that a certain advance notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In addition, before or after the countdown of the timer display is started, the background color of the timer notice display may be changed, and an effect that the reliability is improved on the way may be performed.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399(d), the timer display becomes “0:00”, and the countdown is completed. In addition, a state in which the decoration pattern is in the reach state with "decoration 4" being stopped and displayed on the left and right patterns respectively is shown. It should be noted that the reach state may be after the timer display becomes "0:00", the timer display may be "0:00" after the reach state, and the timer display may be "0". The reach state may be set at the timing of "0:00". It should be noted that, in this effect example, there is a correspondence relationship with the display indicating that the timer display countdown becomes 0 and the superreach is developed, and the display always develops into the superreach.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399(e), the word "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, and a certain notice display is displayed. It is informed that it will be started.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399(f), the button advance notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the display of "Go" is erased, and it is in a non-display state. In this effect example, the start of the button advance notice effect itself is not the advance notice display started as a result of the timer advance notice effect, but the advance notice displayed when the result is successful as a result of the operation of the effect button 136 in the button advance notice effect. The display corresponds to a notice display that is started as a result of the timer notice effect being performed. It should be noted that the tutorial display unit TT1 may be in a non-display state after the button notice production is started, or the button notice production may be started after the tutorial display unit TT1 is in a non-display state, The tutorial display section TT1 may be hidden at the timing when the button notice production is started. By not displaying the tutorial display after the display of “Go”, an effect of concentrating on other effects (for example, button effects) may be obtained.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399(g), it is shown that the button advance notice effect is started and the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. ing.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 399(h), it is determined that the button advance notice effect has been successful, and as shown in FIG. 399(i), it shifts to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative design displayed on the first decorative design display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative design display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative design display device 208L. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the reach state is the "decoration 4". The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of shifting to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display for transitioning to super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E is raised and rotated, and the lower center part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps with the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and a part of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are made difficult to visually recognize because they are overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest monument 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display section TT1. It is informed that the family crest part 224E is moved up to the super reach by the rising/rotating operation. Further, in this production example, in the case of transitioning to at least the swordsman reach of the super reach, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Will be hidden. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that a certain notice display that is performed as a result of the timer notice effect corresponds to the development to super reach.

FIG. 399(j) shows that the swordsman reach has started. It should be noted that when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained displayed by changing the display position downward. Further, since the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed, no display is performed after the tutorial display section TT1 is framed out together with the UI section UI3. Further, the family crest monument 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399(k), it is shown that the cut-in image HCI of the princess is displayed. The cut-in image HCI of this princess is suddenly displayed without passing through the button notice effect, the timer notice effect, or the mini game, and the reliability is low, but the button notice effect or the timer notice effect or It may be displayed as a result of playing the mini game. Further, the iron plate image TP may be displayed instead of the cut-in image HCI of the princess. FIG. 400 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the preliminary announcement effect that is applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 400(a) to 400(c) are the same as those in FIGS. 399(a) to 399(c), description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 400(d), a state is shown in which an animation is being performed in which the character of the lord as the navigation character is throwing a bomb. Specifically, the character of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N throws a bomb while screaming "I'm still", and this bomb displays the first decorative symbol from the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Move across device 208L. Then, this bomb explodes toward the tutorial display section TT1 where the countdown of the timer display is being performed, and explodes in the vicinity above the tutorial display section TT1.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400(e), the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, and the preparation image RDY is displayed again. At the time when this timer advance notice effect was started, the timer display was "10:00", and the timing at which the button advance notice effect was started was informed, but because the timer advance notice effect was interrupted, It may be recognized that it did not correspond to the button notice production. Note that the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the case where the timer advance notice effect is interrupted by the navigation character than when the timer advance effect is not interrupted by the navigation character. In addition, when the effect of interrupting the countdown of the timer display is performed, the time of the timer display is increased instead of the display of the image RDY being prepared, and the time until the countup is extended. Good, or the countdown speed may be slow. Further, for example, the timer announcement has an advantage that the timing of 0 can be easily predicted because the countdown speed does not change, which is why the future can be known by the end timing of the image RDY being prepared (that is, the timer announcement start timing). There are cases.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400(f), the state in which the button advance notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. It is shown. In the tutorial display section TT1, the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400(g), the state in which the gauge of the remaining time meter is decreasing according to the time from the start of the button notice effect and the start of the operation valid period is shown. ing.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 400(h), it is determined that the button advance notice effect has succeeded, and as shown in FIG. 400(i), the process moves to the super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative design displayed on the first decorative design display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative design display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative design display device 208L. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the reach state is the "decoration 4". The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of shifting to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display for transitioning to super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E is raised and rotated, and the lower center part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps with the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and a part of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are made difficult to visually recognize because they are overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest monument 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display unit TT1 in which the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It is informed that the family crest part 224E is moved up to the super reach by the rising/rotating operation. Further, in this production example, in the case of transitioning to at least the swordsman reach of the super reach, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Will be hidden.

FIG. 400(j) shows that the swordsman reach has started. It should be noted that when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained displayed by changing the display position downward. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden together with the UI section UI3, but the in-preparation image RDY is continuously displayed. Further, the family crest monument 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400(k), it is shown that the image RDY being prepared is switched to the timer notice display and the timer notice effect is restarted. Specifically, the timer advance notice display after the restart is changed to a gold background color, which shows that the reliability of the big hit is improved. Further, in FIG. 400(k), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates “10:00”, and there is a possibility that a certain advance notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is restarted. Has been done. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer display countdown is performed by the timer notice effect during the super reach (swordsman reach). In addition, the start time of the timer notice production is set to an appropriate timing, for example, before the super reach is started, after the super reach is started, before reaching the reach state, or when the super reach is started after reaching the reach state. May be started at a timing such as before. Further, the timer display when the timer advance notice effect is restarted can be set to an appropriate time, for example, it may be started from "9:00" indicating the time of interruption.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400(l), the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400(m), the character "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display, and a certain notice display is started. I am informing you.

Then, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400(n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed to inform that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice production corresponds to a notice display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 399, the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is not the development to super reach, but the cut-in image displayed during super reach as a result of the timer notice effect being extended. The cut-in image has high reliability as a result. As described above, in this effect example, the countdown is “0:00” at a good point in the super reach, and an example in which a good effect is performed is shown. The expectation of the big hit is higher as the end timing of the image RDY being prepared (the start timing of a certain notice display) is later in a certain change.

FIG. 401 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the preliminary announcement effect that is applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 401(a) is the same as that in FIG. 399(a), description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401(b), a state is shown in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the preparing image RDY. At this time, “TIMER×2” is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 on which the preparing image RDY is displayed, which indicates that the timer advance notice effect is performed twice. The display of “TIMER×2” may be displayed at the same time as the display of the image RDY being prepared, or may be displayed after the image RDY being prepared is displayed. You may make it think that it will be performed once, but will actually produce it that it is performed twice. Note that, instead of the display of “TIMER×2”, for example, two preparing images RDY may be displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401(c), the preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is started. .. The background color of the timer notice display is blue, which has a low reliability. Here, the timer preview display may be in a default display mode in which the background color is green. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display is "10:00", and it is notified that a certain advance notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display starts, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401(d) shows that the timer display is "0:00" and the countdown is completed. In addition, a state in which the decoration pattern is in the reach state with "decoration 4" being stopped and displayed on the left and right patterns respectively is shown. Further, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, the display of “TIMER×2” displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 is erased, and it is informed that the first timer advance notice effect has been digested and ended. ing. The display of “TIMER×2” may be made difficult to visually recognize by displaying the effect when the timer display is “0:00”. Further, the display of “TIMER×2” may be kept displayed instead of being erased. Further, when a plurality of in-preparation displays are displayed, a state may be provided in which the display regarding the in-preparation display is once hidden after the first in-preparation display ends.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401(e), the word "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, and a certain notice display is displayed. It is informed that it will be started.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401(f), the button advance notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. At this time, the button image 136a and the remaining time meter MT overlap the decorative pattern. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the display of "Go" is erased, and it is in a non-display state. Therefore, it may seem that there is no stock of the timer advance notice effect. In this effect example, the start of the button advance notice effect itself is not the advance notice display started as a result of the timer advance notice effect, but the advance notice displayed when the result is successful as a result of the operation of the effect button 136 in the button advance notice effect. The display corresponds to a notice display that is started as a result of the timer notice effect being performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401(g), a state in which the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button notice effect is started and the operation valid period is started is shown. ing. At this time, the preparing image RDY is displayed again on the tutorial display section TT1 to notify that the second timer advance notice effect will be started, but when the preparing image RDY is displayed again, the preparing image RDY for the first time is prepared. Is enlarged and displayed compared to when is displayed. Therefore, the changing image h0 and a part of the decorative pattern may be overlapped by the image RDY being prepared. In this way, the image RDY being prepared is once hidden and further overlapped, which may have the effect of drawing more attention.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 401(h), it is determined that the button notice effect has been successful, and as shown in FIG. 401(i), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shifts to the super reach. It is displayed and develops into super reach (swordsman reach). Further, the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and overlaps with the front surface side of the lower center of the first decorative pattern display device 208L. In addition, the family crest monument 224E also overlaps a part of the enlarged image RDY in preparation, and is more difficult to visually recognize than the state where it does not overlap the family crest monument 224E. The image RDY being prepared may be overlapped with the family coat emblem 224E only when it is enlarged and displayed, and may not be overlapped when it is not enlarged and displayed. Further, after the super-reach shift display is started, the UI portion UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display portion TT1, and is hidden. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that a certain notice display that is performed as a result of the timer notice effect corresponds to the development to super reach.

FIG. 401(j) shows that the swordsman reach has started. It should be noted that when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained displayed by changing the display position downward. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden together with the UI section UI3, but the in-preparation image RDY is continuously displayed. Since the image RDY being prepared is enlarged and displayed, a part of the variation icon h0 is overlapped, and the swordsman character in the reach effect display is also overlapped. In this way, the enlarged image RDY that is being prepared and displayed may be displayed even during execution of the super reach. Further, the family crest monument 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401(k) shows that the image RDY being prepared is switched to the timer notice display and the second timer notice effect is started. Specifically, the timer advance notice display after the start is changed to a gold background color, which shows that the reliability of the big hit is improved. In addition, in FIG. 401(k), the timer display in the timer notification display indicates "3:00", and it is notified that a certain notification display may be displayed 3 seconds after the countdown is started. Has been done. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer display countdown is performed by the timer notice effect during the super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in this effect example, the size of the timer notice display is set to be the same size as the enlarged image RDY being prepared, and when the timer notice display is enlarged, it is a big hit compared to when it is not enlarged. It is easy to confirm and display the design. In addition, when the background color of the timer notice display is gold, the enlarged display may be performed without fail. Further, even if the background color of the timer notice display is a color other than gold, it may be displayed in an enlarged manner. Further, in this example of effect, the background color of the second timer notice effect is more reliable than that of the first timer notice effect, but the timer display time is shorter. Note that the timer display time may be longer in the second timer advance notice effect than in the first timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401(l), the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401(m), the character “Go” is displayed instead of the timer display, and a certain notice display is started. I am informing you.

Then, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401(n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed to inform that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the second timer advance notice effect corresponds to the advance notice display of the iron plate image TP as a certain advance notice display. In this effect example, it may be possible to dramatically improve the sense of expectation for a big hit by notifying in advance that the timer advance notice effect will be performed twice.

As described above, in this effect example, when the image RDY being prepared is displayed as the number of clothes, when one image RDY being prepared is exhausted, all the images RDY being prepared are displayed in the same symbol variable display. It has been shown to be digested.

FIG. 402 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the preliminary announcement effect that is applicable to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 402(a1) to FIG. 402(a2) are the same as those in FIG. 398(a1) to FIG.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402(a3), it is shown that the long press effect display by the long press effect display is started to be displayed. In the long press effect display, an area in which the lord's character is drawn is arranged in the upper part, and an area in which the swordsman character is drawn is arranged in the lower part, depending on the operation amount of the long press operation of the effect button 136. , The sizes of both areas are displayed so as to relatively change. In addition, the in-preparation image RDY is also displayed when the long press effect is started. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 402(a3), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has not started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402(a4), a state in which acceptance of a long press operation by a long press effect is started is shown. That is, it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has started. In this long press effect, the remaining time gauge MT is not displayed, but may be displayed. Further, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared is switched to the timer notice display and the timer notice effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice display has been changed to a green background color, indicating that the reliability is not so high. Also, in FIG. 402(a4), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates “5:00”, and it is notified that a certain advance notice display may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown is started. Has been done. That is, in this effect example, the operation valid period and the countdown time of the timer display match. Note that they do not have to match completely. In addition, the timer notice effect may be started after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may be started after the timer notice effect is started, The timer advance notice effect may be started at the timing when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

In FIG. 402(a5), it is shown that the player is pressing and holding the effect button 136 for a long time. At the timing shown in FIG. 402(a5), the timer display in the timer advance notice display is "4:00".

In FIG. 402(a6), the player continues to press and hold the effect button 136. At this time, in the long press effect display, the area in which the lord's character arranged above is drawn is enlarged, and the area in which the swordsman character placed below is drawn is reduced accordingly. Character is shown to be dominant. This suggests that advantageous results are likely to occur. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 402(a6), the timer display in the timer advance notice display is "3:00".

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402(a7), the timer display becomes “0:00”, the countdown ends, and the state of the character “Go” is displayed. In addition, the long-press effect is still being performed, and the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is still ongoing. That is, it can be said that the character display of “Go” is displayed during the effective operation period of the effect button 136. Also, in the long press effect display, the area in which the lord's character arranged above is drawn further enlarged, and the area in which the swordsman character placed below is drawn is further reduced accordingly. It is shown that the lord's character is by far the most dominant. It should be noted that the long press effect may be ended after the character "Go" is displayed, or the character "Go" may be displayed after the long press effect is ended. The long press effect may be ended at the timing when the character “” is displayed. Further, the operation valid period may end after the character “Go” is displayed, or the character “Go” may be displayed after the operation valid period ends, or “Go” may be displayed. The operation valid period may end at the timing when the character “” is displayed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402(a8), the character "one shot" is displayed, and the decal button image 136aL is also displayed together with the remaining time meter MT to start the button advance notice effect and the operation is effective. It is shown that the period has been set again. That is, this button advance notice effect can be regarded as an example of the button operation effect performed subsequent to the long press effect. In other words, it can be said that an example in which a plurality (types) of button effects are continuously performed is shown. Here, the operation valid period to be set may be set again after the operation valid period in the long-press effect has once ended, or may be set continuously in the operation valid period in the long-press effect. May be.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 402(a9), in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 402(a10), the main character wins the enemy swordsman, A combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4" is derived, and swing fluctuation is started. At this time, the family crest cast 224E, the Yatsushiro cast 224Fa, and the general cast 224Fb emit light in a rainbow light emitting manner so as to celebrate the big hit.

In this way, in this production example, the long-press part finishes the display during preparation and starts the countdown of the timer display, and the countdown is completed between the long-press part and the next part or at the end of the long-press part. Then, it becomes "0:00", and an example in which the button effect performed in the next part is good is shown.

FIG. 402(b1) to FIG. 402(b5) show that the long press effect is performed in the swordsman reach, but the timer notice effect is not performed.

Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402(b1), after the long press effect by the long press effect display is started, the acceptance of the long press operation is started, and the effect button 136 is also started. It is shown that the long press operation of is being performed. In this example of the effect, the timer notice effect is not performed.

However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 402(b2), the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, but in the effect display for long press, the lord's character arranged above is drawn. The area is reduced, and the area in which the swordsman character placed below is drawn is enlarged accordingly, indicating that the lord's character is inferior (character superiority of the enemy character, swordsman). .. This suggests that it is difficult to obtain advantageous results.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402(b3), the character of “one blow” is displayed, and the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT to give a button advance notice effect. It is shown that the operation is started and the operation valid period is set again. As described above, when the timer advance notice effect is not performed when the long press effect is performed, the decal button image 136aL is difficult to be displayed, and the button image 136a in the default display mode is easily displayed. Note that, when the long press effect is performed, if the timer advance notice effect is not performed, the decal button image 136aL may not be displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 402(b4), in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 402(b5), the main character loses to the enemy swordsman, and the “decoration 4- A combination of missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 4" is derived, and swing fluctuation is started. It should be noted that the flow may be a case where the mini game or the timer announcement effect is not passed, and the big hit may be made.

FIG. 403 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the button repeated hit effect that can be applied to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 403(a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 403(a), since one variable display of Toku-zu 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 both have default display modes. A tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 403(a), “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed, and the panda character is displayed. And the relationship with Tonosama's character. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 403(a), the button repeated hit effect has been started, and the explanation of "make the meter to MAX within the time by continuous button hits" is performed. A button image 136a is displayed together with the characters "preparation", and an operation amount meter MT11 including five memories arranged vertically is displayed on the left side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 403(a), it is before the start of acceptance of the repeated hit operation of the effect button 136, that is, before the start of the operation valid period, and the effect button lamp 138 is also lit in white. In this effect example, the display of “preparation” displayed above the button image 136a can be referred to as a display corresponding to the in-preparation image RDY (preparation effect display of button repeated hit effect). It should be noted that, when the button repeated hit production is started, the decorative pattern which has been variably displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is moved to the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is reduced and displayed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 403(a) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 403(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yashiro actor 224Fa, which is one of the production movable bodies. And a general character object 224Fb are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 403(b), it is shown that the acceptance of the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 has been started. Specifically, the character "preparation" displayed above the button image 136a is switched to the character "start", and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a to start the operation valid period. At the same time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light. In this effect example, it can be said that the button continuous hit effect (main effect) is started at the timing when the operation valid period is started.

On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 403(c), the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is reduced in accordance with the passage of time from the operation valid period, and is displayed on the right side of the button image 136a. A countdown display is displayed by displaying numbers. At the timing shown in FIG. 403(c), "5" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is informed that the time until the operation valid period ends is 5 seconds. Since a certain notice effect may be performed when the countdown in the countdown display is completed, it can be said that the countdown effect by the countdown display corresponds to the timer notice effect.

In FIG. 403(d), it is shown that the player has started the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 403(d), "4" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is informed that there is another 4 seconds until the operation valid period ends.

In FIG. 403(e), the player continuously performs the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is red in accordance with the number of continuous hit operations. It is displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 403(e), "3" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is informed that there is another 3 seconds until the operation valid period ends.

In FIG. 403(f), the player continuously performs the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, three memories of the operation amount meter MT11 are displayed in red. Has been done. At the timing shown in FIG. 403(f), "1" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is informed that there is one second left until the operation valid period ends.

In FIG. 403(g), the countdown display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L becomes "0", the operation valid period ends, and the state in which the player repeatedly hits the effect button 136 is shown. It should be noted that the operation amount meter MT11 has a mode in which three memories are displayed in red, that is, it is indicated that the button repeated hit effect has failed. Although the effect button lamp 138 is lit in red, the lighting state may be switched from red to white at the timing when the operation valid period ends, or before the operation valid period ends. The lighting state of the effect button lamp 138 may be switched from red to white.

When the button repeated hit effect fails, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 403(h) displays "sorry...", and notifies that the button repeated hit effect has failed. In this example of performance, in a pachinko machine capable of executing a countdown display effect in addition to the timer notification, a certain notification display may not include the countdown display.

FIG. 404 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the preliminary announcement effect that is applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 404(a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. , And a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 404(a), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 all have default display modes. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 404(a) displays the first preparing image RDY1. The function of the first in-preparation image RDY is the same as that of the above-described in-preparation image RDY. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 404(a) has a default display mode in blue. Further, in this effect example, the second in-preparation image RDY is displayed above the first in-preparation image RDY1, and a state in which a plurality of in-preparation images are simultaneously displayed is shown. For the first in-preparation image RDY1 and the second in-preparation image RDY2, respective corresponding effects (timer notice effect, mini game, etc.) are performed. It should be noted that all of these in-preparation images (the first in-preparation image RDY1 and the second in-preparation image RDY2) function as a pre-reading notice. In addition, the background color of any of the prepared images is green, which is the default display mode. Also, these preparation-in-progress images may be started to be displayed at the same time, or one of them may be started to be displayed after the other is started to be displayed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 404(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

FIG. 404(b) shows a state in which the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 404(a) is finished and the next symbol variation display is started. Specifically, when the symbol variation on the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by a moving animation, respectively, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The change icon is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11, and moves to the corresponding pedestal. To do. Further, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, it can be said that the first in-preparation image RDY1 and the second in-preparation image RDY2 are continuously displayed, that is, these in-preparation images are displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404(c), the first preliminary image RDY1 displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is started. ing. The background color of the timer notice display corresponding to the first image in preparation RDY1 is green, which is the default display mode. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display is "5:00", and it is informed that a certain advance notice display may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, when one of the plurality of preparing images is activated (digested) and the effect is started, all the other preparing images are also digested. It should be noted that although all of the images in preparation are consumed in one symbol variation display, the notice icon may be carried over and displayed until the next symbol variation display.

FIG. 404(d) shows that the timer display in the timer notice display corresponding to the first image in preparation RDY1 is “0:00”, and the countdown is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 404(e), the character “Go” is displayed in the area where the timer notice display corresponding to the first image in preparation RDY1 was displayed, and the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display is displayed. It is informed that a certain corresponding notice display is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404(f), the character “Go” is erased together with its display area, and the second preparing image RDY2 slides downward and moves to the position of the tutorial display section TT1. Image preparation animation is in progress. Further, it is shown that the notice effect (preceding start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display by the timer notice effect corresponding to the first in-preparation image RDY1 is started, and the ninja character NJ4 appears. Has been done. The ninja character NJ4 displayed here is the same as the ninja character NJ4 which may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 391(f) is changed, but another It may be a character. In this production, the preparatory image moving animation may be started after the preceding start notice production is started, or the precedent start notice production may be started after the preparing image movement animation is started, The image moving animation during preparation may start at the timing when the preceding start notice production starts. Although the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIG. 404(f) overlaps the second preparing image RDY2, it may overlap the second preparing image RDY2.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404(g), the pending change animation has started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0. Has been done. At this time, the entire variation icon h0 is covered by the effect EF4, making it more difficult to visually recognize than the state in which it is not covered by the effect EF4.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404(h), as a result of the pending change animation, the change icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the change notice is started.

In FIG. 404(i), after the "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is reached, transition to the super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative design displayed on the first decorative design display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative design display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative design display device 208L. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of shifting to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display for transitioning to super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E is raised and rotated, and the lower center part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps with the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and a part of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are made difficult to visually recognize because they are overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest monument 224E also overlaps a part of the second in-preparation image RDY2. It is informed that the family crest part 224E is moved up to the super reach by the rising/rotating operation. Further, in this example of performance, after the super-reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 and is hidden.

FIG. 404(j) shows that the swordsman reach has started. It should be noted that when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained displayed by changing the display position downward. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden together with the UI section UI3, but the second preparation-in-progress image RDY2 is continuously displayed. Further, the family crest monument 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404(k) shows that the second preliminary image RDY2 is switched to the timer notice display and the timer notice effect is started. The timer notice display has a golden background color, which shows that the reliability of the big hit is improved. In addition, in FIG. 404(k), the timer display in the timer notification display indicates “10:00”, and it is notified that a certain notification display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is restarted. Has been done. Note that the timer advance notice display is in the default display mode at the time of display start, and after the display start (for example, after the countdown is started), a promotion display such as a change to a gold background color may be performed. Good.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404(l), the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404(m), the character "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display, and a certain notice display is started. I am informing you.

Then, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404(n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed to inform that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect corresponding to the second preparation image RDY2 corresponds to the notice display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. It should be noted that in this example of performance, a new preparing image is not displayed after one of the plurality of preparing images is digested, but a new preparing image is displayed after one of the plurality of preparing images is digested. The middle image may be displayed.

FIG. 405 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the effect by the explanation display applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 405(a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 391(a), description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 405(a2), the explanation display in the tutorial display portion TT1 is changed from "Panda is the master of the lord" to "The lord is the Yatsushiro shogun". .. In this effect example, when the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched, the opening/closing display by the shutter image described above is not performed, and the switching display is performed between the explanation displays. In this effect example, in one symbol variable display, when switching the explanation display, the opening/closing display by the shutter image is not performed, but the switching display between the explanation displays is shown.

FIG. 405(b1) to FIG. 405(b3) show how the open/close display is performed by the shutter image when the explanation display is switched. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 405(b1) to 405(b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 391(a) to 391(b), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 405(b3), the shutter image is opened before the tutorial display section TT1 by the shutter image is completely closed, and the explanation display of “The Lord is Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed. Is shown. That is, it is shown that the opening/closing display by the shutter image is not the warning display that the warning display is performed but the false warning display. Here, the shutter image may be opened after the tutorial display section TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. I expected that the notice display would be started by performing such an effect, but by disappointing the player because the notice display was not started and the notice display was not displayed, the opening and closing display of the shutter image is displayed. Sometimes you can have expectations.

FIG. 406 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the preliminary announcement effect that is applicable to the present embodiment. FIGS. 406(a1) to 406(a3) show another example of the effect following FIG. 391(e). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 406(a1) to (a2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 391(f) to (g), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 406(a3), the effect EF4 has been deleted, but the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains unchanged from the default display mode. .. In this way, a failure effect may be performed in which the display mode does not change even when the hold change animation described above with reference to FIG. It should be noted that a plurality of types of characters that appear in the pending change animation may be prepared so that the display mode of the pending icon changes depending on the characters that appear in the pending change animation.

In the hold change animation described above, the ninja character NJ4 is displayed so as to overlap the UI unit UI3. For example, as shown in FIG. 406(b1), the character NJ4 is displayed above the UI unit UI3 and the UI is displayed. It is also possible not to overlap the section UI3. In this case, in the pending change animation, the ninja character NJ4 may or may not overlap the UI unit UI3.

FIG. 407 is a diagram showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment step by step.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407(a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 407 (a1), since one variable display of Toku-zu 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 both have default display modes. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 407(a1), “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed, and the panda character is displayed. And the relationship with Tonosama's character. In addition, in this example of the effect, the decorative symbol is moved to the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is reduced and displayed. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 407(a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 407(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852. The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yashiro actor 224Fa, which is one of the production movable bodies. And a general character object 224Fb are arranged.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407(a2) shows that the roulette effect as a mini game is started. In this roulette effect, a circular roulette wheel RR is divided into three equal parts and divided into three parts. The grandpa area is arranged above the three sections, the princess area is arranged on the lower left side, and the Chibi princess area is arranged on the lower right side. When the roulette effect is started, each area is blinked in red to perform a variable display, and finally a notice display corresponding to the area illuminated in red is prepared. Note that the symbol variation display at which the roulette effect starts and the symbol variation display at which the in-preparation display and the like end may be the same or different. Further, in the configuration in which the display indicating that the roulette effect is started is performed, the symbol variation display in which the display is performed and the symbol variation display in which the preparation in progress display and the like end may be the same, or separately. It may be. By the combination of the above description, the display can be referred to as a pre-reading notice display.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407(a3), as a result of the variable display of the roulette effect, it is shown that all areas are lit in red. That is, it is notified that the advance notice display corresponding to the grandpa character, the advance notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the advance notice display corresponding to the princess Chibi character are prepared.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407(a4), the tutorial display section TT1 displays the first preparing image RDY1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and at the upper left of the display screen. Is displayed such that the third in-preparation image RDY3 is adjacent to the grandpa character GII, and the Chibi-hime character CHM is displayed below the third in-preparation image RDY3. That is, when a character is to appear, each character appears at a position corresponding to the character, and when a preparing image is displayed, the character is displayed at a position corresponding to the character. It can be said that the appearing character itself may correspond to the image under preparation. Further, the relationship between the appearing character and the effect to be executed may be 1:1 or 1:N (N>1). In addition, a certain effect may be executed by digesting a plurality of characters (the relationship between the character and the effect may be N (N>1):1).

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407(a5) shows that the Chibihime character CHM moves upward and overlaps the lower left corner of the third in-preparation image RDY3. That is, it can be said that a certain notice display overlaps with another notice display. As a result, it is notified that the advance notice display corresponding to the Chibihime character CHM will start.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407(a6), a state is shown in which an animation in which the character CHM of Princess Chibi throws an object toward the variable icon h0 is performed. Then, when the object reaches the variation icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is difficult to visually recognize. That is, the notice display corresponding to the character CMH of Princess Chibi is a notice display due to a change in the display mode of the variable icon h0. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407(a7), the effect EF7 is erased and the variable icon h0 is in a state where it is easily visible. At this time, it is shown that the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the change notification by the variable icon h0 is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407(a8), display is started in a manner in which the grandfather character GII vibrates. This notifies that the advance notice display corresponding to the old character GII will start.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407(a9), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the third in-preparation image RDY3 arranged adjacent to the grandfather character GII is displayed. Has been done. When the mini game is started, the cylindrical drum DRM extending in the horizontal direction starts rotating with the horizontal direction as the rotation axis. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407(a10), the drum DRM is stopped and displayed, and the symbol in which the character “intense heat” is displayed is derived, suggesting that there is a high possibility of a big hit. There is. That is, the fluctuation notice is given by deriving the word “heat” from the drum DRM. It can be said that this effect is not an effect that changes the display mode of something, but an effect that gives a big hit announcement.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407(a11), display is started in a manner in which the princess character HME vibrates. This notifies that the notice display corresponding to the princess character HME will start. Since the princess character HME is displayed so as to overlap the UI unit UI3, the display of the UI unit UI3 may be focused by the vibration display of the princess character HME.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a12), the state where the timer advance notice effect is started is shown in the area where the first preparing image RDY1 was displayed. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME is a timer notice effect. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the first preparing image RDY1 was displayed, and then the countdown is started. When the result of the countdown is "0:00", a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 407 (a12), “30:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407(a13), as a result of the countdown being performed, the timer display becomes “0:00”, and the countdown is completed. Then, the princess character HME rises and moves to a position different from the position of the first image in preparation RDY1 to notify that the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is started. That is, it can be said that the same effect as the display of “Go” described above with reference to FIG. 404(m) is being performed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407(a14), a super-reach transition display is performed, and a state of developing into a super-reach (swordsman reach) is shown. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME corresponds to the development of the swordsman reach. Also, although not shown, the family crest 224E rises and rotates, and overlaps with the front side of the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in this example of performance, the background color of the super-reach transition display is gold, and it is notified that the reliability of the big hit is high. The tutorial display section TT1 is hidden because the countdown by the timer display is completed. Further, after the super-reach shift display is started, the UI portion UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display portion TT1, and is hidden.

In this example of performance, all the preparation images are digested before the development of super reach, but at least one of them may be digested after the development of super reach. For example, the iron plate image TP is displayed. A mini game or a timer notice effect to be played may be performed.

FIG. 407(b1) shows that in the roulette effect described above with reference to FIG. 407(a2), only the grand area of the three areas is lit in red. That is, of the notice display corresponding to the grandpa character, the notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the notice display corresponding to the chibi-hime character, only the notice display corresponding to the grandpa character may be prepared. It has been informed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407(b2), the third in-preparation image RDY3 is displayed so that the grandfather character GII is adjacent to it. That is, the grandpa character GII appears at a position corresponding to the grandpa character GII, and the preparing image that appears with the grandpa character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the grandpa character GII. Therefore, in this example of performance, only the mini game with the drum DRM is played.

FIG. 408 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

The effect shown in FIG. 408(a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 407(a3), but “×2” is displayed in the area of Princess Chibi, and a notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi is displayed. It will be prepared twice.

Then, in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 408(a2), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed in the tutorial display portion TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and the upper left portion of the display screen is displayed. Is displayed such that the third in-preparation image RDY3 is adjacent to the grand character GII, and two Chibihime characters CHM1 and CHM2 are displayed below the third in-preparation image RDY3. In addition, when a plurality of effects by the grandfather character GII and the princess character HME are prepared, for example, two same characters can be displayed for one preparing image. Specifically, when a plurality of effects by the princess character HME are prepared, this can be realized by displaying one first preparing image RDY1 and displaying two princess character HMEs. Conversely, one character may be displayed and a plurality of images being prepared may be displayed.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 408(a3), one of the two Chibihime characters CHM1 CHIM1 moves upward, and in the lower left corner portion of the third preparing image RDY3. It is shown that they overlap. This notifies that the first notice display of the two notice displays corresponding to the Chibihime character CHM1 will start.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 408(a4), the animation in which the character CHM1 of Princess Chibi throws an object toward the variable icon h0 is shown. Then, when the object reaches the variation icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is difficult to visually recognize. That is, it is informed that the advance notice display is started due to the change of the display mode of the variable icon h0 corresponding to the princess Chibi character CMH1.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408(a5), the effect EF7 is erased and the variable icon h0 is in a state where it is easy to visually recognize. At this time, it is shown that the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the change notification by the variable icon h0 is started.

Further, in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 408(a6), the other little Chibi Princess character CHM2 of the two Chibi Princess characters moves upward, and the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3. It is shown that the parts overlap. As a result, it is notified that the second notice display corresponding to the Chibihime character CHM2 will start.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 408(a7), a state is shown in which an animation in which the Chibihime character CHM2 throws an object toward the variable icon h0 is performed. Then, when the object reaches the variation icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is difficult to visually recognize. That is, it is notified that the advance notice display by the variable icon is ranked higher due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon h0 corresponding to the princess Chibi character CMH2.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408(a8), the effect EF7 is erased and the variable icon h0 is in a state where it is easy to visually recognize. At this time, the display state of the change icon h0 is changed from the red notice display mode to the gold notice display mode, and the change notice h0 is ranked up.

FIG. 408(b1) to FIG. 408(b4) show another effect example following FIG. 408(a3). Since the effect shown in FIG. 408(b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 408(a4), description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408(b2), after the object thrown by the Chibihime character CHM1 reaches the fluctuation icon h0 and the effect EF7 is displayed, the entire display screen is darkened BL Is performed, the portion where the effect EF7 is displayed glows white, and the display is performed in a manner in which the light extends horizontally from there. At this time, the first in-preparation image RDY1 and the second in-preparation image RDY3 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are not displayed. It should be noted that, when another mini game is started while the change icon display of the variable icon h0 is being changed, the mini game may be temporarily hidden due to the darkness of the display screen. You can Further, when a plurality of preparing images are displayed, all the preparing images may be temporarily hidden, or only a part of the preparing images may be temporarily hidden. You may do it. In this way, the state in which the dark display BL is displayed may be referred to as the fourth state. Then, in this example of effect, in terms of the relationship between the first state in which the hold icon is displayed together with the UI unit UI3 and the second state in which the hold icon is hidden together with the UI unit UI3, From the state to the fourth state, it may be the second state after the first state again, or may be the second state from the first state, There may be a case where the first state changes to the fourth state and then the second state.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408(b3), it is shown that the light of the portion where the effect EF7 was displayed is enlarged and displayed.

After that, when the dark display ends, as shown in FIG. 408(b4), the variation icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the effect is restarted. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 408(b4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 408(a5), so description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 408(c1) to FIG. 408(c3) show another effect example following FIG. 407(a6). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 408(c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 407(a7), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408(c2), the display in a manner in which the grandfather character GII vibrates is started, and the “Go” in the area where the third in-preparation image RDY3 was displayed. Characters are displayed to inform that the mini game will be started. The display of "Go" may start after the grandpa character GII starts to vibrate, or the grandpa character GII may start to vibrate after the display of "Go" starts. The display of “Go” may be started at the timing when the old character GII starts to vibrate. This notifies that the advance notice display corresponding to the old character GII will start.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408(c3), the mini game is started in the area where the third in-preparation image RDY3 arranged adjacent to the grandfather character GII is displayed. Has been done. In this example of performance, when the mini game is started, the area in which the third in-preparation image RDY3 was displayed moves to the approximate center of the display screen, and the effect of rotation of the drum DRM is started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the area in which the mini game is played is performed in an area different from the area in which the in-preparation image was displayed. It should be noted that the case where the mini game is started after the display of "Go" may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the mini game is started without the display of "Go". .. In addition, a big hit may be more likely to occur when the mini game is enlarged and displayed than when the mini game is not enlarged and displayed. The display from the image in preparation to the start of the mini game, the timer notice effect, or the like may be performed in another area. When the third display and a certain notice display (a certain effect) are performed in the same area, the first display and the second display are performed in different places, so the display of the third display system is easier to understand. There are cases where the effect is produced.

FIG. 409 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the preliminary announcement effect that is applicable to the present embodiment. Here, the display device (display device 1) on which the left effect display is performed and the display device (display device 2) on which the right effect display is performed may be different display devices. In that case, a third display (a certain notice display) may be displayed on the display device 2.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409(a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 409(a), since one variable display of Toku-zu 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The change icon h0 has a red display mode, which is a change notice display mode, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 409(a). In addition, in this example of the effect, the decorative symbol is moved to the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is reduced and displayed. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 409(a) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 409(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

A family crest accessory 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yashiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409(b), the multi-chance up notice is started. When the multi-chance up notice is started, the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is divided into two left and right, and a left notice display area CUL and a right notice display area CUR are formed. In the left-hand notice display area CUL, "Chibihime participates in SP Reach due to annihilation" is displayed, and Chibihime warrior production is performed with the mission of princess annihilation of a large number of children. In the display area CUR, the display "Tomorrow's participation in SP reach" is displayed, and the grandfather and the lord perform a drink comparison, and the lord's mission is to win the drink comparison. In this example production, the mission in the Chibihime Musou production and the mission in the drinking comparison production are switched to super reach when at least one mission is achieved, and the reliability is improved when both missions are achieved. Has been done. In addition, the drinking comparison production may be started after the Chibihime Musou production is started, the Chibihime Musou production may be started after the drinking comparison production is started, and both productions are started at the same time. May be done. In addition, in this example of performance, if at least one of the mission in the Chibihime Musou production and the mission in the drinking comparison production is achieved, a big hit may be made.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 409(c), it is shown that the mini game is started in the tutorial display area TT1 during the execution of both the Chibihime Musou effect and the drinking comparison effect. There is. When the mini game is started, the mini character MC1 of the lord and the target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas that are divided into four equal parts, and the upper area of the four areas is the hit area. An arrow hits the hit area to give a chance advance notice. It is supposed to be. Note that the hit area is not limited to one, and may be a plurality of hit areas, all of the hit areas may be hit, or all the hit areas may be non-hit areas.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 409(d), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord has pierced the area around the target TGT. That is, the appearance of successful mini-game as a notice display is shown.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409(e), the chance up cut-in image WCI in which the word "chance" is displayed in the left notice display area CUL where the Chibihime Musou production is performed is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the mission in the Chibihime Musou production corresponding to the area in which the chance up cut-in image WCI is displayed is easier to achieve. As described above, in this effect example, the area in which the image RDY being prepared is displayed does not match the area in which the advance notice is displayed, which may make the player feel uncomfortable and improve the interest. .. Note that the chance-up cut-in image WCI may be displayed in the right-side notice display area CUR where the drinking comparison effect is performed, or the chance-up may be improved in both the left-side notice display area CUL and the right-side notice display area CUR. The cut-in image WUI may be displayed in some cases. Note that the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden because the mini game is over.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409(f), the state in which the minions are completely wiped out in the Chibihime Musou production displayed in the left notice display area CUL and the mission is achieved is shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409(g), the character "Wipe out" is displayed together with the display of Chibihime in the left notice display area CUL, and the mission in the Chibihime Musou production has been achieved. Has been announced. In the right-hand notice display area CUR, the effect of drinking comparison continues.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409(h), it is shown that the lord has won the grandfather in the drinking comparison effect displayed in the right notice display area CUR and the mission has been achieved.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409(i), the word "Victory" is displayed in the right advance notice display area CUR together with the display of the lord's up, indicating that the mission in the drinking comparison effect has been achieved. Has been done.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409(j), it is shown that the swordsman reach has started. It should be noted that when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained displayed by changing the display position downward. In this example of performance, the swordsman reach was started because the mission in the drinking comparison was completed, and because the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production was achieved, Princess Chibi appeared as an ally of the lord. In addition, if the mission in the drinking comparison production is achieved and the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production fails, it will move to the swordsman reach, but Chibi Princess will not appear, the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production has been achieved, and the drinking comparison production If the mission in fails, move to Super Reach for Princess Chibi. That is, in this effect, the contents of the effect to be subsequently developed differ depending on the success or failure of each of the two missions.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 409(k), the cut-in image HCI of the princess in which the characters of “chance” and the princess character are displayed is displayed on the background of horizontal stripes. As a result, the reliability of the big hit is improved, but it is not the notice display started via the mini game started from the image RDY in preparation or the timer notice production, and it is suggested that the reliability is not so high. ing.

FIG. 410 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect example of the effect shown in FIG. 409. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 410(a) and 410(b) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 409(a) and 409(b), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 410(c), the appearance of both the Chibihime Musou effect and the drinking comparison effect is shown. In this effect example, the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed, and the mini game has not yet started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the advance notice display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared is not started before the transition to the super reach. This effect continues from FIG. 410(c) to FIG. In FIG. 410(e), the chance up cut-in image WCI corresponding to the success of the mini game is not displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 410(f) to 410(j) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 410(f) to (j) are different from the effects shown in FIGS. 409(f) to (j) in that the tutorial display section TT1 displays the image RDY being prepared. The description is omitted because it is the same except for the above.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 410(k), the preparing image RDY is overlapped with the effect EF5, the displaying of the preparing image RDY ends, and a notice display corresponding to the preparing image RDY is displayed. It has been announced that it will be started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 410(l), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the preparing image RDY was displayed. When the mini game is started, the mini character MC1 of the lord and the target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas that are divided into four equal parts, and the upper area of the four areas is the hit area. An arrow hits the hit area to give a chance advance notice. It is supposed to be. Note that the hit area is not limited to one, and may be a plurality of hit areas, all of the hit areas may be hit, or all the hit areas may be non-hit areas.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 410(m), an arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord is stuck in the area around the target TGT. That is, the appearance of successful mini-game as a notice display is shown.

Then, the iron plate image TP is displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 410(n). This iron plate image TP is a notice display for notifying that the big hit is confirmed. As described above, in this example performance, the mini game is started after the transition to the super reach, and the reliability is higher than that when the mini game is started and the corresponding notice display is displayed before the transition to the super reach. The high notice is displayed.

FIG. 411 is a diagram showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment step by step. Since the effect shown in FIG. 411(a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 407(a1), description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411(a2), "reach when caught" is displayed, showing that the chasing performance with the mission of catching Echigoya is started. There is. When the chase effect is started, a sub window WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and a display (main display) relating to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 411(a1). Is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, it may be possible to grasp the situation of the symbol variable display in the background before a certain effect is executed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411(a3), it is shown that the lord is close to the Echigoya. On the other hand, in the sub window WP3, the main display is continued.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 411(a4), the state in which the lord has caught Echigoya and the mission has been achieved is shown. As a result, the fact that reach is reached is notified. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 may display the in-preparation image RDY to display that the reach is being prepared. As a result, by displaying the notice display corresponding to the result of the mission (mini game) in stock, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the reach as the notice display occurs.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411(a5), the chase effect is finished, the main display displayed in the sub window WP3 is again displayed on the entire display screen, and then the "decoration 4" is reached. The situation is shown. In this performance example, it is shown that the reach has occurred due to the success of the mission in the chase performance. In addition, when the main display is displayed on the entire screen, the sub window WP3 may be enlarged (wipe display) or may be switched. Further, when the main display is a full screen display, the preparing image RDY may be displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

411(b1) to FIG. 411(b2) show another example of effects relating to the display of the sub-window during execution of the chase effect shown in FIGS. 411(a1) to (a5).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411(b1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 411(b1), since one variable display of Toku-zu 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The change icon h0 has a red display mode, which is the display mode of the notice, while the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 411(b1) displays the first in-preparation image RDY1. In addition, a third in-preparation image RDY3 is displayed in the upper left portion of the display screen. In addition, in this example of the effect, the decorative symbol is moved to the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is reduced and displayed. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 411(b1) is in a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 409(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

A family crest accessory 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yashiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411(b2), the chasing effect described above is started. When the chase effect is started, a sub window WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and a display (main display) relating to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 411(b1). Is displayed. The first in-preparation image RDY1 and the third in-preparation image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two in-preparation images RDY1 and RDY3, only the first in-preparation image RDY1 displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed in the sub-window WP3 in the sub-window WP3, and the third in-preparation image RDY3 is displayed. Is not displayed in the sub window WP3. In this way, even in this effect example, it may be possible to grasp the situation of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain effect (chase effect) is executed. In this example of performance, the sub window WP3 and the preparing image are displayed at positions that do not overlap each other, but the preparing image may overlap the sub window WP3 and the preparing image may overlap the sub window WP3. You may make it overlap.

FIGS. 411(c1) to (c2) show another example of the effect shown in FIGS. 411(b1) to (b2). Since the effect shown in FIG. 411(c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 411(b1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411(c2), the chasing effect described above has been started. When the chase effect is started, a sub window WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and a display (main display) relating to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 411(c1). Is displayed. In addition, in this example of performance, among the first in-preparation image RDY1 and the third in-preparation image RDY3, the third in-preparation image RDY3 is continuously displayed without changing the display position. RDY1 is displayed only in the sub-window WP3 as the main display is displayed in the sub-window WP3, and the first in-preparation image RDY1 displayed at the position that has been displayed so far is deleted.

FIG. 411(d1) to FIG. 411(d2) show the display mode of the image during preparation when the background display is tilted. Note that the effect example shown in FIG. 411(d1) is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 409(a), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411(d2), the background display is reduced to about 3/4, and the reduced background image is tilted counterclockwise by about 10 degrees to perform a shake vision effect. Is shown. In this case, the in-preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, the in-preparation image RDY is shown not to be tilted together with the background display.

FIG. 412 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 412(a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 407(a1), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 412(a2), the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed as if the UI unit UI3 is lifted. There is. Specifically, the first step-up display unit SUA has the same width as the UI unit UI3, the letter "A" indicating the first stage of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side, and the right side thereof. Has a mini game display area for playing a mini game as a step-up notice.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412(a3), a state where the mini game is started in the mini game display area is shown. When the mini game is started, "strike" is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display showing how the lord's character throws a bowling ball is displayed. That is, this mini game is a bowling chance game whose mission is to strike in the bowling game.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 412(a4), a state in which a lord's character throws a bowling ball and heads toward ten pins arranged in a pyramid shape is shown.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412(a5), a bowling ball collides with a pin, all 10 pins fall and become a strike, and it is shown that the mission has been achieved. ..

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (a6), the preparing image RDY is displayed in the tutorial display portion TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. .. The background image of the preparing image RDY is green, which is the default display mode.

When the bowling chance game ends, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412(a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward to frame out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

FIGS. 412 (b1) to (b8) describe another example of the effect of the step-up notice. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 412(b1) to 4(b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 412(a1) to 412(a2), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412(b3), the second step-up display unit SUB rises from below the first step-up display unit SUA, and the UI unit UI3 and the first step-up display unit SUA are lifted. This is how it is displayed. Specifically, the second step-up display section SUB also has the same width as the UI section UI3, the letter "B" indicating the second stage of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side, and the right side thereof. Has a mini game display area for playing a mini game as a step-up notice. In this example of performance, the minigame is played on the second step-up display unit SUB more easily than the minigame is played on the first step-up display unit SUA. In addition, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the mini game succeeds on the second step-up display unit SUB than when the mini game succeeds on the first step-up display unit SUA.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (b4), a state where the mini game is started in the mini game display area is shown. When the mini game is started, the display of "Let me cup in" is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display showing how the lord's character is putting is displayed. That is, this mini game is a golf game whose mission is to put in a cup with a putt.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (b5), the appearance of the lord's character putting and the golf ball moving toward the cup is shown.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (b6), the state where the golf ball is cup-in and the mission is achieved is shown.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412(b7), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed in the tutorial display portion TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. .. In addition, the background color of the image RDY being prepared is red, and it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is high.

When the bowling chance game ends, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (b8), the first step-up display unit SUA and the second step-up display unit SUB move downward to frame out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

It should be noted that in this example of performance, an example in which the bowling chance game and the golf game are successful has been described. Alternatively, in the golf game, a display indicating that the player did not cup in may be displayed to notify the mission failure. In addition, in this example of performance, the lord's character appears in the bowling chance game and the golf game, but other characters may appear, for example, when the princess character appears, the lord's character appears. It may be suggested that the reliability of the big hit is higher than the case.

FIG. 413 is a diagram for explaining another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. 412. Since the effect shown in FIG. 413(a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 412(a1), description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 413(a2), the first step-up display unit SUA is raised from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed as if the UI unit UI3 is lifted. There is. At this time, the explanation display and the variation icon h0 displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 are deleted. That is, in this effect example, a state in which a certain object in the UI unit UI3 is hidden when the first step-up display unit SUA appears is shown. The explanation display may be erased after the first step-up display unit SUA starts displaying, the first step-up display unit SUA may be displayed after the explanation display is deleted, or The explanation display may be erased at the timing when the one-step-up display unit SUA is displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 413(a3) to (a5) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 413(a3) to (a5) are not shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 as well as the effects shown in FIGS. 412(a3) to (a5). The description is omitted because it is the same except that the variable icon h0 is not displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 413(a6), the state in which the mission is achieved is continuously shown.

When the bowling chance game ends, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 413(a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and frames out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position. The explanation display and the variation icon h0 remain hidden.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 413(a8), the change icon h0 is displayed again in a red display mode. That is, it is shown that the change icon h0 is changed to the change notice display mode and is displayed again. It should be noted that the preparation image RDY may be displayed before the display state of the variable icon h0 changes and is displayed again, and the mini game, the timer notice effect, or the like may be passed through.

FIGS. 413(b1) to 413(b3) show another display mode of the step-up notice effect. The effect shown in FIG. 413(b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 413(a1), but is different in that four pedestals in the hold icon display area are not displayed.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 413(b2), the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed as if the UI unit UI3 is lifted. There is. At this time, the explanation display and the variation icon h0 displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 are deleted. Further, in this effect example, the display position of the hold icon h11 is not changed despite the upward movement of the UI unit UI3, and therefore, the hold icon h11 overlaps the mini game display area of the first step-up display unit SUA. Is shown. That is, when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, it can be said that a certain display (holding icon h11) does not move even if the UI unit UI3 moves.

FIG. 413(b3) The first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the bowling chance game has started in the mini game display area. As described above, since the hold icon h11 overlaps the mini game display area, a part of the character display of “strike” is hidden. That is, it can be said that a part of the mini game is hidden by the hold icon h11.

FIG. 414 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414(a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 414(a), since one variable display of Toku-zu 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The change icon h0 has a red display mode, which is a change notice display mode, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and is hidden in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 414(a). The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 414(a) has a default display mode displayed in blue. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414(a), a state of transition to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative design displayed on the first decorative design display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative design display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative design display device 208L. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the reach state is the "decoration 4". In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display for transitioning to super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E is raised and rotated, and the lower center part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps with the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and a part of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are made difficult to visually recognize because they are overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest monument 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display section TT1. It is informed that the family crest part 224E is moved up to the super reach by the rising/rotating operation.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 414(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, the family crest monument 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yashiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.
In FIG. 414(b), a state in which the family crest part 224E is returned to the initial position is shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414(c), a state is shown in which an animation (UI part FO animation) in which the UI part UI3 is framed out below the display screen is started. When the UI part FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is erased.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 414(d) to 414(f), the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the variable icon h0 does not frame out together with the UI unit UI3, and the display state is maintained with the display position lowered as shown in FIG. 414(f).
FIG. 414(g) shows that the swordsman reach has started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414(h), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA is raised and the variable icon h0 is displayed so as to be lifted. That is, in this effect example, since the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but since the variable icon h0 is displayed, it is shown that only the variable icon h0 is moving. You can

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414(i), the bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, "strike" is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display showing how the lord's character throws a bowling ball is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414(j), a state in which a lord's character throws a bowling ball and heads toward 10 pins arranged in a pyramid shape is shown.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414(k), the bowling ball collides with the pins, all 10 pins fall and become strikes, and it is shown that the mission has been achieved. ..

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414(l), the in-preparation image RDY appears at the lower right corner of the display screen, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. To be done. The background image of the preparing image RDY is green, which is the default display mode. Further, FIG. 414(l) shows that the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and frames out. At this time, the in-preparation image RDY is overlapped with the first step-up display unit SUA, and as shown in FIG. 414(m), at least one image is displayed until the frame-out of the first step-up display unit SUA is completed. The part is difficult to see.

FIG. 415 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415(a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 415(a1), since one variable display of Toku-zu 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The change icon h0 has a red display mode, which is the display mode of the notice, while the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 415(a1) displays the first in-preparation image RDY1. The background color of the first in-preparation image RDY1 is green, which is the default display mode. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 415(a1) has a default display mode in blue. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415(a1), a state of transition to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative design displayed on the first decorative design display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative design display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative design display device 208L. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the reach state is the "decoration 4". In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display for transitioning to super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E is raised and rotated, and the lower center part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps with the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and a part of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are made difficult to visually recognize because they are overlapped by the family crest 224E. The family crest monument 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display section TT1. It is informed that the family crest part 224E is moved up to the super reach by the rising/rotating operation. In this effect example, an example in which the first in-preparation image RDY1 is already displayed when shifting to the super reach is shown.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 415(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, the family crest monument 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yashiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

FIG. 415(a2) shows a state in which the family crest monument 224E has returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 415(a3), a state is shown in which an animation (UI part FO animation) in which the UI part UI3 is framed out below the display screen is started. When the UI part FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is erased.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 415(a4) to 415(a6), the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the variable icon h0 and the first in-preparation image RDY1 do not frame out together with the UI unit UI3, and as shown in FIG. 415(a6), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the lower display position. The display state of the first in-preparation image RDY1 is maintained without changing the display position.
FIG. 415(a7) shows that the swordsman reach has started.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415(a8) shows that the first step-up display unit SUA is raised and the variable icon h0 is displayed so as to be lifted. That is, in this effect example, since the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but since the variable icon h0 is displayed, it is shown that only the variable icon h0 is moving. You can Further, the first in-preparation image RDY1 is displayed without overlapping the display position and overlapping the first step-up display SUA. The first in-preparation image RDY1 may be overlapped with the first step-up display SUA. The first step-up display unit SUA may be raised and the first in-preparation image RDY1 may be moved upward.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415(a9), it is shown that the above-mentioned bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, "strike" is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display showing how the lord's character throws a bowling ball is displayed. However, the mini-game display area of the first step-up display SUA overlaps the first in-preparation image RDY1 and is more difficult to visually recognize than the non-overlapping state. The same applies to the following effects.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415(a10), a state in which a lord's character throws a bowling ball and heads toward ten pins arranged in a pyramid shape is shown.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415(a11), the bowling ball collides with the pins, all 10 pins fall and become strikes, and it is shown that the mission has been achieved. ..

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415(a12), the third in-preparation image RDY3 appears in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. Is notified. That is, when a certain number of preparing images are displayed in a certain area and a new preparing image is displayed, the new preparing image is displayed in another area. You can The background color of the third in-preparation image RDY3 is green, which is the default display mode. Further, as shown in FIGS. 415(a12) to 415(a12), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward to frame out.

FIG. 415(b1) to FIG. 415(b2) are diagrams showing another display mode of the UI part FO animation. Note that FIG. 415(b1) is an effect following FIG. 415(a3). Further, the effect shown in FIG. 411(b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 415(a4), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415(b2), it is shown that the swordsman reach is started after the UI part FO animation is completed. In this effect example, the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation, but it is shown that only the pedestal on which the variable icon h0 is placed is kept displayed with the display position lowered. That is, even if the UI unit UI3 is framed out, a part of the UI unit UI3 is displayed.
FIG. 416 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the pseudo continuous effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416(a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged in the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 416(a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 all have default display modes. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 416(a1). Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 416(a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 409(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yashiro actor 224Fa, which is one of the production movable bodies. And a general character object 224Fb are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416(a2), the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, "decoration 6" on the left symbol and "decoration 7" on the right symbol, respectively. It is shown that the display is stopped. The middle symbols are being displayed in a variable manner.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416(a3), the changing speed of the middle symbol is low, and the pseudo continuous symbol composed of the lord's pattern is scrolling in from above the display screen. ing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416(a4), a state where the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is shown.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416(a5), the pseudo-relational pattern stop animation that produces whether or not to start the pseudo-relational is started. When the pseudo-relational pattern stop animation is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation, leaving the variable icon h0 and the preparing image RDY. Here, the UI part FO animation may be started after the pseudo continuous symbol stop animation starts, or the pseudo continuous symbol stop animation may start after the UI part FO animation starts, or the pseudo continuous symbol. The UI part FO animation may be started at the timing when the stop animation is started. Further, the pseudo-relational pattern stop animation may be started after the UI part FO animation is completed. As described above, in this effect example, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed in a certain state such as when the pseudo-relation effect is performed or when the pseudo-relation effect is established. When the pseudo continuous symbol stop animation is started, the pseudo continuous symbol expands laterally as shown in FIGS. 416(a5) to (a7).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416(a6), the pseudo continuous symbol is further expanded and overlaps the left symbol and the right symbol, so that the left symbol and the right symbol are difficult to see. ing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416(a7), the pseudo continuous symbol is further expanded, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed. It is displayed throughout. At this time, the pseudo continuous pattern is also expanded in the vertical direction, and a part thereof is overlapped by the in-preparation image RDY. In addition, the pseudo-relational pattern is also overlapped with the stage name display portion ST1, the reception count display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device. It is also overlapped with the lord's character displayed in 208N and the second hold number display. In addition, at this time, the family crest monument 224E starts to rise and partially overlaps the pseudo continuous symbol.

Then, as shown in FIG. 416(a8), the family crest monument 224E rotates, the voice “don” is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that the pseudo-relation is performed.

FIG. 416(a9) shows a state in which the pseudo-relational pattern stop animation ends, the pseudo-relational pattern is displayed in the original display mode, and the UI unit UI3 is framed in by the frame-in animation (UI unit FI animation). Has been done. It should be noted that the UI section FI animation may be started after the pseudo-relational stop animation ends, the UI section FI animation may be started before the pseudo-relational stop animation ends, or the pseudo-relational stop The UI part FI animation may be started at the timing when the animation ends. In addition, the decorative pattern is in a temporary stop state due to the fluctuation in the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 6-pseudo-relational pattern-decoration 7”, and then the second variation display of the decorative pattern by pseudo-relation is started. It

FIG. 416(b1) to FIG. 416(b3) show an example of display before and after the production of the Stetchen effect performed at the time of mode transition or stage change. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 416(b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 416(a1), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 416 (b2), the Stetchen effect is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed in the dark, respectively, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. It is shown that the light is emitted from the center and light rays extend from the center to the left and right. At this time, the light rays are displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this effect example, the UI unit UI3 is hidden during the dark display by the Stetchen effect. Further, in this effect example, it is also shown that the in-preparation image RDY is not displayed at the time of the dark display by the Stetchen effect. Further, during the dark display, the preparing image RDY may be ended and the mini game or the timer notice effect may be started.

FIG. 416(b3) shows a state in which the production of Stetchen has ended. In this example of performance, the same display as before the start of the Stetchen effect is displayed after the end of the Stetchen effect. In other words, it is shown that it was a fake Stechen effect in which neither mode transition nor stage change was performed.

FIG. 417 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the button advance notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 417(a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 417(a), since one variable display of Toku-zu 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The change icon h0 has a red display mode, which is a change notice display mode, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and is not displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 417(a). Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 417(a) has a notice display mode displayed in gold. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 417(a), it is shown that the swordsman reach has started. Specifically, the decorative design displayed on the first decorative design display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative design display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative design display device 208L. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the reach state is the "decoration 4". In this effect example, the UI unit UI3 is displayed even while the swordsman reach is being executed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, all of the stage name display portion ST1, the number-of-acceptance display 850, and the stock button image 852 are deleted, and the background display is also the background display of Swordsman Reach.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed in the upper part of the display screen, but the lord's character is not displayed. The background display is also the background display of Swordsman Reach.

Further, the family crest monument 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yashiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 417(b), a united animation is started, and a pair of semitransparent button images 136q are displayed from above and to the right of the display screen. Are moving. Note that the operation of the effect button 136 has not been accepted while the combined animation is being displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 417(c), a state is shown immediately before the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q come close to each other and the combination is completed. In the effect example shown in FIG. 417(c), when the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q come close to each other, the effect EF6 causes at least a part of the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q to overlap with each other, as compared with the state where they do not overlap. It is difficult to visually recognize the semi-transparent button image 136q. Therefore, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the united animation succeeds. Also, in FIG. 417(c), it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. The effect EF6 may be displayed after the UI unit UI3 is framed out, the effect EF6 may be displayed before the UI unit UI3 is framed out, or the effect EF6 may be displayed at the timing when the UI unit UI3 is framed out. EF6 may be displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 417(d), the united animation has succeeded, the deca button image 136aL is materialized, and the button advance notice effect is started, and the remaining time meter MT is also displayed to indicate the operation acceptance state. It has been shown to have started. As described above, in this effect example, the UI unit UI3 is hidden at least during the period in which the button advance notice effect is being performed using the button image 136a (the large button image 136aL).
FIG. 418 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of effects that can be applied to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 418(a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 418(a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 all have default display modes. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 418(a1), “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed, and the panda character is displayed. And the relationship with Tonosama's character. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 418 (a1), the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed as a lost design, and the first decorative pattern display device 208L displays the "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 6" loss. It is displayed as a stop with a combination of decorative patterns. Further, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol 284a1 is also lit in the display mode of the loss. Note that the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 416(a1) is in the advance notice display mode displayed in red.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 409(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yashiro actor 224Fa, which is one of the production movable bodies. And a general character object 224Fb are arranged.

In FIG. 418 (a2), the state in which the symbols are still displayed is shown. At this time, the variable icon h0 is deleted in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

After that, when the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the UI portion wipe display portion WP4 that covers the entire UI portion UI3 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 418(a3). , A character riding a motorcycle frames in from the left side of the UI wipe display unit WP4 and sprints toward the right end as shown in FIGS. 418(a3) to (a5). .. That is, in this effect example, the UI part wipe display part WP4 is displayed in order to return the display mode of the UI part UI3 from the notice display mode to the default display mode, and the effect display is performed on the UI part wipe display part WP4. In some cases, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 can be changed naturally. In addition, for example, when the display is returned to the original display due to a loss in the super reach effect, the entire display screen may be covered with the wipe display section and the effect display may be performed on the wipe display section.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 418(a6), the appearance by the character of the lord on the UI wipe display unit WP4 is finished, and the UI wipe display unit WP4 is erased. When the UI section wipe display section WP4 is erased and the UI section UI3 is displayed, the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and the change icon is displayed. It becomes h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11, and moves to the corresponding pedestal. In the tutorial display section TT1, the display "Tonosama is Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed, and the explanation display changes before and after the UI wipe display section WP4.

In addition, in this effect example, the UI wipe display unit WP4 may not be displayed or may be displayed while the preparing image RDY is displayed. When the UI wipe display unit WP4 is displayed while the preparing image RDY is displayed, the preparing image RDY is hidden during that time, and as a result, the preparing image RDY is displayed unintentionally. The mini game or the timer notice effect may be started after the end.

FIG. 418(b1) to FIG. 418(b4) show an example of the display on the tutorial display unit TT1.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 418(b1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 418(b1), since one variable display of Toku-zu 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The change icon h0 is displayed in gold and is in the display mode of the change notice, while the hold icon h11 is in the default display mode. The family coat emblem 224E also emits light in gold according to the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and is hidden in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 418(b1). Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 418(b1) has a default display mode in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 418(b1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yashiro actor 224Fa, which is one of the production movable bodies. And a general character object 224Fb are arranged.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 418(b2) to (b4), a mode in which the swordsman character scrolls in from below in the tutorial display section TT1 and continuously moves the line of sight from the crown to the feet Shows that the swordsman character is scrolled. Also, as shown in FIG. 418(b4), after the swordsman character's feet are displayed, the swordsman character is scroll-displayed in such a manner that the line of sight is continuously moved from the feet to the crown. That is, a continuous scroll display between the top of the swordsman's character and the feet is displayed in a reciprocating manner. In this effect example, an example in which the entire character is displayed by continuously scrolling and displaying a part of the character in the tutorial display unit TT1 is shown.

In this effect example, for example, when the explanation display is not resumed or only the hold icon is hidden (the UI unit UI3 is displayed), a certain display is performed by using a part of the UI unit UI3. Can be said to be shown for an example of doing.

FIG. 419 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effects applicable to the present embodiment. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 to which the effect example shown in FIG. 419 can be applied, for example, can be divided into a first special figure starting port and a second special figure starting port for one starting port, and a symbol in a normal game state. There is a so-called MAX 8 machine (may be referred to as 8 maintenance order machine) capable of holding 8 variable displays. Here, a description will be given by taking eight MAX machines as an example.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 419(a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0 so that eight hold icons can be displayed and four pedestals are arranged in a zigzag pattern at the front and rear. At the timing shown in FIG. 419(a1), since seven variable displays of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 are held in total, seven holding icons h1 to h7 are displayed in the holding icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h7 all have default display modes. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the change icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 419(a1), “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed and an explanation display is displayed. It is being appreciated. In addition, in this example of the effect, the decorative symbol is moved to the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is reduced and displayed. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 419(a1) is in a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 419(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. According to the second hold number display, at the timing shown in FIG. 419(a1), it is informed that four special maps 1 are held and three special maps 2 are held. Further, a family crest monument 224E is arranged below the first decorative pattern display device 208L. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yashiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

FIG. 419(a2) shows that the game balls have entered the second special figure starting port and the total of eight special figures 1 and 2 are reserved. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the eighth hold icon h8 is displayed, the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7 and the variable icon h0 which are already displayed. It is shown that the display mode of is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of a grandfather that imitates the face of a grandfather. Also, the UI unit UI3 has changed from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “Pong” to notify that the hold is full. In this example of effect, an example of effect in which the UI unit UI3, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 are changed all at once when the hold is full. In addition, in this effect example, the number of times of symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon in which the display mode of the grandfather is displayed may be notified.

FIG. 419(b1) shows that a swordsman reach is being performed. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 419(b1), the second hold number display is displayed. According to the second hold number display, at the timing shown in FIG. 419(b1), the special figure 1 is displayed. It is informed that four are reserved and three special maps 2 are reserved.

FIG. 419(b2) shows that the game balls have entered the second special figure starting port and the total of eight special figures 1 and 2 are reserved. Specifically, in the second hold number display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is informed that four special maps 1 are held and four special maps 2 are held, and the speaker 120 is also held. From this, the sound "Pong" is output to notify that the hold is full.

FIG. 419(b3) shows that the player lost the game in the super reach, the production of the swordsman reach was completed, and the display returned to the castle town stage display. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the swordsman reach is finished and the process returns to the castle town stage, a combination of lost decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4" is displayed and shakes. A temporary stop display due to fluctuation is displayed. Also, because the holding tank is full while the production of Swordsman Reach is being executed, the UI section UI3 is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, and all the change icons h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 are changed. Has changed from the default display mode to the old display mode. In this example of performance, if the UI unit UI3 is hidden and becomes full while the UI unit UI3 is hidden, when the UI unit UI3 is redisplayed, the UI unit UI3, the change icon, and the hold icon are displayed. An example of the effect of changing the display mode is shown.

FIGS. 419(c1) to (c4) are diagrams illustrating another aspect of the effect example shown in FIGS. 419(b1) to (b3). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 419(c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 419(b1) to (b2), description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 419(c3), it is shown that the player lost the game in the super-reach, the production of the swordsman reach was completed, and the display returned to the castle town stage. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the swordsman reach is finished and the process returns to the castle town stage, a combination of lost decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4" is displayed and shakes. A temporary stop display due to fluctuation is displayed. In addition, in this example of performance, while the production of the swordsman reach is being performed, the holding tank is full, but the UI unit UI3, the change icon h0, and the holding icons h1 to h8 are not changed, and the holding tank is full. The character "MAX" indicating that it has been displayed is displayed above the variable icon h0. After that, the symbols are confirmed and displayed in a state where the display modes of the UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 do not change.

After that, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 419(c4), the UI unit UI3 changes from the default display aspect to the special display aspect displayed in gold, and changes. All of the icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 change from the default display mode to the grandpa display mode. After that, the hold icons h1 to h8 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h1 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to be the change icon h0, The hold icons at the display positions of the second hold icon h2 to the eighth hold icon h8 become the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7, respectively, and move to the corresponding pedestals. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 419(c4), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the tutorial display section TT1, "Panda is master of lord" is displayed and explanation is displayed.
FIG. 420 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effects applicable to the present embodiment.

FIG. 420(a1) to FIG. 420(a3) and FIG. 420(b1) to FIG. 420(b2) are diagrams for explaining another aspect of the effect example shown in FIG. In the effect examples shown in FIG. 420(a1) to FIG. 420(a3) and FIG. 420(b1) to FIG. 420(b2), the UI unit UI4 has a variable icon display area, a hold icon display area, a tutorial display section TT4, and a stage name. The display portion ST2 and the display portion ST2 are integrally displayed on the lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Even in this example of performance, when the super reach is reached, the UI portion is framed out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed without being framed out even when the super reach is reached. You can leave it alone. When the notice icon is stocked, the explanation display on the tutorial display section TT4 or the stage name display section ST2 is erased. Further, in this example of production, the image in preparation can be displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 or the stage name display section ST2.

As shown in FIG. 420(a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI portion UI4 surrounded by a rectangular frame is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI section UI4 shown in FIG. 420(a1) has a hold icon display area formed in the center thereof. The hold icon display area is divided into four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. Further, a variable icon display area is formed in the upper center of the UI unit UI4, and the variable icon is displayed in such a manner that it is placed on the frame formed by the UI unit UI4. At the timing shown in FIG. 420(a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 both have default display modes. A tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display section TT1 and the stage name display section ST1 described above, description thereof will be omitted here. Note that the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 420(a1) displays "Due to the completion of the notice icon...", and the stage name display section ST2 displays "Castle town stage". It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is also displayed.

In addition, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224F and the general officer symbol. 224Fb is arranged.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 420(a2) shows that the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 is switched to the first in-preparation image RDY1. The first preparing image RDY1 has a background color of green and has a default display mode.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 420(a3), the state where the display of the stage name displayed on the stage name display portion ST2 is switched to the fourth in-preparation image RDY4 is shown. The fourth preparing image RDY4 has a green background color, and has a default display mode. As described above, in this effect example, an example in which the image in preparation is displayed in each of the plurality of explanation display portions is shown.

FIG. 420(b1) to FIG. 420(b2) are diagrams showing another example of effects following FIG. 420(a1). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 420(b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 420(a2), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 420(b2), the stage name displayed on the stage name display portion ST2 is continuously displayed, and the fourth preparation image RDY4 is displayed on the stage name display portion ST2. It is shown that it is displayed at a position shifted upward. That is, it is shown that the image under preparation overlaps a part of the area where the explanation display is displayed. Note that it is also possible to apply such a display mode in the tutorial display unit TT4.

FIG. 420(c1) to FIG. 420(c7) are diagrams showing another aspect of the effect shown in FIG. 140. Here, FIG. 420(c1) is an effect following FIG. 140(c). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 420(c1) to (c4) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 140(d) to 140(g), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 420(c5), the state in which the family crest monument 224E descends toward the initial position is shown. Then, the portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to visually recognize it. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. This shuriken SH1 is moving toward the tutorial display section TT1.

After that, FIG. 420(c6) shows that the family crest monument 224E is returned to the initial position. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the tutorial display section TT1, and the effect EF2 in which a part of the tutorial display section TT1 explodes is displayed. This effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize a part of the tutorial display section TT1. As a result, the player may have an expectation that a notice display may be displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 to increase the reliability of the big hit. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 420(c7), the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 to notify that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. .. The image RDY being prepared has a green background color and is in a default display mode. In this effect, instead of the image RDY being prepared, a timer notice display may be displayed to start the timer notice effect, a mini game may be started, or a notice display may be performed. ..

FIG. 421 is a diagram illustrating another aspect of the effect example shown in FIGS. 154(b-1) to 154(b-5).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 421(a1), the UI unit UI2 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the UI unit UI2 in this example of performance, a hold icon display area is formed on the left side. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, each of which constitutes a hold display frame, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 421(a1), the four hold icons are accommodated in each frame in the hold icon display area, and the second hold icon among the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 is stored. The hold icon h12 is a display mode of the prefetching notice (for example, a display mode that lights in blue), and the other hold icons are default display modes. Further, a variable icon display area is formed above the frame accommodating the first hold icon h11, and the variable icon h0 is displayed in this variable icon display area during symbol variable display. Here, the area in which the variable icon h0 is displayed may be included in the UI unit UI2. A tutorial display section TT7 is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 421(a1), the tutorial display unit TT7 displays the preparing image RDY. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. It should be noted that none of the variable icon h0 and the first holding icon h11 to the fourth holding icon h14 overlaps the decorative symbol.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen. In this production example, none of the stage name display portion ST1, the number-of-acceptances display 850, and the stock button image 852 are displayed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed in the upper part of the display screen, but the lord's character is not displayed. The background display is also the background display of Swordsman Reach.

In addition, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb are arranged. Has been done. At the timing shown in FIG. 421(a1), the family crest monument 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 421(a2), the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed. The hold icon display area can be enlarged and displayed by, for example, an animation display that gradually enlarges. At the timing shown in FIG. 421(a2), the hold display frame accommodating the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the prefetch notice, is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the hold display frame accommodating the second hold icon h12 is displayed in an expanded form. Further, in this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT7 is off the display screen due to the enlarged display of the hold display frame, but the preparation image RDY displayed in the tutorial display unit TT7 does not change the display position. , Is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen separately from the tutorial display section TT7. At this time, the image RDY being prepared may overlap a part of the hold display frame or the hold icon. At the timing shown in FIG. 421(a2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 421(a3), the emission color of the family crest monument 224E that has emitted blue light changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is changed from blue to green.

Then, as shown in FIG. 421(a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the enlarged second hold icon h12 is changed from blue to green. As a result, the player may be able to increase his/her expectation for the big hit for the variable display of symbols relating to the suspension corresponding to the second suspension icon h12.

Then, as shown in FIG. 421(a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced and the default display mode is restored. The reduction display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually reduces. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this way, and the display mode of the hold icon can be changed with the expanded hold display frame. In addition, in this effect example, the image RDY being prepared is displayed in the tutorial display portion TT7 that appears by reducing the hold icon display area.

421(b1) to FIG. 421(b2) show another form of the effect example shown in FIG. 421(a1) to FIG. 421(a5). Since the effect shown in FIG. 421(b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 421(a1), description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 421(b2), the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed in the same manner as shown in FIG. 421(a2). At this time, the hold icon display area is displayed below the display screen and overlaps with the enlarged display hold icon by the preparing image RDY. In the production example shown in FIG. 421(b2), the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and relates to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 421(b1). The display (main display) is displayed. Although the UI unit UI2 is not displayed in the display in the sub window WP3, it may be displayed. Further, the sub window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged and displayed hold icon display area. As described above, in this effect example, it may be possible to grasp the situation of the symbol variable display in the background before a certain effect is executed.

Subsequently, a display example of a warning display when a ball-squeezing error occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 422 to 424. Here, FIG. 422 is a diagram showing a display example of a ball removal error display, FIG. 423 is a diagram showing a display example of a ball removal error display, and FIG. 424 is a display example of a ball removal error display. It is a figure. It should be noted that the display position of the warning error of the ball removal error (hereinafter referred to as “ball removal error display”) is set to a fixed place, but which position is to be displayed can be set appropriately. is there. In the following description, a display example including variations of the display position of the ball-out error display is shown below. It should be noted that this ball removal error display is erased when the ball removal button 130 is operated to clear the lower plate full state and the ball removal error is resolved. Further, in the example of the effect described below, a display example of the ball removal error display is shown, but the present invention can be applied to, for example, a door opening error that occurs when the front frame door 106 is opened. Further, the error sound may be output together with the ball removal error display, or may not be output.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 422(a1) to (a2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 391(c) to (d). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422(a1), a state is shown in which the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed overlapping with a part of the tutorial display portion TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. ing. In the ball removal error display ERR1, a message "Please remove the ball" is displayed to prompt the player to produce the game balls stored in the lower tray to eliminate the full tank state.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422(a2), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the tutorial display portion TT1 in which the shutter image is opened and the preparing image RDY is displayed. It is shown as being displayed. As a result, it may be possible to notice the image RDY being prepared by looking at the ball-out display. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY being prepared. In addition, it may be possible to entertain the effect display that is being performed by quickly removing the ball and deleting the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the in-preparation image RDY is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball-out error display ERR1 and the in-preparation image RDY.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 422(b1) to (b2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 393(c1) to (c2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422(b1), it is shown that the remaining time display meter MT4 partially overlaps the ball-out error display ERR1. That is, in this example of performance, it can be said that one of the timer notices made up of a plurality of displays is overlapped by the ball-out error display ERR1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 422(b2), when the remaining time display meter MT4 becomes shorter as the remaining time of the timer display becomes shorter, the overlapped state due to the ball removal error display ERR1 is eliminated and the remaining time display meter is MT4 becomes easy to visually recognize. As a result, it may be possible to notice the remaining time display meter MT4 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the remaining time display meter MT4. In addition, it may be possible to entertain the effect display that is being performed by quickly removing the ball and deleting the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the remaining time meter MT4 is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the remaining time meter MT4.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 422(c1) to (c2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 394(b4) to (b5). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422(c1), the ball-out error display ERR1 overlaps the enemy swordsman character, but the semi-transparent button image 136q related to the coalescence animation overlaps. It is shown that there is no. At this time, the ball-out error display ERR1 may overlap the semi-transparent button image 136q in the united animation.

Then, as shown in FIG. 422(c2), when the semi-transparent button image 139q approaches, a part of the ball-out error display ERR1 overlaps. As a result, it may be possible to notice the coalescence animation by looking at the ball-out display. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball-out error display ERR1 by watching the united animation. In addition, it may be possible to entertain the effect display that is being performed by quickly removing the ball and deleting the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to look at the ball-out error display ERR1 and the united animation at the same time, and to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the united animation is displayed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 422(d1) to (d2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 401(f) to 401(g). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422(d1), part of the ball-out error display ERR1 is displayed so as to overlap the right symbol of the decorative symbol and the remaining time meter MT, but the tutorial display unit The UI unit UI3 including the TT1 is not overlapped.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 422(d2), the tutorial display section TT1 displays the preparing image RDY again, and it is informed that the second timer advance notice effect will be started, but the preparing image RDY is displayed again. At times, the image RDY being prepared is enlarged and displayed as compared with the case where the first image RDY is displayed. Therefore, the image RDY being prepared is overlapped by a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 that has not been overlapped with the tutorial display section TT1 until now. As a result, it may be possible to notice the magnified image RDY by looking at the ball-out display. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY being prepared. In addition, it may be possible to entertain the effect display that is being performed by quickly removing the ball and deleting the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the ball removal error display ERR1 and the enlarged in-preparation image RDY are viewed at the same time and the display of the in-preparation image RDY is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 422(e1) to (e2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 402(a5) to (a6). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422(e1), a part of the ball-out error display ERR1 partially overlaps the area in which the character of the swordsman is drawn, but the lord's character is drawn. Areas do not overlap.

After that, as shown in FIG. 422(e2), as a result of the player's long-pressing operation of the effect button 136, the region in which the lord's character arranged above is drawn is enlarged, and then the lord's character is drawn. A part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the area where the character is drawn. As a result, it may be possible to notice the superiority or inferiority between the lord's character and the enemy swordsman character by looking at the ball-out display. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball-out error display ERR1 by seeing the superiority or inferiority of the lord's character and the enemy swordsman character. In addition, it may be possible to entertain the effect display that is being performed by quickly removing the ball and deleting the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, seeing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the superiority or inferiority of the lord's character and the enemy swordsman character at the same time, and giving an opportunity to remove the ball when the superiority or inferiority of the lord's character and the enemy swordsman character is finished. May be possible.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 422(f1) to (f2) show, for example, display examples of the warning display in the case where a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 404(e) to (f). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422(f1), it is shown that part of the ball-out error display ERR1 overlaps the second in-preparation image RDY2. On the other hand, the display area in which the character “Go” is displayed (the display area in which the first in-preparation image RDY was displayed) does not overlap.

Thereafter, in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 422(f2), the character “Go” is erased together with its display area, the second preparing image RDY2 slides downward, and the position of the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed. Image moving animation is being prepared. Further, it is shown that the notice effect (preceding start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display by the timer notice effect corresponding to the first in-preparation image RDY1 is started, and the ninja character NJ4 appears. Has been done. At this time, the overlapped state of the ball removal error display ERR1 and the second in-preparation image RDY2 is eliminated. On the other hand, a part of the ball-out error display ERR1 overlaps the ninja character NJ4. Further, the ball removal error display ERR1 may not overlap the ninja character NJ4. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of the second in-preparation image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball-out error display ERR1 by looking at the second in-preparation image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4. In addition, it may be possible to entertain the effect display that is being performed by quickly removing the ball and deleting the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it is possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the second removal image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 are displayed by viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the second preparation image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 at the same time. There are cases.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 423(a1) to (a2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 407(a3) to (a4). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423(a1), the ball-out error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette wheel RR. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap any display.

After that, in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 423(a2), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed in the tutorial display portion TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and the upper left portion of the display screen is displayed. Is displayed such that the third in-preparation image RDY3 is adjacent to the grandpa character GII, and the Chibi-hime character CHM is displayed below the third in-preparation image RDY3. At this time, a part of the ball-out error display ERR1 overlaps the character CHM of Princess Chibi. That is, it can be said that in this effect example, at least a part of the ball-out error display ERR1 overlaps with a part of the plurality of preparing images. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of at least one of the plurality of in-preparation images (including characters) by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball-out error display ERR1 by looking at a plurality of preparing images. In addition, it may be possible to entertain the effect display that is being performed by quickly removing the ball and deleting the ball removal error display ERR1. In some cases, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when viewing the ball-out error display ERR1 and a plurality of in-preparation images at the same time and finishing displaying the in-preparation image.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 423(b1) to (b2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball-out error occurs in the example productions shown in FIGS. 407(b1) to (b2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423(b1), the ball-slotting error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette wheel RR. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap any display.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423(b2), the third in-preparation image RDY3 is displayed so that the grandfather character GII is adjacent to it. That is, the grandpa character GII appears at a position corresponding to the grandpa character GII, and the preparing image that appears with the grandpa character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the grandpa character GII. In this case, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 423(a2), since the image in preparation (princess CHIV character CHM) corresponding to a certain effect is not displayed, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed. Is also not overlapped against.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 423(c1) to (c2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 409(b) to (e). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423(c1), in the effect shown in FIG. 409(b), it is shown that the ball-out error display ERR1 is displayed substantially in the center of the left notice display area CUL. There is. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap any display.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423(c2), in the effect shown in FIG. 409(e), a mini-game executed based on the image RDY being prepared displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. As a result of the success, it is shown that the chance up cut-in image WCI is displayed in the left notice display area CUL. At this time, it is shown that a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the chance up cut-in image WCI. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI by looking at the ball-out error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the chance up cut-in image WCI. In addition, it may be possible to entertain the effect display that is being performed by quickly removing the ball and deleting the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the ball-out error display ERR1 and the chance up cut-in image WCI are viewed at the same time and the display of the chance up cut-in image WCI is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 423(d1) to (d2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 411(b1) to (b2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423(d1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 411(b1), it is shown that the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1. .. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap any display.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423(d2), the above-described chasing effect has been started. When the chase effect is started, a sub window WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and a display (main display) relating to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 423(d2). Is displayed. The first in-preparation image RDY1 and the third in-preparation image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two in-preparation images RDY1 and RDY3, only the first in-preparation image RDY1 displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed in the sub-window WP3 in the sub-window WP3, and the third in-preparation image RDY3 is displayed. Is not displayed in the sub window WP3. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub window WP3, and is continuously displayed without changing the display position. At this time, at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be overlapped with the sub window WP3.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 423(e1) to (e2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 411(d1) to (d2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423(e1), in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 411(d1), the ball-excluding error display ERR1 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. .. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap any display.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423(e2), the background display is reduced to about 3/4, and the reduced background image is tilted counterclockwise by about 10 degrees to perform a shake vision effect. It is shown that it is being broken. In this case, the in-preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, the in-preparation image RDY is shown not to be tilted together with the background display. At this time, the ball-out error display ERR1 does not change the display position even when the shake vision effect is being performed, and is not tilted, and the display state is maintained. At this time, the background image is inclined, so that the margin portion is represented in black. Then, a part of the ball-out error display ERR1 overlaps this margin part. For example, when the ball-out error display ERR1 is displayed in black characters, it is assimilated to the color of the margin part, and a part of it. It may be difficult to see.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 423(f1) to (f2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 412(a1) to (a2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423(f1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 412(a1), it is shown that the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1. .. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap any display.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423(f2), the first step-up display unit SUA is raised from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed as if the UI unit UI3 is lifted. Has been done. At this time, the ball-out error display ERR1 at least partially overlaps the tutorial display section TT1 because the UI section UI3 is raised. That is, since the display area of the UI unit UI3 is enlarged, the ball-out error display ERR1 overlaps the UI unit UI3. As a result, it may be possible to notice the occurrence of the effect on the first step-up display unit SUA by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by seeing the UI portion UI3 rising. In addition, it may be possible to entertain the effect display that is being performed by quickly removing the ball and deleting the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display on the first step-up display unit SUA is finished by simultaneously viewing the effects on the ball-removal error display ERR1 and the first step-up display unit SUA.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 424(a1) to (a2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 414(d) to (e). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424(a1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 414(d), a part of the ball-out error display ERR1 is overlapped with the upper part of the tutorial display portion TT1. It is shown. That is, in this effect example, before the UI section UI3 is framed out by the UI section FO animation, the ball-excluding error display ERR1 overlaps the UI section UI3.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424(a2), the UI portion UI3 is shown to be framed out by the UI portion FO animation. In this effect example, the UI part FO animation shows that the overlapping state of the ball removal error display ERR1 on the UI part UI3 is canceled while the UI part UI3 is framed out downward.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 424(b1) to (b2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 418(a3) to (a5). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424(b1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 418(a3), a part of the ball-out error display ERR1 overlaps the UI wipe display part WP4. It is shown. At this time, it does not overlap with the character of the lord who rides on the motorcycle displayed in the UI wipe display portion WP4.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424(b2), it is shown that the character of the lord on the motorcycle is moving to the right end of the UI wipe display portion WP4. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the UI wipe display portion WP3 and the character of the lord on the motorcycle. As a result, it may be possible to notice the effect display on the UI wipe display unit WP3 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the effect display on the UI wipe display unit WP3. In addition, it may be possible to entertain the effect display that is being performed by quickly removing the ball and deleting the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the effect display on the UI wipe display unit WP3 is finished by viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the effect display on the UI wipe display unit WP3 at the same time.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 424(c1) to (c2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 421(b1) to (b2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424(c1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 421(b1), the ball-out error display ERR1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and part of the decorative symbol is overlaid. It is shown to be wrapped. Note that it does not overlap with other displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424(c2), a state in which the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed is shown. At this time, the hold icon display area is displayed below the display screen and overlaps with the enlarged display hold icon by the preparing image RDY. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 424(c2), the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and relates to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 424(c1). The display (main display) is displayed. Note that the UI unit UI2 is hidden when the sub window WP3 is displayed. Further, the sub window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged and displayed hold icon display area. At this time, part of the ball-out error display ERR1 overlaps the sub window WP3, and part of the other part overlaps the hold icon display area. The ball-out error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub window WP3, and the display position is maintained. As a result, it may be possible to notice the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area that is enlarged and displayed by looking at the ball-out error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball-out error display ERR1 by seeing the effect of changing the display form of the hold icon in the hold icon display area. In addition, it may be possible to entertain the effect display that is being performed by quickly removing the ball and deleting the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, to simultaneously see the ball dropout error display ERR1 and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area, and to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the effect of changing the display status of the hold icon in the hold icon display area ends. May be possible.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 424 (d1) to (d3) show variations of the display mode of the ball-out error display ERR1.

In the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 424(d1), the display of "please remove the ball" is surrounded by a rectangular frame, and the background is transparent. Therefore, even when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the display of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be made conspicuous, and the influence of the visibility of the display on the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be reduced. There are cases.

The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 424(d2) has the same form as the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 424(d1), but the background is opaque. Therefore, when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the visibility of the ball removal error display ERR1 is improved, but the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be difficult to view.

The ball-out error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 424(d3) is another display mode of the ball-out error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 424(d2), and the display of "please remove the ball" is white on a black background. The mode is represented by.

In the embodiment described above, the three decorative symbol display devices, that is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 280M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are used, but the decorative symbol display device is used. It goes without saying that the pachinko machine 100 including only one is applicable. Further, the present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with two decorative pattern display devices, and can also be applied to a pachinko machine provided with four or more decorative pattern display devices.

425 to 462 are diagrams showing, in stages, the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to this embodiment. 425 to 462, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220 and the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. Note that, in FIGS. 425 to 462, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, but as in the above-described embodiment, a device including a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. May be Further, the transparent light guide plate IL or POV display described above may be arranged on the front surface side of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 425 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 426 is a figure showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 425. , FIG. 427 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 426 step by step. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425(1), the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the fourth design and the second decorative design may be displayed. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 425(1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 425 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed. In addition, the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state.

In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon representing the hold of special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of the special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holding icons of the special figure 1 and the second holding number display. In addition to the number of holding lamps 220 lit, the number of holding icons and the second holding number display in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon,.... In the hold icon display area, hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side become the hold icons with older prizes.

In FIG. 425(1), three hold icons h11, h12, h13 of special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and all of these three hold icons h11, h12, h13 of special figure 1, It is displayed in a default display mode (a circular non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokushu 1 is a round hold icon.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons of special figure 2 are displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 425 is the non-electric power support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric Chu and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon holding icon of the special drawing which is easier to win in special maps 1 and 2 is displayed, and the holding icon of the other special map is displayed. I try not to display it. That is, when the control state is the non-electric power support state, as shown in FIG. 425(1), the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is displayed and the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is not displayed in the hold icon display area. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric power support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is displayed and the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is not displayed. Note that the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device→starting or erasing the moving animation of the hold icon→starting the variation of the decorative symbol, but this order is reversed. Good.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425(2), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. Moreover, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon that is the target of the pattern change this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is a decorative symbol display device. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 by moving to the change icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and displayed as the change icon h0, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The third hold icon h13 moves to the display position of the second hold icon h12, and is displayed as the second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by the frame-in animation, the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen to start the timer notice effect. The display mode of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "10:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. Here, the first timer advance notice display TM11 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to display a decimal point of less than 1 second.

Then, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and "09:75" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 425(4). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In addition, the characters "timer activated" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 has started.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425(5) shows that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by the frame-in animation, the second timer notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen to start the second timer notice effect. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Here, the second timer advance notice display TM12 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to display a decimal point of less than 1 second. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "09:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 425(5). In addition, a character "attention" is displayed near the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and "01:25" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12 at the timing shown in FIG. 425(6). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display in the second timer advance notice display TM12 was started. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display continues on the first timer notice display TM11, and "07:25" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425(7), when the countdown in the second timer advance notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display in the second timer advance notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. , "Attention on hold" is displayed to call attention to the hold change, the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 can be changed. It is notified that there is a possibility. The hold change animation may be started after the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", or the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 after the hold change animation starts. May be "00:00", or the pending change animation may be started at the timing when the timer display in the second timer advance notice display TM12 is "00:00". Note that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 continues, and "06:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 425(7).

Then, as shown in FIG. 425(8), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the panda display mode, and the prefetch display mode is set. That is, in this effect example, an example in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the second timer advance notice display TM12 is shown. In addition, the character "Hold change" is displayed near the navigation character YM to inform that the pre-reading notice has been given due to the hold change. It should be noted that the character display of "hold change" may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed after the character display of "hold change" is performed. Alternatively, the characters "Hold change" may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is still continuing, and "05:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 425(8). The second timer notice display TM12 is erased. Here, the second timer notice display TM12 may be deleted after the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed after the second timer notice display TM12 is deleted. Alternatively, the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change at the timing when the second timer notice display TM12 is erased.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display (the symbol variable display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than when not.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425(9) shows that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 425(9), "05: 11” is displayed. In addition, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a “pending changed” message indicating that a holding change has been made is displayed along with the panda icon PND. As described above, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the effect (advance effect) executed as a result of the timer advance effect is notified by the icon. Furthermore, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "I'm still there" is displayed, suggesting that there is a possibility that further notice display by the timer notice effect may be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425(10), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "03:29" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 425(10). In addition, a question mark is displayed along with the character "what" near the navigation character YM, which fuels an expectation as to which warning display will be displayed when the countdown on the first timer warning display TM11 is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425(11), the second stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 425(11).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425(12), the countdown on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed, and the third stop occurs at the timing when the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. Done, the replay symbol RP as a pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "pseudo-repeat!" are displayed, and it is informed that the pseudo-repeat will be performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, but the middle symbol after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00" May be stopped and displayed, or the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. As described above, in this effect example, the display periods of the plurality of timer notice effects overlap, and one timer notice display (second timer notice display TM12) functions as a prefetch notice. Further, in this effect example, a state in which the display start timing of the timer notice display is different for each of the plurality of timer notice effects is shown.

After that, as shown in FIG. 425(13), the second variable display of the decorative symbols by the pseudo-link is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “×2” is displayed, which indicates the number of times the second variable display of the decorative pattern is started by the pseudo-link. At this time, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased. Here, after the first timer notice display TM11 is erased, the second variation display of the decorative design by the pseudo-relation may be started, or after the second variation display of the decorative design by the pseudo-relation is started. Then, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be deleted, or the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link may be started at the timing when the first timer advance notice display TM11 is deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425(14), a state in which the second variable display of decorative symbols by pseudo-linking is performed is shown. Then, the replay icon RPL is displayed below the panda icon PND displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, informing that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425(15), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (16), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 425(17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 425(18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, normal reach is performed, and a state in which the medium symbol is changing at a low speed is shown. In addition, the characters "Timer advance notice due to SP development" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the mission effect indicating that the timer advance effect is started by developing into super reach is started. Are also shown. In this example of performance, the timer advance notice effect is started by the achievement of the mission, and the reliability of the big hit is increased. Therefore, it may be possible to expect that the timer advance notice effect is started by shifting to the super reach.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (19) following FIG. 425 (18) shows that normal reach is continuously performed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (20), the middle pattern is stopped and displayed at “decoration 6” during normal reach, and the transition to super reach is not performed, and the decoration of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5” is lost. It is informed that the display will be stopped by a combination of symbols. In addition, a character "sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the super reach is not to be performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 426(21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL are erased, and the character "sorry" displayed near the navigation character YM is also erased. It should be noted that the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL may be deleted after the fluctuation fluctuation of the decorative pattern starts, or the fluctuation fluctuation of the decorative pattern after the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL are deleted. It may be started, or the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL may be deleted at the timing when the fluctuation fluctuation of the decorative pattern is started. Further, the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL may be deleted at the same time, or may be deleted one by one.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 426(22), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the defective decorative patterns “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (23), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 that has been the display mode of the prefetching notice becomes the change icon h0 that is the notice display mode related to the symbol variation by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (24) shows that two timer notice effects are started at the same time. In this effect example, the third timer advance notice display TM13 and the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 are respectively frame-in from the left and right sides of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and two timer advance notice effects are simultaneously started. Both the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 are default display modes. In the third timer notice display TM13 displayed on the right side of the display screen, "30:00" is displayed as a timer display, and a certain effect is started when 30 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. It suggests. Further, "10:00" is displayed as the timer display on the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 displayed on the left side of the display screen, and a certain effect is started when 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. Suggests that. In this example of performance, since the two timer notice displays TM13 and TM14 start counting down at the same time, there is a certain effect both when 10 seconds have elapsed and 30 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. Have been suggested to be initiated. Here, a certain effect that may be started when 10 seconds have passed and a certain effect that may be started when 30 seconds have passed may be the same or different. Good.

After that, the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 and the timer display in the fourth timer advance notice display each start counting down (subtraction display), and at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (25), the third timer advance notice display TM13 displays "29:45" is displayed, and "09:45" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14. That is, it is shown that 0.55 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. In addition, a character "Attention to the timer" is displayed near the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (26), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, the countdown continues on the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (26), "28:02" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. Then, "08:02" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (27), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. The third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (27), "27:75" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. Then, "06:75" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

Then, as shown in FIG. 426 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. The third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (28), "25:23" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. Then, "05:23" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (29), normal reach is started, and the state where the medium symbol is changing at low speed is shown. In addition, the character “soon” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the timer display in the fourth timer notice display TM14 may count up and the notice effect may be started soon. Has been done. It should be noted that the countdown continues on the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (29), "23:16" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. Then, "03:16" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426(30) shows that normal reach is continuously performed. It should be noted that the countdown is still continuing on the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 426(30), "21:80" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. “01:80” is displayed in the fourth timer advance notice display TM14.

After that, as shown in FIG. 426(31), when the countdown in the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", a large number of Sabohani characters SBHN cross on the decorative symbol display device 208. Sabohani group notice is given. This Sabohani group notice is a notice with a high expectation of a big hit. That is, it can be said that when the Sabohani group notice is given, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the Savohani group notice is not given. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 426(31), the strong sabotani group notice is given. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters “group occurrence” are displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the Sabohani group notice is given. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the strong sabotani group notice is given as a result of the timer notice effect by the fourth timer notice display TM14. In other words, the notice of the strong sabotani group can be said to be an example of a certain effect. Note that the Savohani group notice may be started after the timer display on the fourth timer notice display TM14 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the fourth timer notice display TM14 after the Savohani group notice is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display in the fourth timer notice display TM14 is "00:00". On the other hand, in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 426(31). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (32), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development!" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been announced. At this time, the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 is erased. On the other hand, in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and "18:31" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 426(32).

Subsequently, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (33) develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. A sabotani icon SBH is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the sabotani group notice has been executed. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and "12:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 426(33).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (34) shows that the swordsman reach is continuing. Then, the character "timer attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and attention is paid to the third timer advance notice display TM13. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown continues, and "11:03" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (34).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (35), the timer preview shortened animation is started while the countdown is displayed on the third timer preview display TM13, and the effect is displayed on the third timer preview display TM13. Has been done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 426 (36), the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 is reduced, and “03:00” is displayed in the third timer notice display TM13. As described above, in this effect example, it may be difficult to predict the type of effect executed by the timer notice effect by changing the timer display during the countdown display.

After that, when the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 becomes “00:00”, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 427 (37) following FIG. 426 (36). .. In addition, the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a has been displayed. That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain effect.

As described above, in this effect example, the display periods of a plurality of timer notice effects are overlapped, and both the timer notice displays (third timer notice display TM13 and fourth timer notice display TM14) are all in effect during the symbol variation. It is shown that the display is functioning as an advance notice (announcement of the change).

After that, as shown in FIG. 427 (38), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and at the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". It should be noted that in this effect example, there is a case where the effect (notice effect) executed as a result of the timer notice effect may not be notified by an icon. Here, the fact that the strong cut-in image CI1a has been displayed may be notified by an icon. After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 427 (39), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 427 (40 ), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decoration decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the pattern is more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (variable display of the symbol), the big hit symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 428 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 429 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 428. is there. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 428(1) and 428(2) are the same as FIGS. 425(1) and 425(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this example of performance, two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are respectively frame-in from the left and right of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and two timer notice productions are started at the same time. To be done. Note that three or more timer announcement effects may be started at the same time. Both of these two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are default display modes. In the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, "16:00" is displayed as the timer display, which suggests that a certain effect will be started 16 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. Further, "03:00" is displayed as a timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, and a certain effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. Suggests. In this example of performance, since the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 start counting down at the same time, a certain effect is produced both when 3 seconds and 16 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. It has been suggested to start. Here, a certain effect that may be started when 3 seconds have elapsed and a certain effect that may be started when 16 seconds have elapsed may be the same or different. Good.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 is started, and “14:75” is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 428(4). Further, "01:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. That is, it is shown that 1.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 428(5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the countdown in the second timer advance notice display TM12 is completed, and the timing when the timer display in the second timer advance notice display TM12 becomes “00:00” In the figure, the character "pre-reading mode entry" is displayed near the navigation character YM, indicating that the pre-reading mode is started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the pre-reading mode is executed as a certain effect as a result of the timer notice effect related to the second timer notice display TM12 being performed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 428(6), the second timer notice display TM12 is erased, and the "prefetch mode" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the prefetch mode is displayed. It has been reported that the Further, at this time, the character "pre-reading mode entry" displayed near the navigation character YM is erased. On the other hand, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "12:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 428(6).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428(7), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "08:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 428(7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428(8), the second stop is performed and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continuing, and "07:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 428(8).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428(9), the third stop is performed, “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed, and then in FIG. 428(10). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 4". In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "05:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 428(10).

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428 (11), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area. The hold icon that has moved and is displayed as the variable icon h0 and that was at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continuing, and "03:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 428(11). The look-ahead mode continues even after the symbol variable display is started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 428(12), the characters “Attention to hold” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started with the first hold icon h11. It is informed that the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change. The first timer advance notice display TM11 continues to count down, and "01:80" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 428(12).

Then, as shown in FIG. 428 (13), at the timing when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display of pandas. The display mode is changed to a pre-reading display mode. That is, in this example of effect, an example in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the first timer advance notice display TM11 is shown. In addition, the character "Hold change" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed. As described above, in this effect example, in addition to the pre-reading notice in the pre-reading mode performed as a result of a certain timer notice production, a pre-reading notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon is given as a result of another timer notice production An example is given. Further, in this effect example, the pre-reading notice in the pre-reading mode performed as a result of a certain timer notice production and the pre-reading notice subject to the change in the display mode of the hold icon performed as a result of another timer notice production are the same symbol variation. An example of what is being displayed is shown. In this example of performance, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes at the timing when the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, but the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 changes. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the display becomes "00:00", or the first timer notice display TM11 after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. The timer display in may be "00:00". Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 428(14), the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased. Further, the characters of "holding change" displayed near the navigation character YM are also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428 (15), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428(16), the second stop is performed and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428(17), the third stop is performed, "decoration 4" is displayed as a stop in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed, and then in FIG. 428(18). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 4". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 429 (19) subsequent to FIG. 428 (18), the suspension (first suspension) of the special diagram 1 is exhausted and the variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the first special diagram. The variable display of symbols on the display device 212 is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 that has been the display mode of the prefetching notice becomes the change icon h0 that is the notice display mode related to the symbol variation by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. The look-ahead mode continues even after the symbol variable display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 429 (20), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 429 (21), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 429 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 429 (23) shows that the strong sabotani group notice is given. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters “group occurrence” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the Sabohani group notice has been given.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 429 (24), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development!" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been announced.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 429 (25), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to inform the type of super reach.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 429 (26), a cut-in image including a balloon image in which the character "Game" is arranged in the balloon is displayed together with the up image of the lord's character. The cut-in image displayed here is a weak cut-in image CI1b in which a banchou face is not arranged around the word "Game" in the speech balloon, and is a big hit compared to the case where the cut-in image is not displayed. Although the reliability is high, it suggests that the jackpot is less reliable than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Moreover, a question mark is added to the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the "chance", which suggests that the expectation of a big hit is improving.

After that, as shown in FIG. 429 (27), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 429 (27), the game ball is won at the special opening 1 starting opening 230, the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 is increased by 1, and the holding of the special drawing 1 is displayed in the second holding number display. The number display is "1".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 429 (28), a state in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is shown. At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 429 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decorative decorative symbols "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this example of performance, the timer notice display of a plurality of timer notice productions is started at the same time, and both of the timer notice displays (the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12) function as prefetch notices. The situation is shown. Furthermore, it is also shown that both timer advance notice displays (first timer advance notice display TM11 and second timer advance notice display TM12) both function as prefetch advance notices for the same symbol variation display.

Further, in this effect example, the start timing of the hold change animation does not start at the timing when the timer notice display becomes “00:00” but “00:00” at the time when the display mode of the hold icon changes. Since the change of the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect is consistent with the completion of the countdown of the timer notice display as a certain effect, the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the timer notice effect as a certain effect are performed. It may be possible to clarify the relationship with.

In addition, in this effect example, the countdown in the timer notice display of the two timer notice effects is started at the same time, but the timing of the start of the countdown of the first timer notice display TM11 is changed by the variation display of the hold icon. It may be started after the start. That is, although the display start timings of the timer notice displays of the plurality of timer notice effects are the same, the countdown start timings may be different. In this case, the countdown may be started in the different symbol variable display.

In addition, in this effect example, the pre-reading notice (display of the hold icon in the pre-reading mode and the display mode of the pre-reading) is started as a certain effect in each of the different symbol variable displays, but each pre-reading is performed in the same symbol variable display. The notice may be started.

FIG. 430 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 431 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 430. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 430(1) and 430(2) are the same as FIGS. 425(1) and 425(2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this example of performance, two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are respectively frame-in from the left and right of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and two timer notice productions are started at the same time. To be done. Note that three or more timer announcement effects may be started at the same time. Both of these two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are default display modes. In the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, "06:00" is displayed as the timer display, which suggests that a certain effect is started 6 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. Further, "10:00" is displayed as the timer display on the timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, which suggests that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. In this example of performance, since the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 start counting down at the same time, a certain effect is produced both when 6 seconds and 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. It has been suggested to start. Here, a certain effect that may be started when 6 seconds have elapsed and a certain effect that may be started when 10 seconds have elapsed may be the same or different. Good.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 430(4), the first timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed. , "05:75" is displayed, and "09:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 430(5), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decoration pattern is displayed small on the upper center of the decoration pattern display device 208, and the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display screen. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the center of the display screen, the character of "Item get when princess appears" is displayed, and when the princess character appears from the treasure box, a notice item (may be referred to as "preview icon") may be acquired. It has been suggested that it can. In addition, a character "select with the cross key" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a navigation display for operating the operation key unit 137 to move the cursor CSL to select a treasure box is displayed. In addition, the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 430(5), "05:60" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer In the notice display TM12, "09:60" is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display by the timer notice effect is started before the start of the mini game.

After that, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 430(6), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , The right treasure chest image BXR is surrounded. Further, the countdown is continued in each of the two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM11, and at the timing shown in FIG. 430(6), "04:37" is displayed in the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed. The notice display TM12 displays "08:37".

After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 430(7), the character "decide right" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the right It is reported that the treasure chest image BXR has been determined as a treasure chest that can be opened. In addition, the countdown continues in each of the two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 430(7), "03:00" is displayed in the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "07:00" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430(8), the effect production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved to the center, and the left treasure box image BXL not selected is displayed. Erased. Then, a character of "Open" is displayed near the navigation character YM to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. In addition, the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 430(8), "02:50" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. The notice display TM12 displays "06:50".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 430(9), the character “HME” of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR, the characters “item get” are displayed, and “next to” the navigation character YM is displayed. The word “Taze” is displayed to inform that the mini-game was successful and the advance notice item was acquired. This suggests that, in the timer advance notice effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11, it is assured that a certain effect is performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed. In this example of production, the appearance of the princess character HME announces the acquisition of the notice item as a certain production. At this time, the countdown continues in each of the two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 430(9), "01:50" is displayed in the first timer advance notice display TM11. In the second timer notice display TM12, "05:50" is displayed. In the present embodiment, the countdown is performed by the timer advance notice effect in this way, and it may be possible to excite the effect by the mini game until the countdown is completed (until "00:00" is reached).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430(10), at the timing when the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the first timer advance notice display TM11 displays the super reach advance notice item. Swordsman character KNG is added to the first timer notice display TM11. As described above, displaying the notice item of the super reach may make it easy to visually understand that the super reach is performed. In addition, in this example of production, it can be said that the result of the mini game is displayed as an icon. Further, in this effect example, an example in which a notice item is displayed as a certain effect as a result of performing the timer notice effect is shown. Note that the swordsman character KNG may be displayed after the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", or the first timer advance notice display TM11 after the swordsman character KNG is displayed. The timer display may be "00:00". The second timer advance notice display TM12 continues counting down, and "04:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 430(10).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430(11), the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is changed from "00:00" to "SP standby", and this display starts super reach. Continue until In other words, whether the super reach corresponding to the display of "SP waiting" and the display of the swordsman character KNG as the notice item in the first timer notice display TM11 occurs at this time in the symbol variable display, It is difficult to determine whether or not it will occur in the symbol variation display after the next time. The second timer advance notice display TM12 continues counting down, and "03:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 430(11).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 430(12), the characters “Attention to hold” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11. It is informed that the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change. The second timer advance notice display TM12 continues to count down, and "01:80" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 430(12).

Then, as shown in FIG. 430 (13), at the timing when the timer display in the second timer advance notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display of pandas. The display mode is changed to a pre-reading display mode. In addition, the character "Hold change" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430(14), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from "00:00" to "hold change", and the panda character PND is further added to display the hold icon. It is shown that the display mode has been notified. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the content of a certain effect executed as a result of the timer predictive effect is informed in the timer predictive display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430(15), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the characters of "holding change" displayed near the navigation character YM are also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430(16), the second stop is performed and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430(17), the third stop is performed, "decoration 4" is displayed as a stop in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed, and then in FIG. 430(18). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 4". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 431 (19) subsequent to FIG. 430 (18), the suspension (first suspension) of the special diagram 1 is exhausted and the variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the first special diagram. The variable display of symbols on the display device 212 is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon that was at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 that has been the display mode of the prefetching notice becomes the change icon h0 that is the notice display mode related to the symbol variation by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. The second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased when the symbol variation display is started, but the first timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed in which the character “Sword is waiting” is displayed with the swordsman character KNG added. Has been continued. That is, it can be said that the timer announcement effect on the first timer announcement display TM11 was a look-ahead announcement that the super reach will be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 431(20), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. At this time, the word "Hot" is displayed near the navigation character YM, which suggests that the reliability of the big hit has dramatically increased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 431 (21), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 431(22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. Further, at this time, the first timer advance notice display TM11 notifies that the digestion animation is started and the swordsman character KNG as the advance notice item is digested and moves to the super reach. In addition, after the reach state is formed, the digestion animation of first timer notice display TM11 may be started, or the reach state may be formed after the digestion animation of first timer notice display TM11 is started. However, the digestion animation of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the reach state is formed.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 431 (23) shows that the strong sabotani group notice is given. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters “group occurrence” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the Sabohani group notice has been given.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 431(24), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development!" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been announced.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 431 (25), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to inform the type of super reach.

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 431 (26), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. It notifies that CI1a has been displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 431 (27), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and at the substantially center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 431 (28), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 431 (29 ), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hits of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, an example in which all of the plurality of timer advance notice effects are executed as the prefetch advance notice is shown, and at least one of the timer advance notice effects is executed as a result. An example is shown in which it is difficult to determine whether the effect is a notice in the symbol variation display or a prefetch notice. Moreover, in this effect example, it is found out when the symbol variation display that is the target of the prefetch is performed that any timer notice effect is a prefetch notice for the same symbol variation display, so the same symbol variation display is performed. It may be possible to dramatically increase the expectation of a big hit by combining the target pre-reading notices.

FIG. 432 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 433 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that since FIGS. 432(1) to (15) are the same as FIGS. 430(1) to 430(15), description thereof will be omitted.

After the first stop of the decorative symbol is performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 432 (16) is subjected to the second stop, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. It Then, as shown in FIG. 432 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 432 (18), the digestion animation is started on the first timer notice display TM11, and it is notified that the swordsman character KNG as the notice item is digested and moves to super reach. To be done. That is, it can be said that the swordsman character KNG in this production example was functioning as a notice that the super reach was executed in the symbol variation display. Further, in this effect example, an example in which at least one of the two timer notice effects functions as a prefetch notice is shown. In addition, in this effect example, an example in which it is difficult to determine whether a certain effect executed as a result of each of a plurality of timer notice effects is a look-ahead notice or a notice in the symbol variation display is difficult. ing.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 433 (19) following FIG. 432 (18), “SP development!” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the super reach will be developed. There is. In addition, in this example of performance, the notice of the sabotani group is not given.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 433(20), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to inform the type of super reach. Further, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is quietly erased as the transition to the super reach is performed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 433(21), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with “chance”, and the expectation of a big hit is high. Suggests that you are up.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 433 (22), the main character's lord is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and a screen that is defeated is displayed, and at the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, a middle symbol is stopped and displayed. The "decoration 6" of the schedule is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 433 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed in a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. There is. At this time, the character “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result will be lost. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 433 (24), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns that are missing “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Thus, in this effect example, one of the plurality of timer notice effects is executed as a look-ahead notice, and the other is a notice in the symbol variation display, and the symbol variation display targeted for the timer notice effect is different. Therefore, it may be possible to increase the expectation for a big hit in any of the variable display of symbols that is the target of the timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 434 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 434(1) and 434(2) are the same as FIGS. 425(1) and 425(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 434(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this example of performance, two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are respectively frame-in from the left and right of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and two timer notice productions are started at the same time. To be done. Both of these two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are default display modes. In the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, "06:00" is displayed as the timer display, which suggests that a certain effect is started 6 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. Further, "02:00" is displayed as the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, and a certain effect is started when 2 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Suggests. In this example of performance, since the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 start counting down at the same time, a certain effect is produced both when 2 seconds and 6 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. It has been suggested to start.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 is started, and "05:75" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 434(4). Further, "01:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 434(5), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. The two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 each continue counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 434(5), "05:20" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "01:20" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 434(6), when the timer display in the second timer advance notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display. The display mode is changed to a pre-reading display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the second timer advance notice display TM12 is shown. After that, as shown in FIG. 434(7), in the second timer notice display TM12, “hold+1+1UP” is displayed instead of the display of “00:00”, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed. It is informed that the display mode of the prefetch notice has changed. The first timer advance notice display TM11 continues counting down, and "03:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 434(7).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 434(8), the hold change animation is further started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may further change. It The first timer advance notice display TM11 continues to count down, and "01:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 434(8).

Then, as shown in FIG. 434(9), at the timing when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the display mode of panda to the length display. The display mode is changed to a prefetch display mode that is a step up from the panda display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which, as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the first timer advance notice display TM11, an effect of further changing the display mode of the hold icon whose display mode has changed is shown. Has been done. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that a certain effect that is executed as a result of the two timer notice effects is performed for the same symbol variable display. In addition, in this example of effect, the display mode of the hold icon that has changed from the default display mode is further changed as a result of the timer notification effect of the first timer notification display TM11, but it may not change. It may be. In addition, the hold icon that changes the display mode as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11 and the display mode as a result of the timer notice effect on the second timer notice effect TM12 are changed. The hold icons may be different. Then, as shown in FIG. 434(10), in the first timer notice display TM11, “hold+1+1UP” is displayed instead of the display of “00:00”, and the notification is displayed in the second timer notice display TM12. In addition, it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed in two steps.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 434(11), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 434(12), the second stop is performed and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 434(13), a third stop is performed, "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 434(14). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 4". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In addition, in this effect example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed for the same symbol variable display, but, for example, as shown in (8′) of FIG. 434 (7), The hold change animation may be started for the second hold icon h12 in addition to the first hold icon h11, and the display modes of both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 may change. May be notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 434(9′), at the timing when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of panda to the length. While changing to the display mode, the display mode of the second hold icon h11 may be changed from the default display mode to the panda display mode. That is, as a certain effect that is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the first timer notice display TM11, an effect that further changes the display mode of the hold icon whose display mode has changed is performed, and a display mode of another hold icon. An example is shown in which an effect of changing is performed.

In this effect example, in the same symbol variable display, the effect of changing the display form of the hold icon is performed in two stages as a result of each of the two timer notice effects, but in different symbol variable displays, for the same hold icon. You may make it change production of a display mode.

FIG. 435 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 436 shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 435 step by step. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 435(1) and 425(2) are the same as FIGS. 425(1) and 425(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by the frame-in animation causing the first timer advance notice display TM11 to frame in from the right side of the display screen. The display mode of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "10:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that the pseudo continuous effect is likely to be started as a certain effect. As described above, in this effect example, the content of a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect is suggested by adding identification information such as an icon to the timer notice display.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and "09:75" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 435(4). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In addition, the characters "timer activated" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 has started.

Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435(5) shows that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by the frame-in animation, the second timer notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen to start the second timer notice effect. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "04:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 4 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, in this effect example, the panda icon PND is added to the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change as a certain effect. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "09:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 435(5). In addition, a character "attention" is displayed near the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and "03:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12 at the timing shown in FIG. 435(6). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 was started. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "08:75" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435(7) shows that the mini game is started. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a small size in the upper center, and displays a "1" on the dice and a "change with hold" display. Is performed, and the production button 136 is operated after the mini game is started, and as a result, when the result of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon changes. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "mini game start" is displayed, and the start of the mini game is notified. The two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 each continue counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 435(7), "08:60" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed. The notice display TM12 displays "03:60".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435(8), the variable display of symbols on the dice is started, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button acceptance time meter MT, and the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 is started. This is informed and the player is prompted to operate the effect button 136. The display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes so that the gauge becomes shorter according to the time from the start of the mini game. The button reception time meter MT may not be displayed. The two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are still counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 435(8), "08:12" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. The notice display TM12 displays "03:12".

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 435(9), as shown in FIG. 435(10), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the symbols on the dice stopped. In the example shown in FIG. 435(10), the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed in a form showing the result of "1" and the character of "success" is displayed, which is the result of achievement of the mission in the mini game. Has been announced. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Yatteze" is displayed to inform that the mini game has succeeded. That is, it is determined that the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12 is changed according to the result of the mini game. The two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are still counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 435(10), "06:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. The notice display TM12 displays "02:00".

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 435(11), the characters "Attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11. It is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed. The two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are still counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 435(11), "05:88" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "01:88" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 435(12), at the timing when the timer display in the second timer advance notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the length display. The display mode is changed to a pre-reading display mode. In addition, the character “Hot” is displayed near the navigation character YM, which suggests that the first hold icon h11 has changed to a display mode with high reliability. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "05:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 435(12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435(13), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from "00:00" to "super hot hold", and the display mode of the hold icon indicates the reliability of the big hit. It is shown that the notification that the display mode has changed to the high display mode is given. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "04:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 435(13).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435(14), the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 continues, and "04:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 435(14). .. At this time, the character "Attention of the right timer" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the first timer advance notice display TM11 displayed on the right side of the display screen is alerted.

After that, the decoration pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 435(15) shows that the mini game is started. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are displayed side by side on the left and right of the center of the display screen, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. ing. Further, in the upper center part of the display screen, the characters "Select with the cross key" are displayed, and a navigation display for operating the operation key unit 137 to move the cursor CSL to select a treasure box is displayed. In addition, the character "put out a princess" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is suggested that a notice display may be displayed when the princess character appears from the treasure box. The first timer advance notice display TM11 is still counting down, and "04:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 435(15).

After that, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 435 (16), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , The right treasure chest image BXR is surrounded. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "02:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 435(16).

After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435 (17), the character "right selection" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the right treasure box. It is reported that the image BXR has been selected as a treasure box that can be opened. Further, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved to the center and displayed, and the left treasure chest image BXL not selected is deleted. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is temporarily stopped and remains at "02:50", but the countdown may be continued.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 435(18), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR, the characters "pseudo-renyo" are displayed, and "next" is displayed near the navigation character YM. The word "success" is displayed to inform that the mini game has been successful. In other words, the result of this mini game determines that a pseudo continuous effect as a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is performed. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown has restarted, and "01:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 435(18).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 436 (19) subsequent to FIG. 435 (18), the character “pseudo-repeated” is displayed near the navigation character YM to give a notice that the pseudo-repeated is started. .. At this time, the decorative pattern is enlarged and moved and displayed in the center of the display screen. The first timer advance notice display TM11 continues to count down, and "00:78" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 436(19).

Then, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 436(20) and "00:00" is displayed, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the "decoration 5 -Replay symbol RP-decorative 6" combination of decorative symbols is displayed. The decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, or the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 after the decorative design is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative design may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is "00:00". In this way, in this effect example, for example, when it is decided that the pseudo-relation will be performed, the decorative symbols are not stopped and displayed one by one, but the three symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time, thereby smoothing the game. You may be able to proceed to. Even in this case, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed one by one in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

After that, as shown in FIG. 436(21), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. In the first timer notice display TM11, instead of displaying "00:00", "x2" indicating the number of times the second variable display of decorative symbols by pseudo-linking is started is displayed. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 436(22), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 436 (23), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 436 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 436 (25), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the normal reach is performed, and the state that the middle symbol is changing at a low speed is shown.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 436 (26) shows that normal reach is continuously performed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 436 (27), the middle pattern is stopped and displayed as "decoration 6" during the normal reach, and the variation of the shake is caused by the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". Temporary suspension is in progress. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the game will be lost.

Then, as shown in FIG. 436 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, the first timer advance notice display TM11, which has notified that the pseudo-repeating has been performed, is also deleted. In addition, since the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is still the display mode of the guard length, the display of "really hot hold" is maintained in the second timer notice display TM12.

As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the timer notice is given according to the result (success) of the mini game is shown.

FIG. 437 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 438 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 437. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 437(1) to (9) are the same as FIGS. 435(1) to 435(9), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 437(9), as shown in FIG. 437(10), the decorative symbol display device 208 causes the symbols on the dice to be stopped and displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 437(10), the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed in a form showing the result of "3" and the character "regretful" is displayed, which is not the result of accomplishing the mission in the mini game. It has been reported. That is, it is reported that the mission has failed. In addition, the character "regrettable" is displayed near the navigation character YM. That is, the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12 is changed depending on the result of the mini game. Gives different results. The two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are still counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 437(10), "06:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. The notice display TM12 displays "02:00".

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 437(11), the characters "Attention to hold" are displayed near the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, It is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed. It should be noted that the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are still counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 437(11), "05:88" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "01:88" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 437 (12), at the timing when the timer display in the second timer advance notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display. The display mode is changed to a pre-reading display mode. In addition, the character "a little heat" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which suggests that the first hold icon h11 has changed to a display mode with a slightly higher degree of reliability. That is, it can be said that the reliability is lower than the display mode of the guard length, but the reliability is higher than that of the default display mode. The first timer advance notice display TM11 is still counting down, and "05:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 437(12).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 437(13), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from "00:00" to "chance hold", and the display mode of the hold icon is slightly higher in reliability. It is shown that the change to the display mode of the prefetch notice is informed. The first timer advance notice display TM11 is still counting down, and "04:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 437(13).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 437(14), the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 continues, and "04:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 437(14). .. At this time, the character "Attention of the right timer" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the first timer advance notice display TM11 displayed on the right side of the display screen is alerted.

After that, the decoration pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 437(15) shows that the mini game is started. Note that the effect examples shown in FIGS. 437(15) to (17) are different from the effect examples shown in FIG. 435(15) to (17) in the display mode of the first hold icon h11. Since the second timer advance notice display TM12 is the same except that the display content is different, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 437 (18), the auntie character BBA appears from the right treasure box image BXR, the characters "Uhihi" are displayed, and "Sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM. Characters are displayed to inform that the mini game has failed. That is, in this effect example, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 435, it is indicated that the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is a false advance notice effect due to the failure of the mini game, or It is suggested that the pseudo-relational production is not performed as a production. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown has restarted, and "01:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 437(18). If the mini game fails, the reach state may be set instead of the pseudo continuous production, and the reach production may be performed.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 438 (19) following FIG. 437 (18) shows that the decorative pattern is enlarged and moved and displayed in the center of the display screen. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "00:78" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 438(19).

After that, when the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 438(20) and "00:00" is displayed, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the "decoration 5 -A combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4" is displayed, and a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 328(21), in the decorative pattern display device 208, "decoration 5-decoration 4" -It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the decoration "4". The decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, or the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 after the decorative design is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative design may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is "00:00". In this way, in this effect example, for example, when the pseudo-relation is not performed and it is determined that the game will be lost, the decorative symbols are not stopped and displayed one by one, but three symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time. In some cases, the game can be smoothly progressed. Even in this case, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed one by one in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

FIG. 439 is a diagram showing stepwise about another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 440 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 439. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 439(1) to 425(2) are the same as FIGS. 425(1) to 425(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by the frame-in animation causing the first timer advance notice display TM11 to frame in from the right side of the display screen. The display mode of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "08:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 8 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that the pseudo-relation is likely to be started as a certain effect.

Then, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and "07:75" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 439(4). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In addition, the characters "timer activated" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 has started.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439(5) shows that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by the frame-in animation, the second timer notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen to start the second timer notice effect. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "04:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 4 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, in this effect example, the panda icon PND is added to the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change as a certain effect. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continuing, and "07:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 439(5). In addition, a character "attention" is displayed near the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer advance notice display TM12 is started, and "03:75" is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12 at the timing shown in FIG. 439(6). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 was started. On the other hand, also in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "06:75" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439(7) shows that a mini game of dice is started. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a small size in the upper center, and displays a "1" on the dice and a "change with hold" display. Is performed, and the production button 136 is operated after the mini game is started, and as a result, when the result of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon changes. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "mini game start" is displayed, and the start of the mini game is notified. The two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 each continue counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 439(7), "06:60" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed. The notice display TM12 displays "03:60".

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439(8), the variable display of the symbols of the dice is started, the button image 136a is displayed, and it is notified that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 is started, and the game is played. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted to the person. Although the button reception time meter MT is not displayed in this example of performance, it may be displayed. Note that the countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 439(8), "06:12" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice is displayed. In the display TM12, "03:12" is displayed.

FIG. 439(9) to FIG. 10(10) show that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the dice mini game continues. That is, it is shown that the mini-game of the dice has been started, but the operation of the effect button 136 has not been performed yet. Note that the countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 439(10), "04:35" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer notice is displayed. In the display TM12, "01:35" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439(11), the state of the dice symbol and the button image 136a that are being variably displayed moves to the lower left of the display screen. This suggests that another effect is performed overlapping with the mini-game of the dice being executed. Note that the countdown is still continuing on the two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 439(11), "04:22" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "01:22" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439 (12), another mini game (mini game of treasure chest) starts while the mini game of the dice is being executed. When the mini game of the treasure box is started, the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are displayed side by side on the left and right of the center of the display screen, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the upper center part of the display screen, the characters "Select with the cross key" are displayed, and a navigation display for operating the operation key unit 137 to move the cursor CSL to select a treasure box is displayed. In addition, the character "put out a princess" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is suggested that a notice display may be displayed when the princess character appears from the treasure box. In addition, the mini game of the dice is continuously played, and the operation of the effect button 136 is also valid. Further, the countdown is still continued on the two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (12), "04:00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "01:00" is displayed.

As described above, in this effect example, while one mini game related to one of the two timer notice effects is being played, one mini game related to another timer notice effect is being played. It has been shown that there are periods during which multiple mini-games are being played simultaneously as a result. That is, at least a period during which one mini game related to one timer announcement effect among a plurality of timer announcement effects is played and a period during which one mini game related to another timer announcement effect is played. It is shown that some overlap.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 causes the symbols on the dice to be stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 439 (14). In the example shown in FIG. 439(14), the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed in a form showing the result of "1", and it is informed that the result of the mission achievement in the mini game of the dice has been achieved. That is, it is determined that the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12 is changed according to the result of the mini game. In addition, in this example of performance, the result of the mission achievement is notified only by the stop display of the symbols on the dice, but the character display of “success” and the navigation character YM “Done” in the manner described above in FIG. 435. Characters may be displayed. On the other hand, the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are still counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 439(14), "03:75" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "00:75" is displayed. At this time, the mini game of the treasure box is also continued, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is valid.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439(15), the hold change animation is started for the first hold icon h11, and the fact that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed is notified. The countdown is interrupted in the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 439(15), the first timer notice display TM11 remains "03:75" and the second timer The notice display TM12 remains "00:75". Even at this time, the treasure chest mini game continues, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is valid.

After that, when the countdown of the timer display in the two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 is restarted and the timer display in the second timer advance notice display TM12 becomes "00:00" as shown in FIG. The display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the number-length display mode, and a highly reliable look-ahead display mode is achieved. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continuously performed, and is "03:00" at the timing shown in FIG. 439(16). Even at this time, the treasure chest mini game continues, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is valid.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439(17), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from "00:00" to "super hot hold", and the display mode of the hold icon indicates the reliability of the big hit. It is shown that the notification that the display mode has changed to the high display mode is given. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "02:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 439(17). Further, at this time, the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are moving to the left side as the mini game of the dice ends. Further, the treasure chest mini game continues, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also valid. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 439(18) to 440(26) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 439(18) to 440(26) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 435(16) to 436(24), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

After the reach state is formed as shown in FIG. 440(26), a strong sabotani group notice is given in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 440(27). At this time, the reach pattern is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters “group occurrence” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the Sabohani group notice has been given.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 440(28), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development!" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been announced.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 440 (29), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to inform the type of super reach.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 440(30), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In addition, the characters “strong cut-in” are displayed near the navigation character YM, which notifies that the strong cut-in image CI1a has been displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 440(31), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and at the substantially center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 440 (32), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 440 (33), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decorative decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 441 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 442 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 441. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 441(1) to (9) are the same as FIGS. 425(1) to 425(9), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 441(10), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "04:29" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 441(10). Further, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "pseudo-repeating", which fuels the expectation that the pseudo-reproduction will be performed when the countdown on the first timer notice display TM11 is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 441(11), the second stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. Further, the countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "02:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 441(11). In addition, the character “No!” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is denied that the pseudo-relation is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect related to the first timer notice display TM11. Have been suggested.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 441 (12), the timer preview change animation (timer preview addition animation) is started while the countdown is displayed on the first timer preview display TM11, and the effect is displayed on the first timer preview display TM11. Is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the characters "group notice?", and as a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11, It has been suggested that there may be Sabohani group notices instead of pseudo-relationships. As described above, in this effect example, it is notified that a certain effect, which is performed as a result of the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11, is not the pseudo-relation but another effect. As a result, the player may be able to expect that the effect performed after the countdown of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed is an effect having a higher jackpot reliability than the pseudo-relation.

Then, as shown in FIG. 441(13), the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is added, and “15:03” is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11. In addition, a question mark is added to the characters "group notice" near the navigation character YM, which suggests that the Sabohani group notice may be given. In this way, in this example of performance, it may be possible to recognize that another certain effect will be performed by performing addition of the timer display while predicting that pseudo-relation will be performed as a certain effect. is there. Even if the timer advance notice change animation is performed, the time indicated by the timer display in the timer advance notice display may not be changed, and in the end, a pseudo-relation may be performed as a certain effect. Further, in this effect example, the example in which the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is added has been described, but the timer display in the second timer advance notice display TM12 may be added in some cases. Further, the timer display may not only be added, but may be subtracted.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 441 (14), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. In this production example, the pseudo-relation production that is started after the pseudo continuous symbols are stopped and displayed is different from a certain production that is executed as a result of the timer advance production that is applied to the first timer advance notice display TM11. It is said that. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Yes!" is displayed to respond to the display of "group notice" in FIG. 441 (13), and the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed. It is informed that a certain effect that is executed as a result of is is a notice of the Sabohani group. In this example of the effect, the pseudo-relational effect is performed even though the certain effect is not the pseudo-relational effect. ), and the pseudo continuous production may be always performed. Also, a certain effect may be a pseudo-relational effect, and by additionally adding a timer display, another effect (sabohani group notice) may also be a certain effect, which corresponds to one timer notice effect. There may be a plurality of certain effects. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "14:60" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 441(14).

After that, as shown in FIG. 441(15), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “×2” is displayed, which indicates the number of times the second variable display of the decorative pattern is started by the pseudo-link. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "14:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 441(15).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 441 (16), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, the countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "06:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 441(16).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 441 (17), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 441 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:13" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 441(18).

Then, as shown in FIG. 442 (19) following FIG. 441 (18), when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays Sabohani group notice is given. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters “group occurrence” are displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the Sabohani group notice is given. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that, as a result of the timer notice effect by the first timer notice display TM11, the strong Savohani group notice is given instead of the pseudo-relation. It should be noted that the Savohani group notice may be started after the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the first timer notice display TM11 after the Savohani group notice is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is "00:00". Further, as shown in FIG. 442 (19), when the notice of the sabotani group is started, the display of the panda icon PND is ended.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 442 (20), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development!" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been announced.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 442 (21), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to inform the type of super reach. Further, a sabotani icon SBH is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen to notify that the sabotani group notice has occurred.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 442 (22), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. It notifies that CI1a has been displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 442 (23), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 442 (24), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 442 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hits of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 443 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 443(1) and 443(2) are the same as FIGS. 425(1) and 425(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 443(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this example of performance, two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are respectively frame-in from the left and right of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and two timer notice productions are started at the same time. To be done. Both of these two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are default display modes. In the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, "60:00" is displayed as the timer display, suggesting that a certain effect is started when 60 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. ing. In this example of performance, by displaying “60:00” on the first timer notice display TM11, it is possible to indicate the occurrence of super reach, and for example, a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect is displayed as a cut-in image. Suggests that. That is, the external appearance of the timer advance notice effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11 makes it appear as if it functions as a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed. Further, "02:00" is displayed as the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, and a certain effect is started when 2 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Suggests. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 443(4) to (7) are performed. The effect shown in FIGS. 443(4) to (7) is different from the effect shown in FIGS. 434(4) to (7) in the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 by 54 seconds. The description is omitted because it is the same except for.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 443(8), the character "timer attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the first timer notice display TM11 is alerted. The first timer advance notice display TM11 continues counting down, and "56:85" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 443(8).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 443(9), the timer preview shortened animation is started while the countdown is displayed on the first timer notification display TM11, and the effect is displayed on the first timer notification display TM11. It is shown.

After that, as shown in FIG. 443(10), the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is reduced, and “02:00” is displayed in the first timer advance notice display TM11. At this time, the panda icon PND is added to the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change as a certain effect. Thus, in this effect example, by changing the timer display during the countdown display, it is pretended that the timer advance notice effect is being executed as a look-ahead notice. The production is performed so that it can be known that it was executed as a notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 443(11), the hold change animation is further started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may further change. It The first timer advance notice display TM11 continues to count down, and "01:20" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 443(11).

Then, as shown in FIG. 443(12), at the timing when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the display mode of panda to the length display. The display mode is changed to a prefetch display mode that is a step up from the panda display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which, as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the first timer advance notice display TM11, an effect of further changing the display mode of the hold icon whose display mode has changed is shown. Has been done. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that a certain effect that is executed as a result of the two timer notice effects is performed for the same symbol variable display. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice effect concerning the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice effect concerning the second timer notice display TM12 are executed as notice effects for different symbol variation displays at the beginning of the effect. It is assumed that, after that, a certain effect corresponding to the second timer advance notice display TM12 and a certain effect corresponding to the first timer advance notice display TM11 that were initially performed targeted the same symbol variable display. Since it is found that the game is a thing, it may be possible to make the game surprising. In other words, from the time indicated by the timer display at the time when the first timer notice display TM11 was started, at the beginning of the display, it was suggested that the notice was given during the super reach, but the timer display was shortened. Moreover, the look-ahead notice for the same symbol variation display is performed in combination by giving a look-ahead notice for the same symbol variation display as the second timer notice display TM12 by changing the display form of the hold icon. As a result, the expectation for a big hit may be dramatically improved. After that, as shown in FIG. 443(13), in the first timer advance notice display TM11, “hold+1+1UP” is displayed instead of the display of “00:00”, and the notification is displayed in the second timer advance notice display TM12. In addition, it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed in two steps. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 443(14) to (17) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 443(14) to (17) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 434(11) to 434(14), so description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in this example of performance, both the timer notice effect of the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice effect of the second timer notice display TM12 function as a look-ahead notice for the same symbol variation display. Any of them may function as a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed. In any case, since a composite notice is given for the same variable display of symbols, it may be possible to further increase the reliability of the big hit.

Further, there may be a case where the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the timer change effect on the second timer advance notice display TM12 are different from each other, and the variable display may be executed. It may function as a look-ahead notice, and the other timer notice effect may also function as a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed. In this case, expectation for a big hit than in the case where the same symbol variation display is combined and performed. May be dispersed. Further, there may be a case where either one of the timer notice effect for the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice effect for the second timer notice display TM12 is a false timer notice effect.

FIG. 444 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 444(1) and (2) are the same as FIGS. 425(1) and 425(2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 444(3), it is shown that the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 444(4) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this example of performance, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation and is displayed in the center of the display screen. The first timer advance notice display TM11 is a default display mode. The first timer notice display TM11 displays "60:00" as the timer display, which suggests that a certain effect will be started 60 seconds after the countdown is started.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and "58:12" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 444(5). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.88 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 444(6), the bomb image BOM is displayed so as to overlap (overlap) with the front side of the first timer notice display TM11, and the bomb effect is started. Has been done. At this time, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is more difficult to visually recognize than when the bomb image BOM does not overlap. When the bomb effect is started, a display for igniting the squib extending from the upper end of the bomb image BOM is displayed, and the display is such that the squib is shortened according to the elapsed time from the start of the bomb effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 444(7) shows that the bomb effect is continuing. At the timing shown in FIG. 444(7), the state immediately before the fuse reaches the upper end of the bomb image BOM is shown. In addition, a question mark is added to the navigation character YM in the vicinity of the character "what", which suggests that some effect will be started as a result of the bomb effect.

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 444(8), the bomb image BOM explodes, and the effect image is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the first timer notice display TM11. .. In this case as well, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is difficult to visually recognize because it is overlapped by the effect image.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 444(9), the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed in addition to the first timer notice display TM11, and two timer notice effects are started. .. In addition, the characters "timer increase" are displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the two timer advance notice effects have started. Here, the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is reset to "60:00", and the second timer advance notice display TM12 displays "02:00" as the timer display. Further, both the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM12 are default display modes. That is, in this effect example, the timer notice display is divided and displayed during execution of the timer notice effect, and a new timer notice effect is started. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 444(10) to (12) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 444(10) to (12) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 443(4) to 443(6), description thereof will be omitted.

After that, for example, in a manner as shown in FIGS. 425(9) to 426(36), the symbol variation display is ended, the next symbol variation display is started, and after that, after the super reach is performed, the figure In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in 444(13), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed at the timing when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. In addition, the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a has been displayed. That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain notice effect. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 444(14) to (16) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 444(14) to (16) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 427(38) to (40), so description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 445 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 446 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 445. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 445(1) to (3) are the same as FIGS. 444(1) to (3), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 445(4) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this example of performance, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation and is displayed in the center of the display screen. The first timer advance notice display TM11 is a default display mode. On the first timer notice display TM11, "03:00" is displayed as the timer display, which suggests that a certain effect is started 3 seconds after the countdown is started.

Then, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and "02:12" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 445(5). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.88 seconds have passed since the countdown was started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 445(6), the bomb image BOM is displayed so as to overlap (overlap) with the front surface side of the first timer notice display TM11, and a state where the bomb effect is started is shown. Has been done. At this time, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is more difficult to visually recognize than when the bomb image BOM does not overlap. When the bomb effect is started, a display for igniting the squib extending from the upper end of the bomb image BOM is displayed, and the display is such that the squib is shortened according to the elapsed time from the start of the bomb effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 445(7) shows that the bomb effect is continuing. At the timing shown in FIG. 445(7), the state immediately before the fuse reaches the upper end of the bomb image BOM is shown. In addition, a question mark is added to the navigation character YM in the vicinity of the character "what", which suggests that some effect will be started as a result of the bomb effect. In the first timer notice display TM11, it is difficult to visually recognize the bomb image BOM, but the timer display is "00:00".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 445(8), the bomb image BOM is shown to explode.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 445(9), the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed in addition to the first timer notice display TM11, and two timer notice effects are started. .. In addition, the characters "timer increase" are displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the two timer advance notice effects have started. Here, the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is reset to "60:00", and the second timer advance notice display TM12 displays "02:00" as the timer display. Further, both the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM12 are default display modes. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect applied to the first timer advance notice display TM11, the bomb image BOM explodes as a certain effect, and two timer advance notice effects are newly started. There is.

In this production example, after the bomb image BOM has exploded, as shown in FIG. 445(9′), the characters “SP waiting” are displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the notice of super reach is displayed. The effect of adding the character KNG of the swordsman as an item and the effect of starting a new timer notification effect on the second timer notification display TM12 may be performed. At this time, the characters "Item Get" are displayed near the navigation character YM to inform that the advance notice item has been acquired. That is, as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11, two advance notice effects are performed as a certain effect, one is an effect in which the advance notice item is displayed, and the other is a new timer advance effect. May be started.

In addition, when the lower plate full tank error occurs after the bomb image BOM explodes and the two timer advance notice effects are started as described above, a new display is made as shown in FIG. 445 (9″). Even if the first ball advance notice display TM11 and the second timer tip display TM12 that have started are overlapped (overlapped) on the front side of the second timer advance notice display TM12, the ball removal error display "Please remove the ball" is displayed. Good. According to this, in order to make the timer notice display easy to visually recognize, it may be possible to urgently eliminate the ball removal error. The ball-out error display may be overlapped with the first timer advance notice display TM11 or the second timer advance notice display TM12.

In addition to the ball-out error display, for example, another error display such as a door opening display may overlap with the timer notice display. This is because the error display is an important notification content for the player, and thus it may be possible to focus attention on the occurrence of the error by deteriorating the visibility of the timer notice display.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 446(10) following FIG. 445(9), the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed. , "01:50" is displayed. On the other hand, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display is not started, and the display of "60:00" remains. That is, in this effect example, the state in which the countdown of the timer display is started only for one of the two timer notice effects is shown. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "attention" is displayed, and the second timer advance notice display TM12 is called for attention.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 446(11), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. The second timer advance notice display TM12 continues to count down, and "01:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 446(11). On the other hand, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown has not started, and the timer display remains "60:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 446 (12), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the panda display at the timing when the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”. The display mode is changed to a pre-reading display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the second timer advance notice display TM12 is shown. In addition, the word “hot” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes, and the reliability of the big hit with respect to the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 is increased. Suggests an improvement. In this production example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes at the timing when the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", but the timer on the second timer advance notice display TM12 changes. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the display becomes "00:00", or the second timer notice display TM12 after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. The timer display in may be "00:00". After that, the second timer notice display TM12 is erased. On the other hand, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown has not started, and the timer display remains "60:00".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 446 (13), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped and displayed, and after the temporary stop by the combination of the missing decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2" , The state of confirmation display is shown. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown has not started, and the timer display remains "60:00".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 446 (14), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 that has been the display mode of the prefetching notice becomes the change icon h0 that is the notice display mode related to the symbol variation by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode.

Then, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and “59:75” is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 446 (15). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

That is, in this effect example, a state in which the timer notice effect is performed across a plurality of symbol variable displays is shown.

FIG. 447 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 448 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 447. Is. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 447(1), a combination of decorative patterns “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 447(1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable icon h0 is not displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 447 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed.

In FIG. 447(1), one hold icon h11 of Toku-zu 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and is displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, none of the hold icons of special figure 2 are displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447(2), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. Further, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 (the hold icon which is the target of the pattern change this time) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center and is displayed as the variable icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

FIG. 447(3) shows that the game balls are won in the special-figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of holdings of the special-figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is a display mode composed of one bomb, and the character "TIMER" is added above. In addition, the characters "timer is on hold" are displayed near the navigation character YM. In this effect example, a state in which the notice display of the timer notice effect is displayed by displaying the hold icon in the display mode of the bomb is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447(4), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447(5), the second stop is performed and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447(6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 447(7). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns with the missing "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (8), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which was in the display mode of the bomb, moves to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, and the variable icon h0 that is the notification display mode of the timer notification effect related to the symbol variation. Become.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447(9) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by the frame-in animation, the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen to start the timer notice effect. The display mode of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "07:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 7 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. In addition, the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb shows that the display of "TIMER" is erased and the head of the fuse is ignited. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "something will happen after 7 seconds "..." is displayed, which suggests that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed 7 seconds later. Here, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed after the change icon display mode is changed, or the change icon h0 display mode is changed after the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed. Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and "06:36" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 447(10). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. In addition, the character "attention" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the first timer advance notice display TM11 is called. Further, the length of the squib of the variable icon h0 is also shortened according to the time after the countdown of the timer display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447(11), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. The first timer advance notice display TM11 continues to count down, and "03:29" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 447(11). In addition, a question mark is displayed along with the character "what" near the navigation character YM, which fuels an expectation as to which warning display will be displayed when the countdown on the first timer warning display TM11 is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (12), the second stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 447(12). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the characters “pseudo-relation”, suggesting that the pseudo-reproduction may be performed when the countdown on the first timer notice display TM11 is completed. doing.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (13), the countdown on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed, and the third stop occurs at the timing when the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. Done, the replay symbol RP as a pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. Further, the variable icon h0, which is the display mode of the bomb, has exploded, and the effect is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Pseudo-repeating" is displayed, and it is informed that the pseudo-repeating will be performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, but the middle symbol after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00" May be stopped and displayed, or the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 447(14), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the default display mode, and the variable icon h0 further indicates "2" that is the number of times the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-link. Is displayed. As described above, in this example of performance, when the pseudo notice effect as a certain effect is performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect, the change icon h0 notifies that the pseudo consecutive effect is performed. The situation is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447(15), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (16), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 447 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (18), the strong sabotani group notice is given. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters “group occurrence” are displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the Sabohani group notice is given.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 448 (19) following FIG. 447 (18), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and “SP development!” is displayed near the navigation character YM. , Has been informed that it will develop into super reach.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 448(20), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to inform the type of super reach.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 448 (21), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the characters “strong cut-in” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. It notifies that CI1a has been displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 448 (22), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 448 (23), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 448(24), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative symbols for the big hits of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this example of the effect, the timer advance notice effect is executed only once for each bomb display. However, even if only one bomb is displayed, the timer advance notice effect may be executed a plurality of times. Good. Further, a plurality of display modes (for example, color and shape) of the bomb may be prepared, and the number of times of the timer notice effect executed may be different depending on the display mode. In this case, the timer announcement effect of the number of times corresponding to the display mode may not be performed, and for example, the configuration may be such that the maximum three times, but only once.

FIG. 449 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 450 shows stepwise a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 449. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 449(1), the combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 449(1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 449 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed.

In FIG. 449(1), the two hold icons h11 and h12 of Toku-zu 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and are displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, none of the hold icons of special figure 2 are displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449(2), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is a decorative symbol display device. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 by moving to the change icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and displayed as the change icon h0, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. Is displayed as. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by the frame-in animation, the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen to start the timer notice effect. The display mode of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 5 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449(3), a mini game is also started. In this example of performance, when the mini game is started, the decorative pattern is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, the display of the roll of "1" on the dice and the display of "Hold change" are performed, and the mini game is It is announced that the display mode of the hold icon will change when the effect button 136 is operated after the start and, as a result, the result of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "mini game start" is displayed, and the start of the mini game is notified. It should be noted that the mini game may start after the timer notice effect starts, the timer notice effect may start after the mini game starts, the timing when the timer notice effect starts, and the mini game starts. The timing to do may be the same.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449(4), the variable display of symbols on the dice is started, the decal button image 136aL is displayed together with the button acceptance time meter MT, and acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 is started. In addition, the word "press" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to prompt the player to operate the effect button 136. Here, when the big button image 136aL is displayed, the reliability of the big hit is higher than that when the button image 136a of the normal size is displayed, that is, the big hit pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed. Further, on the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 449(4), the first timer advance notice display TM11 displays “04: 37” is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.63 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 449(5), as shown in FIG. 449(6), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the symbols on the dice in a stopped state. In the example shown in FIG. 449(6), the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed in such a manner as to show the result of "1", and the character of "Yoshi" is displayed, which is the result of achieving the mission in the mini game. Has been announced. That is, the result of this mini game determines that a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11. The first timer advance notice display TM11 is still counting down, and "02:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 449(6).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449(7), the hold change animation is started for the first hold icon h11, and the fact that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed is notified. Note that the countdown is still continuing on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "01:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 449(7).

Then, as shown in FIG. 449(8), when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the bomb display. The mode is changed, the character "TIMER" is added above it, the character "Timer hold" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the first hold icon h11 becomes the display mode of the bomb. It has been reported that it has changed. That is, in this example production, as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11 being displayed, a hold icon that changes to a hold icon in a display mode of a bomb that gives notice of execution of the timer advance notice effect as a certain effect It is shown that a mode change effect is being performed. Also, in this effect example, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 447, instead of displaying the hold icon of the display mode of the bomb at the time of winning the start winning, the display mode of the bomb is displayed while the symbol variable display after winning is being executed. An example in which the display mode is changed to the hold icon is shown. A replay icon is displayed in the first hold icon h11 in the bomb display mode, and the result of the timer advance notice effect executed in association with the first hold icon h11 in the bomb display mode is performed. It has been suggested that a pseudo-relationship may be performed as a certain effect. That is, it can be said that a preliminary announcement (pre-reading announcement) is being given. In this production example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 was changed to display a bomb at the timing when the timer display became "00:00", but the timer display became "00:00". The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be changed to a bomb display mode later, or the timer display may be changed to "00:00" after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to a bomb display mode. It may be.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449(9), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449(10), the second stop is performed and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

After that, a third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to a swing fluctuation, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 449(11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative pattern of the decoration "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449 (12), the suspension (first suspension) of the special diagram 1 is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which was in the display mode of the bomb, moves to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, and the variable icon h0 that is the notification display mode of the timer notification effect related to the symbol variation. Become. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 449(13) to (17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 449(13) to (17) are different from the effects shown in FIGS. 447(9) to (13), except that the replay icon is displayed on the variable icon h0. The description is omitted because it is the same. Here, the timer advance notice effect executed in FIGS. 449(13) to (17) is the timer advance notice effect concerning the second timer advance notice display TM12.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 449(18), after the variable icon h0 that is the bomb display mode has exploded, the display mode is changed to the replay display mode. As described above, in this effect example, when the pseudo notice effect as a certain effect is performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is a specific display mode (replay display mode). By doing so, it is shown that the fact that the pseudo continuous production has been performed is informed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 450 (19) subsequent to FIG. 449 (18), the second variable display of the decorative symbol by pseudo-linking is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 450(20), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 450(21), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 450(22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 450 (23), the strong sabotani group notice is given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area remains displayed together with the variable icon h0. In addition, the characters “group occurrence” are displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the Sabohani group notice is given. In addition, in this example of performance, one Savohani character making up the notice of the strong Savohani group stumbles on the variable icon h0, and a change animation of the display mode of the variable icon h0 is performed. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the change icon h0 may be affected by the advance notice of the Savohani group.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 450(24), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the replay display mode to the large-displayed bomb display mode. However, the characters "new timer!" are displayed near the navigation character YM. That is, the change icon h0 is used to give a notice display that the timer notice effect related to the third timer notice display TM13 is started. In addition, the character "hot" is displayed above the change icon h0 after this change, which suggests that a highly reliable production of a big hit may be performed as a certain production. .. Then, a cut-in icon is displayed in the variable icon h0, and as a result of the timer advance notice effect that is predicted to be executed, a cut-in image may be displayed as a certain effect. Is suggested. In addition, in this example of performance, since the character "hot" is displayed, it can be said that it is predicted that the strong cut-in image CI1a is likely to be displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 450 (25), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to inform the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon h0 is erased.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 450 (26) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the third timer notice display TM13 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by a frame-in animation. The display mode of the third timer notice display TM13 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13, which suggests that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started.

Then, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the third timer notice display TM13 is started, and "01:25" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13 at the timing shown in FIG. 450 (27). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

After that, when the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 becomes "0:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 450(28). That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain notice effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 450 (29 ), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 450(30), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Further, in this effect example, when the variable icon h0 is re-displayed, the display mode of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the strong cut-in image, and the timer advance notice effect related to the third timer notice display TM13 is performed. As a result, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 450 (31 ), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decorative decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 451 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 451(1) to (12) are the same as FIGS. 447(1) to (12), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 451 (13), the third stop is performed at the timing when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. It is performed, instead of the replay symbol RP in the middle symbol, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Failure" is displayed, and the timer for the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed. It is shown that the notice production was a fake timer notice production. The timer display may be "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed, or the middle symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display is "00:00". The middle symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display is "00:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 451 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased. The change icon h0 has changed from the bomb display mode to the default display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 451 (15), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns with the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this effect example, the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the bomb, but the example is shown in which the fake timer advance notice effect is performed, but the false timer advance notice effect may not be performed, That is, when the hold icon is displayed in the bomb display mode, the timer advance notice effect may be performed without fail.

FIG. 452 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 453 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 452. Is. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIG. 452(1) and FIG. 452(2) are the same as FIG. 447(1) and FIG.

In FIG. 452(3), a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting opening 230 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by 1 is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is a display mode in which three bombs are represented as one lump, and the character "TIMER x 3" is added above. In addition, the characters "timer is on hold" are displayed near the navigation character YM. In this example of performance, a state in which a notice icon indicating that the timer notice effect is to be executed three times is displayed by displaying the hold icon in a display mode in which three bombs are collected together is shown. .. It should be noted that the display mode of the bombs is not limited to one or three, and may be displayed in a display mode in which two bombs are in one block, or a display mode in which four or more bombs are in one block. May be displayed in.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452(4), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452(5), the second stop is performed and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452(6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to the swing fluctuation, and then in FIG. 452(7). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452(8), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode in which the three bombs are in a lump is moved to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, so that three timer advance notice effects regarding the symbol variation are executed. The change icon h0, which is a notice display mode of the fact, is displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452(9) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by the frame-in animation, the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen to start the timer notice effect. The display mode of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "07:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 7 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that the pseudo-relation is likely to be started as a certain effect. In addition, in the variable icon h0 in the display mode in which three bombs are a lump, the display of “TIMER×3” is erased and the tip of the fuse of the bomb arranged on the right side of the three bombs is ignited. The state is displayed, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "something is... in 7 seconds" is displayed, and a certain effect can be performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed in 7 seconds. It has been suggested that there is Further, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper center part. Here, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed after the change icon display mode is changed, or the change icon h0 display mode is changed after the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed. Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. Further, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display position of the decorative pattern is changed, or the display position of the decoration pattern is changed after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be displayed at the timing when the display position of the decorative pattern is changed.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and "06:36" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 452(10). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. In addition, the character "attention" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the first timer advance notice display TM11 is called. Further, the length of the squib of the bomb arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0 is also shortened according to the time after the countdown of the timer display is started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452(11) shows that the second timer notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by the frame-in animation, the second timer notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen to start the second timer notice effect. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "20:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect will be started when 20 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, in this effect example, the icon SBH of Sabohani is added to the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that there is a high possibility that the Sabohani group notice is started as a certain effect. In addition, the variable icon h0 in a display mode in which three bombs form a single block shows that the tip of the fuse of the bomb arranged on the left side of the three bombs is ignited. The length of the squib of the bomb placed on the left side also becomes shorter according to the time since the countdown on the timer display started. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "05:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 452(11). In addition, the character "attention" is continuously displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 452(12), "19:20" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.8 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 was started. On the other hand, also in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "04:95" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452(12), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this example of performance, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the character "Short notice is confirmed" appears with the character Sabohani on the right side of the treasure box image BOX. It is informed that when the character SBHN of Sabohani appears from the treasure box, the Sabohani group notice is given. In addition, the characters "Attention also to the mini game" are displayed near the navigation character YM, and attention is given to the mini game together with the timer notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452(13), a state in which the result of the mini game is displayed is shown. Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is opened, the character SBHN of Sabohani appears from the inside, and the character "Success!" is displayed in the vicinity thereof. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Yatteze" is displayed, indicating that the mini game has succeeded. Note that the countdown continues in each of the two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 452 (13), "03:51" is displayed in the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer The notice display TM12 displays "17:76".

Then, as shown in FIG. 452(14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the second timer notification display TM12 changes from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode, and the second timer notification display TM12 is displayed. The icon SBH of the added sabotani is displayed in a manner of increasing to four, and it is informed that the sabotani group notice will be executed. It should be noted that when the high reliability display mode is changed, the strong sabotani group notice may be executed without fail, or the weak sabotani group notice may be executed in some cases. , Strong Savohani group notice is always executed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with "pseudo-relation", and as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11, the pseudo-relation effect can be performed as a certain effect. It has been suggested that there is sex. Note that the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 452(14), "01:37" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer In the notice display TM12, "15:62" is displayed.

After that, when the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 452 (15) and "00:00" is displayed, the right side of the variable icon h0 in the display mode in which three bombs are collected The bomb explodes and the effects are displayed. Then, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-replay symbol RP-decoration 6" is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of “pseudo-relation!” is displayed to inform that the pseudo-relational effect will be performed. The decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, or the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 after the decorative design is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative design may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is "00:00". On the other hand, in the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "14:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 452(15).

After that, as shown in FIG. 452(16), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “×2” is displayed, which indicates the number of times the second variable display of the decorative pattern is started by the pseudo-link. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased and the replay icon RPL is displayed to inform that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed. It should be noted that the replay icon RPL may be started to be displayed after the second variation display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo rendition is started, or the second decoration by the pseudo rendition after the replay icon RPL is started to be displayed. The variable display of the symbols may be started, or the replay icon RPL may be displayed at the timing when the second variable display of the decorative symbols by the pseudo-link is started. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the mode in which the bomb arranged on the right side is deleted. As described above, in this example of the effect, the bomb is reduced by one each time the timer notice effect is performed once. The second timer advance notice display TM12 continues to count down, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 452(16).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452(17), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "05:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 452(17).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452 (18), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 453 (19) following FIG. 452 (18 ), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. R. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. The second timer advance notice display TM12 continues to count down, and "02:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 453 (19).

After that, as shown in FIG. 453(20), when the countdown in the second timer advance notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the change icon h0 in the display mode in which the two bombs are in one lump is displayed. The bomb on the left side explodes, the effect is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a notice of the strong sabotani group. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, the characters “group occurrence” are displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the Sabohani group notice is given. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the strong sabotani group notice is given as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12. Note that the Savohani group notice may be started after the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the second timer notice display TM12 after the Savohani group notice is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 is "00:00".

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 453(21) shows that the Sabohani group notice is continuously given. At this time, a sabotani icon SBH is displayed below the replay icon RPL icon to notify that the sabotani group notice has been given. At this time, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased. Further, in this effect example, since the effect display is switched to the display of super reach, the variable icon h0 displayed in the variable icon display area is erased. The variable icon h0 may be deleted after the second timer notice display TM12 is deleted, or the second timer notice display TM12 may be deleted after the change icon h0 is deleted. The timing at which the timer notice display TM12 is deleted and the timing at which the change icon h0 is deleted may be the same.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 453 (22), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to inform the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon display area is erased. In addition, in this example of production, corresponding to the variable icon h0 of the remaining one of the three bombs, the bomb icon and “standby” are displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Is displayed to inform that the third timer notice effect is scheduled to start. As described above, in this effect example, the display that the timer advance notice effect is waiting is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 453 (23) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the third timer notice display TM13 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by a frame-in animation. The display mode of the third timer notice display TM13 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13, which suggests that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. At this time, the bomb icon displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen is erased. The replay icon RPL overlaps the front side of the third timer notice display TM13 and is more difficult to visually recognize than the non-overlapped state.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the third timer advance notice display TM13 is started, and "01:25" is displayed on the third timer advance notice display TM13 at the timing shown in FIG. 453 (24). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

After that, when the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 becomes “00:00”, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 453(25). That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain effect.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 453 (26), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 453 (27), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Further, in this effect example, when the variable icon h0 is re-displayed, the display mode of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the strong cut-in image, and the timer advance notice effect related to the third timer notice display TM13 is performed. As a result, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 453 (28), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decoration decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this effect example, the timer notice effect is executed the number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed in the hold icon, but not the same number of times as the number corresponding to the number of bombs displayed in the hold icon. The displayed number of bombs may be the minimum guaranteed number of times the timer advance notice effect is executed, or the maximum executable number of times.

In addition, as a mission, when the timer notice production is executed the number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed in the hold icon (that is, when the mission is achieved), the big hit symbol is definitely displayed. May be configured as.

FIG. 454 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 454(1) to (10) are the same as FIGS. 447(1) to (10), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

At the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "06:36", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 454(11) shows that the second timer notice effect is starting. Has been done. Specifically, for example, by the frame-in animation, the second timer notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen to start the second timer notice effect. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "02:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect will be started when 2 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started.

Then, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer advance notice display TM12 is started, and "01:00" is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12 at the timing shown in FIG. 454 (12). It is displayed. That is, one second has elapsed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 was started. On the other hand, also in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "05:36" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 454 (12), the explosive effect starts even though the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb does not show "00:00" in any of the timer notice displays. Has been done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 454(13), the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the display mode of the bomb to the display mode of the panda at the timing when the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”. Then, the display mode of pre-reading is set. In addition, the character "icon change" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed. Then, as shown in FIG. 454(14), the second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased. Further, the characters of "holding change" displayed near the navigation character YM are also deleted. The first timer advance notice display TM11 continues to count down, and "04:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 454(14).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 454(15), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "03:29" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 454(15). In addition, a question mark is displayed along with the character "what" near the navigation character YM, which fuels an expectation as to which warning display will be displayed when the countdown on the first timer warning display TM11 is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 454(16), the second stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 454(16). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the characters “pseudo-relation”, suggesting that the pseudo-reproduction may be performed when the countdown on the first timer notice display TM11 is completed. doing.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 454(17), the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed, and the third stop occurs at the timing when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". Done, the replay symbol RP as a pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "pseudo-repeat!" are displayed, and it is informed that the pseudo-repeat will be performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, but the middle symbol after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00" May be stopped and displayed, or the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the timer advance notice effect is performed a plurality of times by the hold icon in the display mode of the bomb that suggests the single timer advance notice effect is shown.

FIG. 455 is a diagram showing stepwise about another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 456 is a figure showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 455. Is. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. It should be noted that FIGS. 455(1) and (2) are the same as FIGS. 447(1) and (2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 455(3), a state in which the game balls are won in the special-figure 1 starting opening 230 and the number of holdings of the special-figure 1 is increased by one is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold number of special figure 1 is displayed in the second hold number display. It becomes "1". Here, the first hold icon h11 has a display mode of a bomb, but has a display mode of a large bomb having a size larger than that shown in FIG. 447(3). In addition, a replay icon, a sabotani icon, and a Bancho icon are displayed in the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the large bomb, and the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the large bomb is displayed. It has been suggested that, as a result of the timer advance notice effect executed in relation to, the pseudo continuous effect, the Sabohani group advance notice, and the cut-in image may be displayed as a certain effect. That is, it can be said that the pseudo-relational production, the Sabohani group notice, and the cut-in image notice (prefetch notice) are given. In addition, a character "Large timer is on hold" is displayed near the navigation character YM. In this example of the effect, three icons indicating an effect to be executed as a certain effect are displayed on the hold icon in the display mode of one bomb, thereby displaying a notice that the timer notice effect is executed three times. Is being performed. The number of icons shown in the hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode of the large bomb is not limited to one or three, and may be a mode in which two icons are displayed, or four icons may be displayed. There may be a case where the above icons are displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455(4), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Onihi” is displayed, suggesting that the jackpot reliability for the pattern variation display of the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the large bomb, is extremely high. doing.

In FIG. 455(5), a state in which the game balls are won in the special-figure 1 starting opening 230 and the number of holdings of the special-figure 1 is increased by 1 is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon (second hold icon) h12 of special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold number of special figure 1 is displayed in the second hold number display. It becomes "2". Here, the second hold icon h12 is partially overlapped with the first hold icon h11 that is the display mode of the large bomb, and it is considered that the second hold icon h12 is less visible than in the case where the second hold icon h12 is not overlapped. There is. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Oni heat standby" is displayed, and the start of the pattern variation display related to the first hold icon h11, which is suggested to have extremely high reliability of the big hit. It informs that it is waiting.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455(6), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455(7), the third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to the swing fluctuation, and then in FIG. 455(8). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns that are missing "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455(9), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the large bomb moves to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, and a notice display that three timer notice effects regarding the symbol variation are executed It becomes the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb which is the mode. In addition, in response to the start of the pattern variation display for the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the large bomb, the character “Demon heat fluctuating” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a big hit announcement is given. Has been done.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455(10) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by the frame-in animation, the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen to start the timer notice effect. The display mode of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "07:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 7 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that the pseudo continuous effect is likely to be started as a certain effect. In addition, the variation icon h0 in the display mode of the large bomb shows that the tip of the squib is ignited, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "something will happen in 7 seconds..." is displayed. It is suggested that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed after 7 seconds. Further, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper center part. Here, the first timer notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed after the display position of the decorative pattern is changed, or the display position of the decoration pattern is changed after the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed. Alternatively, the first timer notice display TM11 may be displayed at the timing when the display position of the decorative design is changed.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and "06:36" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 455(11). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. In addition, the character "attention" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the first timer advance notice display TM11 is called. Further, the length of the fuse in the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb is shortened according to the time after the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started. At this time, for example, the display mode of the replay icon displayed in the variable icon h0 may be changed by blinking or the like to notify that the timer advance notice effect corresponding to the replay icon is started. .. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455(12) shows that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by the frame-in animation, the second timer notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen to start the second timer notice effect. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "20:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect will be started when 20 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, in this effect example, the icon SBH of Sabohani is added to the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that there is a high possibility that the Sabohani group notice is started as a certain effect. Further, the countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "05:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 455(12). In addition, the character "attention" is continuously displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect. At this time, for example, the display mode of the sabotani icon displayed in the variable icon h0 may be changed by blinking or the like to notify that the timer advance notice effect corresponding to the sabotani icon has started. ..

Then, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer advance notice display TM12 is started, and "19:20" is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12 at the timing shown in FIG. 455(13). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.8 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 was started. On the other hand, also in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "04:95" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455(13), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this example of performance, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the character "Short notice is confirmed" appears with the character Sabohani on the right side of the treasure box image BOX. It is informed that when the character of Savohani appears from the treasure box, a notice of the Savohani group will be given. Here, although a part of the variable icon h0 in the display mode of the large bomb is overlapped with the character display of "group notice confirmed when appears", the character display may be overlapped with the variable icon h0. .. In addition, the characters "Attention also to the mini game" are displayed near the navigation character YM, and attention is given to the mini game together with the timer notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455(14), it is shown that the result of the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is opened, the character of Sabohani appears from the inside, and the character "Success!" is displayed in the vicinity thereof. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Yetase" is displayed, showing that the mini game has been successful. The two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 each continue counting down. At the timing shown in FIG. 455(14), "03:51" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed. The notice display TM12 displays "17:76".

Then, as shown in FIG. 455(15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the second timer notification display TM12 changes from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode, and the second timer notification display TM12 is displayed. The icon SBH of the added sabotani is displayed in a manner of increasing to four, and it is informed that the sabotani group notice will be executed. It should be noted that when the high reliability display mode is changed, the strong sabotani group notice may be executed without fail, or the weak sabotani group notice may be executed in some cases. , Strong Savohani group notice is always executed. In addition, in the variable icon h0 in the display mode of the large bomb, since the mini-game is successful and the execution of the notice of the Savohani group is confirmed, the mark of “done” is displayed so as to overlap the icon of the Savohani. Note that the “done” mark may be displayed after the notice of the Savohani group is executed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with "pseudo-relation", and as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11, the pseudo-relation effect can be performed as a certain effect. It has been suggested that there is sex. The two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 each continue counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 455(15), "01:37" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and the second timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "15:62" is displayed.

After that, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 455(16) and "00:00" is displayed, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the "decoration 5 -Replay symbol RP-decorative 6" combination of decorative symbols is displayed. The variable icon h0 in the display mode of the large bomb partially overlaps the replay symbol RP, but the replay symbol RP may overlap the variable icon h0. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of “pseudo-relation!” is displayed to inform that the pseudo-relational effect will be performed. The decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, or the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 after the decorative design is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative design may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is "00:00". On the other hand, in the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "14:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 455(16).

After that, as shown in FIG. 455(17), the second variation display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-link is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “×2” is displayed, which indicates the number of times the second variable display of the decorative pattern is started by the pseudo-link. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased and the replay icon RPL is displayed to inform that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed. Furthermore, in this example of performance, since the pseudo-relational effect is executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect, "done" by overlapping the replay icon displayed in the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb. Mark is displayed. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 455(17).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455(18), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "05:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 455(18).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 456 (19) subsequent to FIG. 455 (18), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 456(20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. The second timer advance notice display TM12 continues to count down, and "02:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 456(20).

Then, as shown in FIG. 456(21), when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a notice of the strong sabotani group. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, the characters “group occurrence” are displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the Sabohani group notice is given. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the strong sabotani group notice is given as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 456(22), it is shown that the Sabohani group notice is continuously given. At this time, a sabotani icon SBH is displayed below the replay icon RPL icon to notify that the sabotani group notice has been given. At this time, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased. Further, in this effect example, after that, the effect display is switched to the display of super reach, but when the change icon h0 is in the display mode of the large bomb, the change icon h0 is not erased, and even if the change to super reach is performed. Although the displayed state is maintained, the variable icon may be deleted.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 456 (23), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to inform the type of super reach.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 456 (24) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the third timer notice display TM13 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by a frame-in animation. The display mode of the third timer notice display TM13 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13, which suggests that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. The replay icon RPL overlaps the front side of the third timer notice display TM13 and is more difficult to visually recognize than the non-overlapped state.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the third timer notice display TM13 is started, and "01:25" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13 at the timing shown in FIG. 456(25). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

After that, when the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 becomes “00:00”, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 456(26) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a, and then FIG. 456(27). As shown in, the third timer advance notice display TM13 is erased. Further, in this effect example, since the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the timer advance notice effect, the strong icon is displayed so as to overlap with the length icon displayed in the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb. “Completed” mark is displayed. In this way, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain effect.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 456 (28), since effects corresponding to all the icons shown in the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb are performed, the variation icon h0 starts to explode. Has been done. Then, as shown in FIG. 456 (29), the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the display mode of the large bomb to the display mode of panda, and the advance notice display by the variable icon h0 is performed. Here, the variation icon h0 may change to a display mode other than the display mode of the panda, for example, when the display mode of the bancho is changed, the jackpot pattern is larger than when the display mode of the panda is changed. May be easily confirmed and displayed. In addition, the default display mode may be changed. Then, as shown in FIG. 456 (30), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is erased together with the variable icon display area, but it may not be erased.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 456 (31 ), it is shown that the combination of the decorative patterns “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5” is temporarily stopped due to the fluctuation. At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. At this time, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are also displayed again. Then, as shown in FIG. 456 (32), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decoration decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 457 is a diagram showing in stages an example of the pending notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 457(1) and (2) are the same as FIGS. 447(1) and (2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 457(3), a state in which a game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting opening 230 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by 1 is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special figure 1 is a display mode of the Yoshimune hold, and is a display mode of the prefetch notice. When the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of this Yoshimune hold, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally fixed and stopped than when the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode. In addition, the character “I appeared!” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold has been displayed. It should be noted that the display of the character "I appeared!" may be started after the display of the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of Yoshimune hold has started, or the display of the character "I appeared!" After the start, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of Yoshimune hold may be started to be displayed, or at the timing when the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of Yoshimune hold is started to display "I appeared! The display of the character "" may be started. Further, in addition to the display mode of Yoshimune hold representing the character of Tonosama, for example, a hold icon is displayed in a display mode of grandfather hold representing a grandpa character or a display mode of grandpa hold representing a grandmother character. Alternatively, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the type of character.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 457(4), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters of "Next Expected Change" are displayed, and the expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of Yoshimune hold is high. Has been suggested.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 457(5), the second stop is performed and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. The characters displayed near the navigation character YM have been deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 457(6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to the swing fluctuation, and then in FIG. 457(7). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 457 (8), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which has been the display mode of Yoshimune hold, becomes the change icon h0 which is the notice display mode regarding the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "SP confirmed!" is displayed, and the advance notice is given to inform that the super reach will be started. As described above, it can be said that the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold functions as a pre-reading notice of the big hit and also as a pre-reading notice of super reach. The display of the character "SP confirmed!" may be started after the symbol variable display is started, or the character "SP confirmed!" may be displayed at the timing when the symbol variable display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 457(9), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 457(10), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 457(11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 457(12), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the weak Savohani group announcement is made in which the number of Sabohani SBHN is smaller than that of the strong Savohani group announcement described above. This weak Savohani group notice is more reliable than it was without the Savohani group notice, but less reliable than when the strong Savohani group notice was given.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 457(13), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been informed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 457(14), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to inform the type of super reach.

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 457 (15) shows that the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 457 (16), the main character's shrine is defeated by an enemy swordsman, and a defeated screen is displayed, and at the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, a middle symbol is stopped and displayed. The "decoration 6" of the schedule is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". After that, as shown in FIG. 457 (17), the decorative pattern display device 208 shows that the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. There is. At this time, the character “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result will be lost. Further, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are displayed again, and the change icon h0 in the display mode of Yoshimune hold is also displayed again. After that, as shown in FIG. 457 (18), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns with the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 458 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 459 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 458. Is. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 458(1) and 458(2) are the same as FIGS. 447(1) and 447(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 458(3), a state in which a game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting opening 230 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by 1 is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special figure 1 is a display mode that is common to the display mode of Yoshimune hold representing the character of the lord mentioned above, but the character of the lord holding a bomb is displayed. The display mode of the Yoshimune bomb held is shown, and the display mode of the pre-reading notice of the timer notice production is shown. In addition, the character "group" is displayed on the bomb held by the lord's character, and there is a possibility that the Sabohani group notice will be given as a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed. It suggests. In addition, the character "I appeared!" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is displayed. It should be noted that the display of the character "I'm here!" may be started after the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb is started to be displayed, or the character "I'm here!" is displayed. The first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold may be started after the start of, or at the timing when the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is displayed. The display of the characters “Mr. Appears!” may be started. Further, in addition to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold representing the lord's character, for example, the display icon of the grand bomb hold representing the grandpa character or the display icon of the grand bomb reserve representing the grandmother character is displayed. May be displayed, and the possibility of a true timer advance notice effect may differ depending on the type of character.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458(4), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character of "next variation expectation" is displayed, and the expectation of the big hit in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is high. Is suggested.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458(5), the second stop is performed and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In addition, the character "something" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, showing that a certain message is being displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458(6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to the swing fluctuation, and then in FIG. 457(7). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns that are missing "decoration 5-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the display of the character "something" is switched to the display of the character "I have it", that is, the message "I have something" is displayed from these character displays. Can be said to be This message is a message corresponding to the display of the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, and suggests that the timer notice effect may be started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458(8), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which has been the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb suspension, becomes the change icon h0 which is the notice display mode regarding the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Onihi" is displayed, suggesting that the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display related to the variation icon h0 which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb suspension is extremely high. ing. The display of the character "Onihi" may be started after the symbol variable display is started, or the display of the character "Onihi" may be started at the timing when the symbol variable display is started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458(9) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this example of performance, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation and is displayed in the center of the display screen. The first timer advance notice display TM11 is a default display mode. On the first timer notice display TM11, "12:00" is displayed as the timer display, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 12 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. In addition, the character "attention" is displayed near the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and "11:86" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 458(10). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.14 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458(11), the first timer advance notice display TM11 is shown switching from the timer display to the character display of “waiting for group occurrence”. At this time, the icon of Sabohani is added to the left side of the character display of "waiting for group occurrence", and it is notified that the Sabohani group notification will be executed as a result of the timer announcement effect. That is, in this effect example, the explanation display (tutorial display) is being performed in the timer advance notice display while the timer display countdown is being executed (during subtraction) in the timer advance notice display. After that, as shown in FIG. 458(12), the character display of "standby for group occurrence" is switched to the timer display again. In this effect example, the timer display and the character display of "waiting for group occurrence" on the first timer advance notice display TM11 are alternately switched at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 0.5 seconds) to be displayed. It is performed after the countdown is started until the reach state described later is reached. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "10:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 458(12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458(13), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues and the alternate display described above also continues, and "04:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 458(13).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458(14), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 458(15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 458 (16), the alternating display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 ends and the timer display is continuously displayed. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 458(16).

After that, as shown in FIG. 458(17), when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a notice of a strong sabotani group. At this time, although the hold icon display area is erased, the variable icon display area is still displayed and the variable icon h0 is also continuously displayed. In addition, the characters “group occurrence” are displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the Sabohani group notice is given. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect performed by the first timer advance notice display TM11, the Sabohani group advance notice is shown as a certain effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458(18) shows that the Sabohani group notice is continuously given. Then, the variable icon h0, which has been the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, is changed to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold that the bomb has been deleted. That is, in this example of performance, a change icon (holding icon) in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, which is a combination of the advance notice of advance/failure determination (prefetch notice) and the notice of timer notice effect (prefetch notice), is executed by the timer notice production. An example is shown in which the display mode of Yoshimune holding is changed to have a function of only advance notice of advance/rejection determination (prefetch advance notice) after performing the function. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458(18), the first timer advance notice display TM11 is also deleted. It should be noted that the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be deleted after the change icon h0 display mode is changed, or even if the change icon h0 display mode is changed after the first timer notice display TM11 is deleted. Alternatively, the timing at which the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes and the timing at which the first timer advance notice display TM11 erases may be the same.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 459 (19) following FIG. 458 (18), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed. To be done. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to inform the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon h0 is erased together with the variable icon display area. The variable icon h0 may be erased after the transition to the super reach, the transition to the super reach may be performed after the variation icon h0 is deleted, or the variation icon h0 may be changed at the timing of transition to the super reach. It may be erased.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 459(20), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. It notifies that CI1a has been displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 459(21), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and a screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 459(22), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Further, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are also redisplayed, and the change icon h0 is also redisplayed in the display mode of Yoshimune hold. After that, as shown in FIG. 459(23), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols for the big hit of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 460 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 461 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 460. Is. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 460(1), the combination of decorative patterns "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 460(1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 460 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed.

In FIG. 460(1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of Toku-zu 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and are displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, none of the hold icons of special figure 2 are displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460(2), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is a decorative symbol display device. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 by moving to the change icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and displayed as the change icon h0, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. Is displayed as. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

FIG. 460(3) shows that the game balls are won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is newly displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the number of holdings of the special figure 1 in the second holding number display becomes “2”. .. Here, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is a display mode in which three bombs are represented as one lump, and the character "TIMER x 3" is added above. In addition, the characters "timer is on hold" are displayed near the navigation character YM. In this effect example, as described above with reference to FIG. 452, a notice icon indicating that the timer notice effect is to be executed three times is displayed by displaying the hold icon in a display mode in which three bombs are collected. Is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460(4), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460(5), the second stop is performed and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460(6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is displayed as a stop in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed, and then in FIG. 460(7). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460(8), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452(9) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, a timer advance notice effect is started when the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by a frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 5 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. In addition, in this effect example, the icon SBH of Sabohani is added to the first timer notice display TM11. In this effect example, as a result of performing the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11, as will be described later. , It is suggested that the character of Sabohani may appear from the treasure chest image BOX in the mini game. In addition, the first hold icon h11 in a display mode in which three bombs form a lump indicates that the tip of the fuse of the bomb located in the center of the three bombs is ignited, and the navigation character YM is displayed. In the vicinity of, the character "something is... in 5 seconds" is displayed, and it is suggested that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed in 5 seconds. Further, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper center part. Here, the first timer notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed, or the first hold icon is displayed after the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed. The display mode of h11 may change, or the first timer advance notice display TM11 may start to be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. Further, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display position of the decorative pattern is changed, or the display position of the decoration pattern is changed after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be displayed at the timing when the display position of the decorative pattern is changed. In this example of the effect, the character display of "TIMER x 3" additionally displayed above the first hold icon h11 is continuously displayed.

Then, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and "04:06" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 460(10). It is displayed. That is, 0.94 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Further, the length of the squib of the bomb arranged in the center of the first hold icon h11 is also shortened according to the time after the countdown of the timer display is started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460(11) shows that the mini game is started. In this example of performance, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the character "Sudden hot notice when "is displayed" is displayed on the right side of the treasure box image BOX together with the character Sabohani It is informed that when a character of Sabohani appears from the treasure box, a notice that the jackpot is extremely reliable is executed. In addition, a character of "mini game" is displayed near the navigation character YM to call attention to the mini game.

After that, when the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 460 (12) and "00:00" is displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the result of the mini game. Specifically, the treasure chest image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the center and then is opened, and the character SBHN of Sabohani appears in a large size from the inside, and " The character "group notice confirmed" is displayed, and the character "yetaze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to inform that the mini-game is successful and the Sabohani group notice is executed. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the result of the mini game is derived as a certain effect is shown as a result of the timer notification effect related to the first timer notification display TM11 being performed. It can also be said that, as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11, a look-ahead advance notice that the Sabohani group advance notice is given is shown as a certain effect.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (13), the character “in preparation” is displayed with the icon SBH of the sabotani in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the sabotani group will be announced. There is. Further, at this time, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to a mode in which the bomb arranged in the center is erased and two bombs are represented as one lump. Here, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the display of the characters SBH of the sabotani and the display of "in preparation" is started, or the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. After that, the display of the sabotani icon SBH and the character display of "preparing" may be started, or the first hold icon h11 may be displayed at the timing when the display of the sabotani icon SBH and the character display of "preparing" is started. The display mode may change. It should be noted that if the mini game is successful, the strong Savohani group notice may be executed without fail, or the weak Savohani group notice may be executed in some cases. The group notice is always executed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 460(14), after the first stop to the third stop are sequentially performed, the temporary stop due to the fluctuation in fluctuation is combined with the decorative pattern of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 5". It is shown to be taking place. Then, as shown in FIG. 460(15), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns with the missing "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (16), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 after the display mode has changed as described above moves to the variable icon display area in the state of the changed display mode, and the remaining two timer notices related to the symbol change The variable icon h0 is a notice display mode that the effect is executed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (17) shows that two timer notice effects are started at the same time. In this effect example, the second timer advance notice display TM12 and the third timer advance notice display TM13 are respectively frame-in by frame-in animation from the left and right of the display screen, and two timer advance notice effects are simultaneously started. The second timer advance notice display TM12 and the third timer advance notice display TM13 are both default display modes. The replay icon RPL is added to the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the question mark icon is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13 displayed on the left side of the display screen. QST is added. Then, "07:00" is displayed as the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 7 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started, That is, it is suggested that the pseudo-relationship may be started when 7 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display was started. Further, "08:00" is displayed as the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 8 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. It should be noted that it is not clear which effect is a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer advance effect produced on the third timer advance notice display TM13. In this example of performance, since the two timer notice displays TM12 and TM13 start counting down at the same time, a certain performance starts when both 7 seconds and 8 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. It is suggested to be done. In addition, in the variable icon h0 in the display mode in which two bombs are in a lump, the heads of both fuses of the two bombs are respectively ignited in response to the start of the two timer advance notice effects.

After that, the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 and the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 each start counting down (subtraction display), and at the timing shown in FIG. , "04:27" is displayed, and "05:27" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. That is, 0.73 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

After that, when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and "00:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 461 (19) following FIG. 460 (18), the display that the two bombs have become a lump Both bombs in the variation icon h0 of the aspect explode, and the effect is displayed. Then, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-replay symbol RP-decoration 6" is displayed. On the other hand, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown continues, and "01:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 461 (19).

After that, as shown in FIG. 461 (20), the second variation display of the decorative symbols by the pseudo-link is started. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased and the replay icon RPL is displayed to inform that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown continues, and "00:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 461(20).

After that, at the timing when the countdown in the third timer notice display TM13 is completed and becomes “00:00”, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 461(21), the display mode of the variable icon h0 is a lump of two bombs. The display mode is changed to the display mode of the panda, and the display mode of the notice relating to the symbol variable display is displayed. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the third timer advance notice display TM13. Further, in this example of the effect, the content of the certain effect was not clear due to the question mark icon QST, but the content of the certain effect was revealed for the first time because the countdown was completed and the certain effect was performed. Is shown. Further, in this effect example, when the hold icon that is started to be displayed in the display mode in which the three bombs are in a lump is displayed as the hold icon, the timer notice effect is performed as the look-ahead notice and is displayed as the variable icon. After that, it is shown that a timer notice effect is also given as a notice concerning the symbol variation display. That is, when the hold icon in the display mode for notifying that the timer advance notice effect is performed a plurality of times is displayed, the state in which the timer advance notice effect is executed in each of the plurality of symbol variable displays is shown. Specifically, it is shown that the Sabohani group notice, the pseudo-relation effect, and the change effect of the change icon h0, which are performed as a result of the execution of the timer notice effect, are performed in different symbol variable displays. Further, in this effect example, the look-ahead notice given as a result of a certain timer notice effect and the subject of the notice relating to the symbol change display given as a result of another timer notice effect are the same symbol change display. An example is given. Further, in this effect example, two timer advance notice effects are simultaneously started, but the contents of the effect performed as a result of execution of the respective timer advance effects are different.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 461 (22), the third timer notice display TM13 is erased, and below the replay icon RPL, the panda icon PND is displayed and the change icon h0 gives a notice. It has been notified that notification has been performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 461 (23), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 461 (24), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 461 (25), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the upper center part of the display screen to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. Further, the icon SBH of the sabotani and the display of "preparing" which were displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM are erased.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 461 (26), the strong sabotani group notice is given so as to correspond to the display of the icon SBH of the sabotani displayed near the navigation character YM and the "preparing". .. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, the characters “group occurrence” are displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the Sabohani group notice is given. Further, in this example of performance, one Sabohani character SBHN composing the notice of the strong Sabohani group stumbles on the variable icon h0, and a change animation of the display mode of the variable icon h0 is performed. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the change icon h0 may be affected by the advance notice of the Savohani group.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 461 (27), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the display mode of the panda to the display mode of the bancho displayed in a large size. However, it is shown that the form of the advance notice display by the variable icon h0 is stepped up to the one with higher reliability.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 461 (28), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to inform the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon display area is erased.

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 461 (29) shows that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 461 (30), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 461 (31), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. In addition, it is also shown that the variable icon h0 is also re-displayed in a display mode of a large size guard length. Then, as shown in FIG. 461 (32 ), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decoration decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 462 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIG. 462(1) and FIG. 462(2) are the same as FIG. 449(1) and FIG.

In FIG. 462(3), a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting opening 230 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by 1 is shown. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is newly displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the number of holdings of the special figure 1 in the second holding number display becomes “2”. .. Here, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is in a button hold display mode, and the effect of changing the hold icon display mode is started by operating the effect button 136.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 462(4), the character "PUSH" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the notification for promoting the pressing operation of the effect button 136 is performed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 462(5), in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 462(6), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is the button hold display mode. The display mode of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the bomb, and a state in which the timer display is displayed above the second hold icon h12 in which the display mode is changed is shown. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the timer notice display is displayed on the hold icon is shown. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 462(6), "10:00" is displayed as the timer display, suggesting that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. There is. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the time (initial value) at the start of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display can be specified by the hold icon. In this production example, the countdown start is held until the symbol variable display corresponding to the second hold icon h12 is started, but the symbol variable display corresponding to the second hold icon h12 is displayed. The countdown may be started in the suspended state, that is, in the state displayed as the suspended icon. In this case, for example, when the timing at which a certain effect is started, such as the timing after the symbol variable display corresponding to the second hold icon h12 is started, the timer display is reset and the countdown is restarted. You may do so. In addition, a question mark is added to the characters near the navigation character YM together with the characters “pseudo-relation”, and as a result of the timer advance notice effect, the pseudo-relation effect may be executed as a certain effect. Is suggested. At the timing shown in FIG. 462(6), a lower plate full tank error has occurred, and in the decorative pattern display device 208, it overlaps with a part of the front surface side of the second hold icon h12 (so that they overlap. In), the ball removal error message "Please remove the ball" is displayed. According to this, in order to make the timer notice display easy to visually recognize, it may be possible to urgently eliminate the ball removal error.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 462(7), the game progresses from the timing shown in FIG. 6(6), and the hold is applied to the second hold icon h12 in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 6(6). It is shown that the symbols have been digested and the variable display of the symbols has started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 462(7), the countdown of the timer display is started in the timer notice display displayed in the variable icon h0, and at the timing shown in FIG. : 32” is displayed. That is, it is suggested that a certain effect may be performed after 7.32 seconds. As described above, in this effect example, the timer icon is displayed by the variable icon h0. It can also be said that the variable icon display area in which the variable icon h0 is displayed also functions as a display area for displaying the timer notice display. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "attention" is displayed, and attention is given to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, when the countdown in the timer notice display displayed in the variation icon h0 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 462(8) and "00:00" is displayed, "decoration 5-replay symbol RP-decoration 6" The combination of decorative patterns is displayed, and it is informed that the pseudo continuous effect will be performed.

Also, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 462(5), as shown in FIG. 462(6'), "30:00" may be displayed as the timer display. Has been done. That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 462 (6′), it is suggested that a certain effect is started when 30 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "group notice", and as a result of the timer notice effect, there is a possibility that the Sabohani group notice is executed as a certain effect. Is suggested.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 462 (7'), the game progresses from the timing shown in FIG. 6 (6'), and the second hold icon h12 in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 6 (6'). It is shown that the hold related to has been exhausted and the variable display of the symbols is started. In the production example shown in FIG. 462 (7′), the timer display in the timer notice display displayed on the variable icon h0 is “30:00”, which is the timer display at the start of the countdown. Therefore, when the countdown of the timer display is started, after the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, the countdown of the timer display is performed on the first timer advance notice display TM11. Be seen. That is, in this effect example, the time (initial value) at the start of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notification display can be specified by the hold icon (variable icon), and the timer notification display can be displayed separately. The timer advance notice display shows that the timer display is counting down. At the timing shown in FIG. 462 (7′), “27:32” is displayed, which suggests that a certain effect may be performed 27.32 seconds later. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "attention" is displayed, and attention is given to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 462 (8′) and “00:00” is displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a notice of the strong sabotani group. Is shown. In this effect example, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are displayed without being erased. In addition, the characters “group occurrence” are displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the Sabohani group notice is given.

In this way, the hold icon may be first displayed in the button hold display mode, and changed to the bomb display mode by operating the effect button 136.

Note that, in the effects described with reference to FIGS. 425 to 462, the type of certain effects, the effect contents of the timer advance effect, and the contents of the mini game performed as a result of the execution of the timer advance effect are the same as those in FIG. It goes without saying that the various effects described with reference to the drawings can be applied.
In the above description,

"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative pattern display device 208L, second decorative pattern display device 208M, third decorative pattern display device 208N, mini Display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.],

One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a timer advance notice effect in the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 310(1)],

The first display is a certain effect [for example, a pseudo continuous effect shown in FIGS. 308(11) to (12) or a notice display due to a change in the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 309(a5). 309 (c2) lever effect, advance notice by stop display of pine symbol CC as a chance symbol shown in FIG. 311 (9fa'), decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini display device 208P] is a display for informing the timing of performing,

One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, timer addition effect shown in FIG. 310(2) to FIG. 310(5)],

The second display is a display that gives advance notice that the timing at which the certain effect starts is changed [for example, in the navigation with the timer addition shown in FIGS. 310(2) to (5)). "Additional information" and "+10 seconds" displayed in the balloon of the character YM],

The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 310(2) to 310(5), the timer notification effect in the timer notification display TM1 is displayed. When a timer is added, a timer addition effect is being performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, even if the time until the certain effect is started is informed by the first display, it is foretold that the time informed by the second display will change. There is a possibility that it may happen, so not only waiting for the time until a certain performance starts, but also having the expectation that the time may change, enjoy the first display You may be able to. Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display and the second display. .. Further, the display means may always display the first display and the second display, or may not display the first display and the second display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which a certain effect is performed, or may notify other than the timing at which a certain effect is performed. In addition, the first display may be a notification that always notifies the timing at which a certain effect is performed, or may not notify the timing at which a certain effect is performed.

In addition, the second display may give a notice only when the timing at which a certain effect starts is changed, or may give a notice other than that the timing at which a certain effect starts changes. It may be one. Further, the second display may always give a notice that the timing at which a certain production is started changes, or may not give a notice that the timing at which a certain production starts changes. It may be one.

Further, only the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display, or even a display other than the second display may be displayed during the first display. Good. In addition, the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display, or the second display may not be displayed during the display of the first display.

The start of the timer notice display may be that the display of the first display is started, or that the display of the countdown display is started (for example, if a number is displayed, It may be that the countdown of the countdown display is started. Further, the end of the timer notice display may be that the first display is not displayed, or that the countdown display is not displayed (for example, the number is erased and “attention” is displayed). The displayed state may be included), or the countdown by the countdown display may be completed (for example, 0 is displayed), and the display displayed on the first display after the countdown is completed. It may be that (for example, the character display of “attention”) is hidden.

In addition, “the display mode of the first display is changed after the second display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 310(2) to 310(5), After the timer addition effect is performed, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated, and the time is added on the timer display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the change in the display mode of the first display.

Here, only the display mode of the first display may be changed after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display after the second display is displayed. The display mode of the display other than the above may be configured to change. Further, the display mode of the first display may be configured to change after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display may be changed after the second display is displayed. It may be configured so that it may not change.

Even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change, and the display mode of the first display may be changed only when the second display is displayed. May change.
In addition, "the display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,

One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],

One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a sub display device 208S or the like],
The first display is a display displayed on the first display means,
The second display is a display displayed on the second display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the line of sight of the player may be concentrated on the first display means until the first display is finished, but by displaying the second display on the second display means as well. In some cases, it is possible to focus attention on both of the two display means without concentrating the line of sight only on the first display means.

Here, the display means may be configured only by the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured by including display means other than the first display means and the second display means. .. Further, the display means may be configured to necessarily include the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured to not include the first display means and the second display means. Good.

Further, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or may be displayed on other than the first display means. Further, the first display may be always displayed on the first display means, or may not be displayed on the first display means.

Further, the second display may be displayed only on the second display means, or may be displayed on other than the second display means. Further, the second display may be always displayed on the second display means, or may not be displayed on the second display means.

In addition, “the second display means is arranged on the front side of the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 314(A1), the sub display device 208S is in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.],

The first display means may be overlapped by the second display means on which the second display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 314(A2) to (A3). , The decorative pattern display device 208 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S on which the timer addition effect is being performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the second display means may overlap the first display means while displaying the second display, so that the second display is focused and a certain effect is started. In some cases, it may be possible to make it easier to recognize that the time to change may change.

Here, the second display means in which the second display is displayed may only overlap the first display means, or the second display in which the second display is displayed. The display means may overlap the display means other than the first display means. In addition, the second display means in which the second display is displayed may always overlap the first display means, or the second display means in which the second display is displayed, There may be cases where one display means does not overlap.

Further, the first display means may be overlapped only by the second display means displaying the second display, or the second display displaying the second display. The first display means may be overlapped by the display means other than the means.

In addition, “the first position [eg, the initial position of the sub-display device 208S shown in FIG. 314(B1)] and the second position [eg, the sub-display device 208S shown in FIG. 314(B3) are decorative symbol display devices. The second display means is configured to be movable between positions such as 208, which overlaps with the front surface side in the approximate center of 208.

The second display means is a display means that overlaps the first display means at the second position [for example, as shown in FIG. 314(B3), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device. At a position where the sub display device 208S overlaps with the front surface side in the substantial center of 208, the sub display device 208S overlaps the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the second display means may be configured to be movable between the first position and the second position, or other than the second display means between the first position and the second position. The display means may also be configured to be movable. Further, the second display means may be configured to always move between the first position and the second position, and the second display means may be provided between the first position and the second position. It may be configured so that it may not move.

Further, the second display means may be configured to be movable only between the first position and the second position, and the second display means other than between the first position and the second position. May be configured to be movable.

Further, the second display means may overlap the first display means only at the second position, or may overlap the first display means at a position other than the second position. It may be anything. Further, the second display means may always overlap the first display means at the second position, or may not overlap the first display means at the second position. Good.

In addition, the “first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIGS. 308(2) to (7)],”

The countdown display is a display in which the timing until the certain effect is performed is counted down [for example, as shown in FIGS. 308 (2) to (7), the timer of the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed. The countdown in the display informs the timing of the pseudo-relationship, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may include only the countdown display, or may include a display other than the countdown display. Further, the first display may necessarily include the countdown display, or may not include the countdown display.

In the countdown display, only the timing until a certain effect is performed may be performed by the countdown, or the timing other than the timing until a certain effect is performed may be performed by the countdown. .. Further, in the countdown display, the timing until a certain effect is performed may be always performed by the countdown, or the timing until the certain effect is performed may not be performed by the countdown. Good.

Further, "even in the state where the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display is continued,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, even when the second display is displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued, or even when the second display is displayed, it is continued in addition to the countdown by the countdown display. There may be things. Also, the countdown by the countdown display may always be continued even when the second display is displayed, and the countdown by the countdown display may not continue even when the second display is displayed. Good.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued even when only the second display is displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display is continued even when the second display is not being displayed. Good.

In addition, “while the second display is being displayed, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted during the display of the second display, or anything other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted during the display of the second display. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be necessarily interrupted during the display of the second display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted during the display of the second display.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only while the second display is being displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even when the second display is not being displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, display of “attention” character in timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 308(8)]”
The third display is a display different from the first display,
The third display is a display different from the second display,
The third display is a display not included in the certain effect,

The third display is displayed when the first display indicates 0 (for example, as shown in FIGS. 308 (7) to (8), the timer in the timer advance notice display TM1). When the display becomes 0, the word "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1],
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to further enhance the sense of expectation for the third display by the countdown of the first display.

Here, when the first display is a display showing 0, only the third display may be displayed, or when the first display is a display showing 0, the third display is displayed. Other displays may also be displayed. Further, when the first display is a display showing 0, the third display may be displayed without fail, and when the first display is a display showing 0, the third display is It may not be displayed.

Further, the third display may be displayed only when the first display shows 0, and also when the first display shows 0, A third display may be displayed.

In addition, “when the second display is displayed, it is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol than when the second display is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation by displaying the second display.

In addition, when the second display is displayed, the jackpot design may be finally confirmed and displayed. When the second display is displayed, the jackpot design may not be finally displayed. It may be.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, pseudo continuous production shown in FIG. 308(9) to FIG. 12(12)],
The certain effect is an effect including the fourth display,
The fourth display is a performance display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the certain effect may include only the fourth display, or may include a display other than the fourth display. In addition, a certain presentation may necessarily include the fourth display, or may not include the fourth display.

In addition, “a production movable means capable of executing a plurality of types of operations [for example, a family crest character 224E, a thousand box character 224H, a first large board behavioral material 224Ga to a fourth large board behavioral material 224Gd, a second decorative symbol display device 208M. , A third decorative symbol display device 208N, a sub display device 208S, a POV display 224I, etc.],

One of the plurality of types of motions is a first motion [for example, a motion of the first large-board behavior auditor product 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor product 224Gd shown in FIG. 309 (d3)],
The certain effect is an effect including the first action,
The first action is a production action,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it is possible to perform a dynamic effect using the effect moving means, and it may be possible to further improve the effect.

Here, the effect movable means may be capable of performing only a plurality of types of actions, or may be capable of performing a plurality of types of actions. Further, the production-enabling means may always execute a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

Moreover, the production movable means may be capable of executing only the first operation, or may be capable of executing an operation other than the first operation. Moreover, the effect moving means may be one that always executes the first operation, or may not execute the first operation.

Further, the certain effect may include only the first action, or may include an action other than the first action. Moreover, a certain effect may necessarily include the first action, or may not include the first action.

In addition, “when the certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the certain effect is not performed [for example, FIG. 308(11) to FIG. The case where the pseudo-run shown in 12) is started is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the pseudo-run is not started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that a certain effect is performed.

In addition, when a certain effect is performed, the big hit symbol may always be finally fixedly displayed, and even when a certain effect is performed, the big hit symbol may not be finally fixedly displayed. Good.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display [for example, the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 304(9) to (14) or FIGS. 308(9) to (12). Quasi-relational production shown in FIG. 317, and a chance-up notice display shown in FIG. 317(4) and FIG.

In the period from the start of display of the first display to the start of display of the second display, the display of the fifth display may be started,
The fifth display is a notice display,

When the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the fifth display is not displayed [for example, FIGS. 304 (9) to (14)). It is more likely to be a big hit when the conversation notice shown in is given than when it is not given.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the fifth display will be displayed during the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display. is there.

Here, in the period from the display start of the first display to the display start of the second display, there may be a case where only the fifth display is started, and the first display is In the period from the start of display to the start of display of the second display, the display other than the fifth display may be started in some cases. Further, in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display, the display of the fifth display may be always started, or the display of the first display may be started. The display of the fifth display may not be started in the period until the display of the second display is started.

In addition, the display of the fifth display may be started only during the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display. The display of the fifth display may be started in a period other than the period from the start to the display of the second display.

In addition, when the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot design may always be finally confirmed and displayed. Even when the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot design is not finally confirmed and displayed. There may be.
In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,

"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a sub display device 208S, a first decorative pattern display device 208L, a second decorative pattern display device 208M, a third decorative pattern display device 208N, mini Display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.],

One of the plurality of types of display is a period display [for example, a display of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (A1)],

The period display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is being performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 317, the chance up meter CMT is operated by a swordsman reach. It may be displayed during the specified period],

One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display [for example, notice by lever effect shown in FIG. 317 (18), etc.],

The period display is a display for notifying the first timing [for example, the timing indicated by the check point CP3 at which the notice by the lever effect is started as shown in FIG. 317(18)].

The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may start,

The period display may be erased after the display of the period display is started and before the first timing is reached [for example, as shown in FIGS. 321 (A1) to (A2), check If the cut-in display shown in FIG. 321 (A2) is performed before the timing indicated by the point CP3 is reached, the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, since the first timing of the period display is known during the display of the period display, there is a possibility that the display means will not be seen until the first timing comes close. Here, the period display may be hidden before the first timing is reached. Even at the timing before the first timing comes, it is possible to direct the line of sight to the display means to see the period display. There are cases.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to draw in the game from the time the period display is displayed until the first timing.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of display. Further, a plurality of types of displays may be displayed without fail, or a plurality of types of displays may not be displayed.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the period display and the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the period display and the first effect display. Further, the display means may display the period display and the first effect display without fail, or may display the period display and the first display in some cases.

Further, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or may be displayed in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed during a period other than the above period. Further, the period display may be always displayed during a certain period of the reach effect display, or during a certain period of the reach effect display. It may not be displayed in some cases.

Further, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. In addition, the period display may necessarily notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

Further, only the period display may be deleted before the first timing from the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is displayed after the display of the period display is started. Before that, the display other than the period display may be deleted. Further, the period display may be erased before the first timing from the display of the period display is started, or the period display may be deleted before the first timing. The display may not be erased in some cases.

Further, the period display may be erased only after the display of the period display is started and before the first timing is reached, or it is the first timing after the display of the period display is started. Other than before, the period display may be deleted.

It should be noted that the period in which the period display is displayed may be during variable display, during big hit game, during demo display, during symbol stop display, etc., regardless of during reach.

Further, the period display may be displayed during execution of all the reach, or may be displayed only during execution of a specific reach and not displayed during execution of other reach productions. Good. For example, the period display may not be displayed during long reach, but may be displayed during SP reach. Further, it may not be displayed in the first half of SP reach, but may be displayed in the second half of SP reach. Further, it may be displayed in the first half of SP reach and not displayed in the second half of SP reach. Further, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing when the display of the chance up meter is started, and the end of the period display is, for example, the timing when the display of the chance up meter is ended. Good. Further, the start of the period display means, for example, a timing at which an effect such as a reach effect in which the period display is performed is started, and the end of the period display means a timing at which the effect is ended. However, it does not matter whether or not the chance up meter is actually displayed. Further, the start of the period display means the time when the progress of the character or the marker on the chance up meter is started, and the end of the period display means the time when the progress of the character or the marker on the chance up meter ends. It may be. Further, when the chance up meter is configured to be displayed/hidden by the operation means, the start of the period display means the timing at which the opportunity up meter is started to be displayed by the operation means. The end may be the timing when the display of the chance up meter is ended by the operating means.

Further, the start of the period display means, for example, from the start of the period display effect (for example, a display indicating that the chance up meter can be displayed) to the end of the period display effect (for example, the chance up meter. Until the display suggesting that can be displayed is hidden or until the chance up meter is hidden).

Further, the term display includes not only a display that is displayed until the first timing is reached, but also a display that is erased before the first timing is reached.

Further, the certain period may be two or more during the period in which the reach effect display is being performed. At this time, the period display may be started and ended for each certain period, or the period display may be continuously displayed over two certain periods. In this case, in the first certain period, after the first period display is started and ended, the period display itself is continuously displayed, and when the second certain period is started, a new period is displayed. The second period display as a display may start and end.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display [for example, display of cut-in of grandfather shown in FIG. 321 (A2), display of effect image shown in FIG. 321 (A2b), etc.] And
The second effect display is a display different from the first effect display,

The second effect display may be displayed before the first timing [for example, as shown in FIGS. 321(A1) to (A2) and 321(A2b), the chance up meter is displayed. In the CMT effect, before the sabotani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3, the cut-in display of the grandpa shown in FIG. 321(A2) or the effect image shown in FIG. 321(A2b) may be displayed. Etc.],

The period display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 321 (A1) to (A2) and (A2b), chances are displayed. In the effect by the upmeter CMT, the display timing of the cut-in of the grandfather shown in FIG. 321 (A2) and the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 321 (A2b) are not notified, etc.],

During the display of the second effect display, the period display is erased [for example, as shown in FIGS. 321(A1) to (A2) and (A2b), shown in FIG. 321(A2). The chance up meter CMT is deleted when the display of the old cut-in or the effect image shown in FIG. 321 (A2b) is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, since the display not notified by the period display is displayed, the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing, so before the first timing comes. May also have expectations.

Here, there may be a case where only the second effect display is displayed before the first timing, or an effect display other than the second effect display is also displayed before the first timing. There may be cases. Further, the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing, or the second effect display may not be displayed before the first timing.

In addition, the second effect display may be displayed only before the first timing, or when the second effect display is displayed before the first timing. There may be.

Further, the period display may not notify only the timing when the display of the second effect display is started, or may not notify other than the timing when the display of the second effect display is started. May be. Further, the period display may not necessarily notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started, or may notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started. Good.

Further, during the display of the second effect display, only the period display may be deleted, or during the display of the second effect display, displays other than the period display may be deleted. Further, the period display may be deleted without fail during the display of the second effect display, or the period display may not be deleted during the second effect display.

Further, the period display may be erased only while the second effect display is being displayed, or the period display may be erased when the second effect display is not being displayed.

Instead of the effect display, an error notification such as a ball pulling error, a notification indicating a firing position, or a notification for preventing forgetting to remove the prepaid card may be used as a notification other than the error. In addition, as a form of the effect display, a display that appears by light emission by an LED, operation by the effect movable means, or light emission by the light guide plate may be used.

Further, the timing at which the second effect display is displayed may be notified by the period display. Further, the timing at which the second effect display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

In addition, “the second effect display is a second notice display [for example, a notice of the cut-in of the grandfather shown in FIG. 321 (A2) or the effect image shown in FIG. 321 (A2b)] is there,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, by displaying the second effect display before the first timing, it is possible to suggest that there may be a big hit without waiting for the first timing, It may be possible for the player to have expectations even before the first timing comes.

In addition, "when the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the second effect display is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]

Was also explained. In addition, when the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, or even when the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. It may not be done.

In addition, “a production movable means capable of executing a plurality of types of operations [for example, a family crest character 224E, a thousand box character 224H, a first large board behavioral material 224Ga to a fourth large board behavioral material 224Gd, a second decorative symbol display device 208M. , A third decorative symbol display device 208N, a sub display device 208S, a POV display 224I, etc.],

One of the plurality of types of motions is a second motion [for example, a motion of the first large-board behavior auditor product 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor product 224Gd shown in FIG. 321 (A3b)].
The second operation is a performance operation,

The second operation may be performed during the display of the second effect display [for example, the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 321 (A2b)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it is possible to perform a dynamic effect using the effect moving means, and it may be possible to further improve the effect.

Here, the effect movable means may be capable of performing only a plurality of types of motions, or may be capable of performing a plurality of types of motions. Further, the effect moving means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

Further, only the second operation may be performed during the display of the second effect display, or an operation other than the second operation may be performed during the display of the second effect display. May be. Further, the second operation may be always performed during the display of the second effect display, or the second operation may not be performed during the display of the second effect display.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of actions is the first action [for example, the action of the family crest monument 224E shown in FIGS. 303(E1) to (E2) and FIG. 303(F1). Senryo box accessory 224H operation],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the period display is configured to be displayed again after the period display is erased [for example, as shown in FIGS. 321 (A2a) to (A3a), After the chance up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in display, when the animation display of the duel scene is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is displayed again, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make an expectation about the redisplay of the period display.

Here, after the period display is erased, only the period display may be configured to be displayed again, or after the period display is erased, a display other than the period display may be displayed again. It may be configured. Further, the period display may be configured to be displayed again after the period display is erased, or the period display may not be displayed again after the period display is erased. May be.

In addition, the period display may be configured to be displayed again only after the period display is erased, or the period display may be configured to be displayed again even after the period display is not erased. Good.

In addition, “the period display is not displayed until the certain period elapses after the period display is erased [for example, as shown in FIGS. 321(A2) to (A5). In addition, after the chance up meter CMT is erased by displaying the cut-in of the old character, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed in the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, after the period display is erased, only the period display may be configured not to be displayed until a certain period elapses, or until the certain period elapses after the period display is erased. The display other than the period display may not be displayed. Further, after the period display is erased, the period display may be configured not to be displayed until a certain period of time elapses. The display may be configured to be displayed in some cases.

Further, the period display may be configured not to be displayed only after the period display is erased until a certain period elapses, or the certain period elapses even after the period display is not erased. The period display may not be displayed until.

When there are a plurality of certain periods in the period in which the reach effect display is being performed, after the period display is erased in the first certain period, the period display is not performed in the first certain period. Although not displayed, the period display may be displayable when a second certain period begins after the first certain period. Also, after the period display is erased in the first certain period, the period display may not be displayed in the second certain period after the first certain period, or the symbol. The period display may not be displayed until the variable display ends.
In addition, “the certain period is a period during execution of super reach,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of displays is a third effect display [for example, a notice of a champ up by the display of the boy character BOY shown in FIG. 317(4), and a master shown in FIG. 317(13). Of the opportunity to increase by displaying the cut-in image CI3 of
The third effect display is a display different from the first effect display,

The period is displayed at the second timing [for example, the timing indicated by check point CP1 at which the advance notice of the champ up is displayed by displaying the boy character BOY shown in FIG. 317(4), the master shown in FIG. 317(13). Of the check point CP2 at which the advance notice of the chance up by the display of the cut-in image CI3 is started] is displayed.

The second timing is a timing at which the display of the third effect display may be started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the period display may be such that only the second timing may be notified, or timing other than the second timing may be notified. Further, the period display may be one that always notifies the second timing, or one that may not notify the second timing.

Further, the second timing may be one in which only the display of the third effect display may be started, or there is a possibility that something other than the display of the third effect display may be started. It may be one. Further, the second timing may be one in which the display of the third effect display is always started, or may be one in which the display of the third effect display may not be started.
The timing displayed by the period display may be three or more.

Further, when a certain reach occurs, the effect display is always performed three times, and when another reach occurs, the effect display is always performed twice, so that the place where the effect display is performed may be fixed. Even when the reach is the same, the effect display may be performed three times when the reach is reached, and the effect display may be performed only once when the reach is reached. In that case, the case of "notifying a lot of timings" may be more likely to be a big hit than the case of "notifying very often", or may be more likely to be shifted. Also, the likelihood of a big hit does not have to change depending on the number of timing notifications. Further, the larger the number of times the effect display is performed, the more likely it is to be a big hit.

Further, the second timing may be a timing after the first timing, the second timing may be a timing before the first timing, or the first timing and the second timing. The two timings may be the same timing.

In addition, “the first effect display is a first notice display [for example, notice by lever effect shown in FIG. 317 (18), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, "One of the multiple types of display is the third display,

"When at least a part of the first display becomes difficult to see" is "when at least a part of the first display is overlapped by the third display",
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "the display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
The display means is a first display means,
The first display means is a means for displaying the period display,
The second display means is a means for performing a performance operation,

The second display means may overlap at least part of the period display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be configured by only a plurality of display means, or may be configured by other than the plurality of display means. Further, the display means may be necessarily composed of a plurality of display means, or may not be composed of a plurality of display means.

Further, the first display means may display only the period display or may display a display other than the period display. In addition, the first display means may always display the period display, or may not display the period display.

In addition, the second display means may perform only the effect operation or may perform an operation other than the effect operation. Further, the second display means may be one that always performs the effect operation, or may be one that does not perform the effect operation.

In addition, there may be a case where at least a part of the period display is overlapped by the second display means, or when at least a part of the period display is overlapped by the second display means. There may be. Further, there may be a case where at least a part of the period display is always overlapped by the second display means, and at least a part of the period display may not be overlapped by the second display means. Good.
Also, in the above description,

"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a sub display device 208S, a first decorative pattern display device 208L, a second decorative pattern display device 208M, a third decorative pattern display device 208N, mini Display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.],

One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, an effect by the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 326(A1) to FIG. 326(A9)],

One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, the display of the grandpa's conversation image CI2 in the conversation announcement shown in FIGS. 326(A4) to (A9)],
The first display and the second display are different displays,

At least part of the display mode of the first display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 326(A1)] is the first speed [for example, 10 The speed at which the gauge disappears in seconds, etc.]

At least a part of the display mode of the second display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the grandpa's conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 326(A4)] is the second speed [for example, a gauge at 5 seconds The speed may disappear, etc.]
The first speed and the second speed are different speeds,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the display means.

In recent years, a lot of displays are displayed on the display means, and there is a problem that a player unfamiliar with the game or a player playing the model for the first time does not know where to pay attention. In this gaming table, by making the first speed different from the second speed, the player can naturally guide his or her line of sight to a display in which the speed at which the display mode changes is fast (slow), and the player having the above problem May be able to entertain the production.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may display a plurality of types of displays without fail, or may display a plurality of types of displays in some cases.

Further, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or may be displayed in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed during a period other than the above period. Further, the period display may be always displayed during a certain period of the reach effect display, or during a certain period of the reach effect display. It may not be displayed.

Further, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. Further, the period display may be one that always notifies the first timing, or one that may not notify the first timing.

Further, only the period display may be deleted before the first timing from the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is displayed after the display of the period display is started. Before that, the display other than the period display may be deleted. Further, the period display may be surely deleted before the first timing after the display of the period display is started, or it is the first timing after the display of the period display is started. Before, the period display may not be erased.

Further, the period display may be erased only after the display of the period display is started and before the first timing is reached, or it is the first timing after the display of the period display is started. Other than before, the period display may be deleted.

In addition, the “first display is a display including a time display [for example, a display of a gauge in the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 326(A1)],

The second display is a display including the time display [for example, a gauge display in the remaining time display meter MT2 shown in FIG. 326(A4)].

The time display is a display whose display mode changes according to the passage of time in a certain period [for example, an operation valid period] [for example, the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 326(A1) or FIG. 326( In the remaining time meter MT2 shown in A4), the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the effective operation period, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to easily recognize the speed of change in the display mode.

Here, the first display may include only the time display, or may include a display other than the time display. In addition, the first display may include a time display without exception, or may not include a time display.

Further, the second display may include only the time display, or may include something other than the time display. In addition, the second display may necessarily include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, the time display may be such that the display mode changes only in accordance with the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode changes in accordance with something other than the passage of time in a certain period. May be. Further, the time display may be such that the display mode always changes with the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode may not change with the passage of time in a certain period. It may be.

In addition, there is a case where both the first display and the second display are displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 326(A4) to (A7), a button is displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM. Both the effect display in which the image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 are displayed and the operation promotion notification image displayed in the grand conversation image CI2 in the conversation announcement are displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the production may be lively by displaying both the first display and the second display.

Here, there may be a case where only the first display and the second display are displayed, and there is a case where both the first display and the second display are displayed. Good. Further, both the first display and the second display may be displayed without fail, or both the first display and the second display may not be displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, a character display of “hot heat” in a balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 326(A9), etc.]

One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a character display such as "Intense heat" in the grandpa's conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 326(A9)],
The third display and the fourth display are different displays,

The first display is a display in which at least a part of the display modes can be changed until the first time [for example, 10 seconds] has elapsed,

The second display is a display in which at least a part of the display modes can be changed until the second time [for example, 5 seconds] has elapsed,

When the first time has elapsed from the start of the display of the first display, the third display may be displayed,

When the second time has elapsed from the start of the second display, the fourth display may be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be one in which only at least a part of the display modes can be changed until the first time elapses, or at least a part of the display modes until the first time elapses. Display modes other than the above may be changeable. Further, the first display may be one in which at least a part of the display modes always changes until the first time elapses, or at least a part of the display modes change until the first time elapses. It may not be possible.

Further, the second display may be one in which only at least a part of the display modes can be changed until the second time elapses, or at least a part of the display modes other than the second time elapse. The display mode of may be changeable. Further, the second display may be one in which at least a part of the display modes always changes until the second time passes, or at least a part of the display modes change until the second time passes. It may not be possible.

In addition, when the first time has elapsed from the start of the display of the first display, only the third display may be displayed, or the first display may start displaying the first display. When time passes, a display other than the third display may be displayed. In addition, when the first time has elapsed from the start of the display of the first display, the third display may be displayed without fail, or when the first time has elapsed from the start of the display of the first display. The third display may not be displayed.

Further, when the second time has elapsed from the start of the display of the second display, only the fourth display may be displayed, or the second display may start displaying the second display. When time passes, a display other than the fourth display may be displayed. Also, when the second time has elapsed since the second display started to be displayed, the fourth display may be displayed without fail, or when the second time has elapsed since the second display started to be displayed. In some cases, the fourth display may not be displayed.

The third display and the fourth display may have the same display mode or different display modes.

Further, in the third display and the fourth display, the reliability of the big hit may be higher or lower in the fourth display. The third display and the fourth display may have the same jackpot reliability.

In addition, “the first display is a countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 328(A1)],

The second display is the countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the second timer advance notice display TM2 shown in FIG. 328(A1)],

The countdown display is a display for notifying the timing until a certain effect [for example, display of pseudo continuous effect] is performed [for example, first timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 328(A1). And the second timer notice display TM2 informs the time until the pseudo-relation occurs by a countdown display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the countdown display may notify only the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may notify other than the timing until a certain effect is performed. Further, the timing until a certain effect is performed may be notified without fail, or the timing until a certain effect is performed may not be notified in some cases.

In addition, "operating means [for example, effect button 136, etc.] operable by the player is provided,
The first display is an operation effective period display,
The second display is the operation valid period display,

The operation valid period display is a display showing a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the operation means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by anyone other than the player. Further, the operation means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may be one that is not operated by the player.

Further, the operation valid period display may indicate only a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or may indicate something other than the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid. The operation valid period display may necessarily indicate the period during which the operation of the operation means is valid, or may not indicate the period during which the operation of the operation means is valid.

In addition, “the first display is a period display [for example, a first chance up meter CMTa shown in FIG. 323(A1)],

The second display is the period display [for example, the second chance up meter CMTb shown in FIG. 323(A1)],

The period display is a display for informing a first timing [for example, a timing at which the advance notice of a chance up by the boy character BOY shown in FIG. 323(A2) is started].

The first timing means a certain effect in a first period [for example, a period during which an animation of a duel scene in the swordsman reach shown in FIG. 323(A1) to (A2) is performed] [for example, FIG. 323]. There is a possibility that the display of the advance notice of a chance by the boy character BOY shown in (A2)] is performed.

From the start to the end of the first period, the first timing is notified,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. Further, the period display may be one that always notifies the first timing, or one that may not notify the first timing.

Further, the first timing may be such that only the sixth display may be started in the first period, or displays other than the sixth display may be started in the first period. There is a possibility that it may be done. Further, the first timing may be such that the sixth display is always started during the first period, or the sixth display may not be started during the first period. May be.

Also, only the first timing may be notified from the start to the end of the first period, or the first timing may be notified from the start to the end of the first period. Other than the timing may be notified. Further, the first timing may be notified without fail during the period from the start to the end of the first period, or the first timing may be notified from the start to the end of the first period. The timing may not be notified in some cases.

Further, the first timing may be notified only during the period from the start to the end of the first period, or in addition to the period from the start to the end of the first period. One timing may be notified.

In addition, “the display mode of at least a part of the second display may change at the first speed depending on the passage of time,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, in accordance with the passage of time, there may be a case where at least a part of the display modes of the second display changes only at the first speed, and in accordance with the passage of time, the second display There may be a case where at least a part of the display modes change at a speed other than the first speed. Also, depending on the passage of time, at least a part of the display manner of the second display may change at the first speed without fail, and depending on the passage of time, at least a part of the second display The display mode may not change at the first speed.

Further, depending on the passage of time, there may be a case where only at least a part of the display manners of the second display changes at the first speed, and according to the passage of time, at least the second display. There may be a case where something other than some display modes changes at the first speed.

In addition, "when at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed than when at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the first speed" In the end, it is easier to finalize and display the jackpot pattern,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, when at least a part of the display form of the second display changes at the second speed, the jackpot symbol may be finally definitely displayed, or at least a part of the second display may be displayed. Even when the mode changes at the second speed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is not finally confirmed and displayed.

In addition, “the first display is a performance display [for example, a performance display by the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 326(A1) to FIG. 326(A9)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the second display is an effect display [for example, a display of the grandpa's conversation image CI2 in the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 326(A4) to (A9)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,

"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a sub display device 208S, a first decorative pattern display device 208L, a second decorative pattern display device 208M, a third decorative pattern display device 208N, mini Display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.],

One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 329(A1)],

The first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a countdown display of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 329(A1)].

The countdown display is a display for notifying the timing until a certain effect is performed by counting down [for example, as shown in FIGS. 329(A1) to (A7), a timer notice display is displayed. The countdown in the timer display of TM1 notifies the timing at which the pseudo-relation is performed.] While the countdown display is being displayed, the display mode of the first display is the first display mode [for example, FIG. A1) a small display mode of timer advance notice display TM1] to a second display mode [for example, a large size display mode of timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 329 (A3)] There is
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the display means.

Further, according to this gaming table, since variations of the effects are increased by changing the display mode of the countdown display, it may be possible to entertain the player until a certain effect is performed.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to draw attention to the countdown display itself by changing the display mode of the countdown display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

The first display may include only the countdown display, or may include a display other than the countdown display. Further, the first display may necessarily include the countdown display or may not include the countdown display. Further, the first display may be the countdown display, or the first display may not be the countdown display.

In addition, the countdown display may notify the timing until a certain effect is performed only by performing the countdown, or the timing until the certain effect is performed by not performing the countdown. It may be one that does. In addition, the countdown display may be one that always notifies the timing until a certain effect is performed by counting down, or when the timing until the certain effect is performed is not notified by performing the countdown. There may be

Further, during the display of the countdown display, the display mode of the first display may be changed only from the first display mode to the second display mode. The display mode of the display may change from the first display mode to a display mode other than the second display mode. Also, the display mode of the first display may be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode without fail during the display of the countdown display, or the display of the first display may be displayed during the display of the countdown display. The mode may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

Further, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode only while the countdown display is being displayed. The display mode of one display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

The countdown display may be a timer display. Further, the start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the display of the first display is ended. May be. Further, the start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing when the countdown is started after the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing when the countdown is ended. Good.

In addition, “the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display is terminated by the time the symbol variation display is terminated [for example, as shown in FIGS. 308(1) to (7)). , The display of the countdown in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and is finished during the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the countdown display for notifying the timing until a certain effect is completed is completed during one execution of the symbol variation display, so the effect may not be redundant.

Here, the countdown display is started during execution of the symbol variation display, and only the countdown display may be ended before the symbol variation display is ended, or the countdown display is started during execution of the symbol variation display, The display other than the countdown display may be terminated before the symbol variation display is terminated. In addition, the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be surely ended before the symbol variation display ends, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the symbol concerned is displayed. The countdown display may not end before the variable display ends.

In addition, the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be ended only until the symbol variation display is ended, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the symbol concerned is displayed. The countdown display may be ended besides the end of the variable display.

In addition, “the first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a first display size [for example, a small size],

The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size [for example, large size, etc.],

In the first display size and the second display size, the second display size is larger,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the expectation for the countdown display can be changed (the countdown display with the increased display size can be focused) by increasing the display size of the countdown display.

Here, the first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the first display size, or the first display may be a display size other than the first display size. The display mode may be displayed. The first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the first display size, or when the first display is not displayed in the first display size. There may be a display mode.

The second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the second display size, or the first display is displayed in a display size other than the second display size. The display mode may be displayed. The second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the second display size, or when the first display is not displayed in the second display size. There may be a display mode.

The display sizes may be the same, for example, the display size may be the same, but the colors and shapes of the frames and characters may be different.
Further, the first display size may be larger than the second display size.

In addition, “when the display of the countdown display is started [for example, when the countdown display is started in the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 as shown in FIG. 308(3)], the first The display is displayed in the first display mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is changed to the first display. It may be displayed in a display mode other than the one display mode. In addition, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be the first display. There may be a case where it is not displayed in the display mode.

Further, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the countdown display is started, or the first display may be displayed other than when the display of the countdown display is started. It may be displayed in the first display mode.

When the display of the first display is started [for example, when the frame advance of the timer advance notice display TM1 is started as shown in FIG. 308(2)], the first display is displayed. Displayed in the first display mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, May be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. Further, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, The display may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, only when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode, or other than when the display of the first display is started, One display may be displayed in the first display mode.

In addition, “during the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, shown in FIGS. 329(A2) to (A3). As described above, when the timer display of the timer notification display TM1 is “03:00” indicating that the timer display of the timer display of the timer display of the timer display of the timer display of the timer display of the timer display of TM3 is 3 seconds, Has changed from small size to large size, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to expect the display mode to change during the countdown display.

Here, during the display of the countdown display, the first display may be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode without fail, or the first display may be changed to the first display mode during the display of the countdown display. The display mode may be changed to a display mode other than the second display mode. Further, the first display may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode while the countdown display is being displayed.

Further, the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode without fail while the countdown display is being displayed. The first display mode may be changed to the second display mode without fail.

In addition, “the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode than in the case where the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. If you do, it is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot pattern,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the first display will change to the second display mode.

In addition, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally definitely displayed, or the first display may be the first display mode. Even when the display mode is changed to the second display mode, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed in a finalized manner.

Further, “The first display is a display in which the display position may change [for example, as shown in FIGS. 329(A2) to (A3), the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative symbol display device. The display position is changed from the substantially right center of the display screen of 208 to the substantially center],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the display position of the first display is changed, which may give a visual change and improve the effect.

Here, the first display may be one in which only the display position may change, or one in which the display position other than the display position may change. Further, the first display may be one in which the display position always changes, or may be one in which the display position may not change.

Further, “When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes [for example, FIG. 329(A2) to FIG. ), when the display size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from the small size to the large size, the display position changes from the substantially right center to the substantially center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, since the display mode of the first display changes and the display position also changes, it may be possible to draw attention to the first display.

Here, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, only the display position of the first display may change, or the first display changes from the first display mode. When changing to the second display mode, the display position other than the display position of the first display may also change. Further, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may always change, and the first display changes from the first display mode to the first display mode. When changing to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, only when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may change, or the first display may change to the first display mode. The display position of the first display may be changed in a case other than the case of changing from the second display mode.

In addition, "the first display is a display that may be a moving display [for example, an animation display of an enlarged display of the timer notice display TM1],"

The display position of the first display is changed by performing the moving display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 329(A2) to (A3), the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed as an enlarged display animation. Enlarged display, display position changes, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, since it is possible to give a visual change by the moving display of the first display, the effect of the production may be improved.

Here, the first display may be a display in which only the moving display may be performed, or a display in which a display other than the moving display may be performed. Further, the first display may be one in which moving display is always performed, or may not be displayed in some cases.

Further, by performing the moving display, only the display position of the first display may be changed, and by performing the moving display, the display positions of other than the display position of the first display may be changed. Good. Further, the display position of the first display may always change by the moving display, or the display position of the first display may not change by the moving display. ..

In addition, the display position of the first display may change only when the moving display is performed, or even when the display position of the first display changes even when the moving display is performed. Good.

In addition, while the display of the movement display, the countdown by the countdown display progresses,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued during the display of the moving display, or other than the countdown by the countdown display may be continued during the display of the moving display. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be always continued during the display of the movement display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be continued during the display of the movement display.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued only during the display of the moving display, or the countdown by the countdown display may be continued other than during the display of the moving display.

In addition, while the display of the movement display, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted during the display of the moving display, and other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted during the display of the moving display. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be always interrupted during the display of the movement display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted during the display of the movement display.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only while the moving display is being displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even when the moving display is not being displayed.

Further, “The countdown display is a display for counting down the time until the certain effect is performed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 329(A2) to (A7), the timer of the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The countdown in the display informs the timing of the pseudo-relationship, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the countdown display may be a countdown of only the time until a certain effect is performed, or may be something other than a countdown of the time until a certain effect is performed. Further, the countdown display may be one that always counts down the time until a certain effect is performed, or may not count down the time until a certain effect is performed.

In addition, by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it is notified that the timing for performing the certain effect has come [for example, FIG. 329(A7) to FIG. As described above, when the timer display in the timer notification display TM1 becomes 0, the character "attention" is displayed on the timer notification display TM1 to notify that the pseudo link is performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, by displaying the display showing 0 in the countdown display, it may be notified that only the timing for performing a certain effect has been reached, or by displaying the display showing 0 in the countdown display. It is also possible to notify other than the fact that it is the time when a certain effect is performed. In addition, by displaying a display showing 0 in the countdown display, it may be informed that it is a timing at which a certain effect is performed, or by displaying a display showing 0 in the countdown display, There may be a case where it is not notified that it is the time when a certain effect is performed.

In addition, it may be notified that the timing for performing a certain effect is reached only by displaying the display showing 0 in the countdown display, or other than displaying the display showing 0 in the countdown display. In this case, it may be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect.

In addition, “the countdown display is configured to be erased after the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 329(A7) to (A11), After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the timer notice display TM1 is erased, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the effect may not be redundant by deleting the countdown display after the countdown is completed.

Here, only the countdown display may be erased after the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or other than the countdown display after the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display. May also be configured to be erased. Further, the countdown display may be configured to be always erased after the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or the countdown display may be erased after the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display. It may be configured so that it may not be performed.

Further, the countdown display may be configured to be erased only after the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display, and the countdown display may be displayed other than after the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display. May be erased.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [for example, display of “attention” character in timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 329 (A8), etc.],”
The second display is a display not included in the certain effect,

When a display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is erased after the second display is displayed [for example, FIG. 329(A7) to As shown in the figure (A11), after the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the word "attention" is displayed instead of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, and then the timer notice display TM1 is erased. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the second display is displayed when the countdown display is erased, so that it may be possible to improve the effect of erasing the countdown display.

Here, the second display may not be included only in a certain effect, or may not be included in an effect other than the certain effect. The second display may not necessarily be included in a certain effect, or may be included in a certain effect. Further, the second display may be included in a certain effect.

Further, when a display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display, only the countdown display may be erased after the second display is displayed, or a display showing 0 in the countdown display. When is displayed, the display other than the countdown display may be erased after the second display is displayed. Further, when the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be surely deleted after the second display is displayed, or the display showing 0 in the countdown display. When is displayed, the countdown display may not be erased after the second display is displayed.

Further, the countdown display may be erased after the second display is displayed only when the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or the display showing 0 in the countdown display. In addition to the case where is displayed, the countdown display may be erased after the second display is displayed. Further, when the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be erased only after the second display is displayed, or the display showing 0 in the countdown display. When is displayed, the countdown display may be erased even after the second display is displayed.
In addition, "the display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,

One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a sub display device 208S or the like],

One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],

When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 330(A1), The timer advance notice display TM1 of the size is displayed on the sub display device 208S, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed only on the first display unit, or the first display of the first display mode. When is displayed, the first display may be displayed on display means other than the first display means. Further, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be always displayed on the first display means, and the first display of the first display mode is When displayed, the first display may not be displayed on the first display means.

Further, only when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode is displayed. The first display may be displayed on the first display unit in a case other than the case.

Further, "when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is the second display. It may be displayed on the means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 330 (A2) to (A3), when the timer notice display TM1 changes from a small size to a large size, the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative pattern. Displayed on the display device 208, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, since the display means to be displayed when the display mode of the first display changes is changed, it may be possible to visually improve the effect.

Here, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is displayed only on the second display means. In some cases, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display changes to the second display means. It may be displayed on other display means. Further, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is always displayed on the second display means. There may be, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display on the second display means It may not be displayed.

Further, only when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is displayed on the second display means. The first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means may change to the second display mode even when the first display is the second display. It may be displayed on the display means.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The countdown display described so far may be a display performed only while the symbol variable display is being executed, or may be performed as a pre-reading notice. That is, it can be said that the countdown display functions as a notice of the symbol variation display and may also function as a prefetch notice. Here, it may be performed only as a pre-reading notice.

Further, in the case where the countdown display is performed as a look-ahead notice, the countdown display may be displayed during the period between the symbol variation display and the symbol variation display performed next. In that case, during the symbol stop display, the notification of the time by the countdown display may be stopped/interrupted/stopped (for example, the time of the fixed stop timing of the symbol is also displayed during the symbol stop display (however, the countdown is performed. It may be possible to stop notating the time, etc. The time notification may be continued by the countdown display even during the symbol stop display. In addition, the countdown is internally performed during the symbol stop display. However, the countdown may be stopped internally during the symbol stop display.

Also, when displaying a countdown display as a prefetch notice, if there is a hold whose variable time changes depending on the number of holds (for example, a hold whose variable time is indefinite), the countdown display should not be performed. Good. This is because, if the symbol variation display time is indefinite, it may be difficult to know at what timing the countdown becomes 0. For example, it is necessary to match the generation timing (pseudo rendition, reach, etc.). In the case of (development etc.), it is preferable to perform only in the symbol variable display.

On the other hand, the countdown display may be performed also when the hold whose variable time is indefinite is in the hold. In this case, for example, an effect that does not cause a problem even if it suddenly occurs (for example, a change in the display mode of the hold icon, an effect such as round promotion during a big hit, a telop display such as "approaching hard", etc. It suffices if the countdown of the timer is completed before the end of the hold of the target is completed). In addition, even when an effect that requires timing adjustment occurs, a certain timing (for example, the start of the pending pattern change display that is the prefetch target) n Forced adjustment of the book edge Good.

Further, the countdown display may be displayed during the big hit. In this case, the display may be continued across the round intervals. Here, during the big hit game, the period of one round is indefinite, so it is preferable to appropriately set the countdown time, for example, to prevent the countdown display from occurring in the last round, or during the big hit end interval (final When the jackpot end display period ends after the round ends, and the timer is set to 0 at the next timer interrupt (for example, 4 ms period), or when a certain round is reached, the book edge is forced. You may make it display the combined time (For example, even if it is not 0 in countdown display, "00:00" is forcibly displayed and an effect is generated).

Also, the time until the simultaneous production, the production by RTC, etc. may be notified by a countdown display.

Further, the display device may be configured by a transmissive liquid crystal, and on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal, a production means such as a production moving means and a decorative member, and another display device such as a drum or an LCD are arranged. They may be configured to be visible through the. At this time, the transmissive liquid crystal may be configured to be switchable by the liquid crystal shutter between a state in which the back side is visible and a state in which the rear side is difficult to visually recognize.

In addition, the operation mode of the production movable means such as the accessory may change or the light emission mode of the lamp may change according to the notification of the time by the countdown display.

In addition, a display that gives notice that there may be effects that affect the countdown display itself (for example, addition/subtraction of timer, interruption, fast forward/rewind, enlargement/reduction of countdown display, change of color or shape, etc.) (For example, an effect of inciting that something may occur due to the mini character, etc.) may be performed. For example, when a mini character appears, something may occur in the countdown display (when nothing is actually done or when something is done), and when another character comes out, something is always done. May be performed, or an effect may be performed such that something is always performed when another character comes out. At this time, for example, the larger the number of appearances of the character, the more likely it is to be a big hit.

Further, when the number of countdown displays is large, the final big hit may be likely to occur, and when the chance up notice is given, the final big hit may be likely to occur.

Further, with respect to the chance up meter, even if a part or all of the meter is enlarged or reduced, or promotion effect (for example, a color or shape is changed, a character or a marker indicating the current position is changed, etc.) is performed. Good.
Also, in the above description,
A gaming table provided with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],

The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 339(3)],

The timer display is a display including a time display [for example, a timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 330(3)],

After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect [for example, pseudo rendition shown in FIG. 330(9), strong sabotani group notice shown in FIG. 343(9), or revival effect shown in FIG. 347(30). Or the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 350(35) or the effect of changing the display form of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 346(6) to (7)] may be started. Consists of

It is configured such that the certain effect may not be started even after the display of the timer display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 341 (5) to (6), the timer is displayed. Although the notice display TM1 is displayed, it is erased before the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", and some presentation is not performed, etc.],

The certain effect is started when the display of the timer display is started and the display of the time becomes a certain time [for example, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is “00:00” or the like]. In some cases, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” as shown in FIG. 339(9), the second variation display of the decorative design by the pseudo-link is displayed. Etc.],

The jackpot symbol is fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display when the display of the timer display is started and the certain effect is executed than when the display of the timer display is started and the certain effect is not executed Prone to
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

Conventionally, the display effect on the display means tends to be diversified. However, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to expect to start a certain effect by starting the timer display.

Here, the display means may display only the timer display, or may display other displays than the timer display. Further, the display means may always display the timer display or may not display the timer display.

Further, the timer display may include only the time display, or may include a display other than the time display. Further, the timer display may necessarily include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, it may be configured such that only a certain effect may be started after the display of the timer display is started, and effects other than the certain effect are also started after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured to be performed. Further, it may be configured such that a certain effect is always started after the display of the timer display is started, and a certain effect may not be started after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured.

Further, it may be configured such that a certain effect may be started only after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect is started even after the display of the timer display is not started. It may be configured in some cases.

Further, it may be configured such that a certain effect may not be started even after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect may be generated even after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured such that other effects may not be started. Further, it may be configured such that a certain effect is not always started even after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect is started even after the display of the timer display is started. May be configured.

Further, it may be configured such that only a certain effect may be started in response to the display of the timer display being started and the display of the time being a certain time, or the display of the timer display may be started. It may be configured such that an effect other than a certain effect may be started in response to the fact that the time is displayed for a certain time. Further, it may be configured such that a certain effect is always started when the display of the timer display is started and the display of the time becomes a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started and the time is displayed. May be configured such that a certain effect may not be started even when a certain time is displayed.

Further, it may be configured such that a certain effect may be started only when the display of the timer display is started and the display of the time becomes a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured such that a certain effect may be started in response to something other than the fact that the time is displayed at a certain time.

Further, when the display of the timer display is started and a certain effect is executed, the big hit symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display, or the big hit symbol may not be fixedly displayed. May be configured as.

Further, “the certain effect may be started after the display of the timer display is started and when the display of the time reaches the certain time [for example, FIG. 339(3) to As shown in (9) of the figure, when the timer display in the timer notification display TM1 becomes "00:00" after the timer notification effect is started, the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. etc],

If the display of the timer display is finished after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches the certain time, the certain effect is not started [eg, FIG. As shown in (3) to (6) of the figure, if the timer display in the timer notification display TM1 is erased before the timer display becomes "00:00" after the fake timer notification effect is started, the pseudo-link is generated. The second variation display of decorative design does not start, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the fact that the timer display reaches a certain time.

Here, after the display of the timer display is started, when a time display reaches a certain time, only a certain effect may be started, or the display of the timer display is started. After a certain time, when a time display reaches a certain time, an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, after the display of the timer display is started, and when the display of the time reaches a certain time, a certain effect may be started without fail, or after the display of the timer display is started. A certain effect may not be started when the time display reaches a certain time.

Further, after the timer display is started, a certain effect may be started only when the time display reaches a certain time, or the timer display is started. There may be a case where a certain effect is started in a case other than when the time display has reached a certain time later.

Further, when the display of the timer display is finished after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, only a certain effect may not be started, When the display of the timer display ends after the display of the display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, effects other than the certain effect may not be started. Further, if the display of the timer display is finished after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, a certain effect may not necessarily be started, and the timer is not necessarily started. A certain effect may be started after the display of the display is started and the display of the timer display is finished before the display of the time reaches a certain time. Further, after the display of the timer display is started and the display of the timer display is finished before the display of the time reaches a certain time, a certain effect may not be started, and the timer display may be started. Even when the display of the timer display is finished after the display of is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a mini game [for example, a mini game shown in FIG. 353(3) to (9) in FIG. 353].

If the first result [for example, the result of the appearance of the princess character HME from the treasure box image shown in FIG. 353(9)] is derived as the display result of the mini game, the display of the time is the certain result. It is configured such that the certain effect is started when the time is reached [for example, when the princess character HME appears from the treasure chest image as shown in FIG. 353(9), it is shown in FIG. 353(17). As described above, the replay symbol RP is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to excite the trend of the timer announcement by the mini game.

Here, the display means may display only the display of the mini game, or may display other displays than the display of the mini game. Further, the display means may display the display of the mini game without fail, or may not display the display of the mini game.

Further, when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, the time display may reach a certain time and only a certain effect may be started. As a result, when the first result is derived, the display of time may reach a certain time and an effect other than the certain effect may be started. Further, when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, the time display may reach a certain time and a certain effect may be started without fail. As a result, when the first result is derived, the time display may reach a certain time and a certain performance may not be started.

Further, the time display may reach a certain time and a certain effect may be started only when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, or the display of the mini game may be performed. As a result, the time display may reach a certain time and a certain presentation may be started in a case other than the case where the first result is derived.

In addition, "the display means is a means capable of displaying an advance notice item [for example, a princess character HME displayed at the lower left of the display screen shown in FIG. 353(10)],

The advance notice item may be displayed depending on the display result of the mini game [for example, in the mini game shown in FIG. 353(5) to FIG. When the character HME appears, as shown in FIG. 353(10), the princess character HME is displayed as a notice item in the lower left of the display screen, etc.],

The advance notice item includes a display suggesting that the certain effect is executed [eg, by displaying the princess character HME as a advance notice item, advance notice is given that the pseudo-relation will be performed]. ,

After the display of the notice item is started, the display of the time reaches the certain time and the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 353 (10). , After the princess character HME is displayed as a notice item, the second display of the variation of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-link is started at the timing when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A becomes "0:00". ,

When the notice item is not displayed, the display of the time reaches the certain time and the certain effect is not started [for example, in FIG. 354(5) to FIG. 9(9). When the old lady BBA (10) appears from the treasure chest image in the mini game shown, the advance notice item is not displayed and the pseudo-repeating is not performed as shown in FIG. 354 (10)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the display of the advance notice item.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to recognize by the notice icon as a result display while paying attention to the mini game that a certain effect by the timer display is started.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to excite the effect in a period until the timer display reaches (or does not reach) a certain time.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the advance notice item, or may be capable of displaying other than the advance notice item. Further, the display means may always display the advance notice item or may not display the advance notice item.

Further, it may be configured such that only the notice item may be displayed depending on the display result of the mini game, or something other than the notice item may be displayed depending on the display result of the mini game. It may be configured as is. Further, the notice item may be always displayed according to the result of the mini game display, or the notice item may not be displayed depending on the result of the mini game display. Good.

Further, the notice item may include only a display that suggests that a certain effect will be executed, or may include a display other than a display that suggests that a certain effect will be executed. Further, the notice item may always include a display suggesting that a certain effect is executed, or may not include a display suggesting that a certain effect is executed.

Further, after the notice item is started to be displayed, the time display may reach a certain time and only a certain effect may be started, or after the notice item is started to be displayed, The time display may reach a certain time, and an effect other than the certain effect may be started. Further, after the notice item is started to be displayed, the time display may reach a certain time so that a certain effect is always started, or after the notice item is started to be displayed, The time display may reach a certain time and a certain presentation may not be started.

Further, it may be configured such that the display of time reaches a certain time and a certain effect is started only after the notice item is started to be displayed, and other than after the notice item is started to be displayed. Alternatively, the time display may reach a certain time and a certain effect may be started.

Further, when the advance notice item is not displayed, it may be configured such that the time display reaches a certain time and only a certain effect is not started. When the advance notice item is not displayed, the time display may be It may be configured such that a certain amount of time is reached and effects other than a certain effect are not started. Further, when the notice item is not displayed, the time display may reach a certain time so that a certain effect is not always started. When the notice item is not displayed, the time display may be changed. It may be configured such that a certain effect is reached and a certain effect is started. In addition, the display result of the mini game is derived after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time display is started to change [for example, FIG. ), after the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 353(14), as shown in FIG. 353(9), before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started. , The results of the mini-game display are derived, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the timer display has not reached a certain time, it may be possible to focus attention on the display result of the mini game.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to impress the association between the timer display and the mini game.

Here, after the display of the timer display is started, it may be configured that only the result of the display of the mini game is derived before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured such that, after being displayed, a result other than the display result of the mini game is derived before the display of the time display starts to change. Further, after the display of the timer display is started, the result of the display of the mini game may be always derived before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display may be started. After that, the result of the mini game display may not be derived before the display of the time display starts to change.

Further, after the display of the timer display is started, the result of the display of the mini game may be derived only before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display may be started. After that, the result of the mini game display may be derived other than before the display of the time display starts to change.

Further, the result of the mini game display may be derived only after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display may be started. Other than after the start, the display result of the mini game may be derived before the display of the time display starts to change.

In addition, the display result of the mini game is derived after the display of the time display starts to change and before the display of the time reaches the certain time [for example, FIG. As shown in 349(4), after the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1L is started, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1L becomes "0:00" at the timing shown in FIG. Before completion, as shown in FIG. 349(9), the result of the mini game display is derived, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, since the timer display has not reached a certain time, it may be possible to focus attention on the result when the mini game is voted.

Here, after the display of the time display starts to change, only the result of the display of the mini game may be derived before the display of the time reaches a certain time. After the display starts to change, before the time display reaches a certain time, a result other than the display result of the mini game may be derived. Further, after the display of the time display starts to change, the result of the display of the mini game may be always derived before the display of the time reaches a certain time. May be configured such that the result of the mini-game display may not be derived after the start of change before the time display reaches a certain time.

The result of the mini game display may be derived only after the display of the time display starts to change and before the display of the time reaches a certain time. After the start of change, the result of the mini game display may be derived other than before the time display reaches a certain time.

Further, the result of the mini game display may be derived before the time display reaches a certain time only after the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the time display may be performed. In addition to after the start of change, the result of the mini game display may be derived before the time display reaches a certain time.

In addition, “the display of the mini game may be started before the display of the timer display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 355(3) to (4), the timer advance notice effect is displayed. Mini-game is started before
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it is not possible to know whether or not the timer display is started at the time when the display of the mini game is started, so that it may be possible to pay attention to the trend of the mini game.

Here, there may be a case where only the display of the mini game is started before the display of the timer display is started, or a display other than the display of the mini game is displayed before the display of the timer display is started. The display may also be started. Also, the display of the mini game may always start before the display of the timer display starts, or the display of the mini game may not start before the display of the timer display starts. Good.

In addition, the mini game may be displayed only before the display of the timer display is started, or the display of the mini game may be displayed before the display of the timer display is started. It may be started.

In addition, the mini game may be displayed before the display of only the timer display is started, or the display of the mini game may be displayed before the display other than the display of the timer display is started. May be started.

In addition, as a result of the display of the mini game, a second result [for example, a result in which the icon BCF of the face-length face appears from the treasure box image shown in FIG. 355(8)] may be derived,

The second result is a result that is not related to the certain effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 355(8), when a result in which the longest face icon BCF appears from the treasure chest image is derived, 355(4) is not related to the timer advance notice effect, the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 356(25) is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to draw attention to whether or not the display result of the mini game is related to a certain effect.

Here, only the second result may be derived as the display result of the mini game, or the result other than the second result may be derived as the display result of the mini game. Good. In addition, the second result may be always derived as a result of the display of the mini game, or the second result may not be derived as a result of the display of the mini game.

Further, the second result may not be related only to a certain performance, or may not be related to a performance other than the certain performance. In addition, the second result may not necessarily be related to a certain performance, or may be related to a certain performance.

In addition, as the certain effect, a first notice [for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 346(6) to (7)] may be executed.
The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to expect that the timer display is displayed and the prefetching notice is given.

Here, only a first notice may be executed as a certain effect, or a notice other than the first notice may be executed as a certain effect. Further, the first notice may be executed as a certain effect, or the first notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

In addition, there is a case where a second notice [for example, a pseudo-relation shown in FIG. 330(9)] is executed as the certain effect.

The second notice is a notice that the execution time of the symbol variation display is longer when it is executed than when it is not executed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, there is a case where it is possible to give a feeling of expectation for a big hit by displaying a timer display and lengthening the execution time of the symbol variation display.

Here, only a second notice may be executed as a certain effect, or a notice other than the second notice may be executed as a certain effect. Further, the second notice may be executed as a certain effect, or the second notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

Further, the second notice may be such that only the execution time of the symbol variable display becomes longer when it is executed than when it is not executed, or when it is executed than when it is not executed. The time other than the execution time of the symbol variable display may be long. In addition, the second notice may be such that the execution time of the symbol variable display is always longer when it is executed than when it is not executed, or when it is executed than when it is not executed. The execution time of the variable display of symbols may not be long.

In addition, there is a case where a “third notice (for example, display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 350(35)) is executed as the certain effect,

The third notice is a notice that the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when it is executed than when it is not executed,
A game table characterized by that. ]

Was also explained. According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the timer display will be displayed and a big hit announcement will be given.

Here, only a third notice may be executed as a certain effect, or a notice other than the third notice may be executed as a certain effect. Also, the third notice may be executed as a certain effect, or the third notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

In addition, the third notice may be such that only the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display when it is executed than when it is not executed, and when it is executed than when it is not executed In this case, symbols other than the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display. Further, the third notice may be that the big hit symbol is definitely displayed in the symbol variation display when it is executed rather than when it is not executed, or when it is executed rather than when it is not executed. In some cases, the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display.

Also, the third notice may be that the big hit symbol is definitely displayed in the symbol variation display when it is executed, or when it is executed, the big jackpot symbol may not be definitely displayed in the symbol variation display. It may be.

In addition, there is a case where a fourth notice [for example, a revival effect shown in FIG. 347(30)] is executed as the certain effect.
The fourth notice is a notice that a big hit will be announced.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the timer display will be displayed and the jackpot will be a big hit.

Here, only a fourth notice may be executed as a certain effect, or a notice other than the fourth notice may be executed as a certain effect. Further, the fourth notice may be executed as a certain effect, or the fourth notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

Further, the fourth notice may notify only that it is a big hit, or may notify other than that it is a big hit. Further, the fourth notice may be a notification that the jackpot will be a big hit, or may not notify that the jackpot will be a big hit.

In addition, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a ball removal error display [for example, lower plate full tank error display ERR1 etc. shown in FIG. 389(1)],

The ball-out error display is a display that may be displayed in a plate full tank error state [eg, lower plate full tank error state, etc.],

The timer display may be overlapped with the ball-out error display [for example, as shown in FIG. 389(3), the timer notice display TM1 overlaps the lower plate full tank error display ERR1. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to motivate the user to quickly cancel the plate full tank error state in order to see the effect displayed by the timer.

Here, the display means may display only the ball-out error display, or may display a display other than the ball-out error display. Further, the display means may always display the ball-out error display, or may not display the ball-out error display.

Further, the ball-out error display may be displayed only in the plate full tank error state, or may be displayed in a state other than the plate full tank error state. The ball-out error display may be always displayed in the plate full tank error state, or may not be displayed in the plate full tank error state.

Further, the timer display may be configured to be overlapped only with the ball removal error display, or the timer display may be configured to be overlapped with a display other than the ball removal error display. May be. Further, the timer display may be configured to always overlap with the ball removal error display, or the timer display may not be overlapped with the ball removal error display in some cases.

In addition, "the timer display is a display that is displayed in any one of a plurality of modes,

One of the plurality of types of modes is the first mode [for example, the default display mode shown in FIG. 348(3)],

One of the plurality of types of modes is the second mode [for example, the high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 346(3)],
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,

The case where the timer display is displayed in the second mode is configured to be more easily started than the case where the timer display is displayed in the first mode.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to have an expectation that a certain effect is started depending on the mode of the timer display.

Further, according to this gaming machine, when a mini game is played, the possibility of success of the mini game may be expected depending on the mode of the timer display. That is, first, the player expects a certain effect to be executed by expecting the success of the mini game, but the mode of the timer display which is started to be displayed midway is indirectly started first. In some cases, the results of the game display can be expected. That is, in some cases, the effect (timer display) started later functions as a notice of the effect (mini game, etc.) started earlier, and the player can be entertained.

Here, the timer display may be displayed only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in a mode other than the first mode and the second mode. Good. Further, the timer display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode.

Further, the first aspect and the second aspect may be partially different aspects or may be entirely different aspects.

Further, when the timer display is displayed in the second mode, it may be configured so that only a certain effect is started more easily than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode. It may be configured such that an effect other than a certain effect is more likely to be started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the display is displayed in the first mode. Further, when the timer display is displayed in the second mode, a certain effect may be configured to be started without fail, rather than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode. A certain effect may not be started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode rather than when the display is displayed in the first mode.

Further, when the timer display is displayed in the second mode, a certain effect may be configured to be started without fail, and when the timer display is displayed in the second mode, a certain effect may be performed. May not be started.

The timer display may be changed to the second mode after being displayed in the first mode, or the timer display may be changed to the first mode after being displayed in the second mode. Good. Further, when the timer display is started in the first mode, it may be configured not to change to the second mode, or when the timer display is started in the second mode, It may be configured so as not to change to the first aspect.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of modes is the third mode [for example, the timer display of “7:77” shown in FIG. 390(a) or “99:99 shown in FIG. 390(b)”. And the rainbow display mode shown in FIG. 390(g)].
The third aspect is an aspect different from the first aspect,
The third aspect is an aspect different from the second aspect,

When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the jackpot symbol is fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make the player have expectations at the start of displaying the timer display.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to give an expectation for being displayed in the third mode.

Here, the third aspect may be partially different from the first aspect, or may be wholly different from the first aspect.

Further, the third aspect may be partially different from the second aspect, or may be wholly different from the second aspect.

Further, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, only the big hit symbol may be configured to be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display, or when the timer display is displayed in the third mode. The symbols other than the jackpot symbols may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display. Further, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the jackpot design may be configured to be definitely displayed in the symbol variable display, or when the timer display is displayed in the third mode. The jackpot symbol may not be fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display.

Further, only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display, except when the timer display is displayed in the third mode. Also in the case, the big hit symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display.

In addition, "when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, it is different from the jackpot game which is performed in response to the jackpot symbol being confirmed and displayed, which is advantageous to the player (hereinafter, "First state") is added,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the timer display may be able to further enhance the sense of expectation for the third mode.

Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, only the first state may be added, and when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, The state other than the one state may be added. Further, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the first state may be configured to be always provided, and when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, The state may not be given in some cases.

Further, the first state may be provided only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, or when the timer display is not displayed in the third mode. Also, the first state may be added.
In addition, "the first state is a probability change state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

It should be noted that the probability variation state may or may not be provided with the electric support state. The probability variation state may be a probability variation state in which the state is maintained until the next big hit, or a probability variation state (ST) in which the state ends when a certain number of symbol variation displays are performed. Good.

Further, instead of the probability change state, a power support state (special figure low probability general figure high probability state) may be used.
In addition, "the first state is a pending holiday home,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, the pending holiday game may be a pending holiday game in which the probability variation big hit is confirmed, or may be a pending holiday game in which a big hit that is not the probability variation big hit is determined.

In addition, "when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the timer display is erased before the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed without changing the display of the time in the symbol variation display. Is configured as
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, even if the timer display does not reach a certain time, it may be possible to make the player expect. Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, it is configured that only the timer display is erased before the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variable display. However, if the timer display is displayed as the third display, the display other than the timer display is deleted before the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. May be configured as follows. In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is always erased before the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. If the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display may not be deleted before the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured.

Also, when the timer display is displayed as the third display, the timer display is configured to be erased only before the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variable display. If the timer display is displayed as the third display, the timer display may be erased except before the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured.

Further, only when the timer display is displayed as the third display, the timer display is erased before the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. Even if the timer display is not displayed in the third display, the timer display is erased before the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. May be configured as follows.

The timer display may be erased before the time display changes to reach a certain time.

In addition, “when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the certain effect is not started and the jackpot symbol is confirmed even when the display of the time reaches the certain time. Configured to be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, advantageous development may be expected even when a certain effect is not started.

Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and only the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed. May be configured, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, some performance is not started and symbols other than the jackpot symbol are also displayed. It may be configured to be confirmed and displayed. In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the big hit symbol is definitely displayed. If the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, some performance is not started and the big hit symbol is not fixedly displayed. May be configured.

Further, only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed. May be done. Also, in cases other than the case where the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even when the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed. May be configured as follows. The time display may reach a certain time, a certain effect may be started, and the big hit symbol may be fixedly displayed.

In addition, “the first mode is a mode in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the first time [for example, a timer display of “5:00”, etc.],

The second aspect is an aspect in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the second time [for example, a timer display of “20:00”, etc.],

The third aspect is an aspect in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the third time [for example, a timer display of "7:77", etc.],
In the first time and the second time, the second time is a longer time,
The third time is a time different from the first time,
The third time is a time different from the second time,

The third time is a time displayed only when the first state is given,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started.

Here, the first mode may be a mode in which the first time displayed in the timer display is only the first time, or the first time displayed in the timer display is the first time. It may be a mode other than the above time. The first mode may be a mode in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is always the first time, or the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the first display. It may be a mode in which the time may not be reached.

The second mode may be a mode in which the time displayed first in the timer display is only the second time, or the time displayed first in the timer display is the second time. It may be a mode other than time. The second mode may be a mode in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is always the second time, or the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the second display. There may be a mode in which the time may not be reached.

The third mode may be a mode in which the first time displayed in the timer display is only the third time, or the first time displayed in the timer display is the third time. It may be a mode other than time. The third mode may be a mode in which the time displayed first in the timer display is always the third time, or the time displayed first in the timer display is the third time. There may be a mode in which the time may not be reached.

Further, between the first time and the second time, the second time may be always longer, or the second time may not be longer.

The third time may be different from only the first time, or may be different from the time other than the first time. The third time may be different from the first time, or may be the same as the first time.

The third time may be different from only the second time or may be different from the time other than the second time. The third time may be different from the second time, or may be the same time as the second time.

The third time may be the time displayed in a case other than the case where the first state is given, or is the time that is always given when the first state is given. Alternatively, the time may be a time when the first state is not given and a time when the first state is not given.

In addition, "The time display that is displayed first in the timer display is a display of the number of seconds, and is also configured to be able to display a decimal point display [for example, a timer advance notice display shown in FIG. The decimal point can be displayed in the timer display in TM1.],

The display of the first time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point is 0,

The display of the second time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the display of the time when the display after the decimal point is 0,

The display of the third time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the display of the time when the display after the decimal point is other than 0,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player may recognize at a glance that it is the premier timer.

Here, the time display first displayed in the timer display may be a display of the number of seconds, and may be configured to be able to display only the display after the decimal point, or the time display first displayed in the timer display. The display may be a display of the number of seconds and a display other than the display below the decimal point may be configured to be displayed. In addition, the time display that is displayed first in the timer display may be configured to display the number of seconds and the decimal point display, and the time displayed first in the timer display may be configured. The display of may be configured to display the number of seconds and may not display the display below the decimal point.

Further, "the display of the first time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives a notice,

The display of the second time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives a notice,

The display of the third time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time longer than the execution time of the symbol variable display for which the timer display gives a notice, A gaming table. ]
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player may recognize at a glance that it is the premier timer.

Here, “the time display first displayed in the timer display is a display of the number of seconds, and is also configured to be able to display a decimal point display [for example, a timer notice shown in FIG. 339(3)]. With the timer display in display TM1, decimal places can be displayed, etc.],

The display of the first time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point is 0,

The display of the second time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0,

The display of the third time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the display of the time when the display after the decimal point is other than 0,

The display of the first time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives a notice,

The display of the second time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives a notice,

The display of the third time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time longer than the execution time of the symbol variable display for which the timer display gives a notice, A gaming table. ]
May be

In addition, “provided with effect display means capable of executing effect display [for example, 7-segment display device SEG or the like shown in FIG. 384],
The effect display means is a means provided separately from the display means,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the timer display,

When the timer display is displayed by any one of the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter, “first case [for example, one of the decorative pattern display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG Only when the timer advance notice is displayed]”).),

When the timer display is displayed on both the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter, "second case [for example, as shown in FIGS. 384(3) to (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. And the timer advance notice display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both performed.]").

In the first case, the certain effect may not be started,
In the second case, the certain effect is configured to start,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to expect the start of a certain effect depending on the number of timer displays for one certain effect.

Here, the effect display means may be capable of executing only effect display, or may be capable of executing display other than effect display. Further, the effect display means may always execute the effect display, or may not execute the effect display.

Further, the effect display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the effect display means may always display the timer display, or may not display the timer display.

Further, in the first case, it may be configured so that only a certain effect may not be started, and in the first case, an effect other than a certain effect may not be started. Good. Further, in the first case, a certain effect may not necessarily be started, or a certain effect may be started in some cases.

Further, in the second case, only a certain effect may be configured to be started, and in the second case, an effect other than the certain effect may be configured to be started. In the second case, a certain effect may be configured to be started without fail, or a certain effect may not be started.

In addition, rather than when the timer display is displayed only by the display means of the effect display means and the display means, the case where the timer display is displayed only by the effect display means of the effect display means and the display means, It may be configured so that the jackpot pattern is finally confirmed and displayed. Further, the case where the timer display is displayed by both the effect display means and the display means is finally a big hit, rather than the case where the timer display is displayed only by the effect display means of the effect display means and the display means. The symbols may be configured to be easily displayed in a fixed manner.

Further, when the timer display is displayed by both the effect display means and the display means, the timer display of either one of the effect display means and the display means may end halfway.

Further, the effect display means and the display means display different times, and a certain effect is started when a certain time is reached on the timer display of one of the effect display means and the display means. May be done.

Further, “The timer display is a display in which the display of the time is counted down [for example, as shown in FIGS. 339(3) to (9), the timer advance notice display TM1 counts down the timer display. Etc.],

The certain time is 0 [for example, a timer display of “00:00” shown in FIG. 339(9)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
According to this game table, it may be possible to easily recognize that a certain time has been reached.

It should be noted that the certain time may include that it is 0 including a decimal point, and may be, for example, a display of “0.00” or “00.00”, or “0:00” or The display may be "00:00".
In the above description,

A gaming table provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],

One of the plurality of types of display is the first display [for example, a change effect display (hold change) of the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIGS. 391(f) to (g). Prior production display) etc.],

One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a hold icon in a red display mode shown in FIG. 391(h), etc.],

One of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, a preparing image RDY shown in FIG. 391(d)],
The first display is a display of a character related to the second display,
The second display is a display of the hold icon in the display mode of the prefetch notice,

The third display is a display indicating that a certain notice display [for example, display of mini game shown in FIG. 391(o) to FIG. 391(p)] is waiting for display.

The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 391(f) to 391(h), a ninja character NJ4 is displayed. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed from the default display mode to a red display mode after the hold change pre-effect display is performed]

The third display may be started in the first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 391(d), the UI section UI3 displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is being prepared. The display of the image RDY has started, etc.],

There is a case where the display of the third display started in the first state ends in the second state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 391(d) to 391(n), UI The preparation-in-progress image RDY whose display is started in the state in which the section UI3 is displayed is finished in the state in which the UI section UI3 is hidden, etc.],

After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state [for example, FIG. 391(n) to FIG. As shown in (o), after the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished, the display of the mini game is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, etc.],

After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [for example, display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 391(q)] may be started [for example, FIG. 391(o) to FIG. As shown in (q), when the display result of the mini game becomes a great success, the iron plate image TP is displayed, etc.],

The certain effect is a notice relating to a symbol variation display being executed [for example, the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 391(q) is a notice display notifying that the jackpot is confirmed, etc.],

There is a case where the second state is brought after the first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 391(l) to FIG. 391(m), it is displayed when moving to the swordsman reach. UI section UI3 is hidden, etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed,

The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI unit UI3 is hidden in Swordsman Reach].
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

Although there is room for improvement in the display means of the conventional game table, this game table can realize a game table having a characteristic in the display means.

Also, according to this gaming machine, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance of the notice display, is a notice display other than the hold icon, so that the user can concentrate on the fluctuation. Sometimes it can be entertained.

Also, according to this gaming machine, it is possible for a beginner to entertain and excite by notifying whether the notice is a preliminary notice or a pre-reading notice, and for some experienced users, the preliminary indication is the relevant notice. In some cases, it may be easier to understand if it is displayed, and it is possible to clarify the expectations.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be easier to understand which advance notice will be given depending on the timing of ending the display during preparation.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may be a display of a character related only to the second display, or may be a display of a character related to a display other than the second display. In addition, the first display may be a display of a character that is always related to the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

Further, only the third display may be started in the first state, or displays other than the third display may be started in the first state. Further, the third display may be always started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state. Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

In addition, the third display started to be displayed in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display started to be displayed in the first state. However, the display may end in a state other than the second state. In addition, the third display started to be displayed in the first state may always end in the second state, and the third display started to be displayed in the first state is the second display. In some cases, the display may not end in this state.

In addition, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, only a certain notice display may be started in the second state. After the display of the display is finished, the display of the display other than the certain notice display may be started in the second state. Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be always started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state. There may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is not started in the second state after the completion of.

Further, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is started in the second state only after the display of the third display is finished in the second state. The display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state other than after the display of the display is finished.

Further, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state. After the display of the display is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started in a state other than the second state.

Further, there may be a case where only a certain effect is started after a certain notice display is displayed, and after the certain notice display is displayed, an effect other than a certain effect is also started. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may be always started after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain notice display is displayed.

Further, a certain effect may be started only after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is not displayed. It may be.

Further, the certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. Further, a certain effect may be a notice that is always related to the symbol change display being executed, or may be a notice that is not related to the symbol change display being executed.

Further, the second state may be set only after the first state, or the second state may be set even after a state other than the first state. Further, the second state may be always set after the first state, or the second state may not be set after the first state.

The first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or one of the states in which displays other than the hold icon can be displayed. .. Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed. Further, the second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states in which no display other than the hold icon is displayed. The second state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is not always displayed, or one of the states in which the hold icon may be displayed.

Here, the first display may be a display of the character relating to the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon, or an effect display in the calibration of the character (navi character) that is constantly displayed. ..

In addition, the second display may be a display that changes from the hold icon in the default display mode to the hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode.

The third display may be a character display in preparation, a character display, a notice item display, or a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display. It may be a display in progress.

Further, the certain notice display may be a display during the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, a mini game, or a notice effect.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of displays is a sixth display [for example, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391(a)],

The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least behind the hold icon,

The hold icon is configured to be displayable while the sixth display is displayed [for example, the hold icon can be displayed while the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc.],

The hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed [for example, when the UI unit UI3 is hidden as shown in FIG. 391(m), the hold icon is displayed. Icon is not displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make the hold icon stand out.

Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back of only the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back of a display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be a display of an image that is always displayed on the back side of at least the hold icon, or may be a display of an image that is not displayed at least on the back side of the hold icon.

Further, only the hold icon may be configured to be displayable while the sixth display is displayed, or any display other than the hold icon may be configured to be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. May be. In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be always displayed when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. May be configured.

Further, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be configured to be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. May be.

Also, it may be configured such that only the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, and so that displays other than the hold icon are not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. Also, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed without the sixth display being displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed without the sixth display being displayed. May be configured.

Further, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, and the hold icon is not displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

In addition, in the "first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with the display of the third display [eg, FIG. 391 ( As shown in d), the in-preparation image RDY is overlaid and displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 in the UI section UI3, etc.],

The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [for example, the in-preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 391(d). And the display position of the image in preparation RDY shown in FIG. 391(m) are the same, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by displaying the third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it is strongly impressed that the third display is not a look-ahead notice due to a change in display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, it may be possible to prevent the user from overlooking by notifying that a notice other than the change in the display mode of the hold icon is being given.

Here, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped only with the display of the third display, and in the first state, It may be configured such that at least a part of the six displays may be displayed in an overlapping manner with the displays other than the third display. Further, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display without fail, and in the first state, the display of the sixth display may be displayed. It may be configured such that at least a part of the display may be overlapped with the third display and may not be displayed.

Further, in the first state, only at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display, and in the first state, the sixth display may be displayed. The display other than at least a part of the display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display.
In addition, "the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,

One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect [for example, a default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 391(a)],

One of the plurality of types of modes is a second mode [for example, a gold display mode shown in FIG. 391(e)],

The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The jackpot symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display [for example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391(e) is displayed in a gold display mode, the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, and ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, It
A game table characterized by that. ]

Was also explained. Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in modes other than the first mode and the second mode. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. Good.

Further, the case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more variable display than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of only the jackpot symbol may be easily confirmed and displayed, the sixth display may be changed from the first mode to the second mode rather than the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In the case where the mode is changed, symbols other than the big hit symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display. Further, the case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more variable display than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The jackpot symbol may be definitely displayed in the above, and the sixth display may be changed from the first mode to the second mode, as compared with the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. When changing to, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is not confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display.

Further, only when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display, and the sixth display is the first aspect. Even in the case other than the case of changing from the second mode to the second mode, the big hit symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display.
In addition, "the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,

One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect [for example, a default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 391(a)],

One of the plurality of types of modes is a second mode [for example, a gold display mode shown in FIG. 391(e)],

The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , It is easy to start displaying the second display [for example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391(e) is displayed in a gold display mode, a red hold icon is easily displayed. etc],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in modes other than the first mode and the second mode. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. Good.

Further, the case where the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode is more than the second case when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. Only the display of the display may be easily started, and the sixth display may be changed from the first mode to the second mode, as compared with the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. When the display is changed to, it may be easier to start the display other than the second display. Further, the case where the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode is more than the second case when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. The display of the display may be always started, and the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, as compared with the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display may not start when the display has changed.

Further, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode, and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode. The display of the second display may be easily started even in the case other than the case where the mode is changed.

In addition, “At least a part of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display [for example, as shown in FIG. 391(f), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed on the UI unit UI3. They overlap, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, various information can be obtained by focusing on the sixth display, and the game can be made easy to understand in some cases.

Here, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap only with the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display may overlap with a display other than the sixth display. May be configured to do so. Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display without fail, or at least a part of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured as.

Further, only a part of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display, or the entire first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display. ..

In addition, “the first display and the sixth display are configured not to overlap [for example, as shown in FIG. 406(b1), the ninja character NJ4 overlaps the UI unit UI3. No, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, if the sixth display is focused on, at first glance, the third display seems to be a display related to the change display of the hold icon, but it may be understood that this is not the case.

Here, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the displays other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. Good. Further, the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap with each other, or may be configured so that the first display and the sixth display may overlap with each other. ..

In addition, "a certain reach effect [eg, super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG. 391 (m) to FIG. 391 (q)] can be executed,

The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started [for example, the super reach (swordsman reach shown in FIGS. 391(m) to (q)). ) Before the start of]],

The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed [for example, a state in which super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 391(m) to (q) is being executed]. A gaming table characterized by the following. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to notice whether or not a certain reach state is reached.

Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than the certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured to always execute a certain reach effect, or may be configured not to execute a certain reach effect.

Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before the execution of the reach effect other than the certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the above states. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is necessarily started, or one of the states in which the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

Further, the second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is being executed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being executed. In addition, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always executed or a state in which a certain reach effect is not executed.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a mini game display shown in FIGS. 391(o) to (p)],

One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display [for example, a display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 391(q)],

The certain notice display is a notice for notifying that the certain effect is started [for example, in the mini game shown in FIGS. 391(o) to (p), the arrow released by the mini character MC1 of the lord. Has foretold to display the iron plate image TP by sticking in the area around the target TGT],
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain notice display,
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the certain notice display may give a notice only when a certain effect is started, or may give a notice other than a certain effect being started. Further, a certain notice display may be a notice that a certain effect is started, or may not be a notice that a certain effect is started.

Further, only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain notice display, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain notice display. Further, the fourth display may be displayed without fail as a certain notice display, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain notice display.

Further, only a fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. Further, the fifth display may be always displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, "the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display, may be continuously displayed even after the symbol variable display to be started next is started [eg, FIG. 391 ( i) to (j) of the same figure, the image RDY in preparation is displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to give a sense of expectation over a plurality of fluctuations by the third display, and the goal is easy to understand, so the period of giving a sense of expectation may be clear.

Here, the third display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display may be continuously displayed only after the symbol variable display to be started next is started, or The third display started to be displayed in the symbol variable display may be continuously displayed other than after the next symbol variable display is started. Further, the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may always be continuously displayed after the next symbol variation display is started, or in a certain symbol variation display. The third display, which is started to be displayed, may not be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started.

In addition, “the first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display, is erased before the next symbol variable display is started [for example, FIG. 391(f) to FIG. h), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display may be erased only before the next symbol variable display is started, or the display in a certain symbol variable display is The started first display may be erased other than before the next symbol variation display is started. Further, the first display which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display may be erased before the next symbol variable display is started, or the display is started in a certain symbol variable display. The displayed first display may not be deleted before the next symbol variation display is started.

In addition, “in the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed [for example, as shown in FIG. 397 (a4), the characters of “super heat” are displayed in the tutorial display section TT1. There may be a notice display consisting of],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where only a certain effect is executed in the area where the third display is displayed, and an effect other than a certain effect is also executed in the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases where Further, a certain effect may be necessarily executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

Further, there may be a case where a certain effect is executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, and a certain effect is also executed in an area other than the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases where

In addition, “operation means [for example, effect button 136 etc.] that can be operated by the player is provided,

One display of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display [for example, the large button image 136aL or the like shown in FIG. 394(b6)],
The seventh display is a display that prompts the user to operate the operation means,

The seventh display is a display that is started after the third display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 394(b1) to (b6), the decal button image 136aL is not prepared. The display of the middle image RDY is started after the display is started],

When the operating means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated during the display of the large button image 136aL shown in FIG. 394(b6), the iron plate is operated. The image TP is displayed, etc.] The third display is a display that is terminated before the display of the seventh display is started [for example, FIG. 394(b1) to FIG. , The preparation-in-progress image RDY is displayed before the big button image 136aL is displayed.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the operation means may be operable only by the player or may be operable by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may be one that is not operated by the player.

Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operating means, or may prompt other than operations of the operating means. Further, the seventh display may be a message that always prompts the user to operate the operating device, or may not prompt the user to operate the operating device.

Further, the seventh display may be a display which is started only after the third display is started, or is a display which is started even after the third display is started. It may be. Further, the seventh display may be that the display is always started after the third display is started, or the display is not started after the third display is started. Good.

Further, when the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect may be started without fail, and when the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is not started. There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may be started when the operation means is operated only while the seventh display is being displayed, and a certain effect may be generated when the operation means is operated while the seventh display is not being displayed. It may be started. Further, a certain effect may be started when the operation means is operated during the display of only the seventh display, and a certain effect may be generated when the operation means is operated while a display other than the seventh display is also displayed. May be started.

In addition, the third display may be displayed only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display may be ended other than before the display of the seventh display is started. It may be one that does. In addition, the third display may be the one that is always finished before the display of the seventh display is started, or when the display is not finished before the display of the seventh display is started. There may be

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is an eighth display [for example, a united animation or the like shown in FIG. 394(b4) to FIG. 394(b5)],

The eighth display is a display for announcing that the display of the seventh display will be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 394 (b4) to (b6), a button advance notice effect is produced by a united animation. ], that is, the display of the big button image 136aL is foretold],
The third display is a display that is terminated during the display of the eighth display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the eighth display may give a notice only that the display of the seventh display is started, or may give a notice other than that the display of the seventh display is started. May be The eighth display may be a notification that the display of the seventh display is started, or may not be a notification that the display of the seventh display is started. It may be.

Further, the third display may be finished only during the display of the eighth display, or may be finished during the display of a display other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of displays is a ninth display [for example, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 401(a)],
The ninth display is a variable icon display,

Two third displays may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 404(a), two preparing images RDY1 and RDY2 may be displayed, etc.],

After the display of one of the two third displays ends, the display mode of the other changes [for example, as shown in FIG. 401(g), the preparing image RDY is displayed enlarged. etc],

The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps the ninth display [for example, as shown in FIG. 401(g), the enlarged and displayed image RDY overlaps the variation icon h0. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to notice that the two third displays are displayed.

Here, there may be a case where only two third displays are displayed, there may be a case where three or more third displays are displayed, and only one third display is displayed. It may be done.

In addition, only one of the two third displays may be changed after the display of one of the three third displays is completed, or the other display mode may be changed after the display of one of the three third displays is completed. The display modes other than the display modes of No. may be changed. Further, the display mode of the other of the two third displays may be changed after the display of one of the three third displays is completed, and the other display mode may be changed after the display of one of the three third displays is completed. The display mode of may not change.

Further, the display mode of the other of the two third displays may change only after the display of one of the third displays ends, or even after the display of one of the three third displays ends. The other display mode may change.

Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap with displays other than the ninth display. Good. Also, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display without fail, and the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap with the ninth display. ..

Further, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and displays other than the third display whose display mode has changed may also overlap the ninth display. ..

In addition, "When the three third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays ends in one symbol variable display [for example, in FIG. 401(b) to FIG. As shown, the two in-preparation images RDY are all consumed in the same symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when two third displays are displayed, only one display of all third displays may be ended in one symbol variable display, or when three third displays are displayed. May terminate the display of all the displays other than the third display in the one symbol variable display. In addition, when three third displays are displayed, all third display may be ended in one symbol variation display, or when three third displays are displayed. The display of all the third displays may not end in the one symbol variable display.

In addition, when three third displays are displayed, all third displays may be ended only in one symbol variation display, or when three third displays are displayed. The display of all the third displays may be ended in the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display. Further, only when two third displays are displayed, all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variable display, except when two third displays are displayed. In the case of, the display of all the third displays may be ended in the one symbol variable display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a tenth display [for example, “Panda is master of lord” displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 391(a). Explanation display etc.]
The tenth display is an explanation display,

The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 391(a), the explanation display is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1. Etc.],

The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 391(d), the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. etc],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed. Other information may be displayed. Further, when it is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, or when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. May be

The third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In the above description,

A gaming table provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],

One of the plurality of types of displays is a character related to the first display [change effect display of the display mode of the hold icon (hold change advance effect display), for example, FIG. 391(f) to FIG. ) Character NJ4 etc.]]

One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [a hold icon in a display mode of a prefetch notice, for example, a hold icon in a red display mode shown in FIG. 391(h), and the like],

One of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [preparation display, for example, preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 391(d)],
The first display is a display of a character related to the second display,
The second display is a display of the hold icon in the display mode of the prefetch notice,

The third display is a notice display [a mini game or a timer notice, for example, the mini game display shown in FIGS. 391(o) to (p), and FIGS. 393(b3) to (b4). [Timer advance notice effect, etc.] shown in FIG.

It is configured so that the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started. [After the hold change pre-effect display by the character is started, the hold icon is displayed. Is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice, for example, as shown in FIGS. 391(f) to (h), the first hold icon after the hold change pre-effect display is performed by the ninja character NJ4. The display mode of h11 has changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, etc.],

The third display may be started in the first state, and [the display of the in-preparation display is started in the state where the hold icon is displayed, for example, FIG. 391(d)). , The display of the in-preparation image RDY is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed],

The third display started to be displayed in the first state is configured so that the display may be ended in the second state, and [the display is started while the hold icon is displayed. The in-preparation display ends when the hold icon is not displayed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 391(d) to 391(n), the display starts when the UI unit UI3 is displayed. The preparation-in-progress image RDY has finished being displayed in a state where the UI portion UI3 is not displayed, etc.],

The display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state after the display of the third display is finished in the second state. In the display state, after the display of the in-preparation display is finished, the mini game or the timer notice is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 391(n) to (o), the display of the in-preparation image RDY is displayed. After the end, the display of the mini game is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, or, as shown in FIGS. 393(b1) to (b4), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed. After the display is finished, the timer notice effect is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, etc.],

After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [the relevant notice, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 391(q) or the button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 394(c4)] [When the display result of the mini game becomes a great success or when the countdown is completed by the timer notice, the notice is started, for example, in FIG. 391(o) to FIG. As shown in the figure, when the display result of the mini game becomes a great success, the iron plate image TP is displayed. When the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed as shown in FIGS. 394(c1) to (c4). The button advance notice effect by the big button 136aL is started],
The certain effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed,

The second state may be changed to the second state after the first state. [There is a case where a state where a hold icon can be displayed is changed to a state where the hold icon is not displayed, for example, FIG. 391 As shown in (l) to (m) of the figure, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the displayed UI unit UI3 is hidden and shifts from the state in which the hold icon can be displayed to the state in which it is hidden. Etc.],

The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed [for example, the state in which the UI unit UI3 before transitioning to Swordsman Reach is displayed, etc.],

The second state is one of states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, a state in which the UI unit UI3 is hidden in the swordsman reach, etc.]. ]
I explained.

Although there is room for improvement in the display means of the conventional game table, this game table can realize a game table having a characteristic in the display means.

Also, according to this gaming machine, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance of the notice display, is a notice display other than the hold icon, so that the user can concentrate on the fluctuation. Sometimes it can be entertained.

Also, according to this gaming machine, it is possible for a beginner to entertain and excite by notifying whether the notice is a preliminary notice or a pre-reading notice, and for some experienced users, the preliminary indication is the relevant notice. In some cases, it may be easier to understand if it is displayed, and it is possible to clarify the expectations.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be easier to understand which advance notice will be given depending on the timing of ending the display during preparation.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may be a display of a character related only to the second display, or may be a display of a character related to a display other than the second display. In addition, the first display may be a display of a character that is always related to the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

Further, only the third display may be started in the first state, or displays other than the third display may be started in the first state. Further, the third display may be always started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

In addition, the third display started to be displayed in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display started to be displayed in the first state. However, the display may end in a state other than the second state. In addition, the third display started to be displayed in the first state may always end in the second state, and the third display started to be displayed in the first state is the second display. In some cases, the display may not end in this state.

In addition, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, only a certain notice display may be started in the second state. After the display of the display is finished, the display of the display other than the certain notice display may be started in the second state. Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be always started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state. There may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is not started in the second state after the completion of. Further, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is started in the second state only after the display of the third display is finished in the second state. The display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state other than after the display of the display is finished.

Further, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state. After the display of the display is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started in a state other than the second state.

Further, there may be a case where only a certain effect is started after a certain notice display is displayed, and after the certain notice display is displayed, an effect other than a certain effect is also started. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may be always started after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain notice display is displayed.

Further, a certain effect may be started only after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is not displayed. It may be.

Further, the certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. Further, a certain effect may be a notice that is always related to the symbol change display being executed, or may be a notice that is not related to the symbol change display being executed.

Further, the second state may be set only after the first state, or the second state may be set even after a state other than the first state. Further, the second state may be always set after the first state, or the second state may not be set after the first state.

The first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or one of the states in which displays other than the hold icon can be displayed. .. Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

Further, the second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states in which no display other than the hold icon is displayed. The second state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is not always displayed, or one of the states in which the hold icon may be displayed.

Here, the first display may be a display of the character relating to the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon, or an effect display in the calibration of the character (navi character) that is constantly displayed. ..

In addition, the second display may be a display that changes from the hold icon in the default display mode to the hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode.

The third display may be a character display in preparation, a character display, a notice item display, or a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display. It may be a display in progress.

Further, the certain notice display may be a display during the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, a mini game, or a notice effect.

In addition, "The third state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed,
The fourth state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed,
The third state is a state different from the first state,
The fourth state is a state different from the second state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

In addition, “the third display started to be displayed in the first state may end in the first state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

In addition, “the third display started to be displayed in the first state may end in the third state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

In addition, “the third display started to be displayed in the first state may end in the fourth state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

Further, the first state may be a state including that the symbol variable display (decorative symbol, special symbol) is being executed.

In addition, "a certain effect may be started after the certain notice display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

Note that the certain notice display is not limited to the true notice display, and may be a false notice display in which a certain effect is not started.

Further, when the certain notice display is the mini game, the certain effect may be a display showing the result of the mini game.

In addition, the character is not limited to a person, and may be a mini item display such as a notice item.

In addition, “the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started” is “the second display after the display of the first display is started”. There is a case where the display for starting the display of “is displayed” may be made. Here, the first display may or may not be displayed in another scene. Further, the second display may or may not be displayed in another scene.

Further, "it is configured so that it may be in the second state after the first state", "may be the second state following the first state It is configured as described above.” Further, after the first state, there may be a case where the state shifts to the second state without passing through another state (for example, the fourth state). Further, there may be a case where the first state is followed by another state (for example, the third state or the third state) and then the second state is entered. Further, there may be a case where the first state is changed to the second state in the state where the one symbol variable display is performed.

Further, a certain effect may be faded in while a certain notice display is faded out.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display [display of an image including a hold icon display area, for example, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391(a)],

The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least behind the hold icon,

The hold icon is configured to be displayable while the sixth display is displayed [the hold icon is displayable while the image including the hold icon display area is displayed, for example, The hold icon can be displayed while the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc.],

The hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. [The hold icon is not displayed when the image including the hold icon display area is not displayed, for example, FIG. ), the hold icon is not displayed when the UI unit UI3 is hidden, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make the hold icon stand out.

Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back of only the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back of a display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be a display of an image that is always displayed on the back side of at least the hold icon, or may be a display of an image that is not displayed at least on the back side of the hold icon.

Further, only the hold icon may be configured to be displayable while the sixth display is displayed, or any display other than the hold icon may be configured to be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. May be. In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be always displayed when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. May be configured.

Further, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be configured to be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. May be.

Also, it may be configured such that only the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, and so that displays other than the hold icon are not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. Also, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed without the sixth display being displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed without the sixth display being displayed. May be configured.

Further, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, and the hold icon is not displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. Note that the sixth display may be a display that does not overlap the changing decorative design.

Further, in the configuration in which a part of the sixth display is overlapped with a part of the third display, the display of a part different from the third display is overlapped with the decorative pattern. May be.
Further, the sixth display may include a display of the pedestal of the hold icon.
Further, the sixth display may include a display of the base of the variable icon.
Further, the sixth display may be a display different from the display of the background image.

Further, in the "first state, at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display, and the [hold icon is displayed. In this state, a part of the image including the hold icon display area is displayed so as to overlap the preparation display. For example, as shown in FIG. 391(d), the preparation image RDY is a tutorial in the UI unit UI3. And the like are displayed in an overlapping manner on the display unit TT1],

The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position. [Display of the preparing display in the state where the hold icon is displayed] The position and the display position of the in-preparation display in the non-display state of the hold icon are the same, for example, the display position of the in-preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 391(d) and the in-preparation image shown in FIG. 391(m). The display positions of RDY are the same, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by displaying the third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it is strongly impressed that the third display is not a look-ahead notice due to a change in display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, it may be possible to prevent the user from overlooking by notifying that a notice other than the change in the display mode of the hold icon is being given.

Here, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped only with the display of the third display, and in the first state, It may be configured such that at least a part of the six displays may be displayed in an overlapping manner with the displays other than the third display. Further, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display without fail, and in the first state, the display of the sixth display may be displayed. It may be configured such that at least a part of the display may be overlapped with the third display and may not be displayed.

Further, in the first state, only at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display, and in the first state, the sixth display may be displayed. The display other than at least a part of the display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display.
In addition, "the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,

One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect [default display aspect, for example, a default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 391(a), etc.],

One of the plurality of types of modes is a second mode [a display mode of an advance notice or a pre-reading advance notice, for example, a gold display mode shown in FIG. 391(e)], and the sixth display When the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, than when the first aspect is not changed from the second aspect to the second aspect. The display including the display is configured to be easily started [The image including the hold icon display area is displayed more than when the image including the hold icon display area is not changed from the default display mode to the prefetch notice display mode. When the display mode of the pre-reading notice is changed from the default display mode, the hold icon of the pre-reading notice display mode is more likely to be displayed. For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. If displayed, it is easy to display a red hold icon, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in modes other than the first mode and the second mode. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. Good.

Further, the case where the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode is more than the second case when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. Only the display of the display may be easily started, and the sixth display may be changed from the first mode to the second mode, as compared with the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. When the display is changed to, it may be easier to start the display other than the second display. Further, the case where the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode is more than the second case when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. The display of the display may be always started, and the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, as compared with the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display may not start when the display has changed.

Further, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode, and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode. The display of the second display may be easily started even in the case other than the case where the mode is changed.

In addition, "when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, as compared with the case where the sixth aspect is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Is configured so that the display of the second display is more easily started", "in a certain state, the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode." It is configured such that the display of the second display is more easily started when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when it is not changed. It is also possible.
In addition, "the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,

One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect [default display aspect, for example, a default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 391(a), etc.],

One mode of the plurality of types of modes is the second mode [display mode of advance notice or prefetching advance notice, for example, gold display mode shown in FIG. 391(e)],

The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The big hit symbol is configured to be easily confirmed and displayed in the pattern variation display [Hold icon display than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the prefetch notice display mode When the image including the area is changed from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode, it is more likely to be a big hit, for example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391(e) is displayed in a gold display mode. , The display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, and therefore, the jackpot pattern is likely to be confirmed and displayed in the pattern variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of prefetching, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in modes other than the first mode and the second mode. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. Good.

Further, the case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more variable display than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of only the jackpot symbol may be easily confirmed and displayed, the sixth display may be changed from the first mode to the second mode rather than the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In the case where the mode is changed, symbols other than the big hit symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display. Further, the case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more variable display than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The jackpot symbol may be definitely displayed in the above, and the sixth display may be changed from the first mode to the second mode, as compared with the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. When changing to, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is not confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display.

Further, only when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display, and the sixth display is the first aspect. Even in the case other than the case of changing from the second mode to the second mode, the big hit symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display.

In addition, "when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, as compared with the case where the sixth aspect is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Is configured so that the jackpot symbol can be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display," "in a certain state, the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. When the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display than when it is not changed. It is also possible.

In addition, “at least a part of the image including the hold icon display area is configured so that at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the first display. Overlapping with the character relating to the change effect display of the display mode of the hold icon (hold change advance effect display), for example, as shown in FIG. 391(f), a part of the UI unit UI3 overlaps the ninja character NJ4. Wrapped, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, various information can be obtained by focusing on the sixth display, and the game can be made easy to understand in some cases.

Here, at least a part of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the first display only, or at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed. The display other than the first display may be overlapped and displayed. Further, it may be configured such that at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed by being overlapped with the first display, and at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed. The display may be overlapped with one display and may not be displayed.

Further, only at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the first display, and at least a part of the sixth display other than the display may be displayed. The display may also be configured to be displayed so as to overlap the first display.

Further, it may be configured such that a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping with the first display, or the entire display of the sixth display may be displayed as the first display. It may be configured to be displayed so as to be overlapped.

Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap only with the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display may overlap with a display other than the sixth display. May be configured as follows. Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display without fail, or at least a part of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured as.

Further, only a part of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display, or the entire first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display. ..

In addition, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the first display. In the state in which both the configured image including the hold icon display area and the character related to the change effect display of the hold icon display mode (hold change advance effect display) are displayed, the image including the hold icon display area is displayed. It is not overlapped with the character related to the change effect display of the display mode of the hold icon (hold change advance effect display), for example, as shown in FIG. 406(b1), the UI unit UI3 is overlapped with the ninja character NJ4. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, if the sixth display is focused on, at first glance, the third display seems to be a display related to the change display of the hold icon, but it may be understood that this is not the case.

Here, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping only the first display. Or, when both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed on the display other than the first display without overlapping. May be configured as. Further, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be configured to be displayed without necessarily overlapping the first display, In a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may not be displayed without overlapping the first display.

Further, even when both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, it may be configured such that only the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the first display. It is good to configure so that when both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, displays other than the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping the first display. May be done. In addition, even when both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping the first display. Good, so that the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping the first display even in a state other than the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed. It may be configured.

Further, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the displays other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. .. Further, the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap with each other, or may be configured so that the first display and the sixth display may overlap with each other. ..

In addition, "a certain reach effect [a specific super reach effect, for example, super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 391 (m) to (q)] is configured to be executable,

The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started [a state before a specific super reach effect is started, for example, FIG. 391(m) to FIG. Before the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in Figure (q) is started],

The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed [a state in which a specific super reach effect is being executed, for example, the super reach (swordsman) shown in FIGS. 391(m) to (q). Reach) is being executed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to notice whether or not a certain reach state is reached.

Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than the certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured to always execute a certain reach effect, or may be configured not to execute a certain reach effect.

Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before the execution of the reach effect other than the certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the above states. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is necessarily started, or one of the states in which the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

Further, the second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is being executed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being executed. In addition, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always executed or a state in which a certain reach effect is not executed.

The first state may be a reach state before development into SP reach in a certain fluctuation, and the second state may be a state in which SP reach is being executed in the certain fluctuation.

In addition, the first state is a state before the SP reach in a certain variation, and further is a certain state before the reach state is reached, and the second state is an SP in the certain variation. It may be in a state where the reach is being executed.
That is, the first state and the second state may be one set.

Further, "the certain notice display is a timer notice display [for example, display of timer notice effect shown in FIG. 394(b3) to FIG. 394(b5)]."
A gaming table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

The timer advance notice display may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

Further, when there are a plurality of types of timer notice display, it may be a certain type of timer notice display.

In addition, “the certain notice display is a display of a mini game [for example, a display of the mini game shown in FIGS. 391(o) to (q)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The mini game may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

Further, when there are a plurality of types of mini games, it may be a certain type of mini game.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [one of the notices, for example, display of button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 394(b6)],

It is configured such that the fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured such that only a fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect. May be. Further, the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect without fail, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 391(q)],

It is configured such that the fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured such that only a fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. May be. Further, the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect without fail, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

Note that the fourth display and the fifth display may be different displays. Here, when the fifth display is displayed than when the fourth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be easier to be confirmed and displayed, or more than when the fifth display is displayed. When the fourth display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed.

Further, in the case where the fifth display is a display that appears only under special conditions, the case where at least one of the third display mode and a certain notice display mode is displayed only in a certain mode There may be. In addition, “the third display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display may be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variable display is started. [The in-preparation display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display is continuously displayed even after the next symbol variable display is started, for example, as shown in FIGS. 391(i) to (j). , The in-preparation image RDY is displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to give a sense of expectation over a plurality of fluctuations by the third display, and the goal is easy to understand, so the period of giving a sense of expectation may be clear.

Here, the third display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display may be continuously displayed only after the symbol variable display to be started next is started, or The third display started to be displayed in the symbol variable display may be continuously displayed other than after the next symbol variable display is started. Further, the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may always be continuously displayed after the next symbol variation display is started, or in a certain symbol variation display. The third display, which is started to be displayed, may not be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started.

In addition, "the first display that is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display is configured so that it may be erased before the next symbol variation display is started [a certain symbol The character related to the change effect display (hold change change advance effect display) of the display mode of the hold icon whose display is started in the variable display is erased before the next symbol variable display is started, for example, FIG. 391 (f )-(H) of the figure, the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display may be configured to be deleted only before the symbol variable display to be started next is started, The first display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display may be configured to be erased in some cases other than before the next symbol variable display is started. Further, the first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be configured to be surely deleted before the next symbol variation display is started, or a certain symbol variation display. In the display, the first display started to be displayed may not be erased before the next symbol variation display is started.

Note that a certain notice display and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the symbol variable display. Further, a certain notice display and a certain presentation may be performed across the first state to the second state (the second state to the first state), or may not be performed.

In addition, "in the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect is configured to be executed [in the area where the display during preparation is displayed, the notice is executed, For example, as shown in FIG. 397 (a4), there may be a case where a notice display composed of the characters "intense heat" is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 in which the image RDY being prepared is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where only a certain effect is executed in the area where the third display is displayed, and an effect other than a certain effect is also executed in the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases where Further, a certain effect may be necessarily executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

Further, there may be a case where a certain effect is executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, and a certain effect is also executed in an area other than the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases where

In addition, "operating means [buttons and levers, for example, effect button 136, etc.] operable by the player are provided,

One of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display [display of an image of a button or lever, for example, a large button image 136aL shown in FIG. 394(b6)],
The seventh display is a display that prompts the user to operate the operation means,

The seventh display is a display that is displayed after the third display is started [the display of the image of the button or lever is started after the preparation display is started, For example, as shown in FIG. 394(b1) to FIG. 394(b6), the deca button image 136aL has been started to be displayed after the in-preparation image RDY is started to be displayed],

When the operating means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started [when the button (or lever) is operated during the display of the image of the button or lever, the notice is given. When the production button 136 is started, for example, the iron plate image TP is displayed when the production button 136 is operated while the large button image 136aL shown in FIG. 394(b6) is displayed],

The third display is a display that is terminated before the display of the seventh display is started [The display during preparation is terminated before the image of the button or lever is displayed, For example, as shown in FIG. 394(b1) to FIG. 394(b6), the preparation-in-progress image RDY is displayed before the deca button image 136aL is displayed.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the operation means may be operable only by the player or may be operable by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may be one that is not operated by the player.

Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operating means, or may prompt other than operations of the operating means. Further, the seventh display may be a message that always prompts the user to operate the operating device, or may not prompt the user to operate the operating device.

Further, the seventh display may be a display which is started only after the third display is started, or is a display which is started even after the third display is started. It may be. Further, the seventh display may be that the display is always started after the third display is started, or the display is not started after the third display is started. Good.

Further, when the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect may be started without fail, and when the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is not started. There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may be started when the operation means is operated only while the seventh display is being displayed, and a certain effect may be generated when the operation means is operated while the seventh display is not being displayed. It may be started. Further, a certain effect may be started when the operation means is operated during the display of only the seventh display, and a certain effect may be generated when the operation means is operated while a display other than the seventh display is also displayed. May be started. In addition, the third display may be displayed only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display may be ended other than before the display of the seventh display is started. It may be one that does. In addition, the third display may be the one that is always finished before the display of the seventh display is started, or when the display is not finished before the display of the seventh display is started. There may be

The seventh display may be a big button image of the normal button image and the big button image. Here, in the case where the normal button image is displayed and the case where the big button image is displayed, the big hit symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed when the big button image is displayed.

Further, the seventh display may be a special color button image of the normal color of the button image and the special color of the button image. Here, in the case where the button image of the normal color and the case where the button image of the special color is displayed, the case where the button image of the special color is displayed is easier to confirm and display the jackpot pattern. Good.

Further, the seventh display may be an image of another operation means of the images of the operation means (second button, lever, etc.) different from the normal button image and the button. Here, when the normal button image is displayed and when the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed, the jackpot pattern is better when the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed. The confirmation display may be easy.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is an eighth display [for example, a united animation or the like shown in FIG. 394(b4) to FIG. 394(b5)],

The eighth display is a display for announcing that the display of the seventh display will be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 394 (b4) to (b6), a button advance notice effect is produced by a united animation. ], that is, the display of the big button image 136aL is foretold],
The third display is a display that is terminated during the display of the eighth display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the eighth display may give a notice only that the display of the seventh display is started, or may give a notice other than that the display of the seventh display is started. May be The eighth display may be a notification that the display of the seventh display is started, or may not be a notification that the display of the seventh display is started. It may be.

Further, the third display may be finished only during the display of the eighth display, or may be finished during the display of a display other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of displays is a ninth display [for example, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 401(a)],
The ninth display is a variable icon display,

The third display may be displayed two times. [Two preparation-in-progress displays may be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 404(a), two preparation-in-progress images RDY1 and RDY2 are displayed. Etc.],

After the display of one of the two third displays is completed, the display mode of the other is changed to [Preparation of one of the two preparing displays is completed and then the other preparing display is completed. The display mode of the display changes, for example, as shown in FIG. 401(g), the preparing image RDY is enlarged and displayed, etc.],

The third display in which the display mode is changed overlaps with the ninth display [The in-preparation display in which the display mode is changed overlaps with the variable icon, for example, as shown in FIG. The displayed in-preparation image RDY overlaps the variation icon h0, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to notice that the two third displays are displayed.

Here, there may be a case where only two third displays are displayed, there may be a case where three or more third displays are displayed, and only one third display is displayed. It may be done.

In addition, only one of the two third displays may be changed after the display of one of the three third displays is completed, or the other display mode may be changed after the display of one of the three third displays is completed. The display modes other than the display modes of No. may be changed. Further, the display mode of the other of the two third displays may be changed after the display of one of the three third displays is completed, and the other display mode may be changed after the display of one of the three third displays is completed. The display mode of may not change.

Further, the display mode of the other of the two third displays may change only after the display of one of the third displays ends, or even after the display of one of the three third displays ends. The other display mode may change.

Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap with displays other than the ninth display. Good. Also, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display without fail, and the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap with the ninth display. ..

Further, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and displays other than the third display whose display mode has changed may also overlap the ninth display. ..

In addition, "when two of the third displays are displayed, it is configured such that all the displays of the third display are terminated in one symbol variation display [Two in-progress displays are displayed. In this case, all of them are consumed in the same symbol variation display. For example, as shown in FIGS. 401(b) to 401(k), the two preparation images RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when two third displays are displayed, only one display of all third displays may be ended in one symbol variable display, or when three third displays are displayed. May terminate the display of all the displays other than the third display in the one symbol variable display. In addition, when three third displays are displayed, all third display may be ended in one symbol variation display, or when three third displays are displayed. The display of all the third displays may not end in the one symbol variable display. In addition, when three third displays are displayed, all third displays may be ended only in one symbol variation display, or when three third displays are displayed. The display of all the third displays may be ended in the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display. Further, only when two third displays are displayed, all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variable display, except when two third displays are displayed. In the case of, the display of all the third displays may be ended in the one symbol variable display.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of displays is a tenth display [explanatory display, for example, “Panda is master of lord” displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 391(a). Displayed explanations, etc.]
The tenth display is an explanation display,

The tenth display is a display that is displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed [the explanation display is displayed in a specific display area when displayed, for example, , The explanation display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 as shown in FIG. 391(a)],

The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area. [The in-preparation display is displayed in a specific display area in which the explanation display is displayed, for example, FIG. ), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 where the explanation display is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed. Other information may be displayed. Further, when it is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, or when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. May be

Further, the third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Good. The third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

Further, "a display indicating that the display of a certain notice display is waiting to start" means "a character display in preparation [for example, "in preparation" in the preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 391(d). Character display, etc.”,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "one display of the plurality of types of display is an eleventh display [ball-out display, for example, ball-out error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 422(a1)],

The eleventh display is a display that prompts the player to eject the game ball [for example, in the ball removal error display ERR1, a character display "Please remove the ball" prompts the player to remove the ball, etc.],

In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap with the eleventh display. Configured [In a state in which both the in-preparation display and the ball-out display are displayed, at least a part of the in-preparation display overlaps the ball-out display, for example, as shown in FIG. 422(a2). In addition, the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.], and the gaming table. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the eleventh display may be a display urging only to eject the game ball, or may be a display urging to do something other than ejecting the game ball. In addition, the eleventh display may be a display that always prompts the player to eject the game ball, or may be a display that may not prompt the player to eject the game ball.

The eleventh display may be a display prompting to eject only the game ball or a display prompting to eject other than the game ball.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped and displayed only on the eleventh display. May be displayed, or in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped and displayed in addition to the display of the eleventh display. It may be configured to be performed. Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is always overlapped with the eleventh display. May be displayed, or when both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least part of the third display is displayed without overlapping with the eleventh display. It may be configured in some cases.

Further, in a state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, displays other than at least a part of the third display are overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Also, only in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be displayed, or in a state other than the state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least part of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed as.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the third display is configured to be overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured such that when both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the entire display of the third display overlaps the eleventh display. May be.

Further, in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is displayed so as to overlap with the eleventh display. In the state where both the mini game and the timer notice and the ball-out display are displayed, at least a part of the mini game and the timer notice overlaps the ball-out display, for example, 422 (b1), the remaining time display meter MT4 is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is displayed so as to be overlapped only with the eleventh display. It may be configured, and in the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display overlaps with the display other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is always overlapped with the eleventh display. May be displayed, or in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is displayed without overlapping with the eleventh display. It may be configured in some cases.

Further, in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is overlapped and displayed on the eleventh display. Alternatively, in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display and displayed. Even if both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display overlaps the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed as.

Further, in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed so as to overlap with the eleventh display. Or, in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, the whole display of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed so as to overlap with the eleventh display. May be.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [ball game machine, for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "the gaming table is a slot machine [revolving type gaming machine],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Although the hold icon may be used in a display indicating that the start of a certain effect is held on the slot machine, this game table can realize this.
Also, in the above description,
"Demonstration means capable of executing a timer effect [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],

Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
A gaming table equipped with

The timer effect is configured such that an effect (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain effect”) is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. If, for example, as shown in FIGS. 447(9) to (13) in FIG. 447, the timer display becomes “00:00” after the first timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed, the pseudo continuous production is performed. Etc.],

One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [for example, a hold icon in the display mode of the bomb shown in FIG. 447(3)],
The second hold icon is a look-ahead notice hold icon,

The second hold icon is a hold icon indicating that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display [for example, in FIG. 447(3) to FIG. 9(9). As shown, the hold icon in the display mode of the bomb suggests that the timer advance notice effect will be started in the next symbol variation display],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, the contents of the effect (that the timer effect is performed) may be known by the hold icon.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. In addition, the production means may always execute the timer production, or may not execute the timer production.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of hold icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of hold icons. Further, the display means may display a plurality of types of holding icons without fail, or may not display a plurality of types of holding icons.

Further, the timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. However, when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, an effect other than a certain effect may be started in some cases. Further, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is always started when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured such that a certain effect may not be started when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the display is started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time only after the display of the timer display is started. However, it may be configured such that a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time other than after the display of the timer display is started.

The timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect may be started only when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. However, it may be configured such that a certain effect may be started even when the timer display has reached a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

Further, the second hold icon may only indicate that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the timer during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may also indicate something other than that the presentation may be started. Further, the second hold icon may always indicate that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the timer during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. There may be a case where it does not suggest that the production may be started.

Hereinafter, the term “at least suggest” includes not only the suggestion but also the notice.

Further, the second hold icon may always start the timer effect when displayed, for example, the timer effect may not be started even if the second hold icon is displayed, For example, there may be a case where a fake second hold icon in which the timer effect is not started is displayed, or a big hit occurs after the second hold icon is displayed and before the timer effect is started. There may be a case where the timer effect is not performed after the jackpot game has been finished and the default display mode is the hold icon.

In addition, “the second hold icon is a hold icon that suggests the content of the certain effect [for example, the hold icon in the display mode of the bomb is a certain effect as shown in FIG. 449(8). It suggests that there is a possibility that a pseudo-representation will be performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, there are cases where it is possible to make the effect contents executed in the symbol variable display that is the subject of the prefetching notice interesting.

Here, the second hold icon may be capable of suggesting only the content of a certain effect, or may be capable of suggesting something other than the content of a certain effect. Further, the second hold icon may always indicate the content of a certain effect, or may not indicate the content of a certain effect.

In addition, "the second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a display mode in which three bombs are shown as one lump shown in FIG. 452(3)]. ,

The second display mode is a display mode that suggests that the timer effect is started a plurality of times during execution of the certain symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 452(3) to 453(23). As shown in FIG. 3, the hold icon in the display mode in which three bombs are a lump suggests that the timer advance notice effect will be started three times in the next symbol fluctuation display],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the timer effect is performed a plurality of times by displaying one holding icon.

Here, the second hold icon may be displayed only in the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. May be. The second hold icon may be always displayed in the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

Further, the second display mode may only suggest that the timer effect is started a plurality of times during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality of times during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may also indicate something other than the start of the one-time timer effect. Further, the second display mode may necessarily indicate that the timer effect is started a plurality of times during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality of times during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. There may be a case where it is not suggested that the timer production of the times is started.

Further, the second display mode may suggest that only a plurality of timer effects are started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality of timer effects may be indicated during execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may indicate that an effect other than the one-time timer effect is also started.

Further, the second display mode may suggest that the timer effect is started a plurality of times only during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or other than during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. Also, it may indicate that the timer effect is started a plurality of times.

In addition, “the second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a display mode including one bomb shown in FIG. 447(3)],

The first display mode is a display mode that suggests that the timer effect is started at least once until the certain symbol variation display is ended [for example, FIG. 447(3)- As shown in (9) of the same figure, the hold icon in the display mode consisting of one bomb suggests that one timer advance notice effect will be started in the next symbol fluctuation display],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to expect the number of timer effects by the hold icon.

Here, the second hold icon may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. May be. The second hold icon may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the first display mode may suggest that only one timer effect is started until a certain symbol variable display is finished, or a certain symbol variable display is displayed. It may also indicate something other than the fact that the timer effect is started once before it is ended. Further, the first display mode may necessarily indicate that one timer effect is started until a certain symbol variable display is ended, or a certain symbol variable display is displayed. There may be a case where it is not suggested that one timer effect is started before it is ended.

Further, the first display mode may suggest that only one timer effect is started until a certain symbol variable display is finished, or a certain symbol variable display is displayed. It may indicate that an effect other than the one timer effect is started before the end.

It should be noted that the second display mode may be configured such that the number of times the timer effect is executed is greater than that in the first display mode.

Further, as the display of the second hold icon, there are a plurality of display patterns (for example, pattern 1, pattern 2, etc.) suggesting one timer effect, and the jackpot pattern is definitely displayed in pattern 2 rather than pattern 1. It may be configured to be easy. Here, the pattern may be a color pattern, a size pattern, a shape pattern, or the like.

Further, even in the first display mode, the timer effect may be started a plurality of times.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of holding icons is a third holding icon [for example, a holding icon in the display mode of Yoshimune holding shown in FIG. 457(3)],
The third hold icon is a look-ahead notice hold icon,
The second hold icon and the third hold icon are different hold icons,

The third hold icon is a hold icon on which a certain character [for example, a lord's character or the like] is displayed,

The third hold icon is a hold icon that does not include a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started during execution of the certain symbol variation display [for example, shown in FIG. 457(3). As described above, the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold is a pre-reading notice of the big hit (super reach), and does not suggest that the timer notice production is started, etc.],

The second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 458(3), etc.],

The third display mode is a display mode that suggests that the timer effect is started during execution of the certain symbol variation display including the certain character [for example, FIG. 458(3) to FIG. As shown in FIG. (9), the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, which is configured to include the lord's character, suggests that the timer advance notice effect will be started in the next symbol fluctuation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to give an expectation of the reliability of the prefetching notice.

Here, the third hold icon may be one in which only a certain character is displayed, or one in which a character other than a certain character is displayed. Further, the third hold icon may be one in which a certain character is always displayed, or one in which a certain character may not be displayed.

Further, the third hold icon may not include only a display indicating that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a certain symbol variation display. It may not include any display other than the display suggesting that the timer effect may be started during execution. Further, the third hold icon may not necessarily include a display that suggests that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may not include a certain symbol variation display. It may include a display indicating that the timer effect may be started during execution.

Further, the third hold icon may not include a display indicating that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variable display, or a certain symbol variable display It may not include a display that indicates other than that the timer effect may be started during execution.

Further, the third hold icon may not include a display indicating that the timer effect may be started only while a certain symbol variable display is being executed, or a certain symbol variable display It may not include a display indicating that the timer effect may be started other than during execution.

Further, the second hold icon may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. Good. The second hold icon may be always displayed in the third display mode or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

Further, the third display mode may indicate that the timer effect is started only while the certain character variable display including the certain character is being executed, or may include the certain character. It may also suggest something other than that the timer effect is started during execution of the symbol variable display. Further, the third display mode may necessarily indicate that the timer effect is started during execution of a certain symbol variation display including a certain character, or may include a certain character. There may be a case where it is not suggested that the timer effect is started during the execution of the symbol variable display. Further, the third display mode may suggest that only the timer effect is started during execution of a certain symbol variation display including a certain character, or including a certain character. It may be suggested that an effect other than the timer effect is started during the execution of the symbol variable display.

Further, the third display mode may suggest that the timer effect is started only during execution of a certain symbol variable display including a certain character, or may include a certain character. It is also possible to suggest that the timer effect is started other than during execution of the symbol variable display.

Note that the timer effect may be started in the symbol variable display before the certain symbol variable display is started. For example, the timer effect in which the second hold icon suggests execution may be performed in another symbol variation display before a certain symbol variation display. According to this, there may be a case where the player can pay attention to the game while expecting that the timer effects are collectively performed in the one-time symbol variable display.

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute the notification regarding the certain effect performed by the timer effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 452 (16), the replay icon RPL indicates that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed. , Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the player can grasp the type of a certain effect, and thereafter, it may be possible to see the timer effect while imagining the content of the certain effect.

Here, it may be configured to be able to execute only the notification regarding a certain effect performed by the timer effect, or configured to be able to execute a notification other than the notification regarding a certain effect performed by the timer effect. It may be Further, it may be configured to always execute the notification regarding a certain effect performed by the timer effect, or may be configured such that the notification regarding a certain effect performed by the timer effect may not be executed. It may be one that has been created.

In addition, “the display means is a means capable of displaying a variable icon [for example, a variable icon h0],

The second hold icon that has been displayed as a hold icon may be displayed as a change icon (hereinafter, referred to as “first change icon”) in association with the start of the certain symbol change display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 452(7) to FIG. 452(8), the first hold icon h11 in the display mode in which three bombs are collected into one block is displayed as the next symbol variable display. When started, it is displayed as a variable icon h0 having the same display form, etc.],

A display in which the display mode of the first variable icon changes in association with the execution of the timer effect once during execution of the certain symbol variable display (hereinafter, "first display [eg, figure 452 (9) to (16) in the same figure, a change icon h0 that changes from a display mode in which three bombs are in one block to a display mode in which two bombs are in one block]". Is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 452(8) to (16), when one timer advance notice effect is executed, a display mode in which three bombs are lumped together is displayed. Change icon h0 changes to a display mode in which two bombs are bundled together, etc.],

The first variation icon after the display mode is changed by the first display is a variation icon capable of suggesting the remaining number of times of the timer effect that can be started during execution of the certain symbol variation display [eg, As shown in FIG. 452(16), the change icon h0 that has changed into a display mode in which two bombs are in a lump suggests that the timer advance notice effect will be executed twice more, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the variable icon may be able to function as a notification means of the number of times of the timer effect.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the variable icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable icon. Further, the display means may always display the variable icon or may not display the variable icon.

Further, the second hold icon displayed as the hold icon may be configured to be displayed only as the first variable icon, or the second hold icon displayed as the hold icon may be displayed. The icon may be configured to start being displayed as something other than the first variable icon. In addition, the second hold icon that was displayed as the hold icon may be configured to always start to be displayed as the first variable icon, or the second hold icon that was displayed as the hold icon, The display may not be started as the first variable icon in some cases.

Further, only the second hold icon that was displayed as the hold icon may be configured to be displayed as the first variable icon in some cases, or the second hold icon that is displayed as the hold icon. Other than the icon, the display may be started as the first variable icon in some cases.

Further, it may be configured such that only the first display is displayed in association with one timer effect being executed during execution of a certain symbol variable display, or execution of a certain symbol variable display. The display other than the first display may be displayed in association with the execution of the timer effect once. Further, the first display may be always displayed in association with the execution of the timer effect once during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured such that the first display may not be displayed in association with the execution of the timer effect once.

Further, the first display may be displayed only in association with the execution of the timer effect once during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the execution of a certain symbol variation display. The first display may be configured to be displayed in relation to the fact that the timer effect is executed once.

Further, the first variation icon after the display mode is changed by the first display may be capable of suggesting only the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display. The number other than the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display may be suggested. Further, the first variation icon after the display mode is changed by the first display may necessarily indicate the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, The remaining number of timer effects that can be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display may not be suggested.

In addition, “the second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a mode that can suggest the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started [eg, FIG. 462 (6). A timer display is displayed above the hold icon in the display mode of the bomb shown in [1], etc.]. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to imagine the content of a certain effect executed by suggesting the display of the initial value of the time on the timer display.

Here, the second hold icon may be displayed only in a mode in which the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started may be suggested, or the display of the timer display may be displayed. It may be displayed in a mode other than the mode in which the time displayed at the start can be suggested. In addition, the second hold icon may be always displayed in a mode in which the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started can be suggested, or when the display of the timer display is started. The time displayed in may not be displayed in a manner that can be suggested.

Further, the second hold icon may be displayed in such a manner that only the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started may be displayed, or the display of the timer display is started. The time other than the time displayed at the time of being displayed may be displayed in a mode that can be suggested.

In addition, "a plurality of the timer effects (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of timer effects") may be simultaneously started during the execution of the certain symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 460 (17). Two timer notice effects are started at the same time],

One of the plurality of timer effects is a first timer effect [for example, a timer notification effect related to the second timer notification display TM12 shown in FIG. 460(17)],

One of the plurality of timer effects is a second timer effect [for example, a timer notification effect related to the third timer notification display TM13 shown in FIG. 460(17)],

Displayed when display of the timer display in the first timer effect (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer display [e.g., second timer advance notice display TM12 or the like shown in FIG. 460(17)]") is started. The time [for example, 7 seconds (“07:00”) or the like] and the timer display in the second timer effect (hereinafter, “second timer display [eg, the third shown in FIG. 460 (17)] "Timer notice display TM13 etc.]") is displayed when the display is started [for example, 8 seconds ("08:00") etc.] are different times,

When the first timer display reaches the certain time, a first effect [for example, a pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 461(19)] may be performed as the certain effect.

When a second effect [for example, a change effect in the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 461(21)] is performed as the certain effect when the second timer display reaches the certain time There is
The first effect and the second effect are different effects,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to expect that a plurality of certain effects (announcements) will be performed by combining timer effects.

Here, there may be a case where a plurality of timer effects are simultaneously started only during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and a plurality of timer effects are simultaneously started other than during execution of a certain symbol variation display. There may be cases. Further, a plurality of timer effects may always be started simultaneously during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality of timer effects may not be simultaneously started during execution of a symbol variation display.

Further, there may be a case where only a plurality of timer effects are simultaneously started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and effects other than the plurality of timer effects are simultaneously started during execution of a certain symbol variation display. There may be cases.

In addition, the start timing of a plurality of timer effects may be shifted, and at least a part of the execution period of each timer effect may overlap.

Further, the time displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may be always different times, It may be the same time.

Further, when the first timer display reaches a certain time, only the first effect may be performed as a certain effect, or when the first timer display reaches a certain time. There may be a case where an effect other than the first effect is performed as a certain effect. In addition, when the first timer display reaches a certain time, the first effect may be necessarily performed as a certain effect, and when the first timer display reaches a certain time, a certain effect may be performed. There may be a case where the first effect is not performed.

In addition, the first effect may be performed as a certain effect only when the first timer display reaches a certain time, or except when the first timer display reaches a certain time. However, there may be a case where the first effect is performed as a certain effect.

Further, when the second timer display reaches a certain time, only the second effect may be performed as a certain effect, or when the second timer display reaches a certain time. There may be a case where an effect other than the second effect is performed as a certain effect. In addition, when the second timer display reaches a certain time, the second effect may be necessarily performed as a certain effect, and when the second timer display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is performed. As a case, the second effect may not be performed.

In addition, the second effect may be performed as a certain effect only when the second timer display reaches a certain time, or except when the second timer display reaches a certain time. Also, there may be a case where the second effect is performed as a certain effect.

Further, the first effect and the second effect may be different from each other or may be the same.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a ball removal error display [for example, a ball removal error display etc. shown in FIG. 445 (9")],

The ball removal error display is a display that may be displayed in a plate full tank error state [for example, as shown in FIG. 445 (9″), when a lower plate full tank error occurs, the ball removal error is displayed. Display is displayed, etc.],

One of the timer display and the ball removal error display may be overlapped with the other display [for example, as shown in FIG. 445(9″), The error display overlaps the front side of the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to expedite the ball removal operation by the timer display. Here, the display means may display only the ball-out error display, or may display a display other than the ball-out error display. Further, the display means may always display the ball-out error display, or may display the ball-out error display in some cases.

Further, the ball-out error display may be displayed only in the plate full tank error state, or may be displayed in a state other than the plate full tank error state. Further, the ball-out error display may be always displayed in the dish full tank error state, or may not be displayed in the dish full tank error state.

Further, one of the timer display and the ball-out error display may be configured to be overlapped with the other display only, or one of the timer display and the ball-out error display may be displayed. May be overlapped with a display other than the other display. In addition, one of the timer display and the ball-out error display may be configured to overlap the other display, and one of the timer display and the ball-out error display may be configured to overlap with the other display. It may be configured so that the display may not overlap.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,

"A gaming table provided with a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of timer productions [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like],

One of the plurality of types of timer effects is a first timer effect [for example, a timer notification effect related to the first timer notification display TM11 shown in FIGS. 425(3) to 425(12)]. ,

One of the plurality of types of timer effects is a second timer effect [for example, a timer notification effect related to the second timer notification display TM12 shown in FIGS. 425(5) to 425(7)]. ,

In the first timer effect, after the display of the first timer display [for example, the first timer advance notice display TM11 shown in FIG. 425(3)] is started, the first timer display is the first timer display. The first effect [for example, the pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 425(13)] may be started in response to the display of time [for example, “00:00” or the like]. It is a composed performance,

In the second timer effect, after the display of the second timer display [for example, the second timer notice display TM12 or the like shown in FIG. 425(5)] is started, the second timer display becomes the second timer display. In response to the display of time [eg, "00:00" or the like], a second effect [eg, effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 425(8)] is started. It is a performance that is configured to be

During display of a certain decorative symbol variable display, the period in which the first timer display is displayed [for example, the period shown in FIG. 425(3) to (12), etc.] and the second timer display are A period (hereinafter, referred to as “first period [for example, FIGS. 425(5) to (7) in FIG. 425(5) to FIG. 425(7)] in which FIG. , Etc.]”) may occur.
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the rendering means, but according to this gaming table, it is possible to provide a gaming table having a feature in the rendering means.

Further, according to this gaming table, there are cases where the effect of a certain decorative symbol variable display can be excited by the timer effects being overlapped.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of timer effects, or may be capable of executing effects other than the plurality of types of timer effects. In addition, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of timer productions, or may not execute a plurality of types of timer productions.

Further, in the first timer effect, only the first effect may be started when the first timer display reaches the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured as there is, or after the display of the first timer display is started, the first timer display becomes the first time The effect may be configured to be started in some cases. Also, the first timer effect, the first effect is always started in response to the first timer display has reached the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured, or the first effect may not be started when the first timer display reaches the first time after the first timer display is started. It may be configured as is.

Further, in the first timer effect, the first effect may be started only when the first timer display reaches the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. The first timer display may be configured to have a certain configuration, or the first timer display may be the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. The effect may be started in some cases.

Further, in the first timer effect, the first effect may be started in response to the first timer display reaching the first time only after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured as there is, or even after the display of the first timer display is not started, the first effect is produced in response to the first timer display reaching the first time. It may be configured to be started in some cases.

Further, in the second timer effect, only the second effect may be started when the second timer display reaches the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured as there is, or after the second timer display is started after the display of the second timer display is started, other than the second effect The effect may be configured to be started in some cases. Also, the second timer effect, the second effect is always started in response to the second timer display has reached the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured, or the second effect may not be started in response to the second timer display becoming the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured as is.

Further, in the second timer effect, the second effect may be started only when the second timer display reaches the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. The second timer display may be configured to have the second timer display after the second timer display is started to display the second time. The effect may be started in some cases.

Further, in the second timer effect, the second effect may be started in response to the second timer display reaching the second time only after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured as there is, or even after the display of the second timer display is not started, the second effect is displayed in response to the second timer display reaching the second time. It may be configured to be started in some cases.

Further, during the display of a certain decorative pattern variable display, it may be configured such that only the first period may occur, or during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display, a period other than the first period. May also occur. Further, the first period may be configured to always occur during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display, or the first period may not occur during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display. May be configured as follows.

Further, the first period may be configured to occur only during the display of a certain decorative pattern variable display, or the first period may be set other than during the display of a certain decorative pattern variable display. It may be configured to occur in some cases.

In addition, "at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that is being executed in the first period is configured to be executed as a prefetch notice [ For example, as shown in FIGS. 425(5) to 425(8), the second timer notice display TM12 is selected from the timer notice effects for the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice effect for the second timer notice display TM12. Timer advance notice effect according to the above is an effect executed as a pre-reading notice that changes the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the pre-reading notice],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, there is a case where the effect of a certain decorative symbol variable display can be excited by using the timer effect as a pre-reading notice.

Here, it may be configured such that at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that is being executed in the first period may be executed only as a pre-reading notice. However, it is configured such that at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that is being executed in the first period may be executed as something other than the prefetch notice. Good. In addition, at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that is being executed in the first period may be configured to be executed without fail as a prefetch notice. The timer effect of at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that is being executed during the period may be configured not to be executed as a prefetching notice.

Further, it may be configured such that only the timer effect of at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that is being executed in the first period may be executed as the prefetching notice. , The effect other than the timer effect of at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as the prefetching notice. ..

Further, it may be configured such that one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that is being executed in the first period may be executed as a prefetching notice. Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed during the period may be configured to be executed as a pre-reading notice.

In addition, "one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that is being executed in the first period is executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other is executed as a look-ahead notice. In some cases, for example, as shown in FIGS. 425(3) to (13) in FIG. The timer notice effect on the 1-timer notice display TM11 is an effect for executing the pseudo continuous effect that is a notice of the symbol variation display, and the timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12 is the display mode of the hold icon. Is a production for executing the change production of

Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period may be executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variable display [for example, FIG. )- As shown in FIG. 427 (37), among the timer notice effects for the third timer notice display TM13 and the timer notice effects for the fourth timer notice display TM14, the timer notice effect for the third timer notice display TM13 is , The effect for executing the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as the notice effect, and the timer notice effect on the fourth timer notice display TM14 is the effect for executing the notice of the Sabohani group as the notice effect, etc. ],

There is a case where both of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period are executed as a prefetching notice (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”) [eg, As shown in FIGS. 428(3) to (13), the first timer notice display TM11 is selected from among the timer notice productions for the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice productions for the second timer notice display TM12. The timer advance notice effect is an effect for executing the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, the timer advance effect for the second timer notice display TM12 is an effect executed for starting the prefetch mode, and the like. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to expect that the effect that is started later is targeted for the same decorative symbol variable display as the object of the effect that is started first.

Here, when one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period is executed only as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other is executed only as a prefetch notice. There may be, and one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period is also executed as something other than a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variable display, and the other is prefetched. It may be executed as something other than a notice. In addition, one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period may be executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other may be executed as a look-ahead notice. However, there is a case where one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that is being executed in the first period is not executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other is not executed as a prefetch notice. Good.

Further, there may be a case where both the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period are executed only as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variable display, There may be a case where both the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed during the period are executed as something other than a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variable display. In addition, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period may be executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, or are being executed in the first period. Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect may not be executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variable display.

Further, there may be a case where both the first timer effect and the second timer effect which are being executed in the first period are executed only as a look-ahead notice, and the first timer effect which is being executed in the first period is the first timer effect. Both the one timer effect and the second timer effect may be executed as something other than the pre-reading notice. Further, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period may be necessarily executed as a prefetch notice, or the first timer effect that is being executed in the first period. There is a case in which both of the second timer effect and the second timer effect are not executed as the prefetching notice.

Further, in the first case, the first effect [eg, the prefetch mode shown in FIG. 428(6)] may be started during the display of the certain decorative symbol variable display. Has been done,

In the first case, a decorative pattern that is started after the certain decorative pattern variation display [for example, a decorative pattern variation display executed in the period shown in (428) to (10) of FIG. 428] The variable display (hereinafter, referred to as "first decorative pattern variable display [for example, decorative pattern variable display executed in the period shown in Fig. 428 (11) to (18) in Fig. 428]") is displayed. The second effect [for example, change effect of display mode of hold icon shown in FIG. 428(13)] is configured to be started in some cases,

In the first case, the first timer effect [e.g., timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12 shown in FIG. 428(3) to FIG. 428(3)] and the second timer effect[ For example, the timer notice effect or the like relating to the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIGS. 428(3) to (13)] is the same decorative symbol variation display that is started after the first decorative symbol variation display. For example, the effect is executed as a pre-reading notice for the decorative pattern variation display executed in the period shown in FIG. 429 (19) to (29).
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to expect a certain decorative symbol variable display as a look-ahead notice while raising a certain decorative symbol variable display by a timer effect.

Here, in the first case, it may be configured such that only the first effect may be started during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display, and in the first case, a certain decorative symbol. The effect other than the first effect may be started during the display of the variable display. Further, in the first case, the first effect may be configured to start without fail during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display, and in the first case, a certain decorative symbol variable display is displayed. It may be configured such that the first effect may not be started.

Further, in the first case, the first effect may be started only during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display, and in the first case, a certain decorative symbol fluctuation The first effect may be started other than during the display of the display. Further, only in the first case, the first effect may be started during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display, or in the cases other than the first case, or The first effect may be started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display.

Further, in the first case, it may be configured such that only the second effect may be started during the display of the first decorative symbol variable display, and in the first case, the first decoration It may be configured such that an effect other than the second effect may be started during the display of the symbol variable display. Further, in the first case, the second effect may be configured to be started without fail during the display of the first decorative symbol variable display, and in the first case, the first decorative symbol variable display. The second effect may not be started during the display of.

In the first case, the second effect may be started only while the first decorative symbol variable display is being displayed, or in the first case, the first decoration The second effect may be started other than during the display of the variable display of symbols. Further, only in the first case, it may be configured such that the second effect may be started during the display of the first decorative symbol variable display, or in cases other than the first case, The second effect may be started during the display of the first decorative symbol variable display.

Further, in the first case, the first timer effect and the second timer effect are executed only as a look-ahead notice for the same decorative symbol variable display started after the first decorative symbol variable display. It may be a thing, or may be executed as something other than the pre-reading notice for the same decorative symbol variable display started after the first decorative symbol variable display. Further, in the first case, the first timer effect and the second timer effect are always executed as a look-ahead notice for the same decorative symbol variable display started after the first decorative symbol variable display. It may be one that may not be executed as a look-ahead notice for the same decorative symbol variable display started after the first decorative symbol variable display.

Further, "in the first case, at least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed [for example, FIG. 428(3)- A certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer notice effect related to the first timer notice display TM11 shown in (13) of the figure is an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes to the display mode of pandas, etc.] ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, since one of the effects is a change in hold, it may be possible to expect that the other effect will be performed for the decorative symbol variable display that is the target of the change in hold.

Here, in the first case, one of the first effect and the second effect may be an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, or in the first case, the first effect Both the effect and the second effect may be effects in which the display mode of the hold icon changes.
Note that a pre-reading notice other than the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon may be given.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed [for example, a change effect in the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 434(9)],

The second effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 434(6)],

The hold icon whose display mode is changed by one of the first effect and the second effect may be further changed by the other effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 434(9), As a result of performing the timer notice effect on the 1-timer notice display TM11, as a certain effect, an effect of changing the hold icon in the display mode of the panda to the bancho display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, there are cases where it is possible to raise the rank of the hold icon in multiple stages by timer effects.

Here, the hold icon whose display mode is changed by one of the first effect and the second effect may be further changed only by the other effect, or between the first effect and the second effect. The hold icon whose display mode is changed by one of the effects may be further changed by an effect other than the other effect. Further, the hold icon whose display mode is changed by one of the first effect and the second effect may be changed by the other effect without fail, and the hold icon may be changed by the other effect. The hold icon whose display mode is changed by one effect may not be changed by the other effect.

Further, only the hold icon whose display mode is changed by one of the first effect and the second effect may be further changed by the other effect, or between the first effect and the second effect. Other than the hold icon whose display mode is changed by one of the effects, the other effect may be further changed. Further, the hold icon whose display mode is changed only by one of the first effect and the second effect may be further changed by the other effect, and between the first effect and the second effect. The hold icon whose display mode is changed by an effect other than one effect may be further changed by the other effect.

In addition, "the timing when the first effect according to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started, and the timing related to the second timer effect being executed in the first period" The timing for starting the second effect may be different [for example, as shown in FIGS. 425(5) to (13) in FIG. 425, the timer notification effect on the first timer notification display TM11 is displayed. Is different from the timing at which the pseudo-relational effect executed by means of is started and the timing at which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon executed by the timer announcement effect related to the second timer announcement display TM12 is started, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, there are cases where variations are provided in the start timing of the effect related to the timer effect.

Here, the timing at which the first effect related to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started, and the second effect related to the second timer effect being executed in the first period is started. It may be configured such that only the timing that is performed may be different, and the timing when the first effect related to the first timer effect that is being executed in the first period is started and the time when the first effect is executed in the first period. The timing other than the timing at which the second effect related to the second timer effect in the middle is started may be different. Also, the timing at which the first effect related to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started, and the second effect related to the second timer effect being executed in the first period is started. The timing may be different from each other, and the timing at which the first effect related to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started and the second effect being executed in the first period. The timer production may be configured such that the second production may start at the same timing.

In addition, "a first notice icon [for example, the swordsman character KNG shown in FIG. 430(10)] may be displayed as the first effect [for example, FIG. )-(10) (FIG. 432(3)-(10) in FIG. 4), as a result of performing the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11, as a certain effect, the swordsman character KNG. Is displayed],

In the case where the first timer effect [for example, the timer notice effect related to the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIGS. 432(3) to (10)] is executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variable display. Is displayed after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative pattern variable display [for example, decorative pattern variable display performed in the period shown in FIGS. 432(2) to 433(24)] Then, an effect corresponding to the first notice icon [for example, an effect of super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 433(20) to (22), etc.] is displayed while the certain decorative symbol variable display is displayed. Is configured to get started,

When the first timer effect [for example, the timer notice effect for the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIG. 430(3) to (10) in FIG. 430] is executed as a prefetch notice, the certain decorative symbol After the first notice icon is displayed during a variable display [for example, a decorative pattern variable display performed in the period shown in FIGS. 430(2) to (18)], the certain decorative pattern is displayed. According to the first notice icon during the display of the decorative pattern variable display that is started after the variable display [for example, the decorative pattern variable display performed in the period shown in FIGS. 431 (19) to (29) in FIG. 431]. The production [for example, production of super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG. 431 (25) to (27) in FIG. 43] is configured to be started.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to draw attention to whether the notice icon displayed as the first effect is given as a notice or as a prefetch notice.

When the second effect is started first, the notice effect corresponding to the first notice icon is the same target as the second effect, depending on whether the second effect is a notice or a prefetch notice. In some cases, it can be expected to start with the decorative pattern variable display that becomes.

Here, it may be configured such that only the first notice icon may be displayed as the first effect, or something other than the first notice icon may be displayed as the first effect. May be configured as follows. Moreover, the first notice icon may be configured to be always displayed as the first effect, or the first notice icon may not be displayed as the first effect.

The first notice icon may be displayed only as the first effect, or the first notice icon may be displayed as an effect other than the first effect. May be configured as follows.

In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, a certain decorative symbol variation It may be configured such that only the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started during the display of the display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variable display, or After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, a configuration other than the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is also displayed during the display of the certain decorative pattern variation display May be done. In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, a certain decorative symbol variation It may be configured such that the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is always started during the display of the display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variable display, or After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, it is configured so that the effect corresponding to the first notice icon may not be started during the display of the certain decorative pattern change display. May be.

In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, a certain decorative symbol variation The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be configured to be started only during the display of the display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variable display, or After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started other than during the display of the certain decorative pattern change display. May be. In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variable display, a certain decorative symbol is displayed only after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variable display. It may be configured such that the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started during the display of the variable display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variable display, or In addition to after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, it is configured so that the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started during the display of the certain decorative pattern variable display. May be.

In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative pattern variable display, it is started after a certain decorative symbol variable display. It may be configured such that only the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, or when the first timer effect is executed as the prefetch notice, a certain decoration is performed. After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the variable display of symbols, a display other than the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the change of decorative pattern that is started after a certain decorative pattern change display. The production may also be started. In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative pattern variable display, it is started after a certain decorative symbol variable display. It may be configured such that the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is always started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, or when the first timer effect is executed as the prefetch notice, a certain decoration is performed. After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the variable pattern display, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started during the display of the decorative pattern change display that is started after a certain decorative pattern change display. It may be configured so that it may not be performed.

In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative pattern variable display, it is started after a certain decorative symbol variable display. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started only during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, or when the first timer effect is executed as the prefetch notice, a certain decoration is performed. After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the variable display of symbols, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon other than during the display of the variable display of decorative patterns that is started after a certain decorative pattern change display May be configured to be started. Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, only after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display, it starts after a certain decorative symbol variable display. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, or if the first timer effect is executed as the prefetch notice, a certain decoration is performed. In addition to after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the variable display of symbols, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the variable display of decorative symbols that is started after a certain decorative pattern change display. May be configured to be started.

In addition, "It is configured so that a second notice icon may be displayed as the second effect,

When the second timer effect is executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variable display, after the second notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variable display, the certain It is configured such that the effect corresponding to the second notice icon is started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display,

When the second timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, after the second notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variable display, after the certain decorative symbol variable display It is configured such that the effect corresponding to the second notice icon is started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display to be started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

In addition, when one of the first effect and the second effect is a notice regarding a certain decorative pattern variation display, and the other is a look-ahead notice, the notice icon displayed as the first effect and the second notice are displayed. The notice icon displayed as an effect may be the same notice icon.
In addition, "It is configured to be able to run multiple types of mini games,

One of the plurality of types of mini games is a first mini game [for example, a treasure chest mini game shown in FIG. 435(15) to FIG. 18(18)],

One of the plurality of types of mini-games is a second mini-game [for example, a mini-game of dice shown in FIGS. 435(7) to 435(10)],

In the first mini-game, the first timer display [eg, first timer advance notice display TM11 or the like shown in FIG. 435(3)] becomes the first time [eg, “00:00” or the like]. This is a mini game from which the result is derived before. [For example, in the treasure box mini game shown in FIGS. 435(15) to (18), the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is “00:00”. Results have been derived before],

In the second mini game, the second timer display [for example, the second timer advance notice display TM12 or the like shown in FIG. 435(5)] becomes the second time [for example, "00:00" or the like]. This is a mini game from which the result is derived before. [For example, in the mini game of the dice shown in FIGS. 435(7) to (10), the timer display of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is "00:00". Results have been derived before],

The first effect is configured to be an effect corresponding to the result of the first mini game [for example, the result of the treasure chest mini game shown in FIGS. 435(15) to (18) is successful. 436 (21), the pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 436 (21) is executed as a certain effect that is performed as a result of the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11],

The second effect is configured to be an effect corresponding to the result of the second mini game [for example, the result of the dice mini game shown in FIGS. 435(7) to (10) is successful. 435 (12), the effect in which the hold icon shown in FIG. 435 (12) is changed to the display mode of the length is executed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible not only to wait for the timer display time but also to pay attention to the result of the mini game during that time.

Here, only a plurality of types of mini games may be configured to be executable, or a game other than the plurality of types of mini games may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured to always execute a plurality of types of mini games, or may be configured to not execute a plurality of types of mini games.

In the first mini game, only the result may be derived before the first timer display reaches the first time, or the first timer display before the first timer display reaches the first time. Other than the result may be derived. In addition, in the first mini game, the result may be always derived before the first timer display reaches the first time, or before the first timer display reaches the first time. The result may not be derived in some cases.

The first mini-game may be such that the result is derived only before the first timer display reaches the first time, or before the first timer display reaches the first time. Besides, the result may be derived.

In the second mini game, only the result may be derived before the second timer display reaches the second time, or before the second timer display reaches the second time. Other than the result may be derived. In addition, the second mini game may be one in which the result is always derived before the second timer display reaches the second time, or before the second timer display reaches the second time. The result may not be derived in some cases. Also, the second mini game may be such that the result is derived only before the second timer display reaches the second time, or before the second timer display reaches the second time. Besides, the result may be derived.

In addition, the first effect may be configured to be an effect corresponding only to the result of the first mini game, or the first effect may be an effect corresponding to a result other than the result of the first mini game. May be configured. In addition, the first effect may be configured to be an effect that always corresponds to the result of the first mini game, or the first effect may not be an effect that corresponds to the result of the first mini game. It may be configured as is.

In addition, the second effect may be configured to be an effect corresponding only to the result of the second mini game, or the second effect may be an effect corresponding to a result other than the result of the second mini game. May be configured. In addition, the second effect may be configured to be an effect that always corresponds to the result of the second mini game, or the second effect may not be an effect that corresponds to the result of the second mini game. It may be configured as is.

The types of mini games may be the same or different between the first timer effect and the second timer effect. In addition, the start order and the type of the mini game may be associated with each other.

Further, it may be configured to suggest the first effect or the second effect during execution of the mini game. For example, when the mini game is successful, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed. You may make it produce such as being suggested.

In addition, "When the result of the first mini-game is the first result, the first effect is configured to be performed in the first mode [for example, FIG. 435(15) to FIG. When the result of the treasure chest mini game shown in (18) is a success result, the pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 436 (21) is performed as a result of the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11. Is executed as a production, etc.],

When the result of the first mini game is the third result, the first effect is performed in the third mode [for example, FIG. 437(15) to FIG. 18(18)]. When the result of the treasure box mini game shown in FIG. 4 is a failure result, the lost effect shown in FIG. 438 (20) is a certain effect that is performed as a result of the timer notification effect on the first timer notification display TM11. Etc.],

When the result of the second mini game is the second result, the second effect is performed in the second mode [for example, FIG. 435(7) to FIG. When the result of the mini game of the dice shown in FIG. 4 is a success result, the effect of changing the hold icon shown in FIG. As a result, it is executed as a certain production, etc.],

When the result of the second mini game is the fourth result, the second effect is configured to be performed in the fourth mode [for example, FIG. 437(7) to FIG. When the result of the mini game of the dice shown in FIG. 4 is a failure result, the effect of changing the hold icon shown in FIG. 437 (12) to the display mode of panda is the timer notice effect applied to the second timer notice display TM12. As a result, it is executed as a certain effect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, there are cases where the variation of the effect due to the combination of the mini game and the timer effect is increased and the interest can be enhanced. Here, the first effect may be configured to be performed only in the first mode when the result of the first mini game is the first result, or the result of the first mini game is The first effect may be performed in a mode other than the first mode when the first result is obtained. Further, when the result of the first mini game becomes the first result, the first effect may be configured to be performed in the first mode without fail, or the result of the first mini game may be the first result. The first effect may not be performed in the first mode when the result is.

Further, when the result of the first mini game is the first result, only the first effect may be configured to be performed in the first aspect, or the result of the first mini game may be the first result. When the result is, effects other than the first effect may be performed in the first aspect. Further, the first effect may be configured to be performed in the first mode only when the result of the first mini game is the first result, or the result of the first mini game is the first result. The first effect may be configured to be performed in the first mode in a case other than the case of the result.

Further, when the result of the first mini game is the third result, the first effect may be configured to be performed only in the third mode, or the result of the first mini game may be the third result. When the result is, the first effect may be performed in a mode other than the third mode. In addition, the first effect may be configured to be performed in the third mode when the result of the first mini game is the third result, and the result of the first mini game is the third result. The first effect may not be performed in the third mode when the above result is obtained.

Further, when the result of the first mini game is the third result, only the first effect may be performed in the third mode, or the result of the first mini game may be the third result. When the result is, the effect other than the first effect may be performed in the third mode. The first effect may be performed in the third mode only when the result of the first mini game is the third result, or the result of the first mini game is the third result. The first effect may be configured to be performed in the third aspect in a case other than the case of the result.

In addition, when the result of the second mini game is the second result, the second effect may be configured to be performed only in the second mode, or the result of the second mini game may be the second result. The second effect may be configured to be performed in a mode other than the second mode when the above result is obtained. Further, when the result of the second mini game becomes the second result, the second effect may be configured to be performed in the second mode without fail, and the result of the second mini game may be the second result. The second effect may not be performed in the second mode when the above result is obtained.

Further, when the result of the second mini game is the second result, only the second effect may be configured to be performed in the second mode, or the result of the second mini game may be the second result. In the case of the above result, effects other than the second effect may be performed in the second mode. Further, the second effect may be configured to be performed in the second mode only when the result of the second mini game is the second result, and the result of the second mini game is the second result. The second effect may be configured to be performed in the second mode in a case other than the case of the result.

Further, when the result of the second mini game is the fourth result, the second effect may be configured to be performed only in the fourth aspect, or the result of the second mini game may be the fourth result. The second effect may be performed in a mode other than the fourth mode when the above result is obtained. Further, when the result of the second mini game is the fourth result, the second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth mode without fail, and the result of the second mini game may be the fourth result. It may be configured such that the second effect may not be performed in the fourth mode in the case of the above result.

Further, when the result of the second mini game is the fourth result, only the second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth aspect, or the result of the second mini game may be the fourth result. In the case of the above result, effects other than the second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth aspect. Further, the second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth mode only when the result of the second mini game is the fourth result, or the result of the second mini game is the fourth result. The second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth aspect in a case other than the case of the result.
In addition, "One of the plurality of types of mini games is a third mini game,

When the result of the third mini game is the fifth result, the third effect is configured to be performed in the fifth aspect,

When the result of the third mini game is a sixth result, the third effect is configured to be performed in a sixth aspect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

In addition, the time display [for example, “10:00” or the like] of the first timer display [for example, the first timer notice display TM11 or the like shown in FIG. 441(3)] is the first time. Is a display showing the time until [for example, 10 seconds],

It is configured such that the time display of the first timer display may be changed before the first time is reached [for example, the time displayed as "10:00" in FIG. 441(3) is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 441 (12) to (13) in FIG. 441 (12) to (13), the 1-timer advance notice display TM11 has added the time shown in the timer display before “00:00”, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make the player act as an effect that changes the aspect of the first timer effect, and make the player have expectations.

Here, the time display of the first timer display may indicate only the time until reaching the first time, or may indicate a time other than the time until reaching the first time. May be. In addition, the time display of the first timer display may necessarily indicate the time until reaching the first time, or may not indicate the time until reaching the first time. May be.

Further, it may be configured so that the time display of the first timer display may be changed only before it reaches the first time, and the time display of the first timer display becomes the first time. It may be configured so that it may be changed other than before. The time display of the first timer display may be configured to be changed before the first time, or the time display of the first timer display may be changed before the first time. It may be configured so that it may not be performed.

Further, it may be configured such that only the time display of the first timer display may be changed before it becomes the first time, and the time display other than the time display of the first timer display may be the first time display. It may be configured so that it may be changed before the time.

Further, "the time display of the second timer display is a display showing the time until the second time,

It is configured so that the time display of the second timer display may be changed before it becomes the second time,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make the player act as an effect that changes the aspect of the second timer effect, and make the player have expectations.

Here, the time display of the second timer display may indicate only the time until reaching the second time, or may indicate the time other than the time until reaching the second time. May be. In addition, the time display of the second timer display may necessarily indicate the time until reaching the second time, or may not indicate the time until reaching the second time. May be.

Also, the time display of the second timer display may be configured to be changed only before the second time, and the time display of the second timer display may be the second time. It may be configured so that it may be changed other than before. In addition, the time display of the second timer display may be configured to be changed before the second time, or the time display of the second timer display may be changed before the second time. It may be configured so that it may not be performed.

Further, it may be configured such that only the time display of the second timer display may be changed before it becomes the second time, and the time display other than the time display of the second timer display may be changed to the second time display. It may be configured so that it may be changed before the time.

In addition, the first timer display [for example, the figure is displayed during the display of the certain decorative pattern variation display [for example, the decorative pattern variation display performed in the period shown in FIGS. 425(2) to 426(22)]. 425(3) first timer advance notice display TM11, etc.] is configured to be the first time in some cases [for example, the first timer advance notice display TM11 shown in FIG. "00:00" is displayed at the timing shown in Fig. (12)],

The second timer display [for example, the second timer notice display TM12 or the like shown in FIG. 425(5)] may be the second time during the display of the certain decorative symbol variable display. [For example, “00:00” is displayed at the timing shown in (7) of the second timer notice display TM12 shown in FIG. 425(5)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured such that only the first timer display may be the first time during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display, or the first timer display may be the first time during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display. The display other than the timer display may be configured such that the first time may be displayed. Further, the first timer display may be configured to always be the first time during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display, or the first timer display may be displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display. It may be configured such that the first time may not be reached.

Further, the first timer display may be configured to be the first time only during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display, and the first timer display may be configured to be the time other than during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display. The one timer display may be configured to be the first time.

In addition, it may be configured such that only the second timer display may be the second time during the display of a certain decorative pattern variable display, or the second time may be displayed during the display of a certain decorative pattern variable display. The display other than the timer display may be configured to be the second time in some cases. Further, the second timer display may be configured to be the second time without fail during the display of a certain decorative pattern variable display, or the second timer display may be displayed during the display of a certain decorative pattern variable display. It may be configured such that the second time may not be reached.

Further, the second timer display may be the second time only during the display of a certain decorative pattern variable display, and the second timer display may be the second time other than during the display of the certain decorative pattern variable display. The second timer display may be configured to be the second time.

In addition, “the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started [for example, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is shown in FIG. ), the second timer advance notice display TM12 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 425(5), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the start timing of the timer display is diversified, it may be possible to enhance the interest.

Here, the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started and the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started may be different, or the display of the first timer display is started. The timing other than the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started may be different. Further, the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started, or the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started and the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started. There may be a case where the display timing of the timer display is started at the same time.

Further, "the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may be different [eg, As shown in FIG. 425(3), the first timer advance notice display TM11 displays “10:00” when the display is started, and the second timer advance notice display TM12 changes to FIG. 425(5). As shown, "03:00" is displayed when the display is started],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the time displayed when the timer display is started is diversified, it may be possible to enhance the interest.

Here, only the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started. The time display other than the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may be different. .. Further, the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started, or the first time display may be different. The time display displayed when the display of the timer display is started may be the same as the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started.

In addition, “the first time and the second time are the same time [for example, “00:00” or the like],”
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
According to this gaming table, the start timing of the effect may be easily recognized in some cases.
Note that the first time and the second time may be different times.
In addition, “the first time is 0, and the second time is 0,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to more easily grasp the start timing of the effect.

The first time may be other than zero. Further, the second time may be other than zero.

In addition, it is configured to be able to display a “ball removal error display [for example, a ball removal error display shown in FIG. 445 (9″)],

The ball removal error display is a display that may be displayed in a plate full tank error state [for example, as shown in FIG. 445 (9″), when a lower plate full tank error occurs, the ball removal error is displayed. Display is displayed, etc.],

It is configured such that at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may overlap the ball-out error display [for example, FIG. 445 (9″). , The ball-out error display overlaps the front side of the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to expedite the ball removal operation by the timer display.

Here, only the ball-out error display may be displayed, or a display other than the ball-out error display may be displayed. Further, the ball removal error display may be displayed without fail, or the ball removal error display may not be displayed in some cases.

Further, the ball-out error display may be displayed only in the plate full tank error state, or may be displayed in a state other than the plate full tank error state. Further, the ball-out error display may be always displayed in the dish full tank error state, or may not be displayed in the dish full tank error state.

Further, the display of at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may be configured to be overlapped only with the ball-out error display, or the first timer display and the second timer display may be overlapped. At least one of the second timer displays may be overlapped with a display other than the ball removal error display. Further, the display of at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may be configured to be overlapped with the ball-out error display without fail, or the first timer display and the second timer display may be arranged. It may be configured so that at least one of the displays may not overlap the ball-out error display.

Further, it may be configured such that only one of the first timer display and the second timer display may overlap the ball-out error display, or the first timer display and the second timer display may overlap. Both displays of the timer display may be overlapped with the ball-out error display.
Further, "the game machine characterized in that the production means is a display means. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Hereinafter, it will be additionally described including the above description.

(Supplementary Note 1) A gaming machine comprising image display means, symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display, and notice means capable of executing a plurality of types of notices, wherein the image display means is a hold display. Is a display means capable of displaying, the image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons, the hold display is a display displayed in the hold display area in the image display means, The hold display is a display in accordance with the number of operations of the symbol variation display that are suspended (hereinafter, referred to as “the number of suspensions”), and the symbol variation display is when the suspension is exhausted. , A startable display, the notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display unit, the notice icon is a different icon from the hold display, the notice icon display area Is an area different from the hold display area, the notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying one or more of the notice icons, and the notice means displays the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area. When one notice icon is consumed, it is a means that can execute the notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed, and during the period in which the symbol variable display is executed once, A structure in which a big hit is more likely to occur when the first number of the plurality of types of the notice icons is consumed by the second number, which is larger than the first number, than when the first number of the notice icons is consumed by the first number A gaming table characterized by being used.

(Supplementary Note 2) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 1, wherein the notice icon is configured to be displayed in a number corresponding to the number of times the notice may be executed. A gaming table.

(Supplementary Note 3) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 1 or 2, wherein the advance notice means is a means capable of executing a false advance notice in the same mode as the advance notice mode, and the advance notice means displays the advance notice icon. When one of the notice icons displayed in the area is exhausted, it is a means capable of executing the false notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon, and the false notice is executed. The game table is characterized in that the result of the symbol variable display is lost later.

(Supplementary note 4) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 3, wherein the notice icon that is started to be displayed in the notice icon display area during the period in which the one-time symbol variable display is executed. A gaming table characterized in that the fourth number, which is larger than the third number, is more likely to be a big hit than the third number.

(Supplementary Note 5) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 4, further comprising a suspending display means capable of executing a display according to the number of suspensions, and the suspending display means being the image display means. Is another display means.

(Supplementary Note 6) The game machine according to Supplementary Note 5, wherein the holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means.

(Supplementary Note 7) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 6, further comprising prefetching advance notice means capable of executing a prefetch advance notice, wherein the prefetch advance notice means displays the advance notice icon in the advance notice icon display area. A gaming machine, which is a means capable of executing the prefetching notice by displaying.

(Supplementary Note 8) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 7, wherein the notice icon is displayed during a period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variation display”) that is a target of prefetching is being executed. The fifth number may be consumed, and the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first symbol variation display") executed before the second symbol variation display is executed is executed. In the period of time, the notice icon may be exhausted by a sixth number, the sixth number is a number different from the fifth number, and the hold display is the first symbol variation. A gaming table, which is a display notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the display is being executed.

(Supplementary Note 9) In the gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 8, the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) in which the notice icon is consumed is executed. The gaming table, wherein the notice icon may start to be displayed during a certain period.

(Supplementary Note 10) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 9, wherein the symbol variation display is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, referred to as “third symbol variation display”. ) Is being executed, the display of the notice icon may be started during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note 11) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 10, wherein the hold display area is an area capable of displaying the hold display up to a seventh number, and the notice icon display area is It is a region in which the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number, and the seventh number is a number different from the eighth number.

(Supplementary Note 12) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 11, further comprising a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of productions, and one of the plurality of types of notices is the first It is a notice, one of the plurality of types of notice is a second notice, the first notice is a notice different from the second notice, among the plurality of types of production One is a first effect, one of the plurality of kinds of effects is a second effect, and the first effect is a different effect from the second effect. The first notice is a notice notifying that the first effect is executed, and the second notice is a notice notifying that the second effect is executed. A gaming table characterized by.

(Supplementary Note 13) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 12, wherein the advance notice icon displayed in the advance notice icon display area is configured to be always consumed. A gaming table.

(Supplementary Note 14) The game machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 13, wherein the game machine is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note 15) A gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, wherein one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon, which is displayed during the first symbol variable display. The display of the first notice icon may be started as the notice icon, and the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display is the first symbol variation display. May not be digested during the display of, in the symbol variation display that is displayed after the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "second symbol variation display"), the first symbol variation display A gaming machine, wherein the first notice icon that has not been digested during display is configured to be digested in some cases.

(Supplementary note 16) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 15, wherein the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display is exhausted during the display of the first symbol variation display. A gaming table characterized by being sometimes played.

(Supplementary note 17) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 15 or 16, wherein the first notice icon is started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display as a look-ahead notice of the second symbol variation display. There is a case that there is a case, a gaming table.

(Supplementary note 18) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 15 to 17, wherein the first number of the first notice icons are exhausted during one display of the symbol variation display. Also, when the second number of the first notice icon is exhausted, it is more likely to be a big hit, and the second number is a number larger than the first number. Stand.

(Supplementary note 19) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary notes 15 to 18, wherein the second notice icon is configured to be displayable as the notice icon, and the second notice icon is consumed. A gaming table, which is configured to be a big hit in the variable display of symbols.

(Supplementary note 20) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary notes 15 to 19, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a notice display, and the first notice icon is consumed. In the above, the first notice display may be displayed as the notice display in some cases.

(Supplementary Note 21) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 20, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a false notice display, and the false notice is displayed when the first notice icon is consumed. The first false notice display may be displayed as the notice display, and the display mode of the first false notice display is the same as the display mode of the first notice display. A gaming table characterized in that it is configured so that it will be displaced in the symbol variation display in which the notice display is displayed.

(Supplementary note 22) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary notes 15 to 21, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a prefetch effect display, and the third notice icon is the notice icon. A gaming machine, which is configured to be displayable, wherein the prefetching effect display may be started when the third notice icon is consumed.

(Supplementary note 23) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes 15 to 22, wherein the display means is a means including a plurality of display means.

(Supplementary Note 24) The game console according to any one of Supplementary Notes 15 to 23, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol variable display.

(Supplementary note 25) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 15 to 24, wherein the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display is the second symbol. A gaming table, which is configured so that it is always consumed by the end of the variable display.

(Supplementary note 26) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 15 to 25, wherein the notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the display means, and the notice icon display area is A gaming table, which is an area capable of displaying a plurality of the notice icons.

(Supplementary note 27) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes 15 to 26, further comprising an effect control unit, wherein the effect control unit is a unit capable of executing control of the display unit. And a gaming table.

(Supplementary note 28) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 27, comprising main control means and symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display, wherein the main control means can transmit a command to the effect control means. The production control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means, and the main control means is a means capable of executing control of the symbol display means. A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 29) The game stand according to any one of Supplementary Notes 15 to 28, wherein the game stand is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary note 30) A gaming machine provided with a first display means capable of executing symbol variation display and a second display means, wherein the second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon. The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays, and the second display means is the number of times the operation of the symbol variation display is suspended (hereinafter, “suspended”). The display means is capable of displaying a display corresponding to the "number") in the hold display area, the symbol variable display is a display started when the hold is exhausted, and the notice icon is the second It is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area in the display means, the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holding depending on the number displayed, the notice icon display area, the hold display area Is a different area, the notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying a plurality of the notice icons, the second display means, when the notice icon of the notice icon display area has been consumed , A display means capable of displaying the type of the notice display corresponding to the type of the noticed icon that has been consumed, and in the period in which the symbol variable display is being executed once, the notice icon is the first number consumed. It is configured such that the second number, which is larger than the first number, is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the second display means is the pattern that is the object of prefetching. The display means is capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area as a read-ahead notice display before the variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variation display”) is started. And a gaming table.

(Supplementary note 31) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 30, wherein the notice icon is configured to be displayed in a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed. And a gaming table.

(Supplementary note 32) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 30 or 31, wherein the second display means is a display means capable of displaying a false notice display in the same manner as the notice display. The display means is capable of displaying, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, the fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. The gaming table is characterized in that, after the false notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is out of alignment.

(Supplementary note 33) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 32, wherein the second display means is a display means composed of a plurality of display means. ..

(Supplementary Note 34) In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 33, one display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means, and one display means of the plurality of display means is a hold. Display means, the hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area, the hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of hold in the hold display area The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of decorative symbols, the image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, and the hold display A means is a display means different from the said image display means, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

(Supplementary note 35) The game machine according to supplementary note 34, wherein the holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means.

(Supplementary note 36) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 32, wherein the second display means is an image display means, and the image display means is a variable display of decorative symbols. Is a display means capable of displaying, and a holding icon is displayed in the holding display area in accordance with the number of holdings.

(Supplementary note 37) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 36, wherein the notice icon is extinguished by a fifth number during a period in which the second variable display is being executed. Yes, in the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “first symbol variation display”) executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is displayed. The sixth number may be consumed, the sixth number is a number different from the fifth number, the display according to the pending number, the first symbol variable display is executed The gaming table, which is a display notifying that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended during a certain period.

(Supplementary note 38) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 36, wherein the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is until the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching. A game machine characterized by being surely digested by.

(Supplementary note 39) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 38, wherein the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) in which the notice icon is consumed is executed. The gaming table, wherein the notice icon may start to be displayed during a certain period.

(Supplementary note 40) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 39, wherein the fourth symbol is executed during the period in which the symbol variable display is executed before the fourth symbol variable display is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that the notice icon that is consumed during the period when the variable display is executed may start to be displayed.

(Supplementary note 41) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 40, wherein the reserved display area is an area in which a display corresponding to the reserved number can be displayed up to a seventh number, and the notice is given. The icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icon up to an eighth number, and the seventh number is a number different from the eighth number.

(Supplementary note 42) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 41, comprising a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of productions, and configured to display a first notice icon as the notice icon. As the notice icon, a second notice icon is configured to be displayed, the first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon, and the plurality of types One of the notices is a first notice, one of the plurality of types of notices is a second notice, and the first notice is the second notice. It is a notice display different from the notice display, and when the first notice icon is consumed, the first notice display is displayed, and the second notice icon is consumed. The second notice display is configured to be displayed, one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect, and one of the plurality of types of effects is It is a second effect, the first effect is an effect different from the second effect, and the first notice display is a notice display notifying that the first effect is executed. And the second notice display is a notice display for notifying that the second effect will be executed.

(Supplementary note 43) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 42, comprising a main control means and an effect control means, wherein the main control means can transmit a command to the effect control means. The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means, and the main control means is means capable of executing control of the first display means. And the effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the second display means.

(Supplementary note 44) The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 43, wherein the game stand is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note 45) A gaming machine having display means, wherein the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one type of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon. Yes, the advance notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch advance notice display, and when the big hit symbol variable display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variable display”) that is the target of the prefetch is suspended. In, in the case where a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") are consumed between the start of the first symbol change display and the end of the second symbol change display. There is, in the case where the second symbol variable display is suspended, from the start of the first symbol variable display until the end of the second symbol variable display, the plurality of notice icons May be newly displayed, one type of display of the plurality of types of display is a production display, and when the notice icon is consumed, the production corresponding to the digested notice icon. The display is configured to be displayed in some cases, one of the plurality of notification icons is a first notification icon, and one of the plurality of notification icons is a notification icon. , The second notice icon, and in the one-time symbol variable display, the first number of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “first number of notice icons”) are exhausted, thereby the effect display As the first effect display is configured to be displayed, the first number of advance notice icons is a advance notice icon including the first advance notice icon, the first number of advance notice icons, A game table, which is a notice icon including the second notice icon. According to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a display characteristic. Further, according to this gaming machine, there is a possibility that the first effect display is displayed from when one icon of the first number of icons is displayed until the first number of icons are consumed. Sometimes you can continue to have a sense of expectation for something. Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to the big hit by making the number of the notice icons look like the symbol variation before the hold which is the prefetch target. Here, the plurality of notice icons may be two notice icons or may be three or more notice icons. Further, when the first notice icon is consumed, the effect display A corresponding to the first notice icon may be displayed, or when the second notice icon is consumed, the second notice icon is displayed. Corresponding effect display B may be performed, or effect display C corresponding to the first notice icon and the second notice icon when the first notice icon and the second notice icon are consumed. You may go. Also, only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon may be consumed, or only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon is newly added. You may make it display on.

(Supplementary note 46) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 45, wherein a second number of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as a “second number notice icon”) are consumed in one symbol variable display. Also, the first effect display is configured not to be displayed, the first number and the second number are different numbers, the second number of the notice icon is the first A notice icon including one notice icon of the notice icon and the second notice icon, wherein the second number of notice icons is one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon. A gaming table characterized in that the other notice icon is not included in the notice icon. According to this gaming machine, the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, and the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed in one symbol variation display. However, since the first effect display is not displayed, it may be possible to give a feeling of superiority to the player who can see the first effect display. Here, the second number may be smaller than the first number, and the second number may be larger than the first number. Further, the first number may be one, and in this case, the second number may be two or more. Further, the first number may be two or more, and in this case, the second number may be larger than the first number. Further, there may be an effect display that is displayed when the second number of notice icons have been consumed. Further, even if the second number of notice icons are exhausted, a part of the first effect display may be displayed, or all of the first effect display may be displayed. Further, the reliability of the big hit for the first effect display may be changed according to the number of the notice icons that have been consumed, or the reliability of the big hit for the first effect display may be the same. Further, when the notice icons including the first notice icon and the second notice icon are displayed, the first number of notice icons may be configured to be consumed. Further, even if the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons are not consumed and the second number of notice icons are consumed. Alternatively, both the first notice icon and the second notice icon may not be deleted.

(Supplementary Note 47) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 45 or 46, wherein one of the plurality of notice icons is a notice icon, and the third notice icon is consumed. Then, a game stand characterized in that a third effect display is displayed as the effect display. According to this gaming table, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of production and enhance the production effect. The third notice icon may be one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon. Further, the third notice icon may be a notice icon different from both the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

(Supplementary Note 48) In the gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 45 to 47, the lost symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) that is the target of prefetching is suspended. In this case, the plurality of notice icons may be digested between the start of the third symbol variable display and the end of the fourth symbol variable display, wherein the gaming table is characterized in that. According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the change in the hold that is the prefetch target ends. In addition, depending on whether the result of the pattern change display of the prefetch target is a big hit or a loss, it is digested from the first symbol change display or the third symbol change display to the symbol change display of the prefetch target. The maximum number of notice icons may be the same or different. Further, depending on whether the result of the pattern change display of the prefetch target is a big hit or a loss, it is digested from the first symbol change display or the third symbol change display to the symbol change display of the prefetch target. The minimum number of notice icons may be the same or different. Also, in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, one symbol that is performed before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display) The maximum number of notice icons consumed in the variable display (for example, the first symbol variable display, the third symbol variable display) depends on whether the result of the symbol variable display of the prefetch is a big hit or a miss. It may be the same or different. Also, in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, one symbol that is performed before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display) The minimum number of notice icons that can be consumed in the variable display (for example, the first symbol variable display, the third symbol variable display) is when the result of the symbol variable display of the pre-reading is a big hit or a miss. It may be the same or different. In addition, the maximum number of notice icons that are consumed in the pattern variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) that is the target of prefetching in a state where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended The result of the variable display of the pattern to be prefetched may be the same or different between the big hit and the miss. In addition, the minimum number of notice icons that are consumed in the pattern variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) that is the target of prefetching in a state where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended The result of the variable display of the pattern to be prefetched may be the same or different between the big hit and the miss.
(Appendix 49)

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note 48, in the case where the fourth symbol variable display is suspended, from the start of the third symbol variable display until the end of the fourth symbol variable display A gaming table, wherein the plurality of notice icons may be displayed in between.

According to this gaming machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big jackpot, so that it may be possible to entertain until the change in the hold to be read ahead ends.

(Supplementary note 50) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 45 to 49, further comprising a suspending display means, wherein the suspending display means is the number of the start of the symbol variation display suspended (hereinafter, "suspended"). A game machine characterized by being a means capable of displaying a hold display of a number corresponding to "number". The hold display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, a light emitting means such as an LED, or a movable means.

(Supplementary note 51) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 50, characterized in that it is configured not to display the number of holdings depending on the number of the notice icons displayed. According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

(Supplementary Note 52) The game stand according to any one of Supplementary Notes 45 to 51, wherein the game stand is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note 53) The game console according to any one of Supplementary Notes 45 to 51, wherein the game console is a slot machine.

(Supplementary Note 54) A gaming machine having a plurality of display means, wherein one display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means and one of the plurality of display means is displayed. Means is a second display means, the first display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, the second display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display , One of the plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the first display means is a display related to the notice icon, and among the plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the second display means. One type of display is a display related to the notice icon, and the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display, and is a jackpot symbol variable display (pre-reading target). Hereinafter, when the "second symbol variation display".) is suspended, a plurality of the plurality of the symbols are displayed from the start of the first symbol variation display to the end of the second symbol variation display. The notice icon (hereinafter referred to as “plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed, and when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the first symbol variation display is started and then the The gaming table, wherein the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed before the second symbol variable display ends. The display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, or may be one in which a pattern is formed by cutting the light guide plate with a lens and irradiating it with a light source from the side. , LED or the like, or 7-segment. Further, the display related to the notice icon may be a display regarding that the notice icon is stocked, a display regarding that the notice icon is exhausted, or a notice of stocking the notice icon. It may be a display, or an effect display that is executed when the notice icon is exhausted. Further, the second display means may be larger than the first display means, and the second display means may be smaller than the first display means. Further, the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means, or the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means. It may be small.

(Supplementary note 55) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 54, wherein the second display means is configured so that the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed. Stand. In addition, one notice icon may be newly displayed. Moreover, you may make it perform the effect|action that the notice icon is consumed by the 2nd display means.

(Supplementary note 56) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 54 or 55, wherein the first display means may perform a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed. A gaming table. It should be noted that the “display indicating that the notice icon may be displayed” may be performed in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is displayed, or the notice icon is displayed. You may make it perform in the symbol variable display.

(Supplementary Note 57) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 54 to 56, wherein the first display means is a means provided with a first display area, and the second display means is The gaming table is a means provided with a second display area, and the advance notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area.

(Supplementary Note 58) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 54 to 56, wherein the first display means is means provided with a first display area, and the second display means is The second display area is provided, and the effect display corresponding to the notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area. And a gaming table.

(Supplementary Note 59) A gaming table including display means and movable means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one of the plurality of types of displays is provided. The display is a notice icon, and the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display, and is a big hit symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as "second symbol variation display") which is a target of the read-ahead. In the case where is held, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) from the start of the first symbol variation display to the end of the second symbol variation display. ) May be consumed, in the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, from the start of the first symbol variation display until the end of the second symbol variation display In some cases, the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed, and when the notice icon is exhausted, an effect corresponding to the digested notice icon (hereinafter referred to as “notice icon digest effect”) is performed. A game machine characterized by being configured as described above, and as the notice icon digestion effect, an effect by the movable means (hereinafter, referred to as "first movable means effect") may be performed. In addition, the effect by the movable means may be performed only by the first movable means effect, but may be performed by another movable means effect different from the first movable means effect. In this case, a notice icon corresponding to each movable means effect may be displayed, or a notice icon corresponding to the movable means for which the effect is performed may be displayed.

(Supplementary note 60) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 59, wherein the first movable means effect may be performed when the twenty-first notice icon is exhausted as the notice icon. A gaming table characterized by In addition, even if the 21st notice icon is exhausted, the first moving means effect may not be performed, and if the 21st notice icon is exhausted, the first movable means must be moved. Means production may be performed. Further, when the 21st notice icon is exhausted, there may be a case where an effect (an effect having a different operation) different from the first movable means effect is performed. In addition, when the 21st notice icon is consumed, the production may be performed by a movable means different from the first movable means, or the 21st notice icon is consumed. Then, the effect may be always performed by the first movable means.

(Supplementary note 61) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 59 or 60, wherein the first moving means effect is not performed when the twenty-second notice icon is exhausted as the notice icon. A gaming table characterized by It should be noted that the first moving means effect may be performed even if the twenty-second notice icon is consumed, or another effect (or effect display) when the twenty-second notice icon is consumed. May be performed.

(Supplementary note 62) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 59 to 61, further comprising operation means, wherein the movable means is the operation means, and the first movable means effect is The gaming table, wherein the mode of the operating means is an effect that changes from the first mode to the second mode. Here, the "change" is meant to include deformation, displacement, movement, and operation.

(Supplementary note 63) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 59 to 62, further comprising a second movable means, wherein the movable means is the first movable means, and the notice icon is exhausted. A game table characterized in that, as an effect, an effect by the second movable means (hereinafter, referred to as "second movable means effect") may be performed.

(Supplementary note 64) A gaming machine provided with a display means, wherein the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and one type of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon. Yes, the advance notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch advance notice display, and when the big hit symbol variable display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variable display”) that is the target of the prefetch is suspended. In the case where a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons") are consumed from the start of the first symbol change display to the end of the second symbol change display. There is, in the case where the second symbol variable display is suspended, from the start of the first symbol variable display until the end of the second symbol variable display, the plurality of notice icons May be newly displayed, one type of display of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon increase suggestion display, the notice icon increase suggestion display, the notice icon may be displayed. It is a display that suggests that the advance notice icon increase suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays,

A gaming table characterized by that. The notice icon may not be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, or the notice icon may be always displayed when the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed. Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed only once in the symbol variation display, or the notice icon increase suggestion display may be always displayed in only one symbol variation display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is not displayed, or the notice icon may not be displayed unless the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

(Supplementary note 65) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 64, wherein in the symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display, the notice icon increase suggestion display is configured to end. A gaming table characterized by. The change in which the display of the advance notice icon increase suggestion display ends may be the second symbol change display. By doing so, it may be possible to expect that the notice icon may be displayed until the end.

(Supplementary note 66) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 64 or 65, wherein one of the eleventh number of the advance notice icons suggested by the advance notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed as the advance notice icon. There is a case that there is a case, a gaming table. The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a suggestion that the notice icon increases by one. Further, the number of notice icons displayed on the notice increase notice display need not be increased. Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a notice of a gasse that the notice icon does not increase. The advance notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display indicating that a plurality of advance notice icons will increase. In this case, for example, when the number of the notice icons suggested by the notice increase notice display is three, only two may be increased. Further, notice icons other than the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be increased.

(Supplementary note 67) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 64 or 65, wherein the twelfth number of the notice icons among the eleventh number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display, A gaming machine, which may be displayed as the notice icon.

(Supplementary note 68) A gaming machine comprising display means and hold display means, wherein the hold display means is a means capable of displaying a hold display of a number corresponding to the number of hold, and the display means Is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and one type of display of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon, and the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display. In the case where the pending display (hereinafter, referred to as "second pending display") of the big hit symbol variable display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variable display") that is the target of prefetching is displayed, A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed from the start of the first symbol change display to the end of the second symbol change display. In the case where the second pending display is displayed, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first variable display and the end of the second variable display. The gaming table may be displayed, and the first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed, the gaming table.

(Supplementary note 69) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 68, wherein the second hold display is a display that may be displayed in a look-ahead display mode, and the variable display in which the second hold display is displayed. In the game table, the second hold display may be displayed in the prefetch display mode.

(Supplementary note 70) The gaming table according to supplementary note 68 or 69, wherein a pending display of a lost symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth symbol variable display") that is a target of prefetching (hereinafter, "fourth"). "Hold display") is displayed, when the plurality of notice icons are consumed between the start of the third symbol variable display and the end of the fourth symbol variable display There is a gaming table.

(Supplementary Note 71) A gaming machine having display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon, the notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon, and the display means is a plurality of A display capable of displaying different types of display, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a first display, and one of the plurality of types of display is a second display. , The second display is an explanatory display, the first display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed, and the second display is displayed Is a display displayed in the second display area, the notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed. There is a gaming table. The first display may be an explanatory display different from the second display, or may be a non-explanatory display. Further, the second display may be a display showing the current situation such as a tutorial display or a stage name, or may be a display of the effect mode names of the selectable effect modes. Here, in the effect mode, for example, a mode for changing the frequency of change in the display mode of the hold icon, a mode for changing the operation frequency of the effect movable body, or a frequency of occurrence of one-shot notification effect There is a mode for making it. In addition, the display position of the notice icon may be closer to the second display area than the start position of the animation that appears when the notice icon is displayed. The display position of the icon may be closer to the second display area. Further, here, the "notice icon" may be only one notice icon, only a part of the plurality of notice icons, or all of the plurality of notice icons. It may be a notice icon. In addition, the “trailer icon” may be only the trailer icon displayed first among the plurality of trailer icons, or a part of the trailer icon including the trailer icon displayed first among the plurality of trailer icons. It may be an icon. Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may completely match, or even if a part of the display period of the first display overlaps with the display period of the second display. Alternatively, a part of the display period of the second display may overlap with the display period of the first display. Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may not overlap. Further, the notice icon may or may not be displayed during the display period of the first display. Further, the notice icon may or may not be displayed during the display period of the second display. Further, the second display and the notice icon do not necessarily have to be displayed at the same time. In addition, the display frequency may be different between the first display and the second display. For example, when the display frequency of the second display is higher than the display frequency of the first display, the line of sight of the notice icon is guided. May be easy. Further, the first display area and the second display area may have different sizes, or the first display area and the second display area may have different roles. For example, the notice display may not be performed in the first display area, but the notice display may be performed in the second display area.

(Supplementary Note 72) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 71, wherein the advance notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch advance notice display.

(Supplementary note 73) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 71 or 72, wherein the first display is a change icon display, the explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon, and the notice icon is The second display may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part (hereinafter, referred to as “first part”), and when the notice icon is consumed, the first display of the second display is performed. The game table is characterized in that the overlap to the part is eliminated. According to this gaming table, by displaying in the second display area in which the notice icon related to the relevant symbol and the next symbol variation display is explained rather than the change icon, the knowledge about the notice icon is deepened. At the same time, even if the result of the symbol variation display is a loss, it may be possible to newly expect the symbol variation display in which the notice icon displayed as the prefetch notice display is consumed. The entire second display may be displayed by eliminating the overlap with the first portion. Further, in the period in which the variable icon is displayed, the variable icon may be one that can at least suggest an expectation for the big hit in the symbol variable display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display or may be consumed in the symbol variation display that is the subject of the look-ahead. Further, the notice icon may be surely consumed in the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching, or the notice icon may not be consumed in the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching. Further, the notice icon may be configured to be able to be displayed only in a single number, or may be configured to be able to be displayed in a plurality. Here, in the case of displaying a plurality of notice icons, the notice icon may be displayed up to a predetermined upper limit number, or the notice icon may be displayed indefinitely without setting the upper limit number. Good.

(Supplementary Note 74) In the gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 71 to 73, the display of the second display may be started in a state where the notice icon is displayed. Characteristic game table.

(Supplementary note 75) The game console according to any one of supplementary notes 71 to 73, wherein the second display is not started in a state where the notice icon is displayed. ..

(Supplementary note 76) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 71 to 75, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display is a third display, and the third display is a notice. A gaming table, wherein the third display is displayed in the second display area when the third display is displayed.

(Supplementary note 77) The game console according to any one of supplementary notes 71 to 76, wherein the second display area is an area divided by a line.

(Supplementary note 78) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 71 to 77, wherein the "previous icon is displayed in the second display area rather than in the first display area when displayed". "Is an icon displayed in a display area close to the display area of", "when the notification icon is displayed, it is displayed in the second display area", A gaming table.

(Supplementary note 79) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 71 to 78, the symbol variation display that is a big hit has a larger number of digesting the notice icon than the symbol variation display that is a loss. A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary note 80) A gaming machine including display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying an explanation display of a notice icon, and the notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon, and the plurality of types In the case where one of the explanation displays of is a first explanation display, the first explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon, and the notice icon is displayed as a prefetch notice display. There is a certain icon, and the jackpot variation is more likely to consume the notice icon than the variation of the loss.

(Supplementary Note 81) In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 80, in the case where the notice icon is displayed in a display area in which the first explanation display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “first display area”). A gaming table characterized by an icon.

(Supplementary note 82) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note 81, in the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first explanation display is displayed in the first explanation display area. A game table characterized by being not played.

(Supplementary note 83) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 80 to 82, wherein one explanation display of the plurality of types of explanation displays is a second explanation display, and the second explanation. The display is a display showing the current performance stage, and the notice icon may be displayed in the display area in which the second explanation display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “second display area”). A gaming table characterized by being an icon.

(Supplementary note 84) The game console according to supplementary note 83, wherein the performance stage changes even when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area.

(Supplementary Note 85) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 80 to 84, wherein the display means uses a plurality of types of icons (hereinafter, referred to as “plurality of types of advance notice icons”) as the advance notice icon. One of the plurality of types of notice icons is a first notice icon, and one of the plurality of types of notice icons is a second notice icon. The first notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the first effect, and the second notice icon may be displayed before the start of the second effect. Is
A game table characterized by that.

(Supplementary note 86) A gaming machine having display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon, and the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a preread notice display. The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon, the display unit is a unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display. , The first display is an explanatory display, the first display is a display displayed in the first display area of the display means, and the notice icon is the first display area when displayed. A gaming machine characterized by being an icon displayed in one display area.

(Supplementary note 87) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 86, wherein the first display is not displayed when the notice icon is displayed.

(Supplementary note 88) The game console according to supplementary note 87, wherein the display of the first display may restart when the notice icon is exhausted.

(Supplementary note 89) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 86 to 88, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display is a second display and the second display is a notice. The display is a display, the second display is a display displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, and the description display is a description display related to the notice icon. Game table.

(Supplementary note 90) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 86 to 89, wherein the display means is a means configured by a plurality of display means, and one of the plurality of display means is , A first display means, one of the plurality of display means is a second display means, one of the plurality of display means is a third display means, the The first display means is a means capable of displaying the symbol variable display, the second display means is a means capable of displaying the effect display, and the third display means is the second display means. Is a means capable of displaying a display adapted to the display, and the first display area is a display area provided in at least a partial area of the third display means. ..

(Supplementary note 91) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 86 to 90, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display is a third display, and the third display is an explanation. The third display is a display displayed in the second display area of the display means, and the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second display area. A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary note 92) The game console according to supplementary note 91, wherein the third display is not displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. In the above description, the first tutorial display may be a display including a display explaining the character displayed on the second display means. Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the effect display being executed. Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display indicating the probability of expected change. Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display regarding the reach jackpot expectation degree. Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display regarding the jackpot expectation of the character. Further, the first tutorial display may be a display configured not to be displayed at the same time as the first notice display.

(Supplementary note 93) A gaming machine including display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons, and the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display. The display area in which the notice icon is displayed is a display area different from the display area in which the hold icon is displayed, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. One of the displays is a first display, one of the plurality of types of display is a second display, and the first display is one of the plurality of notice icons. A display including one of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as a “first notice icon”), and the second display includes a display in which the first notice icon is displayed in a large size. The gaming table, wherein the first display may be made after the second display is made. Here, the notice icon included in the second display may be an enlarged view of the first notice icon, or may be a notice icon different from the first notice icon.

(Supplementary Note 94) In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 93, one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display, and the third display is a variable display of decorative symbols, The first display is a display indicating that the first notice icon is stocked, and the first display is a display that is not overlapped with the third display. A gaming table characterized by.

(Supplementary note 95) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 93 or 94, wherein the third display is a display that may not overlap the first display, and the third display is the third display. A game table, which is a display that may be overlapped with the second display.

(Supplementary note 96) The game console according to any one of supplementary notes 93 to 95, wherein the first display is a display displayed in a hold display frame.

(Supplementary note 97) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 93 to 96, wherein the second display is a display performed when the first notice icon is acquired.

(Supplementary note 98) The game console according to supplementary note 97, wherein the second display is a display also performed when the first notice icon is consumed.

(Supplementary note 99) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 97 or 98, wherein when the notice icon is acquired, the notice icon acquired together with at least a part of the notice icons already acquired is enlarged and displayed. A gaming table characterized by.

(Supplementary note 100) A gaming machine including display means, wherein the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display. Yes, one of the plurality of types of display is a second display, one of the plurality of types of display is a third display, and the first display is a hold It is a display of a display frame, the second display is a display of an aspect in which at least a part of the first display is expanded, the third display is a display of decorative symbols, the first The display is a display that is not overlapped with the third display.

(Supplementary note 101) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 100, wherein the display of the position of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display, the fourth display is a performance display, and the second display In the portion of the display expanded from the first display (hereinafter referred to as “expansion portion”), the fourth display is configured to be displayable, and the expansion portion is the third display. A game table, which is a part that is not overlapped with the display.

(Supplementary note 102) The game console according to supplementary note 101, wherein the effect display is a pre-reading notice display.

(Supplementary note 103) The gaming machine according to Supplementary note 101 or Supplementary note 102, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display, and the sixth display is a notice display, In the expanded portion, the sixth display is configured to be displayable, and the fourth display and the fifth display are partly the same display, and the game table.

(Supplementary Note 104) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 100 to 103, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display, and the fifth display is a serif advance notice. And the fifth display is a display that does not overlap the first display, and the fifth display is a display that may overlap the second display. A gaming table characterized in that.

(Supplementary note 105) A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display is a first display, and One display is a second display, one display of the plurality of types of display is a third display, the first display is a display including an icon display frame, The icon display frame is a display frame capable of displaying an icon relating to the symbol variable display, the second display is a display in a mode in which at least a part of the first display is expanded, and the third display Is a decorative symbol variable display, and the first display is a display that is not overlapped with the third display.

(Supplementary note 106) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 105, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display, the fourth display is an effect display, and the second display In a portion expanded from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as “expanded portion”) of the display, the fourth display is configured to be overlapped and displayable, and the expanded portion includes A game table, which is a portion that is not overlapped with the third display.

(Supplementary note 107) The game console according to supplementary note 106, wherein the effect display is a pre-reading notice display.

(Supplementary Note 108) The game console according to Supplementary Note 106 or Supplementary Note 107, wherein the effect display is a display for changing a display mode of the icon.

(Supplementary note 109) The game console according to any one of supplementary notes 106 to 108, wherein the third display is a display that may be overlapped with the expanded portion. Game table.

(Supplementary note 110) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 106 to 109, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display, and the fifth display is The fifth display is a display that is not overlapped with the first display, and the fifth display is a display that may be overlapped with the expanded portion. There is a gaming table.

(Supplementary note 111) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 106 to 110, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display, and the sixth display is It is a notice display, and in the expanded portion, the sixth display is configured to be able to overlap and be displayed, and the fourth display and the sixth display are partially the same display, A gaming table characterized by.

(Supplementary note 112) The game console according to any one of supplementary notes 105 to 111, wherein the icon is a hold icon.

(Supplementary note 113) The gaming machine according to supplementary note 112, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a number of the suspension icons corresponding to the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is suspended. And a gaming table.

(Supplementary note 114) The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 105 to 114, wherein the game stand is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note a1) A game table provided with an operating means and a first area, wherein the first area is an area into which a game ball can enter, and the operating means of the operating means in the first button effect. A game table characterized in that the number of times of accepting an operation (hereinafter referred to as "the number of times of acceptance") can be increased or decreased, and the number of times of acceptance may increase when a game ball enters the first area.

(Supplementary Note a2) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note a1, comprising display means, wherein the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one of the plurality of types of displays is It is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "first display"), and in the first button effect, when the operation means is operated when the number of receptions is one or more, the first display The game console characterized in that may be displayed.

(Supplementary Note a3) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note a2, one display of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”) and the second display. The display mode of is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display, and when the operation means is operated in the second button effect, the second display may be displayed, The second display may be displayed even when the number of receptions is 0, and the second display and the first display can be displayed in parallel, ..

(Supplementary Note a4) The game machine according to supplementary note a3, wherein the first button effect and the second button effect can be executed in parallel.

(Supplementary Note a5) The game machine according to supplementary note a3 or a4, wherein the display unit displays an image simulating the operation unit in the first button effect (hereinafter referred to as “third display”). The display means can display an image imitating the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth display”) in the second button effect, and the size of the third display can be displayed. The game table is characterized in that the size is different from the size of the fourth display.

(Supplementary Note a6) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes a1 to a5, wherein the number of times of acceptance may be reduced when the operation means is operated.

(Supplementary Note a7) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes a1 to a6, wherein the number of times of acceptance may increase when a plurality of game balls enter the first area. Game table.

(Supplementary Note a8) The game console according to any one of supplementary notes a1 to a7, wherein the first area is a general winning opening.

(Supplementary Note a9) The game table according to any one of supplementary notes a1 to a8, including a second region, wherein the second region is a region through which a game ball can pass, and the second region. A game table, wherein a game ball that has passed through a region may enter the first region, and the number of times of acceptance may increase when the game ball enters the second region.

(Supplementary Note a10) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes a1 to a9, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note b1) A game table including a first area and a display means, wherein the first area is an area into which a game ball can enter, and the display means displays a plurality of types of displays. It is a displayable means, and one of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”), and when the game ball enters the first area, the first display is displayed. One display may be displayed, and the first display is not overlapped with the fluctuating decorative pattern, the gaming table.

(Supplementary Note b2) In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note b1, one display of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”) and the second display. Is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display, the display means is a means capable of displaying a wipe display, and the wipe display does not overlap the second display. The gaming table, wherein the first display is the wipe display.

(Supplementary Note b3) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note b2, wherein the wipe display is displayed in a part of the display area of the display means.

(Supplementary note b4) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes b1 to b3, one display of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”). Yes, the display mode of the third display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display, and the first display is displayed as a display for changing the display mode of the third display. A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary note b5) The game console according to supplementary note b4, wherein the third display is a hold icon.

(Supplementary note b6) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes b1 to b5, wherein the first display is not started during execution of the stop display of the decorative symbol.

(Supplementary note b7) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes b1 to b6, wherein when a game ball enters the first area during the display of the first display, the first display The game console is characterized by being continuously displayed.

(Supplementary note b8) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes b1 to b7, wherein the first area is a general winning opening.

(Supplementary note b9) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes b1 to b8, including a second region, wherein the second region is a region through which a game ball can pass, A game ball that has passed through an area may enter the first area, and the first display may be displayed when the game ball enters the second area. ..

(Supplementary Note b10) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes b1 to b9, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note c1) A gaming machine provided with display means, wherein the display means performs a symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “first symbol variation display”), and then a next symbol variation display (hereinafter, “first symbol variation display”). Second symbol variation display") is a means capable of displaying, and in the first symbol variation display, a variation icon corresponding to the first symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "first variation icon"). ) Can be displayed, the icon displayed as the first variation icon is configured to be displayable as a notice icon in the second symbol variation display, and the area in which the notice icon is displayed is A gaming table, which is an area different from the area in which the first variable icon is displayed.

(Supplementary note c2) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note c1, in the second symbol variation display, a variation icon (hereinafter, referred to as “second variation icon”) corresponding to the second symbol variation display. A gaming table, which is displayable and is configured to be able to display both the second variable icon and the notice icon.

(Supplementary note c3) The gaming machine according to supplementary note c1 or c2, wherein the icon displayed as the hold icon can be displayed as a variable icon, and the notice icon is one of a plurality of display modes. The display mode is changeable, and one display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode, and the notice icon of the first display mode is a change of the display mode of the hold icon. A game table characterized by being an icon related to.

(Supplementary Note c4) The gaming machine according to supplementary note c3, wherein the notice icon in the first display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the variable icon.

(Supplementary Note c5) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note c3 or c4, wherein one display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode, and the notice icon of the second display mode. Is an icon related to a change in display mode of the hold icon, and the notice icon in the second display mode is an icon related to a change in display mode of the variable icon. Stand.

(Supplementary Note c6) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes c1 to c5, wherein a display mode of the notice icon is different from a display mode of the variable icon.

(Supplementary Note c7) The game console according to any one of supplementary notes c1 to c6, wherein an animation including a movement of the advance notice icon can be displayed.

(Supplementary Note c8) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes c1 to c7, wherein the display means includes an image display device.

(Supplementary note c9) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes c1 to c8, in the non-electric power support state, the icon displayed as the first variation icon is the second symbol variation display. A gaming machine, which is displayed as the notice icon.

(Supplementary Note c10) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes c1 to c9, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note d1) A gaming machine provided with an operating means operable by a player and a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of displays, wherein one of the plurality of types of displays is One display, one display of the plurality of types of display is a second display, the second display is a display different from the first display, the plurality of types of display One of the displays is a display for prompting the player to repeatedly hit the operating means (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”), and the third display starts the first display. Is a display that is displayed in a state in which the operation of the operating means for receiving the operation can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as “first state”), and the first display is after the third display is started. In the, it is a display that can be started when the operating means is repeatedly hit, the first display is a display that can be started when the operating means is long-pressed, the second display is, It is a display that is more likely to be started when the operating means is repeatedly hit than when the operating means is long pressed, and the third display is the operating means for starting the second display. A gaming table, which is a display that is not displayed in a state in which the operation of can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as a "second state").

(Supplementary Note d2) The game table according to Supplementary Note d1, comprising a light emitting means, the light emitting means being capable of emitting light from the inside of the operating means, and the light emitting means being in the first state. Then, the gaming table, which is a means to be turned on, and the light emitting means is a means to be turned off in the second state.

(Supplementary Note d3) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note d1, comprising a light emitting means, wherein the light emitting means can emit light from the inside of the operating means, and the light emitting means is in the first state. Then, it is a means to be in a state of emitting light in the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is a means to be in a state of emitting light in the second light emitting mode in the second state. Stand.

(Supplementary note d4) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d1 to d3, comprising symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display, and the first display is during execution of the symbol variation display. It is a display that can be started, the second display is a display that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display, and the third display is a display that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display. A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note d5) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d1 to d4, wherein the second display is a display which is not started only by long-pressing the operation means. A gaming table.

(Supplementary Note d6) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d1 to d5, wherein when the operating means is pressed for a long time, the first display can be started as if the operating means was repeatedly hit. The game table is characterized in that

(Supplementary Note d7) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d1 to d6, wherein the long-pressing means that the operating state of the operating means is maintained for a predetermined time. There is a gaming table.

(Supplementary Note d8) A gaming machine provided with an operation means operable by a player and a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is It is a display in one display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”), and one display of the plurality of types of display is a display in a second display mode (hereinafter, “second display”). Display)), the second display is a display different from the first display, and the first display is a first number of operations by the operation means in a first operation mode. Is a display that can be started when the operation is performed, and the first display is a display that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. The second display is when the second operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode more than when the operation means performs the operation once in the second operation mode. Is a display that is easier to start, the second operation mode is an operation mode in which the operation is continued for a longer period than the first operation mode, and the first number exceeds 1 The number of times is the number of times, the second number of times is more than 1, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a display in a third display mode (hereinafter referred to as “third display”). ), the third display mode is a display mode that prompts continuous operation of the operation means in the first operation mode, and the third display starts the first display. It is a display displayed in a state (hereinafter, referred to as “first state”) in which the operation of the operating means for receiving the operation can be accepted, and the third display is for starting the second display. A gaming table, which is a display that is not displayed in a state in which an operation of the operation means can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as a "second state").

(Supplementary Note d9) The game machine according to Supplementary Note d8, further comprising a light emitting means, wherein the light emitting means is a light emitting state in the first state, and the light emitting means is in the second state. Then, a gaming table, which is a means to be in a non-light emitting state.

(Supplementary Note d10) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note d8, comprising a light emitting means, wherein the light emitting means is in a state of emitting light in a first light emitting mode in the first state, and the light emitting means is In the second state, the second light emitting mode is emitting light, and the second light emitting mode is a light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode. Stand.

(Supplementary Note d11) The game machine according to supplementary note d9 or d10, wherein the light emitting means is means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operating means.

(Supplementary note d12) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d8 to d11, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variable display, and the first display is the symbol. It is a display that can be started during the display of the variable display, the second display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variable display, and the third display is during the display of the symbol variable display. A game table characterized by a startable display.

(Supplementary Note d13) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d8 to d12, the second display may be performed only once by the operation means in the second operation mode. A gaming table characterized by a display that is not started.

(Supplementary Note d14) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes d8 to d13, wherein the second operation mode is that the operating state of the operating means is maintained for a first time period. A game console characterized in that it is an operation mode.

(Supplementary Note d15) In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note d14, when the operating state of the operating means is maintained for a second time period, the operating means pseudo-operates in the first operating mode. The first display is configured to be able to start as if the first number of operations had been performed, and the second time is a time that is equal to or longer than the first time. Stand.

(Supplementary Note d16) The game stand according to any one of Supplementary Notes d8 to d15, wherein the game stand is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note d17) The game stand according to any one of Supplementary Notes d8 to d16, wherein the game stand is a slot machine.

(Supplementary Note d18) A gaming machine provided with an operation means that can be operated by a player and a production means that can execute a plurality of types of productions, wherein one production of the plurality of types of productions is One effect, one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect, the second effect is an effect different from the first effect, and the first effect Is an effect that can be started when a first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode, and the first effect is once by the operation means in the second operation mode. Is a production that can be started even when the operation is performed, the second operation mode is an operation mode in which the operation is continued for a longer period than the first operation mode, The number of times is more than 1, and the second effect is the operation means in the first operation mode, as compared with the case where the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. The game machine characterized in that the second number of times is more than 1 when the second number of operations is performed is easier to start.

(Supplementary Note d19) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note d18, comprising a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variable display, wherein one of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect, and The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display, and the third effect is an effect that prompts continuous operation of the operation means in the first operation mode, The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect. One effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode while the third effect is being executed. Stand.

(Supplementary Note d20) In the game machine according to Supplementary Note d18 or d19, the second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a first time. A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note d21) In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note d20, when the operating state of the operating means is maintained for a second time, the operating means pseudo-operates in the first operating mode. A game machine characterized in that the first effect is configured to be started as being operated a first number of times, and the second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time.

(Supplementary Note d22) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d18 to d21, wherein the second effect is obtained by performing only one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode. A game table characterized by a production that is not started.

(Supplementary Note d23) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d18 to d22, including a light emitting means, wherein the light emitting means is capable of accepting an operation for starting the first effect by the operating means. In such a state, the light emitting unit is a unit that is in the second state when the light emitting unit can accept an operation for starting the second effect by the operating unit. The gaming table, wherein the second state is a state different from the first state.

(Supplementary Note d24) The game machine according to Supplementary Note d23, wherein the first state is a state where light is emitted and the second state is a state where light is not emitted. Game table.

(Supplementary Note d25) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note d23, wherein the first state is a state in which light is emitted in a first mode, and the second state is in a state in which light is emitted in a second mode. A gaming table characterized by being in a state of being.

(Supplementary Note d26) The game console according to Supplementary Note d25, wherein the first aspect is a first color and the second aspect is a second color. ..

(Supplementary Note d27) The game table according to any one of supplementary notes d23 to d26, wherein the light emitting means is means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operating means.

(Supplementary note d28) The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes d18 to d27, wherein the game stand is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note d29) A gaming machine provided with an operating means operable by a player and a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is It is a display in one display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”), and one display of the plurality of types of display is a display in a fourth display mode (hereinafter, “fourth display”). The fourth display is a display different from the first display, and the first display is a display in which the first number of operations by the operation means are performed in the first operation mode. The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is operated once in the second operation mode, and the first display is a display that can be started. The display is an effect display, the fourth display is a selection display, and the fourth display is for selecting one image of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It is a display that is displayed, and one image of the plurality of types of images is a first image, and the first image is the second operation mode during execution of the fourth display. Is an image that is more easily selected when the second operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode than when the operation operation is performed once by the operation means. The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the operation is continued longer than the first operation mode, the first number is a number exceeding 1, and the second number is A game table characterized by a number of times exceeding 1.

(Supplementary Note d30) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note d29, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display, and the fifth display is different from the first display. The gaming table, wherein the fifth display is a display that can be started when the first image is selected during execution of the fourth display.

(Supplementary Note d31) In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note d29 or d30, one display of the plurality of types of display is a display in a third display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”). Yes, the third display mode is a display mode that prompts continuous operation of the operation means in the first operation mode, and the third display is for starting the first display. The game machine characterized in that the display is displayed in a state in which the operation of the operating means can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as "first state").

(Supplementary Note d32) The game machine according to Supplementary Note d31, including a light emitting means, wherein the light emitting means is a means that is in a light emitting state in the first state.

(Supplementary Note d33) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d29 to d32, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variable display, and the first display is the symbol. A gaming table, which is a display that can be started while the variable display is being displayed.

(Supplementary Note d34) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d29 to d33, wherein the first image is obtained by performing only one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode. A game table characterized in that it is an image that is not selected.

(Supplementary Note d35) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes d29 to d34, wherein the second operation mode is that the operating state of the operating means is maintained for a first period of time. A game console characterized in that it is an operation mode.

(Supplementary Note d36) In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note d35, when the operating state of the operating means is maintained for a second time, the operating means pseudo-operates in the first operating mode. The first display is configured to be startable as if a first number of operations were performed, and the second time is a time that is equal to or longer than the first time. ..

(Supplementary Note d37) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes d29 to d36,
A game table characterized in that the game table is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note d38) The game stand according to any one of Supplementary Notes d29 to d36, wherein the game stand is a slot machine.

(Supplementary Note d39) A gaming machine provided with an operating means operable by a player, a producing means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects, and a displaying means capable of executing a plurality of types of displays, wherein One of the types of effects is a first effect, and the first effect can be started when a first number of operations are performed by the operation means in a first operation mode. The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, and the second operation mode is the first operation mode. The operation mode in which the operation is continued for a longer period than the operation mode, the first number of times is more than 1, and one of the plurality of types of displays is the first selection. The first selection display is a display in which one image of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to an operation of the operation means, and one image of the plurality of types of images is , A first image, the first image, the first image, while the execution of the first selection, than the case where one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, The image is easier to select when the second operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode, and the second number is more than 1. Game table.

(Supplementary Note d40) In the game machine according to Supplementary Note d39, one of the plurality of types of effects is a fourth effect, and the fourth effect is different from the first effect. Is a production,

The game machine characterized in that the fourth effect is an effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.

(Supplementary Note d41) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note d39 or d40, comprising a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variable display, and one of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect, The third effect is an effect that can be started while the symbol variable display is being executed, and the third effect is an effect that prompts continuous operation of the operation means in the first operation mode. Yes, the first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect, The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the third effect. A gaming table.

(Supplementary Note d42) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d39 to d41, wherein the second operation mode is an operation in which a state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a first time period. It is an aspect, a gaming table characterized by the above.

(Supplementary Note d43) In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note d42, when the operating state of the operating means is maintained for a second time, the operating means pseudo-operates in the first operating mode. A game machine characterized in that the first effect is configured to be started as being operated a first number of times, and the second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time.

(Supplementary Note d44) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note d42 or d43, wherein the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the first time or longer during execution of the first selection display. Even if it is configured to be operated once by the operating means, a gaming table.

(Supplementary Note d45) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d39 to d44, wherein the first image is obtained by performing only one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode. A game table characterized in that it is an image that is not selected.

(Supplementary Note d46) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d39 to d45, one of the plurality of types of displays is a second selection display, and the second selection display is , A selection display capable of selecting one image of a plurality of types of images according to an operation of the operation means, the second selection display is a selection display different from the first selection display, One of the plurality of types of images is a second image, and the second image is displayed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. Is an image that can be selected when the operation is performed the number of times, and the second image is operated once by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display. Is a selectable image, and the third number of times is more than one.

(Supplementary Note d47) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note d46, wherein one of the plurality of types of effects is a fifth effect, and the fifth effect is the second selection display. A gaming machine, which is an effect that can be started when the second image is selected.

(Supplementary Note d48) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d39 to d47, including a light emitting means, wherein the light emitting means can accept an operation for starting the first effect by the operating means. In this state, the means is the first state, the light emitting means is a means that is in the second state during execution of the first selection display, and the second state is the first state. A game table characterized by being in a state different from that of.

(Supplementary Note d49) The game machine according to Supplementary Note d48, wherein the first state is a state where light is emitted and the second state is a state where light is not emitted. Game table.

(Supplementary Note d50) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note d48, wherein the first state is a state in which light is emitted in a first mode, and the second state is in a state in which light is emitted in a second mode. A gaming table characterized by being in a state of being.

(Supplementary Note d51) The game console according to Supplementary Note d50, wherein the first aspect is a first color and the second aspect is a second color. ..

(Supplementary Note d52) The game console according to any one of supplementary notes d39 to d51, wherein the light emitting means is means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operating means.

(Supplementary note d53) The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes d39 to d51, wherein the game stand is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note d54) A gaming machine provided with a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variable display, an operating means operable by a player, and a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, wherein One of the types of display is a display in the first display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”), and one of the plurality of types of display is a second display. It is a display in a display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”), the second display is a display different from the first display, and the first display is the symbol variation display. Is a display that may be started during the display of the, the second display is a display that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display, among the plurality of types of display The first display is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operating means (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”), and the first display starts the display of the third display. Is a display that may be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit, and the first display is the operation means after the display of the third display is started. Is a display that may be started even when is pressed for a long time, and one display of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to operate the operation means (hereinafter, " The fourth display is a display different from the third display, and the second display is after the display of the fourth display is started. The display may be started when the operation means is operated two or more times, and the second display is the operation means after the display of the fourth display is started. A game table characterized in that the display is not started only by pressing and holding once.

(Supplementary Note d55) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note d54, comprising light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of types of light emitting states, wherein the light emitting means is means capable of emitting light from the inside of the operating means. One of the plurality of types of light emitting states is a first light emitting state, and the light emitting means is a means that becomes the first light emitting state in a state of receiving an operation of the operation means. A gaming table characterized by.

(Supplementary Note d56) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note d55, wherein one of the plurality of types of light emitting states is a second light emitting state, and the first light emitting state is a lighting state. , The second light emitting state is an extinguished state, and the light emitting means is in the lighted state to represent a state in which the operation of the operating means is accepted, and the light emitting means is in the extinguished state. As a result, the game machine is characterized in that it is in a state in which the operation of the operation means is not accepted.

(Supplementary Note d57) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note d55, wherein one of the plurality of types of light emitting states is a second light emitting state, and the first light emitting state is a first light emitting state. The second light emitting state is a state of emitting light in the second light emitting mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note d58) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d54 to d57, wherein the first display is a notice display and the second display is a notice display. A gaming table.

(Supplementary note d59) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d54 to d58, wherein one of the plurality of types of display indicates to select one option from a plurality of options. (Hereinafter, referred to as “selection display”), one display of the plurality of types of display is a display that is displayed when the first option of the plurality of options is selected ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as "fifth display"), and the fifth display is started when the operation means is operated two or more times after the display of the selection display is started. The fifth display is a display that is not started by only pressing the operating means once after the display of the selection display is started. Characteristic game table.

(Supplementary Note d60) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note d59, wherein the fifth display is displayed when the number of operations of the operating means is the first number of times after the display of the selection display is started. It is a display to be started, and the first number is 2 or more.

(Supplementary Note d61) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d54 to d60, wherein the operating means is held down when the operating means is pressed for a long time after the display of the third display is started. The gaming table is characterized in that the display of the first display may be started as a continuous hit.

(Supplementary Note d62) In the gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes d54 to d61, long-pressing means that the operating state of the operating means is maintained for a predetermined time. A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note d63) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d54 to d62, wherein one of a plurality of states for accepting an operation of the operation means is a first state, and the operation means One of the plurality of states for accepting the operation of is a second state, the second state is a state different from the first state, the third display, the A gaming machine characterized by being a display displayed in a first state and the fourth display being a display displayed in the second state.

(Supplementary Note d64) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note d63, wherein the first state is a state in which an operation for starting display of the first display is accepted.

(Supplementary Note d65) The game console according to Supplementary Note d63 or d64, wherein the second state is a state in which an operation for starting the display of the second display is accepted. ..

(Supplementary Note d66) In the gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes d63 to d65, the first state is a state in which the first state is completed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the first state. There is a gaming table.

(Supplementary Note d67) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes d63 to d66, wherein the second state is completed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the second state. There is a gaming table.

(Supplementary note d68) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d54 to d67, wherein the second display indicates that the number of operations of the operation means is changed after the display of the fourth display is started. The game machine is characterized in that the display is started in the case of the second number of times, and the second number of times is 2 or more.

(Supplementary note d69) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d54 to d68, wherein the third display is a display including a first image, and the first image is the operation means. A game table, which is an image including an image showing an appearance.

(Supplementary Note d70) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note d69, wherein the fourth display is a display including a plurality of second images, and the second image is an image showing an appearance of the operation means. A game table characterized by being an image including.

(Supplementary Note d71) The game console according to Supplementary Note d70, wherein the second image is an image having a display mode different from that of the first image.

(Supplementary Note d72) The game stand according to any one of Supplementary Notes d54 to d71, wherein the game stand is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note d73) A gaming machine provided with a first operation means and a second effect means, which is configured to be capable of executing a plurality of kinds of effects, and is one of the plurality of kinds of effects. The effect is a first effect, one effect of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect, and the first effect is the first operation means in the first operation mode. It is an effect that may be executed in response to being operated, and the second effect may be executed in response to the first operating means being operated in the first operation mode. The production mode of the second production is a production mode different from the production mode of the first production, and when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, There is a case where one effect is started, and when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started, and the second effect means is the light emitting means. And the second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means.

(Supplementary Note d74) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note d73, wherein the “production performed by the second production means” described in Supplementary Note d73 means that the second production means is in the second light emission mode. A game table characterized in that it is "production performed by emitting light."

(Supplementary Note d75) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note d73 or d74, including first rendering means, the first rendering means is image display means, and the first rendering is the first rendering. A game stand characterized by being a performance executed by a performance means.

(Supplementary note d76) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d73 to d75, including a third effect means, wherein the third effect means is a movable means, and the second effect. A means is a means provided in the said 3rd production|generation means, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.

(Supplementary Note d77) The game stand according to Supplementary Note d76, wherein the third rendering means is an image display means.

(Supplementary Note d78) The game stand according to Supplementary Notes d73 to d77, wherein the second effect means is means capable of emitting light in the first light emission mode.

(Supplementary note d79) A gaming machine provided with a first operation means, configured to be able to execute a plurality of types of effects, and one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect, One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect, and the first effect is executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode. There is a certain effect, the second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the effect of the second effect The aspect is an effect aspect different from the effect aspect of the first effect, and when the first operation means is operated in the second operation aspect, the first effect may be started, When the first operation unit is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started, and the second effect is an effect executed by the second effect unit. A game machine characterized in that the second effect means is a light emitting means.

(Supplementary Note d80) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note d79, wherein the “production performed by the second production means” described in Supplementary Note d79 means “the second production means emits light in the second light emission mode”. A game table characterized in that it is "production performed by".

(Supplementary Note d81) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note d81, wherein the second effect means is means capable of emitting light in a first light emission mode, and the first light emission mode is the second light emission mode. A gaming table, which has a different light emission mode from.

(Supplementary note d82) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d79 to d81, including a first effect production means, wherein the first effect production means is a first image display means, and The game machine is characterized in that the effect is an effect executed by the first effecting means.

(Supplementary Note d83) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d79 to d82, including a third effect means, the third effect means is a movable means, and the second effect means is A gaming table, which is a means provided in the third rendering means.

(Supplementary Note d84) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note d83, including a fourth effect means, the fourth effect means is a second image display means, and the fourth effect means is the fourth effect means. A game table characterized in that it is a means provided in the third effect means.

(Supplementary note 85) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 79 to 84, comprising a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display, and the first effect is during display of the symbol variation display. A gaming machine, which is an effect that may be started, and the second effect is an effect that may be started while the symbol variable display is being displayed.

(Supplementary note d86) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d79 to d85, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first operation means causes the first operation means to move to the first operation mode. The gaming table, wherein the first effect may be started as being operated in an operation mode.

(Supplementary Note d87) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes d79 to d86, wherein the “operation in the first operation mode” described in Supplementary Note d79 means “a plurality of operations”. A gaming table characterized by.

(Supplementary Note d88) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes d79 to d87, wherein the “operation in the second operation mode” described in Supplementary Note d79 is a “long press operation”. A gaming table characterized by.

(Supplementary Note d89) The game machine according to Supplementary Note d88, wherein the long-pressing operation is an operation in which the operated state is maintained for a predetermined time. Stand.

(Supplementary note d79) A gaming machine provided with a first operation means, configured to be able to execute a plurality of types of effects, and one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect. , One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect, and the first effect is executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode. The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode. The production mode of is a production mode different from the production mode of the first production, and when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first production may start. Yes, the second effect is not started when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, and the second effect is a back button effect, which is characterized in that Stand.

(Supplementary Note d80) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note d79, further comprising a first rendering means, the first rendering means is an image display means, and the first rendering is the first rendering means. A game table characterized by being a performance executed by.

(Supplementary Note d81) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note d80, wherein the “production performed by the first production means” described in the supplementary text d80 is “the first production means displays a first display”. A game table characterized in that it is a "draft executed by doing".

(Supplementary Note d82) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes d79 to d81, wherein the second effect is an effect executed by the first effect means. ..

(Supplementary Note d83) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 82, wherein the “production performed by the first production means” in the supplementary statement 82 is “the first production means displays a second display”. A game table characterized in that it is a "draft executed by doing".

(Supplementary Note d84) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes d79 to d81, comprising a second effect means, the second effect means is a light emitting means, and the second effect is A game stand characterized in that it is an effect executed by the second effect means.

(Supplementary Note d85) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note d84, wherein the "production performed by the second production means" in the supplementary d84 is "the second production means is in the second light emission mode. A game table characterized in that it is "production performed by emitting light."

(Supplementary Note d86) A game machine including a first operation means and a second operation means, which is configured to be capable of executing a plurality of types of display, and is one of the plurality of types of displays. The display is a first display, one display of the plurality of types of display is a second display, the first display, the first operation means in the first operation mode The second display may be displayed in response to the operation, and the second display may be displayed in response to the second operation means being operated in the first operation mode. The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display, and when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, There is a case where one display is started, and the second display is not started when the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode.

(Supplementary Note d87) The game console according to Supplementary Note d86, wherein the second display is a display displayed on a setting screen.

(Supplementary Note d88) The game machine according to Supplementary Note d86 or d87, wherein the second display is a display that is displayed when one of the plurality of options is selected. And a gaming table.

(Supplementary Note e1) A game table including operation means provided at a position operable by a player and display means capable of displaying a mini game, wherein the game table is a pachinko machine and the decoration. The effect display (hereinafter, referred to as “first effect display”) related to the symbol variation display is a display including a display (hereinafter, referred to as “first operation promotion display”) for prompting the operation of the operation means. The effect display related to the mini game (hereinafter referred to as “second effect display”) is a display including a display prompting operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second operation promotion display”). Yes, the first effect display is a display that may be displayed in a first period, and the second effect display is a display that may be displayed in a second period. The first display and the second display are periods in which at least a part thereof overlaps (hereinafter referred to as “third period”), and the result of the first effect display is a notice (hereinafter referred to as “first "A notice"), and the result of the second effect display is a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter, "second notice"). A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note e2) In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note e1, when the operation means is operated in the third period, the second notice is given and then the second notice is given. The game table characterized in that the first notice is given.

(Supplementary Note e3) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note e1, wherein at least the first notice and the second notice are the first notice and the second notice when the operation means is operated in the third period. Is given, and the first notice may change in response to the second notice after the second notice has been given.

(Supplementary note e4) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes e1 to e3, wherein the first effect display overlaps with the second effect display in the third period. And a gaming table.

(Supplementary note e5) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes e1 to e4, wherein the second effect display is a display including a display of an effective period of the operation means for the mini game. Characteristic game table.

(Supplementary note e6) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes e1 to e5, wherein the first notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes, and one of the plurality of modes is , The first aspect, one of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect, and the first notice is performed in the second aspect rather than in the first aspect. In the case where the mini-game is started, it is configured such that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed, and when the mini game is started, the first notice is the second notice rather than the second aspect. A gaming table characterized in that the mode is easier to perform.

(Supplementary Note e7) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note e6, wherein the second notice is an executable notice in a plurality of modes, and one of the plurality of modes is a third mode. One of the plurality of modes is a fourth mode, and the second notice is configured so that, when executed in the fourth mode, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. And the second notice is configured to be executed in the fourth mode when the first notice is executed in the second mode. ..

(Supplementary note e8) The gaming machine according to supplementary note e6, wherein the second notice is an executable notice in a plurality of modes, and one of the plurality of modes is a third mode. One of the plurality of modes is a fourth mode, and the second notice is executed in the fourth mode rather than in the third mode. Finally, the jackpot design is configured to be easily displayed in a finalized manner, and in the first case, the jackpot design is configured to be finally displayed in a finalized manner more easily than in the second case. In the second case than in the case of, it is configured so that the final jackpot design is easier to be finalized and displayed, and in the third case than in the fourth case, the jackpot design is finally confirmed. The first notice is executed in the second mode, and the second notice is executed in the fourth mode. The second case means a case where the first notice is executed in the second mode and the second notice is executed in the third mode. Yes, the third case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first mode and the second notice is executed in the fourth mode. The case of four is a case where the first notice is executed in the first mode and the second notice is executed in the third mode. Stand.

(Supplementary note e9) The gaming machine according to supplementary note e6, wherein the second notice is an executable notice in a plurality of modes, and one of the plurality of modes is a third mode, One of the plurality of modes is a fourth mode, and the second notice is executed in the fourth mode rather than in the third mode. Finally, the jackpot pattern is configured to be easily confirmed and displayed. In the first case and the second case, the probability that the jackpot pattern is finally confirmed and displayed is the same, or The case is configured so that the final jackpot design is more likely to be confirmed and displayed, and whether the probability that the jackpot design is finally confirmed and displayed is the same between the second case and the third case, The second case is configured so that the final jackpot design is more likely to be finalized and displayed, and the third and fourth cases have the same probability that the final jackpot design will be finalized and displayed. Or, in the third case, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed. In the first case, the first notice is executed in the second mode. And the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect, the second case, the first notice is executed in the second aspect, and A case where the second notice is executed in the third mode, and the third case is that the first notice is executed in the first mode, and It is a case where the notice is executed in the fourth mode, and the fourth case means that the first notice is executed in the first mode and the second notice is the first mode. A gaming machine characterized in that it is executed in three modes.

(Supplementary note e10) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes e1 to e9, the number of times the operation means is operated to perform the result of the first effect display, A game machine characterized in that the number of times of operating the operation means necessary for performing the second effect display result is different.

(Supplementary Note e11) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes e1 to e10, wherein the mini game is played and the mini game is played more than when the first notice is given without the mini game being played. The gaming table is characterized in that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when one notice is given.

(Supplementary note e12) A gaming machine having display means capable of executing decorative symbol variable display, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine and is configured to execute a plurality of types of mini-games. Of the mini-games is a first mini-game, one of the plurality of types of mini-games is a second mini-game, and the first mini-game is a display area. Is a mini game displayed using the display area, the second mini game is a mini game displayed using the certain display area, and the first mini game and the second mini game are different from each other. A gaming machine characterized by being a mini game.

(Supplementary note e13) The gaming machine according to supplementary note e12, further comprising advance notice means capable of executing a plurality of advance notices, wherein one of the plurality of advance notices is a first advance notice, and the plurality of advance notices are included. One of them is the second notice, and it seems that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the second notice is given than when the first notice is given. And one of the results of the first mini-game is a result (hereinafter, referred to as a “second result”) that suggests that the second notice will be given, and A gaming machine, wherein one of the results of the second mini-game is the second result.

(Supplementary note e14) The gaming machine according to supplementary note e12 or e13, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, and among the plurality of types of effects. One is a first effect, one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect, and when the first mini game is played, it is more important than the second effect. The first effect is configured to be performed more easily, and when the second mini game is performed, the second effect is configured to be performed more easily than the first effect. A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary note e15) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes e12 to e14, wherein the appearance rates of the plurality of types of mini-games are different between the non-electrically supported state and the electrically supported state. Game table.

(Supplementary note e16) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes e12 to e15, wherein the first mini-game is a mini-game performed by a first character appearing, and the second mini-game. The game machine is a mini game in which the first character appears and is played.

(Supplementary note e17) The gaming machine according to supplementary note e13, wherein the first mini-game is a game in which the first character may appear and is played, and the second mini-game is the first The first mini game is a mini game in which one character may appear and may be played, and the first mini game is a mini game in which a third character may appear and be played. , A mini game that may be played with a fourth character appearing. In the first mini game, the case where the third character appears is more than the case where the first character appears. The second result is easily derived, and in the second mini game, the second result is more easily derived when the fourth character appears than when the first character appears. A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary note e18) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes e12 to e17, wherein when the mini game is not displayed in the certain display area, another effect display (hereinafter, referred to as “third effect display”). ") is performed, and the third effect display is erased when the mini game is started.

(Supplementary note e19) The game console according to any one of supplementary notes e12 to e18, wherein the certain display area is partitioned by a frame.

(Supplementary note e20) The game console according to any one of supplementary notes e12 to e19, wherein the certain display area is a preset display area.

(Supplementary note e21) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes e12 to e20, wherein the certain display area is formed by enlarging a display area preset in association with the start of the mini game. A gaming table characterized in that.

(Supplementary note e22) The game console according to any one of supplementary notes e12 to e21, wherein the certain display area is an area provided in the display means.

(Supplementary note e23) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes e12 to e21, further comprising display means (hereinafter, referred to as "second display means") different from the display means, and the certain display. An area is an area provided on the second display means, wherein the gaming table is characterized.

(Supplementary Note e24) A gaming machine comprising a notice means capable of executing a plurality of notices and a display means capable of displaying a mini game, wherein the game table is a pachinko machine, and the plurality of notices are included. One is a first notice, one of the plurality of notices is a second notice, and when the second notice is given rather than the first notice is given. It is configured so that the final jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed, and the mini game is a game in which a plurality of results are prepared, and one of the plurality of results is the first one. A result, one of the plurality of results is a second result, the notice is a notice executed according to the result of the mini game, and the first result is derived. A gaming machine characterized in that the second notice is more likely to be given when the second result is derived than in the case.

(Supplementary Note e25) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note e24, wherein the result of the mini game becomes the second result before the result of the mini game is derived, and the second notice is given. It is suggested that it is easy to play.

(Supplementary note e26) The gaming machine according to supplementary note e24 or e25, comprising a production means capable of executing the first production, the production means is a display means, and the first production is a decorative symbol variation. It is an effect that is performed in relation to display, the first effect is an effect in which a plurality of effect results are prepared, and one of the plurality of effect results is a first effect result, One of the plurality of effect results is a second effect result, and the result of the first effect is the second effect result before the result of the first effect is derived. It is suggested that this is advantageous development, and it is easier for the second effect result to give advantageous advantages to the player than the second result. ..

(Supplementary note e27) The gaming machine according to supplementary note e26, wherein a big hit is awarded when the second effect result is derived.

(Supplementary note e28) The gaming machine according to Supplementary note e26 or e27, wherein the mini game is a game that can be executed in the first period, and the first effect is an effect that can be executed in the second period. The gaming machine, wherein the first period and the second period are periods at least partially overlapping with each other.

(Supplementary note e29) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes e26 to e28, wherein, in one decorative symbol variable display, the mini game is started earlier than the first effect. A gaming table characterized by.

(Supplementary note e30) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes e24 to e29, comprising: an operating means provided at a position operable by a player, wherein the operating means is operated in the mini game. Is configured to derive the result of the mini game, and is configured not to derive the result of the mini game when the operating means is not operated in the mini game. If the result of the game is not derived, the first notice is more likely to be given than the second notice, and if the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice is given rather than the first notice. The game table is characterized by the fact that it is easy to give notice.

(Supplementary Note e31) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes e24 to e30, even when the second notice is scheduled to be executed (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”), The gaming table, wherein the first notice is executed when the result of the mini game is not derived.

(Supplementary note e32) The gaming machine according to supplementary note e31, comprising a hold icon display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons, wherein one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon. Yes, one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon, the first notice is a notice that the first hold icon is displayed, and the second notice is In the first case, the mini game is started during execution of a certain symbol variation display in the state where the first hold icon is displayed. In, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon is not changed to the second hold icon, and in the first case, if the result of the mini game is derived. A game machine, wherein the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon.

(Supplementary note e33) The gaming machine according to supplementary note e31, comprising a hold icon display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons, wherein one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon. Yes, one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon, the first notice is a notice that the first hold icon is displayed, and the second notice is In the first case, the mini game is started during execution of a certain symbol variation display in the state where the first hold icon is displayed. In, when the result of the mini game is derived, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variable display, and in the first case, the mini game If the result of is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display, and a symbol started after the certain symbol variation display A gaming machine, wherein the first holding icon is changed to the second holding icon during execution of variable display.

(Supplementary note e34) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes e24 to e29, comprising operating means provided at a position operable by a player, wherein the operating means is operated in the mini game. A gaming table, wherein the same result is derived depending on whether or not the operation means is operated.

(Supplementary note e35) The game console according to any one of supplementary notes e24 to e34, wherein the mini game is started before the reach.

(Supplementary Note e36) A gaming machine provided with an operating means provided at a position operable by a player and a display means, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine, and the displaying means is a mini game. It is a displayable means, and is configured to derive a result of the mini game by operating the operation means, and is configured to change a result of the mini game depending on an operation status of the operation means. A gaming machine characterized in that the result of the game may include a result unrelated to the result of the judgment (hereinafter referred to as "first result").

(Supplementary note e37) The gaming machine according to supplementary note e36, wherein the mini game is a game aiming at achievement of a certain task, and whether or not the certain task is achieved depends on an operation situation of the operation means. A gaming table characterized by being a thing.

(Supplementary note e38) The gaming machine according to supplementary note e36 or e37, which is provided with a decorative symbol display means capable of executing decorative symbol variable display, and the mini game is started in the first period (hereinafter, referred to as “ "In the case of one"), there is a certain game, the first period is a period in which the start of the decorative symbol variable display is not suspended, and the decorative symbol variable display is executed in the first period. A gaming machine characterized by being in a non-playing period.

(Supplementary note e39) The gaming machine according to supplementary note e38, wherein the operation means is configured to be capable of performing an auto operation, and the mini game in the first case is configured to be incapable of performing the auto operation. A gaming table characterized by

(Supplementary note e40) The gaming machine according to supplementary note e38 or e39, wherein the mini game may be started in a second period (hereinafter, referred to as a “second case”). The period is a period including the execution of the decorative symbol variable display and the execution of the big hit game, and the first result is the first result as the result of the mini game in the first case rather than the second case. A game table characterized by being easily derived.
(Appendix e41)
The gaming table described in appendix e40,
The second period is a period that does not include the first period,
A game table characterized by that.

(Supplementary note e42) The game table according to supplementary note e40 or e41, wherein the second case is more relevant than the first case, as a result of the mini-game, to the result of the decorative symbol variable display. (Hereinafter, referred to as "second result") is easily derived, a gaming table.

(Supplementary note e43) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note e42, the second result in the case where the mini game is started during execution of the decorative symbol variable display is a notice or a look-ahead notice, and the jackpot game. The game machine, wherein the second result in the case where the mini game is started during execution of is a pre-reading notice.

(Supplementary note e44) The game console according to any one of supplementary notes e40 to e43, wherein the types of mini-games are different between the first case and the second case.

(Supplementary note e45) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes e40 to e44, wherein, in the mini game of the first case, an effective period display of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “first effective period display”). ) Is displayed, and in the mini game of the second case, the valid period display of the operating means (hereinafter, referred to as “second valid period display”) is displayed. The first effective period display is a meter display, the second effective period display is a meter display, the first effective period display and the second effective period display. A game table characterized in that the decreasing speed of the meter is different.

(Supplementary note e46) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes e40 to e45, wherein a display prompting an operation of the operation means in the mini game in the first case (hereinafter, referred to as “first operation promotion display”). ") is displayed, and in the mini game of the second case, a display for prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as "second operation promotion display") is displayed. The first operation prompting display is provided with a first number of display patterns, and the second operation prompting display is provided with a second number of display patterns. In the first number and the second number, the second number is larger, the gaming table.

(Supplementary note e47) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes e38 to e46, wherein in the first case, only the first result is derived as a result of the mini game. A gaming table.

(Supplementary note e48) A game table including operation means provided at a position operable by a player, and display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display, wherein the game table is a pachinko machine. , One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display, one of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display, the first effect display is , The effect display related to the decorative symbol variable display, the second effect display is a mini game effect display, and the first effect display is a big hit announcement (hereinafter referred to as "first announcement"). ) May be executed, and in the second effect display, a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter, referred to as “second notice”) may be derived. A game console characterized by being a display.

(Supplementary note e49) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note e48, the first notice is a notice by pseudo-repeated display, and the pseudo-repeated display is a temporary decoration pattern in one decorative symbol variable display. A game machine characterized by being a display for displaying a stop display a plurality of times, wherein the second notice is a notice that the number of temporary stop displays of the decorative pattern in the pseudo continuous display is increased.

(Supplementary note e50) The gaming machine according to supplementary note e48, wherein the first notice is a notice by pseudo-repeated display, and the pseudo-repeated display is a temporary decoration symbol in one decorative symbol variable display. A game table characterized in that it is a display for displaying a stop display a plurality of times, and the second notice is a notice that the pseudo continuous display is started.

(Supplementary note e51) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note e48, the first notice is a notice by pseudo-repeated display, and the pseudo-repeated display is a temporary decoration pattern in one decorative symbol variable display. A game machine characterized by being a display for displaying a stop display a plurality of times, wherein the second notice is a notice of the number of temporary stop displays of the decorative pattern in the pseudo continuous display.

(Supplementary Note f1) A game table provided with a first operation means and a second operation means, which is configured to be capable of executing a plurality of types of effects, and is one of the plurality of types of effects. The effect is a first effect, and is configured such that the first effect can be started according to the operation of the first operation means, and the first effect is being executed. A game table, wherein the second operation means is configured to vibrate in at least a part of the states (hereinafter, referred to as "first state"). The first effect may be a notice effect. Further, the second operating means may be a larger operating means than the first operating means, or may be a smaller operating means.

(Supplementary Note f2) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note f1, wherein the first state is a state during the entire period in which the first effect is executed.

(Supplementary Note f3) The game machine according to Supplementary Note f1 or f2, wherein one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect, and the second operation means is within a second period. There is a case where the second effect is started when operated, and a case where the second effect is not started even when the second operation means is operated. The operation means is an operation means that may vibrate when the second operation means is operated within the second period,

A gaming table characterized by that. The second operating means may be an operating means that always vibrates when the second operating means is operated within the second period.

(Supplementary Note f4) In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note f3, even in at least a part of the states in which the second effect is being executed (hereinafter, referred to as “second state”). A game table characterized in that the second operation means is configured to vibrate, and the first state is a state in which the second effect is not being executed.

(Supplementary note f5) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes f1 to f4, when the first operation means is operated within a first period, the first effect is started. In some cases, the first effect is not started even if the first operation means is operated, and the second operation means is configured to operate the second operation means within the first period. A gaming table, which is a manipulating device that may vibrate when the manipulating device is operated. That is, even when the first effect is not executed, the second operation means may be vibrated or may be vibrated without fail.

(Supplementary Note f6) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note f5, which is configured to be capable of executing a plurality of types of notifications, and one of the plurality of types of notifications is a first notification, and The one notification is a notification that prompts the user to operate the first operation means, and the first notification is configured to be performed within the first period. That is, the second operating means may be an operating means that may vibrate when the second operating means is operated while the first notification is being executed. It may be an operating means for performing.

(Supplementary Note f7) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes f1 to f6, wherein one of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect, and the operation of the first operation means is performed. According to the above, it is configured such that either one of the first effect and the third effect can be started, and in the state where the third effect is being executed, A game table characterized in that the second operation means is configured not to vibrate.

(Supplementary Note f8) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes f1 to f7, wherein the first effect is an effect that can be started even when the first operation means is in a non-operation state. Characteristic game table.

(Supplementary Note f9) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes f1 to f8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note f10) The game console according to any one of supplementary notes f1 to f8, wherein the game console is a slot machine.
(Supplementary note g1) operation means provided at a position where the player can operate,

A gaming machine comprising: a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of displays, wherein one of the plurality of displays is a first display and one of the plurality of displays is a first display. Second display, the first display is a display including a display related to the operation valid period of the operating means, the second display includes a display related to the operation valid period of the operating means It is a display, and the second display is configured such that a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as “first notice display”) is started in response to the operation of the operation unit. Characteristic game table.

(Supplementary note g2) The gaming machine according to supplementary note g1, wherein the first notice display includes a display including a display relating to an operation valid period of the operation means. ..

(Supplementary Note g3) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note g1 or g2, wherein the first notice display is a display that may be displayed during execution of a certain effect, and the certain effect is the first A gaming table, characterized in that it is configured to develop after the notice display is started.

(Supplementary Note g4) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note g3, wherein one of the plurality of displays is a third display, and the third display is operated by the operation means during the operation valid period. The third display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as a “third notice display”), and the certain effect is the third notice display. A gaming table, which is configured to evolve after being displayed.

(Supplementary Note g5) The gaming machine according to supplementary note g4, wherein the third notice display is a display that may be displayed even if the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period. A game table characterized in that the first notice display is a display which is not displayed when the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period.

(Supplementary note g6) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes g1 to g5, wherein the first display is a display for displaying the first notice display after the operation means is operated. The gaming table, wherein the first display is a display in which another notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "second notice display") is performed even before the operation means is operated.

(Supplementary Note g7) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note g6, wherein the first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a first display mode, and the first notice display is a third notice. Is a notice display that may be displayed in a display mode, the second notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a second display mode, and the second notice display is a fourth notice display. Is a notice display that may be displayed in the display mode of, and the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode more than when the second notice display is displayed in the second display mode. Is configured such that the first notice display according to the third display mode is more likely to be displayed, and the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. Also, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed.

(Supplementary note g8) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes g1 to g6, wherein one of the plurality of displays is a fourth display, and the fourth display is the operating means. The operation prompting display is a display that may be displayed in a fifth display mode, and the operation promoting display is a display that may be displayed in a sixth display mode. , The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in the first display mode, and the first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in the third display mode In the case where the operation promotion display is displayed in the sixth display mode, the operation promotion display is displayed in the fifth display mode, the first display mode in the third display mode. The notice display is configured to be easily displayed, and the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode more than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. In this case, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed, which is a gaming table.

(Supplementary note g9) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes g1 to g8, wherein the first notice display is a display that is displayed during at least a part of the remaining period of the operation valid period. The period during which the first notice display is displayed when the operation means is operated after the first period has elapsed from the start of the operation valid period is the third period, and the operation valid period is The period during which the first notice display is displayed when the operating means is operated after the second period has elapsed from the start is the fourth period, and the fourth period is longer than the first period. A gaming machine, wherein the second period is a longer period and the fourth period is a shorter period than the third period.

(Supplementary note g10) The gaming machine according to supplementary note g9, wherein the total length of the first period and the third period is the same as the operation valid period or shorter than the operation valid period. It is a length, and the total length of the second period and the fourth period is the same length as the operation valid period or a length shorter than the operation valid period, Game table.

(Supplementary Note g11) A gaming table comprising an operating means provided at a position operable by a player, and a display means capable of displaying a first display, wherein the first display is the operating means. Is a display including a display regarding the operation valid period, and the first display is such that a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as “first notice display”) is started in response to the operation of the operation unit. And the first notice display is a display including a display relating to an operation valid period of the operation means.

(Supplementary note g12) The gaming machine according to supplementary note g11, wherein the first notice display is a display that may be displayed during execution of a certain effect, and the certain effect is the first notice display. A gaming table, which is configured to evolve after being displayed.

(Supplementary note g13) The gaming machine according to supplementary note g12, wherein one of the plurality of displays is a third display, and the third display is operated by the operation means during the operation valid period. The third display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as a “third notice display”), and the certain effect is the third notice display. A gaming table, which is configured to evolve after being displayed.

(Supplementary note g14) The gaming machine according to supplementary note g13, wherein the third notice display is a display that may be displayed even if the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period. A game table characterized in that the first notice display is a display which is not displayed when the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period.

(Supplementary note g15) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes g11 to g14, wherein the first display is a display in which the first notice display is performed after the operation means is operated. The gaming table, wherein the first display is a display in which another notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "second display") is performed even before the operation means is operated.

(Supplementary Note g16) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes g11 to g15, wherein one of the plurality of displays is a fourth display, and the fourth display is the operation means. The operation promotion display is a notice display that may be displayed in the fifth display mode, and the operation promotion display may be displayed in the sixth display mode The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in the first display mode, and the first notice display may be displayed in the third display mode The case where the operation prompting display is displayed in the sixth display mode is more than the case where the operation prompting display is displayed in the fifth display mode. The first notice display is configured to be easily displayed, and the first notice display is the third display mode more than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. The gaming table characterized in that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when it is displayed in.

(Supplementary note g17) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes g11 to g16, wherein the first notice display is a display that is displayed during at least a part of the remaining period of the operation valid period. The period during which the first notice display is displayed when the operation means is operated after the first period has elapsed from the start of the operation valid period is the third period, and the operation valid period is The period during which the first notice display is displayed when the operating means is operated after the second period has elapsed from the start is the fourth period, and the fourth period is longer than the first period. A gaming machine, wherein the second period is a longer period and the fourth period is a shorter period than the third period.

(Supplementary note g18) The gaming machine according to supplementary note g17, wherein the total length of the first period and the third period is the same as the operation valid period or shorter than the operation valid period. It is a length, and the total length of the second period and the fourth period is the same length as the operation valid period or a length shorter than the operation valid period, Game table.

(Supplementary note g19) A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine, and one of the plurality of displays is a first display, One of the plurality of displays is a second display, the first display is a display related to a certain performance, and the second display is a display related to the certain performance. The first display is a display that may be displayed once as a display forming at least a part of a combination of decorative symbols during execution of the decorative symbol variable display, and the second display is the decorative symbol. Is a display that does not form a combination of, and the first display and the second display are at least partially different from each other.

(Supplementary note g20) The gaming machine according to supplementary note g19, wherein the certain effect is an effect that is started after the first display is displayed.

(Supplementary Note g21) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note g19 or g20, wherein the first display is a display provided with a first number of patterns and the second display is a second number. Is a display in which the number of patterns is provided, and the second number is larger than the first number.

(Supplementary Note g22) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note g21, wherein the first number is one.

(Supplementary note g23) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes g19 to g22, wherein the combination of the decorative symbols is three, and the certain effect is the first of three as the combination of the decorative symbols. A gaming machine, which is an effect that is started when the display is once displayed. Here, the display modes of the three first displays may be the same, or some or all of them may be different from each other.

(Supplementary note g24) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes g19 to g22, wherein the combination of the decorative symbols is three, and the combination of the decorative symbols is configured to be sequentially displayed once. The gaming table, wherein the certain effect is an effect that is started when the first display is displayed as a decorative pattern that is finally displayed once in the combination of the decorative patterns.

(Supplementary note g25) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes g19 to g24, the display means may temporarily display the first display during execution of the decorative symbol variable display. It is a means that may display a notice display for notifying that the first notice is displayed once more easily when the notice display is displayed than when the notice display is not displayed. A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary note g26) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes g19 to g25, wherein the decorative symbol variation display is a combination of decorative symbols according to the result of the winning/disapproval determination after the variation of the decorative symbol is started. The gaming table is configured to be fixedly displayed, and the first display is a display that is not fixedly displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols.

(Supplementary note g27) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes g19 to g26, including operating means provided at a position where the player can operate, and the certain effect is using the operating means. The first display is a display including a display imitating the operation means, the second display is a display including a display imitating the operation means, the first The display is a display that does not include a display related to the operation valid period of the operation means, and the second display is a display that includes a display related to the operation valid period of the operation means in the certain effect. Game table.

(Supplementary note g28) The gaming machine according to supplementary note g27, wherein the first display is a display that is displayed before the operation valid period of the operation means in the certain effect is started. Characteristic game table.

(Supplementary Note g29) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes g19 to g26, including operating means provided at a position operable by a player, wherein the operating means is one of a plurality of states. Is a means capable of taking one of the states, one of the plurality of states is a first state, one of the plurality of states is a second state, The first state and the second state are different states, and the first display is a display pattern (hereinafter, referred to as a "first display pattern") corresponding to the operation means in the first state. .), and the second display is a display having a display pattern (hereinafter, referred to as “second display pattern”) according to the operating means in the second state. The second display is a display having the first display pattern, the second display is a display having the second display pattern, and the second display is a display having the first display pattern. There is a case where the second display is displayed in the second display pattern in the certain effect after one display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”), and the first case. The game machine is characterized in that the operation means in is configured to be in the second state more easily than in the first state. Hereinafter, it will be additionally described including the above description.

(Supplementary Note h1) A gaming machine including image display means, wherein the image display means is display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one type of the plurality of types of displays is It is a first display, the first display is a display for notifying the time until a certain effect is performed, and one type of display of the plurality of types of display is a second display. The second display is a display that may give a notice that the time until the certain effect is started changes, and the second display is displayed during the display of the first display. There is a case that there is a case, a gaming table. Here, the “certain effect” may be an effect by display and effect moving means (including an image display means such as a sub liquid crystal, a versa writer, a light guide plate).

(Supplementary note h2) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note h1, when the second display is displayed, the display mode of the first display is changed after the second display is displayed. A gaming table that is configured. Here, even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change. The display mode of the first display may change only when the second display is displayed.

(Supplementary Note h3) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h1 or h2, wherein the image display means is a means including a plurality of image display means, and one of the plurality of image display means is an image display means. Is a first image display means, one image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means, the second image display means, the first image A gaming table, characterized in that it is arranged in front of the display means.

(Supplementary note h4) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h3, wherein the second display may be displayed on the second image display means, and the second display may be displayed. The game table, wherein the first image display means may be overlapped by the image display means.

(Supplementary note h5) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h1 to h4, even when the second display is displayed, the time informed by the first display is advanced. Characteristic game table.

(Supplementary Note h6) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes h1 to h5, wherein after the timer reaches 0, a display different from the second display is displayed. Stand.

(Supplementary note h7) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h1 to h6, wherein the second display is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the second display is not displayed.

(Supplementary note h8) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h1 to h7, one type of display of a plurality of types of display is a third display, and the certain effect is The game table characterized in that it is the third display displayed by the image display means, and that the display of the substitute sign is a performance display.

(Supplementary note h9) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes h1 to h7, comprising a production movable means, wherein the production movable means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of operations, One type of operation is an effect operation, and the certain effect is an effect operation by an effect moving means. Here, an operation other than the effect operation may be executed, and as the operation other than the effect operation, for example, there is an operation at power-on, an initial position returning operation, or a retract operation. Further, the effect moving means is not limited to one provided on the game board, and may be one provided on a frame (front door), for example.

(Supplementary Note h10) The gaming machine according to any one of the supplementary notes h1 to h9, characterized in that when the certain effect is generated, a big hit is easier than when it is not generated. ..

(Supplementary note h11) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h1 to h10, wherein a hot effect display is displayed from the time the first display is displayed until the time the second display is displayed. A gaming table characterized by being sometimes played.

(Supplementary Note h12) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h1 to h11, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note h13) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h1 to h11, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

(Supplementary Note h14) A gaming machine provided with image display means, wherein the image display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one type of the plurality of types of displays is One effect display, one type of display of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display, the period display is a display that is displayed during a certain period during reach, The period display is a display for notifying a timing (hereinafter, referred to as “first timing”) at which the first effect display may be displayed, and the period is displayed before the first timing. A game table characterized in that the display may be erased. Here, the period in which the period display is displayed is not limited to during the reach, but may be during a change or during a big hit. Further, even during the reach, it may be displayed in the first reach but not displayed in the second reach.

(Supplementary note h15) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note h14, one type of display of the plurality of types of display is a third effect display, and the third effect display is displayed by the period display. There is a case where the timing is not notified, and the period display is hidden during the display of the third effect display. Here, in addition to the effect display, for example, an error notification such as a ball pulling error, a notification indicating a firing position, a notification other than an error such as a notification for preventing the player from forgetting to remove the prepaid card, a light emission by an LED, a performance operation by an accessory May be performed. Further, the timing of displaying the third display may be notified by the period display. The timing at which the third display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

(Supplementary note h16) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note h15, the third effect display may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter, referred to as “big hit symbol variation”) in which the result of the hit determination is a big hit. A game stand characterized by a certain effect display.

(Supplementary note h17) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note h16, the third effect display may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter, referred to as "missing symbol variation") in which the result of the hit determination is out of alignment. It is a certain effect display, and is configured such that the big hit symbol variation is displayed more frequently than the lost symbol variation, the third effect display being displayed.

(Supplementary note h18) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h15 to h17, comprising a production movable means, wherein the production movable means is a means for performing a production operation, and the third production. The game stand characterized in that the output movable means may perform the effect operation during the display of the display.

(Supplementary Note h19) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h14 to h18, wherein after the period display is hidden, the period display is in an easily visible state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Supplementary note h20) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h14 to h19, characterized in that the period display is hidden until a certain period during the reach ends.

(Supplementary Note h21) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h14 to h19, wherein the period display is a display that is always displayed during a certain period during the reach. ..

(Supplementary Note h22) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h14 to h21, wherein the period display notifies the timing of displaying the second effect display (hereinafter, referred to as “second timing”). A game table characterized by being displayed. Here, the timing displayed by the period display may be three times or more. In addition, the place for notifying the chance increase may be fixed in correspondence with the reach, such that the chance increase is notified three times when a certain reach occurs and the chance increase is notified twice when another reach occurs. It is also possible to change the location for notifying the chance up such that the notification is given three times when it is and the notification is given only once when it is. In that case, the case of “notifying a lot of timings” may be more likely to be a big hit than the case of “not so much notification”, or may be more likely to be missed. Also, the likelihood of a big hit does not have to change depending on the number of timing notifications. Further, the larger the number of opportunities increased, the larger the jackpot may be made, or the smaller the number of opportunities increased, the larger the jackpot may be made.

(Supplementary Note h23) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes h14 to h22, wherein the image display means is a means including a plurality of image display means, and the image display means is a plurality of image display means. The one image display means is a first image display means, one image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means, the first image display means, The second image display means is an image display means that may display the period display, the second image display means is an image display means that may perform an effect operation, and the second image display means displays the period display. A game table, which is characterized in that at least a part thereof may overlap.

(Supplementary Note h24) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h14 to h23, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note h25) A gaming machine provided with image display means, wherein the image display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one type of the plurality of types of displays is It is one effect display, one type of display of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display, and one type of display of the plurality of types of display is a third display. Yes, the period display is a display that is displayed during a certain period during reach, and the period display is a timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter, "first timing"). That is, at least a part of the first effect display may be overlapped by the third display before the first timing. A gaming table.

(Supplementary Note h26) A gaming machine including display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying the first display, and at least a part of the first display is displayed according to the passage of time. The aspect changes at a first speed, the display means is a means capable of displaying the second display, and according to the passage of time, at least part of the second display has a second display aspect. A game table characterized in that the first speed is different from the second speed, which changes with speed.

(Supplementary note h27) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h26, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one type of the plurality of types of displays is a time display. Yes, the time display is a display in which at least a part of the time display is changed in accordance with the passage of time within a certain period, and one of the time displays is A gaming machine characterized by being a first display and one of the time displays is the second display.

(Supplementary Note h28) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note h26 or h27, wherein the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display.

(Supplementary note h29) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h26 to h28, wherein the first display is a display in which a display mode changes until a first time elapses, and the second display The display is a display in which the display mode changes until the second time elapses. When the first time elapses, the third display is displayed, and when the second time elapses, the fourth display. Is displayed, and the gaming table. Here, the third display and the fourth display may be the same or different. Further, the third display may have higher reliability than the fourth display, and the fourth display may have higher reliability than the third display.

(Supplementary note h30) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h26 to h29, one type of display of the plurality of types of display is a first type of display, and the first type of display is A gaming table characterized in that there are the first display and the second display as types of display. Here, the first display and the second display may be different types of display.

(Supplementary note h31) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note h30, the first type of display is a timer advance notice display, and one type of display of the plurality of types of display is the first type. And the timer notice display is a display for notifying a time until the first effect display is displayed.

(Supplementary note h32) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h30, further comprising operation means, wherein the first type of display is an operation effective period display, and the operation effective period display is the operation means. Is a display showing a period during which the operation of is valid, wherein the gaming table.

(Supplementary Note h33) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note h30, the first type of display is a period display, and one type of the plurality of types of display is a second type of display. It is an effect display, and the period display is a display that may notify a timing (hereinafter, referred to as “first timing”) at which the second effect display may be displayed in the first period. The gaming machine is characterized in that the first timing is notified during the period from the start to the end of the first period.

(Supplementary Note h34) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h26 to h33, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note h35) A gaming machine including display means, wherein the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one type of the plurality of types of displays is a countdown display. Yes, the countdown display is an effect in which notification of a time until a certain effect is performed (hereinafter, referred to as “time notification”) may be executed, and the time notification is executed by the countdown display. In the case where the countdown display is displayed, the countdown display may be displayed in the first display mode, and when the time notification is being executed by the count gown display, the countdown display is the first display. A gaming table characterized in that it may change from the mode to the second display mode.

(Supplementary Note h36) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h35, wherein the first display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a first display size, and the second display. The mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a second display size, and the second display size is larger than the first display size.

(Supplementary note h37) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h35 or h36, wherein when the display of the countdown display is started, the countdown display is displayed in the first display mode.

(Supplementary note h38) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h35 to h37, when the countdown display is displayed, the first display mode is necessarily changed to the second display mode. A gaming table characterized by.

(Supplementary note 39) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 35 to 37, wherein the game table is changed to the second display mode rather than being displayed in the first display mode as it is. The game table is characterized by the fact that the jackpot pattern is likely to be finally confirmed and displayed.

(Supplementary note 40) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes 35 to 39, characterized in that the countdown display is started and ended within a period of one symbol variation display. ..

(Supplementary note h41) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h35 to h40, when the countdown display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the countdown display moves, A game table characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note h42) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note h41, wherein the time notification is continued by the countdown display while the countdown display is moving.

(Supplementary note h43) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h41, wherein the time notification by the countdown display is interrupted while the countdown display is moving.

(Supplementary Note h44) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h35 to h43, wherein when the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, the certain effect by the countdown display is performed. A notification indicating that the time is 0 is performed, and after the notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed is 0 is performed by the countdown display, the countdown display is erased. A gaming table that is configured.

(Supplementary Note h45) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h44, wherein when the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, a specific display is displayed and then hidden.

(Supplementary Note h46) The game console according to any one of supplementary notes h35 to h45, wherein the game console may not change to the second display mode.

(Supplementary Note h47) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h35 to h46, wherein the display means includes a plurality of display means, and one display means of the plurality of display means is A first display means, one display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means, and the countdown display of the first display mode is displayed by the first display means. A gaming table characterized by being sometimes played.

(Supplementary Note h48) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h47, wherein the second display means may display a countdown display of the second display means.

(Supplementary Note h49) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h35 to h48, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note h50) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h35 to h48, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

(Supplementary Note h51) A gaming machine including display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, wherein one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display, and the first display is a period. The first display is a display that may be displayed during a certain period of the reach effect display, and one of the plurality of types of display is Second display, the second display is a notice display, the first display is a display for notifying the first timing, and the first timing, the second display It is a timing at which display may be started, and the first display may be erased before the first timing after the display of the first display is started. Characteristic game table.

(Supplementary Note h52) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note h51, one of the plurality of types of display is a third display, the third display is a performance display, and the third The display is a display different from the second display, the third display may be displayed before the first timing, and the first display may be the third display. A gaming table characterized in that it is a display that does not notify the timing to start the display, and the first display is erased during the display of the third display.

(Supplementary Note h53) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note h52, wherein the third display is a notice display.

(Supplementary note h54) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note h53, when the third display is displayed, final jackpot symbols are more likely to be finalized and displayed than when the third display is not displayed. A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note h55) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h52 to h54, which is provided with effect moving means capable of executing a plurality of types of operations, and one of the plurality of types of operations is a first And the first operation is a performance operation, and the first operation may be performed during the display of the third display.

(Supplementary Note h56) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h51 to h55, wherein the first display is displayed again after the first display is erased. A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note h57) The gaming machine according to supplementary notes h51 to h55, wherein the first display is not displayed until the certain period of time elapses after the first display is erased. A gaming table characterized by being

(Supplementary note h58) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h51 to h55, wherein the first display is moved again after the certain period has elapsed after the first display was erased. A gaming table, characterized in that it is configured to be displayed.
(Supplementary Note h59) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes h51 to h58,

The game machine characterized in that the certain period is a period during execution of super reach.

(Supplementary Note h60) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h51 to h59, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display, and the fourth display is a performance display. The fourth display is a display different from the second display, the first display is a display that may also notify the second timing, and the second timing The game table, wherein the fourth display is a timing at which display may be started.

(Supplementary Note h61) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h51 to h60, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note h62) A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, wherein one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display and the first display is a countdown. It is a display including a display, the countdown display is a display that may include a timing notification, the timing notification is a notification performed by updating the display of the countdown display the timing at which a certain effect is performed That is, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display.

(Supplementary Note h63) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h62, wherein the first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes.

(Supplementary Note h64) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note h63, wherein the first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a first display size. The display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size, and in the first display size and the second display size, the second display size Is a larger game table.

(Supplementary note h65) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 62 to 64, wherein when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is displayed in the first display mode. A gaming table characterized by that.

(Supplementary note h66) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h62 to h65, wherein the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode while the countdown display is being displayed. A game table that is characterized by constant changes.

(Supplementary note h67) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h62 to h65, wherein the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. A gaming table characterized in that, when one display is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed.

(Supplementary note h68) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h62 to h67, characterized in that the display of the first display is started and ended during one execution of the symbol variation display. And a gaming table.

(Supplementary note h69) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h62 to h68, wherein the first display is a display whose display position may change.

(Supplementary note h70) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h69, wherein when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes. A gaming table characterized by that. Here, the first display of the first display mode is displayed at a first position, the first display of the second display mode is displayed at a second position, It may be a gaming table.

(Supplementary note h71) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h69 or h70, wherein the first display is a display that may be moved and displayed, and the display position of the first display is changed by the move display. A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note h72) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note h71, wherein the update display of the countdown display is continued even while the movement display is being displayed.

(Supplementary note h73) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h71, wherein the update display of the countdown display is interrupted during the display of the movement display.

(Supplementary Note h74) The game console according to any one of supplementary notes h62 to h73, wherein the countdown display is a time countdown display.

(Supplementary Note h75) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h74, wherein the timing notification notifies that the certain effect is performed by displaying 0 in the countdown display. A gaming table characterized by being a notification.

(Supplementary Note h76) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h74 or h75, wherein the countdown display is erased after a display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display. A gaming table.

(Supplementary Note h77) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h76, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a second display, and the second display is not included in the certain effect. It is a display, and when the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is erased after the second display is displayed. Game table.

(Supplementary Note h78) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h62 to h77, wherein the display means is a means including a plurality of display means, and is one of the plurality of display means. Is a first display means, one of the plurality of display means is a second display means, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, A game table, wherein the first display is displayed on the first display means.

(Supplementary note h79) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h78, wherein the first display in the second display mode may be displayed on the second display means. ..

(Supplementary note h80) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h62 to h79, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary note h81) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h62 to h79, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

(Supplementary Note h82) A gaming machine including display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a timer display, and the timer display includes a time display. It is configured such that a certain effect may be started after the display of the timer display is started, and the certain effect is performed even after the display of the timer display is started. It is configured so that it may not be started, and the certain effect may be started when the display of the timer display is started and the time display reaches a certain time. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when the timer display is started and the certain effect is executed than when the timer display is started and the certain effect is not executed. A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary note h83) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h82, wherein after the timer display is started and the time display reaches the certain time, the certain effect is started and the timer display is displayed. After the start, the certain effect is not started if the time display does not reach the certain time, the gaming table.

(Supplementary note h84) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h82 or h83, wherein the certain effect is at least one type of advance notice among a plurality of types of advance notices, and one of the plurality of types of advance notices is , A first notice, one of the plurality of types of notices is a second notice, and one of the plurality of types of notices is a third notice. One of the notices is a fourth notice, the first notice is a look-ahead notice, and the second notice is a symbol variation display when it is executed rather than when it is not executed. It is a notice that the execution time will be long, the third notice is a notice that the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when it is executed than when it is not executed, and the fourth notice is A game table characterized by being a notice that it can be a big hit. Here, the first notice may be a pending change notice, a prefetch mode, or a continuous notice. Further, the second notice may be a pseudo-relation, or a notice effect by inserting a movie. The third notice may be a cut-in notice or a next notice. The fourth notice may be a big hit notification.

(Supplementary note h85) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h82 to h84, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a mini game display, and the display is based on the display result of the mini game. A game table characterized in that the time display reaches the certain time and the certain effect is started.

(Supplementary Note h86) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h85, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying an advance notice item, and the advance notice item may be displayed in accordance with the display result of the mini game. The notice item includes a display indicating that the timer display is started to be displayed, and the time display is the certain time after the notice item is started to be displayed. When the notice item is not displayed, the certain effect is not started without the time display reaching the certain time, A gaming table characterized by.

(Supplementary note h87) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h85 or h86, wherein the result of the display of the mini game is before the change of the time display is started and before the time display reaches the certain time. Is configured to be derived from a gaming table.

(Supplementary note h88) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h85 or h86, wherein the display result of the mini game is after the change of the time display is started and before the time display reaches the certain time. Is configured to be derived from a gaming table.

(Supplementary Note h89) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h85 to h88, wherein a result unrelated to the certain effect may be derived as a result of the display of the mini game, and the timer display is provided. The game machine is configured so that the display of the mini game is started before the display of is started.

(Supplementary note h90) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h82 to h89, the timer display when the certain effect is not started is erased without displaying the certain time in the time display. A gaming table, which is configured to be.

(Supplementary Note h91) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h82 to h90, the timer display is a display started in any one of a plurality of aspects, and the plurality of aspects are included. One of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect, one of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect, the first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects, The certain effect is configured to be more easily started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode. A gaming table characterized by.

(Supplementary Note h92) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note h91, wherein one of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect, and the third aspect is an aspect different from the first aspect. The third mode is a mode different from the second mode, and when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the jackpot symbol is configured to be confirmed and displayed. When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, it is different from the big hit game that is performed in response to the fact that the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed, and a state advantageous to the player is given The gaming table characterized by being.

(Supplementary Note h93) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note h92, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, before the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed without changing the time display. The timer display is configured to disappear,
A game table characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note h94) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note h92, in the case where the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the certain time is displayed even when the time display reaches the certain time. A gaming table, characterized in that the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed without the effect being started.

(Supplementary Note h95) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h92 to h94, wherein the first mode is a mode in which the first time display in the timer display is the first time. The second mode is a mode in which the time display first displayed in the timer display is the second time, and the third mode is the time display first displayed in the timer display. It is an aspect of three times, in the first time and the second time, the second time is a longer time, the third time is different from the first time. And the third time is a time different from the second time, and the third time is a time displayed only when the advantageous state is given. A gaming table.

(Supplementary note h96) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note h95, the time display that is first displayed in the timer display is a display of the number of seconds and is also configured to be able to display a decimal point. The display of the first time as the time display first displayed in the display is a time display in which the decimal point is 0, and the second time as the time display first displayed in the timer display. Is a time display in which the decimal point is 0, and the third time display as a time display first displayed in the timer display is a time display in which the decimal point is other than 0. A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary note h97) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h95 or h96, wherein the display of the first time as the time display first displayed in the timer display is a variable display of symbols that the timer display gives a notice. It is a display of a time shorter than the execution time, and the display of the second time as the time display first displayed in the timer display is a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variable display for which the timer display gives a notice. The display of the third time as the first time display displayed in the timer display is a display of a time longer than the execution time of the symbol variable display for which the timer display gives a notice, A gaming table characterized by.

(Supplementary note h98) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h82 to h97, comprising: a production display unit capable of executing a production display, wherein the production display unit is a unit capable of displaying the timer display. The display means and the effect are configured so that there is a case (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”) in which the timer display is displayed by one of the display means and the effect display means. There is a case where the timer display is displayed on both of the display means (hereinafter, referred to as “second case”). In the first case, the certain effect may not be started. The gaming machine is configured as described above, and in the case of the above-mentioned item 2, the certain effect is configured to be started.

(Supplementary Note h99) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h82 to h98, wherein the timer display is a display in which a time display is displayed as a source, and the certain time is 0. There is a gaming table.

(Supplementary Note h100) A gaming machine provided with a display means, wherein the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display. The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a second display, the display of one of the plurality of types of display is a third display, among the plurality of types of display The first display is a fourth display, the first display is one of the displays relating to the notice, and the second display is a display by displaying the hold icon in a certain mode. The third display is one of the displays for announcing that the execution of the effect will be started (the display indicating that the execution of the effect is waiting). The fourth display is one of the advance notices different from the second notice, and the display of the first display is started before the display of the second display is started. There is, the third display was started in the first state, the display may end in the second state, after the display of the third display in the second state has ended , The display of the fourth display is started in the second state, and the second state may be changed to the second state after the first state. A game characterized by being one of states in which an icon may be displayed, and the second state being one of states in which a hold icon may not be displayed. Stand.

(Supplementary Note h101) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h100, wherein the third display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display may end in the next symbol variable display. And a gaming table.

(Supplementary Note h102) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h100 or h102, wherein the display of the position of the plurality of types of display is the fifth display, and the fifth display is the display of the background in the hold icon. The fifth display is configured to be displayable in the first state, and the fifth display is configured not to be displayed in the second state, and the first state is A state in which a certain reach effect is not executed, the second state is a state in which a certain reach effect is executed, and at least a part of the area in which the third display is displayed. Is configured so as to overlap the area in which the fifth display is displayed, the gaming table.

(Supplementary Note h103) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h102, wherein the display means is means capable of displaying a notice display that is performed by displaying the fifth display in a certain mode. A gaming table.

(Supplementary note h104) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h102 or h103, wherein at least a part of the area in which the first display is displayed overlaps with the area in which the fifth display is displayed. The gaming table characterized by being.

(Supplementary note h105) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h102 or h103, wherein the area in which the first display is displayed does not overlap with the area in which the fifth display is displayed. A gaming table characterized by.

(Supplementary note h106) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h100 to h105, the first display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed in the next symbol variation display. A gaming table characterized by the fact that it cannot be played.

(Supplementary Note h107) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h100 to h105, wherein the display of the fourth display is performed in an area in which the third display is displayed. Game table.

(Supplementary Note h108) A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display is a first display, and one of the plurality of types of display is One display is a second display, one display of the plurality of types of display is a third display, and one display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display, and the first display is a display that at least suggests that the second display may be started. The second display is a display of a hold icon in a display mode of a pre-reading notice, the third display is a display for notifying that the execution of a certain production is started, and the fourth display Is a notice display regarding the symbol variation display being executed, the fifth display is a display indicating that at least the hold icon is displayed, and the fourth display is displayed as the certain effect. The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started, and the display of the third display is started in the first state. In some cases, the display of the third display started in the first state may end in the second state, and the display of the third display ends in the second state. After that, the display of the fourth display may be started in the second state, and the second state may be set after the first state, and the first state may be a certain reach. The effect is not being executed, the second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed, and the fifth display can be displayed together with the hold icon in the first state. The gaming table is configured such that the fifth display is not displayed together with the hold icon in the second state.

(Supplementary note h109) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note h108, the third display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display continues even after the next symbol variation display is started. A gaming table, which may be displayed.

(Supplementary note h110) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h108 or h109, wherein at least a part of the third display is configured to overlap the fifth display. ..

(Supplementary Note h111) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h108 to h110, wherein the fifth display is a display capable of being displayed in a plurality of types of modes, and is one of the plurality of types of modes. The aspect is the first aspect, one aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the second aspect, the fifth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. When the fifth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode, a big hit symbol is more likely to be fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display than when not performed, a game characterized by Stand.

(Supplementary note h112) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h108 to h110, wherein the fifth display is a display capable of being displayed in a plurality of types of modes, and is one of the plurality of types of modes. The aspect is the first aspect, one aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the second aspect, the fifth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. A game characterized in that the display of the second display is more likely to be started when the fifth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when not performed. Stand.

(Supplementary Note h113) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h108 to h112, wherein at least a part of the first display is configured to overlap the fifth display. Characteristic game table.

(Supplementary Note h114) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h108 to h112, characterized in that the first display and the fifth display are configured not to overlap. Stand.

(Supplementary note h115) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h108 to h114, the first display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, and the symbol variation display to be started next is started. A gaming table characterized by being erased before being played.

(Supplementary Note h116) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h108 to h115, wherein the fourth display is displayed in an area in which the third display is displayed. Stand.

(Supplementary note h117) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h108 to h115, further comprising operation means operable by a player, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a sixth The sixth display is a display that prompts the operation of the operating means, the sixth display is a display that is started after the third display is started, When the operation means is operated during the display of the sixth display, the display of the fourth display is started, and the third display is displayed before the display of the sixth display is started. A game table characterized by being a display to be ended.

(Supplementary note h118) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h117, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display and the seventh display is the display of the sixth display. A game table characterized in that it is a display announcing that it will be started, and that the third display is a display that is terminated while the seventh display is being displayed.

(Supplementary note h119) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h108 to h118, one display of the plurality of types of display is an eighth display, and the eighth display is a variation. It is a display of the icon, there are cases where two of the third display is displayed, after the display of one of the two third display is finished, the other display mode changes, the display mode is The changed third display overlaps the eighth display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Supplementary note h120) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note 119, when two of the third displays are displayed, all the displays of the third display are finished in one symbol variation display, Characteristic game table.

(Supplementary Note h121) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h108 to h120, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display is a ninth display, and the ninth display is an explanation. The ninth display is a display displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed, and the third display is displayed in the first display area. A game table characterized by a display that may be displayed.

(Supplementary Note h122) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 108 to h121, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note h123) A gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, wherein one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display, and One display is a second display, one display of the plurality of types of display is a third display, and one display of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display The first display is a display of a character related to the second display, the second display is a display of a hold icon in a display mode of a prefetching notice, and the third display is , A display indicating that the display of a certain notice display is waiting to be started, the fourth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back surface of the hold icon, and the display of the first display is The display of the second display may be started after it is started, the third display may be started in the first state, and the display is started in the first state. The third display may be terminated in the second state, and after the display of the third display is terminated in the second state, the certain notice display in the second state is terminated. The display may be started, a certain effect may be started after the certain notice display is displayed, and the second state may be set after the first state. The hold icon is configured to be displayable while the sixth display is displayed, and the hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. One state is one of the states in which the sixth display can be displayed, and the second state is one of the states in which the sixth display is not displayed. A gaming table characterized by.

(Supplementary note h124) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h123, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display and one display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display. And the certain notice display is a display for notifying that the certain effect is started, and the certain effect is a notice for the symbol variation display being executed, and the certain notice display As a result, the fourth display may be displayed, and as the certain effect, the fifth display may be displayed.

(Supplementary note h125) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h123 or h124, which is configured to be able to execute a certain reach effect, and the first state is before execution of the certain reach effect is started. A gaming machine characterized in that it is one of the states, and the second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed.

(Supplementary note h126) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h123 to h125, the third display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, and the symbol variation display to be started next is started. A game console characterized in that it may be continuously displayed even after being played.

(Supplementary note h127) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h123 to h126, wherein at least a part of the third display is configured to overlap the sixth display. Characteristic game table.

(Supplementary Note h128) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h123 to h127, wherein the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes, and is one of the plurality of types of modes. Aspect is the first aspect, one aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the second aspect, the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect When the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode, a big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display, than when not performed, a game characterized by Stand.

(Supplementary note h129) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h123 to h127, wherein the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes, and is one of the plurality of types of modes. Aspect is the first aspect, one aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the second aspect, the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect A game characterized in that the display of the second display is more likely to be started when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when not performed. Stand.

(Supplementary Note h130) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h123 to h129, wherein at least a part of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display. Characteristic game table.

(Supplementary Note h131) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 123 to h130, characterized in that the first display and the sixth display are configured not to overlap. Stand.

(Supplementary note h132) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h123 to h131, the first display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, and the symbol variation display to be started next is started. A gaming table characterized by being erased before being played.

(Supplementary Note h133) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h123 to h132, wherein the certain effect may be executed in an area in which the third display is displayed. A gaming table.

(Supplementary Note h134) The gaming machine according to any one of the supplementary notes h123 to h133, further comprising operation means operable by a player, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display. Is a display, the seventh display is a display that prompts the operation of the operating means, the seventh display is a display that is started after the third display is started, When the operating means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started, and the third display is a display that is ended before the display of the seventh display is started. There is a gaming table.

(Supplementary note h135) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h134, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display is an eighth display and the eighth display is a display of the seventh display. A game machine characterized in that it is a display announcing that it will be started, and that the third display is a display that is terminated while the eighth display is being displayed.

(Supplementary note h136) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h123 to h135, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display is a ninth display, and the ninth display is a variation. It is a display of the icon, there are cases where two of the third display is displayed, after the display of one of the two third display is finished, the other display mode changes, the display mode is A gaming table, wherein the changed third display overlaps the ninth display.

(Supplementary note h137) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note h136, when two of the third displays are displayed, all the displays of the third display are finished in one symbol variation display, Characteristic game table.

(Supplementary note h138) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h123 to h137, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display is a tenth display, and the tenth display is an explanation. Display, the tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means when displayed, and the third display is displayed in the first display area. A game table characterized by a display that may be displayed.

(Supplementary Note h139) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h123 to h138, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note h140) A gaming machine including display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, wherein one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display, and the other of the plurality of types of displays is One display is a second display, one display of the plurality of types of display is a third display, the first display of the character related to the second display. Display, the second display is a display of a hold icon in the display mode of the prefetch notice, the third display is a display showing that it is waiting for the display start of a certain notice display, The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started, and the third display may be started in the first state, and the first The third display started to be displayed in the state may end the display in the second state, and after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the second display In some cases, the display of the certain notice display may be started in a state, and after the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may be started, and the certain effect is a symbol being executed. It is a notice regarding variable display, and may be the second state after the first state, the first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed, The second state is a state in which one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed is a gaming table.

(Supplementary Note h141) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note h140, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display, and the sixth display is displayed at least on the back surface of the hold icon. Is configured to be able to display the hold icon when the sixth display is displayed, and is configured not to display the hold icon when the sixth display is not displayed. The gaming table characterized by being.

(Supplementary Note h142) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h141, wherein in the first state, at least part of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping with the third display. And a display position of the third display in the first state and a display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position. ..

(Supplementary Note h143) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note h141 or h142, wherein the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes, and one mode of the plurality of types of modes is It is one aspect, one aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a second aspect, than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect Also, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display, the gaming table.

(Supplementary note h144) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h141 or h142, wherein the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of aspects, and one aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is It is one aspect, one aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a second aspect, than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect Also, the gaming table characterized in that the display of the second display is more likely to be started when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode.

(Supplementary Note h145) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h141 to h144, wherein at least a part of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display. Characteristic game table.

(Supplementary Note h146) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h141 to h144, wherein the first display and the sixth display are configured not to overlap with each other. Stand.

(Supplementary Note h147) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h140 to h146, which is configured to be able to execute a certain reach effect. In the first state, the execution of the certain reach effect is performed. A gaming machine, which is one of the states before being started, and the second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed.

(Supplementary Note h148) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h140 to h147, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display, and one of the plurality of types of display is displayed. One display is a fifth display, the certain notice display is a display for giving a notice that the certain effect is started, and the fourth display is displayed as the certain notice display. In some cases, the fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect, and the gaming table.

(Supplementary note h149) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h140 to h148, the third display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display, and the symbol variable display to be started next is started. A game console characterized in that it may be continuously displayed even after being played.

(Supplementary note h150) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h140 to h149, wherein the first display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display is a symbol variation display to be started next. A gaming table characterized by being erased before being started.

(Supplementary note h151) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h140 to h150, the certain effect may be executed in the area where the third display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Supplementary note h152) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h140 to h151, further comprising operation means operable by a player, wherein one of the plurality of types of displays is a seventh one. Is a display, the seventh display is a display that prompts the operation of the operating means, the seventh display is a display that is started after the third display is started, When the operating means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started, and the third display is a display that is ended before the display of the seventh display is started. There is a gaming table.

(Supplementary note h153) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h152, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display is an eighth display and the eighth display is a display of the seventh display. A game machine characterized in that it is a display announcing that it will be started, and that the third display is a display that is terminated while the eighth display is being displayed.

(Supplementary note h154) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h140 to h153, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display is a ninth display and the ninth display is a change. It is a display of the icon, there are cases where two of the third display is displayed, after the display of one of the two third display is finished, the other display mode changes, the display mode is A gaming table, wherein the changed third display overlaps the ninth display.

(Supplementary note h155) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note h154, when two of the third displays are displayed, all the displays of the third display are finished in one symbol variation display, Characteristic game table.

(Supplementary note h156) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h140 to h155, wherein one display of the plurality of types of display is a tenth display, and the tenth display is an explanation. Display, the tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means when displayed, and the third display is displayed in the first display area. A game table characterized by a display that may be displayed.

(Supplementary Note h157) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h140 to h156,
A game table characterized in that the game table is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note h158) A gaming machine provided with a production means capable of executing a timer effect and a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons, wherein the timer effect is displayed when the timer display is started. Is configured to be able to start when a certain time has come, one of the plurality of types of holding icons is a second holding icon, the second holding icon, A pre-reading notice hold icon, and the second hold icon is a hold icon indicating that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, wherein the game is characterized in that Stand.

(Supplementary note h159) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h158, wherein the second hold icon is a hold icon indicating the content of the certain effect.

(Supplementary note h160) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h158 or h159, wherein the second hold icon is configured to be displayable in a plurality of display modes, and one of the plurality of display modes is, It is a second display mode, wherein the second display mode is a display mode that suggests that the timer effect is started a plurality of times during execution of the certain symbol variation display, Game table.

(Supplementary note h161) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note h160, one of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode, and the first display mode is the certain symbol variation display. A gaming machine, which is a display mode that suggests that the timer effect is started once until it is ended.

(Supplementary note h162) The gaming table according to supplementary note h160 or h161. One of the plurality of holding icons is a third holding icon, the third holding icon is a look-ahead notice holding icon, and the third holding icon displays a certain character. Is a hold icon, the third hold icon is a hold icon that does not include a display suggesting that the timer effect is started during the execution of the certain symbol variation display, and the plurality of display modes One of them is a third display mode, and the third display mode suggests that the timer effect is started during execution of the certain symbol variation display including the certain character. A gaming machine characterized by a display mode.

(Supplementary note h163) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h158 to h162, wherein the game stand is configured to be able to execute a notification regarding the certain effect performed by the timer effect. Stand.

(Supplementary note h164) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h158 to h163, wherein the display means is means capable of displaying a variation icon, and is related to the start of the certain symbol variation display. The second hold icon is configured to be displayed as the variable icon in some cases, and the variation is related to the fact that the timer effect is performed once while the certain symbol variation display is being performed. The mode of the icon is configured to change (hereinafter, referred to as “first change”), and the variable icon displayed by the first change is the timer during execution of the certain symbol variable display. A game console characterized by an icon that can indicate the remaining number of times that production can be started.

(Supplementary note h165) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h158 to h164, wherein the second hold icon is displayed in a manner capable of suggesting the time initially displayed as the timer display. A gaming table characterized by a certain hold icon.

(Supplementary note h166) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h158 to h165, a plurality of timer effects may be simultaneously started during execution of the certain symbol variation display, and the plurality of timer effects. One of the plurality of timer effects is a first timer effect, and one of the plurality of timer effects is a second timer effect, and the timer display in the first timer effect (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer effect”). The time displayed first as "one timer display") is different from the time displayed first as the timer display in the second timer effect (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display"). And, a certain effect performed in response to the first timer display reaching the certain time and an effect performed in response to the second timer display reaching the certain time, A game table characterized by different productions.

(Supplementary Note h167) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h158 to h166, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a display prompting a ball-shedding operation (hereinafter referred to as “ball-shedding display”). There is a case where one display of the timer display and the ball removal display is overlapped with the other display, and the gaming table.
(Appendix h168)

The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h158 to h167, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

(Supplementary Note h169) A gaming machine provided with effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of timer effects, wherein one of the plurality of types of timer effects is a first timer effect, and the plurality of types of timer effects. One of the effects is a second timer effect, and the first timer effect is in response to the first timer display being started and the first timer display being the first time. The second timer effect is the second effect when the second timer display is started and the second timer display reaches the second time. In the case where a certain decorative symbol variable display is being executed, the period in which the first timer display is displayed overlaps with the period in which the second timer display is displayed ( Hereinafter, "first case") is configured so that at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect may be executed as a pre-reading notice. A gaming table configured as described above.

(Supplementary Note h170) In the gaming machine according to supplementary note h169, in the first case, the first timer effect is executed as a notice and the second timer effect is executed as a prefetch notice (hereinafter , "Second case"), and in the first case, the first timer effect and the second timer effect are executed as a notice (hereinafter, referred to as "third case"). .), and in the first case, the first timer effect and the second timer effect may be executed as a prefetching notice (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth case”). A gaming machine, characterized in that the time when one effect is started may be different from the time when the second effect is started.

(Supplementary note h171) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h169 or h170, wherein the first notice item may be displayed as the first effect, and the first effect is used as a notice. When it is executed, it is configured such that a notice corresponding to the first notice item is started during the execution of the certain decorative symbol variable display, and the first effect is executed as a look-ahead notice. In this case, the look-ahead notice according to the first notice item during the execution of the decorative pattern variable display (hereinafter, referred to as "first decorative pattern variable display") started after the certain decorative pattern variable display. Is configured to be started.

(Supplementary note h172) The gaming machine described in Supplementary note h170, wherein in the fourth case, the first effect may be started during execution of the certain decorative symbol variable display. In the fourth case, while the decorative symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “first decorative symbol variable display”) started after the certain decorative symbol variable display is being executed, the second The effect is configured to be started in some cases, the first effect is a look-ahead notice effect for the first decorative symbol variable display, and the first effect is a hold icon. Is a production in which the display mode is changed, and the second production is a production of a look-ahead notice for the first decorative symbol variable display, the gaming table.

(Supplementary note h173) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h172, wherein the second effect is an effect that further changes the display mode of the hold icon whose display mode is changed by the first effect. And a gaming table.

(Supplementary note h174) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h169 to h173, wherein a plurality of types of mini-games are configured to be executable, and one of the plurality of types of mini-games is One mini game, one of the plurality of types of mini games is a second mini game, and the first mini game has the first timer display at the first time. The second mini-game is a mini game in which the result is derived before, and the second mini-game is a mini game in which the result is derived before the second timer display reaches the second time. It is configured to perform the first effect according to the result of the mini game, and is configured to perform the second effect according to the result of the second mini game. Characteristic game table.

(Supplementary note h175) The gaming machine according to supplementary note h174, wherein the first effect is performed in the first mode when the result of the first mini game is the first result. It is configured such that the first effect is performed in the third mode when the result of the first mini game is the third result, and the result of the second mini game is the second result. When the result is, the second effect is configured to be performed in the second mode, and when the result of the second mini game is the fourth result, the second effect is A game table, which is configured to be performed in four modes.

(Supplementary Note h176) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h169 to h175, wherein the timer display changes in time midway to become a timer display in the form of another certain effect. A gaming table.

(Supplementary note h177) In the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h169 to h176, the first timer display may be the first time during execution of the certain symbol variation display. And the second timer display may be the second time during execution of the certain symbol variation display, the gaming table.

(Supplementary note h178) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h169 to h177, wherein the start timings of the first timer display and the second timer display are different.

(Supplementary note h179) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h169 to h178, wherein the time displayed as the initial display of the first timer display and the initial display of the second timer display are displayed. A game table characterized by different times.

(Supplementary Note h180) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h169 to h179, wherein the first time and the second time are the same time.

(Supplementary Note h181) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h169 to h180, comprising a display means, and the display means provides a display prompting a ball-shedding operation (hereinafter referred to as “ball-shedding display”). Displayable means, one display of the first timer display and the ball-out display may overlap the other display, of the second timer display and the ball-out display A game table, wherein one display of one may overlap with the other display.

(Supplementary note h182) The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes h169 to h180, comprising a display means, and the effect producing means is the display means.

(Supplementary Note h183) The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes h169 to h182, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

<<Eighth Embodiment>>
Next, a gaming table (pachinko machine, slot machine, etc.) according to the eighth embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 463 to 476. In addition, about the same structure as other embodiment demonstrated using FIGS. 1-462, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected in drawing and the description is abbreviate|omitted. Further, when the content described in the present embodiment and the content described in the other embodiments conflict, the content described in the present embodiment is adopted. Further, by applying the contents described in one or more configurations among the one or more configurations described in other embodiments to one or more configurations of the present embodiment, a more game is played. You may be able to widen the width of.

<Decorative pattern>
Next, the decorative pattern according to the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 463. The decorative design according to the present embodiment includes a decorative design of the first display mode, a decorative design of the second display mode, and a decorative design of the third display mode. The display mode of the decorative pattern may be two types or four or more types. Further, the first to third display modes are not limited to the display modes shown in FIG. 463.

<decorative design / A-based decorative design>
The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 463(A) is an example of the decorative pattern in the first display mode. This decorative pattern of the first display mode is a decorative pattern of the same display mode as the "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" described with reference to FIG. 5B above, and will be distinguished from other decorative patterns thereafter. For this reason, the decorative patterns given the numbers 1 to 9,0 are expressed as "A decorative 1" to "A decorative 10", respectively, and these decorative patterns are collectively referred to as "A decorative pattern". Express. In the present example, the A-based decorative symbols (“A ornament 1” to “A ornament 10”) are mainly used for variable display of symbols in the normal mode.

In this A system decorative pattern, when notifying that there is a possibility that it will develop into the prefetch notice (B system prefetch notice) shown in FIGS. 463 (B) (3) or (B) (4), FIG. 463 ( A) By stopping and displaying a symbol combination (for example, "A ornament 2-A ornament 4-A ornament 6") in which three even-numbered ornamental symbols are arranged as shown in (1), the normal mode look-ahead notice (weak) )I do. Also, in the case of notifying that it is decided that the prefetching notice (B system prefetching notice) shown in FIGS. 463(B)(3) or (B)(4) is confirmed, FIG. 463(A)(1) The normal mode look-ahead notice (strong) is performed by stopping and displaying the symbol combination of a specific decorative symbol as shown in (for example, "A ornament 3-A ornament 3-A ornament 7").

In this example, in the normal mode, an example in which the B-system pre-reading notice is developed is shown, but it may be configured to be developed in the C-system pre-reading notice. That is, when the jackpot reliability of three or more levels is set, the jackpot reliability may be promoted (or demoted) by one step for each fluctuation, or two steps or more (or demotion) for each fluctuation. ) May be done.

<Decorative pattern/B-based decorative pattern>
The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 463(B) is an example of the decorative pattern in the second display mode. The decorative pattern of the second display mode is a decorative pattern of a display mode in which a part of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" described with reference to FIG. In order to distinguish it from other decorative patterns, the decorative patterns numbered 1 to 9,0 are expressed as "B decorative 1" to "B decorative 10", respectively, and these decorative patterns are collectively referred to. It is expressed as "B-based decorative pattern". In the present example, the B-based decorative symbols (“B ornament 1” to “B ornament 10”) are mainly used in the symbol variable display in the state of weak reliability increase.

In this B-series decorative pattern, when notifying that there is a possibility that the pre-reading notice (C-series pre-reading notice) shown in (C) (5) or (C) (6) of FIG. B) By stopping and displaying a symbol combination (for example, "B ornament 2-B ornament 4-B ornament 6" etc.) in which three even-numbered ornamental symbols are arranged as shown in (3), a pre-reading notice (weak) is given. To do. Also, there is a possibility that the prefetch notice (C series prefetch notice) shown in FIGS. 463 (C) (5) and (C) (6) may develop, and that possibility is higher than the prefetch notice (weak). In this case, the pre-reading notice is given by stopping and displaying the symbol combination of the specific decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 463(B)(4) (for example, “B ornament 3-B ornament 3-B ornament 7”). Do (strong).

<Decorative pattern/C decorative pattern>
The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 463(C) is an example of the decorative pattern in the third display mode. The decorative pattern of the third display mode is a decorative pattern of a display mode in which a number is given to the character image, and thereafter, in order to distinguish it from other decorative patterns, a decoration numbered 1 to 9,0 is applied. The symbols are respectively expressed as "C decoration 1" to "C decoration 10", and these decorative patterns are collectively referred to as "C-based decoration pattern". In the present example, the C-based decorative symbols (“C ornament 1” to “C ornament 10”) are mainly used for symbol variation display in the state of high reliability.

In this C-based decorative pattern, when notifying that there is a possibility of a big hit, a pattern combination in which three even-numbered decorative patterns as shown in FIG. 463(C)(5) are arranged (for example, "C decorative 2 -C decoration 4-C decoration 6", etc.) is stopped and displayed to give advance notice (weak). In addition, when notifying that the big hit is confirmed, a pattern combination of specific decorative patterns as shown in FIGS. 463(C) and (6) (for example, “C decoration 3-C decoration 3-C decoration 7”, etc.) By displaying the stop, the pre-reading notice (strong) is given.

In the present example, the jackpot reliability (degree of possibility of deriving a jackpot as a result of judgment) in each of the above-described prefetching notices is (A)(1) normal mode prefetching notice (weak)<(A)(2) Normal mode Look-ahead notice (strong) ≤ (B) (3) Look-ahead notice (weak) <(B) (4) Look-ahead notice (strong) ≤ (C) (5) Look-ahead notice (weak) <(C) (6) There is a read ahead notice (strong) relationship. It should be noted that the magnitude relation of the profits in the first to third display modes is not limited to the one based on the jackpot reliability, and may be, for example, a difference depending on the expected degree of the probability change or the expected degree of the holding condominium.

Therefore, for example, the jackpot reliability is (A) (1) normal mode pre-reading notice (weak) = (A) (2) normal mode pre-reading notice (strong), (B) (3) pre-reading notice (weak) = ( B) (4) Look-ahead notice (strong), (C) (5) Look-ahead notice (weak) = (C) (6) Look-ahead notice (strong) (A) (1) Normal mode look-ahead notice (weak) <(A) (2) Normal mode look-ahead notice (strong) ≤ (B) (3) Look-ahead notice (weak) <(B) (4) Look-ahead notice (strong) )≦(C) (5) Pre-reading notice (weak) <(C) (6) Pre-reading notice (strong). Further, the symbol combination of the prefetch notice is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 463, and for example, a symbol combination in which three different decorative symbols are arranged (for example, “A decoration 1-A decoration 2-A decoration 3”, “C”). The readahead notice may be given by stopping and displaying "decoration 0-C decoration 2-C decoration 5" or the like.

<Variable display of decorative patterns and advance notice>
Next, the decorative symbol variable display and the pre-reading notice according to the present embodiment will be described in detail.

<Variable display of decorative patterns and advance notice/Example 1>
FIG. 464 is a diagram showing a decorative symbol variable display and prefetching notice in time series according to the first embodiment.

In this example, (1-1) variable display by A system decorative design and fixed stop display of lost design → (1-2) variable display by B system decorative design and pre-reading notice (weak) → (1-3) C system The display is performed in the order of the variable display by the decorative pattern and the advance notice (strong)→(1-4) the fixed stop display of the big hit symbol by the C type decorative pattern. Hereinafter, each display will be described in detail.
<(1-1) Variable display by A system decorative design and fixed stop of lost design>

The state shown in FIG. 464(1) is a state before the variation of the decorative symbol is started. In the same state, by displaying the symbol combination of "A decoration 1-A decoration 4-A decoration 6" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208 as the final stop display of the decorative symbol variable display. , Stop display of lost symbols is displayed.

Further, since the special game 1 variable game holding number is 3, the number 3 is displayed in the special drawing 1 holding number display area 208e provided at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display area 208d is displayed. In the hold icon display area at the lower left, three hold icons h11 to h13 corresponding to the number of holdings of the special figure 1 variable game are displayed. Further, since the special game 2 variable game holding number is 0, the number 0 is displayed in the special figure 2 holding number display area 208f provided at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the user interface (UI) display area at the lower right of the effect display area 208d, a navigation character YM (character image of the lord) for performing various kinds of navigation and notification is displayed.

The state shown in the next FIG. 464(2) is a state after the variation of the decorative pattern is started. In the same state, the decorative symbol variation display is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 variable game is decreased from 3 to 2, so the special figure 1 reserved number display The number 3 is updated to 2 in the area 208e. In addition, in the same state, the moving (decreasing) animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed. This movement (decrease) animation is an animation in which the hold icon (the hold icon that is the subject of this pattern change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the base of the change icon, and the second hold icon h12. An animation in which the hold icon in the display position moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 and the hold icon in the display position of the third hold icon h13 indicates the second hold in the special figure 1. And an animation of moving to the display position of the icon h12.

The state shown in the next FIG. 464 (3) is a state in which the holding number of the special figure 1 variation game is increased by one during the decorative symbol variation display. In the same state, the number of reserved special game 1 variable games has been increased from 2 to 3, so the number 2 is updated to 3 in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 208e. In addition, in the same state, a new hold icon h14 is performing an increasing animation that appears in the hold icon display area.

The next state shown in FIG. 464(4) is a state in which the stop display (left stop) of the decorative design (A decoration 1 in this example) is performed in the left design display area 208a of the decorative design display device 208, and continues. The state shown in FIG. 464(5) is a state in which the stop display (right stop) of the decorative symbol (A decoration 6 in this example) is performed in the right symbol display area 208c. Further, the state shown in FIG. 464 (6) is a state in which the stop display (middle stop) is performed after the fluctuation of the decorative design (A decoration 4 in this example) in the middle design display area 208b, and the subsequent diagrams. In the state shown in 464(7), the symbol combination of "A decoration 1-A decoration 4-A decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the state where the lost symbol is confirmed and stopped is displayed. is there.
<(1-2) Variable display and pre-reading notice by B type decorative design (weak)>

The state shown in FIG. 464(8) is the state after the variation of the decorative pattern is started. In the same state, the decorative symbol variation display is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 variable game is decreased from 3 to 2, so the special figure 1 reserved number display The number 3 is updated to 2 in the area 208e. In the same state, the holding icons h12 to h14 of Toku-zu 1 are moving (decreasing).

The state shown in FIG. 464(9) is a state in which a step-up notice (changing notice) is given in the decorative symbol variable display. In this step-up notice, the princess character image CP1 (step-up notice SU1) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Here, the step-up notice is a notice in which a plurality of types of display modes are sequentially switched and displayed in a predetermined display order, and for example, the step-up notice described with reference to FIGS. 171 and 188 is applicable. .. In the step-up notice of this example, the character images are arranged in the order of the princess character image CP1 (step-up notice SU1), the grandfather character image CP2 (step-up notice SU2), and the bancho character image CP3 (step-up notice SU3). When the reliability of the big hit is expressed by changing it step by step, and the character image CP3 (step-up notice SU3) of the bancho is displayed, the development to the super reach is confirmed and the possibility of the big hit increases. Is configured.

The next state shown in FIG. 464 (10) is a stop display (left) of a decorative design (in this example, a decorative design obtained by applying a flower image FP1 to B decoration 2) in the left design display area 208a of the decorative design display device 208. (Stop) and the symbol "?" is displayed in the UI display area. In the same state, the flower image FP1 is applied to the B decoration 2 and the symbol "?" is displayed in the UI display area to display the pre-reading notice (in this example, the B-system pre-reading shown in FIG. 464 (13)). Notice (weak)) is likely to start.

The next state shown in FIG. 464 (11) is a stop display (right) of a decorative design (in this example, a decorative design obtained by applying a flower image FP2 to the B decoration 6) in the right design display area 208c of the decorative design display device 208. (Stop) and the character string "Oops" is displayed in the UI display area. In this state, the flower image FP2 is applied to the B decoration 6 and the character string "Oops" is displayed in the UI display area while maintaining the display mode of left stop, so that the look-ahead notice (in this example, , B system pre-reading notice (weak) shown in FIG. 464(13) may be started.

The next state shown in FIG. 464 (12) is stopped after the fluctuation of the decorative pattern (in this example, the decorative pattern obtained by applying the flower image FP3 to the B decoration 4) in the middle pattern display area 208b of the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped. In addition to the display (intermediate stop), the character string “Chance?” is displayed in the UI display area. In the same state, while maintaining the display mode of left stop and right stop, the flower image FP3 is applied to the B decoration 4, and the character string "Chance?" is displayed in the UI display area, thereby prefetching. The advance notice (in this example, the B-system prefetch advance notice (weak) shown in FIG. 464(13)) may be started.

As shown in FIGS. 464 (10) to (12 ), a pattern or the like is applied to a part of the B-series decorative design, or a symbol or character that causes a sense of expectation is displayed in the UI display area. Therefore, if it is configured to give a notice that the pre-reading notice (in this example, the B-system pre-reading notice (weak) shown in FIG. 464 (13)) may be started, the game is displayed during the decorative symbol variation display. In some cases, people's expectations can be gradually increased.

In the next state shown in FIG. 464 (13), the symbol combination of “B decoration 2-B decoration 4-B decoration 6” is fixedly stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. The system pre-reading notice (weak) has been given. Here, by issuing this B-system pre-reading notice (weak), it is informed that there is a possibility of developing into the C-system pre-reading notice (strong) shown in FIG. ..

In this way, by displaying the symbol combination based on the B-based decorative symbol different from the A-based decorative symbol as the fixed stop display, the look-ahead notice can be realized by the display mode of the decorative symbol. Further, since the B-system pre-reading notice (weak) is a notice that another C-system pre-reading notice may start, another C-system pre-reading notice may be given. It may be possible to make the player have an expectation that he or she may not know it.
<(1-3) Variable display with C-based decorative design and advance notice (strong)>

The state shown in FIG. 464 (14) is a state after the variation of the decorative pattern is started. In the same state, while the decorative symbol variation display is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 variation game holding number is reduced from 2 to 1, so the special figure 1 holding number display The number 2 is updated to 1 in the area 208e. In addition, in the same state, the hold icons h13 and h14 of special figure 1 are moved (decreased).

The states shown in the following FIGS. 464 (15) to (16) are the states in which a step-up notice (preliminary notice) is given in the decorative symbol variable display. In this step-up notice, after the princess character image CP1 (step-up notice SU1) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative pattern display device 208, the grandfather character image CP2 (step-up notice SU2) is stopped and displayed. doing.

In the state shown in FIG. 464 (17), the stop display (left stop) of the decorative design (in this example, C decoration 3) is performed in the left design display region 208a of the decorative design display device 208, and the UI display region is displayed. , The symbol "!" is displayed. In the same state, the C decoration 3 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the symbol "!" is displayed in the UI display area, so that the look-ahead notice (in this example, it is shown in FIG. 464 (20)). Notice that there is a possibility that the C system prefetch notice (strong) will be started.

In the state shown in FIG. 464 (18), the decorative symbol (C decoration 7 in this example) is stopped and displayed (right stop) in the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the UI display area is displayed. , "Hot?" is displayed. In the same state, while maintaining the display mode of left stop, the C decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the character string "Hot?" (In this example, the C system prefetch notice (strong) shown in FIG. 464(20)) is predicted to be started.

In the next state shown in FIG. 464 (19), a stop display (middle stop) is performed after the swing fluctuation of the decorative design (in this example, C decoration 3) in the middle design display area 208b of the decorative design display device 208, and the UI is displayed. In the display area, the character string "Hot!" is displayed. In the same state, the C decoration 3 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208c while the display mode of the left stop and the right stop is maintained, and the character string "Hot!" is displayed in the UI display area. Then, the pre-reading notice (in this example, the C-system pre-reading notice (strong) shown in FIG. 464(20)) is likely to be started.

As shown in FIGS. 464(17) to (19), by displaying the C-based decorative pattern in a stopped state, or by displaying a symbol or character that causes an expectation in the UI display area, If it is configured to give advance notice that the prefetch notice (in this example, the C system prefetch notice (strong) shown in FIG. 464(20)) may be started, the expectation of the player during the decorative symbol variable display. It may be possible to gradually increase the feeling.

In the state shown in FIG. 464 (20), the symbol combination of “C decoration 3-C decoration 3-C decoration 7” is fixedly stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and C The system pre-read notice (strong) has been given. Here, by giving this C-system look-ahead notice (strong), it is notified that there is a high possibility of a big hit (or that the big hit is confirmed).

In this manner, by displaying the symbol combination based on the C-based decorative design different from the A-based decorative design or the B-based decorative design, the pre-reading notice can be realized by the display mode of the decorative design. In addition, since the C-system pre-reading notice announces that there is a high probability of a big hit (or that the big hit is confirmed), the expectation that it may be possible to make a profit by the C-system look-ahead notice. In some cases, the game can be held by the player.
<(1-4) Final stop display of big hit design with C type decorative design>

The state shown in FIG. 464 (21) is a state after the variation of the decorative pattern is started. In the same state, the decorative symbol variation display is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 variable game is reduced from 1 to 0, so the special figure 1 reserved number display The number 1 is updated to 0 in the area 208e. In addition, in the same state, a moving (decreasing) animation of the hold icon h14 of Toku-zu 1 is performed.

The states shown in the following FIGS. 464 (22) to (24) are states in which a step-up notice (announcement during change) is given in the decorative symbol variable display. In this step-up notice, after the princess character image CP1 (step-up notice SU1) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative pattern display device 208, the grandfather character image CP2 (step-up notice SU2) is stopped and displayed. Then, finally, by stopping and displaying the bancho character image CP3 (step-up notice SU3), the development to super reach is confirmed, and the possibility of a big hit increases (or the big hit is confirmed). It suggests.

In the state shown in the following FIG. 464 (25) to (27), the stop display (left stop) of the decorative symbol (in this example, C ornament 3) is performed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, the decorative pattern (C decoration 3 in this example) is stopped and displayed (right stop) in the right symbol display area 208c, and the character string "reach" is displayed in the UI display area. In the same state, the fact that the reach state has been reached is notified.

The next state shown in FIG. 464 (28) is a state in which a group notice is given. Here, the group notice is a notice with high reliability of the big hit, and corresponds to, for example, the Sabohanie notice described using FIG. 337. It can be said that when the group notice is given, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the group notice is not given. In this example, as a group notice, a large number of character images of Sabohani cross the effect display area 208d from right to left, and a character string "Gekiatsu" is displayed in the UI display area. , Suggesting that the development of super-reach has been confirmed and the chances of a big hit have increased (or that a big hit has been confirmed).

The next state shown in FIG. 464 (29) is a state in which SP development notification is being performed. In this SP development notification, while continuing to give notice of the Savohani group and displaying the character string "SP" in the UI display area, the development to super reach is confirmed and there is a possibility of a big hit. It indicates that it has become higher (or that the jackpot has been confirmed). The next state shown in FIG. 464 (30) is a state where the super reach effect is being performed. In this super reach production, in the production display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208, a movie in which the main character and the enemy swordsman duel is displayed.

The next state shown in FIG. 464 (31) is a state where the button effect is being performed. In this button effect, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image BP simulating the appearance of the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136), and an operation promotion display that prompts an operation by the operation means (this example). Then, the downward arrow) is displayed.

The next state shown in FIG. 464 (32) is a state in which the operation by the operating means (in this example, the chance button 136) is accepted, and the next state in FIG. 464 (33) is the operation by the operating means is accepted. Based on the fact, the cut-in image is displayed and the character string "strong cut-in" is displayed in the UI display area. In the cut-in image of this example, a balloon image in which the characters "Game" and a plurality of character images are arranged in the balloon is displayed together with the up image of the character of Tonosama. The next state shown in FIG. 464 (34) is a state where a victory effect is being performed. In this victory effect, it is indicated that the main character has won the swordsman who is the enemy, and that the character string "Yatteze" is displayed in the UI display area, indicating that the jackpot has been confirmed. doing.

In the state shown in FIG. 464 (35), a stop display (middle stop) is performed after the swing fluctuation of the decorative design (in this example, C decoration 3) in the middle design display area 208b of the decorative design display device 208, and the UI is displayed. In the display area, the character string "Big hit" is displayed. In the same state, the C decoration 3 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208c while the display mode of the left stop and the right stop is maintained, and the character string "big hit" is displayed in the UI display area. , Has announced that the jackpot has been confirmed.

As shown in FIGS. 464(27) to (34), a plurality of types of displays that give a sense of expectation, such as group effects, SP development notification, SP reach effects, button effects, and display of cut-in images, are continuously displayed. If it is configured to give advance notice that there is a possibility of a big hit (or that the big hit has been confirmed), it may be possible to gradually increase the player's expectation during the decorative symbol variable display. is there.

In the state shown in FIG. 464 (36), the symbol combination of “C decoration 3-C decoration 3-C decoration 3” (symbol combination that becomes a big hit) is determined in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. By displaying the character string "Big hit" in the UI display area in addition to the stop display, the fact that the big hit has been confirmed is notified.

<Variable display of decorative patterns and advance notice/Example 2>
FIG. 465(a) is a diagram showing, in time series, a part of the decorative symbol variable display and prefetching notice according to the second embodiment, and is shown in FIGS. 465(a)(1) to (a)(8). The figure shown is a figure corresponding to FIG. 464 (1) to FIG.

The state shown in FIG. 465(a)(1) is a state before the variation of the decorative pattern is started. In the same state, by displaying the symbol combination of "A decoration 1-A decoration 4-A decoration 6" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208 as the final stop display of the decorative symbol variable display. , Stop display of lost symbols is displayed.

Further, since the special game 1 variable game holding number is 3, the number 3 is displayed in the special drawing 1 holding number display area 208e provided at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display area 208d is displayed. In the hold icon display area at the lower left, three hold icons h11 to h13 corresponding to the number of holdings of the special figure 1 variable game are displayed. Further, since the special game 2 variable game holding number is 0, the number 0 is displayed in the special figure 2 holding number display area 208f provided at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a navigation character YM for performing various kinds of navigation and notification is displayed in the user interface (UI) display area at the lower right of the effect display area 208d.

The state shown in the following FIG. 465(a)(2) is the state after the variation of the decorative pattern is started. In the same state, the decorative symbol variation display is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 variable game is decreased from 3 to 2, so the special figure 1 reserved number display The number 3 is updated to 2 in the area 208e. In addition, in the same state, the moving (decreasing) animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed.

The state shown in the following FIG. 465(a)(3) is a state in which the number of reserved special game 1 variation games is increased by one during the decorative symbol variation display. In the same state, the number of reserved special game 1 variable games has been increased from 2 to 3, so the number 2 is updated to 3 in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 208e. In addition, in the same state, a new hold icon h14 is performing an increasing animation that appears in the hold icon display area.

The state shown in the following FIG. 465(a)(4) is a state in which the stop display (left stop) of the decorative symbol (A ornament 2 in this example) is performed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208. Yes, in the state shown in FIGS. 465(a) and (5), the stop display (right stop) of the decorative symbol (A decoration 6 in this example) is performed in the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, It is a state in which the symbol change effect for changing the display mode of the A decoration 2 and the A decoration 6 which are stopped and displayed is started. In the state shown in FIGS. 465(a) and (6) below, a pattern promotion effect is performed in which the display mode of the A decoration 2 and the A decoration 6 that are stopped and displayed is changed (promoted) from the A system decorative pattern to the B system decorative pattern. It is in a state.

In the state shown in FIGS. 465(a) and (7), a stop display (middle stop) is performed after the fluctuation of the decorative design (B decoration 4 in this example) in the middle design display area 208b of the decorative design display device 208. In the state shown in FIGS. 465(a) and (8), the symbol combination of "B decoration 2-B decoration 4-B decoration 6" is fixed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. By displaying the stop, the system B pre-reading notice (weak) is given. Here, it is informed that there is a possibility that the system B pre-reading notice may be developed by giving the system B pre-reading notice (weak).

As in the present embodiment, the display mode of the decorative design may be changed during one decorative design variable display, and the A-based decorative design is changed to the B-based decorative design during the decorative design variable display by the A-based decorative design. (Or, it may be changed (promoted) to C-based decorative design) (details will be described later), while the decorative design variable display by B-based decorative design is displayed, B-based decorative design is changed to C-based decorative design (promoted). You may let me. Further, the design may be demoted, for example, while the decorative design variation display by the B-based decorative design is being displayed, the B-based decorative design may be changed (relegated) to the A-based decorative design, or decoration by the C-based decorative design. During the pattern change display, the C-based decorative design may be changed (relegated) to the B-based decorative design (or A-based decorative design). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change of the display mode of the decorative symbol, and it is possible to perform a surprising variable display of the decorative symbol, which may improve the interest of the player. ..

<Variable display of decorative patterns and advance notice/Example 3>
FIG. 465(b) is a diagram showing a part of the decorative symbol variable display and prefetching notice according to the third embodiment in a time series, and is shown in FIGS. 465(b)(5) to (a)(8). The figure shown is a figure corresponding to FIG. 464 (5) to FIG.

In the state shown in FIGS. 465(b) and (5), the stop display (left stop) of the decorative design (in this example, A decoration 2) is performed in the left design display region 208a of the decorative design display device 208, and the right design display region is displayed. In 208c, the decoration pattern (A decoration 6 in this example) is stopped and displayed (right stop). The state shown in the following FIG. 465 (a) (6), while performing a stop display (middle stop) of the decorative design (A decoration 4 in this example) in the middle design display area 208b of the decorative design display device 208, stop It is a state in which a pattern change effect for changing the display mode of the displayed A decoration 2, A decoration 4, and A decoration 6 is started.

The state shown in the following FIG. 465(b)(7) is a pattern for changing (promoting) the display mode of the A decoration 2, A decoration 4, and A decoration 6 that are stopped and displayed from the A series decorative pattern to the B series decorative pattern. After performing the promotion effect, the middle symbol display area 208b is in a state where the fluctuation of the decorative pattern (B decoration 4 in this example) is changed, and the following state shown in FIGS. 465(b)(8) is the decorative pattern. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the display device 208, the symbol combination of "B decoration 2-B decoration 4-B decoration 6" is fixedly stopped and displayed, whereby the B system pre-reading notice (weak) is performed. Here, it is informed that there is a possibility that the system B pre-reading notice may be developed by giving the system B pre-reading notice (weak).

As in the present embodiment, the display mode of a part (or all) of the decorative design may be changed after all the decorative designs in the variable display are stopped and displayed, and all the A-based decorations in the variable design are displayed. After the symbols are stopped and displayed, the display mode of part (or all) of the A-based decorative design may be changed (promoted) to the B-based decorative design (or C-based decorative design) or may be changed. After all B-based decorative designs are stopped and displayed, a part (or all) of the B-based decorative designs may be changed (promoted) to a C-based decorative design. Further, the design may be demoted, for example, after displaying all the B-based decorative designs that are being variably displayed, the display mode of part (or all) of the B-based decorative design is changed to the A-based decorative design. (Demotion), or after displaying all C-based decorative symbols that are variably displayed, the display mode of part (or all) of the C-based decorative symbols is changed to the B-based decorative symbol (or A-based). It may be changed (decorated) to a decorative pattern).

Note that FIGS. 465(c)(5) to (c)(8) are modifications of FIGS. 465(b)(5) to (b)(8). As in this example, in (c) and (6) of the figure, even after the symbol change effect for changing the display mode of the A decoration 2, the A decoration 4, and the A decoration 6 that are stopped and displayed is started, it continues. In (c) and (7) of the same figure, the A type decorative design may not be changed (promoted) to the B type decorative design. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change of the display mode of the decorative symbol, and it is possible to perform a surprising variable display of the decorative symbol, which may improve the interest of the player. ..

Further, FIGS. 465(d)(4) to (d)(8) are modifications of FIGS. 465(a)(4) to (a)(8). As in this example, in (d) and (6) of the figure, after starting the symbol change effect that changes the display mode of the B decoration 2 among the B decoration 2, the A decoration 4, and the A decoration 6 that are stopped and displayed. Even in the same figure (d) (7) that follows, the B type decorative design is not changed (promoted) to the C type decorative design, but the B type decorative design is changed (degraded) to the A type decorative design (or , B-based decorative patterns are maintained). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change of the display mode of the decorative symbol, and it is possible to perform a surprising variable display of the decorative symbol, which may improve the interest of the player. ..

<Variable display of decorative patterns and advance notice/Example 4>
FIG. 466(a) is a diagram showing a part of the decorative symbol variable display and prefetching notice according to the fourth embodiment in a time series, and is shown in FIGS. 466(a)(1) to (a)(8). The figure shown is a figure corresponding to FIG. 464 (1) to FIG. The diagrams shown in FIGS. 466(a)(1) to (a)(5) are the same as the diagrams shown in FIGS. 465(a)(1) to (a)(5) of the second embodiment. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The state shown in FIGS. 466(a) and (6) is a state in which a pattern promotion effect is performed in which the display mode of the A decoration 2 and the A decoration 6 that are stopped and displayed is changed (promoted) from the A system decorative pattern to the C system decorative pattern. is there. In the state shown in FIGS. 466(a) and (7), a stop display (middle stop) is performed after the fluctuation of the decorative design (in this example, C decoration 4) in the middle design display area 208b of the decorative design display device 208. In the state shown in FIGS. 466(a) and (8), the symbol combination of "C decoration 2-C decoration 4-C decoration 6" is confirmed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. The C system pre-reading notice (weak) is given by the stop display. Here, by giving this C-system look-ahead notice (weak), it is notified that the possibility of a big hit has increased (or that the big hit has been confirmed).

As in the present embodiment, the display mode of the decorative symbol may be changed (promoted or demoted) in two or more stages during one decorative symbol variable display. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the change in the display mode of the decorative symbol, and it is possible to perform a surprising decorative variable change display, which may improve the interest of the player. is there.

<Variable display of decorative patterns and advance notice/Example 5>
FIG. 466(b) is a diagram showing a part of the decorative symbol variable display and prefetching notice according to the fifth embodiment in chronological order, and in FIGS. 466(b)(1) to (b)(12). The figure shown is a figure corresponding to FIG. 464 (1) to FIG. The diagrams shown in FIGS. 466(b)(1) to (b)(5) are almost the same as the diagrams shown in FIGS. 465(a)(1) to (a)(6) of the third embodiment. Since they are the same, the same reference numerals are given in the drawings and the description thereof is omitted.

FIGS. 466(b)(6) to (b)(9) are states in which the promotion opportunity effect is being performed. Here, the promotion opportunity effect is an effect that promotes the promotion of the decorative pattern. In the promotion chance production of this example, "C decoration 2" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 over the period shown in FIGS. 466(b)(6) to (b)(7). -C decoration 4-C decoration 6" part of the pattern combination, "C decoration 3-C decoration 3-C decoration 7" overlapping display, "C decoration 3-C decoration 3-C" The display of overlapping the pattern combination of "C decoration 2-C decoration 4-C decoration 6" is repeatedly executed on a part of the pattern combination of "decoration 7", and the character string "promotion chance" is displayed in the UI display area. Is displayed.

Further, in the promotion opportunity effect of this example, the button effect is performed over the period shown in FIGS. 466(b)(8) to (b)(9). In this button effect, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image BP simulating the appearance of the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136), and an operation promotion display that prompts an operation by the operation means (this example). In the above, the meter display MP indicating the "press" character string) and the period during which the acceptance of the operation by the operating means is valid (the operation acceptance valid period) is displayed.

In the state shown in FIGS. 466(b) and (10), the pattern combination of "C decoration 2-C decoration 4-C decoration 6" is erased in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c, and "C decoration 3-C decoration" is displayed. By displaying only the symbol combination of "3-C decoration 7", the confirmation display of the promotion of the decorative symbol is displayed, and the character string "Gekiatsu" is displayed in the UI display area. Further, in the state shown in the next FIG. 466(b)(11), the fluctuation of the symbol combination of “C decoration 3-C decoration 3-C decoration 7” is performed, and the state shown in the next FIG. 464(b)(12). The state shown is a state in which the C-system look-ahead notice (strong) is performed by confirming and stopping the symbol combination of "C decoration 3-C decoration 3-C decoration 7" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Here, by giving this C-system look-ahead notice (strong), it is notified that there is a high possibility of a big hit (or that the big hit is confirmed).

As in the present embodiment, when changing (promoting or demoting) the display mode of the decorative pattern, an effect that fuels the change (promotion or demoting) may be performed. With such a configuration, the player can be made to pay more attention to the change in the display mode of the decorative pattern, and the interest of the player can be improved in some cases. In addition, a button effect that prompts the player to perform an operation may be executed during execution of an effect that fuels a change (promotion or demotion). With such a configuration, it may be possible to increase the player's ability to intervene in the game and further improve the player's interest.

<Variable display of decorative patterns and advance notice/Example 6>
FIG. 466(c)(1) to FIG. 467(c)(35) are diagrams showing a decorative symbol variable display and prefetching notice in time series according to the sixth embodiment.

In this example, (1-1) variable display by A system decorative design, production of mini game (failure) and fixed stop display of lost design → (1-2) promotion production from A system decorative design to C system decorative design And pre-reading notice (strong) → (1-3) The display is performed in the order of demotion production from C-based decorative design to A-based decorative design and fixed stop display of lost design. Hereinafter, each display will be described in detail.

<(1-1) Variable display by A-type decorative design, production of mini game (failure) and fixed stop display of lost design>

The state shown in FIG. 466(c)(1) is a state before the variation of the decorative symbol is started. In the same state, by displaying the symbol combination of "A decoration 4-A decoration 6-A decoration 6" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the final stop display of the decorative symbol variable display. , Stop display of lost symbols is displayed.

Further, since the special game 1 variable game holding number is 3, the number 3 is displayed in the special drawing 1 holding number display area 208e provided at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display area 208d is displayed. In the hold icon display area at the lower left, three hold icons h11 to h13 corresponding to the number of holdings of the special figure 1 variable game are displayed. Further, since the special game 2 variable game holding number is 0, the number 0 is displayed in the special figure 2 holding number display area 208f provided at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a navigation character YM for performing various kinds of navigation and notification is displayed in the user interface (UI) display area at the lower right of the effect display area 208d.

The state shown in the next FIG. 466(c)(2) is a state after the variation of the decorative pattern is started. In the same state, the decorative symbol variation display is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 variable game is decreased from 3 to 2, so the special figure 1 reserved number display The number 3 is updated to 2 in the area 208e. In addition, in the same state, the moving (decreasing) animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed.

The states shown in FIGS. 466(c)(3) to (c)(8) of FIG. 46 are states in which the mini game is being executed. As the mini game executed during the decorative symbol variable display, the mini game described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 200 can be cited. In the mini game of this example, one of the two treasure boxes BX1 and BX2 is used by the player. When the character CP4 of Tonoh appears from the selected treasure box, it is determined that the mission has succeeded, and when the old character CP5 appears from the selected treasure box, it is determined that the mission has failed. Is configured. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 466(c) and (7), the auntie character CP5 has appeared from the selected treasure box, so it is determined that the mission has failed, and in FIG. The game is over.

The state shown in FIGS. 466(c) and (9) below is a state in which swing fluctuation is performed in the symbol combination of “A decoration 4-A decoration 6-A decoration 6” in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the state shown in FIGS. 466(c) and (10), the stop display of the symbol combination of "A decoration 4-A decoration 6-A decoration 6" is performed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the fixed stop display of the lost symbol is displayed. It is in the state of performing. In this example, since the mission has failed in the mini game (because the failure pattern has been derived as a result of the mini game), promotion of the B type decorative design (or the C type decorative design) from the A type decorative design is not performed. Is configured as follows.
<(1-2) Promotion effect from A-based decorative design to C-based decorative design and pre-reading notice (strong)>

The state shown in FIGS. 467(c) and (11) is the state after the variation of the decorative pattern is started. In the same state, while the decorative symbol variation display is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 variation game holding number is reduced from 2 to 1, so the special figure 1 holding number display The number 2 is updated to 1 in the area 208e. In addition, in the same state, the moving (decreasing) animations of the hold icons h12 and h13 of Toku-zu 1 are performed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 467(c)(12) to (13) are states in which a step-up notice (preliminary notice) is given in the decorative symbol variable display. In this step-up notice, after the princess character image CP1 (step-up notice SU1) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative pattern display device 208, the grandfather character image CP2 (step-up notice SU2) is stopped and displayed. doing.

In the state shown in FIGS. 467(c) and (14) below, the stop display (left stop) of the decorative design (in this example, C decoration 3) is performed in the left design display area 208a of the decorative design display device 208, and the UI is displayed. The symbol "!" is displayed in the display area. In the same state, the C decoration 3 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the symbol "!" is displayed in the UI display area, so that the look-ahead notice (in this example, FIG. 467(c)(17) ) Indicates that the C system prefetch notice (strong)) may start.

In the state shown in FIGS. 467(c) and (15) below, a stop display (right stop) of a decorative design (in this example, C decoration 7) is performed in the right design display area 208c of the decorative design display device 208, and the UI is displayed. In the display area, the character string "Hot?" is displayed. In the same state, while maintaining the display mode of left stop, the C decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the character string "Hot?" (In this example, it is predicted that the C system prefetching notice (strong) shown in FIGS. 467(c) and (17) may be started.

In the state shown in FIGS. 467(c) and (16), a stop display (middle stop) is performed after the fluctuation of the decorative design (in this example, C decoration 3) in the middle design display area 208b of the decorative design display device 208. At the same time, a character string "Hot!" is displayed in the UI display area. In the same state, the C decoration 3 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208c while the display mode of the left stop and the right stop is maintained, and the character string "Hot!" is displayed in the UI display area. Then, the pre-reading notice (in this example, the C-system pre-reading notice (strong) shown in FIGS. 467 (c) and (17)) is likely to be started.

As shown in FIGS. 467(c), (14) to (c), (16), a C-based decorative design is stopped and displayed, or a symbol or character is displayed in the UI display area to cause an expectation. If it is configured to give advance notice that there is a possibility that a pre-reading notice (in this example, the C-system pre-reading notice (strong) shown in FIGS. 467(c) and (17)) may be started, the decoration In some cases, it is possible to gradually increase the player's expectation during the variable display of symbols.

In the state shown in FIGS. 467 (c) and (17), the symbol combination of “C decoration 3-C decoration 3-C decoration 7” is fixedly stopped and displayed in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208. Then, the C system prefetching notice (strong) has been given. Here, by giving this C-system look-ahead notice (strong), a false notice (gasse notice) that the possibility of a big hit is high is executed.

<(1-3) Demotion from C-based decorative design to A-based decorative design and fixed stop display of lost design>

The states shown in FIGS. 467(c) and (18) are the states after the variation of the decorative pattern is started. In the same state, the decorative symbol variation display is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 variable game is reduced from 1 to 0, so the special figure 1 reserved number display The number 1 is updated to 0 in the area 208e. In addition, in the same state, a moving (decreasing) animation of the hold icon h13 of Toku-zu 1 is performed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 467(c)(19) to (21) are states in which a step-up notice (preliminary notice) is given in the decorative symbol variable display. In this step-up notice, after the princess character image CP1 (step-up notice SU1) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative pattern display device 208, the grandfather character image CP2 (step-up notice SU2) is stopped and displayed. Then, finally, by stopping and displaying the bancho character image CP3 (step-up notice SU3), a false notice (gaze notice) that the development to super reach has been confirmed and the possibility of a big hit has increased is executed. doing.

The states shown in FIGS. 467(c)(22) to (c)(24) are the stop display of the decorative design (in this example, C decoration 3) in the left design display area 208a of the decorative design display device 208. After (left stop), a stop display (right stop) of the decorative design (in this example, C decoration 3) is performed in the right design display area 208c, and a character string "reach" is displayed in the UI display area. Is going. In the same state, the fact that the reach state has been reached is notified.

The next state shown in FIGS. 467(c) and (25) is a state in which a group notice (small) is given. In this example, as a group notice, a smaller number of Sabohanii character notices than the group notice of the first embodiment (see FIG. 464 (28)) are used to cross the effect display area 208d from right to left (Small). At the same time, by displaying the character string "Chance" in the UI display area, the false advance notice (geek notice) that the development to super reach has been confirmed and the possibility of a big hit has increased ..

The states shown in the following FIGS. 467(c) and (26) are states in which SP development notification is being performed. In this SP development notification, the Sabohani group notice (small) is continuously given, and by displaying the character string "SP" in the UI display area, the development to super reach is confirmed, and the jackpot of the big hit is confirmed. A false notice (gasse notice) that the possibility is high is being executed. The next state shown in FIGS. 467(c) and (27) is a state where the super reach effect is being performed. In this super reach production, in the production display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208, a movie in which the main character and the enemy swordsman duel is displayed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 467(c) and (28) are states in which button effects are being performed. In this button effect, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image BP simulating the appearance of the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136), and an operation promotion display that prompts an operation by the operation means (this example). Then, the downward arrow) is displayed.

The next state shown in FIGS. 467(c) and (29) is a state in which the operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is accepted, and the next state shown in FIGS. 467(c) and (30) is In this state, the cut-in image (weak) is displayed based on the fact that the operation by the operation means has been accepted. In the cut-in image (weak) of this example, a balloon image in which the characters "Game" are arranged in the balloon is displayed together with the up image of Tonosama's character, but the cut-in image of Example 1 (Fig. 464 (33)), the display mode of the balloon image is different. The following states shown in FIGS. 467(c) and (31) are states in which defeat production is being performed. In this defeat production, it is displayed that the main character is defeated by an enemy swordsman, and the character string "sorry" is displayed in the UI display area, suggesting that it was not a big hit. ing.

In the states shown in FIGS. 467(c)(32) to (c)(33), the wipe image WP appears in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and gradually covers the entire display area. The decorative pattern is overlapped by the wipe image WP, and the decorative pattern is not visible. In the same state, the wipe image WP covers almost the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a process of changing (degrading) the C decorative symbol to the A decorative symbol is executed.

In the state shown in FIGS. 467(c) and (34), the wipe image WP is erased, and the fluctuation in fluctuation is caused by the symbol combination of "A decoration 3-A decoration 4-A decoration 3" in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c. In the state shown in FIGS. 467(c) and (35), the stop display of the symbol combination of "A decoration 3-A decoration 4-A decoration 3" is performed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Then, it is a state where the fixed stop display of the lost symbol is performed.

Note that FIGS. 467(d)(31) to (d)(38) are modifications of FIGS. 467(c)(31) to (d)(35). Even when the decorative pattern is overlapped by the wipe image WP as in this example, the process of changing (degrading) the C-based decorative pattern to the A-based decorative pattern is not performed, and the same figure (d) (35) is used. ), by performing the stop display of the symbol combination by the C-based decorative symbol, after the fixed stop display of the lost symbol, the next decorative symbol variable display (d) (37) after that, C The system decorative design may be changed (relegated) to the A system decorative design and the variable display by the A system decorative design may be started. With such a configuration, it may be possible to maintain the player's expectation as compared with the case where the decorative pattern is demoted at the same time as the wipe image WP.

Further, FIGS. 468(a)(31) to (d)(35) are also modifications of FIGS. 467(c)(31) to (d)(35). As in this example, during the super reach production before the decorative pattern is overlapped by the wipe image WP, the C type decorative pattern is changed to the A type decorative pattern (relegated), and a part of the pattern combination of the A type decorative pattern (In this example, a stop display of the A decoration 4 which is the middle pattern) is performed, and after the shaking fluctuation after the wipe image WP is erased in (a) and (34) of FIG. May be. With such a configuration, it may be possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the target variation of the prefetching notice has ended.

<Variable display of decorative patterns and advance notice/Example 7>
FIG. 468(b)(1) to FIG. 469(b)(40) are diagrams showing a decorative symbol variable display and prefetching notice in time series according to the seventh embodiment.

In this example, (1-1) variable display with A-based decorative design and production of the first mini-game (success) and prefetch notice → (1-2) variable display with C-based decorative design and mini-game in fierce fighting mode (Success) production and pre-reading notice → (1-3) The display is performed in the order of promotion from fierce fighting mode to super fierce fighting mode and confirmation stop display of big hit symbols. Hereinafter, each display will be described in detail.

<(1-1) Variable display with A-based decorative design, production of the first mini-game (success) and pre-reading notice>

The state shown in FIG. 468(b)(1) is a state before the variation of the decorative symbol is started. In the same state, by displaying the symbol combination of "A decoration 4-A decoration 6-A decoration 6" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the final stop display of the decorative symbol variable display. , Stop display of lost symbols is displayed.

Further, since the special game 1 variable game holding number is 3, the number 3 is displayed in the special drawing 1 holding number display area 208e provided at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display area 208d is displayed. In the hold icon display area at the lower left, three hold icons h11 to h13 corresponding to the number of holdings of the special figure 1 variable game are displayed. Further, since the special game 2 variable game holding number is 0, the number 0 is displayed in the special figure 2 holding number display area 208f provided at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a navigation character YM for performing various kinds of navigation and notification is displayed in the user interface (UI) display area at the lower right of the effect display area 208d.

The state shown in the next FIG. 468(b)(2) is the state after the variation of the decorative pattern is started. In the same state, the decorative symbol variation display is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 variable game is decreased from 3 to 2, so the special figure 1 reserved number display The number 3 is updated to 2 in the area 208e. In addition, in the same state, the moving (decreasing) animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 468(c)(3) to (c)(8) are states in which the mini game is being executed. As the mini game executed during the decorative symbol variable display, the mini game described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 200 can be cited. In the mini game of this example, one of the two treasure boxes BX1 and BX2 is used by the player. When the character CP4 of the lord appears from the selected treasure box, it is determined that the mission has succeeded, and the auntie character CP5 (see FIGS. 466(c)(7)) appears from the selected treasure box. If it does, it is configured to determine that the mission has failed. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 468(b) and (7), since the character CP4 of Tonobu has appeared from the selected treasure box, it is determined that the mission has succeeded, and the mini in FIG. 468(b)(8). The game is over.

The state shown in FIGS. 468(b) and (9) below is a state in which the swing variation is performed in the symbol combination of “C decoration 3-C decoration 3-C decoration 7” in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and In front of the decorative pattern, the characters “heavy”, “fight”, and “M” indicating the start of the fierce fighting mode are displayed. In the state shown in FIGS. 468(b) and (10), the C-system prefetch notice is displayed by confirming and stopping the symbol combination of "C decoration 3-C decoration 3-C decoration 7" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. (Strong) Here, by giving this C-system look-ahead notice (strong), it is notified that there is a high possibility of a big hit (or that the big hit is confirmed). In this example, since the mission was successful in the first mini game, the A-based decorative design is promoted from the A-based decorative design.

<(1-2) C-based decorative design variable display and production of mini-game (success) in fierce battle mode and pre-reading notice>

The state shown in FIGS. 468(b) and (11) is a state after the variation of the decorative pattern is started. In the same state, while the decorative symbol variation display is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 variation game holding number is reduced from 2 to 1, so the special figure 1 holding number display The number 2 is updated to 1 in the area 208e. In addition, in the same state, the moving (decreasing) animations of the hold icons h12 and h13 of Toku-zu 1 are performed.

The states shown in FIGS. 468(b) and (12) are transitions to the fierce battle mode. In this example, since the mission was successful in the previous mini-game during the decorative pattern variation display (since the success pattern was derived as a result of the mini game), promotion of the C-based decorative design from the A-based decorative design was promoted. Along with doing, a fierce fighting mode has been added. The states shown in FIGS. 468(c)(13) to (c)(17) in the next figure are states in which the mini game is being executed in the fierce battle mode. The mini game executed during the fierce battle mode may be the mini game described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 200, but in this example, the same mini game as the previous mini game during the decorative pattern variation display is executed. ing. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 468(b) and (16), the character CP4 of the lord has appeared from the selected treasure box, so it is determined that the mission has succeeded, and the mini in FIG. 468(b)(17). The game is over.

The following states shown in FIGS. 468(b)(18) to (b)(19) are states in which the hold change animation is started. In this hold change animation, the third hold icon h13 having the first display mode (white circle image in this example) and the third hold icon h13 having the second display mode (bancho face image in this example) are used. The animation including the animation for changing to the hold icon h13′ of No. is executed. By performing this hold change animation, it is announced that the result of the next variable display is likely to be a big hit (or that it is confirmed that it is a big hit).

The state shown in the following FIGS. 468(b) and (20) is a state in which swing fluctuation is performed in the symbol combination of “C decoration 3-C decoration 3-C decoration 7” in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and In front of the decorative pattern, the characters “heavy”, “fight”, and “M” indicating the start of the fierce fighting mode are displayed. In the state shown in FIGS. 468(b) and (21), the C-system prefetch notice is displayed by confirming and stopping the symbol combination of “C decoration 3-C decoration 3-C decoration 7” in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It is in the state of performing (strong). Here, the possibility of a big hit is extremely high (or the big hit is confirmed) by giving the second C-system look-ahead notice (strong).
<Promotion from fierce fighting mode to super fierce fighting mode and fixed stop display of jackpot pattern>

The state shown in FIGS. 468(b) and (22) is the state after the variation of the decorative pattern is started. In the same state, the decorative symbol variation display is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 variable game is reduced from 1 to 0, so the special figure 1 reserved number display The number 1 is updated to 0 in the area 208e. In addition, in the same state, the moving (decreasing) animation of the hold icon h13' of special figure 1 is performed.

The state shown in FIGS. 468(b) and (23) is a state in which the super fierce battle mode is entered. In this example, since the mission was successful in the previous mini-game during the decorative pattern variable display (since the success pattern was derived as a result of the mini-game), the super fierce battle mode is given. The states shown in the following FIGS. 468(b), (24) to (26) are states in which a step-up notice (changing notice) is being performed in the decorative symbol variation display during the super-fighting mode. In this step-up notice, after the princess character image CP1 (step-up notice SU1) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative pattern display device 208, the grandfather character image CP2 (step-up notice SU2) is stopped and displayed. Then, finally, by stopping and displaying the bancho character image CP3 (step-up notice SU3), the development to super reach is confirmed, and the possibility of a big hit increases (or the big hit is confirmed). It suggests.

The state shown in the following FIG. 468(b)(27) to FIG. 469(b)(29) is the stop display of the decorative design (in this example, C decoration 3) in the left design display area 208a of the decorative design display device 208. After (left stop), a stop display (right stop) of the decorative design (in this example, C decoration 3) is performed in the right design display area 208c, and a character string "reach" is displayed in the UI display area. Is going. In the same state, the fact that the reach state has been reached is notified.

The next state shown in FIGS. 469(b) and (30) is a state in which a group notice is given during the super-fighting mode. In this example, as a group notice, a large number of character images of Sabohani cross the effect display area 208d from right to left, and a character string "Gekiatsu" is displayed in the UI display area. , Suggesting that the development of super-reach has been confirmed and the chances of a big hit have increased (or that a big hit has been confirmed).

The following states shown in FIGS. 469(b) and (31) are states in which SP development notification is being performed during the super-fighting mode. In this SP development notification, while continuing to give notice of the Savohani group and displaying the character string "SP" in the UI display area, the development to super reach is confirmed and there is a possibility of a big hit. It indicates that it has become higher (or that the jackpot has been confirmed). The state shown in FIGS. 469(b) and (32) is a state in which super reach effect is being performed. In this super reach production, in the production display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208, a movie in which the main character and the enemy swordsman duel is displayed.

The states shown in FIGS. 469(b) and (33) below are the states in which the deca button effect is being performed during the super fierce battle mode. In this big button effect, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image BP2 simulating the appearance of the operating means (in this example, the chance button 136) (the button image shown in FIG. 464 (31) of the first embodiment). A button image larger than BP) and an operation prompting display (downward arrow in this example) that prompts an operation by the operating means are displayed.

The state shown in FIGS. 469(b) and (34) below is a state in which the operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is accepted, and the state shown in FIGS. 469(b) and (35) below is The cut-in image is displayed based on the acceptance of the operation by the operation means, and the character string “strong cut-in” is displayed in the UI display area. In the cut-in image of this example, a balloon image in which the characters "Game" are arranged in the balloon is displayed together with the up image of the lord's character. The next state shown in FIGS. 469(b) and (36) is a state where a winning effect is being performed. In this victory effect, it is indicated that the main character has won the swordsman who is the enemy, and that the character string "Yatteze" is displayed in the UI display area, indicating that the jackpot has been confirmed. doing.

In the states shown in FIGS. 469(b)(37) to (b)(38), the wipe image WP appears in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 and gradually covers the entire display area. The decorative pattern is overlapped by the wipe image WP, and the decorative pattern is not visible. In the same state, a process of covering almost the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 with the wipe image WP is executed.

In the state shown in FIGS. 469(b) and (39), after the wipe image WP is erased, the swing of the decorative pattern (in this example, C decoration 3) in the middle pattern display area 208b of the decorative pattern display device 208 is changed. The stop display (middle stop) is performed, and the character string "Big hit" is displayed in the UI display area. In the same state, the C decoration 3 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208c while the left stop and right stop display modes are maintained, and the character string "Big hit" is displayed in the UI display area. , Has announced that the jackpot has been confirmed. The state shown in the next FIG. 469 (b) (40), the symbol combination of "C decoration 3-C decoration 3-C decoration 3" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 (a symbol combination that becomes a big hit) ) Is fixedly stopped and displayed, and the character string "Big hit" is displayed in the UI display area to notify that the big hit has been fixed.

As shown in FIGS. 469(c), (37) to (c), (40), the decorative pattern is overlapped by the wipe image WP, and the C type decorative pattern is changed to the A type decorative pattern (demotion). Then, the fixed stop display of the symbol combination based on the A type decorative symbol may be performed. With such a configuration, it may be possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the target variation of the prefetching notice has ended.

<Variable display of decorative patterns and advance notice/Example 8>
FIG. 469(d)(1) to FIG. 470(25) are diagrams showing the decorative symbol variable display and prefetching notice in time series according to the eighth embodiment.

In this example, (1-1) variable display by A type decorative design and production of mini game (success) and mini item → (1-2) Promotion effect from A type decorative design to C type decorative design and look-ahead notice ( (Strong)→(1-3) The display is performed in the order of reach from the variable display by the C type decorative design. Hereinafter, each display will be described in detail.

<(1-1) Variable display with A type decorative design and mini game (success) and production of mini items>

The state shown in FIG. 469(d)(1) is a state before the variation of the decorative symbol is started. In the same state, by displaying the symbol combination of "A decoration 4-A decoration 6-A decoration 6" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the final stop display of the decorative symbol variable display. , Stop display of lost symbols is displayed.

Further, since the special game 1 variable game holding number is 3, the number 3 is displayed in the special drawing 1 holding number display area 208e provided at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display area 208d is displayed. In the hold icon display area at the lower left, three hold icons h11 to h13 corresponding to the number of holdings of the special figure 1 variable game are displayed. Further, since the special game 2 variable game holding number is 0, the number 0 is displayed in the special figure 2 holding number display area 208f provided at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a navigation character YM for performing various kinds of navigation and notification is displayed in the user interface (UI) display area at the lower right of the effect display area 208d.

The state shown in the next FIG. 469(d)(2) is the state after the variation of the decorative pattern is started. In the same state, the decorative symbol variation display is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 variable game is decreased from 3 to 2, so the special figure 1 reserved number display The number 3 is updated to 2 in the area 208e. In addition, in the same state, the moving (decreasing) animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed.

The states shown in FIGS. 469(d)(3) to (d)(8) in the next figure are states in which the mini game is being executed. Examples of the mini game executed during the decorative symbol variable display include the mini game described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 200. In the mini game of the present example, the mini game by Amida lottery is executed. In the mini game of this example, the bancho face image CP6 progresses according to the rules of the Amida lottery, and finally reaches the panda face image CP7, so that a mini item (notice icon) is acquired, and FIG. d) The mini game ends in (9). Here, the mini item (preliminary icon) is a type of pre-reading notice, and the mini item (preliminary icon) can be carried over after the acquired fluctuation.

The state shown in the next FIG. 470(d)(10) is a state in which the swing fluctuation is performed in the symbol combination of "A decoration 4-A decoration 6-A decoration 6" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the state shown in FIGS. 470(d) and (11), the stop display of the symbol combination of "A decoration 4-A decoration 6-A decoration 6" is performed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the fixed stop display of the lost symbol is displayed. It is in the state of performing. In this example, since a mini item has been acquired in the mini game, display of a mini item (an image of a panda's face) CP7 and a character string suggesting that the mini item has been acquired (in this example, in the effect display area 208d) , "Waiting" character string) is displayed.
<(1-2) Promotion effect from A-based decorative design to C-based decorative design and pre-reading notice (strong)>

The states shown in FIGS. 470(d) and (12) are the states after the variation of the decorative pattern is started. In the same state, while the decorative symbol variation display is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 variation game holding number is reduced from 2 to 1, so the special figure 1 holding number display The number 2 is updated to 1 in the area 208e. In addition, in the same state, the moving (decreasing) animations of the hold icons h12 and h13 of Toku-zu 1 are performed.

The states shown in the following FIGS. 470 (d) (13) to (14) are states in which a step-up notice (preliminary notice) is given in the decorative symbol variable display. In this step-up notice, after the princess character image CP1 (step-up notice SU1) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative pattern display device 208, the grandfather character image CP2 (step-up notice SU2) is stopped and displayed. doing. Further, in the same state, by displaying the mini item (image of the face of a panda) CP7 in the effect display area 208d during the decorative symbol variable display, the decorative symbol is promoted from the A-based decorative symbol to the C-based decorative symbol. I foretell.

The state shown in the next FIG. 470 (d) (15) performs a stop display (left decoration) of the decorative design (in this example, C decoration 3) in the left design display area 208a of the decorative design display device 208, and the UI The symbol "!" is displayed in the display area. In the same state, the C decoration 3 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the symbol "!" is displayed in the UI display area, so that the look-ahead notice (FIG. 470(d) (18) in this example) is displayed. ) Indicates that the C system prefetch notice (strong)) may start.

The state shown in the following FIG. 470 (d) (16) performs a stop display (right stop) of the decorative symbol (C decoration 7 in this example) in the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the UI In the display area, the character string "Hot?" is displayed. In the same state, while maintaining the display mode of left stop, the C decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the character string "Hot?" (In this example, it is announced that the C system prefetching notice (strong) shown in FIGS. 470(d) and (18) may be started.

In the next state shown in FIG. 470(d)(17), a stop display (middle stop) is performed after the fluctuation of the decorative design (in this example, C decoration 3) in the middle design display area 208b of the decorative design display device 208. At the same time, a character string "Hot!" is displayed in the UI display area. In the same state, the C decoration 3 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208c while the display mode of the left stop and the right stop is maintained, and the character string "Hot!" is displayed in the UI display area. Then, the pre-reading notice (in this example, the C-system pre-reading notice (strong) shown in FIGS. 470(d) and (18)) may be started.

The state shown in the following FIG. 470 (d) (18) is to confirm and stop the symbol combination of "C decoration 3-C decoration 3-C decoration 7" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, the C system prefetching notice (strong) has been given. Here, by giving this C-system look-ahead notice (strong), it is notified that there is a high possibility of a big hit (or that the big hit is confirmed).
<(1-3) Reach from variable display with C-based decorative design>

The state shown in FIGS. 470(d) and (19) is the state after the variation of the decorative pattern is started. In the same state, the decorative symbol variation display is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 variable game is reduced from 1 to 0, so the special figure 1 reserved number display The number 1 is updated to 0 in the area 208e. In addition, in the same state, a moving (decreasing) animation of the hold icon h13 of Toku-zu 1 is performed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 470(d)(20) to (d)(21) are the states in which the deletion animation of the mini item is executed. In this mini item deletion animation, an animation including an animation for deleting the display of the mini item (image of the panda's face) CP7 displayed in the effect display area 208d is executed. Here, by executing the deletion animation of the mini item, it is notified that the mini item that was carried over has been consumed and that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the fluctuation (or that the big hit is confirmed). ..

The state shown in the following FIG. 470(d)(22) is a state in which a step-up notice (a notice during change) is given in the decorative symbol variable display. In this step-up notice, the princess character image CP1 (step-up notice SU1) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the possibility of a big hit is high (or the big hit is confirmed). What you have done).

The states shown in FIGS. 470 (d) (23) to (d) (25) are the stop display of the decorative design (in this example, C decoration 3) in the left design display area 208a of the decorative design display device 208. After (left stop), a stop display (right stop) of the decorative design (in this example, C decoration 3) is performed in the right design display area 208c, and a character string "reach" is displayed in the UI display area. By doing so, it informs that the reach state has been reached. The description of the subsequent display is omitted.
<Modification of Example 8>

470(e)(8) to (e)(14) are modifications of the decorative symbol variable display and the pre-reading notice described with reference to FIGS. 469(d)(8) to 470(d)(11). Here is an example. In this example, after finishing the mini game in FIGS. 470(e) and (9), the decoration symbol (A decoration 2 in this example) is stopped in the left symbol display area 208a in the next FIGS. 470(e) and (10). After performing the display (left stop), in the next FIG. 470(e)(11), the stop display (right stop) of the decorative symbol (A decoration 6 in this example) is performed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the mini An item deletion animation is running.

Further, in the next FIG. 470(e)(12), the decorative design is promoted from the A-based decorative design to the B-based decorative design, and the decorative design (in this example, B decorative 2) is stopped in the left design display area 208a. While performing the display (left stop), stop display (right stop) of the decorative symbol (B decoration 6 in this example) is performed in the right symbol display area 208c, and finally, in FIG. 470(e)(14), By performing stop display of the symbol combination of "B decoration 2-B decoration 4-B decoration 6" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the final stop display of the lost symbol is performed.

As in this example, during the change in which the mini item is acquired, the acquired mini item may be digested and the decorative pattern may be promoted. As in the eighth embodiment described above, the change after the change is performed. You may carry over to fluctuations. Further, the profit obtained by the mini item is not limited to the promotion of the decorative design and the notice of the promotion of the decorative design, but may be reach, reach notice, big hit, big hit notice or the like.

<Variable display of decorative patterns and advance notice/Example 9>
FIG. 471 is a diagram showing a decorative symbol variable display and prefetching notice in time series according to the ninth embodiment. The decorative symbol variable display and look-ahead notice according to the ninth embodiment are the same as the decorative symbol variable display and look-ahead notice according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 464, except that the second decorative symbol change display is performed. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted. Needless to say, the fourth symbol (for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 211(a)) is variably displayed separately from the decorative symbol used in the second decorative symbol variable display.

The decorative symbol display device 208 according to the present example includes second symbol display regions 208g to 208i separately from the symbol display regions 208a to 208c, and in the second symbol display regions 208g to 208i, different from the decorative symbol variable display. It is possible to display different types of decorative pattern variable display (second decorative pattern variable display), and the second decorative pattern variable display is configured to be performed during all periods during the display of the decorative pattern variable display. The display mode of the decorative design used for the second decorative design variable display is not particularly limited, but in this example, the second decorative design is used by using the A-based decorative design in all periods during the display of the decorative design variable display. It is configured to perform variable display.

Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 471(1) to 471(8), the decorative symbols of the decorative symbol variable display in the symbol display regions 208a to 208c, and the second in the second symbol display regions 208g to 208i. The decorative pattern of the decorative pattern variable display is a decorative pattern of the same display mode (in this example, an A-based decorative pattern), and as shown in FIGS. 471 (9) to (36), The decorative pattern of the decorative pattern variable display in 208a to 208c and the decorative pattern of the second decorative pattern variable display in the second symbol display areas 208g to 208i are different decorative patterns (in this example, one is B There is a case where a system decorative pattern (or a C system decorative pattern) and the other is an A system decorative pattern).

As in this example, in all the periods during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, it is possible to display a decorative pattern variable display (second decorative pattern variable display) of a different type from the decorative symbol variable display. , Even if the decorative pattern variable display is in a state where it is difficult or invisible to be seen from the front because it overlaps with another display or a movable body, the decorative pattern can be confirmed by the second decorative pattern variable display. In some cases, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is disadvantaged.

<Variable display of decorative patterns and advance notice/Example 10>
FIG. 472 is a diagram showing a decorative symbol variable display and prefetching notice in time series according to the tenth embodiment. The decorative symbol variable display and prefetching notice according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 468(b)(1) to 469(b)(36), except that the second decorative symbol variable display is performed. Since the decorative symbol variable display and the pre-reading notice according to the seventh embodiment are the same, the same reference numerals are given in the drawings and the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 according to the present example includes second symbol display regions 208g to 208i separately from the symbol display regions 208a to 208c, and in the second symbol display regions 208g to 208i, different from the decorative symbol variable display. It is possible to display a different type of decorative pattern variation display (second decorative pattern variation display), and a part of the period during the display of the decorative pattern variation display (in this example, as shown in FIG. 472 (1), immediately after the start of variation) The second decorative symbol variable display is configured to be performed during a part of the period). The display mode of the decorative design used for the second decorative design variable display is not particularly limited, but in this example, the second decoration using the A-based decorative design during a part of the period during the display of the decorative design variable display. It is configured to perform variable display of symbols.

Therefore, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 472(1), the decorative symbols of the decorative symbol variable display in the symbol display regions 208a to 208c and the second decorative symbol variable display of the second symbol display regions 208g to 208i are displayed. The decorative pattern and the decorative pattern have the same display form (in this example, the A-based decorative pattern).

As in this example, during at least a part of the period during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, it is possible to display a decorative pattern variable display (second decorative pattern variable display) of a different type from the decorative symbol variable display. By doing so, even if the decorative pattern variable display overlaps with other displays or the movable body and becomes difficult or invisible from the front side, the second decorative pattern variable display confirms the decorative pattern. In some cases, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is disadvantaged.

<Variable display of decorative patterns and advance notice/Example 11>
473(a), (37) to (a), (40) are diagrams showing a decorative symbol variable display and pre-reading notice in time series according to the eleventh embodiment. The decorative symbol variable display and prefetching notice according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 469(b)(37) to 469(b)(40), except that the second decorative symbol variable display is performed. Since the decorative symbol variable display and the pre-reading notice according to the seventh embodiment are the same, the same reference numerals are given in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 according to the present example includes second symbol display regions 208g to 208i separately from the symbol display regions 208a to 208c, and in the second symbol display regions 208g to 208i, different from the decorative symbol variable display. It is possible to display a decorative pattern variation display of the type (second decorative pattern variation display), and a part of the period during the display of the decorative pattern variation display (in this example, the fluctuation fluctuation shown in FIGS. 473(a) and (39)). The second decorative symbol variable display is configured to be performed during the period (1) and a part of the period immediately before the fixed stop display shown in (a) and (40) of FIG. The display mode of the decorative design used for the second decorative design variable display is not particularly limited, but in this example, the second decoration using the A-based decorative design during a part of the period during the display of the decorative design variable display. It is configured to perform variable display of symbols.

Therefore, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 473 (40), the decorative symbols of the decorative symbol variable display in the symbol display regions 208a to 208c and the second decorative symbol variable display of the second symbol display regions 208g to 208i are displayed. The decorative pattern is a decorative pattern in a different display mode (in this example, one is a C-based decorative pattern and the other is an A-based decorative pattern).

As in this example, during at least a part of the period during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, it is possible to display a decorative pattern variable display (second decorative pattern variable display) of a different type from the decorative symbol variable display. By doing so, even if the decorative pattern variable display overlaps with other displays or the movable body and becomes difficult or invisible from the front side, the second decorative pattern variable display confirms the decorative pattern. In some cases, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is disadvantaged.
<Modification of Example 11>

473(b)(37) to (b)(40) in FIG. 473(a)(37) to (a)(40) in FIG. Here is an example. In this example, when the decorative pattern variable display overlaps with the display of the wipe image WP and becomes difficult or invisible from the front, the second decorative pattern variable display is displayed in front of the wipe image WP. It is configured to display.

With such a configuration, the decorative pattern variable display is overlapped with another display such as the wipe image WP and becomes difficult or invisible from the front side, but the second decorative pattern is displayed. It is possible to confirm the decorative pattern by the variable display, and it may be possible to avoid a situation in which the player is disadvantaged.

<Variable display of decorative patterns and advance notice/Example 12>
473(c)(1) to (c)(10) of FIG. 47 are diagrams showing the decorative symbol variable display and prefetching notice in time series according to the twelfth embodiment. The decorative symbol variable display and prefetching notice according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 468(b)(1) to (b)(10), except that the second decorative symbol variable display is performed. Since the decorative symbol variable display and the pre-reading notice according to the seventh embodiment are the same, the same reference numerals are given in the drawings and the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 according to the present example includes second symbol display regions 208g to 208i separately from the symbol display regions 208a to 208c, and in the second symbol display regions 208g to 208i, different from the decorative symbol variable display. It is possible to display different types of decorative pattern variable display (second decorative pattern variable display), and a part of the period during display of the decorative pattern variable display (in this example, FIG. 473(b)(3) to FIG. b) (7), the period in which the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced by the execution of the mini game, and the decorative symbols shown in (b), (9) to (b), (10) of FIG. It is configured to perform the second decorative pattern variable display in a part of the period after promotion from the system decorative pattern to the C system decorative pattern).

As in the present example, during the period in which the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced by execution of a mini game or the like, a decorative symbol variable display (second decorative symbol variable display) different from the decorative symbol variable display is displayed. If possible, even if the decorative design variable display becomes difficult to see, it is possible to confirm the decorative design by the second decorative design variable display, which gives a disadvantage to the player. It may be possible to avoid such a situation. Further, in a part of the period after the decorative pattern is promoted from the A-based decorative design to the C-based decorative design, a decorative design variable display (second decorative design variable display) different from the decorative design variable display is displayed. With a possible configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice a change in the decorative pattern (promotion or demotion), and it may be possible to increase the interest of the player.
<Modification of Example 12>

473(d)(9) to (d)(10) are modifications of the decorative symbol variable display and the pre-reading notice described with reference to FIGS. 473(b)(9) to (a)(10). Here is an example. In this example, a part of the period during the display of the decorative symbol variable display (in this example, the decorative symbols shown in FIGS. 473(d)(9) to (d)(10), from the A type decorative symbols to C) In a part of the period after being promoted to the system decorative pattern), the decorative pattern of the display mode different from the decorative pattern of the decorative pattern variable display in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (in this example, the C system decorative pattern) The second decorative pattern variable display is configured by using a decorative pattern different from the A to C decorative patterns). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice a change in the decorative pattern (promotion or demotion), and it may be possible to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 473(e)(9) to (e)(10), a part of the period during the display of the decorative symbol variable display (in this example, in FIG. 473(e)(10), In the period of the fixed stop display by the C-based decorative design), the decorative design of the display mode different from the decorative design (in this example, the C-based decorative design) of the decorative design variable display in the design display areas 208a to 208c (the above-mentioned) The second decorative pattern variable display may be performed by using a decorative pattern different from the A to C system decorative patterns). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice a change in the decorative pattern (promotion or demotion), and it may be possible to increase the interest of the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 473(f)(1), even when the fixed stop display of the decorative design is performed, when the decorative design is not changed (promoted or demoted), the second decorative design variation The display may not be performed. With such a configuration, it may be possible to accurately inform the player that a change in the decorative design (promotion or demotion) has not been performed.

<Variable display of decorative patterns and advance notice/Example 13>
FIGS. 473(g)(1) to 475(g)(70) are diagrams showing a decorative symbol variable display and prefetching notice in time series according to the thirteenth embodiment.

In this example, (1-1) promotion from A system decorative pattern to B system decorative pattern, timer notice, mini game, fixed stop display of lost pattern → (1-2) variable display and pre-reading notice by B system decorative pattern (Strong)→(1-3) The display is performed in the order of promotion from B type decorative design to C type decorative design, mini game, pseudo-repeating, and fixed stop display of big hit symbols. Hereinafter, each display will be described in detail.

<(1-1) Promotion from A system decorative pattern to B system decorative pattern, timer notice, mini game, fixed stop display of lost pattern>

The state shown in FIG. 473(g)(1) is a state before the variation of the decorative pattern is started. In the same state, by displaying the symbol combination of "A decoration 1-A decoration 4-A decoration 6" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208 as the final stop display of the decorative symbol variable display. , Stop display of lost symbols is displayed.

Further, since the special game 1 variable game holding number is 3, the number 3 is displayed in the special drawing 1 holding number display area 208e provided at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display area 208d is displayed. In the hold icon display area at the lower left, three hold icons h11 to h13 corresponding to the number of holdings of the special figure 1 variable game are displayed. Further, since the special game 2 variable game holding number is 0, the number 0 is displayed in the special figure 2 holding number display area 208f provided at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a navigation character YM for performing various kinds of navigation and notification is displayed in the user interface (UI) display area at the lower right of the effect display area 208d.

Further, in addition to the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, second symbol display areas 208g to 208i are provided, and in the second symbol display areas 208g to 208i, decorative symbol variable display of a different type from the decorative symbol variable display (second (Variable display of decorative pattern) can be displayed, and is configured to perform the second variable display of decorative pattern during all periods during display of the variable display of decorative pattern.

The state shown in the next FIG. 473(g)(2) is a state after the variation of the decorative pattern is started. In the same state, the decorative symbol variation display is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 variable game is decreased from 3 to 2, so the special figure 1 reserved number display The number 3 is updated to 2 in the area 208e. In addition, in the same state, the moving (decreasing) animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed. In this movement (decrease) animation, the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 (hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) moves to the change icon display area and is displayed as the change icon h0. .. Here, the first hold icon h11, which was in the display mode of the bomb, moves to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, and the variable icon h0 that is the notification display mode of the timer notification effect related to the symbol variation. Become.

The state shown in the next FIG. 473 (g) (3) is a state in which the number of holding special game 1 variation games is increased by one during the decorative symbol variation display. In the same state, the number of reserved special game 1 variable games has been increased from 2 to 3, so the number 2 is updated to 3 in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 208e. In addition, in the same state, a new hold icon h14 is performing an increasing animation that appears in the hold icon display area.

The following states shown in FIGS. 473(g)(4) to (g)(7) are the states in which the variable icon change animation is being executed. In this variable icon change animation, the character image CP8 of the lord collides with the variable icon h0 that is the display mode of the bomb, and the animation including the animation in which the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes to Sabohani is executed. Here, by changing the display mode of the variation icon h0 to sabotani, there is a possibility that a notice (for example, a group notice shown in FIGS. 475(g) and (60)) will be executed in the decorative pattern variation display after the next time. Suggests that there is.

Further, in the state shown in FIGS. 473(g) and (6), the timer advance notice is started during the changing icon change animation. Here, the timer notice includes a display that shows the remaining time until a new effect is started, and is also a type of notice effect that suggests that a new effect will be started. For example, the timer notice or the like described with reference to FIG. 44, FIG. 308 to FIG. 316, FIG. 425 to FIG. 462, etc. is applicable, but in this example, by displaying the timer notice display TM in the effect display area 208d, Performs production that counts down the remaining time until production is started. In the state shown in FIG. 473(g)(6), by displaying the time "07:00" on the timer advance notice display TM, a certain effect (in this example, 7 seconds after the countdown is started) This suggests that the B system prefetching notice (weak) shown in FIGS. 474(g) and (15) is started.

The states shown in FIGS. 473(g)(8) to 474(g)(11) are states in which a mini game is being executed. As the mini game executed during the decorative symbol variable display, the mini game described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 200 can be cited. In the mini game of this example, one of the two treasure boxes BX1 and BX2 is used by the player. When the character CP4 of the lord appears from the selected treasure box, it is determined that the mission has succeeded, and the auntie character CP5 (see FIGS. 466(c)(7)) appears from the selected treasure box. If it does, it is configured to determine that the mission has failed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 473(g) and (11), since the character CP4 of the lord has appeared from the selected treasure box, it is determined that the mission is successful and the mini game is ended. Further, since the mission was successful in the mini game and the mini item (advance icon) was acquired, as shown in FIG. 473(g)(12), in the effect display area 208d, the mini item (image of the lord) CP4 By performing the display and displaying the character string “Chance eye determination” in the UI display area, the pre-reading notice (in this example, the B-system pre-reading notice (weak) shown in FIGS. 474(g) and (15)) is displayed. It has announced that it may be started.

The next state shown in FIG. 474(g)(13) is the stop of the decorative design (in this example, the decorative design in which the flower image FP1 is applied to the B decoration 2) in the left design display area 208a of the decorative design display device 208. The display (stopped to the left) is performed, and the character string “determination of chance eyes” is displayed in the UI display area. In the same state, the flower image FP1 is applied to the B decoration 2 and the character string “determination of chance eyes” is displayed in the UI display area, so that the pre-reading notice (in this example, FIG. 474(g)(15) ) Indicates that there is a possibility that the B system pre-reading notice (weak) shown in () may be started.

The next state shown in FIG. 474(g)(14) is the stop of the decorative design (in this example, the decorative design in which the flower image FP2 is applied to the B decoration 6) in the right design display area 208c of the decorative design display device 208. In addition to displaying (stopping to the right), the character string "Chance eye determination" is displayed in the UI display area. In the same state, while maintaining the display mode of left stop, the flower image FP2 is applied to the B decoration 6 and the character string "Chance eye determination" is displayed in the UI display area, so that the look-ahead notice (book) is displayed. In the example, it is announced that the B-system prefetch notice (weak) shown in FIGS. 474(g) and (15) may be started.

The states shown in FIGS. 474(g)(15) to (g)(16) are based on the fact that 7 seconds have elapsed since the timer advance countdown was started, and the symbols on the decorative symbol display device 208 are shown. By displaying the symbol combination of "B decoration 2-B decoration 4-B decoration 6" in the display areas 208a to 208c as the fixed stop display, the B-system prefetching notice (weak) is performed. Here, it is informed that there is a possibility that the system B pre-reading notice may be developed by giving the system B pre-reading notice (weak).
<Variable display with B-type decorative design and advance notice (strong)>

The states shown in FIGS. 474(g)(17) to (g)(19) are the states in which the variable icon change animation is being executed during the decorative symbol variable display. In this variable icon change animation, an animation including an animation in which the display mode of the variable icon h1 changes to sabotani is executed. Here, by changing the display mode of the variation icon h1 to sabotani, there is a possibility that a notice (for example, a group notice shown in FIG. 475(g) (60)) will be executed in the decorative symbol variation display after the next time. Suggests that there is.

The state shown in the next FIG. 474(g)(20) is the stop of the decorative design (in this example, the decorative design in which the flower image FP1 is applied to the B decoration 3) in the left design display area 208a of the decorative design display device 208. Display (stop left). In the same state, the pre-reading notice (in this example, the B-system pre-reading notice (strong) shown in FIGS. 474(g) and (23)) may be started by applying the flower image FP1 to the B decoration 3. I foretell.

The state shown in the next FIG. 474(g)(21) is the stop of the decorative design (in this example, the decorative design in which the flower image FP2 is applied to the B decoration 7) in the right design display area 208c of the decorative design display device 208. In addition to the display (stop right), the character string "chance" is displayed in the UI display area. In the same state, while maintaining the display mode of left stop, the flower image FP2 is applied to the B decoration 7 and the character string "chance" is displayed in the UI display area, so that the look-ahead notice (in this example, in advance) is displayed. 474 (g) and (23), the system B pre-reading notice (strong) is predicted to be started.

The state shown in the next FIG. 474(g)(22) is the stop of the decorative pattern (in this example, the decorative pattern obtained by applying the flower image FP3 to the B decoration 7) in the middle pattern display area 208b of the decorative pattern display device 208. In addition to the display (intermediate stop), the character string "hot" is displayed in the UI display area. In the same state, while maintaining the display mode of left stop and right stop, the flower image FP3 is applied to the B decoration 7 and the character string "hot" is displayed in the UI display area, so that the look-ahead notice ( In this example, it is predicted that the B system prefetching notice (strong) shown in FIGS. 474(g) and (23) may be started.

In the next state shown in FIG. 474(g)(23), the symbol combination of "B decoration 3-B decoration 7-B decoration 7" is fixedly stopped and displayed in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208. Then, the system B pre-reading notice (strong) is given. Here, the fact that the B-system pre-reading notice (strong) is given may cause the development of the C-system pre-reading notice.

<(1-3) Promotion of B-based decorative design to C-based decorative design, mini game, pseudo-relation, fixed stop display of jackpot design>

The states shown in FIGS. 474(g)(24) to (g)(26) are states in which the variable icon change animation is being executed during the decorative symbol variable display. In this variation icon change animation, an animation including an animation in which the display mode of the variation icon h2 changes to sabotani is executed. Here, by changing the display mode of the variation icon h2 to sabotani, it is possible that a notice (for example, a group notice or the like shown in FIG. 475(g) (60)) will be executed in the decorative symbol variation display after the next time. Suggests that there is.

The states shown in FIGS. 474(g) and (27) to (g) and (33) in the next figure are states in which the mini game is being executed. Examples of the mini game executed during the decorative symbol variable display include the mini game described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 200. In the mini game of the present example, the mini game by Amida lottery is executed. In the mini game of this example, the bancho's face image CP6 progresses according to the rules of the Amida lottery, and finally reaches the crystal image CP9, thereby acquiring a mini item (preliminary icon), and FIG. 474(g). The mini-game ends at (32).

In this example, since the pseudo-repeated mini item is acquired in the mini game, the “pseudo-repeated series” is displayed in the UI display area over the period of FIGS. 474(g)(34) to 474(g)(36). The character string “determined” is displayed and the first pseudo-run is executed. In this first pseudo-relation, a temporary stop display (left stop) of the decorative design (B decoration 3 in this example) is performed in the left design display region 208a of the decorative design display device 208, and the decorative design is displayed in the right design display region 208c. (In this example, B decoration 4) is temporarily displayed (left stop), and the crystal image CP9 is temporarily displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The next state shown in FIGS. 474(g) and (37) is a state in which the start of the second pseudo-repeating operation is notified. In this example, during the period in which the pseudo-relation is being executed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the second symbol display areas 208g to 208i are configured to perform variable display with A-type decorative symbols.

The next state shown in FIGS. 474(g) and (38) is a state in which pseudo-relation is started. In this second pseudo run, as shown in FIGS. 474(g), (39) to (g), (45), a mini game by Amida lottery is executed during the decorative symbol variable display. In the mini game of this example, the bancho's face image CP6 progresses according to the rules of the Amida Lottery, and finally reaches the panda's face image CP7, thereby acquiring a mini item (preliminary icon). g) (45) ends the mini game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 475(g)(46) to (g)(48), in the second pseudo run, the decorative pattern is promoted from the B-based decorative pattern to the C-based decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is displayed. In the left symbol display area 208a of the device 208, a temporary stop display (left stop) of a decorative symbol (in this example, C ornament 3) is performed, and in the right symbol display region 208c, a temporary of the decorative symbol (in this example, C ornament 7) The stop display (left stop) is performed, and the decoration symbol (C decoration 7 in this example) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In FIG. 470(g)(48), the pattern combination of "C decoration 3-C decoration 3-C decoration 7" is temporarily displayed in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208, thereby pre-reading the C system. By giving a notice (strong), it is announced that there is a high possibility of a big hit (or that a big hit has been confirmed).

The state shown in the following FIG. 475(g)(49) shows the shake fluctuation of "C decoration 3-C decoration 3-C decoration 7" and the display of the effect image in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208. The state shown in FIG. 475(g)(50) is a state in which the start of the third pseudo-repeating is notified. In the third pseudo run, the step-up notice is executed during the decorative symbol variable display. In this step-up notice, after the princess character image CP1 (step-up notice SU1) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative pattern display device 208, the grandfather character image CP2 (step-up notice SU2) is stopped and displayed. Then, finally, by stopping and displaying the bancho character image CP3 (step-up notice SU3), the development to super reach is confirmed, and the possibility of a big hit increases (or the big hit is confirmed). It suggests.

The state shown in the following FIG. 475 (g) (55) to (g) (57) is the stop display of the decorative design (in this example, C decoration 3) in the left design display area 208a of the decorative design display device 208. After (left stop), a stop display (right stop) of the decorative design (in this example, C decoration 3) is performed in the right design display area 208c, and a character string "reach" is displayed in the UI display area. Is going. In the same state, the fact that the reach state has been reached is notified.

The states shown in the following FIGS. 475(g), (58) to (g), (59) are the states in which the variable icon change animation is being executed during the decorative symbol variable display. In this variable icon change animation, an animation including an animation in which the display mode of the variable icon h2 changes from Sabohani to an icon with the characters "heat!" Here, by changing the display mode of the variable icon h2 to an icon with the character "heat!", a notice (for example, shown in FIG. 475(g)(60) in the decorative symbol variable display after the next time is displayed. Group notice, etc.) may be executed.

The next state shown in FIGS. 475(g) and (60) is a state in which a group notice is given. In this example, as a group notice, a large number of character images of Sabohani cross the effect display area 208d from right to left, and a character string "Gekiatsu" is displayed in the UI display area. , Suggesting that the development of super-reach has been confirmed and the chances of a big hit have increased (or that a big hit has been confirmed).

The next state shown in FIG. 475(g)(61) is a state in which SP development notification is being performed. In this SP development notification, while continuing to give notice of the Savohani group and displaying the character string "SP" in the UI display area, the development to super reach is confirmed and there is a possibility of a big hit. It indicates that it has become higher (or that the jackpot has been confirmed). The next state shown in FIG. 475(g)(62) is a state where the super reach effect is being performed. In this super reach production, in the production display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208, a movie in which the main character and the enemy swordsman duel is displayed.

The next state shown in FIGS. 475(g) and (63) is a state in which a big button effect is being performed. In this big button effect, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image BP2 simulating the appearance of the operating means (in this example, the chance button 136) (the button image shown in FIG. 464 (31) of the first embodiment). A button image larger than BP) and an operation prompting display (downward arrow in this example) that prompts an operation by the operating means are displayed.

The next state shown in FIGS. 475(g) and (64) is a state in which the operation by the operating means (in this example, the chance button 136) is accepted, and the next state shown in FIGS. 475(g) and (65) is The cut-in image is displayed based on the acceptance of the operation by the operation means, and the character string “strong cut-in” is displayed in the UI display area. In the cut-in image of this example, a balloon image in which the characters "Game" are arranged in the balloon is displayed together with the up image of the lord's character. The next state shown in FIGS. 475(g) and (66) is a state where a winning effect is being performed. In this victory effect, it is indicated that the main character has won the swordsman who is the enemy, and that the character string "Yatteze" is displayed in the UI display area, indicating that the jackpot has been confirmed. doing.

In the states shown in FIGS. 475(g)(67) to (g)(68), the wipe image WP appears in the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 and gradually covers the entire display area. The decorative pattern is overlapped by the wipe image WP, and the decorative pattern is not visible. In the same state, a process of covering almost the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 with the wipe image WP is executed.

In the state shown in FIG. 475(g) (69), after the wipe image WP is erased, the swing of the decorative pattern (in this example, C decoration 3) in the middle pattern display area 208b of the decorative pattern display device 208 is changed. The stop display (middle stop) is performed, and the character string "Big hit" is displayed in the UI display area. In the same state, the C decoration 3 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208c while the left stop and right stop display modes are maintained, and the character string "Big hit" is displayed in the UI display area. , Has announced that the jackpot has been confirmed. The state shown in the following FIG. 475 (g) (70) is the symbol combination of "C decoration 3-C decoration 3-C decoration 3" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 (a symbol combination which is a big hit). ) Is fixedly stopped and displayed, and the character string "Big hit" is displayed in the UI display area to notify that the big hit has been fixed.
<Modification of Example 13>

475(h)(37) to (h)(38) in FIG. 474(g)(37) to (g)(38) shown in FIG. It is the figure which showed the example. In the thirteenth embodiment, while the pseudo-relationship is being executed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the second symbol display areas 208g to 208i are configured to perform variable display with the A-type decorative symbol, but FIG. (H) As shown in (37), the stop display of the A-based decorative symbol may be performed in the second symbol display areas 208g to 208i when the pseudo-relation is stopped.

Also, FIGS. 475(i)(1) and (i)(37) are diagrams corresponding to FIGS. 473(g)(1) to 475(g)(37). In the above-mentioned Example 13, the combination mode of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c and the combination mode of the decorative symbols in the second symbol display areas 208g to 208i are the same combination mode, but FIG. 475(i)(1) ), when the variation of the decorative pattern is stopped, the combination mode of both decorative patterns may be different, or as shown in FIG. 475(i)(37), when the pseudo-relation is stopped, The combination of decorative patterns may be different. That is, the mode of the symbol combination of the big hit symbol and the lost symbol may be different between the decorative symbol variable display and the second decorative symbol variable display. Note that only the big hit symbols may have the same combination mode.

Further, FIGS. 475(j) and (24) are diagrams corresponding to FIGS. 474(g) and (24). As shown in FIGS. 474(g) and (24), during the decorative symbol variation display in the symbol display regions 208a to 208c, in the second symbol display regions 208g to 208i, the pseudo sequence or the pre-reading notice by the second decorative symbol variable display is given. You can go.
<Design switching in decorative design variable display>

Next, with reference to FIG. 476, switching of symbols in the decorative symbol variable display will be described. FIG. 476 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the switching of symbols in the decorative symbol variable display.

FIGS. 476(a)(7) to (a)(13) are diagrams corresponding to FIGS. 471(7) to (13), and are enclosed by a dotted line (FIGS. 476(a)(8). ) To (a) (12)) show in time series from the start of variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of all the decorative patterns. Details of the display from the start of variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of all the decorative patterns are shown in FIGS. 476(b)(8) to (b)(12).

Specifically, in FIG. 476(b)(8), when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the symbol combination of "A ornament 4-A ornament 6-A ornament 6" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. While the display of No. moves downward, the display of the symbol combination of "A decoration 5-A decoration 7-A decoration 7" newly appears above the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

Subsequently, when the variable display of the decorative symbols further progresses, the display of the symbol combination of “A decoration 4-A decoration 6-A decoration 6” displayed below the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208a. While disappearing outside 208c, the display of the symbol combination of "A decoration 5-A decoration 7-A decoration 7" moves downward, and above the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "A decoration 6-A decoration 8". -The display of the symbol combination "A decoration 8" newly appears.

Subsequently, when the variable display of the decorative symbols further progresses, the display of the symbol combination of "A decoration 5-A decoration 7-A decoration 7" displayed below the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208a. While disappearing outside 208c, the display of the symbol combination of "A decoration 6-A decoration 8-A decoration 8" moves downward, and above the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "A decoration 7-A decoration 9". -The display of the symbol combination of "A decoration 9" newly appears.

Subsequently, when the variable display of the decorative symbols further progresses, the display of the symbol combination of “A decoration 6-A decoration 8-A decoration 8” displayed below the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208a. While disappearing outside 208c, the display of the symbol combination of "A decoration 7-A decoration 9-A decoration 9" moves downward, and above the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "A decoration 6-A decoration 1". -The display of the symbol combination of "A decoration 1" appears newly. In the present example, at the time of the variable display, by promoting the A-based decorative design to the B-based decorative design, the pattern combination of "A decorative 7-A decorative 9-A decorative 9" is changed to "B decorative 7-". Change to the pattern combination of "B decoration 9-B decoration 9", and change the pattern combination of "A decoration 6-A decoration 1-A decoration 1" to the pattern combination of "B decoration 6-B decoration 1-B decoration 1" However, the A type decorative pattern may be used as it is.

Subsequently, when a stop display (left stop) of the decorative symbol (in this example, B ornament 2) is performed in the left symbol display region 208a, "B ornament 4-B" is displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b and the right symbol display region 208c. The display of the symbol combination of "decoration 4" moves downward, and the display of the symbol combination of "B decoration 5-B decoration 5" newly appears above the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. Subsequently, when the variable display of the decorative symbols further progresses, the display of the symbol combination of “B ornament 4-B ornament 4” displayed below the middle symbol display region 208b and the right symbol display region 208c is displayed in the symbol display region 208a. While disappearing to the outside of ~ 208c, the display of the symbol combination of "B decoration 5-B decoration 5" moves downward, and above the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, "B decoration 6-B". The display of the symbol combination "decoration 6" appears newly.

Then, when the stop display (right stop) of the decorative symbol (in this example, B decoration 6) is performed in the right symbol display region 208c, the display of "B decoration 6" moves downward in the middle symbol display region 208b. At the same time, a new display of "B decoration 7" appears above the middle symbol display area 208b. Subsequently, when the variable display of the decorative symbol further progresses, the display of "B decoration 6" displayed below the middle symbol display region 208b disappears outside the symbol display regions 208a to 208c, while "B decoration 7". While the display of No. moves to the lower side, the display of the symbol combination of "B decoration 8" newly appears above the middle symbol display area 208b.

Subsequently, when the stop display (right stop) of the decorative symbol (in this example, B ornament 4) is performed in the middle symbol display region 208b, "B ornament 2-B ornament 4-B ornament 6" is displayed in the symbol display regions 208a to 208c. The symbol combination “” is fixedly stopped and displayed.

Note that FIGS. 476(c) and (9) are diagrams corresponding to FIGS. In the example shown in FIGS. 476(b)(9), promotion of the decorative pattern is realized by changing the display mode of the decorative pattern itself. However, as shown in FIG. 476(c)(9), the decorative pattern itself The promotion of the decorative design may be realized by adding a character image to the decorative design or changing the color of the decorative design without changing the display mode.

Further, FIGS. 476(d)(6) are diagrams corresponding to FIG. 471(6) and the like. In the example shown in FIG. 471(6), the swing fluctuation is realized by swinging the decorative pattern itself left and right, but as shown in FIG. 476(d)(6), a part of the symbol combination of the decorative pattern. A special display mode (in this example, a display mode including a character image and the number 7) as a special display mode (in this example) is displayed as a stop (or swing fluctuation) to pre-read advance notice (in this example). , Continuous notice) may be realized.

Further, FIGS. 476(e)(6) to (e)(7) are diagrams corresponding to FIGS. 468(b)(6) to (b)(7). In the example shown in FIGS. 468(b)(6) to (b)(7), the display mode of the decorative pattern is not changed depending on the result of the mini game, but FIGS. 476(e)(6) to (E) As shown in (9), the display mode of the decorative pattern may be changed according to the result of the mini game and various animation displays.

In addition, FIGS. 476(f) and (6) are diagrams corresponding to FIG. 471(6) and the like. In the example shown in FIG. 471(6), the swing fluctuation is realized by swinging the decorative pattern itself to the left and right, but as shown in FIG. 476(f)(6), a part of the symbol combination of the decorative pattern. As a (in this example, middle pattern) special display mode (in this example, a display mode including the character image and the number 7), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (or shake fluctuation) to realize the prefetching notice. Alternatively, in this case, the degree of promotion of the decorative pattern (for example, either one-stage promotion or two-stage promotion, etc.) may be suggested according to the type of the special display mode.

As described above, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 464 or the like) capable of displaying a decorative symbol variable display. And a notice means capable of executing a plurality of types of look-ahead notices (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 4), wherein the decorative symbol variable display is a plurality of types of decorative symbols After starting the variation of, is configured to be stop display in a mode according to the result of the hit determination, the decorative pattern is a symbol that can be displayed in a plurality of display modes, among the plurality of display modes One of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode (for example, an A-based decorative pattern shown in FIG. 463A), and one of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode (for example, FIG. 463). (B) decorative pattern shown in (B) or C decorative pattern shown in FIG. 463 (C)), and one of the plurality of types of pre-reading notices is the first pre-reading notice, In the decorative pattern variable display, the variation of the decorative pattern is started from the state where the decorative pattern according to the first display mode is stopped and displayed, and the decorative pattern according to the second display mode is stopped and displayed (hereinafter, " The second case”. For example, there is a fluctuation stop shown in FIG. 464(7), a fluctuation display shown in FIG. 464(8) to a fluctuation stop shown in FIG. 464(13). The decorative pattern in the second display mode is a game table characterized in that it may be stopped and displayed as the first look-ahead notice.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the display mode of the decorative pattern may be different between the start and the change of the variation, and the display mode of the decorative pattern at the time of the variation stop may be a pre-reading notice. A look-ahead notice can be executed according to the display mode, and a game stand having a display means can be provided.
Further, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 464 etc.) capable of displaying a decorative symbol variable display, and a plurality of types. A notice table capable of executing a pre-reading notice (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 4), and the decorative symbol variable display starts variation of a plurality of types of decorative symbols. After that, it is configured to be stop-displayable in a mode according to the result of the hit determination, the decorative pattern is a pattern that can be displayed in a plurality of display modes, and one of the plurality of display modes is , A first display mode (for example, an A-based decorative pattern shown in FIG. 463(A)), and one of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode (for example, FIG. 463(B)). It is a B-based decorative design shown, or a C-based decorative design shown in FIG. 463 (C)), one of the plurality of types of pre-reading notice is the first pre-reading notice, and a certain decorative pattern variable display In, in the case where the variation of the decorative design is started from the state where the decorative design according to the first display mode is stopped and displayed, and the decorative design according to the first display mode is stopped and displayed (hereinafter, "the first case For example, there are fluctuation stop shown in FIG. 464(1), fluctuation display shown in FIG. 464(2) to fluctuation stop shown in FIG. 464(7), and the display means can display the super reach effect. The display means is a means capable of continuously displaying the variable display of the decorative symbol in the second display mode even during the display of the super reach effect, and a certain decorative symbol variable display. In, in the case where the variation of the decorative pattern is started from the state where the decorative pattern according to the first display mode is stopped and displayed, and the decorative pattern according to the second display mode is stopped and displayed (hereinafter, "the second case For example, there is a fluctuation stop shown in FIG. 464(7), a fluctuation display shown in FIG. 464(8) to a fluctuation stop shown in FIG. 464(13), and the decorative pattern in the second display mode is the The first pre-reading notice may be displayed as a stop, and the decorative pattern variation display started after the certain decorative symbol variation display in the second case than in the first case (hereinafter, It is easy to be a big hit in "the first decorative pattern variable display". When the first decorative pattern variable display is a big hit, the big hit according to the second display mode in the first decorative pattern variable display When the combination is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative pattern variable display is lost, In one decorative symbol variable display, after the stop combination is temporarily displayed in the second display mode, the stop combination is changed to the stop combination in the first display mode and displayed. It is a game table characterized by.

In the first display mode, all the decorative patterns may be the first display mode, and in the second display mode, at least one decorative pattern may be the second display mode. Further, the “display mode (of the decorative pattern)” according to the present invention may be any of a shape, a pattern, a color, or a combination thereof. Further, "difference in display mode (of decorative pattern)" means addition of another symbol, character, or figure (for example, a character image) to the decorative pattern, discoloration, transformation, or deletion of a part of the decorative pattern, It may be due to a difference in the type of animation related to the decorative pattern (for example, a weak animation or a strong animation shown in FIG. 476(f)), or due to a difference in the variation mode of the decorative pattern (for example, vertical scrolling. , Horizontal scroll, frame advance, display of only symbols to which odd number (or even number) is given, high speed scroll, low speed scroll, etc.) may be used. Further, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the first pre-reading notice is (always) stopped and displayed, and the second display mode is stopped only as the first pre-reading notice. It may be a display mode to be displayed. In addition, a certain display mode (decorative pattern of the first display mode) is changed from the certain display mode to another display mode, and a second display mode is used in another display mode used as a read-ahead notice display mode. The decorative pattern of may stop.

Further, in the certain decorative symbol variable display, the variation of the decorative symbol is started from the state where the decorative symbol in the first display mode is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol in the first display mode is stopped and displayed. There is a case (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”. For example, fluctuation stop shown in FIG. 464(1), fluctuation display shown in FIG. 464(2) to fluctuation stop shown in FIG. 464(7)). That is, the combination of the decorative patterns according to the first display mode in the first case (hereinafter, referred to as “first combination”) and the combination of the decorative patterns according to the second display mode in the second case. (Hereinafter, referred to as “second combination”) may be the same combination, and the first combination may not be a big hit (for example, FIG. 463(A)(1), FIG. 465(c)). (8) is a pattern combination of "A decoration 2-A decoration 4-A decoration 6", the second combination is not a big hit (for example, FIG. 463 (B) (1), FIG. (13), the symbol combination of "B decoration 2-B decoration 4-B decoration 6" shown in FIGS. 465(b)(8), shown in FIGS. 463(C)(1), 466(a)(8) It is a pattern combination of "C decoration 2-C decoration 4-C decoration 6"), and decoration started after the certain decorative pattern variable display in the second case rather than in the first case. The symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as "first decorative symbol variable display") may be configured to be a big hit.

With such a configuration, even when the same combination is displayed, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for a big hit in the decorative pattern variable display after a certain decorative symbol variable display, and the player It may be possible to increase the interest of. In addition, there is a case (combined case) where the combination of the decorative pattern of the first display mode and the decorative pattern of the second display mode becomes the combined display of the decorative pattern only in the second display mode. Good.

Further, one of the plurality of types of pre-reading notices is a second pre-reading notice (for example, step-up notice shown in FIG. 464(22) to FIG. 24(24), group notice shown in FIG. 464(28), The SP advance notification shown in FIG. 464(29), the SP reach shown in FIG. 464(30), the button effect shown in FIG. 464(31), and the cut-in image shown in FIG. 464(33). Is a look-ahead notice that may be started in a decorative pattern change display that is started after the certain decorative pattern change display, and the first look-ahead notice is the first in the certain decorative pattern change display. The second look-ahead notice may be configured to be given in advance in some cases.

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the second prefetching notice may be started by the first prefetching notice, so that the expectation for the first prefetching notice is further enhanced. You may be able to. In addition, it may be possible to make an impression that the second prefetching notice is not a false notice (gasse notice) by executing the prefetching notice in stages.

The first look-ahead notice may be configured to (predictably) give a notice that the second look-ahead notice may be started in the certain decorative symbol variable display. The first look-ahead notice may be configured to give only a notice that the second look-ahead notice may be started in the certain decorative symbol variable display.

Further, the second prefetching notice is more likely to be given when the certain decorative symbol variable display is the second case than when the certain decorative symbol variable display is not the second case. May be configured.

With such a configuration, since it is possible to have an expectation for the second prefetch notice depending on the presence or absence of the first prefetch notice, the expectation for the first prefetch notice may be further increased. is there.

Further, in the second case, it may be configured to switch from the first display mode to the second display mode during variable display of the certain decorative symbol variable display.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation during the variable display of a certain decorative pattern variable display.

Further, when the first decorative pattern variable display is a big hit, the combination of big hits according to the second display mode is stopped and displayed in the first decorative pattern variable display, When the decorative pattern variation display of one is lost, the combination of the losses according to the second display mode is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first decorative pattern variation display, and then the combination of the losses is displayed as the first display. The display may be changed to a combination of loses depending on the mode and displayed in a stopped state.

With such a configuration, the display mode of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed in the case of a big hit and a loss is different, and it is possible to have an expectation for the big hit by displaying the decorative pattern according to the second display mode. In some cases, the expectation for the first look-ahead notice can be further increased.

Further, one of the plurality of display modes is a third display mode (for example, A system decorative pattern shown in FIG. 471), and the display means is at least one of the display of the decorative pattern variable display. In the period of the part, the decorative symbol variable display different from the decorative symbol variable display (hereinafter referred to as "second decorative symbol variable display". For example, variable display in the second symbol display areas 208g to 208i shown in FIG. 471. ) Is a means capable of displaying, and the second decorative symbol variable display is configured so that the decorative symbol in the third display mode may be stopped and displayed in correspondence with the decorative symbol variable display. May be.

With such a configuration, the decorative pattern variable display is the second decorative pattern variable display even when it is difficult or invisible from the front due to overlapping with other displays or movable bodies. With this, it is possible to confirm the decorative pattern, and it may be possible to avoid a situation in which the player is disadvantaged.

The second decorative symbol variable display may be configured so that the decorative symbol in the third display mode is (always) stopped and displayed in correspondence with the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the first display mode and the third display mode may be the same display mode.

Further, the decorative pattern variable display is a means capable of displaying a display of pseudo patterns of decorative patterns (for example, pseudo patterns shown in FIGS. 474(g)(38) to 475(g)(49)). The pseudo-repeating is configured to repeat the variable display of the decorative symbols and the temporary stop display in a single decorative symbol variable display once a certain number of times, and when the temporary stop of the decorative symbols is displayed in the pseudo-ream, The second decorative symbol variable display may be configured such that the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is not performed.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to make it clear that the decorative symbol variable display is a pseudo sequence.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying a mini game (for example, a mini game shown in FIGS. 466(c)(3) to 466(c)(7)), and as a result of the mini game, Either a success pattern (for example, the success pattern shown in FIGS. 468(b)(7) and 469(d)(7)) or a failure pattern (for example, the failure pattern shown in FIGS. 466(c)(7)). The pattern is configured to be derived, and the result of the mini game is configured to be derived during the display of the certain decorative symbol variable display, and the certain decorative symbol variable display. In, in the case of the second case, the success pattern may be derived as a result of the mini game.

With such a configuration, when the result of the mini game is a success pattern, the decorative pattern according to the second display mode is stopped and displayed, so that the expectation for the first look-ahead notice can be increased. Sometimes you can.

Further, the display means is a display (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”) that suggests the second case. For example, FIGS. 469(d)(8) to 470(d)(19) and the like. The mini-item shown in FIG. 3) is capable of displaying, and the first display is configured to start displaying after the success pattern is derived, and the first display is the second display. It may be a display that disappears in connection with the occasion.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make an impression that the decorative pattern according to the second display mode is stopped and displayed by performing the display in which the first display disappears. Therefore, the expectation for the first look-ahead notice You may be able to enhance the feeling.

Further, the advance notice means is a means capable of executing a timer advance notice (for example, the timer advance notice shown in FIGS. 473(g)(6) to 474(g)(15)), and the timer advance notice is a timer display. After the display of No. is started, a certain effect (for example, a pre-reading notice and other effects shown in FIG. 474(g)(15)) is started in relation to the timer display becoming a display indicating a certain time. This is a possible notice, and the certain effect may be an effect that changes from the variable display of the decorative symbol in the first display mode to the variable display of the decorative symbol in the second display mode.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to gradually increase the expectation for the stop display of the decorative pattern in the second display mode by executing the timer notice. In addition, when the timer display is a display indicating a certain time, it may be configured to suggest that the stop display of the decorative design according to the second display mode is performed.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying a super reach effect (for example, SP reach effect shown in FIG. 471(30) to FIG. 471(34)), and the display means displays the super reach effect. Even in the middle, it may be a means capable of continuously displaying the variable display of the decorative pattern according to the second display mode. Further, the decorative design according to the first display mode and the decorative design according to the second display mode may be different in any of color, pattern, shape, or a combination thereof. Further, the decorative design according to the second display mode is a decorative design in which a certain display is added to the decorative design according to the first display mode, or at least a part of the decorative design according to the first display mode is other than the decorative design. It may be a decorative pattern changed to a display mode.

The configuration of the game table according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the game table according to the above-described embodiment. For example, in the case where a variable display of decorative symbols such as rewinding effect is repeatedly executed. , The promotion (or demotion) of the decorative symbol may be executed during any variable display. Further, the promotion (or demotion) of the decorative design may be executed in a stage change or mode change performed during one display of the decorative design change. Further, the promotion (or demotion) of the symbols may be executed not only during the change before the reach or during the stop, but also during the reach or the SP reach. Further, it may be configured to execute the promotion (or demotion) of the symbol after the reach loss and to expect the fluctuations from the next time. Further, the jackpot pattern displayed during the jackpot may be promoted to give a pre-reading notice of the holding condominium, or a notice of a probable change promotion or round increase. Further, the big hit symbol displayed during the big hit may be the display of the symbol after promotion or the display of the default (before promotion) symbol.
[Ninth Embodiment]

First, with reference to FIGS. 477 to 505, a game table according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described.

In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 477 to 521 are used only in the description of the ninth and tenth embodiments of the present invention, and the same reference numerals are used in other drawings. Also, in the description of the ninth and tenth embodiments, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 477 to 521 are given priority. The numbers of the examples of the ninth embodiment and the tenth embodiment are also used in principle only for the description of the ninth embodiment and the tenth embodiment, but of the ninth embodiment and the tenth embodiment. Each example and each example of other embodiments can be applied in combination with each other. Further, if there are drawings showing similar timings in a plurality of drawings, duplicated explanation may be omitted.
<Overall structure>

The overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 477. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table that allows a player to obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage tray door 108, and a launch. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is a vertically rectangular game machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk of a store (gaming store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and to be opened and closed, and the inside of the front frame door 106 is formed by a frame shape. Is a door member having an opening 116. The clerk of the game shop can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. Note that the lamp is an example of a light emitting means, and in the present embodiment, a device in which the light source is an LED is also called a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pressing an opening lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage dish which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage dish opened. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “ball”) and provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launch device 110. , A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 to be launched into the game area 124, an effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 479) by the operation of the player, and an effect button 136 built in the effect button 136. Chance button lamp 138 for emitting a light, a ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit. A return operation button 142 and a ball lending display section (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit are provided. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 477 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 has been filled with a game ball. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided. This launching device 110 sends a game ball to the game area 124 of the game board at every elapse of a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the player continuously operates the ball firing handle 134. It is fired toward and corresponds to an example of a firing means. Note that a right-hand hit button capable of maximizing the firing strength by pushing down the ball firing handle 134 may be provided.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed through the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is omitted in FIG. 477, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.
FIG. 478 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 477 seen from the back side.

At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls having an opening opening upward, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150 and at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in rear view.

The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have temporarily stayed are delivered one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that gives a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal, when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) to reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined amount. Based on the satisfaction of the condition, the player is provided (paid) with a game value (game ball) in an amount according to the given condition.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 480) that performs control processing for the whole game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-board 400 (see FIG. 480) that performs control processing relating to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 480) that performs the control processing related to the effect, and the payout control section 600 that performs the control processing related to the payout of the game balls ( (Refer to FIG. 480) and a payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 having an error canceling switch 168 that cancels an error by an operation of a game shop staff, a shooting control unit 630 (FIG. 480) that performs control processing relating to shooting of a game ball. (Refer to FIG. 480) and a power switch for turning on/off the power by operating a game shop clerk, and forming a power board control unit 660 (see FIG. 480) for supplying power to various electric game machines. 178 and a power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 including a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and signals of the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. A CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving is provided.
FIG. 479 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the substantial center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary The symbol reserve lamp 216, the first special symbol reserve lamp 218, the second special symbol reserve lamp 220, and the high-precision middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as a "universal symbol", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later.

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device (image display device) for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208j can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

The general figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative design displayed on the decorative design display device 208 is a design representing the design displayed on the first special design display device 212 or the second special design display device 214 in a form that enhances the effect. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of a predetermined first variable game (a detailed figure variable game which will be described later in detail) that is being held, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of variable figure games. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

The 1st special figure reservation lamp 218 and the 2nd special figure reservation lamp 220 are the lamps for showing the number of the predetermined 2nd variation game which has been reserved (details variation game which details are mentioned later), this execution. In the form, it is possible to hold the special figure variation game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight if the first special figure and the second special figure are combined). The term "hold" here means to hold the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on start information described later.

The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notifying means) for making a notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-accuracy lamp 222 is configured to be informed that the current symbol control state is not notified after the power is turned on until the big hit game is started, and thereafter not to be informed. There is. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but as the symbol control state here, it may be any of the normal state, the time saving state (electric power support state), and the probability variation state, and the state with the special symbol probability variation and It may be one of the states in which there is no change in the special figure.

In this specification, the term "control state" is used to describe the state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100), but the term "control state" includes the concept of a so-called game state.

In addition, a general winning opening 226, a universal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the effect device 206. ing.

In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering this general winning opening 226 (in the general winning opening 226). In the case of winning the prize), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 478 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 477. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player may be referred to as "prize balls" and the balls to be lent to the player may be referred to as "rental balls" in consideration of the prize. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

In this embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 478 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls. Along with discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of itself does not change.

In this embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is provided below the universal figure starting port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232. It corresponds to a variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (den Chu). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning the prize in the second special figure starting port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232 with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the closed state of the pair of blade members 2321 is an opening/closing mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure variation game is won and the universal figure display device 210 hits and displays the symbols as a stop, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, to the second special figure starting port 232. The ball can be entered (the prize winning state is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is the state where the prize is easy. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 has either one of a small size (corresponding to the first size) and a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball). It is a variable starting region in which the easiness of entering a game ball is variable, which changes from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting region. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are open, of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special region that is the variable starting region is more than the game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230 that is the fixed starting region. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or less than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning port 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 that can open and close the variable winning opening with a solenoid. The variable winning opening is sometimes called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 is sometimes called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball is easier to enter the variable winning opening than the closed state to the other state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state, and the closed state in the variable winning port 234 of the present embodiment is such that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state of the variable winning port 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 becomes substantially vertical to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning port 234 maintains the closed state until the big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly closed to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a state in which it is completely closed. In addition, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 479 as long as the winning of the gaming ball is achieved by the passing or entering of the gaming ball. When the special figure variation game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided to guide a ball that has not won any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, and then discharge it to the game island side.

The balls contained in the upper plate 126 are supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148 pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and wins the prize (general winning hole 226, variable winning hole 234) or the starting hole. Outgoing outlet 240 by winning in (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), without winning any winning port or starting port, or only passing through universal figure starting port 228. To reach.
<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. .. Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp exit 242b or a ball ridden by a game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm portion 224a to a shoulder position and an elbow of an elbow. An unillustrated forearm motor for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The production movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the respective inner ends overlap. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are slightly overlapped with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the lattice holes, or the shoji part of the lattice holes may be closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portion of the lattice holes may be completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 may be made completely invisible. Good.

Decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 477, the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 479 correspond to the effect means, and among them, the decorative pattern display device 208. Corresponds to an example of the decorative pattern display means.

Further, on the game board 200, a specification sticker 290 showing the specifications of the game table is attached at a position visible to the player.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 480. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a main sub-control unit that responds to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300. In addition, a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a time. A timer circuit 312 for measuring the number of times, the number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value within a range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit has two built-in counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each of the starting port, the winning port, and the variable winning port, and opening of the front frame door. A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame open sensor, and a lower pan full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302. 322, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general symbol display device 210 Display control of a drive circuit 326 for performing display control and various status display sections 328 (for example, the universal figure holding lamp 216, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.) And a drive circuit 334 for controlling a predetermined movable member, for example, various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232, a door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234, and the like. , Are connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere has won the special opening 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the internal counter value storage corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Stored in the register for use. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the special figure 2 starting port 232, it similarly latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 at that timing. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336, the external terminal board 349, an external hall computer (not shown), and the like. The game information (for example, game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is provided with the voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 outputs the start signal output circuit 340 from the start signal output circuit 340. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. It is possible to communicate with the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured to be able to transmit signals, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured to be unable to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by bidirectional communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to send a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured to be unable to send a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times. It is equipped with. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, chance button lamp 138). A drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. Volume adjustment switch (not shown) for adjusting the volume to be output, operation unit sensors (not shown) that detect pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors are output to the basic circuit 402. VDP (video) for displaying the image on the decorative pattern display device 208 by reading the image data and the like stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the sensor circuit 428 and the CPU 404 and using the work area of the VRAM 436 to display the image. -Display processor) 434 is connected.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on this control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

In addition, the basic circuit 502, the drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, the effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and the detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. A sensor circuit 518 for outputting to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game underframe lamp drive for controlling the game underframe lamp 542. A circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540 are connected.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the firing control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on the control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of ball rentals. Ball rental information indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout controller 600. The frame sensor 605 detects when the front frame door 106 is open and outputs an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The firing control unit 630 is a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 for instructing to permit or stop firing, and a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134 outputs the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player. Control of the firing motor 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the launching mallet 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the launching device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 and the like) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off (for example, a power storage circuit) (for example, , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply controller 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout controller 600 and the second sub controller 500, and the payout controller 600 fires the main controller 300 and the second sub controller 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

Next, using FIG. 481(a) to (d), the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described. The figure (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first starting hole sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230, and that the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on condition that the second starting opening sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variation display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit up and one central segment is lit up repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variation display of special figure 2". To do. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of variable display of symbols in the present invention.

Then, when the variation time (before the variation time in the present invention) determined before the variation of the special figure 1 starts, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, When the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation start of 2 (corresponding to the fluctuation time also referred to in the present invention) elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of "variable display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 is stopped or displayed, or the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2 after starting "variable display of special figure 2" Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display according to the present invention, hereinafter, the stop symbol aspect of the special diagram 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after starting the "variable display of the special diagram 1 or 2". The series of display up to is referred to as a symbol fluctuation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In the figure (a), 12 kinds of special drawings from "Special drawing A" to "Special drawing L" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol fluctuation stop display, and the white part in the drawing is turned off. The position of the segment to be turned on is shown, and the black-painted part shows the position of the segment to be lit.

"Special drawing A" is a 16 round (16R) special jackpot design (hereinafter also referred to as 16R special jackpot A or 16R probability variation A), "special drawing B" is a 16R special jackpot design (hereinafter, 16R special jackpot B or 16R) It is also a probability variation B), and the "special drawing C" is a 16R jackpot design (hereinafter, also referred to as 16R jackpot or 16R normal). In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, determination of whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not to be a special jackpot is performed by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (big jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (or a probability variation state), and a state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state (or a non-probability variation state).

Further, both after the 16R special jackpot game and after the 16R jackpot game, the state shifts to a time saving state (electric support state). Although the time saving will be described later in detail, the state of transitioning to the time saving state is called the high probability state (or electricity support state) of the universal figure, and the state of not transiting to the time saving state is the low probability state of the universal figure (or non-electrical state). Support state). 16R special jackpot design "special map A" and "special map B" are special probability high probability general figure high probability state, 16R jackpot design "special map C" is special special probability low probability It is a stochastic state. These "special drawing A" to "special drawing C" are symbols in which the profit amount given to the player is a relatively large profit amount.

"Special drawing D" is a 4R special jackpot design (hereinafter also referred to as 4R special jackpot A or 4R probability variation A), "Special drawing E" is a 4R special jackpot design (hereinafter also referred to as 4R special jackpot B or 4R probability variation B) ), and “Special drawing D” and “Special drawing E” are 4R, as compared with “Special drawing A” to “Special drawing C” which are 16R. "Special drawing F" is a 2R special jackpot design (hereinafter also referred to as 2R special jackpot A or 2R certainty variation A), "Special drawing G" is 2R special jackpot design (hereinafter also referred to as 2R special jackpot B or 2R certainty variation B) ), the "special map H" is a 2R jackpot design (hereinafter also referred to as a 2R jackpot or 2R normal), and compared to "special map A" to "special map C" which are 16R, "special map F". ~ "Special drawing H" is different in that it is 2R. "Special map I" is a small hit symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as a small hit), and is a special symbol low probability general symbol low probability state. In addition, "special drawing J" is a falling design 1, "special drawing K" is a falling design 2, and "special drawing L" is a falling design 3, both of which are profit amounts to be given to the player. Is a design that has a relatively small amount of profit.

FIG. 4856(b) shows an example of a decorative pattern. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first start opening sensor detects that a ball has won the first special drawing starting opening 230 or the second special drawing starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special drawing starting opening 230, or On the condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232, the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 Displayed in the order of “decoration 1”→“decoration 2”→“decoration 3”→... “decoration 9”→“decoration 10”→“decoration 1”→... in each symbol display region of the region 208c "Variable display of decorative pattern" is switched.

And, when notifying 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 16R normal, 4R probability variation A, 4R probability variation B, 2R probability variation A, 2R probability variation B, or 2R normal, the same decorative pattern in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c A combination of three symbols (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") is stopped and displayed. Moreover, when notifying 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 4R probability variation A, 4R probability variation B, 2R probability variation A, or 2R probability variation B, three same odd decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The symbol combination (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying the small hit, the "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, and when notifying, the symbol combination shown in the figure (b) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The symbol combinations other than are stopped and displayed.

FIG. 4856(c) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. In the stop display mode of the public figure of the present embodiment, there is a hit symbol 1 (hereinafter, also referred to as 1 per figure) "Public symbol A" and a hit symbol 2 (hereinafter also referred to as 2 per universal figure). There are three types: "Universal figure B" and "Universal figure C" which is a deviating pattern. Based on the fact that the gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Performs "variable display of general maps". And, in case of notifying the winning of the universal figure variation game, "Public figure A" or "Public figure B" is stopped and displayed, and in the case of notifying the failure of the universal figure fluctuation game, "Public figure C" is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in this figure (c), the white part in the figure shows the place of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black-painted part shows the place of the segment where the light is turned on.
<Main processing of main controller>

Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 480 will be described using FIG. 482. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 480 stores a special figure random number value, a special figure round determination random number value, a special figure electric support determination random number value, and a special figure determination random number. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random number value of special figure winning, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area of the RAM 308 that stores the number of reserved special figures is sometimes referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start-up information storage unit for a special figure, which is divided into a maximum number (four in this example) of areas in which the start of the win/fail judgment (lottery) can be suspended. There is also a random number storage area for general drawings. In the special figure starting information storage unit, as will be described later, a plurality of kinds of starting information are set as one set, and these starting information are stored one by one in the winning order (holding order).

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 480 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, to which this activation signal is input, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 482 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power supply that the power supply control unit 660 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in the present embodiment), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing a main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, Processing for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether the state before the power is cut off (before the power failure) is restored, and if the state before the power failure is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state) ), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a clerk at a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 478 is ON (indicating that there is an operation). If the RAM clear signal is on (when RAM clear is required), the basic circuit 302 is initialized to the initial state in step S113. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not required), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte configuration register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) or not (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal) is determined. If the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specified. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 so that the pachinko machine 100 is initialized. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 478. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command that indicates that the power-off state has been restored, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value in the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting the interruption prohibition, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generating random number counters for respectively generating initial values of the universal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of possible numbers for the universal figure winning random number is 0 to 20, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, the value 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Main controller timer interrupt processing>

Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 483. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 480 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The partial timer interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (mainly) set so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (not to detect abnormal processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 480 including various sphere detection sensors are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence/absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 performs various operations. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, the RAM 308 stores information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) two times before in each RAM detection sensor. Is read from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ) The information on the presence/absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in) is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

Further, in step S205, the presence/absence information of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, It is determined whether or not the information on the presence/absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one gaming ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process is repeated several times at very short intervals of about 2 ms. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 480 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, there is a current detection signal). If it matches with the information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the universal figure starting opening 228. It is determined that there has been a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 234 and 226 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been won. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first starting opening sensor that detects the ball entering the first special drawing starting opening 230 matches the above winning determination pattern information, the first special drawing It is determined that there is a winning in the starting opening 230, that is, a game medium that passes through a predetermined area is detected, and the processing following the winning in the first special figure starting opening 230 is performed, but the detection signals of the past three times are detected. If the presence/absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the first special figure starting port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, a previous detection signal does not exist, and a current detection signal does not exist). After it is determined that there is a winning, it is not determined that there is a winning until the information of the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and the universal figure winning random number value and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a result obtained by obtaining a value from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100 and adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter that corresponds to the random number counter The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating the random number for winning I'll do it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for general-purpose winning random number value generation has completed one round, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has completed one cycle. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for

In step S211, an effect random number updating process is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the symbol is displayed on the universal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time to change/stop displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210. Various including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time of fluctuating/stopping, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a timer for measuring a predetermined ending effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning a prize counter updating process, when the winning holes 234 and 226 and the starting openings 230 and 232 are won, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is displayed. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

In addition, in step S217, prize winning acceptance processing is performed. In the prize receiving process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of starting information acquired here are stored as a set of starting information in an empty area of the starting information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 in accordance with the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 480 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. To the power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 are the encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

In step S221, a universal figure state update process is performed. The universal figure state update process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the general figure state update processing in the middle of the general figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED which normally constitutes the symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

Further, in the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the universal figure variation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. Ordinary symbol display device 210 is configured to be in a mode, the 7-segment LED is turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be a lost symbol display mode. Turn on/off the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general-picture state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 confirms either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 481(c)) or the lost symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 481(c)). Display. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player.

Further, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal figure operation is set in the setting region, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the opening period to the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening/closing of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the universal figure variation game is a loss, the universal figure loss flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure loss flag is on, even in the universal figure state updating process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the universal figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this universal figure-related lottery process, opening/closing control of the universal figure variation game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the universal figure is inactive), and the pending universal figure variation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unselected by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the random number storage area described above. The winning judgment is performed, and when the winning is determined, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value, the universal figure display device 210 receives the common figure display device 210 from among a plurality of fluctuation times. One time during which the figure is variably displayed is selected, and this variability display time is stored as a figure variation display time in the figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is stored in the universal figure pending count storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Moreover, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

Then, the special figure prefetching process (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update processing in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on/off the drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game). In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. .. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special figure When the probability variation flag is on and the universal figure probability variation flag is also on, any one of special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so as to have the special figure e when the figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure probability variation flag is on, and the special figure f when the loss flag is on. The 7 segment LED is controlled to be turned on and off, and the setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214, 15R special big hit pattern (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal big hit pattern (special figure e), lost symbol ( The fixed display of any one of the special symbols f) is performed.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the special display 2 that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 variable game. Further, if the number of shortening times stored in the shortening number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shortening times, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, the time saving flag is turned off. Further, even during the big hit game (during the special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that it exists is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the area, in order to stand by for a predetermined winning effect production period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, for a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the big hit by the decorative pattern display device 208 is started. First, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the variable winning opening 234 is detected) The solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), the door member Is output in the open state and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234, and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information that indicates the closing period. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which is repeated at a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in the present exemplary embodiment) of opening/closing control of the door member, a predetermined end effect period (for example, Storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by for 3 seconds), that is, for a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the jackpot by the decorative pattern display device 208 is finished. The information indicating the production standby period is set in. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time saving frequency (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and is also provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving frequency storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON.

The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit is shortened. If the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure (universal figure probable variation). In the high probability state of the public figure, the probability of being hit in the general variation game is higher than in the low probability state of the universal figure. Also, in the general figure high probability state, the variation time of the general figure fluctuation game becomes shorter than in the general figure low probability state (general figure shortness). Further, in the universal figure high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state (electric chute extension). In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. The state in which any one of these Phenomenon Probability, Phenomenon Variance, and Den Chu is set is called Densapo (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, the general probability low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is a normal figure high probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 during the big hit game, many game balls in the special figure 2 starting hole 232 until the game balls enter There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be won during a big hit increases and the gambling performance increases, which is to solve this problem.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operation is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, the out flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, the description will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Special figure 2 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is inactive both, and special figure 2 which is on hold Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random number storage area. Special figure 1 related lottery process, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is in the non-operating state, and the special figure 1 which is suspended With the start condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area.

Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variation game start condition and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. If the number of pending special game 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable games relating to the pending special game 1 variable games are not performed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the determination result of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and notifies the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting opening 232. , The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting opening 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, the special figure variation game with high advantage (special figure 2 variation game in this example) is played prior to the special figure variation game with low advantage (special figure 1 variation game in this example). Therefore, it may be easy to give a difference in the degree of advantage of the gaming state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special piece) from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. FIG. 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value pair) is acquired, and based on the special figure 2 winning random value in the acquired special figure 2 starting information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, the ROM 306 It is determined whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a non-win by using the hit/miss determination table stored in (a hit/miss judgment). Then, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information and the determined hit/miss judgment result. After the variable display, the symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed are determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit/miss determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the hit determination, the obtained random number for determining the special figure variation time, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) of special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

The main control unit 300 retrieves the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, deletes the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and Figure 2 The special figure 2 reservation number in the reservation number storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is performed based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area. You may do it.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is similarly performed. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game with a high degree of advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with a low degree of advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority variation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variable game with a low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game with a high advantage, and the special figure 1 is held pending It may be the special figure 1 priority variation that is prioritized over the reservation and is digested. Also, without prioritizing either the special figure 2 variation game with a high advantage or the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, the special figure variation game related to the suspension of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started. It may be a change in the winning opening winning order that starts in order. In the starting mouth winning order variation, the maximum number of reservations is 8 regardless of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. Therefore, compared with the priority fluctuation in which the maximum number of reservations is 4 in Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, respectively. In some cases, the upper limit of the number of reservations can be increased.

Further, in the above description, the lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special map are not performed according to the state of one special map, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special map state update described above is not performed. By performing the process and the special figure-related lottery process independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, a plurality of special figures may be simultaneously changed. When a plurality of special maps are simultaneously changed in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special maps, or the lottery results of the respective special maps are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to separately display each lottery result, or one display may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special symbols. In addition, when fluctuations relating to a plurality of special maps are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped first may influence the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flag values, and a timer selected in the special figure related lottery process. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, including information such as numbers, various jackpot flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flag values, etc. are included, and winning effect start command and end In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit round number, etc. are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232, and winning at the variable winning ports 234 and 235. Including presence or absence. In the case of the prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in the prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

Further, in the above-described rotation start setting transmission process, the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-flags, special figure probability variation flags, special figure 1 related lottery processing, and special figures stored in the RAM 308 are included in the command data. 2 Set the information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, and the like. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, the command data is set with information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, such as the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening opening setting transmission processing, in the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games. Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variation games or special figure 2 variation games Set the information indicating such as.

Further, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) Prior notice information or no prior notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full tank error. .. When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, and the universal figure display device 210 and the special figure 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display sections 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I/O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I/O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, the setting of interrupt permission is performed, and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 482. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input/output port is performed. After that, the state becomes HALT.

FIG. 484 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special map prefetch process (step S224) of the main controller timer interrupt process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, pre-determines the stop symbol before the hit determination process, and the pre-determination result (special The prefetch result) is stored in the prefetch result storage unit (see FIGS. 485(a) to 485(c)) in the RAM 308.

Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit that stores the pre-reading result of the special figure 1 and the number of special figure 1 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit are specified. A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing as 1 prefetch number is provided. In this example, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 1 pre-reading result of the highest rank (the first place) is deleted every time the number of special figure 1 pre-reading decreases by 1 and the remaining special figure 1 pre-reading result is deleted. Are processed so that the rank of the data of 1 is advanced by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 1 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 1 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 1 prefetch results having the lowest rank (last).

Further, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section for storing the special figure 2 pre-reading result and the number of special figure 2 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section are stored. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing the number is provided. In this example, the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four pre-reading results. In the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 2 pre-reading result with the highest rank is deleted and the remaining special figure 2 pre-reading result data ranks each time the number of special figure 2 pre-reading decreases by one. Are processed so as to be incremented by one. Also, each time the number of special figure 2 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 2 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 2 preread results having the lowest rank.

In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increased (step S301). Whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of prefetches. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing when the special figure 2 reserved number is larger than the special figure 2 preread number, and the special figure 2 reserved number is equal to the special figure 2 preread number. If they are the same, it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is specified before the winning/judging process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Figure 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-reading special figure 2 start information, for example, the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is set to the special figure 2 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made prior to the hit/miss determination processing in the processing (step S229). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Then, it transfers to step S307.

In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of special figure 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage. This is performed by comparing with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increased, the special figure prefetching process is ended and the main control unit is executed. Return to timer interrupt processing.

In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is not being performed (the power support is being performed (universal figure high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading advance notice includes conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electricity support.

In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (set of special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value) is specified before the winning/judgment processing in the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231). Figure 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 1 start information, and the hit determination table and the special figure decision table used at the time of hit determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is set to the special figure 1 related lottery Preliminary determination is made prior to the hit/miss determination processing in the processing (step S231). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

In step S313 subsequent to step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained in advance determination is stored in the earliest empty area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process.

In step S315, the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 in RAM 308 is replaced with the "undetermined" information indicating that the starting information is not pre-read without pre-reading the increased special figure 1 starting information. Store in the first empty area of the set. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above, only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be stored. All pre-reading results in the set may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 484, the read-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2, and the read-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the electrical support. However, whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special maps 1 and 2 may be determined by a lottery. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300 may determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not in non-electric support), when the start information increases, the prefetch is always executed and the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch is performed. The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to execute the lottery and the effect using the pre-reading result.

FIG. 485 exemplifies a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 485(a) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 preread result information is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 485(a), the special-reading 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the holdable number of the special-drawing 1 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 485(a), the storage area "holding 1" stores "special drawing I" (off) as stop symbol information, and the storage area "holding 2" stores "special drawing I" as stop symbol information. "(Disappearance) is stored, "special drawing A" (15R probability variation big hit) is stored in the storage area "holding 3" as stop symbol information, and "special drawing I" is stored in the storage area "holding 4" as stop symbol information. "(Disappearance) is stored.

FIG. 485(b) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 485(b), the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 2 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the holdable number of the special figure 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 485(b), "special figure f" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and the stop symbols are stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". No information is stored. Note that, in FIG. 485(b), a state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

FIG. 485(c) shows an example of the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit in the electrical support. As shown in FIG. 485(c), in the storage area “holding 1”, “undetermined” information is stored instead of the stopped symbol information. Neither stop symbol information nor “undetermined” information is stored in the storage areas “holding 2” to “holding 4”.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the judgment result, the fluctuation timer number (variation time), the timer group described later, and the like are pre-determined, and the pre-read result is stored in the pre-read result storage unit. The information can be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

Next, with reference to FIG. 486, for the win/fail judgment table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 483, see FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 486(a) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for win/loss determination, and FIG. 486(b) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for win/loss determination. In the case of the special figure high probability state in the case of performing the special decision of the special figure 1, when the special figure high probability state is referred to, the high probability table for winning/decision determination shown in FIG. 486(a) is referred to, and in the special figure low probability state The low probability table for success/failure determination shown in FIG. 486(b) is referred to. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referred win/loss determination table and the acquired random number value, the win/loss determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variation game, a big hit, a small hit, or an outlier is selected as the hit/miss determination result.

Similarly, in the case of performing the special judgment of the special figure 2, in the case of the special figure high probability state, the special figure low probability state is referred to by referring to the high probability table for hit/damage determination shown in FIG. 486(a). In this case, the low/probability table for determination of success/failure shown in FIG. 486(b) is referenced. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referred win/loss determination table and the acquired random number value, the win/loss determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variation game, the big hit or the outlier is selected as the hit/miss determination result.

FIG. 486(c) is a diagram showing an example of a small hit determination table. When the result of the jackpot judgment is out of range, the table for small hit determination shown in FIG. 486(c) is referred to, and based on the numerical range shown by the referred table for small hit determination and the acquired random number value. , Select the result of the special drawing small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the win/no win determination result (lottery result) per special figure is the special figure 1, the small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the win/no determination result, and the loss is with a probability of 63536/65536. However, the small hit is not selected when the result of the lottery win/loss determination (lottery result) per special drawing is the special drawing 2.

Next, the stop is performed based on the winning/deciding result or the like determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 483. The special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. 487. Here, FIG. 487 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determining table, and FIG. 487 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 symbol determining table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, referring to the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 487 (a), based on the hit result of the special figure 1 and the numerical range of the random value, the special figure Select the stop pattern of 1. In the present embodiment, when the hit/no hit result of Toku-zu 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special drawings A to G, and when the hit/no hit determination result of Toku-zu 1 is a small hit, Toku-zu H is selected, and when the hit/no-go result of Toku-zu 1 is lost, toku-zu I is selected.

In addition, when determining the stop symbol of special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 design decision table which is shown in Figure 487 (b), on the basis of the hit result of special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The special design 2 stop design is selected by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the hit/damage result of Toku-zu 2 is a big hit, any one of the Toku-zu a to Toku-e is selected. f is selected. After the symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined, the symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 488(a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 488(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, the input/output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. The effect control process will be described later.

In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, when pressing of the effect button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the effect button 136.

In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to the VDP 434, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, the command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S417 following step S415, the lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to various lamps 418, the instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the shielding device 246, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output. Then, it returns to step S403.

FIG. 488(b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects the strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 488(c) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step S601 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S603 following step S601, the control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in the information transmission process of the first sub control unit main process (step S421), and the other effect random number updating process is performed. And so on.

FIG. 488(d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

In step S703 subsequent to step S701, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S705, If not (step S703: No), it waits until the transfer end interrupt signal is input.

In step S705, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 404 forms the display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701. , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S707 subsequent to step S705, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

In step S709 subsequent to step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the image drawing end is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S709: Yes), If not (step S709: No), the process waits until the generation end interrupt signal is input.

In step S711, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 489(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S801 of FIG. 489(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, the input/output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 508 is initialized.

In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. .. In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S807, the effect data corresponding to this command (effect data by the effect movable body 224 and effect data by the lamp) is read from the ROM 506, and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

In step S813 following step S811, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. After that, the process returns to step S803.

FIG. 489(b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

FIG. 489(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step S1001 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S1003, which is subsequent to step S1001, an effect random number updating process and the like are performed.

Hereinafter, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 490 to 521.
<Image display device>

FIG. 490 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. First, with reference to FIG. The configuration will be described.

The image display device 208′ of the present embodiment includes the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 479 (or includes a device corresponding to the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 479), and a plurality (for example, three) Image display devices (first image display device 2081, second image display device 2082, and third image display device 2083).

In this example, the image display device 208 is configured by a first image display device 2081 which is a main, and a second image display device 2082 and a third image display device 2083 which are subordinates.

As an example, the first image display device 2081 is an image display device configured by a liquid crystal display device or the like, and its display area has two other image display devices (a second image display device 2082 and a third image display device 2083). It is an image display device that is larger than that of (1) and does not move. In this specification, the first image display device 2081 may be referred to as a main display device or a main liquid crystal. Further, in this example, the first image display device 2081 has the same (or equivalent) configuration as the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 479.

Each of the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 is an image display device configured by a liquid crystal display device or the like, and in this example, the sizes of both display areas are the same. Further, in this example, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device are arranged on both left and right sides of the first image display device 2081 with the first image display device 2081 interposed therebetween. The image display device arranged on the left side of the first image display device 2081 as seen from the player is the second image display device 2082, and the image display device arranged on the right side is the third image display device 2083. In this specification, the second image display device 2082 may be referred to as a left sub display device or a left sub liquid crystal, and the third image display device 2083 may be referred to as a right sub display device or a right sub liquid crystal.

The second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are arranged in the left-right direction in this example so that the front of the first image display device 2081 is close to or away from each other along the display surface of the first image display device 2081. It is configured to be able to move (slide) to.

As an example, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 have a length in the width direction shorter than about half the length of the first image display device 2081 and a height slightly shorter. Further, in the second image display device 2082, at the initial position shown in FIG. 9A, at least the right edge portion thereof overlaps with the front surface side of the left edge portion of the first image display device 2081. In the initial position shown in FIG. 20A, at least the left edge portion 2083 overlaps the front surface side of the right edge portion of the first image display device 2081.

When the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 move from the initial position so as to be close to each other, the first image display device 2081 (display in) becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize (visual recognition). If the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 move toward the initial position so as to be separated from each other, the first image display device 2081 (displayed by) is the player. Will be easier to see.

The first image display device 2081 may move, and the second image display device 2082 and/or the third image display device 2083 may not move. Further, the size of the display area of the first image display device 2081 may be smaller than the display area of the second image display device 2082 and/or the third image display device 2083, or the display areas of these three are the same size. May be Further, the number of image display devices 208′ may be two, or may be four or more.

Further, the number of image display devices 208′ may be one. In that case, all of the respective displays shown in the following examples (production examples) are displayed on one image display device 208′.
<Image display device/first image display device>

The first image display device 2081 has, in its display area, a first symbol display area 208X (symbol display areas 208a to 208c) and an effect display area 208d for performing variable display of decorative symbols (first variable display). The effect display area 208d includes an icon display area 800 and an explanation display area TT1.

In the present specification, the decorative design displayed in the first design display region 208X (design display regions 208a to 208c) is referred to as "first decorative design".

In FIG. 490(a), a combination of decorative patterns (first decorative pattern) of "decoration 3-decoration 1-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

Further, the icon display area 800 is composed of, for example, five horizontally arranged areas, and can display one variable icon and four holding icons, which is the maximum holding number of the special game 1 (or special figure 2) variable game. is there. In this example, the variable icon display area is provided at the right end of the icon display area 800 (near the center of the display area, below the middle symbol display area 208b), and the special icon is sequentially drawn from a position close to the variable icon display area. A display area of a hold icon corresponding to the first to fourth hold orders of the variable game is provided.

In FIG. 490(a), the variable icon h0 is displayed at the right end of the icon display area 800, and a suggestion display (a pedestal in this example) indicating that four hold icons can be displayed is displayed on the left side thereof. Corresponding to the fact that the three variable displays in FIG. 1 are suspended, suspension icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed on the three pedestals, respectively. In this case, the hold icon h11 is the hold icon corresponding to the earliest (oldest stored) hold, and the hold icons h12 corresponding to the second hold in order toward the left and the third hold. The hold icon h13 is displayed.

The change icon h0 is a hold icon corresponding to the change, and is, for example, an icon that changes from these hold icons when the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 shown in FIG. 490(a) are exhausted. Further, the display mode of the icon displayed as the hold icon and the display mode (pattern, size, etc.) of the icon displayed as the variable icon may be the same display mode or different display modes. ..

On the right side of the icon display area 800, an explanation display area (tutorial display section) TT1 is provided. In the explanation display area TT1, various kinds of information regarding games and effects are displayed (tutorial display), and the contents thereof are updated at an appropriate timing. In the explanation display area TT1 shown in FIG. 490(a), "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed, and the explanation about the lord's character is made.
<Image display device/second image display device>

In the second image display device 2082, a meter (button image) imitating the image of the chance button 137 is displayed at the bottom of the display area. For example, if the number of times the chance button 137 is operated (pressed) is increased, for example, the colored (non-white) colored portion of the button image increases, and the button image is entirely filled, the player A production (for example, one-shot notification production) that is highly expected by the user is executed.

Alternatively, if a certain effect increases the number of parts to be filled and all the parts are filled, it becomes possible to execute the button effect once, and if the button is operated in that state, it will be a big hit with the variation. The player is configured to perform an effect that is highly expected by the player, such as notifying of whether or not.

Further, below the meter, a stage name display area is provided for displaying the stage name and reach name currently being performed. In the stage name display area of FIG. 490(a), “Castle town” is displayed, and it is informed that the current stage is the castle town. Further, above the display area of the second image display device 2082, a second symbol display area 208Y (see (i) in the figure) for performing variable display of decorative symbols (second variable display) is provided. ing.

As enlarged and shown in FIGS. 491(o) to 491(q), the second symbol display area 208Y has three symbol display areas 208k to 208g (left symbol display area 208k, middle symbol display) for displaying decorative symbols. It has a region 208l and a right symbol display region 208g). In this specification, the decorative pattern displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y may be referred to as "second decorative pattern". In addition, when it is not necessary to distinguish from the first decorative design, such as is clear from the meaning of the sentence, both the first decorative design and the second decorative design may be described as “decorative design”.

In this example, the case where the second symbol display area 208Y is provided in the second image display device 2082 will be described as an example, but the second symbol display area 208Y may be provided in the first image display device 2081. It may be provided in the third image display device 2083.

The variable display (second variable display) of the decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) executed in the second symbol display area 208Y is the variable display (first variable symbol) executed in the first symbol display area 208X. Variable display)). That is, the second variable display is visible (not displayed) to the player as shown in FIG. 490(a) and visible (displayed to the player as shown in FIG. 490(j)). ) May be displayed.

The second symbol display area 208Y (each of the left symbol display area 208k, the middle symbol display area 208l, and the right symbol display area 208g) is a first symbol display area 208X (the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, the right). The display area is smaller than each of the symbol display areas 208c), and the display size of the second decorative symbol is smaller than that of the first decorative symbol. The second variable display is executed in association with the first variable display executed by the first image display device 2081 and has a smaller display size than the first variable display. The second decorative pattern may be referred to as a "mini decorative pattern".

In the effect example of the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 490 to 505, the second decorative pattern has the same (same kind) design as the first decorative pattern as shown in FIGS. 491(o) to 491(q). The design (decorated design) is displayed. Further, as will be described later in detail, at a certain timing, the second decorative symbol may display the same symbol combination as the first decorative symbol, or may display a different symbol combination. Further, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be visible to the player at the same time, or only one of them may be visible to the player (easy to recognize).
<Image display device/third image display device>

The third image display device 2083 shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. The lord's character may or may not always be displayed.
<Other production methods>

As a rendering device other than the image display device 208', for example, a speaker 120, a fourth symbol display device 284, operating means 136, 137, accessory parts 224A, 224B, 224C are provided.

The fourth symbol display device 284 is a device for notifying whether or not the symbols are changing (or the symbols are stopped), and for example, a symbol on the left side is indicated by a quadrangle figure, which is a symbol changing notification device of the special figure 1. The circular figure on the right side is the symbol fluctuation notification device of FIG. In the following figures, the case of being displayed in white indicates the state in which the design of Special Figure 1 (square) or Special Figure 2 (round) is changing, and the case of being displayed in gray is When the special figure 1 (square) or special figure 2 (round) is out of position and it is displayed in black, the special figure 1 (square) or special figure 2 (round) is stopped. Indicates the state of. In addition, although the fourth symbol display device 284 is shown as having a configuration separate from the image display device 208′ in this example, even if these are images displayed on the image display device 208′. Good.

The operation means 136 and 137 are operation buttons (for example, a chance button 136 and a chance button 137).

In addition, each of the role products 224A, 224B, and 224C is one type of the effect movable body 224, and for example, the family crest role product 224A disposed below the first image display device 2081 and above the first image display device 2081. Yatsushiro character 224B and general character member 224C, which are located at. The family crest monument 224A is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. Further, the family coat emblem 224A internally has a light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect. In addition, the Yatsushiro 224B and the general 224C are also configured to be able to move in the vertical direction in accordance with the effect contents. Both the Yatsushiro 224B and the shogun 224C have a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the production.

Although the speaker 120 and the fourth symbol display device 284 are described above the image display device 208′ for convenience of description, they do not specify the positional relationship with the image display device 208′. The same applies to the positional relationship between the chance buttons 136 and 137 and the image display device 208'. The family crests 224A, the Yatsushiro 224B, and the shogun 224C merely show an example of the operation, and the positional relationship with the image display device 208′ is not limited to those described here.

Further, the speaker 120 is a diagram for showing a sound output in each of the following embodiments, and although a sound output example (for example, a character “Don” or the like) may be described together with the illustration of the speaker 120, the sound output The presence/absence of the example does not indicate the presence/absence of the voice output, and the voice may be output even if the voice output example is not described. ..

Here, the hold icon and the variable icon are configured to be changeable to white display, blue display, green display, red display, gold display, iridescent display, or the like. Also, chance buttons 136, 137, family crest actor 224A, Yatsushiro actor 224B, and general actor 244C can be changed to white lighting, blue lighting, green lighting, red lighting, gold lighting, rainbow lighting, etc. by built-in LEDs. Is configured.

For example, in FIG. 490(a), the variable icon h0 is displayed in white, the hold icon h11 is displayed in blue, and the hold icons h12 and h13 are each displayed in white. In addition, the hold icon and the variable icon are displayed in white as a default display, and the hold icon h11 is displayed in blue to give advance notice. In addition, the display mode (display color, shape, etc.) of the variable icon and each hold icon is classified according to the jackpot expectation level, and the classification (rank of the expectation level) is notified (in this way, the game). It is also a production (which notifies the production that the person should wait) (this will be described later). In addition, the jackpot expectation degree means the expectation degree that the winning/discarding determination of the variation game (the result of the final symbol variation display) is a jackpot.

Further, the LEDs incorporated in the chance button 136 and the chance button 137 are lit in white respectively, the LEDs incorporated in the family crest actor 224A are illuminated in blue, and the LEDs incorporated in the Yatsushiro actor 224B and the general actor 244C are illuminated in white. There is. As an example, the family crest monument 224A emits light in the same color (blue in this example) in conjunction with the look-ahead notice of the holding icon h11, and the Yashiro 224B and the general actor 244C have their built-in LEDs lit in rainbow colors (rainbow). The light is emitted to notify the hit.

490 to 521, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 shown in FIG. 478, Although the description of the structure of the universal figure holding lamp 216 and the like is omitted, these structures are also provided similarly to FIG. 478.
<Direction using the second decorative pattern>

With reference to FIG. 490 to FIG. 505, as one of the embodiments of the present invention, a part of the configuration is appropriately extracted for an example of performance using the second decorative design executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Description will also be given with reference to an enlarged view.
<Example A>

Again, FIG. 490 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

First, the timing shown in FIG. 490(a) shows a state in which the variation of the first decorative symbol is stopped (variation stop state), and in the first image display device 2081, the "decoration 3" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative patterns (first decorative pattern) of "decoration 1-decoration 4" (a pattern combination that is out of order) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, a white variation icon h0 is displayed at the right end of the icon display area 800, and four suggestion displays (in this example, the pedestal) are displayed on the left side of the variation icon h0. h12 and h13 are displayed to inform that the hold of special figure 1 is 3. Further, while the hold icons h12 and h13 are displayed in white (default), the hold icon h11 is displayed in blue and the prefetching notice is executed. In the explanation display area TT1, a tutorial display "Panda is master of lord" is executed.

In the second image display device 2082, the meter (button image) is displayed, but at this timing, all the meters are filled with white, and the fact that the meter is 0 is notified. In the stage name display area, "Castle Town" is displayed, which informs that the current stage is the castle town.

The third image display device 2083 shows that the lord's character is riding on the stage. At the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the reservation of special figure 1 is “3”, The second hold number display of special maps 1 and 2 indicating that the special map 2 is "0" is displayed.

In the fourth symbol display device 284, both the special figure 1 (quadrangle) and the special figure 2 (circular shape) are displayed in gray, which indicates that they are in a disengaged stop state. The chance buttons 136 and 137 have their built-in LEDs lit in white. The family coat emblem 224 has the built-in LED emitting blue light in conjunction with the advance notice of the hold icon h11, and stands by (stops) at the initial position (below the first image display device 2081 in this example). The Yatsushiro Yakuhin 224B and the Shogun Yakuhin 244C have their built-in LEDs emitting white light, and are waiting (stopped) at an initial position (above the first image display device 2081 in this example). Audio output from the speaker 120 is not performed at this timing.

In the following description, mainly the effects that have changed from the previous effects over time will be mainly described.

As for the timing shown in FIG. 490(b), one hold (holding corresponding to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 4(a)) has been exhausted, and symbol fluctuation in the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) has started. In the fourth symbol display device 284, the special figure 1 (quadrangle) is displayed in white, and the special figure 2 (circle) is displayed in gray to indicate that the variable game of the special figure 1 is being executed. ..

At this timing, in the first symbol display region 208X (symbol display regions 208a to 208c) of the first image display device 2081, the variable display of the first decorative symbol (first variable display) is performed. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative pattern (the first variable display and the second variable display) is represented by a downward white arrow (the same applies to other examples below). Further, the white arrow shown in FIG. 3B is a long and narrow arrow, and in this case, it indicates that the decorative pattern is fluctuating at high speed in a mode having transparency. On the other hand, when the outline arrow is displayed as a short (thick) arrow (for example, FIG. 7E), it indicates that the decorative symbol is changing at a low speed. In the case of low-speed fluctuation, the speed may be such that the decorative pattern can be recognized.

In addition, as the hold is exhausted, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed in the icon display area 800 by a moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800. Then, it is displayed as a blue variable icon h0, and a look-ahead notice is given. In addition, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes the hold icon h11 to the left of the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h13 becomes the hold icon h12, which is the left side of the change icon h0. The white hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed on the two pedestals, respectively, to notify that the hold of special figure 1 is 2.

In the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the special reservation 1 is "2", and the special reservation 2 is "0". The number is displayed.

In the explanation display section TT1, the characters "Panda is the master of the lord" are still displayed. In this way, the explanation display on the explanation display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variable displays.

At the timing shown in FIG. 490(c), in the left symbol display area 208a of the first image display device 2081, the decorative symbol (here, “decoration 6”) undergoes fluctuation fluctuation (temporary stop), and in FIG. The timing shown is a state in which the decorative symbol (here, “decoration 6”) is subject to swing fluctuation (temporary stop) in the right symbol display area 208c of the first image display device 2081, and it is made to appear as reach (temple). .. The timing shown in FIG. 7E is a state in which the decorative pattern (“decoration 6”) that has been subject to swing fluctuation (temporary stop) in the right symbol display area 208c has started fluctuation again. The fluctuation of the "decoration 6" in the right symbol display area 208c at this timing is a low speed fluctuation as indicated by a white short (thick) arrow. In addition, a state in which the low speed fluctuation starts after the fluctuation of the decorative design (temporary stop) may be referred to as “the decorative design slips” or “the decorative design shifts”.

In the present embodiment, when the decorative pattern (first decorative pattern) is misaligned, continuous effect (for example, pseudo continuous effect) may be started. In this example, the case where the decorative design (first decorative design) is displaced as one of the start conditions of the pseudo-relational effect will be described, but another start condition may be used as the start condition of the pseudo-representative effect. The design (first decorative design) may be necessarily displaced, may or may not be displaced, or may not be displaced, and the pseudo continuous effect described below is also the same. Is.

The timing shown in FIG. 5F is a state in which the decorative symbol (here, “decoration 7”) is swinging (temporarily stopped) in the right symbol display area 208c. In this way, when a certain decorative pattern (here, "decoration 6") is displaced, another (next) decorative pattern (here, "decoration 7") is swinging (temporarily stopped) The stopped decorative pattern (“decoration 7”) may be referred to as “misalignment”.

In the present embodiment, the occurrence of the misalignment of the decorative design (first decorative design) is one of the notifications that the pseudo continuous effect may be started. It should be noted that the notification that the pseudo continuous effect may be started may be another notification, or may not be the occurrence of the misalignment.

The timing shown in (g) of the figure is a state in which the first animation has started in the middle symbol display area 208b that was undergoing high-speed fluctuation. In this example, the first animation is an animation with a special symbol (first symbol). Here, the special symbol is a symbol of a different type from the decorative symbol representing the number, and is, for example, one of the symbols relating to the execution of the continuous effect (first effect). The special design is also one of the decorative designs (the first decorative design and the second decorative design of this embodiment). Specifically, the special symbol is a symbol for which continuous production (for example, pseudo continuous production, continuous notice production, etc.) is started when the symbol is stopped and displayed.

As an example, the first animation of the present embodiment is an animation (special symbol stop-inspiring animation) that fuels whether or not the special symbol is stopped and displayed in at least one of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the present embodiment, as an example, the first animation will be described by taking as an example a case where the first symbol is an animation (middle symbol fanning animation) that fuels whether or not the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Here, the stop display of the special symbol may be a swing fluctuation stop display (temporary stop display), which is the same in the following embodiments.

When the middle symbol agitation animation ends, the special symbol may be stopped and displayed, and when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, continuous production may be executed.

Here, the special symbol is the symbol of the character (lord) as shown in FIG. 7G, and when the special symbol (the symbol of the character (lord)) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, for example, The pseudo continuous effect is executed as the continuous effect. In this way, the special symbol related to the start of execution of the pseudo-relational effect may be referred to as a pseudo-relational symbol.

The continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) is started when a certain symbol (three symbols) is stopped and displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. A configuration may be adopted, and in that case, the fanned animation (first animation) may be an animation fanned whether or not the last symbol of the three symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, the stop display in this case refers to a stop display other than the fixed display, such as including swing fluctuation in at least one of the three symbols.

That is, the timing shown in FIG. 6(g) is the first animation (middle symbol energization) that fuels whether or not the pseudo continuous symbol (start condition) related to the start of the pseudo continuous effect is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. (Animation) is being performed.

At the timing shown in (h) of the figure, the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and at the timing shown in (i) of the figure, the horizontal width of the pseudo symbol starts to be gradually enlarged. ing. That is, the pseudo-relational pattern in FIG. 7H has the same display size as the decorative patterns (“decoration 6” and “decoration 7”) in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, but the same figure. The width of the pseudo continuous pattern of (i) is enlarged. As a result, the right end of the "decoration 6" in the left symbol display area 208a and the left end of the "decoration 7" in the right symbol display area 208a start to overlap with the left end and the right end of the pseudo continuous symbol, respectively.

Further, at the timing shown in (i) of the figure, in the upper part of the second image display device 2082, the second symbol display area 208Y for displaying the second decorative symbol starts its display. At this timing, only the second symbol display area 208Y (the frame portion shown by a white square frame in the figure) starts its display, and the second decorative symbol is hidden.

The timing shown in (j) of the same figure shows a state in which the width of the pseudo continuous symbol is further enlarged and displayed. At this timing, the "decoration 6" in the left symbol display area 208a and the "decoration 7" in the right symbol display area 208a are completely overlapped by the pseudo continuous symbol, and are not visible to the player (left symbol display Both of the decorative symbols in the area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are difficult for the player to visually recognize as compared with the pseudo continuous symbol).

Further, at this timing (at least a part of the state in which the first animation display (middle symbol fanning animation) is displayed), the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y (shaking). Fluctuation, temporary stop display). The second decorative symbol at this timing is stopped and displayed in the symbol combination shown in FIG. 491(o), for example. That is, the swinging fluctuation (temporary stop) of the decorative symbol (here "decoration 6") is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k, and the swinging fluctuation (temporary stop) of the decorative symbol (here "decoration 7") is displayed in the right symbol display area 208g. ) Is displayed, and the pseudo continuous symbol (here, the symbol of the same character (customer) as that of (h) in the figure) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208l.

It should be noted that, as shown in (i) of the same figure, the second frame as shown in (j) is displayed without displaying "only the frame" of the second symbol display area 208Y as the display scheduled area of the second decorative symbol. The second decorative symbol may start to be displayed in the symbol display area 208Y (the second symbol display area 208Y can be recognized by the player by the start of the display of the second decorative symbol).

At this timing, the first decorative pattern is invisible to the player due to the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous pattern (for example, it is more difficult to visually recognize than the pseudo continuous pattern or the displayed second decorative pattern), and the first animation After the end of the first decorative symbol (the state of variation stop of the first decorative symbol) is undetermined, the second decorative symbol (the middle symbol display region 208l of the second symbol display region 208Y) stops the pseudo continuous symbol The presence or absence of the display can be recognized by the player. That is, for the advanced player, by paying attention to the second decorative symbol, at this timing, the state of the variable stop of the first decorative symbol, that is, the state of the stop display of the special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) and the continuous effect thereof Whether or not the execution of (pseudo continuous production) has started can be recognized. In this way, the state of fluctuation stop of the first decorative symbol is undetermined, but the presence or absence of the stop display of the special symbol (presence/absence of continuous effect) can be recognized by the player by the second decorative symbol (first condition). In the present specification, the state in which the state is notified instead of the first decorative symbol which is not visible (difficult to see) to the player in the symbol display area 208X is referred to as "previous barre".

The timing shown in FIG. 6(k) shows a state in which the width of the pseudo continuous symbol is further enlarged and displayed. At this timing, the "decoration 6" in the left symbol display area 208a and the "decoration 7" in the right symbol display area 208a are completely overlapped by the pseudo continuous symbol, and are not visible to the player (left symbol display Both of the decorative symbols in the area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are difficult for the player to visually recognize as compared with the pseudo continuous symbol). Further, the left and right ends of the enlarged pseudo continuous symbol are displayed in part of the display areas of the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083, respectively. That is, one pseudo continuous symbol is displayed across (spanning) a plurality of image display devices 208′ (first image display device 2081, second image display device 2082 and third image display device 2093).

More specifically, in the second image display device 2082, the enlarged left end portion of the pseudo continuous symbol overlaps with the second decorative symbol, the meter and the stage name display area, for example, the left end portion of the pseudo continuous symbol is at least the first. The two decorative symbols are overlapped (in this example, the left end portion of the pseudo continuous symbol is overlapped with the second decorative symbol, the meter and the stage name display area). Note that the second decorative symbol continues to be stopped and displayed for the symbol combination of FIG. 491(o).

In the third image display device 2083, the enlarged right end portion of the pseudo-relational pattern is overlapped with a part of the display on the third image display device 2083 (in this example, the lord's character on the stage, And, it is overlapped with the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2).

Further, at this timing, a part of the movable body (in this example, the family crest part 244A) starts to rise and overlaps with a part of the first image display device 2081 (overlaps with the first image display device 2081). .. As a result, a part of the display displayed on the first image display device 2081 is overlapped with the family crest monument 224A and is invisible to the player (or the second decorative pattern or movable body (the family crest monument 224A, etc.). ) Is more difficult to see). Specifically, (a part of) the pseudo-relational pattern, a part of the display of the icon display area 800 (in this example, (all of) the change icon h0, a hold icon h11 and a part of its pedestal), and an explanation display. A part of the tutorial display in the area TT1 is invisible to the player (or more difficult to see than the second decorative pattern or the movable body (such as the family crest actor 224A)).

At the timing shown in FIG. 1(l), the enlarged display of the pseudo-relational pattern ends (enlargement is stopped at the same size as the pseudo-relational pattern shown in FIG. 6(k)), and the position of the raised family crest actor 244A The figure shows a state in which the speaker 120 rotates and the sound effect “don” is output from the speaker 120.

At this timing, the symbol combination of the first decorative symbol is invisible (difficult to visually recognize) to the player due to the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbol, but the first decorative symbol is determined to be in a stopped state. That is, at this timing, the player can recognize the state of stop display of the special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) and the start of execution of continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect). The second decorative pattern is the same as in FIG. 4(k) (state of FIG. 491(o)).

Therefore, even if the player does not notice the stop display (previous barre) of the pseudo continuous symbol in the second symbol display area 208Y at the timing of (j) of the figure, the movable body ((l) of FIG. It is possible to recognize that the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol and the start of execution of the pseudo continuous effect by the pseudo continuous symbol have been confirmed by the operation (rotation operation here) of the family crest part 244A) and/or the sound effect from the speaker 120.

The family coat emblem 244A starts rotating after, for example, the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol and the start of execution of the pseudo continuous effect due to the stop display are confirmed. The family crest monument 224A may rise after starting rotation at the initial position (the position below the first image display device 2081 shown in (j) of the same figure). In that case, for example, a pseudo continuous symbol After the stop display and the start of execution of the pseudo continuous effect due to the stop display have been confirmed, the robot moves to the stop position after the ascent (the position (1) in the figure).

Note that the family crest accessory 244A performs movements such as ascent and descent, rotation, and the like even during other effects. In addition, the family crest accessory 244A may be configured not to perform movements such as ascending and descending and rotating during other presentations, and may move and rotate such as ascending and descending during other presentations. Some of the operations may be performed, or only some of the operations may not be performed.

The timing shown in the figure (m) shows a state in which the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbols in the first symbol display area 208X becomes visible to the player after the first animation display is finished. Although illustration is omitted, during the period from (l) to (m) in the same figure, an animation of a reduced display of the enlarged pseudo continuous symbol is executed, and as shown in (m) in the figure, the size of the initial state ( The display size is reduced to "decoration 6" in the left symbol display area 208a and "decoration 7" in the right symbol display area 208c). As a result, "decoration 6" that swings (temporarily stops) in the left symbol display area 208a of the first symbol display area 208X, a special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) that swings (temporarily stops) in the middle symbol display area 208b , And the “decoration 7” that is shake-changed (temporarily stopped) in the right symbol display area 208c becomes visible to the player, and the confirmation of execution of the pseudo continuous effect is notified. The second decorative pattern is the same as in FIG. 4(k) (state of FIG. 491(o)). That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 6(m), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are in the same display mode ((provisional) stop display of the same symbol combination), and at the same time, visible to the player. There is.

It should be noted that the animation of the reduced display of the pseudo-relational pattern, which is executed from the same figure (l) to the same figure (m), is the animation display of the enlarged display of the pseudo-rear pattern (for example, the same figure (h) to the same figure). The execution time may be the same as that in the figure (k)), may be short, or may be long. Moreover, the animation of the reduced display of the pseudo continuous symbols may not be executed.

In general, the player stops the special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first image display device 2081 (first symbol display area 208X) as shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to recognize that the start of execution of the continuous production (pseudo continuous production) has been confirmed. Alternatively, a player accustomed to the game cannot visually recognize the state of the first decorative symbol (whether there is a symbol combination or a (provisional) stop display) by the first animation display, as shown in FIG. Even if it is difficult to visually recognize, it may be possible to recognize that the start of execution of the continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) has been confirmed by the operation (rotation operation in this case) of the movable body (family crest actor 224A). ..

In the present embodiment, the state of the first symbol display area 208X is invisible (difficult to view) at a timing earlier than those ((m) and (l) in the figure) and by the first animation display. However, as shown in FIG. 11(j), the player recognizes that the start of execution of the continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) has been confirmed by the second decorative symbol that is not overlapped in the first animation display. In some cases, it can be done.

In this example, the timing at which the special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) shown in FIG. 7G starts to be displayed is the start timing of the first animation, but the start timing of the first animation is not limited to this timing. Absent. For example, the start timing of the first animation may be the timing at which the special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) shown in (g) of the figure becomes visible to the player, or as shown in (h) of the figure. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the pseudo continuous symbol may be temporarily stopped, or the display mode of the special symbol may be changed at a timing later than the same figure (h) (in this example, the pseudo pattern as shown in the same figure (i)). It may be the timing when the enlarged display of the continuous symbols is started).

Further, the end timing of the first animation is, for example, until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the same figure (m), before the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the same figure (m), (1) to (l) of FIG. When the reduced animation of the special symbol is executed during the same figure (m), until the reduced animation ends, the reduced animation starts, or the enlarged animation ends in the same figure (l). , And so on.

That is, the display period of the first animation is a period defined as a combination of any of the start timing and end timing of the first animation described above. When the reduced animation of the special symbol is executed, the display period of the first animation is before the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the same figure (g) to (m) in the same figure (h) to the same figure. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed in FIG. (m), or before the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the same diagrams (i) to (m). Further, when the reduced animation of the special symbol is not executed before the figure (m) (when it ends in the enlarged display), the display period of the first animation is from the figure (g) to the figure (l). The same applies to FIG. 1(h) to FIG. 1(l), or to FIG. 1(i) to FIG. 1(l), and the same applies to each of the following embodiments.

The timing shown in (n) of the figure shows a state in which a second animation different from the first animation has started to be displayed in the display area of the first image display device 2081.

The second animation displayed at this timing (after the pseudo-relational pattern is stopped) is an animation displayed during the period until the pseudo-reproduction is started, and here, it continues a plurality of times (for example, twice). It is an animation showing that the execution of the pseudo-relationship has been confirmed.

In this example, in the second animation, the character (lord) is displayed from the left side of the center as shown in FIG. 9(n), and the character (lord) moves to the center as shown in FIG. However, it is an animation in which the display size is enlarged and the characters "Still still!!" are displayed. Further, in this example, the second animation is displayed only on the first image display device 2081, but the second animation may be displayed over a plurality of image display devices 208′.

The timing shown in (p) of the figure shows the state in which the pseudo continuous effect that continues a plurality of times has started to be executed, and there is no end of the hold and no change in the display of the icon display area.

At this timing, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (first symbol display area 208X) of the first image display device 2081, the first decorative symbol combination of "decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. .. In addition, it overlaps with a part of the first decorative pattern (a part of "decoration 6" in this example), and displays regarding the number of times of the pseudo continuous effect (hereinafter, referred to as "pseudo continuous number display", in this example, 2 “×2” indicating the number of times is displayed.

Further, in the symbol display areas 208k to 208g (second symbol display area 208Y) of the second image display device 2082, the second decoration in the state of FIG. 491(o) similar to FIG. The design (decorative design including the stop display of the pseudo continuous design) continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the display of the first image display device 2081 is changed, accurate information (in this example, the pseudo in this example, by the second decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y) is displayed. The player can recognize that the continuous effect is being executed). That is, the second decorative design displayed in the second image display device 2082 (second design display area 208Y) is a decorative design such as displaying the decorative design (combination of decorative designs) to notify the player of some information. It can be said that the pattern is displayed so as to exhibit the original function of. In other words, the second decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol even if the state of the first decorative symbol (presence or absence of symbol combination and (provisional) stop display) is invisible or difficult for the player to see. Guarantee information notification by.

In this way, when continuous production (for example, pseudo continuous production) is executed, after the first animation (medium symbol agitation animation) is displayed, a special symbol (for example, pseudo continuous symbol) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is stopped. After that, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is restarted, a symbol other than the special symbol in the middle symbol symbol display region 208b (for example, a decorative symbol of a number similar to that of the right symbol symbol display region 208c (here, "decoration symbol 7")) indicate. That is, at this timing, the symbol combination of the second decorative symbol (“decoration 6-special symbol-decoration 7”) is different from the symbol combination of the first decorative symbol (“decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7”) It is a combination.

In this example, in the state where the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted, the numerical decorative symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, but in the state where the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted. The same symbol as the second decorative symbol (that is, a special symbol) may be displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b.

The timing shown in the figure (q), in the first symbol display area 208X of the first image display device 2081 and the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082, respectively, decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and It shows a state in which the variable display (high-speed fluctuation) of the second decorative pattern has resumed. Further, with the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the animation in which the pseudo continuous number display (in this example, “×2”) is reduced and displayed is executed.

The timing shown in the figure (r), in the first symbol display area 208X, while the variable display of the first decorative symbol (high-speed fluctuation) continues, while the second symbol display area 208Y (second decorative symbol) is It is hidden.

In the above example, after the timing shown in (i), after displaying the variable display of the second decorative symbol as shown in (q) in the second symbol display area 208Y, (j) in the same figure. The temporary stop of the second decorative symbol shown in () (stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol) may be performed.

Further, in the second image display device 2082, the stop display of the second decorative symbol including the stop display of the special symbol (the second decorative symbol (FIG. 491(o)) shown in FIG. 9(j)) is the first image display device. As long as it is visible to the player before the stop display of the first decorative symbol including the special symbol in 2081 (the same figure (m)), the special symbol is stopped at the timing shown in the same figure (i), for example. The stop display of the second decorative symbol including the display (FIG. 491(o)) may be displayed, or at the timing shown in FIG. (k) or (l), the stop display of the special symbol is displayed. 2 The stop display of the decorative design (FIG. 491(o)) may be displayed.

In the same figure (j), the right symbol (“decoration 6”) and the left symbol (“decoration 7”) are overlapped with the enlarged middle symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) (first timing), The display timing (second timing) of the second decorative symbol may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing. May be

Further, in FIG. 6(p), the display timing (first timing) of the pseudo consecutive number display is the same timing as the display start timing (restart timing, second timing) of the first decorative symbol. The first timing may precede the second timing, or the first timing may follow the second timing.

Further, in the same figure (q), the start timing (first timing) of the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the start timing (second timing) of the variable display of the second decorative symbol are the same timing. The first timing may precede the second timing, or the first timing may follow the second timing.

Further, the pseudo consecutive number display may be started from the same figure (q), in which case the display timing of the pseudo consecutive number display (first timing) and the start timing of the variable display of the second decorative symbol (first The second timing) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

Further, in FIG. 5(r), the timing (first timing) when the pseudo-repeated number display is reduced from the size shown in FIG. 4(q) and the timing of erasing the second decorative symbol (second timing) The timing may be the same, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.
<Matters common to each example>
Items common to each embodiment shown in FIGS. 490 to 505, including this embodiment, will be described.

First, the state of the decorative design (the design combination of the decorative designs) that is the condition (in some cases) where the pseudo-relationship is started, the deviation occurs in the left design or the right design (there is a special design in the middle design after that). If you stop), the left symbol and the right symbol become tempai (when stopped by the same symbol), if the special symbol stops in the middle symbol, or the special symbol stops in the middle symbol regardless of the left symbol and the right symbol Whether or not (only), and so on.

Also, in the configuration where the pseudo continuous production may be started when a shift pattern occurs in the left pattern or the right pattern, if the shift pattern does not occur, it becomes a tempai, and then the decorative pattern of the number that is tempered If the decorative pattern of the number with 1 added passes, it develops to reach. On the other hand, if the pseudo-relational production is not started, a ten-pie is created if no misalignment is generated, and thereafter, the decorative pattern of the number obtained by adding 1 to the decorative pattern of the number that has been ten-pie is stopped and displayed, which is out of alignment.

Also, in the configuration where the pseudo-relation effect may be started when the left symbol and the right symbol are tempted, there is a state of whether the pseudo-relational symbol is stopped and displayed first, and then the number of the tempo If a decorative pattern with a number obtained by adding 1 to the decorative pattern passes, the reach is developed. On the other hand, when the pseudo-relational production is not started, the decorative design of the number which is the numbered decorative design of 1 is stopped and displayed, and it is out.

Further, for example, the left design is "decoration 6", the middle design is "special design", and the right design is "decoration 7" is stopped (the design combination of "decoration 6-special design-decoration 7" is stopped) and is simulated. When the continuous production is started, the left symbol "decoration 6", the middle symbol "special symbol", and the right symbol "decoration 7" are also stopped and displayed in the next pseudo continuous demonstration, and the reach thereafter is, for example, the left symbol. The "decoration 6" and the right pattern are "decoration 6" and are configured to be a tempai (referred to as "decoration 6 tempai"). In this case, the “decorative 6 tempai” is configured to have a higher jackpot probability than the reach other than the “decorative 6 tempai”.

Therefore, in the second decorative pattern, for example, as shown in FIG. 4(j) and FIG. 491(o), among the symbol combinations of “decoration 6-special symbol-decoration 7”, the left symbol “decoration 6” is the player. In some cases, the player may be able to recognize whether or not it becomes a “decorative 6 tempai” when it develops into a super reach, and it may be possible to increase the expectation of the player.

Some tempai patterns have different jackpot expectations. For example, the left pattern is "decoration 7" and the right pattern is "decoration 7". Become. In such a case, the second decorative design makes it possible to visually recognize that the design combination of "decoration 7-special design-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed, and the subsequent development is "hot" to the player. It may be possible to recognize that

In addition, the first animation (animated animation of the special symbol) includes enlarged display, but it may also include rotation display, and it is attached to the design instead of the enlarged display of the design itself. For example, the effect display may include a display that gradually expands. Further, the enlarged display of the first animation may cause the display other than the second decorative pattern to overlap.

Further, the second decorative pattern will be described by taking as an example the configuration that may be displayed and may be hidden, except for the configuration (FIG. 499) in which the third decorative pattern described later is displayed, the second decorative pattern. May be always displayed.

In addition, in one of the fanning animations of the special design (first animation, special design stop flairing animation, middle design flairing animation), the second decorative design may cause the tipping to occur, or the second There is no one corresponding to the special symbol in the decorative symbol, and there may be one in which the tip is out of focus due to the stop display of the second decorative symbol other than the special symbol.

Further, the stop display (re-display) of the decorative pattern (first decorative pattern) that occurs after the pseudo-reproduction does not include the special symbol so that the pseudo-relational pattern is not mistakenly recognized as stopped again. Is desirable.

Further, when the number of pseudo-repetitions is plural, the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes (or can be changed (out of the changeable states) as the number of times increases (increases). 1))), and in that configuration, the hold icon and the variable icon may be hidden at a certain timing.

Further, the case where the number of pseudo-repetitions is plural is described as an example, but the number of pseudo-repetitions may be one. The larger the number of pseudo-repetitions (the more consecutive the pseudo-reproductions are), the higher the jackpot expectation. Further, in each effect example described in the present specification, there may be a case where a big hit expectation degree is higher than the pseudo continuous effect, or there is a case where a big hit expectation degree is lower than the pseudo continuous effect. May be.
<Example B>

Next, another example of performance will be described. FIG. 491 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

This effect example is an example of the case where the special symbol is not stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display (that is, the case where the continuous effect is not started), and FIGS. 491(a) to 491(i) are diagrams. Since the timing is the same as that shown in 490(a) to 490(i), description thereof will be omitted. In addition, other than that, the description of the configuration similar to the effect example A shown in FIG. 490 may be omitted.

The timing shown in FIG. 491(j) indicates a state in which the horizontal width of the pseudo continuous symbol is further enlarged and displayed. At this timing, the "decoration 6" in the left symbol display area 208a and the "decoration 7" in the right symbol display area 208a are completely overlapped by the pseudo continuous symbol, and are not visible to the player (left symbol display Both of the decorative symbols in the area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are difficult for the player to visually recognize as compared with the pseudo continuous symbol).

In the second image display device 2082, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y in which only the frame portion (white-filled square frame) has started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. To be done. The second decorative pattern in this case is displayed in the state shown in FIG. That is, the swinging fluctuation (temporary stop) of the decorative symbol (here "decoration 6") is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k, and the swinging fluctuation (temporary stop) of the decorative symbol (here "decoration 7") is displayed in the right symbol display area 208g. )Is displayed. On the other hand, in the middle symbol display area 208l, the variable display (high-speed fluctuation) of the decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) is being displayed.

The timing shown in the figure (k), the animation of the reduced display of the enlarged pseudo continuous symbol is executed in the first symbol display area 208X, and the size in the initial state as shown in the figure (h) (left symbol display area The display is reduced to "decoration 6" of 208a or "decoration 7" of the right symbol display area 208c), and an animation (scroll display of the middle symbol) that descends from above in the middle symbol display area 208b is executed. It shows the state.

At this timing, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. The second decorative pattern in this case is displayed in the state shown in FIG. That is, the decorative symbol (here, "decoration 6") is shaken and changed (temporarily stopped) displayed in the left symbol display region 208k, and the decorative symbol (second symbol, "decoration 8" here) is displayed in the middle symbol display region 208l. ) Is stopped and displayed, and the decorative pattern (here, “decoration 7”) is shaken and changed (temporarily stopped) and displayed in the right symbol display area 208g. That is, at this timing, the first symbol variation region 208X and the second symbol variation region 208Y are both visible to the player, but the state of the first decorative symbol (presence or absence of symbol combination and (provisional) stop display) And, the state of the second decorative symbol (presence or absence of symbol combination and (temporary) stop display) is different. Hereinafter, when simply described as “state of decorative design”, it means a state (display mode) such as a design combination of decorative designs and presence/absence of (provisional) stop display.

The timing shown in FIG. 1 (l) is a state in which the first decorative symbol in the first symbol variation area 208X is displayed, and then the numeric decorative symbol (here, “decoration 8”) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Showing. That is, after the first animation display, the special symbol (here, the pseudo continuous symbol) is not stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and it is determined that the continuous effect (the pseudo continuous effect) due to the stop of the special symbol is not executed. It is in the state of having done. Here, the first animation display refers to an animation based on the pseudo-continuous symbols (the symbols of the character (lord)) in FIGS.

Further, at this timing, the stop display (sway fluctuation display) of the second decorative symbol shown in (q) of the same figure continues in the second symbol display area 208Y. That is, at this timing, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are visible to the player in the same state (a combination of decorative symbols is a temporary stop state of "decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 7").

Thus, in this example, the case where the execution of the continuous effect (for example, the pseudo continuous effect) does not start after the first animation display is shown, and in that case, the middle symbol display of the first symbol display area 208X In the area 208b, the special symbol (for example, a pseudo continuous symbol) is not stopped and displayed, and a symbol (for example, a decorative symbol of a number) different from the special symbol is stopped and displayed (swing variation display, temporary stop display). Further, in this case, the decorative pattern stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b (here, "decoration 8") is the numerical decorative pattern (FIG. 490(p)) displayed when the continuous effect is executed. It is a decorative design (third design) of a number different from the decorative design (“decoration 7”) stopped and displayed in the design display area 208b.

The timing shown in the figure (m) shows the state in which the second decorative symbol is deleted in the second image display device 2082, and the timing shown in the figure (n) is the first symbol in the first symbol display area 208X. The decorative design is stopped and displayed (here, the second decorative design (combination of decorative designs of "decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 7") is stopped and displayed.

Generally, as shown in FIG. 1L, the player is special in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first image display device 2081 (first symbol display area 208X) after the display of the first animation is finished. Since the symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) is not stopped and displayed, it is possible to recognize that it is determined that the continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) is not executed. Alternatively, a player accustomed to the game can move the movable body even if the state of the first symbol display area 208X is invisible (difficult to see) by the first animation display, as shown in FIG. It may be possible to recognize that the start of execution of the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) has been confirmed by the operation of the (family crest monument 224A) (the rotation operation in this case).

In the present embodiment, at a timing earlier than that, even in a state where the stop display of the first decorative symbol is not fixed (the first animation display is being executed), as shown in FIG. It is determined that the continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) is not executed by the second decorative pattern (FIG. 491(q)) in which the decorative pattern (numeric decorative pattern) other than the pseudo continuous pattern is stopped and displayed in the display area 208l. It may be possible for the player to recognize that.

Alternatively, at a timing before the timing shown in (l) of the figure, and even when the first animation display is being executed, as shown in (j) of the figure, (the middle symbol display area 208l is high speed It is possible to make the player recognize that it is determined that the continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) is not executed by the second decorative symbol (FIG. 491(p)) that is changing (the pseudo continuous symbol is not stopped and displayed). Sometimes you can.

In the same figure (k), the pseudo symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b may appear to move downward (shift) and return to the upper side, and may be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In that case Becomes a stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol shown in FIG. 490(m), and similar to FIG. 490(n) to FIG. 490(r), the pseudo continuous effect is started. In this case, when the player previously viewed the second decorative symbol in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, the first symbol is displayed in the state in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol of the second decorative symbol. If the middle pattern of the decorative pattern (pseudo continuous pattern in the middle pattern display area 208b) is displaced downward, the player may be able to recognize that it is displaced and return to the upper side (become a tip).

It should be noted that the method of displaying the stop display by returning to the upper side after being shifted downward may be configured to have a higher jackpot expectation than in the case where the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal stop mode.

As described above, during execution of the first animation ((j) and (k) in the same figure), the first decorative symbol after the end (the state of variation stop of the first decorative symbol) is undetermined, Due to the second decorative symbol (the pseudo continuous symbol is not stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y), it is pointed out that the continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) is not performed. That is, for example, an expert or the like pays attention to the second decorative symbol, and before the stop of the variation of the first decorative symbol, the state of the stop display of the special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) and the continuous effect thereof (pseudo continuous effect). It becomes possible to recognize whether or not the execution of () has started.

Note that, for example, at the display timing of the second decorative symbol shown in FIG. 11(j), the second decorative symbol (FIG. 491(q)) in which the middle symbol is stopped and displayed may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 490, when the pseudo consecutive effect is executed, the first variation due to the display of the second decorative symbol does not occur, and as shown in FIG. 491, the first variation occurs only when the pseudo consecutive effect is not performed. You may do it.

In addition, the leading edge may be generated in both the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed as shown in FIG. 490 and the case where the pseudo continuous effect is not executed as shown in FIG. 491.

Further, in FIG. 491(k), the timing (first timing) when the animation of the scroll display of the pseudo continuous symbol starts and the timing (second timing) at which the second decorative symbol is displayed are the same. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be later than the second timing.
<Production example C>

FIG. 492 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect centering on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Production example C-1)

The same figure (b)-the figure (f), the 2nd design indicatory territory 208Y in order to execute the fluctuation indication of the 2nd decorative design (the 2nd fluctuation indication) is provided in the 1st image display 2081. It is an example of production when there is.

That is, FIG. 4B to FIG. 4F correspond to the timings shown in FIG. 490(h) to FIG. 490(l), respectively, and in FIG. The second decorative symbol displayed on the two-image display device 2082 is displayed on the second symbol display area 208Y provided on the first image display device 2081.

Specifically, at the timing shown in FIG. 492(b), the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and at the timing shown in FIG. 4(c), the horizontal width of the pseudo symbol is gradually enlarged. Start, the right edge of the "decoration 6" of the left symbol display area 208a and the left edge of the "decoration 7" of the right symbol display area 208a start to overlap the left edge and the right edge of the pseudo continuous symbol, respectively. For example, on the upper left side of the one image display device 2081, only the second symbol display area 208Y (the frame portion indicated by a white square frame in the drawing) for displaying the second decorative symbol starts its display (the first 2 The decorative design is not displayed).

As for the timing shown in FIG. 7D, the width of the pseudo continuous symbol is further enlarged and displayed, and the "decoration 6" in the left symbol display area 208a and the "decoration 7" in the right symbol display area 208a are both pseudo continuous. It is completely overlapped by the symbols, and is not visually recognizable to the player (both the decorative symbols in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208a are hard to see by the player as compared with the pseudo continuous symbol).

In addition, at this timing (at least a part of the state where the first animation display (middle symbol agitation animation) is displayed), in the second symbol display area 208Y, the state shown in FIG. 491(o) The second decorative pattern is displayed. That is, the swinging fluctuation (temporary stop) of the decorative symbol (here "decoration 6") is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k, and the swinging fluctuation (temporary stop) of the decorative symbol (here "decoration 7") is displayed in the right symbol display area 208g. ) It is the second decorative symbol in a state in which the pseudo symbol symbol (here, the symbol of the same character (Hen) as the figure (h)) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208l. That is, before the end of the first animation, the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol in the middle symbol display area 208l is in a state of being in a premature state, and at this timing (or the timing thereafter), the pseudo continuous effect is executed. The confirmation may be recognizable to the player.

At this timing, at least a part of the second decorative symbol or the second symbol display area 208Y overlaps a part of the first animation.

In the timing shown in FIG. 7E, the width of the pseudo-relational pattern of the first decorative pattern is further expanded, and one pseudo-relational pattern has a plurality of image display devices 208′ (first image display device 2081, second image display). It is displayed across the device 2082 and the third image display device 2093). The second decorative symbol (FIG. 491(o)) including the stop display of the pseudo symbol is continuing to be displayed and overlaps the pseudo symbol of the first decorative symbol. Further, the family crest monument 244A starts to rise and overlaps with a part of the first image display device 2081 (overlaps with the first image display device 2081).

At the timing shown in FIG. 6F, the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbol of the first decorative symbol ends, the raised family crest part 244A rotates at the raised position, and the speaker 120 produces a sound effect of "don". It shows the output status. The second decorative symbol (FIG. 491(o)) including the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol is continuing to be displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment (production example), the pseudo continuous pattern of the expanding first decorative pattern first overlaps with the second decorative pattern (overlapped by the second decorative pattern), and then the second image display device. Display starts at 2082.

Even if the player does not notice the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbols in the second symbol display area 208Y shown in FIG. 4D, the operation of the movable body (family crest actor 244A) shown in FIG. It is possible to recognize that the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol and the start of execution of the pseudo continuous effect due to it are confirmed by (the rotation operation in this case) and/or the sound effect from the speaker 120. The other configuration is similar to that of FIG. 490.
(Production example C-2)

FIGS. 492(h) to (l) are diagrams showing another example of effect, and an example of effect in which a part of the first decorative symbol is hidden during execution of the first animation.

FIGS. 492(h) to (l) correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 490(h) to 490(l), respectively.

At the timing shown in FIG. 492 (h), the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X, and at the timing shown in (i), the width of the pseudo symbol is gradually expanded. Start display. At this timing, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol) in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are not displayed. Further, for example, in the upper portion of the second image display device 2082, only the second symbol display area 208Y (the frame portion shown by a white square frame in the figure) for displaying the second decorative symbol starts its display. (The second decorative pattern is hidden).

At the timing shown in FIG. 7(j), the width of the pseudo continuous symbol is further enlarged and displayed, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. This second decorative design is in the state of FIG. 491(o). That is, the swinging fluctuation (temporary stop) of the decorative symbol (here "decoration 6") is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k, and the swinging fluctuation (temporary stop) of the decorative symbol (here "decoration 7") is displayed in the right symbol display area 208g. ) Is displayed, and a pseudo continuous symbol (here, the symbol of the character (lord)) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208l. As a result, before the end of the first animation, the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol in the middle symbol display area 208l is in a state of being in a state of being delayed, and the pseudo continuous effect is executed at this timing (or a timing thereafter). In some cases, the confirmation can be recognized by the player.

In the timing shown in FIG. 9(k), the width of the pseudo continuous symbol of the first decorative symbol is further expanded, and one pseudo continuous symbol has a plurality of image display devices 208′ (first image display device 2081, second image display). It is displayed across the device 2082 and the third image display device 2093). The second decorative symbol (FIG. 491(o)) including the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol is continuing to be displayed. At least a part of the second decorative symbol or the second symbol display area 208Y overlaps with a part of the first animation displayed on the second image display device 2082.

At the timing shown in FIG. 1(l), the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbol of the first decorative symbol ends, the raised family crest 244A rotates at the raised position, and the speaker 120 produces a sound effect "don". It shows the output status. The second decorative symbol including the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol is continuing to be displayed. The other configuration is similar to that of FIG. 490.

Thus, in the present embodiment (production example), the pseudo continuous symbol of the expanding first decorative symbol first starts to be displayed on the second image display device 2082, and then the second decorative symbol (FIG. 491(o)). ) (Overlapped by the second decorative pattern).

In this effect example, the decorative symbols in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208a which are hidden in FIG. 9(i) are at least the second animation (pseudo) shown in FIG. 490(n). Timing (for example, the timing shown in FIG. 490 (m)) prior to the timing before the animation executed in the period until the start of the continuous production (for example, in the state before the non-display (in this example, in the left symbol display area 208a The decoration pattern "decoration 6" is redisplayed in the right pattern display area 208a.

In this way, when the first decorative symbol is hidden during the execution of the first animation, the display of the second decorative symbol allows the player to recognize the state of the decorative symbol. Note that the display start timing of the second decorative symbol is the same as in the case of the effect example of FIG. 490.
(Production example C-3)

FIGS. 492(n) to (o) are diagrams showing another example of the effect, which is an example of the effect in the case of the ten pie (reach) in FIG. 490(d).

FIG. 492(n) corresponds to the timing shown in FIG. 490(d). In FIG. 490(d), the effect of making it look like a tempai (not actually becoming a tempai) is performed, but the timing shown in FIG. 492(n). Shows that it is a tempai.

The timing shown in FIG. 492 (o) shows the state in which the tempai (reach) effect is being executed, and in this example, the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol, for example, in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208a) , "Decoration 6") are respectively enlarged and displayed, and the decoration symbol (for example, "decoration 6") in the middle symbol display area 208b is more than the decoration symbols in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a. An animation that is displayed with poor visibility is running.

Further, by overlapping the left symbol and the right symbol that are displayed in an enlarged manner, the high speed fluctuation of the middle symbol itself is more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the left symbol and the right symbol.

Here, "animation displayed in a state of poor visibility to the player" is an animation in which the visibility is poor compared to the left symbol and the right symbol due to high-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol, or the left symbol or It is an animation that is displayed in a state where the transparency is high compared to the right pattern (the decorative pattern is displayed light).

In this case (in the case of tempai), the second decorative design is not displayed on any of the image display devices 208'. In other words, in the present embodiment, the visibility of the scroll display of the middle symbol is hindered by the animation display of the right symbol and/or the left symbol (a state in which notification of information by the first decorative symbol is hindered). However, the display of the second decorative symbol (the notification of the relevant information) is not performed.

In FIG. 7D, the display of the second decorative design is started, but the pseudo continuous design is overlapped with the second decorative design by the display start timing of the second decorative design and the expansion of the pseudo continuous design. The timing may be at the same time, or the pseudo continuous symbol may be overlapped with the second decorative symbol by the expansion of the pseudo continuous symbol after the second decorative symbol starts to be displayed, or it may be pseudo. After enlarging the continuous symbol, the display may be started so that the second decorative symbol overlaps the pseudo continuous symbol. The same applies to FIG.
<Production example D>

FIG. 493 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

At the timing shown in FIG. 4A, for example, the variable display of the first decorative symbol as shown in FIGS. 490(b) to (c) is executed, and the timing shown in FIG. 493(b) is followed by the left symbol. For example, the decorative pattern of "decoration 6" is displayed in the display area 208a, the decorative pattern of "decoration 7" is shaken (temporarily stopped) in the right symbol display area 208a, and the decorative pattern is rapidly changing in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is shown.

The timing shown in FIG. 4C corresponds to the timing shown in FIG. 490, and is the state in which the first animation has started in the middle symbol display area 208b that was undergoing high-speed fluctuation. In this example, the first animation is an animation with a special symbol (first symbol), but a special symbol (here, a symbol of a character (princess)) different from the pseudo-reproduction is stopped and displayed. It is an animation that fuels how you like (an animation that fuels the middle pattern). For example, when a special symbol (here, a character (princess) symbol) different from the pseudo continuous effect is stopped and displayed, another continuous effect of the same type as the pseudo continuous effect (for example, a mini character MC described later). Continuous production, continuous announcement production, etc.) will be started.

At the timing shown in FIG. 6C, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the animation of scroll display of the middle symbol in which the special symbol of the character (princess) descends from above is executed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 6D, the special symbol of the character (princess) is (temporarily) stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and thereafter, for example, the vertical position is kept unchanged and the rotating animation (second Animation).

As for the timing shown in FIG. 6E, the execution of the continuous effect is decided as the special design of the character (princess) is stopped and displayed in the middle design display area 208b in FIG. It shows a state in which an animation (second animation) (for example, before starting continuous production) is being executed regarding continuous production. Here, the second animation is an animation including an image in which the image of the character (princess) is displayed and the character "chance!"

That is, in this effect example, the display period of the first animation is, for example, until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the same figure (d) (before the symbol of the character (princess) is rotated in the same figure (d)). ) Period.

The timing shown in FIG. 5F is the stop display of the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display area 208X (here, the stop display of the symbol combination of “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7” (fluctuation fluctuation, temporary Stop)) is being executed.

At this timing, a small character (mini character MC) is displayed above the explanation display area TT1. In this example, the mini character MC is a mini character (princess), and this display is a continuous effect (effect display forming at least a part of the continuous effect).

In this example, the special symbol is different from the pseudo continuous symbol, but after the special symbol is stopped and displayed (second animation), the decorative symbol is displayed (stopped display). In the case of being displayed again, in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a, the decorative symbol (“decoration 6”) of the left symbol display area 208a when the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in FIG. 490. ), and the same decorative pattern as the decorative pattern (“decoration 7”) in the right symbol display area 208a is displayed.

In such a case, the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is the same as the decorative symbol ("decoration 7") in the right symbol display area 208a (or the same as the decorative symbol ("decoration 6") in the left symbol display area 208a). The decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed. That is, at this timing, the special symbol (character (princess)) is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative symbol is restarted after the animation (second animation) is displayed, as shown in FIG. For example, a stop display (swing fluctuation, temporary stop) of the decorative pattern of the pattern combination “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed.

In the fourth symbol display device 284, the timing shown in FIG. 9(g) is displayed in gray in both the special figure 1 (square) and the special figure 2 (circular), indicating that it is in the state of stoppage. Showing. Further, in the first symbol display area 208X of the first image display device 2081, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (stopped with the symbol combination of "decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7", which is a falling symbol combination).

As for the timing shown in FIG. 7H, one hold (holding corresponding to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 9G) has been exhausted, and symbol fluctuation in the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) has started. In the fourth symbol display device 284, the special figure 1 (quadrangle) is displayed in white, and the special figure 2 (circle) is displayed in gray to indicate that the variable game of the special figure 1 is being executed. ..

At this timing, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first image display device 2081, the variable display (first variable display) of the fast decorative first decorative symbol is performed.

In addition, as the hold is exhausted, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed in the icon display area 800 by a moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800. It is displayed as a white variation icon h0. Also, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes the hold icon h11 on the left of the variable icon h0, and the white hold icon h11 is displayed on the pedestal on the left of the variable icon h0. Has been notified that the number of the holding is 1.

In the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the special reservation 1 is "1" and the special drawing 2 is "0". The number is displayed.

The mini character (princess) of the information in the explanation display section TT1 continues to display (display continues (carry over) until the next change). Mini character (princess), for example, during the subsequent game, the number (display number) is increased by a special symbol (here, the stop display of the character (princess)) (see (d) in the figure), The greater the number of displays, the higher the expectation of a big hit, and the higher the expectation of the player. That is, the effect of increasing (appearing) the display number of the mini character (princess) can be said to be the same kind of effect as the pseudo continuous effect in terms of continuous effect.

On the other hand, the pseudo continuous effect is a continuous effect within one variation, whereas the effect in which the mini character (princess) of the present embodiment appears is a continuous effect over a plurality of variations (a continuous effect called horizontal movement). In terms of points, it can be said that they are different types of continuous production.

Further, the effect of increasing (appearing) the display number of the mini character (princess) can be referred to as an effect display similar to the meter display in that the increase in the display number increases the expectation of the player. Therefore, instead of the effect of increasing (appearing) the display number of the mini character (princess), a meter display (display in which the meter increases (or decreases)) may be used.
In addition, the number of mini characters (princess) displayed may correspond to the number of continuous effects.

In addition, in this example, the second decorative design is not displayed on the image display device 208 ′ (the tip is not flung).

Further, in this example, the case where the special symbol of the character (princess) rotates in the second animation display has been described, but it may be configured to be enlarged similarly to the pseudo continuous symbol.
<Example E>

FIG. 494 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Production example E-1)

Since the timings shown in FIGS. 4A to 4C are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 493A to 493, description thereof will be omitted.

In the timing shown in FIG. 494(d), in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X, the special symbol of the character (princess) is (temporarily) stopped and displayed, and thereafter, for example, the vertical position is left unchanged. , Running a spinning animation.

At this timing, the second decorative symbol is displayed (stopped) in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082. The second decorative pattern in this case is in the state shown in the right diagram of FIG. Specifically, in the left symbol display area 208j of the second symbol display area 208Y, a numerical decorative symbol (for example, "decoration 6") is shaken (temporarily stopped) and displayed, and in the middle symbol display area 208k, the numerical symbol is decorated. The symbol (for example, “decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed, and the numerical decorative symbol (for example, “decoration 7”) is displayed in a swinging motion (temporary stop) in the right symbol display area 208l.

The timing shown in FIGS. 4(e) to 4(h) is the same as the timing shown in FIGS. 493(e) to 493(h) except that the second decorative design is displayed in the second design display area 208Y. Is.

That is, in the same figure (e), the second animation (animation including the image in which the image of the character (princess) is displayed and the character "chance!!" is displayed) is executed, and the same figure (f) is shown. In the timing shown in, the stop display of the first decorative symbol (here, the stop display of the symbol combination of "decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7" (fluctuation fluctuation, temporary stop)) is executed in the first symbol display area 208X. At the same time, the mini character (princess) is displayed above the description display area TT1. The second decorative design is maintained in the state shown in the right diagram of FIG.

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 4G, both the special figure 1 (square) and the special figure 2 (circular) are displayed in gray in the fourth symbol display device 284 and are in a stopped state. It is shown that. Further, in the first symbol display area 208X of the first image display device 2081, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (stopped with the symbol combination of "decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7", which is a falling symbol combination). The second decorative design is maintained in the state shown in the right diagram of FIG.

In this way, in the same figure (d), the same figure (e), the 2nd decorative design of the combination of the same decorative design as the 1st decorative design which is displayed in the same (f) and (g) the stop indication It is being done, and there is a tipping point.

In this way, in the present embodiment, even if it is a special design other than the pseudo-relational design, the second decorative design causes a flare, but the design displayed as the second decorative design does not include the special design ( (No special pattern is included), the special design is not included, and all the figures are decorative patterns, which results in a tip deviation.

At the timing shown in FIG. 6(h), one hold (holding corresponding to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 6(g)) is exhausted, and in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first image display device 2081, high-speed fluctuation The variable display of the first decorative pattern (first variable display) is performed, and also in the symbol display areas 208j to 208l of the second image display device 2082, the variable display of the second decorative symbol of high speed fluctuation (second fluctuation) Display). The configuration other than this is the same as that of FIG. 493, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

In addition, in this example, the display timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol which starts the display in the same figure (d) and the stop timing (second timing) of the special symbol may be the same. , The first timing may precede the second timing, or the first timing may follow the second timing.

Further, the display timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol to start the display in FIG. 7D and the timing (second timing) of starting rotation of the special symbol may be the same, The first timing may precede the second timing, or the first timing may follow the second timing.

In addition, the start timing (first timing) of the variable display of the second decorative symbol and the start timing (second timing) of the variable display of the first decorative symbol that are started in FIG. The first timing may be before the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.
(Production example E-2)

FIGS. 494(m) to (o) are diagrams showing another example of effect, and an example of effect when another special symbol is displayed.

The timings shown in (m) and (n) of the figure are the same as the timings shown in (a) and (b) of the figure. The timing shown in the same figure (o) is similar to the timing shown in the same figure (c), but in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X, it is different from the special symbol of the character (princess) (separate No.) shows a state in which an animation (first animation) in which special symbols are scroll-displayed is being executed. The special symbol of this example is, for example, a special symbol relating to the high-speed pseudo-relation (for example, a special symbol displayed as "continuation"), and when the special symbol relating to the high-speed pseudo-repetition is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. , High-speed pseudo-reproduction is executed.

The timing shown in the same figure (p), in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area, shows a state in which special symbols related to high speed pseudo-relation are stopped and displayed (sway fluctuation, temporary stop), The timing shown in (q), because the special symbol related to the high speed pseudo-relation is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first decorative symbol (first variable display) is started in the first symbol display area 208X, and the high speed pseudo-repetition is started. Shows the state in which the production of is being executed. Further, in this case, for example, the number of executions of high-speed pseudo-relationship (“second shot” in this example) is displayed above the icon display area 800. In the high-speed pseudo-reproduction, scroll display of a special symbol (for example, a special symbol displayed as “continuation”)→stop display (temporary stop display)→first variation display (revariation display) is high speed, for example, 100. It is repeated once (until the display of the number of executions of high-speed pseudo-repeating becomes "100th shot").

In this effect example, the special symbols may be a mixture of special symbols relating to high-speed pseudo-relation such as pseudo-repetitive symbols (characters (characters)) as shown in FIG. 490 and symbols in other effect modes. ..

In addition, in this effect example, the second decorative design is not displayed and the tip does not come off, but the second decorative design may be displayed. In this case, the display start timing of the second decorative symbol may be any timing of (n) to (p) of the same figure. Further, the second decorative symbol may be displayed in the same figure (q), and in that case, the same stop display as the stop display of the first decorative symbol in the same figure (p) may be displayed, or the same. A display similar to the display in the first symbol display area 208X of FIG. (q) (high-speed pseudo-relation effect) may be performed.

It should be noted that the high-speed pseudo continuous effect may be developed after the normal pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 490, or only one of them may be executed.
<Production example F>

FIG. 495 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect (for example, high-speed pseudo-relation effect) centering on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

The timing shown in the same figure (b) ~ the same figure (c), in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082, the variable display of the second decorative symbol (the second variable display, the same figure (f)). ) Is the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 494(n) to (o) except that the display is performed, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

The timing shown in the same figure (d), in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X, a special symbol related to high speed pseudo-relation (for example, a special symbol displayed as "continuation") is stopped (swing fluctuation). , Temporarily stopped). Then, even at this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082, the variable display (second variable display) of the second decorative symbol continues to be displayed (not stopped and displayed).

The timing shown in the figure (e), because the special symbol relating to the high speed pseudo-relation is stopped and displayed, the variable display (first variable display) of the first decorative symbol is started in the first symbol display area 208X, and the high speed is achieved. The state where the production of the pseudo-relation is being executed is shown. Then, also at this timing, the variable display (second variable display) of the second decorative symbol continues to be displayed (not stopped) in the second symbol display area 208Y. The other configurations are similar to those of FIGS. 494(n) to 494(q).

In this example, in the period of FIGS. 495(b) to (e), the variable display (second variable display) of the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082. continuing. Then, in the period of FIGS. 495(b) to 495(d), the first decorative design and the second decorative design are in different states. In this way, when the high-speed pseudo-reproduction effect is executed (even if a break (temporary stop of special symbols, etc.) is provided during the high-speed pseudo-reproduction effect, the second variable display is continued. You can

In this example, since there is no stop display (temporary stop display) of the second decorative symbol, no tipping occurs. However, if the viewpoint is changed, there is no stop display (temporary stop display) of the second decorative design (the variable display of the second decorative design (the second variable display) continues to be displayed), so that a normal pseudo-sequence is displayed. It may be said that the player may be able to recognize the production or the high-speed pseudo continuous production (for example, an advanced player can recognize it).
<Production example G>

FIG. 496 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and is an effect example when the button effect is executed.
(Production example G-1)

The timing shown in FIG. 4B is the same as in FIG. 490(j), except that the second decorative pattern is displayed in the state of FIG. 491(p). That is, the decorative symbol (here, "decoration 6") is displayed in the left symbol display region 208j of the second symbol display region 208Y, and the decorative symbol (here, "decoration 7") is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display region 208l. , Temporary stop), and in the middle symbol display area 208k, the middle symbols are displayed in a variable manner (high-speed fluctuation).

At the timing shown in FIG. 7C, the pseudo-relational symbols that have been enlarged and displayed in the first symbol display area 208X stop the enlarged display. The display size of the pseudo continuous pattern at this timing is, for example, a display size similar to that of FIG. 6B, and more specifically, the display of the pseudo continuous pattern scrolled (FIG. 490(g), etc.). It is larger than the size and does not exceed the display area of the first image display device 2081 (to the extent that the pseudo continuous symbol is not displayed on the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083).

Then, at this timing, the effect (button effect) relating to the operating means is executed. That is, the animation related to the button effect is displayed on the front surface of the enlarged pseudo continuous symbol (overlaps a part of the pseudo continuous symbol). The animation relating to the button effect includes, for example, a display prompting the user to operate the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) and a display indicating the valid acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136. The display prompting the user to operate the operation means is, for example, an image (button image BG) imitating the chance button 136, the characters “press!” and an arrow display, and a display indicating the valid acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 ( In the elapsed time notification image TG), for example, the entire reception valid period is displayed as a colored (other than white) filled image, and the filled image becomes smaller as the reception valid period elapses (the meter subtracts (decreases)). (Displayed) This is the display that executes the animation. In accordance with this, the chance button 136 lights up the built-in LED in red to notify that the operation is possible.

In this example, the button image BG and the elapsed time notification image TG overlap each other on the front surface of the enlarged pseudo-relational pattern, but the button image BG is displayed on the front surface of the enlarged pseudo-relational pattern. Although the example in which the image BG and the elapsed time notification image TG overlap each other is shown, at least a part of the elapsed time notification image TG in which the meter is subtracted and displayed on the front surface of at least a part of the enlarged pseudo-simulation pattern. It may be configured to partially overlap.

Further, at this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the state of FIG. 491(p) continues for the second decorative symbol, as in FIG.

The timing shown in FIG. 7D shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. In the present embodiment, the animation of the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbols is stopped until the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect, and the chance button 136 is operated within the valid acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136. In this case, the animation of the enlarged display of the pseudo-relational pattern is restarted.

Further, at this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the state of FIG. 491(p) continues for the second decorative symbol, as in FIG.

That is, in the same figure (b)-the figure (d), the state of the 1st decorative design and the 2nd decorative design is different.

The timing shown in FIG. 6E shows a state in which the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbol of the first decorative symbol is restarted by the operation of the chance button 136, and the width is further enlarged. At this timing, the left and right ends of the pseudo continuous symbol are displayed in part of the display areas of the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083, respectively. That is, one pseudo continuous symbol is displayed across (spanning) a plurality of image display devices 208′ (first image display device 2081, second image display device 2082 and third image display device 2093).

Further, in the middle symbol display area 208k of the second symbol display area 208Y by the operation of the chance button 136, as shown in the figure (e) below, the pseudo continuous symbol (character (lord)) is stopped and displayed ("decoration 6- It is (temporarily) stopped and displayed by the symbol combination of "pseudo-relational pattern-decoration 7", whereby it has been noticed that the start of the pseudo-relational effect has been confirmed (not visible in the first symbol display area 208X (difficult to see). ), the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol is notified instead of the first decorative symbol). Then, in the second image display device 2082, the enlarged left end portion of the pseudo continuous symbol overlaps with the second decorative symbol, the meter and the stage name display area, for example, the left end portion of the pseudo continuous symbol is at least the second decorative symbol. Are overlapped with each other (in this example, the left end portion of the pseudo continuous symbol is overlapped with the second decorative symbol, the meter and the stage name display area).

In the third image display device 2083, the enlarged right end portion of the pseudo-relational pattern is overlapped with a part of the display on the third image display device 2083 (in this example, the lord's character on the stage, And, it is overlapped with the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2).

In addition, at this timing, the family crest monument 244A starts rising and overlaps with a part of the first image display device 2081.

At the timing shown in FIG. 6F, the enlarged display of the pseudo-relational pattern of the first decorative pattern ends (the enlargement is stopped at the same size as the pseudo-relational pattern shown in FIG. 6E), and the family crest part raised 244A is rotated at the elevated position, and the speaker 120 outputs the sound effect "don". In the state where the button image is not displayed ((e) and (f) in the figure), the first image display device 2081 and the second image display device 2082 (and the third image display device 2083) are The pseudo continuous design of the first decorative design is displayed. As for the second decorative pattern, the state of FIG.

The configuration other than this is the same as the configuration described with reference to FIGS. 490(k) to 490(n), and thus description will be omitted.

In this example, the button effect is executed during the execution of the first animation (stop-and-animation animation of special symbols, and animation animation of medium symbols). That is, the first animation includes an animation related to the button effect (button effect animation). In this case, the button effect animation is displayed only on the first image display device 2081. The animation of the button effect may be displayed only on the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083), or may be displayed on each of the plurality of image display devices 208′. One button effect animation may be displayed over the image display device 208′.

When the button effect is executed, until the button effect is started (for example, until the animation of the button effect shown in FIG. 7C is started to be displayed), the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 2081. When (enlargement animation) is executed and the button effect starts, the enlarged display of the pseudo-relational pattern is temporarily stopped. Then, when the chance button 136 is operated within the valid period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136, the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbol is restarted.

Further, from the start of the button effect until the chance button 136 is operated, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the middle symbol display area 208k of the second image display device 2082 (the second decorative symbol is shown in FIG. 491(p). State), by operating the chance button 136, the decorative design (in this case, the pseudo continuous design) is stopped and displayed in the middle design display area 208k of the second image display device 2082 (the second decorative design is shown in FIG. 496(e)). (State shown in the figure below), and the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbol is restarted on the first image display device 2081.

That is, when the chance button 136 is operated at the time t1 from the start of the button effect, the second button may be operated earlier than when the chance button 136 is operated after the time t2 (t2>t1) from the start of the button effect. The decorative design can be stopped and displayed, and it is possible to quickly recognize the presence or absence of the execution of the continuous production (here, the pseudo continuous production) (cause the second decorative design to cause tipping).

In this example, after the chance button 136 is operated, the timing (first timing) at which the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the second image display device 2082 and the pseudo continuous symbol on the first image display device 2081. The timing (second timing) at which the enlarged display is restarted may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing. It may be early.

Even when the chance button 136 is operated in the same figure (d), the stop display of the second decorative symbol (middle symbol) is not performed in the same figure (e), and the variable display may be continued.
(Production example G-2)

FIGS. 11H to 11L show the case where the button effect is executed during the execution of the first animation and the operation is not performed within the acceptance valid period of the operation of the chance button 136. The timings shown in FIGS. 3(h) to 3(l) correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 4(b) to 4(f), respectively, and thus redundant description will be omitted. To do.

Even if the button effect is started in (i) of the same figure, as shown in (j) and (k) of the same figure, no operation is performed within the valid acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136. In this case, the stop display of the second decorative symbol (middle symbol) is not performed, and the variable display continues (state of FIG. 491(p)).

The timing shown in (l) of the figure shows a state in which the acceptance valid period of the operation of the chance button 136 has ended. In this case, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed due to the time out, and in this example, the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k (the state shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 496(e)).

Further, since the chance button 136 is not operated and the enlarged display animation of the pseudo continuous symbol on the first image display device 2081 cannot be restarted, at the timing shown in FIG. Cancel the) and the maximum size pseudo continuous pattern is displayed.
(Production example G-3)

In the figures (n) to (r), the button effect is executed during the execution of the first animation, and the operation is performed within the acceptance valid period of the operation of the chance button 136. This is an example of the case where the pseudo continuous symbol of the first decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed, and the timings shown in the same figures (n) to (r) are respectively shown in the same figures (b) to (f). Since it corresponds to the timing shown, redundant description will be omitted.

The timing shown in (p) of the figure shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated. Then, at the timing shown in (q), the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbol of the first decorative symbol ends, and the display size before the enlargement (in the initial state, in the medium symbol display area 208b of the first image display device 2081). The pseudo continuous pattern of (display size) shows a state where scroll display is started. Further, in the second image display device 2082, stop display of the second decorative symbol (swing fluctuation, temporary stop) is executed. The second decorative pattern in this case is in the state shown in the figure (q) lower diagram, and is a (provisional) stop display of the symbol combination of the numerical decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 7"). .. As a result, the fact that the pseudo-relational pattern of the first decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed (the execution of the pseudo-relational production does not start) has come to an end.

At the timing shown in FIG. 5(r), in the first symbol display area 208X, the first decorative symbol (for example, "decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 7") of the same symbol combination as the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (swing). It is fluctuated and temporarily stopped) and notifies that the pseudo continuous effect does not start execution.

In the present embodiment, between the figures (p) to (q), the pseudo continuous symbols in the first symbol display area 208X are shown in the figure (q) from the display size shown in the figure (p). An animation that is reduced to the display size may be executed, or after the chance button 136 is operated in the same figure (p), the enlarged display is resumed and enlarged to a predetermined size (for example, the maximum size). After that, an animation in which the display size is reduced to the display size shown in FIG.

If the pseudo-relational effect is not executed, if the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in (p) of the same figure, the second decorative pattern of numbers (for example, "decoration 6-decoration 8- The decoration pattern of the pattern combination of “decoration 7” is displayed in a stopped state (temporary stop display), and after the animation of the reduced display of the pseudo continuous symbol is executed on the first image display device 2081, the pseudo continuous effect does not start to be executed. Scrolling display of the suggested pseudo-relational pattern is performed ((p) in the same figure).

In addition, in the scroll display of the middle symbol (special symbol) of the first decorative symbol, the scroll display is started without stopping the special symbol at a predetermined position, so that the execution of the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is not started. There is also a configuration in which the special symbol is returned and the special symbol is stopped and displayed (continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) is executed), and the present embodiment can be applied to that configuration as well. In that case, for example, at the timing shown in the same figure (q), in the second symbol display area 208Y, the second decorative symbol including the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol in the middle symbol is stopped and displayed so that the tip is out of focus. Or, at the timing shown in the same figure (r), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol (decoration of the same symbol combination including the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol in the middle symbol as shown in the lower diagram of the same symbol (e)) (Pattern) may be stopped and displayed.
<Example H>

FIG. 497 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, which is an example of the effect performed after the jackpot temporary stop display.

The timing shown in FIG. 2B is a state in which the reach is formed, and in the left symbol display area 208c of the first symbol display area 208X, the decorative symbol (here, "decoration 6") is shaken and fluctuated (temporary stop). ) Is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol (here, “decoration 6”) swings (temporarily stops), and in the medium symbol display area 208b, the medium symbol is rapidly changing.

At the timing shown in FIG. 3C, the middle symbol changes to a low speed fluctuation in the middle symbol display area 208b. In this low-speed fluctuation, for example, when the middle pattern has passed the "decoration 7", the other than the deviation is determined. If the middle symbol stops before "decoration 5" or if the middle symbol stops at "decoration 7", the detachment is determined.

The timing shown in (d) of the figure is a state in which an effect (notice effect) indicating that there is a possibility of developing into a super reach (eg, swordsman reach) has been started. That is, in the first image display device 2081, a reduced display animation in which the left symbol and the right symbol are gradually reduced while temporarily stopped is executed. Also, at a certain timing during the execution of the reduced display animation, the variable display of the second decorative symbol starts to be displayed on the second image display device 2082. Further, in the icon display area 800, a pedestal appears below the variable icon h01.

The timing shown in FIG. 7E is a state in which the reduced display animation of the left symbol and the right symbol is further advanced in the first image display device 2081, while the left symbol and the right symbol are reduced, respectively, and the first image display is performed. An animation is performed in which the display area of the device 2081 moves to the upper left and the upper right so as to be separated from each other. The variable display of the second decorative pattern continues.

The timing shown in (f) of the figure is a state in which a display (notice production) for giving notice that the super reach (for example, swordsman reach) production will start is being executed, and the swordsman's cut is performed on the first image display device 2081. An in-image (here, an image in which the character (swordsman) and the characters "Swordsman see!" are displayed) is displayed.

Further, in the icon display area 800, the pedestal of the variable icon h0, the other reserved icons h11 and h12, and the pedestal of the reserved icons are deleted, and only the variable icon h0 is displayed. The variable display of the second decorative pattern continues.

The timing shown in (g) of the figure shows a state in which the scenes are switched, the confrontation scene between the character (lord) and the character (swordsman) is displayed on the first image display device 2081, and the execution of the super reach production is started. There is.

Further, in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082, as shown in the right figure of FIG. 9(g), in the left symbol display area 208j and the right symbol display area 208l, respectively, decorative symbols (both in this example). "Decoration 6") is temporarily displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the reach effect, the display is started in a state in which the second decorative pattern is variably displayed ((d) of the figure), and after the notice effect of the super reach effect ((f) of the figure) is executed. When the super reach effect is started, a temporary stop of the left symbol and the right symbol of the second decorative symbol is displayed (FIG. (g)).

The timing shown in (h) of the figure shows the state where the special effect (special display EX) is being executed in the second symbol display area 208Y. The special effect is, for example, one of the notice effects that informs that the promotion effect will be executed. The special effect is an effect that is not executed in the first symbol area 208X, and is, for example, a display that reduces the visibility of the second symbol display area 208Y. In this example, on the front surface of the second decorative design shown in the right diagram of FIG. 7G, that is, the display of the characters "CHANGE" (special display EX) so as to overlap these over the design display regions 208j to 208l. )It is carried out. The special effect may or may not be executed, and the ratio of execution (appearance) also varies. That is, the probability that the special effect is executed varies depending on the super reach effect being executed. Another effect having a higher jackpot expectation than a certain effect is configured to have a higher execution probability of the special effect when other conditions are the same. The probability that this special effect is executed (appearance) is 0%, 5%, 10%, 30%, 50%, 70%, 100%, or the like.

The timing shown in (i) of the figure is a state in which the scene immediately after the show is displayed on the first image display device 2081. At this timing, the special display EX in the second symbol display area 208Y is erased, and the second decorative symbol in the state shown in the right diagram of FIG.

At the timing shown in FIG. 11(j), the scene in which the character (lord) wins is displayed on the first image display device 2081, and the decorative symbol (here, “decoration 6”) shakes in the middle symbol display area 208b. It shows a changed (temporary stop) state. Also in the second symbol display area 208Y, as shown in the right figure (j) in the figure, the decorative symbol (here, "decoration 6") swings and fluctuates (temporarily stops) in the middle symbol display region 208k. The second decorative symbol swings (temporarily stops) in the symbol combination (in this example, "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6").

The timing shown in (k) of the figure shows the state in which the button effect has started execution. This button effect is, for example, a jackpot pattern promotion effect, and a large button image BG that makes the first decorative pattern invisible or difficult for the player to see is displayed overlapping the first decorative pattern, and the chance button. A display for prompting the operation of 136 (in this example, the image of the characters “press!” and an arrow) and an elapsed time notification image TG indicating the valid period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 are displayed.

By the display of the button image BG, the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display area 208X is difficult to visually recognize, but the second decorative symbol is the same big hit symbol combination as the first decorative symbol (in this example, the same symbol). (J) A swing variation (temporary stop) is caused by the "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" pattern combination shown in the right diagram, and the player can visually recognize the fluctuation.

When the chance button 136 is operated at this timing (within the acceptance valid period of the operation indicated by the elapsed time notification image TG), the first symbol display area 208X, the second symbol display, as shown in FIG. In any of the areas 208Y, the jackpot pattern combination after promotion (here, the decorative pattern of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" swings (temporarily stops) and becomes visible to the player. If the chance button 136 is not operated and the time expires within the valid reception period of 1., the promotion may be performed and the display shown in FIG.

In this effect example, it is difficult to visually recognize the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display area 208X at the time of executing the button effect shown in FIG. 9(k), and the second decorative symbol is visually recognized by the player in the second symbol display area 208Y. Although it is possible, there is no occurrence of a tip barring in the second decorative pattern (a tip barring of the combination of the decorative patterns after promotion shown in FIG. 1L).

In this way, even in the case of developing into the super reach effect, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y at least at any timing before the development.

The most interesting point for the player is the result of success or failure of the super reach production. Therefore, even if it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the first symbol display area 208X in the super reach effect, it is necessary to inform the player of the state of the decorative symbol by the second decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. The sex is low. Therefore, when the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y during the execution of the super reach effect, the special effect related to the second decorative symbol (for example, the visibility of the second decorative symbol is reduced. Such a production). Further, this special effect is executed with a certain probability (0%, 5%, 10%, 30%, 50%, 70%, 100%, etc.) depending on the situation.

In FIG. 7D, the timing at which the display of the second decorative symbol starts (first timing) and the timing at which the reduced display of the first decorative symbol starts (second timing) are the same timing. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Further, in the same figure (g), the timing at which the left symbol and the right symbol of the second decorative symbol are temporarily stopped (first timing) and the timing at which the super reach effect is started (second timing) are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Further, the timing at which the special effect (special display EX) of the second decorative symbol is started is not limited to the timing in (h) of the figure, and may be any period as long as the super reach effect is being executed.

Further, in the same figure (j), the timing of the temporary stop of the middle symbol of the second decorative symbol (first timing) and the result of success or failure of the super reach effect (in this example, the character (lord) has won) are notified. The display timing (second timing) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing. Good.

Further, in the same figure (l), the timing (first timing) at which the first decorative design after promotion is displayed and the timing (second timing) at which the second decorative design after promotion is displayed are the same. It may be a timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
<Example I>

FIG. 498 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and is another example of the effect performed after the jackpot temporary stop display.

Since the timing shown in FIG. 4B is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 497(j), description thereof will be omitted.

The timing shown in (c) of the figure shows the state in which the button effect has started execution. This button effect is, for example, a payout addition effect, and a display for prompting the user to operate the button image BG and the chance button 136 on the first image display device 281 (in this example, the characters "additional payout, press!"). An image of an arrow) and an elapsed time notification image TG indicating a valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 are displayed.

Further, at this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the jackpot pattern combination after promotion (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" shown in the right figure of FIG. 7C) is temporarily stopped and displayed. Barre is occurring.

That is, as a result of the winning/disapproval determination, the 16R jackpot is actually won, but in FIG. 6B, for example, the symbol combination of 4R jackpot (for example, "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6") is temporarily displayed. In this case, as shown in the figure (c), the payout addition effect is executed, and in the second symbol display area 208Y, the 16R jackpot symbol combination (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is temporarily displayed. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that the 16R jackpot has been won (the first barring due to the second decorative design).

At the timing shown in (d) of the figure, the number of balls added is displayed (the coin addition display TT2) by operating the chance button 136 at the timing shown in (c) of the figure, and It is in a state in which an effect for informing that it has been added is being executed. The payout addition display TT2 is a display of an image of “+600” here, and thereby notifies that 600 balls have been added. The state of the second decorative symbol is the same as the right diagram of FIG.

It should be noted that the player who visually recognizes the payout amount addition display TT2 may be able to predict the number of rounds actually won from the payout amount added number. That is, assuming that the maximum number of balls (prize balls) in the case of 16R big hit is 2400 (=15 balls×10 counts×16R) as an example, as shown in FIG. The number of payout balls obtained by the combination (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) is 600 (=15 balls×10 counts×4R).

In other words, the player who visually recognizes the number of coins added on the coin shown in (d) of this figure actually uses this number (or the addition thereof) (even if the actual number of winning rounds based on the second decorative symbol is unknown). Can predict what R is a big hit. In other words, the display of the number of coins added in this case is a notification about the big hit (a notification about what the actual big hit is the R big hit (the number of rounds actually won)).

In (e) to (i) of the same figure, the button effect (additional coin addition effect) (opportunity button 136 operation by the player) and the additional coin addition amount display TT2 are repeated several times, and the result is shown in FIG. At the timing shown, the pay-out amount display TT2 (in this example, "MAX" is displayed) indicating that the pay-out amount has reached the maximum number is executed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 7(k), the 16R jackpot pattern combination (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first symbol display area 208X, so that the 16R jackpot (output) It is notified that the number of balls (the number of prize balls) is 2,400. In addition, during the period of the same figure (c) ~ the same figure (k), the temporary stop display of the 16R jackpot symbol combination (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") continues in the second symbol display area 208Y. (The tipping of the second decorative pattern continues)

In this example, the maximum number of balls (prize balls) in the case of a 16R big hit (for example, 2400 balls) and the number of balls added in the figures (d), (f) and (h). Depending on the display TT2 (total of), there are cases where the player can recognize that the 16R jackpot has been won at the timing shown in (h) or (j) of FIG. In other words, it can be said that the leading edge deviation is caused by the coin addition amount display TT2 shown in FIG.

In addition, in the same figure (c), the timing (first timing) when the display of the second decorative pattern of the second image display device 2082 starts and the timing (second timing) when the button effect on the first image display device 2081 starts. Timing) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Thus, in the one effect (for example, the big hit symbol promotion effect shown in FIGS. 497(k) to 497(l)) performed after the big hit temporary stop display, before the operation of the chance button 136, the second decorative symbol Although there is no tip burr due to, the other effects among the effects performed after the big hit temporary stop display (for example, the effect such as the payout ball addition effect shown in FIG. 498 or the effect such as the bonus increase number of big hits effect) is the second decorative pattern. The leading edge (FIG. 498(c)) may occur.
<Production example J>

499 (a) ~ (g) is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208' of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern In addition to, it is an example of an effect in which the third decorative pattern is displayed.
(Production example J-1)

499(a) to 499(f) are the same as the effect examples of FIGS. 492(a) to 492(f), except that the third decorative symbol is displayed in the third symbol display area 208Z. Therefore, mainly different points will be described and the other description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 3B, the third decorative design is a decorative design displayed in the third design display area 208Z separately from the first decorative design and the second decorative design, and as an example, an image display device. In any one of 208' (in this example, the first image display device 2081), it is always displayed at least during the variation game of the decorative symbol (timing during execution of variable display or stop display of the decorative symbol). 2 It is a decorative pattern that is displayed even if the decorative pattern is not displayed). Further, the third decorative design, the display size of each design is at least smaller than the display size of each design of the first decorative design, the overall display size of the third decorative design is at least than the entire display size of the first decorative design It is a small decorative pattern (mini decorative pattern). In the following description, when it is described that "the third decorative symbol is always displayed", it means that "the third decorative symbol is always displayed during the period when the decorative symbol is displayed". ..

The third decorative design continues to be displayed during the period of (a) to (g) of the same figure, but during display, as shown in (d) and (e) of the same figure, for example, the third design display area The position of 208Z may be configured to move.

In the timing shown in FIG. 7G, for example, after the timing shown in FIG. 6F, the other movable bodies (Yatsushiro 224B and General 224C) descend from the initial position, and the first image display device 2081. It is in a state where it overlaps with the front of the upper part of. At this timing, a part of the pseudo continuous symbol and a part of the second decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y are covered by the Yatsushiro 224B and the general symbol 224C, and visually recognized by the player. It is difficult (not visible).

In the example shown in FIGS. 499(a) to 499(g), the third image display area 208Z is provided in the first image display device 2081, and shows the state in which it is always displayed during the variation game of the special figure 1. There is. In this example, since the period shown in FIGS. 499(b) to 499(g) is during the variable game of the special figure 1 (timing during the variable display of the decorative pattern), the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative pattern. Even at the timing ((d) to (g) in the figure), it is the timing ((b), (c), (g) in the figure) when the second decorative design is not displayed (difficult to see). Also, the third decorative pattern is always displayed. Even if the special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the third decorative symbol does not have the special symbol, and it is stopped and displayed. There is no.

Further, the third symbol display area 208Z is configured to be movable, and, as shown in (e) to (f) of the figure, for example, a movable body moves to the front of the image display device 208', Even when at least a part of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is difficult to see due to the movable body, the third decorative symbol is always visible to the player by the movement of the third symbol display area 208Z. ..
(Production example J-2)

The figure (n)-the figure (r) is the figure which shows another example of the production which centered on the image display device 208' of the pachinko machine of this execution form in stages, 1st decorative design and 2nd It is another example of production in which the third decorative pattern is displayed in addition to the decorative pattern.

The same figure (n)-the figure (o) is the timing which is similar to the production example of drawing 497 (c)-drawing 497 (d), but the 2nd design is indicated in the upper left of the 1st image display 2081. The region 208Y is provided to display the second decorative symbol, and the third symbol display region 208Z is provided above the description display region TT1 to constantly display the third decorative symbol. That is, it is a configuration in which a plurality of mini decorative designs may be displayed (simultaneously) on one image display device (first image display device 2081). However, the states of the second decorative design and the third decorative design are different.

As for the timing shown in the same figure (n), the right symbol and the left symbol (for example, "decoration 6" respectively) of the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol is changing at high speed (Fig. 497 (g) right). (State of figure). Also, the third decorative pattern is variably displayed.

The timing shown in (o) of the figure is a state in which the reach effect is started, and the reduction movement animation of the first decorative symbol (for example, the right symbol and the left symbol in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped) is being executed. Is. The second decorative pattern continues the state of the right figure of FIG. 497 (g), and the third decorative pattern is variably displayed.

In the same figure (p) and the same figure (q), the first decorative pattern approaches the second decorative pattern due to the reduced movement animation, and the second decorative pattern overlaps with a part of the first decorative pattern to the second decorative pattern. Is a state in which it is difficult for the player to see (not visible). The second decorative pattern continues the state of the right figure of FIG. 497 (g), and the third decorative pattern is variably displayed.

In the same figure (r), after the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern substantially overlap, one (the first decorative pattern in this example) is in a non-display state. The second decorative pattern continues the state of the right figure of FIG. 497 (g), and the third decorative pattern is variably displayed.

In addition, in the production example of the same figure (n)-the same figure (r), while displaying the 2nd decorative design, for example, with the 2nd image display device 2082, in the same figure (p)-(q), the 1st decoration The left symbol and the right symbol of the symbol move to the left and right respectively, the left symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the third image display device 2083. It may be configured to be performed. In this case, the left pattern of the first decorative pattern may be moved in the direction of the second decorative pattern in the second image display device 2082, and may be erased (non-displayed) when overlapping.

In this example, the second decorative design is a decorative design that is displayed only for a certain period due to the establishment of a certain condition, whereas the third decorative design is a decorative design that is always displayed.

It should be noted that, although the respective embodiments (production examples) described in the present specification can be appropriately combined and applied, in the case of being applied in combination with the present embodiment, the second decorative pattern in each embodiment is always displayed. It will not be done.

Further, the third decorative design may have a different design from the first decorative design and the second decorative design, and even in that case, the third decorative design is always displayed.

Further, as shown in (g), (p) and (q) of the same drawing, the second decorative symbol is overlapped by the first decorative symbol and the movable body, which makes it difficult for the player to see (not visible). However, the third decorative design (movable display is possible), even if the first decorative design and the movable body may move, the third decorative design is always displayed.

On the other hand, the third decorative symbol is mainly configured to be visible to the player whose decorative symbol is variably displayed, and it is difficult to specify the symbol as compared with the second decorative symbol. Moreover, since the third decorative pattern does not include a special symbol, it is not configured to notify the player of a combination (state) of decorative symbols as an alternative to the first decorative symbol like the second decorative symbol.
<Production example K>

FIG. 500 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082, the third image display It is an example of effects related to the operation of the device (right sub liquid crystal) 2083.
(Production example K-1)

The same figure (a)-the figure (b) shows one example of production by the 2nd image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082 and the 3rd image display device (right sub liquid crystal) 2083. In this example, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 2081 is provided with a second symbol display area 208Y for displaying a second decorative symbol.

FIG. 4A shows a timing corresponding to the timing shown in FIG. 493B, but the second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082 and the third image display device (right sub liquid crystal) 2083 are background images. Only displayed. At this timing, the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 are in the initial position, are most distant from each other, and the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 overlaps the left end of the main liquid crystal 2081 and is arranged on the left of the main liquid crystal 2081. The right sub liquid crystal 2083 is arranged on the right of the main liquid crystal 2081 so as to overlap the right end portion of the main liquid crystal 2081.

At the timing shown in FIG. 6B, one special symbol (for example, a pseudo continuous symbol) is divided and displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 at the initial position. Further, at this timing, in the main liquid crystal 2081, only the frame portion of the second symbol display area 208Y starts displaying. In this embodiment, the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are moved to predetermined positions, and the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, and execution of the pseudo continuous effect is confirmed.

The timing shown in FIG. 13C is a state in which the second decorative symbol starts to be displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081, and a part of the second decorative symbol is overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082, so that the player cannot see it. In this example, the middle design display area 208k of the second decorative design is not overlapped with the left sub liquid crystal 2082 at the timing shown in FIG. 7C, and the second decorative design is the same as that of FIG. In the state shown in j), the special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k. Therefore, the player who visually recognizes this may be able to recognize the temporary stop of the pseudo-relational pattern (execution of the pseudo-relational effect) (the tip deviation due to the second decorative symbol occurs).

The timing shown in FIG. 7D is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 have started to move (slide) so that they are close to each other in front of the main liquid crystal 2081. By the movement of the left sub liquid crystal 2082, the second decorative pattern of the main liquid crystal 2081 completely overlaps, and the whole is invisible to the player.

The timing shown in FIG. 7E is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are in contact with (adjacent to) the front center of the main liquid crystal 2081 and are stopped. When the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 come into contact with each other, the pseudo continuous image which is divided and displayed on each of the sub-liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 is integrated across the sub-liquid crystals 2082 and 2083. Is displayed in. As a result, the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, and thereafter, the pseudo continuous effect is started to be executed. Further, the first decorative pattern of the main liquid crystal 2081 is overlapped with the two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083, and most of them are invisible to the player.

On the other hand, once, the second decorative pattern, which has been overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082, is exposed from the left side of the left sub liquid crystal 2082, and is again visible to the player. The second decorative design is in the state shown in FIG. 7(j), and similar to the display of the pseudo continuous design of the first decorative design by the two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083, the pseudo continuous design is provisional in the middle design display area 208k. It is stopped.

The timing shown in (f) of the figure is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 have started to move toward the initial position again in the directions in which they are separated from each other. At this timing, the first decorative pattern of the main liquid crystal 2081 overlapped with the two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 becomes visible again to the player. In this example, in the state where the special symbol is continuously displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083, another symbol different from the special symbol (here, "decoration" is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b of the main liquid crystal 2081). 7” is displayed as a temporary stop, and the combination of the first decorative pattern “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (first symbol display area 208X). Has been done. In addition, a pseudo continuous number display (“×2” indicating two times in this example) is displayed.

At this timing, the second decorative pattern of the main liquid crystal 2081 is again overlapped with the left sub liquid crystal 2082.

The timing shown in FIG. 9G is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are moved to the initial positions, and the special symbols displayed on both the sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 are hidden. Further, at this timing, by overlapping the left sub liquid crystal 2082, a part of the second decorative pattern ((j) in the figure) of the main liquid crystal 2081 is invisible to the player.

The timing shown in (h) of the figure shows a state in which the second symbol display area 208Y and the second decorative symbol of the main liquid crystal 2081 are hidden, and the timing shown in (i) of the main liquid crystal 2081 is The variable display of the 1st decorative design (1st variable display) has shown the state restarted.

It should be noted that the display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol and the start timing (second timing) of the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are the same timing in FIG. It may be present, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Further, the non-display timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol and the timing of completion of movement (end of movement) of the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 to the initial position in FIG. The second timing) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

This production example is at least one sub liquid crystal in at least one of the states (state corresponding to stop display of special symbols (pseudo continuous symbols)) informing that continuous production (pseudo continuous production) will be executed. It is configured to move to a position (at least one of the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083).

Then, during at least a part of the time when the sub liquid crystal moves, the second decorative pattern is overlapped by the moving sub liquid crystal.
(Production example K-2)

FIG. 500(m) to FIG. 500(r) show another example of effect by the moving left sub liquid crystal 2082 and right sub liquid crystal 2083. In this example, the second symbol display area 208Y for displaying the second decorative symbol is provided on one of the movable sub liquid crystals (for example, the left sub liquid crystal 2082).

The figures (m) to (r) are the same as the figures (b) to (g), respectively, except that the second symbol display area 208Y and the second decorative symbol are displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082. Since the configuration is the same as that shown, only different parts will be described and duplicate description will be omitted.

That is, similar to (b) to (g) in the figure, the example of this effect is a state of notifying that the continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) will be executed (stop display of the special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol)). In at least one of the corresponding states), at least one sub liquid crystal (at least one of the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083) is configured to move to a position.

At this time, since the second decorative pattern ((j) in the same figure) is displayed on the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 after the timing of (n) in the figure, in the effect example, the second decorative pattern is displayed during the display ( The figures (n) to (r) are not overlapped by other configurations and are always visible to the player.

The second decorative symbol slides in the left and right direction in front of the main liquid crystal 2081 as the left sub liquid crystal 2082 moves.

In this way, the second decorative design that is a substitute for the first decorative design (auxiliary) is always visible to the player during the display, and is displayed in a moving manner, so that the decorative design can be changed or displayed. It is possible to make the player easily recognize the state such as a temporary stop display.

It should be noted that in the production example shown in FIG. 500, an example in which one special symbol is displayed by the two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 has been described, but a plurality of liquid crystals including at least one sub liquid crystal (image display device 208′) can be used. You may make it display one special symbol. For example, the main liquid crystal 2081 and the left sub liquid crystal 2082 may display one special symbol, or the main liquid crystal 2081 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 may display one special symbol, or all the liquid crystal display devices 208. It may be configured to display one special symbol by'.
<Production example L>

FIG. 501 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and for the operation of the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083. It is another related production example.

The second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 may be arranged above and below the first image display device 208, respectively. As an example, the image display device arranged on the upper side of the first image display device 2081 is the second image display device 2082, and the image display device arranged on the lower side is the third image display device 2083.

As an example, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 have a length in the up-down (height) direction shorter than about half the length of the first image display device 2081, and also have a length in the width direction. Slightly shorter. In the initial position, at least the lower end side of the second image display device 2082 overlaps the front side of the upper end side of the first image display device 2081, and the third image display device 2083 has at least the upper end side thereof. The portion overlaps with the front surface side of the lower end side portion of the first image display device 2081.

Then, in this example, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are arranged so that the front of the first image display device 2081 is close to or away from each other along the display surface of the first image display device 2081. It is configured to be movable (sliding movement) in the vertical direction.
(Production example L-1)

First, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 501(a) to 501(c), the second image display device 2082 and the second symbol display area 208Y for displaying the second decorative symbol are provided.

The timing shown in FIG. 3A is a state in which the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first symbol display area 208X is provided in the plurality of image display devices 208′ (in this example, the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082, and the third image display device 2083). The variable display of the first decorative pattern is provided over the three image display devices 208'.

Further, in the case of the stop display (confirmed display), the first decorative pattern may be configured not to straddle the three image display devices 208 ′, or the first decorative pattern displayed on the first image display device 2081. A part of the decorative pattern may be configured to straddle the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083), and among the first decorative patterns displayed on the first image display device 2081. Only the middle pattern may be configured to straddle the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083).

In the first image display device 2081 which is visible to the player from between the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083, the timing shown in FIG. Is a state in which the stop fanning animation and the medium pattern fanning animation) are being executed. Further, the first animation in this case is an animation including the animation of the button effect, and the button image BG on the front of the special pattern (so as to overlap), the image suggesting the operation of the button (here, “press!”). Character and arrow image) and the elapsed time notification image TG are displayed.

At this timing, the first animation is executed in the first image display device 2081, so that the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative symbol. On the other hand, in the second image display device 2082, at this timing, the second decorative symbol in the state shown in FIG. 491(o) starts to be displayed, and the decorative symbol (“decoration 6” in this example) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208j. ), the special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) in the middle symbol display area 208k, the decorative symbol ("decoration 7" in this example) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208l, and execution of continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) is started. Has announced that it has been decided. Note that in FIG. 501, the second decorative symbols are all in the state shown in FIG. 491(o).

In addition, in this example, the first animation is executed only on the first image display device 2081, but a part thereof may be executed on the second image display device 2082 and/or the third image display device 2083.

At the timing shown in FIG. 7C, in response to the operation of the chance button 136, an effect for notifying that a continuous effect (here, pseudo continuous effect) is to be performed (in this example, a long scroll is displayed as " The notice effect) in which the character "Continue" is displayed is executed. Behind the notice production, the temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol is displayed, and the left symbol (“decoration 6”) and the right symbol (“decoration 7”) are visible to the player, The pattern is overlapped with the notice production and is invisible to the player.

This notice effect is displayed across the three image display devices 208'. That is, a part of the notice effect (a part of the scroll in this example) is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, but the second decorative symbol is displayed so as to overlap the notice effect, and the second image is displayed. The decorative pattern is visible to the player. In other words, the first decorative symbol (particularly the medium symbol) of the first image display device 2081 is invisible to the player, but the second decorative symbol causes the decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped (the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed). It is possible for the player to recognize what has been done.

In the present embodiment, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed across the plurality of image display devices 208′, but the special symbol and the button image do not extend across the plurality of image display devices 208′, for example, the first The image is displayed on the single image display device 2081. Here, in the present embodiment, “displayed across a plurality of image display devices 208′” includes “displayed across a plurality of image display devices 208′”. That is, as shown in FIG. 7A, the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082, and the third image display device are in a state where the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are separated from each other. This means that the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed across all of 2083.

Although illustration is omitted, a scroll display of a design (for example, a middle design) having the first decorative design may be displayed across a plurality of image display devices 208′. The configuration for performing the button effect shown in FIG. 496 may be replaced with this embodiment.
(Production example L-2)

The effect examples shown in (d) to (e) of the same figure are examples in which the notice effect is executed by the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083.

At the timing shown in FIG. 7D, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 slide in a direction in which they approach each other, and abut (vertically adjoin) to make the first decorative pattern visible to the player. It is in a disabled state. Even at this timing, the second decorative design makes it possible for the player to recognize the state of temporary stop of the decorative design (that the pseudo continuous design is stopped and displayed).

The timing shown in FIG. 6E is a state in which the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are separated and returned to the initial position. At this timing, the same display as that shown in FIG.
(Production example L-3)
501(g) to 501(h) show another example of effect.

The timing shown in (g) of the same figure corresponds to the timing shown in (c) of the same figure, and continuous production (here, pseudo continuous production) is performed in response to the operation of the chance button 136. It is in a state in which an effect (notifying effect in which the word "CONTINUE" is displayed on the scroll is displayed) is being executed. The notice effect is executed only by the first image display device 2081, and behind that, the temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol is performed, and the left symbol (“decoration 6”) and the right symbol (“decoration 7”) are It is visible to the player, but the middle pattern is overlapped with the notice effect and is not visible to the player.

At this timing, the second decorative design is displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the player recognizes the temporary stop state of the decorative design (the pseudo continuous design is stopped and displayed) by the second decorative design. It is possible.

The timing shown in FIG. 13H is a state in which the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). .. In this case, a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the entire notice effect is visible to the player.

The second decorative pattern also moves relatively downward with the movement of the second image display device 2082, but does not overlap with the notice effect displayed on the two image display device 2082 and is visually recognized by the player. It is possible.
(Production example L-4)

FIG. 501(i) to FIG. 501(j) show other effect examples. In this example, the second decorative pattern is displayed above the first decorative pattern of the first image display device 2081.

The timing shown in (i) of the figure is a state in which the first decorative symbol is displayed on the first image display device 2081 and the notice effect is being executed overlapping with a part of the first decorative symbol. Behind the notice production, the temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol is displayed, and the left symbol (“decoration 6”) and the right symbol (“decoration 7”) are visible to the player, The pattern is overlapped with the notice production and is invisible to the player.

On the other hand, it moves to the first image display device 2081, and the second decorative symbol is displayed above the first decorative symbol so that it can be visually recognized by the player.

The timing shown in FIG. 11J is a state in which the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). .. In this case, a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the notice effect is entirely visible to the player.

On the other hand, the second decorative pattern displayed on the first image display device 2081 is overlapped by the movement of the second image display device 2082, and a part of it is not visible to the player.

(Production example L-5) FIGS. 501(k) to (l) show other production examples. The timing shown in (k) of the same figure is the same as the timing shown in (i) of the same figure, and the second decorative symbol moves to the first image display device 2081 and is displayed above the first decorative symbol. ..

The timing shown in FIG. 1L is a state in which the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). .. In this case, a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the notice effect is entirely visible to the player.

At this timing, the second decorative pattern displayed on the first image display device 2081 moves to the second image display device 2082 and is visible to the player.

The timing of movement of the second decorative symbol may be before overlapping with the second image display device 2082, may be simultaneous with the overlapping, or may be overlapped with the second image display device 2082. May be after.

Thus, in the present embodiment ((a) to (c) in the figure, (d) to (e) in the figure, (g) to (h) in the figure), a plurality of special symbols are provided. Image display devices (here, the first image display device 2081 and the second image display device 2082) respectively, and the other image (here, the image of the notice effect) is displayed only on the front surface of the one special symbol. The notice effect is displayed across a plurality of image display devices 208' by moving the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083).

Further, in the present embodiment ((k) to (l) in the same figure), the image display device (here, the second image display device 2082) moves, and another image display device (here, the first image display device). When it overlaps with the second decorative design displayed in 2081), the second decorative design moves to the second image display device 2082 and maintains a state recognizable to the player. In this case, another display (for example, the first decorative pattern) does not move to the second image display device 2082, but another display (for example, an image of the notice effect) that is overlapped by the movement of the second image display device 2082. Is moved to the second image display device 2082 and is displayed on the second image display device 2082.

Further, as shown in (i) to (j) of the same figure, the second decorative symbol may not move even when the second image display device 2082 is overlapped by the moving second image display device 2082.
<Production example M>

FIG. 502 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Production example M-1)
The same figure (b)-the figure (e) is the example of production during the big hit.

The timing shown in the figure (b) is a state before the big hit game is started, and a combination of big hits (for example, "", as a first decorative design in the first design display area 208X of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 2081. The decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is temporarily stopped and the chance button 136 also has the built-in LED illuminated in rainbow colors. In the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082, the second decorative symbol having the same content as the first decorative symbol is displayed as shown in the lower diagram of FIG.

The timing shown in FIG. 6C is a state during a big hit game (for example, during a round game), and an effect during a big hit is executed in the main liquid crystal 2081 (including the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083). There is. During the big hit game, in principle, the second decorative design is hidden.

The timing shown in FIG. 7D is a state where the big hit game is still in progress, but when an error (for example, lower plate full tank error) occurs, the error is reported. The notification of the error is, for example, an error display E1 on the main liquid crystal 2081 (in this example, the display of the character "please remove the ball"). Further, in this case, for example, on the left sub liquid crystal 2082, a second decorative pattern (a decorative pattern in which a jackpot pattern combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped) is displayed.

The timing shown in (e) of the figure is a state in which the error display E1 on the main liquid crystal 2081 is not displayed due to the elimination of the error. At this timing, the second decorative design is also hidden again.

In this case, in FIG. 7D, the timing at which the second decorative symbol is displayed (first timing) and the timing at which the error display E1 is displayed (second timing) may be the same timing. , The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, and the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Further, in the same figure (e), the timing at which the second decorative symbol is hidden (first timing) and the timing at which the error display E1 is hidden (second timing) may be the same timing. However, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Production example M-2)

Next, (g) to (l) of the same figure are examples of effects in the case of performing an effect using the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol.

In the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081, the same decorative symbol (for example, "decoration 1") on the right symbol and the left symbol is temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol is changing, as shown in FIG. Now, the reach production has started. In this case, for example, in the second symbol display area 208Y of the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, the second decorative symbol of the same symbol combination as the first decorative symbol (the state of (f) in the figure) is displayed.

The timings shown in the figures (h) to (l) are a state in which the countdown display of the middle symbols is being executed in the middle symbol display region 208b of the first symbol display region 208X. On the other hand, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the second decorative symbol continues to be displayed in the state of FIG. 7F (countdown display is not performed). Thus, in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X (not limited to the countdown display), when performing an effect using the middle symbol, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the middle symbol changes. The display may be continued.
(Production example M-3)

Next, (m) to (o) of the same figure are examples of effects in the case of performing a triple line reach effect.

The timing shown in the figure (m) is a state in which the triple line reach effect based on the first decorative design is being executed, and in this case, the second decorative design is not displayed.

The timing shown in (n) of the figure is a state in which the fanning effect of the line (“decoration 7” in this example) having the first decorative pattern is being executed. In this case, as shown in the lower diagram of the same figure (n), the second decorative pattern is displayed in the same pattern combination as the decorative pattern of the line (“decoration 7” in this example).

The timing shown in (o) of the figure is a state in which the fanning effect of another line (“decoration 8” in this example) of the first decorative symbol is being executed. In this case, the second decorative pattern is hidden. Is displayed.

In this example, the second decorative pattern may be displayed during the stir-in effect of a certain line in the ripple line reach, and the second decorative pattern may be hidden in the case of the double line reach.

In addition, in the same figure (n), even if the timing (first timing) at which the second decorative symbol is displayed and the timing (second timing) at which the fanning effect of the first decorative symbol is started are the same, The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Further, in the same figure (o), the timing at which the second decorative design is hidden (first timing) and the timing of starting the fanning effect of the first decorative design (second timing) are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Production example M-4)

503(b) to 503(e) are, for example, effect examples in the case of displaying the second decorative pattern between FIGS. 490(g) to 490(h).

The timing shown in FIG. 4B is similar to the timing shown in FIG. 490(g), and is a state in which scroll display of the middle symbol (special symbol) is being performed on the main liquid crystal 2081.

In the timing shown in FIG. 7C, the first decorative design is temporarily stopped (the stop display of the special design is confirmed) in the main liquid crystal 2081, and the second decorative design is also in the same state as the first decorative design (Fig. 491(o) state). At this timing, on the main liquid crystal 2081, an effect of integrally changing the display mode of a plurality of displays (display group G) in the display area (hereinafter, referred to as "display group integrated effect") is performed. As an example of the display group integrated effect, an effect of integrally enlarging, reducing, inclining, and rotating the display group G (effect of one or a combination of these) and shaking the display group integrally. It is an effect to be displayed (Shake Vision effect) or an animation effect including these scenes. In this example, as shown in FIG. 7C, the display group integrated effect is performed in which the display group G is integrally tilted.

Specifically, a plurality of displays (a plurality of display groups G including a background display) in the display area of the main liquid crystal 2081 are integrally tilted with respect to the outer frame (physical frame) of the main liquid crystal 2081 ( An animation including a scene. In such an integrated display group effect, since a plurality of display groups G including a background display are integrally slightly reduced and inclined, a space is generated in the actual display area, and the space is filled with black or the like. Is displayed.

Then, in this example, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 even while the display group integrated effect is being executed. In this example, the second decorative pattern is not inclined and is displayed in a predetermined area. The display content (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol is the same as the display content (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol displayed in the display group integrated effect, and in this example, "decoration 6-special symbol ( Pseudo continuous pattern)-decoration 7" is a combination of decorative patterns.

The second decorative pattern is displayed so as to overlap the space (black filled display) generated by the inclination of the display group G and at least a part of the inclined display group G. The second decorative pattern may be displayed so as to overlap only in the space (black filled display) created by the tilt of the display group G, or only in the tilted display group G. It may be displayed. In addition, the second decorative pattern may be displayed inclining at the same angle as the display group G.

Due to the display group integrated production, the first decorative symbol may be difficult for the player to visually recognize, but the second decorative symbol may allow the player to recognize the combination (the state) of the decorative symbols (second). It is possible to remove the tip with a decorative pattern).

The timing shown in (d) of the figure is a state in which the display group integrated effect is completed. At this timing, the display group G that is displayed in a tilted state returns to the normal display state, and the second decorative symbol continues to be displayed at the same position. In this example, a part of the first decorative symbol that has returned to the normal display (“decoration 6” on the left symbol) is overlapped with the second decorative symbol. The states of the first decorative design and the second decorative design are the same.

The timing shown in FIG. 4E is similar to the timing shown in FIG. 490(h), and the second decorative symbol is not displayed.

In addition, in the same figure (c), the timing (first timing) when the second decorative symbol is displayed and the timing (second timing) when the display group integrated effect is started may be the same timing. , The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, and the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Production example M-5)

The same figure (g)-the figure (i), for example in special figure 1 fluctuation game and special figure 2 fluctuation game, is the production example when the design of the decorative design changes.

For example, the maximum number of reservations is 8 and the specifications are different between the special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game. For example, the special 1 variable game has a 50% probability change and the 2 variable game has a 100% probability change, or a 16R big hit If the ratio is different), at least a part of the decorative design may be different between the decorative design for performing the variable display of special diagram 1 and the decorative design for performing the variable display of special diagram 2. The present embodiment is a display example of the second decorative pattern in such a case.

Specifically, in this example, the variation game of the special figure 2 has a higher advantage than the variation game of the special figure 1, for example, the special figure 2 is a combination of symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". In the case of and the case of the pattern combination of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3", 16R is a big hit, while the special figure 1 is 16R only in the case of the pattern combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" It will be a big hit.

In addition, the design of the 16R jackpot is different from that of the other design at least in part. For example, the right symbol (“decoration 7”) in FIG. 7G is provided with a mark M indicating that it is a 16R jackpot symbol. That is, in the variable game of special figure 1, the mark M is given only to the "decoration 7" of the decorative pattern, and in the variable game of special figure 2, the mark M is given to the "decoration 3" and "decoration 7" of the decorative pattern. To be done.

The timing shown in the same figure (g), as a result of the variation game of Toku-zu 1, the combination of symbols shifted to the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081 (for example, the symbol combination of "decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 7") It is a state in which the first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed.

Since it is the variation game of the special figure 1, the mark M is given only to the right symbol ("decoration 7") of the first decorative symbol, and the mark M is not imparted to the left symbol ("decoration 3").

At this timing, the suspension of special figure 1 is 2 and the suspension of special figure 2 is 2 (the total of the suspension is 4), and the variation icon h0 is displayed at the right end of the icon display area 800, and the variation icon h0 is displayed. To the left of h0, hold icons h11 and h12 corresponding to the hold of Toku-zu 1 and hold icons h21 and h22 corresponding to the hold of Toku-zu 2 are alternately displayed.

Further, on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the second reserved number display (“22” in this example) of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, on the left sub liquid crystal 2082, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 9G, the second decorative design in the same state as the first decorative design is (provisionally) stopped and displayed.

The timing shown in the same figure (h), the variation game of Toku-zu 1 is stopped, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are out of combination of symbols (for example, a symbol combination of "decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 7"). Are displayed in a stopped state.

The timing shown in (i) of the figure is a state in which one hold of special figure 2 has been digested and the variable game of special figure 2 has started. In the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081, the variable display (first variable display) of the decorative symbol of special figure 2 is started, and the variable icon h0 corresponding to the variation is displayed at the left end in the icon display area 800. , And hold icons h11, h22, and h12 are displayed on the left of them. Further, on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the second reservation number display (“2 1 ”in this example) of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, on the left sub liquid crystal 2082, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 9I, the second decorative symbol of the symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination of “decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 7”) is continuously stopped and displayed. However, since the variable display of the special figure 2 is being executed, the mark M is given to the "decoration 3" of the left symbol and the "decoration 7" of the right symbol of the second decorative symbol. That is, as compared with the state of FIG. 9G, the mark M is added to the "decoration 3" of the left design of the second decorative design).

When the variation game of special figure 1 is changed to the variation game of special figure 2, a mark M is also given to "decoration 3" which is a 16R big hit symbol and the player is notified, but in the first symbol display area 208X, high speed The fluctuation has started, and it is very difficult to recognize the decorative pattern to which the mark M is attached.

Even in such a case, when the second decorative design which is stopped and displayed includes the corresponding decorative design (“decoration 3” in this example), the mark M is given to the decorative design. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player of the 16R jackpot pattern.

In the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, the design switching manner (mark M giving and erasing) and the design switching timing (mark M giving and erasing timing) may be different. Good or the same.
(Production example M-6)

(M) of the figure is another example of the effect of the second decorative symbol, for example, an example of the display during execution of the super reach effect.

In many cases, for example, during the execution of the super reach effect, the player is generally not interested in the symbol combination of the decorative symbols (which symbol is the tempe). In such a case, since it is less necessary to notify the accurate information in the second decorative design, the effect using the second decorative design may be performed.

In this example, it overlaps with the second decorative pattern (the same state as the right diagram in FIG. 497(g)) so that the player cannot easily see the second decorative pattern, for example, as a notice effect, a special display EX (here Then, the effect of displaying "the display of the characters "CHANGE") is executed.

Further, in addition to the second decorative design, another decorative design (third decorative design whose display size is smaller than the first decorative design) may be displayed, which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize (the notice effect is Instead of the second decorative design (which is being executed), the state of the decorative design may be displayed in the third decorative design. In this example, in the third symbol display area 208Z provided in the first image display device 2081, the third decorative symbol (the same as the second decorative symbol overlapping the special display EX) shown in the left diagram of FIG. Status) is displayed.
<Production example N>

FIG. 504 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, in the case where the ball-out display E2 and the second decorative design are displayed. It is a production example.

Note that FIG. 504 illustrates an example of an effect when the ball-out display E2 is performed in the configuration described above, and the description of the configuration described above will be omitted.

Here, the ball-out display E2 is a display that is displayed on the image display device 208' when a lower plate full tank error occurs and notifies the player of the error occurrence, and is one of the error displays. The lower plate full tank error is an error that occurs when the lower plate 128 is full, and when the lower plate full tank state is resolved by operating the ball discharge lever 132, the lower plate full tank error is resolved and the ball removal display E2 is displayed. Is also hidden.
(Production example N-1)

The timings shown in FIGS. 4B and 4C correspond to the timings of FIGS. 490(i) and 490(j), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 8B, at the timing when the horizontal width of the special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) gradually starts to be enlarged, for example, a part of the first decorative symbol of the main liquid crystal 2081 (in this example, the left symbol The ball-out display E2 is displayed so as to overlap with (part of).

On the other hand, at this timing, the pseudo continuous symbol does not overlap the ball-out display E2. Also, the icon display area 800 and the explanation display area TT1 do not overlap the ball-out display E2.

The second symbol display area 208Y is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082, but the display start timing (first timing) and the display start timing of the ball-out display E2 (second timing) are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

As shown in FIG. 6C, when the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbol proceeds, a part of the pseudo continuous symbol is overlapped by the ball-out display E2. Then, at this timing, the second subordinate liquid crystal 2082 displays the second decorative pattern (the state shown in FIG. 491(o)).

The timing (first timing) when the display of the second decorative symbol in the state shown in FIG. 491 (o) is started and the timing (second timing) when a part of the pseudo continuous symbol is overlapped by the ball-out display E2 The same timing may be used, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, and the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Production example N-2)

The timings shown in FIGS. 4E and 4F correspond to the timings of FIGS. 493D and 493F, respectively.

As shown in (e) of the same figure, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the special symbol (character (princess)) is (temporarily) stopped and displayed, and then, at the timing when the rotating animation is executed, for example, A ball-out display E2 is displayed above the display area TT1. In this case, the ball-out display E2 does not overlap any display.

At the timing shown in (f) of the same figure, the mini character (princess), which is a display related to the continuous effect, starts the display and overlaps the ball-out display E2.
(Production example N-3)

The timings shown in FIGS. 4H and 4I correspond to the timings in FIGS. 496D and 496E, respectively.

As shown in (h) of the figure, within the acceptance valid period of the operation of the chance button 136, at the timing when the chance button 136 is operated (or immediately before the operation), the ball-out display E2 is performed below the special symbol. At this timing, the ball-out display E2 does not overlap any display.

The display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol (here, the state shown in FIG. 491(p)) and the display start timing of the ball-out display E2 (second timing) are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Further, at the timing shown in (i) of the figure, the special symbol restarts the enlarged display by operating the chance button 136, and the ball-out display E2 overlaps this enlarged display. The second decorative pattern at this timing is in the state shown in FIG. 491(o). In this case, the display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative design (FIG. 491(o)) and the timing (second timing) at which a part of the pseudo continuous design is overlapped by the ball-out display E2. May be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Production example N-4)

The timings shown in FIGS. 500(k) to 500(m) correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 500(c) to 500(e), respectively.

As shown in (k) of the figure, at the timing when the second decorative symbol (state of FIG. 491 (o)) starts to be displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081, and a part of the second decorative symbol is overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082, The ball-out display E2 is performed below the first decorative symbol (for example, the left symbol). At this timing, the ball-out display E2 does not overlap any display.

Even if the display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative pattern (state shown in FIG. 491(o)) and the display start timing (second timing) of the ball-out display E2 are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Further, at the timing shown in (l) of the same figure, the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are slid so as to be close to each other, and the ball-elimination display E2 is overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082. In this case, at least a part of the ball-out display E2 is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

Further, the timing shown in (m) of the figure is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are in contact (adjacent) and stopped, and in this case as well, the left sub liquid crystal 2082 causes the ball-out display E2. Are overlapped, and at least a part of them becomes difficult for the player to see. It should be noted that, at the timing shown in (m) of the figure and the timing shown in (l) of the figure, at least a different portion of the ball-out display E2 is overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082. That is, at the timing shown in (l) of the same figure, at least the left end of the ball-out display E2 is overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082 (the right end is not overlapped), and at the timing shown in (m) of the same figure, At least the right end of the blank display E2 is overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082 (the left end is not overlapped). The second decorative pattern (FIG. 491(o)) is exposed from the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and is visible to the player.

Further, there may be a timing between the same figure (l) and the same figure (m) where both ends of the ball-out display E2 are not overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and can be visually recognized by the player. ..
(Production example N-5)

The timings shown in (o) and (p) of the figure correspond to the timings of (i) and (j) of FIG. 501, respectively.

As shown in (o) of the figure, in the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082 is displayed at the timing when the first decorative symbol is displayed and part of the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the notice effect. A ball-out display E2 is displayed below. At this timing, the second decorative pattern (the state shown in FIG. 491(o)) is also displayed below the second image display device 2082 (at a substantially symmetrical position with the notice effect (display) sandwiched between the ball-elimination display E2). ..

Even if the display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative pattern (state shown in FIG. 491(o)) and the display start timing (second timing) of the ball-out display E2 are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 7(p), the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps with a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). Is. In this case, a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the notice effect is entirely visible to the player. The second image display device 2082 that has moved overlaps a part of the ball-out display E2, but the overlapped part is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the ball-out display E2 is displayed. As a whole, it becomes visible to the player.

On the other hand, the second decorative pattern (state shown in FIG. 491(o)) displayed on the first image display device 2081 is overlapped by the movement of the second image display device 2082, and a part of it is played by the player. Is not visible.

As described above, in the present production example (production example N), the display example of the ball-out display E2 has been described, but the ball-out display E2 is hidden when the ball-out operation is performed and the lower plate full tank error is resolved. (Erased).

In addition, when the ball-out display E2 is performed, a notification sound may be output from the speaker 120 at the same time.

Further, instead of the ball-out display E2, another error display (for example, a door opening error) may be displayed.

Further, in the effect examples N-1 to N-5, the ball-out display E2 is displayed at different positions, but as an example in which the ball-out display E2 is displayed, the effect examples N-1 to N- The display positions of No. 5 are listed, and the ball-out display E2 is actually displayed at one predetermined place. For example, in the pachinko machine 100 configured to display the ball-out display E2 at the positions shown in (e) and (f) of the figure, when the effects shown in (b) and (c) of the figure are executed, The ball-out display E2 is displayed above the description display area TT1 shown in FIGS.

In this way, by displaying the ball-elimination display E2 in accordance with the second decorative symbol, special symbol, continuous effect (display related to continuous effect, partial display of continuous effect) of the present embodiment, the player is displayed. By focusing on the ball-out display E2, it may be possible to make it easier to recognize the second decorative symbol, the special symbol, the continuous effect, or the like of the present embodiment.

Alternatively, the player can display the ball-excluded display E2 in accordance with the second decorative symbol of the present embodiment, the special symbol, the continuous effect (display related to the continuous effect, a part of the continuous effect), etc. 2 In some cases, it may be possible to make it easier to recognize the ball-out display E2 by paying attention to a decorative design, a special design, a continuous effect, and the like.

Further, by displaying the ball-out display E2, it is possible to erase the ball-out display E2 at an early stage to motivate the user to enjoy the effect display performed on the image display device 208', and eliminate the lower plate full tank error (ball-out removal). It may be possible to prompt the operation of.

Further, by displaying the ball-out display E2, it is possible to focus attention on the important effect display when paying attention to the ball-out display E2, and it may be possible to give an opportunity to perform the ball removal after the effect display is finished. is there.
<Example of image control>

FIG. 505 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of image control relating to the display of the second decorative symbol according to the present embodiment.

9A is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the VRAM 436, and FIG. 9B is a schematic diagram showing the image display device 208' (left sub liquid crystal 2082, main liquid crystal 2081, and right sub liquid crystal 2083). ..

Further, FIGS. 7C and 7D are schematic diagrams for explaining general image control, and FIGS. 8E to 8H are used for a part of the display of the present embodiment. It is a schematic diagram explaining the image control performed.

As shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the VRAM 436 has frame buffers A and B corresponding to the left sub liquid crystal 2082 (B), the main liquid crystal 2081 (A), and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 (C), respectively. C and a work area W (for example, an area for expanding and storing the compressed image data in the ROM 408). Actually, two sets of frame buffers A, B and C are provided (for swapping) in order to switch and display alternately.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 504(g) and (h), when a second decorative pattern having the same symbol combination as the first decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082, for example, it is general. Image control as shown in FIGS. 505(c) and 505(d).

First, as shown in FIG. 505(c), the VDP 434 reads out image data of a decorative pattern (for example, variable display of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 504(g)) stored in the ROM 406, and uses the work area W of the VRAM 436. Then, the image data is decompressed and temporarily stored, and a display image is generated. Then, the display image is expanded in the first set of frame buffers A1 and B1 designated in the drawing area. At this time, for example, the frame buffer A1 is expanded in the same size, and the frame buffer B1 is expanded in a reduced size according to the size of the second decorative pattern.

Then, by swapping the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffers A1 and B1 and the second set of frame buffers A2 and B2, the images stored in the frame buffers A1 and B1 that are not specified in the drawing area are displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 and It is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082.

On the other hand, for example, in effects such as FIGS. 490 (h) to (j), a first decorative pattern (a decorative pattern including an animation display of the middle pattern (first animation display)) and a second decorative pattern (middle) A decorative pattern including a temporary stop display of the pattern) is displayed differently.

In this case, the VDP 434 reads out the image data of the decorative pattern (for example, the first decorative pattern shown in FIG. 490(h)) stored in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. The image data is decompressed and temporarily stored while being used to generate a display image.

Then, as shown in (f) of the same figure, another set of the generated display image is reduced (or in the same size) and generated.

After that, as shown in FIG. 7G, a part of the display image on one side (which becomes the first decorative pattern) is processed (in this case, the image of the middle pattern is enlarged), and the other ( The display image serving as the second decorative pattern is processed as necessary (for example, the image is reduced).

Then, as shown in FIG. 3H, the display image of the processed first decorative pattern and the display image of the second processed decorative pattern (after processing) are designated as the drawing area in the first set of frame buffers A1. , B1 respectively (with the same size), and swapping the drawing area designations of the frame buffers A1 and B1 and the second set of frame buffers A2 and B2. The image stored in B1 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 and the left sub liquid crystal 2082. Thereafter, similar processing is continuously performed in accordance with the progress of the effect (animation).

As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention has the display means (for example, the image display device 208′, the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082, A game table provided with a third image display device 2083), wherein the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a first decoration. It is a variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “first variable display”) of a symbol (for example, a decorative symbol displayed in the first symbol display area 208X (the symbol display areas 208a to 208c)), and the plurality of types of the display. One of the displays is a variable display of a second decorative design (for example, a decorative design displayed in the second design display area 208Y (design display areas 208k to 208g)) (hereinafter referred to as "second variable display"). , And the second decorative pattern (for example, the second decorative pattern at the time of final display, at least one second decorative pattern at the time of final display, in FIG. 490 (m) and FIG. 491 (o), etc. The first decorative design (for example, the first decorative design during finalization display, at least one first decorative design during finalization display, FIG. 490) rather than the decorative design displayed in the middle pattern display area 208k shown). The decorative pattern displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b shown in m) or the like has a larger display size, and in the first variable display, the first animation display (for example, at least one of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c). There is a case where an animation (for example, a stop-inclination animation of a special symbol, a middle symbol incentive animation) that fuels whether or not a special symbol is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) may be displayed, and the first animation display is The game machine is characterized in that the second variable display is displayed in at least a part of the displayed states.

Note that "the first animation display may be displayed in the first variable display" means that "the first animation display is started in the first variable display. Yes. Further, the first variable display and the first animation display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

Further, "the second variable display is displayed in at least a part of the states in which the first animation display is displayed" means "the first animation display is displayed. In at least a part of the states, the second variation display may be displayed in some cases." Further, the second variable display and the first animation display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

According to such a configuration, for example, the content of the first variable display (type of decorative pattern) and the state (presence/absence of confirmation display) are unconfirmed due to the start of the first animation display. , Even if the content or state of the first variable display may be difficult for the player to visually recognize as compared with the first animation or the second variable display, the second variable display causes the first variation In some cases, the player may be able to recognize (guess) the content or state of the display, or the subsequent effect (for example, the effect related to the jackpot expectation level) (the second variable display may allow the player to lose the tip). May be). As a result, it may be possible to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the display of the second decorative symbol may allow the player to be accurately informed of the state of symbol variation.

Further, for advanced players who are accustomed to the game, the result of the effect can be recognized at an early stage by the display of the second decorative symbol (previous barre), and the motivation for the game may be increased in some cases.

Further, the first animation display is one display of the animation display that fuels whether the first symbol is stopped and displayed, and after the end of the first animation display, the first symbol is displayed. It may be stopped and displayed, and the first symbol is the first effect (for example, continuous effect, pseudo continuous effect, continuous notice effect, effect shown in FIGS. 490(p) to 490(r), FIG. 493. (F) ~ symbols such as the effect shown in Figure 493 (h) start of execution (hereinafter, "first effect symbol (for example, special symbol, pseudo symbol, middle symbol of Fig. 490 (h) symbol, Fig. 493 ( (d) middle pattern, FIG. 494(p) middle pattern, etc.)”).

The first symbol may be one of the symbols displayed in the first variable display.

Further, "the first symbol may be stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display" means that "the first symbol is stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display." It may be displayed."

Further, the first animation display and the first symbol stop display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

According to such a configuration, for example, by the start of the first animation display, after the end of the first animation display, the first effect symbol relating to the start of execution of the first effect is stopped and displayed. Whether or not it is undetermined, or even if it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it compared to the first animation or the second variable display, the second variable display causes the first effect symbol to be displayed. In some cases, it is possible to let the player recognize (guess) the first effect (for example, an effect related to the jackpot expectation degree) whether or not it is stopped and displayed (the second variation display allows the player to see the tip). It may be possible). As a result, it may be possible to increase the interest of the player.

Further, for example, while the player's interest is enhanced by performing a continuous effect based on the stop display of the special symbol, there is a case where the state of the symbol variation can be accurately transmitted to the player by the display of the second decorative symbol. ..

Further, for advanced players who are accustomed to the game, the result of the effect can be recognized at an early stage by the display of the second decorative symbol (previous barre), and the motivation for the game may be increased in some cases.

In addition, after the end of the first animation display, the first symbol may not be stopped and displayed, and in the case where the first symbol is stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display, the first symbol Before the end of the animation display of the second symbol in the second variable display (for example, special symbol, pseudo continuous symbol, middle symbol of the second symbol display area 208Y shown in FIG. 490(j), FIG. 491(o) ) In the middle symbol, the middle symbol of the second symbol display area 208Y of FIG. 494 (d) is stopped and displayed, and the second symbol is the first symbol of the first effect symbols. It may be a separate pattern.

The second symbol may be one of the symbols displayed in the second variable display.

Further, "the first symbol may not be stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display" means that "the first symbol is not stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display. It may be done.”

Moreover, "the second symbol is stopped and displayed in the second variable display before the end of the first animation display" means "the second variable display before the end of the first animation display". There may be a case where the second symbol is stopped and displayed in "." Further, the first animation display and the second symbol stop display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

With such a configuration, for example, when the first effect design is stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display, the start of the first animation display causes the first animation display to be stopped. After the end, whether or not the first effect design is stopped and displayed is undetermined, or even if it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it compared with the first animation or the second variable display, The player recognizes whether or not the first effect symbol is stopped and displayed by the second symbol stopped and displayed in the second variable display, and the first effect (for example, an effect related to the jackpot expectation). It may be possible to (guess) (depending on the second design of the second variable display, it may be possible to make a break). As a result, it may be possible to increase the interest of the player.

Further, for example, while the player's interest is enhanced by performing a continuous effect based on the stop display of the special symbol, there is a case where the state of the symbol variation can be accurately transmitted to the player by the display of the second decorative symbol. ..

Further, for advanced players who are accustomed to the game, the result of the effect can be recognized at an early stage by the display of the second decorative symbol (previous barre), and the motivation for the game may be increased.

Further, in the first variable display, a display in which the first symbol is enlarged (for example, a display as shown in FIGS. 490(i) to 490(l)) may be displayed, and the second display may be displayed. In the variable display, there is no case where the display in which the second symbol is enlarged is displayed, and the first animation display may be a display including a display in which the first symbol is enlarged.

Also, after the end of the first animation display, a third symbol (for example, a decorative symbol different from the special symbol displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b of the first symbol display region 208X, a special symbol, FIG. 491(l)) In some cases, a symbol such as "decoration 8" of the middle symbol shown) is stopped and displayed, and when the third symbol is stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display, in the second variable display. Fourth symbol (for example, a decorative symbol different from the special symbol displayed in the middle symbol display region 208k of the second symbol display region 208Y, a symbol such as "decoration 8" of the medium symbol shown in FIG. 491(q)) Is stopped and displayed, the third symbol is one of the symbols different from the first effect symbol, and the fourth symbol is a symbol different from the first effect symbol. It may be a separate pattern from the aforementioned third pattern.

In addition, "the third symbol may be stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display" means that the display that the third symbol is stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display is displayed. , It may be done." Further, the first animation display and the third symbol stop display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

Further, "the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the second variable display" means that "the display in which the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the second variable display may be performed". Is.

Further, one of the plurality of types of display is a display for prompting to discharge the game ball (hereinafter referred to as “ball discharge display (for example, error display E1 shown in FIG. 502(d))”). It is also possible that at least a part of the display of the first animation display displayed in the state where the ball discharge display is displayed overlaps the ball discharge display.

Further, during the display of the first animation display, at least a part of the second variable display may be overlapped by the first animation display.

Further, during the display of the first animation display, at least a part of the display of the first animation display may be overlapped by the second variable display.

Further, during the display of the first animation display, at least a part of the display of the first variable display may be overlapped by the first animation display.

In addition, in the first variable display, a second animation display (for example, animation display before start of continuous effect, animation display shown in FIGS. 490(n) and (o), animation display shown in FIG. 493(e), etc.) ) May be displayed.

Further, a first display unit (for example, a first image display device 2081) and a second display unit (for example, a second image display device 2082) are provided, and the display unit is the first display unit. The first variable display may be displayed on the first display means, and the second variable display may be displayed on the second display means.
Further, the gaming table may be a pachinko machine.
[Tenth Embodiment]

Next, a tenth embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 506 to 521. The tenth embodiment is an example of an effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment, and the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 is the configuration of the ninth embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 477 to 489. The description is omitted because it is the same as The other configurations are the same as those of the ninth embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 490 to 505, and the same reference numerals are used to omit the duplicated description.
<Expectation notification production>

As one of the embodiments of the present invention, an example of an expectation notification effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 506 to 521. It should be noted that each of the embodiments of FIGS. 506 to 521 will be described with reference to an enlarged view in which a part of the configuration is appropriately extracted.

Here, the anticipation notification effect is an effect that notifies the player of the expected big hit expectation of the effect that has occurred or is expected to occur, or an effect that notifies the player that the player should wait (high hit expectation). In the following, among the degree-of-expectation notification effects, an example of the degree-of-expectation rank notification effect and the preliminary degree-of-expectation rank notification effect will be described in particular. The expectation rank notification effect is an effect that classifies the generated effects according to the jackpot expectation level and notifies the classification (rank of the expectation level) (and thereby notifies the effect that the player should wait). The pre-expectation degree rank notification effect refers to an effect that notifies the expected degree rank in advance regarding the generated effect (thus, the effect that the player should wait for is notified in advance).
<Production example a>

FIG. 506 is a diagram showing an example of the expectation notification effect centering on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Production example a-1)

An example of the effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 506(a) to 506(l). The figure (a)-the figure (l) are figures which show an example of an effect in steps.

First, the timing shown in FIG. 506(a) shows a state in which the variation of the decorative design (the first decorative design and the second decorative design) is stopped. In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 2081, the first design is displayed. In the area 208X (symbol display areas 208a to 208c), a combination of symbols that are out of the decorative pattern (first decorative pattern) of "decoration 3-decoration 1-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed.

In addition, a white (default) variable icon h0 is displayed at the right end of the icon display area 800, and four suggestion displays (in this example, the pedestal) are displayed on the left side thereof, and white is displayed on each of the three pedestals. (Default) hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed to inform that the hold of Toku-zu 1 is 3. In addition, a mini character (lord) is displayed above the icon display area 800. In the explanation display area TT1, a tutorial display "Panda is master of lord" is executed.

In the second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 506 to 521, the second decorative symbol is always in the same state as the first decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 (the same symbol combination, the same variable display or stop display state). ), and here, the number “3-1-4” (a combination of numbers indicating a symbol combination that is out of order) is stopped and displayed. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 506 to 521, an example in which such a simple (undecorated) combination of numbers is displayed as the second decorative pattern will be described. However, in the left sub liquid crystal 2082, the first decorative pattern is displayed. The display notifying the same content as the state of the decorative design of the design is referred to as "second decorative design", and the area where the second decorative design is displayed will be described as "second design display area 208Y".

Further, a meter (button image) is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082, but at this timing, all the meters are filled with white, and it is notified that the meter is 0. In the stage name display area, "Castle Town" is displayed, which informs that the current stage is the castle town.

Third image display device (in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the appearance of a lord's character on the stage is shown. At the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the suspension of special figure 1 is "3. , And the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 indicating that the special figure 2 is reserved is “0”.

In the fourth symbol display device 284, both the special figure 1 (quadrangle) and the special figure 2 (circular shape) are displayed in gray, which indicates that they are in a disengaged stop state. The chance buttons 136 and 137 have their built-in LEDs lit in white. The family coat emblem 224 has a built-in LED that emits white light and stands by (stops) at an initial position (below the first image display device 2081 in this example). The Yatsushiro Yakuhin 224B and the Shogun Yakuhin 244C have their built-in LEDs emitting white light, and are waiting (stopped) at an initial position (above the first image display device 2081 in this example). Audio output from the speaker 120 is not performed at this timing.

In the following description, mainly the effects that have changed from the previous effects over time will be mainly described.

As for the timing shown in FIG. 506(b), one hold (holding corresponding to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 5(a)) has been exhausted, and a symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) has started. In the fourth symbol display device 284, the special figure 1 (quadrangle) is displayed in white, and the special figure 2 (circle) is displayed in gray to indicate that the variable game of the special figure 1 is being executed. ..

At this timing, in the first symbol display region 208X (symbol display regions 208a to 208c) of the first image display device 2081, the variable display of the first decorative symbol (first variable display) is performed. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative pattern (the first variable display and the second variable display) is represented by a downward white arrow (the same applies to other examples below).

Further, as the hold is exhausted, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed in the icon display area 800 by moving animations, respectively, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800. And is displayed as a white variation icon h0. In addition, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes the hold icon h11 to the left of the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h13 becomes the hold icon h12, which is the left side of the change icon h0. The white hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed on the two pedestals, respectively, to notify that the hold of special figure 1 is 2.

In the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the special reservation 1 is "2", and the special reservation 2 is "0". The number is displayed. Further, in the lower part of the display area, for example, level display is performed.

At this timing, the character effect display by the mini character (navi character) MC is started. The mini character MC in this example is a mini character (lord). In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 506 to 521, in principle, the mini character (lord) is, for example, performing a particular effect display (such as using the entire screen) such as a big hit effect or a super reach effect. It is almost always displayed at a timing other than the timing (for example, at least the timing during the variable display of the first decorative symbol) and has various roles. In the following description, the mini character (lord) displayed in FIG. 506(a) is referred to as a "normal display (default display) mini character (lord)". In this example, the normally displayed mini character (lord) is a mini character (lord) in a state of standing upright with its back facing, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 521(a).

If the mini character (lord) is not displayed almost all the time, or if the character effect display is performed by the mini character MC (navi character) other than the normally displayed mini character (lord), the character effect display is performed. The mini character MC appears at the timing of execution.

In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 506 to 521, as the character effect display by the mini character (lord), animation display in which the mini character (lord) plays a sub game (mini game) is executed.

The character effect display at the timing of FIG. 11B is an animation display in which the mini character (lord) shoots an arrow at the target and performs a "target hit" sub game. As enlarged and shown in the upper part of FIG. 521(b), a mini character (lord) drawing an arrow is displayed on the left side of the main liquid crystal 2081 (above the icon display area 800), and on the right side of the main liquid crystal 2081 (description). The target is displayed on the display unit TT1). In this example, the target is divided into four, and one of them is displayed in red, for example.

Further, in the explanation display section TT1, "When hitting red..." is displayed to notify that some effect is started according to the result of the sub game.

The timing shown in FIG. 7C is an effect in which the target sub-game is continuously performed (hereinafter referred to as “sub-game effect”). Is being executed, and as shown in the enlarged middle part of FIG. 521(b), the arrow shot by the mini character (lord) is flying toward the target. The arrow (partial display of the sub game effect) emitted by the mini character (lord) overlaps, for example, part of the first decorative symbol during flight. The arrow (display of a part of the sub game effect) released by the mini character (donor) may be overlapped with a part of the first decorative symbol during flight, for example.

When the arrow reaches the target as shown in the same figure (d) and the lower part of FIG. 521 (b), the result of the sub game effect is enlarged like a wipe (or a balloon) as shown in the same figure (e). It is displayed (display of the effect result). In this example, as the effect result display SR, a state in which the arrow hits the red display portion of the target is enlarged and displayed. The effect result display SR (a part of the sub game effect) is displayed (in front of the decorative pattern) in preference to the changing decorative pattern (first decorative pattern), and the changing decorative pattern (this example). Then, it overlaps with a part of the right pattern) (a part of the display of the sub game effect is not overlapped with the changing decorative pattern (first decorative pattern)).

At the timing shown in (f) of the same figure, the mini character (lord) has returned to the normal display (default display) shown in (a) of the figure and the sub game effect has ended. It shows a state in which the expectation rank notification effect is executed.

In the preliminary expectation degree rank notification production, for example, as shown in FIG. 16F, the preliminary expectation degree rank display RP is performed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083. The prior expectation degree rank display RP is a rank of the jackpot expectation degree when the effect is executed (after the effect) for effects that may be performed after the timing at which the effect is displayed (for example, during the next variation game). Is a display for notifying in advance. That is, the prior expectation degree rank notification effect is an effect of performing the prior expectation degree rank display RP as the notice effect.

In this example, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 521(c), the characters “A?” and a red rectangle are displayed as the prior expectation degree rank display RP, and the jackpot expectation rank is “A”. It informs that the effect may be executed. As an example, in a part of the sub-game production, a display (for example, “red” is displayed as a target) may be displayed or may not be displayed at all in relation to the prior expectation rank display RP. Good.

Here, the rank of the jackpot expectation degree will be described. At least some of the effects related to the jackpot (judgment/non-judgment) are divided into a plurality of jackpots depending on the probability (jackpot expectation degree) of being a jackpot after the execution of the jackpot. It is classified into ranks (attributes). In the present embodiment, the rank of the jackpot expectation degree is classified into, for example, “SSS”, “S”, “A”, “B”... In descending order of the jackpot expectation degree. In addition, a plurality of effects may be classified into the same rank. The relationship between the rank of the jackpot expectation and the effect will be described in detail later, but for convenience of the following description, an example will be described. Is displayed), the production for giving a pre-reading notice (the production change for holding) is “S”, the swordsman reach production is “S”, and the holding icon is changed to a red holding icon (“red icon” is displayed. ) The effect of giving a pre-reading notice (red hold change effect) is "A", the hold icon changes to a blue hold icon ("blue icon" is displayed), and the effect of giving a pre-reading notice (blue hold change effect) is It is classified as “B”...

Further, in the following description, the “preliminary expectation degree rank display RP for notifying that there is a possibility that an effect with a jackpot expectation degree rank of “◯” is executed” may be referred to as “preliminary expectation degree ○ display”. is there. For example, "preliminary expectation degree rank display RP that notifies that there is a possibility that a performance of which rank of jackpot expectation degree is "S" is executed" is called "preliminary expectation degree S display", and The “preliminary expectation degree rank display RP” for notifying that the effect with the rank “A” may be executed is referred to as “preliminary expectation degree A display”.

That is, at the timing shown in (f) of the same figure, on the right sub liquid crystal 2083b, the "preliminary expectation A display" for notifying that the effect having the rank "A" for the jackpot expectation may be executed is performed. (FIG. 521(c)).

In addition, in this example, as a result of the target sub-game effect, one prior expectation degree rank display RP (here, “preliminary expectation degree A display”) is performed, but the sub-game effects are the same or different. A plurality of sub-games may be executed, and in this case, a plurality of preliminary expected degree rank displays RP may be performed according to the result of the sub-game effect.

The timing shown in (g) of FIG. 16 is a state in which the decorative symbols of the outlying symbol combination (the symbol combination of “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 8” in this example) are stopped and displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081. The right sub-liquid crystal 2083 continues to display the “preliminary expectation degree A display (preliminary expectation degree rank display RP)”.

As for the timing shown in FIG. 2H, one hold is exhausted, and in the fourth symbol display device 284, the special figure 1 (square) is displayed in white and the special figure 2 (circular) is displayed in gray. 1 shows a state in which the variable game of FIG. 1 is being executed.

At this timing, in the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081, the variable display of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is performed.

In addition, as the hold is exhausted, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed in the icon display area 800 by a moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800. It is displayed as a variable icon h0 and changes to blue to give a pre-reading notice. Further, the hold icon located at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes a hold icon h11 (white) adjacent to the left side of the variable icon h0, and notifies that the hold of FIG. 1 is 1.

Further, in the movable body (for example, the family crest part 224A), the built-in LED changes to emit blue light in synchronization with the blue variation icon h0.

At the upper part of the display area of the right sub-liquid crystal 2083, the special reservation 1 is "1" and the special drawing 2 is "0". Is being done. In addition, the display of "prior expectation A display" continues.

Note that, as described above, the “preliminary expectation A display” is a display for notifying that an effect having the jackpot expectation of “A” rank may be executed, and as the “A” rank effect, For example, there is an effect in which the hold icon changes to red (a "red icon" is displayed) to give a pre-reading notice.

However, at this timing, the hold icon (variation icon h0) corresponding to the consumed hold changes to blue color to give a pre-reading notice (blue hold change effect). The effect (blue pending change effect) in which the hold icon changes to blue (the “blue icon” is displayed) to give advance notice (blue pending change effect) is, for example, an effect in which the jackpot expectation is “B” rank.

In other words, in this example, in spite of the "preliminary expectation A display" being performed, in reality, a jackpot expectation other than "A" rank (for example, a jackpot expectation "B" rank) Is running.

In this way, even when the preliminary expectation rank display RP is performed, the effect corresponding to the rank is not always executed. Then, as shown in (h) of the figure, when the effect of the jackpot expectation different from the prior expectation rank display RP is executed (here, the display of the “blue icon” is executed), the prior expectation rank display is performed. The RP (here, “preliminary expectation A display”) continues its display.

As described above, the prior expectation degree rank display RP of the present embodiment is displayed over a plurality of variable displays (in this respect, it can be said that it is a look-ahead display), but the prior expectation degree rank display RP is displayed only with the fluctuation. It may be displayed, or may be displayed over a plurality of variable displays (pre-read display).

The timing shown in (i) of the figure is a state in which another character effect display is being performed by the mini character MC. This character effect display is an animation for effecting acquisition of the mini item MI. For example, as shown in FIG. 521(e), the mini character (lord) turns around and acquires the mini item MI displayed as "S". It is a production display. The advance expected degree rank is promoted to the “S” rank by the acquisition of the mini item “S”, and the production scheduled to be executed (the production of the rank corresponding to the advance expected degree rank display RP) has the jackpot expected degree rank. There is a possibility to be promoted to the production of "S". That is, the acquisition effect of the mini item MI is also one of the sub game effects.

At the timing shown in FIG. 9J, the “preliminary expectation A display” that has been displayed until then is hidden on the right sub liquid crystal 2083b, and instead, an effect in which the jackpot expectation rank is “S” is executed. “Preliminary expectation S display” is given to notify that there is a possibility that "Preliminary expectation S display" in this example is, as shown in FIG. 521(d), a character display "S?" and a gold rectangular display.

That is, in (f) to (i) of the same figure, "preliminary expectation A display" is performed, and there is a possibility that a big hit expectation "A" is executed (that is, the prior expectation rank is "A"). However, since the mini character (Den) acquired the mini item “S” at the timing of (i) in the figure, the effect of the jackpot expectation “S” is executed. Since it has been promoted to a state in which there is a possibility that it will be changed (that is, the advance expectation rank is promoted to “S”), the advance expectation rank display RP changes from “preliminary expectation A display” to “preliminary advancement” at the timing of FIG. It has been informed that there is a possibility that an effect with a big hit expectation of "S" will be executed.

In this embodiment, the advance expectation rank is promoted by the mini item acquired by the mini character (lord), but a special zone (high accuracy zone) in which the advance expectation rank is easily promoted may be provided. As a result, it is possible to indirectly perform an effect regarding promotion of the jackpot expectation degree, as compared with the case where a special zone in which a pending change easily occurs is provided.

The timing shown in (k) of the figure is a state in which an effect having a jackpot expectation of "S" rank is being executed as informed by "preliminary expectation S display". That is, the variable icon h0 of the icon holding area 800 changes from the blue (circular) icon to the icon of the character (lord) shown in FIG. 521(g) (when the hall holding change effect is executed), and the jackpot expectation degree Is high (S rank).

Further, in association with the change of the change icon h0, the light emitting color of the built-in LED of the movable body (here, the family crest actor 224) is changed from blue to gold.

The timing shown in (l) of the figure is the same as the notification of “preliminary expectation S display” in FIG. It is in a running state.

In the expectation rank notification production, the expectation rank display RN is performed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, for example, as in FIG. The expectation degree rank display RN is a display for notifying the rank of the jackpot expectation degree after the end of the effect for the effect being executed. That is, the degree-of-expectation-rank notification effect is an effect of performing the degree-of-expectation rank display RN as a notice effect.

Further, in the following description, the “expectation degree rank display RN for notifying that the effect having the jackpot expectation degree rank of “◯” has been executed (is being executed)” may be referred to as “expectation degree ○ display”. is there. For example, the “expectation degree rank display RN for notifying that the effect having the big hit expectation degree rank of “S” has been executed (is being executed) is referred to as “expectation degree S display”.

In this example, as the expectation degree rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 521(j), the character “S”, the gold rectangle and the letters “To hold” are displayed, and the jackpot expectation rank is “S”. It is informed that the effect of “” is being executed (“expectation degree S display” is being performed).

The expectation degree rank display RN (“expectation degree S display”) is displayed in the same area as the prior expectation degree rank display RP (“preliminary expectation degree S display” in FIG. That is, instead of “displaying in advance S degree of expectation” (overwriting), “display of expectation degree S” is displayed.

Further, FIG. 1L shows a state in which the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3) based on the function related to the membership service of the player, and the privilege is given. There is. The privilege here is, for example, opening of a song.

The level increases by adding points associated with the game (for example, adding 1 point for each symbol variation, adding 2 points by executing a certain effect, etc.). The effect for which points are added may or may not include the expectation notification effect of this embodiment.

Further, “release of songs” means that, for example, the number of songs that can be viewed during a big hit has increased. At this timing, for example, a music release notification MM (enlarged and shown in FIG. 521(h)) for notifying that the music C has been released is displayed above the “expectation S display” on the right sub liquid crystal 2083. ing.

Note that this membership service may be able to be provisionally started even if the player is not logged in by the unique authentication information, but even if the player cannot start without logging in Good.

As described above, in this example production, a sub-game (for example, a target sub-game production) is performed by a mini character (lord), and a preliminary expectation degree rank notification production is executed according to the result (for example, “preliminary expectation”). Degree A display”), and a sub-game (for example, mini item acquisition production) by a mini character (lord) promotes advancement of the advance expectation rank to “preliminary expectation S display”), and a production with a higher expectation (for example, , The pre-reading announcement effect by the "donor icon", level up by increasing points, song opening).

It should be noted that, in FIGS. 4(k) to (l), the prior expectation degree rank display RP ("preliminary expectation degree S display") instantaneously changes to the expectation degree rank display RN ("expectation degree S display"). As shown in the figure, the switching display from the prior expectation degree rank display RP to the expectation degree rank display RN is an animation display (for example, an animation in which the front and back of the plate-like body are switched and the switching display is performed). May be. Further, when switching from the prior expectation rank display RP to the expectation rank display RN, there may be a period in which both the prior expectation rank display RP and the expectation rank display RN are displayed.

Further, in (l) of the same figure, the display start timing (first timing) of the "expectation S display" and the display start timing (second timing) of the music release notification MM are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing (the same applies in the following embodiments).
(Production example a-2)
506(m) to (o) of FIG. 506 are views showing another example of the production step by step.

The timing shown in (m) of the figure is the same as that of (g) in the figure, and thus the description thereof is omitted. At the timing shown in FIG. 9(n), one hold is exhausted, and in the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081, the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is variably displayed. Further, in the icon display area 800, the hold icons h11 and h12 are respectively moved and displayed by a moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800 and is displayed as a variable icon h0. , Changes to red and gives advance notice. Further, the hold icon located at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes a hold icon h11 (white) adjacent to the left side of the variable icon h0, and notifies that the hold of FIG. 1 is 1.

Incidentally, regarding the other configurations (for example, the state of the fourth symbol display device 284, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, etc.) accompanying the completion of the reservation, the same figure (h ) Is the same as the above), or the number only changes depending on the number of reservations), and therefore the description is omitted (the same applies to the following description).

In addition, in the movable body (for example, the family crest part 224A), the built-in LED is changed to emit red light in synchronization with the red variation icon h0.

Further, at this timing, the display of "preliminary expectation A display" (for example, the character display "A?" shown in FIG. 521(c) and the display of a red rectangle) continues from the timing of FIG. ing.

That is, in this example, the “preliminary expectation A display” is performed from the timing of FIG. 11M, and actually corresponds to the “preliminary expectation A display” at the timing of FIG. An effect (for example, a red-holding change effect whose jackpot expectation is “A” rank) is being executed.

The timing shown in (o) of the figure is the same as the notification of “preliminary expectation A display” in FIG. It is in a running state.

In this example, as the expectation degree rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 521(i), the characters “A”, the red rectangle and the characters “red hold” are displayed, and the jackpot expectation rank is “A”. It is informed that the effect of “” is being executed (“expectation degree A display” is being performed).

In this example, the case where the red hold change effect is executed as the effect of which the jackpot expectation corresponding to the “preliminary expectation A display” is “A” rank is described as an example, but the jackpot expectation is “A”. Other effects may be supported as the rank effect.

For example, if the "hime rescue reach effect" is classified as an effect of the jackpot expectation "A" rank, "the "princess rescue reach effect" was executed after the "preliminary expectation A display" was performed." The state is that "the effect with the jackpot expectation "A" rank has been executed according to the notification of "preliminary expectation A display"", and in that case also, the expectation rank notification effect ("expectation A display") Is done.
(Production example a-3)
506(p) to (r) of FIG. 506 are diagrams showing another example of the production in stages.

The timing shown in (p) of the same figure is the same as that in (j) of the same figure, and therefore its explanation is omitted. At the timing shown in FIG. 9(q), in the state where the “preliminary expectation S display” is being performed, for example, a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect) with a jackpot expectation of “S” rank is executed on the main liquid crystal 2081. Is the state that has started.

The timing shown in (r) of the figure is the same as the notification of “preliminary expectation S display” in FIG. It is in a running state.

That is, in this example, as the expectation degree rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 521(k), the character "S", the gold rectangle and the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed, and the jackpot expectation rank is It is informed that the effect of "S" is being executed ("Expectation level S display" is being performed).

Further, points are added based on the function related to the membership service of the player, the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3), and the privilege is given. The privilege here is, for example, opening of a song (song C).

In addition, in this example, the case where the swordsman reach production is executed as the production of which the jackpot expectation corresponding to the “preliminary expectation S display” is “S” rank is described as an example, but the jackpot expectation is “S”. Other effects may be supported as the effect of the rank.

For example, when the "feature effect" is classified as an effect having the jackpot expectation "S" rank, the state in which "the character effect" is executed after the "preliminary expectation S display" is performed is "As the notification of "preliminary expectation S display", the effect of the jackpot expectation "S" rank was executed", and in that case also, the expectation rank notification effect ("expectation S display") is performed. ..

Conventionally, the notice effect that occurs is informed by a direct expression (for example, an expression such as “Yoshimune is on hold”), but according to the present embodiment, the notice effect is classified and the rank is notified. By doing so, it may be possible to make the player guess the advance notice effect that will occur and enhance the interest of the game.
<Common items in each example>
Items common to the respective examples shown in FIGS. 506 to 521 will be described below.

The prior expectation degree rank and the expectation degree rank (the big hit expectation degree of the effect) described in each example and the effect corresponding thereto (the effect that does not correspond) are a combination for convenience of description, and are limited to the description in the present specification. It is not something that will be done.

For example, a certain effect (effect A) corresponds to only the expectation rank notification effect, but another effect (effect B) may correspond to the prior expectation rank notification effect and the expectation rank notification effect. .. In addition, the preliminary expectation degree rank notification production may be performed in each presentation, or the preliminary expectation degree rank notification presentation may be performed in a specific presentation. In addition, the expected degree rank notification effect may be performed every time, or the expected degree rank notification effect may be performed as a specific effect.

Further, the time from the start of execution of the preliminary expectation rank notification effect to the corresponding effect (first time) is the same as the time from the start of execution of the expectation rank notification effect to the corresponding effect (second time). , The first time may be longer than the second time, and the second time may be longer than the first time.
<Production example b>

FIG. 507 is a diagram showing another example of the expectation notification effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Production example b-1)
507(b) to 507(f) are diagrams showing another example of the production step by step.

The timing shown in (b) of the figure is a state in which the blue-holding change effect by the change icon h0 is executed and the “preliminary expectation A display” is displayed, which is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 506(h). Therefore, the description is omitted.

The timing shown in (c) of the figure shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for effecting acquisition of the mini item MI) by the mini character (lord) is being executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 521(f), the mini character (lord) turns around and acquires the mini item MI displayed as "Up". By the acquisition of the mini item “Up”, the currently executed effect (blue pending change effect in this example) is promoted to an effect with a high jackpot expectation.

At the timing shown in FIG. 7D, the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the red hold change effect of the big hit expectation degree “A”, because the mini item “Up” is acquired in FIG. It has been promoted to.

That is, the variable icon h0 changes to red to give a pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the built-in LED of the family crest monument 224A changes to red light emission.

Further, at this timing, the display of “preliminary expectation A display” (for example, character display “A?” and red rectangle display) continues from the timing of FIG.

That is, in this example, the “preliminary expectation A display” is performed from the timing of FIG. 11B, and actually corresponds to the “prior expectation A display” at the timing of FIG. An effect (for example, a red-holding change effect whose jackpot expectation is “A” rank) is being executed.

The timing shown in (e) of the figure is the same as the notification of “preliminary expectation A display” in FIG. It is in a running state.

In this example, as the expectation degree rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 521(i), the characters “A”, the red rectangle and the characters “red hold” are displayed, and the jackpot expectation rank is “A”. It is informed that the effect of “” is being executed (“expectation degree A display” is being performed).

The timing shown in (f) of the figure is a state in which the "expectation level A display" is hidden after a certain time has elapsed from the start of the display of the "expectation level A display".

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 506(i) to (j), the advance expectation rank display RP is promoted by the effect of acquiring the mini item MI by the mini character (lord). , The mini-item (lord) obtains the mini item MI, and the rank of the jackpot expectation level of the executed effect is promoted.

It should be noted that in FIG. 7F, the expectation degree rank display RN (“expectation degree A display”) is hidden after a certain time has elapsed from the start of the display, but (a plurality of expectation degree rank display RNs are overlapped. The latest expectation rank display RN may continue to be displayed (when displayed).

Also, the time (first time) from the start of execution of the preliminary expectation rank notification effect to the non-display (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN) and from the start of execution of the expectation rank notification effect to the end thereof. The time (until the expected rank display RN is hidden) (second time) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time The time may be longer than the first time.
(Production example b-2)
507(h) to (l) of FIG. 507 are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

The timing shown in (h) of the figure is a state in which the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed and the “preliminary expectation S display” is displayed, and is similar to the timing shown in FIG. 506(j). Therefore, the description is omitted.

The timing shown in (i) of the figure shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for obtaining effect of the mini item MI) by the mini character (lord) is being executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 521(f), the mini character (lord) turns around and acquires the mini item MI displayed as "Up". By the acquisition of the mini item “Up”, the currently executed effect (blue pending change effect in this example) is promoted to an effect with a high jackpot expectation.

At the timing shown in FIG. 7(j), since the mini item “Up” is acquired in FIG. 7(i), the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the big hit expectation degree “S” It has been promoted to.

In other words, the variable icon h0 changes to the hall icon (FIG. 521(g)) to give a pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the family crest cast 224A has its built-in LED change to a golden light emission.

Further, at this timing, the display of "preliminary expectation S display" (for example, character display "S?" and gold rectangular display) continues from the timing of FIG.

That is, in this example, the “preliminary expectation S display” is performed from the timing of FIG. 11H, and actually corresponds to the “prior expectation S display” at the timing of FIG. An effect (for example, a hall holding change effect with a jackpot expectation of "S" rank) is being executed.

The timing shown in (k) of the figure is the same as the notification of “preliminary expectation S display” in FIG. It is in a running state.

In this example, as the expectation rank display RN, the character "S", the gold rectangle and the characters "Holder" are displayed (Fig. 521 (j)), and the big hit expectation rank is "S". Is being executed ("expectation level S display" is being performed).

Further, points are added based on the function related to the membership service of the player, the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3), and the privilege is given. The privilege here is, for example, opening of a song (song C). Further, the right sub liquid crystal 2083 displays the music release notification MM.

The timing shown in (l) of the same figure shows the state after a certain time has elapsed from the start of the display of the “expectation degree S display”. At this timing, the music release notification MM is hidden on the right sub-liquid crystal 2083, but the “expectation level S display” (FIG. 521(j)) is not hidden and the display is continued.

The “expectation degree A display” shown in FIG. 6F is hidden after a lapse of a fixed time (t1) from the display start, but the “expectation degree S display” is at least the display period (t1 of the “expectation degree A display”). ) The display continues for a longer period t2 (t2>t1).

The "expectation S display" is, for example, "expectation" when the next variation game (variable display of the decorative pattern) is started and an effect different from the effect corresponding to the "expectation S display" is executed. When the effect corresponding to the “degree S display” is finished, it is not displayed.

Also, the time (first time) from the start of execution of the preliminary expectation rank notification effect to the non-display (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN) and from the start of execution of the expectation rank notification effect to the end thereof. The time (until the expected rank display RN is hidden) (second time) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time The time may be longer than the first time.

Also, the time from the display start of the prior expectation degree rank display RP (for example, “preliminary expectation degree A display”) having a low jackpot expectation degree to the display end (display switching by the expectation degree rank display RN) (first Time) and the time from the start of display of the prior expectation degree rank display RP (for example, “preliminary expectation degree S display”) having a high jackpot expectation degree to the display end (switching of the display by the expectation degree rank display RN) (No. 2) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, and the second time may be longer than the first time. ..
(Production example b-3)
507(n) to (r) of FIG. 507 are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

At the timing shown in FIG. 6(n), the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is being executed as in the case of FIG. 506(j), but the preliminary expectation rank notification effect is not being executed. ..

The timing shown in (o) of the figure shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for effecting acquisition of the mini item MI) by the mini character (lord) is being executed. In this example, the mini character (lord) turns around and acquires the mini item displayed as "Up" (FIG. 521(f)). By the acquisition of the mini item “Up”, the currently executed effect (blue pending change effect in this example) is promoted to an effect with a high jackpot expectation.

At the timing shown in FIG. 7(p), the blue hold change effect by the variation icon h0 is, for example, the big hit expectation degree “S”, due to the mini item “Up” being acquired in FIG. It has been promoted to. In other words, the variable icon h0 changes to the hall icon (FIG. 521(g)) to give a pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the family crest cast 224A has its built-in LED change to a golden light emission.

The timing shown in (q) of the figure is a state in which the expectation rank notification effect is being executed based on the fact that the effect of the big hit expectation degree of “S” rank has been executed in the figure (p).

In this example, as the expectation degree rank display RN, a character "S", a gold rectangle, and a character "don't hold" are displayed (45(j)), and a big hit expectation rank is "S". Is being executed ("expectation level S display" is being performed).

Further, points are added based on the function related to the membership service of the player, the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3), and the privilege is given. The privilege here is, for example, opening of a song (song C). Further, the right sub liquid crystal 2083 displays the music release notification MM.

The timing shown in (r) of the figure is the same as the timing shown in (l) of the figure, and shows the state after a certain time has elapsed from the start of the display of the “expectation degree S display”. At this timing, the music release notification MM is hidden on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, but the “expectation S display” is not hidden and the display is continued.

The “expectation degree A display” shown in FIG. 6E is hidden after a lapse of a fixed time (t1) from the start of display, but the “expectation degree S display” in FIG. The display continues for at least a period t2 (t2>t1) longer than the display period (t1) of the “expectation degree A display”.

The "expectation S display" is, for example, "expectation" when the next variation game (variable display of the decorative pattern) is started and an effect different from the effect corresponding to the "expectation S display" is executed. When the effect corresponding to the “degree S display” is finished, it is not displayed.

Also, the time (first time) from the start of execution of the preliminary expectation rank notification effect to the non-display (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN) and from the start of execution of the expectation rank notification effect to the end thereof. The time (until the expected rank display RN is hidden) (second time) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time The time may be longer than the first time.

In addition, the time from the start of display of the prior expectation degree rank display RP (for example, “preliminary expectation degree A display”) having a low jackpot expectation rank (display switching by the expectation degree rank display RN) (first Time) and the time from the start of display of the prior expectation degree rank display RP (for example, “preliminary expectation degree S display”) having a high jackpot expectation rank (display switching by the expectation degree rank display RN) (first 2) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, and the second time may be longer than the first time. ..

In this example, the advance expectation rank notification effect is not performed, but in that case as well, the expectation rank notification effect (FIGS. (q) and (r)) is expected when the advance expectation rank notification effect is performed. This is the same as the degree rank notification effect (((k) in the figure, (l) in the figure)) (when the expected degree rank is the same).

It should be noted that the expected degree rank notification effect (for example, the same figure (k) to the same figure (l), and the same figure (q) to the same figure in the case where the prior expectation degree rank notification production is performed and not performed). (R)) may be in different states (when the expectation ranks are the same). As an example, the time (first time) from the display start to the display end of the “expectation degree S display” in the case of performing the prior expectation degree rank notification effect and the “expectation degree in the case where the prior expectation degree rank notification effect is not performed. The time (second time) from the display start to the display end of "S display" is the first time is long, the second time is short (or the first time is short, the second time is long), etc. Is.

In the case of performing the prior expectation degree rank notification effect (for example, in the same figure (b)-the same figure (d), the same figure (h)-the figure (j)), when not performing the prior expectation degree rank notification effect (for example, , (N) to (p) in the same figure, it may be possible to prompt the player to guess the advance notice effect that will occur, and it may be possible to enhance the interest of the game. For example, when the prior expectation degree rank notification effect is not performed, there is no change in the displayed effect, and it is difficult to predict the jackpot expectation degree ((n) in the same figure). In some cases, the game may end.

However, if the big hit expectation can be predicted early by the advance expectation rank notification effect (if it is possible to predict the possibility of a big hit expectation effect), the willingness to continue the game is not lost and the interest of the game is enhanced. May be possible.
<Production example c>

FIG. 508 is a diagram showing another example of the anticipation notification effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Production example c-1)
508(b) to 508(f) are diagrams showing another example of the effect step by step.

The timing shown in (b) of the figure is a state in which the blue-holding change effect by the change icon h0 is executed and the “preliminary expectation A display” is displayed, which is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 506(h). Therefore, the description is omitted.

The timing shown in (c) of the same figure shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for effecting acquisition of the mini item MI) by the mini character (lord) is being executed. In this example, the mini character (lord) turns around and acquires the mini item displayed as "Up" (FIG. 521(f)). By the acquisition of the mini item “Up”, the currently executed effect (blue pending change effect in this example) is promoted to an effect with a high jackpot expectation.

At the timing shown in FIG. 7D, the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the big hit expectation degree “S” due to the mini item “Up” being acquired in FIG. It has been promoted to.

In other words, the variable icon h0 changes to the hall icon (FIG. 521(g)) to give a pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the family crest cast 224A has its built-in LED change to a golden light emission.

At this timing, the display of "preliminary expectation A display" shown in FIG. 521(c) (for example, the character display "A?" and the display of a red rectangle) is continued from the timing of FIG. ing.

That is, in this example, the “preliminary expectation A display” is performed from the timing of FIG. 11B, and actually corresponds to the “prior expectation A display” at the timing of FIG. As effects, effects with different jackpot expectations (ranks) (for example, hall holding change effects with jackpot expectation "S" rank) are executed.

The timing shown in (e) of the figure is based on the fact that the effect of "S" rank in expectation of jackpot is executed as the effect corresponding to "Preliminary expectation A display" in (d) of FIG. It is in a state where performance is being executed.

In this example, as the expectation rank display RN, the character "S", the gold rectangle and the character "Hold on hold" are displayed (Fig. 521 (j)), and the big hit expectation rank is "S". Is being executed ("expectation level S display" is being performed).

Further, as in this example, when the prior expectation degree rank display (“preliminary expectation degree A display”) and the rank of the corresponding jackpot expectation degree (for example, the jackpot expectation degree of “S” rank) do not match Can also be said to be an effect (contradiction effect) in which the rank of the big hit expectation degree of the notification content and the rank of the corresponding big hit expectation degree of the effect conflict. In addition, such a contradiction effect is one of the premium effects (rare effects), and the premium effect is, for example, an effect of which the rank of the jackpot expectation is "SSS" (superior).

Therefore, in this embodiment, a special expectation rank display RNS (special expectation rank display RNS) is performed at the timing of FIG. The special expectation rank display RNS is, as shown in FIG. 521(l), a character display of "SSS", a rainbow color rectangle display, and a character display of "contradiction effect", which are displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083. It

The special expectation rank display RNS (may be referred to as “expectation degree SSS display”) is displayed in parallel with the “expectation degree S display”.

Also, at this timing, points are added based on the function related to the membership service of the player, and the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3), and the state in which the privilege is given Showing. The privilege here is, for example, opening of a song (song C). Further, the right sub liquid crystal 2083 displays the music release notification MM. In this case, the music release notification MM is displayed so as to overlap at least one of the “expectation level SSS display” and the “expectation level S display” (in this example, the music release notification MM is “expected”). However, they may be displayed so as not to overlap with each other.

The timing shown in (f) of the same figure shows the state after a certain time has elapsed from the start of the display of the “expectation level S display” and the “expectation level SSS display”. At this timing, the music release notification MM is hidden on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, while the “expectation level S display (FIG. 521(j))” and the “expectation level SSS display (FIG. 521(l))” are displayed. None are hidden and the display continues.

The "expectation level S display" and the "expectation level SSS display" are, for example, "expectation level S display" (or "expectation level SSS display") when the next variation game (variable display of decorative symbols) is started. When an effect different from the effect corresponding to is executed, when the effect corresponding to the “expectation level S display” (or “expectation level SSS display”) is completed, etc., it is not displayed.

Also, the time (first time) from the start of displaying the prior expectation degree rank display RP to the non-display (the display is switched to the expectation degree rank display RN) and from the start to the end of the display of the expectation degree rank display RN. The time (until the expected rank display RN is hidden) (second time) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time The time may be longer than the first time.

Further, the time (first time) from the display start of the prior expectation rank display RP to the non-display (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN) and the display from the display of the special expectation rank display RNS to the end. Until (the special expectation rank display RNS is hidden) (the second time) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or The time of 2 may be longer than the first time.

Further, in (e) of the figure, the display start timing (first timing) of the “expectation degree SSS display” and the display start timing (second timing) of the “expectation degree S display” are the same. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Further, the display end timing (first timing) of the “expectation degree SSS display” and the display end timing (second timing) of the “expectation degree S display” may be the same, or the first timing. The timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Production example c-2)

Another example of the effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 508 (h) to (i). The figure (h)-the figure (i) is a figure which shows another example of stage effects in steps.

At the timing shown in (h) of the figure, the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed, and the "preliminary expectation S display" is displayed as shown in (d) of FIG. 521. Since the timing is the same as that shown in j), the description is omitted.

The timing shown in (i) of the figure shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for performing the effect acquisition of the mini item) by the mini character (lord) is being executed. In this example, the mini character (lord) turns around and acquires the mini item displayed as "Up" (FIG. 521(f)). By the acquisition of the mini item “Up”, the currently executed effect (blue pending change effect in this example) is promoted to an effect with a high jackpot expectation.

At the timing shown in FIG. 9(j), the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the red hold change effect with the jackpot expectation level “A”, because the mini item “Up” in FIG. It has been promoted to.

That is, the variable icon h0 changes to red to give a pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the built-in LED of the family crest monument 224A changes to red light emission.

Further, at this timing, the display of "preliminary expectation S display" (for example, character display "S?" and gold rectangular display) continues from the timing of FIG.

That is, in this example, "preliminary expectation S display" shown in FIG. 521(d) is performed from the timing of FIG. (i), and actually, "preliminary expectation S display" is performed at the timing of FIG. As an effect corresponding to the “degree S display”, an effect having a different jackpot expectation level (rank) (for example, a red-holding change effect having a jackpot expectation level of “A” rank) is executed.

The timing shown in (k) of the figure is based on the fact that the effect of the jackpot expectation level of "A" is executed as the effect corresponding to the "preliminary expectation S display" in the figure (j). It is in a state where performance is being executed.

In this example, as the expectation degree rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 521(i), the characters “A”, the red rectangle and the letters “red hold” are displayed, and the jackpot expectation rank is “A”. It is informed that the effect of “” is being executed (“expectation degree A display” is being performed).

In other words, in this example as well, a contradictory effect in which the prior expectation degree rank display (“preliminary expectation degree S display”) and the corresponding jackpot expectation degree rank (for example, the jackpot expectation degree “A” rank) do not match Running.

Therefore, at the timing of (k) in the figure, a special expectation rank display RNS (special expectation rank display RNS) is performed. The special expectation rank display RNS is a character display of "SSS", a rainbow color rectangular display, and a character display of "contradiction effect" here, and is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083 (FIG. 521 (l)).

The special expectation rank display RNS (“expectation SSS display”) is displayed in parallel with the “expectation A display”.

Also, at this timing, points are added based on the function related to the membership service of the player, and the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3), and the state in which the privilege is given Showing. The privilege here is, for example, opening of a song (song C). Further, the right sub liquid crystal 2083 displays the music release notification MM. In this case, the music release notification MM is displayed so as to overlap at least one of the “expectation level SSS display” and the “expectation level A display” (in this example, the music release notification MM is “expected”). However, they may be displayed so as not to overlap with each other.

The timing shown in (l) of the same figure shows the state after a certain time has elapsed from the start of displaying the “expectation level A display” and the “expectation level SSS display”. At this timing, in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the music release notification MM and the “expectation degree A display” are hidden, but the “expectation degree SSS display (FIG. 521(l))” is not hidden, The display continues.

In addition, "expectation degree SSS display" is, for example, when the next variation game (variable display of decorative symbols) is started, and when an effect different from the effect corresponding to "expectation degree SSS display" is executed, "expectation" When the effect corresponding to "degree SSS display" is finished, it is not displayed.

Also, the time (first time) from the start of displaying the prior expectation degree rank display RP to the non-display (the display is switched to the expectation degree rank display RN) and from the start to the end of the display of the expectation degree rank display RN. The time (until the expected rank display RN is hidden) (second time) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or the second time The time may be longer than the first time.

Further, the time (first time) from the display start of the prior expectation rank display RP to the non-display (the display is switched to the expectation rank display RN) and the display from the display of the special expectation rank display RNS to the end. Until (the special expectation rank display RNS is hidden) (the second time) may be the same, the first time may be longer than the second time, or The time of 2 may be longer than the first time.

Further, in (l) of the figure, the display start timing (first timing) of the “expectation level SSS display” and the display start timing (second timing) of the “expectation level A display” are the same. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Further, in FIG. 1(l), the display end timing (first timing) of the music release notification MM and the display end timing (second timing) of the "expectation degree A display" may be the same. However, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 508, for example, a plurality of expectation rank displays RN are displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083. In this way, when a plurality of expected degree rank displays RN are displayed and the contents are the same, one expected degree rank display RN and the number thereof (for example, “×2”, “×3”). Or the like, or may be displayed so as to overlap a part or all of the respective expected degree rank displays RN (the same applies to the music release notification MM).

Further, when a plurality of expectation level rank displays RN are displayed in an overlapping manner, they are hidden (or difficult to be visually recognized) (overlapped) by the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 or the like). The degree rank display RN may be displayed (re-displayed) on the foreground. Alternatively, in a configuration in which a plurality of expected degree rank displays RN are displayed, but only the latest one expected degree rank display RN can be displayed, the previous expected degree rank display RN is redisplayed by button operation. Good.

In addition, the button may not be displayed again, and only the latest expectation rank display RN may be visible to the player.

The configuration (display example and re-display example) in which a plurality of expectation rank displays RN are displayed is the same in other embodiments.

In the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 506 to 521, the respective examples can be applied in combination with each other, and the same as the main effect example C shown in FIG. 508. However, in the present embodiment, only the configuration of the main effect example C is provided. The configuration may not be included.

In addition, in the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 506 to 521, a configuration that does not include the configuration of only one other effect example may be adopted.
<Production example d>

FIG. 509 is a diagram showing an example of the expectation notification production centering on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Production example d-1)

Another example of the effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 509(b) to 509(f). The figure (b)-the figure (f) is a figure which shows another example of stage production in steps.

At the timing shown in FIG. 50B, the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed and the “preliminary expectation A display” shown in FIG. 521(c) is displayed, and FIG. 506(h). Since the timing is the same as that shown in, the description will be omitted.

The timing shown in (c) of the same figure shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for effecting acquisition of the mini item MI) by the mini character (lord) is being executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 521(f), the mini character (lord) turns around and acquires the mini item displayed as "Up". By the acquisition of the mini item “Up”, the currently executed effect (blue pending change effect in this example) is promoted to an effect with a high jackpot expectation.

At the timing shown in FIG. 7D, the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the big hit expectation degree “S” due to the mini item “Up” being acquired in FIG. It has been promoted to.

In other words, the variable icon h0 changes to the hall icon (FIG. 521(g)) to give a pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the family crest cast 224A has its built-in LED change to a golden light emission.

At this timing, the display of "preliminary expectation A display" shown in FIG. 521(c) (for example, the character display "A?" and the display of a red rectangle) is continued from the timing of FIG. ing.

That is, in this example, the “preliminary expectation A display” is performed from the timing of FIG. 11B, and actually corresponds to the “prior expectation A display” at the timing of FIG. An effect with a jackpot expectation level (rank) different from the effect (for example, a hall holding change effect with a jackpot expectation level of “S”) is being executed.

The timing shown in (e) of the figure is a state in which the expectation rank notification effect is executed based on the execution of the jackpot expectation degree of "S" rank being executed.

In this example, as the expectation degree rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 521(j), the character “S”, the gold rectangle and the letters “To hold” are displayed, and the rank of the jackpot expectation degree is “S”. Is informed that the effect is being executed (the “expectation S display” is being performed).

In addition, at this timing, since the effect of the jackpot expectation “A” rank corresponding to the prior expectation degree rank display (“preliminary expectation degree A display”) is not executed, “preliminary expectation degree A display” is displayed (Fig. 521(c)) also continues.

Also, at this timing, points are added based on the function related to the membership service of the player, and the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3), and the state in which the privilege is given Showing. The privilege here is, for example, opening of a song (song C). Further, the right sub liquid crystal 2083 displays a music release notification MM (FIG. 521(h)).

That is, on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, "preliminary expectation A display", "expectation S display", and song release notification MM are displayed. The song release notification MM includes "preliminary expectation A display" and "expectation S display. Is displayed so as to overlap with at least one of them (in this example, the music release notification MM overlaps with the “expectation S display”), but is displayed so as not to overlap with any of them. May be done.

The timing shown in (f) of the same figure shows the state after a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of display of the “preliminary expectation A display (FIG. 521(c))” and the “expectation S display (FIG. 521(j))”. ing. At this timing, the song opening notification MM is hidden on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, but neither the “preliminary expectation A display” nor the “expectation S display” is not hidden and the display continues. There is.

The "expectation S display" is different from the effect corresponding to the "expectation S display" (or "expectation SSS display"), for example, when the next variable game (variable display of decorative symbols) starts. When the effect is executed, when the effect corresponding to the “expectation level S display” (or the “expectation level SSS display”) ends, it is not displayed.

In addition, the “preliminary expectation A display” is a display that continues because the corresponding effect (effect with jackpot expectation “A” rank) is not executed at this timing, and the corresponding effect ( It is hidden by the execution of the big hit expectation degree "A" rank production).

Further, the display end timing (first timing) of the “expectation degree S display” and the display end timing (second timing) of the “preliminary expectation A display” may be the same, or the first May be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Production example d-2)
Another example of the effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 509(h) to (l).
The figure (h)-the figure (l) is a figure which shows another example of stage production in steps.

The timing shown in (h) of the figure is a state in which the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed and the “preliminary expectation S display (FIG. 521(d))” is displayed, and FIG. 506(j). Since the timing is the same as that shown in, the description will be omitted.

The timing shown in (i) of the figure shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for obtaining effect of the mini item MI) by the mini character (lord) is being executed. In this example, the mini character (lord) turns around and acquires the mini item displayed as "Up". By the acquisition of the mini item “Up”, the currently executed effect (blue pending change effect in this example) is promoted to an effect with a high jackpot expectation.

At the timing shown in FIG. 9(j), the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the red hold change effect with the jackpot expectation level “A”, because the mini item “Up” in FIG. It has been promoted to.

That is, the variable icon h0 changes to red to give a pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the built-in LED of the family crest monument 224A changes to red light emission.

Further, at this timing, the display of "preliminary expectation S display" (for example, the character display "S?" shown in FIG. 521(d) and the display of a gold rectangle) is continued from the timing of FIG. ing.

That is, in this example, the “preliminary expectation S display” is performed from the timing of FIG. 11H, and actually corresponds to the “prior expectation S display” at the timing of FIG. An effect with a jackpot expectation level (rank) different from the effect (for example, a red hold change effect with a jackpot expectation level of “A” rank) is executed.

The timing shown in (k) of the figure is a state in which the expectation rank notification effect is executed based on the execution of the jackpot expectation degree of "A" rank.

In this example, as the expectation degree rank display RN, the characters “A”, the red rectangle and the letters “red hold” shown in FIG. 521(i) are displayed, and the jackpot expectation rank is “A”. It is informed that the effect is being executed ("Expectation level A display" is being performed).

In addition, at this timing, since the effect of the jackpot expectation “S” rank corresponding to the prior expectation degree rank display (“preliminary expectation degree S display”) is not executed, the “preliminary expectation degree S display” is displayed (Fig. 521(d)) is also continuing.

The timing shown in (l) of the same figure shows the state after a certain time has elapsed from the start of displaying the “preliminary expectation S display” and the “expectation A display”. At this timing, on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the “expectation degree A display” is hidden, while the “preliminary expectation degree S display” continues to be displayed.

Note that the “preliminary expectation S display” is a display that continues because the corresponding effect (effect with the jackpot expectation “S” rank) is not executed at this timing, and the corresponding effect ( It is hidden by the execution of the jackpot expectation of "S" rank).

Further, in (l) of the same figure, the display end timing (first timing) of the “expectation degree A display” and the display end timing (second timing) of the “preliminary expectation degree S display” are the same. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

In addition, in the present embodiment (drafting example d), the configuration in which the plurality of prior expectation rank display RPs or the expectation rank display RNs are displayed without overlapping is described. A configuration in which a part of the degree rank display RN is overlapped and displayed may be used.

In addition, in the present embodiment (drafting example d), the configuration in which the plurality of prior expectation degree rank displays RP or the expectation degree rank displays RN are displayed vertically (in a vertical arrangement) has been described. The configuration may be such that the RP or the expectation rank display RN is displayed on the left and right (side by side).

In addition, in the present embodiment (production example d), the case where the ranks of the expectation degree rank display RN and the prior expectation degree rank display RP are different has been described as an example, but the same is true even when both ranks are the same.
<Production example e>

FIG. 510 is a diagram showing another example of the expectation notification effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Production example e-1)
FIGS. 510(b) to 510(h) are diagrams showing another example of the effect step by step.

The timing shown in (b) of the figure is a state in which the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is executed and the “preliminary expectation A display (FIG. 521(c))” is displayed, and FIG. 506(h). Since the timing is the same as that shown in, the description will be omitted.

In the same figure (d), at a certain timing, as shown in FIGS. 506(b) to 506(e), a sub-game effect by a mini character (lord) (for example, the target hit “shown in FIG. 521(b)”). "Sub game effect" and the like) are executed, and as a result, "preliminary expectation degree S display (Fig. 521(d))" is added to "preliminary expectation degree A display (Fig. 521(c))" on the right sub liquid crystal 2083. Is displayed. In this case, the “preliminary expectation A display” that was displayed earlier is displayed in the lower row, and the “preliminary expectation S display” that is displayed later is displayed in the upper row in a vertical arrangement.

The timing shown in (e) of the figure shows a state in which the character effect display (animation for effecting acquisition of the mini item MI) by the mini character (lord) is being executed. In this example, the mini character (lord) turns around and acquires the mini item displayed as “Up” ((FIG. 521 (f)). The production currently being executed by acquisition of the mini item “Up” (in this example, , Blue hold change effect) is promoted to an effect with high expectation for a big hit.

At the timing shown in FIG. 6F, the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the red hold change effect of the jackpot expectation level “A” because the mini item “Up” is acquired in FIG. It has been promoted to.

That is, the variable icon h0 changes to red to give a pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the built-in LED of the family crest monument 224A changes to red light emission.

Further, at this timing, the "preliminary expectation S display" and the "preliminary expectation A display" are continuously displayed from the timing of FIG. 5D (FIGS. 521 (d) and (c)).

That is, in this example, the “preliminary expectation A display” is performed from the timing of FIG. 11B, and actually corresponds to the “preliminary expectation A display” at the timing of FIG. A big hit expectation degree (rank) effect (for example, a red pending change effect having a big hit expectation degree of "A" rank) is being executed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 7G, the expectation rank notification effect is executed (the “expectation degree A display” is performed) based on the execution of the jackpot expectation degree “A” rank. It is in a state. In this case, the “expectation degree A display” is switched (replaced) to the “preliminary expectation A display” and displayed.

In addition, at this timing, since the effect of the jackpot expectation “S” rank corresponding to the prior expectation degree rank display (“preliminary expectation degree S display”) is not executed, the “preliminary expectation degree S display” is also displayed. doing.

The timing shown in (h) of the figure shows a state after a certain time has elapsed from the start of the display of the “expectation degree A display”. At this timing, on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the “expectation degree A display” is hidden, while the “preliminary expectation degree S display” continues to be displayed.

At this timing, the “preliminary expectation S display” display is moved to the area where the “expectation A display” was displayed because the “expectation A display” displayed in the lower row is hidden. It is displayed by sliding.

Note that the “preliminary expectation S display” is a display that continues because the corresponding effect (effect with the jackpot expectation “S” rank) is not executed at this timing, and the corresponding effect ( It is hidden by the execution of the jackpot expectation of "S" rank).

In this way, the preliminary expectation degree rank display RP starts displaying at different timings, and simultaneously a plurality of preliminary expectation degree rank display RPs (here, “preliminary expectation degree S display” and “preliminary expectation degree S display”) are displayed. In this case, the one prior expectation degree rank display RP displayed earlier is displayed in the lower stage, and the other prior expectation degree rank displays RP are displayed so as to be stacked in the upper stage in the order of addition.

Then, the expectation rank display RN corresponding to one of the plurality of prior expectation rank displays RP (the effect of the jackpot expectation (rank) is executed to become the expectation rank display RN, and the expectation rank display RN (after a certain period of time has passed)). When the expected degree rank display RN displayed in the lower row is hidden, the prior expected degree rank display RP or the expected degree rank display RN displayed in the upper row is changed to the lower row. The display area is moved (slide) to the display area of No., that is, in the case where the lower prior anticipation degree rank display RP or the expected degree rank display RN is not displayed, the upper row is displayed like a so-called "deepening". The prior expectation degree rank display RP or the expectation degree rank display RN is sequentially moved to the display area in the lower stage and redisplayed.
(Production example e-2)
FIG. 510(j) to FIG. 510(p) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

Since the timings shown in (j) to (m) of the same figure are the same as those shown in (b) to (e) of the same figure, description thereof will be omitted.

At the timing shown in FIG. 14(n), the blue hold change effect by the change icon h0 is, for example, the big hit expectation degree “S”, due to the mini item “Up” being acquired in FIG. It has been promoted to.

In other words, the variable icon h0 changes to the hall icon (FIG. 521(g)) to give a pre-reading notice, and in conjunction with this, the family crest cast 224A has its built-in LED change to a golden light emission.

Further, at this timing, the display of "preliminary expectation S display" and "preliminary expectation A display" (FIGS. 521 (d) and (c)) continue from the timing of FIG.

In other words, in this example, the "preliminary expectation S display" is performed from the timing of (l) in the figure, and actually corresponds to the "preliminary expectation S display" at the timing of (n) in the figure. A big hit expectation degree (rank) effect (for example, a big hit expectation degree “S”-rank hall holding change effect) is executed.

At the timing shown in (o) of the figure, the expectation rank notification production is executed based on the execution of the jackpot expectation “S” rank being executed (“Expectation S display” is being performed). It is in a state. In this case, the “expectation degree S display” is switched (replaced) to the “preliminary expectation S display” and displayed.

Also, at this timing, points are added based on the function related to the membership service of the player, and the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3), and the state in which the privilege is given Showing. The privilege here is, for example, opening of a song (song C). Further, the right sub liquid crystal 2083 displays the music release notification MM.

Further, at this timing, since the effect of the jackpot expectation “A” rank corresponding to the prior expectation degree rank display (“preliminary expectation degree A display”) is not executed, the “preliminary expectation degree A display” is also displayed. doing.

That is, in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, from the bottom, "preliminary expectation A display (Fig. 521(c))", "expectation S display (Fig. 521(j))", and song release notification MM (Fig. 521(h)). Are displayed vertically in this order, and the song release notification MM overlaps at least the "expectation S display" (even if the release notification MM is displayed so as not to overlap the "expectation S display"). Good).

The timing shown in (p) of the figure shows the state after a certain time has elapsed from the start of the display of the “expectation degree S display”. At this timing, the music release notification MM is hidden on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, while the “expectation level S display” and the “preliminary expectation level A display” continue to be displayed.

Note that the "preliminary expectation A display" is displayed because the corresponding effect (effect with the big hit expectation "A" rank) is not executed at this timing, and the corresponding effect ( It is hidden by the execution of the big hit expectation degree "A" rank production).
(Production example e-3)
FIG. 510(q) to FIG. 510(r) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

The timing shown in (q) of the same figure is the same as the timing shown in (n) of FIG.

In the same figure (r), at a certain timing, as shown in FIGS. 506(b) to 506(e), a sub-game effect by a mini character (lord) (for example, a target hit “shown in FIG. 521(b)”). (A plurality of sub-game effects) are executed, and as a result, the “preliminary expectation A display” and the “preliminary expectation S display” are simultaneously displayed on the right sub-liquid crystal 2083. In this case, for example, “preliminary expectation A display” with a low jackpot expectation rank is displayed in the lower row, and “preliminary expectation S display” with a high jackpot expectation rank is displayed in a vertical arrangement in the upper row. The display order may be reversed.

As described above, in the present embodiment (production example e), the configuration in which the plurality of prior expectation rank display RPs or the expectation rank display RNs are displayed without overlapping is described. A configuration in which a part of the degree rank display RN is overlapped and displayed may be used.

In addition, in the present embodiment (production example e), a configuration in which a plurality of prior expectation degree rank displays RP or expectation degree rank displays RN are displayed vertically (in a vertical arrangement) has been described. The configuration may be such that the RP or the expectation rank display RN is displayed on the left and right (side by side).

In addition, in the present embodiment (production example e), the case where the ranks of the expectation degree rank display RN and the prior expectation degree rank display RP are different has been described as an example, but the same is true even if both ranks are the same.
<Production example f>

FIG. 511 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the anticipation notification effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

The timing shown in (b) of the figure is a state in which the blue-holding change effect by the change icon h0 is executed and the “preliminary expectation A display” is displayed, which is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 506(h). Therefore, the description is omitted.

The timing shown in (c) of the figure is, for example, the timing of transition from the first time to the second time of the pseudo continuous effect, and the movable object (in this example, Yatsushiro 224B and General 224C) is being executed. It is in a state. This effect is, for example, when the built-in LED lights in white at the initial position indicated by the broken line, the Yashiro Yakuhin 224B and the General Yakuhin 224C change to blue lighting and descend from the initial position, and part of the main liquid crystal 2081. It is an effect that overlaps with (for example, a part of the variable display of the first decorative symbol), and as an example, is an accessory effect having a jackpot expectation of “A” rank.

Further, at this timing, the display of "preliminary expectation A display" (for example, the character display "A?" and the display of a red rectangle) continues from the timing of FIG.

That is, in this example, the “preliminary expectation A display” is performed from the timing of FIG. 11B, and actually corresponds to the “prior expectation A display” at the timing of FIG. An effect (for example, an accessory effect with a jackpot expectation of "A" rank) is being executed.

The timing shown in (d) of the figure is the same as the notification of “preliminary expectation A display” in FIG. It is in a running state. The Yatsushiro 224B and the general 224C have returned to their initial positions.

In this example, as the expectation degree rank display RN, as shown in FIG. 521 (m), the character “A”, the red rectangle and the letters “logo drop” are displayed, and the jackpot expectation rank is “A”. Is informed that the effect is being executed (“expectation degree A display” is being performed).

The timing shown in (e) of the figure shows a state in which the “prior expectation degree A display (FIG. 521 (c))” is displayed again on the left sub liquid crystal 2082.

In the pseudo continuous effect, a plurality of effects are repeatedly executed. For example, in the present production example, as the pseudo-relational production (a part of), a production in which the Yatsushiro 224B and the general military 224C repeatedly descend and rise as shown in FIGS. To do. That is, the character effect corresponding to the “preliminary expectation A display” displayed in FIG. 11B is an effect that continues until the pseudo-relation effect is completed.

Therefore, even if the display is switched from the “preliminary expectation A display” to the “expectation A display” by descending the Yatsushiro 224B and the general 224C (FIG. (d), again, FIG. “Preliminary expectation A display” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG.

In this case, the “preliminary expectation A display” is redisplayed at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the Yatsushiro 224B and the general 224C return to the initial position from the position shown in FIG. 7C). (It is displayed overlaid on "Expectation A display"). Alternatively, the display may be switched from the "preliminary expectation A display" (the display may be switched by an animation display in which the "expectation A display" is turned upside down).

The timing shown in (g) of the figure is, for example, the timing of shifting from the second time to the third time of the pseudo-relational effect, and subsequently the character effect production by the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character character 224C (the jackpot expectation is "A" rank. Character effect) is being executed.

Further, at this timing, the display of "preliminary expectation A display" (for example, the character display "A?" and the display of a red rectangle) continues.

The timing shown in (h) of the figure is the "expectation degree A display" based on the performance of the jackpot expectation degree "A" rank being executed as in the notification of "preliminary expectation degree A display" in the figure (g). Is being executed. The Yatsushiro 224B and the general 224C have returned to their initial positions. In this case, the “expectation degree A display” is a display of the letters “A”, the red rectangle and the letters “logo drop”, as shown in FIG. 521(m).

The timing shown in (i) of the figure is a state in which the character effect, which is a part of the pseudo-relation effect, is finished, and the jackpot expectation corresponding to the “expectation degree A display” is an effect (rank effect) Based on the end of the effect, as shown in FIG. 521 (n), a display indicating the end of the effect (overlapped) on the “expectation degree A display” (in this example, the character “Done” is displayed) The entered mark) is displayed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 11(j), after a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the display of "expectation level A", the "expectation level A display" and the display indicating the end of the effect overlapping therewith are not displayed. It has become (erased).

In addition, in the same figure (j), the timing (first timing) when the "expectation degree A display" is hidden and the display (the mark with the character "Done") indicating the end of the production are hidden. The same timing (second timing) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Further, in this example, the “preliminary expectation degree A display” is switched to the “expectation degree A display” in the same figure (d), but in one effect (for example, one pseudo continuous effect), a plurality of combinations When a motion of an object (moving up and down in this example) is performed, the “preliminary expectation A display” may be continued without switching to the “expectation A display” during the production period.

Further, in this example, the case of displaying the “preliminary expectation A display” and the “expectation A display” has been described, but the “expectation S display” (“preliminary expectation S display” that is not hidden even after the corresponding production is finished. In the case of “display S,” the display is continued with the display (mark including the character “done”) indicating the end of the effect in FIG.
<Production example g>

512 to 513 are diagrams showing, in stages, another example of the expectation notification effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

The timings shown in FIGS. 512(b) to 512(f) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 510(d) to 510(h), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

At the timing shown in FIG. 6H, in the state in which the “preliminary expectation S display” is being performed, for example, a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect) with a jackpot expectation of “S” rank is executed on the main liquid crystal 2081. Is the state that has started. In the icon display area 800 of the main liquid crystal 2081, only the variable icon h0 is displayed in red, and the family coat emblem 224A is also lit in red in conjunction with the variable icon h0.

The timing shown in FIG. 521 (k) is based on the fact that the jackpot expectation “S” rank performance has been executed, as indicated by the “preliminary expectation S display” in FIG. As shown, the letters “S”, the gold rectangle and the letters “Swordsman Reach” are displayed to notify that the production with the jackpot expectation rank “S” is being executed. "S display" is performed).

Further, points are added based on the function related to the membership service of the player, the level is increased (here, the level is increased from 1.2 to 1.3), and the privilege is given. The privilege here is, for example, opening of the song (song C), and a song release notification MM (FIG. 521(h)) for notifying that the song C has been released is displayed at the upper part of the "expectation S display". Has been done.

At the timing shown in FIG. 11(j), the confrontation scene in the super reach effect (swordsman reach effect) is displayed. In the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the “expectation S display” continues to be displayed, but the song is released. The notification MM is hidden.

The timing shown in (k) of the figure is a state in which the animation before the start of the button effect is displayed so as to overlap the front of the confrontation scene in the super reach effect (swordsman reach effect). "Display" continues to be displayed. Instead of displaying the start animation of the button effect, a simple effect image (not related to the button effect) may be displayed.

The timing shown in (l) of the same figure shows the state where the button effect has been executed. That is, an animation related to the button effect is displayed in front of the confrontation scene in the super reach effect (swordsman reach effect). The animation related to the button effect is, for example, an image (button image BG) imitating the chance button 136 and a display (elapsed time notification image TG) indicating a valid period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136. The button image BG is displayed in the same red color as the display color of the variable icon h0 and the lighting color of the family coat emblem 224A, and accordingly, the chance button 136 is also operable by turning on the built-in LED in red. Is informed.

Note that the display start timing (first timing) of the button image BG and the red lighting timing (second timing) of the chance button 136 may be the same timing, or the first timing is the second timing. The timing may be earlier than, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

The timing shown in (m) of the figure shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated within the valid acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136.

The timings shown in (n) to (q) of the figure are a state where a series of effects based on the operation of the chance button 136 is being performed. A series of effects based on the operation of the chance button 136 is, for example, as shown in (n) of the same figure, from the initial position (for example, below the main liquid crystal 2081) indicated by a broken line, in which the family crest actor 224A emits rainbow colors. Ascending to the front of the main liquid crystal 2081, the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 224B also light up in rainbow colors and repeatedly move up and down above the main liquid crystal 2081. Further, in the image display device 208′, an illumination display, a special image (animation) display, or the like is performed, and the chance buttons 136 and 137 also produce an effect in which the built-in LED lights in a rainbow color ((n) to (n) of FIG. (P)). Then, the family crest monument 224A returns to the initial position ((q) in the figure), and a series of effects based on the operation of the chance button 136 ends. In addition, in the figures (n) to (q), a series of effects based on the operation of the chance button 136 is also performed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, and the advance expectation rank display RP (expectation rank display RN) is performed. Is hidden.

The timing shown in (r) of the same figure shows the state where the character (lord) has won in the super reach effect (swordsman reach effect). That is, on the main liquid crystal 2081, an image in which the character (lord) wins the character (swordsman) and the character "win" are displayed. Further, the accessory (family crest 224A, Yatsushiro 224B, general officer 224C) continues to be illuminated in rainbow color at the initial position, and the chance buttons 136 and 137 also continue to be illuminated in rainbow.

513(a) is a state following FIG. 512(r), and a decorative pattern of a jackpot pattern combination (here, "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6") is displayed in the display area of the main liquid crystal 2081. (Vibration fluctuation display, temporary stop display).

At the timing shown in FIG. 18B, the decorative symbol of the jackpot symbol combination (here, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) is stopped and displayed in the display area of the main liquid crystal 2081, and the 4-symbol display device 284 is displayed. Indicates that the special figure 1 (quadrangle) is filled with black and the special figure 2 (round) is displayed with gray, which indicates that the special figure 1 is in a hit stop state.

At the timing shown in FIG. 7C, the mission achievement display (notification) MA is displayed. In this example, the mission achievement display MA corresponds to the display of the button effect in FIGS. 512(m) and 512(n), and the display “NO11: I saw a big button” and the character (lord) in FIG. 512(r). It is a display of "NO52: swordsman reach big hit" corresponding to the display of the winning scene and the stop display of the decorative design of the big hit in FIG. 503(b).

In this embodiment, the mission achievement display MA is displayed in addition to the prior expectation rank display RP and the expectation rank display RN. A plurality of mission achievement indicators MA are prepared, and the player can obtain advantageous benefits according to the types (contents) and the number thereof by collecting the mission achievement indicators MA.

The mission achievement display MA is a display corresponding to a membership service and is different from the prior expectation rank display RP (expectation rank display RN) for notifying the rank of the jackpot expectation of the performance to be executed, and is a display corresponding to the membership service. This is a display (notification) that is not directly related to. For this reason, the mission achievement display MA does not interfere with the performance, and is not confused with the notification corresponding to a certain fluctuation, and is notified when the fluctuation is stopped, such as when the fluctuation is stopped. Is.

After the mission achievement display MA is displayed, the big hit game starts as shown in (d) of the same figure, the probability variation promotion effect is executed ((f) of the same figure), and the big hit game ends ((h) of the same figure). )).

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in (i) of the same figure, after the jackpot game is over, as the mission achievement display MA, the fact that it is a probable change (in this example, "NO21: probable change promotion" is notified. The display is displayed, for example, in one of the big hit end intervals (from the end of the last round of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game) in order to prevent the first hit.

On the other hand, the prior expectation degree rank display RP and the expectation degree rank display RN) of the present embodiment may be informed before the final stage in a branching manner of the corresponding production. For example, if a red hold change effect (for example, jackpot expectation “A”) is executed, even if there is a possibility of being promoted to a hall hold change effect (for example, jackpot expectation “S”), advance expectation There may be a case where “preliminary expected degree A display” is performed as the degree rank display RP (determined by the red hold change effect).
<Production example h>

FIG. 514 is a diagram showing another example of the expectation notification effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Production example h-1)
514(b) to 514(e) are diagrams showing another example of the effect step by step.

The timing shown in FIG. 13B is a state in which the main symbols are stopped and displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 (in this example, the combination of the symbols “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 8”). In the icon display area 800, the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in white, respectively, to notify that the special figure 1 has a hold of 2.

At the timing shown in FIG. 7C, one hold is exhausted, and the variable icon h0 changes to blue in the icon display area 800 to give a pre-reading notice. In addition, the hold icon h11 is displayed in white to notify that the hold of the special figure 1 is 1.

The timing shown in (d) of the figure is a state in which it is informed that a certain effect (here, the blue-holding change effect shown in (c) of the figure) has been executed by the dialogue of the mini character (lord). .. Specifically, as shown in an enlarged view in the lower part of FIG. 7D, a balloon SS is displayed on the mini character (lord), the character "Hold on blue change" is displayed, and the blue hold change effect is executed. It has been notified (ex post facto) that it has been done.

The timing shown in (e) of the figure is a state in which the posterior notification of the effect by the mini character (lord) is hidden.

The posterior notification of the effect by the mini character (Den) in this embodiment (notification by the dialogue of the mini character (Den)) does not notify the rank of the big hit expectation degree of the effect, and is executed after this timing. Since it is not a notification in advance about an effect that may be performed, the notification is different from the prior expectation rank display RP of the present embodiment.
(Production example h-2)
514(h) to 514(l) are diagrams showing another example of the effect step by step.

The timing shown in (h) of the figure is the same as the timing shown in (b) of the figure, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

At the timing shown in (i) of the figure, one hold is exhausted, and in the icon display area 800, the variable icon h0 changes to red to give advance notice. In addition, the hold icon h11 is displayed in white to notify that the hold of the special figure 1 is 1.

The timing shown in (j) of the figure is a state in which it is informed that a certain effect (here, the red-holding change effect shown in (i) of the figure) is executed by the mini character (lord). Specifically, the balloon SS is displayed on the mini character (lord), the character "Hold on red change" is displayed, and the fact that the red hold change effect is executed is notified (ex post facto).

At the timing shown in (k) of the same figure, for example, as shown in an enlarged view of the lower figure of the same figure, for example, an image (for example, if the player is a player who overlaps the display area of the expectation rank display RN of the right sub liquid crystal 2083). It shows a state in which a visual effect image AE and the like, which is easy to be noticed, is displayed. In this case, the player directs the player's line of sight to the display area of the expectation rank display RN by, for example, displaying an arrow pointing from the vicinity of the mini character (lord) to the display area of the expectation rank display RN. The display is also done.

At the timing shown in FIG. 1L, the visual effect image AE is hidden and the expectation degree rank display RN (in this example, “expectation degree A display”) is visible to the player.

In the present embodiment, the posterior notification of the effect by the mini character (lord) (the posterior notification similar to that in FIG. 7D) and the expectation rank display RN by the mini character (lord) are performed. The prior expectation rank display RP of the embodiment is not performed.
(Production example h-3)
514(n) to (r) of FIG. 514 are diagrams showing another example of the effect step by step.

The timing shown in (n) of the figure is the same as that of (g) in FIG. 506, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the prior expectation rank display RP (in this case, shown in FIG. 521 (c)). Is a state in which "preliminary expectation A display" is displayed.

At the timing shown in (o) of the figure, one hold is exhausted, and the variable icon h0 changes to red in the icon display area 800 to give a pre-reading notice. In addition, the hold icon h11 is displayed in white to notify that the hold of the special figure 1 is 1.

The timing shown in (p) of the figure is a state in which it is informed that a certain effect (here, the red-holding change effect shown in (o) of the figure) is executed by the mini character (lord) displayed normally. is there. Specifically, a balloon SS as shown in an enlarged view in the figure below (d) is displayed on the mini character (Den), the word "Hold changes to red" is displayed, and the red hold change effect is executed. It has been notified (ex post facto) that it has been done.

At the timing shown in (q) of the same figure, as in the case of (k) of the figure, an image (for example, an image which overlaps the display area of the prior expectation degree rank display RP (“preliminary expectation degree A display”) of the right sub liquid crystal 2083 (for example, It shows a state in which a visual effect image or the like that is easily noticed by the player is displayed. However, in this case, the visual effect image is displayed behind the “preliminary expectation A display” and the “preliminary expectation A display” is visible to the player, as shown in the enlarged view of the lower part of FIG. Has become.

The visual effect image is not displayed at the timing shown in FIG. In addition, in the figure (o), the "preliminary expectation A display" is switched (replaced) to "preliminary expectation A display" based on the execution of the jackpot expectation "A" rank. The “expectation level A display” is visible to the player.

In the present embodiment, the posterior notification of the effect by the mini character (lord) (the posterior notification similar to that in FIG. 7D), the preliminary expected degree rank display RP, and the expected degree rank display RN are performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1L and FIG. 1R, the expectation rank display RN is performed with the same effect (display mode) regardless of the presence or absence of the prior expectation rank display RP. However, the effect (display mode) in which the expected degree rank display RN is performed may be different depending on the presence or absence of the prior expected degree rank display RP.
<Direction example i>

FIG. 515 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the expectation notification effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Production example h-1)

The timing shown in FIG. 16B is a state in which the mini character (lord) is executing the mission notification effect during the variable display of the decorative symbol on the main liquid crystal 2081. Specifically, the mini character (lord) displays a balloon SS "Temple with 7 symbols" to notify the mission.

The timing shown in FIG. 7D shows a state in which the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol and the left symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c and the mission (temple of 7 symbols) has been achieved.

Further, at the timing shown in (e) of the figure, an effect based on the achievement of the mission shown in (d) of the figure is executed. In this example, the production based on the achievement of the mission is a display of characters (in this case, "steel plate!") that suggests that a big hit will be achieved.

In the present embodiment, as a result of the mission notification effect by the mini character (lord) of FIG. 6B, when the mission is achieved, a display indicating that the jackpot will be a big hit is executed. However, in the mission notification effect of FIG. 7B, the mission may not be achieved (for example, 7 symbols are not stopped and displayed), and the rank of the jackpot expectation degree is not notified. This is an effect different from the prior expectation rank notification effect (preliminary expectation rank display RP).

Although illustration is omitted, in the figure (e), the expectation rank display RN may be displayed in addition to the characters (in this case, “Iron plate!!”) indicating that the jackpot is a big hit.
<Production example j>

FIG. 516 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of the anticipation degree notification effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and shows an example of the appearance aspect of the prior expectation degree rank display RP. It is a figure.

The timing shown in FIG. 516(b) is a state in which the variable display of the first decorative symbol is being performed on the main liquid crystal 2081. In the icon display area 800, a white variable icon h0 is displayed at the right end, and white hold icons h11, 12 are displayed on the left. A timer advance notice effect is executed on the main liquid crystal 2081. The timer advance notice effect of this example is overlapped with a part of the variable display of the first decorative pattern, and a blue timer TM as shown in the enlarged view of the lower part of the same figure (b) is displayed. It is a blue timer effect that displays.

At the timing shown in FIG. 6D, the timer TM is 0, and a display indicating that the timer TM is 0 is displayed. At this timing, on the front of the variable display of the first decorative pattern, a mini character MC2 different from the normally displayed mini character MC (mini character (lord)) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the decorative pattern. To be done. In this example, the mini character MC2 is a mini character (lord) shown enlarged in the lower diagram of FIG. Then, after the timer TM and the mini-character MC2 are hidden, as shown in (e) of the figure, a prior expectation degree rank display RP (“preliminary expectation degree A display” here) is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083 part. To be done.

In this way, the prior expectation degree rank display RP (here, “preliminary expectation degree A display”) is the character effect display (for example, the mini character) by the mini character (Den) that appears later at the timing shown in FIG. It may be displayed in relation to the appearance display of (Den) ((e) in the figure).

At the timing shown in FIG. 9G, one hold is exhausted and the next variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the main liquid crystal 2081. At this timing, since the effect corresponding to the “preliminary expectation A display” is not executed, the “preliminary expectation A display” is continuously displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083.

At the timing shown in FIG. 13H, another timer advance notice effect is being executed on the main liquid crystal 2081. As shown in the enlarged view of the figure (h), the timer advance notice effect is displayed with a red timer TM overlapping with a part of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, for example, performing a countdown display of 30 seconds. It is a red timer production. Further, this red timer effect is an effect corresponding to the “preliminary expectation A display”.

At the timing shown in (i) of the figure, the timer TM starts counting down as shown in an enlarged view in the right figure of (i), and the red timer effect corresponding to the "preliminary expectation A display" is executed. Thus, the “preliminary expectation A display” is switched (replaced) to the “expectation A display” and displayed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 7(j), the countdown of the timer TM progresses as shown in an enlarged view on the right side of FIG. Is hidden.

The timing shown in (l) of the figure is a state in which the timer TM is 0 as shown in an enlarged view in the right figure of (l), and a display indicating that the timer TM is 0 is displayed. .. Then, at this timing, on the front of the variable display of the first decorative design, a mini character MC2 (mini character (customer)) different from the normally displayed mini character (customer) so as to overlap a part of the decorative design. Is displayed.

As shown in (m) of the same figure, when the red timer effect produces a hall holding change effect in which the white variation icon h0 changes to a hall icon, as shown in (n) of the figure, the right sub liquid crystal 2083. An expectation degree rank display RN (here, “expectation degree S display”) is displayed on the section.

When a timer with a short timer notice effect is displayed, the prior expectation rank display RP is more likely to be displayed than when a timer with a long timer is displayed. It should be noted that when a timer with a long timer announcement effect is displayed, the advance expectation rank display RP may be displayed more easily than when a timer with a short timer is displayed.

Further, when a timer with a short timer notice effect is displayed, the expectation level rank display RN is more likely to be displayed than when a timer with a long timer is displayed. The expectation rank display RN may be more easily displayed when a timer with a long timer announcement effect is displayed than when a short timer is displayed.

Further, when a timer with a short timer announcement effect is displayed, the prior expectation degree rank display RP having a higher jackpot expectation is more likely to be displayed than when a timer with a long notice is displayed. It should be noted that when a timer with a long timer announcement effect is displayed, the prior expectation degree rank display RP having a higher jackpot expectation may be displayed more easily than when a timer with a short notice is displayed.

Further, when a timer with a short timer notice effect is displayed, the expectation rank display RN having a higher jackpot expectation is more likely to be displayed than when a timer with a long notice is displayed. It should be noted that when a timer with a long timer notice effect is displayed, the expectation rank display RN with a higher jackpot expectation may be displayed more easily than when a timer with a short notice is displayed.
<Direction example k>

FIG. 517 is a diagram showing another example of the expectation notification production centering on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and a diagram showing another example of the appearance of the prior expectation rank display RP. Is.
(Production example k-1)
517(b) to 517(e) are diagrams showing another example of the effect step by step.

The timing shown in FIG. 517(b) is a state where the main liquid crystal 2081 is performing the stop display (swing variation display, temporary stop display) of the first decorative symbol. The symbol combination of the first decorative symbol is, for example, "decoration 4-special symbol-decoration 8". Further, this special symbol is, for example, a pseudo continuous symbol.

This special symbol is an image related to the prior expectation degree rank display RP as shown in the enlarged view of the lower part of FIG. An image RPG simulating the expectation degree rank display RP) is included (attached), and due to the stop display of this special symbol, the right expectation rank display RP (in this example, “preliminary expectation degree A "Display") is displayed ((c) in the same figure).

Then, as shown in FIG. 3D, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed). In this case, the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol is a special symbol, but as shown in an enlarged view in the lower diagram of FIG. (d), “4-5-8” is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y, It is informed that the decorative pattern of the pattern combination of "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. Then, the variable display of the next first decorative symbol is executed by the completion of the hold ((e) in the same figure).
(Production example k-2)
FIGS. 517(h) to 517(k) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

At the timing shown in FIG. 517(h), the main liquid crystal 2081 is in a state in which the variable display of the first decorative symbol is being performed, and FIG. 517(i) is in the state in which the button effect is executed. This button effect is an effect regarding whether or not to execute the prior expectation degree rank notification effect (whether or not to display the prior expectation degree rank display RP). In this example, a button image BG that overlaps the variable display of the first decorative symbol and an elapsed time notification image TG are displayed on the front face of the variable display. Further, as enlarged in the figure (i) lower diagram, the button image BG and the elapsed time notification image TG are images (related to the prior expectation rank display RP) on the back surface (and the front surface of the first decorative symbol) ( For example, an image RPG simulating the prior expectation rank display RP is included. In this case, at least one of the button image BG, the elapsed time notification image TG, and the image RPG simulating the prior expectation degree rank display RP is displayed (possibly) the rank of the prior expectation degree rank display RP (for example, a jackpot). The display (eg, red display) is associated with the degree of expectation “A”. In this case, the chance button 136 is also made to emit the same color (red).

When the chance button 136 is operated within the acceptance valid period of the operation of the chance button 136 as shown in FIG. 11J, as shown in FIG. The display RP (in this case, “preliminary expectation A display”) is displayed.

In addition, as an appearance mode other than this, as shown in (m) of the same figure, based on the display of a mini item MI (enlarged and shown in the lower diagram of (m) of the same figure) that imitates the prior expectation rank display RP. The expectation rank display RP may be displayed. For example, when the mini character MI uses the mini item MI imitating the prior expectation degree rank display RP, the prior expectation degree rank display RP is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, for example.

Further, as shown in (n) of the figure, the prior expectation degree rank display RP may be displayed based on the display of the hold icon RI imitating the prior expectation degree rank display RP. In this case, the advance expectation rank display RP is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, for example, in the change in which the hold icon RI (enlarged in the lower diagram of FIG. 9(n)) simulating the advance expectation rank display RP is consumed. The preliminary expectation degree rank display RP may be displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083, for example, in the change before the hold icon RI imitating the preliminary expectation degree rank display RP is consumed.
<Direction example l>

FIG. 518 is a diagram showing another example of the expectation notification effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Production example l-1)
FIG. 518(b) to FIG. 518(d) are diagrams showing another example of the effect step by step.

At the timing shown in FIG. 518(b), in the state where the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081, the advance expectation degree rank display RP (in this example, “preliminary expectation degree A display”) is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083. ) Is displayed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 7C, one hold is exhausted, the change icon h0 changes from white to red, and the red hold change effect is executed.

The timing shown in (d) of the figure is based on the fact that the red hold change effect having the jackpot expectation of "A" rank is executed, as the "preliminary expectation A display" is notified in FIG. Degree A display” is performed. At the same time, the “preliminary expectation S display” is performed.

In this case, the effect corresponding to the “preliminary expectation S display” is, for example, an effect related to holding (for example, hall holding change effect). In other words, the variable icon h0 displayed in red at this timing may be notified that it may be promoted to a hall icon (promoted in two steps). It should be noted that the number is not limited to two, and may be changed (promoted) in three or more stages, and in this case, three or more prior expectation rank displays RP are simultaneously executed.
(Production example 1-2)
FIG. 518(h) to FIG. 518(k) are diagrams showing another example of effects in stages.

The timing shown in FIG. 518(h) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 506(e), and is a state in which the sub game effect has been successful.

At the timing shown in (i) of the figure, based on the success of the sub-game production, for example, the prior expectation degree rank display PR (for example, “preliminary expectation degree A display”) is performed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083. In addition, in addition, a display (for example, band display) related to the prior expectation degree rank display PR is performed across the main liquid crystal 2081, the left sub liquid crystal 2082, and the right sub liquid crystal 2083. The display associated with the prior expectation rank display PR is the same color as the color corresponding to the rank of the prior expectation rank display PR (red band display in this example), and the jackpot expectation (in this example, "A") is displayed as a telop so that the player can easily see it. In this case, the prior expectation rank display PR is a still image, and the display related to the prior expectation rank display PR is a moving image, so that the player can more easily recognize the prior expectation rank.

FIG. 11K is a display example when another prior expectation degree rank display PR (for example, “preliminary expectation degree S display”) is added. Also in this case, for example, in the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the prior expectation degree rank display PR (for example, “preliminary expectation S display”) is performed, and the main liquid crystal 2081, the left sub liquid crystal 2082, and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are preliminarily displayed. A display related to the expectation rank display PR (for example, a band display and a telop display) is performed.

Further, in this case, for example, the display related to the prior expectation degree rank display PR (“preliminary expectation degree S display”) added later is the prior expectation degree rank display PR (“preliminary expectation degree A display” previously displayed. )) is displayed in front of (to overlap the previous display).

Note that the prior expectation rank display PR includes a display of a still image displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083 and a display related to the prior expectation rank display PR by band display and telop display, but the expectation rank display PN indicates the right sub display. Only a still image displayed on the liquid crystal 2083 is displayed.

Alternatively, the expectation rank display PN may include a still image displayed on the right sub liquid crystal 2083 and a display related to the expectation rank display PN by band display and telop display.
<Direction example m>

FIG. 519 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the anticipation notification effect centered on the image display device 208′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

The timings shown in FIGS. 519(a) to 519(e) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 506(a) to 506(e), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

At the timing shown in (f) of the figure, the mini character (lord) returns to the normal display (default display) shown in (a) of the figure, the sub game effect is finished, and as a result of the sub game effect, the timer. This shows the state in which the notice production has been executed.

In this timer notice effect, a red timer TM (enlarged and shown in the right figure of FIG. 6F) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variable display of the first decorative pattern, and a countdown display of, for example, 30 seconds is displayed. It is a red timer performance. The timer notice production is a notice production that notifies that some production will be executed after a predetermined period (in this case, 30 seconds displayed in the countdown display) has elapsed.

The timing shown in (h) of the figure is a state in which the timer TM is 0 as shown in an enlarged view in the right figure of (h), and a display indicating that the timer TM is 0 is displayed. .. At this timing, on the front of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, a mini character MC2 (mini character) different from the normally displayed mini character MC (mini character (lord)) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the decorative symbol. The character (lord) is displayed.

At the timing shown in (i) of the figure, the change icon h0 changes from white to red, and the red hold change effect is executed. In conjunction with this, the family coat of arms character 244A also changes from white lighting to red lighting.

The timing shown in (j) of the figure is based on the execution of the red-holding change effect having the jackpot expectation of "A" rank in the figure of (i). The display is done.

As described above, in this embodiment, the "red timer effect" is performed in the timer notice effect, and after the timer ends, the red hold change effect having the jackpot expectation of "A" rank is executed.

That is, for example, a timer notice effect with different display modes (for example, a timer notice effect having different colors such as "red timer effect" and "blue timer effect", shape, pattern, etc.) is given as a jackpot expectation rank. By informing the timer notice effect, the rank of the big hit expectation degree of the effect to be executed later is notified in advance, and after the timer notice effect is finished, the effect belonging to the corresponding jackpot expectation level is executed. Then, the timer advance notice effect can be made to function in the same manner as the advance expectation rank notification effect of the present embodiment. That is, by applying the present embodiment (embodiment M), all of the above-described prior expectation degree rank notification effects of the present embodiment can be replaced with the timer announcement effects.

Further, it may be configured to include both the timer advance notice effect of this embodiment and the above-mentioned prior expectation rank notification effect other than this embodiment.
<Various tables for advance anticipation rank notification production>

FIG. 520 is an example of various tables applied to the present embodiment (production example a to effect example m).

FIG. 520(a) is an example of an effect rank table showing a correspondence relationship between each effect and the rank (attribute) of the jackpot expectation degree.

As shown in the figure, the ranks (attributes) of the jackpot expectation degree are, for example, “SSS”, “S”, “A”, “B”,... In addition, for some of the effects to be performed on the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the expectation level of a big hit after the execution of the effect is set in advance, and "SSS", " It is classified into ranks of "S", "A", "B",....

For example, the contradictory production has a jackpot expectation rank of "SSS", the hall holding change production has a jackpot expectation rank of "S", the swordsman reach production has a jackpot expectation rank of "S", and the red hold change production has a The jackpot expectation rank is "A", the princess rescue reach production is the jackpot expectation rank "A", the red timer presentation is the jackpot expectation rank "A", and the blue pending change production is the jackpot expectation rank Is "B", and in the blue timer effect, the rank of the jackpot expectation is "B"...

In addition, this table is provided with a table for advance anticipation rank notification effect and a table for anticipation rank notification effect, and effects corresponding to each are set. Therefore, there is an effect that is not set in the table for the advance expectation rank notification effect and is set in the table for the expectation rank notification effect. For example, if the swordsman reach performance is set in the table for the expected rank notification performance, but is not set in the table for the preliminary expectation rank notification performance, the preliminary expectation rank notification performance is executed for the swordsman reach performance. However, only the expectation rank notification effect is executed.

In addition, except for special cases such as contradictory effects, the effects that are the targets of the prior expectation rank notification effects are the targets of the expectations rank notification effects, so the effects set in the table for the prior expectations rank notification effects are As a general rule, it is set in the table for the expectation rank notification production.

Further, the rank is a relative classification among a plurality of effects of the same type (for example, a classification in the reach effect, a classification in the pending change effect), and the rank of the jackpot expectation is the same. Even if there is, the jackpot expectation (numerical value) differs depending on the type of effect (for example, reach effect or hold change effect, etc.). For example, in the example of FIG. 10A, the rank of the jackpot expectation degree is set to A in the princess rescue reach production, but this is relatively classified into A rank among a plurality of reach productions. Not too much. For example, when comparing the big hit expectation of the swordsman reach production and the princess rescue reach production, the swordsman reach production has a higher expectation of big hits. As a result, the swordsman reach production ranks "S" and the hime rescue reach production ranks "A" Has been classified.

In addition, even if the ranks of the jackpot expectations are the same, there may be a large difference in the jackpot expectations depending on the type of production. (For example, when comparing the effects, the reach effect is generally higher than the pending change effect in expectation of a big hit, etc.).

Therefore, for example, even when the princess rescue reach production with the jackpot expectation rank of "A" is higher than the jackpot change production with the jackpot expectation rank of "S", the jackpot expectation (numerical value) may be higher. is there.

That is, when the types of effects are different, the jackpot expectation is not necessarily set in the order of the ranks in FIG.

Further, the correspondence relationship between the rank of the big hit expectation degree and the effect and the effect set in FIG. 11A are merely examples for convenience of description, and are not limited to the relationships shown here.

The ranking is set considering not only the jackpot expectation but also the degree of rarity (in the case of special production such as contradiction production) and the number of points of the membership service.

FIG. 520(b) is a mini item table showing a list of mini items and their functions applicable in this embodiment.

When the mini character (lord) acquires the mini item shown in FIG. 3B, the corresponding production is executed. The types of mini items are not limited to those shown in the figure.

520(c) to 520(f) are an example of a temporary storage area for effect management provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400, and a reserved color information table used when changing the reserved icon. , And its setting example.

As shown in FIG. 7C, for example, in the reserved color information table, information about the fluctuation (item “corresponding” in the table) of Toku-zu 1 and holdings 1 to 4 (Item “Holding 1 in the table) of Toku-zu 1 are stored. "-"Hold 4") is stored. Each of the “relevant” and the “reserved 1” to “reserved 4” is further divided into “previous (relevant)”, “this time”, “next time”, “next time”, and “next time after time”. The color information of the hold icon is stored for each item.

Each time the hold is exhausted, the color information of the hold icon is reset to the previous one (the previous time and the previous hold), and the hold icon changes, as shown in FIG.

Hereinafter, an example of setting the color information will be specifically described. FIG. 5D corresponds to the information on the hold icon shown in FIG. 506A, for example.

At the timing shown in FIG. 506(a), a white (default, displayed as “default” in the figure) variable icon h0 and hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the icon display area 800. In this case, as shown in the item “(previous) applicable” in FIG. 520(d), “default” (white, the same applies below) is assigned to “associated” corresponding to the variation icon h0, and “hold” is assigned to the hold icon h11. "Default" is set to "1", "Hold 2" corresponding to the hold icon h12 is set to "Default", and "Hold 3" corresponding to the hold icon h13 is set to "Default".

Further, as the color information of “current time”, “default” is set in “hold 1”, “default/previous A” is set in “hold 2”, and “default” is set in “hold 3”. Here, "default/advance A" of "hold 2" indicates that the hold icon is displayed by default and "preliminary expectation A display" is displayed as the preliminary expectation rank display RP.

In addition, as the color information for the "next time", "blue → red" is set for "hold 2", "default" is set for "hold 3", and "default" is set for "hold 3" as the color information for "next time". Has been done. Here, “blue→red” of “holding 2” indicates that the display color of the holding icon is changed to blue and then to red.

Further, FIG. 6E corresponds to the information of the hold icon shown in FIG. 506F, for example.

As the hold is exhausted, the setting information in the hold color information setting table is updated as shown in FIG. At the timings of FIGS. 506(b) to (f), the white variation icon h0 and the hold icons h11, h12 are displayed in the icon display area 800. In this case, as the color information of “(previous) applicable”, “default” is set in “related”, “default/prior A” is set in “hold 1”, and “default” is set in “hold 2”.

That is, the "hold 1" (hold icon h11 in FIGS. 506(b) to (f)) is displayed by default, and when the hold 2 in the previous change is the hold 1, the change display in that state (FIG. In “506 (b) to (f)”, “preliminary expectation degree A display” is displayed as the preliminary expectation degree rank display RP.

In addition, “blue→red” is set to “hold 1”, “defective” is set to “hold 2” as color information of “current time”, and “default” is set to “hold 2” as color information of “next time”. Has been done.

Further, FIG. 5F corresponds to the information of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 507(b) to 507(f), for example. As the hold is exhausted, the setting information in the hold color information setting table is updated as shown in FIG. At the timings of FIGS. 507(b) and 507(c), the blue change icon h0 and the white hold icon h11 are displayed in the icon display area 800. In this case, as the color information of “(previous) applicable”, “blue→red” is set in “applicable” and “default” is set in “hold 1”. This is because when the hold 1 in the previous change is the relevant one, the hold icon is changed to blue during the change display in that state (FIGS. 507(b) and 507(c)), and then further changed to red ( 507(d) to (f)). In addition, "default" is set to "hold 1" as the color information of "this time".
In addition, the game table (for example, Pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention is a display unit (for example, image display device 208′, first image display device 2081, second image display device 2082, third image display device). 2083), which is a gaming machine, and which has a first special symbol (for example, a special symbol, a pseudo-repetitive symbol, and FIG. 490(h) special symbol (a special feature of the character "Den") that indicates that the pseudo-reproduction is performed. (Pattern), the middle pattern of FIG. 494 (o) (special pattern of the character "continuation", etc.) is configured to be displayable, and the first special pattern is used as a pattern representing a big hit. It is a non-design, the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, one display of the plurality of types of display, a variable display of a set of decorative symbols (hereinafter, "first It is a variable display (for example, a variable display of decorative symbols in the first symbol display area 208X (the symbol display areas 208a to 208c)), and one of the plurality of types of display is the first display. A variable display of a set of decorative symbols separate from the variable display (hereinafter referred to as “second variable display (for example, variable display of decorative symbols in the second symbol display area 208Y (the symbol display areas 208k to 208g))”). ), the display size of the first variable display is larger than that of the second variable display, and the first variable display and the second variable display can be displayed in parallel. , The first variable display is a display including three symbols, the second variable display is a display including three symbols, the middle symbol in the first variable display (hereinafter, "first An animation display that stirs whether the first symbol is stopped and displayed (hereinafter referred to as "first animation display (for example, display of special symbol stop stirrer animation, middle symbol stirrer animation)") The first animation display is an animation display including a change in the display mode of the first symbol, and after the first animation display is completed, the first animation display is displayed. It is configured such that there is a case where the first symbol is stopped and displayed in one middle symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “first case (for example, case of FIG. 490(m))”). It is configured such that there is a case (for example, in the case of FIG. 491(l)) where the first symbol is not stopped and displayed on the first middle symbol after the end of the animation display in the first case. , Before the end of the first animation display The middle symbol in the second variable display (hereinafter, referred to as "second middle symbol"). ) Is configured such that the second symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, in the case of FIG. 490(j) and FIG. 491(o)), the first symbol is the first display size of the first symbol. Is a special symbol, the second symbol is the first special symbol of the second display size, the display size of the first display size is larger than the second display size It is a gaming machine characterized by the following.
Further, the above "animation display including a change in the display mode of the first symbol" is "animation display including a scene in which the first symbol is enlarged", and is left in the first variable display. At least one of the symbol and the right symbol in the first variable display may be overlapped with the enlarged first symbol (for example, the state of FIG. 490(j)). Therefore, the left symbol in the second variable display and the right symbol in the second variable display may not overlap with the second symbol (for example, the state of FIG. 14(k)). It may be configured.
Further, the first symbol enlarged to a certain size is configured to overlap with the second variable display (for example, the state of FIG. 490(k) or the state of FIG. 504(k)). May be
Further, than the symbol variation display when the number of stop display of the first special symbol is the first number of times, the symbol variation display when the number of stop display of the first special symbol is the second number of times In the end, the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be finalized and displayed, and the number of times of the second number of times is larger than that of the first number of times.
Further, the stop display of the second symbol may be configured such that the player can recognize whether or not the pseudo continuous effect is continued.
Also, after the pseudo-relational production is started, when the first symbol (for example, the pseudo-repetitive symbol) is stopped and displayed, the symbol stopped and displayed on the left symbol in the first variable display is tempted. It may be configured to have a reach state (for example, the tempire reach shown in FIG. 492(o)).
Further, in a state where a certain super reach effect (for example, the super reach (for example, swordsman reach) effect shown in FIG. 497(f)) is being performed, a certain notice is given in the area where the second variable display is displayed. A display (for example, a special effect display (special display EX) shown in FIG. 497(h), a special display EX of advance notice effect for notifying that promotion effect is executed) may be displayed. Therefore, in the area different from the area in which the second variable display is displayed (for example, in the display area of the first image display device 2081 shown in FIG. 497(h)), the certain notice display is not displayed. After the certain super reach effect is started, the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed (for example, the state of FIG. 497(j), the same figure (l)). Is
It may be one.
Further, the first variable display may be a display in which one variable display is ended by three symbols being fixedly displayed.
Further, after the first symbol is stopped and displayed on the first middle symbol (for example, in the case of FIG. 490(m)), a certain effect display (for example, FIG. 490(n) to FIG. Effect display) is configured to be displayed, and the first variable display is hidden in a state where the certain effect display is being displayed. The first variable display is configured to be re-displayed after the display ends (for example, the state of FIG. 490(p)), and the first middle symbol at the time of the re-display starts. A design different from the first design may be configured to be stopped and displayed.
Further, the second variable display is configured to be displayed in a state where the certain effect display is displayed (for example, a state of FIG. 490(n) to FIG. 490(o)). It may be configured such that the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second middle symbol displayed in the state where the effect display is displayed.
In addition, there is a case where the second variable display is not displayed in the state where the first variable display is displayed (for example, the state of FIG. 490(r)). It may be.
Further, when all of the first symbol (for example, a special symbol for displaying "continuation" shown in FIG. 501(g)) is displayed on the first image display means (for example, in FIG. 501(g)). State), and in a certain state after the second image display means has moved, a part of the first symbol is displayed on the first image display means, The other part of the symbol may be displayed on the second image display means (for example, the state of FIG. 501(h)).
Further, one image display means of the plurality of image display means is a third image display means (for example, a third image display device 2083), and the first symbol on the first image display means. It is configured so that all (for example, the state of FIG. 501(g)) of all (for example, a special symbol displaying “continuation” shown in FIG. 501(g)) may be displayed, and the second In a certain state after the image display means has moved, a part of the first symbol is displayed on the second image display device, and another part of the first symbol is displayed on the third image display device. It may be configured to be displayed (for example, the state of FIG. 501(e)).
<Enclosed pachinko machine>

FIG. 522 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 522, a predetermined number of game media (eg, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium shot from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 is discharged from the game area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. Further, display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, ball rental, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 1 are not provided.

Note that the upper plate 126 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 289 may be provided with the display unit 903 described above, and further, the display unit 903 may be provided with a touch panel. May be. That is, the touch panel provided on the display unit 903 can function as the operation unit. Then, the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, continuous hitting operation, or long-pressing operation on the touch panel, or when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, It may be configured such that the pseudo continuous tapping operation is performed on the touch panel in a state where the touch panel is continuously touched. Further, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be set to an effective state. Further, in some of the effects, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In other words, in the touch panel, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be activated, may not be activated, or may be configured to have many effects to be activated, or may be configured to have few effects. .. In addition, when there are a plurality of effects by the continuous tapping operation on the touch panel, and when the touch panel is used, the long press automatic continuous tapping function may not be in an effective state in many cases, or may be configured in a small number. ..

As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 522 encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine for use. May be performed by credit.
<Slot machine>

Next, with reference to FIG. 523, a slot machine (rotating cylinder game machine) as a game table applicable to the present invention will be described. Here, FIG. 523 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as seen from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 523 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 523), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are housed, and the slot machine 1000 has It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, each pattern is printed on the belt-shaped member at an equal number of intervals, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are formed by attaching the belt-shaped member to a predetermined circular tubular frame material. The symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 by the player, so that a total of 9 symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols seen by the player is changed. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged on the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the reel backlight be shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be uniformly illuminated. An optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided near each of the reels 1010 to 1012 inside the slot machine 1000. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotation direction of the symbol on the reel is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the pay line.

The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 1014 that is activated. The activated pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as the game medium. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, when one bet on a medal is bet, the horizontal pay line on the middle row is valid, and when two bets are placed on a medal, an upper horizontal pay line and a lower horizontal pay line are added. When three coins are activated and three medals are bet, the five lines to which the rightward winning line and the rightward winning line are added are effective as winning lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to five lines. For example, when one bet is placed on a bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the right line. Five lines of the downward winning line and the rightward winning line may be valid as the winning line. Hereinafter, the winning line that becomes effective may be referred to as an effective line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery described below, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The re-play lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is re-playable (there is no need to insert medals) when a re-play, which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a production lamp.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, one coin is inserted up to a maximum of three coins. When the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, two coins are inserted, and when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed, three coins are inserted. It is designed to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals have been inserted, a game start notification indicating that a game start operation is possible is started. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically by using the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, and an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1041. Is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display device 126 is a display device for displaying various kinds of internal information (for example, the number of paid-out medals during bonus game) in numerical values. The payout number display unit 1027 is a display unit for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is the third stop reel. It should be noted that a light-emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light-emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing the medal when the inserted medal is jammed to remove the medal. The settlement button 1034 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and bets that have been bet, and discharging from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of an operating means. The chance button 1100 may be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or may be operated in relation to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can be in a plurality of states like the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, and the state may be changeable during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting player's individual game history information), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. In the present embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to the operating means.

Below the stop button unit 1036, a title panel 1062 for displaying a model name and affixing various certificates is provided, and a title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. A medal payout port 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided below the title panel 1062.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A rendering device 1060 is provided above the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the rendering device 1060. The rendering device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 that includes two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown in the figure) disposed behind the shutter 1063. , A production image display device), and when the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b open outward in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed on the front surface of the slot machine 1000 (game). It is a structure that appears on the person side).

It should be noted that the liquid crystal display device need not be a liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effect images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display. It may be a reel (drum) or a display device including a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole of the display screen is visible to the player. In the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the periphery of the display screen may be hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen may look odd. In this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but it may be a curved surface.
<Other game machines>

The gaming table according to the present invention, as shown in FIG. 524(a), "inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, executes a lottery based on a bet 2004 and a start 2006 operation, and displays a lottery result on a lottery result display device 2008." However, at the time of winning, the bonus coin number is added to the remaining credit number, and when the cash out 2009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 2010 issues a receipt in which a code corresponding to the remaining credit number is issued 2000" May be

Further, as shown in FIG. 2B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and electronic data that realizes the present invention as shown in FIG. May be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the above, and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for implementing the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 1B has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data about a game through a mobile phone line, and data about the acquired game (book). A storage unit that stores electronic data for implementing the invention) and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The portable game machine 4000 shown in FIG. 7C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired game-related data (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The household video game machine 5000 in FIG. 6D has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data about the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and data about the acquired game ( A storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 7E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data for implementing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game console 5000 shown in FIG. Further, the present invention can be applied to execute a game even in a game program in which the operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine is simulated for a home game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used. Furthermore, although the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as an example of a game table, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball game machine, a smart ball, or the like.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, among the plurality of configurations described in the embodiments, the content described in one configuration may be applied to another configuration to further broaden the game.

The game table according to the present invention can be applied to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning drum game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine or a medalless slot machine. it can.

100 Pachinko machine 136 Chance button 208 Decorative pattern display device 212 1st special figure display device 214 2nd special figure display device 224 Production movable body 300 Main control unit 400 First sub control unit 500 Second sub control unit

Claims (7)

Display means capable of displaying decorative pattern variable display,
Preliminary means that can execute multiple types of prefetch notice,
A gaming table equipped with
The decorative symbol variable display is configured to be able to be stopped and displayed in a mode according to the result of the hit/miss determination after starting the variation of a plurality of types of decorative symbols,
The decorative design is a design that can be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode,
One of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode,
One of the plurality of types of look-ahead notices is the first look-ahead notice,
In a certain decorative pattern variable display, the variation of the decorative design is started from the state where the decorative design according to the first display mode is stopped and displayed, and the decorative design according to the first display mode is stopped and displayed (hereinafter , "The first case"),
In a certain decorative pattern variable display, the variation of the decorative design is started from the state where the decorative design according to the first display mode is stopped and displayed, and the decorative design according to the second display mode is stopped and displayed (hereinafter referred to as the "second case".) There is,
The decorative pattern in the second display mode may be stopped and displayed as the first look-ahead notice,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a super reach effect,
The display means is a means capable of continuously displaying the variable display of the decorative design according to the second display mode even while the super reach effect is being displayed,
The big hit in the decorative pattern variable display (hereinafter, referred to as "first decorative pattern variable display") started after the certain decorative symbol variable display in the second case rather than in the first case. It is easy to become
When the first decorative design variable display is a big hit, the combination of big hits according to the second display mode is stopped and displayed in the first decorative design variable display,
In the case where the first decorative symbol variable display is lost, the first combination of the lost symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol variable display, and then the first combination of the lost symbols is displayed. The display is stopped and changed to a combination of loses according to the display mode of
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to claim 1 ,
One of the plurality of types of look-ahead notices is a second look-ahead notice,
The second look-ahead notice is a look-ahead notice that may be started in a decorative symbol variable display started after the certain decorative symbol variable display,
The first look-ahead notice, there Ru case of notice that there is a possibility that the second pre-read announcement is started at the certain decorative symbol variable display,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to claim 2 ,
The certain decorative the certain decorative symbol variable display than when symbol variable display is not a case of the second is There are easy performed the second look-ahead warning is better when the case of the second,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 3 ,
Wherein the first case and second, that switches from the first display mode while variable display of the certain decorative symbol variable display in the second display mode,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 4 ,
The decorative design according to the first display mode and the decorative design according to the second display mode are different in color, pattern, shape, or a combination thereof.
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 5 ,
The decorative design according to the second display mode is a decorative design in which a certain display is added to the decorative design according to the first display mode, or at least a part of the decorative design according to the first display mode is another display mode. It is a decorative pattern changed to
A game table characterized by that. The game table according to any one of claims 1 to 6 ,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.